2015 Seadoo 4-Tec Service Manual

SAFETY NOTICE
SAFETY NOTICE
This manual has been prepared as a guide to NOTE: Indicates supplementary information re-
correctly service and repair 2015 Sea-Doo® wa- quired to fully complete an instruction.
tercraft as described in the model list in the Although the mere reading of such information
INTRODUCTION. does not eliminate the hazard, your understanding
This edition was primarily published to be used of the information will promote its correct use.
by technicians who are already familiar with all Always observe common shop safety practice.
service procedures relating to BRP products.
Mechanical technicians should attend training Unless otherwise noted, the engine must be
courses given by BRPTI. stopped and the tether cord must be removed
prior to perform any services.
Please note that the instructions will apply only
if proper hand tools and special service tools are Before carrying out any inspection or maintenance
used. procedure on the watercraft, wait until the engine
and exhaust have cooled down to avoid potential
The contents of this manual depicts parts and pro- burns.
cedures applicable to the particular product at the
time of writing. Service and Warranty Bulletins Torque wrench tightening specifications must be
may be published to update the content of this strictly adhered to. Use the torque values and ser-
manual. Dealer modifications that were carried vice products as in the exploded views or in the
out after manufacturing of the product, whether procedures when noted.
or not authorized by BRP, are not included. Locking devices when removed must be replaced
In addition, the sole purpose of the illustrations (e.g.: locking tabs, elastic stop nuts, self-locking
throughout the manual, is to assist identification fasteners, cotter pins, etc.).
of the general configuration of the parts. They are Hoses, cables and locking ties removed during a
not to be interpreted as technical drawings or ex- procedure must be reinstalled as per factory stan-
act replicas of the parts. dards.
The use of BRP parts is most strongly recom- When ordering parts always refer to the specific
mended when considering replacement of any model PARTS CATALOG.
component. Dealer and/or distributor assistance We strongly recommend that any services be car-
should be sought in case of doubt. ried out and/or verified by a highly skilled profes-
The engines and the corresponding components sional mechanic.
identified in this document should not be utilized It is understood that this manual may be trans-
on product(s) other than those mentioned in this lated into another language. In the event of any
document. discrepancy, the English version shall prevail.
It is understood that certain modifications may BRP disclaims liability for all damages and/or in-
render use of the watercraft illegal under existing juries resulting from the improper use of the con-
federal, provincial and state regulations. tents.
This manual emphasizes particular information de-
noted by the following wording and symbols:
WARNING
Indicates a potential hazard that, if not
avoided, could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation

which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates an instruction which, if not
followed, could result in severe damage to ve-
hicle components or other property.
smr2015-005 I
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This shop manual covers the following BRP made Due to late changes, there may be some differ-
2015 Sea-Doo watercraft models. ences between the manufactured product and the
description and/or specifications in this document.
MODEL
BRP reserves the right at any time to discontinue
GTI™ Series or change specifications, designs, features, mod-
GTI 120 els or equipment without incurring obligation.
GTI 130
GTI SE 130
GTI SE 155
GTI LTD 155
GTR™ Series
GTR 215
GTS™ Series
GTS RENTAL 130
GTX™ Series
GTX 155
GTX S 155
GTX LIMITED 215
GTX LIMITED iS 260
RXP™ Series
RXP-X 260
RXP-X RS 260
RXT™ Series
RXT 260
RXT RS 260
RXT-X 260
RXT-X RS 260
RXT-X aS 260
RXT-X RS aS 260
WAKE Series
WAKE 155
WAKE PRO 215
The information and component/system descrip-

tions contained in this manual are correct at time
of writing. BRP however, maintains a policy of
continuous improvement of its products without
imposing upon itself any obligation to install them
on products previously manufactured.
II smr2015-005
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE INFORMATION ENGINE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER (EIN)
HULL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Engine Identification Number is located on
(HIN) front end of the engine.
The hull identification number is composed of
12 digits:
YDV 12345 L 4 95
Model year
Year of production
Month of production
Serial number (a letter may also be used as a digit)
Manufacturer
It is located on the deck at the rear of watercraft.
F18D03A
TYPICAL
1. Engine Identification Number (EIN)
smo2009-002-131_b
TYPICAL
1. Hull Identification Number (HIN) - aS and iS models
HOISTING A WATERCRAFT
To work on a watercraft, you should mount it se-
curely on a stand.
The LIFTING STRAP (P/N 529 036 189) MUST be
used to hoist and mount the watercraft on a
stand.
NOTICE Using any other lifting strap kit than
the one recommended may cause damage to
the vehicle. Bumpers could be torn off.
smr2010-034-001_a
TYPICAL
1. Hull Identification Number (HIN) - models without aS and iS
smr2015-005 III
INTRODUCTION
The owner/operator is not to, and should not al-

low anyone else to modify the engine in any man-
ner that would alter the horsepower or allow emis-
sions levels to exceed their predetermined factory
specifications.
EPA Emission Regulations

All new 1999 and more recent Sea-Doo water-
craft manufactured by BRP are certified to the
EPA standards as conforming to the requirements
of the regulations for the control of air pollution
emitted from new watercraft engines. This cer-
tification is contingent on certain adjustments
being set to factory standards. For this reason,
sbl2009-004-003 the factory procedure for servicing the product
TYPICAL must be strictly followed and, whenever practica-
ble, returned to the original intent of the design.
ENGINE EMISSIONS The responsibilities listed above are general and
INFORMATION in no way a complete listing of the rules and regu-
lations pertaining to the EPA requirements on ex-
Manufacturer's Responsibility haust emissions for marine products. For more
Since production of the 1999 model year engines, detailed information on this subject, you may con-
PWC manufacturers of marine engines are re- tact:
quired to determine the exhaust emission levels For All Courier Services:
for each engine horsepower family and certify U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
these engines with the United States of Amer- Office of Transportation and Air Quality
ica ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY 1310 L Street NW
(EPA). An emissions control information label, Washington D.C. 20005
showing emission levels and engine specifica-
tions, must be placed on each vehicle at the time
of manufacture. Regular US Postal Mail:
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Dealer Responsibility Office of Transportation and Air Quality
1200 Pennsylvania Ave. NW
When servicing all 1999 and more recent Sea-Doo Mail Code 6403J
watercraft that carry an emissions control informa- Washington D.C. 20460
tion label, adjustments must be kept within pub-
lished factory specifications. INTERNET WEB SITE: http://www.epa.gov/otaq
Replacement or repair of any emission related E-Mail: otaqpublicweb@epa.gov
component must be executed in a manner that
maintains emission levels within the prescribed MANUAL INFORMATION
certification standards.
Dealers are not to modify the engine in any man- MANUAL PROCEDURES
ner that would alter the horsepower or allow emis- Many of the procedures in this manual are inter-
sion levels to exceed their predetermined factory related. Before undertaking any task, you should
specifications. read and thoroughly understand the entire section
Exceptions include manufacturers' prescribed or subsection in which the procedure is contained.
changes, such as altitude adjustments. A number of procedures throughout the book
require the use of special tools. Before com-
Owner Responsibility mencing any procedure, be sure that you have
The owner/operator is required to have engine on hand all the tools required, or their approved
maintenance performed to maintain emission equivalents.
levels within prescribed certification standards.
IV smr2015-005
INTRODUCTION
The use of RIGHT (starboard) and LEFT (port) in-

dications in the text are always referenced to the
driving position (when sitting on the watercraft).
smr2009-011-002_a
1. Left (port)
2. Right (starboard)
Other common terms used in the marine indus-

try are the BOW (front of the watercraft), and the
STERN (rear of the watercraft).
This manual uses technical terms which may be
different from the ones in the PARTS CATALOGS.
MANUAL LAYOUT
This manual is divided into many major sections as
can be seen in the main table of contents at the
beginning of the manual.
Each section is divided into various subsections,
and again, each subsection has one or more divi-
sions.
Illustrations and photos show the typical construc-
tion of various assemblies and, in all cases, may
not reproduce the full detail or exact shape of the
parts used in a particular model vehicle. However,
they represent parts which have the same or a
similar function.
smr2015-005 V
INTRODUCTION
TYPICAL PAGE
Section 06 ENGINE Page heading

Subsection 01 (MAGNETO) indicates section
and subsection.
Subsection title MAGNETO

Indicates applicable Models
models.
Loctite 243 Drop represents a

service product
Exploded view assists Model
to be applied.
you in identifying parts
and their related Dotted box contains
positions. parts applicable to a
specific model.
Bold face number

1 is used to identify
a part referred to
the text.
NEW indicates that the
part must be replaced NEW
with a new one.
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
Illustration number
for publishing process. XXX0000
Document number for 55 Page number

publishing process.
mmr2008-001
NOTICE Pay attention to torque specifications.

Some of these are in lbf in instead of lbf ft.
Use appropriate torque wrench.
Typical_iso_2008_en
VI smr2015-005
INTRODUCTION
TYPICAL PAGE
Section 03 ENGINE
Subsection 09 (MAGNETO SYSTEM)
Tittle in bold
indicates category
of information to be GENERAL
carried out. NOTE: The following procedures can be done
without removing the engine.
During assembly/installation, use the torque val-
ues and service products as in the exploded
views.
Reference to a Clean threads before applying a threadlocker. Re-
specific section fer to the SELF-LOCKING FASTENERS and LOC-
or subsection. TITE APPLICATION sections at the beginning of
this manual for complete procedure. TYPICAL
WARNING indicates a general
Torque wrench tightening specifications
view which may
must be strictly adhered to. not represent exact
Locking devices (e.g.: locking tabs, elastic 1 details.
stop nuts, self-locking fasteners, etc.) must
be replaced with new ones. TYPICAL
1. Starting pulley
PROCEDURES NOTE: To remove starting pulley bolts, hold mag- Call-outs pertaining
Indicates component neto flywheel with a socket as shown. to above illustration.
procedures apply to. MAGNETO FLYWHEEL
Magneto Flywheel Cleaning
Clean all metal components in a non-ferrous metal
cleaner.
CAUTION: Clean magneto flywheel using only
Indicates specific a clean cloth. Illustration always
procedure to be Magneto Flywheel Removal follows text to which
carried out. Remove muffler, refer to the EXHAUST SYSTEM it applies.
section.
Remove acoustic panel.
Remove rewind starter. mmr2007-016-002
Remove starting pulley no. 2. TYPICAL Italic bold face type-

Models
setting indicates a
Remove the connecting flange retaining the
procedure applicable
rewind starter to the engine housing. to a specific
model(s).
mmr2008-001 57
Bold face number following part

name refers to exploded view
at beginning of subsection.
typical_txt_2008_en
smr2015-005 VII
INTRODUCTION
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Tighten fasteners to the torque specified in the exploded view(s) and/or in the written procedure. When
a torque is not specified, the torque normally recommended for a specific fastener should be used. Refer
to the following table.
WARNING
Torque wrench tightening specifications must be strictly adhered to.
Locking devices must be replaced when removed (e.g.: locking tabs, elastic stop nuts, self-lock-
ing fasteners, cotter pins, etc.).
In order to avoid a poor assembly, tighten screws, bolts, or nuts in accordance with the following proce-
dure:
1. Manually screw all screws, bolts and/or nuts.
2. Apply half the recommended torque value.
NOTICE Be sure to use the recommended tightening torque for the specified fastener used.
NOTE: Whenever possible, always apply torque on the nut.
3. Tighten fastener to the recommended torque value.
NOTE: Always torque screws, bolts and/or nuts using a crisscross pattern when multiple fasteners are
used to secure a part (e.g. a cylinder head). Some parts must be torqued according to a specific se-
quence and torque pattern as detailed in the installation procedure.
4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9

Property
class and
head 4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9
markings
4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9 12.9
5 8 10 12
Property
class and
12
10
nut
5
markings
A00A8BS
FASTENER FASTENER GRADE/TORQUE

SIZE 5.8 Grade 8.8 Grade 10.9 Grade 12.9 Grade
1.5 – 2 N•m 2.5 – 3 N•m 3.5 – 4 N•m 4 – 5 N•m
M4
(13 – 18 lbf•in) (22 – 27 lbf•in) (31 – 35 lbf•ft) (35 – 44 lbf•ft)
3 – 3.5 N•m 4.5 – 5.5 N•m 7 – 8.5 N•m 8 – 10 N•m
M5
(27 – 31 lbf•ft) (40 – 47 lbf•ft) (62 – 75 lbf•ft) (71 – 89 lbf•ft)
6.5 – 8.5 N•m 8 – 12 N•m 10.5 – 15 N•m
M6 16 N•m (142 lbf•in)
(58 – 75 lbf•ft) (71 – 106 lbf•ft) (93 – 133 lbf•in)
M8 15 N•m (133 lbf•in) 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft) 32 N•m (24 lbf•ft) 40 N•m (30 lbf•ft)
M10 29 N•m (21 lbf•ft) 48 N•m (35 lbf•ft) 61 N•m (45 lbf•ft) 73 N•m (54 lbf•ft)
VIII smr2015-005
INTRODUCTION
FASTENER INFORMATION Threadlocker Application for

Uncovered Holes (Bolts and Nuts)
NOTICE Most fasteners are metric. Mis-
matched or incorrect fasteners could cause
damage to the vehicle.
SELF-LOCKING FASTENER 1
PROCEDURE
2
A00A3LA
1. Apply here
A00A6LA 2. Do not apply
TYPICAL — SELF-LOCKING FASTENER
1. Clean threads (bolt and nut) with solvent.
The following describes common procedures 2. Apply LOCTITE 7649 (PRIMER) (P/N 293 800 041)
used when working with self-locking fasteners. on threads and allow to dry.
Use a metal brush or a tap to clean the hole prop- 3. Choose proper strength Loctite threadlocker.
erly, then use a solvent. Allow the solvent time 4. Fit bolt in the hole.
to act, approximately 30 minutes, then wipe off.
Solvent utilization is to ensure proper adhesion of 5. Apply a few drops of threadlocker at proposed
the product used for locking the fastener. tightened nut engagement area.
6. Position nut and tighten as required.
LOCTITE® APPLICATION
PROCEDURE Threadlocker Application for Blind
Holes
The following describes common procedures
used when working with Loctite products.
NOTE: Always use proper strength Loctite prod- 1
uct as recommended in this Shop Manual.
NOTICE When applying threadlocker prod- 2
ucts (anaerobic products), pay attention to
prevent the product from coming into contact
with ABS plastic parts (painted parts).
lmr2007-040-004_a
1. On fastener threads
2. On threads and at the bottom of hole
1. Clean threads (bolt and hole) with solvent.

2. Apply LOCTITE 7649 (PRIMER) (P/N 293 800 041)
on threads (bolt and nut) and allow to dry for 30
seconds.
3. Choose proper strength Loctite threadlocker.
smr2015-005 IX
INTRODUCTION
4. Apply several drops along the threaded hole Threadlocker Application for
and at the bottom of the hole. Pre-Assembled Parts
5. Apply several drops on bolt threads.
6. Tighten as required.
Threadlocker Application for Stud

Installation in Blind Holes 1
1 3
2
A00A3OA
1. Apply here
lmr2007-040-005_a 2. Do not apply
1. On stud threads
2. On threads and in the hole 1. Clean bolts and nuts with solvent.
3. On retaining nut threads
2. Assemble components.
1. Clean threads (stud and hole) with solvent.
3. Tighten nuts.
2. Apply LOCTITE 7649 (PRIMER) (P/N 293 800 041)
4. Apply a few drops of proper strength Loctite on
on threads and allow to dry.
bolt/nut contact surfaces.
3. Put 2 or 3 drops of proper strength Loctite
5. Avoid touching metal with tip of flask.
threadlocker on female threads and in hole.
NOTE: For preventive maintenance on exist-
NOTE: To avoid a hydro lock situation, do not ap-
ing equipment, retighten nuts and apply proper
ply too much Loctite.
strength Loctite on bolt/nut contact surfaces.
4. Apply several drops of proper strength Loctite
on stud threads. Threadlocker Application for an
5. Install stud. Adjustment Screw
6. Install cover, part, etc.
7. Apply a few drops of proper strength Loctite on 2
1
uncovered stud threads.
8. Install and tighten retaining nut(s) as required.
A00A3PA
1. Apply here
2. Plunger
1. Adjust screw to proper setting.

2. Apply a few drops of proper strength Loctite
threadlocker on screw/body contact surfaces.
3. Avoid touching metal with tip of flask.
X smr2015-005
INTRODUCTION
NOTE: If it is difficult to readjust, heat screw with Gasket Compound Application

a soldering iron (232°C (450°F)).
Application for Stripped Thread Repair 1 2
5
1
6
8
2
1
A00A3QA 4 7
1. Release agent
2. Stripped threads 1 3
3. Form-A-Thread
lmr2007-040-006_a
4. Tape
5. Cleaned bolt 1. Proper strength Loctite
6. Plate 2. Loctite Primer N (P/N 293 800 041) and Gasket Eliminator 518
7. New threads (P/N 293 800 038) on both sides of gasket
8. Threadlocker 3. Loctite Primer N only
Standard Thread Repair 1. Remove old gasket and other contaminants us-
Follow instructions on Loctite FORM-A-THREAD ing LOCTITE CHISEL (GASKET REMOVER) (P/N 413
81668 package. 708 500). Use a mechanical means only if nec-
essary.
If a plate is used to align bolt:
NOTE: Avoid grinding.
1. Apply release agent on mating surfaces.
2. Clean both mating surfaces with solvent.
2. Put waxed paper or similar film on the surfaces.
3. Spray Loctite Primer N on both mating surfaces
3. Twist bolt when inserting it to improve thread and on both sides of gasket and allow to dry 1
conformation. or 2 minutes.
NOTE: NOT intended for engine stud repairs. 4. Apply LOCTITE 518 (P/N 293 800 038) on both
Repair of Small Holes/Fine Threads sides of gasket, using a clean applicator.
Option 1: Enlarge damaged hole, then follow 5. Place gasket on mating surfaces and assemble
STANDARD THREAD REPAIR procedure. parts immediately.
Option 2: Apply FORM-A-THREAD on the screw NOTE: If the cover is bolted to blind holes, apply
and insert in damaged hole. proper strength Loctite in the hole and on threads.
Permanent Stud Installation (Light Duty) Tighten fastener.
1. Use a stud of the desired thread length. If holes are sunken, apply proper strength Loctite
on bolt threads.
2. DO NOT apply release agent on stud.
6. Tighten as usual.
3. Follow Standard Thread Repair procedure.
4. Allow 30 minutes for Loctite FORM-A-THREAD Threadlocker Application for Mounting
to cure. on a Shaft
5. Complete part assembly. Mounting with a Press
smr2015-005 XI
INTRODUCTION
3. Apply a strip of proper strength Loctite on lead-

ing edge of outer metallic gasket diameter.
NOTE: Any Loctite product can be used here. A
low strength liquid is recommended as normal
1 strength and gap are required.
4. Install according to standard procedure.
2
5. Wipe off excess product.
3 6. Allow 30 minutes for product to cure.
A00A3UA NOTE: Normally used on worn-out housings to
prevent leaking or sliding.
1. Bearing
2. Proper strength Loctite It is generally not necessary to remove gasket
3. Shaft
compound applied on outer gasket diameter.
1. Clean shaft external contact surface.
2. Clean internal contact surface of part to be in-
stalled on shaft.
3. Apply a strip of proper strength Loctite on cir-
cumference of shaft contact surface at inser-
tion or engagement point.
NOTE: Retaining compound is always forced out
when applied on shaft.
4. DO NOT use antiseize Loctite or any similar
product.
5. No curing period is required.
Mounting in Tandem
1. Apply retaining compound on internal contact
surface (bore) of parts to be installed.
2. Continue parts assembly as per previous illus-
tration.
Threadlocker Application for Case-In

Components (Metallic Gaskets)
A00A3VA 1
1. Proper strength Loctite
1. Clean inner housing diameter and outer gasket

diameter.
2. Spray housing and gasket with LOCTITE 7649
(PRIMER) (P/N 293 800 041).
XII smr2015-005
Subsection XX (MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE)
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Maintenance is very important for keeping the watercraft in a safe operating condition. The watercraft
should be serviced as per the maintenance schedule.
A repair shop or person of the owner's choosing may maintain, replace, or repair emission control devices
and systems. These instructions do not require components or service by BRP or authorized Sea-Doo
dealers. Although an authorized Sea-Doo dealer has an in-depth technical knowledge and tools to service
the Sea-Doo personal watercraft, the emission-related warranty is not conditioned on the use of an au-
thorized Sea-Doo dealer or any other establishment with which BRP has a commercial relationship. For
emission-related warranty claims, BRP is limiting the diagnosis and repair of emission-related parts to
the authorized Sea-Doo dealers. For more information, please refer to the US EPA EMISSION-RELATED
WARRANTY contained herein. Proper maintenance is the owner’s responsibility. A warranty claim may
be denied if, among other things, the owner or operator caused the problem through improper mainte-
nance or use.
You must follow the instructions for fuel requirements in the fueling section of this manual. Even if gaso-
line containing greater than ten volume percent ethanol is readily available, the US EPA issued a prohibi-
tion against the use of gasoline containing greater than 10 vol% ethanol that applies to this vehicle. The
use of gasoline containing greater than 10 vol% ethanol with this engine may harm the emission control
system.
Disregard the information pertaining to the following systems if the watercraft is not equipped with these
features:
– iBR (intelligent Brake and Reverse)
– iS (intelligent Suspension) (GTX LTD iS only)
– aS (adjustable Suspension) (RXT-X aS only)
Carry out all maintenance as listed in the schedule whenever the hours or time of each column is reached.
NOTE: As an example, at 200 hours or 2 years, complete all items in this column and ALSO in the EVERY
100 hours or 1 year column.
WARNING
Failure to properly maintain the watercraft according to the maintenance schedule and proce-
dures can make it unsafe to operate.
The maintenance schedule does not exempt the pre-ride inspection.
smr2015-006 1
A: ADJUST FIRST 50 HOURS OR 1 YEAR

C: CLEAN EVERY 100 HOURS OR 1 YEAR
I: INSPECT
L: LUBRICATE EVERY 200 HOURS OR 2 YEARS
R: REPLACE
O: OPERATOR TO BE PERFORMED BY
RS: REPAIR SHOP
PART/TASK NOTE
ENGINE
Engine oil and filter R R RS
Rubber mounts I RS
(1) Every 10 hours in salt water use.
Corrosion protection (2) Replace at 200 hours, irrespective of the
(Spray an anticorrosion lubricant to metallic L (1) O number of years.
components in engine compartment)
Supercharger clutch (215/260 engines) R (2) RS
EXHAUST SYSTEM
I, C (3) Daily flushing in salt water or dirty water
Exhaust system I (3) O/RS
use.
COOLING SYSTEM
Hose and fasteners I I RS
(4) Replace at 300 hours or 5 years
Coolant I R(4) RS
FUEL SYSTEM
iTC lever (5) I, L O/RS (5) See NOTE 1 after maintenance schedule.
Fuel cap, filler neck, fuel tank, fuel tank straps, fuel lines (6)
I I RS
and connections (6) At storage period or after 100 hours of use
Fuel system leak test I I RS whichever comes first.
Throttle body I I RS
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
Air intake silencer I RS —
ELECTRONIC MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
Fault codes I I RS —
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Spark plugs I I R RS
Ignition coils I, L RS
Electrical connections and fastening (ignition system, starting
I I RS (7) Inspect once a month. Add electrolyte as
system, fuel injectors, fuse boxes etc.)
required.
Engine cut-off switch I I RS
Monitoring beeper I I RS
Battery and fasteners I (7) O/RS
STEERING SYSTEM
Steering cable and connections I I RS
Steering nozzle bushings I I RS (8) Inspect operation
O.T.A.S. (8) I I RS
2 smr2015-006

C: CLEAN EVERY 100 HOURS OR 1 YEAR
I: INSPECT
R: REPLACE
RS: REPAIR SHOP
PART/TASK NOTE
PROPULSION SYSTEM
Carbon ring and rubber boot (drive shaft)(10) I I RS
Impeller, impeller boot and wear ring condition I I RS
Impeller shaft radial play I RS (6) At storage period or after 100 hours
of use whichever comes first.
Jet pump housing inspection I RS (9) Inspect each month (more often in
Impeller shaft seal, sleeve, O-ring and impeller cover I (6) RS salt water use) and change when necessary.
(10) Inspect more frequently when using PWC
Drive shaft/impeller splines I, L RS in foul/dirty water.
Sacrificial anode I (9) O/RS
Measure impeller and impeller wear ring clearance I RS
iBR SYSTEM (intelligent Brake and Reverse)
iBR lever (5) I, L O/RS
iBR gate backlash I I RS
iBR friction sleeves, bushings and iBR gate stoppers I I RS (5) See NOTE 1 after maintenance schedule.
(6) At storage period or after 100
iBR U arm, VTS trim ring and iBR gate I RS hours of use whichever comes first.
(11) I (6) (11) See NOTE 2 after maintenance schedule.
iBR U arm retaining screws I (11) RS
iBR protective guard I I RS

iS SYSTEM (intelligent Suspension) (GTX limited iS only)
iS oil (12) I RS (12) Check pump reservoir oil level and for
iS position sensor I RS system leaks.
aS SYSTEM (adjustable Suspension) (RXT-X aS only)
Nitrogen remote reservoir —
I RS
(adjustment knob, mounts)
HULL AND BODY
Hull I O
—
Ride plate and water intake grate I O
NOTE 1: The iTC and iBR levers should be inspected by depressing and releasing the levers to check for freedom of movement. If any
friction is felt, the lever must be taken apart, cleaned, inspected for wear and lubricated, refer to INTELLIGENT THROTTLE
CONTROL (ITC), STEERING and O.T.A.S. subsections.
NOTE 2: Ensure proper torque of iBR U arm to iBR actuator shaft retaining screws. If retaining screws found loose, do not re-torque
them. Replace them with new ones.
smr2015-006 3
Subsection XX (STORAGE PROCEDURE)
STORAGE PROCEDURE
SERVICE PRODUCTS
Description Part Number Page
DOW CORNING 111 ..................................................................... 413 707 000 ............................................. 3
LOCTITE 767 (ANTISEIZE LUBRICANT) ....................................... 293 800 070 ............................................. 3
XPS FUEL STABILIZER.................................................................. 413 408 601 ............................................. 1
XPS LUBE...................................................................................... 293 600 016 ..................................... 1, 3–4
PROCEDURES Exhaust System Flushing

Flush the exhaust system. Refer to EXHAUST
PROPULSION SYSTEM SYSTEM subsection.
Propulsion System Cleaning and Intercooler Draining (260 Engine)
Protection
It is important to expel any trapped water that may
Clean jet pump by spraying water in its inlet have accumulated from condensation in the exter-
and outlet and then apply a coating of XPS LUBE nal intercooler.
(P/N 293 600 016) or equivalent.
NOTICE Failure to drain the intercooler may
Jet Pump Inspection cause severe damage to this component.
Remove impeller cover and check if jet pump is Proceed as follows:
water contaminated; if so, refer to JET PUMP sub-
section for the repair procedure. Models With Suspension
1. Open the boarding platform and remove the RH
FUEL SYSTEM storage bin.
Fuel System Inspection 2. Ensure there is an alignment line drawn on the
intercooler outlet hose. This will ensure the
Verify fuel system. Check fuel hoses for leaks. hose is not twisted or kinked on reinstallation.
Replace damaged hoses or clamps if necessary.
3. Loosen the clamp retaining the intercooler out-
Fuel System Protection let hose.
XPS FUEL STABILIZER (P/N 413 408 601) (or equiva- 4. Remove the intercooler outlet hose from the in-
lent) should be added in the fuel tank to prevent tercooler.
fuel deterioration and fuel system gumming. Fol- NOTE: This hose feeds the inlet of the throttle
low manufacturer's instructions for proper use. body.
NOTICE Fuel stabilizer should be added iS Models
prior to engine lubrication to ensure fuel sys- 5. Drape a couple of shop rags over the iS module
tem component protection against varnish to protect it from any expelled water from the
deposits. intercooler.
Fill up fuel tank completely. Ensure there is no wa-
ter inside fuel tank.
NOTICE Should any water be trapped inside
fuel tank, severe internal damage will occur to
the fuel injection system.
ENGINE
Engine Oil and Filter Replacement
Change engine oil and filter. Refer to LUBRICA-
TION SYSTEM subsection.
smr2012-004 1
8. Torque intercooler hose clamp as specified.

INTERCOOLER HOSE CLAMP TORQUE
4 N•m (35 lbf•in)
Exhaust System Draining

The exhaust system is self draining, but the ex-
haust manifold and intercooler (215 engine) need
to be drained to avoid damages should the water-
craft be stored in an area where the temperature
attains the freezing point of water.
Using the flushing connector located at the rear of
vehicle, inject pressurized air (at 380 kPa (55 PSI))
smo2009-002-151_a in the system until there is no more water flowing
TYPICAL from jet pump.
1. Hose alignment lines
2. Hose clamp
3. Intercooler outlet hose
4. iS module
All Models
6. Start engine and rev up to 4000 RPM several
times. Water will be expelled from the inter-
cooler.
NOTE: Prevent air intake system from aspirating
foreign objects which may cause severe engine or
damage.
7. Stop engine.
8. Properly align and reinstall hose on intercooler. smr2009-021-004_a
1. Flushing connector
9. Torque intercooler hose clamp as specified.
INTERCOOLER HOSE CLAMP TORQUE The following hose can be fabricated to ease
draining procedure.
Models Without Suspension

1. Open the seat.
2. Ensure there is an alignment line drawn on the
throttle body inlet hose. This will ensure the smo2008-001-053_a
hose is not twisted or kinked on reinstallation. TYPICAL
1. Flushing adaptor (P/N 295 500 473)
3. Loosen the clamp retaining the hose to the 2. Hose 13 mm (1/2 in)
throttle body. 3. Air hose male adapter
4. Remove the hose from the throttle body and NOTICE Failure to drain the exhaust mani-
direct it away from the throttle body and other fold may cause severe damage to components.
components.
5. Start engine and rev up to 4000 RPM several Engine Coolant Replacement
times. Water will be expelled from the inter- Antifreeze should be replaced every 200 hours or
cooler. every two years to prevent antifreeze deteriora-
NOTE: Prevent air intake system from aspirating tion.
foreign objects which may cause severe engine or NOTICE Failure to replace the antifreeze as
damage.
recommended may allow its degradation that
6. Stop engine. could result in poor engine cooling.
7. Properly align and reinstall hose on throttle
body.
2 smr2012-004
If coolant is not replaced, test the coolant density

using an antifreeze hydrometer.
Replace coolant if necessary. For the coolant re-
placement procedure, refer to COOLING SYSTEM
subsection.
NOTICE Improper antifreeze density may
result in coolant freezing should the vehicle
be stored in area where the freezing point
is attained. This could seriously damage the
engine.
Engine Internal Lubrication

Engine must be lubricated to prevent corrosion on
internal parts. smr2006-016-030_a
1. Ignition coil
Lubrication of the engine is recommended at the 2. Spark plug
end of the season and before any extended stor-
age period to provide additional corrosion protec- 8. Spray XPS LUBE (P/N 293 600 016) into each
tion. This will lubricate the engine intake valves, spark plug hole.
the cylinders and the exhaust valves. 9. Crank the engine a few turns to distribute the
To lubricate the engine, proceed as follows: oil on cylinder wall.
1. Open seat. NOTE: To crank engine, use the drowned mode
to avoid injecting fuel. Fully depress throttle lever
Models With Suspension and hold for cranking engine.
2. Remove the rear ventilation box. 10. Apply LOCTITE 767 (ANTISEIZE LUBRICANT)
All Models (P/N 293 800 070) on spark plug threads then
reinstall them.
3. Disconnect ignition coil connectors.
NOTE: Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM subsection
WARNING for details on installing the spark plugs and igni-
tion coils.
When disconnecting coil from spark plug, al-
ways disconnect coil from main harness first. 11. Prior to inserting the ignition coil onto its spark
Never check for engine ignition spark from plug, apply some DOW CORNING 111 (P/N 413
an open coil and/or spark plug in the engine 707 000) around the seal area that touches the
compartment as the spark may cause fuel va- spark plug hole.
pors to ignite. 12. Reinstall ignition coils.
13. Ensure the seal seats properly with the engine
NOTICE Never cut the locking ties of ignition top surface.
coil connectors. This would allow mixing of 14. Reconnect ignition coil connectors.
the wires between cylinders. 15. Install all other removed parts.
4. Clean the area around the ignition coils to avoid
dirt falling into a cylinder. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
5. Remove ignition coils. Battery Removal
6. Unscrew spark plugs. For battery removal, cleaning and storage, refer to
7. Using an ignition coil as a puller, remove spark CHARGING SYSTEM subsection.
plugs.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Engine Compartment Cleaning
1. Clean the bilge with hot water and a mild deter-
gent, or using bilge cleaner.
2. Rinse thoroughly.
smr2012-004 3
3. Lift front end of watercraft to completely drain

bilge. Refer to appropriate HULL subsection for
bilge drain plug removal.
Anticorrosion Treatment
Wipe off any residual water in the engine compart-
ment.
Spray XPS LUBE (P/N 293 600 016) over all metallic
components in engine compartment.
NOTE: The seat should be left partially open
during storage. This will prevent engine compart-
ment condensation and possible corrosion.
BODY AND HULL

Body and Hull Cleaning
Wash the body with a soap and water solution
(only use a mild detergent). Rinse thoroughly with
fresh water. Remove marine organisms from the
hull.
NOTICE Never clean body parts or hull with
strong detergent, degreasing agent, paint thin-
ner, acetone, etc.
Replace damaged labels/decals.
Body Repair
If any repair is required, refer to BODY subsection.
Hull Repair
If any repair is required, refer to appropriate HULL
subsection.
Body and Hull Protection

Apply a good quality marine wax on body and hull.
If the watercraft is to be stored outside, cover it
with an opaque tarpaulin to prevent sun rays and
grime from affecting the plastic components, wa-
tercraft finish as well as preventing dust accumu-
lation.
NOTICE The watercraft should never be left
in water for storage, stored in direct sunlight
or stored in a plastic bag.
4 smr2012-004
October 29, 2010 Subject: Storage Procedure No. 2010-7
YEAR MODEL MODEL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER

2010 All All All
NOTE: Carry out the following tasks in the same Fuel System Protection
order as detailed in this bulletin. The BRP FUEL STABILIZER (P/N 413 408 600) or
equivalent should be added in fuel tank to pre-
PROCEDURES vent fuel deterioration and fuel system gumming.
Follow manufacturer's instructions for proper
Propulsion System use.
Jet Pump Cleaning NOTICE Fuel stabilizer should be added prior

to engine lubrication to ensure fuel system
Clean jet pump by spraying water in its inlet
components protection against varnish de-
and outlet and then apply a coating of XPS LUBE
posits.
WARNING Engine
Always remove safety lanyard cap from post Engine Oil and Filter Replacement
to prevent unexpected engine starting before Change engine oil and filter. Refer to LUBRI-
cleaning the jet pump area. Engine must not CATION SYSTEM subsection in the appropriate
be running for this operation. SHOP MANUAL.
Jet Pump Inspection Intercooler Draining

Remove impeller cover and check if jet pump is It is important to expel any trapped water that may
water contaminated; if so, refer to JET PUMP sub- have accumulated from condensation in the exter-
section in the appropriate SHOP MANUAL for the nal intercooler.
repair procedure.
NOTICE Failure to drain the intercooler may
Drive Shaft Corrosion Protection cause severe damage to this components.
No protection against corrosion is required since All 255 Engine Models except iS Series
the drive shaft is rubber-coated. 1. Removed the intake hose from throttle body.
Fuel System
Fuel System Inspection
Verify fuel system. Check fuel hoses for leaks.
Replace damaged hoses or clamps if necessary.
NOTICE Salt water use may cause clamps to
prematurely corrode. Therefore, they would
require a closer look and a more frequent pre-
ventive replacement.
Printed in Canada. (sbs2010-005 en AP)

©2010 Bombardier Recreational Products Inc. and BRP US Inc. All rights reserved.
1/ 4
®™ and the BRP logo are trademarks of Bombardier Recreational Products Inc. or its affiliates.
smr2009-004-001_a
1. Intake hose smo2009-002-151_a

2. Throttle body
2. Hose clamp
2. Start engine and rev up to 4000 RPMs several 3. Intercooler outlet hose
times. Water will be expelled from intercooler. 4. iS module
4. Start engine and rev up to 4000 RPMs several

times. Water will be expelled from intercooler.
NOTE: Prevent air intake system from aspirating
foreign objects which may cause severe engine or
damage.
5. Stop engine.
6. Install intercooler outlet hose.
Exhaust System Protection

The exhaust system is self draining, but the ex-
haust manifold needs to be drained to avoid dam-
ages if watercraft is stored in area where freezing
sbs2008-005-002 weather is present.
WATER EXPELLED FROM INTERCOOLER
Using the flushing connector located at the rear
3. Stop engine. of vehicle, inject pressurized air into system until
there is no more water flowing from jet pump.
4. Liberally lubricate throttle body inside and out.
5. Clean off any lubrication on the throttle body MODEL AIR PRESSURE
intake hose flange. iS Series 380 kPa (55 PSI)
6. Install air intake hose to the throttle body. All other models 689 kPa (100 PSI)
iS Series
Proceed as follows:
1. Loosen the clamp retaining the intercooler out-
let hose.
2. Remove the intercooler outlet hose from the in-
tercooler.
NOTE: This hose feeds the inlet of the throttle
body.
3. Drape a couple of shop rags over the iS module
to protect it from any expelled water from the
intercooler. smr2009-021-004_a
TYPICAL – IS SERIES
2/ 4 2010-7 SERVICE
Lubrication of the engine is recommended at the
end of the season and before any extended stor-
age period to provide additional corrosion protec-
tion. This will lubricate the engine intake valves,
the cylinders and the exhaust valves.
To lubricate the engine, proceed as follows:
1. Open seat and remove the rear ventilation box.
2. On iS series, remove the rear ventilation box.
For all other models, pull engine cover upward
and remove it.
3. Disconnect ignition coil connectors.
smo2008-001-054_a
TYPICAL – ALL OTHER MODELS

WARNING
1. Flushing connector — location may differ When disconnecting coil from spark plug, al-
The following hose can be fabricated to ease ways disconnect coil from main harness first.
draining procedure. Never check for engine ignition spark from
an open coil and/or spark plug in the engine
compartment as spark may cause fuel vapor
to ignite.
NOTICE Never cut the locking ties of ignition

smo2008-001-053_a coil connectors. This would allow mixing the
TYPICAL wires between cylinders.
1. Flushing adaptor (P/N 295 500 473)
2. Hose 13 mm (1/2 in)
3. Air hose male adapter 4. Clean ignition coil areas to avoid falling dirt into
cylinder.
NOTICE Failure to drain the exhaust manifold
5. Remove ignition coils.
may cause severe damage to this components.
6. Unscrew spark plugs.
Engine Coolant Replacement 7. Using an ignition coil as a puller, remove spark
Antifreeze should be replaced every 200 hours or plugs.
every two years to prevent antifreeze deteriora-
tion.
NOTICE Failure to replace the antifreeze as
recommended may allow its degradation that
could result in poor engine cooling.
If coolant is not replaced, test the coolant density
using an antifreeze hydrometer.
Replace coolant if necessary. For the coolant re-
placement procedure, refer to COOLING SYSTEM
subsection in the appropriate SHOP MANUAL.
NOTICE Improper antifreeze density might
lead coolant to freeze if vehicle is stored in
area where freezing point is reached. This
would seriously damage the engine. smr2006-016-030_a
1. Ignition coil
2. Spark plug
Engine Internal Lubrication
Engine must be lubricated to prevent corrosion on 8. Spray XPS LUBE (P/N 293 600 016) into each
internal parts. spark plug hole.
9. Crank the engine a few turns to distribute the
oil on cylinder wall.
SERVICE 2010-7 3/ 4
NOTE: To crank engine, use the drowned mode Vehicle Protection
to avoid injecting fuel. Fully depress throttle lever Apply a good quality marine wax on body and hull.
and hold for cranking engine.
The seat should be left partially open during stor-
10. Apply LOCTITE 767 (ANTISEIZE LUBRICANT) age. This will prevent engine compartment con-
(P/N 293 800 070) on spark plug threads then densation and possible corrosion.
reinstall them.
If the watercraft is to be stored outside, cover it
11. Prior to inserting the ignition coil to its loca- with an opaque tarpaulin to prevent sun rays and
tion, apply some DOW CORNING 111 (P/N 413 grime from affecting the plastic components, wa-
707 000) around the seal area that touches the tercraft finish as well as preventing dust accumu-
spark plug hole. lation.
12. Reinstall ignition coils.
NOTICE The watercraft should never be left in
13. Ensure the seal seats properly with the engine water for storage, stored in direct sunlight or
top surface. stored in a plastic bag.
14. Reconnect ignition coil connectors.
15. Install all other removed parts.
Electrical System
Battery Removal
For battery removal, cleaning and storage, refer to
CHARGING SYSTEM subsection in the appropri-
ate SHOP MANUAL.
Vehicle
Bilge Cleaning
Clean the bilge with hot water and mild detergent
or with bilge cleaner.
Rinse thoroughly.
Lift front end of watercraft to completely drain
bilge.
Body and Hull Cleaning

Wash the body with soap and water solution (only
use mild detergent). Rinse thoroughly with fresh
water. Remove marine organisms from the hull.
NOTICE Never clean body parts or hull with
strong detergent, degreasing agent, paint thin-
ner, acetone, etc.
Replace damaged labels/decals.
Body Repair
If any repair is needed, refer to BODY subsection
in the appropriate SHOP MANUAL.
Wipe off any residual water in the engine compart-
ment.
Spray XPS LUBE (P/N 293 600 016) over all metallic
components in engine compartment.
4/ 4 2010-7 SERVICE
Subsection XX (PRESEASON PREPARATION)
PRESEASON PREPARATION
Proper vehicle preparation is necessary after the
winter months or when a watercraft has not been
used during 4 months.
Any worn, broken or damaged parts found during
the storage procedure should have been replaced.
If not, proceed with the replacement.
Referring to the maintenance schedule, carry out
the maintenance procedures for every item spec-
ified in the column 100 HOURS OR 1 YEAR.
smr2012-005-002_a
1. Use this column
Furthermore, proceed with the following:

Watercraft Prepared as per Storage Procedure
– Ensure battery is fully charged.
– Reinstall the battery.
– Test ride watercraft to confirm proper opera-
tion.
Watercraft Not Prepared as per Storage Proce-
dure
– Ensure battery is fully charged.
– Replace engine oil and filter.
– Drain fuel tank and fill with fresh fuel.
– Reinstall the battery.
– Test ride watercraft to confirm proper opera-
tion.
smr2012-005 1
Subsection XX (SPECIAL PROCEDURES)
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
SERVICE TOOLS
LARGE HOSE PINCHER................................................................ 529 032 500 ........................................... 3
SUCTION PUMP ........................................................................... 529 035 880 ........................................... 2
GENERAL Engine Lubrication

Refer to the following special procedures accord- Refer to WATER-FLOODED ENGINE in this sub-
ing to the specific event. Procedures described section.
may not be applicable to every watercraft model.
Fuel Inspection
PROCEDURES Check fuel tank for water contamination. If nec-
essary, siphon and refill with fresh fuel.
TOWING THE WATERCRAFT IN
WATER WATER-FLOODED ENGINE
If the engine is flooded with water, it must be ser-
Special precautions should be taken when towing
viced within a few hours after the event. Other-
a Sea-Doo watercraft in water.
wise, the engine will have to be overhauled.
The maximum recommended towing speed is
24 km/h (15 MPH). NOTICE
This will prevent the exhaust system from fill- – Never try to crank or start the engine. Water
ing with water, which may lead to water being trapped in the intake manifold would enter
injected into and filling the engine. Without the the combustion chamber through the intake
engine running, there isn't any exhaust pressure valves and may cause damage to the engine.
to push the water out the exhaust outlet. – An engine flooded with water must be prop-
erly drained, lubricant replaced (oil change),
NOTICE Failure to follow these instructions operated (boil out procedure), then lubricant
may result in damage to the engine. If you replaced again, otherwise parts will be seri-
must tow a stranded watercraft in water, be ously damaged.
sure not to exceed the maximum towing speed
of 24 km/h (15 MPH). Exhaust System Draining
If water is suspected to be in the exhaust system,
SUBMERGED WATERCRAFT remove the exhaust pipe and the muffler. Drain
them or siphon the water out of them. Refer to
NOTICE Never try to crank or start engine. EXHAUST SYSTEM subsection.
Water trapped in the intake manifold would
flow towards the engine and possible cause Intake System Draining
severe engine damage. 1. If water is present in the air intake silencer,
empty it. Refer to AIR INTAKE SYSTEM sub-
1. Drain bilge.
section.
2. If the watercraft was submerged in salt water,
2. Remove the air intake silencer and check for
rinse the bilge and all components thoroughly
water in the supercharger inlet hose. Remove
with fresh water using a garden hose to stop
hose to empty it.
the salt corroding effect.
3. Remove the water from blow-by valve hose.
3. Check for water in the intake system. If wa-
ter found in the intake system, refer to WA- 4. If water is suspected in the intake manifold,
TER-FLOODED ENGINE in this subsection. remove the intake manifold and drain it. Then
siphon the water out from the intake valve
ports. Refer to INTAKE MANIFOLD subsec-
tion.
smr2012-006 1
Supercharger Servicing
215 and 260 Engines
If there is water in the oil or in the supercharger in-
let hose, the supercharger should be taken apart,
all the components dried, and the slip clutch nee-
dle bearings and shaft ball bearings replaced. Re-
fer to SUPERCHARGER subsection. smr2006-006-001_a
TYPICAL
1. Valve cover
If the engine oil is contaminated with water (oil will 8. Wrap a piece of tape around the suction pump
be milky), change the engine oil and filter as per tube 400 mm (16 in) from the end of the tube.
following procedure. 9. Insert the tube in the PTO area until the tape is
Models with Suspension even with the cylinder-block edge.
Remove the deck extension. Refer to BODY sub- 10. Siphon contaminated oil out.
section.
All Models
1. Using the SUCTION PUMP (P/N 529 035 880),
siphon the contaminated oil from the engine
reservoir through the dipstick hole.
smr2006-006-003_a
TYPICAL
1. Suction pump tube with tape
2. Edge of cylinder-block
11. Remove the suction pump tube.

529035880
12. Reinstall valve cover.
NOTICE Never crank or start engine when 13. Install a NEW oil filter and reinstall the oil filter
siphon tube is in dipstick hole. Never start cap.
engine when there is no oil in engine.
14. Replenish the engine with appropriate amount
2. Remove the suction pump tube from the dip- of the recommended engine oil. Refer to LU-
stick hole. BRICATION SYSTEM subsection.
3. Fully depress throttle lever and HOLD it for 15. Proceed with the BOIL OUT PROCEDURE
cranking. that follows.
4. Crank the engine for 5 seconds. NOTE: The boil out procedure is intended to evap-
5. Remove the oil filter cap and the oil filter. Refer orate a small quantity of water contained in the oil
to LUBRICATION SYSTEM subsection. system.
6. Again, siphon the contaminated oil from the oil Boil Out Procedure in a Test Tank or Tied to a
filter reservoir. Trailer with Watercraft in Water
7. Remove valve cover. Refer to CYLINDER 1. Connect the vehicle to latest applicable
HEAD subsection. B.U.D.S. version to monitor the coolant tem-
perature. Coolant temperature must exceed
100°C (212°F) in order for the water to boil out.
Once the boiling point is attained, the water
will evaporate quickly.
2. Run the engine for 5 minutes at 3500 RPM.
2 smr2012-006
WARNING CAPSIZED WATERCRAFT

Be sure to safely secure the watercraft. Capsized for More than 5 Minutes
Refer to WATER-FLOODED ENGINE in this sub-
3. With the engine still running at 3500 RPM, in- section.
stall a LARGE HOSE PINCHER (P/N 529 032 500)
on the coolant line going to the oil cooler.
529032500
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment may be very hot. Direct contact may re-
sult in skin burn. Do not touch any electri-
cal parts or jet pump area when the engine
is running.
smr2009-015-001_a
TYPICAL
1. Oil cooler coolant inlet hose
4. Continue to run the engine at 3500 RPM for 15

more minutes (20 minute total run time).
5. Shut the engine off.
6. Remove the hose pincher from coolant line go-
ing to the oil cooler.
NOTICE Hose pincher must be removed prior
to operating the watercraft. Failure to do this
will result in damage to the engine.
7. Change the oil and filter again.
8. Procedure is now complete.
smr2012-006 3
Subsection XX (ENGINE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION)
ENGINE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

SERVICE TOOLS
ALIGNMENT SHAFT ADAPTER .................................................... 529 035 719 ......................................... 7–8
ALIGNMENT SHAFT SUPPORT .................................................... 529 035 506 ............................................. 7
ALIGNMENT SHAFT ..................................................................... 295 000 141 ......................................... 7–8
PUMP PLATE................................................................................. 529 036 224 ............................................. 7
SERVICE PRODUCTS
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ......................................... 7, 9
PULLEY FLANGE CLEANER ......................................................... 413 711 809 ............................................. 7
smr2012-007 1
ENGINE SUPPORTS
GTS 130, GTI 130, GTI 155, GTR 215 and WAKE 155
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
NEW (18 lbfft)
T mark
upwards
25 Nm
(18 lbfft) NEW
NEW Maximum
25 Nm thickness:
(18 lbfft) T mark 5 mm
upwards (13/64 in)
25 Nm NEW 25 Nm

(18 lbfft) (18 lbfft)
Maximum thickness:
NEW 5 mm (13/64 in)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
NEW (18 lbfft)
T mark
NEW upwards
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
Maximum
thickness:
5 mm (13/64 in)
NEW
25 Nm NEW
(18 lbfft) 25 Nm
NEW = Component must be replaced when removed. (18 lbfft)
smr2011-007-001_a
2 smr2012-007
GTX 155 and GTX S 155
25 Nm 25 Nm
NEW
25 Nm
NEW (18 lbfft)
T mark
upwards
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW
Maximum thickness:
5 mm (13/64 in)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
T mark 25 Nm
upwards (18 lbfft)
NEW
25 Nm
NEW (18 lbfft)
Maximum
25 Nm thickness:
(18 lbfft) 5 mm
NEW (13/64 in)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
T mark
upwards
Maximum
thickness:
5 mm
(13/64 in)
25 Nm NEW
(18 lbfft)
NEW
25 Nm
smr2011-007-002_a
smr2012-007 3
RXT 260, GTX 215/260 and WAKE PRO 215
T mark
upwards 25 Nm
NEW (18 lbfft)
25 Nm 25 Nm
NEW
T mark 25 Nm
Maximum upwards (18 lbfft)
thickness:
5 mm
(13/64 in)
Maximum
thickness:
5 mm
(13/64 in)
NEW
NEW 25 Nm
25 Nm (18 lbfft)
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
T mark
upwards
NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft) Maximum
thickness:
5 mm
(13/64 in)
NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm NEW
smr2011-007-003_a
4 smr2012-007
RXP-X 260
25 Nm 25 Nm
NEW
NEW
T 25 Nm
25 Nm mark (18 lbfft)
T (18 lbfft) upwards
mark
upwards
25 Nm 25 Nm Maximum

(18 lbfft) (18 lbfft) tickness
NEW 5 mm
NEW
(13/64 in)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW
T
mark
upwards
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW
25 Nm
smr2012-007-001_a
smr2012-007 5
PROCEDURES COMMON PROCEDURE FOR ALL MODELS

– Remove the seat. Refer to appropriate BODY
ENGINE subsection.
Engine Removal Guideline – Disconnect the battery. Refer to CHARGING
SYSTEM subsection.
PROCEDURES ACCORDING TO MODEL – Unplug fuel hose from fuel rail. Refer to
MODELS WITH SUSPENSION ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI) subsection.
– Drain coolant. Refer to COOLING SYSTEM
– Remove moving deck and deck extension. Refer subsection.
to BODY. – Disconnect the "B" connector from the ECM.
– Remove the air intake silencer and its support. – Disconnect the engine connector.
Refer to AIR INTAKE SILENCER (MODELS WITH
– Disconnect the knock sensor and magneto
SUSPENSION) subsection).
connectors (remove connector housings from
ALL MODELS EQUIPPED WITH A 260 ENGINE the ECM support).
– Disconnect the EGTS sensor from the muffler.
– Unplug air intake hose from the throttle body.
– Disconnect the three ground cables on the front
ALL MODELS EQUIPPED WITH A 260 ENGINE end of engine.
(EXCEPT MODELS WITH SUSPENSION) – Unplug the front exhaust hose from the muffler.
– Remove the supercharger. Refer to – Unplug the blow-by valve hose.
SUPERCHARGER subsection. – Unplug the ride plate hoses from water pump
housing.
ALL MODELS EQUIPPED WITH A 215 ENGINE – Move muffler backward. Refer to EXHAUST
– Unplug both hoses from the supercharger. SYSTEM subsection.
– Remove the drive shaft. Refer to DRIVE SHAFT
ALL MODELS subsection.
(EXCEPT MODELS WITH SUSPENSION) – Remove the engine mounting screws.
– Disconnect all fuel injector connectors and the – Cut any locking ties from hoses or wiring
following sensors (CTS, CPS, TOPS, CAPS and harness that prevent engine removal.
OPS). – Slightly lift the engine using a suitable
– Remove the intake manifold. Refer to INTAKE lifting device.
MANIFOLD subsection.
– Unplug water hoses from exhaust manifold.

– Disconnect the starter cable from the starter.
– Disconnect the engine ground cable located
under the exhaust manifold.
– Carry on engine lifting to remove it from the
body opening.
NOTICE Be careful not to scratch body or

to hit any engine component during engine
removal.
6 smr2012-007
Engine Installation Run engine and ensure there is no leakage.

Installation of engine in watercraft is essentially NOTICE If watercraft is out of water, exhaust
the reverse of removal procedures. However pay system must be cooled using the flush kit.
particular attention to the following.
NOTICE Whenever engine is removed from Engine Alignment
watercraft, engine alignment must be per- REQUIRED TOOLS
formed at reinstallation.
PUMP PLATE
Wipe off any spillage in bilge. Clean with the PUL- (P/N 529 036 224)
LEY FLANGE CLEANER (P/N 413 711 809).
ALIGNMENT SHAFT SUPPORT
Check tightness and condition of engine rubber (P/N 529 035 506)
mounts. Refer to ENGINE MOUNTS in this sub-
section. ALIGNMENT SHAFT ADAPTER
(P/N 529 035 719)
Before completely lowering engine, install ground
cable, starter cable and water hoses on exhaust ALIGNMENT SHAFT
manifold. Follow these guide lines. (P/N 295 000 141)
– Ensure contact surface is perfectly clean then
To verify alignment of engine proceed as follows:
reconnect ground cable to engine.
– Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060) on 1. Remove jet pump and drive shaft. Refer to
threads of ground cable screw or use a new STEERING AND PROPULSION section.
screw with self-locking product. 2. Remove drive shaft boot.
– Tighten ground cable screw to 23 N•m 3. Assemble alignment tool.
(17 lbf•ft).
3.1 Install the alignment shaft support on
– Torque starter cable nut to 7 N•m (62 lbf•in). pump plate.
– Install protective cap over the starter cable end.
3.2 Secure using M8 x 25 x 1.25 hexagonal
– Connect exhaust manifold water inlet and screws.
outlet hoses. Tighten clamps to 1.7 N•m
(15 lbf•in).
Place engine into vehicle.
Install engine support screws. Do not apply
threadlocker to engine support screws and do
not torque yet.
Align engine. Refer to ENGINE ALIGNMENT in
this subsection for complete procedure.
NOTICE The engine alignment must be com-
pleted before finalizing the engine installation.
smr2011-007-005_a
Install and properly align exhaust pipe. Refer to 1. Alignment shaft support (P/N 529 035 506)
EXHAUST SYSTEM subsection. 2. Support plate (P/N 529 036 224)
3. M8 x 25 x 1.25 hexagonal screws
Reinstall all other removed parts.
Check hose condition and pressure test fuel sys- TORQUE
tem, refer to FUEL SYSTEM section. Alignment tool screws 24 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
WARNING 4. Install the alignment tool as follows.

Whenever doing any type of repair on wa- 4.1 Position the alignment tool against the
tercraft or if any components of the fuel sys- pump support.
tem are disconnected, a pressure test must
4.2 Push the alignment tool upward and hold
be done before starting engine.
it in this position.
Verify all electrical connections (ground wires and
battery).
smr2012-007 7
smr2009-016-029_a
smr2011-007-006_a
TYPICAL
Step 1: Place alignment tool against pump support 1. Alignment shaft adapter
Step 2: Push alignment tool upward
6. Carefully slide the ALIGNMENT SHAFT (P/N 295
TORQUE 000 141) through the engine alignment tool.
Alignment tool nuts 24 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
Install the ALIGNMENT SHAFT ADAPTER (P/N 529

035 719) on the end of the ALIGNMENT SHAFT
(P/N 295 000 141).
529035719
smr2011-007-007_a
1. Alignment shaft (P/N 295 000 141)

2. Alignment tool
7. Insert alignment shaft end into alignment

295000141
shaft adapter. If the alignment is correct, the
Trace two thin lines on alignment shaft. alignment shaft end should slide through the
adapter.
NOTE: A small resistance during shaft insertion is
normal.
8. If the alignment is incorrect, loosen engine
mount retaining screws (Allen socket screws).
9. Add or remove shims as required.
NOTE: Shims location is between engine mount
and engine mount plate.
NOTICE Whenever shims are used to cor-
smr2009-016-200_a
rect alignment, never install more than 5 mm
LINES DISTANCE (13/64 in) of shims.
Line A at 739.5 mm (29.114 in)
Line B at 742.5 mm (29.232 in)
5. Remove the ALIGNMENT SHAFT ADAPTER

(P/N 529 035 719) from the end of the alignment
shaft and install it in engine PTO housing.
NOTICE Ensure alignment shaft adapter is
fully inserted into the engine PTO housing.
8 smr2012-007
ENGINE MOUNTS
If engine mounts have been removed, apply LOC-
TITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060) on screw threads
or use new screws with self-locking product.
Torque all engine mount screws to 25 N•m
(18 lbf•ft).
NOTE: Position conical spring washer with the "T"
mark upwards.
smr2011-007-008_a
REAR STARBOARD ENGINE MOUNT SHOWN

1. Engine mounting screw
2. Engine mount retaining screws
3. Shim(s)
10. When engine alignment is correct, check the

longitudinal position of engine.
Engine Longitudinal Position Verification
With alignment shaft installed, check the location
of the marks (previously drawn at the beginning of
the engine alignment procedure).
Engine is properly positioned longitudinally when
smr2011-007-004_a
the engine alignment tool is between both shaft 1. T mark
marks.
– If one mark is visible, the engine is properly po-
sitioned.
– If both marks are visible, the engine must be
moved forward.
– If no mark is visible, the engine must be moved
rearward.
smr2012-007-002_a
PROPER POSITION
1. Engine alignment tool
2. Alignment shaft
3. Mark at 742.5 mm (29.232 in)
When alignment and longitudinal position of en-

gine are correct, tighten engine mount screws.
Refer to ENGINE MOUNTS in this subsection.
Recheck engine alignment.
smr2012-007 9
Subsection XX (AIR INTAKE SYSTEM (MODELS WITHOUT SUSPENSION))
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM (MODELS

WITHOUT SUSPENSION)
130 and 155 engines (including GTS RENTAL)
Hand tight
GTX 155
1.7 N•m
(15 lbf•in)
4 N•m
(35 lbf•in)
1.7 N•m
(15 lbf•in)
1.7 N•m
(15 lbf•in)
4 N•m
(35 lbf•in)
smr2012-008-001_a
smr2012-008 1
215 and 260 Engines
Hand tight
1.7 N•m
(15 lbf•in)
4 N•m
(35 lbf•in)
4 N•m
(35 lbf•in)
smr2012-008-002_a
2 smr2012-008
PROCEDURES 3. Unplug the top of ventilations tubes and place

them lower in hull.
AIR INTAKE SILENCER
Air Intake Silencer Access
GTS, GTI, GTR, RXP and WAKE 155 Models
1. Open the front storage compartment cover.
2. Remove partitions. Refer to BODY subsection.
smr2011-008-014_a
1. Ventilation tubes
4. Cut locking ties securing wiring harness and

fuel hoses to air intake silencer.
smr2011-008-003_a
1. Partitions
2. Retaining strap
3. Plastic rivets
3. Disconnect gauge and OTAS connectors.
smr2012-008-005_a
1. Cut these locking ties
5. Cut locking ties securing fuel hoses and wiring

harness to upper bracket
6. Disconnect gauge and OTAS connectors.
smr2011-008-004_a
1. Gauge connector
2. OTAS connector
4. Remove plastic darts securing the top of the

ventilation tubes.
5. Unplug ventilations tubes and place them lower smr2012-008-006_a
in hull. 1. Disconnect the OTAS connector

2. Disconnect the gauge connector
RXT, GTX and WAKE PRO Models
1. Open the front storage compartment cover. Air Intake Silencer Removal
2. Remove the storage bin. 1. Open or remove the seat.
smr2012-008 3
2. From seat opening, cut locking tie securing the

wiring harness and the fuel supply hose to air
intake silencer.
smr2011-008-012_a
RXT, GTX AND WAKE PRO MODELS

1. Rear retaining strap – under glove box
4. Loosen clamp securing the air intake silencer

outlet hose to throttle body.
smr2012-008-003_a
GTS, GTI, GTR, RXP AND WAKE 155 MODELS

1. Cut this locking tie
smr2011-008-009_a
smr2011-008-011_a
TYPICAL – GTI SHOWN
1. Air intake silencer outlet hose
RXT, GTX AND WAKE PRO MODELS 2. Loosen this clamp
5. Detach the breather hose from the air intake
3. Detach rear retaining strap retaining air intake silencer outlet hose.
silencer and fuel tank.
smr2011-008-006_a
smr2011-008-010_a
GTS, GTI, GTR, RXP AND WAKE 155 MODELS
1. Rear retaining strap TYPICAL – GTI SHOWN
1. Breather hose
2. Breather hose clamp
3. Air intake silencer outlet hose
6. From the front storage compartment, cut lock-

ing tie securing the wiring harness and the fuel
hose to air intake silencer.
4 smr2012-008
smr2011-008-007_a
smr2011-008-018_a
THROUGH FRONT STORAGE COMPARTMENT OPENING
1. Cut this locking tie 1. Remove upper section of air intake silencer
2. Front of air intake silencer
3. Remove the inlet tube (2 inlet tubes on 215
7. Detach the front retaining straps. and 260 engines), the baffle and the outlet hose
from the air intake silencer.
smr2011-008-008_a
1. Front retaining straps
8. Carefully pull the air intake silencer forward to

remove it from the vehicle.
smr2011-008-019_a
Air Intake Silencer Disassembly 1. Inlet tube

2. Baffle
1. Remove screws retaining both parts of air in- 3. Outlet hose
take silencer together.
Air Intake Silencer Assembly
Install the baffle into the outlet hose. Ensure
marks are aligned.
smr2011-008-017_a
smr2011-008-020_a
1. Retaining screws (5x) TYPICAL – GTI SHOWN
1. Baffle mark
2. Unlatch air intake silencer and remove the up- 2. Outlet hose mark
per section.
smr2012-008 5
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Air intake silencer screws Hand tight
Air Intake Silencer Installation

The installation is the reverse of the removal pro-
cedure. However, pay attention to the following.
Ensure wiring harness and fuel hoses are properly
smr2011-008-023_a route.
TYPICAL – GTX SHOWN Tighten all gear clamp as specified in exploded
1. Baffle mark
2. Outlet hose mark views.
Install the assembly in the air intake silencer.
AIR INTAKE TUBE
Air Intake Tube Removal
215 and 260 Engines
1. Open seat.
2. Detach the seat bridge from the body and move
it aside to make room.
3. Loosen clamps retaining the air intake tube.
smr2011-008-021_a

1. Baffle tab into air intake silencer slot
2. Air intake silencer rib into the outlet hose groove
Install the inlet tube. Ensure each end is properly

attach.
NOTE: On 215 and 260 engines, both inlet tubes
are attached as shown.
smr2012-008-004_a
1. Air intake tube

2. Retaining clamps
4. Detach the air intake tube from both hoses.

5. Open the front compartment storage cover and
remove the storage bin.
6. Slide the air intake tube over the air intake
silencer and through the front compartment
opening.
smr2011-008-022_a Air Intake Tube Installation

1. Retaining tabs The installation is the reverse of the removal pro-
Press both halves of the air intake silencer to- cedure. However pay attention to the following.
gether until all tabs are locked. Do not force, Make sure hoses are perfectly inserted into air in-
make sure all tubes are properly installed. take tube before tightening the clamps.
6 smr2012-008
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Retaining clamps 4 N•m (35 lbf•in)
smr2012-008 7
Subsection XX (AIR INTAKE SYSTEM(MODELS WITH SUSPENSION))
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM

(MODELS WITH SUSPENSION)
155 Engine
1.7 N•m
(15 lbf•in)
NEW
Blow-by
valve 6 N•m
(53 lbf•in)
10 N•m
(89 lbf•in)
NEW
6 N•m
(53 lbf•in)
4 N•m
(35 lbf•in)
NEW = Component must be replaced when removed.

smr2012-009-001_a
smr2012-009 1
260 Engine
1.7 Nm
(15 lbfin)
Blow-by
valve 6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
NEW 10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
smr2009-017-001_b
2 smr2012-009
PROCEDURES
AIR INTAKE SILENCER COVER
Air Intake Silencer Cover Removal
Remove the deck extension. Refer to BODY sub-
section for procedure.
Release retaining latches.
Loosen clamp securing blow-by hose to cover.
smr2009-017-005_a
1. Air intake silencer baffle
Air Intake Silencer Baffle Installation

Insert the end of the baffle into supercharger air
inlet hose. Using hose ears to retain hose, push
the baffle into supercharger air inlet hose.
smr2009-017-004_a
1. Retaining latches
2. Loosen this clamp
Remove the cover.
Air Intake Silencer Cover Installation smr2009-017-006_a

The installation is the reverse of the removal pro- 1. Baffle
cedure. However, pay attention to the following. 2. Air intake hose
Check the condition of the seal cover. Replace Install air intake silencer cover and all other re-
seal as required. moved parts.
Tighten blow-by hose clamp.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
AIR INTAKE TUBE
Blow-by hose clamp 1.7 N•m (15 lbf•in) Air Intake Tube Removal
Remove the AIR INTAKE SILENCER COVER and
Refer to BODY subsection for the proper installa- the AIR INTAKE SILENCER BAFFLE, see proce-
tion procedure. dure in this subsection.
Release the three rubber latches securing the air
AIR INTAKE SILENCER BAFFLE intake tube.
Air Intake Silencer Baffle Removal
Remove AIR INTAKE SILENCER COVER, see pro-
cedure in this subsection.
Pull the baffle out of the air intake silencer.
smr2012-009 3
smr2009-017-009_a
1. Air intake silencer

smr2009-017-007_a 2. Outlet hose groove
1. Rubber latches
Secure air intake silencer using NEW screws.
Remove air intake tube from vehicle.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Air Intake Tube Installation Air intake silencer screw 6 N•m (53 lbf•in)
cedure. Install all other removed parts.
AIR INTAKE SILENCER

Air Intake Silencer Removal
Remove:
– Deck extension, see BODY subsection for pro-
cedure
– Air intake cover
– Air intake tube.
Remove and discard both screws securing air in-
take silencer.
smr2009-017-008_a
1. Air intake silencer screws
Inside air intake silencer, squeeze the top of its

outlet hose and move hose out of air intake si-
lencer.
Air Intake Silencer Installation

Squeeze the top of the air intake silencer outlet
hose and move it in the air intake silencer.
Install the air intake silencer into hose groove.
4 smr2012-009
Subsection XX (INTAKE MANIFOLD)
INTAKE MANIFOLD
SERVICE PRODUCTS
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ............................................. 7
130 and 155 Engines (Models without suspension)
See
ELECTRONIC FUEL
9 Nm INJECTION (EFI)
(80 lbfin) Loctite
See
ELECTRONIC FUEL 243
INJECTION (EFI)
5.5 Nm
(49 lbfin)
Loctite Engine
243 oil
9 Nm NEW
Loctite (80 lbfin)
243
17 Nm 9 Nm
(150 lbfin) (80 lbfin)
5.5 Nm
See
(49 lbfin) ELECTRONIC FUEL
INJECTION (EFI)

smr2011-010-001_a
smr2012-010 1
215 Engine
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
See
ELECTRONIC FUEL
See INJECTION (EFI)
ELECTRONIC FUEL
INJECTION (EFI)
Loctite
243 Engine
5.5 Nm
(49 lbfin) oil
Loctite
243
NEW
9 Nm
Loctite (80 lbfin)
See
243 ELECTRONIC FUEL 17 Nm
INJECTION (EFI) (150 lbfin)
5.5 Nm
(49 lbfin)
Engine
oil NEW
See
INTERCOOLER
(215 ENGINE)
NEW
smr2011-010-003_a
2 smr2012-010
155 Engine (Models with suspension) and 260 Engines
See
ELECTRONIC FUEL
INJECTION (EFI) See
ELECTRONIC FUEL
INJECTION (EFI)
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
9 Nm
See (80 lbfin) Loctite
ELECTRONIC FUEL 243
INJECTION (EFI)
Engine
oil
5.5 Nm
(49 lbfin)
Loctite
243
NEW
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
Loctite
243
17 Nm
See (150 lbfin)
ELECTRONIC FUEL
5.5 Nm INJECTION (EFI)
(49 lbfin)

smr2011-010-002_a
smr2012-010 3
PROCEDURES
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Intake Manifold Removal
Models With Suspension
Remove the air intake silencer. Refer to AIR IN-
TAKE SYSTEM (MODELS WITH SUSPENSION)
subsection.
All Models
Disconnect the intake hose at intake manifold.
smr2009-018-002_a
1. Cut these locking ties to release harness
smr2009-018-020_a
TYPICAL – SUPERCHARGED ENGINE SHOWN

1. Intake hose
Move the coolant expansion tank aside to make smr2009-018-003_a
room. 1. Cut these locking ties to release harness
Remove the oil dipstick.

On some models, remove the engine cover.
Press tabs on both sides to remove the cover.
Disconnect fuel hose connector at fuel rail. Refer
to ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI) subsec-
tion.
Unplug the "B" connector from the ECM by pulling
the lock. Refer to CONNECTOR INFORMATION
subsection for procedure.
Cut all locking ties securing the wiring harnesses
to the intake manifold.
smr2009-018-004_a
1. Cut these locking ties to release harness
Unplug the ignition coil and fuel injector connec-

tors.
4 smr2012-010
smr2009-018-008_a
smr2009-018-005_a
1. Engine connector
1. Ignition coil connectors 2. ECM support
2. Fuel injector connectors
Unplug the knock sensor (KS), the magneto and
Unplug the manifold air pressure sensor (MAPS), the throttle actuator connectors.
the engine connector and the manifold air temper-
ature sensor (MATS).
smr2009-018-009_a
1. KS connector
smr2009-018-007_a
2. Magneto connector location
3. Throttle actuator connector
TYPICAL
1. MAPS connector
2. Engine connector location Detach the knock sensor (KS) and magneto con-
3. MATS connector nector housings from the ECM support. For
more details, refer to CONNECTOR INFORMA-
Detach the engine connector housing from the TION subsection.
ECM support.
smr2012-010 5
On 215 engine, disconnect both hoses at the

front end of intercooler.
Remove manifold retaining screws and push the
oil dipstick tube out of the manifold slot.
smr2009-018-010_a
1. KS connector
2. Magneto connector
3. ECM support
Unplug the oil pressure switch (OPS).
R1503motr59A
Lift intake manifold up to pull it out of the mount-

ing brackets.
smr2009-018-011_a
1. Oil pressure switch (OPS)
Unscrew ECM retaining screws and remove ECM

from its support.
R1503motr61A 1
1. Mounting brackets
Pull intake manifold out.
Intake Manifold Inspection

Check intake manifold for cracks, warping at
flanges or any other visible damage.
Check if intake manifold gaskets are cracked, brit-
tle or otherwise damaged.
Replace damaged parts as necessary.
smr2009-018-012_a
Intake Manifold Installation
1. ECM retaining screws
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
Pull the engine wiring harness with the ECM Pay attention to following details.
plugged away from intake manifold.
6 smr2012-010
Ensure that all gaskets are properly installed and

in good condition.
smr2009-018-013_a
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE - INTAKE MANIFOLD SCREWS
Ensure to properly route and secure wiring har-

ness with locking ties.
R1503motr62A 1
Install the ECM on its support.
INTAKE MANIFOLD
1. Gaskets ECM RETAINING SCREWS
First, position intake manifold on front mounting LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)
PRODUCT
bracket then push manifold toward engine to then (P/N 293 800 060)
proceed with rear mounting bracket. TORQUE 9 N•m (80 lbf•in)
When installing the intake manifold, lift up the oil
dipstick tube a little bit to fit in the slot of the man- Install all other removed parts.
ifold. 215 Engine
1 NOTE: Make sure the outlet hose of the inter-
cooler is installed in its holding device (located on
the oil filler tube) otherwise the hose will scuff on
the engine block.
R1503motr59B
1. Oil dipstick tube
Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060) on the

intake manifold screws. smr2006-012-002_a
Tighten intake manifold to specification using the 1. Intercooler outlet hose holding device
following sequence.
TIGHTENING TORQUE FLAME ARRESTER
Intake manifold screws 9 N•m (80 lbf•in) Flame Arrester Location
The flame arrester is integrated in the intake man-
ifold.
smr2012-010 7
smr2009-018-014_a
1. Flame arrester
Flame Arrester Inspection

The flame arrester in the intake manifold is main-
tenance free.
Flame Arrester Replacement

NOTE: The flame arrester can not be removed
from the intake manifold.
Replace intake manifold if necessary. Refer to IN-
TAKE MANIFOLD in this subsection.
8 smr2012-010
Subsection XX (SUPERCHARGER (215 AND 260 ENGINES))
SUPERCHARGER
(215 AND 260 ENGINES)
SERVICE TOOLS
4-PIN SOCKET............................................................................... 529 035 948 ....................................... 8, 11
BEARING SUPPORT/PUSHER ...................................................... 529 035 950 ..................................... 10–11
CAMSHAFT LOCKING TOOL........................................................ 529 035 839 ............................................. 3
NEEDLE BEARING PUSHER......................................................... 529 036 237 ........................................... 13
SUPERCHARGER GEAR HOLDER................................................ 529 036 025 ............................................. 4
SUPERCHARGER RETAINING KEY............................................... 529 036 027 ................................... 7–8, 14
SUPPORT PLATE........................................................................... 529 035 947 ............................. 4, 7, 10–11
TORX ADAPTER............................................................................ 529 035 938 ....................................... 6, 15
SERVICE PRODUCTS
ISOFLEX GREASE TOPAS NB 52 ................................................. 293 550 021 ........................................... 12
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ......................... 11–12, 14–15
LOCTITE 5910 ............................................................................... 293 800 081 ........................................... 14
SUPER LUBE GREASE.................................................................. 293 550 030 ........................................... 15
smr2013-004 1
Loctite 243
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
Loctite
243
NEW
NEW
40 Nm
29 Nm (30 lbfft)
(21 lbfft) NEW
(Left-hand
Loctite threads)
5910
Engine oil
Engine
Loctite oil
243
Loctite
243 9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
Engine
oil
9 Nm Isoflex grease
(80 lbfin) Topas NB 52
(See the grease location table
Loctite in SUPERCHARGER ASSEMBLY)
243
Super
Lube Engine
grease oil
NEW
29 Nm
(21 lbfft)
smr2010-019-001_c
2 smr2013-004
INSPECTION SUPERCHARGER CLUTCH

SLIPPING MOMENT
SUPERCHARGER INLET (ON ENGINE)
CLEANLINESS To access supercharger. Refer to SUPER-
NOTE: A lower than usual maximum RPM at full CHARGER ACCESS in this subsection.
throttle might be caused by a dirty supercharger Remove cylinder head cover, refer to CYLINDER
inlet. HEAD subsection.
To access supercharger. Refer to SUPER- Remove spark plugs.
CHARGER ACCESS in this subsection.
Turn engine by rotating the supercharger nut
Visually inspect supercharger inlet side for oil, salt counterclockwise until the position lines on oil
or any other deposits. separator cover are lined up as shown in the
following illustration.
smr2009-025-006_a
1. Position lines
Lock camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation while

checking slipping moment of supercharger.
smr2006-012-010_a REQUIRED TOOL
1. Dirt here
CAMSHAFT LOCKING TOOL
If dirt is found, proceed as follows. (P/N 529 035 839)
1. Remove supercharger and perform the clutch
slipping moment test. Inspect bearings and
friction clutch. Replace bearings and clutch
components as necessary.
2. Separate supercharger housing.
NOTE: Since supercharger is disassembled, it is
recommended to completely inspect it.
3. Clean internal housing and turbine using a brush
and cleaning solvent to get rid of oil deposits.
4. Blow dry with compressed air.
NOTICE Do not let turbine spin when using
compressed air. smr2009-025-007_b
5. Complete usual assembly procedures as de- 1. Camshaft locking tool

scribed in this subsection. Check slipping moment counterclockwise by us-
ing a torque wrench with actual torque viewer. A
mirror is useful to see the viewer.
smr2013-004 3
smr2009-020-004_a
1. Torque wrench
smr2006-074-101
NOTE: Before checking the supercharger slipping Check slipping moment counterclockwise by us-
moment on a new or rebuilt supercharger, it is rec- ing a torque wrench with a viewer.
ommended to turn the clutch for a minimum of 3
complete revolutions. This will dissipate grease or
oil on the friction shims for a precise reading.
Supercharger should start to turn at a torque
within the specified values.
SLIPPING MOMENT (NEW SUPERCHARGER)
9 N•m to 14 N•m (80 lbf•in to 124 lbf•in)
SLIPPING MOMENT
(BREAK-IN SUPERCHARGER)
If the torque is not within specifications, repair smr2006-074-100_a

supercharger clutch. Verify supercharger clutch 1. Torque wrench
components as per SUPERCHARGER INSPEC- 2. Gear holder
TION in this subsection.
NOTE: Before checking the supercharger slipping
moment on a new or rebuilt supercharger, it is rec-
SUPERCHARGER CLUTCH ommended to turn the clutch for a minimum of 3
SLIPPING MOMENT complete revolutions. This will dissipate grease or
(BENCH TEST) oil on the friction shims for a proper reading.
Mount supercharger on support plate. Supercharger should start to turn at a torque
within the specified values.
Hold supercharger gear with supercharger gear
holder. SLIPPING MOMENT (NEW SUPERCHARGER)
REQUIRED TOOLS 9 N•m to 14 N•m (80 lbf•in to 124 lbf•in)
SUPPORT PLATE SLIPPING MOMENT (BREAK-IN

(P/N 529 035 947) SUPERCHARGER)
SUPERCHARGER GEAR HOLDER
(P/N 529 036 025)
If the torque is not within specification, repair
supercharger clutch. Verify supercharger clutch
components as per SUPERCHARGER INSPEC-
TION in this subsection.
4 smr2013-004
TROUBLESHOOTING
The following is provided to help in diagnosing the
probable source of troubles. It is a guideline and
it should not be assumed to list all possible prob-
lems.
Always check for fault codes. If a fault code is de-
tected, service the fault code first. Refer to DIAG-
NOSTIC AND FAULT CODES subsection.
ENGINE WILL NOT START (ENGINE DOES smr2009-020-010_a
NOT TURN OVER) 1. Air intake silencer support
1. Supercharger seized or obstructed

- Inspect and repair supercharger.
ENGINE LACKS ACCELERATION OR

POWER (DOES NOT REACH MAXIMUM
RPM)
1. Supercharger inlet is dirty
- Check and clean supercharger inlet.
- Check engine oil. Siphon excess of oil.
2. Supercharger slipping clutch defective
- Check slipping clutch moment. smr2009-020-011_a
- Repair supercharger if out of specification. MANY PARTS REMOVED FOR CLARITY PURPOSE
1. Support screws
PROCEDURES Supercharger Removal

Remove air inlet and outlet hoses from super-
SUPERCHARGER charger.
Supercharger Access
On models with suspension, remove the moving
deck. Refer to BODY (RXT, GTX AND WAKE PRO)
subsection for proper procedure.
Remove the air intake silencer. Refer to the ap-
propriate subsection according to model:
– AIR INTAKE SYSTEM (MODELS WITHOUT
SUSPENSION)
– AIR INTAKE SYSTEM (MODELS WITH SUS-
PENSION).
smr2009-020-012_a
Remove the air intake silencer support.
1. Air inlet hose
2. Hose clamp
smr2013-004 5
Remove retaining screws and pull out the super-

charger.
smr2009-020-013_a
1. Air outlet hose

2. Hose clamp
Unscrew blow-by valve screws and move it aside

to make room.
smr2009-020-005_a
1. Retaining screws
2. Upper retaining screw (hidden behind the supercharger)
NOTE: Use the following tool to remove the up-

per retaining screw.
REQUIRED TOOL
TORX ADAPTER
(P/N 529 035 938)
smr2008-012-010_a
1. Blow-by valve
2. Supercharger
Using a marker, trace a mark on rubber adapter

and exhaust pipe.
R1503motr250A
1. Upper retaining screw
Supercharger Disassembly
NOTICE Be scrupulous when working on
supercharger parts. Supercharger rotation
smr2008-012-011_a reaches 45 000 RPM. Any modification, im-
1. Rubber adapter proper repair, assembly or damage on the
2. Exhaust pipe
parts, may result in damage of the super-
Loosen clamp securing rubber adapter to exhaust charger. Strictly follow the described proce-
pipe. dures.
Detach muffler strap. 1. Secure the supercharger on its support plate.
Move muffler back (± 5 cm (2 in)).
6 smr2013-004
REQUIRED TOOL
SUPPORT PLATE
(P/N 529 035 947)
2. Take apart supercharger housing.
1 2 1
smr2009-020-006_a
1. Cap nut (left-hand thread)
4. Remove washer, turbine, O-ring and step collar

from supercharger shaft.
F00B28A 3 1 1
1. Retaining screws
2. Housing half (intake side)
3. Housing half (engine side)
smr2009-020-007_a
1. Washer
2. Turbine
3. O-ring
4. Step collar
5. Loosen nut on supercharger shaft engine side

(turn counterclockwise).
REQUIRED TOOL
F00B29A SUPERCHARGER RETAINING KEY

(P/N 529 036 027)
PLASTIC HAMMER
3. Loosen cap nut (turn clockwise) on super-

charger shaft turbine side.
REQUIRED TOOL
SUPERCHARGER RETAINING KEY

(P/N 529 036 027)
smr2013-004 7
2 1
F00B2CA
1. Supercharger shaft
8. Press out ball bearing from supercharger shaft

F00B2BA 1 by using a press.
1. Nut
2. Retaining key REQUIRED TOOL
6. Remove L-ring, spring washers, lock washer, SUPERCHARGER RETAINING KEY

drive gear and needle pins by turning the super- (P/N 529 036 027)
charger upside down. Discard all needle pins.
1
smr2006-012-008_a
1. Nut
2. L-ring
3. Spring washers (5x)
4. Lock washer F00B2DA 2 3
5. Friction shims
6. Drive gear 1. Supercharger shaft
7. Needle pins (discard all) 2. Ball bearing
3. Retaining key
7. Carefully push out supercharger shaft towards
engine side by using a press. 9. Remove retaining disc with seal from housing
half (engine side).
REQUIRED TOOL
4-PIN SOCKET
(P/N 529 035 948)
NOTE: It may be necessary to heat the housing

with a heat gun to release the retaining disc.
8 smr2013-004
A B
C
R1503motr360A
A. Driven plate journal depth

B. Drive gear thickness
C. Lock washer thickness
F00B2AA 1
1. 4-pin socket
DRIVEN PLATE JOURNAL DEPTH
14.460 mm to 14.500 mm
10. Discard the oil seal. NEW
(.5693 in to .5709 in)
11. Remove and discard ball bearing from super- SERVICE LIMIT 14.600 mm (.5748 in)
charger housing half (engine side) by using a
press and a suitable bearing pusher. DRIVE GEAR THICKNESS
11.000 mm to 11.050 mm
NEW
2 (.4331 in to .435 in)
SERVICE LIMIT 10.900 mm (.4291 in)
LOCK WASHER THICKNESS

1 NEW
4.050 mm to 4.150 mm
(.1594 in to .1634 in)
R1503motr236A Spring Washer

1. Supercharger housing half (engine side) Put spring washer package together as it is as-
2. Bearing pusher
sembled on the supercharger shaft. Measure the
Supercharger Inspection height of the unloaded spring washer package.
Supercharger Clutch Components and Gear

Check the wear limit on drive gear, lock washer
and driven plate on supercharger shaft. Check
drive gear for cracks.
NOTE: If parts are worn out or damaged, repair
supercharger only by using supercharger repair
kit.
R1503motr248A A
A. Spring washer package height
smr2013-004 9
SPRING WASHER PACKAGE HEIGHT 1 4

10.7 mm to 10.9 mm
NEW
(.4213 in to .4291 in)
Supercharger Assembly
NOTICE Every time when supercharger shaft
has been removed, both ball bearings have to
be replaced.
NOTICE Both ball bearings have to be in-
stalled with cages facing turbine side.
1. Install ball bearing on supercharger shaft. Hold
bearing using the following tool.
1.1 Apply enough engine oil on NEW ball bear- F00B2FA 2 3
ing.
1. Supercharger shaft
1.2 Press the bearing. Use the following tool 2. Ball bearing
3. Bearing support plate
to hold the bearing. 4. Protrusion of support plate on this side (underneath inner race)
REQUIRED TOOL 2. Press in the ball bearing in supercharger hous-

ing half (engine side).
SUPPORT PLATE
(P/N 529 035 947) 2.1 Apply enough engine oil on NEW ball bear-
ing.
NOTICE Ensure to position ball bearing 2.2 Press the bearing using the following tool.
against protrusion of support plate for the in- REQUIRED TOOL
stallation. This way, the installation pressure
will be applied to the inner race and will not be BEARING SUPPORT/PUSHER
transmitted to the bearing balls which would (P/N 529 035 950)
otherwise shorten the bearing life.
NOTICE To install ball bearings and super- 1
charger shaft always use a press, never use
any beating force like a hammer.
F00B2EA
1. Bearing support/pusher
3. Secure the supercharger housing plate (engine

side) in a vice.
10 smr2013-004
REQUIRED TOOL 2 3
SUPPORT PLATE
(P/N 529 035 947)
4. Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060) on

retaining disc. If a new retaining disc is used,
the threads are coated with a self-locking prod-
uct.
5. Install the retaining disc in supercharger hous-
ing half. F00B2GA 1
1. Support plate
2. Bearing support/pusher
1 2 3. Protrusion here
NOTICE Before pressing in the super-

charger shaft, be sure to properly support
the inner race of ball bearing in super-
charger housing half with the recom-
mended tool. This way, the installation
pressure will be applied to the inner race
and will not be transmitted to the bearing
balls which would otherwise shorten the
bearing life.
6.2 Apply heat outside of the housing with a
heat gun to expand its diameter prior to in-
F00B2IA serting the shaft. Ensure there is no O-ring
1. Retaining disc on the housing half prior to heating.
2. 4-pin socket
6.3 Apply engine oil on supercharger shaft.
REQUIRED TOOL Press shaft with thrust washer and dis-
tance sleeve together in supercharger
4-PIN SOCKET housing half.
(P/N 529 035 948)
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Retaining disc 40 N•m (30 lbf•ft)
6. Press supercharger shaft in housing half (en-

gine side).
6.1 Properly support bearing using the follow-
ing tools under supercharger housing half.
REQUIRED TOOLS
SUPPORT PLATE
(P/N 529 035 947)
BEARING smr2006-012-032_a
SUPPORT/PUSHER 1. Compressor shaft
(P/N 529 035 950) 2. Ball bearing
3. Supercharger housing half
4. Thrust washer
5. Distance sleeve
smr2013-004 11
2 1
smr2009-020-007_b
1. Step collar
2. O-ring
F00B2HA 3. Turbine
4. Washer
1. Supercharger shaft 5. Cap nut
2. Distance sleeve
Complete installation of supercharger shaft, en-
7. Apply engine oil on seal and push into retaining gine side as follows:
disc by hand.
NOTE: Always use a NEW oil seal when assem- NOTICE It is of the utmost importance that
bling the supercharger. all parts be absolutely clean. The compressor
shaft spins at up to 45 000 RPM and any debris
could cause a failure.
1
9. Prepare the following parts for assembly by ap-
plying ISOFLEX GREASE TOPAS NB 52 (P/N 293
550 021) as shown in the next illustrations.
NOTICE No other grease can be used, other-
wise damage to needle bearing will occur.
R1503motr242A
1. Oil seal
8. Install step collar, O-ring, turbine and washer on

supercharger shaft. Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)
(P/N 293 800 060) on cap nut and temporary fin-
ger tight cap nut.
NOTE: The cap nut on the supercharger shaft has
a left-handed thread. The Loctite has to be applied
in a small dose into the nut.
12 smr2013-004
REQUIRED TOOL
Shaft (needle bearing NEEDLE BEARING

seat and collar) PUSHER
(P/N 529 036 237)
Drive gear (inner

diameter)
Friction shims (inner

diameter and both sides)
Smr2012-011-005_a
1. Drive gear
2. Outer plastic cage
3. Needle bearing pusher
Lock washer (inner
splines and friction shim 12.3 Remove needle bearing pusher and dis-
thrust surface) card outer plastic cage.
12.4 Check if all 40 needle pins are in place.
10. Put the first friction shim on a workbench.

NOTICE Manipulate friction shims with care,
those parts are sensitive.
11. Put the drive gear on the friction shim.
12. Install the NEW needle bearing in drive gear.
12.1 Position the needle bearing on the drive
gear.
Smr2012-011-007_a
1. Drive gear
2. 40 needle pins
3. Inner plastic cage
4. Needle bearing pusher
5. Outer plastic cage
13. Place the second friction shim on the drive

gear.
14. Install the package consisting of friction shim,
drive gear with needle bearing and friction
shim on the hub side of the compressor
shaft.
Smr2012-011-003_a
1. Needle bearing NOTE: The inner plastic cage is pushed out upon
2. Drive gear installation on compressor shaft.
3. Friction shim
12.2 Push the needle pins with inner plastic

cage into the drive gear.
smr2013-004 13
smr2006-012-008_a
1. Nut
Smr2012-011-009_a
2. L-ring
1. Package of friction shims, drive gear and needle bearing 3. Spring washers
2. Inner plastic cage 4. Lock washer
5. Friction shims
15. Discard the inner plastic cage and install the 6. Drive gear
7. Needle bearing
lock washer.
16. Apply engine oil to the spring washers. NOTE: The L-ring will preload the spring washers.
17. Position the spring washers as per illustration. 20. Hold the lock washer of the supercharger
shaft (engine side) and tighten the cap nut.
NOTICE When installing the spring washers,
REQUIRED TOOL
take care of the exact installation direction of
the washers. SUPERCHARGER RETAINING KEY
(P/N 529 036 027)
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Cap nut 29 N•m (21 lbf•ft)
21. Apply LOCTITE 5910 (P/N 293 800 081) on super-

charger housing sealing surface.
1
smr2006-012-009_a
1. Spring washers
18. Install the L-ring on the compressor shaft.

the hexagonal nut threads.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Hexagonal nut 29 N•m (21 lbf•ft)
R1503motr246A
1. Apply Loctite 5910 on sealing surface
22. Assemble supercharger housing halves.

22.1 Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800
060) on retaining screws.
22.2 Tighten supercharger housing halves
screws according to the following se-
quence.
14 smr2013-004
TIGHTENING TORQUE TIGHTENING TORQUE

Supercharger housing Supercharger retaining
9 N•m (80 lbf•in) 9 N•m (80 lbf•in)
halves screws screws
NOTE: For the upper retaining screw the follow-

4 6 ing tool must be used mounted 90° to torque
wrench.
8
REQUIRED TOOL
2
TORX ADAPTER
1 (P/N 529 035 938)
5 3
R1503motr227B
A
SUPERCHARGER TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
23. Verify the clutch slipping moment. Refer to

SUPERCHARGER CLUTCH SLIPPING MO-
F00B1UA 1
MENT (BENCH TEST) in this subsection.
1. Torx adapter perpendicular to torque wrench
Supercharger Installation A. 90°
1. Grease sealing surface between supercharger NOTICE Not installing the tool as shown will
and PTO housing with SUPER LUBE GREASE change the torque applied to the screw.
(P/N 293 550 030).
NOTE: Ensure O-rings are installed. 5. After complete installation of the supercharger,
the slipping moment has to be rechecked.
Refer to SUPERCHARGER CLUTCH SLIPPING
MOMENT (ON ENGINE) at the beginning of
this subsection.
R1503motr247A 1
1. Super Lube grease
2. Install supercharger on PTO housing.

the retaining screws.
4. Tighten supercharger retaining screws to spec-
ifications.
smr2013-004 15
Subsection XX (INTERCOOLER (215 ENGINE))
INTERCOOLER (215 ENGINE)

SERVICE TOOLS
VACUUM/PRESSURE PUMP ........................................................ 529 021 800 ........................................... 2
See INTAKE MANIFOLD
NEW
Engine oil
NEW
smr2011-045-001_a
smr2013-020 1
PROCEDURES If there is a pressure drop, first spray hoses and

adapters with a soapy solution to ensure they are
INTERCOOLER not leaking.
Otherwise, remove intercooler from manifold to
Intercooler Leak Test spray soapy water on it. If air bubbles are present,
Perform intercooler leak test when engine looses replace the intercooler. Refer to procedures fur-
performance, when there is white exhaust smoke ther in this subsection.
or when temperature in exhaust system is to high. Properly reinstall removed parts.
WARNING Make sure the intercooler outlet hose is installed
in the holding device (located on the oil filler tube)
Let engine cool down prior to perform leak otherwise the hose will scuff on the engine block.
test. Direct contact with hot engine may re-
sult in skin burn.
NOTE: The inspection can be done while inter-

cooler remains installed in intake manifold.
Remove:
– Outlet hose from exhaust manifold
– Inlet hose from intercooler.
smr2006-012-002_a
1. Intercooler outlet hose holding device
Intercooler Removal
Remove intake manifold. Refer to INTAKE MAN-
IFOLD subsection.
Remove collar from intercooler.
smr2006-012-007_a
INTERCOOLER PULLED OUT FOR CLARITY PURPOSE ONLY

1. Intercooler
2. Outlet hose
3. Inlet nipple
Plug intercooler inlet nipple.

Install an adapter on the outlet hose to connect a
pressure pump.
REQUIRED TOOL
VACUUM/PRESSURE PUMP
(P/N 529 021 800)
F19D0DB 1 2
Pressurize the intercooler as follows:
TYPICAL
PRESSURE TEST 1. Intercooler
2. Collar
69 kPa (10 PSI) for 10 minutes minimum
Carefully pull intercooler out of intake manifold.
2 smr2013-020
1 3
2
F19D0FA
1. Clamp
2. Plastic block between nipples
3. Plastic block
Reinstall collar.
Align recess of collar with ribs on intake manifold.
smr2006-012-007_b
1. Intercooler
2. Profile ring
3. Collar
Intercooler Installation
Installation is essentially the reverse of removal
procedures. However pay particular attention to
the following.
Ensure profile rings are properly installed on inter-
cooler and apply engine oil on them to ease instal-
lation.
While properly aligning the inner end of intercooler
in intake manifold, gently push intercooler until it
bottoms.
smr2013-020-002_a
Align mark on intercooler with middle rib of the 1. Collar

intake manifold. 2. Recess
3. Ribs
Reinstall intake manifold.
smr2013-020-001_a
1. Middle rib
2. Intake manifold
3. Mark on intercooler
NOTE: If intercooler is hard to push in, a clamp

can be used to press intercooler in.
smr2013-020 3
INTERCOOLER (260 ENGINE)

SERVICE TOOLS
LARGE HOSE PINCHER................................................................ 529 032 500 ........................................... 4
smr2012-013 1
4 N•m
(35 lbf•in)
4 N•m
(35 lbf•in)
8 N•m
(71 lbf•in)
1.7 N•m
(15 lbf•in)
NEW
8 N•m
(71 lbf•in)
1.7 N•m 1.7 N•m

(15 lbf•in) (15 lbf•in)
NEW 4.5 N•m

(40 lbf•in)
GTX LTD
Only
NEW NEW
1.7 N•m
(15 lbf•in)
1.7 N•m
(15 lbf•in)
smr2013-005-100_a
2 smr2012-013
MAINTENANCE
INTERCOOLER FLUSHING
Flushing the intercooler with fresh water is essen-
tial to neutralize corroding effects of salt or other
chemical products present in water. It will help to
clean up sand, salt, shells or other particles in in-
tercooler.
NOTE: Intercooler is flushed with the exhaust
system, as they are on the same circuit. smr2009-019-008_a
Exhaust system and intercooler should be flushed 1. Intercooler water outlet fitting
2. Intercooler water inlet fitting
each time:
– Watercraft is used in salt water and is not ex- 3. Let water soak in intercooler for a couple of
pected to be used further the same day. hours. Occasionally, shake the intercooler to
– Watercraft is used in foul water. soak off deposits.
– Watercraft is stored for any extended time. 4. Rinse the intercooler using a garden hose in-
stalled on water outlet.
Refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM subsection for flush-
ing procedure. 5. Let water flow out of intercooler a few minutes
to evacuate internal deposits.
NOTICE Failure to flush the system, when
6. Check water flow.
necessary, will severely damage engine inter-
cooler and/or exhaust system. WATER FLOW
LOW OR 1. Repeat cleaning procedure.

PROCEDURES ERRATIC 2. Replace the intercooler.
INTERCOOLER HIGH AND
Intercooler is not clogged.
REGULAR
WARNING
Let engine cool down prior to work on or near
intercooler.
Intercooler Cleaning
If temperature in intake manifold is too high or if
engine is down in performance, intercooler may
require to be cleaned.
The exhaust system should be flushed first, as it
may unclogged the intercooler. If not, then pro-
ceed with the intercooler cleaning procedure as smr2009-019-009_a
detailed here. 1. Garden hose installed on water outlet

2. High and regular water flow
NOTE: The exhaust temperature will decrease
when the intercooler is clogged because more 7. Perform a leak test before installing the inter-
water is rerouted through the exhaust system. cooler in the watercraft.
To clean the intercooler, do the following: Intercooler Leak Test
NOTICE Never try to clean the intercooler Block intercooler water outlet hose.
with chemical products. Only use fresh water.
Chemical products will permanently damage
the internal parts of intercooler.
1. Remove the intercooler from the watercraft.
See procedure further in this subsection.
2. Pour fresh water into the water outlet fitting.
smr2012-013 3
REQUIRED TOOL Intercooler Access

RXT and GTX with Suspension
LARGE HOSE PINCHER
(P/N 529 032 500) Open the boarding platform and remove both stor-
age baskets.
RXT Without Suspension
Open the seat and remove both rear access pan-
els.
RXP-X Series
Remove the seat and the rear handle.
Detach exhaust hose from muffler.
Intercooler Removal
Disconnect the intercooler water hoses.
smr2013-005-002_a
MANY PARTS REMOVED FOR CLARITY PURPOSE

1. Intercooler
2. Intercooler water outlet hose
3. Intercooler water inlet hose
Unplug the intercooler water inlet hose from the

intercooler.
Install the VACUUM/PRESSURE PUMP (P/N 529 021
800) on intercooler water inlet fitting.
smr2013-005-002_a
MANY PARTS REMOVED FOR CLARITY PURPOSE

1. Intercooler
2. Intercooler water outlet hose
3. Intercooler water inlet hose
Disconnect both air hoses.
529021800
Pressurize the intercooler.

PRESSURE TEST
69 kPa (10 PSI) for 10 minutes minimum
If there is a pressure drop, first spray tool, hoses

and adapters with a soapy water solution to en-
sure they are not leaking. If they are not leaking,
replace the intercooler.
smr2013-005-002_b
1. Intercooler air inlet hose

2. Intercooler air outlet hose
4 smr2012-013
Disconnect vent hose. INTERCOOLER ATTACHMENTS

Front Attachment Replacement
Remove the INTERCOOLER, see procedure in
this subsection.
iS Models
Detach iS module from its support and move the
module aside to make room.
smr2013-005-001_a
1. Vent hose
Detach both intercooler straps.

smr2009-019-005_a
FIXED DECK REMOVED FOR CLARITY PURPOSE

1. iS module
2. Retaining latch
Cut locking ties securing wiring harnesses to iS

module support and front attachment.
smr2013-005-003_a
1. Intercooler straps
smr2009-019-006_a
RXP Model
1. Cut these locking ties
Pull intercooler out of vehicle.
All Models
All Models Except RXP
Cut locking ties securing the iBR harness.
Remove the iBR actuator. Refer to iBR AND VTS
subsection. Remove screw retaining the intercooler attach-
ment.
Remove the intercooler from vehicle by the LH
opening.
Intercooler Installation
cedure.
NOTE: Ensure hoses are routed correctly and
locking ties are positioned at proper locations.
smr2012-013 5
smr2012-013-002_a
smr2012-013-001_a 1. Retaining screw

1. Locking tie retaining the iBR harness 2. Washer
2. Intercooler attachment retaining screw 3. LH rear attachment
When reinstalling, tighten front attachment Install a new attachment using a NEW screw.
screws to specification. Tighten rear attachment screw to specification.
TIGHTENING TORQUE TIGHTENING TORQUE
Front attachment screw 8 N•m (71 lbf•in) Rear attachment screw 8 N•m (71 lbf•in)
Install all other removed parts. Install all other removed parts.
Rear Attachment Replacement
Remove the intercooler, see procedure in this sub-
section.
Remove darts and rubber pad.
smr2009-019-050_a
THROUGH THE LH REAR OPENING

1. Dart
2. Rubber pad
Remove and discard screw securing the attach-

ment to the hull.
6 smr2012-013
Subsection XX (EXHAUST SYSTEM)
EXHAUST SYSTEM
SERVICE TOOLS
FLUSHING CONNECTOR ADAPTER ............................................ 295 500 473 ........................................... 8
SERVICE PRODUCTS
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ........................................... 14
smr2012-014 1
11 Nm
(97 lbfin) 16 Nm
(142 lbfin)
9 Nm
(80 lbfin) Loctite 567
(pipe sealant)
Loctite 243
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
7.5 Nm
(66 lbfin)
8 Nm
(71 lbfin) 4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
For testing and replacement,

see ELECTRONIC FUEL
INJECTION (EFI)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
28 Nm
(21 lbfft)
12 Nm
(106 lbfin)
smr2012-014-001_a
2 smr2012-014
1.7 Nm
(15 lbfin)
NEW
1.7 Nm
(15 lbfin)

smr2011-013-100_a
smr2012-014 3
RXT, GTX and WAKE PRO Series (215 and 260 Engines)
215 Engine NEW
1.7 Nm
(15 lbfin)
NEW
1.7 Nm
(15 lbfin)
1.7 Nm
(15 lbfin)
260 Engine
1.7 Nm
(15 lbfin)
NEW
1.7 Nm
(15 lbfin)
smr2011-013-002_b
4 smr2012-014
GTI, GTS, GTX and WAKE Series (130 and 155 Engines)
130 Engine
155 Engine (except GTX series)
1.7 Nm
(15 lbfin)
1.7 Nm
1.7 Nm (15 lbfin)
(15 lbfin)
1.7 Nm
155 Engine (GTX series) (15 lbfin)
smr2011-013-003_b
smr2012-014 5
GTR and RXP-X Series
GTR Series 1.7 N•m

(15 lbf•in)
1.7 N•m
(15 lbf•in)
1.7 N•m
(15 lbf•in)
1.7 N•m
(15 lbf•in)
NEW 1.7 N•m

(15 lbf•in)
1.7 N•m
(15 lbf•in)
RXP-X Series
NEW
1.7 N•m
(15 lbf•in)
NEW
1.7 N•m
(15 lbf•in)

smr2012-014-025_a
6 smr2012-014
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The exhaust system is cooled by water provided
by a pressurized area in the jet pump (open loop
system).
The same water is also used to cool the in-
tercooler (supercharged engines) and the iBR
actuator (models with iBR).
smr2008-013-008_a
Water exits exhaust pipe water jacket through

holes to inject water in muffler and resonator.
smr2008-013-007_a
215 ENGINE
1. Intercooler
2. Intercooler water inlet
3. Intercooler water outlet
4. Exhaust manifold water inlet
5. Exhaust manifold smr2008-013-009_a
6. Exhaust manifold water outlet (to pump support) 1. Water packet holes
7. Exhaust manifold water outlet (to exhaust pipe and muffler)
Water is evacuated through the exhaust outlet in
transom area.
Exhaust System Technical

Specifications
Total Loss Cooling System
TYPE
(TLCS)
Flow from jet pump
WATER FLOW
(no water pump)
TEMPERATURE Calibrated outlet fittings
CONTROL (no thermostat)
smr2009-021-002_a
130, 155 AND 260 ENGINES SYSTEM

1. Exhaust manifold water inlet Self-bleed type
2. Exhaust manifold
BLEEDING
3. Exhaust manifold water outlet (to pump support)
4. Exhaust manifold water outlet (to exhaust pipe and muffler) SYSTEM
Self-drain type
DRAINING
Water from the exhaust manifold jacket is di-
rected to the exhaust pipe via 2 hoses.
MAINTENANCE
EXHAUST SYSTEM FLUSHING
Flushing the exhaust system with fresh water is
essential to neutralize corroding effects of salt or
other chemical products present in water. It will
smr2012-014 7
help to clean up sand, salt, shells or other parti-

cles in water jackets (exhaust system, intercooler
(supercharged engines) and hoses).
Exhaust system flushing should be performed
when the watercraft is not expected to be used
further the same day or when the watercraft is
stored for any extended time. F00E05A 1 2
NOTICE Failure to flush the system, when 1. Quick connect adapter
necessary, will severely damage intercooler 2. Flushing connector adapter
(supercharged engines) and exhaust system. To flush the exhaust system, start the engine then
Make sure engine operates during entire pro- immediately open the water tap.
cedure.
NOTICE Always start the engine before
WARNING opening the water tap. Open water tap im-
Perform these operations in a well ventilated mediately after engine is started to prevent
area. Certain components in the engine overheating. Never run engine without sup-
compartment may be very hot. Direct con- plying water to the exhaust system when
tact may result in skin burn. Do not touch watercraft is out of water.
any electrical part or jet pump area when
engine is running. Run the engine about 20 seconds at a fast idle
between 4000 - 5000 RPM.
WARNING NOTICE Never run engine longer than 2 min-
When operating the engine while the water- utes. Drive line seal has no cooling when wa-
craft is out of the water, the heat exchanger tercraft is out of water.
in the ride plate may become very hot. Avoid Ensure water flows out of jet pump while flushing.
any contact with ride plate as burns may oc-
cur. Close the water tap, then stop the engine.
NOTICE Always close the water tap before
Connect a garden hose to connector located at the stopping the engine.
rear of watercraft. Do not open water tap yet.
Disconnect the garden hose.
NOTICE Remove flushing connector adapter
after operation (if used).
PROCEDURES
MUFFLER
CAUTION Certain components in the
engine compartment may be very hot. Let
exhaust system cool down prior to removing
smr2009-021-004_a
parts.
1. Water inlet connector
Muffler Access
NOTE: The following tool is recommended when Models With Suspension
a quick connect adapter is used to ease garden
hose installation. Open seat.
RECOMMENDED TOOL
Remove moving deck and deck extension. Refer
to BODY (RXT, GTX AND WAKE PRO SERIES)
FLUSHING CONNECTOR subsection.
ADAPTER (P/N 295 500 473) Remove the air intake silencer. Refer to AIR IN-
TAKE SILENCER (MODELS WITH SUSPENSION)
subsection.
8 smr2012-014

Remove or open seat.
Muffler Removal
1. Cut locking tie securing water outlet hose (ex-
haust system) and blow-by hose.
2. Disconnect the water outlet hose from the ex-
haust manifold.
3. Gently disconnect the hose from blow-by valve.
smr2009-016-004_a
TYPICAL
1. EGTS sensor
2. Exhaust hose
6. Disconnect the exhaust hose from muffler.
smr2009-016-003_a
TYPICAL
2. Water outlet hose (exhaust system)
3. Blow-by hose
4. Blow-by valve
5. Exhaust manifold smr2009-016-005_a
TYPICAL
4. Unscrew exhaust clamp. 1. Exhaust hose clamp
NOTICE Do not use pneumatic or electrical 7. Detach retaining strap.

tools as seizure may occur.
smr2009-016-006_a
smr2009-016-007_a
TYPICAL
TYPICAL 1. Muffler retaining strap
1. Exhaust clamp
5. Unplug the exhaust gas temperature sensor 8. Remove the muffler.

(EGTS). – On models with suspension, remove the
LH rear storage basket then move the muf-
fler backwards and slide it through the rear
opening.
– On models without suspension, move the
muffler back then slide it forward through the
deck opening.
smr2012-014 9
Muffler Inspection
Check muffler for:
– Cracks
– Corrosion
– Other damages.
Check if exhaust hose is:
– Brittle
– Hard
– Cracked
– Otherwise damaged. smr2008-013-027_a
Replace any defective part. TYPICAL

1. Engine lifting ring
2. Spacer (in this case a bolt)
Muffler Installation 3. Exhaust pipe fitting
With a new muffler, install the EGTS sensor. Re-
Confirm that the exhaust pipe mark is aligned with
fer to ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI) sub-
the mark on the exhaust manifold.
section.
Open muffler adjusters by sliding adjuster blocks.
smr2008-013-025_a
1. Exhaust manifold mark

2. Exhaust pipe mark
Tighten exhaust clamp to specification.

smr2008-013-026_a
TIGHTENING TORQUE
TYPICAL – RUBBER PAD REMOVED FOR CLARITY PURPOSE Exhaust clamp 11 N•m (97 lbf•in)
Step 1: Lift adjuster tab
Step 2: Move adjuster outward
NOTICE Do not use pneumatic or electric
Insert the muffler in hull. tools as seizure may occur.
Align the exhaust pipe flange to the exhaust mani-
fold. Rotate and move muffler so that the exhaust Install the muffler strap.
pipe flange makes perfect contact with exhaust NOTICE Ensure not to rotate muffler during
manifold. strap installation. The use of a soapy water so-
Slide both adjuster blocks against muffler to sup- lution on inner side of muffler strap is recom-
port it in position. mended.
NOTE: Ensure muffler is in contact with both ad- Install all other removed parts.
juster blocks. Readjust as required.
After installation, ensure there is no water or ex-
Install exhaust clamp with the nut upward. haust gas leak when engine is running.
Tighten clamp loosely. Test run the engine while supplying water to the
Using a spacer, position the exhaust pipe. exhaust system.
REQUIRED SPACER NOTICE Never run engine without supplying
RXP-X Series 32 mm (1-1/4 in) water to the exhaust system when watercraft is
out of water.
All other models 50 mm (2 in)
10 smr2012-014
EXHAUST HOSES Rear Exhaust Hose Replacement

Remove battery and battery holder. Refer to
CHARGING SYSTEM subsection.
Loosen clamps securing rear exhaust hose to res-
onator and RH fixation plate.
smr2012-014-010_a
1. Muffler
2. Front exhaust hose
3. Resonator
4. Rear exhaust hose
Front Exhaust Hose Replacement smr2012-014-020_a
1. Retaining clamps
Remove the LH rear storage basket. Remove the rear exhaust hose from vehicle.
Remove the deck extension. Refer to BODY sub- Models Without Suspension
section.
Remove the resonator. See procedure in this sub-
Models Without Suspension section.
Remove seat. Loosen clamp securing the rear exhaust hose to
On RXP-X models, remove the rear handle. RH fixing plate.
All Models
Cut all locking ties from exhaust hose.
Remove exhaust hose from the muffler outlet and
resonator.
Remove front exhaust hose from vehicle.
When reinstalling exhaust hose, make sure to at-
tach elbow fittings at the highest position that you
can on the exhaust hose.
Replace all locking ties previously cut.
Tighten retaining clamps to specification.
smr2011-013-004_a
TIGHTENING TORQUE DECK REMOVED FOR CLARITY

Front exhaust hose clamp 4 N•m (35 lbf•in) 2. Hose clamp
3. RH fixing plate
Install all other removed parts. All Models
After installation, ensure there is no water or ex- When reinstalling rear exhaust hose, tighten
haust gas leak when the engine is running. Test clamps to specification.
run the engine while supplying water to the ex-
haust system.
NOTICE Never run engine without supplying
water to the exhaust system when watercraft is
out of water.
smr2012-014 11
TIGHTENING TORQUE Remove exhaust pipe and the rubber adapter.

Rear exhaust hose clamp 4 N•m (35 lbf•in) Exhaust Pipe Inspection
Reinstall all other removed parts. Inspect exhaust pipe for:
– Cracks
haust gas leak when the engine is running. Test – Flange damages
run the engine while supplying water to the ex- – Other damages.
haust system. Replace exhaust pipe as required.
NOTICE Never run engine without supplying Check if the rubber adapter is:
water to the exhaust system when watercraft is – Brittle
out of water. – Hard
– Otherwise damaged.
EXHAUST PIPE Replace rubber adapter if necessary.
Exhaust Pipe Installation

Trace a mark to locate the middle of the muffler
bulge opening.
smr2012-014-011_a
1. Exhaust pipe
2. Rubber adapter
3. Muffler
smr2008-013-035_a
Exhaust Pipe Removal 1. Bulge

2. Middle of the opening
Remove MUFFLER, see procedure in this subsec-
tion. Install the rubber adapter on exhaust pipe. Ensure
rubber adapter is properly seats against exhaust
Disconnect water inlet hose from exhaust pipe fit- pipe shoulder.
ting.
smr2008-013-038_a
1. Exhaust pipe shoulder

2. Rubber adapter
smr2008-013-033_a Center the rubber adapter strip of the rubber

1. Water inlet hose adapter between both exhaust pipe marks.
2. Exhaust pipe
Tighten retaining clamp.
Loosen rubber adapter clamps.
12 smr2012-014
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Rubber adapter
retaining clamp
smr2008-013-039_a
1. Rubber adapter end

2. Outside of the muffler bulge
A. 95 mm ± 2 mm (3.74 in ± .079 in)
Tighten retaining clamp.

smr2008-013-036_a
1. Rubber adapter strip TIGHTENING TORQUE

2. Retaining clamp
3. Exhaust pipe marks Rubber adapter
retaining clamp
Slide the other clamp on the rubber adapter.
Insert the exhaust pipe into the muffler. Install muffler in vehicle. Refer to MUFFLER IN-
Align the center of the rubber adapter strip with STALLATION in this subsection for complete pro-
the mark previously traced on muffler. cedure.
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
smr2008-013-037_a
1. Middle of rubber adapter strip

2. Center of the muffler bulge opening smr2012-014-012_a
1. Exhaust manifold
Using a caliper, measure the distance between
the exhaust pipe shoulder and the outside of the Exhaust Manifold Removal
muffler bulge.
1. On models with suspension, remove the
Position the muffler to 95 mm ± 2 mm moving deck and the deck extension. Refer to
(3.74 in ± .079 in). Check the distance in BODY subsection.
several places.
2. Move muffler rearwards to make room. Refer
to MUFFLER REMOVAL in this subsection to
know how separate muffler from exhaust man-
ifold.
3. Disconnect the exhaust manifold water outlet
hose.
smr2012-014 13
NOTE: There is no gasket between cylinder block

and exhaust manifold.
Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060) on
threads of screws.
To help holding the manifold while installing
screws, first insert the exhaust manifold into the
exhaust pipe then, install the upper front screw.
Continue with the remaining screws.
Torque screws to specification as per following il-
smr2009-016-023_a
lustrated sequence. Repeat the procedure twice.
1. Water outlet hose
2. Exhaust manifold
TIGHTENING TORQUE
4. Disconnect exhaust manifold water inlet hose Exhaust manifold screws 9 N•m (80 lbf•in)
from exhaust manifold.
7 5 1 3 9 11
smr2009-016-024_a
TYPICAL – iS MODEL SHOWN

1. Exhaust manifold water inlet hose
5. Unscrew the exhaust manifold beginning with

R1503motr152A 8 6 4 2 10 12
the bottom screws. This will help holding the
manifold while you remove the screws.
6. Remove the exhaust manifold from vehicle. haust gas leak when the engine is running. Test
– On models with suspension, move the ex- run the engine while supplying water to the flush-
haust manifold rearwards to remove it. ing connector.
– On models without suspension, lift up the
exhaust manifold to remove it. NOTICE Never run engine without supplying
Exhaust Manifold Inspection out of water.
Inspect exhaust manifold condition paying atten-
tion for cracks or other damage. Check contact RESONATOR
surfaces and hose. Replace any defective part. Resonator Removal
Inspect plane surfaces for warpage. Small defor-
mation can be corrected by grinding surface with Models With Suspension
a fine sand paper. Install sand paper on a surface 1. Remove engine from vehicle. Refer to ENGINE
plate and rub part against oiled sand paper. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION subsection.
Clean all metal components in a solvent. 2. Remove battery and battery holder. Refer to
CHARGING SYSTEM subsection.
Exhaust Manifold Installation 3. Loosen clamp securing rear exhaust hose to
Installation is essentially the reverse of removal resonator.
procedures. However, pay particular attention to 4. Remove the screw securing the front of the res-
the following. onator.
14 smr2012-014
smr2010-021-008_a
smr2011-013-007_a
TYPICAL – MODEL WITHOUT iS SHOWN TYPICAL – GTI SHOWN
1. Resonator retaining screw 1. Resonator
5. Remove the front exhaust hose from resonator.
6. Remove resonator from vehicle. 6. Slide resonator by the deck opening.
Models Without Suspension Resonator Inspection

1. Remove seat. Inspect parts condition paying attention for defor-
2. On RXP-X models, remove the rear handle. mation, cracks or other damage. Check hoses.
Replace any defective part.
3. Detach the front exhaust hose from the res-
onator. Resonator Installation
4. Remove screw and washer securing the front Installation is the reverse of the removal proce-
of the resonator. dures. However, pay attention to the following.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Resonator retaining screw 7.5 N•m (66 lbf•in)

haust gas leak when the engine is running. Test
run the engine while supplying water to the ex-
haust system.
out of water.
smr2011-013-006_a

1. Resonator retaining screw
5. Loosen clamp securing the rear exhaust hose

to resonator.
smr2012-014 15
Subsection XX (PTO HOUSING AND MAGNETO)
PTO HOUSING AND MAGNETO

SERVICE TOOLS
3-PIN MAGNETO HARNESS ADAPTER........................................ 529 036 016 ....................................... 9–10
BLIND HOLE BEARING PULLER SET........................................... 529 036 117 ............................................. 9
HANDLE ........................................................................................ 420 877 650 ............................................. 9
IMPELLER REMOVER/INSTALLER ............................................... 529 035 820 ............................................. 8
OETIKER PLIERS........................................................................... 295 000 070 ............................................. 7
STARTER DRIVE SEAL PUSHER................................................... 420 876 502 ............................................. 9
SUCTION PUMP ........................................................................... 529 035 880 ............................................. 3
SERVICE PRODUCTS
ISOFLEX GREASE TOPAS NB 52 ................................................. 293 550 021 ....................................... 9, 14
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ....................................... 6, 11
LOCTITE 648 (GREEN) .................................................................. 413 711 400 ............................................. 8
PULLEY FLANGE CLEANER ......................................................... 413 711 809 ......................................... 4, 7
smr2012-015 1
9 Nm
(80 lbfin) 9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
Loctite Loctite
243 243
Engine oil
NEW Isoflex grease
Topas NB 52
Loctite 243
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
NEW Isoflex grease

Topas NB 52
Engine
NEW oil
15 Nm Loctite
(133 lbfin) 648
+50°
250 Nm
(184 lbfft)

smr2010-022-001_b
2 smr2012-015
GENERAL
NOTE: It is good practice to check for fault
codes using the B.U.D.S. software as a first trou-
bleshooting step. Refer to the DIAGNOSTIC AND
FAULT CODES subsection.
Always carry out electrical tests on components
before removing or installing them.
PROCEDURES
smr2006-006-003_a
PTO HOUSING 1. Suction pump tube
2. Edge of cylinder block
PTO Housing Access
4. Disconnect at throttle body the air intake hose.
5. Move muffler rearwards. Refer to EXHAUST
Remove the moving deck and the deck extension. SYSTEM subsection.
Refer to BODY subsection.
6. Disconnect CPS connector from wiring har-
Remove the air intake silencer. Refer to appropri- ness.
ate AIR INTAKE SYSTEM subsection.
RXP-X Models
Remove seat and rear handle.
215 and 260 Engines
Remove the supercharger. Refer to SUPER-
CHARGER subsection.
All Models
Drain the engine oil. Refer to LUBRICATION SYS-
TEM subsection.
Drain engine coolant, refer to the COOLING SYS-
TEM subsection. smr2008-023-016_a
Refer to STEERING AND PROPULSION and re- CPS CONNECTOR
move the following: 7. Disconnect the magneto connector, located be-

– Jet pump side the ECM.
– Drive shaft
– Drive shaft bellows.
PTO Housing Removal

1. Disconnect the battery. Refer to STARTING
SYSTEM subsection.
2. Remove the cylinder head cover. Refer to
CYLINDER HEAD subsection.
3. Insert the tube of the suction pump in the lower
area of the timing chain and syphon remaining
oil out of the lower timing chain case.
REQUIRED TOOL smr2011-014-002_a
130/155 ENGINES
SUCTION PUMP 1. Magneto connector
(P/N 529 035 880) 2. ECM support
3. ECM
smr2012-015 3
10. Slightly lift aft end of engine and insert a safely

block under the engine to secure it in this po-
sition.
11. Remove LH rear engine support.
smr2011-014-003_a
215/260 ENGINES
1. Magneto connector
2. Throttle body
3. ECM support
4. ECM
1
8. Place rags under PTO housing to prevent oil

spillage. R1503motr50A
NOTE: Up to 250 ml (8 U.S. oz) of oil could flow TYPICAL

out when removing PTO housing. If spillage oc- 1. Engine support
curs, clean immediately with the PULLEY FLANGE
12. Remove water pump housing, refer to COOL-
CLEANER (P/N 413 711 809) to prevent oil stains.
ING SYSTEM subsection.
9. Remove both rear engine support screws.
smr2007-016-003_c
1. Water pump housing
smr2009-016-020_b 13. Remove PTO housing retaining screws.

RIGHT SIDE OF VEHICLE
1. Rear engine support screw NOTE: Note position of the CPS harness retaining
clamp position as illustrated above for reinstalla-
tion.
smr2009-016-022_b
LEFT SIDE OF VEHICLE

1. Rear engine support screw
4 smr2012-015
Inspect the needle bearing in the PTO housing

used to support the starter drive shaft.
NOTE: Clean all disassembled metal components
in a non-ferrous metal cleaner.
Inspect oil strainer for contaminants, debris or
other particles. Clean as required.
smr2009-022-001_a
1. PTO housing
2. CPS harness retaining clamp
3. CPS
14. Remove PTO housing from engine.

NOTICE To prevent damaging contact sur-
faces, be sure to use prying lugs to separate
PTO housing from engine.
R1503motr117A
NOTE: Carefully separate PTO housing from en-
gine using two flat screwdrivers prying equally on 1. PTO oil strainer
opposite sides of the housing and at the same
time. Proceed slowly to prevent starter drive disc PTO Housing Installation
springs and thrust washer from falling down into For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
bilge area. However, pay attention to the following.
Apply lubricants, sealers or threadlocker as speci-
fied in exploded view.
Apply torques as specified in exploded view.
Install starter drive, see STARTER DRIVE INSTAL-
LATION further in this subsection.
Install a NEW PTO housing gasket.
NOTE: When installing the PTO housing, you will
need to rotate the oil/water pump shaft slightly to
align it with the balance shaft for proper insertion.
NOTICE Pay particular attention to the PTO
housing gasket alignment to ensure that it
does not get pinched, or slide out of its sur-
face contact area. Never force housing when
installing it. If there is a strong resistance, re-
move housing and check oil/water pump shaft
alignment and starter drive gear alignment.
smr2005-034-002_a
1. Disc springs NOTICE Ensure the starter drive shaft is well

2. Thrust washer
3. Starter drive aligned when engaging it in the PTO housing
needle bearing.
15. Remove PTO housing gasket and discard it.
PTO Housing Inspection

Inspect PTO housing for cracks or any other dam-
ages. Replace if necessary.
smr2012-015 5
smr2009-022-004_a
smr2009-022-002_a
1. CPS harness retaining clamp
1. Pay attention that gasket remains properly positioned
on this surface
Install the PTO housing screws finger tight, then
Refer to the following illustration to identify the torque them as per following table and sequence
locations of the various housing screws. numbered in the following illustration.
PTO HOUSING INSTALLATION
SCREW
GASKET PRODUCT
TORQUE
LOCTITE
243 (BLUE) 9 N•m
NEW
(P/N 293 800 (80 lbf•in)
060)
smr2009-022-001_b
1. Screws M6 x 35
2. Screws M6 x 85
NOTE: Install the CPS harness retaining clamp

at the position noted during the PTO housing
removal.
smr2009-022-001_c
Reinstall LH engine support as per following table.

LH ENGINE SUPPORT INSTALLATION
PRODUCT TORQUE
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)
23 N•m (17 lbf•ft)
(P/N 293 800 060)
Remove safety block from under engine.

Install both rear engine support screws loosely.
6 smr2012-015
Carry out an engine alignment, refer to the

ENGINE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION subsec-
tion.
NOTICE An engine alignment procedure
must be carried out to ensure proper engine
alignment or severe component damage may
occur.
Install all remaining parts, reconnect hoses and
electrical connectors. Refer to applicable subsec-
tions for procedures and specific details (torques,
service products or instructions).
Refill engine with oil and cooling system with
coolant. Refer to LUBRICATION SYSTEM and smr2009-022-007_a
COOLING SYSTEM subsections. TYPICAL

1. Oetiker clamps
2. PTO seal
PTO SEAL Pull seal from PTO housing.
PTO Seal Inspection
Inspect the PTO seal on the PTO housing. If brit-
PTO Seal Installation
tle, hard or damaged, or if you see a sign of oil Insert a NEW Oetiker clamp over the seal.
leakage, replace it. Push seal onto PTO housing. Be sure to align seal
Inspect ball bearing within PTO seal for excessive and clamp as noted at removal.
play and smooth operation. NOTICE When installing PTO seal on super-
Replace PTO seal if oil seal or ball bearing is dam- charged engines, make sure to position the
aged. Oetiker clamps as illustrated.
smr2009-022-006_a R1503motr367A 1
1. PTO seal
1. Oetiker clamps
PTO Seal Removal Crimp Oetiker clamp.

Place rags under PTO housing to prevent spillage. REQUIRED TOOL
If spillage occurs, clean immediately with PULLEY
FLANGE CLEANER (P/N 413 711 809) to prevent oil OETIKER PLIERS
stains. (P/N 295 000 070)
NOTE: Note position of seal and orientation of
Oetiker clamp for installation.
Remove the Oetiker clamp retaining the seal to
the PTO housing.
smr2012-015 7
PTO COUPLING PTO Coupling Inspection

Inspect seal within coupling, if it is brittle, cracked
or hard, replace it.
Check coupling for worn or damaged splines. Re-
place as required.
PTO Coupling Installation

However, pay attention to the following.
PTO COUPLING INSTALLATION
PRODUCT TORQUE
LOCTITE 648 (GREEN)
250 N•m (184 lbf•ft)
(P/N 413 711 400)
smr2010-022-002_a
1. PTO coupling
2. Seal
STARTER DRIVE BEARINGS
3. Stop sleeve
PTO Coupling Removal

Lock crankshaft. Refer to CYLINDER BLOCK sub-
section for the procedure.
Remove PTO seal as described in previous proce-
dure.
Unscrew coupling from crankshaft.
REQUIRED TOOL
IMPELLER
REMOVER/INSTALLER
(P/N 529 035 820)
NOTICE Apply engine oil to the removal tool

smr2009-022-009_a
to protect the seal located within the PTO cou- PTO HOUSING
pling. 1. Starter drive bearing
R1503motr56A
smr2009-022-008_b
CYLINDER BLOCK
TYPICAL – TURN COUNTERCLOCKWISE TO REMOVE 1. Starter drive bearing
1. Impeller removal tool
8 smr2012-015
Starter Drive Bearing Removal

Remove PTO housing, see procedure in this sub-
section.
Remove starter drive bearing from PTO housing
or cylinder block.
REQUIRED TOOL
BLIND HOLE BEARING PULLER

SET (P/N 529 036 117)
Starter Drive Bearing Installation smr2009-022-101_a
STATOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE TEST

Prior to assembly grease starter drive bearing. 1. Connect adapter to magneto connector
2. Leave vehicle harness disconnected
STARTER DRIVE BEARING INSTALLATION
Read voltage as per following table.
PRODUCT
STATOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE TEST
ISOFLEX GREASE TOPAS NB 52 (P/N 293 550 021)
TEST ENGINE
TERMINAL VOLTAGE (AC)
Install starter drive bearing in the PTO housing or SPEED
in the cylinder block. 1 and 2
REQUIRED TOOLS 4000 RPM 1 and 3 Approx. 50 Vac
STARTER DRIVE SEAL 2 and 3
PUSHER (P/N 420 876 502)
HANDLE
If voltage is lower than specification, carry out a
(P/N 420 877 650) STATOR CONTINUITY TEST and a STATOR INSU-
LATION TEST. See procedures in this subsection.
STATOR Stator Continuity Test

Disconnect the magneto connector, located be-
Stator Output Voltage Test side the ECM.
Disconnect the magneto connector, located be-
Install the following harness adapter onto the
side the ECM.
magneto connector.
Install this following harness adapter onto the
NOTE: Do not connect the magneto harness
magneto connector.
adapter to the vehicle harness connector.
adapter to the vehicle harness connector. REQUIRED TOOL
REQUIRED TOOL 3-PIN MAGNETO

HARNESS ADAPTER
(P/N 529 036 016)
3-PIN MAGNETO HARNESS
ADAPTER (P/N 529 036 016)
Connect multimeter between each pair of YEL-
LOW wires.
Set multimeter to Vac scale.
Start engine.
Connect multimeter between each pair of YEL-
LOW wires as per following table. Measure volt-
age between each pair of wires.
smr2012-015 9
smr2009-022-101_b smr2009-022-101_c
STATOR CONTINUITY TEST STATOR INSULATION TEST

1. Connect adapter to magneto connector 1. Connect adapter to magneto connector
2. Leave vehicle harness disconnected 2. Leave vehicle harness disconnected
Read resistance. Read resistance.

STATOR CONTINUITY TEST STATOR INSULATION TEST
RESISTANCE @ RESISTANCE @
TERMINAL TERMINAL
20°C (68°F) 20°C (68°F)
1 and 2 Any YELLOW wire and
Infinity (open circuit)
engine ground
1 and 3 0.1 - 1
2 and 3 If there is a resistance or continuity to engine
ground, the stator coils and/or the wiring is
If any result is out of specification, replace stator. grounded and need to be repaired or replaced.
Stator Insulation Test Stator Removal

Disconnect the magneto connector, located be- Remove PTO housing, see procedure in this sub-
side the ECM. section.
Install the following harness adapter onto the Remove stator cable holding plate from PTO hous-
magneto connector. ing.
adapter to the vehicle harness connector.
REQUIRED TOOL
3-PIN MAGNETO
HARNESS ADAPTER
(P/N 529 036 016)
Connect multimeter between any YELLOW wire

and engine ground.
smr2009-022-011_a
TYPICAL
1. Screws
2. Holding plate
Remove stator retaining screws.

Remove stator from PTO housing.
10 smr2012-015
smr2009-022-012_a smr2009-022-009_b
1. Stator screws TYPICAL

2. Stator 1. Stator cable grommet
Stator Installation Apply threadlocker and torque stator and cable

holding plate screws as per following table.
However, pay attention to the following. STATOR INSTALLATION
NOTE: The position of the stator in the PTO hous- TORQUE
ing is determined by a key on the stator and a PRODUCT (STATOR AND CABLE
notch in the magneto housing. HOLDING PLATE)
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)
(P/N 293 800 060)
Install PTO housing as per procedures in this sub-

section.
ROTOR AND TRIGGER WHEEL

Rotor and Trigger Wheel Inspection
Inspect rotor and trigger wheel condition. Pay par-
ticular attention to the inside of the rotor for:
– Cracks
– Rub marks
smr2010-022-013_a
1. Notch for stator – Discoloration.

If damaged, replace faulty part.
Place the stator cable rubber grommet in the
notch provided in the PTO housing. Check the trigger wheel for bent teeth using the
following procedure.
1. Install a dial indicator on crankcase casting.
2. Position the gauge on a tooth and set it to zero
(0). Be sure to lock the indicator dial to prevent
movement of the dial during the remainder of
the procedure.
3. Draw a line on the tooth to indicate it as the first
tooth measured (reference tooth).
4. Gently lift the gauge contact point off the tooth
and rotate the rotor to the next tooth.
smr2012-015 11
NOTE: When lifting contact point off the tooth for

rotor rotation, be careful not to move gauge posi-
tion or test readings taken on next tooth will not 3
be accurate with reference to the reference tooth.
5. Gently set the gauge contact point on the next 2
tooth and read the dial indicator. 1
6. Repeat this procedure taking a reading at each
tooth.
7. Recheck reading on reference tooth to ensure
gauge has not changed position (gauge should
still read zero). 1
TRIGGER WHEEL TEETH INSPECTION
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DIFFERENCE R1503motr53A
0.15 mm (.006 in) TYPICAL

1. Rotor retaining screws
2. Rotor
3. Trigger wheel
Rotor and Trigger Wheel Installation

1. Align the trigger wheel to the crankshaft using
the location pin on the crankshaft end.
2. Install NEW OEM rotor screws and torque
them as per following table.
ROTOR AND TRIGGER WHEEL INSTALLATION
TORQUE
PARTS (CRISSCROSS FINAL TORQUE
PATTERN)
Additional 50°
smr2009-022-015_a NEW OEM 15 N•m
rotation with a
1. Trigger wheel rotor screws (133 lbf•in)
2. Dial indicator torque angle gauge
If the reading exceeds the maximum allowable tol- NOTICE Always install NEW OEM screws
erance, straighten the tooth or replace the trigger with pre-applied threadlocker. These are
wheel. stretch screws that are one time use only.
8. Properly reinstall PTO housing. Not replacing rotor screws may lead to engine
damage and failure.
Rotor and Trigger Wheel Removal
Lock crankshaft, refer to CYLINDER BLOCK sub- RING GEAR
section for procedure. Ring Gear Removal
Remove PTO housing, see procedure in this sub- Lock crankshaft. Refer to CYLINDER BLOCK sub-
section. section for procedure.
Remove and discard the magneto rotor retaining Remove the PTO housing, see procedure in this
screws. subsection.
Pull rotor and trigger wheel off crankshaft end. Remove and discard the magneto rotor retaining
screws.
Pull rotor, trigger wheel, and ring gear off crank-
shaft end.
12 smr2012-015
NOTICE Always install NEW OEM screws

4
with pre-applied threadlocker. These are
3 stretch screws that are one time use only.
Not replacing rotor screws may lead to engine
2 damage and failure.
STARTER DRIVE
1
Starter Drive Removal
Remove the PTO housing and ring gear as de-
scribed in this subsection.
R1503motr54A
Remove starter drive.
TYPICAL
1. Magneto rotor retaining screws
2. Rotor
3. Trigger wheel
4. Ring gear
Ring Gear Inspection

Inspect ring gear for damages. Pay particular at-
tention to teeth condition. If badly worn, cracked,
or broken teeth are found, replace ring gear.
Ring Gear Installation

However, pay attention to the following. smr2010-022-016_a
1. Starter drive
Align the ring gear and trigger wheel to the crank-
shaft using the location pin on the crankshaft end. NOTICE Be careful not to lose the spring
discs and thrust washer located on the starter
1 drive shaft.
R1503motr54B
TYPICAL
1. Location pin
2. Location pin holes
Install NEW OEM rotor screws and torque them

as per following table.
RING GEAR INSTALLATION
smr2005-034-002_a
TORQUE 1. Spring discs

PARTS (CRISSCROSS FINAL TORQUE 2. Thrust washer
3. Starter drive
PATTERN)
Additional 50°
NEW OEM 15 N•m
rotation with a
rotor screws (133 lbf•in)
torque angle gauge
smr2012-015 13
Starter Drive Inspection

Inspect all starter drive parts for excessive wear,
cracks and other defects. Pay attention to the
condition of the drive gear teeth.
Ensure proper operation of the starter drive sprag
clutch.
If any part of the assembly shows signs of ab-
normal wear, cracks, broken teeth or malfunction
(sprag clutch), replace the faulty part.
Starter Drive Installation

However, pay attention to the following. smr2009-022-009_a
Position the spring discs and thrust washer onto PTO HOUSING
1. Starter drive bearing
the starter drive shaft as per following illustration.
NOTICE Be sure not to forget the spring
discs and thrust washer on the starter drive
shaft when reassembling.
smr2005-034-100_a
TYPICAL
1. Thrust washer
2. Spring discs
3. Starter drive
When installing a new starter drive, oil the shaft,

gear teeth and splines with engine oil.
Apply ISOFLEX GREASE TOPAS NB 52 (P/N 293 550
021) on the starter drive bearings located in the
cylinder block and in the PTO housing.
R1503motr56A
CYLINDER BLOCK
1. Starter drive bearing
14 smr2012-015
Subsection XX (LUBRICATION SYSTEM)
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
SERVICE TOOLS
ADAPTER HOSE ........................................................................... 529 035 652 ............................................. 9
ECM ADAPTER TOOL................................................................... 529 036 166 ..................................... 11, 28
FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER ............................................................ 529 035 868 ............................... 11, 27–28
OIL SEAL GUIDE........................................................................... 529 035 822 ........................................... 16
PRESSURE GAUGE....................................................................... 529 035 709 ............................................. 9
SUCTION PUMP ........................................................................... 529 035 880 ............................................. 7
SUPERCHARGER OIL SPRAY NOZZLE TOOL ............................. 529 036 134 ........................................... 21
WATER PUMP SEAL PUSHER...................................................... 529 035 823 ..................................... 16–17
SERVICE TOOLS – OTHER SUPPLIER

FLUKE RIGID BACK PROBES ....................................................... tp88 ........................................... 27
SERVICE PRODUCTS
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ....... 12, 14, 16, 20–21, 26, 29
LOCTITE 5910 ............................................................................... 293 800 081 ........................................... 13
PULLEY FLANGE CLEANER ......................................................... 413 711 809 ....................................... 8, 18
SUPER LUBE GREASE.................................................................. 293 550 030 ............................................. 9
XPS 4-STROKE SYNTH. BLEND OIL (SUMMER) ......................... 293 600 121 ............................................. 6
smr2012-016 1
9 Nm
(80 lbfin) NEW
Engine oil
Loctite
243 Loctite
NEW 243
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
Engine oil
17 Nm
(150 lbfin)
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
Loctite
243
19 Nm
(168 lbfin)
NEW
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
Loctite 243
Engine oil
Loctite 243 Engine Loctite

NEW 9 Nm oil 243
(80 lbfin)
Engine
oil 9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
smr2010-023-100_c
2 smr2012-016
9 Nm
(80 lbfin) Engine oil
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
NEW
Engine oil
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
Left hand Loctite 243
threads NEW
Supercharger
NEW Loctite 243
Engine
oil
19 Nm 11 Nm
Engine oil
Engine oil
Loctite 5910 9 Nm

(80 lbfin)
13 Nm Loctite 243

(115 lbfin) Loctite 243
smr2011-015-002_a
smr2012-016 3
ENGINE LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
Legend
1
Pressurized oil
2
Scavenged oil
3 Blow-by gas
4
5
8
7
9
10
11
12
13
smr2009-023-100_en
1. Oil dipstick
2. Rocker arm (intake)
3. Rocker arm (exhaust)
4. Hydraulic valve lifter
5. Camshaft
6. Piston pin
7. Into PTO housing
8. From oil filter
9. Piston cooling
10. Connecting rod
11. Balance shaft
12. Crankshaft
13. Oil tank
4 smr2012-016
ENGINE LUBRICATION CIRCUIT (CONT'D)
1
34
4 3 2 3
6
5
7
9 8
10
11 12
13 15
14
16
18 17
19
20
21
22
23
24 25 28
29
26
30
27
31
Legend
Pressurized oil 32
Scavenged oil
Blow-by gas 33
smr2009-023-101_en
1. To air intake silencer 18. Oil spray nozzle

2. Rocker arm (intake) 19. Drive shaft
3. Rocker arm (exhaust) 20. Crankshaft
4. Rocker arm axle 21. PTO seal
5. Camshaft 22. Oil pressure switch
6. Pressure relief valve 23. Balance shaft
7. Oil separator 24. PTO housing
8. Cylinder head 25. Pressure pump
9. Blow-by valve 26. Pressure relief valve
10. Supercharger (if so equipped) 27. Oil strainer (pressure pump)
11. Oil filter 28. Scavenge pump
12. Hydraulic chain tensioner 29. Oil tank
13. Supercharger bearing (if so equipped) 30. Oil strainer (scavenge pump)
14. Friction clutch 31. Oil drainage (PTO housing)
15. Piston pin 32. Oil cooler
16. Connecting rod 33. Scavenge of oil and blow-by gas
17. Piston cooling 34. Oil filler cap
smr2012-016 5
MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL
Recommended Oil
Use XPS 4-STROKE SYNTH. BLEND OIL (SUMMER)
(P/N 293 600 121).
Naturally-Aspirated Engines
If the recommended XPS™ engine oil is not avail-
able, use a 5W 40 or 10W 40 engine oil meet-
ing the requirements for API service classification
SM, SL or SJ. Always check the API service label
certification on the oil container, it must contain at smo2009-002-003_b
least one of the above standards. TYPICAL – iS MODELS SHOWN
1. Oil dipstick
Supercharged Intercooled Engines
If XPS™ engine oil is not available, use a 10W40 Check the oil level as follows:
mineral engine oil compatible with wet clutches. NOTE: It is of the utmost importance to follow
NOTE: The XPS engine oil has been thoroughly this procedure in order to obtain an accurate read-
tested to be free of any additives that could impair ing of the engine oil level.
the functionality of the supercharger clutch. 1. Watercraft must be level. Check oil level either
with watercraft in water or out of water.
NOTICE NEVER use synthetic oil. This would
impair the proper operation of the super- NOTE: If the watercraft is out of water, link a gar-
charger clutch. Do not add any additives to den hose to the hose adapter. Refer to EXHAUST
the recommended oil. Mineral oils not recom- SYSTEM FLUSHING in the EXHAUST SYSTEM
mended by BRP may also contain additives subsection.
(friction modifiers) that may cause inappropri- NOTICE When watercraft is out of water:
ate slippage of the supercharger and eventu-
– Never run engine without supplying water to
ally lead to premature wear. For this reason,
the exhaust system.
XPS Synthetic Blend oil (Summer Grade) or a
BRP approved equivalent are the only recom- – Never run engine longer than 2 minutes.
mended oils. Use of any oil not recommended Drive line seal has no cooling when water-
by BRP may void BRP's limited warranty. craft is out of water.
2. Warm-up engine then let idle for 30 seconds
Oil Level Verification before stopping.
NOTICE Check level frequently and refill if 3. Stop engine.
necessary. Do not overfill — it would make 4. Open or remove seat.
the engine smoke and reduce its power. Op-
erating the engine with an improper level 5. On models with suspension, remove the ven-
may severely damage engine. Wipe off any tilation box from the deck extension to gain par-
spillage. tial access to engine compartment.
NOTE: To remove the rear ventilation box, simply
release the 3 clips retaining it and lift it off the deck
extension.
6 smr2012-016
lmr2007-053-100_a
1. Full
2. Add
3. Operating range
Otherwise, add oil until its level is between marks

as required.
To add oil, unscrew oil cap. Place a funnel into the
smo2009-002-002_a
oil filler neck opening and add the recommended
1. Rear ventilation box
2. Deck extension oil to the proper level. Do not overfill.
3. Retaining clips
Oil Change
6. Wait at least 30 seconds for the oil to settle
in the engine, then pull dipstick out and wipe NOTE: Oil and oil filter must be replaced at the
clean. same time. Oil change and oil filter replacement
should be done with a warm engine.
CAUTION Engine oil may be hot. Certain Bring engine to its normal operating temperature.
components in the engine compartment may
be very hot. Direct contact may result in skin NOTICE When watercraft is out of water:
burn. – Never run engine without supplying water to
the exhaust system.
– Never run engine longer than 2 minutes.
Drive line seal has no cooling when water-
craft is out of water.
Run engine for 10 seconds at 4000 RPM and shut
it off at this RPM. This will move oil from PTO
housing to oil tank to allow maximum oil draining.
Remove oil filler cap and dipstick.
CAUTION Engine oil may be hot. Certain

components in the engine compartment may
be very hot. Direct contact may result in skin
burn.
smo2009-002-003_b Siphon oil through the dipstick tube.
TYPICAL – iS MODELS SHOWN
1. Oil dipstick REQUIRED TOOL
7. Reinstall dipstick, push in completely.

SUCTION PUMP
8. Remove dipstick and read oil level. It should be (P/N 529 035 880)
between the FULL and ADD marks.
NOTICE Never crank or start engine when

suction pump hose is in the dipstick tube.
Never start engine when there is no oil in en-
gine.
smr2012-016 7
NOTE: To properly position the suction pump

hose is located at the proper height to siphon
oil, it is suggested to put some electrical tape on
hose at 475 mm (18-11/16 in) from its end. Then,
insert the hose until you reach the tape.
smr2009-023-003_a
1. Oil filter screw

2. Oil filter cover
3. Oil filter
Place rags in filler area to prevent spillage. If

spillage occurs, clean immediately with the PUL-
LEY FLANGE CLEANER (P/N 413 711 809) to prevent
stains.
Oil Filter Inspection

Check oil filter screw O-ring, change if necessary.
Check and clean the oil filter inlet and outlet area
for dirt and other contaminations.
R1503motr150A 1
TYPICAL
1. Suction pump
2. Suction pump hose in the dipstick tube
Pull suction pump hose out of dipstick tube.

Fully depress the throttle lever and HOLD it while
cranking engine for 10 seconds. Siphon oil again.
Repeat the crank-siphon cycle 2 - 3 times.
Refill engine with the recommended oil, see REC-
OMMENDED OIL in this subsection.
Reinstall oil filler cap and dipstick.
Replace OIL FILTER, see procedure in this sub-
section.
smr2009-023-004_a
OIL FILTER 1. Inlet bore from the oil pump to the oil filter
2. Outlet bore to the engine oil providing system
Oil Filter Removal Oil Filter Installation

Remove:
– Oil filter screw Pay attention to the following details.
– Oil filter cover
Install a NEW oil filter.
– Oil filter.
Install NEW O-rings on oil filter cover.
Apply engine oil on filter ring, filter cover O-rings
and on oil filter screw O-ring.
8 smr2012-016
NOTE: In salt water area, it is recommended to Test at the Oil Pressure Switch
coat mating surface of cover with SUPER LUBE Location
GREASE (P/N 293 550 030).
Remove oil pressure switch and install gauge.
Torque oil filter screw to specification.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Oil filter screw 9 N•m (80 lbf•in)
INSPECTION
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
Oil Pressure Test Requirement
Bring engine to its normal operating temperature.
CAUTION Certain components in the en-

gine compartment may be very hot. Direct
contact may result in skin burn. smr2009-023-005_a
INSTALLATION AT PRESSURE SWITCH LOCATION

NOTICE When watercraft is out of water: 1. Remove oil pressure switch and install gauge here
– Never run engine without supplying water to
the exhaust system. To prevent the EMS to go in limp home mode (at
2500 RPM) or to generate a fault code, do the fol-
– Never run engine longer than 2 minutes. lowing:
Drive line seal has no cooling when water-
craft is out of water. 1. Ground OPS to engine.
2. Plug OPS to harness.
Required Tools for Oil Pressure Test 3. Start engine.
REQUIRED TOOLS 4. While engine is running, unplug OPS from har-
ness.
PRESSURE GAUGE
(P/N 529 035 709) Read oil pressure at different RPM as per table
above.
ADAPTER HOSE Reinstall oil pressure switch.
(P/N 529 035 652)
Test at the Cylinder Head Location
NOTE: A 1/8 NPT pipe extension may ease the The oil pressure may be measured from cylinder
installation. head if desired.
Remove plug located on cylinder head and install
Oil Pressure Specifications gauge.
Use the following table to compare the oil pres-
sure at different RPM.
OIL PRESSURE
448 kPa - 648 kPa
Idle (cold) (65 PSI - 94 PSI)
for a very short time
Idle (at 80°C (176°F)) Min. 228 kPa (33 PSI)
400 kPa - 496 kPa
4000 - 7500
(58 PSI - 72 PSI)
smr2012-016 9
7. Heavy wear on plain bearings.

- Check radial clearance of plain bearings. Replace
if out of specification.
HIGH OIL CONSUMPTION

1. Oil in breathing system.
- Check if breather V-ring is brittle, hard or dam-
aged. Replace V-ring.
2. Valve stem seals worn or damaged.
- Replace valve stem seals.
3. Piston rings worn out (blue colored exhaust
smoke).
smr2009-023-006_a - Replace piston rings.
INSTALLATION AT CYLINDER HEAD
1. Remove plug and install gauge here OIL CONTAMINATION (WHITE
Start engine and read pressure at different RPM APPEARANCE)
as per table above. 1. Water ingestion through drive shaft and floating
Reinstall plug. ring
- Check if water is leaking between drive shaft and
floating ring. Repair or replace defective parts.
TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to PTO HOUSING AND MAGNETO subsec-
tion.
probable source of troubles. It is a guideline and - Change engine oil and filter.
it should not be assumed to list all possible prob- 2. Oil seal and rotary seal on water pump shaft
lems. leaking.
Always check for fault codes. If a fault code is de- - Replace oil seal and water pump shaft assembly.
tected, service the fault code first. Refer to EN- - Change engine oil and oil filter.
GINE MANAGEMENT section.
3. Cylinder head gasket leaking.
LOW OR NO ENGINE OIL PRESSURE - Replace cylinder head gasket and tighten cylinder
head with recommended torque.
1. Oil level too low.
- Change engine oil and oil filter.
- Refill engine oil.
- Check for high oil consumption. See below. 4. Cylinder head screws not properly tightened.
- Check for oil leaks (oil leaking out of leak indica- - Retighten screws with recommended torque.
tor hole, gaskets, oil seal or O-rings). Repair or - Change engine oil.
replace.
5. Oil cooler O-rings are leaking.
2. Oil pressure switch defective. - Replace O-rings.
- Check and replace if necessary. - Change engine oil and oil filter.
3. Oil filter clogged. 6. Cylinder block or cylinder head casting is leak-
- Replace engine oil and oil filter at the same time. ing.
4. Oil pressure regulator valve sticks open, or - Check for internal cracks in casting. Replace dam-
spring load is too small. aged components.
- Clean oil regulator piston and its bore. Replace if - Change engine oil and oil filter.
necessary.
- Measure spring free length. Replace if too small.
5. Oil pump(s) worn or damaged.
- Check oil pump rotors and its bore for wear limits.
Replace if out of specification.
6. Engine oil strainers are clogged.
- Remove and clean engine oil strainers.
10 smr2012-016
PROCEDURES ENGINE RUNNING

TEST PROBES RESISTANCE ( )
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH (OPS)
Infinitely high (OL)
OPS
Oil Pressure Switch Operation connector
Engine when pressure reaches
ground 180 kPa (26.11 PSI) and
The switch threshold value to send a signal of low (pin 1)
220 kPa (32 PSI)
oil pressure may vary from a minimum of 180 kPa
(26 PSI) to a maximum of 220 kPa (32 PSI).
smr2009-023-102_a
If resistance values are incorrect, replace OPS.

smr2009-023-005_a
If the values are correct, check the continuity of
1. OPS the wiring harness.
Oil Pressure Switch Inspection Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Continuity

First, carefully check the condition of the connec- Test
tor terminals. Clean to remove dirt and corrosion Disconnect the ECM connector "A" from the ECM.
that could affect proper operation of the OPS. Check continuity of OPS circuit as per following
IMPORTANT: Do not apply dielectric grease on table.
terminal. REQUIRED TOOL
Before checking the function of the OPS, an oil
pressure test has to be performed to be sure the ECM ADAPTER TOOL
oil pressure is not in fault. Refer to INSPECTION (P/N 529 036 166)
in this subsection.
When the engine oil pressure tests good but the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER
OIL message in the information center is present (P/N 529 035 868)
and the beeper sounds:
– Ensure OPS connector is plugged to the switch.
– Check the resistance of the OPS while engine OPS ECM
RESISTANCE
is off and while engine is running. CONNECTOR ADAPTER
Close to 0
Pin 1 Pin E3
Oil Pressure Switch Resistance Test (continuity)
Disconnect the connector from the OPS.
Use a multimeter to check the resistance as
shown.
ENGINE NOT RUNNING
TEST PROBES RESISTANCE ( )
OPS
Engine Close to 0 (normally
connector
ground closed switch)
(pin 1)
smr2012-016 11
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Oil pressure switch 9 N•m (80 lbf•in)
PTO OIL STRAINER

PTO Oil Strainer Removal
Remove engine oil. See procedure in OIL
CHANGE in this subsection.
Remove the PTO housing. Refer to PTO HOUS-
ING AND MAGNETO subsection.
smr2009-023-102_b
Remove the oil strainer.
If continuity test failed, repair or replace the con-
nector and wiring between ECM connector and
OPS. 1
If continuity test succeeded, check the ECM. Re-
fer to ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI) sub-
section.
Oil Pressure Switch Removal

155 Engine (models with Suspension)
and Supercharged Engines
Remove the throttle body. Refer to ELECTRONIC
FUEL INJECTION (EFI) subsection.
All Models
Unplug the OPS connector. R1503motr117A
Unscrew and remove the oil pressure switch. 1. PTO oil strainer
PTO Oil Strainer Cleaning and

Inspection
Clean oil strainer with a part cleaner then use com-
pressed air to dry it.
Check and clean the oil outlet area for dirt and
other contaminations.
smr2009-023-005_a
1. OPS
Oil Pressure Switch Installation

threads of oil pressure switch.
Torque oil pressure switch to specification.
12 smr2012-016
NOTE: The oil pressure regulator system opens

when the oil pressure exceeds 400 kPa (58 PSI).
Oil Pressure Regulator Removal

Remove engine oil. See procedure in OIL
CHANGE in this subsection.
Remove:
– Oil pressure regulator plug
– Compression springs
– Valve piston
– Valve piston guide.
R1503motr118A 1
1. Oil inlet to the oil pump
PTO Oil Strainer Installation

Clean cylinder block to remove all remaining sili-
cone residues in oil strainer area.
Apply a thin layer of LOCTITE 5910 (P/N 293 800 081) smr2011-015-003_b
on oil strainer side. TYPICAL
Install it in the PTO housing. 1. Valve piston guide
2. Valve piston
Install the PTO housing using the procedure de- 3. Inner compression spring
4. Outer compression spring
scribed in the PTO HOUSING AND MAGNETO 5. Oil pressure regulator plug
subsection. 6. O-ring
Refill engine at the proper level with the recom- NOTE: Oil pressure regulator plug on oil pump
mended oil. Refer to ENGINE OIL for the proce- housing is spring loaded.
dure.
Oil Pressure Regulator Inspection
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE Inspect valve piston and valve piston guide for
REGULATOR scoring or other damages.
The oil pressure regulator is located on the bottom Check outer compression spring for free length.
of the PTO housing. OUTER COMPRESSION SPRING FREE LENGTH
NEW NOMINAL 60 mm (2.362 in)
SERVICE LIMIT 50.3 mm (1.98 in)
Replace inner and outer compression spring as an

assembly.
Replace parts if important wear or damage are
present.
Clean bore and threads in the PTO housing from
metal shavings and other contaminations.
Oil Pressure Regulator Installation

smr2011-015-003_a
TYPICAL
1. Oil pressure regulator
However, pay attention to the following details.
smr2012-016 13
Be careful that the O-ring on plug screw is in 1

place.
threads of the oil pressure regulator plug.
Torque plug screw to specification.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Oil pressure regulator
13 N•m (115 lbf•in)
plug
OIL PRESSURE PUMP

The oil pressure pump is located in the PTO hous-
ing and is driven by the balance shaft.
R1503motr126A
Oil Pressure Pump Removal
1. Outer oil pump rotor
1. Remove engine oil. See procedure in OIL
CHANGE in this subsection. 6. Extract the coolant/oil pump shaft from outside
2. Remove the PTO housing. Refer to PTO PTO housing cover with a pusher.
HOUSING AND MAGNETO subsection.
3. Remove water pump housing and the impeller. 1
Refer to COOLING SYSTEM subsection. 2
4. Remove screws securing the oil pump cover.
F18E16A
1. Pusher
2. Coolant/oil pump shaft
7. Remove rotary seal and oil seal. Refer to RO-

TARY SEAL further in this subsection.
R1503motr125A 1 Oil Pressure Pump Inspection
1. Screws Inspect coolant/oil pump shaft, housing and cover
2. Oil pump cover
for marks or other damages.
5. Pull and remove the outer oil pump rotor. Check inner rotor for corrosion pin-holes or other
damages. If so, replace coolant/oil pump shaft.
Ensure to also check oil pump housing and cover
and replace if damaged.
14 smr2012-016
R1503motr129A 1
1. Pittings on the teeth
Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance be-

tween inner and outer rotors. R1503motr131A 2 1
1. PTO housing surface
2. Vernier depth gauge
R1503motr132A 2 1
1. Oil pump outer rotor surface
R1503motr130A 2 1 2. Vernier depth gage
1. Outer rotor
2. Inner rotor Clearance between pump housing and outer rotor
should not exceed the following specification. If
OUTER AND INNER ROTOR CLEARANCE so, replace the complete oil pump assembly.
SERVICE LIMIT CLEARANCE BETWEEN PUMP HOUSING
A AND OUTER ROTOR
B 0.25 mm (.0098 in) 0.1 mm (.004 in)
C NOTE: When the axial clearance of the coolant/oil
pump shaft increases, the oil pressure decreases.
If clearance between inner and outer rotors ex-
ceeds the tolerance, replace coolant/oil pump Check the inside of oil pump housing and its cover
shaft. Ensure to also check oil pump housing and for scoring or other damages and replace if dam-
cover and replace if damaged. aged.
If clearance between outer rotor and its bore in Oil Pressure Pump Installation
oil pump exceeds the tolerance, replace the com-
plete oil pump and the PTO housing. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
Pay attention to the following details.
Using a vernier depth gauge, measure side wear
as shown. Install a NEW rotary seal and a NEW oil seal. Refer
to ROTARY SEAL in this subsection.
Install the coolant/oil pump shaft.
smr2012-016 15
NOTICE Never use a hammer for the After engine is completely reassembled, start en-
coolant/oil pump shaft installation. Only use a gine and make sure oil pressure is within specifi-
press to avoid damaging the ceramic compo- cations.
nent of the rotary seal.
REQUIRED TOOL
ROTARY SEAL
OIL SEAL GUIDE
Rotary Seal Removal
(P/N 529 035 822) Remove the coolant/oil pump shaft. Refer to OIL
PRESSURE PUMP in this subsection.
WATER PUMP SEAL PUSHER Carefully remove rotary seal with a screwdriver.
(P/N 529 035 823)
F18E17A
R1503motr142A 2 1
1. Oil seal guide NOTICE Be careful not to damage the surface
2. Coolant/oil pump shaft
of the rotary seal bore in PTO housing.
1 Remove also the oil seal behind the rotary seal.
F18E18A
1. Oil seal
R1503motr143A 2
1. Coolant/oil pump shaft with oil seal guide Discard rotary seal and oil seal.
2. Rotary seal pusher to support PTO housing
Rotary Seal Installation
threads of oil pump cover screws. The installation is the opposite of the removal pro-
cedure. Pay attention to the following details.
Tighten oil pump cover screws and torque to spec-
ification. NOTE: Never use oil in the press fit area of the oil
seal and rotary seal.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Push the NEW oil seal in place by using thumb.
Oil pump cover screws 9 N•m (80 lbf•in)
16 smr2012-016
1 Oil Suction Pump Removal

Models with Suspension
1. Remove jet pump and drive shaft. Refer to
STEERING AND PROPULSION section.
2. Remove the moving deck. Refer to BODY
(GTX, RXT AND WAKE PRO) subsection.
3. Remove the air intake silencer. Refer to AIR IN-
subsection.
4. Detach the muffler from the exhaust manifold
and move muffler backwards. Refer to EX-
HAUST SYSTEM subsection.
5. Remove engine support mount screws.
R1503motr128A
6. Move engine backwards, just enough to reach
1. Oil seal
oil suction pump cover screws.
Install the NEW rotary seal. All Models
REQUIRED TOOL 1. Remove retaining screws from oil filler tube.
WATER PUMP SEAL PUSHER

(P/N 529 035 823)
NOTICE Never use a hammer for the rotary

seal installation. Only use a press to avoid
damaging the ceramic component.
2 1
smr2009-023-010_a
1. Oil filler tube screws
2. Remove oil filler tube.

3. Remove retaining screws.
F18E19A
1. Rotary seal
2. Rotary seal installer
Install the coolant/oil pump shaft. Refer to OIL

PRESSURE PUMP in this subsection.
OIL SUCTION PUMP

The oil suction pump is located on the front side of
the engine inside of the oil suction pump housing
at the bottom of the oil filler tube.
smr2012-016 17
smr2009-023-011_a
1. Suction pump cover screws

smr2006-014-023_a
4. Place rags under cover to prevent spillage. If TYPICAL

1. Oil pump shaft
spillage occurs, clean with the PULLEY FLANGE 2. Outer rotor
CLEANER (P/N 413 711 809).
5. Remove the oil suction pump housing. 9. Remove oil strainer and cover gasket.
6. Remove oil pump screws and cover. Oil Suction Pump Inspection
Inspect oil pump shaft, housing and cover for
marks or other damages.
Check inner rotor for corrosion, pin-holes or other
damages. If so, replace oil pump shaft. Ensure
to also check oil pump housing and cover and re-
place if damaged.
smr2008-015-006_a
TYPICAL
1. Oil pump cover
2. Oil pump screws
7. Remove oil pump shaft.

8. Remove outer rotor. R1503motr137A
1. Pittings on the teeth
Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance be-

tween inner and outer rotors.
18 smr2012-016
A
B
C
R1503motr140A 1 2
R1503motr138A 2 1 1. Oil pump outer rotor surface
2. Vernier depth gage
1. Outer rotor
2. Inner rotor
Clearance between pump housing and outer rotor
OUTER AND INNER ROTOR CLEARANCE should not exceed the following specification. If
so, replace the complete oil pump assembly.
SERVICE LIMIT
A CLEARANCE BETWEEN PUMP HOUSING
AND OUTER ROTOR
B 0.25 mm (.0098 in)
0.1 mm (.004 in)
C
NOTE: When the axial clearance of the oil pump
If clearance between inner and outer rotors ex- shaft assembly increases, the oil pressure de-
ceeds the tolerance, replace oil pump shaft. En- creases.
sure to also check oil pump housing and cover and Check the inside of oil pump housing and its cover
replace if damaged. for scoring or other damages and replace if dam-
If clearance between outer rotor and its bore in aged.
oil pump exceeds the tolerance, replace the com- Inspect rubber ring gaskets.
plete oil pump and the PTO housing.
Using a vernier depth gage, measure side wear as
shown.
R1503motr139A 1 2 smr2006-014-020_a
1. Oil pump housing surface 1. Suction pump cover gasket

2. Vernier depth gage 2. Oil filler tube gasket
If rubber rings are brittle, cracked or hard, replace

them.
smr2012-016 19
Oil Suction Pump Installation

Clean both contact surfaces of oil suction pump
cover.
Check and clean the oil inlet and outlet area for dirt
and other contaminations.
smr2009-023-008_a
1. Screws M6 x 25
2. Screws M6 x 45
Tighten suction pump cover screws as per follow-

ing sequence.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Suction pump cover
screws
smr2009-023-007_a
1. Oil inlet
2. Oil outlet
Make sure oil strainer is properly installed in the

oil suction pump cover.
Apply engine oil on both rubber ring gaskets.
smr2009-023-009_a
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
Refer to the appropriate procedures and install all

other removed parts.
SUCTION PUMP OIL STRAINER

NOTE: The oil strainer does not need to be
cleaned at every oil change. Clean it during other
smr2006-014-020_a
inspections, especially when the engine is disas-
1. Suction pump cover gasket
2. Oil filler tube gasket sembled.
Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060) on Suction Pump Oil Strainer Removal
threads of the suction pump cover screws. Remove the oil suction pump cover as explained
Position screws according to their length as in OIL SUCTION PUMP REMOVAL
shown. Remove oil strainer from the suction pump cover.
20 smr2012-016
smr2008-015-007_a
1. Banjo bolt
2. Supercharger oil spray nozzle
3. Oil spray nozzle support
4. Torx screw
Supercharger Oil Spray Nozzle

Inspection
smr2006-014-022_a
Check oil spray nozzle for:
1. Oil strainer – Dirt
2. Suction pump cover
– Bend
Suction Pump Oil Strainer Inspection – Other damages.
Clean oil strainer with a part cleaner then use com- Replace if necessary.
pressed air to dry it.
Supercharger Oil Spray Nozzle
Check oil strainer for tear or other damages. Re- Installation
place it if necessary.
For installation reverse the removal procedure.
Suction Pump Oil Strainer Installation However, pay attention to the following.
For installation of the suction pump cover, refer to Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060) on
OIL SUCTION PUMP in this subsection. threads of Torx screw.
Install the oil spray nozzle support.
SUPERCHARGER OIL SPRAY TIGHTENING TORQUE
NOZZLE Oil spray nozzle support
11 N•m (97 lbf•in)
Supercharger Oil Spray Nozzle (Torx screw)
Removal
Install oil spray nozzle with Banjo bolt.
Remove the PTO housing. Refer to PTO HOUS-
ING AND MAGNETO subsection. TIGHTENING TORQUE
Remove the Torx screw securing the oil spray noz- Oil spray nozzle Banjo
19 N•m (168 lbf•in)
zle support. bolt
Unscrew the Banjo bolt. Adjust the position of the oil spray nozzle.
REQUIRED TOOL
SUPERCHARGER OIL
SPRAY NOZZLE TOOL
(P/N 529 036 134)
The distance between the adjustment tool and oil

spray nozzle must be within 1 mm (.039 in).
smr2012-016 21
NOTE: When the scope of repair work obligates

you to split the cylinder block, take this opportu-
nity to clean the oil spray nozzles.
Piston Oil Spray Nozzle Removal

Remove cylinder block lower half. Refer to CYLIN-
DER BLOCK subsection.
Remove oil spray nozzle and Banjo fitting from
cylinder block upper half.
smr2008-015-008_a
A. 1 mm (.039 in)
NOTE: Make sure that the oil spray nozzle is fac-

ing to the center of the tool. Not following this
procedure will lead to an insufficient oiling of the
supercharger and a supercharger failure can oc-
curs. Adjust the oil spray nozzle if necessary by
slightly bending it, take care not to over bend the
oil spray nozzle.
mmr2009-111-048_a
1. Banjo fitting
2. Oil spray nozzle
Piston Oil Spray Nozzle Cleaning and

Inspection
smr2008-015-009_a
Clean oil spray nozzle and Banjo fitting from dirt
1. Center of supercharger oil spray nozzle tool and debris. Use a part cleaner, then compressed
air and dry the parts.
PISTON OIL SPRAY NOZZLES Check if ball inside Banjo fitting moves freely.
The piston oil spray nozzles are located on the up-
per half of cylinder block.
mmr2009-111-049_a
1. Ball
2. Spring
3. Banjo fitting
4. Oil spray nozzle
smr2009-023-012_a
1. Piston oil spray nozzles

NOTE: If the oil spray nozzle is damaged or bent
during work in the cylinder block, it must be re-
placed immediately.
22 smr2012-016
Piston Oil Spray Nozzle Installation NOTE: Make sure not to loose thrust washer
when removing it from oil separator cover, oth-
NOTICE At assembly make sure the contact erwise thrust washer would fall into the PTO
surface of the oil spray nozzle is well fitted onto housing.
the cylinder block. If this is not ensured, the oil
spray direction will change, causing potential
engine damage.
smr2009-023-016_a
1. Thrust washer
2. Oil separator cover
mmr2009-111-050_a
5. Remove spark plug tube.
1. Oil spray nozzle
2. Contact surface 6. Remove rocker arm shaft together with rocker
arms, refer to CYLINDER HEAD subsection.
OIL SEPARATOR COVER 7. Remove chain guide and camshaft guide.
Oil Separator Cover Removal
1. Remove the blow-by valve. See procedure in
this subsection.
2. Remove camshaft position sensor.
smr2006-014-066_a
1. Rocker arm
2. Camshaft guide
3. Chain guide
8. Move camshaft backwards as far as possible.

9. Remove oil separator cover from timing gear by
smr2009-023-015_a releasing the holding clips.
1. Camshaft position sensor
2. Screw
3. Remove cylinder head cover, refer to CYLIN-

DER HEAD subsection.
4. Remove thrust washer from oil separator cover.
smr2012-016 23
BLOW-BY VALVE
Blow-By Valve Description
The function of the blow-by valve is the circulation
of the oil vapors.
Blow-By Valve Operation

Normal Operation
During its normal operation, the blow-by valve al-
lows crankcase vapors to return in the intake sys-
tem where they are harmlessly burned.
smr2006-014-067_a
1. Camshaft
2. Oil separator cover
NOTE: Be careful not to break the holding clips

from oil separator cover when its removed from
the timing gear.
Oil Separator Cover Inspection

Inspect oil separator cover for marks or other dam-
ages. Ensure to check also the holding clips of oil
separator cover and for thrust washer. If any dam-
age is visible replace oil separator cover.
smr2009-023-019_a
NORMAL OPERATION
By-Pass Function
If, for any reason, the valve piston gets stuck
at normal operation and the crankcase pressure
exceeds 40 kPa (6 PSI), the pressure unseats a
check ball and crankcase vapors can bypass the
valve piston.
smr2006-014-037_a
1. Holding clips
Oil Separator Cover Installation

Properly install oil separator cover and thrust
washer. They need to be in a perfect even posi-
tion with timing gear.
NOTE: Make sure not to lose thrust washer when
installed on oil separator cover.
For installation of rocker arm shaft with rocker
arms, follow the procedure as it is described in
CYLINDER HEAD subsection.
Install all other removed parts.
24 smr2012-016
smr2009-023-014_a
1. TOPS switch connector

2. Retaining screws
smr2009-023-021_a
Remove and discard O-ring and V-ring.
BY-PASS FUNCTION NOTE: The blow-by valve can not be disassem-
bled.
Blow-By Valve Removal
Remove:
– Deck extension, refer to BODY (GTX, RXT AND
WAKE PRO) subsection
– Air intake silencer, refer to AIR INTAKE SYS-
TEM (MODELS WITH SUSPENSION) subsec-
tion.
All Models
Remove ventilation hose from blow-by valve.
Remove the CPS connector from its support on
blow-by valve.
smr2009-023-022_a
1. Blow-by valve
2. V-ring
3. O-ring
Blow-By Valve Inspection

If blow-by valve is damaged, replace it.
Clean all contact surfaces of blow-by valve.
Place a clean rag on valve inlet.
Blow air through inlet port. Air must flow freely to
smr2009-023-013_a
the outlet port.
1. Blow-by valve
2. CPS connector
Disconnect the TOPS switch connector of the

blow-by valve.
Unscrew and remove the blow-by valve.
smr2012-016 25
TOPS SWITCH
Tip Over Protection Switch (TOPS
Switch) Function
The function of the TOPS switch is the engine pro-
tection in the event the watercraft tip over.
During normal operation the TOPS switch state is
OFF, no signal to the ECM.
If the watercraft tips over, gravity causes a valve
piston to close and no engine oil will leak out of
the blow-by valve.
In this event, a pin (with magnet) opens a gap
to the TOPS switch (Hall effect sensor) and the
smr2009-023-023_a
TOPS changes its state to ON and sends a signal
Turn valve upside down and blow air again. Air to the ECM.
must not flow out. The ECM will shut down the engine by cutting the
ignition and the fuel injection.
smr2009-023-024_a
smr2009-023-018_a
BLOW-BY VALVE CUT-AWAY

If test fails, replace blow-by valve. 1. Valve housing
2. Valve sleeve
3. Valve piston
Blow-By Valve Installation 4. Check ball
5. Valve pin (with magnet)
The installation is the reverse of the removal pro- 6. TOPS switch of the blow-by valve
Install the blow-by valve with NEW O-ring and
V-ring.
threads of blow-by valve screws.
Tighten blow-by valve screws to specification.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Blow-by valve screws 9 N•m (80 lbf•in)
Reinstall remaining removed parts.
26 smr2012-016
NOTE: After voltage test, clear the fault codes in

the ECM using the B.U.D.S. software.
TOPS Switch Output Voltage Test

Remove the blow-by valve.
Back-probe TOPS connector and check voltage.
REQUIRED TOOL
FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER

(P/N 529 035 868)
NOTE: To easily probe wire terminals through the

back of the connector, use the FLUKE RIGID BACK
PROBES (P/N TP88) or an equivalent.
smr2009-023-020_a
TIP OVER FUNCTION
TOPS Switch Input Voltage Test

Remove:
– Deck extension, refer to BODY (GTX, RXT AND
WAKE PRO) subsection.
– Air intake silencer, refer to appropriate AIR IN-
TAKE SYSTEM subsection.
All Models
Disconnect the TOPS switch connector of the smr2009-023-050_a
blow-by valve. BLOW-BY VALVE IN NORMAL POSITION

1. Blow-by valve
Briefly press the START/STOP button to wake-up 2. RED probe into pin 2
3. BLACK probe into pin 1
the ECM.
Probe terminals as shown to check the voltage BLOW-BY
TOPS SWITCH
output from the ECM. VALVE VOLTAGE
CONNECTOR
POSITION
TOPS SWITCH CONNECTOR VOLTAGE
Pin 1 and pin 2 Normal position 0.4 ± 0.1 Vdc
Approximately
Pins 2 and 3 Pin 1 and pin 2 Upside down 4.4 ± 0.2 Vdc
5 Vdc
Normal position Approximately
Pin 2 and pin 3
or upside down 5 Vdc
Replace TOPS switch if not within specification.
TOPS Switch Circuit Continuity Test

Disconnect the TOPS switch connector of the
blow-by valve.
Disconnect the connector "A" from the ECM.
Check continuity of the blow-by valve TOPS
smr2009-023-103_a switch circuit as per following table.
If voltage test is good, check the TOPS switch out-

put voltage.
If voltage test is not good, check the continuity of
the blow-by valve TOPS switch circuit.
smr2012-016 27
REQUIRED TOOL
ECM ADAPTER TOOL

(P/N 529 036 166)
FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER

(P/N 529 035 868)
TOPS SWITCH ECM

RESISTANCE
CONNECTOR ADAPTER smr2009-023-052_a
Pin 1 Pin F4 1. TOPS valve inscriptions

Close to 0
Pin 2 Pin G1
(continuity) OIL COOLER
Pin 3 Pin C4
The oil cooler is located below the air intake man-
ifold.
smr2009-023-103_b
1. Pin 1
2. Pin 2
3. Pin 3
If continuity test is good, check ECM. Refer to

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI) subsection.
If continuity test is not good, repair or replace de- smr2009-023-025_a
fective wires or connectors. 1. Oil cooler
TOPS Switch Replacement Oil Cooler Removal

Remove blow-by valve and turn it upside down. Remove engine from vehicle. Refer to ENGINE
Insert a small screwdriver between TOPS switch REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION subsection.
and its retaining tab. Twist and hold the TOPS Disconnect cooling hoses from oil cooler.
switch then release the other retaining tab.
Remove screws securing oil cooler.
smr2009-023-051
When installing the TOPS switch, make sure

printed information is visible.
28 smr2012-016
smr2007-015-007_a
1. Oil cooler crews

2. Oil cooler
Remove oil cooler from engine. Ensure not to lose

O-rings located between oil cooler and engine.
R1503motr148A 1
1. O-rings
Oil Cooler Inspection

If O-rings are brittle, cracked or hard, replace
them.
Clean both contact surfaces of oil cooler.
Check and clean the oil inlet and outlet area for dirt
and other contaminations.
Oil Cooler Installation

Apply engine oil on O-rings.
threads of oil cooler screws.
Tighten oil cooler screws to specification.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Oil cooler screws 9 N•m (80 lbf•in)
smr2012-016 29
Subsection XX (COOLING SYSTEM)
COOLING SYSTEM
SERVICE TOOLS
OETIKER PLIERS........................................................................... 295 000 070 ........................................... 8
TEST CAP ...................................................................................... 529 035 991 ........................................... 7
SERVICE PRODUCTS
BRP PREMIXED COOLANT .......................................................... 219 700 362 ........................................... 5
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ........................................... 11
LOCTITE 567 (PIPE SEALANT) ..................................................... 293 800 013 ........................................... 6
smr2012-017 1
COOLING SYSTEM (CLOSED LOOP)
Bleed hose
from cylinder
Coolant temperature head to
sensor (CTS) expansion
activates when coolant tank
temperature exceeds
100°C (212°F)
Expansion
Coolant housing coolant tank
including thermostat
opens at 87°C (188°F) Coolant
and water pump returns
impeller from oil
cooler
Coolant flows
to oil cooler
Coolant flows
to ride plate Oil
cooler
Coolant returns
from ride plate
Ride plate
(operates as heat
exchanger)
smr2011-016-001_aen
2 smr2012-017
COOLING SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1.7 Nm
(15 lbfin)
4 Nm 4 Nm
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
smr2011-016-002_a
smr2012-017 3
COOLING SYSTEM COMPONENTS (ENGINE)
NEW
17 Nm
(150 lbfin)
NEW
Loctite
243
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
NEW
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
(left-hand threads)
smr2010-024-100_b
4 smr2012-017
GENERAL Technical Specifications

TYPE Closed loop cooling system.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COOLANT FLOW Flow from water pump.
A closed loop cooling system is utilized on the
TEMPERATURE
1503 4-TEC engines, which offers an efficient CONTROL
Thermostat.
engine cooling while keeping dirt and salt water
out of the cooling system. This system keeps Self-bleed type through
SYSTEM
the temperature constant and prevents internal coolant tank (hose at
BLEEDING
engine corrosion. uppermost point of circuit).
A separate coolant tank ensures that enough en- MONITORING
Turns on at 110°C (230°F).
gine coolant is in the circuit during any operating BEEPER
condition.
The coolant flow comes from the water pump im- MAINTENANCE
peller into the cylinder block. It goes around the
cylinders and straight up to the cylinder head. A ENGINE COOLANT
smaller quantity of engine coolant enters the cylin-
der block on the exhaust side for a better cool- WARNING
ing. In the cylinder head the water channels flow To avoid potential burns, do not remove the
around the exhaust and then the intake valves and coolant tank cap or loosen the ride plate drain
leave the engine through a large hose. From there plug if the engine is hot.
the coolant goes back to the water pump hous-
ing and depending on the engine temperature, it
flows through the thermostat directly back to the Recommended Coolant
water pump impeller, or it takes its way through Use BRP PREMIXED COOLANT (P/N 219 700 362) or
the heat exchanger. a blend of 50% antifreeze with 50% distilled wa-
Engine coolant is also directed towards the oil ter.
cooler (coolant type). NOTE: Using a blend of 40% antifreeze with
Coolant temperature sensor and bleed hose nip- 60% distilled water will improve the cooling effi-
ple are located on the cylinder head. ciency when watercraft is used in particularly hot
weather and/or hot water condition.
NOTICE A blend of 40% antifreeze with 60%
distilled water will improve the cooling effi-
ciency. Using water tap instead of distilled
water, would contribute to make deposits in
cooling system and to reduce antifreeze effi-
ciency. This could lead to engine overheating.
To prevent antifreeze deterioration, always use
the same brand. Never mix different brands un-
less cooling system is completely flushed and
refilled.
NOTICE To prevent rust formation or freezing
condition in cold areas, always replenish the
smr2009-024-002_a system with 50% antifreeze and 50% distilled
1. Bleed hose nipple water. Pure antifreeze will freeze at a higher
2. Coolant temperature sensor (CTS) temperature than the optimal water/antifreeze
NOTICE Never modify cooling system ar- mix. Always use ethylene glycol antifreeze
rangement, otherwise serious engine damage containing corrosion inhibitors specifically
could occur. recommended for aluminum engines.
smr2012-017 5
Draining the System Thereafter, engine can be run one last time to soak
off deposits.
WARNING Drain and thoroughly rinse the cooling system
Never drain or refill cooling system when en- with clean fresh water.
gine is hot. Refill cooling system as described below.
Open or remove seat. Refilling the System
On models with suspension, remove the rear Watercraft should be level, engine cold and drain
ventilation box. plug removed for refilling.
Install a drain pan underneath the ride plate. Place a container under drain plug to collect an-
Unscrew the drain plug on ride plate. tifreeze.
NOTE: Raising the front of the watercraft will con- Apply LOCTITE 567 (PIPE SEALANT) (P/N 293 800
tribute to drain the cooling system. 013) on drain plug threads.
Ask someone to pour recommended antifreeze in
coolant tank.
When antifreeze flows out from the ride plate
drain hole, reinstall drain plug. Torque drain plug
to specification.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Drain plug 8.5 N•m (75 lbf•in)
Continue to pour and fill coolant tank between

smr2009-024-102_a
marks.
1. Cooling drain plug
Remove the coolant tank cap.

Dispose coolant as per local regulations.
Do not reinstall drain plug at this time.
Cleaning the System

NOTICE Cleaning the cooling system as per
the following procedure is required when en-
gine overheats (assuming everything else is
operating normally) or each time coolant is
replaced.
Drain the cooling system.
Add a cleaning product such as the Zerex® Super
Cleaner by Valvoline (or an equivalent) in coolant
tank then fill cooling system with demineralized
water.
Reinstall cap on coolant tank. smr2011-016-004_a
TYPICAL – GTI, GTS,GTR, RXP AND WAKE 155

Install watercraft in a test basin or ride on a water 1. Level between marks when engine is cold
plane. Start engine and run for approximately 15
minutes.
IMPORTANT: Ensure thermostat opens so that
the cleaning product flows in ride plate properly.
Stop engine and let the cleaning product work for
12 to 16 hours.
6 smr2012-017
When engine has completely cooled down,

recheck coolant level coolant tank and top up if
necessary.
INSPECTION
COOLING SYSTEM LEAK TEST
WARNING
To avoid potential burns, do not remove the
coolant tank cap or loosen the ride plate drain
smo2009-002-137_a plug if the engine is hot.
TYPICAL – GTX, RXT AND WAKE PRO 215
1. Level between marks when engine is cold
Open or remove seat.
Do not install pressure cap at this time. On models with suspension, remove the deck
Link a garden hose to the hose adapter at the back extension. Refer to BODY subsection.
of the watercraft. Refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM Install the TEST CAP (P/N 529 035 991) on the
FLUSHING in the EXHAUST SYSTEM subsection. coolant tank.
water to the exhaust system.
Start engine and let run for a maximum of 2 min-
utes. Stop engine and wait 15 minutes to cool
down. Refill tank as necessary.
NOTICE Never run engine longer than 2 min-
utes. Drive line seal has no cooling when wa-
tercraft is out of water.
529035991
NOTE: Properly cool exhaust system by installing
a garden hose. Refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM sub- NOTE: It is not necessary to install a hose pincher
section. on overflow hose.
Repeat this run-stop cycle 2-3 times until thermo- Connect the VACUUM/PRESSURE PUMP (P/N 529
stat opens and stop engine. 021 800) to test cap and pressurize system
through coolant tank to 90 kPa (13 PSI).
smr2009-024-103_a
TYPICAL
1. Vacuum/pressure pump
smr2009-024-003_a 2. Test cap
1. This hose becomes hot when thermostat opens
Check all hoses, ride plate, engine and oil cooler
Last, refill coolant tank and install pressure cap. for coolant leaks. Spray a soap and water solution
and look for air bubbles.
smr2012-017 7
Check the leak indicator hole if there is oil or 8. Internal passage blocked in cooling system
coolant. If so, replace appropriate water pump - Inspect and clean.
shaft seal.
PROCEDURES
PRESSURE CAP
Pressure Cap Inspection
Using a pressure cap tester, check cap opening
pressure. If opening pressure is out of range, in-
stall a new pressure cap.
CAP OPENING PRESSURE
90 kPa ± 10 kPa
Opening range
(13 PSI ± 1.5 PSI)
CLAMPS
smr2009-024-004_a
1. Leak indicator hole

Clamp Replacement
To cut or secure Oetiker clamps of cooling system
TROUBLESHOOTING hoses, use the OETIKER PLIERS (P/N 295 000 070).

lems.
tected, service the fault code first. Refer to DIAG-
1
ENGINE OVERHEATING
1. Low coolant level.
- Refill and check for leaks (coolant leaking out
of engine leak indicator hole, hoses or clamps
missing/defective, cylinder head gaskets leaks,
ride plate leaking, etc.). Repair or replace.
2
2. Air in cooling system F01B2KA
- Refill and bleed cooling system. 1. Cutting clamp

2. Securing clamp
3. Thermostat defective (does not open when en-
gine gets hot) NOTE: Always check general condition of hoses
- Replace thermostat housing. and clamp tightness.
4. Water pump failure
- Inspect and replace defective components.
5. Water temperature sensor defective
- Check or replace. Refer to ELECTRONIC FUEL
INJECTION (EFI).
6. Ride plate or hoses damaged
- Check or replace damaged components.
7. Exhaust system clogged
- Flush exhaust system.
8 smr2012-017
WATER PUMP HOUSING
smr2010-024-201_a
SUPERCHARGED ENGINE
1. Detach intake hose at throttle body
2. Supercharger hose
All Models
1. On supercharged engines, remove also the
hose from the supercharger.
smr2009-024-004_b
1. Water pump housing 2. Drain cooling system and engine oil.

3. Disconnect the coolant tank hose from water
Water Pump Housing Access pump housing and move coolant tank aside to
Models Without Suspension make room.
1. Remove seat. 4. Disconnect exhaust hose from the resonator.
Place hose over muffler.
2. Remove the rear handle, RXP-X models.
3. Detach the air intake hose from the throttle Water Pump Housing Removal
body, GTR and RXP-X models. Disconnect ride plate hoses from water pump
Models With Suspension housing.
1. Remove moving deck and deck extension. Re-
fer to BODY subsection.
subsection:
3. Detach the air intake hose from the throttle
body.
smr2009-024-107_a
TYPICAL
1. Ride plate outlet hose
2. Ride plate inlet hose
Disconnect the cylinder head outlet hose and oil

cooler hoses.
smr2010-024-200_a
NATURALLY-ASPIRATED ENGINE
smr2012-017 9
F18E11A
smr2009-024-006_a
TYPICAL 1. Water pump housing gasket

1. Water pump housing
2. Cylinder head hose
3. Oil cooler inlet hose Check if thermostat is in good condition. Refer to
4. Oil cooler outlet hose THERMOSTAT in this subsection.
Remove water pump housing screws. Water Pump Housing Leak Test
Plug the connections of the oil cooler return hose,
coolant tank hose, ride plate return hose and cylin-
der head return hose with a rag.
smr2008-016-004_a 4
TYPICAL
Pull the water pump housing to remove it. 2

Water Pump Housing Inspection
Check if gasket is brittle, hard or damaged and re-
place as necessary. F18E12A 1 3
1. Oil cooler return connection
2. Coolant tank hose connection
3. Ride plate return hose connection
4. Cylinder head return hose connection
Fill the water pump housing with water.

If a bigger quantity of coolant leaks out at the ride
plate outlet connection, replace the water pump
housing.
If there is no leak, check the operation of the ther-
mostat.
Water Pump Housing Installation

The installation is the opposite of the removal pro-
10 smr2012-017

threads of water pump housing screws.
1
Install screws as per the following illustration.
F18E13A
1
1. Impeller
NOTICE Coolant/oil pump shaft and impeller

F18E10A
have left-hand threads. Remove by turning
1. Screws M6 x 25 clockwise and install by turning counterclock-
2. Screws M6 x 105
wise.
NOTICE To prevent leaking, take care that the
gaskets are exactly in groove when you rein- Water Pump Impeller Inspection
stall the water pump housing. Check impeller for cracks or other damage. Re-
place impeller if damaged.
Tighten screws to specification using the follow-
ing sequence. Water Pump Impeller Installation
The installation is the opposite of the removal pro-
7 8 1 cedure. Pay attention to the following details.
NOTICE Be careful not to damage impeller
wings during installation.
6
Torque impeller to specification.
5
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Water pump impeller 3 N•m (27 lbf•in)
4 THERMOSTAT
The thermostat is a single action type.
F18E10B 2 3
Thermostat Removal
TIGHTENING TORQUE Remove the WATER PUMP HOUSING, see pro-
Water pump housing cedure in this subsection.
screws NOTE: The thermostat is located inside the water
pump housing.
WATER PUMP IMPELLER Thermostat Test
Water Pump Impeller Removal To check the operation of the thermostat, put it in
Remove the WATER PUMP HOUSING, see pro- water and heat water.
cedure in this subsection. Look inside the cylinder head return hose con-
Unscrew the impeller clockwise. nection to see the movement of the thermostat.
Thermostat should open when water tempera-
ture reaches 87°C (189°F).
smr2012-017 11
If there is no operation, replace the water pump

housing.
Thermostat Installation
For installation, reverse the removal procedure,
paying attention to the following details.
Refer to WATER PUMP HOUSING in this subsec-
tion.
ROTARY SEAL
Rotary Seal Inspection
Check leak indicator hole for oil or coolant leak.
smr2009-024-004_a
1. Leak indicator hole
Coolant leaking out of the hole indicates a defec-

tive rotary seal. Leaking oil indicates a faulty oil
seal.
Rotary seal and oil seal must be replaced together.
Rotary Seal Replacement

Refer to LUBRICATION SYSTEM subsection.
12 smr2012-017
Subsection XX (CYLINDER HEAD)
CYLINDER HEAD
SERVICE TOOLS
CAMSHAFT LOCKING TOOL........................................................ 529 035 839 ........................................... 10
DRIVE SHAFT ADAPTER............................................................... 529 035 985 ............................................. 3
ENGINE LEAK DOWN TEST KIT ................................................... 529 035 661 ............................................. 4
VALVE GUIDE PUSHER (6 MM) .................................................... 529 036 087 ........................................... 19
VALVE GUIDE REMOVER (6 MM) ................................................ 529 036 086 ........................................... 19
VALVE SPRING COMPRESSOR CUP............................................ 529 036 073 ........................................... 14
VALVE SPRING COMPRESSOR .................................................... 529 035 724 ........................................... 14

SNAP-ON VALVE STEM SEAL PLIERS ......................................... YA8230 ........................................... 15
SERVICE PRODUCTS
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ..................................... 10, 13
MOLYKOTE G-N ............................................................................ 420 297 433 ........................................... 19
smr2012-018 1
See
IGNITION
SYSTEM
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
NEW
20 Nm
Engine oil (15 lbfft)
+ 90o
Engine oil
Loctite
243
Isoflex NEW
grease
Topas
NB52
9 Nm Engine oil

9 Nm
(80 lbfin) (80 lbfin) Loctite Loctite
243 243
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
For replacement Engine oil
see CYLINDER
BLOCK
See ELECTRONIC
NEW
FUEL INJECTION 40 Nm
(30 lbfft)
+120° + 90o
Engine oil
Engine oil
Loctite 243
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
NEW

smr2010-025-001_b
2 smr2012-018
GENERAL
NOTE: When diagnosing an engine problem, al-
ways perform an engine leak test. This will help
pin-point a problem. Refer to ENGINE LEAK TEST
in this subsection for procedures.
When disassembling parts that are duplicated in
the engine, (e.g.: valves, bushings), it is strongly
recommended to note their position and to keep
them as a “group”. If you find a defective com-
ponent, it will be much easier to find the cause
of the failure. Since parts were break-in together
during the engine operation, they will keep their
smr2009-025-002_a
matched fit when parts are reassemble together
1. Oil dipstick
within their “group”.
6. Unplug and remove ignition coils.
INSPECTION 7. Remove spark plugs.
NOTE: Ignition coil may be used as an extractor.
ENGINE LEAK TEST
The procedure has to be done when engine oper-
ating temperature of approximately 70°C (158°F)
is reached.
WARNING
Be careful to burns when working on a hot
engine.
Preparation
1. Remove any required parts to give access to
engine.
2. Remove the tether cord.
3. Remove jet pump (refer to JET PUMP subsec- smr2009-025-003_a
tion). 1. Ignition coil

2. Spark plug
4. Remove coolant pressure cap.
8. Remove CYLINDER HEAD COVER, see proce-
WARNING dure in this subsection.
To avoid potential burns, only remove the 9. Install the drive shaft adapter and an appropri-
coolant pressure cap by wearing the appro- ate wrench lever on drive shaft end.
priate safety equipment. REQUIRED TOOL
5. Remove oil dipstick.

DRIVE SHAFT ADAPTER
(P/N 529 035 985)
smr2012-018 3
Leak Test Procedure 4. Supply combustion chamber with air.

NOTE: Cylinder numbers are molded on cylinder
head cover.
1. Rotate engine crankshaft counterclockwise un-
til the cylinder 1 is at Top Dead Center (TDC) 1
compression stroke.
1.1 As the engine crankshaft is turned over,
observe the movement of intake rocker
arm of the cylinder to be checked. 3
1.2 After piston completes its cycle and the
intake valve closes, observe the piston. 2
1.3 When it reaches its uppermost position
this is TDC compression stroke.
R1503motr157A
TYPICAL
1. Leak down tester gauge
2. Gauge adapter
3. Air supply hose
5. Note the amount of leaking or percentage (de-

pending on tester).
LEAKAGE
ENGINE CONDITION
PERCENTAGE
Up to 15% Excellent condition
16% to 25% Good condition
R1503motr156A Fair condition; engine will run
1. Intake rocker arms 26% to 40% and performance might be
down in some cases
2. Secure the wrench lever, at the end of the drive Poor condition, diagnose and
shaft, against hull to prevent further crankshaft 41% and higher
repair engine
rotation.
3. Install the leak down test tool. 6. Proceed the same way with remaining cylin-
ders.
REQUIRED TOOL
ENGINE LEAK Diagnostic
DOWN TEST KIT Pressurize area to be tested, spray soap/water so-
(P/N 529 035 661) lution at the indicated location and look and/or lis-
ten for air bubbles.
3.1 Install the appropriate gauge adapter into
spark plug hole.
3.2 Connect the leak down tester gauge to the
gauge adapter.
3.3 Connect to an adequate pressurized air
supply.
3.4 Set needle of measuring gauge to zero (0).
NOTE: Each tester will have specific instruction
on the gauge operation and required pressure.
Refer to manufacturer's instructions.
4 smr2012-018
OBSERVATION CAUSE 4. Rocker arm screw not properly tightened

- Retighten screws with recommended torquing
Air escaping on intake procedure.
Leaking intake valve(s)
port
5. Faulty chain tensioner
Air escaping on
Leaking exhaust valve(s) - Replace chain tensioner.
exhaust port
Air escaping into Excessively worn and/or 6. Chain guide is worn out
crankcase broken piston rings - Replace chain guide.
Air bubbles out of Leaking cylinder head 7. Stretched timing chain or worn out sprocket
coolant tank gasket - Replace timing chain and sprocket.
Air/water
Damaged gasket and/or 8. Camshaft is worn out
escaping from
loosened screws - Check if camshaft radial clearance is out of spec-
cylinder-block/head
ification.
Damaged gasket and/or
Coolant escaping from
water pump housing
loosened screws (refer to OIL LEAKAGE FROM CYLINDER HEAD
COOLING SYSTEM)
1. Cylinder head cover gasket is leaking
Damaged rotary seal on
Coolant escaping from - Replace cylinder head cover gasket and retighten
water pump shaft (refer to screws with recommended torque.
leak indicator hole
COOLING SYSTEM)
- Check cylinder head cover for cracks or other
Oily contamination on Damaged oil seal on water damage. Replace if necessary.
leak indicator hole pump shaft
2. Cylinder head cover screws are leaking
- Replace cylinder head cover screws.
Reassembly
3. Spark plug tube gasket is leaking
For reassembly, reverse the preparation proce-
dure. Use torque values and service products - Remove cylinder head cover and replace spark
plug tube gasket.
from the exploded views (refer to proper ENGINE
subsections). - Clean spark plug area from oil spillage.
Properly install ignition coils. Refer to IGNITION 4. Blow by valve is leaking
SYSTEM subsection. - Replace blow by valve O-ring.
5. Camshaft sensor O-ring is leaking
TROUBLESHOOTING - Replace camshaft sensor O-ring.
The following is provided to help in diagnosing the 6. Cylinder head gasket is leaking
probable source of problems. It is a guideline and
- Remove cylinder head and check for damage.
lems. - Replace cylinder head gasket and retighten
screws with recommended torquing procedure.
tected, service the fault code first. Refer to DIAG- ENGINE LACKS ACCELERATION OR
NOSTIC AND FAULT CODES section. POWER
UNUSUAL ENGINE NOISE OR 1. Incorrect camshaft timing adjustment
VIBRATIONS - Replace damaged components and readjust
camshaft timing.
1. Incorrect camshaft timing adjustment
2. Intake or exhaust valves are leaking
- Replace damaged components and readjust
camshaft timing. - Perform ENGINE LEAK TEST.
- Check if valve seats properly in valve seat.
2. Camshaft timing gear screws got loose
- Repair or replace damaged components.
- Retighten screws with the recommended torque.
3. Broken valve spring(s)
3. Rocker arm(s) hydraulic element is broken or
worn out (improper valve adjustment). - Replace defective parts.
- Replace faulty rocker arm(s). 4. Broken rocker arm(s)
- Replace defective parts.
smr2012-018 5
PROCEDURES
CYLINDER HEAD COVER
Cylinder Head Cover Access
Open or remove seat.
On models with suspension, remove the rear
ventilation cover.
Cylinder Head Cover Removal

1. Unplug and remove ignition coils.
smr2006-016-028_a
1. Cylinder head cover

2. Gasket
Cylinder Head Cover Inspection

Check if the gasket on the cylinder head cover
and the rubber bushing on the cylinder head cover
screws are brittle, cracked or hard. If so, replace
the gasket or the cylinder head cover screw ac-
cordingly.
Cylinder Head Cover Installation

smr2009-025-005_a
Properly seat the gasket in the cover groove.
1. Ignition coils
Install the cylinder head cover screws according
2. Remove screws securing the cylinder head to following sequence.
cover.
smr2008-017-005_a
1. Cylinder head cover screws
3. Remove the cylinder head cover and its gasket.

smr2006-016-026_a
TYPICAL
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Cylinder head cover
screws
Install all other removed parts. Refer to proper

subsection for procedure.
6 smr2012-018
SPARK PLUG TUBES

1
Spark Plug Tube Removal
Remove the CYLINDER HEAD COVER, see pro-
Pull spark plug tubes to remove them.
R1503motr93B
1. Rocker arm shaft screw
4. Remove rocker arm shaft with rocker arms.
3
R1503motr83A
1. Spark plug tube
Spark Plug Tube Inspection

Check seals on spark plug tube. If seals are brittle,
cracked or hard, replace spark plug tube. R1503motr84A 2
1. Rocker arm shaft
2. Rocker arms (exhaust side)
3. Rocker arm (intake side)
Rocker Arm Inspection

Inspect each rocker arm for cracks and scored fric-
tion surfaces. If so, replace rocker arm assembly.
Check the rocker arm rollers for free movement,
wear and excessive radial play. Replace rocker
smr2005-036-001_a arm assembly as necessary.
TYPICAL
1. Spark plug tube
2. Seal to the cylinder head cover
3. Seal to the cylinder head
Spark Plug Tube Installation

Pay attention to the following detail.
Apply engine oil on seals.
ROCKER ARMS
Rocker Arm Removal smr2008-017-006_a
1. Remove the CYLINDER HEAD COVER, see 1. Rocker arm (intake side)
2. Rocker arm (exhaust side)
procedure in this subsection. 3. Rollers
2. Remove spark plug tubes. A. Rocker arm inside diameter
3. Remove and discard rocker arm shaft screws.
smr2012-018 7
Measure rocker arm inside diameter. If diameter 1

is out of specification, change the rocker arm as-
sembly.
ROCKER ARM INSIDE DIAMETER
20.007 mm - 20.020 mm
NEW
(.7877 in - .7882 in)
Press the hydraulic lifter with your thumb. If the

hydraulic lifter can be fully pressed in, replace
rocker arm. Lifter must turn freely in rocker arm
bore. Otherwise, replace.
Rocker Arm Shaft
R1503motr85A
Check for scored friction surfaces, if so, replace
parts. 1. Oil orifices from the camshaft to the rocker arm shaft, then to
the rocker arms and finally to the valve adjustment
Measure rocker arm shaft diameter.
Rocker Arm Installation
NOTE: The rocker arm shaft can only be installed
in one specific position. Therefore the camshaft
has to be positioned with its locking pin when the
R1503motr90A A piston of cylinder 3 is on ignition TDC.
A. Measure rocker arm shaft diameter here 1. Lock camshaft. Refer to CAMSHAFT in this
ROCKER ARM SHAFT DIAMETER
subsection.
2. Make sure the position lines on oil separator
19.980 mm - 19.993 mm
NEW cover are lined up as shown in the following il-
(.7866 in - .7871 in)
lustration.
Any area worn excessively will require parts re-

placement.
Verify and clean oil orifices to ensure a good rocker
arm shaft lubrication.
smr2009-025-006_a
1. Position lines
3. Apply engine oil on rocker arm shaft.

4. Position the rocker arm shaft with the notches
on top.
8 smr2012-018
2
1 CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR
NOTE: Although it is not necessary to position
crankshaft to TDC for disassembly, it is a good
practice to do it, as a troubleshooting step, to
know before disassembly if valve timing was
appropriate.
Camshaft Timing Gear Removal

Lock crankshaft, refer to CYLINDER BLOCK sub-
section.
Remove CYLINDER HEAD COVER, see proce-
dure in this subsection.
Lock camshaft. Refer to CAMSHAFT in this sub-
R1503motr91A section.
1. Rocker arm shaft Remove the oil separator cover. Refer to LUBRI-
2. Rocker arm shaft notches
CATION SYSTEM subsection.
5. Install NEW rocker arm shaft screws. Remove the chain tensioner. Refer to CYLINDER
BLOCK subsection.
NOTICE This assembly uses stretch screws.
As the screws have been stretched from the Remove the following parts:
previous installation, it is very important to – Chain guide
use new screws at assembly. Failure to re- – Camshaft timing gear.
place screws and to strictly follow the torque
procedure may cause screws to loosen and
lead to engine damage.
6. Torque screws according to following se-
quence.
NOTE: Always perform a step on ALL rocker arm
shaft screws before going to the next step.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Step 1 10 N•m (89 lbf•in)
Rocker arm Step 2 20 N•m (15 lbf•ft)
shaft screws smr2008-017-007_a
Apply an additional 1. Chain guide
Step 3
90° rotation 2. Timing gear screws
3. Camshaft timing gear
1 3 4 NOTE: Secure timing chain with a retaining wire.

5 2
6 Camshaft Timing Gear Inspection
Check camshaft timing gear for wear or deteriora-
tion.
If gear is worn or damaged, replace it as a set
(camshaft timing gear and timing chain).
NOTE: For crankshaft timing gear replacement,
refer to CYLINDER BLOCK subsection.
Camshaft Timing Gear Installation

R1503motr93A
smr2012-018 9
NOTICE Improper camshaft timing will dam- TIGHTENING TORQUE

age engine components. Make sure camshaft
and crankshaft are still locked. If not, lock them Camshaft timing gear
screws
before beginning this procedure.
Install the camshaft timing gear with the writing NOTICE Crankshaft and camshaft must be
visible, i.e. to be able to see the position lines locked on TDC position to place camshaft
when looking from outside of engine. timing gear and timing chain in the proper
position. To double check, take a look at the
1 timing gear lines. They must be parallel to the
cylinder head surface.
1 1
R1503motr95A
1. Position lines
R1503motr97A
NOTICE Ensure to remove locking tools
1. Good (with 1503 aligned)
2. Never when finished.
Install timing chain. Refer to CYLINDER BLOCK Install all other removed parts.
subsection.
Ensure chain guides are properly installed. CAMSHAFT
Loosely install gear chain screws. Camshaft Locking Procedure
Install chain tensioner. 1. Remove CYLINDER HEAD COVER, see proce-
NOTE: There can be 2 different positions to install dure in this subsection.
the timing gear on the camshaft. Basically both 2. Lock crankshaft, refer to procedure in CYLIN-
positions are working well, since the camshaft DER BLOCK subsection.
and crankshaft are locked in their proper position.
3. Lock camshaft.
Due to some tolerances, there could be one po-
sition which fits better than the other one. To REQUIRED TOOL
check this, perform the following test. CAMSHAFT
Check if timing gear screws are still loose. If LOCKING TOOL
screws are squeezed by the timing gear, remove (P/N 529 035 839)
the chain tensioner again and rotate timing gear
by one tooth clockwise. Then install the chain 3.1 Insert the camshaft locking tool into the
tensioner again. hole behind the camshaft timing gear.
One at a time, remove timing gear screws and 3.2 Make sure the position lines on oil separa-
apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060) on tor cover are lined up as shown in the fol-
threads. lowing illustration.
Tighten timing gear screws to specification.
10 smr2012-018
D A B A C C A B A C C A B A C
R1503motr102A
A. Camshaft lobe (exhaust valves)

B. Camshaft lobe (intake valves)
C. Camshaft bearing journal
D. Camshaft bearing journal — engine front
CAMSHAFT LOBE HEIGHT — EXHAUST VALVE

smr2009-025-007_a 31.430 mm to 31.630 mm
NEW
1. Camshaft locking tool (1.2374 in to 1.2453 in)
2. Position lines
Camshaft Removal CAMSHAFT LOBE HEIGHT — INTAKE VALVE
Remove the CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR, see pro- 31.540 mm - 31.740 mm
cedure in this subsection. NEW
(1.2417 in - 1.2496 in)
Remove the ROCKER ARM, see procedure in this SERVICE LIMIT 31.50 mm (1.2402 in)
subsection.
CAMSHAFT BEARING JOURNAL
Remove the camshaft lock to remove the
camshaft. NEW
39.892 mm - 39.905 mm
(1.5706 in - 1.5711 in)
1 SERVICE LIMIT 39.880 mm (1.5701 in)
CAMSHAFT BEARING JOURNAL
2
(ENGINE FRONT)
24.939 mm - 24.960 mm
NEW
(.9819 in - .9827 in)
CAMSHAFT BEARING INNER DIAMETER
40.000 mm - 40.020 mm
NEW
(1.5748 in - 1.5756 in)
R1503motr101A
CAMSHAFT BEARING INNER DIAMETER
1. Camshaft lock (ENGINE FRONT)
2. Camshaft
25.000 mm - 25.013 mm
NEW
Camshaft Inspection (.9843 in - .9848 in)
Check each lobe and bearing journal of camshaft SERVICE LIMIT 25.050 mm (.9862 in)
for:
– Scoring Replace parts that are not within specifications.
– Scuffing Camshaft Installation
– Cracks
– Other signs of wear. Pay attention to the following details.
Measure camshaft bearing journal and lobe height Grease the camshaft bearing journals well by us-
using a micrometer. ing the ISOFLEX GREASE TOPAS NB 52 (P/N 293 550
Measure clearance between both ends of 021) or a similar product.
camshaft and cylinder head. Install camshaft then place the camshaft lock in its
slot.
smr2012-018 11
Remove the exhaust manifold. Refer to EX-

1 HAUST SYSTEM subsection.
Unscrew the oil filler tube support from cylinder
head.
R1503motr101B
1. Camshaft lock
For other parts, refer to the proper installation pro-

cedures in this subsection.
smr2009-025-009_a
CYLINDER HEAD 1. Retaining screws

2. Oil filler tube support
Cylinder Head Removal Remove the CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR, see pro-
Lock crankshaft, refer to CYLINDER BLOCK sub- cedure in this subsection.
section.
Remove the M6 cylinder head screws.
Drain coolant, refer to COOLING SYSTEM sub-
section.
Remove blow-by valve from cylinder head. Refer
to LUBRICATION SYSTEM subsection.
Unplug the camshaft position sensors (CAPS).
1
Unplug the coolant temperature sensor (CTS).
Disconnect bleeding hose.
Disconnect the cylinder head outlet hose.
R1503motr98A
1. M6 cylinder head screws
Remove and discard the M11 cylinder head

screws securing cylinder head to cylinder block.
smr2009-025-008_a
1. Coolant temperature sensor (CTS)

2. Bleeding nipple
3. Cylinder head outlet hose
Remove the intake manifold. Refer to INTAKE

MANIFOLD subsection.
12 smr2012-018
smr2006-016-063_a
1. Cylinder head
R1503motr99A
2. Flat bar
3. Feeler gauge
1. M11 cylinder head screws
Pull up cylinder head. Check cylinder head warpage.

Remove and discard gasket. CYLINDER HEAD WARPAGE
Maximum 0.15 mm (.006 in)
Cylinder Head Cleaning
Remove carbon deposits from combustion cham- If warpage exceeds specification, resurface the
ber, exhaust port and piston top. cylinder head as follows.
Clean cylinder head, especially cylinder head Use a 400 - 600 grit wet sandpaper on a surface
screw surface from oil spillage. plate and gently grind off the mating surface.
Blow out the oil orifices and check if they are not NOTE: To ensure an even surface, rotate cylinder
clogged. head several times during resurfacing.
Replace cylinder head, if resurfacing fails.
Cylinder Head Installation

Ensure dowel pins are in place.
Install NEW cylinder head gasket.
NOTICE Each installation of the cylinder
head requires a new cylinder head gasket. Us-
ing a gasket twice will cause engine damage,
even if the engine had not run.
smr2009-025-010_a
1. Oil orifices Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060) on
threads of M6 cylinder head screws.
Cylinder Head Inspection Install M6 screws and manually tighten them.
Check for cracks between valve seats or other Install NEW M11 cylinder head screws and
damages, if so, replace cylinder head. tighten them manually.
Check cylinder head mating surface for flatness,
using a straight edge. NOTICE This assembly uses stretch screws.
As the M11 screws have been stretched from
the previous installation, it is very important to
replace the old screws by new ones at assem-
bly. Failure to replace screws and to strictly fol-
low the torque procedure may cause screws to
loosen and lead to engine damage.
Using the following sequence, tighten screws as
described below.
smr2012-018 13
smr2005-036-002_a
R1503motr103A
NOTE: Always perform a step on ALL M11 cylin-

1. Valve spring compressor clamp
der head screws before going to the next step. 2. Valve spring compressor cup
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Step 1 40 N•m (30 lbf•ft)
Apply an additional
M11 cylinder Step 2
120° rotation
head screws
Apply an additional
Step 3
90° rotation
Tighten M6 cylinder head screws to specification.

TIGHTENING TORQUE
M6 cylinder head screws 9 N•m (80 lbf•in)
Remove crankshaft and camshaft locking tools.

Install all removed parts.
R1503motr104A
VALVE SPRINGS LOCATE VALVE SPRING COMPRESSOR CLAMP IN CENTER OF

THE VALVE
Valve Spring Removal
Remove valve cotters.
Remove rocker arm shaft. Refer to ROCKER ARM
procedure in this subsection. Withdraw valve spring compressor, valve spring
retainer and valve springs.
Remove CYLINDER HEAD, see procedure in this
subsection.
Compress valve springs.
REQUIRED TOOL
VALVE SPRING COMPRESSOR

(P/N 529 035 724)
VALVE SPRING
COMPRESSOR CUP
(P/N 529 036 073)
14 smr2012-018
NOTE: Valve cotters must be properly engaged in

valve stem grooves.
smr2008-017-009_a
1. Valve cotters
2. Valve spring retainer
3. Inner valve spring
4. Outer valve spring
Valve Spring Inspection R1503motr105B
Check valve springs for rust, corrosion or other 1. Position of the valve spring
visible damages. If so, replace faulty valve
springs.
VALVES
Check valve springs for free length and straight-
ness. Valve Removal
Replace valve springs if not within specifications. Remove valve spring.
Push valve stem then pull valves out of valve
guides.
2
A
R610motr122A
A. Valve spring length
OUTER VALVE SPRING FREE LENGTH

R1503motr106A
NEW NOMINAL 45.45 mm (1.789 in)
1. Intake valve 38 mm
SERVICE LIMIT 43.00 mm (1.693 in) 2. Exhaust valve 31 mm
INNER VALVE SPRING FREE LENGTH Remove and discard valve stem seal.
NEW NOMINAL 41.02 mm (1.615 in) RECOMMENDED TOOL
SERVICE LIMIT 38.8 mm (1.528 in) SNAP-ON VALVE STEM SEAL PLIERS (P/N YA8230)
Valve Spring Installation

Colored area of the valve spring must be placed
on top.
smr2012-018 15
R610motr126A
A. Valve stem diameter

R610motr125A
VALVE STEM DIAMETER

Valve Inspection NEW
Valve Stem Seal 5.946 mm - 5.960 mm
EXHAUST
(.2341 in - .2346 in)
Always install NEW seals whenever valves are re-
moved. 5.961 mm - 5.975 mm
INTAKE
(.2347 in - .2352 in)
Inspection of valve stem seals is not needed
because NEW seals should always be installed SERVICE LIMIT
whenever cylinder head is removed. EXHAUST
5.93 mm (.233 in)
Valve INTAKE
Inspect valve surface, check for abnormal stem
wear and bending. If so, replace by a new one. Replace valve guide if it is out of specification or
has other damages such as wear or friction sur-
Valve Stem and Valve Guide Clearance face. Refer to VALVE GUIDE in this subsection.
Measure valve stem and valve guide in three
VALVE GUIDE INNER DIAMETER
places, using a micrometer and a small bore
gauge. NEW
NOTE: Clean valve guide to remove carbon de- EXHAUST 5.994 mm - 6.018 mm
posits before measuring. (.236 in - .2369 in)
INTAKE
Change valve if valve stem is out of specification
SERVICE LIMIT
or has other damages such as wear or friction sur-
face. EXHAUST
6.060 mm (.2386 in)
INTAKE
16 smr2012-018
Valve Face and Seat
2 3
A B
V01C1HA
A. Valve face contact width

B. Valve seat contact width
R1503motr107A 1
1. Valve seat
Valve Seat Grinding
2. Exhaust valve contaminated area NOTE: The valve seats may be reground with
3. Valve face (contact surface to valve seat)
a valve seat grinder which centers on the valve
Check valve face and seat for burning or pittings guide.
and replace valve or cylinder head if there are 1. Grind the valve seat at 45°. Remove no more
signs of damage. material than absolutely necessary to clean the
Ensure to seat valves properly. Apply some lap- seat up.
ping compound on valve face and work valve on 2. Using a 35° stone, narrow the valve seat until
its seat with a lapping tool. the appropriate outer diameter is obtained.
Measure valve face contact width.
NOTE: The location of contact area should be in EXHAUST 80°
center of valve seat.
Measure valve seat width, using a caliper.
VALVE SEAT CONTACT WIDTH
NEW 45°
35°
1.25 mm - 1.55 mm A
EXHAUST 35°
(.049 in - .061 in)
1.10 mm - 1.30 mm 45°
INTAKE
(.043 in - .051 in)
80°
SERVICE LIMIT
R1503motr259A
EXHAUST 1.8 mm (.071 in)
A. Valve seat outer diameter EXHAUST
INTAKE 1.6 mm (.063 in)
If valve seat contact width is too wide or has dark

spots, replace the cylinder head.
smr2012-018 17
INTAKE 1
55°
35° 45°
A
35°
45°
55°
R1503motr260A
A. Valve seat outer diameter INTAKE
R1503motr254A
VALVE SEAT OUTER DIAMETER
1. Valve stem seal
INTAKE 37.35 mm (1.4705 in)
EXHAUST 30.3 mm (1.1929 in) Apply engine oil on valve stem and install valve.
NOTICE Be careful when valve stem is
3. Using a 55° stone for the intake and an 80°
passed through sealing lips of valve stem
stone for the exhaust valve, reduce the valve
seal.
seat contact width to the appropriate value
mentioned above.
1
4. Finally, coat the valve seating surface with a
fine paste of valve grinding compound using a
manual valve grinding mandrel. Lightly grind
the valves until a smooth, even, uniform sealing
surface of the appropriate inside and outside
diameter is obtained on both the valve and
the seat. Use only a hand held valve grinding
mandrel with a suction cup, rotating the valve
back and forth through about 45°, and then
advancing the valve 45° before repeating this
operation.
Valve Installation
R1503motr254B
Install NEW valve stem seal.
1. Sealing lips of valve stem seal
To ease installation of cotters, apply oil or grease

on them so that they remain in place while relea-
sing the spring.
After springs are installed, ensure valve springs
and valve spring retainer are properly locked by
tapping on valve stem end with a soft hammer so
that valve opens and closes a few times.
NOTICE An improperly locked valve spring
will cause engine damage.
18 smr2012-018
VALVE GUIDE
Valve Guide Replacement
NOTICE Do not heat cylinder head for this 1
procedure.
NOTICE The sharp edge near the top of the
valve guide must be machined away. Other-
wise it will foul the valve guide hole in the
cylinder head and destroy the cylinder head,
as the valve guide is removed.
Use a special reamer as far as the top of the notch.
R1503motr255A
TYPICAL
1. Punch
Check valve guide bore for abreased material.

The inlet and exhaust valve guides have the same
length and are interchangeable.
NOTE: If valve guide has caused scoring during
1 extraction, replace the cylinder head.
Grease the bore in cylinder head and the leading
2
end of valve guide with MOLYKOTE G-N (P/N 420
297 433).
Press the valve guide into the COLD cylinder head
as shown.
REQUIRED TOOL
VALVE GUIDE PUSHER (6 MM)

(P/N 529 036 087)
R1503motr258A
TYPICAL
1. Special reamer
2. Notch
Chase valve guide out of the cylinder head to-

wards combustion chamber.
REQUIRED TOOL
VALVE GUIDE
REMOVER (6 MM)
(P/N 529 036 086)
smr2012-018 19
Clean cylinder head carefully. Check that the valve

seat is concentric with the new guide axis (check
contact surface with engineer's blue).
R1503motr256A
TYPICAL
1. Valve guide leading end
2. Cylinder head bore
3. Jig
R1503motr257A
TYPICAL
A. Protrusion
VALVE GUIDE PROTRUSION

MINIMUM 12.4 mm (.4882 in)
MAXIMUM 12.8 mm (.5039 in)
NOTE: After installing new guides, they must be

reamed with a standard 6 mm reamer tool. These
are available from various tool suppliers.
20 smr2012-018
Subsection XX (CYLINDER BLOCK)
CYLINDER BLOCK
SERVICE TOOLS
CRANKSHAFT LOCKING TOOL .................................................... 529 035 821 ............................... 12, 15, 21
PISTON CIRCLIP INSTALLER........................................................ 529 035 765 ............................................. 9

SNAP-ON PISTON RING COMPRESSOR PLIERS ....................... RC980 ............................................. 9
SERVICE PRODUCTS
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ........................................... 20
LOCTITE 5910 ............................................................................... 293 800 081 ........................................... 19
LOCTITE CHISEL (GASKET REMOVER) ....................................... 413 708 500 ........................................... 19
smr2012-019 1
Loctite 243
23 Nm
(17 lbfft)
Loctite 243 Engine
oil
NEW 3
23 Nm 2
(17 lbfft)
17 Nm
(150 lbfin) 1
Engine
oil
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
Loctite 243 Engine

oil Loctite
See
Loctite 243 NEW 243
ELECTRONIC
FUEL INJECTION
SYSTEM (EFI) 23 Nm
(17 lbfft) 23 Nm
(17 lbfft)
NEW
Loctite 243
Engine 15 23 Nm
oil (17 lbfft)
Loctite 243 14 40 Nm + 55 Nm

12 13
23 Nm
(17 lbfft) NEW
smr2010-026-001_b
2 smr2012-019
NEW 8
7 Engine oil
5
NEW
11
7
Engine
oil
Engine Engine oil
oil
Engine 6
oil
Engine
16 oil
16 10
Engine oil
Engine
oil Engine 4 NEW 45 Nm + 90°
(33 lbfft)
oil
18
19
Engine oil
18
Engine 17
oil
20 Engine oil
19
Engine Engine
Engine oil
oil oil
20
smr2010-026-002_b
smr2012-019 3
GENERAL 2. Piston/cylinder wall clearance out of specifica-

tion
When disassembling parts that are duplicated in - Check piston/cylinder wall clearance.
the engine, (e.g.: pistons, connecting rods etc.),
- Replace if out of specification.
it is strongly recommended to note their position
and to keep them as a “group”. If you find a 3. Melted or broken piston
defective component, it will be much easier to - Check if oil spray nozzle is not clogged. Refer to
find the cause of the failure. Since parts were LUBRICATION SYSTEM subsection.
break-in together during the engine operation, - Replace piston and cylinder block if necessary.
they will keep their matched fit when parts are
reassemble together within their “group”.
PROCEDURES
TROUBLESHOOTING TIMING CHAIN
probable source of troubles. It is a guideline and Timing Chain Inspection
it should not be assumed to list all possible prob- Check timing chain on camshaft gear for exces-
lems. sive radial play.
Always check for fault codes. If a fault code is de- Check chain condition for wear and rollers condi-
tected, service the fault code first. Refer to DIAG- tion.
UNUSUAL ENGINE NOISE OR
VIBRATIONS
1. Heavy wear on plain bearings
- Check radial play of plain bearings.
- Replace plain bearings if out of specification. R610motr201A 1
2. Crankshaft and balancer shaft are not properly 1. Timing chain
aligned
If chain is excessively worn or damaged, replace
- Disassemble cylinder block and check if marks
are properly aligned. it as a set (camshaft timing gear and timing chain).
3. Crankshaft or balancer shaft axial play out of Timing Chain Removal

specification
Remove:
- Measure crankshaft and balancer shaft axial play.
– Engine oil (refer LUBRICATION SYSTEM sub-
- If axial play is out of specification, replace thrust section)
washers.
– Engine from vehicle (refer to ENGINE RE-
4. Connecting rod axial play out of specification MOVAL AND INSTALLATION subsection)
- Measure connecting rod axial play on crankshaft. – Cylinder head (refer to CYLINDER HEAD sub-
- Replace connecting rod or crankshaft if out of section)
specification. – PTO housing (refer to PTO HOUSING AND
5. Connecting rod screws got loose MAGNETO subsection)
- Replace damaged components and retighten – Crankshaft (refer to CRANKSHAFT in this sub-
screws with the recommended torque. section)
– Timing chain.
BLUE SMOKE IN THE EXHAUST
1. Oil scrapper rings worn out Timing Chain Installation
- Replace piston rings. The installation is essentially the reverse of the re-
moval procedure. However, pay attention to the
ENGINE SUDDENLY TURNS OFF (POOR following details.
IDLING) Ensure to perform proper valve timing.
1. Piston rings worn out NOTICE Improper valve timing will damage
- Replace piston rings. engine components.
4 smr2012-019
Lock crankshaft and camshaft at TDC (refer to PISTONS AND CONNECTING

CYLINDER HEAD subsection for the camshaft RODS
locking procedure).
Install chain, then install chain tensioner. Piston and Connecting Rod Removal
1. Disassemble CYLINDER BLOCK as per proce-
CHAIN TENSIONER dure in this subsection.
NOTE: It is recommended to measure connecting
Chain Tensioner Removal rod big end axial play prior to remove connecting
NOTE: Removal of the intake manifold allows rod. Refer to INSPECTION below.
easier access to the chain tensioner, but is not 2. Remove connecting rod cap screws no. 4.
necessary. Refer to INTAKE MANIFOLD subsec-
tion.
1
Remove:
– Chain tensioner plug screw no. 1
– Gasket ring no. 2 (discard it)
– Chain tensioner no. 3.
3 2
R1503motr08A
1. Connecting rod screws
NOTE: Before removing the connecting rod caps,

mark them to remember the right position when
reassembling.
R1503motr39A 1
1. Plug screw
2. Gasket ring
3. Chain tensioner
Chain Tensioner Inspection

Check chain tensioner for excessive wear or
cracks. Also check free movement of the chain
tensioner piston.
Chain Tensioner Installation

The installation is essentially the reverse of the re-
moval procedure but, pay attention to the follow- 1
R1503motr07A
ing details.
R1503motr07A2
Use a NEW gasket ring when installing the chain 1. Connecting rod marks
tensioner plug screw.
3. Pull piston no. 5 with connecting rod no. 6 out
Tighten the chain tensioner plug screw to specifi-
of the cylinders.
cation.
4. Remove one piston circlip no. 7 and discard it.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Chain tensioner plug
17 N•m (150 lbf•in)
screw
smr2012-019 5
1 2
R610motr134A 1
1. Piston circlip
NOTE: The removal of both piston circlips is not

R1503motr12A
necessary to remove piston pin.
1. Crankshaft
5. Push piston pin no. 8 out of piston. 2. Feeler gauge
1 2 3 CONNECTING ROD BIG END AXIAL PLAY

0.100 mm - 0.352 mm
NEW
(.004 in - .014 in)
Connecting Rod Small End Radial Play

Measure connecting rod small end.
R1503motr27A
1. Piston
2. Piston pin
3. Circlip
6. Detach piston from connecting rod.
Connecting Rod Inspection

2
Connecting Rod Big End Axial Play 1
Using a feeler gauge, measure distance between
butting face of connecting rod and crankshaft
counterweight. If the distance exceeds specified
tolerance, replace the worn part.
R610motr73A
1. Bore gauge
2. Connecting rod
CONNECTING ROD SMALL END DIAMETER

23.01 mm - 23.02 mm
NEW
(.9059 in - .9063 in)
6 smr2012-019
If the connecting rod small end diameter is out CONNECTING ROD BIG END
of specification, replace small end bearing sleeve RADIAL PLAY
no. 9.
NOTE: For small end bearing sleeve replacement
contact a machine shop. After installing a NEW Use NEW bearings, when connecting rod big end
small end bearing sleeve on the connecting rod, diameter is out of specification.
the inner diameter and the oil holes need to be
machined to specification. Piston Pin Inspection
Measure piston pins (refer to PISTON PIN IN- Using synthetic abrasive woven, clean piston pin
SPECTION in this subsection). Compare to inside from deposits.
diameter of connecting rod to obtain connecting Inspect piston pin for scoring, cracking or other
rod small end radial play. damages.
CONNECTING ROD SMALL END RADIAL PLAY Measure piston pin. See the following illustration
SERVICE LIMIT 0.080 mm (.003 in) for the proper measurement position.
Connecting Rod Big End Radial Play

Measure inside diameter of connecting rod big
end. Compare to crankshaft pin.
To measure the connecting rod big end diameter,
use the OLD screws no. 4.
Install the OLD bearings no. 10 as they were
mounted initially.
Tighten connecting rod screws, refer to PISTON R610motr137A A
AND CONNECTING ROD INSTALLATION in this
A. Piston pin diameter in the area of the bushing
subsection.
PISTON PIN DIAMETER
22.996 mm - 23.000 mm
NEW
(.905 in - .906 in)
Measure connecting rod small end diameter (refer

to CONNECTING RODS INSPECTION in this sub-
section) to check connecting rod small end radial
play.
Piston Inspection
Inspect piston for scoring, cracking or other dam-
A ages. Replace piston and piston rings if neces-
sary.
Using a micrometer, measure piston at 18 mm
(.709 in) perpendicularly (90°) to piston pin axis.
R610motr76A
A. Connecting rod big end bearing
CONNECTING ROD BIG END DIAMETER

smr2012-019 7
With the micrometer set to the dimension, adjust

a cylinder bore gauge to the micrometer dimen-
sion and set the indicator to 0 (zero).
A 2 1
R610motr136A 1
1. Measuring perpendicularly (90°) to piston pin axis
A. 18 mm (.709 in) F00B09A
The measured dimension should be as described 1. Use the micrometer to set the cylinder bore gauge
2. Dial bore gauge
in the subsequent table. If not, replace piston.
PISTON MEASUREMENT
130 AND 155 ENGINES
99.951 mm - 99.969 mm
NEW NOMINAL
(3.935 in - 3.936 in)
215 AND 260 ENGINES
99.931 mm - 99.949 mm
NEW NOMINAL
(3.934 in - 3.935 in)
1
Piston/Cylinder Wall Clearance
F00B0AA
Adjust and lock a micrometer to the piston dimen-
sion. TYPICAL
1. Indicator set to 0 (zero)
1 NOTE: Make sure the cylinder bore gauge indica-

tor is set exactly at the same position as with the
micrometer, otherwise the reading will be false.
Position the dial bore gauge 62 mm (2.44 in) above
cylinder base, measuring perpendicularly (90°) to
piston pin axis.
Read the measurement on the cylinder bore
gauge. The result is the exact piston/cylinder wall
clearance.
F00B08A
1. Micrometer set to the piston dimension
NOTE: Make sure used piston is not worn.
8 smr2012-019
PISTON/CYLINDER CLEARANCE
130 AND 155 ENGINES
0.024 mm - 0.056 mm
NEW NOMINAL
(.001 in - .002 in)
215 AND 260 ENGINES
0.044 mm - 0.076 mm
NEW NOMINAL
(.0017 in - .003 in)
SERVICE LIMIT 0.100 mm (.004 in) R610motr134B
If clearance exceeds specified tolerance, re-hone CORRECT POSITION OF THE PISTON CIRCLIP
cylinder sleeve and replace piston by an oversize
one. Piston and Connecting Rod Installation
NOTE: It is not necessary to have all pistons 1. Using a piston ring compressor, slide piston into
replaced with an oversize if they are not all out of cylinder.
specification. Mixed standard size and oversize RECOMMENDED TOOL
piston are allowed.
SNAP-ON PISTON RING COMPRESSOR PLIERS
Piston and Connecting Rod Assembly (P/N RC980)

Apply engine oil on the piston pin.
Insert piston pin into piston and connecting rod.
Install the NEW piston circlip.
REQUIRED TOOL
PISTON CIRCLIP INSTALLER
(P/N 529 035 765)
NOTICE Secure piston pin with new piston

circlips.
NOTE: Take care that the hook of the piston circlip
is positioned properly. R1503motr29A
1 NOTICE Install piston with punched arrow to-

ward exhaust side.
R1503motr28A
1. Sleeve with piston circlip inside

2. Assembly jig from piston clip installer
smr2012-019 9
1 NOTICE Failure to strictly follow this proce-

dure may cause screw to loosen and lead to
engine damage. Knowing that the screws have
been stretched from the previous installation,
it is very important to use new screws at as-
sembly.
R1503motr30A
1. Arrows toward exhaust side
2. Correctly install bearings and carefully clean

split surface on both sides (cracked area).
3 1 2 R1503motr31A
1. Angle torque wrench
PISTON RINGS
Piston Ring Removal
Remove piston as described in this subsection.
Remove rings no. 11.
Piston Ring Inspection

Ring/Piston Groove Clearance
Using a feeler gauge measure each ring/piston
groove clearance. If the clearance is too large, the
piston and the piston rings should be replaced.
R610motr79A RING/PISTON GROOVE CLEARANCE
1. Half bearing of connecting rod big end NEW
2. Split surface of the connecting rod
3. Protrusion of bearing in line with connecting rod groove
0.025 mm - 0.070 mm
RECTANGULAR
3. Torque NEW connecting rod screws as per fol- (.001 in - .0028 in)
lowing procedure: 0.015 mm - 0.060 mm
TAPER-FACE
NOTE: Do not apply any threadlocker product on (.0006 in - .0024 in)
threads of connecting rod screws. 0.020 mm - 0.055 mm
OIL SCRAPER RING
(.0008 in - .0022 in)
NOTICE All connecting rod screws must be
torque FIRST according to step 1 before per- SERVICE LIMIT
forming the step 2. ALL 0.15 mm (.006 in)
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Connecting rod Step 1 45 N•m (33 lbf•ft)

screws Step 2 + 90°
10 smr2012-019
R1503motr32A 1 smr2011-018-001_a
1. Rectangular ring
1. Piston 2. Taper-face ring
2. Filler gauge 3. Oil scraper ring
Ring End Gap NOTICE Ensure that top and second rings are
not interchanged.
RING END GAP
NEW NOTE: Use a ring expander to prevent breakage
during installation. The oil ring must be installed
0.30 mm - 0.50 mm by hand.
RECTANGULAR
(.012 in - .02 in)
Check that rings rotate smoothly after installation.
0.35 mm - 0.55 mm
TAPER-FACE Space the piston ring end gaps 120° apart and do
(.014 in - .022 in)
not align the gaps with the piston pin bore or the
0.35 mm - 0.50 mm thrust side axis.
OIL SCRAPER RING
(.014 in - .02 in)
SERVICE LIMIT A
ALL 1.50 mm (.0591 in) A A
Measure position for ring end gap in the area

of 8 mm to 16 mm (.315 in to .63 in) from top of
cylinder.
NOTE: In order to correctly position the ring in the
cylinder, use piston as a pusher.
1
Using a feeler gauge, check ring end gap. Replace
ring if gap exceeds service limit.
2
Piston Ring Installation
Install rings in the following order and layout: A31C2OA
PISTON RING INSTALLATION 1. DO NOT align ring gap with piston trust side axis
2. DO NOT align ring gap with piston pin bore axis
ORDER RING POSITION A. 120°
Stamped dot
FIRST STEP Oil scraper ring
facing UP CRANKSHAFT
SECOND
Taper-face ring
Stamped "E" and Crankshaft Locking Procedure
STEP "TOP" facing UP
NOTICE The crankshaft must be locked at
Rectangular Stamped "E" and TDC for removal and installation of crankshaft,
THIRD STEP
ring "TOP" facing UP balancer shaft and camshaft.
smr2012-019 11
NOTE: When the crankshaft is locked, the piston

of cylinder 3 is at ignition TDC.
Remove:
– Intake manifold (refer to INTAKE MANIFOLD
subsection)
– Spark plugs
– Cylinder head cover (refer to CYLINDER HEAD
subsection
– Crankshaft access plug screw.
smr2009-026-004_a
1. Position lines
Use a small screwdriver to check if the groove in

the crankshaft is aligned with the hole.
In this position, lock the crankshaft.
REQUIRED TOOL
CRANKSHAFT LOCKING TOOL
(P/N 529 035 821)
smr2009-026-002_a Crankshaft Removal

1. Crankshaft access plug screw 1. Disassemble CYLINDER BLOCK as per proce-
2. Gasket ring
dure described in this subsection.
Turn engine counterclockwise. 2. Remove connecting rod screws. Refer to PIS-
Bring piston of cylinder 3 to ignition TDC, using a TONS AND CONNECTING RODS in this sub-
dial gauge or another similarly suitable tool. section.
NOTICE Do not scratch or damage piston and 3. Remove thrust washers no. 16.
cylinder surface.
R1503motr09A
smr2009-026-003_a 1. Thrust washer

1. Dial gauge
4. Remove crankshaft no. 17.
NOTE: When the piston of cylinder 3 is at ignition
TDC, the position lines on oil separator cover must
be lined up as shown in the following illustration.
12 smr2012-019
1 1
R1503motr13A
R1503motr10A
1. Micrometer
1. Crankshaft 2. Crankshaft area for bearing
Crankshaft Inspection CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER

49.991 mm - 50.01 mm
Crankshaft Gear Inspection NEW
(1.9681 in - 1.9689 in)
Replace crankshaft if the gears are worn or other-
wise damaged.
CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL RADIAL CLEARANCE
2
Crankshaft Pin
Measure all crankshaft pin diameters. Compare to
inside diameter of connecting rod bearings (else-
where in this subsection).
1 2
1
R1503motr11A
1. Balancer gear
2. Crankshaft timing gear
Crankshaft Radial Play

Measure all crankshaft journals. Compare to in-
side diameter of crankshaft bearings (elsewhere
in this subsection).
R1503motr14A
1. Micrometer
2. Crankshaft pin area for bearing
CRANKSHAFT PIN DIAMETER

45.032 mm - 45.048 mm
NEW
(1.7729 in - 1.7735 in)
smr2012-019 13
CRANKSHAFT PIN RADIAL CLEARANCE

Crankshaft Axial Clearance

When assembling the cylinder-block, measure the
crankshaft axial clearance.
R1503motr17A 1 2
1. Mark on balancer shaft
2. Mark on crankshaft
For correct installation of the connecting rods, re-

fer to PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS in this
subsection.
NOTICE It is absolutely necessary to follow
R1503motr41A 2 this procedure. Otherwise severe engine dam-
1. Dial gauge age can occur.
2. Crankshaft
Insert thrust washers no. 16 as soon as crankshaft
CRANKSHAFT AXIAL CLEARANCE is in place as per following illustration.
0.08 mm - 0.22 mm NOTICE Never forget thrust washers on cen-
NEW
(.003 in - .009 in)
ter of crankshaft to control axial adjustment.
Crankshaft Installation
Pay attention to following details.
NOTE: Before installing the crankshaft, make
sure that the timing chain is on the crankshaft 1
and the chain guide has been installed first. Those
parts cannot be installed when the crankshaft is
in place.
NOTICE Crankshaft and balancer shaft marks
have to be aligned.
R1503motr09A
THRUST WASHER INSERT DIRECTION

1. Thrust washer
NOTICE Thrust washers have to be flush with

the cylinder block sealing surface.
14 smr2012-019
1 1
R1503motr16A
R1503motr20A
1. Thrust washer
2. Sealing surface 1. Thrust washer
Install cylinder block lower half. Refer to CYLIN- 3. Remove balancer shaft.
DER BLOCK in this subsection.
Position crankshaft at TDC before installing the
Balancer Shaft Inspection
camshaft and the rocker arms (refer to CYLINDER Check balancer shaft and replace if damaged.
HEAD subsection). If the gear on the balancer shaft is damaged, re-
REQUIRED TOOL place balancer shaft.
Check gear on the crankshaft at the same time
(P/N 529 035 821) and replace crankshaft if necessary (refer to
CRANKSHAFT above).
1 Balancer Shaft Bearing Seat Play
Measure all balancer shaft bearing seats. Com-
pare to inside diameter of balancer shaft bearings
(see CYLINDER BLOCK INSPECTION in this sub-
section).
R1503motr18A
1. Crankshaft locking tool
BALANCER SHAFT
R1503motr23A
Balancer Shaft Removal
1. Micrometer
1. Disassemble CYLINDER BLOCK as per proce- 2. Balancer shaft area for bearing
dure described in this subsection.
2. Remove thrust washers no. 18.
smr2012-019 15
BALANCER SHAFT SEAT DIAMETER

31.984 mm - 32.000 mm
NEW
(1.2592 in - 1.2598 in)
BALANCER SHAFT SEAT RADIAL CLEARANCE

Balancer Shaft Axial Clearance

When assembling the cylinder-block, measure the
balance shaft axial play.
1 R1503motr17A 1 2
1. Mark on balancer shaft
2. Mark on crankshaft
NOTICE Never forget thrust washers no. 18

on PTO side to control axial adjustment on
balancer.
Insert thrust washers as soon as balancer shaft is
in place as per following illustration.
R1503motr42A 2
1. Dial gauge
2. Balancer shaft
BALANCER SHAFT AXIAL CLEARANCE

0.02 mm - 0.25 mm
NEW
(.001 in - .01 in)
Balancer Shaft Installation

For installation, reverse the removal procedure. R1503motr20B
Pay attention to following details.

THRUST WASHER INSERT DIRECTION
1. Thrust washer
NOTICE Balancer shaft and crankshaft marks
have to be aligned. NOTICE Thrust washers have to be flush with
the cylinder block sealing surface.
16 smr2012-019
2 Bearings
When bearings no. 19 and no. 20 need to be re-
moved from the cylinder block, mark them to iden-
tify the correct position at installation. See the fol-
lowing illustration for an example:
1
1
R1503motr22A
1. Thrust washer
2. Sealing surface
Install cylinder block lower half. Refer to CYLIN-

DER BLOCK in this subsection.
Reassemble engine in accordance with the proper
assembly procedures.
R1503motr37A 2
CYLINDER BLOCK 1. Marks on balancer shaft bearings
2. Marks on crankshaft bearings
Cylinder Block Disassembly
Remove: Cylinder Block Inspection
– Engine oil (refer to LUBRICATION SYSTEM Cylinder
subsection)
Check cylinder for cracks, scoring and wear ridges
– Engine from vehicle (refer to ENGINE RE- on the top and bottom of the cylinder. If so, re-
MOVAL AND INSTALLATION subsection) place cylinder.
– Cylinder head (refer to CYLINDER HEAD sub-
section) Cylinder Taper
– PTO housing, starter gear and starter drive (re- Measure cylinder bore and if it is out of specifica-
fer to PTO HOUSING AND MAGNETO subsections, re-hone cylinder sleeve and replace piston
tion) with first oversize.
– Oil suction pump (refer to LUBRICATION SYS- NOTE: It is not necessary to have all cylinders
TEM subsection) re-honed if they are not all out of specification.
– Engine mounting brackets Mixed standard size and oversize cylinders are
– Oil reservoir plug screw no. 12 with O-ring allowed.
no. 13 Measure cylinder bore at 3 recommended posi-
– Cylinder block screws no. 14 and no. 15 tions. See the following illustration.
– Cylinder block lower half
– Crankshaft cover with O-ring
– Balancer shaft (refer to BALANCER SHAFT in
this subsection)
– Crankshaft (refer to CRANKSHAFT in this sub-
section)
– Piston with connecting rod (refer to PISTONS
AND CONNECTING RODS in this subsection).
smr2012-019 17
Bearings
2
To measure the wear of the crankshaft bearings
A no. 19 and balancer shaft bearings no. 20, both
cylinder block halves with OLD bearings have to
1 B be screwed together as per tightening procedure
described below.
Measure the inside diameter of the bearings with
a bore gauge.
3
R1503motr24A
1. First measuring diameter

2.
3.
Second measuring diameter
Third measuring diameter
1
A. 60 mm (2.362 in)
B. 110 mm (4.331 in)
CYLINDER TAPER IN DIAMETER

NEW MAXIMUM 0.038 mm (.001 in)
Distance between measurements should not ex- R1503motr33A

ceed the service limit mentioned above.
ENGINE UPSIDE DOWN
Cylinder Out of Round 1. Bore gauge
Measure cylinder diameter in piston axis direction CRANKSHAFT BEARING INSIDE DIAMETER
from top of cylinder. Take an other measurement
90° from first one and compare. SERVICE LIMIT 50.1 mm (1.9724 in)
NOTE: Take the same measuring points as de-

scribed in CYLINDER TAPER above.
R1503motr25A R1503motr34A 1
A. Perpendicular to crankshaft axis ENGINE UPSIDE DOWN
B. Parallel to crankshaft axis 1. Bore gauge
CYLINDER OUT OF ROUND BALANCER SHAFT BEARING INSIDE DIAMETER

NEW MAXIMUM 0.008 mm (.0003 in) SERVICE LIMIT 32.11 mm (1.2642 in)
SERVICE LIMIT 0.015 mm (.0006 in) Replace bearings if they are out of specifications.
18 smr2012-019
Cylinder Block Assembly 1

For assembly, reverse the disassembly proce-
dure. Pay attention to the following details.
Torque Banjo screw to specification.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Banjo screw 19 N•m (168 lbf•in)
Use NEW bearings when diameters are out of

specification.
If OLD bearings can be used again, make sure
they are at the same position as they were before.
Correctly install bearings. Top crankshaft bearing
halves have a bore which has to be placed in the
upper cylinder block. R1503motr36A
1. Bearing protrusion in cylinder block notch
Apply engine oil on all bearings, in the bottom area

of the cylinder bore and also on the band of the
piston ring compressor tool.
1 For proper installation of pistons, refer to PIS-
2 TONS AND CONNECTING RODS in this subsec-
3 tion.
NOTE: Before installing the crankshaft, make
sure that the timing chain is on the crankshaft
and the chain guide has been installed first. Those
parts cannot be installed after as the crankshaft
is in place.
Clean oil passages and make sure they are not
R1503motr35A
clogged.
1. Cylinder block upper half Clean all metal components in a solvent.
2. Oil bore in cylinder block
3. Oil bore in bearing Cylinder block mating surfaces are best cleaned
using a combination of the LOCTITE CHISEL (GAS-
Bearings have to be flush with the cylinder block
KET REMOVER) (P/N 413 708 500) and a brass brush.
split surface and their protrusions have to fit in the
Brush a first pass in one direction then make the fi-
notched areas in the cylinder block seat.
nal brushing perpendicularly (90°) to the first pass
(cross hatch).
NOTICE Do not wipe with rags. Use a new
clean hand towel only.
IMPORTANT: When beginning the application of
the crankcase sealant, the assembly and the first
torquing should be done within 10 minutes. It is
suggested to have all you need on hand to save
time.
NOTE: It is recommended to apply this specific
sealant as described here to get an uniform appli-
cation without lumps. If you do not use the roller
method, you may use your finger to uniformly dis-
tribute this sealant.
Apply LOCTITE 5910 (P/N 293 800 081) on mating
surfaces.
smr2012-019 19
NOTICE Do not use other products to seal

crankcase. Do not use an activator with the
Loctite 5910. Using other products or non sil-
icone-based sealant over a previously sealed
crankcase with Loctite 5910 will lead to poor
adhesion and possibly a leaking crankcase.
NOTE: Refer to the product label for the sealant
curing time. Respect the manufacturer's recom-
mendations prior to start engine.
Use a plexiglass plate and apply some sealant
on it. Use a soft rubber roller of 50 mm - 75 mm
(2 in - 3 in) available in arts products suppliers for
printmaking, roll the sealant to get a thin uniform
smr2010-026-003_a
coat on the plate (spread as necessary). When
ready, apply the sealant on crankcase mating NOTICE All M10 cylinder block screws must
surfaces. be torque FIRST according to step 1 before per-
forming to step 2.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
M10 cylinder Step 1 40 N•m (30 lbf•ft)

block screws Step 2 55 N•m (41 lbf•ft)
Tighten M8 cylinder block screws no. 15 using the

following sequence.
F12R17A
Do not apply in excess as it will spread out inside

crankcase.
Tighten cylinder block screws as per following pro-
cedure:
screw threads. smr2010-026-004_a
Tighten M10 cylinder block screws no. 14 using TIGHTENING TORQUE

the following sequence.
M8 cylinder block
23 N•m (17 lbf•ft)
screws
NOTE: Before continuing the assembly process,

the axial clearance of balancer shaft and crank-
shaft has to be checked. Refer to CRANKSHAFT
and BALANCER SHAFT in this subsection for the
procedure.
Before mounting the engine bracket, install the
crankshaft cover. Apply engine oil on O-ring and
press cover in. Crankshaft cover has to be flush
with cylinder block surface.
20 smr2012-019
R1503motr19A 2
1. O-ring
2. Crankshaft cover
Position crankshaft at TDC before installing the

camshaft and the rocker arms (refer to CYLINDER
HEAD subsection).
REQUIRED TOOL
(P/N 529 035 821)
R1503motr18A
1. Crankshaft locking tool
Reassemble engine in accordance with the proper

assembly procedures.
smr2012-019 21
Subsection XX (ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM)
ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FRONT
1 2 3
B A
MAPS
KS
ETA MATS
OPS
CTS INJECTOR 1, 2, 3
TOPS ECM
CPS IGNITION COIL 1, 2, 3
CAPS
EGTS
A Engine Wiring Harness Connector KS Knock Sensor

B Vehicule Wiring Harness Connector OPS Oil Pressure Sensor
CAPS Camshaft Position Sensor MAPS Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor IN ECM
CPS Crankshaft Position Sensor MATS Manifold Air Temperature Sensor
CTS Coolant Temperature Sensor ETA Electric Throttle Actuator OUT ECM
ECM Engine Control Module TLS Throttle Lever Sensor
EGTS Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor TOPS Tip-Over Protection System
smr2009-027-002_en
smr2012-020 1
1503 4-TEC CONTROL SYSTEM
INPUTS OUTPUTS
Throttle accelerator sensor (TAS) Relay
Throttle position sensor (TPS) Fuel pump
Crankshaft position (CPS) Starter solenoid

ENGINE CONTROL
Camshaft position (CAPS) MODULE (ECM) Ignition coil (3)
Coolant temperature (CTS) Fuel injector (3)
Manifold absolute pressure (MAPS) Electric throttle

actuator (ETA)
Manifold air temperature (MATS)
Controller area
Exhaust gas temperature (EGTS) network (CAN)
Oil pressure (OPS)
Knock sensor (KS)
Battery voltage (BV)
Digitally Encoded
Security System (D.E.S.S.)
Start/Stop switch
Tip-over protection system (T.O.P.S.)
Off-throttle assisted steering (O.T.A.S.)
Controller area network (CAN)

smr2009-027-003_en
2 smr2012-020
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A highly advanced engine management system
(EMS) is used to ensure a high power output with
cleaner combustion.
There are 7 main systems that interact with the
engine management system:
1. Electronic fuel injection
2. D.E.S.S. System
3. Ignition System
4. Starting System smr2009-027-006_a
5. O.T.A.S. 1. ECM on intake manifold
(Off-Throttle Assisted Steering)
6. T.O.P.S. It features a permanent memory that will store
(Tip-Over Protection System) fault codes, customer information and other
engine information, even when the battery is
7. iControl System
removed from the vehicle.
Engine Control Module (ECM) The ECM controls the following engine manage-
ment functions:
Engine RPM Limiter
The ECM limits maximum engine speed. It moni-
tors engine RPM through the CPS and varies fuel
injection, ignition and throttle plate opening as
necessary.
Engine Speed Control
smr2009-027-005 The ECM controls the engine idle RPM. In addi-
ECM tion, it can vary the engine speed by command-
ing the electronic throttle actuator (ETA) to open or
The ECM is the main component of the engine close based on throttle position and various other
management system. It controls the electrical inputs. The ETA also allows for other functions of
system and the engine management functions by the iControl system.
processing the information obtained from various
switches, controls and sensors that it compares Drowned Mode
to predetermined parameters stored in the ECM. If the engine is flooded and does not start, this
It also interacts with the other electronic systems special mode can be activated to prevent fuel in-
through the CAN bus (information center and jection and ignition while cranking in order to ven-
iControl System) for various functions that affect tilate the engine to dry the cylinder walls.
engine management. NOTE: This mode can also be used if the engine
The ECM is mounted on the intake manifold. is water-flooded.
To activate DROWNED MODE, proceed as per fol-
lowing steps.
1. Install the tether cord cap on the engine cut out
switch.
2. While the engine is stopped, fully pull and
HOLD the throttle lever.
3. Press the START/STOP button. DROWNED
MODE is now on.
Releasing the throttle lever will allow the ECM to
revert back to normal mode.
smr2012-020 3
If the engine does not start, it may be necessary to

remove the spark plugs and crank the engine with
rags over the spark plug holes. Refer to IGNITION
SYSTEM subsection.
Monitoring System
The ECM monitors:
– The electrical and electronic components of the
engine system
– The iControl system
– The information center (gauge)
– Some components of the electrical system
– Signals from other electronic modules
For more information, refer to DIAGNOSTIC AND
FAULT CODES.
Limp Home Mode
The ECM may automatically set the engine in
LIMP HOME MODE using default parameters
when certain major faults are detected. For more
information, refer to DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT
CODES.
Diagnostic Mode
The ECM features a self-diagnostic mode that is
initiated on system power up for certain systems
and components (when pressing the START but-
ton), and when the engine is running for others.
Refer to DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT CODES sub-
section for more information.
4 smr2012-020
Subsection XX (iCONTROL SYSTEM)
iCONTROL SYSTEM
GENERAL iS (INTELLIGENT SUSPENSION)
The iControl (intelligent Control) system may con- The intelligent suspension is an electronically
sist of the following systems depending on the controlled hydro/mechanical system consisting
PWC model: of a hydraulic pump, an actuator, suspension
– Intelligent Throttle Control (iTC) arms, springs and one shock absorber. They are
– Intelligent Brake and Reverse (iBR) installed in the hull and connected to the moving
deck. The suspension system is used to isolate
– Intelligent Suspension (iS).
the riders from the rough water.
The information center (gauge) and handlebar
For a comprehensive and complete description of
switches are used to navigate through and select
this system, refer to SUSPENSION (iS) subsec-
several functions, modes of operation and change
tion.
certain settings and system parameters using the
appropriate handlebar controls.
Each control is electronic and provides a com-
mand signal to an electronic module whose
function is to assure proper operation of its sys-
tem within set parameters.
For a comprehensive and complete description
of the information center, refer to INFORMATION
CENTER (GAUGE) subsection.
iTC (INTELLIGENT THROTTLE

CONTROL)
The iTC is an electronic throttle control system
(ETC) that includes a cable-less throttle control
(TAS) located on the RH side of handlebar and
an electric throttle actuator (ETA) located on the
throttle body.
The iTC allows functions such as touring/sport
mode, cruise control, slow speed mode, ski mode
and O.T.A.S.TM as well as a more precise control
of the engine power.
For a comprehensive and complete description
of this system, refer to INTELLIGENT THROTTLE
CONTROL (ITC) subsection.
iBR (INTELLIGENT BRAKE AND

REVERSE)
The iBR is a brake and reverse system used to
avoid obstacles, gradually slow down or stop
the watercraft, or drive backwards by lowering
the iBR gate that redirects the water flow at the
outlet of the jet pump nozzle.
For a comprehensive and complete description of
this system, refer to IBR AND VTS subsection.
smr2012-021 1
Subsection XX (CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN))
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)

GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The CAN (Controller Area Network) protocol is an ISO standard for serial data communication.
The CAN bus is the nervous system of the iControl system and the engine management system (EMS).
It links the electronic modules (ECUs) together so that they communicate to interact as required.
Two wires connect each component and they are in constant communication with each other at a rate of
about every 10 or 100 milliseconds depending on the component. CAN lines consist of a pair of twisted
wires (WHITE/BLACK and WHITE/BEIGE).
CAN BUS - HI (FUSE BOX)

C7 C11 C9 C10 C8 C12
WH/BE
WH/BE
WH/BE
WH/BE
WH/BE
WH/BE
B-C1 2 2 2 3 1
DEPTH DIAGNOSTIC
SOUNDER CONNECTOR
ECM GAUGE iS iBR

B-C2 3 3 3 4 2
WH/BK
WH/BK
WH/BK
WH/BK
WH/BK
WH/BK
C1 C5 C3 C4 C2 C6

CAN BUS - LOW (FUSE BOX)
ECM Engine Control Module
iBR Intelligent Brake and Reverse module WH/BK = WHITE/BLACK
iS Intelligent Suspension module WH/BE = WHITE/BEIGE
smr2012-022-001_aen
CAN BUS DIAGRAM
smr2012-022 1
TROUBLESHOOTING
DIAGNOSTIC TIPS
Check the fault codes using B.U.D.S. as a first troubleshooting step. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT
CODES subsection.
Make sure the modules are powered before testing CAN.
CAN Communication Problems

The following chart gives some symptoms and behaviors relative to the CAN component in cause. The
list is not exhaustive, only the most significant items are given to help in troubleshooting.
CAN FAULTY WIRES VEHICLE BEHAVIOR OR OBSERVATION
OBSERVATION IN B.U.D.S.
(no communication) IN INFORMATION CENTER
Diagnostic connector
not secured CAN intermittent problems.
in its holder NOTE: Occurs more frequently on watercraft Nothing
(holder contains a equipped with 2 electronic modules.
120 resistor)
Water in holder of
Communication problems and strange
diagnostic connector
behavior of information center. Nothing
(particularly with salt
Inoperative electronic systems in watercraft.
water)
B.U.D.S. will not be able
Engine is set to limp home mode.
to communicate with
Short circuit in CAN iBR gate will not move. "Locked" in neutral.
any electronic module.
wires iBR light is ON.
"No vehicle detected" message
Check engine light is ON.
will be displayed in B.U.D.S.
3 modules instead of 4 will be active.
"Cluster" tab and its data will
Information center iBR light is ON.
not be available in B.U.D.S.
(cluster) Some functions not displayed such
ECM, iBR and iS will report a
as: Engine hours, iS, VTS and RPM.
cluster CAN problem.
ECM tab and its data will
ECM (Engine Control iBR light is ON.
not be available in B.U.D.S.
Module) iBR gate "locked" in neutral.
iBR and iS will report an ECM
Some functions not displayed such as: Engine
CAN problem.
hours and RPM.
iBR gate will not move. "Locked" in neutral. 3 modules instead of 4 will be active.
iBR light is ON. iBR tab and its data will
iBR (intelligent Brake
Check engine light is ON. not be available in B.U.D.S.
and Reverse)
Some functions not displayed such as: Lake ECM and iS will report an iBR
water temperature, no VTS, no F, N and R CAN problem.
indication.
2 smr2012-022
CAN FAULTY WIRES VEHICLE BEHAVIOR OR OBSERVATION

OBSERVATION IN B.U.D.S.
(no communication) IN INFORMATION CENTER
iS handlebar controls have no effect.
iS (intelligent No DOCK mode. Suspension will remain to
iS tab and its data will not be available
Suspension) its last position before the CAN problem.
in B.U.D.S.
iS position is not displayed.
The menu Depth Sounder
Depth sounder Indicator will not be visible. Nothing will be observable.
The Depth menu will not be available.
B.U.D.S. will not be able
to communicate with
Diagnostic connector Nothing will be observable. any electronic module.
"No vehicle detected" message
will be displayed in B.U.D.S.
NOTE: If the gauge cannot communicate with an optional module (iS module or depth sounder) during
the initial power up, the gauge will interpret this as if the vehicle is not equipped with it. No further test
of the system occurs and no indication or fault message will be visible. If communication is interrupted
after the gauge has already detected them, then the gauge will indicate that there is a communication
fault.
smr2012-022 3
Subsection XX (COMMUNICATION TOOLS AND B.U.D.S.)
COMMUNICATION TOOLS AND

B.U.D.S.
SERVICE TOOLS
MPI-2 DIAGNOSTIC CABLE.......................................................... 710 000 851 ............................................. 3
MPI-2 INTERFACE CARD .............................................................. 529 036 018 ......................................... 3–4

MALE-FEMALE EXTENSION SERIAL CABLE............................... DB9 ............................................. 4
GENERAL USB LIGHT
Refer to PROCEDURES for instructions on the STATUS WHAT TO DO

communication tools. – Check USB connection between
If communication problems occur, refer to TROU- MPI-2 and PC computer.
Light is
BLESHOOTING in this subsection. OFF – Check USB operation on PC
computer (hardware or Windows
drivers).
TROUBLESHOOTING
Light is – Connections are GOOD.
DIAGNOSTIC TIPS GREEN Communication can take place
on USB side.
IMPORTANT: Make sure all connections are
made and vehicle is powered up before starting Prerequisite for CAN communication:
B.U.D.S. to allow proper communication between – MPI-2 connected to diagnostic connector on ve-
the vehicle and B.U.D.S. software. hicle.
MPI-2 Connection Troubleshooting – ECM turned on (press the START button).
– Tether cord installed on the vehicle engine cut-
MPI-2 Status Lights off switch.
The MPI-2 includes 2 status lights that indicate the – B.U.D.S. started and logged on.
connection condition: USB and CAN. Both lights
CAN LIGHT
must be GREEN for the MPI-2 to function prop-
erly. Otherwise, refer to the following charts. STATUS WHAT TO DO
Light is Check connection between MPI-2 and
OFF diagnostic connector on vehicle.
Light is Check CAN wires/connectors on
RED vehicle.
Connections are GOOD.
Light is
Communication can take place on
GREEN
CAN side.
vdd2006-001-151_b
Prerequisite for USB communication:

– PC Computer turned on
– MPI-2 connected to PC computer.
smr2013-021 1
Communication Problems when Using 3. Briefly press the vehicle START button to acti-
B.U.D.S. vate the ECM. Do not hold START button to
avoid engine starting.
Missing Module
4. Click on the Read Data button in B.U.D.S.
If one or more ECU is not communicating with the
MPI, refer to DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT CODES Message Box: "Engine must be Stopped..."
subsection. If the following message box is displayed in
No Vehicle Detected B.U.D.S.:
If an “X” is shown in the status bar and the pro-
tocol tool is blinking between Kw2000 500K and
Kw2000, it means that no ECU is communicating
with the MPI.
smr2009-028-015
1. Click on the Cancel button in B.U.D.S.

2. Ensure the tether cord is properly installed.
3. Briefly press the vehicle START button to acti-
rmr2010-020-009
vate the ECM. Do not hold START button to
1. Check connections between the PC computer avoid engine starting.
and the vehicle. 4. Continue with the procedure undertaken prior
2. Ensure the electrical system is powered up. to the appearance of the message box.
NOTE: The tether cord must be installed.
PROCEDURES
3. Ensure both USB and CAN lights on the MPI-2
are GREEN. Refer to MPI-2 CONNECTION
TROUBLESHOOTING subsection.
MPI-2
If B.U.D.S. does not automatically exit the follow- The MPI-2 (Multi-Purpose Interface-2) in conjunc-
ing message box, click the Try active detection tion with the MPI-2 diagnostic cable is used with
mode button. This will manually establish the B.U.D.S. software to communicate with the ECM
communication with the ECUs. (engine control module) and other modules.
MPI-2 Power
The MPI-2 interface card uses the power from the
PC computer USB port.
Connecting the PC to the Vehicle

rmr2010-020-010_a
GTS, GTI, GTR, RXP-X Series and Wake
Message Box: "Some of the Information 1. Open front storage compartment.
Normally Displayed..." 2. Remove storage basket.
If the following message box is displayed in
B.U.D.S.: GTX/RXT Models with Suspension
3. Open the boarding platform.
smr2009-028-016
1. Click on the OK button in the box.

2. Ensure the tether cord is properly installed.
2 smr2013-021
ssi2009-002-002_a
ssi2009-002-004_a
1. Re-boarding platform
TYPICAL — ACCESS FROM REAR RH PANEL
1. Diagnostic connector
4. Remove the RH storage bin.
7. Connect one end of the MPI-2 DIAGNOSTIC CA-
BLE (P/N 710 000 851) to vehicle connector.
710000851
ssi2009-002-003_a
1. RH storage bin
GTX/RXT Models Without Suspension

5. Remove the RH access panel on the boarding
platform.
All Models
6. Disconnect the 6-pin diagnostic connector from
its holder (protective cap).
smr2009-028-004_a
TYPICAL
1. Diagnostic cable connected to vehicle
8. Connect the other end of diagnostic cable to the

MPI-2 INTERFACE CARD (P/N 529 036 018).
smr2011-022-001_a
TYPICAL — ACCESS FROM FRONT STORAGE COMPARTMENT

smr2013-021 3
529036018
NOTE: An optional MALE-FEMALE EXTENSION SE-

RIAL CABLE (P/N DB9) available at electronic retail
outlets can be used between diagnostic cable and mmr2006-079-200
MPI-2 interface. Do not exceed 7.6 m (25 ft). MPI-2 INTERFACE CARD CONNECTED TO USB PORT
CAUTION If the computer you are using is

connected to a power outlet, there is a poten-
tial risk of electric shock when working in con-
tact with water. Be careful not to touch water
while working with the computer.
10. Use B.U.D.S. software as described further in
B.U.D.S. SOFTWARE.
B.U.D.S. SOFTWARE
529035697
B.U.D.S. (BRP Utility and Diagnostic Software)
OPTIONAL MALE-FEMALE EXTENSION SERIAL CABLE
is designed to allow programming key(s) to the
9. Connect the MPI-2 INTERFACE CARD (P/N 529 vehicle, allow electrical and electronic component
036 018) to the USB port of a PC (personal monitoring, activation of certain components for
computer). diagnostic purposes, and to carry out settings
changes.
For more information pertaining to the use of the
B.U.D.S. software, use its help which contains de-
tailed information on its functions.
Always use the latest applicable B.U.D.S. version
available on BOSSWeb.
How to Read the Electronic Control

vdd2006-001-151
Units Using B.U.D.S. Software
IMPORTANT: Ensure all connections have been
made before starting B.U.D.S. to allow proper
operation. Refer to MPI-2 in this subsection.
1. Press the START button to wake up the electri-
cal system.
2. Install the tether cord on the engine cut-off
switch.
3. Start B.U.D.S. and logon.
NOTE: B.U.D.S. will automatically choose the ap-
propriate MPI 2 protocol.
4. Ensure the appropriate number of modules is
shown in the status bar.
4 smr2013-021
NUMBER
MODEL OF MODULES
MODULES
GTS 2 ECM and cluster
GTI, GTR,
RXP-X and 3 ECM, cluster and iBR
WAKE
GTX/RXT ECM, cluster, iBR
4
models with iS and iS
GTX/RXT
models
3 ECM, cluster and iBR
without
suspension smr2010-030-002_a
TYPICAL
If the icon is visible, it indicates that a file is avail-

able in B.U.D.S. to update at least one of the elec-
tronic modules.
NOTE: If an update file is available on BOSSWeb
but the B.U.D.S. software being used is not up
to date, the update icon will not appear. Refer to
the service bulletins to see if there is an update
rmr2011-020-002_a
1. Number of modules
available.
Use the Module submenu and check all modules
5. Read electronic modules by clicking the Read one at a time to see which module(s) can be up-
Data button. dated.
vmr2006-012-100_aen
B.U.D.S. is now ready to use.
Electronic Modules ECU Update smr2009-028-003
TYPICAL
NOTICE Failure to strictly follow a procedure
to update a module may permanently damage 1. If the Update option is greyed out, no update
the module. file is available for this module.
Whenever B.U.D.S. is started, check for an up- 2. If the Update option is black, an update file is
date icon in the B.U.D.S. status bar. available for this module.
smr2013-021 5
Writing Changes in an ECU

1. When finished, save changes to the related
electronic module by clicking the Write Data
button.
smr2009-028-002
1. Greyed out: No update to perform

Black: Update file available
Before applying an update, log in BOSSWeb and

look in Service for the Unit history to find out if
any information or publication related to the vehi-
cle is available. If so, carefully follow the given in-
vmr2006-012-100_ben
structions.
NOTE: A message box will confirm a successful
operation.
2. Remove tether cord from the engine cut-off
switch.
Disconnect MPI connections and secure the vehi-
cle diagnostic connector in its holder.
NOTE: Holder has a 120 ohm internal resistor. Di-
agnositic connector must be secured in holder for
proper operation.
mmr2009-118-011
SERVICE, UNIT HISTORY
NOTE: When selecting the update menu in

B.U.D.S., a dialog box will appear and the update
file description may give some clue to finding the
vehicle-related information in BOSSWeb.
ssi2009-002-004_a
TYPICAL
1. Diagnostic connector secured to holder
NOTICE Failure to secure the diagnostic con-

nector in its protective cap may result in corro-
sion or other damage to the terminals.
3. Reinstall al removed parts, refer to appropriate
subsections.
mbg2008-022-100_a
TYPICAL
1. File description
6 smr2013-021
Subsection XX (DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT CODES)
DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT CODES

GENERAL INFORMATION CENTER MONITORING
Information center
MONITORING SYSTEM VTS, Sport and ECO switch
This system monitors the electronic components MODE and SET switch
of the EMS (engine management system), iBR, in-
formation center, iS and other components of the Cruise switch
electrical system to detect if they are faulty or de- CAN
fective. The monitoring system becomes active
when the START button is pressed. GPS
NOTE: Some components need the engine to be Fuel level sensor

running to be monitored (fuel injectors for exam- Depth sounder
ple).
ECM
The following components or functions are moni-
tored. iBR module
EMS MONITORING iS module
Battery voltage iS MONITORING

EMS sensors (TAS, TPS, CPS, CAPS, MAPS, iS module and motor
MATS, CTS, OPS, EGTS, TOPS, knock sensor).
Throttle actuator, ignition coils and fuel injectors Vehicle speed
ECM Suspension position

CAN
Engine RPM
TOPS
CAN
Information center
D.E.S.S. system
iBR module
START switch and starter solenoid
Fuel pump When a malfunction is currently detected, the re-
lated electronic module:
O.T.A.S.
– Sets an active fault code.
Information center – Adapts the proper protection strategy accord-
iBR module ing to the failure.
– Sends out warning signals to the information
iBR MONITORING center/beeper codes to inform the rider of a par-
iBR module and motor ticular condition.
BRLS
When a minor or transient fault occurs, the fault
message and beeper will cease automatically if
Engine RPM the condition that caused the fault does not exist
Vehicle speed anymore.
iBR gate position If a minor fault is active, the engine will operate
without a noticeable loss of performance.
CAN
Releasing the throttle and letting the engine re-
Lake temperature sensor turn to idle speed may allow normal operation to
Information center resume. If this does not work, try the following:
– Remove tether cord from the engine cut-off
ECM switch.
– Wait 3 minutes to allow the ECM to shut down.
– Start engine.
– Check if the fault code is still active.
smr2013-006 1
The electronic system will react differently de- The following conditions will stop the suspension.
pending on the fault type. If a severe failure
iS PROBLEM SYSTEM BEHAVIOR
occurs, the engine may not be allowed to be
started. In other cases, the engine may operate Suspension operation
in limp home mode (reduced speed) or not be Any active fault code will be disabled
affected at all. related to the iS that
prevents its proper It will remain at the
These strategies are used to protect the engine operation position it was at when
system from damage and to maintain safe opera- the fault code was set
tion of the vehicle.
Limp Home Mode

When a major component of the EMS or the iBR
is not operating properly, limp home mode will be
set. Engine speed will be limited and therefore
vehicle speed.
This mode allows the rider to return home which
would otherwise not be possible without this ad-
vanced system.
When this mode is active, LIMP HOME MODE
will be displayed in the information center.
Major Fault and Vehicle Reaction

The following EMS conditions will trigger a limp
home mode.
MAX ALLOWED
ENGINE PROBLEM
RPM
High engine temperature
3000
(from 110°C (230°F))
High exhaust temperature
3000
(from 110°C (230°F))
Low oil pressure
(below 180 - 220 kPa 2500
(26 - 32 PSI))
The following conditions will trigger limp home

mode.
iBR PROBLEM SYSTEM BEHAVIOR
iBR gate will be moved
Any active fault code and locked in forward
related to the iBR that position (if possible)
prevents its proper Engine will be set in limp
operation home mode (reduced
speed)
2 smr2013-006
Indicator Lights and Message Display Information

The fault indicators and messages displayed in the information center will inform you of a particular con-
dition or if an anomaly occurs.
GTI/GTR/GTS Series and Wake
FAULT
MESSAGE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
INDICATOR (ON)
HIGH TEMPERATURE Engine or exhaust system overheating
Check engine (minor fault req. maint.) or

CHECK ENGINE or LIMP
iBR system fault or
HOME MODE
LIMP HOME MODE (major eng. fault)
LOW or HIGH BATTERY
Low/high battery voltage
VOLTAGE
LOW OIL PRESSURE Low engine oil pressure detected
iBR MODULE ERROR iBR system fault
RXT/GTX/RXP Series and Wake Pro

PILOT LAMPS
(ON)
LOW or HIGH BATTERY

VOLTAGE
CHECK ENGINE or LIMP Check engine (minor fault req. maint.) or

HOME MODE LIMP HOME MODE (major eng. fault)
LOW OIL PRESSURE Low oil pressure
_ iBR system fault
_ OTAS system fault
smr2013-006 3
FAULT MESSAGES
RIGHT KEYPAD ERROR Gauge control button malfunction
LOW OIL PRESSURE Engine low oil pressure detected
HIGH EXHAUST TEMPERATURE High exhaust temperature detected
HIGH TEMPERATURE High engine temperature detected
Engine management system malfunction or
CHECK ENGINE
maintenance required
HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE High battery voltage detected
LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE Low battery voltage detected
LIMP HOME MODE Major fault detected, engine power limited
FUEL SENSOR DEFECTIVE Fuel level sensor fault
WATER TEMP SENSOR DEFECTIVE Problem in iBR, not sending water temperature info
CALIBRATION CHECKSUM ERROR Information center programming corrupted
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED Watercraft maintenance required
DEPTH SOUNDER MODULE COMMUNICATION Error message if depth sounder is disconnected while
PROBLEM riding
Error message if communication with the suspension
IS MODULE COMMUNICATION PROBLEM
module is lost while riding
Error message if communication with the iBR module
iBR MODULE ERROR
is lost while riding
Message when a function is not or cannot be properly
FUNCTION CANNOT BE ACTIVATED
activated
WRONG KEY Key not programmed for this watercraft
O.T.A.S. MAINTENANCE REQUIRED Maintenance on O.T.A.S. required
4 smr2013-006
Beeper Signals
When one of the below conditions occurs, the monitoring system emits the following beep signals.
BEEPER CODES DESCRIPTION
Bad D.E.S.S. system connection.
Reinstall tether cord correctly over engine cut-off switch.
Wrong D.E.S.S. key.
Use a tether cord with a D.E.S.S. key that has been programmed for the
watercraft.
A 1 second beep
every 5 second interval Defective D.E.S.S. key.
(while installing D.E.S.S. key Use another programmed D.E.S.S. key.
on engine cut-off switch if ECM Dried salt water in D.E.S.S. key.
is on) Clean D.E.S.S. key with fresh water to remove salt water.
Defective engine cut-off switch.
Check. Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM subsection.
Improper operation of ECM or defective wiring harness.
Check. Refer to ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI) subsection.
Low fuel level.
Refill fuel tank. If problem persists, check sensor and circuit. Refer to FUEL
A 2 second beep every 5 minute TANK AND FUEL PUMP subsection.
interval Fuel tank level sensor or circuit malfunction.
Check sensor and circuit. Refer to FUEL TANK AND FUEL PUMP
subsection.
High engine coolant temperature.
Refer to COOLING SYSTEM subsection.
High exhaust temperature.
Continuously beeps Refer to ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI) subsection.
Low oil pressure.
Turn off engine as soon as possible. Check oil level and refill. Refer to
LUBRICATION subsection.
smr2013-006 5
FAULT CODES 3. Press the UP or DOWN arrow button repeat-

edly to display each subsequent code.
A fault code is an indication that a malfunction is
detected by the monitoring system of the vehicle. NOTE: When the last fault code has been dis-
played and the button is pressed again, the sys-
Fault Code Categories tem loops back to the first fault code displayed,
and all fault codes can again be displayed. If there
A fault code consists of an alphanumeric designa- was one active fault code when entering FAULT
tor followed by a hexadecimal number of 3 digits. CODE mode, and it becomes occurred (no longer
The alphanumeric designator defines the category active), a NO ACTIVE FAULT CODE message will
of the fault code while the hexadecimal number scroll in the display.
refers to a unique fault.
4. To exit the FAULT CODE display function, the
FAULT CODE CATEGORIES MODE or SET button must be pressed once.
EXAMPLE There is no time out on this function.
ALPHANUMERIC MODULE/
OF FAULT
DESIGNATOR SYSTEM
CODE
Body
(include
From B0 to B3 B2211
information center
and switch faults)
From C0 to C3 iBR and iS C007B
Power train
and related
From P0 to P3 P062F
system faults
(includes ECM)
Communication
From U0 to U3 between modules U0179
and sensors smo2009-002-114_w
FAULT CODE DISPLAY FUNCTION

RELATED MODULE AND FAULTS
FAULT CODE
MODULE
CATEGORY
ECM (engine control Stores mainly “P” codes
module) and some “U” codes
iBR (intelligent brake Stores mainly “C” codes
and reverse) and a few “U” codes
iS (intelligent Stores mainly “C” codes
suspension) and a few “U” codes
Stores mainly “C” codes
Cluster
and a few “U” codes
Reading Fault Codes Using the

Information Center smo2009-002-114_x
TYPICAL - ENGINE FAULT CODE EXAMPLE

NOTE: A fault code must have the "Active" state
to be displayed in the multifunction gauge. Reading Fault Codes Using B.U.D.S.
1. Press the MODE button repeatedly until the Software
FAULT CODE function is visible in the multi- NOTE: All fault code types can be read with
function display. B.U.D.S.
2. Press the SET button or the UP or DOWN arrow 1. Connect vehicle to the latest applicable
button to enter the function and display the first B.U.D.S. software. Refer to COMMUNICA-
fault code. TION TOOLS AND B.U.D.S. subsection.
6 smr2013-006
2. Click on the Read Data button.

3. Click on the Faults tab.
rmr2011-070-001_b
TYPICAL FAULT PAGE

1. Fault tab
2. Fault indicator light
3. Fault code state drop box
4. Fault nomenclature
5. More details button
6. Clear occurred faults button
rmr2011-070-011_a
7. Selected fault
TYPICAL 8. More information indicator
1. Fault tab
FAULT PAGE DESCRIPTION
4. Click on the drop-down list on the LH lower cor-
ner. ITEM INFORMATION
5. Choose the fault state to display. Fault tab Click tab to display the fault page
Fault When flashing, it indicates there is
indicator light active fault(s)
Fault code
Click drop box to select the type of
state drop
faults to display
box
Display specific information and
Fault
statistics related to the fault (see
nomenclature
fault nomenclature table)
rmr2011-021-001_a
TYPICAL To display possible causes and

More details
1. Drop down list service actions related to the
button
selected fault
FAULT
INFORMATION Clear
STATE To clear all occurred faults in related
occurred
Display all possible faults regardless ECU(s)
All faults faults button
of state
When a fault is selected, additional
Active Display only faults matching this state. information pertaining to that
faults Empty area if there is no active fault fault will be displayed when
Selected
clicking the "More details" button.
Display only faults fault
Active and To select a fault, click on the fault
that have either state.
occurred with the mouse or use the cursor up
Empty area if there is neither
faults or down to scroll to the desired fault
active nor occurred fault
smr2013-006 7
FAULT NOMENCLATURE
COLUMN INFORMATION
Fault code number.
When 2 stars (**) precedes the
Code code, detailed conditions when the
fault occurred, can be displayed by
clicking the "More details" button
Display the fault state (active, occurred,
State
inactive)
Displays the module that rmr2011-021-050_a
reports the fault code. TYPICAL

1. Click here
This is the module that detects
or has received a message
of an anomaly and reports it.
Module
List of modules:
Multifunction gauge
ECM (engine control module)
iBR (intelligent brake and reverse)
iS (intelligent suspension)
Number of times this fault
Count occurred within the driving cycle
Value: From 0 to 255
Not to be used
Cycle time
Value: From 0 to 255 minutes rmr2011-070-002_a
TYPICAL — MORE DETAILS PAGE

Not to be used 1. Possible causes related to the selected fault
Total time 2. Service actions
Value: From 0 to 64 255 minutes
3. Operating conditions when fault occurred
Description Provides a short description of the fault
MORE DETAILS PAGE DESCRIPTION
When reading a fault code in B.U.D.S., pay partic- ITEM INFORMATION
ular attention to which module reports a fault. It
is indicated in the Module column. Possible List the possible causes that
causes triggered the fault
The Description column gives a short description
of the fault. Service List the possible actions to perform
actions to solve the fault
Conditions List the operating conditions of the
when fault engine and/or vehicle when the fault
occurred was triggered
Fault Code States

The various electronic control units (ECUs) used in
the vehicle can generate a variety of fault codes
depending on the level of monitoring they are ca-
pable of. Fault codes have 3 possible states:
– Active
– Occurred
rmr2011-021-002_a – Inactive.
SOME COLUMNS REMOVED FOR CLARITY PURPOSE Click the Fault tab then click on the drop-down list
1. Module that reports a fault
2. Fault description on the LH lower corner.
Choose the fault code state you want to display.
Click on the More Details button, on the RH lower
corner, to display the "Possible Causes" and the
"Service Actions" to step further in the diagnosis.
8 smr2013-006
Click on the Faults tab.

NOTE: Only the Occurred state faults can be
cleared.
Click the "Clear Occurred Faults" button.
rmr2011-021-001_a
TYPICAL
1. Drop down list
rmr2008-039-009
FAULT
INFORMATION CLEAR OCCURED FAULTS
STATE
Display all possible faults regardless of This will reset the appropriate counter(s) and will
All faults also record that the problem has been fixed in the
state
related module memory.
Active Display only faults matching this state.
faults Empty area if there is no active fault Observe the "Occurred" fault(s). They should all
disappear. Otherwise, follow this procedure.
Active
Display only faults that have either state. – Remove tether cord cap from engine cut-off
and
Empty area if there is neither active nor switch.
occurred
occurred fault
faults – Wait 3 minutes.
– Repeat procedure to clear faults again.
Active Fault Codes
An active fault code is an indication of a fault that FAULT CODE DIAGNOSTIC
is currently triggered.
The active fault may or may not compromise nor-
Missing Module
mal operation of the related system(s). Service If a module is missing, several fault codes will ap-
action in B.U.D.S. should be used to correct the pear.
problem that caused the fault code. To quickly find which module is missing, perform
Once the fault condition(s) of the active fault is no the following:
longer present, its state will change to "occurred". 1. Connect vehicle to the latest applicable
Occurred Fault Codes B.U.D.S. software. Refer to COMMUNICA-
TION TOOLS AND B.U.D.S. subsection.
An occurred fault code indicates a fault that was
active, but no longer is. 2. Click on the Read Data button.
The occurred fault does not presently affect sys- 3. Click Module in the menu bar.
tem or component operation but is retained as a 4. Look at the list of modules.
history of the faults that were detected. 5. If a module is not visible, then it is not commu-
Inactive Fault Codes nicating through the CAN bus (controller area
network).
An inactive fault code represents a fault code that
is neither active, nor occurred. It is simply part of a
list of all possible faults which may be monitored
by the various ECUs, which may become active
or occurred if the monitoring system detects an
applicable fault.
How to Clear Fault Codes Using

B.U.D.S.
Connect vehicle to the latest applicable B.U.D.S.
software. Refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS
AND B.U.D.S. subsection.
Click on the Read Data button.
smr2013-006 9
smr2011-023-001_a
1. History tab
2. Additional history pages
smr2010-030-001 3. Drop-down list in Last Minute page
TYPICAL — MODULE SUBMENU LIST (MODELS WITH iBR
AND iS) Last Minute Drop-Down List:
6. Refer to the following table to find the appropri- From the Last Minute page, click on the drop-
ate subsection in this manual to diagnose the down list on the LH lower corner.
missing module. Choose the values to display.
MISSING
SECTION TO REFER TO
MODULE
ECM ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI)
Cluster GAUGE
iBR iBR AND VTS
iS SUSPENSION (iS)
Diagnostic Tips Using B.U.D.S.

History Page
HISTORY PAGE DESCRIPTION smr2011-023-002_a
ITEM INFORMATION 1. Drop down list
Last Displays several parameters recorded

minute in the last minute of engine operation
Display the minimum and
Minimum/ maximum values encountered.
Maximum Click "Clear Min/Max" to reset the
values
Display the time proportion in what
Run time
mode the engine was running in
RPM Display the RPM range proportion in
profile which the engine was running in
To see the last minute of operating conditions,

click on the History tab in B.U.D.S.
10 smr2013-006
Guidelines to Solve Fault Codes

CONDITION ACTION
Use B.U.D.S. to:

Read fault codes.
Display "Active" faults to see components currently not operating normally.
Display "Occurred" faults to troubleshoot intermittent problems.
Monitor system(s), sensor(s), switches and actual conditions.
Troubleshooting vehicle
Activate component(s) for troubleshooting.
Set components etc.
Know the last minute of operating conditions by using the "History" page.
Know the operating conditions, if available, when a fault code occurred by
using the "More details" button in the fault page.
Check sensor connections or mixed up connections.
Before vehicle maintenance:

Read the electronic modules with B.U.D.S.
Save and print the B.U.D.S. file (keep faults option only).
New fault(s) appear after a vehicle
maintenance or repair After vehicle maintenance:
Read the electronic modules with B.U.D.S.
Compare the fault code(s) before and after the maintenance
using the printed copy and the current B.U.D.S. reading.
Investigate only the newly fault codes.
Clear all occurred faults in B.U.D.S.
Communication faults displayed as Normal behavior when flashing a module.
"Occurred" after module flashing Clear all occurred faults and check again.
Read the fault description in B.U.D.S.
Click on the "More Details" button.
Sensor "Active" fault Look at the "Conditions" when available.
Read the "Possible Causes".
Apply the "Service Actions".
Several fault codes active at the
Likely to be caused by burnt fuse(s) or bad bus bar connection(s).
same time
Check related fuse(s) and relay.
Check related power and ground wires.
Low system voltage
Check for common power supply to several sensors/modules
on one module
(refer to POWER DISTRIBUTION AND GROUNDS).
Power problem on sensor(s)
NOTE: Some sensors are supplied by the battery while others are
supplied by a module.
Low system voltage
Check battery condition and connections.
on several modules
(several communication faults
Check voltage regulator/rectifier.
will also appear)
A battery charger has likely been used to substitute the vehicle battery.
High system voltage on several
Clear all occurred faults and check again.
modules
Check voltage regulator/rectifier.
Check the module that is reported as missing.
When all modules report that a
module is missing
Check related power and ground wires.
When several modules are in fault Search for a common problem such as a faulty sensor.
smr2013-006 11
CONDITION ACTION
When several modules and sensors report that a module is missing.
The missing module may report CAN bus failure, CAN bus off.
Check related CAN wires (continuity, short to
CAN bus failure, CAN buss OFF
ground, short between CAN low and high).
Check module pins and wiring terminals.
Then, the other modules should stop reporting that module is missing.
May have been generated due to a system or component that was
momentarily operating outside normal parameters.
May be generated when disconnecting and reconnecting a component,
replacing a burnt fuse, or may be due to a momentary high or low voltage.
Before being "Occurred", a fault has always been "Active"
Occurred fault(s) for a certain time, indicating that an unexpected condition
or problem has been present during the driving cycle.
A frequent momentarily fault or an intermittent fault may never
be seen as "Active" in B.U.D.S. while there is still a pending problem.
This type of malfunctions can be discovered by looking at
the "Occurred" faults and then by evaluating the fault count.
As long as a fault is present, it is displayed as "Active".
Low value: Suggests handling problems
Fault count (connections, terminal contact/shape etc.).
(0 - 255) High value: Suggests a frequent and unsolved problem.
The problem should be investigated.
Fault conditions
Look for abnormal, excessive values.
(More details button)
When the basic troubleshooting has been done and the fault
code(s) persists, often the problem is related to the wiring
harness, connections or electromechanical components.
Hard to find problems Short to ground, to battery or between wires.
Wire splices, chafing, terminal problems
(pulled out, bent, out of shape, corroded etc.).
Bad contacts in switch or relay.
12 smr2013-006
GUIDELINES TO SOLVE SPECIFIC Fault Code P0122 and P0123

FAULT CODES The TAS signal #1, the TOPS and MAPS sensors
share the same 5 volt supply. If one of the sen-
Several Fault Codes Are Active sor is using too much power, the voltage will drop
Simultaneously which may result in the fault codes appearing on
If this occurs, check the following: the other sensors. If the fault code becomes ac-
– Check the 30 A fuses in fuse box. tive verify power input in all 3 sensors.
– Check the bus bar condition and connections in
the fuse box(es).
Fault Code P0562
– Check the diagnostic connector for the pres- Battery voltage too low. It occurs when both
ence of water or corrosion. battery voltage and engine RPM conditions are
met. See following chart. Refer to CHARGING
– Check the CAN wires.
SYSTEM subsection.
Fault Code C2100 BATTERY VOLTAGE ENGINE SPEED
iBR Sensors calibration is corrupted If the fault Lower than 6.5 Vdc Lower than 1280 RPM
comes active when the iBR is activated and stays Lower than 11.8 Vdc Greater than 1280 RPM
active, verify if a software update is available.
Fault Code C2120 Fault Code P0563

Battery voltage too high. It occurs when battery
iBR Application calibration is corrupted If the
voltage is above 16 Vdc when engine is running.
fault comes active when the iBR is activated and
Refer to CHARGING SYSTEM.
stays active, verify if a software update is avail-
able. Fault Code P0171
Fault Code C2121, C2221 Multiplicative mixture adaptation exceeds up-
per limit--> mixture too lean. An open signal
iBR or iS application parameters corrupted
on the engine coolant temperature (CTS) can
(backup no. 1 or no. 2). This fault may occasion-
trigger that fault. Refer to ELECTRONIC FUEL
ally appear as occurred. It happens when power
INJECTION (EFI) subsection.
to the module is shut off before the module has
time to complete its shutdown. Normal operation Fault Code P0172
is not affected. If it occurs often, check supply
voltage to module. Multiplicative mixture adaptation below lower
limit--> mixture too rich. An open signal on the
Fault Code C2150, C2233, C2250 engine coolant temperature (CTS) can trigger that
fault. Refer to ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
iBR or iS motor or system current software
(EFI) subsection.
breaker. Motor or module current too high. This
fault may occasionally appear as occurred. Nor- Fault Code P1171
mal operation is not affected. If it the count is
high, check the moving mechanism of the system Additive mixture adaptation exceeds upper
if it is stiffer than normal to operate. limit--> mixture too lean. An open signal on the
engine coolant temperature (CTS) can trigger that
Fault Code C2232 fault. Refer to ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
(EFI) subsection.
Motor open. If suspension operates when using
the iS Up/Down switches, the suspension will op- Fault Code P1172
erate normally when riding even if this fault is ac-
tive. In this case, the fault can be ignored. The Additive mixture adaptation below lower limit
fault will be set to "occurred" when the iS module --> mixture too rich. An open signal on the en-
will be shut down. If the suspension does not op- gine coolant temperature (CTS) can trigger that
erate when using the iS Up/Down switches, refer fault. Refer to ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
to SUSPENSION (iS) subsection. (EFI) subsection.
smr2013-006 13
Fault Code U016A

Loss of vehicle speed. This fault may occasion-
ally appear as occurred. Normal operation is not
affected. If the count is high, check the related
components.
Fault Code U0129

CAN communication error between iS and iBR
modules or iBR CAN message time-out or va-
lidity. This fault may occasionally appear as oc-
curred. Normal operation is not affected. If the
count is high, check the related components. En-
sure connector is plugged.
Fault Code U0300

Incorrect ECM or information center for the en-
gine. Installed part is not appropriate for the vehi-
cle. Using BUDS, check if the security coding of
the cluster is matched with the ECM security cod-
ing. Engine will crank but will not start. Refer
to PARTS CATALOGS for proper part according to
vehicle.
14 smr2013-006
FAULT CODE TABLE

NOTE: Always refer to the fault code list available in the latest applicable version of B.U.D.S. software.
When using the service action suggested in the Fault section of B.U.D.S., the system circuits are referred
as A-M4 for instance. It means ECM connector “A” and the circuit wire M4 as found in the WIRING
DIAGRAM.
P-CODE MODULE DESCRIPTION CAUSE ACTION
The switch may
be defective,
verify the
functionnality
Left keypad fault
of the switch
B2210 CLUSTER (Switch kept activated Problem with left keypad.
or the wires.
more than 60 seconds)
Refer to the shop
manual for switch
diagnosis/testing
procedure.
Suspension UP/DOWN
Look for pin B if
or SPORT / ECO
B2211 CLUSTER Problem with left keypad. shorted to ground
switches shorted to
or pin C.
ground fault
Look for pin B
if disconnected
Suspension UP/DOWN to pin 14 on
or SPORT / ECO the cluster.
B2212 CLUSTER Problem with left keypad.
switches disconnected Look for pin C
fault if disconnected
to pin 15 on the
cluster .
VTS UP/DOWN Look for pin A if
B2213 CLUSTER switches shorted to Problem with left keypad. shorted to ground
ground fault or pin C.
Look for pin A
if disconnected
to pin 13 on
VTS UP/DOWN
the cluster.
B2214 CLUSTER switches disconnected Problem with left keypad.
Look for pin C
fault
if disconnected
to pin 15 on the
cluster .
The switch may
be defective,
verify the
functionnality
Right keypad fault
of the switch
B2220 CLUSTER (Switch kept activated Problem with right keypad.
or the wires.
more than 60 seconds)
Refer to the shop
manual for switch
diagnosis/testing
procedure.
Look for pin B if
MODE/SET switches
B2221 CLUSTER Problem with right keypad. shorted to ground
shorted to ground fault
or pin C.
smr2013-006 15

Look for pin B
if disconnected
to pin 17 on
MODE/SET switches the cluster.
B2222 CLUSTER Problem with right keypad.
disconnected fault Look for pin C
if disconnected
to pin 18 on the
cluster.
Look for pin A if
UP/DOWN switches
B2223 CLUSTER Problem with right keypad. shorted to ground
shorted to ground fault
or pin C.
Look for pin A
if disconnected
to pin 16 on
UP/DOWN switches the cluster.
B2224 CLUSTER Problem with right keypad.
disconnected fault Look for pin C
if disconnected
to pin 18 on the
cluster.
Damaged sensor, damaged
Check for 0,5
Brake Lever Sensor circuit wires, damaged
to 3V on pin F
C0042 IBR (BRLS) signals A connector or damaged iBR pins.
and 0,25 to 1.5
open/shorted to ground Fault detected when the engine
on pin C.
is running or stopped.
Check for 0,5
to 3V on pin F
C0042 IBR 2013 (BRLS) signals A connector or damaged iBR pins.
and 0,25 to 1.5
on pin C.
Check for 0,5
to 3V on pin F
C0043 IBR (BRLS) signals B connector or damaged iBR pins.
and 0,25 to 1.5
on pin C.
Check for 0,5
to 3V on pin F
C0043 IBR 2013 (BRLS) signals B connector or damaged iBR pins.
and 0,25 to 1.5
on pin C.
Perform ECM
software update
if available. Verify
CPS connection.
Verify engine
CPS wires shorted. Bad
temperature if
C0073 IBR Torque request failure connection on the engine
it is plausible. A
coolant temp sensor.
bad connection
with the CTS
can generate this
fault when the
iBR is used.
16 smr2013-006

Perform ECM
software update
if available. Verify
CPS connection.
Verify engine
CPS wires shorted. Bad
temperature if
C0073 IBR 2013 Torque request failure connection on the engine
it is plausible. A
coolant temp sensor.
bad connection
with the CTS
can generate this
fault when the
iBR is used.
If the fault comes
active when the
iBR is activated
and stays active,
Sensors calibration Incompatible firmware or verify if a
C2100 IBR
is corrupted memory failure. software update
is available. Refer
to the service
manual for more
details.
Clean and check
for damage/wear
parts in the
reverse system
and nozzle area.
Check iBR
electrical
motor wiring.
The reverse gate cannot Isolate the iBR
C2100 IBR Actuator movement move to the desired position. output shaft
(stuck or motor open) from the reverse
system and
activate the
iBR, if the fault
comes active,
replace iBR.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
If the fault comes
active when the
iBR is activated
and stays active,
C2100 IBR 2013
is available. Refer
to the service
manual for more
details.
smr2013-006 17

Clean and check
for damage/wear
parts in the
reverse system
and nozzle area.
Check iBR
electrical
motor wiring.
The reverse gate cannot move Isolate the iBR
Actuator movement
C2101 IBR to the desired position within output shaft
warning
expected time. from the reverse
system and
activate the
iBR, if the fault
comes active,
replace iBR.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Clean and check
for damage/wear
parts in the
reverse system
and nozzle area.
Check iBR
electrical
motor wiring.
The reverse gate cannot move Isolate the iBR
Actuator movement
C2101 IBR 2013 to the desired position within output shaft
warning
expected time. from the reverse
system and
activate the
iBR, if the fault
comes active,
replace iBR.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Clean and check
for damage/wear
parts in the
reverse system
and nozzle area.
Check iBR
electrical
motor wiring.
The reverse gate cannot Isolate the iBR
C2102 IBR 2013 Actuator movement move to the desired position. output shaft
(stuck or motor open) from the reverse
system and
activate the
iBR, if the fault
comes active,
replace iBR.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
18 smr2013-006

If the fault comes
active when the
iBR is activated
and stays active,
Reverse gate position verify if a
C2110 IBR iBR malfunction.
sensor error software update
is available. Refer
to the service
manual for more
details.
If the fault comes
active when the
iBR is activated
and stays active,
Angle position sensor verify if a
C2110 IBR iBR malfunction.
warning software update
is available. Refer
to the service
manual for more
details.
Check iBR
cooling circuit.
iBR cooling system failure.
C2110 IBR iBR overheat Refer to the
iBR unit failure.
service manual
for more details.
Perform an iBR
software update
if available and
clear the fault.
Monitoring CPU
Replace the iBR
C2110 IBR message timeout or iBR malfunction.
unit if the fault
validity
remains active.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Perform an iBR
software update
if available.
Replace the iBR
Monitoring CPU limp
C2110 IBR iBR malfunction. unit if the fault
force
remains active
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
If the fault comes
active when the
iBR is activated
and stays active,
Reverse gate position verify if a
C2110 IBR 2013 iBR malfunction.
sensor error software update
is available. Refer
to the service
manual for more
details.
smr2013-006 19

Check CPS
RPM signal received from
C2111 IBR ECM erratic RPM signal sensor
engine ECM not plausible.
connection
If the fault comes
active when the
iBR is activated
and stays active,
Angle position sensor verify if a
C2112 IBR 2013 iBR malfunction.
warning software update
is available. Refer
to the service
manual for more
details.
Check iBR
cooling circuit.
iBR cooling system failure.
C2113 IBR 2013 iBR overheat Refer to the
iBR unit failure.
service manual
for more details.
Perform an iBR
software update
if available and
clear the fault.
Monitoring CPU
Replace the iBR
C2114 IBR 2013 message timeout or iBR malfunction.
unit if the fault
validity
remains active.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Perform an iBR
software update
if available.
Replace the iBR
Monitoring CPU limp
C2115 IBR 2013 iBR malfunction. unit if the fault
force
remains active
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
If the fault comes
active when the
iBR is activated
and stays active,
Application calibration Incompatible firmware or verify if a
C2120 IBR
is available. Refer
to the service
manual for more
details.
20 smr2013-006

If the fault comes
active when the
iBR is activated
and stays active,
C2120 IBR 2013
is available. Refer
to the service
manual for more
details.
Verify starting
and charging
Application parameters Unexpected battery power system circuits.
C2121 IBR corrupted (backup lost or memory failure. Ignore Clear fault
#1 or #2) fault if "occured" Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Verify starting
and charging
C2121 IBR 2013 corrupted (backup lost or memory failure. Ignore Clear fault
service manual
for more details.
Clean and check
for damage in
iBR motor current too high. the reverse gate
Motor current software
C2130 IBR Battery power failure. and nozzle area.
breaker
iBR unit failure. Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Internal motor drive Motor voltage feedback not
C2130 IBR
failure fitting with the command.
Clean and check
for damage in
iBR motor current too high. the reverse gate
C2130 IBR 2013 Battery power failure. and nozzle area.
breaker
iBR unit failure. Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Perform an
iBR update
with BUDS
iBR motor failure. Check iBR
iBR DC motor shorted iBR motor wires dammaged. battery power
C2131 IBR
to ground or 12V Battery power failure. Check iBR
iBR unit failure. Motor Wiring
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
smr2013-006 21

Perform an
iBR update
with BUDS
iBR motor failure. Check iBR
iBR DC motor shorted iBR motor wires dammaged. battery power
C2131 IBR 2013
to ground or 12V Battery power failure. Check iBR
iBR unit failure. Motor Wiring
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Verify if the
motor is properly
C2132 IBR Motor Open No current while activated.
connected to the
iBR housing
Verify if the
motor is properly
C2132 IBR 2013 Motor Open No current while activated.
connected to the
iBR housing
Internal motor drive Motor voltage feedback not
C2133 IBR 2013
failure fitting with the command.
Check for 0,5
to 3V on pin F
C2142 IBR (BRLS)signals A shorted connector or damaged iBR pins.
and 0,25 to 1.5
to battery Fault detected when the engine
on pin C.
Check for 0,5
to 3V on pin F
C2142 IBR 2013 (BRLS)signals A shorted connector or damaged iBR pins.
and 0,25 to 1.5
to battery Fault detected when the engine
on pin C.
Check for 0,5
to 3V on pin F
C2143 IBR (BRLS) signals B connector or damaged iBR pins.
and 0,25 to 1.5
shorted to battery Fault detected when the engine
on pin C.
Check for 0,5
to 3V on pin F
C2143 IBR 2013 (BRLS) signals B connector or damaged iBR pins.
and 0,25 to 1.5
shorted to battery Fault detected when the engine
on pin C.
Check for 4.5
Damaged sensor, damaged to 5 volts on
Brake Lever Sensor circuit wires, damaged sensor connector
C2144 IBR (BRLS) power shorted connector or damaged iBR pins. pin A & D.
to battery Fault detected when the engine Refer to the
is running or stopped. service manual
for more details.
Check for 4.5
C2144 IBR 2013 (BRLS) power shorted connector or damaged iBR pins. pin A & D.
to battery Fault detected when the engine Refer to the
for more details.
22 smr2013-006

Check for 4.5
C2145 IBR (BRLS) power shorted connector or damaged iBR pins. pin A & D.
to ground Fault detected when the engine Refer to the
for more details.
Check for 4.5
C2145 IBR 2013 (BRLS) power shorted connector or damaged iBR pins. pin A & D.
to ground Fault detected when the engine Refer to the
for more details.
Check for 0,5
to 3V on pin F
C2146 IBR (BRLS) signals A/B connector or damaged iBR pins.
and 0,25 to 1.5
reading difference Fault detected when the engine
on pin C.
Check for 0,5
to 3V on pin F
C2146 IBR 2013 (BRLS) signals A/B connector or damaged iBR pins.
and 0,25 to 1.5
reading difference Fault detected when the engine
on pin C.
Clean and check
for damage in
the reverse gate
System current
C2150 IBR iBR input current too high. and nozzle area.
software breaker
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Clean and check
for damage in
the reverse gate
System current
C2150 IBR 2013 iBR input current too high. and nozzle area.
software breaker
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Use B.U.D.S. iBR
unlock function.
System disabled and System is locked. Need
C2151 IBR Refer to the
need activation activation.
service manual
for more details.
Use B.U.D.S. iBR
unlock function.
System disabled and System is locked. Need
C2151 IBR 2013 Refer to the
need activation activation.
service manual
for more details.
Check iBR
cooling circuit.
Water temperature iBR cooling system failure. Replace iBR unit.
C2155 IBR
sensor overheat iBR unit failure. Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
smr2013-006 23

Check iBR
cooling circuit.
Water temperature iBR cooling system failure. Replace iBR unit.
C2155 IBR 2013
sensor overheat iBR unit failure. Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check fuses
#6 (REFER
Battery failure, rectifier failure, TO WIRING
damaged circuit wires, battery DIAGRAM).
terminal connection, damaged Check ground
C2161 IBR Low voltage detected
AC generator or damaged continuity to the
connectors. Ignore fault engine block.
if "occured" Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check fuses
#6 (REFER
Battery failure, rectifier failure, TO WIRING
damaged circuit wires, battery DIAGRAM).
terminal connection, damaged Check ground
C2161 IBR 2013 Low voltage detected
AC generator or damaged continuity to the
connectors. Ignore fault engine block.
if "occured" Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
If the fault comes
active when the
iS is activated
and stays active,
C2200 IS
is available. Refer
to the service
manual for more
details.
Bridge/CPU
Hardware failure or external Check for over
C2210 IS temperature sensor
heat source. utilization / heat.
overheat
If the fault comes
active when the
iS is activated
and stays active,
C2220 IS
is available. Refer
to the service
manual for more
details.
24 smr2013-006

Verify starting
and charging
C2221 IS corrupted (backup lost or memory failure. Ignore Clear fault
service manual
for more details.
If the fault comes
active when the
iS is activated
and stays active,
Internal motor drive Motor voltage feedback not verify if a
C2230 IS
failure fitting with the command. software update
is available. Refer
to the service
manual for more
details.
Check
Motor shorted to Current leak detected when suspension
C2231 IS
ground/battery the bridge is off. actuator pump
wiring.
Check
suspension
C2232 IS Motor open No current while activated.
actuator pump
and/or wiring.
Check
C2233 IS Motor current too high. suspension
breaker
actuator pump.
Check system
circuit at
Seat position sensor
iS module.
C2240 IS error Open, Shorted Sensor not connected.
(REFER TO
to Gnd
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Check
System current
C2250 IS Battery input current too high. suspension
software breaker
actuator pump.
Activate iS
System disabled and System is locked for safety. using B.U.D.S.
C2251 IS
need activation Need activation. activation
function.
Warning only: TOPS detected
Refer to the
by the system, the suspension
C2252 IS TOPS active service manual
is disable while the TOPS
for more details.
is "ON".
Check battery and
C2260 IS System under voltage System under voltage warning.
charging system.
smr2013-006 25

Check system
circuits A-B4,
A-G4, A-H2.
Make sure
that the sensor
housing is
correctly inserted
into the manifold.
Check sensor
Sensing port dirty or blocked.
connector for:
Sensor failure or
a) 5 volts
unexpected reading at idle.
supply from
Sensor fallen out of
Manifold Intake ECM on pin 1.
housing or leaking inlet.
P0106 ECM pressure sensor out b) Ground
For a leak of the Intake
of range supply from
Manifold, the ECM will
ECM on pin 2.
diagnose it only if the RPM
c) Analog voltage
is greater than 5000 RPM.
from sensor to
ECM on pin 3.
The 5 volt
supply is shared
between the TAS
signal 1, TOPS
and MAPS. Verify
all three sensor if
one is pulling too
much current.
Check system
circuits A-B4,
A-G4, A-H2.
Make sure
that the sensor
housing is
correctly inserted
Sensing port dirty or blocked. into the manifold.
Sensor failure or Check sensor
Manifold absolute
unexpected reading at idle. connector for:
pressure sensor
P0107 ECM Sensor fallen out of a) 5 volts on pin 1.
shorted to ground or
housing or leaking inlet. b) 0 volt on pin 2.
not connected.
Connector disconnected. c) 0 volt on pin 3.
The 5 volt
supply is shared
between the TAS
signal 1, TOPS
and MAPS. Verify
all three sensor if
one is pulling too
much current.
26 smr2013-006

Check system
circuits A-B4,
A-G4, A-H2.
Make sure
that the sensor
housing is
correctly inserted
into the manifold.
Sensing port dirty or blocked.
Check sensor
Manifold absolute Sensor failure or
connector for:
pressure sensor open unexpected reading at idle.
P0108 ECM a) 5 volts on pin 1.
circuit or shorted to Sensor fallen out of
b) 0 volt on pin 2.
battery housing or leaking inlet.
c) 0 volt on pin 3.
The 5 volt
supply is shared
between the TAS
signal 1, TOPS
and MAPS. Verify
all three sensor if
one is pulling too
much current.
Check the sensor
for approximately
2280 to 2736
ohms at 19 to
21°C (66 to 70°F).
Check for
Damaged sensor,
approximately
Intake manifold damaged circuit wires,
2280 to 2736
P0112 ECM temperature sensor damaged connector or
ohms at 19 to
shorted to ground damaged ECM pins.
21°C (66 to 70°F)
between ECM
connector pins
A-H3 and A-J3.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check the sensor
for approximately
2280 to 2736
ohms at 19 to
21°C (66 to 70°F).
Check for
Damaged sensor,
Intake manifold approximately
damaged circuit wires,
temperature sensor 2280 to 2736
P0113 ECM damaged connector or
open circuit or shorted ohms at 19 to
damaged ECM pins.
to battery 21°C (66 to 70°F)
between ECM
connector pins
A-H3 and A-J3.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
smr2013-006 27

Check for debris
or blockage in
cooling system.
Check the sensor
for approximately
2280 to 2736
ohms at 19 to
Damaged sensor, 21°C (66 to 70°F).
Engine coolant damaged circuit wires, Check for
P0116 ECM temperature signal damaged connector or approximately
not plausible damaged ECM pins. 2280 to 2736
ohms at 19 to
21°C (66 to 70°F)
between ECM
connector pins
A-A1 and A-J2.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for debris
or blockage in
cooling system.
Check the sensor
for approximately
2280 to 2736
ohms at 19 to
Damaged sensor, 21°C (66 to 70°F).
Engine coolant
damaged circuit wires, Check for
temperature sensor
P0117 ECM damaged connector or approximately
fault - Short circuit
damaged ECM pins. 2280 to 2736
to GND
ohms at 19 to
21°C (66 to 70°F)
between ECM
connector pins
A-A1 and A-J2.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for debris
or blockage in
cooling system.
Check the sensor
for approximately
2280 to 2736
ohms at 19 to
Engine coolant 21°C (66 to 70°F).
Engine overheated
temperature sensor Check for
or damaged sensor.
P0118 ECM fault - Short circuit approximately
Connector disconnected.
to V+ or connector 2280 to 2736
disconnected. ohms at 19 to
21°C (66 to 70°F)
between ECM
connector pins
A-A1 and A-J2.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
28 smr2013-006

Check system
circuits B-E1,
B-K1, B-K3.
Check for 0
volt on sensor
connector pin E.
Check for 5
volts on sensor
connector pin
Damaged sensor, D. The 5 volt
TAS (Throttle
damaged circuit wires, supply is shared
Accelerator sensor)
P0122 ECM damaged connector or between the TAS
1 fault (short circuit
damaged ECM pins. signal 1, TOPS
to GND)
and MAPS. Verify
all three sensor
if one is pulling
too much current.
Check for 0.5 to
3 volts on sensor
connector pin F.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check system
circuits B-E1,
B-K1, B-K3.
Check for 0
volt on sensor
connector pin E.
Check for 5
volts on sensor
connector pin
Damaged sensor, D. The 5 volt
TAS (Throttle
damaged circuit wires, supply is shared
Accelerator sensor)
P0123 ECM damaged connector or between the TLS
1 fault (short circuit
damaged ECM pins. signal 1, TOPS
to battery)
and MAPS. Verify
all three sensor
if one is pulling
too much current.
Check for 0.5 to
3 volts on sensor
connector pin F.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
High air intake Clean intercooler
temperature detected. water circuit
Fault detected when the system.
P0127 ECM Intercooler system fault
engine is running and stopped. Refer to the
Blocked intercooler water service manual
circuit. for more details.
smr2013-006 29

An open
Multiplicative mixture signal on the
adaptation exeeds Engine coolant
P0171 ECM
upper limit--> mixture temperature
too lean (CTS) can trigger
that fault
An open
signal on the
Multiplicative mixture
Engine coolant
P0172 ECM adaptation below lower
temperature
limit--> mixture too rich
(CTS) can trigger
that fault
Check for 11.4
to 12.6 ohms
between engine
connector pin
2 and ECM
connector
pin A-B3.
Check for 12
Damaged injector, damaged volts on pin
Injection Power Stage circuit wires, damaged 2 of injector
P0201 ECM fault - open line / connector or damaged connector.
Cylinder 1 ECM output pins. Check FUSE#13
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Check for
damaged
circuit wires.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for 11.4
to 12.6 ohms
between engine
connector pin
2 and ECM
connector
pin A-K1.
Check for 12
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Check for
damaged
circuit wires
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
30 smr2013-006

Check for 11.4
to 12.6 ohms
between engine
connector pin
3 and ECM
connector
pin A-J1.
Check for 12
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Check for
damaged
circuit wires.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for debris
or blockage in
cooling system.
Check the sensor
for approximately
2280 to 2736
ohms at 19 to
21°C (66 to 70°F).
Check for
High engine coolant High engine coolant
P0217 ECM approximately
temperature detected temperature detected
2280 to 2736
ohms at 19 to
21°C (66 to 70°F)
between ECM
connector pins
A-A1 and A-J2.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check system
circuits B-A3,
B-B3, B-J3.
Check for 0
volt on sensor
connector pin B.
Damaged sensor,
TAS (Throttle Check for 5
Accelerator sensor) volts on sensor
2 fault (short circuit connector pin A.
damaged ECM pins.
to GND) Check for 0.25
to 1.5 volts
on sensor
connector pin C.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
smr2013-006 31

Check system
circuits B-A3,
B-B3, B-J3.
Check for 0
volt on sensor
connector pin B.
Damaged sensor,
TAS (Throttle Check for 5
Accelerator sensor) volts on sensor
2 fault (short circuit connector pin A.
damaged ECM pins.
to battery) Check for 0.25
to 1.5 volts
on sensor
connector pin C.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for
approximately 1
ohm between
pins A and
B of the fuel
pump connector.
Check FUSE#18
(REFER TO
WIRING
Damaged pump, damaged
DIAGRAM)
circuit wires, damaged
Fuel pump open circuit Check for
P0231 ECM connector or damaged
or short to ground damaged
ECM output pins.
circuit wires.
Check for
damaged
connector,
damaged ECM
output pins or
ECM failure.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
32 smr2013-006

Check for
approximately 1
ohm between
pins A and
B of the fuel
pump connector.
Check FUSE#18
(REFER TO
WIRING
Damaged pump, damaged
DIAGRAM)
Fuel pump short circuit Check for
to battery damaged
ECM output pins.
circuit wires.
Check for
damaged
connector,
damaged ECM
output pins or
ECM failure.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for 11.4
to 12.6 ohms
between engine
connector pin
1 and ECM
connector
pin A-B3.
Check for 12
circuit wires, damaged 2 of injector
Injector 1 open circuit
P0261 ECM connector or damaged connector.
or shorted to ground
ECM output pins. Check FUSE#13
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Check for
damaged
circuit wires.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
smr2013-006 33

Check for 11.4
to 12.6 ohms
between engine
connector pin
1 and ECM
connector
pin A-B3.
Check for 12
Injector 1 shorted to
battery
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Check for
damaged
circuit wires.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for 11.4
to 12.6 ohms
between engine
connector pin
2 and ECM
connector
pin A-K1.
Check for 12
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Check for
damaged
circuit wires.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
34 smr2013-006

Check for 11.4
to 12.6 ohms
between engine
connector pin
2 and ECM
connector
pin A-K1.
Check for 12
battery
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Check for
damaged
circuit wires.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for 11.4
to 12.6 ohms
between engine
connector pin
3 and ECM
connector
pin A-J1.
Check for 12
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Check for
damaged
circuit wires.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
smr2013-006 35

Check for 11.4
to 12.6 ohms
between engine
connector pin
3 and ECM
connector
pin A-J1.
Check for 12
battery
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Check for
damaged
circuit wires.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Multiple misfire
P0300 ECM
detected
Misfire cylinder 2
P0301 ECM
(physical cylinder 1)
Misfire cylinder 0
P0302 ECM
Misfire cylinder 1
P0303 ECM
Bring engine to
5000 RPM. If fault
code appears
Damaged sensor, damaged then check for
circuit wires, damaged approximately 5
P0325 ECM Knock sensor 1 fault connector or damaged ECM Mohms between
output pins. Open circuit. system circuits
A-C3 and A-G2.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
For the CPS,
check for
700 to 900
ohms between
terminals A-H1
P0335 ECM Crankshaft signal error connector, damaged ECM
and A-K2 of
pins or damaged tooth wheel.
ECM connector.
Connector disconnected.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
36 smr2013-006

For the CAPS,
check for 12
volts on sensor
connector pin 3.
Check continuity
for circuits
Damaged sensor, damaged A-D4, A-E2 and
circuit wires, damaged terminal 4 on
connector, damaged engine connector.
P0340 ECM Camshaft 1 signal error ECM pins or damaged Check FUSE#12
tooth wheel.Connector (REFER TO
disconnected. WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Engine must
run to erase the
corrected fault.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for 0.85
to 1.15 ohms
between engine
connector pin
1 and ECM
connector
pin A-M4.
Damaged coil, damaged circuit
Ignition coil 1 open Check for 12
wires, damaged connector or
P0351 ECM circuit or shorted to volts on pin 2
damaged ECM output pins.
ground or to battery of coil connector.
Check FUSE#13
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for 0.85
to 1.15 ohms
between engine
connector pin
1 and ECM
connector
pin A-M2.
Check FUSE#14
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
smr2013-006 37

Check for 0.85
to 1.15 ohms
between engine
connector pin
3 and ECM
connector
pin A-M1.
Check FUSE#15
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for 0.85
to 1.15 ohms
between engine
connector pin
1 and ECM
connector
pin A-M4.
Ignition Power Stage Check for 12
P0354 ECM fault - short circuit to volts on pin 2
GND / Cylinder 1 of coil connector.
Check FUSE#13
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for 0.85
to 1.15 ohms
between engine
connector pin
1 and ECM
connector
pin A-M2.
Check FUSE#14
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
38 smr2013-006

Check for 0.85
to 1.15 ohms
between engine
connector pin
3 and ECM
connector
pin A-M1.
Check FUSE#15
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for 0.85
to 1.15 ohms
between engine
connector pin
1 and ECM
connector
pin A-M4.
V+ / Cylinder 1 of coil connector.
Check FUSE#13
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for 0.85
to 1.15 ohms
between engine
connector pin
1 and ECM
connector
pin A-M2.
Check FUSE#14
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
smr2013-006 39

Check for 0.85
to 1.15 ohms
between engine
connector pin
3 and ECM
connector
pin A-M1.
Check FUSE#15
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for 0.85
to 1.15 ohms
between engine
connector pin
1 and ECM
connector
pin A-M4.
Ignition Power stage
Signal not plausible, verify Check for 12
max error & false
P0360 ECM battery voltage too low volts on pin 2
detection of low battery
during ignition. of coil connector.
voltage / Cylinder 1
Check FUSE#13
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for 0.85
to 1.15 ohms
between engine
connector pin
1 and ECM
connector
pin A-M2.
max error & false
Check FUSE#14
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
40 smr2013-006

Check for 0.85
to 1.15 ohms
between engine
connector pin
3 and ECM
connector
pin A-M1.
max error & false
Check FUSE#15
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Verify FUSE#16
(5AMP).
Check for 12
Damaged solenoid, damaged
Starter power stage volts on pin 2 of
P0512 ECM circuit wires, damaged
detects high current the starter relay.
connector or damaged ECM.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Invalid D.E.S.S. Key Program a good
P0513 ECM Key not programmed in ECU.
detected key
Check resistance
at 0 RPM and
Engine leak, oil pump above 3500 RPM.
failure, damaged sensor, Switch is normally
Oil pressure switch damaged circuit wires, closed, ECM
P0520 ECM
functional problem damaged connector or connector
damaged ECM pins. pin A-E3
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Engine leak, oil pump Check resistance
failure, damaged sensor, at 0 RPM and
damaged circuit wires, above 3500 RPM.
P0523 ECM Oil pressure sensor fault damaged connector or
damaged ECM pins. Refer to the
Fault detected when the service manual
engine is running or stopped. for more details.
Check oil level.
Check impedance
Low oil pressure Low oil level, engine leak, of sensor.
P0524 ECM
condition oil pump fault. Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
smr2013-006 41

Check for
approximately
2280 to 2736
ohms at
temperature of
Exhaust gas circuit wires, damaged
19 to 21°C (66
P0544 ECM temperature sensor connector or damaged
to 70°F) between
functional problem ECM output pins.
system circuits
A-H4 and A-J4.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for
approximately
2280 to 2736
ohms at
temperature of
Exhaust gas circuit wires, damaged
19 to 21°C (66
P0545 ECM temperature sensor connector or damaged
to 70°F) between
shorted to ground ECM output pins.
system circuits
A-H4 and A-J4.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check for
approximately
2280 to 2736
ohms at
Exhaust gas temperature of
temperature sensor 19 to 21°C (66
open circuit or shorted to 70°F) between
ECM output pins.
to battery system circuits
A-H4 and A-J4.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check fuses
#6 (REFER
Battery failure, rectifier TO WIRING
failure, damaged circuit wires, DIAGRAM).
Battery voltage not battery terminal connection, Check ground
P0560 ECM
plausible damaged AC generator continuity to the
or damaged connectors. engine block.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check fuses
#6 (REFER
Battery failure, rectifier TO WIRING
failure, damaged circuit wires, DIAGRAM).
battery terminal connection, Check ground
P0562 ECM Battery voltage too low
damaged AC generator continuity to the
or damaged connectors. engine block.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
42 smr2013-006

Check for
regulator-rectifier
Battery failure, rectifier failure
failure.
P0563 ECM Battery voltage too high or battery terminal connection.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Verify the cruise
The cruise switch is shorted switch if it is
P0564 CLUSTER Cruise switch fault or activated more than 60 normally open
seconds. and close when
activated.
P0606 ECM ECM ADC fault Damaged ECM. Replace ECM
Check system
circuits B-E1,
B-K1, B-K3,
B-A3, B-B3, B-J3
Check for 0
volt on sensor
connector
pin B & E.
Check for 5
volts on sensor
connector pin A
& D. The 5 volt
TAS (Throttle supply is shared
P060D ECM Accelerator sensor) between the TAS
connector or damaged
synchronization error signal 1, TOPS
ECM pins.
and MAPS. Verify
all three sensor
if one is pulling
too much current.
Check for 0.5
to 3 volts on
sensor connector
pin Fand 0.25
to 1.5 on C
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Throttle Actuator
- Controller Fault-
P060E ECM
digital position control
exceeds limit
P0610 ECM Variant coding fault
smr2013-006 43

Check for 2.6
ohms (full tank) to
93.6 ohms (empty
tank) between
pin C and pin
Damaged sensor, damaged D at the fuel
Fuel sensor circuit wires, damaged pump connector.
P0629 CLUSTER
disconnected fault connector or damaged Check system
ECM output pins. circuit at the
gauge Pin
19 and 20.
(REFER TO
WIRING
DIAGRAM)
ECM EEPROM fault -
P062F ECM Damaged ECM. Replace ECM.
exchange ECM
ECM Fast ADC fault
P06B6 ECM
(knock detection line)
Heater Power Stage
fault for lambda sensor
P1030 ECM
upstreams of catalyst
- open line
Altitude correction
P1106 ECM factor (fho) not plausible
- out of range
Check system
circuit, perform
Throttle positions Damaged throttle actuator,
closed throttle
calculated from TPS damaged circuit wires,
P1120 ECM with B.U.D.S.
1 and TPS 2 not damaged connector or
Replace throttle
corresponding damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM.
Lambda Sensor fault
P1130 ECM upstreams of catalyst
- open line
An open
Additive mixture signal on the
adaptation exceeds Engine coolant
P1171 ECM
upper limit --> mixture temperature
too lean (CTS) can trigger
that fault
An open
signal on the
Additive mixture
Engine coolant
P1172 ECM adaptation below lower
temperature
limit --> mixture too rich
(CTS) can trigger
that fault
44 smr2013-006

Check continuity
for circuits A-C4,
A-G1, A-F4.
The 5 volt
supply is shared
Boat or sensor upside between the TAS
T.O.P.S. functional down, damaged circuit signal 1, TOPS
P1502 ECM
problem wires, damaged connector and MAPS. Verify
or damaged ECM output pins. all three sensor if
one is pulling too
much current.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check continuity
for circuits A-C4,
A-G1, A-F4.
The 5 volt
supply is shared
T.O.P.S. switch short down, damaged circuit signal 1, TOPS
P1503 ECM
circuit to 12V wires, damaged connector and MAPS. Verify
one is pulling too
much current.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check continuity
for circuits A-C4,
A-G1, A-F4.
The 5 volt
supply is shared
T.O.P.S. switch short down, damaged circuit signal 1, TOPS
P1504 ECM
circuit ground wires, damaged connector and MAPS. Verify
one is pulling too
much current.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check continuity
for circuits A-C4,
A-G1, A-F4.
The 5 volt
supply is shared
Boat or sensor upside
between the TAS
down, damaged circuit
T.O.P.S. switch fault signal 1, TOPS
P1505 ECM wires, damaged connector
non plausible state and MAPS. Verify
or damaged ECM output
all three sensor if
pins. Open circuit.
one is pulling too
much current.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
smr2013-006 45

Check continuity
for circuits A-C4,
A-G1, A-F4.
The 5 volt
supply is shared
Boat or sensor upside
between the TAS
down, damaged circuit
T.O.P.S. switch open signal 1, TOPS
P1506 ECM wires, damaged connector
circuit and MAPS. Verify
or damaged ECM output
all three sensor if
pins. Open circuit.
one is pulling too
much current.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check continuity
for circuits
B-H3, B-H1
Otas sensor voltage circuit wires, damaged
P1550 ECM and FUSE#12.
not plausible connector or damaged ECM.
Refer to the
Open circuit.
service manual
for more details.
No service action
ECM ADC fault -
P1606 ECM Damaged ECM. available for fault
exchange ECM
P1606.
Check system
circuit, perform
Throttle Actuator Damaged throttle actuator,
closed throttle
- Controller Fault - damaged circuit wires,
P160E ECM with B.U.D.S.
digital position control damaged connector or
Replace throttle
below limit damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM.
Check system
circuit, perform
Damaged throttle actuator,
closed throttle
Throttle Actuator - damaged circuit wires,
Power Stage fault damaged connector or
Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM.
Check system
circuit, perform
closed throttle
Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM.
Check system
circuit, perform
closed throttle
Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM.
46 smr2013-006

Check system
circuit, perform
closed throttle
Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM.
Check system
circuit, perform
Throttle Actuator - Damaged throttle actuator,
closed throttle
Return-Spring check damaged circuit wires,
not passed / Spring damaged connector or
Replace throttle
does not close damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM.
Check system
circuit, perform
closed throttle
Position monitoring fault damaged connector or
Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM.
Check system
circuit, perform
Throttle Actuator - closed throttle
P1616 ECM Default position check with B.U.D.S.
damaged connector or
or learning fault Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM.
Check system
circuit, perform
P1619 ECM Adaptation of upper with B.U.D.S.
mechanical limit failed Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM.
Check system
circuit, perform
P1620 ECM Adaptation of lower with B.U.D.S.
mechanical limit failed Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM.
Check system
circuit, perform
closed throttle
Abortion of adaptation damaged connector or
Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM.
smr2013-006 47

Check system
circuit, perform
P1622 ECM Repeated abortion of with B.U.D.S.
adaptation Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM.
Remove
D.E.S.S. key and
Damaged D.E.S.S. key
check system
Voltage of D.E.S.S. key switch, damaged circuit
P1654 ECM circuit B-B2.
switch out of range wires, damaged connector or
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Remove
D.E.S.S. key and
Electrical fault check system
switch, damaged circuit
P1657 ECM of D.E.S.S. key circuit B-B2.
communication line Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Remove
D.E.S.S. key and
check system
Faulty D.E.S.S. key switch, damaged circuit
P1658 ECM circuit B-B2.
communication wires, damaged connector or
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Remove
D.E.S.S. key
Perform an
P1661 ECM iBR malfunction iBR fault detected by ECM.
electrical system
shut down. Clear
fault.
Perform iBR
iBR torque request is software update
P1662 ECM iBR fault detected by ECM.
not plausible if available or
replace iBR.
ECU pin B-M4
is permanently
Permanent 12V is present supplied thru
P1679 ECM Main Relay Sticking
on ECM Pin B-M4. 15 amp fuse
and it should be
accessory 12 Vdc.
ECU Fast ADC fault
P16B6 ECM
ECU Fast ADC fault
P16B7 ECM
ECU Fast ADC fault
P16B8 ECM
P16C0 ECM Fault of ECM ADC
P16C1 ECM Fault of ECM ADC
48 smr2013-006

Fault of ECM monitoring
P16C2 ECM
module
Monitoring fault due to
P16C3 ECM Accelerator Sensor
check
Monitoring fault due to
P16C4 ECM
engine speed check
Safety fuel cut off activ
P16C5 ECM
- Monitoring level 1
Safety fuel cut off activ
P16C6 ECM
- Monitoring level 2
Check system
circuit, perform
Monitoring fault due to closed throttle
P16C7 ECM throttle valve plausibility with B.U.D.S.
check Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM.
Check system
circuit, perform
Monitoring fault due to closed throttle
P16C8 ECM exceeding permitted with B.U.D.S.
throttle valve position Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM.
Remove
D.E.S.S. key and
Monitoring detected check system
switch, damaged circuit
P16C9 ECM non plausible D.E.S.S. circuit B-B2.
key state Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
ECU detected faulty
P16CA ECM watch dog line ECU Damaged ECM. Replace ECM.
defect
ECU switch off
through watch dog
P16CB ECM Damaged ECM. Replace ECM.
line (hardware fault)
ECU defect
Check for
approximately
2280 to 2736
ohms at
temperature of
Exhaust temperature 19 to 21°C (66
not plausible to 70°F) between
ECM output pins.
system circuits
A-H4 and A-J4.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
smr2013-006 49

Check for
approximately
2280 to 2736
ohms at
Intremittent connection.
temperature of
Exhaust temperature 19 to 21°C (66
P2081 ECM circuit wires, damaged
sensor fault to 70°F) between
connector or damaged
system circuits
ECM output pins.
A-H4 and A-J4.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check system
circuit, perform
closed throttle
Electrical lower-range damaged circuit wires,
P212C ECM with B.U.D.S.
violation TPS 2 damaged connector or
Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, replace
ECM
Check system
circuit, perform
closed throttle
Electrical upper-range damaged circuit wires,
P212D ECM with B.U.D.S.
Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, replace
ECM
TAS (Throttle
P2159 ECM Accelerator sensor)
signal not plausible
Air intake manifold leak
P2279 ECM
downstream of throttle
Check cooling
system for
blockage.
Check if the
Exhaust overheat, damaged
High exhaust exhaust injection
P2428 ECM sensor or damaged circuit
temperature detected valve is properly
wires.
calibrated.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check system
circuit, perform
closed throttle
P2620 ECM TPS value not plausible with B.U.D.S.
Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM
Check system
circuit, perform
closed throttle
Electrical lower-range damaged circuit wires,
Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM
50 smr2013-006

Check system
circuit, perform
closed throttle
Electrical upper-range damaged circuit wires,
Replace throttle
damaged ECM.
actuator, repalce
ECM
Check C.A.N.
iBR fault detected by ECM. circuits wires.
CAN communication
C.A.N. circuit failure, Replace iBR.
U0129 ECM error between ECM
iBR or ECM failure. Refer to the
and iBR module
Disconnected connector. service manual
for more details.
If fault ACTIVE,
Warning only: the iS module verify CAN
IBR CAN messages
U0129 IS lost communication with connection
timeout or validity
the iBR. between iBR
and iS
Install proper
Exchange security - Incorrect ECM or cluster recommended
U0300 ECM
Wrong ECM for engine. ECM or cluster
for vehicle.
Check C.A.N.
circuits wires.
ECM CAN messages C.A.N. circuit failure, ECM Replace ECM.
U0401 IBR
timeout or validity software failure. Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
If fault ACTIVE,
ECM CAN messages
timeout or validity
the engine ECU. between ECM
and iS
Check C.A.N.
circuits wires.
ECM CAN messages C.A.N. circuit failure, ECM Replace ECM.
U0401 IBR 2013
timeout or validity software failure. Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check C.A.N.
circuits wires.
Replace
Cluster CAN messages C.A.N. circuit failure, Cluster instrument
U0457 IBR
timeout or validity software failure. Cluster.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
If fault ACTIVE,
Cluster CAN messages
timeout or validity
the Cluster. between Cluster
and iS
smr2013-006 51

Check C.A.N.
circuits wires.
Replace
Cluster CAN messages C.A.N. circuit failure, Cluster instrument
U0457 IBR 2013
timeout or validity software failure. Cluster.
Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check C.A.N.
circuits wires.
Cluster fault detected by ECM. Replace
Cluster CAN Timeout
C.A.N. circuit failure, instrument
U16A1 ECM error-Missing CAN
Instrument cluster or ECM Cluster.
ID 514h
failure. Refer to the
service manual
for more details.
Check C.A.N.
circuits wires.
Cluster CAN Timeout
ID 230h
service manual
for more details.
Check C.A.N.
circuits wires.
Cluster CAN Timeout
ID 408h
service manual
for more details.
Check C.A.N.
iBR fault detected by ECM. circuits wires.
iBR CAN Timeout
C.A.N. circuit failure, Replace iBR.
iBR or ECM failure. Refer to the
ID 010h
Disconnected connector. service manual
for more details.
Check C.A.N.
circuits wires.
iBR fault detected by ECM.
iBR CAN Timeout Replace
C.A.N. circuit failure,
U16A5 ECM error-Missing CAN instrument iBR.
iBR or ECM failure.
ID 012h Refer to the
Disconnected connector.
service manual
for more details.
Check C.A.N.
circuits wires.
Cluster check sum error C.A.N. circuit failure, instrument
U16A6 ECM
- CAN ID230h Instrument cluster or ECM Cluster.
service manual
for more details.
52 smr2013-006

Check C.A.N.
circuits wires.
Cluster check sum error C.A.N. circuit failure, instrument
U16A7 ECM
- CAN ID408h Instrument cluster or ECM Cluster.
service manual
for more details.
Check C.A.N.
circuits wires.
iBR check sum error Replace iBR.
U16A8 ECM C.A.N. circuit failure, ECM
- CAN ID010h Refer to the
software failure.
service manual
for more details.
Check C.A.N.
circuits wires.
iBR check sum error Replace iBR.
U16A9 ECM C.A.N. circuit failure, ECM
- CAN ID012h Refer to the
software failure.
service manual
for more details.
Cluster CAN Timeout
U16AA ECM error-Missing CAN
ID 410h
Cluster check sum error
U16AB ECM
- CAN ID410h
smr2013-006 53
Subsection XX (INTELLIGENT THROTTLE CONTROL (iTC))
INTELLIGENT THROTTLE CONTROL

(iTC)
SERVICE TOOLS
DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS ............................................................... 529 036 188 ........................................... 15
FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER ............................................................ 529 035 868 ............................... 15, 19, 21
SERVICE PRODUCTS
DIELECTRIC GREASE ................................................................... 293 550 004 ........................................... 20
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Some functions or features described in
this section may not apply to every PWC model,
or may be available as an option.
The iTC is an electronic throttle control system
that includes a cableless throttle control located
on the RH side of handlebar, an electric throttle ac-
tuator (ETA) located on the throttle body and the
engine control module (ECM). The iTC is often re-
ferred to as a "throttle by wire" system.
sdd2009-001-030_b
TYPICAL
1. Throttle body
2. Throttle actuator
The throttle lever operates the throttle accelera-

tor sensor (TAS). It is a double output hall effect
sensor. The redundancy is used for security pur-
poses.
The throttle actuator (ETA) is a DC motor on the
throttle body that regulates the throttle plate via a
drive gear. Pulse width modulation (PWM) is used
sdd2009-001-031_a
to control the motor. In the throttle body, there is
TYPICAL
a double throttle position sensor (TPS). The redun-
1. Throttle lever dancy is used for security purposes. The TPS is
2. Throttle accelerator sensor (TAS) a potentiometer that supplies the ECM the actual
angle position of the throttle plate.
According to the torque demand from the TAS,
the ECM powers the ETA motor to rotate towards
open or close the throttle plate. When the ECM
detects through the TPS that the throttle plate has
reached the targeted opening, the ECM stops the
throttle actuator.
The iTC allows the throttle actuator to be moved ir-
respective of the accelerator sensor position since
it is not directly linked by a throttle cable.
smr2012-025 1
While the throttle lever might be fully pulled in and Once the maximum cruise speed is set, the oper-
held, the ECM could close the throttle plate in- ator can vary the watercraft speed from idle speed
stead of opening it if the iBR lever were pulled up to the set cruise speed using the throttle lever.
in. Then, the ECM could open the throttle plate The set cruise speed will not be exceeded even if
to accelerate the engine to increase the braking the throttle lever is fully depressed.
effect. These different throttle plate movements As you proceed under a constant cruising speed
could be achieved while the throttle lever was still setting, keep your attention level up to maintain
fully pulled in. This is one of the great flexibility of good situational awareness.
the iTC.
Slowing down is a matter of releasing the throttle
The use of the iTC allows the following additional lever further than the set point, or by pulling the
engine modes of operation. iBR lever in or decrease speed with the DOWN
button.
Touring Mode
If the iBR lever is pulled in for braking, CRUISE
Touring mode allows the operator to choose for mode is overridden but not deactivated.
progressive throttle response at certain engine
speed. Once the iBR lever is released and the throttle is
pulled in to engage forward position, the cruise
Available engine power and acceleration is re- function will reengage to limit the watercraft
duced when accelerating from a complete stop speed as it was set before iBR lever activation.
and when operating in the low engine power
range under certain conditions. Slow Speed Mode
When throttle is applied, the engine will progres- The Intelligent Throttle Control also allows for a
sively accelerate to an operating range whereby Slow Speed Mode where the driver can adjust and
full power eventually becomes available. If the en- set idle speed. This is useful when operating in
gine is throttled down sufficiently and for a long slow speed zones where the driver must be es-
enough period of time, engine power and acceler- pecially attentive to possible obstacle avoidance.
ation will again be reduced.
The throttle plate will open and close as necessary
Sport Mode to maintain the set speed.
Sport mode allows the operator for instant throttle Ski Mode
response.
Ski mode allows for repeated and precisely con-
Maximum engine power is available throughout trolled launches and a set towing speed, designed
the engine operational range. specifically for towing a skier or wake boarder.
ECO Mode RAMP Function
When ECO mode is selected (fuel economy The RAMP function available in ski mode is a pre-
mode), engine RPM is limited whereby an op- programmed function used for launching and ac-
timal cruising speed is maintained in order to celerating the PWC when towing a skier or wake-
reduce fuel consumption. boarder.
Cruise Control TARGET SPEED Function

Cruise mode is a function of iTC (intelligent Throt- The TARGET SPEED function limits the maximum
tle Control) system that allows the operator to set towing speed.
the desired maximum watercraft speed.
Learning and Rental Keys
This is useful when cruising for long distances, op-
erating in limited speed zones, or towing a tuber, Learning and Rental keys limit the watercraft ma-
skier or wake boarder. ximum speed. The full stroke of the throttle lever
is used while only a partial stroke of the throttle
Cruise mode only limits forward speed, the oper- plate is achieved. Therefore, greater throttle lever
ator must keep the throttle depressed to maintain movement is used while a smaller engine speed
forward speed. and torque variation is applied through the throttle
actuator. This permits a more accurate and eas-
ier throttle operation to control the engine within
a specified torque curve and maximum speed set-
ting for a learner.
2 smr2012-025
O.T.A.S. TM System (Off-Throttle

Assisted Steering)
The O.T.A.S. (Off-Throttle Assisted Steering)
system provides additional maneuverability in
off-throttle situations. The O.T.A.S. system is
electronically activated and slightly increases en-
gine speed under a pre-defined RPM when the
driver initiates a full turn. When the handlebar is
brought back to its center position, the throttle
reverts to idle.
The throttle plate will open and close as necessary
to assist the steering.
Limitations
The O.T.A.S. system cannot help maintaining con-
trol or prevent collisions in all situations.
smr2012-025 3
OPERATING MODES
GTI
GTS GTI GTI SE GTR WAKE RXP-X
LIMITED
Touring mode X X X X X X N.A.
Sport mode X X X X X X X
ECO mode X X X X X X X
Cruise mode N.A. Opt Opt X Opt X N.A.
Slow speed mode N.A. Opt Opt X Opt X N.A.
Ski mode N.A. Opt Opt Opt Opt X N.A.
Learning key modes X X X X X X X
X = Indicates a standard feature
Opt = Indicates a feature available as an option
N.A. = Not Applicable
Touring Mode WARNING

By default, the watercraft is set to TOURING When activating sport mode, be sure to
mode of operation when started. maintain situational awareness of other wa-
A TOURING mode indicator is ON in the multi- tercrafts, obstacles, or persons in the water.
function gauge to confirm the active mode of op-
eration. 1. Depress and hold the SPORT button for at least
1 seconds.
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
TOURING MODE INDICATOR (ALL MODELS

EXCEPT RXT-X/RXT-X aS)
Sport Mode
When selected, SPORT MODE provides for
instant throttle response and more rapid acceler- smo2012-002-009_a
TYPICAL
ations than TOURING MODE. 1. Sport button
NOTE: Sport mode is not available if using a
LEARNING key. The following message will be displayed:
Once activated, SPORT MODE will remain active
until it is deactivated by the operator, or the engine in
lap
is shut down whereby it defaults back to TOUR- AM

RPMgal/h
ING MODE.
Activating Sport Mode
To quickly activate sport mode while riding at
speed, carry out the following:
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
ENTERING SPORT MODE - INCREASED
ACCELERATION - INSTRUCT PASSENGERS TO
HOLD - PRESS_SPORT_BUTTON
4 smr2012-025
WARNING
Ensure passengers are advised that sport
mode provides for increased accelerations
and that they are to hold on tightly.
2. Press the SET button again to activate sport

mode.
A scrolling SPORT MODE ACTIVATED message
will momentarily confirm that sport mode has
been activated.
smo2012-002-009_a
TYPICAL
in
lap
1. Sport button
AM
RPMgal/h
NOTE: The following message will scroll in the

multifunction display: SPORT MODE DEACTI-
VATED.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
in
lap
AM
SPORT MODE ACTIVATED RPMgal/h
NOTE: After a few seconds, the gauge will revert

to its normal display.
3. Ensure the SPORT mode indicator is turned on.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
SPORT MODE DEACTIVATED
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h

2. Ensure the TOURING mode indicator is on.
SPORT MODE INDICATOR (ALL MODELS in
EXCEPT RXT-X) lap

AM
RPMgal/h
NOTE: The SPORT mode indicator will come on

and stay on as long as sport mode is active.
There is no SPORT mode indicator in the multi-
function display, but only a SPORT MODE indica- TOURING MODE INDICATOR (ALL MODELS
tor light in the tachometer. EXCEPT RXT-X/RXT-X aS)
Deactivating Sport Mode
To quickly deactivate sport mode while riding at ECO Mode
speed, carry out the following: (Fuel Economy Mode)
How to Activate ECO Mode
WARNING
1. Depress the ECO button for at least 1 seconds.
When deactivating sport mode, be sure to
maintain situational awareness of other wa-
tercrafts, obstacles, or persons in the water.
1. Depress and hold the SPORT button for at least

1 seconds.
smr2012-025 5
smo2012-002-009_b smo2012-002-009_b
TYPICAL TYPICAL
1. ECO button 1. ECO button
The following message will be displayed on the The ECO mode indicator will be deactivated.
multifunction display:
Cruise Mode
GTS/GTI Series, GTR and WAKE
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
Cruise Mode Activation at Idle Speed
NOTE: This function is available up to approxi-
mately 10 km/h (6 MPH).
To activate and preset CRUISE MODE at idle
MESSAGE DISPLAYED speed, carry out the following:
1. Tap the throttle lever to move the iBR to the
ECO MODE
forward position.
2. Press and hold the cruise button.
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
FUEL ECONOMY MODE - HOLD SET TO ACTIVATE
OR MODE TO EXIT
The ECO mode indicator will also be activated.

How to Deactivate ECO Mode sdd2009-001-024_j
ENGAGING CRUISE AT IDLE

1. Depress the ECO button for at least 1 seconds. Step 1: Tap throttle to engage FORWARD
Step 2: Press cruise button
The following message will appear in the multi-

function display.
6 smr2012-025
MESSAGE DISPLAYED MESSAGE DISPLAYED

CRUISE MODE _ SELECT SPEED _ PRESS SET TO CRUISE MODE ACTIVE
ACCEPT OR MODE TO EXIT
A beep indicating that you are now in cruise mode
3. Press the UP button until the desired cruise will sound, and a CRUISE indicator will come on in
speed is indicated in the numerical display. the multifunction gauge.
CRUISE MODE INDICATOR
Cruise Mode Activation Above Idle Speed

To activate cruise mode above idle speed (10 km/h
sdd2009-001-024_i (6 MPH)):
1. UP button 1. Accelerate to the desired watercraft speed and
2. DOWN button
hold throttle lever steady.
The following will be displayed in the multifunc- 2. Press and hold the cruise button for approxi-
tion gauge. mately 1 second.
FUNCTION SELECTED - CRUISE MODE

1. CRUISE MODE _ SPEED ADJUSTING
2. Cruise speed set point indication
4. Press the SET button to save the cruise speed sdd2009-001-024_j
selected and engage cruise mode. The follow- ENGAGING CRUISE AT SPEED
Step 1: Accelerate to desired speed and hold throttle steady
ing scrolling message will appear in the multi- Step 2: Press cruise button
function display.
will sound, and a CRUISE indicator will come on in
the multifunction gauge.
smr2012-025 7
Deactivating Cruise Mode

To deactivate cruise mode:
1. Release the throttle lever.
2. Press the cruise button.
Deactivation of cruise mode is indicated by:
– The CRUISE indicator will turn off.
– A BEEP will be heard.
NOTE: If the throttle lever is not fully released
Changing Set Cruise Speed when the cruise button is pressed to deactivate
cruise mode, the BEEP will not be heard and the
To increase or decrease the set cruise speed:
cruise indicator will remain on. The speed limiting
1. Hold the throttle lever all the way in to the han- function of cruise mode will stay active until the
dlebar. throttle is fully released, then the BEEP will be
2. On the RH handlebar, press UP/DOWN button. heard and the cruise indicator will go out.
Cruise Mode
RXT, GTX SERIES and WAKE PRO
Activating Cruise Mode
1. Maintain a constant speed.
2. Press and hold the cruise button for approxi-
mately 1 second.
sdd2009-001-024_h
CHANGING SET CRUISE SPEED

1. Throttle lever
2. UP button
3. DOWN button
While the UP/Down is being pressed to change

the speed setting, the following will appear in the
multifunction gauge.
2 sdd2009-001-024_c
TYPICAL
1. CRUISE button
1 2. Throttle lever
3. UP button
4. DOWN button
You will hear a beep indicating that you are now in

cruise mode, and a green CRUISE indicator light
FUNCTION SELECTED - CRUISE MODE will be lit.
1. CRUISE MODE _ SPEED ADJUSTING
NOTE: Pressing the UP/DOWN button repeatedly

will change the cruise set speed in single incre-
ments. Pressing and holding the button will in-
crease or decrease the speed until the button is
released.
8 smr2012-025
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
CRUISE MODE _ SPEED ADJUSTING
3. Press the SET button to save the cruise speed

selected and engage cruise speed function.
sdd2009-001-034_a
The following message will scroll in the multi-
TYPICAL - CRUISE MODE INDICATOR LIGHT function display.
NOTE: Activating cruise mode of operation only

limits the maximum speed available when de- in
lap
AM
pressing the throttle lever. The throttle lever RPMgal/h
must be held in to maintain forward speed. Wa-

tercraft speed can be varied from idle up to the
set cruise speed using the throttle lever once the
cruise function is activated. Watercraft speed
may vary depending on water conditions during MESSAGE DISPLAYED
use.
CRUISE MODE ACTIVE
Cruise Mode Activation at Idle Speed
NOTE: This function is available up to approxi- Changing Set Cruise Speed
mately 10 km/h (6 MPH). To increase or decrease the set cruise speed:
To activate and preset CRUISE MODE at idle 1. Keep throttle lever fully depressed.
speed in forward thrust: 2. Press the UP/DOWN button.
1. Press and hold the cruise button until the fol-
lowing message appears in the multifunction
display. in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
CRUISE MODE _ SPEED ADJUSTING
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
3. Press the UP/DOWN button to adjust speed ac-
CRUISE MODE _ SELECT SPEED _ PRESS SET TO cordingly.
2. Press the UP button until the desired cruise To deactivate cruise mode:
speed is indicated in the numerical display. The 1. Release the throttle lever.
following message will scroll in the multifunc- 2. Press the cruise button.
tion display.
– The CRUISE indicator light in the speedometer
display will go off.
smr2012-025 9

when the cruise button is pressed to deactivate
cruise light will remain on. The speed limiting
function of cruise mode will stay active until the
throttle is fully released, then the BEEP will be
heard and the cruise light will go out.
Slow Speed Mode

The Intelligent Throttle Control also allows for a
Slow Speed Mode where the driver can adjust and
set idle speed. This is usefull when operating in
slow speed zones where the driver must be es-
pecially attentive to possible obstacle avoidance. sdd2009-001-034_a
The operator can set idle speed between TYPICAL - CRUISE MODE INDICATOR LIGHTIN SPEEDOMETER
1.6 km/h to 11 km/h (1 MPH to 7 MPH).
A message will scroll in the multifunction display
If you accelerate above approximately 14 km/h to specify that you are now in slow speed mode.
(9 MPH) , Slow Speed Mode will be deactivated
and the engine will return to idle RPM when the
throttle is released. in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
Should a situation arise where the operator must
stop or accelerate quickly away from a hazardous
situation, pulling in the iBR lever, or pulling in on
the throttle lever will deactivate slow speed mode
and normal control of the watercraft will be re-
turned to the operator. MESSAGE DISPLAYED
Activating Slow Speed Mode SLOW SPEED MODE _ SPEED ADJUSTING
To activate slow speed mode of operation:
The default slow speed setting of 1 will also come
1. Release the throttle lever to idle RPM. on for a few seconds in the numerical display.
2. Pull in and release the iBR lever to engage neu-
tral. 2
3. Press and hold the cruise button for approxi- in
lap
AM
mately 1 second. RPMgal/h
SLOW SPEED MODE INDICATION

1. SLOW SPEED MODE ACTIVATED message
2. Slow speed setting is displayed here for a few
seconds
NOTE: The scrolling SLOW SPEED MODE mes-

sage repeats itself as long as slow speed mode is
activated. The numerical display reverts back to
sdd2009-001-024_g the previous indication after a few seconds.
TYPICAL
1. CRUISE button
The CRUISE indicator will come on in the

speedometer or multifunction display to indi-
cate cruise activation.
10 smr2012-025
2
in in
lap lap
AM AM
RPMgal/h RPMgal/h
SLOW SPEED MODE INDICATION MESSAGE DISPLAYED

1. SLOW SPEED MODE message SLOW SPEED MODE ACTIVE
2. Numerical display reverts to previous indication
The displays will revert back to their previous in-
Changing Set Slow Speed dication a few seconds after the last activation of
the UP or DOWN button.
To increase or decrease the set slow speed,
press the UP/DOWN button on the RH handlebar Deactivating Slow Speed Mode
once, or repeatedly. The slow speed mode can be deactivated using
any of the following methods:
– Pressing the cruise button
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h – Depressing the iBR lever
– Accelerating past the set slow speed.
When deactivating SLOW SPEED MODE by
pressing the cruise button, or accelerating using
the throttle lever, the iBR gate stays in the for-
MESSAGE DISPLAYED ward position.
SLOW SPEED MODE _ SPEED ADJUSTING When using the iBR lever, the iBR gate will move
towards the reverse position, then neutral when
The setting point indication in the digital screen the lever is released.
will come back on to indicate the slow speed set- SLOW SPEED MODE deactivation will be indi-
ting change. cated in the following manner:
– The CRUISE indicator will go out
2
in
– The scrolling SLOW SPEED MODE ACTIVE
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
message will cease.
1
Ski Mode
trolled launches, and a set towing speed, specifi-
SLOW SPEED MODE INDICATION cally for towing a skier or wake boarder.
Ski mode is not available if using a LEARNING key.
1. SLOW SPEED MODE message
2. Numerical display reverts to previous indication RAMP Function
The RAMP function offers a pre-programmed set-
The displays will revert back to their previous in- ting for launching and accelerating the PWCr.
dication a few seconds after the last activation of
the UP or DOWN button. RAMP 1 provides:
– Slowest launch (smoothest)
NOTE: There are 5 slow speed settings available
(1 through 5). Adjust slow speed mode to desired – Slowest acceleration rate
speed. – Slowest TARGET SPEED range.
The following message will scroll across the mul- RAMP 5 provides:
tifunction display periodically as a reminder. – Quickest launch
– Quickest acceleration rate
– Highest TARGET SPEED range.
smr2012-025 11
TARGET SPEED Function 3. Press SET to enter the function. The multifunc-
The TARGET SPEED function limits the maximum tion gauge message will change to RAMP. The
towing speed. RAMP setting number will be visible in the nu-
merical display.
Once the RAMP has been selected, an average
PWC target speed for that RAMP will be visible in
the numerical display.
The average speed displayed and the speed range
available is dependent on the RAMP selected.
The higher the RAMP number, the higher the
speed range.
The operator may increase or decrease the tar-
get speed to any value within the selected RAMP
speed range.
NOTE: If the desired target speed cannot be set
in the selected RAMP, you must exit then reen-
gage SKI MODE, and select a different RAMP. sdd2009-001-024_f
1. SET button
Engaging and Using Ski Mode
To engage ski mode, carry out the following steps: 2
1. Release throttle lever.
NOTE: Ski mode cannot be engaged if the throttle 1
lever is not fully released, and if CRUISE or SLOW
SPEED mode is engaged. A message will appear
in the multifunction display advising you of the sit-
uation. Follow the instructions in the display.
FIRST SETTING AVAILABLE - RAMP
2. Press the MODE button repeatedly until SKI
MODE is visible in the multifunction display. 1. RAMP message
2. Ramp setting
4. To change the RAMP setting, press the

UP/DOWN button until the desired ramp num-
ber is visible in the numerical display.
5. Press SET to lock in the ramp setting; the mul-
tifunction display will change to the TARGET
SPEED setting function.
1
sdd2009-001-024_e
TYPICAL
1. MODE button
SECOND SETTING AVAILABLE - TARGET SPEED

1. TARGET SPEED message
2. Target speed setting
6. Press the UP/DOWN button to increase or de-

crease the target speed.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED 7. Press SET to lock in the target speed; the dis-
play will switch to the following scrolling mes-
SKI MODE
sage.
12 smr2012-025
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
SKI MODE_PRESS_SET_TO START OR MODE TO
EXIT
sdd2009-001-024_h
NOTE: A BEEP will be heard every 5 seconds as 1. Hold throttle lever in
a SKI MODE engaged reminder. 2. Press UP button to increase speed
3. Press DOWN button to decrease speed
8. Press SET again; the following confirmation
message will appear. NOTE: If the throttle is partly released during a
ski run, the SKI MODE indicator light will start
to blink and the speed adjust function using the
UP/DOWN arrow button will be deactivated.
11. To end a ski run or to pick up a fallen skier or
wakeboarder, fully release the throttle to re-
gain normal throttle control.
NOTE: When the throttle is fully released during
ski mode operation, the system returns to ski
MESSAGE DISPLAYED mode engaged status. The SKI MODE indicator
SKI MODE ACTIVE_PRESS_MODE_AND RETURN light will go out but, ski mode will remain engaged
TO IDLE TO CANCEL and a message to that effect will reappear in the
multifunction display.
NOTE: The SKI MODE indicator will also come 12. Press SET to reactivate ski mode and fully pull
ON and blink when ski mode becomes active. It in the throttle lever to start another ski run.
will be ON steady when the operator pulls and
holds the throttle lever all the way in to the han- Deactivating Ski Mode
dlebar. To exit ski mode at any given point during the ski
mode setting process, press the MODE button.
To end a ski run and completely deactivate ski
mode, release the throttle to idle, then press the
MODE button.
Learning Key Mode

There are 5 speed settings available.
SKI MODE INDICATOR By default, the speed setting is no 3.
9. To launch the PWC in ski mode, pull in and hold Changing Learning Key Speed Settings
the throttle lever all the way to the handlebar NOTE: Changing key settings is only available
grip. The PWC will accelerate to the set TAR- when the engine is not running.
GET SPEED and the SKI MODE indicator will be
To change learning key settings, carry out the fol-
on steady.
lowing:
10. To increase or decrease the TARGET SPEED
1. Press the START/STOP button to wake up the
during a ski run, press the UP/DOWN button,
electrical system and install the NORMAL key
do not release the throttle lever.
on the engine cut-off switch.
2. Wait for the information center to complete its
self-test and display the key recognition mes-
sage.
smr2012-025 13
3. Press the MODE button repeatedly until KEY NOTE: The key speed setting is applicable to any
MODE is visible in the digital screen of the in- key of the same type used on a specific water-
formation center. craft. The same key type used on a different wa-
tercraft may therefore have a different key speed
setting.
D.E.S.S. KEY KEY SPEED APPROX.
TYPE SETTING MAX. SPEED
80 km/h
5
(50 MPH)
74 km/h
4
(46 MPH)
LEARNING 68 km/h
3
KEY (42 MPH)
60 km/h
2
sdd2009-001-024_b
(37 MPH)
TYPICAL - GAUGE CONTROL BUTTONS
1. MODE button 51 km/h
2. SET button 1
3. UPDOWN button (32 MPH)
PROCEDURES
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
THROTTLE ACCELERATOR
SENSOR (TAS)
General
The throttle accelerator sensor (TAS) is a double
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
hall effect sensor that sends a signal to the ECM
KEY MODE which is proportional to the throttle lever angle.
4. Press the SET button once to enable learning

key mode setting function. The display will
change to L-Key.
2
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
sdd2009-001-031_a
FUNCTION SELECTED - LEARNING KEY
1. Throttle lever
2. Throttle accelerator sensor (TAS)
1. L-KEY message
2. Learning key setting First ensure the throttle lever functions ade-
quately. Pull the throttle lever fully in towards the
5. Press the UP or DOWN button to toggle the key handlebar, then release it. It must reach the wide
setting between 1 and 5. See table for speed open position and return to the idle position freely
limitations according to setting. when released. Otherwise, refer to STEERING
6. Press the SET button once to save the setting, SYSTEM for an inspection.
twice to exit the function, or simply wait for the
function to time-out. The change in key setting
will automatically be saved.
14 smr2012-025
TAS Voltage Test NOTE: Use only the 24 pin connectors.

Check the voltage of the throttle accelerator sen- 7. Install the tether cord on the engine cut-off
sor as follows. switch.
1. Open the front storage cover and remove the 8. Briefly press the START button to wake up the
storage bin. ECM.
Models with Suspension 9. Use the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035
868) and select Vdc.
2. Lift suspension using the gauge to gain access.
10. Measure the voltage readings on the installed
NOTE: If more height is required or if the iS can- diagnostic harness connector as follows. Re-
not be used, manually lift suspension by the an- fer to wiring diagram for details.
chor points close to handlebar and safely lock in
this position. Do not lift the watercraft from the 24-PIN CONNECTOR IDLE POSITION
WIDE OPEN
anchor points. POSITION
Models Without Suspension PIN VOLTAGE (Vdc)

3. As applicable, disconnect the top of the 2 front 9 (VI/BU) 3 (BK) 4.9 - 5.1
air ventilation hoses for ease of access to steer- 3 (BK) 6 (YL/BU) 0.15 - 0.35 1.4 - 1.6
ing connector. Refer to BODY subsection.
10 (VI/GN) 4 (BK) 4.9 - 5.1
4. As applicable, remove vertical panel in front
storage compartment. 4 (BK) 7 (YL/GY) 0.4 - 0.6 2.9 - 3.1
All Models If voltage is as per specification, the TAS sensor

5. Reach in under the steering support and discon- is functional.
nect the 24-pin steering connector. If voltage is out of specification, check continuity
of wires between the ECM and the sensor. If con-
tinuity is good, replace sensor.
11. Reinstall removed components.
TAS Replacement (Except X Package)

1. Remove steering cover. Refer to STEERING
SYSTEM.
2. Pry out sensor locking tabs and pull out sensor.
sbl2010-034-019_c
1. 24-pin connector
6. Connect the DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS (P/N 529 036

188) to make an in-line connection between the
disconnected connectors.
smr2009-030-100_a
Step 1: Pry out

Step 2: Pull out sensor
529036188
smr2012-025 15
3. Pull up on the connector end of the TAS and TAS Replacement (X Package Only)
gently pull it out of the throttle handle.
TAS Removal
4. Remove connector from TAS sensor.
1. Remove the 2 screws in the front of the upper
5. For installation, reverse the removal procedure. handlebar housing.
Pay attention to the following.
6. Align sensor pins in their holes.
smr2010-031-001_a
Step 1: Remove these two screws
2. Remove the screw at back of the handlebar.
smr2009-030-101_a
1. Align pin into hole
7. Press sensor into position until locking tabs en-

gage. Ensure it is properly locked in place.
8. Route harness through the notched bracket.
smr2010-031-002_a
Step 2: Remove this screw
NOTICE Do not try to pull the cover off the

housing at this time or damage to the cover will
occur.
3. Grab hold of the housing cover to prevent it
from falling off the handlebar when unlocking
the upper housing in the following step.
4. Using a small screwdriver, unlock the tab that
retains the upper housing and pull the upper
smr2009-030-102_a
housing off.
1. Route harness here NOTICE As you remove the upper housing,
9. When installation is complete, ensure throttle hold on to the housing cover to prevent it from
lever functions properly. falling off the handlebar.
16 smr2012-025
8. Gently pull TAS out of the throttle handle.
smr2010-031-003_a
Step 3: Hold on to this housing cover

Step 4: Unlock this tab smr2010-031-006_a
Step 7: Pull up at connector end

5. Remove the housing cover from the handlebar. Step 8: Pull TAS out of throttle lever here
9. Remove the connector from the TAS.
smr2010-031-004_a
smr2010-031-007_a
Step 5: Remove housing cover
Step 9: Remove TAS connector
6. Release the two tabs that retain the TAS in the
handlebar housing. TAS Installation
Installation is the reverse of the removal proce-
dure however, pay attention to the following.
1. Install connector on TAS and ensure wiring is
properly positioned in handlebar housing.
smr2010-031-005_a
Step 6: Release TAS retaining tabs (2)
7. Pull up on the connector end of the TAS.
smr2012-025 17
smr2010-031-008_a
Step 1: Ensure proper wire routing

smr2010-031-010_a
2. Insert the TAS in the throttle lever. Step 7: Ensure engagement of housing cover retaining tabs
3. Align the TAS in the housing, then press it into Step 8: Ensure engagement of upper housing locking tabs
the housing until both locking tabs engage. En- 9. Install the three retaining screws for the upper
sure it is properly locked in place. housing and torque them to 2 N•m (18 lbf•in).
4. Ensure wiring is not pinched. 10. Ensure there are no fault codes. Connect wa-
5. Position the housing cover onto the handlebar tercraft to the latest B.U.D.S. software, refer
housing. to DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT CODES.
6. Ensure positioning of corrugated conduit. 11. Ensure proper operation of throttle lever and
TAS with engine running.
CRUISE SWITCH
Cruise Switch Test
If pressing the cruise switch does not engage the
CRUISE or SLOW SPEED modes, test the cruise
switch as per following procedure.
1. Connect the watercraft to the latest B.U.D.S.
software. Refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS
AND B.U.D.S. subsection for details.
2. In B.U.D.S., click the Monitoring tab then the
Cluster tab.
3. Press the cruise button on the RH handlebar
smr2010-031-009_a and look for the Cruise indicator light to come
Step 2: Insert TAS in throttle lever on in the Switch inputs area.
Step 3: Ensure locking tab engagement
Step 4: Ensure wiring is not pinched
Step 5: Install housing cover
Step 6: Ensure proper corrugated conduit positioning
7. Position the upper housing on the handlebar

housing.
8. Ensure proper engagement of the upper hous-
ing and cover tabs.
18 smr2012-025
CRUISE SWITCH TEST

SWITCH
GAUGE CONNECTOR RESISTANCE
POSITION
Switch
OL
released
Pin 7 Pin 10
Switch
Close to 0
depressed
If the test failed, replace the cruise switch.

If the test succeeded, the problem may be internal
smr2009-036-012_b
to the information center. Try a new one.
TYPICAL
1. Cruise indicator light
Cruise Switch Replacement
If the test succeeded, the switch and wiring are 1. Disconnect information center connector.
good and the problem may be related to the
information center or ECM. Check for related
fault codes. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT
CODES.
If the test failed, test the switch and wiring as de-
scribed in the following steps.
4. Remove the gauge support cover. Refer to
GAUGE subsection.
5. Disconnect the gauge connector.
NOTICE Pull connector lock out sideways.
Do not twist the screwdriver.
smr2009-042-002_a
1. Gauge connector
2. Pull out to unlock connector
2. Remove terminal 7 (GRAY wire) and 10 (BLACK

wire) from the gauge connector.
10 1
smr2009-042-002_a
1. Gauge connector
11 20
6. Use the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 smr2009-036-003_e
GAUGE CONNECTOR PIN-OUT

868).
7. Select the (ohm) function. 3. Attach a string approximately 1.2 m (4 ft) to the
8. Test the cruise switch as per following table. end of the wires which will be used for draw-
ing the new switch wires through the harness
protective sheath.
4. Remove steering cover. Refer to STEERING
AND O.T.A.S. subsection.
5. Remove the MODE/SET and UP/DOWN arrow
switches from its support.
smr2012-025 19
NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect

switches.
smr2009-036-014_a
SOME PARTS REMOVED FOR CLARITY

1. Cruise switch
smr2009-036-013_b
2. Wiring in slot
3. MODE/SET and UP/DOWN arrow switch connector
1. MODE/SET and UP/DOWN arrow switches
2. Cruise switch
14. Complete installation in reverse order of re-
6. Remove the cruise switch by lifting it off its sup- moval.
port.
7. Cut the locking ties from the harness sheath as SPORT/ECO SWITCH
necessary. Sport/ECO Switch Overview
8. Carefully pull the wires out of the harness.
Ensure the string draws through the harness
sheath.
9. Tie the string to the new cruise switch wire
ends and pull the new wires through the har-
ness.
10. Install new switch terminals in the gauge con-
nector.
11. Apply a small amount of DIELECTRIC GREASE
(P/N 293 550 004) on switch terminals.
12. Reconnect gauge connector.
13. Properly insert cruise switch wiring in slot in smo2012-003-008_c
switch support before installing MODE/SET LH SIDE

and UP/DOWN arrow switches. 1. Sport buttons
2. ECO button
The Sport/ECO switch contain a series of 4 diodes

for the Sport and ECO switches.
The center wire to the switches (pin C), is com-
mon for Sport/ECO switch and VTS switch. The
other two wires (pins A and B), act as signal wires
for each set of switches to the gauge. They actu-
ally each form one branch of an electronic circuit
within the gauge.
Each diode (in circuit) drops a nominal 0.6 Vdc
when conducting electricity. If the circuit current
passes through all four diodes (if the Sport/ECO
switch is open), a drop of 2.4 Vdc would be mea-
sured across the 4 the diodes (pin B to pin C). This
2.4 Vdc at pin B tells the gauge the Sport/ECO
switch is open.
20 smr2012-025
If the Sport button is pressed, 2 diodes are by- If one switch does not function, replace
passed. The remaining two diodes in the circuit Sport/ECO switch.
drop 1.2 Vdc (at pin B). If both switches stay off, do the following to verify
If the ECO button is pressed, 1 diode is by- the circuit.
passed. The remaining three diodes in the circuit 1. Remove the gauge support cover.
drop 1.8 Vdc (at pin B).
The gauge senses these voltages through pin 14
of its connector, and interprets them as signals
that tell it which switch is activated.
When Sport or ECO button is pressed, a circuit
within the gauge will translate it to CAN protocol
and transmit it through the CAN bus. The ECM
(engine control module) will react to the command
and carry out the function.
NOTE: The above stated voltages vary slightly de-
pending on the actual voltage applied to the circuit
and the current flow through the diodes. When
using a Fluke 115 multimeter for testing in diode
test mode, the voltage and current applied by the
multimeter are lower than in circuit. The quality smr2009-042-002_a
of probe contact, the actual probes and leads, and 1. Gauge connector
2. Slide out gauge connector tab to unlock
the precision of the meter calibration will all affect
the results, which will most likely be slightly lower 3. Using the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035
than nominal values stated. 868) set to the diode test function, test the
Sport or ECO switches as per following tables.
Sport/ECO Switch Operation Test
NOTE: In diode test mode, the multimeter will
If Sport/ECO switches do not allow the selection, test the voltage drop through the diodes.
test the switches as follows:
– Check the Sport/ECO switch operation using
B.U.D.S. software. Refer to COMMUNICA-
TION TOOLS AND B.U.D.S. SOFTWARE sub-
section to connect B.U.D.S.
– Check if there is any occurred or active fault
code(s). If not, proceed with the following test.
– Depress the Sport button on steering and check
if the Sport light turn on in B.U.D.S.
– Repeat with the ECO switch. ECO light should
turn on in B.U.D.S.
vmr2006-020-005
smr2012-025-001_a
MONITORING AND CLUSTER TABS

1. Sport light
smr2012-025 21
iS SWITCH TEST
MULTIMETER
SWITCH
LEAD/GAUGE VOLTAGE
POSITION
CONNECTOR
BLACK/WHITE
lead/Pin 14
Approx. 2 Vdc
WHITE/GN lead/Pin
Switch 15
released WHITE/GN
lead/Pin 14
OL
BLACK/WHITE
lead/Pin 15
BLACK/WHITE
lead/Pin 14 Approx.
WHITE/GN lead/Pin 1.1 Vdc
UP 15
depressed WHITE/GN
lead/Pin 14
OL
BLACK/WHITE
lead/Pin 15
BLACK/WHITE
lead/Pin 14 Approx.
WHITE/GN lead/Pin 1.6 Vdc
DOWN 15
depressed WHITE/GN
lead/Pin 14
OL
BLACK/WHITE
lead/Pin 15
NOTE: Remember that each diode should drop

approximately 0.6 Vdc when positively biassed,
and read as an OL (open circuit) when negatively
biassed (leads reversed).
If, when measuring between pins 14 and 15 an
OL is obtained with both positive and negative
diode biassing, test the wiring harness continu-
ity between the gauge and switch assembly. If
harness continuity is good, replace the switch
assembly.
If any reading is significantly different than listed,
carry out the same test at the switch connector,
refer to the wiring diagram. If you obtain the same
results, replace the switch assembly.
If voltages measured on every switch are as
listed in the previous tables (or very close to it),
the switches and the wiring harness are good.
The fault may be within the gauge, or in the circuit
or component the function applies to.
22 smr2012-025
Subsection XX (ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI))
ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI)

SERVICE TOOLS
DIGITAL INDUCTION TACHOMETER ........................................... 529 014 500 ............................................. 2
ECM ADAPTER TOOL................................................................... 529 036 166 .................................. 4, 7, 17,
25, 30–31, 33–34, 36
FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER ............................................................ 529 035 868 ........................ 4, 7–8, 16–17,
23, 25, 27, 30, 33–34
FUEL HOSE DISCONNECT TOOL ................................................ 529 036 037 ........................................... 12

FLUKE AUTOMOTIVE BACK PROBE PIN..................................... TP40 ........................................... 28
FLUKE SUREGRIP INSULATED TEST LEADS............................... TL224 ........................................... 28
SERVICE PRODUCTS
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ...........................8, 13, 26, 36
LOCTITE 518 ................................................................................. 293 800 038 ........................................... 35
GENERAL WARNING
Fuel lines remain under pressure at all times.
WARNING Always proceed with care and use appro-
Always disconnect battery prior to working priate safety equipment when working on a
on the fuel system. Always disconnect bat- pressurized fuel system. Wear safety glasses.
tery exactly in the specified order, BLACK Do not allow fuel to spill on hot engine parts
(-) cable first. Electrical connections should and/or on electrical connectors. Proceed with
be disconnected prior to disconnecting fuel care when removing or installing high pres-
lines. sure test equipment, or disconnecting fuel
line connections. Wipe off any fuel spillage
WARNING in the bilge. Never use a hose pincher on
Fuel vapors are flammable and explosive un- high pressure hoses.
der certain conditions. Ensure work area is
well ventilated. Do not smoke or allow open When the repair is completed, ensure the hose
flames or sparks in the vicinity. from the fuel rail to the fuel pump is properly con-
nected and secured in its support. Perform the
Use B.U.D.S. software to release the fuel pres- FUEL SYSTEM HIGH PRESSURE LEAK TEST as
sure in the system prior to disconnecting a fuel described in FUEL TANK AND FUEL PUMP sub-
line. Refer to FUEL TANK AND FUEL PUMP subsection.
section
WARNING
Cover the fuel line connection with an absorbent
Always perform the fuel system high pres-
shop rag before disconnecting them. Slowly dis-
sure leak test if any component has been
connect the fuel hose to minimize spilling.
removed or disconnected.
smr2012-026 1
WARNING Air Induction

If a gasoline leak and/or odor is present, do Throttle Body
not start the engine. Repair the leak. A 62 mm throttle body is mounted on the intake
manifold.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Air for combustion is drawn in by the engine or by
The electronic fuel injection system (EFI) on a mechanically-driven supercharger. The air flows
this engine is based on the open-loop Bosch through the throttle body and is controlled by a
ME-Motronic system. It is comprised of various throttle plate.
sensors used for detecting ongoing operating Fitted on the throttle body, an electronic throttle
conditions of the engine and watercraft, and in- actuator (ETA) allows the ECM to electronically
cludes all the actuators that perform the required control the throttle plate opening which regulates
adjustment to the engine. the amount of air that enters the engine, and
This system also introduces torque management therefore engine speed.
functions. There is no idle air control valve (IACV).
Electrical System Fuel System

ECM (Electronic Control Module) Fuel Rail
From input signals (e.g. throttle lever, iBR lever), A single fuel rail is mounted on the intake mani-
the ECM acknowledges driver demands and fold. The fuel rail ensures that enough fuel can be
converts them to an engine torque requirement delivered to the fuel injectors throughout the en-
through calculation of several variables. Then, the gine operating range.
ECM controls the iTC (intelligent Throttle Control), The fuel rail is fed by the fuel pump. The fuel pres-
the injection system and the ignition system to sure applied to the fuel rail is regulated by the fuel
meet the torque requirement. pressure regulator located in the fuel pump mod-
The ECM manages the engine torque require- ule.
ments and controls engine operation to ensure it
is delivering optimum performance, fuel economy Fuel Injectors
and meeting emission regulations. The ECM also Three fuel injectors are used to inject fuel into the
controls idle speed and limits maximum engine intake ports of the cylinder head. One injector is
speed. used per cylinder.
Since the ECM manages several torque require- Fuel Pump
ments at the same time including contradictory
An electric fuel pump with an integrated pressure
demands (such as the throttle lever and the iBR
regulator is used. For more details on the fuel
lever being fully pulled in at the same time), it
pump unit, refer to FUEL TANK AND FUEL PUMP
must prioritize the most important requirement
subsection.
according to predefined conditions and apply the
proper action.
ADJUSTMENT
EFI Sensors
The ECM reads the inputs from the sensors IDLE SPEED
which it compares to predetermined parameters
stored in the ECM, makes computations, and ac- Idle speed is not adjustable. The ECM controls
tivates the outputs accordingly (injectors, ignition the idle speed of the engine through the iTC sys-
coils etc.). tem by controlling throttle plate opening using the
ETA (electronic throttle actuator).
Signals from sensors are used by the ECM to de-
termine the injection and ignition parameters (ref- If desired, the engine RPM can be measured fol-
erenced to fuel and ignition maps) as required to lowing this procedure:
maintain the optimum air-fuel ratio. 1. Use a DIGITAL INDUCTION TACHOMETER
(P/N 529 014 500).
2 smr2012-026
2. Press the START button to wake up the ECM.

switch.
4. Ensure throttle lever is completely released.
5. In B.U.D.S., click the ECM Setting tab, then
click on the Reset button.
529014500
2. Wrap the tachometer's wire a few times

around the protruding part of the ignition coil.
smr2009-030-002_a
ECM SETTING PAGE IN B.U.D.S.

1. Click Reset button
The following message will confirm the operation.
A32CCIA
TYPICAL
3. Start engine, read the engine RPM on the in-

duction tachometer.
smr2009-030-003
NOTE: If idle speed is not within specifica-

tions, check if there is any occurred or active Reset is completed.
fault code(s). If not, proceed with the CLOSED NOTE: It is not necessary to click on the Write
THROTTLE RESET PROCEDURE. If idle speed is button in B.U.D.S.
still not adequate, there is probably a mechanical
Exit B.U.D.S.
problem.
NOTE: If the throttle valve was not within the al-
CLOSED THROTTLE RESET lowed range when the Closed Throttle reset was
carried out, no error message would be displayed.
General Information However, a fault code would be set when the en-
This operation performs a reset of the TPS values gine is started.
of the throttle body in the ECM. 6. Start engine and make sure it operates normally
Closed throttle reset must be carried out only through its full engine RPM range.
when: 7. Check for fault codes using B.U.D.S. If a fault
– Replacing the throttle body. code related to the throttle actuator appears,
– Replacing the ECM. clear it, then carry out another Closed Throttle
reset procedure. To clear faults, refer to DIAG-
Closed Throttle Reset Procedure NOSTIC AND FAULT CODES subsection.
1. Use the B.U.D.S. software to perform this set-
ting. Refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS AND
B.U.D.S. subsection.
smr2012-026 3
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
DIAGNOSTIC TIPS ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
Engine problems are not necessarily related to the (ECM)
fuel injection system. CAN Continuity Tests
It is important to ensure that the engine/propul- If a communication problem is present, perform
sion system, fuel delivery and electrical systems the appropriate continuity test relating to the com-
are functioning normally. ponent reported by, or not available in B.U.D.S.
For diagnostics purposes, use B.U.D.S. software. Test wire continuity between the corresponding
See COMMUNICATION TOOLS AND B.U.D.S. terminal of the CAN bus bar in the fuse box and
subsection. the suspected component as follows.
After a problem has been solved, be sure to clear For fuse box access, refer to POWER DISTRIBU-
the fault(s) in the ECM using the B.U.D.S. soft- TION AND GROUNDS subsection.
ware.
Remove both CAN bus bars.
WARNING
All electrical actuators and electronic mod-
ules are powered as soon as the START
button is pressed. Always disconnect the
battery prior to disconnecting any electrical
or electronic parts.
Never use a battery charger to temporarily substi-

tute the battery as it may cause the ECM to func-
tion erratically, or not at all.
Check related-circuit fuse solidity and condition
with an ohmmeter. A visual inspection could lead
to a false diagnosis.
smr2011-027-003_h
Electrical Related Problems 1. CAN LO bus bar
2. CAN HI bus bar
It is important to check the following in the elec-
trical system: Inspect bus bar condition.
– Battery voltage
Disconnect the connector from the component to
– Fuses be tested. Refer to its appropriate subsection.
– Bus bar condition in fuse box
Use the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 868)
– Ground connections and select .
– Wiring and connectors.
Refer to the CAN BUS DIAGRAM above and
Ensure that all electronic components are genuine read wire resistance between the each bus bar
OEM. Any modification to the wiring harness may terminal and the applicable component terminal.
lead to poor system operation or generate fault Check the continuity of the WHITE/RED wire and
codes. the continuity of the WHITE/BLACK wire.
Electrical Connections The following gives an example between the CAN
Pay particular attention to ensure that terminals LO wire and the ECM.
and pins are not out of their connectors, corroded, NOTE: When working with the ECM, install the
or out of shape. ECM ADAPTER TOOL (P/N 529 036 166) on ECM "B"
When probing terminals, pay attention not to de- connector. For connector identification, refer to
form the terminals as this could cause a loose or ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI) subsection.
intermittent connection that would be difficult to
troubleshoot.
4 smr2012-026
CONTINUITY TEST EXAMPLE: ECM TO All Models

FUSE BOX
ECM FUSE BOX
RESISTANCE
CONNECTOR TERMINAL
Close to 0
B-C2 G1
(continuity)
smr2009-030-025_a
1. ECM
2. ECM connectors
ECM Connector Identification

There are 2 connectors connected to the ECM.
The engine harness female connector is con-
smr2011-027-002_a nected to the ECM module male connector "A".
FUSE BOX PIN IDENTIFICATION
The vehicle system control harness female con-
If continuity is good, CAN wires are in good connector is connected to the ECM module male con-
dition. nector "B".
If continuity is not good, check wiring, connectors The ECM connectors have 48 pins.
and terminals condition.
NOTE: It may be necessary to check the continu-
ity to more than one component.
Reconnect connectors and reinstall removed
parts.
ECM Access
Open/remove seat.
smr2009-027-005
Models with Suspension ECM CONNECTORS
1. Remove the rear ventilation box located over NOTE: For connector information, cleaning and
the engine. Refer to AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. probing, refer to WIRING DIAGRAM subsection.
2. Remove deck extension. Refer to BODY.
smr2012-026 5
ECM Power Supply Diagram ECM Wake Up Logic

With Tether Cord Installed
Battery
When the START button is pressed to start en-
B1
Fuse F8 gine:
A1
C4 – ECM pin B-D1 receives current from battery via
Bus bar (Vdc) the START switch. ECM is woken up.
C8 C9 C6
– ECM pin B-H2 provides a ground to the relay
A9 B6
Relay B9
Fuse F3 coil in fuse box.
A6
A11 – The relay contacts close and provides main
B11
D12 23
12 Vdc power to the ECM at pin B-M4.
Long bus bar (Vdc) Start switch – The relay also powers the other components in
D1 2
the electrical system.
E1
Fuse F19 – ECM pin B-E4 monitors for a tether cord in-
F1
stalled on the engine cut-off switch.
B-M4
Switched Signal
B-H2 – When a tether cord is installed, the magnet in
power
Wake up
B-D1 the tether cord cap closes the reed switches
ECM in the engine cut-off switch and the ECM pin
B-L1, B-M2, B-M3
B-F2 provides a ground. This tells the ECM the
H4, H5, H6
Bus bar (ground)
tether cord is installed.
H1 – ECM pin B-B2 reads the D.E.S.S. key in the
Engine tether cap and determines if it is valid. If so, the
smr2011-025-001_aen engine can be started.
ECM Wake Up Validation Without a Tether Cord Installed

Press the START button. When the START button is pressed:
– The information center turns on, goes through
NOTE: Do not install the tether cord.
the self-test function, displays applicable mes-
QUICK INDICATION THAT ECM IS POWERED sages and turns off a few seconds later.
(assuming the observed component is working) – The engine cannot be cranked.
– The ECM stays powered up until it removes
Information center turns on.
the ground to the relay coil after 3 minutes (pin
Fuel pump turns on for approximately 5 seconds. B-H2).
– Relay contacts open and power to the ECM is
NOTE: Since the tether cord is not installed, the removed.
information center will turn off a few seconds af- – Power is also removed on all other electrical
ter the self-test, but the ECM and electrical sys- systems except the GPS supply to the informa-
tem will stay powered for approximately 3 min- tion center.
utes longer.
If the ECM does not turn on, check the following: ECM Shut Down Logic
– Fuses F8, F19 and F3 in fuse box When the engine is stopped by using the STOP
– Battery voltage. Refer to CHARGING SYSTEM button or by removing the tether cord from the
engine cut-off switch, the following occurs:
– The 12 Vdc power bus bars in fuse box
– ECM stops the engine.
– The ground bus bar in fuse box
– After 5 seconds, the information center turns
– Relay and wiring. Refer to POWER DISTRIBU- off.
TION
– After 60 seconds, ECM (pin B-H2) removes the
– ECM power supply wires and ground wires. ground to the relay coil.
See following procedure.
– Relay contacts open and power to the ECM is
removed.
– Power is also removed on all other electrical
systems except the GPS supply to the informa-
tion center.
6 smr2012-026
ECM Power Supply Test

1. Remove cover from fuse box. Refer to POWER
DISTRIBUTION subsection.
NOTE: Do not install the tether cord.
3. Use the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035
4. Probe fuse F19 as illustrated.
NOTE: This will validate the fuse at the same smr2009-030-010
time.
BATTERY 868) and select .
FUSE BOX VOLTAGE
POST 5. Probe terminals as per following table.
Fuse F19
ECM
terminal at F1 FUSE BOX RESISTANCE
Ground Battery voltage ADAPTER
Fuse F19
Terminal F1 Pin B-M4 Close to 0
terminal at E1
smr2011-027-003_J
smr2011-027-003_i
If battery voltage is measured at E1 but not at F1, If an open circuit is measured, repair or replace
replace the fuse. wiring and connectors.
If voltage is not measured at E1, check the wiring If the ECM power circuit tests good, the problem
and connections between the relay output and may be one of the following:
F19 output. Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM. – Start switch circuit open to ECM, refer to
STARTING SYSTEM subsection.
If voltage is as per specification, carry out the
CONTINUITY TEST OF ECM POWER CIRCUIT. – ECM not providing a ground to relay in fuse box,
refer to POWER DISTRIBUTION subsection.
Continuity Test of ECM Power Circuit – ECM ground wire open circuit, refer to CONTI-
NUITY TEST OF ECM GROUND CIRCUITS in
1. Wait for electrical power to go off (approxi-
this subsection.
mately 3 minutes).
– ECM internal problem.
2. Disconnect "B" connector from ECM.
3. Install ECM ADAPTER TOOL (P/N 529 036 166) on Continuity Test of ECM Ground
ECM connector. Circuits
1. Disconnect "B" connector from ECM.
2. Install ECM ADAPTER TOOL (P/N 529 036 166) on
ECM connector.
smr2012-026 7
3. Use the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 WARNING

868) and select .
Always disconnect the BLACK negative (–)
4. Probe adapter terminals as per following table. battery cable first, then disconnect RED pos-
ECM BATTERY itive (+) cable.
RESISTANCE
ADAPTER POST
2. Disconnect both ECM connectors from ECM.
Pins B-L1, Close to 0
Ground 3. Unscrew all retaining screws and remove the
B-M2 and B-M3 (continuity)
engine ECM from its support on the intake man-
ifold.
smr2009-030-010_a
If measurement is out of specification, check

ground bus bar in fuse box and continuity
of its wires and connections with the engine
grounds. Also check battery ground and engine smr2009-030-025_b
1. ECM
grounds. Refer to POWER DISTRIBUTION AND 2. Retaining screws
GROUNDS.
ECM Installation
Reverse removal procedure however, pay atten-
tion to the following.
1. Install ECM. Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293
800 060) to mounting screws and torque to
5.5 N•m (49 lbf•in).
NOTICE Always replace ECM by the same
part number or by a BRP approved equivalent.
2. Reconnect ECM connectors.
3. Reconnect battery cables.
WARNING
smr2011-027-003_e
TYPICAL
Always reconnect the RED positive (+) battery
1. Ground bus bar in fuse box cable first, then reconnect BLACK negative (–)
cable.
If everything tests good and ECM does not
power up, try a new ECM. Refer to ECM RE- 4. If a new ECM is installed, refer to ECM RE-
PLACEMENT. PLACEMENT in this subsection.
ECM Removal ECM Replacement
NOTE: If a new ECM is to be installed, first read Prior to replacing a suspected ECM, ensure that all
the procedures in ECM REPLACEMENT in this the recommendations in the general introduction
subsection. of this section have been followed.
1. Disconnect battery cables. When installing a new ECM, data must be entered
and a reset is required.
8 smr2012-026
ECM Manual Data Entry

There are 2 possible methods to collect the re-
quired information. The 1st being the easiest:
1. Use B.U.D.S. software and obtain the data
from a saved .mpem file on your PC com-
puter.
2. Collect the information from the vehicle and
BOSSWeb.
1st Collecting Method: Obtaining the Data
from a Saved .mpem File
1. Use the B.U.D.S. software.
mmr2009-023-082_a
NOTE: It is not necessary to perform any connec-
tion. The PC computer can be used alone. NOTE: You may have to go to another AutoSave
2. In B.U.D.S., click on the Open button. folder from a previous version of B.U.D.S.
4. Choose the latest file saved for this specific ve-
hicle.
mmr2009-023-080
3. Click once on the Folder Up button in the Open

box.
smr2009-030-006
TYPICAL
IMPORTANT: Be sure to use the file that specifi-

cally matches the vehicle you are servicing.
NOTE: The file name structure is as follows:
BUDS version_VIN_date read (yyyymmdd)_hour read
(hhmmss).mpem
Example:
P2.3.22.12_2BPSBK8C68V000168_20090206_111640.mpem
mmr2009-023-081_a
Hence:
B.U.D.S. version: P2.3.22.12
Double click on the AutoSave folder. VIN: 2BPSBK8C68V000168
Date: 2009 02 06
Hour: 11h 16m 40s
5. Go in the Vehicle tab and record the following

information.
1. Vehicle serial number
2. Engine serial number (without the leading
“M”)
smr2012-026 9
3. Vehicle model number 2. Vehicle model number

4. Customer name. 3. Customer name.
smr2009-030-007_a
VEHICLE TAB
6. Enter recorded data in ECM as detailed in

ENTERING THE COLLECTED INFORMATION mmr2009-118-011
INTO THE ECM. SERVICE, UNIT HISTORY
2nd Collecting Method: Collect the 3. Enter the recorded data in the new ECM as de-
Information from the Vehicle and BOSSWeb tailed in ENTERING THE COLLECTED INFOR-
1. Record engine serial number. MATION INTO THE ECM.
Entering the Collected Information into the
ECM
1. Use the latest applicable B.U.D.S. software.
Refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS AND
switch.
4. In B.U.D.S., click the Read Data button to read
the new ECM.
vmr2006-012-100_aen
1
The following window will pop up.
F18D03A
1. Engine serial number
2. Record the following numbers using

BOSSWeb. Look in Service menu and
choose Unit history.
10 smr2012-026
8. Enter the old ECM serial number in the Add

Part In History window.
smr2008-023-100
5. Enter the vehicle model number.

NOTICE Do not enter SBOAT for a PWC. En-
ter only the appropriate model number as ob-
tained when gathering the information.
smr2009-030-008
HISTORY, PART REPLACEMENT, ADDING PART IN HISTORY

TABS
NOTE: The ECM serial number can be found on

the ECM sticker that also identifies the part num-
ber.
9. Click the Keys tab and click on the Erase All
Keys button.
smr2008-023-100_b
TYPICAL
6. Click the Vehicle tab and enter the information

you recorded previously.
2. Engine number (do not enter the “M” at the
beginning of the engine number)
3. Customer name.
mmr2009-023-087
10. Program the desired D.E.S.S. key(s) to the wa-

tercraft. Refer to D.E.S.S. SYSTEM subsec-
tion.
NOTE: If you do not program at least one D.E.S.S.
key to the watercraft, you will not be able to write
the data to the new ECM, and will be prompted
to do so.
11. Briefly press the vehicle START button to
smr2009-030-007_a wake up the ECM. Engine must not crank.
VEHICLE TAB
12. Click on the Write Data button.
7. Click on the following tabs:
– History
– Part Replacement
– Add Part in History.
smr2012-026 11
vmr2006-012-100_ben
13. Perform the Closed throttle reset. Refer

to Closed Throttle Reset (TPS) in ADJUST-
MENTS in this subsection.
14. Reinstall remaining removed parts. lmr2006-008-010
FUEL RAIL NOTE: It may be necessary to rotate fuel hose fit-

ting to align the tool ends with the openings of the
Fuel Rail Removal locking mechanism.
1. Open/remove seat. Fuel Rail Removal
Models with Suspension 1. Cut locking ties retaining engine harness to fuel
2. Remove rear ventilation box. Refer to BODY. rail.
All Models
4. Pull out relay in fuse box to prevent fuel pump
to turn on unexpectedly. Refer to POWER DIS-
TRIBUTION.
Fuel Rail Hose Disconnection
1. Release fuel pressure. Refer to FUEL PUMP in
FUEL TANK AND FUEL PUMP subsection.
2. Place an absorbent shop rag under the fuel sup-
ply hose fitting at the fuel rail to catch any fuel
leakage.
3. Disconnect fuel hose from fuel rail using the
FUEL HOSE DISCONNECT TOOL (P/N 529 036 smr2009-030-011_b
037). 1. Cut locking ties
2. Remove screws retaining the fuel rail.
529036037
12 smr2012-026
smr2009-030-026_a smr2009-030-026_a
1. Retaining screws 1. Retaining screws
3. Gently pull fuel rail side to side (wiggle). 3. Properly install new locking ties to secure en-
gine harness to fuel rail.
smr2009-030-027_a
1. Fuel rail
4. Disconnect all injector connectors. smr2009-030-011_b
5. Pull fuel rail out with fuel injectors. 1. New locking ties
Fuel Rail Installation Fuel Rail Hose Connection

Reverse the removal procedure. However, pay at- 1. Apply engine oil on O-rings of fitting.
tention to the following.
fuel rail retaining screws.
2. Torque fuel rail retaining screws to 9 N•m
(80 lbf•in).
mmr2009-121-022_a
1. Apply oil on O-rings
smr2012-026 13
2. Connect fuel hose to fuel rail. If the engine RPM does not drop when clicking on
IMPORTANT: Push fuel hose fitting on fuel rail un- a cylinder, this cylinder is not functioning properly.
til you hear a "click". Try pulling fuel hose off fuel Check the following:
rail to ensure fitting is properly locked. – Fuel injector operation. Refer to FUEL INJEC-
TOR OPERATION TEST.
3. Pressurize the fuel system and check for a fuel
leak. Refer to FUEL SYSTEM HIGH PRESSURE – Spark plug and ignition coil. Refer to IGNITION
LEAK TEST in FUEL TANK AND FUEL PUMP SYSTEM.
subsection. – Engine condition.
WARNING Fuel Injector Operation Test with

Failure to pressurize the fuel system may re- B.U.D.S. (Static)
sult in severe injury or a life threatening situ- NOTICE After fuel injector activation using
ation should a leak occur. B.U.D.S., always crank engine in drowned
mode to ventilate engine and prevent a poten-
4. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. tial backfire due to fuel accumulation in the
engine.
FUEL INJECTOR
1. Connect watercraft to B.U.D.S. software.
Fuel Injector Operation Test with Refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS AND
B.U.D.S. (Dynamic) B.U.D.S.
1. Connect watercraft to B.U.D.S. software. 2. Press the START button to wake up the ECM.
Refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS AND 3. Install the tether cord on the engine cut-off
B.U.D.S. switch.
2. Start engine. 4. In B.U.D.S., click the following:
3. In B.U.D.S., click the following: – Read Data button
– Read Data button – Activation tab.
– Monitoring tab. 5. On the ECM Activation page, energize the fuel
4. Using the B.U.D.S. software, shut down each injector to be tested by clicking on it in B.U.D.S.
engine cylinder one at a time by clicking on the
button under the applicable cylinder.
smr2009-030-013_a
ACTIVATION AND ECM TABS

1. Injector of cylinder no. 1 shown
mmr2009-120-006_a
6. Listen to the injector.
MONITORING AND ECM TABS
1. Click on cylinder number to be tested If you can hear the injector, it validates its oper-
ation. Carry out the FUEL INJECTOR BALANCE
If the engine RPM drops when clicking on a cylin-
TEST.
der, the injector and the ignition of this cylinder are
functioning normally. If you do not hear the injector, carry out the INJEC-
TOR INPUT VOLTAGE TEST.
14 smr2012-026
Fuel Injector Balance Test with

B.U.D.S.
NOTICE After fuel injector activation using
B.U.D.S., always crank engine in drowned
mode to ventilate engine and prevent a po-
tential backfire due to fuel accumulation in
engine.
1. Install a fuel pressure gauge as described in
FUEL PUMP PRESSURE TEST of FUEL TANK
AND FUEL PUMP subsection.
smr2009-030-013_a
Refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS AND 1. Injector of cylinder no. 1 shown
B.U.D.S.
3. Press the START button to wake up the ECM. 9. Record the fuel pressure drop for injector no. 1.
4. Install tether cord on engine cut-off switch. 10. In B.U.D.S., click the Fuel Pump button to ac-
tivate fuel pump.
5. In B.U.D.S., click the following:
– Read Data button
– Activation tab.
6. In B.U.D.S., click the Fuel Pump button to ac-
tivate fuel pump.
smr2009-030-014_a

1. Fuel pump
11. Repeat the procedure for fuel injectors no. 2

and no. 3 and record the pressure drop for
smr2009-030-014_a each injector.
ACTIVATION AND ECM TABS 12. The maximum fuel pressure drop between in-
1. Fuel Pump activation button
jectors should not exceed the following spec-
7. Fuel pressure must be within specification. Re- ification:
fer to FUEL TANK AND FUEL PUMP subsec- MAXIMUM FUEL PRESSURE DROP ALLOWED
tion. Re-activate fuel pump as necessary. BETWEEN FUEL INJECTORS
8. In B.U.D.S., energize fuel injector no. 1. 10 kPa (1.5 PSI)
If pressure drop of any fuel injector is greater than

the specification, replace that injector then repeat
the test.
13. Using the valve on the fuel pressure gauge,
release the pressure in the system (if so
equipped).
14. Remove fuel pressure gauge and reinstall re-
moved parts.
Fuel Injector Input Voltage Test

1. Open/remove seat.
smr2012-026 15

2. Remove rear ventilation box. Refer to BODY.
All Models
3. Disconnect fuel injector connectors.
NOTE: Push against tab underneath connector as
illustrated to unlock it.
smr2009-030-029_a
If battery voltage is measured, carry out the IN-

JECTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT TEST.
If battery voltage is not measured, check continu-
ity between fuse box and injector as follows.
Continuity Test of Injector Power

Circuit
1. Remove cover of fuse box. Refer to POWER
DISTRIBUTION subsection.
smr2009-030-028_a 2. Remove the long bus bar.
PUSH HERE TO UNLOCK
smr2011-027-003_L
TYPICAL
smr2009-030-011_a
1. Long bus bar
1. Fuel injector connectors
4. Press the START button to wake up the ECM. 868) and select .
5. Install tether cord on engine cut-off switch. 4. Read resistance of the applicable injector circuit
868) and select Vdc. INJECTOR
INJECTOR
FUSE BOX MEASUREMENT
CONNECTOR
7. Read input voltage to the applicable injector as
per following table. 1 (rear) Terminal D7
VIOLET wire
PROBE INJECTOR 2 Terminal D6 Close to 0
MEASUREMENT with a tracer
CONNECTOR 3 Terminal D5
VIOLET wire with a tracer
Battery voltage
to battery ground
16 smr2012-026
If control circuit and all tests applicable to the in-

jector are good, try a new ECM. Refer to ECM.
Fuel Injector Resistance Test

(at ECM Connector)
1. Reconnect the injector connector.
2. Disconnect the ECM "A" connector.
3. Install ECM ADAPTER TOOL (P/N 529 036 166) on
ECM connector.
4. Remove the long bus bar from fuse box.
smr2011-027-003_m
If continuity is good, the fuse, wiring and connec-

tors are functional.
If continuity is not obtained, first check the fuse
and replace as required.
5. If fuse is good, repair/replace wiring and con-
nectors from fuse box to injector. Refer to
WIRING DIAGRAM subsection.
6. Reinstall bus bar and cover.
Fuel Injector Control Circuit Test

1. Disconnect ECM "A" connector. smr2011-027-003_L
TYPICAL
2. Install ECM ADAPTER TOOL (P/N 529 036 166) on 1. Long bus bar
ECM connector.
3. Use the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 868) and select .
868) and select .
6. Measure resistance value between terminals
4. Probe terminals as per following table. as follows.
ECM FUSE BOX ECM RESISTANCE @
INJECTOR INJECTOR MEASUREMENT INJECTOR
ADAPTER TERMINAL ADAPTER PIN 20°C (68°F)
1 (rear) Pin A-B3 1 D7 A-B3
BROWN
2 Pin A-K1 wire with Close to 0 2 D6 A-K1 11.4 - 12.6
a tracer
3 Pin A-J1 3 D5 A-J1
smr2009-030-010_c
If control circuit is at fault, repair or replace wiring

and connectors.
smr2011-027-003_m
smr2012-026 17
If resistance values are as specified, injector coil 3 2

is in good condition.
If resistance value are not as specified, repeat test
at injector connector.
7. Reinstall bus bar and fuse box cover.
Fuel Injector Resistance Test (at

Component)
1. Remove injector connector.
2. Check resistance value between injector pins R1503motr164A 1
as per followings table. FUEL RAIL ASSEMBLY
1. Fuel injector
RESISTANCE @ 2. Injector clip
INJECTOR PIN
20°C (68°F) 3. O-ring
1 2 11.4 - 12.6 3. Pull the fuel injector out of the fuel rail.
Fuel Injector Installation

dure. However, pay attention to the following de-
tails.
FUEL INJECTOR IDENTIFICATION
INJECTOR COLOR
ENGINE
CODE
100/130 Red
155/215/260 Blue
1. If you reinstall a used injector, carefully inspect

smr2009-030-030_a O-ring condition before reinstallation. Replace
O-ring with a new one if damaged.
If readings are not as specified, replace injector. 2. Apply a thin film of engine oil to O-rings.
If readings are as specified, repair or replace 3. Insert the fuel injector in the fuel rail.
wiring and connectors from ECM to injector.
4. Secure injector to fuel rail with a retaining clip.
Fuel Injector Removal 5. Install fuel rail on engine. Refer to FUEL RAIL
1. Remove fuel rail. Refer to FUEL RAIL in this in this subsection.
subsection. 6. Pressurize the fuel system and check for a fuel
2. Remove the injector clip. leak. Refer to FUEL SYSTEM HIGH PRESSURE
LEAK TEST in FUEL TANK AND FUEL PUMP
subsection.
WARNING
Always carry out a fuel system high pressure
leak test after working on the fuel system.
7. Reinstall all remaining removed parts, refer to

applicable subsections.
18 smr2012-026
THROTTLE BODY ECM ENGINE THROTTLE BODY

Throttle Body Description Throttle actuator: Off.
Throttle plate: Rest position, maintained
OFF Stopped
opened at approximately 8° (1). This is
also the limp home position.
Throttle actuator: On.
Throttle plate: Moves from the
rest position to approximately 14°. It
then moves back to the rest position.
Not This is the diagnostic mode where the
ON
started rest position, actuator opening force to
overcome the return springs and the
motor return rate are monitored. If any
of these parameters are out of range, a
fault code is initiated.
Throttle plate: Moves from the
Started.
rest position to idle position
smr2009-030-016_a
Normal
1. Throttle body ON (approximately 1-3°) according to
operation
2. Throttle plate ECM injection and ignition maps.
3. Throttle actuator (electric motor inside) at idle
4. Throttle position sensor (TPS) (inside)
Throttle plate is opened and closed as
necessary to control the idle speed.
Electronic Throttle Actuator Started.
The electronic throttle actuator (ETA) is a DC mo- Normal
Throttle plate: Opens and closes
ON operation
tor on the throttle body that regulates the throt- at various
according to ECM torque management
tle plate via a drive gear. Pulse width modulation priorities.
RPM
(PWM) is used to control the motor.
(1) Degree values are given from the fully closed position.
Throttle Plate Operating Positions
Two torsional springs are connected to the throttle Throttle-Body Faults and Effects
plate. A main spring and another one in a plunger NOTE: Among other things, a weak or broken
mechanism. spring and a sticky throttle plate (carbon build-up,
When there is no power to the throttle actuator dried salt water etc) are validated by the throttle
(ETA), the plunger mechanism maintains the throt- body diagnostic mode.
tle plate at a rest position. This also serves as the
limp home position.
When the throttle plate is opened by the ETA as
commanded by the ECM, it acts against the main
spring. If the ETA failed, the return spring would
bring the throttle plate back to the limp home po-
sition.
smr2012-026 19
FAULT EFFECT WARNING

Limp home mode. Engine speed limited to idle. Use the product in well ventilated area. Refer
Partial failure
ECM will use the remaining TAS sensor. to product manufacturer's warnings. Wipe
Fault code set and beeper off any product leakage in bilge.
of TAS sensor
activated to emit warning signals.
(one internal
Check engine light is turned ON.
sensor only)
Driveability could be reset by releasing
5. To avoid getting dirt into engine, spray cleaner
and reapplying the throttle. on a clean rag (outside the bilge) then rub rag
against throttle plate and bore. A toothbrush
Complete Limp home mode. Engine works well too.
failure of speed limited to 2500 RPM.
TAS sensor Fault code set and beeper WARNING
(both internal activated to emit warning signals.
sensors) Check engine light is turned ON. First ensure ECM is off. Otherwise, if ECM
should suddenly turn off, it would quickly
Limp home mode. Engine close the throttle plate which could cause
speed limited to 2500 RPM. serious finger injury.
Engine speed can still be increased up
Any throttle
to 3200 RPM using the throttle lever.
body failure 6. Manually open throttle and hold fully open to
Fault code set and beeper
activated to emit warning signals. reach all surfaces.
Check engine light is turned ON.
WARNING
NOTE: When one of these faults is active, O.T.A.S. and iBR
will continue to monitor their input signals. However, since
Ensure nobody presses the START button.
the engine speed is limited, the O.T.A.S. will not be activated. The ECM would turn on and the throttle ac-
Also, since the ECM cannot control the throttle body, the iBR tuator (ETA) would cycle. This could cause
may produce a fault since the ECM does not react to its serious finger injury as the throttle plate
specific torque requests. It all depends on the circumstances moves quickly.
when the iBR is applied. (vehicle and engine speed will be
a factor). 7. To remove residual dirt, spray cleaner on throt-
tle plate and on bore.
Throttle Body Lubrication 8. Reinstall removed parts.
No lubrication is required.
Throttle Body Actuator (ETA) Test
Throttle Body Cleaning Throttle Body Actuator (ETA) Test with
1. Remove the parts required to access the throt- B.U.D.S.
tle body, refer to THROTTLE BODY REMOVAL. NOTE: Use the Setting page, to confirm ETA
2. Check throttle body cleanliness using a flash- movement. The Monitoring page will not read
light. Fully open throttle plate and verify: the actual ETA movement.
– Throttle body bore 1. Enable electrical system.
– Throttle plate edge. 2. Connect vehicle to the latest B.U.D.S. version.
Look for: 3. Select the Setting, then ECM tabs.
– Dirt
4. Slowly depress the throttle lever from the idle
– Oily surfaces to WOT. The ETA should go from 0% to 100%.
– Carbon and salt deposits on throttle plate and
the surrounding bore.
3. Clean as necessary.
4. Use a throttle body cleaner such as GUNK IN-
TAKE MEDIC or an equivalent.
NOTICE Only use an appropriate throttle
body cleaner that will not damage O-rings and
EFI sensors.
20 smr2012-026

switch.
NOTE: The throttle plate should cycle again.
6. As you observe the throttle plate, have some-
one gradually and evenly pull in the throttle
lever, then release it in the same way.
NOTE: The throttle plate should open then close
according to throttle lever position.
If any test failed, proceed with the STATIC TESTS.
Throttle Body Static Tests
lmr2010-021-008_a
TYPICAL
WARNING
1. ETA position First ensure the ECM is off. Otherwise, if
If result is out of specification, carry out a CLOSED ECM should turn off, it would quickly close
THROTTLE RESET. Refer to ADJUSTMENT in this the throttle plate which could cause serious
subsection. finger injury.
NOTE: The ETA is reset at the same time as the
TPS. WARNING
After the reset, test ETA again. During the test, ensure nobody presses the
START button. The ECM would turn on and
If the result is still out of specification, check wire cycle the throttle actuator. This could cause
continuity between ECM and throttle body before serious finger injuries as the throttle plate
assuming the ETA is at fault. moves quickly.
Throttle Body Inspection 1. Using your fingers, push in on the throttle plate
Always check for corroded terminals or damaged and ensure it opens smoothly within the throt-
wiring when diagnosing throttle body problems. tle body.
Throttle Body Dynamic Tests
1. Remove the parts required to access the throt-
tle body, refer to THROTTLE BODY REMOVAL.
2. Remove the air inlet hose from the throttle
body.
3. Observe the throttle plate with the engine
stopped.
NOTE: The throttle plate should be in the rest po-
sition (slightly opened).
WARNING
Keep your fingers out of the throttle plate
area while the ECM turns on. The throttle
actuator will cycle. This could cause seri- smr2009-030-016_b
ous finger injuries as throttle plate quickly 1. Push here to open

moves. NOTE: The throttle plate must open fully and re-
turn freely to the rest position (slightly opened)
4. As you observe the throttle plate, have some- when released.
one press the START button to wake up the
ECM. 2. Push throttle plate closed as indicated in follow-
ing illustration. It must close completely and re-
NOTE: The throttle plate should cycle quickly turn freely to the rest position (slightly opened)
from the rest position to a partially open position when released.
(approximately 14°), then back to the rest posi-
tion.
smr2012-026 21
smr2009-030-016_c
smr2009-030-031_a
1. Push here to close PRESS HERE TO UNLOCK
If the throttle plate does not move smoothly or

does not return freely to the rest position, the
problem is mechanical. Check for salt accumu-
lation on throttle plate shaft. It may also be an
actuator or gear problem. Replace throttle body
as necessary.
If throttle plate operates normally, the problem
is electrical. Check throttle actuator (ETA) wiring
continuity, throttle position sensor (TPS) and
throttle accelerator sensor (TAS). smr2009-030-024_a
TYPICAL
WARNING 1. Throttle body
2. Inlet hose
Replace throttle body when throttle plate 3. Connector
does not return properly.
7. Remove retaining screws from throttle body.
Throttle Body Replacement
Throttle Body Removal
4. Lift suspension to gain access.
NOTE: If more height is required or if the suspen-
sion electronic control cannot be used, manually smr2009-030-022_a
lift suspension by the anchor points close to han- 1. Throttle body

dlebar and safely block in this position. Do not lift 2. Screws
the watercraft from the anchor points. 8. Pull throttle body off intake manifold.
All Models Installation
5. Disconnect inlet hose from throttle body. Installation of the new throttle body is the reverse
6. Disconnect throttle body connector. of the removal procedure. However, pay attention
To remove connector from throttle body, press to the following.
connector locking tab illustrated. 1. Torque retaining screws in a criss-cross se-
quence to 9 N•m (80 lbf•in).
22 smr2012-026
2. Perform the Closed Throttle reset. See proce- If the needle behavior is not as expected, proceed
dure in ADJUSTMENTS. with the following steps.
8. Manually move the throttle plate in throttle
TPS (THROTTLE POSITION body using a blunt tool (without sharp tip).
SENSOR)
WARNING
General Do not move throttle plate with your fingers.
NOTE: The TPS is part of the throttle body. Otherwise, if ECM should turn off, it would
The throttle position sensor (TPS) is a double po- quickly close the throttle plate which could
tentiometer that sends a signal to the ECM that is cause serious finger injury.
proportional to the throttle plate angle. The TPS is
located inside the throttle body.
TPS Wear Test

1. With the engine turned off, slowly pull in throt-
tle lever and pay attention for smooth operation
without physical stops.
switch.
Refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS AND
5. In B.U.D.S., click the following:
– Monitoring tab smr2009-030-016_b
1. Push here
– ECM tab.
6. Slowly and regularly depress the throttle lever. 9. Check needle movement again.
7. Observe the Throttle Opening needle move- – If needle moves as expected, check the throttle
ment in B.U.D.S. accelerator sensor (TAS). Refer to THROTTLE
ACCELERATOR SENSOR (TAS) in this subsec-
tion.
– If needle does not move as expected, perform
the TPS VOLTAGE TEST and the TPS RESIS-
TANCE TEST in this subsection.
TPS Resistance Test
1. Remove the parts required to access the throt-
tle body, refer toTHROTTLE BODY REMOVAL
in this subsection.
2. Ensure the throttle body connector is properly
connected.
mmr2009-120-001
3. Disconnect ECM connector "A" from the ECM.
MONITORING AND ECM TABS 4. Use the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035
868) and select .
NOTE: The needle should move gradually and
regularly as you move the throttle lever. If the 5. Probe circuit as per following table while using
needle “sticks”, bounces or suddenly drops, it a finger to manually move throttle plate.
may indicate a worn TPS that needs to be re-
placed. An initial slight delay after the throttle
lever is pulled and before the needle starts to
move is normal.
smr2012-026 23
FULLY CLOSED FULLY OPEN CRANKSHAFT POSITION

ECM THROTTLE THROTTLE SENSOR (CPS)
ADAPTER PLATE (1) PLATE
RESISTANCE ( )
PIN MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
A-A2 A-K4 875 1625 875 1625
A-A2 A-K3 954 1934 228 585
A-A2 A-F3 254 634 980 1983
A-K3 A-K4 228 585 954 1934
A-K3 A-F3 1385 2315 1385 2315
A-K4 A-F3 980 1983 254 634
(1)To obtain the fully closed position, it is necessary
to push against the throttle plate in the throttle
body with a finger and hold it in this position for the
measurement.
smr2006-020-100_a
TYPICAL
1. Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS)
NOTE: Take into account that a CPS fault can

be triggered by a bent or missing trigger wheel
tooth. First check for fault codes, then test the
CPS as per following procedure. If it tests good,
check trigger wheel teeth condition. Refer to
PTO HOUSING AND MAGNETO in the ENGINE
section.
vmr2008-022-005_a
CPS Voltage Test
1. Remove the required parts to access the CPS,
If any resistance value is incorrect, check wire refer to CPS REPLACEMENT.
continuity between ECM and throttle body before
assuming the TPS is at fault. Refer to WIRING 2. Disconnect CPS connector.
DIAGRAM subsection.
smr2009-030-032_a
smr2008-023-016_a
TPS CONNECTOR PIN-OUT
TYPICAL
If the TPS resistance values are correct, try a new
ECM. Refer to ENGINE CONTROL MODULE 3. Press the START button to wake up the ECM.
(ECM) in this subsection. 4. Install the tether cord on the engine cut-off
switch.
5. Pull the throttle lever completely in to the han-
dlebar and hold (drowned mode).
24 smr2012-026
6. While cranking the engine, probe CPS termi-

nals.
CPS CONNECTOR MEASUREMENT
PIN VOLTAGE
1 2 Approximately 2.3 Vac
lmr2006-021-002_b
TYPICAL
If resistance is not within specifications, replace

the CPS.
If resistance tests good, proceed with the follow-
ing steps.
3. Reconnect the CPS and disconnect ECM con-
lmr2006-021-002_a
nector "A" from the ECM.
TYPICAL
4. Install the ECM ADAPTER TOOL (P/N 529 036 166)
If voltage is not as specified, carry out a CPS RE- on ECM connector "A".
SISTANCE TEST. 5. Test circuit resistance through CPS as per fol-
If voltage is as specified, check continuity of lowing table.
wiring between CPS connector and ECM connec-
tor. Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
CPS Resistance Test

1. Disconnect CPS connector.
2. Using a FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035
868) set to , probe CPS terminals as per fol-
lowing table.
CPS CONNECTOR MEASUREMENT
RESISTANCE
PIN
@ 20°C (68°F) 529035868
1 2 700 - 900 ECM ADAPTER MEASUREMENT

RESISTANCE
PIN
@ 20°C (68°F)
A-H1 A-K2 700 - 900
smr2012-026 25
vmr2008-022-005_a
If resistance measured is as specified, check

ECM. Refer to ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
(ECM) in this subsection.
smr2006-020-100_b
If resistance measured is not as specified, repair 1. Wire retaining clip
or replace wiring and connectors between ECM 2. CPS retaining screw
and the CPS.
9. Pull out CPS.
CPS Replacement Installation is the reverse removal procedure.
1. Open/remove seat. However, pay attention to the following.
Models with Suspension 10. Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060) on
CPS retaining screw threads, then torque to
2. Remove rear ventilation box. Refer to BODY. 9 N•m (80 lbf•in).
3. Remove deck extension. Refer to BODY. 11. Refill engine oil and check oil level, refer to
All Models LUBRICATION SYSTEM subsection.
4. Remove air intake silencer. Refer to AIR IN- Trigger Wheel Inspection
TAKE SYSTEM.
Refer to PTO HOUSING AND MAGNETO in the
5. Drain oil from PTO housing. Refer to PTO ENGINE section.
HOUSING AND MAGNETO.
NOTE: It is not necessary to drain oil from engine. CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
6. Disconnect CPS connector. (CAPS)
smr2008-023-016_a
TYPICAL
smr2006-020-057_a
7. Remove wire retaining clip (as applicable). TYPICAL
1. CAPS
8. Remove CPS retaining screw.
CAPS Voltage Test (Harness Side)
1. First check fuse F12 in fuse box. Replace as
required.
26 smr2012-026
2. Remove the parts required to access the CAPS,

refer to CAPS REPLACEMENT.
3. Disconnect CAPS connector.
smr2009-030-035_b
If voltage is read to battery ground, check continu-

ity of ground circuit between CAPS pin 1 and ECM
connector "A" pin E2. Repair or replace wiring and
smr2009-030-034_a
connectors.
1. CAPS connector If voltage is not read to battery ground, carry out
a CONTINUITY TEST OF CAPS POWER CIRCUIT.
5. Install tether cord on engine cut-off switch. Continuity Test of CAPS Power Circuit
6. Probe harness connector terminals as per fol- 1. Remove cover from fuse box. Refer to POWER
lowing table. DISTRIBUTION.
CAPS CONNECTOR MEASUREMENT 2. Remove the long bus bar.
PIN VOLTAGE
3 1 Battery voltage
smr2011-027-003_L
1. Pull out
smr2009-030-035_a
868) and select .
If battery voltage is read, proceed with CAPS DY- 4. Read resistance of the CAPS circuit as per fol-
NAMIC TEST further in this subsection. lowing table.
If battery voltage is not read, probe circuit as per CAPS
following table. FUSE BOX RESISTANCE
CONNECTOR
CAPS CONNECTOR MEASUREMENT TERMINAL PIN
PIN VOLTAGE Close to 0
D8 3
3 Battery ground Battery voltage (continuity)
smr2012-026 27
tl224
smr2011-027-003_o
CAPS CAPS
VOLTAGE
CONDITION CONNECTOR
If continuity is good, wiring and connectors are
functional. Free 3 2 Close to 0 Vdc
If a high resistance or an open circuit is measured,
check the short bus bar in fuse box, repair or re-
place wiring and connectors from fuse box termi-
nal to CAPS connector.
5. Reinstall bus bar and cover.
CAPS Dynamic Test

1. Remove the parts required to access the CAPS,
refer to CAPS REPLACEMENT.
2. Remove CAPS sensor from engine.
3. Back-probe connector and read voltage as fol-
lows.
NOTE: To safely probe wire terminals through the
back of the connector, use FLUKE AUTOMOTIVE
BACK PROBE PIN (P/N TP40) or equivalent.
smr2007-021-010_a
TYPICAL
CAPS CAPS
TP40 VOLTAGE
FLUKE AUTOMOTIVE BACK PROBE PIN P/N TP40 CONDITION CONNECTOR
Metallic object
NOTICE Do not use sharp end probes. They on sensor
3 2 Battery voltage
could damage the connector seal.
Probes can be inserted at the end of the FLUKE
SUREGRIP INSULATED TEST LEADS (P/N TL224).
28 smr2012-026
smr2009-030-034_a
1. CAPS connector
smr2007-021-009_c 7. Unscrew the CAPS retaining screw.

1. Metallic object
8. Pull CAPS from engine.
If voltage is as specified, repair or replace wiring 9. Install the new CAPS.
and connectors between sensor and ECM.
NOTICE Be sure to install new O-ring on the
If wiring is good, check ECM. Refer to ENGINE new CAPS.
CONTROL MODULE (ECM).
If battery voltage is not measured as specified, try 10. Apply Loctite 243 (blue) on the CAPS retaining
a new CAPS. screw threads.
11. Torque the CAPS retaining screw to 9 N•m
CAPS Replacement (80 lbf•in).
MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR (MATS)
All Models
4. Remove air intake silencer. Refer to AIR IN-
TAKE SYSTEM.
5. Detach CPS connector from its holder.
smr2009-030-036_b
1. Manifold air temperature sensor (MATS)
MATS Resistance Test

smr2008-023-016_a 1. Remove the parts required to access the MATS,
TYPICAL refer to MATS REPLACEMENT.
6. Disconnect CAPS connector. 2. Disconnect the MATS connector.
smr2012-026 29
MATS RESISTANCE CHART

TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (OHMS)
°C °F NOMINAL LOW HIGH
- 30 - 22 12600 11800 13400
- 20 - 4 11400 11000 11800
- 10 14 9500 8000 11,000
0 32 5900 4900 6900
10 50 3800 3100 4500
20 68 2500 2200 2800
30 86 1700 1500 1900
40 104 1200 1080 1320
smr2009-030-036_a 50 122 840 750 930
1. MATS connector 60 140 630 510 750
3. Using the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 70 158 440 370 510
868) set to , probe the MAPS sensor termi- 80 176 325 280 370
nals. 90 194 245 210 280
100 212 195 160 210
110 230 145 125 160
120 248 115 100 125
vmr2008-022-005_a
lmr2006-021-004_a
If resistance value is as specified, check ECM. Re-
The resistance value measured should be as spec- fer to ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) in this
ified in the MATS RESISTANCE CHART that fol- section.
lows. Otherwise, replace the MATS. If resistance value is not as specified, repair or
If resistance value is as specified, carry on with replace wiring and connectors between the ECM
the following steps. and the MATS.
4. Reconnect the MATS and disconnect the ECM MATS Replacement
connector "A" on the ECM.
on ECM connector "A". Models with Suspension
6. Probe adapter terminals as follows. 2. Remove rear ventilation box. Refer to BODY.
ECM ADAPTER MEASUREMENT All Models
PIN RESISTANCE 3. Disconnect the MATS connector.
See MATS RESISTANCE 4. Unscrew the MATS from the engine.
A-J3 A-H3
CHART 5. Install a new MATS and torque to 17 N•m
(150 lbf•in).
30 smr2012-026
NOTE: Be sure to install a new thrust washer on

the MATS before installing it on the intake mani-
fold.
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR (CTS)
lmr2006-021-005_a
If resistance measured is not as specified, replace

the CTS.
If the resistance measured is as specified, pro-
smr2006-020-057_b ceed with the following steps.
TYPICAL
1. Coolant temperature sensor (CTS) 3. Reconnect the CTS connector and disconnect
ECM connector "A" from the ECM.
NOTE: An overheat indication will come on in the 4. Using a multimeter and the ECM ADAPTER
information center when the coolant temperature TOOL (P/N 529 036 166), check the CTS circuit
reaches: resistance as per table.
OVERHEAT
ENGINE CTS RESISTANCE TEST
TEMPERATURE
ECM ADAPTER PIN RESISTANCE
All 1503 110°C (230°F)
See CTS RESISTANCE
A-A1 A-J2
Check for debris or blockage in cooling system. CHART
CTS Resistance Test

1. Remove the parts required to access the CTS,
refer to CTS REPLACEMENT.
2. Disconnect the connector from the CTS and
test the resistance of the sensor. Refer to the
CTS RESISTANCE CHART further in this topic.
smr2012-026 31
CTS RESISTANCE CHART MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE

TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (OHMS) PRESSURE SENSOR (MAPS)
°C °F NOMINAL LOW HIGH
- 30 - 22 12600 11800 13400
- 20 - 4 11400 11000 11800
- 10 14 9500 8000 11,000
0 32 5900 4900 6900
10 50 3800 3100 4500
20 68 2500 2200 2800
30 86 1700 1500 1900
40 104 1200 1080 1320
50 122 840 750 930
60 140 630 510 750
70 158 440 370 510
80 176 325 280 370
smr2009-030-036_c
90 194 245 210 280
TYPICAL
100 212 195 160 210 1. Manifold absolute pressure sensor (MAPS)
110 230 145 125 160 NOTE: This sensor is a dual function device.
120 248 115 100 125 When the engine is started and runs at idle speed,
the sensor measures atmospheric pressure and
stores it in the ECM. Thereafter, it measures
manifold absolute pressure at operating RPMs.
Ensure sensor is correctly installed on intake
manifold. Otherwise, the MAPS could generate a
fault code for an unexpected sensor range at idle
when it reads atmospheric pressure. Remove
sensor and check for oil or dirt on its end and
if problem persists, check throttle plate condi-
tion/position and the wiring harness. Perform the
following tests.
vmr2008-022-005_a
MAPS Voltage Test

If the resistance value measured is as specified,
1. Remove the parts required to access the
check ECM. Refer to ECM further in this section.
MAPS, refer to CTS REPLACEMENT in this
If the resistance value is not within specification, subsection.
repair or replace wiring and connectors between
2. Disconnect connector from MAPS.
ECM connector and the CTS.
CTS Replacement
All Models
4. Disconnect CTS connector and remove CTS.
5. Install the new CTS and torque to 18 N•m
(159 lbf•in).
6. Reinstall remaining removed parts.
32 smr2012-026
Continuity Test of MAPS Wiring

Harness
1. Disconnect ECM connector "A" from the ECM.
2. Using a multimeter and the ECM ADAPTER
TOOL (P/N 529 036 166), test for circuit continu-
ity as per following table.
MAPS ECM
RESISTANCE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
Pin 1 A-B4
Close to 0
Pin 2 A-H2
continuity
Pin 3 A-G4
smr2009-030-036_d
3. If wiring harness is good, check ECM. Refer
1. Disconnect
to ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) in this
3. Press the START button to wake up the ECM. subsection.
4. Install the tether cord on the engine cut-off 4. If a high resistance or an open circuit is mea-
switch. sured, repair or replace wiring and connectors
between the ECM and the MAPS.
868) and select Vdc. MAPS Replacement
6. Read voltage as per following table. 1. Open/remove seat.
MAPS CONNECTOR VOLTAGE Models with Suspension
Terminal 1 to battery ground Approx. 5 V 2. Remove rear ventilation box. Refer to BODY.
Terminal 2 to battery ground Approx. 0 V 3. Remove deck extension. Refer to BODY.
Terminal 3 to battery ground Approx. 0 V All Models
4. Disconnect MAPS connector and remove the
MAPS.
5. Install the new MAPS paying attention to index
its tab into the adaptor notch.
6. Apply Loctite 243 (blue) on retaining screw and
torque to 10 N•m (89 lbf•in).
7. Reinstall remaining parts removed, refer to ap-
plicable subsections.
EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE

SENSOR (EGTS)
lmr2006-021-006_a
If voltage measured is as specified, replace the

MAPS.
If voltage measured is not as specified, refer
to CONTINUITY TEST OF MAPS WIRING HAR-
NESS.
smr2009-030-040_a
1. Muffler
2. Exhaust gas temperature sensor (EGTS)
smr2012-026 33
NOTE: An overheat signal will come on in the in- ECM ADAPTER MEASUREMENT
formation center when the exhaust temperature
reaches. PIN RESISTANCE
See EGTS RESISTANCE
ENGINE OVERHEAT TEMPERATURE A-J4 A-H4
CHART
All 1503 110°C (230°F)
EGTS RESISTANCE CHART
EGTS Resistance Test TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (OHMS)
1. Remove the parts required to access the EGTS, °C °F NOMINAL LOW HIGH
refer to EGTS REPLACEMENT in this subsec- - 30 - 22 12600 11800 13400
tion. - 20 - 4 11400 11000 11800
2. Disconnect the connector from the EGTS.
- 10 14 9500 8000 11,000
3. Set the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 0 32 5900 4900 6900
868) to selection and measure the resistance
of the sensor. 10 50 3800 3100 4500
20 68 2500 2200 2800
30 86 1700 1500 1900
40 104 1200 1080 1320
50 122 840 750 930
60 140 630 510 750
70 158 440 370 510
80 176 325 280 370
90 194 245 210 280
100 212 195 160 210
529035868 110 230 145 125 160
120 248 115 100 125
vmr2008-022-005_a
If resistance value is as specified, check ECM. Re-

smr2008-023-018_a
fer to ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) in this
The resistance should be as per the EGTS RESIS- subsection.
TANCE CHART that follows. Otherwise, replace If resistance value is not within specifications, re-
the EGTS. pair or replace wiring and connectors between the
If the EGTS resistance is within specifications, ECM and the EGTS.
proceed with the following steps.
EGTS Replacement
4. Reconnect the EGTS and disconnect ECM con-
nector "A" from the ECM. Models with Suspension
5. Using a multimeter and the ECM ADAPTER 1. Open the boarding platform and remove the LH
TOOL (P/N 529 036 166), check the circuit resis- storage basket.
tance as per following table.
34 smr2012-026
GTX/RXT/Wake Pro Models 3. Start the engine and bring engine RPM above
2. Remove the LH access panel on the boarding 5000 RPM.
platform. 4. Using the B.U.D.S. software, monitor the knock
3. Disconnect the exhaust hose from the muffler. sensor for a fault code.
If no fault occurs, the knock sensor is good.
All Models
If a fault occurs, carry out the following steps.
4. Disconnect the EGTS connector.
5. Ensure sensor and cylinder head contact sur-
5. Unscrew EGTS from muffler. faces are clean.
6. Apply LOCTITE 518 (P/N 293 800 038) on the mid- 6. Ensure the correct mounting bolt and washer
dle threads of the new EGTS. are used and are properly torqued.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the intake man-
ifold to inspect the contact surfaces. Refer to IN-
TAKE MANIFOLD subsection.
7. Check the knock sensor resistance, refer to KS
RESISTANCE TEST.
smr2008-013-041_a KS Resistance Test
1. Apply Loctite 518 in this area
1. Remove the parts required to access the knock
7. Install the EGTS. sensor, refer to KS REPLACEMENT.
8. Torque the sensor to 16 N•m (142 lbf•in). 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector.
9. Install the EGTS connector.
10. Install all other removed parts, refer to applica-
ble subsections.
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
smr2009-030-038_a
1. KS connector
3. Using a multimeter, measure the resistance be-

tween the knock sensor terminals.
R1503motr174A 1
1. Knock sensor (KS)
KS Dynamic Test
1. Connect watercraft to B.U.D.S. software, refer
to COMMUNICATION TOOLS AND B.U.D.S.
subsection.
2. In B.U.D.S., click the Faults tab and look for a
Knock sensor fault.
smr2012-026 35
KS Replacement
All Models
TAKE SYSTEM.
5. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to INTAKE
MANIFOLD) subsection.
smr2009-030-037_a 6. Disconnect KS sensor connector.
KNOCK SENSOR RESISTANCE @ 20°C (68°F)

Approximately 5 M
If resistance is not as specified, replace knock

sensor.
If resistance is as specified, carry on with the fol-
lowing steps.
4. Reconnect the knock sensor connector.
5. Disconnect connector "A" from the ECM.
6. Using a multimeter and the ECM ADAPTER
TOOL (P/N 529 036 166), check circuit resistance
through the knock sensor as per following ta-
smr2010-032-002_a
ble.
TYPICAL - INTAKE MANIFOLD REMOVED
ECM ADAPTER MEASUREMENT 1. Knock sensor
2. Knock sensor connector
RESISTANCE
PIN 7. Unscrew and remove knock sensor from en-
@ 20°C (68°F)
gine.
A-C3 A-G2 Approximately 5 M
8. Clean contact surfaces.
9. Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060) in
threaded hole then install the new knock sen-
sor.
10. Torque sensor retaining screw to 23 N•m
(17 lbf•ft).
NOTICE Improper torque might prevent sen-
sor to work properly and lead engine to severe
damage of internal components.
11. Reconnect knock sensor connector.
vmr2008-022-005_a
12. Reinstall remaining removed parts, refer to ap-
If wiring harness is good, check ECM. Refer to plicable subsections.
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) in this sec-
tion.
If an open circuit is measured, repair or replace
wiring and connectors between ECM and knock
sensor.
36 smr2012-026
Subsection XX (FUEL TANK AND FUEL PUMP)
FUEL TANK AND FUEL PUMP

SERVICE TOOLS
ECM ADAPTER TOOL................................................................... 529 036 166 ........................................... 13
FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER ............................................................ 529 035 868 ..................................... 12, 18
FUEL HOSE ADAPTER.................................................................. 529 036 023 ........................................... 10
FUEL PUMP MODULE SOCKET................................................... 529 036 125 ........................................... 15
LEAK TEST KIT .............................................................................. 529 033 100 ............................................. 7
OETIKER PLIERS........................................................................... 295 000 070 ........................................... 12
PRESSURE GAUGE....................................................................... 529 035 709 ........................................... 10
VACUUM/PRESSURE PUMP ........................................................ 529 021 800 ......................................... 8–9
smr2012-027 1
FUEL TANK AND FUEL PUMP

GTS/GTI Series, GTR and WAKE
NEW
60 N•m
(44 lbf•ft)
22 N•m
(161 lbf•ft) NEW
NEW
3.5 N•m
(31 lbf•in)

smr2012-027-001_a
2 smr2012-027
RXT/GTX and WAKE PRO
NEW
60 N•m
4.5 N•m (44 lbf•ft)
(39 lbf•in) NEW
NEW
3.5 N•m
(31 lbf•in)

smr2012-027-002_a
smr2012-027 3
RXT/GTX
NEW
60 N•m
(44 lbf•ft)
4.5 N•m
(39 lbf•in)
NEW
3.5 N•m
(31 lbf•in)

smr2012-027-003_a
4 smr2012-027
FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC FLOW CHART
Fuel pump does not run Press Start button Fuel pump runs
for 2 sec. then stops
Check fuses. Install fuel pressure gauge

Check fuel pump operation. on fuel pressure line
Repair or replace if necessary.
Replace fuel
pump module
Press Start button
Fuel pump runs
Repair or Fuel pressure less Fuel pressure is Fuel pressure more

replace than 399 kPa (58 PSI) 399 kPa (58 PSI) than 399 kPa (58 PSI)
Fails
Check fuel line/
rail for leaks
Fails OK Crank or start

Perform fuel pump test engine
OK
Fast Fuel pressure less Fuel pressure more Fuel pressure is

pressure drop than 399 kPa (58 PSI) than 399 kPa (58 PSI) 399 kPa (58 PSI)
No
Yes
Check
OK fuel line/
Verify fuel
pump check rail for leaks Repair or
valve Fails
replace FUEL SYSTEM OK
Fails OK
Fails
OK
Check fuel Perform fuel Replace fuel
injector pump test pump module Retest
OK Fails
smr2012-027-004_aen
smr2012-027 5
GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

WARNING The fuel system is comprised of:
Fuel lines remain under pressure at all times. – A fuel tank
Always proceed with care and use appro- – A vented fuel tank cap
priate safety equipment when working on a – A fuel pump module mounted inside the fuel
pressurized fuel system. Wear safety glasses. tank
– A fuel vent system, and
WARNING – A variety of hoses.
Always disconnect battery prior to work- The fuel pump module is basically comprised of:
ing on the fuel system. Fuel vapors are – An electric fuel pump mounted inside a canister
flammable and explosive under certain con- type pump reservoir
ditions. Always work in a well ventilated – A lower inlet filter
area. Do not allow fuel to spill on hot en-
gine parts and/or on electrical connectors. – An upper outlet filter
Proceed with care when removing/installing – A pressure regulator
high pressure test equipment or disconnect- – A float type fuel level sensor.
ing fuel line connections. Cover the fuel
line connection with an absorbent shop rag.
Wipe off any fuel spillage in the bilge.
WARNING
When the repair is completed, ensure that
hoses and connections from fuel rail to the
fuel pump are properly secured. Then, pres-
surize the fuel system. After carrying out a
fuel pump pressure test, use the valve on the
fuel pressure gauge to release the pressure
(if so equipped).
WARNING smr2008-022-007_a
FUEL PUMP MODULE

The fuel pump is energized for a few seconds 1. Fuel pump reservoir
2. Lower inlet filter
each time the START button is depressed. 3. Upper outlet filter
It builds fuel system pressure very quickly. 4. Fuel pressure regulator
5. Float type fuel level sensor
Prior to pressing the START button, ensure
there are no disconnected or damaged fuel
lines that may leak fuel. A high pressure
Fuel Pump Operation
leak test must be carried out whenever a fuel When the pump is in operation, it draws fuel into
system component has been disconnected. the canister through a lower inlet filter and a disk
type valve.
WARNING The pressurized fuel is pushed through an upper
Ensure wires and hoses are routed and se- outlet filter to the fuel rail.
cured away from any vibrating, rotating, Excess fuel pressure generated by the pump is
moving or hot components or sharp edges. routed from the upper filter back to the pump can-
Use appropriate shields and fastening de- ister reservoir by a pressure regulator mounted on
vices as per factory standards. the pump reservoir cover.
When the START button is pressed, the electrical
system is powered. The fuel pump will come on
NOTICE Whenever repairing the fuel system,
for approximately 2 seconds to pressurize the fuel
always check for water infiltration in the fuel rail in preparation for the engine start.
tank. Replace any damaged, leaking or deteri-
orated fuel line. The ECM supplies the ground signal to turn on the
fuel pump motor.
6 smr2012-027
The pressure regulator will ensure appropriate Models with Suspension

fuel pressure is supplied to the injectors. 3. Remove front ventilation box.
When the ECM receives a signal to shut down
the engine (START/STOP switch, engine cut-off
switch, or T.O.P.S. switch) it removes the fuel
pump ground signal.
Fuel Level Indication

An electric float type fuel level sensor is mounted
on the side of the fuel pump reservoir. As the float
moves with changing fuel levels, it varies a resis-
tance that changes the voltage signal coming from
the information center (multifunction gauge). This
signal is representative of the fuel level.
The information center interprets the fuel level
smr2009-031-008_a
voltage signal that comes back from the fuel level
1. Ventilation box
sensor. It then displays the proper fuel level in
the information center and a low fuel warning Models Without Suspension
message when required.
4. Disconnect the top of the two front air ventila-
The information center will also trigger the beeper tion hoses, refer to BODY subsection.
which produces the appropriate beep signal to
warn the driver of a low fuel condition.
The fuel level sensor resistance is at its lowest
value when the fuel tank is full, and at its highest
value when the tank is empty.
Refer to the FUEL LEVEL SENSOR in this subsec-
tion for fuel level sensor testing procedures.
Fuel Tank Venting

The entire vent system is incorporated within the
fuel tank cap.
WARNING sbl2010-004-002
If the cap requires replacement, it must be re- TYPICAL – FRONT AIR VENTILATION HOSES
placed with an approved vented cap of the All Models

same type supplied by BRP. Use of any other
cap, or use of a non-vented cap will not al- 5. Visually inspect condition of hoses and clamps.
low proper venting of the fuel tank. The re- 6. Remove/open fuel tank cap.
sult may be engine fuel starvation, fuel tank 7. Fill up fuel tank.
overpressure, or fuel leaks which could lead
to a fire or an explosion. 8. Install test cap on filler neck.
REQUIRED TOOL
NOTE: BRP is the only supplier of the vented fuel
tank cap. There is no equivalent vented fuel tank TEST CAP (THREADED)
cap available on the market today. (529 033 102)
INSPECTION NOTE: Test cap is included in LEAK TEST

KIT (P/N 529 033 100)
FUEL TANK LEAK TEST FUEL TANK TEST CAP (FLIP) (P/N 529 036 244)
1. Open front storage compartment cover. 9. Use the following tool to pressurize fuel tank.
2. Remove storage bin or partitions. Refer to
BODY subsection.
smr2012-027 7
REQUIRED TOOL
(P/N 529 021 800)
NOTE: A Y-fitting and a check valve can be in-

stalled to use compressed air for quick pressure
build-up when the fuel tank is not full.
smr2009-031-012_a
1. Pressure selected
12. Pressurize fuel tank to specification.

NOTICE Do not exceed the specification
when pressurizing the fuel tank.
FUEL TANK LEAK TEST
TIME WITHOUT
PRESSURE
PRESSURE DROP
mmr2009-121-004_a 21 kPa (3 PSI) 10 minutes
1. Y-fitting (P/N 293 710 059)
2. Check valve (P/N 275 500 505)
3. Apply compressed air here If the pressure drops, locate fuel leak(s), repair/re-
place leaking component(s) and retest.
10. Connect the vacuum/pressure pump to the Possible leak areas are:
nipple of fuel tank test cap.
– Filler neck, hose and connections
– Fuel tank
– Fuel tank neck
– Fuel pump gasket
– Fuel pump check valve (unlikely)
To locate a leak, check for a fuel smell or leaking
fuel.
If a leak is not visible, spray a soapy water solu-
tion on components to ease locating the leak(s);
bubbles will indicate the leak location(s).
NOTE: If the pressure drops and no leak has been
found, it is possibly fuel pump check valve.
NOTICE When the fuel system leak test is
smr2009-031-010_a completed, thoroughly rinse all components
TYPICAL of the soapy water solution with clear water.
1. Inlet valve end
2. Vacuum/pressure pump A soapy water residue may cause premature
3. Compressed air supply deterioration and must be rinsed away.
11. Set vacuum/pressure pump to PRESSURE. WARNING
If a leak is found, do not start the engine.
Wipe off any fuel that leaked and ventilate
the hull thoroughly to remove any accu-
mulated fuel vapors. Do not use electric
powered tools on watercraft unless system
has passed the leak test.
8 smr2012-027
13. Remove test cap. Air should be drawn in freely and vacuum indica-
tion on pump should remain at zero. If vacuum
FUEL TANK CAP LEAK TEST rises, replace the fuel tank cap.
To test the fuel tank cap, use the following tools. Pressure Relief Valve Function Test
REQUIRED TOOL Set the vacuum/pressure pump to the PRESSURE
function.
VACUUM/PRESSURE PUMP (P/N 529 021 800)
Squeeze the vacuum/pressure pump handle to ap-
VENTED CAP TEST ADAPTER (THREADED) ply pressure to the check valve of fuel tank cap
(P/N 529 036 243) and observe the pressure rise. It should be as per
VENTED CAP TEST ADAPTER (FLIP) (P/N specification.
529 036 245)
FUEL TANK CAP TEST
PRESSURE TEST RESULT
Up to 6.9 kPa (1 PSI) Pressure must hold
Above 6.9 kPa (1 PSI)
and below 13.8 kPa Pressure must release
(2 PSI)
If pressure holds above specification, replace the

fuel tank cap.
Remove test adapter.
Reinstall/close fuel tank cap.
529021800
VACUUM/PRESSURE PUMP FUEL SYSTEM HIGH PRESSURE

LEAK TEST
WARNING
A high pressure leak test must be carried
out before starting the engine anytime a fuel
system component has been disconnected
for maintenance or replacement.
1. Visually inspect fuel system to ensure all fuel

system connections are properly made.
2. Lightly pull on hoses at each connection to en-
sure they are properly locked at the quick con-
nect fittings.
529036141
VENTED CAP TEST ADAPTER — TYPICAL THREADED TYPE 3. Remove tether cord from the engine cut-off
SHOWN switch to prevent engine starting.
Inlet Check Valve Function Test 4. Press the START button to turn on the fuel
pump for a few seconds and pressurize the
Install the fuel tank cap onto the vented cap test fuel system.
adapter.
5. Check for fuel odor and visually inspect hoses,
Set vacuum/pressure pump to the VACUUM func- fittings and components for leaking fuel.
tion.
6. If a leak is detected, repair or replace the leaking
Connect vacuum/pressure pump to nipple of component and repeat leak test after the repair.
vented cap test adapter.
7. If no leak is found, engine can be started.
Squeeze the vacuum/pressure pump handle sev-
eral times to draw air in through the check valve
of fuel tank cap.
smr2012-027 9
FUEL PUMP PRESSURE TEST 8. Disconnect the pressure outlet hose from the
fuel pump.
Preparation
The pressure test will show the available pressure WARNING
at the fuel pump outlet. It validates the pressure Cover the fuel line connection with an ab-
regulator, the fuel pump and check valve and it sorbent shop rag. Wipe off any fuel spillage
tests for leaks in the system. inside the bilge.
1. Ensure the battery is fully charged, refer to
CHARGING SYSTEM.
2. Open front storage compartment cover.
3. Remove the storage bin or partitions. Refer to
BODY subsection.
4. Remove front ventilation box.
smr2012-027-010_a
1. Outlet hose
9. Install pressure test tools between discon-

nected hose and fuel pump fitting (in line
installation).
smr2009-031-008_a
1. Ventilation box REQUIRED TOOLS
Models Without Suspension PRESSURE GAUGE

5. Disconnect the top of the two front air ventila- (P/N 529 035 709)
tion hoses, refer to BODY subsection.
FUEL HOSE ADAPTER

(P/N 529 036 023)
sbl2010-004-002
TYPICAL – FRONT AIR VENTILATION HOSES
All Models
6. Ensure hoses and fittings are not leaking. Re-
pair any leak.
7. Ensure there is enough gas in the fuel tank.
10 smr2012-027
Test when Cranking or Starting Engine

1. Crank or start engine and observe fuel pres-
sure. The fuel pressure should be the same as
in previous test.
If pressure is good, fuel pump and pressure regu-
lator are functioning correctly.
2. Stop the engine.
A rapid pressure drop indicates leakage either
from the fuel rail or from the fuel pump check
valve. Check fuel rail for leaks.
If a pressure drop occurs when pressing the
START button and the fuel rail is not leaking, then
smr2009-031-018_a replace the fuel pump module.
TYPICAL
1. Connect to fuel pump A slow pressure drop indicates leakage either
2. Connect to outlet hose from a fuel injector or from the fuel pressure
regulator in the fuel pump module. To check
Test when Engine Is Stopped fuel injectors for leaks, refer to the ELECTRONIC
1. Remove tether cord from the engine cut-off FUEL INJECTION (EFI) subsection. If injectors
switch to prevent engine starting. are not leaking, then replace fuel pump.
2. Press the START button and observe fuel pres- 3. Release fuel pressure in system using the valve
sure. on the pressure gauge.
3. Release pressure in system using the valve on 4. Remove pressure gauge and reinstall fuel hose
the pressure gauge between each test so that on fuel pump module.
the reading returns to zero (0).
4. Repeat test twice and compare readings to WARNING
specifications in following table. Wipe off any fuel spillage in the bilge. Fuel
is flammable and explosive under certain
conditions. Always work in a well ventilated
area.
5. Reinstall all other removed parts, refer to appli-

cable subsections.
PROCEDURES
FUEL HOSES AND OETIKER
CLAMPS
Fuel Hose Inspection
1. Inspect all fuel hoses for wear, kinks, cracks or
smr2009-031-019_a any other types of damages.
FUEL PUMP PRESSURE TEST 2. Inspect all clamps for tightness.
1. Valve on gauge
FUEL PRESSURE Fuel Hose Replacement

MODELS (WHEN PRESSING THE When replacing fuel hoses, be sure to use hoses
START BUTTON) and clamps as available from BRP parts depart-
All 386 kPa - 414 kPa (56 PSI - 60 PSI) ment. This will ensure continued proper and safe
operation.
smr2012-027 11
WARNING 5. If the fuel pump does not run:

Use of fuel lines other than those recom- – Ensure ECM is powered. Refer to ELEC-
mended by BRP may compromise fuel sys- TRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI) subsection.
tem integrity. – Check fuse F18. If fuse is faulty, replace it
and repeat test. If fuse is good, carry out the
FUEL PUMP INPUT VOLTAGE TEST in this
WARNING subsection.
– Never use a hose pincher on high pressure Reconnect throttle body connector.
hoses.
– Never change the routing of a fuel hose. Fuel Pump Pressure Test
– Always reinstall the corrugated protective Refer to INSPECTION in this subsection.
tubing on fuel hoses.
– Secure fuel hoses using the appropriate Fuel Pump Input Voltage Test
locking tie or fastener to prevent contact 1. Ensure the fuel pump fuse (F18) is in good con-
with sharp edges or hot, rotating and mov- dition.
ing parts.
2. Disconnect fuel pump harness connector. Re-
– After connecting a hose or a quick connect
fer to FUEL PUMP REMOVAL.
fitting, pull on the hose near the fitting to
make sure it is securely locked. 3. Use the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035
– Always validate fuel system tightness 868).
by performing a FUEL PUMP PRESSURE 4. Select Vdc.
TEST. 5. Press the START button.
Oetiker Clamp Replacement 6. Read voltage at fuel pump harness connector
REQUIRED TOOL
INPUT VOLTAGE TEST
OETIKER PLIERS TEST PROBES VOLTAGE
(P/N 295 000 070)
Battery
Pin B
ground Battery voltage
(+ probe)
(- probe)
WARNING
Whenever removing a hose in the fuel sys-
tem, always use new Oetiker clamps at as-
sembly.
FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump Operation Test
1. Remove tether cord from the engine cut-off
switch to prevent engine starting.
2. Press START button.
3. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds to build
up fuel system pressure.
4. If fuel pump runs, carry out the FUEL PUMP
PRESSURE TEST as described in INSPECTION
in this subsection. smr2012-027-011_a
FUEL PUMP INPUT VOLTAGE TEST
If battery voltage is read, power circuit is good.

Test the fuel pump circuit. Refer to FUEL PUMP
CIRCUIT TEST.
12 smr2012-027
If battery voltage is not read, power circuit is

faulty. Test continuity of power circuit wiring
between fuse box and fuel pump. Refer to FUEL
PUMP CIRCUIT TEST in this subsection.
Fuel Pump Circuit Test
1. Reconnect the fuel pump harness connector.
2. Remove cover of fuse box.
3. Remove the long bus bar.
smr2011-026-007_a
6. If test succeeded, the fuel pump, its fuse and

its wiring harness are good.
7. If test failed, test wiring continuity as per table.
FUEL PUMP HARNESS CONTINUITY
TEST (WIRING ONLY)
RESISTANCE @
TEST PROBES
20°C (68°F)
Pump harness Fuse
smr2011-026-006_a connector pin B box terminal F2
1. Long bus bar Close to 0
ECM (continuity)
Pump harness
4. Remove ECM connector "B" and install it on the connector B
connector pin A
ECM ADAPTER TOOL (P/N 529 036 166). pin B-M1
529036166
5. Set multimeter to and test pump circuit as per

following table.
PUMP CIRCUIT TEST THROUGH FUEL PUMP
smr2012-027-011_b
RESISTANCE @
TEST PROBES
20°C (68°F)
Fuse box ECM connector B
Approx. 12
terminal D2 pin B-M1
smr2012-027 13
NOTE: If more height is required or if the suspen-

sion cannot be used, manually lift suspension by
the anchor points close to handlebar and safely
lock in this position. Do not lift the watercraft from
the anchor points.
smr2012-027-011_c
If there is an open circuit to FB-F2, repair

wiring/connector between fuel pump and fuse
box.
If there is good continuity to FB-F2 and fuel pump
fuse (F18) is good, check continuity of the wire
jumper between D2 and E2. Repair or replace sbl2010-004-002
wiring as required. FRONT AIR VENTILATION HOSES
If every test succeeded and fuel pump still does All Models
not work, try a new ECM. Refer to ELECTRONIC
FUEL INJECTION (EFI) subsection. 6. Disconnect the negative battery terminal, refer
to CHARGING SYSTEM subsection.
Fuel Pump Removal 7. Disconnect fuel pump electrical connector.
1. Open front storage compartment cover. 8. Disconnect the vent tube from the fuel pump.
2. Remove storage bin or partitions. Refer to 9. Wrap shop rags around the high pressure fuel
BODY subsection. hose fitting, then press on the release button
of the quick connect fitting and disconnect the
Models with Suspension hose.
smr2009-031-008_a
1. Ventilation box smr2012-027-010_b
1. Quick connect fitting (high pressure fuel hose)

4. Lift suspension to gain access. 2. Harness connector
10. Unscrew the fuel pump retaining nut.
14 smr2012-027
REQUIRED TOOL
FUEL PUMP MODULE SOCKET

(P/N 529 036 125)
smr2009-031-023_a
iS MODEL SHOWN
1. Pull out fuel pump module
WARNING
smr2009-031-022_a
Always wipe off any fuel spillage from the
1. Fuel pump module socket watercraft. When working with fuel or fuel
2. Fuel pump retaining nut system and its components, always work in
a well ventilated area.
NOTICE While pulling out the fuel pump
module, pay attention to the corrugated tubes
and fuel sensor float arm. Float arm can get
Fuel Pump Installation
caught up and bend which will reduce fuel sen- Reverse the removal procedure however, pay at-
sor accuracy. If fuel pump module is dropped tention to the following.
or damaged, it must be replaced. 1. Carefully insert fuel pump module in fuel tank
so as not to bend float arm.
11. Slowly pull fuel pump module up through
opening until corrugated tubes contact sides 2. Install a NEW fuel pump module gasket each
of opening. Tilt the fuel pump module as you time the module is reinstalled.
slowly pull the pump upwards. NOTE: Wipe off parts to prevent fuel pump from
turning while torquing fuel pump nut.
WARNING
3. Align arrow on top of fuel pump module with
The upper filter and fuel pump reservoir on index mark on top of fuel tank or fuel sensor
the fuel pump module contain fuel which will accuracy will be affected.
drain out when fuel pump module is not in an
upright position. NOTE: Index mark and arrow locations are high-
lighted for clarity in following illustration.
12. Carefully pull fuel pump module out.
smr2012-027 15
Fuel Filter Removal

NOTE: The lower fuel filter on the fuel pump mod-
ule does not require replacement under normal
operating conditions. Replace only if permanently
clogged or damaged.
1. Remove fuel pump. Refer to FUEL PUMP in
this subsection.
WARNING
The upper filter and fuel pump reservoir on
the fuel pump module contain fuel which will
drain out when fuel pump module is not in an
upright position.
smr2012-027-012_a 2. Turn fuel pump upside down.

FUEL PUMP MODULE INDEXING
1. Align marks 3. Using a small flat screwdriver, pry up the filter
locking tabs.
4. Tighten fuel pump nut.
TORQUE
Fuel pump nut 60 N•m (44 lbf•ft)
5. Carry out a FUEL TANK LEAK TEST and a FUEL

SYSTEM HIGH PRESSURE LEAK TEST. See
procedures in this subsection.
FUEL FILTER
Fuel Filter Inspection
Inspect fuel filter. If dirty, partially clogged or dam-
aged, replace it.
smr2008-022-013_a
1. Fuel filter locking tab (x2)

2. Filter locking pin (x2)
4. Pull filter off fuel pump reservoir housing.
Fuel Filter Installation

1. Align new filter with pump reservoir housing.
2. Press new filter on by hand. Ensure it is fully
seated and locked onto the pump reservoir
housing.
3. Reinstall fuel pump as per procedure in this sub-
section.
4. Carry out a FUEL SYSTEM HIGH PRESSURE
smr2009-031-025_a
LEAK TEST as described in this subsection.
1. Fuel filter
5. Install or other removed parts, refer to applica-
ble subsection.
16 smr2012-027
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR NOTE: On RXT aS 260 model, if more height is

required , manually lift suspension by the anchor
Fuel Level System Overview points close to handlebar and safely lock in this po-
A float type fuel level sensor mounted on the fuel sition. Do not lift the watercraft from the anchor
pump module sends a signal to the information points.
center.
Models Without with Suspension
smr2008-022-007_b
TYPICAL — FUEL PUMP MODULE

1. Fuel level sensor
sbl2010-004-002
The information center interprets this signal and FRONT AIR VENTILATION HOSES
turns on the appropriate number of segments of All Models
a bar type fuel level indication in the lower RH side
of the digital screen in the information center. 4. From under the steering support area, discon-
nect the 24-pin connector.
Fuel Level Troubleshooting
FUEL LEVEL TROUBLESHOOTING
SYMPTOM POSSIBLE CAUSE
– Wiring/connectors
Fuel gauge always
display EMPTY – Fuel level sensor
– Float stuck in low position
– Water in fuel pump
Fuel gauge always
connector
display FULL
– Float stuck in full position
Fuel level sensor fault – Wiring/connectors
code – Fuel level sensor
Fuel gauge displays – Low battery voltage
wrong level – Fuel level sensor fault sbl2010-034-018_b
24-PIN STEERING CONNECTOR DISCONNECT

Use B.U.D.S. to check for a fault code. Refer to Step 1: Pull out safety lock
Step 2: Press in on release tab
DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT CODES. Step 3: Pull locking collar down
Fuel Level Sensor Voltage Test 5. Connect the DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS (P/N 529 036
1. First ensure battery is fully charged. 188) to make an in-line connection between the
disconnected connector.
2. Lift suspension to gain access.
smr2012-027 17
Remove diagnostic harness and reconnect con-

nector.
Fuel Level Sensor Resistance Test at

Information Center
1. Disconnect information center (multifunction
gauge) connector. Refer to GAUGE subsection.
529036188
NOTICE Pull connector lock out. Do not twist
6. Briefly press the START button to wake up the the screwdriver.
ECM.
switch.
9. Measure the voltage at the test connector of
the diagnostic harness as follows.
TEST
FUEL TANK CONNECTOR
VOLTAGE
LEVEL OF DIAGNOSTIC
HARNESS
Full 0.14 Vdc
Pins 5 and 17 smr2009-042-002_a
Empty 2.7 Vdc 1. Gauge connector


868) and select .
3. Alternately drain then fill fuel tank and measure
the sensor resistance between pins 19 and 20
as follows.
RESISTANCE ( ) FLOAT HEIGHT (MM)
4.8 ± 2.2 268.9 ± 3.0 (FULL)
17.8 ± 2.2 240.6 ± 3.0
27.8 ± 2.2 219.1 ± 3.0
37.8 ± 2.2 193.8 ± 3.0
47.8 ± 2.2 161.9 ± 3.0 (HALF)
smr2010-038-003_b 57.8 ± 2.2 128.3 ± 3.0
TEST CONNECTOR OF DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS 67.8 ± 2.2 94.1 ± 3.0
NOTE: Voltage could be slightly different depend- 77.8 ± 2.2 60.6 ± 3.0
ing on battery voltage but should remain relatively 89.8 ± 2.2 28.8 ± 3.0 (EMPTY)
close to this range. If fuel tank is not full or empty,
the voltage value will be proportional to the fuel
level (somewhere in-between).
If voltage is as per specifications the fuel level cir-
cuit and sensor are good. If fuel level does not
work in information center, try a new one.
If voltage is out of specifications, perform the
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR RESISTANCE TEST AT A. Float height
INFORMATION CENTER as described in this sub-
section.
18 smr2012-027
NOTE: If fuel tank is not full or empty, the resis-

tance value will be proportional to the fuel level
(somewhere in-between).
If readings are as per specifications, the fuel level
circuit and sensor are good. If fuel level does not
work in information center, try a new one.
If readings are out of specifications, perform the
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR RESISTANCE TEST AT
FUEL PUMP.
If an open circuit is measured, carry out a conti-
nuity test of the wiring from the information cen-
ter to the 24-pin steering connector, and from the
24-pin steering connector to the fuel pump mod-
ule connector. Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
smr2012-027-011_d
If the wiring is good, carry out a FUEL LEVEL SEN- FUEL LEVEL SENSOR RESISTANCE TEST
SOR RESISTANCE TEST AT FUEL PUMP.
If readings are out of specifications, replace sen-
4. Reconnect information center (multifunction
sor.
gauge) connector.
When everything else has been tested and fuel
Fuel Level Sensor Resistance Test at level is still not working, try a new information
Fuel Pump center.
1. Disconnect fuel pump module connector. Fuel Level Sensor Removal
smr2008-022-029
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

smr2012-027-010_c
FUEL PUMP MODULE 1. Remove fuel pump module from fuel tank, see
1. Fuel pump module connector
FUEL PUMP REMOVAL in this subsection.
2. Alternately drain then fill fuel tank and measure
the sensor resistance between pins "C" and "D"
WARNING
of the fuel pump connector. See table in FUEL The upper filter and fuel pump reservoir on
LEVEL SENSOR RESISTANCE TEST AT INFOR- the fuel pump module contain fuel which will
MATION CENTER. drain out when fuel pump module is not in an
upright position.
2. Drain all fuel from the upper fuel filter and fuel
pump reservoir in an appropriate container.
NOTE: Note routing of fuel level sensor wires
prior to disconnecting the sensor from the fuel
pump module flange.
smr2012-027 19
3. Disconnect the fuel level sensor connector

from the fuel pump module upper flange.
smr2008 022-023_a
1. Pressure regulator
2. Pressure regulator locking tab
smr2008-022-021_a
1. Fuel level sensor connector
4. Disconnect the ground wire from the pressure

regulator. Be careful not to bend the ground
contact on the pressure regulator.
smr2008-022-024_a

2. Pressure regulator rotated clockwise over locking tab
6. Once the pressure regulator is rotate over the

locking tab, pull up on it to remove it from the
pump reservoir cover.
smr2008-022-022_a
1. Pressure regulator
2. Ground wire contact on pressure regulator
3. Ground wire disconnected
5. Using a flat screwdriver, press down on the

locking tab just below the pressure regulator
to release it from the pump reservoir cover,
and rotate it clockwise simultaneously so that
it slips over the locking tab.
smr2008-022-025_a
1. Pressure regulator alignment tabs

2. Fuel pump reservoir alignment tabs
NOTE: The pressure regulator cover must not be

removed from the pressure regulator housing as-
sembly.
20 smr2012-027
Fuel Level Sensor Installation

1. Ensure fuel level sensor locking pins are prop-
erly engaged into the fuel pump reservoir.
smr2008-022-028_a
1. Do not remove pressure regulator cover at locking tabs

2. Pressure regulator cover
3. Pressure regulator housing
7. Push in on the release tabs at the top of the

fuel level sensor to unlock it from the fuel pump
reservoir housing, and simultaneously pull up
smr2008-022-026_b
on the fuel level sensor to remove it.
1. Ensure engagement of sensor locking pins
2. Align the fuel pressure regulator tabs into the

pump reservoir cover and turn it counterclock-
wise until it locks properly.
smr2008-022-026_a
1. Fuel level sensor release tabs

2. Locking pins
smr2008-022-025_b
PRESSURE REGULATOR INSERTION INTO PUMP RESERVOIR

COVER
1. Pressure regulator alignment tabs
2. Fuel pump reservoir alignment tabs
smr2008-022-027_a
1. Pull up on fuel level sensor
smr2012-027 21
6. Reinstall the fuel pump module. Refer to FUEL

PUMP INSTALLATION in this subsection.
FUEL TANK
Fuel Tank Inspection
2. Remove storage bin or partitions. Refer to
BODY subsection.
smr2008-022-030_a
TAB UP WHEN PRESSURE REGULATOR PROPERLY LOCKED

3. Reconnect the ground wire onto the pressure

regulator.
smr2009-031-008_a
1. Ventilation box

4. Open or remove seat for access to aft end of
smr2008-022-031_a
fuel tank.
1. Pressure regulator ground wire installed
All Models
4. Ensure fuel level sensor connector is locked 5. Inspect fuel tank retaining straps for wear,
into the module flange connector. cracks or any other damages. Inspect strap
clip anchors and bolts.
6. Inspect fuel tank for wear caused by any ab-
normal contact or rubbing with other compo-
nent(s).
7. Disconnect fuel filler hose from fuel tank.
8. Inspect fuel tank filler hose for wear, cracks or
other damages.
9. Visually inspect the inside and outside of the
fuel tank filler necks for crack(s). If crack(s) are
found, replace fuel tank.
10. With your fingers, feel the inside and outside
surfaces of fuel tank, especially near the filler
neck.
smr2008-022-021_a
1. Fuel level sensor connector 11. Flex fuel tank neck to ensure there are no hid-
den cracks.
5. Carry out a FUEL LEVEL SENSOR RESISTANCE
TEST as described in this subsection.
22 smr2012-027
NOTE: A fuel tank is comprised of 2 components: Fuel Tank Removal

the tank and the filler neck. The filler neck is in-
jection molded and the tank is then blow molded GTS/GTI Series, GTR, WAKE and RXP-X Series
over the neck. During the molding process, a 1. Remove engine. Refer to ENGINE REMOVAL
small molding seam may appear on the inner AND INSTALLATION.
side of the neck at approximately 4 mm (5/32 in) 2. Remove the air intake silencer. Refer to AIR IN-
from the base of the neck. It is normal to have a TAKE SYSTEM (EXCEPT MODELS WITH SUS-
molding seam and it should not be confused with PENSION subsection.
a crack.
RXT/GTX Without Suspension
4 2 1. Remove the front body module. Refer to BODY
subsection.
TAKE SYSTEM (EXCEPT iS AND aS MODELS)
1 subsection.
RXT/GTX with Suspension
1. Remove moving deck. Refer to BODY subsec-
tion.
3 A 5
F07F06A
2. Remove engine. Refer to ENGINE REMOVAL
1. Tank upper surface area AND INSTALLATION.
2. Inspect outer upper surface at filler neck
3. Normal molding seam 3. Remove suspension base. Refer to SUSPEN-
4. Inspect upper surface area inside filler neck SION.
5. Base of filler neck
A. Approx. 4 mm (5/32 in) All Models
12. Install filler hose and torque retaining clamps. 1. Siphon fuel tank.
2. Disconnect fuel pump connections.
smr2012-027-012_b
smr2012-027-010_b
INDEXING WITH FUEL TANK
1. Align mark with the writing on hose 1. Quick connect fitting (high pressure fuel hose)
2. Harness connector
TORQUE
3. Disconnect filler hose from fuel tank.
Filler hose retaining NOTE: Removing retaining screws of the filler
3.5 N•m (31 lbf•in)
clamps
neck may help to disconnect hose from fuel tank.
13. Reinstall all other removed parts. Refer to ap-
propriate subsection.
smr2012-027 23
smr2009-031-027_a
TYPICAL
smr2012-027-012_c 1. Fuel tank retaining strap
2. Clip anchor securing strap to hull
1. Filler hose
2. Retaining clamp
5. Secure retaining strap ends on top of fuel tank.
NOTE: Take note of wiring harness, hose and 6. Properly secure wire harness, cables and hose
cable routing for proper reinstallation. Also note as prior to removal using appropriate locking
method used for securing with locking ties. ties.
4. Detach fuel tank retaining straps. 7. Install fuel tank filler hose as illustrated.
5. Remove fuel tank from the vehicle.
6. Remove fuel pump as necessary. Refer to
FUEL PUMP in this subsection.
7. Inspect hull and flotation foams for wear.
Fuel Tank Installation

NOTE: Apply torque values as specified in the ex-
ploded view.
1. Reinstall fuel pump if it was removed. Refer to
FUEL PUMP in this subsection.
2. Ensure flotation foams are properly positioned
under fuel tank.
3. Insert fuel tank in hull.
If anchoring clips have been removed, torque re-
smr2012-027-012_b
taining screws to 10 N•m (89 lbf•in).
INDEXING WITH FUEL TANK
4. Place fuel tank retaining strap ends in anchoring 1. Align mark with the writing on hose
clips. Temporarily use tape to hold straps on the
top of fuel tank. TORQUE
Filler hose retaining
3.5 N•m (31 lbf•in)
clamps
8. Reinstall all other removed parts. Refer to their

subsections.
9. When vehicle reassembly is complete, carry
out a FUEL TANK LEAK TEST and a FUEL
SYSTEM HIGH PRESSURE LEAK TEST as de-
scribed in this subsection.
24 smr2012-027
Subsection XX (POWER DISTRIBUTION AND GROUNDS)
POWER DISTRIBUTION AND GROUNDS

GENERAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAM
FUSE BOX
DIAGNOSTIC
F2 15A CONNECTOR
BAT
F3 3A START/STOP
F8 30A
F4 3A SWITCH
GPS
ECM
F5 30A
F6 30A iBR
VOLTAGE REGULATOR/
RECTIFIER
F7 30A
iS
F1 5A
F11 3A DEPTH SOUNDER
F12 3A
FUEL INJECTOR
F13 10A
IGNITION COIL No. 1
F14 10A
FUEL INJECTOR
F15 10A
IGNITION COIL No. 2
FUEL INJECTOR
IGNITION COIL No. 3
F16 5A STARTER SOLENOID

F17 5A
F18 10A FUEL PUMP
F19 15A
O.T.A.S.
CAPS
smr2013-019-100_aen
NOTE: Component shown in doted lines are not offered on all models.
ACRONYM DESCRIPTION
CAPS: Camshaft position sensor iS: Intelligent suspension
ECM: Engine control module O.T.A.S.: Off throttle assisted steering
iBR: Intelligent brake and reverse
smr2012-028 1
FUSE BOX
Fuse Box Location (GTS, GTI, GTR,
Wake and RXP Series)
To access the fuse box, open the front storage
cover an remove the access panel.
ssi2009-002-002_a
1. Boarding platform
smo2011-003-011_c
FUSE BOX ACCESS

1. Access panel
ssi2009-002-003_a
1. Storage bin

To access the fuse box, open the starboard access
panel on the rear deck.
smo2011-003-009_a
TYPICAL
1. Fuse box
2. Fuel tank
3. Front storage compartment (access panel removed)
Fuse Box Location (RXT, GTX and

Wake Pro Series)
smr2011-029-009_a
Models with Suspension 1. Starboard access panel

To access the fuse box, open the boarding plat-
form and remove the RH storage bin.
2 smr2012-028
Fuse Identification NO. DESCRIPTION

Through relay:
F1 5A
– iS control1
Direct power (through F8):
F2 15 A
– Diagnostic connector
F3 3A
– START/STOP
F4 3A
– GPS2
Direct power:
F5 30 A
– iBR power1
Direct power:
F6 30 A
smr2011-027-002_a
– Voltage regulator/rectifier
FUSE BOX PIN IDENTIFICATION Direct power:
F7 30 A
– iS power
NOTE: This fuse box has rows of 11 or 12 cavi-
ties. See table below for details. – F2
NUMBER OF CAVITIES BY ROW – F3
F8 30 A
– F4
ROW NUMBER OF CAVITIES – Relay
A-B 11 Through relay:
F11 3A
C-D 12 – Depth sounder1
E-F 11 Through relay:
G-H 12 – O.T.A.S.
F12 3A
– Gauge start up
– CAPS
Through relay:
F13 – Fuel injector cyl. 1 10 A
– Ignition coil cyl. 1
Through relay:
Through relay:
Through relay:
F16 5A
smr2011-027-003_a
– Starter solenoid
FUSE IDENTIFICATION Through relay:
F17 5A
– iBR control1
Through relay:
F18 10 A
– Fuel pump
Through relay:
F19 15 A
– ECM power
Note 1: Except GTS models.

Note 2: If so equipped.
smr2012-028 3
RELAY
Relay Pin Identification
The relay is in the fuse box. Refer to FUSE BOX
LOCATION.
RELAY PIN IDENTIFICATION
FUNCTION FUSE BOX PIN CONDITION
Direct battery
12-volt input at
B9 power
winding
from fuse F8
Grounded
by ECM B
Control A11 pin H2 once
START/STOP
is depressed
Direct battery
12-volt input at
A9 power
contacts
from fuse F8
12-volt output B11 -
GROUNDS
Ground Location
All the ground terminals are located on the front
of engine.
There is no splice in the ground wiring, the inter-
connections are made through a bus bar in the
fuse box.
smr2011-027-004_a
FRONT OF ENGINE
1. Battery ground
2. Electrical components grounds
3. Exhaust manifold
4 smr2012-028
Subsection XX (IGNITION SYSTEM)
IGNITION SYSTEM
SERVICE TOOLS
D.E.S.S. POST REMOVER ............................................................ 529 035 943 ............................................. 9
DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS ............................................................... 529 036 188 ......................................... 8–9
ECM ADAPTER TOOL................................................................... 529 036 166 ......................................... 4, 9
FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER ............................................................ 529 035 868 ................................. 3–4, 8–9
SERVICE PRODUCTS
DOW CORNING 111 ..................................................................... 413 707 000 ............................................. 6
GENERAL
WARNING
Torque wrench tightening specifications
must be strictly adhered to.
Locking devices when removed (e.g.: locking
tabs, elastic stop nuts, self-locking fasteners,
cotter pins, etc.) must be replaced.
Hoses, cables or locking ties removed during a

procedure must be reinstalled as per factory stan-
dards.
WARNING smr2009-032-002_a
1. Ignition coils
Never check for engine ignition spark from
an open coil and/or spark plug as spark may
cause potential fuel vapors to ignite. Always
Ignition Timing
use an approved spark tester. Ignition timing is not adjustable.
The ECM is programmed with data (ignition map-
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION pings) that it uses to establish optimum ignition
timing under all engine operating conditions.
The ignition system is a digital inductive type sys-
It receives signals from a variety of sensors that
tem.
it compares with the ignition mappings and uses
Ignition system parameters such as ignition tim- it to control the ignition spark timing, duration and
ing, spark duration, and firing order, as well as firing order.
many other engine related functions are con-
The firing of each spark plug is independent of the
trolled by the engine management system (EMS)
others.
in order to meet engine operational requirements.
The EMS can detect many abnormalities includ- Engine RPM Limiter
ing a short circuit in the primary winding of the
ignition coils as well as its associated circuits. The ECM will limit the maximum engine speed by
cutting off ignition spark and fuel at a predeter-
Three separate ignition coils receive power from mined engine RPM.
three separate fuses.
When a ground signal is provided by the ECM to
an ignition coil primary winding, a high voltage is
induced in the coil secondary winding that is used
to produce a spark at the spark plug electrode.
smr2012-029 1
ENGINE RPM LIMITER DIAGNOSTIC GUIDELINES

100, 130 and 155 HP 7750 RPM The following is provided to help in diagnosing the
215 and 260 HP 8300 RPM probable cause of a problem. It is a guideline and
should not be assumed to list all possible causes.
Knock Sensor ENGINE WILL NOT STOP WHEN
A knock sensor is mounted on the cylinder block REMOVING KEY FROM ENGINE CUT-OFF
behind the intake manifold. It detects specific vi- SWITCH
brations that would typically be generated by en- 1. Defective engine cut-off switch
gine detonation. - Check engine cut-off switch. Replace if neces-
If detonation occurs, the knock sensor detects sary.
it and the ECM goes into a specific operating
mode whereby it temporarily retards the ignition ENGINE WILL NOT START (ENGINE
advance until detonation stops. TURNS OVER)
The ECM is able to identify in which cylinder the 1. Fouled or defective spark plug
knocking occurs and modifies the ignition advance - Check spark plug condition. Replace if necessary.
on that cylinder only.
2. Defective CPS
Refer to the ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI)
- Test CPS, refer to ELECTRONIC FUEL INJEC-
section for testing and replacement procedures. TION (EFI) subsection.
TROUBLESHOOTING 3. Defective trigger wheel

- Check. Refer to PTO HOUSING/MAGNETO sub-
It is good practice to check for fault codes using section.
the B.U.D.S. as a first troubleshooting step. Refer
4. Defective ignition circuit
to DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT CODES subsection.
- Check fuses, ignition coils, wiring and connec-
Refer to POWER DISTRIBUTION for fuses and re- tors.
lay information.
Always refer to the WIRING DIAGRAM when ENGINE HARD TO START
troubleshooting an electrical circuit. 1. Faulty, fouled or worn out spark plug
- Check spark plug condition. Replace if necessary.
IGNITION SYSTEM TESTING
2. Drowned engine
1. Ensure fuses F13, F14 and F15 are powered - Check engine temperature value using B.U.D.S.
and in good condition. monitoring page. If the temperature read is lower
than the ambient temperature, CTS sensor may
2. If a fuse is burnt, test for a short circuit or faulty be defective or have a bad connection. There-
component on that fuse circuit before replacing fore, the ECM would erroneously set the engine
the fuse. in cold start mode and it could flood the spark
plugs.
WARNING
Due to the possibility of flammable vapors ac- ENGINE MISFIRES, RUNS IRREGULARLY
cumulating in the bilge, you should always 1. Fouled, defective, worn spark plugs
test for a short circuit which may produce a - Check spark plug condition. Replace if necessary.
spark and ignite the vapors before replacing
a burnt fuse. 2. Defective T.O.P.S. sensor
- Test T.O.P.S. Refer to LUBRICATION subsection.
3. If there is no active fault code, start diagnos-
3. Damaged trigger wheel/loose CPS
tic by carrying out IGNITION COIL TEST USING
B.U.D.S. - Check. Refer to PTO HOUSING/MAGNETO sub-
section.
4. If a primary winding of an ignition coil or a cir-
cuit is at fault, a fault code will be set. Refer to 4. Defective ignition circuit
DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT CODES subsection. - Check fuses, ignition coils, wiring and connec-
tors.
2 smr2012-029
5. Poor engine grounds 3. Energize the ignition coil to be tested by clicking

- Check ground condition, refer to POWER DISTRI- on the corresponding illustration.
BUTION AND GROUNDS subsection.
ENGINE CONTINUALLY BACKFIRES

1. Fouled, defective spark plugs
- Check spark plug condition. Replace if necessary.
2. Damaged trigger wheel/defective or loose CPS
- Check, refer to PTO HOUSING/MAGNETO and
ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI) subsec-
tions.
ENGINE DETONATION OR PINGING

1. Faulty or disconnected knock sensor
- Check, refer to ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
(EFI) subsection.
ENGINE LACKS ACCELERATION OR smr2009-032-001_a
POWER IGNITION COIL ACTIVATION

1. Activation tab
1. Weak spark 2. ECM tab
3. Click on the desired ignition coil
- Check spark plugs, coils, wiring and connections.
You should hear the spark occurring. If in doubt,
PROCEDURES use a sealed vapor proof spark tester or an induc-
tive spark tester as available from tool suppliers,
to prevent a spark from occurring in the bilge.
IGNITION COILS
If there is no ignition at one or more coils, carry
WARNING out a IGNITION COIL INPUT VOLTAGE TEST.
Never check for engine ignition spark from If spark is weak, try a new spark plug. If spark is
an open coil and/or spark plug in the engine still weak, try a new ignition coil.
compartment as a spark may cause fuel va-
NOTE: The voltage required to produce a spark in
pors which may have accumulated in the
the combustion chamber is higher when the en-
bilge to ignite.
gine is running.
Ignition Coil Access Ignition Coil Input Voltage Test
1. Open or remove seat. Make sure fuses F13, F14 and F15 are good be-
Models with a Suspension fore testing.
2. Remove the rear ventilation cover. 1. Disconnect the applicable ignition coil connec-
tor.
All Models 2. Remove tether cord from the engine cut-off
Ignition coils are located on top of the valve cover. switch.
NOTE: Some models have an engine cover that 3. Set the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035
has to be removed to access the ignition coils. 868) to Vdc.
4. Press the START button to activate the ECM.
Ignition Coil Test Using B.U.D.S.
5. Measure voltage within 3 minutes after de-
1. Connect to the latest applicable B.U.D.S. soft- pressing START/STOP button.
ware. Refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS
AND B.U.D.S. section.
2. Select the Activation and ECM tabs.
smr2012-029 3
TEST PROBES VOLTAGE 3. Read resistance of the desired ignition coil cir-
cuit.
VIOLET/BLUE wire
(ignition coil no. 1) IGNITION IGNITION FUSE
MEASUREMENT
COIL COIL WIRE BOX
VIOLET/GREEN wire Battery Battery
(ignition coil no. 2) ground voltage 1 Terminal
VI/BU
(rear) F7
VIOLET/ORANGE wire
(ignition coil no. 3) Terminal
2 VI/GN Close to 0
F6
Terminal
3 VI/OR
F5
smr2008-024-005_b
IGNITION COIL INPUT VOLTAGE TEST
If test succeeds, carry out an IGNITION COIL RE- smr2011-027-002_a
FUSE BOX PIN IDENTIFICATION

SISTANCE TEST.
If test fails, carry out an IGNITION COIL POWER If test fails at any ignition coil, test the following
CIRCUIT CONTINUITY TEST. items separately and repair/replace wiring or ter-
minals from fuse box to the applicable ignition coil.
Ignition Coil Power Circuit Continuity – Wiring from fuse box to engine C04-4POS con-
Test nector
1. Remove fuses F13, F14 and F15. – Wiring from C04-4POS connector to ignition
coil.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM for details.
Ignition Coil Control Circuit Continuity

Test
1. Disconnect ECM connector "A". For connector
identification, refer to WIRING HARNESS AND
CONNECTOR subsection.
2. Connect ECM connector to the ECM ADAPTER
TOOL (P/N 529 036 166).
smr2011-027-003_g
1. Fuse F13
2. Fuse F14
3. Fuse F15

868) and select .
4 smr2012-029
2. Perform a visual inspection of the ignition coils.

Check for corrosion, bent pins, loose or burnt
contacts, and cracked or torn insulator.
3. Using a multimeter, test the resistance in both
primary and secondary windings.
529036166
3. Disconnect ignition coil connector.

4. Test for continuity of circuit as per following ta-
ble.
smr05-015-002_a
IGNITION PRIMARY WINDING

ECM
COIL COIL RESISTANCE
ADAPTER
WIRE RESISTANCE @
CIRCUIT TERMINAL
20°C (68°F)
Cylinder
BR/BK A-M4 Primary
1 (rear) 1 and 2 0.85 - 1.15
winding
Cylinder Close to 0
BR/OR A-M2
2 (continuity)
Cylinder
BR/YL A-M1
3
smr05-015-002_b
SECONDARY WINDING
RESISTANCE @
CIRCUIT TERMINAL
20°C (68°F)
Secondary 1 and spark
9.5 - 13.5 k
winding plug terminal
If any test fails, replace ignition coil.

If test succeeds, carry out an IGNITION COIL
smr2007-023-003_d
CONTROL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY TEST.
IGNITION COIL CONTROL CIRCUIT TEST
Ignition Coil Removal
If test fails, repair the connector or replace the en- 1. Disconnect ignition coil connector.
gine wiring harness.
NOTICE Do not remove the ignition coil be-
Ignition Coil Resistance Test fore disconnecting the input connector or the
An ignition coil with a good resistance measure- wires may be damaged. Do not pry up ignition
ment can still be faulty. Current leakage can occur coil with a screwdriver to avoid damage.
at high voltage levels which is not detectable with NOTE: Twist ignition coil in both directions as you
an ohmmeter. Replacing the ignition coil may be pull it up to ease removal.
necessary as a test.
2. Remove ignition coil from spark plug.
1. Remove ignition coil. Refer to IGNITION COIL
REMOVAL in this subsection.
smr2012-029 5
Ignition Coil Lubrication

1. Push rubber seal down.
sbs2009-011-003_a
1. Correctly shaped excess of product
5. Apply DOW CORNING 111 (P/N 413 707 000) on

sbs2009-011-002_a rubber seal contact area.
1. Rubber seal pulled down
2. Apply DOW CORNING 111 (P/N 413 707 000) to

rubber seal seat as shown.
smr05-015-002_d
1. Apply product here
Ignition Coil Installation

NOTE: Prior to inserting the ignition coil on its
spark plug, apply sealant as described in IGNI-
TION COIL LUBRICATION.
1. Install coil in cylinder head hole.
sbs2009-011-001_a 2. Push the ignition coil down to securely install it
1. Apply product here on the spark plug tip.
3. Pull rubber seal back on its seat making sure the 3. Ensure the seal seats properly with top surface
tabs on the ignition coil and the slots in the seal of engine valve cover.
properly match together.
4. Leave a ring of grease on top of the seal as
shown to act as a water barrier. Wipe off the
excess.
smr2009-032-004_a
1. Seal properly seated
6 smr2012-029
SPARK PLUGS Troubleshooting a Fouled Spark Plug

Spark Plug Removal Fouling of the spark plug is indicated by irregular
running or misfiring of the engine, decreased
1. Remove ignition coil. Refer to IGNITION COIL engine speed due to misfiring, reduced perfor-
REMOVAL in this subsection. mance, and increased fuel consumption.
WARNING Other possible causes are: use of an incorrect
or bad fuel, defective ignition system, incorrect
Never remove an ignition coil from a spark
spark plug gap, loss of compression, or lubricating
plug without disconnecting it from the wiring
oil entering the combustion chamber.
harness. Flammable vapors may be present
in the bilge. Should the tether cord be in- The plug face of a fouled spark plug has either a
stalled on the engine cut-off switch, a spark wet or dry black carbon deposit. Such coatings
could be generated at the spark plug end of form a conductive connection between the center
the coil possibly resulting in an explosion. electrode and the ground electrode.
2. Using a spark plug socket, release the torque Spark Plug Analysis
applied to the spark plug.
1 2
A00E0AA 1 2 3
TYPICAL
1. Overheated (light gray, white)
2. Normal (light brown, brown)
3. Fouled (black, wet or dry, dark deposits, gray, melted coating)
The plug face reveals the condition of the engine,

A00E0BA
operating condition, method of driving and fuel
1. Approved socket mixture. For this reason it is advisable to inspect
2. Improper socket
the spark plug at prescribed intervals, examining
3. Clean the spark plug and cylinder head with the plug face (i.e. the part of the plug projecting
pressurized air. into the combustion chamber).
4. Unscrew spark plug then use the ignition coil to Spark Plug Installation
take spark plug out of spark plug hole.
Prior to installation, ensure the contact surfaces of
the cylinder head and spark plug are free of grime.
1. Using a wire feeler gauge, set electrode gap as
specified in the following chart.
SPARK GAP
ENGINE TORQUE
PLUG mm (in)
Hand tighten
NGK
1503 + 1/4 turn with 0.75 (.030)
DCPR8E
a socket
2. Apply anti-seize lubricant over the spark plug

threads to prevent possible seizure.
3. Hand screw spark plug into cylinder head.
Then, tighten the spark plug clockwise an ad-
smr2009-032-003_a ditional 1/4 turn with an approved spark plug
1. Ignition coil socket.
2. Spark plug
smr2012-029 7
4. Install ignition coil. Refer to IGNITION COIL IN-

STALLATION in this subsection.
5. Complete the installation in the reverse order of
the removal.
ENGINE CUT-OFF SWITCH

Continuity Test of Engine Cut-Off
Switch
1. Disconnect the 24-pin steering connector from 529035868
the vehicle harness. Refer to START/STOP
SWITCH in the STARTING SYSTEM subsection NOTICE Do not attempt to probe the 24-pin
for details. connector on the watercraft. Use the test con-
nector on the diagnostic harness.
3. Set multimeter to .
4. Probe test connector on diagnostic harness to
check continuity as follows.
sbl2010-034-018_b
24-PIN STEERING CONNECTOR DISCONNECT

Step 1: Pull out safety lock
Step 3: Pull locking collar down
2. IMPORTANT: Connect the DIAGNOSTIC HAR-

NESS (P/N 529 036 188) to the 24-pin steering smr2010-038-003_a
connector only, NOT to the vehicle harness READING

connector. ENGINE
D.E.S.S. 24-PIN TEST @
CUT-OFF
REQUIRED TOOLS KEY CONNECTOR 20°C
SWITCH
(68°F)
DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS (P/N 529 036 188)
– Open
FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 868) Pin 13 Pin 11
circuit
– Center
Removed Pin 14
contact
Close to
– Ring
Pin 13 0
contact
Installed Pin 13 Pin 11 –
529036188
8 smr2012-029
smr2010-039-002_a
ENGINE CUT-OFF SWITCH

1. Center contact
2. Ring contact
If any continuity test fails, replace engine cut-off 529036166
switch. 2. Connect the DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS (P/N 529 036

If all readings were as specified, carry out the 188) to the 24-pin vehicle harness connector
CONTINUITY TEST OF VEHICLE HARNESS TO only, NOT to the steering harness connector.
ENGINE CUT-OFF SWITCH. 3. Disconnect connector "B" from ECM. Refer to
WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTOR subsec-
Continuity Test of Vehicle Harness to tion.
Engine Cut-Off Switch
1. Disconnect the 24-pin steering connector. Re- on ECM connector "B".
fer to START/STOP SWITCH in the STARTING
SYSTEM subsection for details. 5. Probe test connector as follows.
REQUIRED TOOLS 24-PIN TEST ECM ADAPTER
READING
CONNECTOR TOOL
11 B-E4
FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 868)
14 B-B2 Close to 0
ECM ADAPTER TOOL (P/N 529 036 166)
13 B-F2
If any continuity test failed, check wiring harness

between 24-pin steering connector and ECM con-
nector.
If problem persists and all tests have been per-
formed, try a new ECM. Refer to ELECTRONIC
FUEL INJECTION (EFI) subsection.
6. Reconnect 24-pin steering harness connector.
529036188
7. Reinstall removed components.
Engine Cut-Off Switch Replacement

REQUIRED TOOL
D.E.S.S. POST REMOVER (P/N 529 035 943)
529035868
529035943
smr2012-029 9
Subsection XX (CHARGING SYSTEM)
CHARGING SYSTEM
SERVICE TOOLS

ELECTRO SPECIALTIES BATTERY LOAD TESTER....................... 710 ........................................... 11
EXTECH INDUCTIVE AMMETER .................................................. 380941 ........................................... 3
GENERAL Voltage Regulator/Rectifier

NOTICE When performing a test on iS mod- The rectifier receives AC current from the mag-
els with the engine running above approxi- neto and transforms it into direct current (DC).
mately 4500 RPM for 3 seconds, be aware that The voltage regulator, included in the same unit,
the suspension will move to its predefined up limits voltage to a maximum level to prevent any
position and then stop in that position. Wait damage to electrical components.
until suspension is stopped before working on
the watercraft. Keep away from moving parts.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The purpose of the charging system is to maintain
the battery at a full state of charge and to provide
the electrical system with the required electrical
power for normal vehicle operation.
Magneto
The magneto is the primary source of electrical
energy. It transforms a magnetic field into an elec-
tric current (AC).
The magneto has a 3 phase, delta wound, 18 pole smr2011-029-001_a
stator that is rated at 380 watts. 1. Voltage regulator/rectifier
Battery
The battery supplies DC power to the electric
starter for cranking the engine. During engine
starting, it also supplies DC power to every elec-
trical and electronic system in the vehicle as well
as all accessories.
At low engine RPM operation and high current
load conditions, it supplements the magneto
output and helps to maintain a steady system
voltage.
F18H1RA
TYPICAL
smr2012-030 1
INSPECTION
CHARGING SYSTEM OUTPUT
First ensure that battery is in good condition prior
to performing the following tests.
NOTE: It is good practice to check for fault codes
using the B.U.D.S. as a first troubleshooting step.
Refer to DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT CODES sub-
section.
Output Voltage Test Using B.U.D.S.

1. Connect to the latest applicable B.U.D.S. soft-
ware. Refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS
2. Select the Monitoring and ECM tabs.
3. Start engine.
NOTE: Connect a garden hose to cool exhaust
system. Refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM subsection.
4. Increase engine RPM as specified in the follow-
ing table and read voltage in B.U.D.S.
2 smr2012-030
OUTPUT VOLTAGE TEST USING B.U.D.S. 4. Increase engine RPM as specified in the follow-
ing table and read voltage with the multimeter.
TEST ENGINE SPEED VOLTAGE (DC)
OUTPUT VOLTAGE TEST USING A MULTIMETER
5500 RPM 14.5 ± .5 Vdc
TEST ENGINE SPEED VOLTAGE (DC)
5500 RPM 14.5 ± .5 Vdc
If voltage is above specification, replace voltage

regulator/rectifier.
If voltage is below specification, check stator
output and wiring harness prior to concluding that
voltage regulator/rectifier is defective. Refer to
PTO HOUSING AND MAGNETO subsection.
Output Current Test with an Inductive
smr2009-033-001_a
Ammeter
TYPICAL For fuse box access, refer to the appropriate BAT-
1. Monitoring tab
2. ECM tab
TERY ACCESS in this subsection.
3. Battery voltage 1. Detach fuse box from the electrical component
support.
If voltage is above specification, replace voltage
regulator/rectifier. Use an inductive ammeter such as the EXTECH IN-
DUCTIVE AMMETER (P/N 380941) or equivalent.
If voltage is below specification, check stator
output and wiring harness prior to concluding that 2. Turn on the ammeter and select 40 Adc.
voltage regulator/rectifier is defective. Refer to 3. From underneath the fuse box, clamp the am-
PTO HOUSING AND MAGNETO subsection. meter around the DC output wire.
Output Voltage Test Using a DC OUTPUT WIRE IN FUSE BOX
Multimeter Terminal A3
For battery access, refer to BATTERY ACCESS in (RED/BLACK wire)
this subsection.
1. Set multimeter to Vdc.
2. Connect multimeter to battery posts.
smr2011-029-002_a
1. Fuse box
smr2012-030-002_a
2. DC output wire
3. Ammeter clamp
TYPICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE TEST AT BATTERY
POSTS
NOTE: Zero set the ammeter before use or read-
3. Start engine. ing may be erroneous.
NOTE: Connect a garden hose to cool exhaust 4. Start engine.
system. Refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM subsection. NOTE: Connect a garden hose to cool exhaust
system. Refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM subsection.
smr2012-030 3
5. Increase engine RPM as specified in the follow- For fuse box access, refer to BATTERY ACCESS
ing table and read current with the ammeter. in this subsection.
TEST ENGINE
CURRENT 1. Remove charging system fuse.
SPEED
2. Set multimeter to Adc.
Approx. 10 A
5500 RPM (while suspension does 3. Connect probes to fuse holder terminals.
not move)
NOTE: Initial current reading will be higher than

specified due to the battery drain from the engine
start. This is an indication that the charging sys-
tem is operating normally. Current load will come
down as the battery recovers its charge.
If current reading is far below specification, test
stator output and wiring harness prior to conclud-
ing the voltage regulator/rectifier is faulty.
NOTE: If the battery is in poor condition or is not
at a full state of charge, current reading will be
above specification. Refer to BATTERY in this
subsection for battery testing. smr2011-029-003_a
6. Tightly secure fuse box to the electrical compo- CHARGING SYSTEM FUSE REMOVED
nent support with a NEW locking tie.
4. Start engine.
WARNING NOTE: Connect a garden hose to cool exhaust
Fuse box must be tightly secured with a NEW system. Refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM subsection.
locking tie. 5. Increase engine RPM as specified in the follow-
ing table and read current with the multimeter.
OUTPUT CURRENT TEST
TEST ENGINE
CURRENT (DC)
SPEED
Approx. 10 A
5500 RPM (while suspension does
not move)
NOTE: Initial current reading will be higher than

specified due to the battery drain from the engine
start. This proves the charging system works.
Current load will come down as the battery re-
covers its charge.
If current is below specification, carry out a STA-
smr2012-030-001_b TOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE TEST prior to concluding
1. Bottom of fuse box the voltage regulator/rectifier is faulty.
2. Electrical component support
3. Locking tie
TROUBLESHOOTING
Output Current Test with a Multimeter
DISCHARGED OR WEAK BATTERY
NOTICE Charging current may rise over mul-
timeter current reading capacity (usually 10 A) 1. Battery posts and/or cable terminal oxidized.
possibly causing test equipment damage. It is - Clean battery terminals, posts, and coat with di-
preferable to use an inductive ammeter to test electric grease.
the charging system current.
4 smr2012-030
2. Loose or bad connections. 2. Old battery with reduced current storage capac-
- Check for wiring and connector tightness, frayed ity.
or broken wires. Repair or replace cables or con- - Carry out a BATTERY VOLTAGE TEST (LOAD AP-
nectors. PLIED).
3. Worn or faulty battery (sulfated, fretting, - Replace battery.
shorted plates or cell, damaged casing, loose 3. Cracked, leaking or improperly sealed battery.
post).
- Ensure battery cell caps are properly installed and
- Carry out a BATTERY VOLTAGE TEST (LOAD AP- not leaking.
PLIED).
- If battery is cracked or leaking electrolyte, re-
- Replace battery. place battery and clean surrounding area as
recommended in BATTERY further in this sub-
4. Burnt fuse(s) or faulty rectifier.
section.
- First check fuse(s). If in good condition, check
voltage regulator/rectifier.
PROCEDURES
5. Faulty stator.
- Test stator and replace as required. VOLTAGE
6. Parasitic or “Key Off” current loads. REGULATOR/RECTIFIER
- Isolate, reduce or eliminate such loads.
Voltage Regulator Continuity Test
- Recharge battery as recommended if vehicle is
not used for extended periods of time. Due to internal circuitry, there is no static test
available to check continuity.
NOTE: “Key Off” or parasitic loads may be loads
due to installed accessories. Parasitic loads may Voltage Regulator/Rectifier Access
also be due to water infiltration in connectors, or
partial short circuits that slowly drain a battery (GTS, GTI, GTR, Wake and RXP Series)
without causing a fuse to burn. Open the front storage cover an remove the ac-
cess panel.
LOW OR NO CHARGING SYSTEM
VOLTAGE
1. Blown F6 fuse.
- Check F6 fuse.
2. Defective stator.
- Test stator. Refer to PTO HOUSING AND MAG-
NETO subsection.
3. Defective charging system wiring or connec-
tions.
- Check for damaged wiring.
- Check for damaged or loose connections.
REPETITIVE BLOWN F6 FUSE

1. Voltage regulator/rectifier internal circuit smo2011-003-011_c
shorted to ground. 1. Access panel
- Refer to VOLTAGE REGULATOR/RECTIFIER
TEST FOR BLOWN F6 FUSE in this subsection.
FREQUENT LOW ELECTROLYTE LEVEL

REQUIRING ADDITION OF DISTILLED
WATER
1. High charging system voltage.
- Carry out a CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE TEST.
smr2012-030 5
smr2011-029-005_a
smr2011-029-004_a
1. Regulator/rectifier
Voltage Regulator/Rectifier Access Remove the RH side access panel on the rear
(RXT, GTX and Wake Pro Series) deck.
smr2011-029-009_a
ssi2009-002-002_a 1. RH side access panel

2. Remove the RH side storage bin.
smr2011-029-006_a
ssi2009-002-003_a
1. Storage bin
6 smr2012-030
Voltage Regulator/Rectifier Test for

Blown F6 Fuse
1. Detach the voltage regulator/rectifier from the
electrical component support. Refer to VOLT-
AGE REGULATOR/RECTIFIER REMOVAL in
this subsection.
2. Disconnect the voltage regulator/rectifier
2-wire connector.
3. Install a new fuse.
If the fuse still burns, check for a shorted wire or
connector pin.
If fuse does not burn, replace regulator/rectifier. smr2011-029-008_b
Step 1: Insert behind the tab

Step 2: Push to lock
Voltage Regulator/Rectifier
Replacement 3. Wiggle it to make sure it is safely locked.
Voltage Regulator/Rectifier Removal 4. Reinstall remaining removed components.
1. Detach electrical component support from
battery holder. Refer to ELECTRICAL COMPO- ELECTRICAL COMPONENT
NENT SUPPORT in this subsection. SUPPORT
2. Disconnect both connectors from the voltage Electrical Component Support
regulator/rectifier.
Removal
3. Detach the voltage regulator/rectifier from the
1. Remove top screws from support.
electrical component support:
3.1 Push the lower tab down to release the
bottom of voltage regulator/rectifier.
3.2 Pull the bottom of voltage regulator/recti-
fier off the electrical component support.
smr2012-030-001_a
1. Fuse box
3. Locking tie
4. Screws
smr2011-029-008_a
2. Unhook the top of electrical component support
Step 1: Push tab
Step 2: Pull off from battery holder.
3. Pull up electrical component support.
Voltage Regulator/Rectifier Installation
dure. However, pay attention to the following.
1. Insert the top of voltage regulator/rectifier be-
hind the component support upper tab.
2. Push the bottom of voltage regulator/rectifier to
lock it.
smr2012-030 7
smr2011-029-007_a smr2011-029-007_c
Step 1: Unhook PUSH TOWARDS BATTERY RACK

Step 2: Pull up 1. Electrical component support
2. Install top screws to the electrical component
Electrical Component Support support.
Installation
Installation is the reverse of removal procedures.
1. Attach the electrical component support to the
battery holder:
1.1 Engage the support lower tabs in the bat-
tery holder bottom openings.
1.2 Push the top of support towards the bat-
tery holder until it clips.
smr2012-030-001_a
1. Fuse box
3. Locking tie
4. Screws
3. Tightly secure the fuse box to the electrical

component support with a NEW locking tie.
WARNING
Fuse box must be tightly secured with a NEW
locking tie.
4. Wiggle the assembly to make sure it is properly

secured.
sbl2011-002-007_a
1.
2.
Electrical component support lower tabs
Battery holder openings
BATTERY
3. Battery holder
4. Electrical components support Battery Access (GTS, GTI, GTR, Wake
and RXP Series)
Open the front storage cover an remove the ac-
cess panel.
8 smr2012-030

3. Remove the RH side access panel on the rear
deck.
smo2011-003-011_c
FUSE BOX ACCESS

1. Access panel
Battery Access (RXT, GTX and Wake smr2011-029-009_a
Pro Series) 1. RH side access panel
Models with Suspension Battery Removal

WARNING
The BLACK negative battery cable must al-
ways be disconnected first and reconnected
last. Never charge or boost battery while in-
stalled in watercraft.
1. Remove the diagnostic connector from its

holder.
ssi2009-002-002_a
2. Remove the RH side storage bin.
smr2012-030-002_b
2. Disconnect the BLACK (-) battery cable.
WARNING
Always disconnect battery cables exactly in
the specified order, BLACK (-) battery cable
ssi2009-002-003_a first then the RED (+) cable last.
1. Storage bin
3. Disconnect the RED (+) cable.
smr2012-030 9
7. Remove battery with battery holder from vehi-

cle.
CAUTION Be careful not to disconnect the

hose from the battery vent and cause an elec-
trolyte spill in the watercraft.
smr2012-030-002_c
1. BLACK (-) cable

2. RED (+) cable
4. Detach electrical component support from

battery holder. Refer to ELECTRICAL COMPO-
NENT SUPPORT in this subsection.
5. Remove and discard both screws securing bat-
tery holder to its base.
smr2009-033-008_a
TYPICAL
1. Vent plugged for removal
WARNING
Electrolyte is poisonous and corrosive. Avoid
contact with eyes, skin and clothing. Wear a
suitable pair of non-absorbent gloves when
removing the battery by hand. Rinse any
affected area with clear running water for
at least 15 minutes, then seek professional
medical attention.
ssi2009-002-009_a
TYPICAL NOTICE Should any electrolyte spillage oc-

1. Retaining screws cur, immediately wash off area with a solution
2. Battery holder
of baking soda and water, then rinse thor-
6. Disconnect vent hose from the battery. oughly.
8. Unlock the upper tabs then slightly open battery
holder.
smr2009-033-009_a
TYPICAL
1. Disconnect here smr2009-005-005_a
1. Unlock here
10 smr2012-030
9. Separate lower tabs to unlock them. NOTE: Hand tighten caps then tighten an ad-
ditional 1/4 turn using a 20 mm (3/4 in) socket.
Using any other tool could damage the plastic
battery caps.
WARNING
Battery electrolyte is caustic. To prevent
spillage, ensure battery cell caps are suffi-
ciently tight to properly seal each cell.
Battery Electrolyte Level

Check electrolyte level in each cell, add distilled
water up to the upper fill level line.
smr2009-005-006 NOTICE Add only distilled water in an acti-
vated battery.
10. Remove battery holder from battery.
Battery Testing
There are 3 types of battery tests.
TEST
COMMENT
METHOD
A dynamic voltage test with a load
applied gives an accurate indication
Voltage test
of the condition of the battery.
(load applied)
This is the most recommended
method.
A static voltage test is carried out
without discharging current. It is
Voltage test
the simplest and most commonly
(no load)
used but the most likely to give
smr2009-005-007
false results.
Battery Cleaning Battery
Gives an accurate indication of the
electrolyte
Clean the battery casing, caps, cables and battery charge condition of each cell.
reading
posts using a solution of baking soda and water.
NOTICE Do not allow cleaning solution to en- Battery Voltage Test (Load Applied)
ter battery. Use a load testing device such as the ELECTRO
SPECIALTIES BATTERY LOAD TESTER (P/N 710). It
Remove corrosion from battery cable terminals
has a 500 A carbon pile adjustable load.
and battery posts using a firm wire brush. Rinse
with clear water then dry well. Follow battery load tester instructions.
Apply a load of 3 times the ampere-hour rating
Battery Inspection of the battery for 14 seconds, then check battery
Visually inspect battery casing for cracks or voltage.
other possible damages. If casing is damaged
or shows signs of acid leaking, replace battery
and thoroughly clean battery holder, holder base
and surrounding area with a solution of water and
baking soda.
Inspect battery posts for corrosion and security of
mounting.
Inspect for cracked or damaged battery caps, re-
place defective caps.
smr2012-030 11
BATTERY VOLTAGE TEST (LOAD APPLIED) Most hydrometers give a true reading at 21°C
(70°F).
TIME TO MEASURE VOLTAGE
INTO TEST (with load applied) In order to obtain the correct value, adjust the ini-
tial reading by adding or subtracting the number
14 seconds 10.5 Vdc min. indicated in the following table.
If battery voltage has dropped below specifica- ELECTROLYTE TEMPERATURE CORRECTION
tion, the battery storage capacity has decreased CHART
appreciably and the battery should be replaced. ELECTROLYTE
TEMPERATURE OPERATION TO
Battery Voltage Test (No Load) PERFORM
°C °F
NOTE: Be aware that the voltage test can indi-
cate that the battery is in good condition even 38 100 .012
Add to the
though the battery does not have enough stored 32 90 .008
reading:
energy to crank the engine. A load test gives a 27 80 .004
more accurate indication of the condition of the 21 70 CORRECT READING
battery.
16 60 .004
If the battery has just received a charge, wait 1-2 Subtract
hours before taking a voltage reading. 10 50 .008
from the
4 40 reading: .012
Set multimeter to Vdc and measure voltage at bat-
tery terminals. - 1 30 .016
FULLY CHARGED BATTERY VOLTAGE (NO LOAD) EXAMPLE NO. 1
12.6 Vdc minimum TEMPERATURE BELOW 21°C (70°F):
Hydrometer reading: 1.250

Battery Electrolyte Reading Electrolyte temperature: -1°C (30°F)
NOTE: Do not top up cell electrolyte level with Subtract: .016
Corrected: 1.234
distilled water prior to taking an electrolyte read-
ing. EXAMPLE NO. 2
Check charge condition of each cell using a hy- TEMPERATURE ABOVE 21°C (70°F):
drometer. Hydrometer reading: 1.235
Electrolyte temperature: 38°C (100°F)
NOTE: A hydrometer measures the charge of a Add: .012
battery in terms of specific gravity of the elec- Corrected: 1.247
trolyte.
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE SPECIFICATION STATE OF CHARGE AS PER HYDROMETER
READING (TEMPERATURE CORRECTED)
BATTERY CONDITION SPECIFIC GRAVITY
STATE OF SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Fully charged 1.265 - 1.280 CHARGE @ 27°C (80°F) @ 4°C (40°F)
100% 1.26 - 1.27 1.27 - 1.28
75% 1.21 - 1.22 1.22 - 1.23
50% 1.16 - 1.17 1.17 - 1.18
1
25% 1.12 - 1.13 1.13 - 1.14
0% 1.10 or less 1.11 or less
Battery Storage
Disconnect and remove battery from watercraft
as explained in BATTERY REMOVAL.
A17E0JA
1. Hydrometer
12 smr2012-030
NOTICE Battery storage is critical for battery WARNING

life. Regularly charging the battery during
storage will prevent cell sulfation. Keeping the Batteries must always be stored out of reach
battery in vehicle for storage may lead to con- of children.
tacts degradation/corrosion and case damage
if freezing occurs. A discharged battery will Activation of a New Battery
freeze and crack in areas where freezing condi-
tions are experienced. Electrolyte leakage will WARNING
damage surrounding parts. Always remove Never charge or boost battery while installed
battery from vehicle for storage and regularly in watercraft.
recharge it to keep an optimal condition.
Perform the following operations whenever a new
Check electrolyte level in each cell. battery is to be installed.
Add distilled water up to upper level line as nec- – Remove the sealing tube from the vent fitting.
essary.
NOTICE Do not overfill.
WARNING
Failure to remove the sealing tube could re-
The battery must always be stored fully charged. sult in an explosion.
If required, recharge until the recommended spe-
cific gravity is obtained prior to storage. 1. Remove caps and fill battery to UPPER LEVEL
NOTICE Battery electrolyte temperature line with electrolyte (specific gravity: 1.265 at
must not exceed 50°C (122°F) during charging. 21°C (70°F)).
The battery casing should not feel hot to the NOTE: This battery may fill slower than others
touch. due to the anti-spill check ball design.
Clean battery terminals and cable connections us-
ing a wire brush.
Apply a light coat of dielectric grease on terminals.
Clean battery casing and caps using a solution of 2
baking soda and water.
NOTICE Do not allow cleaning solution to en-
ter battery.
3
Rinse battery with clear water and dry well using
a clean cloth. 1
Store battery in a cool dry place. Such conditions
reduce self-discharging and keep fluid evaporation
to a minimum. Keep battery away from dew, high
A17E0FB
moisture and direct sunlight.
1. Sealing tube removed
During the storage period, recheck electrolyte 2. Battery electrolyte
level and specific gravity readings at least every 3. Upper level line
month. If necessary, top up the electrolyte level
with distilled water, then recharge (trickle charge). NOTE: Place the cell caps over the cell openings
Recharge frequency depends on battery condi- engaging only the first thread to prevent cell
tion and storage temperature. Maintain battery contamination and acid splatter during charging.
as per following table. Do not screw caps on tightly.
2. Allow the battery to stand for 30 minutes MIN-
AMBIENT CHARGING
IMUM to allow the electrolyte time to soak
TEMPERATURE FREQUENCY
through the battery cells plates.
Below 16°C (60°F) Every month
Above 16°C (60°F) Every 2 weeks
smr2012-030 13
NOTICE If charging rate increases above

2.4 A reduce it immediately. If cell tempera-
ture rises above 50°C (122°F) or if the casing
feels hot, discontinue charging temporarily or
reduce the charging rate.
5. Disconnect battery charger.
1
A17E0GA
1
1. 30 minutes
3. Readjust the electrolyte level to the UPPER 2 - + 3

LEVEL line.
A17E0IB
1
Step 1: Disconnect battery charger from AC outlet
Step 2: Disconnect - lead
Step 3: Disconnect + lead
6. Test battery state of charge. Use a hydrometer.

2
A17E0RB
1
1. Battery electrolyte
2. Upper level line
4. Connect a 2 A battery charger for 3 to 5 hours.
3
A17E0JA
2 - + 1 1. Hydrometer
7. If electrolyte level has dropped after charging,

fill with distilled water to UPPER LEVEL line.
After water is added, continue charging for 1 to
A17E0IA
2 hours to mix water with electrolyte.
Step 1: Connect + lead to battery + post
8. Reinstall caps and clean any electrolyte spillage
Step 2: Connect - lead to battery - post using a solution of baking soda and water.
Step 3: Connect battery charger to AC outlet
NOTE: Hand tighten caps then tighten an ad-
WARNING ditional 1/4 turn using a 20 mm (3/4 in) socket.
Using an other tool could damage the plastic
Gases given off by a battery being charged battery caps.
are highly explosive. Always charge in a well
ventilated area. Keep battery away from cig- WARNING
arettes, open flames, welding operations and
any other types of ignition. Always turn bat- Battery electrolyte is caustic. To prevent
tery charger off prior to disconnecting cables. spillage, battery cell cap should be suffi-
Otherwise, a spark will occur possibly caus- ciently tight to properly seal.
ing the battery to explode.
14 smr2012-030
Charging a Used Battery 2. Exceptionally for this particular case, set the
charger to a high rate.
WARNING NOTE: Some chargers have a polarity protec-
Never charge battery while installed in water- tion feature which prevents charging unless the
craft. charger leads are connected to the correct battery
terminals. A completely discharged battery may
For best results, battery should be charged when not have enough voltage to activate this circuitry,
it is at room temperature. A battery that is cold even though the leads are connected properly.
may not accept current for several hours after This will make it appear that the battery will not
charging has begun. accept a charge. Follow the charger manufac-
Do not charge a frozen battery. If the battery turer's instruction on how to bypass or override
charge is very low, the battery may freeze. If this circuitry so that the charger will turn on and
you suspect the battery to be frozen, move it to a charge a low-voltage battery.
heated area for about 2 hours (or more if required) 3. Since battery chargers vary in the amount of
to let it thaw out before charging. voltage and current they provide, the time re-
quired for the battery to accept a measurable
WARNING charger current may be up to 10 hours or more.
Always charge a battery in a well ventilated 4. If the charging current is not up to a measurable
area. amount after 10 hours, the battery should be
replaced.
The time required to charge a battery will vary de- 5. If the charging current is measurable before
pending on several factors, such as: the end of the 10 hour period, the battery is
– Battery temperature: The charging time is in- good and charging should be completed at a
creased for a cold battery as charging current lower rate as specified in ACTIVATION OF A
accepted by a cold battery will be lower than NEW BATTERY.
for a warm battery. As the battery warms up,
it will accept a higher rate of charge. 6. It is recommended that any battery recharged
using this procedure be tested under load prior
– State of charge: As a battery discharges, it to returning it to service.
gives up its stored energy. The greater the dis-
charge, the longer it will take to fully recharge Battery Installation
it.
1. Install battery in its holder and lock holder.
– Type of charger: Battery chargers vary in the
amount of voltage and current that they can 2. Install the battery in the watercraft using new
supply. screws.
Charging a Very Flat or Completely 3. Tighten battery holder screws to 14 N•m
Discharged Battery (124 lbf•in).
The battery charger used should have an ad- 4. Reconnect the watercraft vent hose to the bat-
justable charging rate. A unit which can be tery vent outlet. Make sure vent hose is not
adjusted in small increments is acceptable. pinched or bent.
The battery charger must be equipped with an am- WARNING
meter capable of accurately measuring current of
less than 1 ampere. Vent hose must be free and open. Avoid skin
contact with electrolyte.
Unless this procedure is properly followed, a good
battery may be needlessly replaced.
1. Measure the voltage at the battery posts with
an accurate voltmeter. If it is below 10 volts,
the battery will accept current at very low rate.
It could be some time before the charging rate
increases. Such low current flow may not be
detectable on some charger ammeters and the
battery will not seem to accept the charge.
smr2012-030 15
BATTERY VENT CHECK VALVE

Battery Vent Hose and Check Valve
Access (GTS, GTI, GTR, Wake and RXP
Series)
cess panel.
smr2009-033-009_a
TYPICAL
1. Connect here
5. Install electrical component support to battery

holder. Refer to ELECTRICAL COMPONENT
SUPPORT in this subsection.
WARNING
Always connect battery cables in the spec-
ified order, RED positive cable first, BLACK smo2011-003-011_c
negative cable last. 1. Access panel
6. Connect RED (+) cable. Reach the check valve on RH side of the hull just
in front of the fuel tank vent.
7. Connect BLACK (-) cable last.
smr2012-030-002_c smr2011-029-010_a
1. BLACK (-) cable FRONT RH SIDE OF HULL - DECK NOT SHOWN

2. RED (+) cable 1. Vent hose
8. Apply dielectric grease on battery posts. Battery Vent Hose and Check Valve
9. Verify cable routing and attachments. Access (RXT, GTX and Wake Pro
10. Insert diagnostic connector in its holder. Series)
11. Install remaining removed components. Models with Suspension
16 smr2012-030
ssi2009-002-002_a
smr2009-033-009_b
2. Remove the RH side storage bin. TYPICAL - REAR RH SIDE OF HULL - DECK NOT SHOWN
1. Vent hose
Battery Vent Check Valve Test

WARNING
Battery caps do not have vent holes. Ensure
vent line is not obstructed and check valve is
functioning properly.
1. Check vent hose condition.

2. Make sure the check valve and grommet are
not plugged.
ssi2009-002-003_a 3. Disconnect vent on LH side of the battery.
1. Storage bin

Remove the RH side access panel on the rear
deck.
smr2009-033-009_a
TYPICAL
1. Disconnect here
4. Use the vacuum/pressure pump in the VAC-

UUM/PRESSURE PUMP (P/N 529 021 800).
smr2011-029-009_a
1. RH side access panel
All models
Reach the check valve on RH side of the hull.
smr2012-030 17
529021800
smr2009-031-013_a
5. Set vacuum/pressure pump to PRESSURE. 1. Vacuum selected
9. Squeeze the vacuum/pressure pump handle

several times to draw air in through the check
valve.
NOTE: The check valve must not let air in, and
must be able to hold 10 in Hg (-34 kPa) of vacuum
without leaking.
smr2009-031-012_a
1. Pressure selected
6. Connect vacuum/pressure pump to the vent

hose end.
7. Squeeze the vacuum/pressure pump handle
several times to push air out through the check
valve.
NOTE: The check valve must let air flow out.
smr2009-033-010_b
MUST HOLD VACUUM IN THIS POSITION
If any test failed, check the vent hose. If the vent

hose is good, replace check valve.
Battery Vent Check Valve Replacement

1. Pull vent check valve out of grommet in hull.
2. Cut locking tie retaining vent hose to check
valve.
3. Remove hose from valve.
4. Install a new check valve on vent hose with
black end towards vent hose, and secure with
a locking tie.
smr2009-033-010_a
5. Push check valve through grommet in hull.
AIR MUST FLOW OUT FREELY
8. Set vacuum/pressure pump to VACUUM.
18 smr2012-030
NOTICE At installation, be sure to position

the check valve with the black side connected
to the vent line, and ORANGE side inserted
through the grommet protruding outside of
the hull.
smr2006-023-003_a
smr2012-030 19
Subsection XX (STARTING SYSTEM)
STARTING SYSTEM
SERVICE TOOLS
DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS ............................................................... 529 036 188 ............................................. 5
ECM ADAPTER TOOL................................................................... 529 036 166 ......................................... 4, 8
FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER ............................................................ 529 035 868 ................................. 4–5, 7–8
SERVICE PRODUCTS
DIELECTRIC GREASE ................................................................... 293 550 004 ........................................... 13
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ........................................... 12
smr2012-031 1
NEW
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
Isoflex grease
Topas NB 52
Loctite
243
smr2010-038-100_a
2 smr2012-031
GENERAL NOTE: This subsection assumes the problem is

related to an electrical component of the starting
BASIC STARTING SYSTEM system. If the starting system tests good, ensure
engine and jet pump integrity. Refer to applicable
OPERATION subsection.
Engine Cranking Conditions
The following conditions must be met to allow en- DIAGNOSTIC GUIDELINES
gine cranking: NOTHING HAPPENS WHEN START/STOP
1. START/STOP button pressed and released to BUTTON PRESSED
activate the ECM.
1. Battery not connected
2. The tether cord securely installed on the en-
- Connect battery
gine cut-off switch and the D.E.S.S. key recog-
nized by the ECM as valid (2 short beeps) 2. Burnt fuse
3. START/STOP button pressed and held. - F3 fuse: (START/STOP switch circuit).
- F8 fuse: (main DC power fuses).
Starting System Logic - F19 fuse (ECM power fuse).
If the ECM recognizes a valid D.E.S.S. key, it al-
lows engine cranking by providing the ground to 3. Defective relay or related circuits
the starter solenoid when the START/STOP but- - Test relay and circuits.
ton is pressed and held. 4. Defective START/STOP switch
If the START/STOP button is activated while the - Test START/STOP switch, wiring and connec-
throttle lever is depressed more than 60%, the en- tions.
gine will crank but will not start (engine drowned
mode). ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK
If the START/STOP button is held after engine has 1. D.E.S.S. not functional or wrong D.E.S.S. key
started, the ECM automatically stops the starter if - If 2 short beeps are not heard when pressing
engine speed reaches at least 1400 RPM. the START/STOP button, refer to DIGITALLY EN-
CODED SECURITY SYSTEM subsection.
If the START/STOP button is pressed when the
engine is running, the engine will shut down. 2. Burnt fuse
- F16 fuse: (starter solenoid power) Carry out a SO-
TROUBLESHOOTING LENOID INPUT VOLTAGE TEST (Solenoid Coil).
3. Discharged battery
DIAGNOSTIC TIPS - Recharge and test. Refer to CHARGING SYSTEM
subsection.
NOTE: It is a good practice to check for fault
codes using B.U.D.S. as a first troubleshooting 4. Battery connections
step. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT CODES - Check/clean/tighten.
subsection.
5. Poor/bad or corroded ground contacts (engine,
Starting system failures are not necessarily re- battery ground cable, starter etc.)
lated to the starter but may be due to one the - Check/clean/repair, refer to POWER DISTRIBU-
following: TION AND GROUNDS subsection.
– Starter solenoid fuse F16
6. Starter solenoid
– Battery, refer to CHARGING SYSTEM
- Test solenoid, wiring and connections.
– START/STOP switch
– Starter solenoid 7. Damaged starter or ground cables
– Engine cut-off switch - Carry out SOLENOID DYNAMIC TEST
– ECM 8. Obstructed starter drive gear assembly
– Wiring/connections. - Check/repair, refer to PTO HOUSING AND MAG-
NETO.
Check these components before removing the
starter. 9. No ground provided by ECM to starter solenoid
- Refer to CONTINUITY TEST OF START/STOP
SWITCH CONTROL CIRCUIT in this subsection.
smr2012-031 3
10. Engine cannot be rotated (possibly seized or jet ENGINE START/STOP SWITCH
pump blocked)
- Refer to ENGINE subsection. START/STOP Switch Circuit Continuity
Test
ENGINE CRANKS SLOWLY 1. Remove START/STOP switch fuse (F3).
1. Loose, corroded or dirty battery cable connec- For fuse box access, refer to POWER DISTRIBU-
tions TION AND GROUNDS subsection.
- Check/clean/tighten. Disconnect connector "B" from the ECM, refer to
2. Discharged/weak battery WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTOR subsec-
- Recharge and test. Refer to CHARGING SYSTEM tion.
subsection. Install ECM ADAPTER TOOL (P/N 529 036 166) on
3. Low voltage from starter solenoid ECM harness connector "B".
- Carry out a SOLENOID DYNAMIC TEST.
4. Damaged starter or ground cables
- Carry out SOLENOID DYNAMIC TEST
5. Worn starter
- Check.
STARTER TURNS, BUT STARTER DRIVE

DOES NOT MESH WITH RING GEAR
1. Worn starter drive gear/starter gear/ring gear
529036166
- Replace worn parts. Refer to STARTER GEAR in
this subsection and PTO HOUSING AND MAG-
NETO subsection. Set the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 868)
to .
2. Defective drive
Press and hold the START/STOP switch and test
- Replace starter drive. Refer to PTO HOUSING for continuity of the switch circuit as per following
AND MAGNETO subsection.
table.
STARTER KEEPS RUNNING CONTINUITY TEST OF START/STOP SWITCH
CIRCUIT (BUTTON PRESSED AND HELD)
1. Shorted solenoid winding
- Replace solenoid. ECM
FUSE BOX RESISTANCE
CONNECTOR B
2. Melted solenoid contacts
Close to 0
- Replace solenoid. Pin A6 B-D1
(continuity)
3. Sticking or defective starter drive
- Lubricate or replace. Refer to PTO HOUSING 2. If the reading is as specified, the START/STOP
AND MAGNETO. switch and its wiring are good.
3. If a high resistance or an open circuit is mea-
PROCEDURES sured, carry out START/STOP SWITCH CONTI-
NUITY TEST.
WARNING
When carrying out any kind of maintenance START/STOP Switch Continuity Test
on the starting system, always disconnect the 1. Remove START/STOP switch fuse (F3).
battery ground cable. This will eliminate the 2. Disconnect the 24-pin steering connector:
possibility of shorting out a power cable, and
generating a spark which could result in a fire GTS, GTI, GTR, Wake and RXP Series
or and explosion. Do not place any tool on Open the front storage cover and remove the ac-
the battery. cess panel.
4 smr2012-031
All Models
smo2011-003-011_c
1. Access panel
RXT, GTX (Models Without Suspension) sbl2010-034-019_c
and Wake Pro 1. 24-pin steering connector
Open front storage compartment cover. 3. Connect the DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS (P/N 529 036
Remove front storage bin. 188) to make an in-line connection between the
Disconnect the top air ventilation hoses. disconnected connector.
529036188
NOTE: Use the 24 pin connectors only.

868) and select .
sbl2010-004-002
FRONT AIR VENTILATION HOSES

5. Measure resistance through switch as per fol-
lowing table.
RXT, GTX (Models Without Suspension)
CONTINUITY TEST OF START/STOP
and Wake Pro SWITCH CIRCUIT
Open front storage compartment cover.
DIAGNOSTIC
Remove front storage bin. SWITCH
HARNESS RESISTANCE
POSITION
For easier access, rise the moving deck using the CONNECTOR
gauge. Released Infinite (OL)
Pressed and Pins 2 and 23
Close to 0
held
smr2012-031 5
Starter Solenoid Access (RXT, GTX

and Wake Pro Series)
The starter solenoid is located underneath the
fuse box.
Open the boarding platform and remove the RH
storage bin.
smr2010-038-003_a
If the switch does not test as specified, replace

the engine START/STOP switch.
If the switch tests as specified, check for an open
circuit between connections as per table:
OPEN CIRCUIT TEST
ssi2009-002-002_a
CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS RESISTANCE
Steering
Fuse box pin A6
connector pin 23 Must be close
Steering ECM connector to 0
connector pin 2 B, pin D1
STARTER SOLENOID
Starter Solenoid Access (GTS, GTI,
GTR, Wake and RXP Series)
Open the front storage cover and remove the ac-
cess panel.
ssi2009-002-003_a
1. Storage bin
smr2011-030-001_a
smo2011-003-011_c
FUSE BOX ACCESS VIEW FROM FRONT OF BATTERY

1. Access panel 1. Fuse box
2. Starter solenoid
The starter solenoid is located underneath the Models Without Suspension
fuse box.
Open the RH side access panel on the rear deck.
6 smr2012-031
smr2011-029-009_a
1. RH side access panel

smr2010-038 001_a
All RXT/GTX and Wake Pro Models 1. Battery holder

2. Electrical components support
3. Starter solenoid
4. Solenoid connector
4. Set the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035

868) to Vdc.
5. Install tether cord on the engine cut-off switch.
6. Press the START/STOP button to activate ECM.
7. Measure voltage within 3 minutes after
START/STOP switch has been depressed.
SOLENOID INPUT VOLTAGE TEST
(SOLENOID COIL)
smr2011-030-001_a VOLTAGE
TEST PROBES
VIEW FROM FRONT OF BATTERY READING
1. Fuse box
2. Starter solenoid Pin A (VIOLET) Battery ground Battery voltage
Solenoid Input Voltage Test

(Solenoid Coil)
1. Make sure F16 fuse is powered and in good
condition before testing.
2. Detach the electrical component support from
the battery holder. Refer to ELECTRICAL COM-
PONENT SUPPORT in CHARGING SYSTEM
subsection.
3. Disconnect solenoid connector, refer to
STARTER SOLENOID ACCESS in this sub-
section.
smr2010-038-002_a
If test succeeded, carry out a SOLENOID CON-

TROL CIRCUIT TEST.
If test failed, carry out a START/STOP SWITCH
CIRCUIT CONTINUITY TEST.
smr2012-031 7
Solenoid Control Circuit Continuity 2. Make sure the battery ground cable is securely
Test connected to the engine. Refer to POWER DIS-
1. Set the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 TRIBUTION AND GROUNDS.
868) to . 3. Set ECM in engine drowned mode:
2. Disconnect connector "B" from ECM, refer to 3.1 Depress throttle lever
WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTOR subsec- 3.2 Install a rubber band to hold lever in full
tion. throttle position
3. Install ECM ADAPTER TOOL (P/N 529 036 166) on 4. Set multimeter to Vdc.
ECM harness connector.
5. Crank engine.
4. Test continuity of wiring from solenoid to ECM
as per following table. 6. As engine is cranking, measure the voltage as
per following tables.
SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT TEST
SOLENOID DYNAMIC TEST (ENGINE CRANKING)
SOLENOID ECM
RESISTANCE TEST PROBES VOLTAGE (DC)
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR B
Close to 0 Solenoid
Pin B (BR/YL) B-L4 Battery ground Battery voltage
(continuity) battery post
2 1
smr2009-034-010_a
1. Starter motor
2. Starter solenoid
7. If test failed, check battery positive cable (from

smr2010-038-002_b
battery to solenoid).
8. If test succeeded, continue with next step.
If test failed, repair or replace wiring/connectors.
If test succeeded, carry out a SOLENOID COIL
RESISTANCE TEST. TEST PROBES VOLTAGE (DC)
Solenoid
Solenoid Coil Resistance Test starter post
Battery ground Battery voltage
1. Set multimeter to .
2. Disconnect solenoid connector.
2 1
3. Measure solenoid coil resistance as per follow-
ing table.
SOLENOID COIL RESISTANCE TEST M
SOLENOID CONNECTOR RESISTANCE
Pin A Pin B 4.5 to 5.5
If test fails, replace solenoid. smr2009-034-010_b
1. Starter motor
Solenoid Dynamic Test 2. Starter solenoid
1. Ensure fuse F16, battery, and starter solenoid 9. If test failed, carry out a SOLENOID INPUT
are properly connected. VOLTAGE TEST (SOLENOID COIL).
8 smr2012-031
10. If test succeeded, continue with next step.

TEST PROBES VOLTAGE (DC)
Solenoid Solenoid
0.2 Vdc max.
battery post starter post
2 1
M smr2009-034-003_c
1. Locking tab
7. When the solenoid mounting flanges are clear

of the electrical components support, slide so-
smr2009-034-010_c
lenoid up and out of the support.
1. Starter motor
2. Starter solenoid
If test failed, replace solenoid.

If all solenoid dynamic tests are as specified, re-
place starter.
11. Remove rubber band from throttle lever.
battery holder. Refer to ELECTRICAL COM-
subsection.
13. Reinstall removed parts.
Solenoid Removal smr2009-034-004_b
1. Solenoid mounting flange

1. Disconnect battery. Refer to CHARGING SYS-
TEM subsection. 8. Disconnect solenoid cables.
WARNING
Always disconnect the BLACK (-) battery ca-
ble first and reconnect last.
2. Remove diagnostic connector from battery

holder.
3. Detach the electrical component support from
the battery holder. Refer to ELECTRICAL COM-
subsection.
4. Disconnect voltage regulator/rectifier connec-
tors.
5. Disconnect starter solenoid connector. smr2009-034-005_a
6. Push starter solenoid back against locking tab. 1. Cables
Solenoid Installation
1. Reverse the removal procedure and pay atten-
tion to the following.
smr2012-031 9
2. Connect cables to solenoid as shown. NOTE: It may be necessary to pull retaining tab to
ensure proper locking.
5. Wiggle solenoid to ensure it is securely locked.
battery holder. Refer to ELECTRICAL COMPO-
NENT SUPPORT in CHARGING SYSTEM sub-
section.
7. Reinstall remaining components.
8. Reconnect battery and test starter solenoid op-
eration.
STARTER
Starter Quick Test
smr2009-034-005_b To easily bypass the starter solenoid and the start
1. Cable from battery control circuits, proceed as follows.
2. Cable to starter motor
– Use a fully charged 12 V battery with a capacity
3. Insert solenoid in components support by push- of at least 30 A-h.
ing in against the locking tab, then down so – Use a set of booster cables to power the
the solenoid mounting flanges insert under the starter.
flanges on the electrical components support. This procedure tests the following:
– Electric starter
– Starter power cable
– Battery to engine ground cable.
WARNING
Fuel, oil, or electrolyte vapors are flammable
and may become explosive if certain con-
ditions are met. These vapors may collect
near the bottom of the hull when present. All
types of ignition including electrical sparks
are to be avoided when maintaining or test-
ing vehicle.
smr2009-034-004_c
1. Insert solenoid under the components support flanges WARNING

4. Push the solenoid into the support until a Always wear safety glasses when working
“click” is heard (locking tab engagement). with or around batteries. Be sure to leave
the booster battery out of the watercraft.
1. Connect booster cables in this strict order:

2. RED booster cable:
3. Connect one clip to the starter post on the
starter solenoid.
4. Connect the other clip to the positive (+) termi-
nal on the external battery.
5. BLACK booster cable:
6. Connect one clip to the negative (-) battery ter-
minal in the vehicle.
smr2009-034-003_b 7. Momentarily apply the second clip to the nega-
1. Solenoid locked here tive (-) terminal of the external battery.
10 smr2012-031
WARNING 6. Disconnect battery. Refer to CHARGING SYS-

TEM subsection.
Always use an external battery for this test to
prevent any electrical sparks from occurring WARNING
within the hull. Always make the final con-
Always disconnect the BLACK (-) battery ca-
nection to the external battery negative (-) ter-
ble first and reconnect last.
minal using the BLACK booster cable clip. Do
not short starter solenoid contacts across the
NOTE: For better access to the starter, work from
main power connections on the relay with a
r RH side and lay across the watercraft.
tool that would cause electrical sparks. Fail-
ure to follow this procedure may result in an 7. Disconnect starter power cable.
explosion. 8. Remove starter retaining screws.
4 2
3 M
smr2009-034-011_a
smr2007-025-008_a
Step 1: Connect cable to solenoid starter post
Step 2: Connect cable to external battery positive post TYPICAL — REAR OF WATERCRAFT IN ON RH SIDE OF
Step 3: Connect cable to vehicle battery negative post ILLUSTRATION
Step 4: Make a momentary contact 1. Exhaust manifold
2. Starter
3. Starter retaining screws
If engine does not crank (or cranks slowly), check 4. Starter power cable retaining nut
the following:
– Booster cable connections Starter Gear Removal
– Vehicle battery ground cable connections to en- 1. Remove starter.
gine
2. Remove gear retaining circlip and pull out
– Starter power cable/connections from solenoid starter gear.
to starter
– Carry out a SOLENOID DYNAMIC TEST.
If the above items all test good, replace the
starter.
Starter Removal
1. Open or remove seat.
2. Remove rear ventilation cover. Refer to BODY.
4. Lower moving deck.
All Models
smr2012-031 11
smr2007-025-009_a
F18H0NA 1 2 1. Apply Isoflex grease Topas NB 52
1. Retaining circlip
2. Starter gear 3. Install starter.
TIPS TO MESH STARTER GEAR WITH
Starter Gear Installation INTERMEDIATE GEAR
Installation is the reverse of removal procedure.
When starter does not mesh:
However, pay particular attention to the following.
Use a new circlip. – Pull starter out
– Temporarily remove O-rings from starter
Starter Installation – Slightly rotate starter gear
Installation is the reverse of the removal proce- – Reinstall starter
dure. However, pay particular attention to the fol- If it still does not mesh:
lowing.
– Pull starter out.
1. Ensure starter and engine mating surfaces are
– Slightly rotate starter gear
free of debris. Serious problems may arise if
starter is not properly aligned. – Reinstall starter
– Repeat these steps until it meshes
2. Apply ISOFLEX GREASE TOPAS NB 52 (P/N 293
550 021) on starter O-rings. When it meshes:
– Pull starter out.
– Be careful not to rotate starter gear out
of position
– Reinstall O-rings to starter
– Reinstall starter
4. Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060)

on retaining screws and torque to 10 N•m
(89 lbf•in).
5. Connect the RED positive cable to the starter
and torque retaining nut to 7 N•m (62 lbf•in).
12 smr2012-031
WARNING
To prevent electric shock whenever connect-
ing the RED power cable to the starter motor,
ensure the BLACK (-) battery cable is discon-
nected.
6. Apply DIELECTRIC GREASE (P/N 293 550 004) on

terminal and nut.
7. Install rubber protector over starter power cable
retaining nut.
smr2007-025-008_b
1. Torque power cable retaining nut to 7 N•m (62 lbf•in) and apply
dielectric grease
2. Install rubber protector
A. 10 N•m (89 lbf•in)
8. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
smr2012-031 13
Subsection XX (INFORMATION CENTER (GAUGE))
INFORMATION CENTER (GAUGE)

SERVICE TOOLS
DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS ............................................................... 529 036 188 ............................... 49, 52–53
FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER ............................................................ 529 035 868 ...................48, 50, 52, 54, 58
SERVICE PRODUCTS
DIELECTRIC GREASE ................................................................... 293 550 004 ............................... 43, 56, 60
smr2013-007 1
GENERAL 2) Numerical Display

The numerical display provides an indication of es-
INFORMATION CENTER (GAUGE) timated watercraft speed.
(GTS) 3) Touring Mode Indicator
WARNING When the TOURING mode indicator is ON, the de-
fault TOURING mode is active.
Do not adjust the display while riding, you
could lose control. Refer to OPERATING MODES subsection for de-
tails.
4) Sport Mode Indicator
1
The SPORT mode indicator is normally off.
When sport mode of operation is selected, the
SPORT mode indicator will come on and stay on
until sport mode is deactivated, or the watercraft
is shut down.
NOTE: Sport mode is not the default riding mode.
To be active, it must be selected on after starting
the engine.
Refer to OPERATING MODES subsection for de-
smo2013-007-100_a
tailed instructions.
TYPICAL - GTS MODELS
1. Multifunction gauge 5) Fuel Level Indication
Multifunction Gauge Description A bar gauge located in the bottom RH side of the
multifunction display continuously indicates the
amount of fuel in the fuel tank while riding.
8 9 10 When the fuel tank is full, 8 segments (bars) of
the indicator are turned on. The top segment is
not used.
2 When there is only 2 segments of fuel indicated
(approximately 25% fuel tank capacity or 14 L
1 (3.7 U.S. gal.), the following indications will come
4 ON to advise you that a low fuel condition exists.
3
LOW FUEL LEVEL INDICATIONS
5 Last 2 fuel gauge
segments Flashing
7 6 11 Fuel tank symbol
smo2013-007-101_a
Audible advisory (one
long beep)
1) Multifunction Display Periodically
The multifunction display is used to: Scrolling LOW FUEL
advisory message
– Display the WELCOME message on power up
– Display the KEY recognition message 6) Hour Meter Display
– Display the engine RPM Continuously displays the accumulated engine
– Display fault messages. hours.
NOTE: If a fault occurs, it will periodically scroll
7) Water Depth Display
the applicable fault message in the display and
revert to the RPM indication depending on the The water depth display provides an indication of
severity of the fault detected. the lake water depth.
2 smr2013-007
The system is capable of indicating water depth 1

under the hull in single increments up to 50 m
(164 ft).
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may
stop indicating. The display's ability to provide an
indication of the waters's depth depends on the
conditions of use.
NOTE: The water depth indication is only avail-
able when a depth sounder is installed and
detected.
smo2011-003-023_b
WARNING TYPICAL - GTI AND GTI SE MODELS

1. Multifunction gauge
Never use the depth sounder as a warning
device to ride in shallow water.
8) Check Engine Light

The check engine light comes ON when a fault is
detected by the engine management system.
The check engine light may be accompanied by
the applicable scrolling fault message in the mul-
tifunction display.
When the check engine light comes on, contact
your authorized Sea-Doo dealer.
2 1 3
9) Maintenance Reminder Indicator smo2012-001-007_c
The maintenance reminder indicator comes ON TYPICAL - GTI LIMITED, GTR AND WAKE MODELS
when required maintenance is due. 2. Analog speedometer
3. Analog tachometer
When this indicator comes on, bring your water-
craft to your authorized Sea-Doo dealer to have it
serviced and to have the maintenance reminder Analog Speedometer Description
indicator reset. The speedometer, located in the LH side of the
information center, provides an analog indication
10) High Temperature Indicator of the speed of the watercraft in miles per hour
The high temperature indicator comes ON when (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
a high engine temperature or a high exhaust The speed indication is based on a GPS (Global Po-
system temperature is detected. Refer to TROU- sitioning System) incorporated within the informa-
BLESHOOTING section. tion center.
11) ECO Indicator If for some reason the GPS signal is lost, a de-
The ECO indicator and a smile in the fuel tank fault mode is used whereby, the speed is calcu-
symbol comes ON when FUEL ECONOMY lated using information received from other sys-
MODE is activated. tems to provide an estimated watercraft speed.
Refer to OPERATING MODES subsection for de- Analog Tachometer Description
The tachometer provides an analog indication of
the revolutions per minute (RPM) of the engine.
INFORMATION Multiply the indicated number by 1000 to obtain
CENTER (GAUGES) the actual engine RPM.
(GTI/GTR/WAKE)
WARNING
Do not adjust the display while riding, you
could lose control.
smr2013-007 3
Multifunction Gauge Features

GTI GTI SE GTI LIMITED GTR WAKE
Touring mode indicator X X X X X
Sport mode indicator X X X X X
Fuel level indication X X X X X
Hour meter display X X X X X
Water depth indication Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
ECO mode indicator X X X X X
CRUISE mode indicator Opt Opt X Opt X
iBR position indicator X X X X X
SKI mode indicator Opt Opt Opt Opt X
VTS position indication Opt X X X X
Opt = Indicates a feature available as an option
Multifunction Gauge Description
8 9 10 11
1 MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
4
3 NOTE: The default indication in the multifunction
display is the compass direction.
5
16 2) Numerical Display
The numerical display is used to provide a variety
12 of indications as selected by the operator using
15 14 7 6 13
smo2011-003-022_a
the DISPLAY function in the multifunction display.
1) Multifunction Display 2
1
The multifunction display is used to:
– Display the WELCOME message on power up
– Display the KEY recognition message
– Provide various indications as selected by the
operator
– Activating or changing various functions or NUMERICAL DISPLAY
modes of operation
– Display scrolling messages of function activa- 1. Numerical display indication
tion or system faults 2. Unit of measurement of indication
– Display fault codes.
4 smr2013-007
AVAILABLE INDICATIONS IN NUMERICAL DISPLAY

GTI GTI SE GTI Limited GTR WAKE
Watercraft speed Indication by default
Engine RPM X X X X X
Engine temperature Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Clock N.A. X X X X
Learning key settings X X X X X
CRUISE SPEED setting Opt Opt X Opt X
SLOW SPEED MODE setting Opt Opt X Opt X
VTS preset Opt Opt X Opt Opt
VTS settings Opt X N.A. X X
SKI MODE settings Opt Opt Opt Opt X
Fuel consumption (instant and average) Opt X X X X
Fuel autonomy
Opt Opt X Opt Opt
(distance and time to empty)
Lap timer Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Top speed/RPM
Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Average speed/RPM
Altitude N.A. N.A. X N.A. N.A.
X = An X indicates a standard feature
Opt = Feature available as an option
N.A. = Not Available
When the information center is first powered up, When sport mode of operation is selected, the
the numerical display defaults to the last selected SPORT mode indicator will come on and stay on
indication. until sport mode is deactivated, or the watercraft
is shut down.
3) Touring Mode Indicator
When the TOURING mode indicator is ON, the de-
fault TOURING mode of operation is active.
SPORT MODE INDICATOR
NOTE: Sport mode is not the default riding mode.

TOURING MODE INDICATOR To be active, it must be selected after starting the
engine.
Refer to OPERATING MODES subsection for de- Refer to OPERATING MODES subsection for de-
tailed instructions. tailed instructions.
4) Sport Mode Indicator 5) Fuel Level Indication
The sport mode indicator is normally off. A bar gauge located in the bottom RH side of the
multifunction display continuously indicates the
smr2013-007 5
FUEL LEVEL INDICATION WATER DEPTH DISPLAY
When the fuel tank is full, 8 segments (bars) of NOTE: The water depth indication is only avail-
the indicator are turned on. The top segment is able when a depth sounder is installed and
not used. detected.
When there is only 2 segments of fuel indicated WARNING
(approximately 25% fuel tank capacity or 14 L
(3.7 U.S. gal.), the following warnings will be ON. Never use the depth sounder as a warning
device to ride in shallow water.
LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING
Last 2 fuel gauge segments
Flashing The check engine light comes ON when a fault is
Fuel tank symbol detected by the engine management system.
Audible warning (one long beep)
Scrolling LOW FUEL WARNING Periodically
message
6) Hour Meter Display (HR)

Continuously displays the accumulated engine
hours.
CHECK ENGINE LIGHT
When the check engine light comes on, contact

9) Maintenance Reminder Indicator
The maintenance reminder indicator comes ON
when required maintenance is due.
HOUR METER DISPLAY

The water depth display provides an indication of
the lake water depth.
The system is capable of indicating water depth
under the hull in single increments up to 50 m
(164 ft).
MAINTENANCE REMINDER INDICATOR
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may
stop indicating. The display's ability to provide and When this indicator comes on, bring your water-
indication of the water's depth depends on the craft to your authorized Sea-Doo dealer to have it
conditions of use. serviced and to have the maintenance reminder
indicator reset.
10) High Temperature Indicator
The high temperature indicator comes ON when a
high engine temperature or a high exhaust system
temperature is detected.
6 smr2013-007
HIGH TEMPERATURE INDICATOR CRUISE MODE INDICATOR
Refer to TROUBLESHOOTING subsection for de- Refer to OPERATING MODES subsection for de-
tails. tailed instructions.
11) iBR Fault Indicator 14) iBR Position Indicator
The iBR fault indicator comes ON when a fault in Provides an indication of the iBR gate position.
the iBR system has been detected. – N (neutral)
– F (forward)
– R (reverse).
iBR FAULT INDICATOR
Refer to TROUBLESHOOTING subsection for de-

tails. iBR POSITION INDICATOR
12) ECO Indicator 15) SKI MODE Indicator

The ECO indicator and a smile in the fuel tank The ski mode indicator is ON when SKI MODE is
symbol comes ON when FUEL ECONOMY active.
MODE is activated.
SKI MODE INDICATOR

ECO MODE INDICATOR
(Fuel Economy Mode) Refer to OPERATING MODES subsection for de-
tailed instructions. 16) VTS Position Indication
The VTS position indication provides an indication
13) CRUISE Mode Indicator
of the pump nozzle position.
The cruise mode indicator comes ON when:
A single segment of a bar gauge type indicator is
– CRUISE MODE has been activated. turned on to indicate the relative position of the
– SLOW SPEED MODE has been activated. watercraft bow.
smr2013-007 7
NOTE: The available functions and the order in

which they appear depends on the watercraft
model. The fault code function is only available
when there is an active fault. The settings func-
tion is only available when the engine is shut off.
The key mode function is only available with a
normal key.
VTS POSITION INDICATION Function Description

Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS subsection Compass
for detailed instructions. A GPS incorporated in the information center pro-
vides the indication in the multifunction display.
Navigating the Multifunction Display The cardinal points, intermediate cardinal points,
as well as the azimuth the watercraft is travelling
WARNING are displayed in the multifunction display by de-
Do not adjust display while riding, you could fault when the watercraft is moving.
lose control.
For a compass indication to be displayed, the GPS
Selecting Functions must have a good link with the navigation satel-
lites.
When operating at speed, the multifunction dis-
play provides an indication of the compass direc-
tion and azimuth of the watercraft is traveling by
default.
1. To select the various functions available
through the multifunction display, press the
MODE button repeatedly until the desired
function is visible:
– LAP TIMER COMPASS DIRECTION DISPLAYED
– SKI MODE
NOTE: The compass indication is only available
– FUEL ECONOMY MODE
above 5 km/h (3 MPH).
– FUEL CONSUMPTION
– VTS MODE WARNING
– DISPLAY Use the compass as a guide only. Not to be
– FAULT CODES used for precision navigation purposes.
– KEY MODE
– SETTINGS. Lap Timer
The lap timer can be used to record up to 50 indi-
vidual lap times.
To activate and use the lap timer, carry out the fol-
lowing:
1. Press the MODE button repeatedly until LAP
TIME is visible in the multifunction display.
FUNCTION SUBMENU DISPLAYED IN

SEQUENCE WHEN MODE BUTTON PRESSED
REPEATEDLY
2. Then press the SET button to enter that func-

tion.
8 smr2013-007
MESSAGE DISPLAYED LAP TIMER FUNCTION EXAMPLE

LAP TIME 1. 01'21'03 lap time displayed here
2. Lap number "2" displayed here
2. Press the SET button to enter the function, the
lap timer will be activated and visible in the dis- To view each lap time, use the UP/DOWN button.
play. The lap counter will indicate which lap is indicated.
2 To view the cumulative lap time of all laps
recorded, use the UP/DOWN button until ALL
is visible in the lap counter.
1
2
LAP TIMER FUNCTION

1. 00'00'00 lap time displayed here
LAP TIMER FUNCTION EXAMPLE
3. To start the timer, press the SET button.
1. Total lap times 02'23'37 displayed
NOTE: The timer starts immediately when press- here
ing the SET button. 2. Lap count "ALL" displayed here
4. To record each lap time, press the SET button
at the start of each lap. To reset the lap timer and lap counter, press and
NOTE: The lap time will be recorded, the lap hold the SET button until the timer and counter are
counter in the numerical display will count the reset to 0 (zero).
number of laps recorded, and the timer will con- Ski Mode
tinue to run.
Ski mode is used for repeated controlled launches
2 when towing a skier or wakeboarder. Refer to OP-
ERATING MODES for more details.
1 ECO Mode
ECO mode is a function by which engine fuel
consumption is reduced. Refer to OPERATING
MODES subsection for detailed instructions.
LAP TIMER FUNCTION EXAMPLE Fuel Consumption
The FUEL CONSUMPTION function is used to dis-
play the watercraft fuel consumption four differ-
2. Lap number "1" displayed here ent ways:
5. To save the last lap and stop the timer, press – Instant fuel flow per hour (gal/h or L/h)
the MODE button. – Average fuel flow per hour (gal/h or L/h)
– Distance to empty (Mi or Km)
– Time to empty (h or min).
The fuel consumption functions are not continu-
ously active.
smr2013-007 9
The fuel consumption function selected becomes Display

active only when selected as the indication in the The DISPLAY function is used to change the indi-
numerical display. cation in the numerical display. Refer to CHANG-
When the LOW FUEL indications come on in the ING NUMERICAL DISPLAY INDICATION.
multifunction gauge, the "TIME TO EMPTY" and
"DISTANCE TO EMPTY" functions will indicate "0" Fault Codes
(zero) if they are the selected indication. The FAULT CODES function is used to display ac-
To display the watercraft fuel consumption, carry tive fault codes.
out the following: Refer to MONITORING SYSTEM subsection for
1. Press the MODE button repeatedly until FUEL details.
CONSUMPTION is visible in the multifunction Key Mode
display.
The KEY MODE function is used for changing
LEARNING key settings.
Settings
The SETTINGS function is used for:
– Changing the clock setting, refer to MULTI-
MESSAGE DISPLAYED FUNCTION GAUGE SETUP.
– Activating the iBR override function, refer to
FUEL CONSUMPTION SPECIAL PROCEDURES.
2. Press the UP/DOWN button to toggle to the de- Multifunction Display Messages
sired fuel consumption display mode.
For a list of usual messages that may be displayed
2 in the multifunction display, refer to MULTIFUNC-
TION DISPLAY MESSAGES in this section.
1
Changing Numerical Display Indication
To change the indication in the numerical display,
carry out the following:
1. Press the MODE button on the RH handlebar
FUEL CONSUMPTION DISPLAY MODE repeatedly until DISPLAY is visible in the multi-
function display.
1. INSTANT FUEL CONSUMPTION message
2. Applicable value
3. Press the SET button to save the setting and

return to the main display.
NOTE: The fuel consumption value selected will
be displayed in the numerical display. Double click
the SET button to reset the average fuel consump-
tion indication. The display will momentarily indi- MESSAGE DISPLAYED
cate zero (0).
DISPLAY
VTS Mode
The VTS MODE function is used to manually set 2. Press the SET button to enter the DISPLAY
the VTS or change VTS PRESET settings. function.
Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS subsection 3. Press the UP/DOWN button until the preferred
for detailed instructions. indication is visible in the multifunction display
(as applicable to model).
– RPM
– SPEED
10 smr2013-007
– CLOCK
– ENGINE TEMP
– ALTITUDE
– TOP SPEED
– AVG SPEED
– TOP RPM
– AVG RPM.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
2
SETTINGS
1 2. Press the UP/DOWN button repeatedly until

CLOCK is visible.
2
NUMERICAL DISPLAY SELECTION 1
1. Type of selected numerical display indication

2. Applicable value
4. Press the SET button to select and save the pre-

ferred indication, or wait for the display function FUNCTION SELECTED - CLOCK
to time out. The last indication visible will be au- 1. CLOCK indication
tomatically saved. 2. Time
Resetting Numerical Display Indication 3. Press the SET button to enter the function.
The following numerical display indications can be CHANGE CLOCK OFFSET message will be
reset when selected: displayed.
– Average fuel consumption
2
– Top speed
– Average speed
1
– Top RPM
– Average RPM.
To reset the indication. double click the SET but-
ton. The numerical display will momentarily indi-
cate zero (0). FUNCTION SELECTED - CHANGE CLOCK
NOTE: Each of these functions become active OFFSET
ONLY when selected as the numerical display 1. CHANGE CLOCK OFFSET indication
indication.
2. Time
Multifunction Gauge Setup 4. Press the UP/DOWN button to adjust the clock
Clock Setting to the correct local time.
1. Press the MODE button repeatedly until SET- 5. Press the SET button to save the setting and
TINGS is visible in the multifunction display. return to the main display.
NOTE: The clock uses the GPS signal to main-
tain the appropriate time referenced to Greenwich
Mean Time (GMT). When setting the clock, only
the hour indication may be changed.
smr2013-007 11
Units of Measurement and Language Setting

The multifunction gauge is capable of displaying information in metric or imperial units and in various
languages.
To change the units of measurement or to change the language displayed in the multifunction gauge,
see your authorized Sea-Doo dealer.
INFORMATION CENTER (GTX, RXT, WAKE PRO)

WARNING
Do not adjust the display while riding, you could lose control.
Information Center Description
1 9 3 4 8 2
4 13 4 4
6 15 10 12 16 5
smo2012-001-007_e
GTX 155/GTX S 155
1 4 9 3 7 8 4 2
10 13 14 4
6 15 11 12 16 5
smo2012-002-005_b
GTX 215/GTX iS LTD/WAKE PRO
12 smr2013-007
1 4 9 3 17 8 4 2
10 13 4
6 14 12 5
smo2012-002-003_c
RXT-X/RXT-X aS
1) Speedometer
The speedometer, located in the LH side of the information center, provides an analog indication of the
speed of the watercraft in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The speed indication is based on a GPS (Global Positioning System) incorporated within the information
center.
If for some reason the GPS signal is lost, a default mode is used whereby, the speed is calculated using
information received from other systems to provide an estimated watercraft speed.
2) Tachometer
The tachometer provides an analog indication of the revolutions per minute (RPM) of the engine. Multiply
the indicated number by 1000 to obtain the actual engine RPM.
3) Multifunction Gauge
The multifunction gauge, located in the center of the information center, is capable of displaying different
indications simultaneously.
Numerical and multifunction displays in the digital screen indicator can be used to display various indica-
tions, or for selecting modes of operation and changing settings as explained in their respective sections.
smr2013-007 13

GTX
GTX 155 GTX RXT-X/ WAKE
LTD iS GTX 215 RXT
S 155 RXT-X aS PRO
260
TOURING mode indicator X X X X N.A. X
SPORT mode indicator X X X X N.A. X
Fuel level indication X X X X X X
Hour meter display X X X X X X
Water depth indication Opt X Opt Opt Opt Opt
ECO mode indicator X X X X X X
CRUISE mode indicator X N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
iBR position indicator X X X X X X
SKI mode indicator Opt N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
VTS position indication X X X X X X
Boost gauge N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. X N.A.
iS indicator N.A. X N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. = Not Available or Not Active
4) Indicator Lights
Indicator lights (pilot lamps), inform you of a selected function or a system anomaly.
An indicator light may be accompanied by a scrolling message in the multifunction display.
See the following table for information on the usual pilot lamps. Refer to MONITORING SYSTEM for
details on malfunction pilot lamps.
PILOT LAMPS
(ON)
Maintenance required. Bring your watercraft to your
MAINTENANCE REMINDER Sea-Doo dealer to have it serviced and to have the
maintenance required indicator reset.
Low fuel level, approx. 25% tank capacity, 14 L

LOW-FUEL
(3.7 U.S. gal.) or fuel level sensor disconnected.
Scrolling SLOW SPEED CRUISE mode or SLOW SPEED MODE engaged. Refer to
MODE message OPERATING MODES subsection.
Scrolling SKI MODE Ski Mode activated. Refer to OPERATING MODES

messages subsection.
SPORT Scrolling SPORT MODE Sport Mode activated. Refer to OPERATING MODES
MODE
ALL MODELS EXCEPT RXT-X/RXT-X aS MODELS
14 smr2013-007
PILOT LAMPS
(ON)
Fuel Economy Mode activated. Refer to OPERATING

FUEL ECO
MODES subsection.
RXT-X/RXT-X aS
Fuel Economy Mode activated. Refer to OPERATING

FUEL ECO
MODES subsection.
smr2013-007 15
5) Fuel Level Indication

A bar gauge located in the bottom RH side of the in
multifunction display continuously indicates the lap

AM
RPMgal/h
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
VTS POSITION INDICATION
Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS for more

details on using the VTS.
FUEL LEVEL INDICATION 7) iS Position
When the fuel tank is full, 8 segments (bars) of GTX Ltd iS
the indicator are turned on. The top segment is The iS display (intelligent Suspension) provides a
not used. visual indication of the relative height of the sus-
Low Fuel Level Warning pension.
It is active when there is only 2 segments of fuel It also indicates if the suspension is in AUTO
indicated (approximately 25% fuel tank capacity or mode of operation.
14 L (3.7 U.S. gal.).
1 2
All Models Except GTX 155 and GTX S 155 in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h

Last 2 fuel gauge segments
ON
Fuel tank symbol (LED)
Audible warning (one long beep)
1. iS position indicator
2. iS AUTO mode indicator
message
When the suspension system is operating in
GTX 155 and GTX S 155 Models AUTO mode, the AUTO indicator and all bar seg-
LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING ments of the position indicator will be on.
Last 2 fuel gauge segments When the suspension height is adjusted manually
Flashing using the UP/DOWN buttons (while in IS mode),
Fuel tank symbol (LCD) the system switches to MANUAL mode of oper-
Audible warning (one long beep) ation. The AUTO indication disappears and only
Periodically
one bar segment of the position indicator will be
Scrolling LOW FUEL WARNING on.
message
Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS for more in-
formation on using the suspension.
6) VTS Position
The VTS position indication located in the bottom 8) Numerical Display
LH side of the digital screen shows the riding at- The numerical display is used to provide a variety
titude of the watercraft. of indications as selected by the operator using
A single segment of a bar gauge type indicator is the DISPLAY function in the multifunction display.
turned on to indicate the relative position of the
watercraft bow.
16 smr2013-007
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
NUMERICAL DISPLAY
The available indications are dependent on the watercraft model or option installed.
RXT-X
AVAILABLE INDICATIONS IN GTX 155, GTX GTX WAKE
RXT aS,
NUMERICAL DISPLAY GTX S 155 215 LTD iS PRO
RXT-X
Engine RPM X X X X X X
Engine temperature Opt Opt Opt Opt X Opt
Lake water temperature N.A. N.A. X N.A. N.A. N.A.
Clock X X X X X X
Learning key settings X X X X X X
CRUISE SPEED setting X X X X Opt X
SLOW SPEED MODE setting X X X X Opt X
VTS preset Opt Opt X X X X
VTS settings (through gauge) X X N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
SKI MODE settings Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt X
Fuel consumption
X X X X X X
(instant and average)
Fuel autonomy
Opt Opt X Opt X Opt
Lap timer Opt Opt Opt Opt X Opt
Top speed/RPM
Opt Opt Opt Opt X Opt
Average speed/RPM
Altitude N.A. N.A. X N.A. N.A. N.A.
When the information center is first powered up, the numerical display defaults to the last selected in-
dication.
smr2013-007 17
9) Multifunction Display
in
lap
– Display the WELCOME message on power up. AM
RPMgal/h
– Display the KEY recognition message.

operator.
– Activating and setting various functions and
modes of operation.
– Display scrolling messages of function activa-
smo2012-002-001_f
tion or system faults.
– Display fault codes. The numerical display may also be selected to dis-
NOTE: The default indication in the multifunction play water temperature. See NUMERICAL DIS-
display is the compass direction. PLAY in this section.
To change the unit of measurement (°C or °F), see
10) Water Depth Display your authorized Sea-Doo dealer.
The water depth display provides an indication of
the lake water depth. 12) Hour Meter Display (HR)
The system is capable of indicating water depth Continuously displays the accumulated engine
under the hull in single increments up to 50 m hours.
(164 ft).
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may in
lap
stop indicating. The display ability to provide an in- AM

RPMgal/h
dication of the water depth depends on the con-

ditions of use.
2
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h HOUR METER DISPLAY
13) iBR Position

1 Provides an indication of the iBR gate position.
– N (neutral)
WATER DEPTH DISPLAY
– F (forward)
1. Depth finder indicator – R (reverse).
2. Water depth indication
NOTE: The water depth indication is only avail- in

lap
AM
able when a depth sounder is installed and RPMgal/h
detected.
WARNING
Never use the depth sounder as a warning
device to ride in shallow water. iBR POSITION INDICATOR
11) Lake Water Temperature Display 14) Compass

GTX Limited iS Only A GPS incorporated in the information center pro-
Continuously displays surface water temperature. vides the indication in the multifunction display.
The cardinal points, intermediate cardinal points,
as well as the azimuth the watercraft is travelling
are displayed in the multifunction display by de-
fault when the watercraft is moving.
18 smr2013-007
For a compass indication to be displayed, the GPS 16) Sport Mode Indicator
must have a good link with the navigation satel-
lites.
This is confirmed when the COMPASS active in- in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
dicator is visible in the digital screen.
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
1 SPORT MODE INDICATOR (GAUGE WITHOUT

BOOST GAUGE)
2
When sport mode of operation is selected, the
sport mode indicator will come on and stay on un-
COMPASS (GAUGE WITHOUT BOOST GAUGE)
til sport mode is deactivated, or the watercraft is
1. Compass indication shut down.
2. Compass active indicator NOTE: The sport mode is not the default riding
mode. To be active, it must be selected after start-
mBAR PSI
ing the engine.
BOOST
For instructions on how to engage sport mode,

refer to OPERATING MODES subsection.
1
GTX LTD iS/RXT/WAKE PRO
In addition to the sport mode indicator in the mul-
2
tifunction display, a SPORT MODE indicator light
COMPASS (GAUGE WITH BOOST GAUGE) turns ON in the tachometer.
1. Compass indication RXT-X/RXT-X aS

2. Compass active indicator There is no sport mode indicator in the multifunc-
tion display, only a SPORT MODE indicator light
NOTE: The compass indication is only available turns ON in the tachometer.
17) Boost Gauge
WARNING
Use the compass as a guide only. Not to be mBAR PSI
BOOST
used for precision navigation purposes.

All Models Except RXT-X/RXT-X aS.
When the TOURING mode indicator is ON, the de-
fault TOURING mode is active. BOOST INDICATOR
The boost gauge indicates the manifold pressure

in
of the engine provided by the supercharger.
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
Navigating the Multifunction Display

When the electrical system is powered up and
the cluster has completed its self test function,
a WELCOME ABOARD SEA-DOO scrolling mes-
TOURING MODE INDICATOR sage will appear for a few seconds. After the wel-
come message, nothing will appear in the display
For more information on the touring mode, refer until the watercraft is operated.
to OPERATING MODES subsection.
smr2013-007 19
When the watercraft is being operated, the multi- NOTE: The fault code function is only available
function display provides an indication of compass when there is an active fault. The settings and
heading or scrolling messages from the monitor- key mode functions are only available when the
ing system. engine is shut off. The key mode function is only
The multifunction display is also used to display a available with a normal key.
menu for the selection of various functions which,
permit changing the numerical display indication, Function Description
system modes of operation, settings, active sys- Lap Timer
tem fault codes, and a lap timer.
WARNING vidual lap times.
Selecting various numerical displays, sys- To activate and use the lap timer, carry out the fol-
tem modes of operation or changing settings lowing:
should only be carried out with the watercraft 1. Press the MODE button repeatedly until LAP
stopped. Selecting these various functions TIME is visible in the multifunction display.
while operating the watercraft at speed is
not recommended as it deters your attention
from situational awareness. in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
LAP TIME
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY 2. Press the SET button to enter the function, the
lap timer will be activated and visible in the dis-
NOTE: To change the unit of measurement or the play.
language displayed, see your authorized Sea-Doo
dealer. 2
in
lap
Selecting Functions AM
RPMgal/h
1
play normally provides an indication of the com-
pass direction and azimuth the watercraft is trav-
eling.
To select the various functions available through FUNCTION SELECTED: LAP TIMER
the multifunction display, press the MODE button
1. Lap time
repeatedly until the desired function is visible:
2. Lap count
– LAP TIME
– SKI MODE 3. To start the timer, press the SET button.
– LAP TIME NOTE: The timer starts immediately when press-
– FUEL CONSUMPTION ing the SET button.
– VTS MODE 4. To record each lap time, press the SET button
– DISPLAY at the start of each lap.
– FAULT CODES NOTE: The lap time will be recorded, the lap
– KEY MODE counter in the numerical display will count the
– SETTINGS. number of laps recorded, and the timer will con-
Then press the SET button to enter that function. tinue to run.
5. To save the last lap and stop the timer, press
the MODE button.
20 smr2013-007
To view each lap time, use the UP or DOWN but-

ton. The lap counter will indicate which lap is in-
dicated. in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
To view the cumulative lap time of all laps

recorded, use the UP or DOWN button until
ALL is visible in the lap counter.
2
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
1 FUEL CONSUMPTION
2. Press the UP or DOWN button to toggle to the

desired fuel consumption display mode.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED: LAP TIMER 2
1. Total time in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
2. ALL is displayed here 1
To reset the lap timer and lap counter, press and

hold the SET button until the timer and counter are
reset to 0 (zero).
FUEL CONSUMPTION DISPLAY MODE
Ski Mode
Ski mode is used for repeated controlled launches
when towing a skier or wakeboarder. Refer to OP- 2. Fuel consumption value
ERATING MODES for more details.
Fuel Consumption return to the main display.
The FUEL CONSUMPTION function is used to dis- NOTE: The fuel consumption value will be dis-
play the watercrafts fuel consumption in four dif- played in the numerical display. Double click the
ferent ways. SET button to reset the average fuel consumption
– Instant fuel flow per hour (gal/h or l/h) indication. The display will momentarily indicate
– Average fuel flow per hour (gal/h or l/h) zero (0).
– Distance to empty (Mi or Km) VTS Mode
– Time to empty (h or min). The VTS MODE function is used to manually set
The fuel consumption functions are not continu- the VTS or change VTS PRESET settings. Refer to
ously active. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS subsection for de-
A fuel consumption function becomes active only tails.
when selected as the indication in the numerical Display
display.
The DISPLAY function is used to change the indi-
When the LOW FUEL indications come on in the cation in the numerical display. Refer to CHANG-
multifunction gauge, the "TIME TO EMPTY" and ING NUMERICAL DISPLAY INDICATION.
"DISTANCE TO EMPTY" functions will indicate "0"
(zero) if they are the selected indication. Fault Codes
To display the watercraft fuel consumption, carry The FAULT CODES function is used to display ac-
out the following: tive fault codes. Refer to MONITORING SYSTEM
subsection.
1. Press the MODE button repeatedly until FUEL
CONSUMPTION is visible in the multifunction Key Mode
display. The KEY MODE function is used for changing
LEARNING key settings. Refer to OPERATING
MODES subsection for details.
smr2013-007 21
Settings
2
The SETTINGS function is used for: in
lap
– Clock setting. Refer to MULTIFUNCTION AM

RPMgal/h
GAUGE SETUP 1
– Dock mode setting. Refer to iS (INTELLIGENT
SUSPENSION) in the SUSPENSIONS subsec-
tion
– iBR override function for maintenance. NUMERICAL DISPLAY SELECTION
Changing Numerical Display Indication 1. Type of selected numerical display indication

2. Applicable value
4. Press the SET button to select and save the pre-
1. Press the MODE button on the RH handlebar ferred indication, or wait for the display function
repeatedly until DISPLAY is visible in the multi- to time out. The last indication visible will be au-
function display. tomatically saved.
The following abbreviations are used in the nu-
merical display:
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
– FT or M
– RPM
– MPH or Km/h
– °F or °C
– AM or PM
MESSAGE DISPLAYED – Gal/h or l/h.
DISPLAY
Resetting Numerical Display Indication
2. Press the SET button to enter the DISPLAY The following numerical display indications can be
function. reset:
3. Press the UP or DOWN button until the pre- – Average fuel consumption
ferred available indication appears. – Top speed
– RPM – Average speed
– SPEED – Top RPM
– LAKE TEMPERATURE (only on model GTX – Average RPM.
Limited iS 260) To reset indications, double click the SET button.
– DEPTH The numerical display will momentarily indicate
– ENGINE TEMP zero (0).
– ALTITUDE (only on model Limited models NOTE: Each of these functions become active
only) ONLY when selected as the numerical display
– TOP SPEED indication.
– AVG SPEED
– TOP RPM Multifunction Gauge Setup
– AVG RPM Changing Clock Setting
– CLOCK. 1. Press the MODE button repeatedly until SET-
TINGS is visible in the multifunction display.
22 smr2013-007
Units of Measurement and Language Setting

in
The multifunction gauge is capable of displaying
lap
AM
RPMgal/h information in metric or imperial units and in vari-
ous languages.
To change the units of measurement or to change
the language displayed in the multifunction gauge,
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
Multifunction Display Messages
SETTINGS
For a list of usual messages that may be displayed
2. Press the UP or DOWN button repeatedly until in the multifunction display, refer to MULTIFUNC-
CLOCK is visible. TION DISPLAY MESSAGES in this section.
2 INFORMATION CENTER (RXP-X)

in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h WARNING
1 Do not adjust the display while riding, you
could lose control.
FUNCTION SELECTED - CLOCK

1. CLOCK message
2. Time
3. Press the SET button to enter the function.

CHANGE CLOCK OFFSET message will be
displayed.
2
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
FUNCTION SELECTED - CHANGE CLOCK

OFFSET
1. CHANGE CLOCK OFFSET message
2. Time
4. Press the UP or DOWN button to adjust the

clock to the correct local time.
smr2013-007 23
1 4 9 3 15 8 4 2
13
6 14 12 5
smo2012-003-300_b
RXP-X
1) Speedometer Multifunction Gauge Features

The speedometer, located in the LH side of the RXP-X
information center, provides an analog indication
of the speed of the watercraft in miles per hour Fuel level indication X
(MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Hour meter display X
The speed indication is based on a GPS (Global Po- Water depth indication Opt
sitioning System) incorporated within the informa-
tion center. ECO mode indicator X
If for some reason the GPS signal is lost, a de- VTS position indication X
fault mode is used whereby, the speed is calcu- Compass X
lated using information received from other sys-
tems to provide an estimated watercraft speed. Boost Gauge X
2) Tachometer Opt = Feature available as an option
The tachometer provides an analog indication of
the revolutions per minute (RPM) of the engine. 4) Indicator Lights
Multiply the indicated number by 1000 to obtain
Indicator lights (pilot lamps), inform you of a se-
the actual engine RPM.
lected function or a system anomaly.
3) Multifunction Gauge An indicator light may be accompanied by a
The multifunction gauge, located in the center of scrolling message in the multifunction display.
the information center, is capable of displaying dif-
ferent indications simultaneously.
Numerical and multifunction displays in the digital
screen indicator can be used to display various in-
dications, or for selecting modes of operation and
changing settings as explained in their respective
sections.
24 smr2013-007
See the following table for information on the usual pilot lamps. Refer to MONITORING SYSTEM for
details on malfunction pilot lamps.
PILOT LAMPS
(ON)
Maintenance required. Bring your watercraft to your
MAINTENANCE REMINDER Sea-Doo dealer to have it serviced and to have the
maintenance required indicator reset.
Low fuel level, approx. 25% tank capacity, 14 L

LOW-FUEL
(3.7 U.S. gal.) or fuel level sensor disconnected.
No message Feature not active on this model.
SPORT Scrolling SPORT MODE Sport Mode activated. Refer to OPERATING MODES
MODE
5) Fuel Level Indication 6) VTS Position

A bar gauge located in the bottom RH side of the The VTS position indication located in the bottom
multifunction display continuously indicates the LH side of the digital screen shows the riding at-
amount of fuel in the fuel tank while riding. titude of the watercraft.
A single segment of a bar gauge type indicator is
mBAR PSI
BOOST turned on to indicate the relative position of the
watercraft bow.
mBAR PSI
BOOST
FUEL LEVEL INDICATION
When the fuel tank is full, 8 segments (bars) of

the indicator are turned on. The top segment is VTS POSITION INDICATION
not used.
Low Fuel Level Warning Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS for more
details on using the VTS.
It is active when there is only 2 segments of fuel
indicated (approximately 25% fuel tank capacity or 7) iS Position
14 L (3.7 U.S. gal.).
Not available for this model.
Last 2 fuel gauge segments 8) Numerical Display
Flashing The numerical display is used to provide a variety
Fuel tank symbol (LCD)
of indications as selected by the operator using
Audible warning (one long beep) the DISPLAY function in the multifunction display.
message
smr2013-007 25
– Activating and setting various functions and

mBAR PSI
BOOST modes of operation.
– Display scrolling messages of function activa-
tion or system faults.
NOTE: The default indication in the multifunction
display is the compass direction.
NUMERICAL DISPLAY
The available indications are dependent on the wa- Not available for this model.
tercraft model or option installed.
11) Water Temperature Display
AVAILABLE INDICATIONS IN
RXP-X Not available for this model.
NUMERICAL DISPLAY
Indication by 12) Hour Meter Display (HR)
Watercraft speed
default
Continuously displays the accumulated engine
Engine RPM X hours.
Engine temperature X
mBAR PSI
BOOST
Lake water temperature N.A.
Clock X
Learning key settings X
CRUISE SPEED setting Opt
SLOW SPEED MODE setting Opt
HOUR METER DISPLAY
VTS preset X
VTS settings (through gauge) N.A. 13) iBR Position
SKI MODE settings N.A. Provides an indication of the iBR gate position.
Fuel consumption – N (neutral)
X
(instant and average) – F (forward)
Fuel autonomy – R (reverse).
X
Lap timer X mBAR PSI
BOOST
Top speed/RPM
X
Average speed/RPM
Altitude N.A.
N.A. = Not Available iBR POSITION INDICATOR
When the information center is first powered up, 14) Compass

the numerical display defaults to the last selected
indication. A GPS incorporated in the information center pro-
vides the indication in the multifunction display.
9) Multifunction Display The cardinal points, intermediate cardinal points,
The multifunction display is used to: as well as the azimuth the watercraft is travelling
are displayed in the multifunction display by de-
– Display the WELCOME message on power up.
fault when the watercraft is moving.
– Display the KEY recognition message.
operator.
26 smr2013-007
For a compass indication to be displayed, the GPS The multifunction display is also used to display a
must have a good link with the navigation satel- menu for the selection of various functions which,
lites. permit changing the numerical display indication,
This is confirmed when the COMPASS active in- system modes of operation, settings, active sys-
dicator is visible in the digital screen. tem fault codes, and a lap timer.
mBAR PSI
WARNING
BOOST
Selecting various numerical displays, sys-
tem modes of operation or changing settings
1 should only be carried out with the watercraft
stopped. Selecting these various functions
while operating the watercraft at speed is
2 not recommended as it deters your attention
COMPASS from situational awareness.
1. Compass indication
2. Compass active indicator mBAR PSI
BOOST
NOTE: The compass indication is only available

WARNING
Use the compass as a guide only. Not to be
used for precision navigation purposes. MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
NOTE: To change the unit of measurement or the

15) Boost Gauge language displayed, see your authorized Sea-Doo
dealer.
mBAR PSI
BOOST
Selecting Functions
play normally provides an indication of the com-
pass direction and azimuth the watercraft is trav-
eling.
To select the various functions available through
BOOST INDICATOR the multifunction display, press the MODE button
repeatedly until the desired function is visible:
The boost gauge indicates the manifold pressure
of the engine provided by the supercharger. – LAP TIME
Navigating the Multifunction Display – VTS MODE
When the electrical system is powered up and – DISPLAY
the cluster has completed its self test function, – FAULT CODES
a WELCOME ABOARD SEA-DOO scrolling mes- – KEY MODE
sage will appear for a few seconds. After the wel- – SETTINGS.
come message, nothing will appear in the display
until the watercraft is operated. Then press the SET button to enter that function.
When the watercraft is being operated, the multi- NOTE: The fault code function is only available
function display provides an indication of compass when there is an active fault. The settings func-
heading or scrolling messages from the monitor- tion is only available when the engine is shut off.
ing system. The key mode function is only available with a
normal key.
smr2013-007 27
Function Description 2
mBAR PSI
BOOST
Lap Timer
1
vidual lap times.
To activate and use the lap timer, carry out the fol-
lowing:
1. Press the MODE button repeatedly until LAP MESSAGE DISPLAYED: LAP TIMER
TIME is visible in the multifunction display.
1. Total time
mBAR PSI
2. ALL is displayed here
BOOST
To reset the lap timer and lap counter, press and

hold the SET button until the timer and counter are
reset to 0 (zero).
Fuel Consumption
The FUEL CONSUMPTION function is used to dis-
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
play the watercrafts fuel consumption in four dif-
LAP TIME ferent ways.
– Instant fuel flow per hour (gal/h or l/h)
2. Press the SET button to enter the function, the
– Average fuel flow per hour (gal/h or l/h)
lap timer will be activated and visible in the dis-
play. – Distance to empty (Mi or Km)
– Time to empty (h or min).
2
mBAR PSI
BOOST
The fuel consumption functions are not continu-
ously active.
1 A fuel consumption function becomes active only
when selected as the indication in the numerical
display.
When the LOW FUEL indications come on in the
FUNCTION SELECTED: LAP TIMER
multifunction gauge, the "TIME TO EMPTY" and
"DISTANCE TO EMPTY" functions will indicate "0"
1. Lap time (zero) if they are the selected indication.
2. Lap count To display the watercraft fuel consumption, carry
out the following:
3. To start the timer, press the SET button.
1. Press the MODE button repeatedly until FUEL
NOTE: The timer starts immediately when press- CONSUMPTION is visible in the multifunction
ing the SET button. display.
4. To record each lap time, press the SET button
at the start of each lap. mBAR PSI
BOOST
NOTE: The lap time will be recorded, the lap

counter in the numerical display will count the
number of laps recorded, and the timer will con-
tinue to run.
5. To save the last lap and stop the timer, press
the MODE button.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
To view each lap time, use the UP or DOWN but-
ton. The lap counter will indicate which lap is in- FUEL CONSUMPTION
dicated.
2. Press the UP or DOWN button to toggle to the
To view the cumulative lap time of all laps desired fuel consumption display mode.
recorded, use the UP or DOWN button until
ALL is visible in the lap counter.
28 smr2013-007
2
Changing Numerical Display Indication
mBAR PSI
BOOST
1 1. Press the MODE button on the RH handlebar
repeatedly until DISPLAY is visible in the multi-
function display.
FUEL CONSUMPTION DISPLAY MODE mBAR PSI

BOOST

2. Fuel consumption value

NOTE: The fuel consumption value will be dis- MESSAGE DISPLAYED
played in the numerical display. Double click the
DISPLAY
SET button to reset the average fuel consumption
indication. The display will momentarily indicate
2. Press the SET button to enter the DISPLAY
zero (0).
function.
VTS Mode 3. Press the UP or DOWN button until the pre-
The VTS MODE function is used to manually set ferred indication appears.
the VTS or change VTS PRESET settings. Refer to – RPM
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS subsection for de- – SPEED
tails. – ENGINE TEMP
Display – TOP SPEED
The DISPLAY function is used to change the indi- – AVG SPEED
cation in the numerical display. Refer to CHANG- – TOP RPM
ING NUMERICAL DISPLAY INDICATION. – AVG RPM
Fault Codes – CLOCK.
The FAULT CODES function is used to display ac- 2
tive fault codes. Refer to MONITORING SYSTEM mBAR PSI
BOOST
subsection.
Key Mode 1
The KEY MODE function is used for changing

LEARNING key settings. Refer to OPERATING
MODES subsection for details.
NUMERICAL DISPLAY SELECTION
Settings
1. Type of selected numerical display indication
2. Applicable value
– Clock setting. Refer to MULTIFUNCTION
GAUGE SETUP 4. Press the SET button to select and save the pre-
– iBR override function for maintenance. ferred indication, or wait for the display function
to time out. The last indication visible will be au-
Multifunction Display Messages tomatically saved.
For a list of usual messages that may be displayed The following abbreviations are used in the nu-
in the multifunction display, refer to MULTIFUNC- merical display:
TION DISPLAY MESSAGES in this section. – FT or M
– RPM
– MPH or Km/h
– °F or °C
smr2013-007 29
– AM or PM 2
– Gal/h or l/h. mBAR PSI
BOOST
Resetting Numerical Display Indication 1

The following numerical display indications can be
reset:
– Top speed FUNCTION SELECTED - CHANGE CLOCK
– Average speed OFFSET
– Top RPM 1. CHANGE CLOCK OFFSET message
– Average RPM. 2. Time
To reset indications, double click the SET button.
The numerical display will momentarily indicate 4. Press the UP or DOWN button to adjust the
zero (0). clock to the correct local time.
NOTE: Each of these functions become active 5. Press the SET button to save the setting and
ONLY when selected as the numerical display return to the main display.
indication. NOTE: The clock uses the GPS signal to main-
Multifunction Gauge Setup Mean Time (GMT). When setting the clock, only
Changing Clock Setting the hour indication may be changed.
1. Press the MODE button repeatedly until SET- Units of Measurement and Language Setting
TINGS is visible in the multifunction display. The multifunction gauge is capable of displaying
information in metric or imperial units and in vari-
mBAR PSI
BOOST ous languages.
To change the units of measurement or to change
the language displayed in the multifunction gauge,
OPERATING MODES
MESSAGE DISPLAYED Touring Mode
SETTINGS By default, the watercraft is in TOURING mode of
operation when first started.
2. Press the UP or DOWN button repeatedly until
A TOURING mode indicator is ON in the multi-
CLOCK is visible.
function gauge to confirm the active mode of op-
2 eration.
mBAR PSI
BOOST

1. CLOCK message TOURING MODE INDICATOR
2. Time
Sport Mode
When selected, SPORT MODE provides for
instant throttle response and more rapid acceler-
displayed.
ations than TOURING MODE.
30 smr2013-007
A SPORT mode indicator is ON in the multifunc-

tion gauge to confirm the active mode of opera-
tion.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
ENTERING SPORT MODE - INCREASED
ACCELERATION - INSTRUCT PASSENGERS TO
SPORT MODE INDICATOR HOLD - PRESS_SPORT_BUTTON
Once activated, SPORT MODE will remain active WARNING

until it is deactivated by the operator, or the engine
Ensure passengers are advised that sport
is shut down whereby it defaults back to TOUR-
mode provides for increased accelerations
ING MODE.
and that they are to hold on tightly.
To activate sport mode while riding at speed, carry 2. Press the SPORT button again to activate sport
out the following: mode.
A scrolling SPORT MODE ACTIVATED message
WARNING will momentarily confirm that sport mode has
When activating sport mode, be sure to been activated.
tercraft, obstacles, or persons in the water.

3 seconds.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
SPORT MODE ACTIVATED

smo2012-002-009_a
3. Ensure the SPORT mode indicator is turned on.
TYPICAL
1. Sport button
NOTE: The following important message will

scroll across the multifunction display:
NOTE: The SPORT mode indicator will come on

and stay on as long as sport mode is active.
To deactivate sport mode while riding at speed,
smr2013-007 31
WARNING
When deactivating sport mode, be sure to
tercraft, obstacles, or persons in the water.

3 seconds.
NOTE: The following message will scroll in the MESSAGE DISPLAYED
multifunction display: SPORT MODE DEACTI- ECO MODE
VATED.
The ECO mode indicator will also be activated.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
SPORT MODE DEACTIVATED ECO MODE INDICATORS
(Fuel Economy Mode)
to its normal display. How to Deactivate ECO Mode
2. Ensure the TOURING mode indicator is on. 1. Depress the Eco button for at least 3 seconds.
TOURING MODE INDICATOR

smo2012-002-009_b
TYPICAL
ECO Mode 1. Eco button
(Fuel Economy Mode) The ECO mode indicator will be deactivated.
Cruise Mode
1. Depress the Eco button for at least 3 seconds.
Cruise mode is a function of iTC (intelligent Throt-
tle Control) system that allows the operator to set
the desired maximum watercraft speed.
This is useful when cruising for long distances, op-
erating in limited speed zones, or towing a tuber,
skier or wake boarder.
Cruise mode only limits forward speed, the oper-
ator must keep the throttle depressed to maintain
forward speed.
smo2012-002-009_b
TYPICAL Once the maximum cruise speed is set, the oper-

1. ECO button ator can vary the watercraft speed from idle speed
up to the set cruise speed using the throttle lever.
The following message will be displayed on the The set cruise speed will not be exceeded even if
multifunction display: the throttle lever is fully depressed.
32 smr2013-007
As you proceed under a constant cruising speed

setting, keep your attention level up to maintain
good situational awareness.
Slowing down is a matter of releasing the throttle
lever further than the set point, or by pulling the
iBR lever in.
If the iBR lever is pulled in for braking, CRUISE
mode is overridden but not deactivated. sdd2009-001-024_i
Once the iBR lever is released and the throttle is 1. UP button

2. DOWN button
pulled in to engage forward position, the cruise
function will reengage to limit the watercraft The following will be displayed in the multifunc-
speed as it was set before. tion gauge.
NOTE: Cruise mode is not available if slow speed 2
mode or ski mode mode is engaged.
Cruise Mode Activation at Idle Speed 1
NOTE: This function is available up to approxi-
mately 10 km/h (6 MPH).
To activate and preset CRUISE MODE at idle
1. Tap the throttle lever to move the iBR to the
forward position. 1. CRUISE MODE _ SPEED
2. Press and hold the cruise button. ADJUSTING
4. Press the SET button to save the cruise speed

selected and engage cruise mode. The follow-
ing scrolling message will appear in the multi-
function display.
sdd2009-001-024_j
ENGAGING CRUISE AT IDLE

Step 1: Tap throttle to engage FORWARD
The following message will appear in the multi-

function display. MESSAGE DISPLAYED
CRUISE MODE ACTIVE

will sound, and a CRUISE indicator will come on in
the multifunction gauge.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
CRUISE MODE _ SELECT SPEED _ PRESS SET TO
3. Press the UP button until the desired cruise

speed is indicated in the numerical display. CRUISE MODE INDICATOR
smr2013-007 33
Cruise Mode Activation Above Idle Speed 2

To activate cruise mode above idle speed (10 km/h
(6 MPH)):
1
1. Accelerate to the desired watercraft speed and
hold throttle lever steady.
2. Press and hold the cruise button for approxi-
mately 1 second.
1. CRUISE MODE _ SPEED
ADJUSTING
NOTE: Pressing the UP/DOWN button repeatedly

will change the cruise set speed in single incre-
ments. Pressing and holding the button will in-
sdd2009-001-024_j
crease or decrease the speed until the button is
ENGAGING CRUISE AT SPEED released.
Step 1: Accelerate to desired speed and hold throttle steady
Step 2: Press cruise button Deactivating Cruise Mode
A beep indicating that you are now in cruise mode To deactivate cruise mode:
will sound, and a CRUISE indicator will come on in 1. Release the throttle lever.
the multifunction gauge. 2. Press the cruise button.
when the cruise button is pressed to deactivate
cruise indicator will remain on. The speed limiting
CRUISE MODE INDICATOR function of cruise mode will stay active until the
throttle is fully released, then the BEEP will be
Changing Set Cruise Speed heard and the cruise indicator will go out.
To increase or decrease the set cruise speed: Slow Speed Mode
1. Hold the throttle lever all the way in to the han-
dlebar. The Intelligent Throttle Control also allows for a
Slow Speed Mode where the driver can adjust and
2. On the RH handlebar, press UP/DOWN button. set idle speed. This is useful when operating in
slow speed zones where the driver must be es-
pecially attentive to possible obstacle avoidance.
The operator can select an idle speed
set point (slow speed) between 1 and 5
(1.6 km/h to 11 km/h (1 MPH to 7 MPH)).
If you accelerate above approximately 14 km/h
(9 MPH), Slow Speed Mode will be deactivated
and the engine will return to its normal idle RPM
sdd2009-001-024_h when the throttle is released.
1. Throttle lever Should a situation arise where the operator must
2. UP button stop or accelerate quickly away from a hazardous
3. DOWN button
situation, pull in the iBR lever, or pull in on the
While the UP/Down is being pressed to change throttle lever to deactivate slow speed mode and
the speed setting, the following will appear in the regain normal control of the watercraft.
multifunction gauge.
34 smr2013-007
Activating Slow Speed Mode Changing Set Slow Speed

To activate slow speed mode of operation: There are 5 slow speed set points available (1
1. Release the throttle lever to idle RPM. through 5), 1 being the slowest.
2. Pull in and release the iBR lever to engage neu- To increase or decrease the slow speed set point,
tral. press the UP/DOWN button on the RH handlebar
3. Press and hold the cruise button for approxi- once, or repeatedly.
mately 1 second.
sdd2009-001-024_i
sdd2009-001-024_g 1. UP button to increase speed

2. DOWN button to decrease speed
TYPICAL
1. CRUISE button
While the UP/DOWN is being pressed to change
The CRUISE indicator will come on in the multi- the slow speed set point, the following will appear
function gauge to indicate cruise activation. in the multifunction gauge.
2
CRUISE MODE INDICATOR FUNCTION SELECTED - SLOW SPEED MODE
A scrolling message will appear in the multifunc- 1. SLOW SPEED MODE - SPEED ADJUSTING
message
tion display to specify that you are now in slow
speed mode. The default slow speed set point of 2. Slow speed set point indication
1 will also come on for a few seconds in the nu-
The displays will revert back to their previous in-
merical display.
dication a few seconds after the last activation of
2 the UP/DOWN button.
NOTE: As a reminder, the following message will
1
scroll across the multifunction display periodically.
FUNCTION SELECTED - SLOW SPEED MODE

2. Slow speed set point of "1" indication
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
NOTE: The scrolling SLOW SPEED MODE mes-
sage repeats itself as long as slow speed mode is SLOW SPEED MODE ACTIVE
activated. The numerical display reverts back to
the previous indication after a few seconds.
smr2013-007 35
Deactivating Slow Speed Mode NOTE: If the desired target speed cannot be set
Slow speed mode can be deactivated using any of in the selected RAMP, you must exit then reen-
the following methods: gage SKI MODE, and select a different RAMP.
– Pressing the cruise button. Engaging and Using Ski Mode
– Depressing the iBR lever. To engage ski mode, carry out the following steps:
– Accelerating above the highest slow speed that 1. Release throttle lever.
can be set (approximately 14 km/h (9 MPH)).
NOTE: Ski mode cannot be engaged if the throttle
When deactivating SLOW SPEED MODE: lever is not fully released, and if CRUISE or SLOW
– By pressing the cruise button, the iBR system SPEED mode is engaged. A message will appear
maintains forward position. in the multifunction display advising you of the sit-
– By pressing the iBR lever, the iBR system will uation. Follow the instructions in the display.
shift to neutral position. 2. Press the MODE button repeatedly until SKI
SLOW SPEED MODE deactivation will be indi- MODE is visible in the multifunction display.
cated in the following manner:
1. The CRUISE indicator will go out
2. The scrolling SLOW SPEED MODE ACTIVE
message will cease.
Ski Mode
trolled launches, and a set towing speed, specifi-
cally for towing a skier or wake boarder.
sdd2009-001-024_e
Ski mode is not available if using a LEARNING key TYPICAL
or a RENTAL key. 1. MODE button
RAMP Function
The RAMP function offers a pre-programmed set-
ting for launching and accelerating the PWCr.
RAMP 1 provides:
– Slowest acceleration rate
– Slowest TARGET SPEED range.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
RAMP 5 provides:
SKI MODE
– Quickest launch
– Quickest acceleration rate 3. Press SET to enter the function. The multifunc-
– Highest TARGET SPEED range. tion gauge message will change to RAMP. The
RAMP setting number will be visible in the nu-
TARGET SPEED Function merical display.
The TARGET SPEED function limits the maximum
towing speed.
Once the RAMP has been selected, an average
PWC target speed for that RAMP will be visible in
the numerical display.
The average speed displayed and the speed range
available is dependent on the RAMP selected.
The higher the RAMP number, the higher the
speed range.
sdd2009-001-024_f
The operator may increase or decrease the tar- 1. SET button

get speed to any value within the selected RAMP
speed range.
36 smr2013-007
FIRST SETTING AVAILABLE - RAMP MESSAGE DISPLAYED
1. RAMP message SKI MODE ACTIVE_PRESS_MODE_AND RETURN

2. Ramp setting TO IDLE TO CANCEL
4. To change the RAMP setting, press the NOTE: The SKI MODE indicator will also come
UP/DOWN button until the desired ramp num- ON and blink when ski mode becomes active. It
ber is visible in the numerical display. will be ON steady when the operator pulls and
holds the throttle lever all the way in to the han-
5. Press SET to lock in the ramp setting; the mul- dlebar.
tifunction display will change to the TARGET
SPEED setting function.
2
SKI MODE INDICATOR
SECOND SETTING AVAILABLE - TARGET SPEED 9. To launch the PWC in ski mode, pull in and hold
the throttle lever all the way to the handlebar
1. TARGET SPEED message
grip. The PWC will accelerate to the set TAR-
2. Target speed setting GET SPEED and the SKI MODE indicator will be
on steady.
6. Press the UP/DOWN button to increase or de-
crease the target speed. 10. To increase or decrease the TARGET SPEED
during a ski run, press the UP/DOWN button,
7. Press SET to lock in the target speed; the dis-
do not release the throttle lever.
play will switch to the following scrolling mes-
sage.
sdd2009-001-024_h
MESSAGE DISPLAYED 1. Hold throttle lever in

2. Press UP button to increase speed
SKI MODE_PRESS_SET_TO START OR MODE TO 3. Press DOWN button to decrease speed
EXIT
NOTE: If the throttle is partly released during a
NOTE: A BEEP will be heard every 5 seconds as ski run, the SKI MODE indicator light will start
a SKI MODE engaged reminder. to blink and the speed adjust function using the
UP/DOWN arrow button will be deactivated.
8. Press SET again; the following confirmation
message will appear. 11. To end a ski run or to pick up a fallen skier or
wakeboarder, fully release the throttle to re-
gain normal throttle control.
smr2013-007 37
NOTE: When the throttle is fully released during

ski mode operation, the system returns to ski
mode engaged status. The SKI MODE indicator
light will go out but, ski mode will remain engaged
and a message to that effect will reappear in the
12. Press SET to reactivate ski mode and fully pull
in the throttle lever to start another ski run. sdd2009-001-024_b
Deactivating Ski Mode TYPICAL - GAUGE CONTROL BUTTONS

1. MODE button
To exit ski mode at any given point during the ski 2. SET button
3. UP/DOWN button
mode setting process, press the MODE button.
To end a ski run and completely deactivate ski
mode, release the throttle to idle, then press the
MODE button.
Learning Key and Rental Key Modes

Both learning and rental keys provide a mode of
operation whereby engine power and speed is
limited. MESSAGE DISPLAYED
There are 5 speed settings available for the learn- KEY MODE
ing key mode. By default, the key modes are pre-
set to the speed setting (3). 4. Press the SET button once to enable learning
NOTE: Changing key settings is only available key mode setting function. The display will
when the engine is not running. change to L-Key.
Changing Learning Key Speed Settings 2
GTS Models
1
The default learning key setting is 74 km/h
(46 MPH) and cannot be changed on these mod-
els.
All Models Except GTS
To change learning or rental key settings, carry out FUNCTION SELECTED - LEARNING KEY
the following: 1. L-KEY message
1. Press the START/STOP button to wake up the 2. Learning key setting
electrical system and install the NORMAL key
on the engine cut-off switch. 5. Press the UP/DOWN button to toggle the key
2. Wait for the information center to complete its setting between 1 and 5. See table for speed
self-test and display the key recognition mes- limitations according to setting.
sage. 6. Press the SET button once to save the setting,
3. Press the MODE button repeatedly until KEY twice to exit the function, or simply wait for the
MODE is visible in the digital screen of the in- function to time-out. The change in key setting
formation center. will automatically be saved.
NOTE: The key speed setting is applicable to any
key of the same type used on a specific water-
craft. The same key type used on a different wa-
tercraft may therefore have a different key speed
setting.
38 smr2013-007
D.E.S.S. KEY KEY SPEED APPROX.

TYPE SETTING MAX. SPEED
80 km/h
5
(50 MPH)
74 km/h
4
(46 MPH)
68 km/h
Learning key 3
(42 MPH)
58 km/h
2
(36 MPH)
51 km/h
1
(32 MPH)
smr2013-007 39
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY MESSAGES

Displayed messages are subject to the functions as applicable to watercraft model.
USUAL MESSAGES
WELCOME ABOARD SEA-DOO Power up display
READING KEY Key reading indication
NORMAL KEY Normal key detected
LEARNING KEY Learning key detected
RENTAL KEY Rental key detected
DISPLAY Display menu for numerical display indication
DEPTH Water depth indication selection
RPM RPM indication selection
SPEED Watercraft speed indication selection
ENGINE TEMP Engine temp selection
ALTITUDE Altitude selection (from GPS)
TOP SPEED Top speed selection
AVG SPEED Average speed selection
TOP RPM Maximum RPM selection
AVG RPM Average RPM selection
FUNCTION CANNOT BE ENGAGED Message when system cannot enter a specific function
CLOCK Clock function
CHANGE CLOCK OFFSET Clock setting function
FUEL CONSUMPTION Menu for selecting fuel consumption display
INSTANT FUEL FLOW Used to display instantaneous fuel consumption
AVERAGE FUEL FLOW Used to display average fuel consumption since last reset
DISTANCE TO EMPTY Display distance available based on fuel remaining in tank and instant
fuel consumption
TIME TO EMPTY Display time to empty based on fuel remaining in tank and instant
fuel consumption
VTS MODE VTS preset menu
PRESET 1 For changing PRESET 1
PRESET 2 For changing PRESET 2
FAULT CODE Fault code menu for viewing codes
NO ACTIVE FAULT CODE No fault codes are active.
KEY MODE KEY mode menu
L-KEY For changing learning key setting
SETTINGS For accessing DOCK mode, iBR-OVR, and CLOCK settings
DOCK MODE DOCK mode function menu
DOCK MODE OFF DOCK mode disable
DOCK MODE AUTO DOCK mode enable
40 smr2013-007
USUAL MESSAGES
DOCK MODE ON Suspension moving to DOCK position
DOUBLE CLICK DOWN FOR DOCK Message scrolling while in DOCK mode menu
MODE
iBR-OVR iBR mode function menu
OVR OFF iBR-OVR function disable
OVR ON iBR-OVR function enable
SLOW SPEED MODE ACTIVE Slow speed mode acknowledgement
IS MODE IS mode function
PRESS UP OR DOWN TO SET Message scrolling when adjusting suspension setting
SUSPENSION
PRESS UP OR DOWN TO ADJUST Message when selecting suspension setting
SUSPENSION
DOUBLE CLICK UP FOR AUTO MODE Message scrolling when activating auto MODE
ENTERING SPORT MODE - Message when SPORT mode is selected
INCREASED ACCELERATION -
INSTRUCT PASSENGERS TO HOLD -
PRESS SPORT BUTTON
SPORT MODE ACTIVATED Message when SPORT mode is activated
SPORT MODE - RETURN TO IDLE TO Message when SPORT mode cannot be activated, engine not at idle
ACTIVATE
SPORT MODE ACTIVE - RETURN TO Message when SPORT mode is in use
IDLE TO CANCEL
SPORT MODE DEACTIVATED Message when user first returns to TOURING mode
SKI MODE WAKE and SKI function
PLEASE EXIT SLOW SPEED MODE Message when a rider attempts to enter SKI mode when already
FIRST in SLOW SPEED mode
RAMP Ramp curve or level of acceleration from 1 to 5
TARGET SPEED Speed requested for SKI mode
SKI MODE - PRESS SET TO START OR SKI mode is unarmed but ready, the PWC is at idle
MODE TO EXIT
SKI MODE ARMED - RETURN TO IDLE SKI mode is ready but the PWC is not at idle, the system is at
OR PRESS MODE TO CANCEL standby
SKI MODE ACTIVE - PRESS MODE Message scrolling when SKI mode is active
AND RETURN TO IDLE TO CANCEL
SKI MODE - SPEED ADJUSTING Message scrolling when adjusting SKI mode speed setting
SKI MODE ACTIVE - RETURN TO IDLE Message scrolling when the user pressed MODE to disengage but
TO CANCEL didn't return to idle
LAP TIME Lap timer function
ECO MODE Menu option for selecting FUEL ECONOMY MODE
ECO MODE ACTIVE - RETURN TO FUEL ECONOMY MODE is active, scrolling instruction for
IDLE TO CANCEL deactivation
SLOW SPEED MODE ACTIVE Message when SLOW SPEED mode is in operation
smr2013-007 41
USUAL MESSAGES
SLOW SPEED MODE ACTIVATED Message when SLOW SPEED mode is selected
SLOW SPEED MODE - SPEED Message scrolling when adjusting slow speed TARGET speed setting
ADJUSTING
PLEASE EXIT SLOW SPEED MODE Message scrolling if SLOW SPEED mode is still active when trying
FIRST to engage CRUISE mode
CRUISE MODE ACTIVE Message when CRUISE mode is in operation
CRUISE MODE ACTIVATED Message when CRUISE mode is selected
CRUISE MODE - SPEED ADJUSTING Message scrolling when adjusting cruise TARGET speed setting
CRUISE MODE - SELECT SPEED - Message scrolling when selecting speed.
PRESS SET TO ACCEPT OR MODE TO
EXIT
PLEASE EXIT CRUISE MODE FIRST Message scrolling if CRUISE mode still active when trying to engage
SLOW SPEED mode
LOW FUEL Message when approximately 25% fuel remaining
NEUTRAL ADJUSTMENT Neutral adjustment
FAULT MESSAGES
WRONG KEY Wrong key selected for model
RIGHT KEYPAD ERROR MODE/SET, UP/DOWN arrow button malfunction
HIGH ENGINE TEMPERATURE High engine temperature detected
CHECK ENGINE Engine system malfunction or maintenance required

CALIBRATION CHECKSUM ERROR Cluster programming corrupted, need to be re-flashed using

B.U.D.S.
DEPTH SOUNDER MODULE Error message if depth sounder is disconnected while riding
COMMUNICATION PROBLEM
iS MODULE COMMUNICATION Error message if communication with the suspension module is
PROBLEM lost while riding
iBR MODULE ERROR Error message if communication with the iBR module is lost while
riding
OTAS DEFECTIVE – MAINTENANCE OTAS is not correctly adjusted
REQUIRED
42 smr2013-007
TROUBLESHOOTING Check for signs of moisture, corrosion or dullness.

Clean pins properly and coat them with DIELEC-
DIAGNOSTIC TIPS TRIC GREASE (P/N 293 550 004) or other appropriate
lubricant when reassembling them, except if oth-
NOTE: It is a good practice to check for fault erwise specified such as for the ECM connectors.
codes using B.U.D.S. software as a first trou- Pay attention to ground wires.
bleshooting step. Refer to COMMUNICATION
TOOLS AND B.U.D.S. subsection.
TROUBLESHOOTING
IMPORTANT: When troubleshooting an electrical
system fault, check battery condition, cables and GUIDELINES
connections first. Press the START/STOP button and install the
tether cord on the engine cut-off switch.
Electrical System Activation
NOTE: Information center should come on, cycle
1. Press the START/STOP button. through its self test function, and stay on for
NOTE: Pressing the START/STOP button without approximately 3 minutes after which all electrical
the tether cord (D.E.S.S. key) installed on the en- power will turn off.
gine cut-off switch will turn on electrical power Briefly press the START/STOP button every 3
without starting the engine; the information cen- minutes to reenergize the electrical system. Do
ter will cycle through a self-test function and shut not hold the START/STOP button to avoid engine
off its display after a few seconds. However, the starting.
electrical system will stay powered up for approxi-
mately three minutes after the START button was NOTE: When troubleshooting using the following
pressed. guidelines, it is important to remember that some
indications, functions and features described may
2. Install the tether cord on the engine cut-off not apply to every PWC model, or may be avail-
switch to activate ECM and Information Center able as an option.
when testing procedures require a component
or system to be supplied with electrical power. Information Center “Does Not Turn
IMPORTANT: When B.U.D.S. is being used, the ON”
ECM will stop communicating with B.U.D.S. ap- If the information center does not turn ON when
proximately 3 minutes after the START button is the START/STOP button is pressed, the power cir-
pressed. Therefore, operations with B.U.D.S. will cuit or ground circuit to the information center is
be interrupted. To reestablish communication, probably open.
briefly press the START button. Do not hold the
START button to avoid engine starting. iS Models
Double click the iS button to move the suspen-
Circuit Testing sion to the up position. If the suspension does not
Check the related-circuit fuse condition with a move to the up position, the problem is related
fuse tester or ohmmeter (a visual inspection to the electrical power system. Refer to POWER
could lead to a wrong conclusion). DISTRIBUTION AND GROUNDS subsection.
If the suspension moves to the up position, the
Electrical Connection Inspection electrical power system is functioning normally.
When replacing an electric or electronic compo-
nent, always check electrical connections. Make All Models
sure they are tight, make good contact, and are Test the 3 A GAUGE/OTAS/CAPS fuse (fuse 12) in
corrosion-free. Dirty, loose or corroded contacts fuse box 1 (FB1).
are poor conductors and are often the source of a If the fuse tests good, carry out an INFORMATION
system or component malfunction. CENTER INPUT VOLTAGE TEST.
Pay particular attention to ensure that pins are not If the information center input voltage test is
bent or pushed out of their connectors. good, test for continuity of the gauge ground
Ensure all wire terminals are properly crimped on circuit (gauge connector pin 11 (BLACK wire) to
wires, and connector housings are properly fas- the ground bus-bar (pin H7) in FB1.
tened. Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM for circuit details.
smr2013-007 43
Information Center Turns ON with – VTS indication

Some Indications Missing – iBR position indication
1. Connect to the latest applicable B.U.D.S. ver- – CHECK ENGINE light is on.
sion, refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS AND NOTE: The lake water temperature indication is
B.U.D.S. subsection. only available for the GTX Limited iS 260 model.
2. Read the fault codes, refer to DIAGNOSTIC The iBR CAN bus circuit is open or the iBR module
AND FAULT CODES subsection. is at fault.
If a fault code is related to a communication NOTE: The ECM will generate several fault codes
problem, carry out a continuity test of the CAN and engage LIMP HOME mode.
bus wires between the applicable module and
the CAN bus-bars in FB1. Refer to WIRING DI- Carry out a continuity check of the CAN bus wires
AGRAM and CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK from the CAN bus-bars in FB1 to the iBR module
(CAN) subsections. (pins 2 and 3). Refer to the WIRING DIAGRAM
and CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) sub-
NOTE: The information center, ECM, iS module, sections for details.
iBR module, and the diagnostic connector are
linked together through CAN bus-bars in fuse NO RPM Indication and NO Engine
box 1. If one wire of the two wire CAN bus sys- Hour Display
tem is open, communication will be slower than
normal. Multiple fault codes may be generated If there is NO RPM indication and NO engine
and the ECM will put the watercraft in LIMP hour display, and the watercraft is in LIMP HOME
HOME mode. mode, the CAN bus to the ECM is open.
If one module cannot be seen in B.U.D.S., the Carry out a continuity check of the CAN bus wires
fault may be the wires that link the module to the from the CAN bus-bars in FB1 to the ECM module,
CAN bus bars, or a problem internal to that mod- connector "B" pins C1 and C2 (B-C1 and B-C2). Re-
ule. Test the CAN bus wires from the faulty mod- fer to the WIRING DIAGRAM and CONTROLLER
ule to the CAN bus-bars in FB1 for continuity be- AREA NETWORK (CAN) subsections for details.
fore assuming the problem is the module.
NO iS Position Display
Information Center Goes Blank Except If there is no iS position display (suspension posi-
for: tion), the iS module is at fault, or its CAN bus cir-
– GPS indicator ON cuit is open.
– Compass ON (if watercraft moving) Carry out a continuity check of the CAN bus wires
– Fuel level ON from the CAN bus-bars in FB1 to the iS module
(pins 2 and 3). Refer to the WIRING DIAGRAM for
– iBR fault indicator light ON
details.
– Indicated speed
NOTE: If communication with the iS module can-
– No other indications visible.
not be established when electrical power is first
NOTE: GPS, compass and iBR indications are not applied, the monitoring system assumes this is a
applicable to GTS models. normal situation (PWC not equipped with iS) and
There is no communication between the informa- will not display an error message.
tion center and all other modules (ECM, iS, iBR).
NO Fuel Level Indication
Carry out a continuity check of the CAN bus wires
from the CAN bus-bars in FB1 to the informa- If there is no fuel level indication, test the fuel
tion center (pins 2 and 3). Refer to the WIRING level sensor and its wiring circuit to the infor-
DIAGRAM and CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK mation center. Refer to FUEL TANK AND FUEL
(CAN) subsections for details. PUMP subsection.
If an open circuit is detected, carry out same test NO Depth Gauge Indication
from the pin steering connector (pins 8 and 20).
If there is no depth gauge indication available and
All Indications ON Except for: the depth sounder active indicator is not on, refer
to DEPTH GAUGE in this subsection.
– LAKE WATER TEMP indication
44 smr2013-007
NOTE: If communication with the depth sounder NOTE: This circuit provides 12 Vdc to the GPS in
cannot be established when electrical power is the information center so that it memorizes the
first applied, the monitoring system assumes this satellites it was linked to for a period of two hours.
is a normal situation (PWC not equipped with This allows the indications to be available within
depth finder) and will not display an error mes- a few seconds of restarting the watercraft (hot
sage. start). After a two hour period, the GPS will have
to reestablish new satellite links.
NO Speed or Compass Indication
Beeper Does Not Function
The beeper is incorporated within the information
To obtain a speed or compass reading and to turn center.
on the GPS indicator, the GPS requires a good up-
link to at least three navigation satellites. If no beep code is heard when installing the
tether cord, first ensure ECM is powered. Refer
If there is no speed or compass indication, look for to ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI) subsec-
the GPS indicator icon. If the GPS indicator is off, tion.
either the GPS cannot uplink with the satellites,
or the GPS system in the information center is at In B.U.D.S., carry out the following:
fault. – Cluster Buzzer Test on the cluster activation
If another watercraft nearby displays a good GPS page
uplink (GPS indicator light on in cluster), the infor- – Check for fault codes. Carry out service actions
mation center may need to be replaced. as applicable.
NOTE: If the GPS uplink is lost while navigating If the Cluster Buzzer Test failed, the ECM is
at speed, the speedometer will provide an esti- powered, and the ECM and information center
mated speed indication based on other parame- are communicating properly through the CAN
ters. The compass indication will not be available bus, replace the information center.
until a good satellite uplink is reestablished.
PROCEDURES
Speed and Compass Indication Slow
to Come ON INFORMATION CENTER
All Models Except GTS Information Center Self Test Function
When initially powering up the watercraft and driv- When the START/STOP button is pressed mo-
ing away, the speed and compass indications may mentarily and the vehicle powers up, all LCD
be slow to come on. This is normal as the GPS segments and indicator lights in the information
requires time to establish an uplink with the navi- center will turn ON for 3 seconds (self test func-
gation satellites (cold start). tion). This self test function allows the driver
If the watercraft was run long enough to display time to ensure that all indications are functioning
the compass and speed indications, shut down properly.
for a short period of time and then restarted (hot It also validates the information centers internal
start), the speed and compass indications should circuits, however, this does not validate proper op-
not take more than 30 seconds to come on. eration of the individual external circuits and sen-
If the speed and compass indications take more sors that provide inputs to the information center.
than 30 seconds to come on, test for the follow- If a system fault is detected by the ECM, the ap-
ing: plicable message and/or indicator light will be dis-
– GPS fuse 4 in FB1 played, and a beep code may be heard.
– Battery voltage at pin 1 of the information cen- If the tether cord is not installed, the indications
ter in the information center will shut off a few sec-
– Continuity of wire between information center onds after the self test function, but the electri-
(pin 1) and contact A5 of FB1. cal system power stays on for approximately 3
minutes. Installing the tether cord on the engine
cut-off switch will turn the indications back on.
If the tether cord is installed, the cluster will stay
on for approximately 3 minutes.
smr2013-007 45
NOTE: If the START/STOP button is pressed and

held without the tether cord installed, the informa-
tion center will stay on as long as the START but-
ton is held.
AM
Multifunction Gauge Setup
Clock Setting
1. Press the MODE button repeatedly until SET-
TINGS is visible in the multifunction display.
smo2010-002-108
FUNCTION SELECTED: CHANGE CLOCK OFFSET
4. Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to adjust

the clock to the correct local time.
the hour digits may be changed. For the clock to
function, the GPS requires a good satellite uplink.
smo2009-002-114_y Units of Measurement and Language Setting
FUNCTION SELECTED: SETTINGS
1. Connect vehicle to the latest applicable
2. Press the UP or DOWN arrow button repeat- B.U.D.S. version, refer to the COMMUNI-
edly until CLOCK is visible. CATION TOOLS AND B.U.D.S. subsection.
2. Press the START/STOP button to energize the
electrical system.
NOTE: You will need to press the START button
every three minutes or the electrical system will
shut off.
AM
3. Select the Read Data button.
4. Choose the Setting tab at the top of the page.
At the bottom LH side of the setting page, select
the Cluster tab.
smo2010-002-107
FUNCTION SELECTED: CLOCK

displayed.
46 smr2013-007
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED message will scroll

in the digital screen. These maintenance re-
minders must be cleared using B.U.D.S.
1. Connect vehicle to the latest applicable
B.U.D.S. version, refer to the COMMUNI-
CATION TOOLS AND B.U.D.S. subsection.
2. Press the START/STOP button to energize the
electrical system.
NOTE: You will need to press the START button
shut off.
smr2011-032-001_a
3. Select the Read Data button.
TYPICAL 4. Choose the Vehicle tab at the top of the page.
1. Read Data
2. Setting tab 5. At the bottom RH side of the vehicle page
3. Cluster tab in the Last Service field, choose Reset Ser-
In the Cluster Language field, choose the desired vice/"Maint" or Reset Supercharger Mainte-
unit of language. nance button as applicable.
NOTE: If the supercharger maintenance was car-
ried out before the reminder appeared in the in-
formation center, the supercharger maintenance
reminder must be reset in order to reset the su-
percharger maintenance hour counter and prevent
the reminder from appearing prematurely.
smr2011-032-002_a
TYPICAL
1. Cluster Language field
2. Click on this arrow to expand list of available languages
In the Cluster Units field, choose the desired unit

of measurement, Imperial or Metric.
smr2009-036-011_a
TYPICAL
1. Read Data
2. Vehicle tab
3. Reset Service/"Maint" button
4. Reset Supercharger Maintenance button
smr2011-032-002_b Information Center Pin-Out

TYPICAL
1. Cluster Units field NOTE: Depending on watercraft model and in-
stalled accessories, some multifunction gauge
Clearing the Maintenance Reminder connector pins may not be used.
Indicators
When the watercraft, engine or supercharger are
due for maintenance, the maintenance reminder
indicator will come on, and a scrolling MAIN-
TENANCE REQUIRED or SUPERCHARGER
smr2013-007 47
INFORMATION CENTER PIN-OUT

PIN
FUNCTION
NO.
1 GPS back-up power
2 CAN HI
3 CAN LOW
4 Spare (buzzer external GND)
5 Spare (buzzer external GND)
6 Not used
Cruise switch signal Vdc smr2009-042-002_a
7 TYPICAL
(SET switch for GTS models)
1. Gauge connector
8 Spare (digital input) 2. Pull out to unlock connector
9 Not used 4. Set the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035
868) to Vdc.
Cruise switch ground
10 5. Press the START button and install the tether
(SET switch for GTS models)
cord on the engine cut-off switch.
11 Gauge GND
6. Measure the information center input voltage
12 Gauge input Vdc power as per following table.
13 VTS switch signal (UP or DOWN) INPUT VOLTAGE TEST AT GAUGE CONNECTOR
14 ECO/SPORT switch signal (ECO or SPORT) PROBE VOLTAGE
15 VTS switch common Pin 12 (VIOLET) Pin 11 (BLACK)
16 UP or DOWN arrow switch signal Battery voltage
Pin 12 (VIOLET) Battery ground
17 MODE and SET switch signal
MODE/SET, UP/DOWN arrow switch
18
common
19 Fuel level sensor VDC signal
20 Fuel level sensor GND
Information Center Input Voltage Test

(at Gauge Connector) 12 V 11
GTS, GTI and WAKE smr2009-036-003_b
INPUT VOLTAGE TEST AT GAUGE CONNECTOR (PINS 12 TO

1. Remove the gauge bezel, refer to BODY sub- 11)
section.
RXT, GTX and WAKE Pro
2. Remove the gauge support cover, refer to IN-
FORMATION CENTER REMOVAL in this sub-
section.
All Models
NOTICE Pull on connector with your hand as
you pull the connector lock out with the screw-
driver. Do not twist the screwdriver.
48 smr2013-007
RXT and GTX Models Without Suspension

4. Reach into the front storage compartment and
remove the front air ventilation hoses.
V 12
smr2009-036-003_c
INPUT VOLTAGE TEST AT GAUGE CONNECTOR (PIN 12 TO

BATTERY GROUND)
If battery voltage is measured as specified, re- sbl2010-004-002

place the information center. FRONT AIR VENTILATION HOSES
If battery voltage is measured to battery ground
but not to pin 11, carry out a CONTINUITY TEST All Models
OF GAUGE GROUND WIRE circuit from the 5. From under the steering support area, discon-
gauge connector to the ground bus-bar contact in nect the 24-pin steering connector.
FB1 as described further in this subsection.
7. If battery voltage is not measured at the gauge
connector, carry out a INFORMATION CENTER
INPUT VOLTAGE TEST (AT STEERING CON-
NECTOR).
Information Center Input Voltage Test
(at Steering Connector)
GTS, GTI and Wake
2. Remove battery access panels.
sbl2010-034-018_b
TYPICAL - DISCONNECT 24-PIN STEERING CONNECTOR


188) to make an in-line connection between the
disconnected connectors.
smo2011-003-011_c
1. Battery access panels
RXT, GTX and WAKE Pro

3. Remove front storage bin.
529036188
smr2013-007 49
7. Press the START/STOP switch and install the

tether cord on the engine cut-off switch.
8. Carry out an input voltage test at the steering
connector (vehicle harness side) as per follow-
ing table.
INFORMATION CENTER INPUT VOLTAGE
TEST (STEERING CONNECTOR)
TEST CONNECTOR ON
VOLTAGE
DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS
Pin 24 (VIOLET) Pin 1 (BLACK)
Battery voltage
Pin 24 (VIOLET) Battery ground
smo2011-003-011_c
BATTERY AND FUSE ACCESS, FRONT STORAGE

COMPARTMENT
1. Battery access panel
RXT and GTX Models with Suspension

10. Open the boarding platform and remove the
RH storage bin.
RXT, GTX (Without Suspension) and
Wake Pro Models
11. Remove the RH access panel on the boarding
platform.
All Models
smr2010-038-003_b 12. Using the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035
TEST CONNECTOR OF DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS 868) set to Vdc, measure battery voltage at the
battery terminals.
If battery voltage is read at steering connector (ve-
hicle harness side) as specified in previous table,
but was not measured to pin 11 at the gauge con-
nector (gauge ground wire), repair or replace the
BLACK ground wire between the gauge connec-
tor and the steering connector.
If battery voltage is measured to battery ground
but not to pin 1, carry out a CONTINUITY TEST OF
GAUGE GROUND WIRE described further in this
subsection.
If no voltage is measured, carry out the following
steps.
GTS, GTI and WAKE Models
9. Remove the battery access panel at the back of
the storage compartment.
smr2011-032-003_a
TYPICAL - BATTERY VOLTAGE TEST
13. Remove fuse box cover.
50 smr2013-007
smr2011-027-002_a
smr2011-032-003_b TYPICAL - CONTACT COORDINATES (FRONT VIEW FB1)

1. Fuse box cover
If battery voltage is measured at E8 but not at F8
14. Press the START/STOP button to energize (with fuse installed), replace the fuse.
electrical system and install the tether cord. If battery voltage is measured at fuse contact E8,
15. Test for battery voltage between each of the refer to CONTINUITY TEST OF GAUGE POWER
terminals atop the GAUGE/OTAS/CAPS fuse WIRE in this subsection.
(12) and battery ground as per following table. If no voltage is measured at fuse contact E8,
VOLTAGE TEST AT FB1 slightly lift one corner of the long bus-bar (12
contacts long).
GAUGE FUSE TEST PROBES READING
16. Measure for battery Vdc between the bus-bar
Fuse pin E8 Battery (-) Battery and battery ground.
numbers F8 post Vdc
smr2011-027-003_c
VOLTAGE TEST AT LONG BUS-BAR

smr2011-027-003_b
VOLTAGE TEST AT FUSE CONTACTS

If battery voltage is measured at the long bus-bar,
repair or replace the wire jumper D8 to E8 (behind
fuse box).
Continuity Test of Gauge Power Wire

1. Remove tether cord from engine cut-off switch.
2. Disconnect gauge connector.
NOTICE Pull connector lock out sideways.
smr2013-007 51
smr2009-042-002_a
TYPICAL smr2011-027-003_d
1. Gauge connector
FB1
1. Remove gauge fuse (F1)
3. Disconnect 24-pin steering connector. 6. Set FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 868) to
setting.
529035868
sbl2010-034-018_b 7. Test the information center power wire continu-

TYPICAL - 24-PIN STEERING CONNECTOR DISCONNECT ity as per following table.
Step 2: Press in on release tab CONTINUITY TEST OF GAUGE POWER WIRE
TEST
4. Connect the DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS (P/N 529 036 CONNECTOR
GAUGE FUSE
188) to make an in-line connection between the ON READING
CONNECTOR BOX 1
disconnected connectors. DIAGNOSTIC
HARNESS
Pin 12 Pin 24 –
(VIOLET) (VIOLET)
Pin 12 – Close to
F8
(VIOLET) 0
– Pin 24
F8
(VIOLET)
529036188
5. Remove the gauge fuse in FB1.
52 smr2013-007
10 1 9. Repair or replace wiring/connectors as re-

quired.
Continuity Test of Gauge Ground Wire

1. Disconnect the 24-pin steering connector.
11 20
smr2009-036-003_e
sbl2010-034-018_b
TYPICAL - 24-PIN STEERING CONNECTOR DISCONNECT


smr2010-038-003 188) to make an in-line connection between the
TYPICAL - TEST CONNECTOR OF DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS disconnected connectors.
529036188
3. Remove the ground bus-bar in the fuse box.
smr2011-027-002_a
TYPICAL - CONTACT COORDINATES (FRONT VIEW FB1)
8. If an open circuit is measured, test the follow-

ing:
CONTINUITY TEST OF GAUGE POWER WIRE
TEST CONNECTOR
FUSE BOX
ON DIAGNOSTIC READING
1
HARNESS
F8 to H9 –
H9 to H11 – Close to 0
H11 Pin 24 (VIOLET)
smr2013-007 53
10 1
11 20
smr2009-036-003_e
smr2011-027-003_e
TYPICAL
1. Ground bus bar
4. Set FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 868) to

selection and carry out a continuity test as
per following table. Refer to the WIRING DIA-
GRAM for circuit details.
smr2010-038-003
TEST CONNECTOR OF DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS
529035868
CONTINUITY TEST OF GAUGE GROUND WIRE

MULTIMETER PROBES
TEST
CONNECTOR READING
GAUGE FUSE
ON
CONNECTOR BOX
DIAGNOSTIC
HARNESS
Pin 11 – H7
(BLACK) smr2011-027-002_a
Close to TYPICAL - CONTACT COORDINATES (FRONT VIEW FB1)

Pin 11 –
Pin 1 (BLACK) 0
(BLACK) 5. Repair wiring and connectors as required.
– Pin 1 (BLACK) H7
Information Center Removal
GTS, GTI, RXP-X and WAKE
1. Remove the bezel that covers the information
center and mirrors, refer to BODY subsection.
2. Press in on the two retaining tabs at the top of
the information center.
54 smr2013-007
smr2009-042-067_a
smr2011-032-004_a 1. LH side tab

RETAINING TABS AT TOP OF INFORMATION CENTER 2. Upper retaining tabs
3. Pull information center out of console. 5. Disconnect the gauge connector.
GTX, RTX and Wake Pro NOTICE Pull connector lock out sideways.
1. Open the front storage compartment cover.
2. Move the steering to its highest position, refer
to BODY subsection.
3. Using a long flat screwdriver, insert the blade
between the lower locking tabs (one each side)
of the gauge support cover, and carefully pry
the tabs outwards to release them from the
gauge support.
smr2009-042-002_a
1. Gauge connector
2. Pull out to unlock
6. Insert a flat screwdriver between the upper

gauge locking tab and gauge support.
smr2009-042-001_a
1. Long flat screwdriver

2. Locking tab
3. Gauge support cover
4. Pull the bottom of the panel outwards to re-

move it from the gauge support.
smr2009-036-010_a
GAUGE REMOVAL
1. Insert screwdriver here
7. Hold back of the gauge with one hand and care-

fully compress the retaining tab to release the
information center from the gauge support.
smr2013-007 55
Information Center Installation

Installation of the information center is the reverse
of the removal procedure. However, pay attention
to the following.
(P/N 293 550 004) to the gauge connector pins.
2. Reconnect gauge connector and ensure proper
operation of gauge.
3. Insert and align the bottom of the gauge into
the support first, then push the top into the sup-
port and ensure it properly locks into the retain- smr2009-042-001_a
ing tab. 1. Long screwdriver
2. Locking tab
GTX, RTX and Wake Pro 3. Gauge support cover
4. When reinstalling the gauge support cover, 3. Remove the cover.
first insert the top of the cover into the sup-
port. Then align the bottom of the cover with
the locking tabs on the outside of the gauge
support and push it in until it snaps back in
place.
All Models
NOTE: If you are installing a replacement informa-
tion center, refer to INFORMATION CENTER RE-
PLACEMENT in this subsection.
Information Center Replacement
All Models
smr2009-042-067_a
NOTE: Replacement information centers are de- 1. LH side tab
livered already programmed. 2. Upper retaining latches
After the information center has been replaced, 4. Disconnect the gauge connector.
connect the watercraft to the latest applicable
B.U.D.S. version and carry out any updates (if
required). Refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS
Once the information center has been updated
(if required), select the applicable settings as de-
scribed in SETTING LANGUAGE AND UNITS OF
MEASUREMENT in this subsection.
GAUGE SUPPORT (RXT, GTX

AND WAKE PRO)
Gauge Support Removal
1. Move steering to its upper most position. smr2009-042-002_a
1. Gauge connector
2. Using a long flat screwdriver, unlatch both sides 2. Slide out gauge connector tab to unlock
of gauge support cover.
5. Using a small screwdriver, unlock back end of
gauge support by pushing on tabs on each side
of the steering column.
56 smr2013-007

passes through all four diodes (say MODE and
SET switches open), a drop of 2.4 Vdc would be
measured across the 4 the diodes (pin B to pin
C). This voltage drop of 2.4 Vdc measured at pin
B tells the gauge the MODE and SET switches
are open.
If the MODE switch is pressed, 2 diodes are by-
passed. The remaining two diodes in the circuit
drop 1.2 Vdc (at pin B).
smr2009-042-003_a
If the SET switch is pressed, 1 diode is bypassed.
1. Inner latches The remaining three diodes in the circuit drop
1.8 Vdc (at pin B).
6. Remove gauge support by pulling out its for- The gauge senses these voltages through pin 17
ward tabs (one on each side), then pulling up of the gauge connector, and interprets them as
on the support. signals that tell it which switch is activated.
If the command signal generated by the closure
of a switch concerns another module, a circuit
within the gauge will translate it to CAN protocol
and transmit it through the CAN bus. The applica-
ble module will react to the command, carry out
the function, and transmit the result back through
the CAN bus.
The information center will use the signals from
the switches and the transmitted information
from the other modules, convert them to an in-
dication, and cancel the command signal it sent
smr2009-042-068_a out once the function has been carried out.
1. Pull out locking tab Command signals from the MODE and SET
switches are used by the information center only.
Gauge Support Installation
The UP/DOWN arrow switch commands are used
1. Reverse the removal procedure. by the gauge for certain functions and settings.
2. Ensure proper operation of gauge once recon- They will also be translated and sent out through
nected. the CAN bus to be used by the ECM for the
CRUISE, SKI mode and SLOW SPEED functions
MODE/SET AND UP/DOWN for increasing or decreasing speed when the
ARROW BUTTONS functions are active, and by the iBR for iBR gate
positioning in SLOW SPEED mode of operation.
Overview The UP/DOWN switches are also used for VTS
The MODE/SET and UP/DOWN arrow buttons trim on RXT 215, GTX 155, GTI SE 130 and 155,
assembly contains a series of 4 diodes for the and WAKE models.
MODE and SET switches, and another 4 diodes NOTE: The voltages stated previously vary
for the UP/DOWN arrow switches. Refer to slightly depending on the actual voltage ap-
WIRING DIAGRAM for simplified diagram of plied to the circuit and the current flow through
switches. the diodes. When using a Fluke 115 multimeter
The center wire to the switches (pin C), is com- for testing in diode test mode, the voltage and
mon to both sides of the switch assembly (some- current applied by the multimeter are lower than
what like a ground wire). The other two wires in circuit. The quality of probe contact, the actual
(pins A and B), act as signal wires to the infor- probes and leads, and the precision of the meter
mation center for each set of switches. They calibration will all affect the results, which will
actually each form one branch of an electronic most likely be slightly lower than nominal values
circuit within the information center. stated.
smr2013-007 57
MODE/SET and UP/DOWN Arrow If each of the gauge button indicator lights come
Buttons Test Using B.U.D.S. on when the applicable switch is pressed, the
1. Connect the watercraft to the latest applicable problem may be related to the information center.
B.U.D.S. version. Refer to COMMUNICATION If one or all of the indicator lights does not come
TOOLS AND B.U.D.S. on, refer to MODE/SET AND UP/DOWN ARROW
2. Press the START/STOP button to energize the SWITCH TEST USING A MULTIMETER.
electrical system.
MODE/SET and UP/DOWN Switch Test
NOTE: You will need to press the START button Using a Multimeter
shut off. GTI and WAKE
3. Select the Read Data button. 1. Remove the information center from the con-
sole, refer to INFORMATION CENTER RE-
4. Choose the Monitoring tab at the top of the
MOVAL (GTI AND WAKE) in this subsection.
page.
5. At the bottom LH side of the monitoring page, RXT, GTX and WAKE PRO
select the Cluster tab. 2. Remove the gauge support cover, refer to IN-
FORMATION CENTER REMOVAL (RXT, GTX
AND WAKE PRO) in this subsection.
All Models
the screwdriver.
smr2012-033-002_a
1. Read Data button

2. Monitoring tab
3. Cluster tab
4. LH switch inputs field
5. RH switch inputs field
6. Press each of the MODE/SET and UP/DOWN

arrow buttons and look for the applicable indica-
tor light to come on in the Switch inputs field smr2009-042-002_a
on lower RH side of the cluster page (Mode, 1. Gauge connector

Set, Up or Down). 2. Pull out to unlock connector

868) to the diode test function.
NOTE: It is important to set the multimeter
to the diode check function when testing the
MODE/SET and UP/DOWN arrow switches as it
contain diodes.
smr2009-036-012_a
SWITCH INPUTS
1. MODE/SET and UP/DOWN arrow button indicator lights
58 smr2013-007
UP/DOWN ARROW SWITCH TEST

SWITCH FLUKE GAUGE
VOLTAGE
POSITION 115 CONNECTOR
RED lead
Pin 16 Approx.
BLACK
Pin 18 2 Vdc
Switch lead
released BLACK
Pin 16
lead OL
Pin 18
RED lead
RED lead
Pin 16 Approx.
BLACK
Pin 18 1.1 Vdc
UP lead
depressed BLACK
Pin 16
lead OL
Pin 18
RED lead
vmr2006-020-005
RED lead
5. Test the MODE/SET and UP/DOWN arrow Pin 16 Approx.
BLACK
Pin 18 1.6 Vdc
switches as per following tables. DOWN lead
MODE/SET SWITCH TEST depressed BLACK
Pin 16
lead OL
SWITCH FLUKE GAUGE Pin 18
VOLTAGE RED lead
POSITION 115 CONNECTOR
RED lead NOTE: Remember that each diode should drop
Pin 17 Approx.
BLACK
Pin 18 2 Vdc
approximately 0.6 Vdc when positively biassed,
Switch lead and read as an OL (open circuit) when negatively
released BLACK biassed (leads reversed).
Pin 17
lead
Pin 18
OL When measuring between pins 17 and 18, or 16
RED lead and 18, if an OL is obtained with both positive
RED lead and negative diode biassing, test the continuity of
Pin 17 Approx. each wire between the gauge and switch assem-
BLACK
Pin 18 1.1 Vdc bly. If continuity is good, replace the switch as-
MODE lead
depressed sembly.
BLACK
Pin 17 If any reading is significantly different than speci-
lead OL
Pin 18 fied, carry out the same test at the switch connec-
RED lead
tor, refer to the wiring diagram. If you obtain the
BLACK
Pin 17 Approx. same results, replace the switch assembly.
lead
Pin 18 1.6 Vdc
SET RED lead If voltages measured on every switch are as spec-
depressed ified (or very close to it), the switches and the
BLACK
lead
Pin 17
OL
wiring harness are good. The fault may be within
Pin 18 the gauge. Replace the gauge and carry out a
RED lead
new MODE/SET AND UP/DOWN TEST USING
B.U.D.S. to ensure the problem is solved.
MODE/SET and UP/DOWN Switch
Assembly Replacement (Except X
Package)
1. Remove steering cover, refer to STEERING
2. Disconnect connector from switch assembly.
smr2013-007 59
MODE/SET and UP/DOWN Switch

Assembly Replacement (X Package
Only)
Switch Removal
1. Remove the 2 screws in the front of the upper
handlebar housing.
smr2009-036-013_a
TYPICAL - GTX LIMITED iS ILLUSTRATED

1. MODE/SET and UP/DOWN switch connector
3. Remove switch assembly from support by lift-

ing it off the support.
4. As applicable, ensure wiring from cruise switch
is properly inserted in slot provided before in-
stalling MODE/SET and UP/DOWN arrow
switch assembly.
smr2010-031-001_a
Step 1: Remove these two screws
2. Remove the screw at back of the handlebar.
smr2009-036-014_a
TYPICAL - GTX LIMITED iS ILLUSTRATED

1. Cruise switch
2. Wiring in slot provided in support smr2010-031-002_a
3. MODE/SET and UP/DOWN arrow switch connector
NOTICE Do not try to pull the cover off the
(P/N 293 550 004) on switch contact pins.
housing at this time or damage to the cover will
6. Install connector on new switch assembly. occur.
7. Insert switch assembly in switch support.
3. Take hold of the housing cover to prevent it
8. Install steering cover, refer to STEERING AND from falling off the handlebar when unlocking
O.T.A.S. the upper housing in the following step.
4. Using a small screwdriver, unlock the tab that
retains the upper housing and pull the upper
housing off.
NOTICE As you remove the upper housing,
hold on to the housing cover to prevent it from
falling off the handlebar.
60 smr2013-007
Switch Installation
1. Install connector on switch assembly.
2. Insert switch assembly in handlebar housing.
3. Ensure proper wire routing.
4. Ensure proper positioning of corrugated con-
duit.
smr2010-031-003_a

Step 4: Unlock this tab
5. Remove the housing cover from the handlebar.
smr2010-040-001_b
Step 1: Install connector

Step 2: Insert switch in handlebar housing
Step 4: Ensure proper positioning of corrugated conduit
5. Ensure engagement of housing cover retaining

tabs.
6. Ensure engagement of upper housing locking
tabs.
smr2010-031-004_a
Step 5: Remove housing cover
6. Remove switch from handlebar housing.

7. Remove connector from switch.
smr2010-031-010_c
Step 5: Ensure engagement of housing cover retaining tabs

smr2010-040-001_c Step 6: Ensure engagement of upper housing locking tabs
Step 6: Remove switch
Step 7: Remove connector 7. Position the upper housing on the handlebar
housing.
8. Ensure proper engagement of the upper hous-
ing and cover tabs.
smr2013-007 61
9. Install the three retaining screws for the upper Depth Sounder Troubleshooting
housing and tighten them as specified.
DEPTH SOUNDER TROUBLESHOOTING
UPPER SWITCH HOUSING SCREW TORQUE
POSSIBLE
SYMPTOM REMEDY
2 N•m (18 lbf•in) CAUSE
Properly
10. Connect watercraft to the latest applicable Depth sounder
connect depth
B.U.D.S. version, refer to COMMUNICATION not connected.
sounder.
Make sure
11. Ensure there are no fault codes, refer to DIAG- depth sounder
NOSTIC AND FAULT CODES subsection. is properly
12. Ensure proper operation of throttle lever and installed in
Depth sounder
switch assembly. battery holder
not properly
base. There
installed.
must be no air
WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR Nothing is gap between
displayed in hull and silicone
The water temperature sensor is connected to the the information pad(s).
ECM center
12 Vdc wire or
Water from the jet pump passes through the in- Check fuse 3 in
ground wire to
tercooler inlet hose where the sensor measures depth sounder
FB1 and wiring
its temperature, generating a signal that is inter- harnesses.
open.
preted by the ECM module. The ECM module
then sends the information through the can-bus Check
to the information center that translates it into a WHITE/BLACK
Problem with
temperature indication. and
communication
WHITE/RED
If the temperature display is 0 degrees, water link wires.
wires to CAN
temperature sensor might be defective. Verify bus-bars in FB1.
water temperature sensor and replace if neces- Launch
sary. r. Watercraft is watercraft in
not in water. water and
DEPTH SOUNDER recheck.
WARNING There is air

between
Never use the depth gauge as a warning de- - - - - (ft or m) is silicone pad and Remove depth
vice to ride in shallow water. Use it as a nav- displayed depth sounder sounder.
igation guide only. Not to be used to get pre- or between Replace
cise navigation data. depth sounder silicone pad.
and battery
holder base.
Depth sounder Try a new depth
is defective. sounder.
62 smr2013-007
smr2011-027-003_f
1. Depth sounder 3A fuse (FB1)

smr2011-032-003_c
TYPICAL
Depth Sounder Removal 1. Diagnostic connector
4. Remove the electrical component support from
the battery holder, refer to CHARGING SYS-
TEM.
5. Remove the battery (with holder) from the wa-
tercraft, refer to CHARGING SYSTEM.
WARNING
Always disconnect the battery cables exactly
in the specified order, BLACK (-) battery cable
first then the RED (+) cable last.
6. Unlock the depth sounder clocking tabs from

the battery holder base and pull the depth
ssi2009-002-002_a
1. Re-boarding platform
sounder out from the base.
2. Remove the starboard (RH) storage bin.
ssi2009-002-014_a
1. Locking tabs
2. Battery holder base
ssi2009-002-003_a
1. Starboard storage bin 7. Disconnect the depth sounder connector from

3. Disconnect the diagnostic connector from its the wiring harness.
holder.
Depth Sounder Inspection
Ensure the silicone pad is in good condition.
smr2013-007 63
NOTE: There must not be any air trapped be-

tween the bottom of the depth sounder and the
bilge. Otherwise, the sounder will not function
correctly.
If the silicone pad is damaged, replace it.
Depth Sounder Silicone Pad

Replacement
1. Place the flat side of the depth sounder on a
level surface.
2. Remove the old silicone pad from the bottom
ssi2009-002-014_b
of the depth sounder. 1. Depth sounder connector
3. Clean the concave surface of depth sounder. 2. Wiring harness
4. Remove both protectors from the silicone pad. 4. After installation:

5. Apply silicone pad on depth sounder. 4.1 Try pulling the sounder out to ensure it
is properly locked in the battery support
NOTICE Make sure to not trap air between
base.
silicone pad and depth sounder. Otherwise,
the device will not work. 4.2 Try pushing on depth sounder. You must
feel a resistance (no air gap).
NOTE: An air gap can be eliminated by adding an
additional silicone pad.
5. Install the battery and electrical component
support in the reverse order of removal, refer
to CHARGING SYSTEM.
6. Install the diagnostic connector in its holder.
7. Carry out the following procedure: TESTING
DEPTH SOUNDER OPERATION.
Testing Depth Sounder Operation
1. Press START/STOP button to activate gauge.
ssi2009-002-013_a 2. Confirm the depth sounder icon is active in
1. Silicone pad gauge.
2. Depth sounder
Depth Sounder Installation

1. Insert the depth sounder in the battery holder
base while paying attention to the position of
the wiring on the sounder with the groove in the
battery holder base.
2. Press firmly on the depth sounder until both
locking tabs are locked into the base.
3. Connect the sounder connector to the wiring
harness and route the wiring in the groove pro- ssi2009-002-018_a
vided in the battery holder base. TYPICAL
1. Depth sounder icon
3. If icon is not active, check in BUDS that icon box

is checked.
64 smr2013-007
NOTE: When watercraft is not in water, the icon

is active but there is no reading. To verify proper
operation, launch watercraft in water and com-
pare depth indication with actual depth.
smr2013-007 65
Subsection XX (RADIO FREQUENCY DIGITALLY ENCODED SECU-
RITY SYSTEM (RF D.E.S.S.))
RADIO FREQUENCY DIGITALLY

ENCODED SECURITY SYSTEM (RF
D.E.S.S.)
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The following components are specially designed
for this system: ECM, D.E.S.S. key (inside tether
cord cap) and engine cut-off switch.
The D.E.S.S. key contains a magnet and a RFID
chip.
– The magnet closes the hall effect switch inside
the engine cut-off switch.
– The RFID chip contains a unique digital code. It smr2015-008-001_a
is the equivalent of the tooth-pattern cut on a 1. D.E.S.S. Key
conventional ignition key. 2. Tether cord float
The D.E.S.S. system allows the engine to start Upon tether cord installation, the key type used
only if a tether cord cap is installed on the engine is momentarily displayed by the multifunction
cut-off switch and the D.E.S.S. key is recognized gauge.
as valid by the ECM.
Both learning and rental keys provide a mode of
The D.E.S.S. key is quite flexible: operation whereby engine power and speed is
– Up to 8 D.E.S.S. keys may be programmed in limited.
the ECM memory using the B.U.D.S. The keys
There are 5 speed settings available for the learn-
can also be erased individually.
ing key mode. By default, the key modes are
– The same D.E.S.S. key can be used on another preset to the speed setting (3). Refer to INTELLI-
vehicle equipped with the D.E.S.S. system. It GENT THROTTLE CONTROL (iTC) subsection.
only needs to be programmed for that vehicle.
NOTE: Changing key settings is only available
D.E.S.S. Key Types when the engine is not running.
Three types of keys can be used: D.E.S.S. Key Beeper Codes
– Normal key
BEEPER SIGNIFICATION
– Learning key
– Rental key. A 0.5 second
Indicates the D.E.S.S. is reading the
beep every
To ease key type recognition, the tether cord float key.
5 seconds
comes in different colors.
Indicates the D.E.S.S. recognizes
KEY TYPE FLOAT COLOR 2 short beeps
the key.
Normal Yellow or Black A 1 second
Indicates the D.E.S.S. does not
Learning Green beep every
recognize the key.
5 seconds
Rental(1) Orange
(1) Rental key can be programmed to a rental watercraft only. NOTE: Other beeps not related to D.E.S.S. can
be heard. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT
CODES.
smr2015-008 1
TROUBLESHOOTING 3. Install a tether cord on the engine cut-off switch

to program a D.E.S.S. key.
DIAGNOSTIC GUIDELINES
probable cause of a problem. It is a guideline and
should not be assumed to list all possible causes.
NO BEEP CODE WHEN KEY IS INSTALLED

ON ENGINE CUT-OFF SWITCH — ENGINE
CAN NOT BE STARTED
1. Gauge shuts-down after its WOW test: Defec-
tive engine cut-off switch
- Check engine cut-off switch. Refer to IGNTION
SYSTEM subsection.
NO BEEP CODE WHEN KEY IS INSTALLED

ON ENGINE CUT-OFF SWITCH — ENGINE
CAN BE STARTED smr2015-008-002
1. Defective gauge beeper 4. Read ECM using Read Data button.

- Check gauge beeper. Refer to INFORMATION
CENTER (GAUGE).
GAUGE DISPLAYS "READING KEY" AND

THERE IS NO KEY INSTALLED ON ENGINE
CUT-OFF SWITCH
1. Gauge shuts-down after 3 minutes: Defective
engine cut-off switch
- Check engine cut-off switch.
PROCEDURES vmr2006-012-100_aen
5. Click on Keys tab.

D.E.S.S. KEY
D.E.S.S. Key Recognition
To allow key recognition, carry out the following
steps:
1. Briefly press the START/STOP button to wake
up the ECM.
2. Securely install the tether cord on watercraft
engine cut-off switch.
3. Press and hold the START/STOP button to start
engine.
D.E.S.S. Key Programming smr2005-072-001_en
1. Connect the watercraft to latest applicable

B.U.D.S. Refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS Adding a Key
AND B.U.D.S. subsection. 1. Click on the Add Key button at the bottom of
IMPORTANT: Ensure all connections have been the screen according to the key type you want
made before starting B.U.D.S. to allow proper to program.
operation.
2. Briefly press START/STOP button to power the
ECM.
2 smr2015-008
WARNING
If programming a Learning or Rental key,
be sure to use the proper key type (color) to
avoid possible confusion.
NOTE: A rental key can be programmed to a

rental watercraft only.
smr2015-008-002
2. Click on Erase Key button at bottom of

B.U.D.S. screen.
smr2009-035-003_c
1. Add Key buttons
2. After approximately 10 seconds, the following

window will pop up confirming the new key has
been saved in the PC computer.
smr2009-035-004_a
smr2008-020-008
1. Click on this button
3. If programming is complete, write the changes After approximately 10 seconds the following
to the ECM. Refer to WRITING CHANGES TO message will appear.
ECM in this subsection.
Adding Another Key
1. Remove the tether cord from the engine cut-off
switch.
2. Install the next tether cord on the engine cut-off
switch.
3. Click on the Add Key button. smr2009-035-007
4. If programming is complete, write the changes

to the ECM. Refer to WRITING CHANGES TO The key is now erased in the PC computer.
ECM in this subsection. 3. If programming is complete, write the changes
to the ECM. Refer to WRITING CHANGES TO
Erasing a Key ECM in this subsection.
switch. Erasing Another Key
1. Remove the tether cord from the engine cut-off
switch.
smr2015-008 3
2. Install the next tether cord to be erased on the

3. Click on Erase Key button.
4. If programming is complete, write the changes
to the ECM. Refer to WRITING CHANGES TO
ECM in this subsection.
Erasing All Keys
1. Click on Erase All Keys button at bottom of
screen.
vmr2006-012-100_ben
NOTE: If for some reason the writing operation

fails, exit B.U.D.S. Restart B.U.D.S. and reenter all
the previously lost information.
2. After the write operation, remove key from
D.E.S.S. post.
3. Try the key(s) on the watercraft.
D.E.S.S. / Engine cut-off Operation

Normal Operation
smr2009-035-004_b
1. Click on this button

mmr2015-131-001_a
NOTE: The following message will be displayed
MONITORING PAGE, ECM TAB
in B.U.D.S.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
RFID CONNECTOR PIN SPECIFICATIONS
A ECM ground
B 12 - 15 Vdc
C 5 Vdc
smr2010-039-001
D 12 Vdc
2. Click Yes to proceed with erasing all keys.
Key Not Read
3. When done, program at least one new key to
the vehicle. Refer to ADDING A KEY in this sub-
section.
4. When programming is complete, write the
changes to the ECM. Refer to WRITING
CHANGES TO ECM in this subsection. mmr2015-131-002_a

NOTE: If there isn't at least one key programmed
to the watercraft, B.U.D.S. will not allow you to Possible causes:
write the changes to the ECM and will prompt you – Damaged RFID chip
to add a key.
– No voltage at RFID-D connector
Writing Changes to ECM – No voltage at RFID-C connector
Save the changes made in B.U.D.S. into the ECM Condition can be duplicated with a magnet on the
as follows. D.E.S.S. post.
1. Click the Write Data button.
4 smr2015-008
mmr2015-131-005_a
1. D.E.S.S. post
Key Not Present
mmr2015-131-003_a
Possible causes:
– No key installed
– No voltage at RFID-B connector
– No ground at RFID-A connector
Condition can be duplicated by unplugging the
RFID connector.
Invalid Key
mmr2015-131-004_a
Possible causes:
– Key not programmed to ECM
smr2015-008 5
Subsection XX (STEERING AND O.T.A.S.)
STEERING AND O.T.A.S.

SERVICE TOOLS
FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER ............................................................ 529 035 868 ........................................... 23
STEERING CABLE TOOL .............................................................. 295 000 145 ........................................... 16

MODIFIED WRENCH 22 mm (7/8 in) x 100 mm (4 in) ................. none ......................................... 7–8
SERVICE PRODUCTS
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ..................................... 11, 13
LOCTITE 567 (PIPE SEALANT) ..................................................... 293 800 013 ........................................... 17
XPS SYNTHETIC GREASE............................................................. 293 550 010 ........................................... 15
smr2012-034 1
STEERING COLUMN AND CABLE

GTS,GTI, GTR and WAKE
XPS
synthetic 0.7 Nm
grease (6 lbfin)
XPS
synthetic 0.7 Nm
7 Nm grease (6 lbfin)
(62 lbfin)
Loctite 9 Nm
243 (80 lbfin)
Loctite 243
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
6 Nm
3.5 Nm (53 lbfin)
(31 lbfin)
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
Loctite 5150
Loctite 567 (silicone sealant)
(pipe sealant)
smr2011-033-001_a
2 smr2012-034
STEERING COLUMN
GTX, GTX iS, RXT, RXT iS and Wake Pro
7 Nm
(62 lbfin) 0.7 Nm
(6 lbfin)
XPS
Loctite synthetic 6 Nm
243 grease (53 lbfin)
0.7 Nm
(6 lbfin)
3.5 Nm
(31 lbfin)
XPS
synthetic
grease
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
Loctite
243
smr2011-033-002_a
smr2012-034 3
STEERING COLUMN
RXT-X, RXT-X aS
0.7 Nm See tightening

33 Nm procedure
(6 lbfin) 22 Nm (24 lbfft)
XPS (16 lbfft)
synthetic
grease See tightening 22 Nm
procedure (16 lbfft)
2 Nm
7 Nm (18 lbfin)
(62 lbfin) 6 Nm
3 Nm (53 lbfin)
(26 lbfin)
Loctite
243
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
See tightening 2 Nm

procedure (18 lbfin)
Loctite
33 Nm 243
(24 lbfft) 0.7 Nm
(6 lbfin)
XPS
3.5 Nm synthetic
(31 lbfin) grease
7 Nm
2 Nm (62 lbfin)
(18 lbfin)
Loctite
243
smr2011-033-003_b
4 smr2012-034
STEERING COLUMN AND CABLE

RXP-X Series
See tightening procedure

22 N•m
(16 lbf•ft)
2 N•m
33 N•m (18 lbf•in)
(24 lbf•ft)
.7 N•m
Loctite 243 (26 lbf•in)
XPS
6 N•m Synthetic
(53 lbf•in) grease
2 N•m
3.5 N•m (18 lbf•in) 7 N•m
.7 N•m 2 N•m
Loctite 243
XPS
9 N•m Synthetic
(80 lbf•in) grease
2 N•m
(18 lbf•in) 33 N•m
(24 lbf•ft)
7 N•m
(62 lbf•in)
Loctite 243
See tightening procedure
Loctite 243
Loctite 5150
(silicone sealant)
6 N•m 7 N•m
Loctite 567
(pipe sealant)
smr2012-034-001_a
smr2012-034 5
STEERING COLUMN SUPPORT AND CABLE

GTX/RXT Series and WAKE PRO
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
Models with suspension
Loctite 5150
(silicone sealant)
7 Nm 6 Nm
2.5 Nm Loctite 567
(22 lbfin) (pipe sealant)
smr2011-033-004_b
6 smr2012-034
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (O.T.A.S.)
The O.T.A.S. (Off-Throttle Assisted Steering) pro-
vides additional maneuverability in off-throttle sit-
uations.
The system uses a pair of magnets attached to the
steering column and a Hall effect switch attached
to the steering column support.
When activated by a magnet, the O.T.A.S. switch
sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM activates a pre-programmed RPM set- smr2012-034-030_a
ting when the driver initiates a full turn after relea- ACCESS FROM ENGINE COMPARTMENT
sing throttle lever. The engine RPM is controlled 1. Loosen bolts
by the Intelligent Throttle Control (iTC).
2. Turn adjustment nut 1 turn at a time in the di-
The O.T.A.S. system is activated in the following rection shown in following table.
conditions:
– The engine speed must be above 4000 RPM for REQUIRED TOOL
at least 1.5 second (approximately). MODIFIED WRENCH 22 mm (7/8 in) x 100
– The throttle lever must be released completely. mm (4 in) (P/N none)
– The steering must be fully turned within approx-
imately 4 seconds after throttle release.
The O.T.A.S. will stay activated for a random
period of time as long as the O.T.A.S. switch is
closed.
O.T.A.S. will be deactivated if:
– The throttle is reapplied, or
– The steering is turned sufficiently to open the
O.T.A.S. switch for more than one second.
ADJUSTMENT
STEERING ALIGNMENT
Models without Suspension
Work from engine compartment to reach adjust-
ment nut.
1. Loosen steering cable clamp bolts. Do NOT re-
move bolts.
smr2012-034 7
ACCESS FROM ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WATERCRAFT
WHAT TO DO
BEHAVIOR
Turn steering cable
adjustment nut as shown
Pulls on left
side
smr2012-034-034_a
ACCESS FROM FRONT STORAGE COMPARTMENT

1. Loosen bolts
Turn steering cable
adjustment nut as shown 2. Turn adjustment nut 1 turn at a time in the di-
rection shown in following table.
REQUIRED TOOL
Pulls on right MODIFIED WRENCH 22 mm (7/8 in) x 100

side mm (4 in) (P/N none)
3. Tighten steering cable clamp bolts to specifica-

tion.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
4. Test watercraft.
5. Readjust adjustment nut as necessary.
Set suspension to its maximum UP position or
safely lift.
Work from front storage compartment to reach
adjustment nut.
1. Loosen steering cable clamp bolts. Do NOT re-
move bolts.
8 smr2012-034
ACCESS FROM FRONT STORAGE

COMPARTMENT
WATERCRAFT
WHAT TO DO
BEHAVIOR
Turn steering cable
adjustment nut as shown
Pulls on left
side
smo2010-002-005_a
EXTENSION TUBE RETAINING SCREWS (4)
2. Pull out or push in the handlebar grips to adjust

handlebar width.
Turn steering cable
adjustment nut as shown NOTE: The handlebar width factory set position
is fully closed. The handlebar width may be in-
creased by 2.5 cm (1 in) each side.
3. Rotate the handlebar grips to the desired posi-
Pulls on right tion of the controls.
side
NOTE: Rotating the handlebar grips rotates the
handlebar extension tubes and controls. The ex-
tension tubes may be rotated plus or minus 18°
from the factory set position.
3. Tighten steering cable clamp bolts to specifica-

tion.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
4. Test watercraft.
5. Readjust adjustment nut as necessary.
ADJUSTABLE ERGONOMIC
STEERING (AES) smo2010-002-006_a
Models with AES Steering ERGONOMIC ADJUSTMENTS

Step 1: Adjust handlebar width
The handlebar may be adjusted to driver prefer- Step 2: Adjust angular position of controls
ence by extending and rotating the handlebar ex-
tension tubes. 4. Using the index marks and scales on each side
of the handlebar, ensure identical width and
To adjust, carry out the following steps: angular position of both handlebar extension
1. Loosen the screws (2 each side) that secure the tubes.
handlebar extension tubes.
smr2012-034 9
If O.T.A.S. works when handlebar is turned on one

side only, check:
– Magnets condition
– If magnets and switch are securely installed.
,
To confirm is O.T.A.S. is functional, carry out
O.T.A.S. OPERATION in this subsection. If it is
not possible, carry out O.T.A.S. SWITCH TEST
WITH B.U.D.S.
PROCEDURES
smo2010-002-006_b
1.
2.
Width index
Width scale
HANDLEBAR GRIP
3. Angular position index
4. Angular position scale Handlebar Grip Removal
To remove handlebar grip, remove the cap, then
5. Torque handlebar retaining screws to 9 N•m the retaining screw.
(80 lbf•in).
INSPECTION
O.T.A.S. OPERATION
This test is to be performed with the watercraft in
the water (test tank or on a trailer).
NOTICE If the test is performed on a trailer,
ensure no debris or rocks can damage the jet
pump.
Start engine. smr2009-037-006_a
TYPICAL – GTX LTD iS SHOWN

Raise engine speed higher than 4000 RPM for 1. Handlebar grip
2. Handlebar grip screw
more than 1 second.
Release throttle while steering is in the straight Pull out handlebar grip and remove grip insert
ahead position. from handlebar.
Within 1 to 3 seconds, turn handlebar all the way
to one side.
The O.T.A.S. should come on by keeping or
increasing engine speed to approximately
3000 RPM.
Then, engine speed will gradually decrease to idle
speed within approximately 5 seconds.
Repeat test for the other side.
If the engine does not behave as described, carry
out the O.T.A.S. SWITCH TEST WITH B.U.D.S. smr2009-037-007_a

TROUBLESHOOTING 1. Grip insert
NOTE: Verify grip insert for damage.

DIAGNOSTIC TIPS
Handlebar Grip Installation
Check fault codes as a first troubleshooting step.
When installing the grip insert in the handlebar,
ensure that it is properly inserted in the slot at the
end of the handlebar tubing.
10 smr2012-034
smr2009-037-010_a
smr2009-037-008_a
RH SIDE SHOWN
TYPICAL – GTX LTD iS SHOWN 1. Cover slots
1. Grip insert
2. Twist screwdriver to open cover.
Install handlebar grip on handlebar matching it to
the notch in the handlebar. 3. Remove the switch cover.
Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060) on Models with AES Steering
screw threads (or use new self-locking screws). 1. Remove the 2 screws at front of the upper han-
Install flat washer and handlebar grip screw. dlebar housing.
NOTICE Ensure to install flat washer other-
wise screw will damage the grip end.
Torque handlebar grip screw to 7 N•m (62 lbf•in).
Install cap.
smr2010-031-001_a
smr2009-037-009_a Step 1: Remove these two screws

1. Grip insert 2. Remove the screw at rear of the handlebar.
2. Grip
3. Flat washer
4. Screw
5. Cap
HANDLEBAR SWITCH COVER

(LH OR RH)
Handlebar Switch Cover Removal (LH
or RH)
Models without AES Steering
1. Insert the end of a small screwdriver in one of
cover slots.
smr2010-031-002_a
smr2012-034 11
NOTICE Do not try to pull the cover off the 2. Insert the front tab and tilt the cover over the
housing at this time. switches (applicable models).
3. Hold the housing cover to prevent it from falling
off the handlebar when unlocking the upper
housing in the following step.
4. Using a small screwdriver, unlock the tab retain-
ing the upper housing and pull the upper hous-
ing off.
NOTICE As you remove the upper housing,
hold the housing cover to prevent it from
falling off the handlebar.
smr2009-037-012_a
TYPICAL — RH SIDE SHOWN

1. Front tab
3. Press on the cover to lock it.

1. Route wires to avoid pinching them.
2. Position the housing cover onto the handlebar
housing.
smr2010-031-003_a
3. Ensure positioning of corrugated conduit
Step 4: Unlock this tab
5. Remove the housing cover from the handlebar.
smr2010-031-009_b
Step 1: Ensure wiring is properly routed

Step 2: Install housing cover
smr2010-031-004_a
Step 5: Remove housing cover 4. Position the upper housing on the handlebar
housing.
Handlebar Switch Cover Installation 5. Ensure proper engagement of the upper hous-
(LH or RH) ing and cover tabs.
1. Install the round rubber button in the cover.
12 smr2012-034
sbg2010-002-001_b
FRONT STEERING EXTENSION BLOCK

3, 4:
smr2010-031-010_b
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800
060) (or install new self-locking screws).
Step 4: Ensure engagement of housing cover retaining tabs Torque to 33 N•m (24 lbf•ft)
Step 5: Ensure engagement of upper housing locking tabs 5 to 8:
Torque to 22 N•m (16 lbf•ft)
6. Install the three retaining screws for the upper
housing and torque them to 2 N•m (18 lbf•in). Install engine cut-off switch (D.E.S.S. post) retain-
ing nut. Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM.
7. Ensure proper operation of throttle lever.
EXTENSION BLOCKS STEERING COVER

(AES STEERING) Steering Cover Removal
Extension Block Removal Models without AES Steering
1. Remove all socket screws (8x) that retain the 1. Remove the engine cut-off switch (D.E.S.S.
front and the rear extension blocks. post) retaining nut. Refer to IGNITION SYS-
TEM.
2. Separate both extension blocks.
2. Remove both handlebar switch covers. See
3. Remove the engine cut-off switch (D.E.S.S. procedure in this subsection.
post) retaining nut. Refer to IGNITION SYS-
TEM. 3. Unlock steering cover from steering.
3.1 Insert a small tool, such as an Allen key,
Extension Block Installation into a steering cover hole. Press the tool
Tighten screws to specification as per illustrated against the retaining tab to unlock it. Re-
sequence. peat for the other side.
NOTICE The tool must be inserted per-
fectly straight to avoid breaking the tab
holder.
sbg2010-002-002_b
REAR STEERING EXTENSION BLOCK

Torque to 33 N•m (24 lbf•ft)
smr2009-037-013_a
1. Allen key
smr2012-034 13
3.2 In both cavities at the back of steering

cover, release both inner retaining tabs
using a long screwdriver.
smr2009-037-014_a
smr2012-034-007_a
1. Rear cavity 1. Steering cover
2. Retaining screws
3.3 Release the five retaining tabs at the rear
of steering cover. Steering Cover Installation
All Models Except RXT-X/RXP-X Series
1. Install the engine cut-off switch.
1.1 Index the alignment pin of the engine cut-
off switch with the notch of steering cover.
smr2009-037-016_a
1. Retaining tabs
3.4 Remove the foam inside the steering

cover.
3.5 Remove the engine cut-off switch from
the steering cover. smr2009-037-017_a
RXT-X/RXP-X Series 1. Steering cover notch
1. Separate the extension blocks. See procedure 1.2 Press the engine cut-off switch until retain-
in this subsection. ing tab is positioned correctly.
2. Remove screws securing the steering cover
(underneath steering cover) to the front exten-
sion block.
smr2009-037-018_a
1. Retaining tab
14 smr2012-034
2. Install the engine cut-off switch nut and tighten THROTTLE AND iBR LEVERS
it to 2 N•m (18 lbf•in).
NOTE: The following procedure demonstrates
3. Install the foam. the replacement of the throttle lever but the same
4. Place the engine cut-off switch harness in foam procedure will be used for the iBR lever.
slot.
5. Install the steering cover. Lever Replacement
5.1 Check if all harnesses are route properly. 1. Remove HANDLEBAR SWITCH COVER, see
All harness must be inserted in its slot. procedure in this subsection.
2. Remove the screw and washer securing throt-
tle lever.
3. Remove throttle lever and its bushings.
smr2009-037-019_a
1. Harness slots
5.2 Clip the top of the cover.

5.3 Stretch the bottom of the steering cover smr2009-037-031_a
until the cover edge passes over the inner 1. Retaining screw
2. Washer
ribs. 3. Bushings
4. Throttle lever
4. Clean throttle lever area from dust or any de-

posits.
5. Apply XPS SYNTHETIC GREASE (P/N 293 550 010)
on bushings and on the outer surface of the re-
turn tab.
smr2009-037-020_a
STEERING REMOVED FOR CLARITY PURPOSE

1. Inner ribs
5.4 Push both side of the cover to lock it with

the steering column.
5.5 Install switch covers. smr2009-037-032_a
RXT-X/RXP-X Series 1. Apply grease here
The installation is the reverse of the removal pro- 6. Install the lever.
cedure.
6.1 Install both bushings in lever hole.
6.2 Insert sensor lever end into throttle lever
fork.
6.3 Position the return tab against the handle-
bar.
smr2012-034 15
6.4 Secure the lever with washer and screw.

6.5 Tighten the lever screw to 0.7 N•m
(6 lbf•in).
7. Reinstall all removed parts using appropriate
procedures.
STEERING CABLE
Steering Cable Replacement smr2009-042-007_a
TYPICAL
GTS/GTI Series, GTR, WAKE and RXP-X Series 1. Steering column
2. Steering column clamp bolts
Remove seat. 3. Steering column clamp
4. Steering cable adjusting nut
Open the front storage compartment cover.
Remove access cover. 1.4 Place steering in its lower position (models
Remove the gauge trim. Refer to BODY subsec- with tilt steering).
tion. 1.5 Free steering cable from the clamp.
RXT/GTX without Suspension 1. At rear of the watercraft, disconnect ball joint
from jet pump nozzle arm.
Open the seat and the front storage compartment
cover.
Remove the storage basket.
Remove the gauge support. Refer to GAUGE sub-
section.
Remove the moving deck. Refer to BODY sub-
section.
Remove the adjusting nut from steering cable
end.
All Models
smr2009-037-004_a
1. Detach steering cable from steering column. 1. Steering cable bolt
2. Nozzle arm
1.1 Remove the bolt securing the ball joint to
the steering column arm. 2. Remove ball joint and jam nut from cable.
smr2009-037-021_a
smr2009-042-006_a
1. Steering cable
1. Steering cable ball joint 2. Jam nut
2. Steering column arm 3. Ball joint
1.2 Remove the steering cable clamp bolts. 3. Using the STEERING CABLE TOOL (P/N 295 000
1.3 Unhook steering cable clamp. 145), loosen steering cable nut.
16 smr2012-034
10.3 Secure steering cable with the steering

cable nut.
295000145
10.4 Tighten nut to 6 N•m (53 lbf•in).
11. Install the ball joint on the end of the steering
cable.
11.1 The threaded portion of steering cable
inserted into ball joint should be within
9 mm ± 1 mm (.354 in ± .039 in).
smr2011-033-011_a
smr2006-031-006_a
1. Steering cable nut
2. Steering cable A. 9 mm ± 1 mm (.354 in ± .039 in)
4. Remove steering cable nut, half rings and 11.2 Tighten jam nut to 2.5 N•m (22 lbf•in).
O-ring. 11.3 Position the steering cable ball joint to the
nozzle as per following illustration.
smr2009-037-023_a
TYPICAL - PUMP AND iBR SYSTEM REMOVED FOR CLARITY

PURPOSE ONLY
1. Steering cable smr2009-037-025_a
2. Steering cable nut TYPICAL
3. Half rings 1. Ball joint bolt
4. O-ring 2. Ball joint under nozzle arm
3. Washer
5. Remove the adjusting nut from the new steer- 4. Nut
ing cable.
11.4 Tighten ball joint nut to 7 N•m (62 lbf•in).
6. From inside the hull, pull the aft end of the cable
through the hull fitting. RXT/GTX with Suspension
7. Using a piece of hose, attach one end of the 1. Check if the cable bellow is properly positioned
new cable to the opposite end of the old cable all around steering cable.
together.
8. Route the new cable in the hull by slowly pulling
the old one, then separate cable ends.
9. From inside of the hull, pass the aft end of the
cable through the hull fitting.
10. Secure the steering cable to the hull fitting.
10.1 Install O-ring and half rings.
10.2 Apply LOCTITE 567 (PIPE SEALANT)
(P/N 293 800 013) on nut threads.
smr2012-034 17
6. Install other removed parts.
Steering Cable Adjustment

Steering cable adjustment is required only if:
– A steering cable end ball joint has been replaced
or loosened/tightened.
– Steering cable adjustment nut has been loos-
ened/tightened.
– Steering cable has been replaced.
smr2009-037-026_a – Steering column or support has been replaced.
1. Check fit
Models with iBR
2. Reinstall the moving deck. Refer to BODY sub- Raise the iBR gate by activating the iBR override
section for complete procedure. function. Refer to iBR AND VTS subsection.
All Models All Models
1. Carry out STEERING ALIGNMENT. See proce- Refer to STEERING CABLE in this subsection and:
dure in this subsection. – Detach steering cable end from steering col-
2. Insert the steering cable through the bottom umn.
end of the steering column. – Unhook steering cable form retaining clamp of
3. Install steering cable clamp and its bolts. Do steering column support.
not tighten bolts yet. 1. Position jet pump nozzle as follows:
1.1 Place a straight edge on the nozzle end.
1.2 Measure the distance from the transom
each side of the straight edge.
smr2009-042-007_a
1. Steering column
3. Steering column clamp
4. Attach steering cable to steering column arm. smr2011-033-010_a
VIEW FROM UNDERNEATH THE HULL — MODELS WITH iBR

SHOWN
1. Straight edge
2. Nozzle
A. LH side measure
B. RH side measure
1.3 Turn nozzle so that measures A and B are

equal.
2. Adjust steering cable as follows:
2.1 Turn adjustment nut to reach specification.
smr2009-042-006_a
1. Steering cable ball joint

2. Steering column arm
5. Tighten retaining bolt to 5 N•m (44 lbf•in).
18 smr2012-034
STEERING ADJUSTMENT NOTE: When handlebar is in straight position and

SPECIFICATION steering cable is installed, steering nozzle may not
be parallel to transom. This is to offset jet pump
187.7 mm (7.39 in)
thrust.
NOTE: This specification gives the 3. Test ride watercraft.
proper nozzle adjustment to offset the
jet pump thrust. 3.1 If watercraft pull on one side, carry out
STEERING ALIGNMENT in this subsec-
NOTE: Be careful not to move inner rod as it tion.
would alter nozzle position.
STEERING COLUMN
Steering Column Removal
GTS/GTI Series, GTR, WAKE and RXP-X Series
Open the front storage cover.
Remove the access cover.
Remove gauge trim, refer to BODY subsection.
GTX/RXT Series and WAKE PRO
smr2012-034-005_c
Open the front storage cover and remove the stor-
1. Adjustment nut age basket.
2. Do NOT move inner rod
Remove the gauge support. Refer to GAUGE sub-
A. 187.7 mm (7.39 in)
section.
2.2 Recheck nozzle position. If it moved, repo- 1. Disconnect both connectors under the steering
sition it and readjust cable nut. column.
2.3 Reinstall steering cable. Pay attention not
to turn the adjustment nut as it would alter
adjustment.
NOTE: Tape can be used over adjustment
nut to prevent altering adjustment.
smr2010-046-015_a
1. Steering connector
2. O.T.A.S. connector
All Models
2. Remove both screws securing the steering col-
smr2012-034-006_a umn.
1. Tape adjustment nut to cable housing to prevent altering
adjustment
2.4 Tighten steering cable clamp bolts to spec-

ification.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
smr2012-034 19
smr2009-037-027_a
1. Steering column screws
3. Pull steering column out of its support. Ensure smr2011-033-006_a
to not damage wiring harness connectors and MODELS WITHOUT TILT STEERING
1. Steering column support
O.T.A.S. magnets. 2. Upper bushing
3. Lower bushing
Steering Column Inspection
Check wear sleeve behind the steering column
Check steering column for: arm.
– Cracks
– Stress marks
– Sings of wear.
Check steering column support bushings.
smr2009-037-029_a
1. Wear sleeve
2. Steering column arm
Replace any damaged or worn parts.
Steering Column Installation

The installation is essentially the reverse of the re-
smr2011-033-005_a
moval procedure. However, pay attention to the
MODELS WITH TILT STEERING following.
2. Upper bushing Carefully, drive steering column through steering
3. Lower bushing column support. Ensure not to hit the O.T.A.S.
magnet during steering column installation.
Tighten steering column screws to 6 N•m
(53 lbf•in).
Reinstall all removed parts using appropriate pro-
cedure.
20 smr2012-034
STEERING COLUMN SUPPORT 4. Remove the gauge support. Refer to GAUGE

subsection.
Steering Column Support Removal
5. On both sides, remove both pivot bushings
(GTS/GTI Series, GTR, WAKE and (steering column support and steering adjust-
RXP-X Series) ment handle).
1. Remove steering column, see procedure in this
subsection.
2. Remove console, refer to BODY subsection.
3. Remove steering column support retaining
screws.
smr2009-037-033_a
1. Pivot bushing of steering column support

2. Pivot bushing of steering adjustment handle
NOTE: If pivot bushings retaining steering column

are hard to remove, remove the retaining screw
from the center hole and tighten it into the offset
hole. Tighten screw until the pivot bushing comes
out of steering column support.
smr2011-033-007_a

2. Retaining screws
Steering Column Support Removal

(GTX/RXT Series and WAKE PRO)
1. Refer to BODY and remove the following parts:
– Storage compartment cover
– Front grille (models with suspension)
– Body covers.
2. Remove storage basket.
smr2009-037-040_a
3. Disconnect both connectors under the steering 1. Center hole
column. 2. Offset hole
6. Remove steering column support and steering

adjustment handle from vehicle.
7. Remove STEERING COLUMN from its support.
See the procedure in this subsection.
Steering Column Support Installation

dure.
smr2010-046-015_a
smr2012-034 21
STEERING TILT RELEASE

HANDLE
Steering Tilt Release Handle
Replacement
Use the same procedure as for STEERING COL-
UMN SUPPORT.
O.T.A.S. SWITCH
O.T.A.S. Switch Test with B.U.D.S.
Connect watercraft to B.U.D.S. Refer to COMMU-
NICATION TOOLS AND B.U.D.S. subsection.
Select the Monitoring and iBR tabs. smo2011-003-011_c
1. Access panel
Briefly press the START/STOP button to wake up
the ECM. GTX/RXT Series and WAKE PRO
Install the tether cord on the engine cut-off Open front storage compartment cover.
switch.
Remove front storage bin.
While monitoring the O.T.A.S. indicator in
Disconnect the top air ventilation hoses.
B.U.D.S., completely turn steering in one di-
rection and keep it in this position.
The O.T.A.S. indicator should turn on when han-
dlebar reaches the stopper.
sbl2010-004-002

Open front storage compartment cover.
smr2009-037-034_a
Remove front storage bin.
MONITORING AND iBR TABS
1. O.T.A.S. indicator For easier access, rise the moving deck using the
iS "up" button.
Repeat test for the other side.
If O.T.A.S. indicator does not turn on, carry out the All Models
O.T.A.S. SWITCH INPUT VOLTAGE TEST. Disconnect the O.T.A.S. connector (keep the
24-pin steering harness connected.
O.T.A.S. Switch Input Voltage Test
Access the O.T.A.S. connector as follows:
GTS/GTI Series, GTR, WAKE and RXP-X Series
cess panel.
22 smr2012-034
529036188
Press the START/STOP button to activate the

electrical system.
Using the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035
868), check ground circuit as follows.
smr2010-046-015_a VOLTAGE
TEST PROBES
1. Steering connector (VDC)
PIN A PIN B
Connect the DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS (P/N 529 036 (3-pin (3-pin Battery voltage
188) in-line between the disconnected O.T.A.S. connector) connector)
connectors.
If voltage is not as specified, check wiring and
connectors.
If voltage is as specified, carry out the O.T.A.S.
SWITCH SIGNAL TEST.
O.T.A.S. Switch Signal Test
Install the DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS (P/N 529 036 188)
as described in the O.T.A.S. SWITCH INPUT VOLT-
529036188 AGE TEST.
electrical system.
868), measure voltage as follows.
VOLTAGE
TEST PROBES
(VDC)
PIN A
Battery 529036188
(3-pin Battery voltage
negative post
connector) Press the START/STOP button to activate the
electrical system.
If voltage is not as specified, check wiring and
connectors. Using the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035
868), check switch signal as follows.
If voltage is as specified, carry out the O.T.A.S.
SWITCH GROUND TEST. TEST PROBES
HANDLEBAR
VOLTAGE
POSITION
O.T.A.S. Switch Ground Test Straight 0.6 to 0.8
Install the DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS (P/N 529 036 188) ahead Vdc
as described in the O.T.A.S. SWITCH INPUT VOLT- Turned
AGE TEST. PIN C PIN B
completely
(3-pin (3-pin
to the right 2.0 to 2.5
connector) connector)
Turned Vdc
completely
to the left
smr2012-034 23
If voltage is not as specified, replace the switch. O.T.A.S. MAGNETS

NOTE: To avoid useless switch replacement, Magnets Replacement
make sure magnets are in good condition. Also,
make sure magnets and switch are securely 1. Remove STEERING COLUMN, see procedure
clipped. in this subsection.
2. Pull magnets off the steering column.
O.T.A.S. Switch Replacement
Models Without Tilt Steering
Remove steering column, see procedure in this
subsection.
Models with Tilt Steering
Remove STEERING COLUMN SUPPORT, see
procedure in this subsection.
Remove steering column from its support by re-
moving both retaining screws.
smr2011-033-008_a
1. Magnets
2. Steering column
Reverse removal procedure to reinstall the mag-

nets.
smr2009-037-027_a
1. Steering column screws
All Models
1. Using a small screwdriver, unhook the switch
from steering support.
smr2009-037-038_a
1. Switch retaining tabs
Reverse removal procedure to reinstall the

O.T.A.S. switch.
24 smr2012-034
Subsection XX (iBR AND VTS)
iBR AND VTS

SERVICE TOOLS
DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS ............................................................... 529 036 188 ..................................... 15, 17
FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER ............................................................ 529 035 868 ......................... 15, 22–23, 41
SERVICE PRODUCTS
DIELECTRIC GREASE ................................................................... 293 550 004 ..................................... 26, 42
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ........................................... 26
smr2012-035 1
iBR GATE COMPONENTS
NEW
14 N•m
(124 lbf•in)
NEW
24 N•m
(18 lbf•ft)
NEW NEW
Loctite 4 N•m 14 N•m
243 (35 lbf•in) (124 lbf•in)
8 N•m Loctite
(71 lbf•in) 243
NEW NEW NEW 24 N•m

32 N•m 24 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
(24 lbf•ft) (18 lbf•ft) 8 N•m
(71 lbf•in)
4 N•m
(35 lbf•in)
NEW
Loctite 243
NEW 14 N•m
(124 lbf•in)
GTI Series
GTR
NEW 8 N•m Wake
24 N•m (71 lbf•in)
(18 lbf•ft)
8 N•m
(71 lbf•in)
Silicone
sealant 5150
4.5 N•m
Loctite 243 (40 lbf•in)
NEW = Component must be replaced
when removed. NEW 6 N•m (53 lbf•in)
smr2013-008-100_b
2 smr2012-035
iBR ACTUATOR
See procedure
14 N•m
(124 lbf•in)
NEW
NEW
12 N•m
(106 lbf•in)
smr2013-008-101_a
smr2012-035 3
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (iBR)
The iBR (intelligent Brake and Reverse) is an elec-
tronically controlled braking and reverse system.
The iBR module controls the position of the iBR
gate to provide forward thrust, reverse thrust,
braking thrust, and neutral.
The operator commands the position of the iBR
gate using either the throttle lever for forward
thrust, or the iBR lever for neutral, reverse, and
for the braking function. sdd2009-001-029_a
The iBR lever is located on the LH side of the han- 1. iBR lever
2. BRLS sensor
dlebar.
The BRLS sends the signals to the iBR module.
The iBR module controls an electric motor that in
turn raises or lowers the iBR gate through a me-
chanical drive unit.
NOTE: The iBR gate will move when commanded
by the iBR lever only if the engine is running. For
maintenance purposes, the iBR OVERRIDE func-
tion available through the gauge can be used to
electrically move the gate to the desired position.
sdd2009-001-036_a
The iBR module is programmed with various pa-
1. iBR lever (intelligent Brake and Reverse) rameters that it compares to the input signals and
information it obtains through the CAN bus from
the other electronic modules.
Depending on vehicle speed and how far the iBR
lever is pulled in, the iBR module will automatically
adjust the iBR gate movement speed and stroke.
NOTE: The iBR lever must be pulled in at least
25% of its travel (approximately) before the iBR
gate starts to move. The first 25% of iBR lever
travel has no effect on the iBR gate.
Every time the iBR gate moves when commanded
by the iBR lever, engine RPM is momentarily re-
duced to idle speed as the gate moves.
smr2013-008-203_a
1. iBR gate WARNING

2. iBR module and motor
3. Jet pump If it is necessary to remove any foreign ob-
ject catch in the iBR gate, nozzle or linkages,
When the iBR lever is pulled in, it operates the strictly observe the following before proceed-
brake and reverse lever sensor (BRLS). It is a dou- ing:
ble output hall effect sensor. The redundancy is – Remove tether cord from engine cut-off
used for security purposes. switch.
– Wait at least 5 minutes or remove iBR
fuses.
– Do not press on START/STOP button. If
START/STOP button is pressed, wait an-
other 5 minutes.
4 smr2012-035
Forward Mode creased, as necessary, to apply a stronger braking

To engage forward: effect with the jet pump thrust when the condi-
tions dictate.
– Start engine
– Pull in the throttle lever. As the watercraft slows to less than 8 km/h
(5 MPH), the following occurs:
The iBR gate will automatically move to the for-
– Braking mode ceases.
ward position (full up).
– Reverse mode takes over if the iBR lever is not
NOTE: The full up position of the iBR gate is de- released.
pendent on the selected VTS trim position.
– Throttle control reverts back to the throttle
Reverse Mode lever.
If the watercraft speed is below 8 km/h (5 MPH) Neutral Mode
when the iBR lever is pulled in, reverse mode is
Every time the iBR lever is pulled in and released,
engaged.
the iBR gate will default to the neutral position,
When the iBR lever is pulled in to engage reverse, except if the throttle lever is still pulled in when
the following occurs: the iBR lever is released. If the throttle lever is
– Engine RPM is reduced to idle. still pulled, the iBR gate will move to the forward
– The iBR gate moves to the reverse position. position when the iBR lever is released and the
– Engine RPM ramps up to the engine power watercraft will accelerate forward.
commanded by the throttle lever.
iBR Override Function
When operating in reverse mode, the iBR lever
controls the iBR gate position and the engine RPM To permit easy access to the jet pump, nozzle, iBR
is controlled by the throttle lever. gate, and various linkages for inspection, mainte-
nance, cleaning or removal of debris, the iBR sys-
The iBR gate position can be modulated anywhere tem provides for an iBR override function that is
between the neutral and full reverse positions de- accessible through the information center.
pending on the position of the iBR lever. If the
iBR lever position is varied during reverse opera- When iBR override is activated, it allows the
tion, engine RPM is reduced to idle every time the user to electrically move the iBR gate and nozzle
iBR gate moves. It is therefore recommended to through its full range of motion.
maintain the iBR lever completely pulled in. NOTICE An object or tool catch in the iBR
Maximum engine RPM in reverse is 5000 RPM. gate, nozzle or linkages when using the iBR
override function may cause damage to these
Braking Mode components. Remove any foreign object that
If the watercraft speed is 8 km/h (5 MPH) per hour may obstruct the iBR gate travel.
and above when the iBR lever is pulled in, braking Activating iBR Override Function
mode is engaged.
When the iBR lever is pulled in to engage braking, WARNING
the following occurs: When using the iBR override function, ensure
– Engine RPM is reduced to idle. nobody stands near the rear of the watercraft.
– The iBR gate moves to the maximum down po- Movement of the iBR gate may squeeze fin-
sition. gers.
– Engine RPM ramps up to the engine power
commanded by the iBR lever. To use the iBR override function, carry out the fol-
lowing step.
When operating in braking mode, the iBR gate al-
ways moves to the maximum down position. The 1. Press the START/STOP button.
throttle lever signal is overridden and engine RPM 2. Install the tether cord.
is now dependent on watercraft speed and how
far the iBR lever is pulled in.
If watercraft speed is high when braking is ap-
plied, engine power will be initially low and
then ramp up to the power commanded by the
iBR lever position. The engine RPM may be in-
smr2012-035 5
sdd2009-001-019_g
Step 1: Press START/STOP button

Step 2: Install tether cord
smo2009-002-114_ff
NOTE: Do not start the engine. The tether cord iBR OVERRIDE
must be installed to ensure the information center
6. Press the SET button to enter iBR OVR function
will not shut off all indications after its self test
and display OVR OFF.
function. Briefly press the START/STOP button to
reactivate the electrical system when required.
3. Press the Mode button on the RH handlebar re-
peatedly until SETTINGS is visible in the digital
display of the information center.
smo2009-002-114_hh
OVERRIDE OFF
7. Press the UP/DOWN arrow button (RH handle-

bar) to display OVR ON.
smo2009-002-114_y
SETTINGS
4. Press the SET button (RH handlebar) to enter

the Settings function.
5. If iBR OVR is not the following function dis-
played, press the UP/DOWN arrow button until
iBR OVR is displayed.
smo2009-002-114_gg
OVERRIDE ON
6 smr2012-035
8. Press the SET button to select the OVR ON NOTE: Changing the VTS trim position without
function. The gauge will return to its normal dis- the engine running in forward thrust mode only
play. changes the indication. The nozzle will move
to the selected VTS trim position when forward
Models with a VTS Switch thrust is engaged.
9. Press the VTS UP or DOWN button (LH handle-
bar) to move the iBR gate.
Models Without a VTS Switch
10. Press the UP/DOWN arrow button (RH han-
dlebar) to move the iBR gate.
Deactivating iBR Override Function
To deactivate the iBR override function, carry out
one of the following:
1. Repeat previous steps and press the SET but-
ton when OVR OFF is visible.
2. Remove tether cord and wait for the electrical
power to shut off (approximately 3 minutes).
3. Start the engine. sdd2009-001-042_a
NOTE: When the engine is started, the iBR OVR INFORMATION CENTER — VTS POSITION INDICATOR
1. Bow up
function is deactivated and the iBR gate will move 2. Bow down
to the neutral position.
NOTE: Only the segment indicating the relative
WARNING position of the VTS will be on. The illustration
When moving the iBR gate using the iBR shows all segments on as can be seen during the
override function, ensure nobody stands self test function.
near the rear of the watercraft. Movement of The VTS system provides the following features
the gate may squeeze fingers. according to models
– Nozzle trimming
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (VTS) – Selection of 2 preset trim positions
– Recording of 2 preset trim positions.
The VTS system is actually part of the iBR system.
It provides watercraft pitch trim adjustments by Nozzle Trimming
adjusting the horizontal position of the jet nozzle. Watercraft must be operating in forward position.
The VTS can be electrically trimmed to the desired Depending on the model, 5 or 9 trim positions are
attitude within the VTS range, or to one of 2 preset available.
trim positions.
The VTS switch (or Up/Down switch) sends com- Using the VTS Button
mand signals to the gauge. The gauge converts (LH Side of Handlebar)
them to CAN protocol and sends them through Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to change
the CAN bus to the iBR module on the iBR actua- the VTS setting.
tor. The actuator then moves the iBR gate which
moves the nozzle to the desired trim position.
NOTE: The nozzle and iBR gate move together
in the VTS trim range up to the maximum noz-
zle down position. If NEUTRAL, BRAKING or RE-
VERSE is engaged, the iBR gate moves past the
VTS full down position. When FORWARD thrust
is reengaged, the nozzle and iBR gate move up to
the last selected VTS trim position.
The nozzle trim position can be seen on the VTS
position indicator in the information center.
smr2012-035 7
3. Press the SET button to save the desired set-

ting.
Using Preset Trim Positions

Two preset trim positions can be selected.
To select the highest trim position recorded, dou-
ble-click on the VTS UP arrow button (bow up).
To select the lowest trim position recorded, dou-
ble-click on the VTS DOWN arrow button (bow
down).
smo2011-003-018_c
TYPICAL - VTS CONTROL BUTTON

1. Bow up
2. Bow down
Using the Up/Down Button

(RH Side of Handlebar)
1. Press the MODE button to display the VTS
function in the gauge.
2. Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to change
the VTS setting.
sdd2009-001-019_c
TYPICAL - DOUBLE-CLICK UP OR DOWN TO USE PRESET

POSITIONS
1. Highest preset position on UP arrow
2. Lowest preset position on DOWN arrow
Recording Preset Trim Positions

Two different VTS trim positions may be recorded
for quickly selecting the preferred watercraft trim
attitude.
When the VTS PRESET trim positions are
changed, the new settings will remain recorded
sdd2009-001-024_i
in memory.
1. Bow up
2. Bow down To record VTS preset trim positions:
1. Press the START/STOP button.
1 switch.
3. Press the MODE button repeatedly until VTS
MODE is displayed.
smo2010-002-106_a
FUNCTION SELECTED - VTS

1. VTS setting
8 smr2012-035
6. Press the SET button to save PRESET 1 and

display PRESET 2.
7. Set PRESET 2
8. Press the SET button to save the settings.
NOTE: The VTS system will compare the preset
trim settings recorded, the highest position will be
assigned to the UP arrow (bow up), the lowest to
the DOWN arrow.
ADJUSTMENT
sdd2009-001-024_b
1. MODE button
2. SET button
IBR NEUTRAL ADJUSTMENT
3. UP/DOWN arrow button
When in NEUTRAL, if the watercraft creeps
forward or backward, the iBR system may be
trimmed.
If the watercraft is moving forwards, momentarily
press the DOWN arrow button on RH side of han-
dlebar.
If the watercraft is moving backwards, momentar-
ily press the UP arrow button on RH side of han-
dlebar.
smo2009-002-114_d
FUNCTION SELECTED - VTS MODE
4. Press the SET button to display PRESET 1.

5. Press the VTS UP/DOWN button to change the
PRESET 1 VTS position.
sdd2009-001-024_i
TRIMMING THE iBR NEUTRAL POSITION

1. UP arrow button (to stop rearward movement)
2 2. DOWN arrow button (to stop forward movement)
NOTE: Press the UP/DOWN arrow button repeat-

edly until proper adjustment of the neutral position
1 is attained and the watercraft stops moving.
MAINTENANCE
iBR GATE BACKLASH CHECK
1. Using the iBR override function, move the iBR
3 gate to the up position. Refer to SYSTEM DE-
smo2009-002-114_e
SCRIPTION (iBR) in this subsection.
FUNCTION SELECTED - PRESET 1
1. Preset 1 function
2. VTS setting selected to 1
3. VTS position indicator at setting 1 (bow down)
smr2012-035 9
Distance "B" Measurement

Without using excessive force, push up on the
trailing edge of the iBR gate to pick up the back-
lash in the gate mechanism. As you hold the gate
up, measure the distance between the trailing
edge of the guard and the trailing edge of the iBR
gate again. Note as measurement "B".
smr2009-038-017_a
1. iBR gate moved to up position
2. Take hold of the lower edge of the iBR gate and

pull down on it slightly, then release it.
smr2009-038-019_a
1. iBR guard
2. Lift up on iBR gate
3. Measurement "B"
iBR Gate Backlash Calculation

Subtract measurement "B" from "A" to obtain the
smr2009-038-026_a iBR gate backlash.
PULL DOWN SLIGHTLY ON iBR GATE
iBR GATE BACKLASH (A - B)
Distance "A" Measurement MAXIMUM 25 mm (.98 in)
Using a machinists ruler, measure the distance be-
tween the bottom of the guard and the trailing Backlash Measurement Result
edge of the iBR gate. Note as measurement "A". If backlash is excessive, inspect and replace iBR
gate parts as required in the following order:
1. Tightening of screws retaining the U-arm to the
actuator shaft
2. Ribs on actuator shaft end and in U-arm
3. Friction sleeves
4. Bushings
5. Contact points (VTS trim ring, U-arm, iBR gate)
6. iBR actuator.
Check iBR gate backlash and gate operation after
parts replacement and reassembly.
smr2009-038-018_a
1. iBR guard
2. Measurement "A"
10 smr2012-035
FRICTION SLEEVE INSPECTION

REPLACEMENT
The 4 friction sleeves on the VTS trim ring should
IBR SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TEST
be replaced if they show signs of advanced wear Test on Dry Land
(flat spots), or every 100 hours as per the mainte- NOTE: This test requires two persons. One per-
nance schedule. son to start engine and operate controls, and one
person to observe iBR gate movement.
1. Provide adequate ventilation of exhaust gases
or move watercraft outside.
NOTICE Do not install an exhaust ventilation
hose in the iBR gate area or damage may oc-
cur when the iBR gate moves downward dur-
ing operation.
2. Connect a water hose to the watercraft to pro-
vide exhaust system cooling when operating
smr2009-038-021_a
engine. Refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM subsec-
1. Worn friction sleeve (flat spot) tion for procedure.
1. To replace the friction sleeves, remove the iBR NOTICE

gate and VTS ring as an assembly, refer to iBR – Ensure there are no tools or other object that
GATE AND VTS RING REMOVAL in this subsec- may interfere with the iBR gate movement.
tion. – Do not run engine for more than 2 minutes
out of water or damage may occur to drive
shaft seal carrier.
WARNING
The person observing the iBR gate move-
ment must stand to the side of the stern well
clear of the iBR gate and pump nozzle in full
view of the operator.
3. Start engine and let idle.

NOTE: If iBR gate was not in the neutral position,
it will move to the neutral position on engine start
up.
smr2013-008-200_a
4. Depress the throttle lever slightly and visually
1. Friction sleeves (2 per side)
confirm the iBR gate moves to the forward po-
2. Remove the worn friction sleeves from the VTS sition (up to the VTS trim position), then release
ring and install new ones. throttle. The iBR gate must remain in the for-
ward position.
3. Apply service products, torques, and install
new screws with threadlocker as specified in 5. Depress the iBR lever fully and confirm the iBR
the exploded view. gate moves to the full down position.
6. Release the iBR lever completely and confirm
the iBR gate moves to the neutral position.
7. Disconnect water hose then shut engine off.
Test with Watercraft on a Waterway

1. Start engine and let idle.
smr2012-035 11
NOTE: If iBR gate is not in the neutral position be- NOTE: The VTS system cannot be tested without
fore the engine start, it will move to the neutral the engine operating in forward thrust. If the en-
position on engine start up. gine is not running in forward thrust, only the VTS
2. Depress the throttle lever slightly, then release indication will change when the VTS control but-
it. Forward movement of the watercraft con- ton is pressed; the nozzle will not change position
firms the iBR gate has moved to the forward until forward thrust is engaged by pulling the throt-
position. tle lever.
3. Depress the iBR lever fully. Rearward move- 3. Start engine.
ment of the watercraft confirms the iBR gate 4. Pull in and release the throttle lever to engage
has moved to the reverse position. forward thrust, allow engine to run at idle RPM.
4. Release the iBR lever completely. Reverse Models with a VTS Switch
thrust should cease and the watercraft should
continue to drift rearward on momentum. 5. Push the VTS UP and DOWN button alternately
to check VTS operation.
5. Apply a small amount of forward thrust to stop
rearward velocity, then tap the iBR lever to re-
turn the iBR gate to neutral.
6. Shut engine off.
VTS FUNCTIONAL TEST

NOTE: This test requires two persons. One per-
son to start engine and operate controls, and one
person to observe nozzle and iBR gate movement.
1. Provide adequate ventilation of exhaust gases
or move watercraft outside.
sdd2009-001-019_c
NOTICE Do not install an exhaust ventilation
1. VTS up button
hose in the iBR gate area or damage may oc- 2. VTS down button
cur when the iBR gate moves downward dur-
ing operation. 6. Confirm nozzle movement and VTS position in-
dication change in the information center.
2. Connect a water hose to the watercraft to pro-
vide exhaust system cooling when operating
engine. Refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM subsec-
tion for procedure.
NOTICE
– Ensure there are no tools or other object that
may interfere with the iBR gate movement.
– Do not run watercraft for more than 2 min-
utes out of water or damage may occur.
WARNING
The person observing the iBR gate move-
ment must stand to the side of the stern well
clear of the iBR gate and pump nozzle in full
sdd2009-001-042_a
view of the operator. 1. Bow up
2. Bow down
NOTE: Only the segment indicating the relative

position of the VTS will be on. The illustration
shows all segments on as visible during the
gauge self test function.
12 smr2012-035
7. Double click the VTS UP and DOWN button al-

ternately to test the VTS preset trim positions.
If double clicking the VTS UP or DOWN button
does not cause the nozzle position or indication to
change, navigate to the VTS MODE function in the
gauge and check for recorded PRESET 1 and PRE-
SET 2 settings. If no presets are recorded, record
PRESET 1 bow up and PRESET 2 bow down, exit
the function and carry out a new test.
If both PRESET 1 and PRESET 2 have the same
setting, note the operator's setting and change
one PRESET, exit the function and carry out a new sdd2009-001-024_i
test. Return the PRESET to the operator's prefer- 1. UP arrow button

2. DOWN arrow button
ence after testing is complete.
10. Ensure the VTS setting in the gauge moves
Models Without a VTS Switch with the VTS.
8. Press the MODE button to display VTS.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The iBR system is self monitoring. If a fault oc-
curs in the iBR system, it will raise a fault code and
communicate it to the information center through
the CAN bus. The information center will turn on
the iBR indicator light to advise the operator of
the iBR system fault. If the fault remains active,
it may be displayed in the gauge. If it is no longer
active, B.U.D.S. must be used to read the fault.
TESTING SEQUENCE
sdd2009-001-024_e To troubleshoot the iBR system, carry out the fol-
1. MODE button lowing in this order:
– Ensure the iBR gate movement is not ob-
structed in any way.
– Ensure the iBR gate mechanisms (gate, VTS
1 ring, U-arm and linkages) are all in good condi-
tion and do not show signs of excessive wear
or friction.
– Cycle the iBR gate up and down using the iBR
OVERRIDE function as described in this sub-
section.
– Check the iBR power fuse (F5) and the iBR con-
trol fuse (F17) in fuse box if the gate did not
move using the iBR OVERRIDE function.
– Connect the watercraft to B.U.D.S. to check
for iBR system or CAN bus related fault
smo2010-002-106_a
codes. Carry out service actions as indicated
VTS FUNCTION
1. VTS setting in B.U.D.S.
– If a CAN bus communication fault with the iBR
9. Press the UP/DOWN arrow button (RH handle- module is indicated, or the iBR module is not
bar) to change the VTS angle. visible in B.U.D.S., carry out a continuity test
of the CAN bus wires between the iBR mod-
ule and the CAN bus-bars in fuse box. Refer
to CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) sub-
section.
smr2012-035 13
– Try moving the iBR using the iBR UP and iBR

DOWN buttons on the iBR activation page in
B.U.D.S.
– Carry out an iBR SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TEST
to check for proper gate and actuator move-
ment.
– Visually inspect system connectors for mois-
ture ingress, corrosion, and proper contact.
– Check for excessive backlash in the gate mech-
anism.
– Remove the screws retaining the U-arm to the
sdd2009-001-019_g
actuator shaft. Verify alignment, refer to iBR Step 1: Press START/STOP button
MECHANISM ALIGNMENT VERIFICATION. Step 2: Install tether cord
NOTE: Briefly press the START/STOP button to

PROCEDURES reactivate the electrical system when required.
iBR LEVER SENSOR (BRLS) 3. Set the suspension to its maximum height.
This will provide better access to the steering
BRLS Test Using B.U.D.S. connectors.
NOTE: The BRLS is composed of a twin hall ef- NOTE: If more height is required or if the iS sys-
fect sensor. A resistance test of the sensor can- tem cannot be used, manually lift the suspension
not be carried out. using a hoist and the anchor points close to han-
1. Connect watercraft to the latest B.U.D.S. soft- dlebars. Then safety lock it in the up position.
ware, refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS AND NOTICE Do not lift the watercraft using the
B.U.D.S. anchor points.
2. Check for an applicable fault code, refer to DI-
AGNOSTIC AND FAULT CODES. 4. Remove the tether cord and wait approximately
3 minutes for the electrical system power to
3. If a fault is indicated, follow service actions as shut off.
indicated in B.U.D.S.
All Models
BRLS Voltage Test 5. Open the front storage compartment cover and
Test for BRLS input voltage as well as BRLS signal remove the storage bin.
voltages as per following steps.
switch to energize the electrical system.
NOTE: DO NOT start the engine.
smo2009-002-124_a
Step 1: Push storage bin latches backwards (one each side)

Step 2: Lift and tilt forward to remove storage bin
14 smr2012-035

529036188
9. Press the START/STOP button to wake up the

electrical system.
sbl2010-004-002
switch.
All Models
7. Reach in through the storage bin opening un-
der the steering area and disconnect the 24-pin
steering connector.
sdd2009-001-019_g

Step 2: Install tether cord

11. Using a FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035
868) set to Vdc, measure the BRLS voltages
from the test connector of the diagnostic har-
sbl2010-034-018_b ness as per following tables.
TYPICAL - 24-PIN STEERING CONNECTOR DISCONNECT

188) in series between the disconnected steer-
ing connectors.
smr2010-038-003_b
TEST CONNECTOR OF DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS
smr2012-035 15
TEST CONNECTOR
iBR LEVER iBR LEVER
OF DIAGNOSTIC
RELEASED PULLED IN
HARNESS
PINS VOLTAGE (Vdc)
21 15
4.9 - 5.1
22 16
15 18 0.15 - 0.35 1.4 - 1.6
19 16 0.4 - 0.6 2.9 - 3.1
12. If voltage measured is as specified, the BRLS

sensor is functioning properly.
NOTE: When moving iBR lever, BRLS voltage
change should increase or decrease in a steady smr2009-038-001_a
linear fashion. TYPICAL

1. BRLS
13. If voltage is out of specification, carry out a 2. BRLS connector
continuity test of the wiring between the iBR Disconnect the 12-pin connector from the iBR ac-
module and the BRLS sensor, refer to CONTI- tuator. Refer to IBR ACTUATOR CONNECTORS
NUITY TEST OF BRLS WIRING HARNESS. ACCESS in this subsection.
Continuity Test of BRLS Wiring
Harness
1. Ensure the 24-pin steering connector pins are
clean, make good contact, and properly con-
nected.
Models Without the X Package
2. Remove the steering cover, refer to STEERING
Models with the X Package
3. Remove the upper housing and housing cover
from the LH handlebar housing, refer to STEER-
ING AND O.T.A.S. subsection.
All Models
smr2013-008-005_a
4. Disconnect the BRLS connector. 1. 12-pin connector
5. Measure for continuity from the BRLS connec-

tor to the 12-pin iBR actuator connector as per
following table.
CONTINUITY TEST OF BRLS WIRING HARNESS
BRLS 12 PIN iBR

RESISTANCE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
Pin A (VI/BE) Pin 4 (VI/BE)
Pin B (BK) Pin 6 (BK)
Pin C (YL/BR) Pin 8 (YL/BR) Close to 0
Pin D (VI/BE) Pin 7 (VI/BE) (continuity)
Pin E (BK) Pin 9 (BK)

Pin F (YL/WH) Pin 5 (YL/WH)
16 smr2012-035
If continuity is good, replace BRLS. BRLS Removal

If an open circuit or a higher than normal resis- Models Without the X Package
tance is measured, carry out the continuity tests
in the following tables to find the problem wire or 1. Remove steering cover, refer to STEERING
connection: AND O.T.A.S. subsection.
– From the BRLS to the 24-pin steering connector Models with the X Package
– From the steering connectors to the iBR actua- 2. Remove the upper housing and housing cover
tor 12 pin connector. from the LH handlebar housing, refer to STEER-
6. Connect the DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS (P/N 529 036 ING AND O.T.A.S. subsection.
188) to the steering connector (steering side
All Models
only).
3. Open the sensor retaining tabs.
NOTE: Resistance readings may be slightly
higher than normal (maximum .5 ) when mea- 4. Pull up on the connector end of the BRLS.
suring from the test connector on the diagnostic 5. Gently pull the sensor from its support and the
harness. iBR lever. Depress the lever as required to ease
CONTINUITY TEST BRLS TO 24-PIN
sensor removal.
STEERING CONNECTOR
TEST
BRLS RESISTANCE
CONNECTOR
Pin A
Pin 21 (VI/BE)
(VI/BE)
Pin B (BK) Pin 15 (BK)
Pin C
Pin 18 (YL/BR)
(YL/BR) Close to 0
Pin D (continuity)
Pin 22 (VI/BE)
(VI/BE)
Pin E (BK) Pin 16 (BK)
Pin F
Pin 19 (YL/WH)
(YL/WH) smr2009-038-001_c
TYPICAL
7. Connect the DIAGNOSTIC HARNESS (P/N 529 1. BRLS
036 188) to the steering connector (vehicle 2. BRLS connector
3. Sensor retaining tabs
side only).
CONTINUITY TEST STEERING CONNECTORS
6. Remove connector from the BRLS.
TO iBR CONNECTOR
BRLS Installation
TEST
12 PIN iBR RESISTANCE Models Without the X Package
CONNECTOR
Pin 7 1. Install BRLS sensor in the reverse order of re-
Pin 22 (VI/BE) moval.
(VI/BE)
Pin 16 (BK) Pin 9 (BK) 2. Ensure wiring harness is properly routed
through slot provided in sensor support be-
Pin 5 fore installing steering cover.
Pin 19 (YL/WH)
(YL/WH) Close to 0
Pin 4 (continuity)
Pin 21 (VI/BE)
(VI/BE)
Pin 15 (BK) Pin 6 (BK)
Pin 8
Pin 18 (YL/BR)
(YL/BR)
8. Repair or replace wiring/connector as required.

smr2012-035 17
smr2010-042-005_a
Step 2: Insert BRLS in iBR lever

Step 3: Ensure locking tab engagement
Step 4: Ensure wiring is not pinched
smr2009-038-001_b Step 5: Install housing cover
1. Wire harness routed in slot
3. Ensure there are no fault codes. Connect wa- 7. Position the upper housing onto the handlebar.
tercraft to the latest B.U.D.S. software, refer to 8. Ensure proper engagement of the housing and
DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT CODES. cover tabs.
4. Carry out an iBR SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TEST
using the iBR lever (engine must be running).
Models with the X Package
Install BRLS sensor in the reverse order of re-
moval. However, pay attention to the following:
1. Install connector on BRLS and ensure wiring is
properly positioned in handlebar housing.
smr2010-042-006_a
Step 7: Ensure engagement of housing cover retaining tabs

Step 8: Ensure engagement of upper housing locking tabs
9. Install the three retaining screws for the upper

housing and torque them to 2 N•m (18 lbf•in).
10. Ensure there are no fault codes. Connect wa-
tercraft to the latest B.U.D.S. software, refer
smr2010-042-004_a
to DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT CODES.
11. Carry out an iBR SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TEST
2. Insert the BRLS in the iBR lever. using the iBR lever (engine must be running).
3. Align the BRLS in the housing, then press it into
the housing until both locking tabs engage. En- iBR ACTUATOR
sure it is properly locked in place.
4. Ensure wiring is not pinched. NOTICE The iBR actuator motor must never
5. Position the housing cover onto the handlebar be tested by applying 12 Vdc directly to it's
housing. connector. Doing so may cause a lock-up and
damage internal actuator components, ne-
6. Ensure positioning of corrugated conduit cessitating replacement of the iBR actuator
assembly.
18 smr2012-035
iBR Actuator Operation Test Using

B.U.D.S.
1. Connect watercraft to the latest B.U.D.S. soft-
ware, refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS AND
B.U.D.S.
2. Click the Read Data button.
3. Check for applicable fault codes on the Faults
page.
4. Click the Activation tab.
5. In the lower LH corner, click the iBR tab.
smr2009-038-028_b
TYPICAL
1. iBR UP/DOWN buttons
2. iBR position indication
If the iBR moves using these buttons but does not

move using the iBR lever, refer to BRLS VOLTAGE
TEST in this subsection.
If the iBR does not move, check the iBR fuses (F5
and F17) in fuse box. If fuse are good, refer to iBR
ACTUATOR INPUT VOLTAGE TEST in this subsec-
tion.
iBR Actuator Motor Current Test Using

smr2009-038-028_a
B.U.D.S.
TYPICAL
1. Read Data 1. On the iBR activation page in B.U.D.S., note the
2. Activation tab iBR Position (Deg) indication.
3. iBR tab
6. In B.U.D.S., click iBR UP and iBR DOWN but-

tons alternately and look for a change in iBR Po-
sition (Deg).
smr2009-038-029_a
1. iBR position indication
2. Activate the iBR override function, refer to iBR

OVERRIDE FUNCTION in the beginning of this
subsection.
smr2012-035 19
3. Press and hold the VTS UP button on the LH iBR ACTUATOR CURRENT DRAW
handlebar to position the iBR to the full up po-
sition and look for the iBR Motor Current indi- DOWN SELECTION -5 to -15 A
cation in B.U.D.S. Also look for a change of iBR UP SELECTION +10 to +20 A
Position (Deg) indication.
NOTE: Current draw indication will not be stable. If current draw is abnormally high (between 20
High and low peaks will be observed. Look for the and 30 A), check the following:
maximum average current draw. – Ensure iBR gate is free of debris.
– Remove the screws retaining the U-arm to the
actuator shaft. Check for excessive friction in
gate movement.
– Check iBR gate friction sleeves and bushings.
– Check for proper voltage to the iBR motor, see
iBR MOTOR VOLTAGE TEST in this subsection.
– Check for fault codes using B.U.D.S.
Remove debris, replace iBR gate components, or
replace the iBR actuator as applicable.
iBR Actuator Connectors Access

GTS, GTI Series, GTR and WAKE Models
Remove seat.
Locate iBR actuator connectors.
smr2009-038-032_b
Step 1: Note iBR current draw

Step 2: Note iBR position indication change
4. Press and hold the VTS DOWN button and look

for the iBR Motor Current draw indication.
Also look for a change of iBR Position (Deg)
indication.
smr2013-008-005_b
TYPICAL
1. 3-pin connector
2. 12-pin connector
RXP-X Series
Remove iBR ACTUATOR from hull. See proce-
smr2009-038-033_b
Step 1: Note iBR current draw

Step 2: Note iBR position indication change
20 smr2012-035
smr2013-008-005_b
TYPICAL
smo2009-002-127_b
1. 3-pin connector
2. 12-pin connector Step 1: Open the boarding platform
Step 2: Remove the LH storage bin
GTX/RXT Series without Suspension
and Wake Pro Locate iBR actuator connectors.
Open LH access panel.
smr2013-008-005_b
TYPICAL
1. 3-pin connector
2. 12-pin connector
smr2013-008-005_b
TYPICAL
1. 3-pin connector
iBR Motor Voltage Test
2. 12-pin connector
1. Disconnect the 2-pin connector on iBR module.
GTX/RXT Series with Suspension Refer to IBR ACTUATOR CONNECTORS AC-
CESS in this subsection.
Open the boarding platform and remove the LH
storage bin.
smr2012-035 21
sdd2009-001-019_c
1. VTS UP
2. VTS DOWN
smr2013-008-005_c
TYPICAL reactivate the electrical system when required.
1. iBR motor module connector
5. Press the VTS DOWN button and read the iBR
2. Set the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 module motor output voltage.
868) to Vdc selection. NOTE: The iBR DOWN button on the iBR Activa-
3. Install insulated clips on the multimeter leads tion page in B.U.D.S. may be used instead of the
and clip leads to pins in the motor connector on iBR override function.
the iBR module. iBR MOTOR VOLTAGE TEST
Battery voltage (over 12 Vdc)
NOTE: Voltage measured should be battery volt-

age in both UP or DOWN directions. Voltage po-
larity should reverse as UP or DOWN button is
pressed alternately.
– If battery voltage is not measured, refer to iBR
ACTUATOR INPUT VOLTAGE TEST in this sub-
section.
– If battery voltage is measured in both direc-
tions, refer to iBR POWER TEST USING A TEST
LIGHT in this subsection.
smr2009-038-031_a – If battery voltage is measured and the test light
TEST OF iBR MODULE OUTPUT VDC TO iBR MOTOR is bright for both iBR UP or DOWN selections,
the iBR motor is at fault and the iBR actuator
GTI Series, GTR, Wake and RXP X Series must be replaced.
Temporary install test wires with a connector to – If battery voltage is low or test light is dim in
the motor connector on the iBR module. Measure both directions, refer to iBR ACTUATOR INPUT
voltage on test wires. VOLTAGE TEST in this subsection.
All Models – If battery voltage is measured and test light is
dim in one direction, replace the iBR actuator.
4. Using the iBR override function (see SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION (iBR in this subsection), press iBR Power Test Using a Test Light
the VTS UP button and read the iBR module 1. Connect the clip of a 12 Vdc test light to the
motor output voltage. battery ground (or engine ground).
NOTE: The iBR UP button on the iBR Activation 2. Touch the test light probe to each pin of the
page in B.U.D.S. may be used instead of the iBR motor output connector on the iBR module as
override function. you select the iBR UP and DOWN alternately.
The test light should come on bright for one pin
only in each direction.
22 smr2012-035
NOTE: The 12 Vdc and ground will alternate be- – Wire continuity from pin 2 of iBR 3-pin connec-
tween pins with a change of iBR direction. tor to A4 of fuse box
– Jumper continuity fuse contact B4 to C3 of 12
iBR Actuator Input Voltage Test Vdc bus-bar in fuse box.
RXP X Series If voltage is good to the negative battery post but
Detach iBR actuator from hull. Refer to IBR AC- not to pin 1 of the connector (ground wire to en-
TUATOR REMOVAL in this subsection. gine), check for an open or bad ground wire (loose,
corroded, or pitted terminals, wire continuity, etc.)
All Models If battery voltage measured is as specified, carry
1. Disconnect the 3-pin and 12-pin connectors out same test using a 12 Vdc test light. Test light
from the iBR module. refer to IBR ACTUATOR should be bright.
REMOVAL in this subsection. If test light is not bright to pin 1 only, look for a
bad contact on the ground circuit (loose, corroded,
pitted, etc.).
If test light is not bright to the negative battery
post, first check voltage at battery terminals to en-
sure battery is not discharged. If battery voltage
is good, look for a bad contact in the 30 amp 12 V
iBR power circuit (loose, corroded, pitted, etc.).
If the 30 amp 12 Vdc power to the iBR actuator is
good, test for the switched 5 amp 12 Vdc as per
following steps.
4. Briefly press the START/STOP button to wake
the electrical system.
smr2013-008-005_b
TYPICAL
1. 3-pin connector
2. 12-pin connector

868) to Vdc selection.
3. Measure for the battery input voltage (through
fuse F5) to the iBR actuator as per following
table.
iBR ACTUATOR INPUT VOLTAGE TEST sdd2009-001-019_g
(30 AMP BATTERY POWER) TYPICAL
3 PIN CONNECTOR BATTERY READING Step 2: Install D.E.S.S. key
Pin 2 Pin 1 – Battery 5. Measure for the switched input voltage to the
Pin 2 – Neg. (-) post voltage iBR actuator as per following table.
NOTE: The 3-pin connector provides battery

power directly to the iBR module for the actuator
motor through the fuse F5.
If battery voltage is not measured, check the fol-
lowing:
– iBR fuse F5 in fuse box
– Battery voltage at fuse contact B4 of fuse box
smr2012-035 23
iBR ACTUATOR INPUT VOLTAGE TEST CAUTION Remove iBR fuse (F5) before
(5 AMP SWITCHED) working in the iBR gate area. Refer to POWER
iBR CONNECTORS DISTRIBUTION.
BATTERY READING
12 PIN 3 PIN All Models
Pin 1 Pin 1 - From Jet Pump Area
Battery
Pin 1 - Neg. (-) post voltage 2. Remove and discard 2 bolts coupling iBR actu-
ator to U-arm.
NOTE: The 12 pin connector provides BRLS sig-
nals, CAN bus, and a switched 12 Vdc power to
the iBR module through the fuse F17
If battery voltage is not measured at all, check the
following:
– iBR control (CRTL) fuse F17 in fuse box
– Battery voltage at fuse contact E3 of fuse box
– Wire continuity from pin 1 of iBR 12-pin connec-
tor to F3 of fuse box
– Jumper continuity fuse contact E3 to D3 of 12
Vdc accessory bus-bar in fuse box.
If voltage is good to the negative battery post
but not to pin 1 of the connector (ground wire to
engine), check for an open or bad ground wire
(loose, corroded, or pitted terminals, wire conti- smr2011-034-010_a
TYPICAL
nuity, etc.). 1. Remove and discard screws
If battery voltage measured is as specified, carry
out same test using a 12 Vdc test light. Test light GTI Series, GTR, Wake and RXP-X
should be bright. 3. Remove seat.
If test light is not bright to pin 1 of the 3 pin con- 4. Remove passenger handles. Refer to BODY.
nector, look for a bad contact on the ground circuit 5. Remove exhaust pipe. Refer to EXHAUST SYS-
(loose, corroded, pitted, etc.). TEM in 2012 shop manual.
If test light is not bright to battery negative ter- From Inside Bilge
minal, first check voltage at battery terminals to
ensure battery is not discharged. If battery volt- 6. Cut locking tie.
age is good, look for a bad contact in the 12 V 7. Disconnect hose from muffler.
iBR switched power circuit (loose, corroded, pit- 8. Move hose end away.
ted, etc.).
If the iBR actuator input voltages and ground cir-
cuit are good, and there is no CAN bus or BRLS
fault, replace the iBR actuator.
iBR Actuator Removal

All Models
1. Move the iBR gate to the forward position (full
up) using the iBR OVERRIDE function. Refer
to SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (iBR) in this subsec-
tion.
NOTICE Do not try to manually force the iBR
gate when all components are installed.
smr2011-034-004_a
1. Cut locking tie

2. Disconnect hose
24 smr2012-035
RXP-X
9. Remove muffler.
GTX/RXT Series and Wake Pro Models
10. Disconnect the two aft electrical connectors
from the iBR actuator. Refer to IBR ACTUA-
TOR CONNECTORS ACCESS in this subsec-
tion.
smr2011-034-003_a
1. Do not remopve these screws
NOTE: It may be necessary to pry out iBR actua-

tor.
smr2013-008-005_b
TYPICAL
1. iBR actuator 3 pin connector
2. iBR actuator 12 pin connector
All Models
11. Remove and discard iBR actuator retaining
screws.
smr2011-034-005_a
PRYING iBR ACTUATOR

1. iBR actuator
smr2013-008-002_a
1. Remove and discard screws
12. Pull out iBR actuator while leaving LH support

plate in place.
NOTE: It is very important to leave support plate
installed at its original position. Do not remove smr2011-034-006_a
support plate mounting screws. 1. Pull out
smr2012-035 25
13. Cut locking tie.

GTI Series, GTR, Wake and RXP-X
14. Disconnect the indicated connectors.
NOTE: Pull on the iBR actuator to access the con-
nectors.
smr2011-034-022_a
1. U-arm ribs
Replace parts as necessary.
smr2011-034-007_a iBR Actuator Installation

1. Unplug connectors Installation is the reverse of the removal proce-
iBR Actuator Inspection
Apply a small amount of DIELECTRIC GREASE
Check condition of ribs on actuator shaft end and (P/N 293 550 004) to the connector pins before
in U-arm. plugging the connectors to the iBR actuator.
RXP-X, GTI Series, GTS and Wake
IMPORTANT: Connect connectors to iBR module
before installing iBR actuator to support plate.
All Models
Install new screws with threadlocker (or clean ac-
tuator mounting screw threads and apply LOCTITE
243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060) on threads).
Install actuator shaft through support plate . In-
stallation is the reverse of removal. However pay
attention to the following:
1. Loosely install all new actuator mounting
screws to allow proper installation.
NOTE: Do not remove support plate mounting
smr2013-008-204_a
1. Actuator shaft ribs

screws.
NOTE: It is very important to leave support plate
installed at its original position. Do not remove
support plate mounting screws.
26 smr2012-035
iBR Actuator Replacement

To allow proper operation of a NEW iBR actuator,
refer to ECM, CLUSTER AND IBR UPDATES.
ECM, Cluster And IBR Updates

Four reflash operations (2 reflash on GTS models)
will be done in the order given in the following ta-
ble.
You will be automatically prompted to start the
reflash operation after you click the Read Button
within B.U.D.S.
APPROXIMATE TIME FOR
MODULE
THE REFLASH
smr2011-034-003_a 1. ECM 6 minutes
1. Do not remopve these screws
2. Cluster 30 seconds
3. iBR (not applicable
20 seconds
to GTS models)
4. iBRMON (not
applicable to GTS 20 scconds
models
Total time 7 minutes
After each module reflash, the module will be

automatically re-read by B.U.D.S. If the following
message appears at this moment, do the follow-
ing:
smr2013-008-002_a
1. Retaining screws installed

sbg2011-006-022
2. Make sure iBR actuator shaft is fully pushed in

place. 1. Press the watercraft START button.
3. Tighten retaining screws to specifications. 2. In B.U.D.S., click "OK" in the message box.
4. Remainder of installation is the reverse of re- 3. You can normally continue the update process.
moval procedure. Install new fasteners when IMPORTANT: In case of problem updating a mod-
required. ule, please contact the BRP technical support
TIGHTENING TORQUE team.
The keys already programmed should remain pro-
12 N•m (106 lbf•in)
grammed after the updates.
Clean iBR shaft screw threads and install new
screws with threadlocker.
Secure U-arm to iBR shaft.
Reinstall iBR fuse.
If installing a NEW iBR actuator, refer to iBR AC-
TUATOR REPLACEMENT in this subsection.
Check watercraft in water for water tightness.
smr2012-035 27
NOTICE
Continuous power to the computer and to the
watercraft is mandatory during this operation.
Be sure to disable the computer screen saver.
If using a portable computer, be sure to provide

a continuous supply of electrical power by
connecting it to a wall outlet.
These software updates of the watercraft mbg2009-014-002
modules will take some time to complete

and MUST NOT be interrupted or damage to Three modules (2 for GTS) should appear as con-
a module could occur. nected in B.U.D.S.
Although computer screen may go blank or may
seem to freeze for a while, do NOT interrupt
B.U.D.S. to allow updates to be completed.
1. Ensure the watercraft battery is fully charged.

2. Connect a portable power pack (fully charged)
to the watercraft battery to ensure there is sbg2011-006-020
enough power to complete the software up- TYPICAL

dates. The use of the portable power pack
is required to avoid potential communication 8. Click on Read Data.
problems during the update.
NOTICE NEVER use a battery charger instead
of portable power pack. The battery charger
may cause electrical noise causing many prob-
lems during the update.
3. Make sure to use the proper B.U.D.S. version.
REQUIRED B.U.D.S. VERSION
W3.3.3 or higher
vmr2006-012-100_aen
4. Connect MPI before starting B.U.D.S. to ensure 9. When the following message appears, click Yes
proper operation. Refer to 2011 SHOP MAN- to start the updates.
UAL for details:
– Section 03: ELECTRONIC MANAGEMENT
SYSTEMS
– Subsection 04: COMMUNICATION TOOLS
AND B.U.D.S.
5. Push the START button briefly.
6. Install tether cord on engine cut-off switch.
7. Start B.U.D.S. and logon.
NOTE: If the following message does not auto-
matically vanish, click the button: Try active de-
tection mode. sbg2011-006-021_a
TYPICAL
28 smr2012-035
NOTICE While the ECM is being updated, an

hour glass might appear on the computer. The
computer screen and vehicle cluster might
also go blank. DO NOT TOUCH ANYTHING
until the following message appears. Then,
click the "OK" button.
sbg2011-006-023_a
1. ECM module information
20. Look at the "BRP Assembly Number".

sbg2011-006-002
TYPICAL
10. When the following message appears. Click

Yes.
rbg2009-005-105
11. Repeat the same update steps for the remain-

ing modules to reflash.
NOTE: When updating the iBR, it is normal to
hear a beep from the watercraft.
12. After the upgrade of all modules, ensure to
clear all occurred faults with B.U.D.S.
12.1 Click on the Faults tab.
12.2 Click the "Clear Occurred Faults" button.
rbg2011-007-005_a
TYPICAL
1. BRP Assembly number
rmr2008-039-009
CLEAR OCCURED FAULTS ECM INFORMATION

13. Exit B.U.D.S. BRP ASSEMBLY NUMBER
14. Remove tether cord and wait until cluster 420666362 OR
shuts down. 420666364 OR
15. Push the START button briefly. 420666373 OR
420666378
16. Install tether cord on engine cut-off switch.
17. Restart B.U.D.S. and click on Read Data but- 21. If any number in the table is found in B.U.D.S.,
ton. then the update was successful.
18. Check if the updates have been successfully 22. Select the Module drop down list and select
reflashed as follows. Cluster then Information.
19. Select the Module drop down list and select 23. Look at the "Supplier Software Number".
ECM then Information.
smr2012-035 29
30. If the number in the table is found in B.U.D.S.,

then the update was successful.
31. If the update was not successful for any mod-
ule, check for each non-reflashed module if an
update is available in B.U.D.S.
32. For example, select the Module drop down
list and select ECM then Update.
32.1 If an update is available, apply it.
32.2 If no update is available, please contact
the BRP technical support team.
sbg2011-006-025_a
sbg2011-006-024_b EXAMPLE
1. ECM update available
CLUSTER INFORMATION
INFORMATION ITEM VALUE iBR GATE
S01300D00 OR iBR Gate Removal (with VTS Trim Ring
Supplier Software Number
S01299D01 and Steering Nozzle)
Move the iBR gate to the forward position (full up)
24. If any number in the table is found in B.U.D.S., using the iBR OVERRIDE function. Refer to SYS-
then the update was successful. TEM DESCRIPTION (iBR) in this subsection.
25. Select the Module drop down list and select
iBR then Information. NOTICE Do not try to manually force the iBR
gate when all components are installed.
26. Look at the "Supplier Software Number".
iBR INFORMATION CAUTION Remove iBR fuse (F5) before
INFORMATION ITEM VALUE working in the iBR gate area. Refer to POWER
DISTRIBUTION.
Supplier Software Number S01315A07
1. Disconnect the steering cable from the steering
27. If the number in the table is found in B.U.D.S., nozzle arm.
then the update was successful.
28. Select the Module drop down list and select
iBRMON then Information.
NOTE: Both the iBR and the iBRMON must be
reflashed during the same update session other-
wise the iBR will not operate at all.
29. Look at the "Supplier Software Number".
iBRMON INFORMATION
INFORMATION ITEM VALUE
Supplier Software Number S01317A02
30 smr2012-035
CAUTION From now on, retain iBR gate

to prevent it to fall. Pay attention not to catch
your fingers.
3. Raise iBR gate to its upper position. Hold in po-
sition.
4. Remove and discard screw and keep bushing
from iBR gate LH pivot point.
NOTE: Pull out bushing along with the screw.
smr2011-034-009_a
GTI SERIES, GTR AND WAKE MODELS

1. Nozzle arm
2. Remove screw
smr2011-034-011_a
TYPICAL — LH SIDE
1. Remove and discard screw, keep bushing
smr2009-038-007_a
GTX/ RXT/RXP-X SERIES, WAKE PRO MODELS

1. Remove screw
2. Nozzle lever
2. Remove and discard screws retaining U-arm to

iBR actuator shaft.
smr2011-034-012_a
TYPICAL
1. Bushing

from iBR gate RH pivot point.
from U-arm pivot point
NOTE: Pull out bushing along with the screw.
smr2011-034-010_a
TYPICAL
1. Remove and discard screws
smr2012-035 31
smr2009-038-011_a
TYPICAL
smr2011-034-013_b 1. iBR gate retaining hexagonal screws to remove
TYPICAL — RH SIDE
1. Remove and discard screws, keep bushings Trim Ring Inspection
1. Inspect trim ring and metal spacers for cracks,
Pull out iBR gate ass'y with U-arm. oblong holes, evidence of wear and deforma-
tion.
2. Inspect plastic bushings and friction sleeves for
cracks, deformation and signs of wear.
smr2011-034-015
TYPICAL
smr2009-038-012_a
iBR Gate and VTS Trim Ring TYPICAL VTS TRIM RING (WITH NOZZLE AND STEERING ARM)
1. Friction sleeves (2 each side)
Disassembly 2. Plastic bushings (x8)
VTS Trim Ring Removal

Remove and discard the two hexagonal screws
and keep bushings securing the iBR gate to the
VTS trim ring.
smr2009-038-022_a
TYPICAL - WORN AND DEFORMED PLASTIC BUSHING
32 smr2012-035
smr2009-038-023
NOTE: Friction sleeves should be replaced as

specified in maintenance chart or if they show
signs of wear (flat surfaces). Plastic bushings
are press fit and should be replaced if they show smr2011-034-017_a
signs of wear, deformation, or if the iBR gate 1. Remove screws

backlash is beyond service limit.
GTX/RXT/RXP-X Series and Wake Pro Models
3. Inspect gate stoppers for signs of wear.
1. Remove the 2 hexagonal screws securing the
steering arms (links) to the steering nozzle (top
and bottom).
smr2009-038-012_b
smr2011-034-016_a 1. Hexagonal screws to remove (top and bottom)

TYPICAL
1. Stoppers 2. Remove the 2 socket head screws securing the
nozzle to the VTS trim ring (1 top and 1 bottom).
4. Replace parts as required.
Steering Nozzle Removal
GTI Series, GTR and Wake Models
1. Remove screws securing nozzle to VTS ring.
smr2009-038-012_c
1. Socket head screws to remove (top and bottom)
smr2012-035 33
Steering Nozzle Lever Removal iBR Gate Inspection

GTX/RXT/RXP-X Series and Wake Pro Models 1. Inspect the iBR gate and its plastic liner for
cracks, out of round holes, evidence of wear,
1. Remove the hexagonal screws securing the deformation and other damages.
steering arms (links) to the steering nozzle
lever, top and bottom. 2. Inspect plastic bushings (x4) for cracks, wear,
and deformation.
3. Replace as required.
smr2009-038-012_d
1. Hexagonal screws to remove (top and bottom)

smr2009-038-014_a
2. Remove the hexagonal screws securing the 1. Plastic liner

2. Plastic bushings
steering nozzle lever to the VTS trim ring, top
and bottom. iBR Gate and VTS Ring Reassembly
Install all parts removed in the reverse order of re-
moval, however pay attention to the following:
– Install new friction sleeves (as required).
– Install new plastic bushings (as required).
– Install new hexagonal screws with thread-
locker.
– Torque all retaining screws as per exploded
view.
When installing the iBR gate onto the VTS ring,
position the VTS ring so that the small end of the
steering nozzle is facing you with the steering
smr2009-038-012_e lever towards the RH side.
1. Hexagonal screws to remove (top and bottom)
Position the iBR gate over the ring so that the
Steering Nozzle Inspection warning label is facing you (right side up) and
1. Inspect steering nozzle for cracks, wear, defor- install the mounting hardware as seen in the
mation, and other damages. exploded view. The attachment points for the
linkage arms will be facing away from you (not
Inspect bushings for wear or other damage. visible in following illustration of iBR gate and VTS
2. Replace parts as required. ring assembly).
Steering Nozzle Lever Inspection
GTX/RXT/RXP-X Series and Wake Pro Models
1. Inspect steering nozzle lever, steering arms,
and spacers for cracks, elongated holes, ev-
idence of wear, deformation and other dam-
ages.
2. Replace as required.
34 smr2012-035
smr2009-038-011_b
1. Small end of nozzle

2. Steering lever smr2011-034-020_a
3. Warning label
1. RH mounting plate
2. Rib here
iBR Gate Installation (with VTS Trim
Ring and Steering Nozzle) NOTE: Ensure RH mounting plate is in place be-
fore inserting iBR gate ass'y. Also position its ribs
as illustrated.
Raise iBR gate to its upper position. Hold in posi-
Ensure all flanged bushings are in place.
tion.
Position iBR gate down and components as
Use new screws with threadlocker for installation.
shown to install into position.
Loosely install M8 x 70 mm screws on RH side.
smr2011-034-018_a
Insert iBR gate ass'y between mounting plates. smr2011-034-013_b
1. M8 x 70 screws here
Install screw on LH side of VTS ring pivot point

then iBR shaft screws.
Torque all retaining screws as specified in ex-
ploded view.
NOTICE Over torquing will damage inserts.
NOTICE Overtorquing will damage inserts.
smr2012-035 35
U-ARM
U-Arm Removal
Remove U-arm as an assembly with iBR gate. Re-
fer to iBR GATE in this subsection.
U-Arm Inspection
1. Inspect U-arm and linkage arms (x2) for cracks,
wear, and signs of twisting and bending.
2. Ensure the VTS cams on the U-arm are not
worn, cracked or broken.
3. Inspect the plastic bushings (x5) for cracks,
wear and deformation.
4. Replace parts as required. smr2011-034-020_b
1. RH support plate
3. Remove plastic nut.

4. Remove internal support plate.
5. Check condition of support plate gasket. Re-
place if necessary.
LH Support Plate Removal
1. Remove iBR actuator from support plate. Refer
to procedure in this subsection.
2. Remove and discard support plate mounting
smr2009-038-016_a
screws.
1. Linkage arms
2. Plastic bushings (x5)
3. VTS cams
U-Arm Installation
dure however, pay attention to the following:
– Install new plastic bushings (as required).
– Install all new hexagonal screws with thread-
locker.
– Torque all retaining screws as per exploded
view.
iBR GATE SUPPORT PLATES

iBR Gate Support Plate Removal
NOTE: Support plates have been factory aligned smr2011-034-003_a
with precision to ensure proper iBR mechanism 1. Support plate mounting screws
alignment. It is not recommended to remove
the support plates except for 2 specific reasons: 3. Pull out support plate.
Damage to the support plate or Realignment re- 4. Check condition of support plate gasket. Re-
quired. In both cases refer to iBR MECHANISM place if necessary.
ALIGNMENT VERIFICATION.
iBR Support Plate Installation
RH Support Plate Removal
RH Support Plate Installation
1. Remove iBR gate ass'y. Refer to procedure in
this subsection. 1. Install inner plate, gasket and outer RH support
plate and snap them together.
2. Remove exterior support plate (unsnap).
36 smr2012-035
2. Finger tighten plastic nut 2. Install gate assembly, except for the 2 bolts se-
curing the iBR actuator shaft to U-arm.
3. Loosely install all actuator mounting screws.
4. Lower reverse gate until it bottoms against
stoppers.
5. Tighten the two lower screws shown.
smr2013-008-201_a
1. Plastic nut
3. Push the assembly towards the top of the

through-hull holes as much as possible.
smr2011-034-003_c
1. Tighten first
6. Raise reverse gate.

7. Tighten remaining screws.
8. Finally, torque actuator mounting screws to
specification as per following sequence.
smr2013-008-201_b
PUSH UPWARDS
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Plastic Nut 28 N•m (21 lbf•ft)
NOTE: It is normal that the assembly might

slightly move downwards when tightening the
plastic nut. Ensure to prevent larger undesired
movement.
4. Ensure formed seal is in good condition and
properly installed onto support plate.
5. Verify alignment. Refer to iBR MECHANISM
ALIGNMENT VERIFICATION in this subsection.
smr2011-034-003_b
6. Check watercraft in water for water tightness. iBR ACTUATOR SCREW TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
LH Support Plate Installation 9. Install screws to secure support plate to iBR ac-
Installation is the reverse of the removal proce- tuator and torque as per exploded view.
dure however, pay attention to the following: To 10. Ensure formed seal is in good condition and
avoid iBR position fault code, strictly follow this in- properly installed onto support plate.
stallation sequence:
1. Install iBR actuator on the support plate.
smr2012-035 37
11. Verify alignment. Refer to iBR MECHANISM – iBR gate assembly is installed. Refer to iBR
ALIGNMENT VERIFICATION in this subsec- GATE INSTALLATION.
tion. – 2 bolts that attach U-arm to iBR actuator are
12. Check watercraft in water for water tightness. removed.
– all parts from the iBR, and iBR gate assembly-
iBR Mechanism Alignment Verification have no damage or excessive wear.
NOTE: Before proceeding with the alignment ver-
ification, make sure that:
– iBR actuator is installed.Refer to iBR ACTUA-
TOR INSTALLATION.
STEP NORMAL SITUATION VERIFICATION IF VERIFICATION FAILS
When stroking the mechanism Raise the reverse gate
downwards, the trim ring completely. Rotate the reverse Check if the pump and venturi
bottoms against the pump (VTS gate down slowly and check are properly tightened or if they
1
down). Then the trim ring is the trim ring's stroke. It are damaged. Inspect parts for
locked and only the U-arm and should complete its stroke damage or excessive wear.
reverse gate rotate. with no resistance.
Raise the reverse gate
The reverse gate must be able
completely and let it rotate Check the mechanism's
2 to rotate completely down
under its own weight. It should alignment with STEPS 3 and 4.
under its own weight.
rotate all the way down.
Inspect parts for damage or
The steering nozzle must turn Turn by hand the steering nozzle
excessive wear. If it is still
freely at all times, even when both sides various times during
3 not free, move both fixing
trim ring bottoms against the the rotation of the mechanism.
plates slightly towards the top
pump (VTS down). It should turn freely at any angle.
and rear of PWC.
When stroking the mechanism Raise the reverse gate There is a misalignment issue,
downwards, the trim ring's completely. Rotate the reverse use a feeler gauge to determine
4 friction sleeves should not gate down slowly and check which sleeve is preventing
prevent the U-arm from the U-arm's stroke. It should movement, then proceed with
completing its rotation. complete its rotation. STEPS 4a to 4d. accordingly.
38 smr2012-035
STEP NORMAL SITUATION VERIFICATION IF VERIFICATION FAILS

Refer to LH PLATE REMOVAL
and LH PLATE INSTALLATION.
Raise the LH plate's rear pivot.
The bottom of the LH friction Lower the LH plate's front pivot.
4a sleeves must not prevent rotation
by contacting the U-arm.
completely. Rotate the reverse
gate down slowly and check
if there is a contact between Refer to LH PLATE REMOVAL
the LH friction sleeves and the and LH PLATE INSTALLATION.
U-arm that prevents rotation. Lower the LH plate's rear pivot.
The top of the LH friction sleeves Raise the LH plate's front pivot.
4b must not prevent rotation by
contacting the U-arm.
Refer to RH PLATE REMOVAL

and RH PLATE INSTALLATION.
Raise the RH plate's rear pivot.
The bottom of the RH friction Lower the RH plate's front pivot.
4c sleeves must not prevent rotation
by contacting the U-arm.
completely. Rotate the reverse
gate down slowly and check
if there is a contact between Refer to RH PLATE REMOVAL
the RH friction sleeves and the and RH PLATE INSTALLATION.
U-arm that prevents rotation. Lower the RH plate's rear pivot.
The top of the RH friction sleeves Raise the RH plate's front pivot.
4d must not prevent rotation by
contacting the U-arm.
VTS CONTROL BUTTON VTS Button Overview

The VTS button contain a series of 4 diodes for the
UP and DOWN arrow switches. Refer to WIRING
DIAGRAM.
The center wire to the switches (pin "C"), is com-
mon for iS button and VTS button (somewhat like
a ground wire). The other two wires (pins "A" and
"B"), act as signal wires to the gauge for each set
of switches. They actually each form one branch
of an electronic circuit within the gauge.
passes through all four diodes (say VTS switch
sdd2009-001-019_c open), a drop of 2.4 Vdc would be measured
1. VTS up button across the 4 diodes (pin "A" to pin "C"). This drop
2. VTS down button
of 2.4 Vdc measured at pin "A" tells the gauge the
VTS switch is open.
smr2012-035 39
If the VTS UP button is pressed, 2 diodes are by- NOTE: If the VTS button is released before full
passed by the closed switch. The remaining two travel of the iBR gate, movement of the iBR gate
diodes in the circuit drop 1.2 Vdc (at pin "A"). will cease.
If the VTS DOWN button is pressed, 1 diode is by- If the iBR does not respond to VTS button com-
passed by the closed switch. The remaining three mands (UP or DOWN), carry out the following VTS
diodes in the circuit drop 1.8 Vdc (at pin "A"). SWITCH TEST USING B.U.D.S.
The gauge senses these voltages through pin 13
of its connector, and interprets them as signals VTS Control Button Test Using
that tell it which switch is activated (VTS UP or B.U.D.S.
VTS DOWN). 1. Connect watercraft to the latest B.U.D.S. soft-
Since the command signal generated by the clo- ware, refer to COMMUNICATION TOOLS AND
sure of a VTS switch concerns the VTS module, B.U.D.S.
a circuit within the gauge will translate it to CAN 2. Click the Read Data button.
protocol and transmit it through the CAN bus. The 3. Check for an applicable fault code on the
VTS module will react to the command, carry out FAULTS page.
the function, and transmit the result back through
the CAN bus. 4. Click the Monitoring tab.
The gauge will use the signals from the switches 5. In the lower LH corner, click the Cluster tab.
and the transmitted information from the other 6. On the LH handlebar, press the VTS UP and
modules, convert them to an indication, and DOWN button alternately and look for the VTS
cancel the command signal it sent out once the UP and VTS Down indicator lights to come on
function has been carried out. in the Cluster Lamp Active area in B.U.D.S.
NOTE: The voltages stated above vary slightly de-
pending on the actual voltage applied to the circuit
and the current flow through the diodes. When
using a Fluke 115 multimeter for testing in diode
test mode, the voltage and current applied by the
multimeter are lower than in circuit. The quality
of probe contact, the actual probes and leads, and
the precision of the meter calibration will all affect
the results, which will most likely be slightly lower
than nominal values stated.
VTS Control Button Functional Test

Using iBR Override Function
smr2009-036-002_c
2. Install tether cord to power up the electrical sys- TYPICAL
tem. 1. Read Data button
2. Monitoring tab
NOTE: Briefly press the START/STOP button to 3. Cluster tab
4. Cluster Lamp Active area
3. Activate the iBR override function, refer to SYS-
TEM DESCRIPTION (iBR) in this subsection.
4. Press and hold the VTS DOWN arrow button.
The iBR gate and steering nozzle will move
downwards together until they reach the full
VTS down position. The iBR gate will then
continue moving to the full reverse/braking
position alone.
5. Depress and hold the VTS UP arrow button and smr2009-041-051_b
ensure the iBR gate moves up to the forward TYPICAL
position. 1. VTS UP and VTS Down indicator lights
40 smr2012-035
If each of the gauge button indicator lights come

on when the applicable switch is pressed, the VTS
control button switches and wiring are good. The
problem may be related to the information center
or iBR module.
If one or all of the indicator lights do not come on,
refer to VTS CONTROL BUTTON TEST USING A
MULTIMETER.
VTS Control Button Test Using a
Multimeter
1. Remove the gauge support cover, refer to
GAUGE subsection.
vmr2006-020-005
the screwdriver.
NOTE: Pay attention to multimeter lead position
for diode biasing during test. Remember that
each diode should drop approximately 0.6 Vdc
when positively biassed, and read as an OL (open
circuit) when negatively biassed (leads reversed).
VTS CONTROL TEST
SWITCH MULTIMETER GAUGE
VOLTAGE
POSITION LEAD CONNECTOR
RED lead Pin 13 Approx.
Switch BLACK lead Pin 15 2 Vdc
released BLACK lead Pin 13
OL
smr2009-042-002_a
RED lead Pin 15
1. Gauge connector RED lead Pin 13 Approx.
UP BLACK lead Pin 15 1.1 Vdc
3. Use a FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 868) depressed BLACK lead Pin 13
set to the diode test function. Test the VTS but- OL
RED lead Pin 15
ton switches as per following tables.
RED lead Pin 13 Approx.
NOTE: It is important to set the multimeter to the DOWN BLACK lead Pin 15 1.6 Vdc
diode check function when testing the VTS control depressed BLACK lead Pin 13
switches. Pin 15
OL
RED lead
When measuring between pins 13 and 15, if an

OL is obtained with both positive and negative
diode biassing, test the continuity of each wire
between the gauge and switch assembly. If con-
tinuity is good, replace the switch assembly.
If any reading is significantly different than speci-
fied, carry out the same test at the switch connec-
tor, refer to the wiring diagram. If you obtain the
same results, replace the switch assembly.
If voltages measured on the VTS UP and DOWN
switch are as specified (or very close to it), the
switches and the wiring harness are good. The
smr2012-035 41
fault may be within the gauge. Replace the gauge

and carry out a new VTS BUTTON TEST USING
B.U.D.S. to ensure the problem is solved.
VTS Control Button Removal
NOTE: The VTS and SPORT/ECO control buttons
may come as a switch assembly that must be re-
placed as a unit.
Models with a VTS Switch
1. Remove steering cover, refer to STEERING
AND O.T.A.S.
Models Without a VTS Switch
2. Remove the upper housing and housing cover smr2009-038-035_b
from the LH handlebar housing. 1. START/STOP switch

2. Wiring routed in slot provided in support
All Models 3. SPORT/ECO switch connector
3. Remove connector from switch assembly. 4. Insert switch assembly in switch support.
5. Install remaining removed parts, refer to
6. Carry out an operational test of the VTS and
iS systems to ensure proper operation of new
switch assembly.
smr2012-035-010_a
TYPICAL
1. SPORT/ECO switch connector
4. Remove switch assembly from support by lift-

ing it off the support.
VTS Control Button Installation

(P/N 293 550 004) on switch contact pins.
2. Install connector on new switch assembly.
3. Ensure wiring from START switch is properly
inserted in slot provided before installing VTS
and SPORT/ECO control switch assembly.
42 smr2012-035
Subsection XX (JET PUMP)
JET PUMP
SERVICE TOOLS
IMPELLER REMOVER/INSTALLER ............................................... 529 035 820 ................... 10–11, 13, 15, 18
IMPELLER REMOVER/INSTALLER ............................................... 529 035 956 ................... 10–11, 13, 15, 18
IMPELLER SHAFT BEARING TOOL ............................................. 529 036 168 ..................................... 14, 16
IMPELLER SHAFT PUSHER.......................................................... 529 035 955 ..................................... 14, 16
PRESSURE CAP ............................................................................ 529 036 172 ............................................. 4
PUMP PLATE................................................................................. 529 036 224 ............................................. 5
SEAL/BEARING PUSHER .............................................................. 529 035 819 ........................................... 17
VACUUM/PRESSURE PUMP ........................................................ 529 021 800 ............................................. 4
SERVICE PRODUCTS
JET PUMP BEARING GREASE ..................................................... 293 550 032 ................................. 9, 16, 18
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ....................................... 7, 19
LOCTITE 577 (THREAD SEALANT) ............................................... 293 800 050 ........................................... 12
LOCTITE 767 (ANTISEIZE LUBRICANT) ....................................... 293 800 070 ........................................... 11
PULLEY FLANGE CLEANER ......................................................... 413 711 809 ............................................. 6
TRIPLE-GUARD GREASE .............................................................. 296 000 329 ................................... 6–7, 12
XPS LUBE...................................................................................... 293 600 016 ....................................... 7, 11
smr2012-036 1
See
DRIVE SHAFT
See
BODY
Loctite 577
(thread sealant)
Triple-guard
grease
NEW
XPS
synthetic Loctite 767
grease (antiseize
Jet pump lubricant)
bearing
grease NEW
10 N•m
Jet pump (89 lbf•in)
bearing
grease
Model
NEW without an iBR 125 N•m
NEW (92 lbf•ft)
7.5 N•m 21 N•m
(66 lbf•in) (15 lbf•ft) 8 N•m
(71 lbf•in)
Loctite
243 10 N•m
(89 lbf•in)
Loctite
21 N•m 243
(15 lbf•ft)
Model 21 N•m
with an iBR (15 lbf•ft)

smr2012-036-001_a
2 smr2012-036
GENERAL Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance between

impeller blade tip and wear ring. Measure each
JET PUMP MAIN COMPONENTS blade at its center.
6
5
4
1
smr2006-027-008
3
MAXIMUM WEAR
MODEL
CLEARANCE
2
smr2006-027-011_a All models 0.35 mm (.014 in)
TYPICAL
1. Nozzle
2. Venturi
3. Jet pump housing
IMPELLER SHAFT RADIAL PLAY
4. Wear ring
5. Impeller Radial play is critical for jet pump life span.
6. Stator
To check radial play, remove jet pump.
INSPECTION Make sure impeller shaft turns freely and
smoothly.
IMPELLER CONDITION 1. Retain housing in a soft jaw vise making sure
not to damage housing lug.
Condition of impeller, impeller boot and wear
2. Set a dial gauge and position its tip onto metal
ring can be quickly checked from underneath the
end, close to the end of the impeller hub.
watercraft. With the vehicle on the trailer, use
a flashlight to visually inspect them through the 3. Move shaft end up and down. Difference be-
inlet grate. tween highest and lowest dial gauge reading is
radial play.
smr2007-028-001_a
TYPICAL — UNDERNEATH HULL

1. Impeller
2. Impeller boot
3. Wear ring
smr2009-006-008_a
IMPELLER/WEAR RING TYPICAL — MEASURING IMPELLER SHAFT RADIAL PLAY
1. Dial gauge
CLEARANCE 2. Measure close to impeller hub end
This clearance is critical for jet pump performance.

To check clearance, remove jet pump.
smr2012-036 3
RADIAL PLAY
0 mm (0 in)
Excessive play can come either from worn bearing

or damaged jet pump housing bearing surface.
LEAK TEST
Whenever performing any type of repair on the jet
pump, a leak test should be carry out.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove impeller cover. Refer to IMPELLER
COVER in this subsection. smr2008-029-005
2. Install the PRESSURE CAP (P/N 529 036 172) on TYPICAL

pump housing. 4. Pressurize pump.
LEAK TEST PRESSURE
Maximum 70 kPa (10 PSI)
5. Pump must maintain this pressure for at least

5 minutes.
– If there is a pressure drop, spray soapy wa-
529036172
ter around cover. If there are no bubbles, im-
3. Connect the VACUUM/PRESSURE PUMP (P/N 529 peller shaft, impeller shaft seal must be re-
021 800) to the pressure cap fitting.
placed. Jet pump unit has to be disassem-
bled.
NOTE: If there is 2 or 3 bubbles coming out from
the seal on the impeller side is acceptable. Leaks
from other areas must be repaired.
529021800
smr2009-006-002_a
TYPICAL
1. Small leak here is acceptable
NOTICE Repair any leak. Failure to correct a

leak will lead to premature wear of pump com-
ponents.
6. Disconnect pump and remove pressure cap.
7. Reinstall impeller cover. Refer to IMPELLER
COVER in this subsection.
4 smr2012-036
PROCEDURES Torque anode retaining screw as specified in ex-

ploded view.
NOTE: Whenever removing a part, visually check
for damage such as: corrosion, cracks, split,
break, porosity, cavitation, deformation, distor- JET PUMP HOUSING
tion, heating discoloration, wear pattern, defec- NOTE: The jet pump housing can be removed as
tive plating, missing or broken balls in ball bearing, an assembly with the venturi. This is the preferred
water damage diagnosed by black-colored spots procedure when either the drive shaft or engine
on metal parts, etc. Replace any damaged parts. removal is required.
As a quick check, manually feel clearance and end
play, where applicable, to detect excessive wear. Jet Pump Housing Removal
Do the following as applicable.
SACRIFICIAL ANODE 1. Remove the iBR gate and VTS trim ring. Refer
Sacrificial Anode Inspection to iBR AND VTS subsection.
Check for wear. If worn more than half, replace 2. Detach steering cable from nozzle.
anode. 3. Remove the nuts that retain the jet pump to the
pump support.
smr2011-035-009_a
1. Sacrificial anode location

smr2011-035-002_a
1. Nuts to remove
Sacrificial Anode Removal
Unscrew sacrificial anode hexagonal screw and 4. Pull back jet pump housing to remove it from
remove anode. the pump support. It may be necessary to wig-
gle it slightly as you pull back on the pump.
Temporarily fasten the PUMP PLATE (P/N 529 036
224) to pump support to support drive shaft and
avoid PTO oil seal damage.
smr2006-027-009
529036224
Sacrificial Anode Installation

dure.
smr2012-036 5
Jet Pump Housing Inspection and Lubricate drive shaft splines, impeller splines and
Cleaning the inside of the impeller boot with TRIPLE-GUARD
GREASE (P/N 296 000 329).
1. Visually inspect jet pump housing. Pay atten-
tion to the stator. Ensure the assembly is clean Ensure the neoprene seal is properly installed on
and free of any debris and defects. the jet pump.
Do the following as applicable.
2. Blow low pressure compressed air through the
pressure outlet fitting and make sure it is clear.
smr2011-035-003_b
TYPICAL
1. Neoprene seal
smr2011-035-004_a
TYPICAL Install new O-rings then slide water outlet adapter

1. Pressure outlet onto pump.
3. Ensure cap screw is tight.
4. Ensure the neoprene seal is in good condition.
Replace as required.
smr2011-035-005_a
1. Slide adapter onto pump

2. New O-rings here
Install new O-rings on pump support.

smr2011-035-003_a The water flow is controlled by a calibrated re-
1. Cap screw ducer. Ensure to install the proper reducer.
2. Neoprene seal
Jet Pump Housing Installation

Brush and clean impeller splines and drive shaft
splines with PULLEY FLANGE CLEANER (P/N 413
711 809) or equivalent. Splines must be free of
any residue.
6 smr2012-036
REDUCER NOTE: Slightly lubricate wear ring with XPS LUBE

(P/N 293 600 016) to minimize friction during initial
ENGINE COLOR CODE impeller start.
130/155/215 Yellow
260 Green VENTURI
Venturi Removal
NOTICE Improper reducer can cause over-
heating and damage to exhaust system. Jet Pump Housing installed
As applicable, do the following.
1. Remove the iBR gate and VTS trim ring as an
assembly. Refer to iBR AND VTS subsection.
2. Remove nozzle.
3. Cut locking ties and remove the 2 bailer hoses
from the venturi.
4. Refer to JET PUMP HOUSING REMOVED to
continue procedure.
Jet Pump Housing Removed
1. Remove the screws retaining the venturi to the
jet pump housing.
smr2011-035-006_a
1. Install new O-rings

2. Calibrated reducer
Generously apply TRIPLE-GUARD GREASE (P/N 296

000 329) on drive shaft splines.
Install jet pump.
NOTE: If necessary, wiggle jet pump to engage
drive shaft splines in impeller.
Install new nuts and torque as per table and the
illustrated sequence.
TORQUE
22 N•m (16 lbf•ft)
smr2011-035-007_a
1. Venturi retaining screws
Venturi Installation
cedure. Pay attention to the following.
As applicable, align venturi bailer holes with those
in pump support.
threads of venturi screws (or install new self-lock-
ing screws).
Install venturi screws and flat washers.
Torque venturi screws to 21 N•m (15 lbf•ft).
smr2011-035-009_b As applicable, ensure bailer hoses and fittings are
in good condition.
smr2012-036 7
IMPELLER COVER
Impeller Cover Removal
1. Remove the venturi.
2. With pump housing in vertical position, remove
and discard the 3 retaining screws.
F18J0MA
TYPICAL
5. Remove both O-rings.
F18J0LA
TYPICAL
3. Using a fiber hammer, gently tap impeller cover

to help release it from the jet pump housing.
4. Use a flat screwdriver in the slots provided as
pry points to remove it from the jet pump hous-
ing.
smr2009-006-003_a
TYPICAL
1. O-rings
Impeller Cover Inspection

Check for presence of water in cover and bearing
area. If water is found, replace seals on impeller
side. Also replace O-rings and/or impeller cover.
sdd2009-001-114_b
1. Slot
8 smr2012-036
smr2009-006-002_a
1. Seal on impeller side F18J0NA
TYPICAL
2. Put 23 ml (.8 U.S. oz) of JET PUMP BEARING

GREASE (P/N 293 550 032) in the cover.
smr2009-006-003_a
1. Cover O-rings
F18J18A
Check impeller boot and O-rings condition on im-
peller. Replace as required. TYPICAL
3. Install impeller cover by aligning the cover index

mark with the pump top fin as shown.
smr2009-006-004_a
1. Impeller boot
2. Impeller O-ring
sdd2009-001-114_c
3. Pump housing O-ring
1. Align mark with top fin
Perform a leak test. Refer to LEAK TEST in this
subsection. NOTE: Cover can only be installed in one position
as screw holes are not located symmetrically.
Impeller Cover Installation 4. Secure cover with NEW self-locking screws.
1. Install O-rings in their respective groove.
smr2012-036 9
NOTE: Push cover against pump housing while

alternately tightening screws. Make sure O-rings
are positioned correctly and they are not damaged
when pushing the cover.
5. Torque cover screws to 7.5 N•m (66 lbf•in).
IMPELLER
Impeller Removal
NOTE: If impeller shaft is to be disassembled,
loosen the impeller shaft nut prior to removing
the impeller.
1. Remove jet pump from the watercraft. Refer to smr2009-006-005_a
JET PUMP HOUSING in this subsection. TYPICAL
1. Flat side
COVER in this subsection. 5. Unscrew the impeller counterclockwise using
3. Remove impeller boot by turning it clockwise the required tool.
(LH threads).
ENGINE REQUIRED TOOL
100, 130, IMPELLER REMOVER/INSTALLER
155 (P/N 529 035 820)
IMPELLER REMOVER/INSTALLER
215, 260
(P/N 529 035 956)
529035956
TYPICAL
NOTE: It may be necessary to heat the impeller

to ease removal.
NOTICE Never use an impact wrench to
F19J06A
loosen impeller.
TYPICAL
1. Unscrew clockwise
4. Mount the flat sides of impeller shaft in a vise.
smr2009-006-006_b
TYPICAL
10 smr2012-036
6. To pull impeller out of the pump, apply a rotating

movement as you pull on the impeller.
Impeller Installation
1. Mount the flat sides of the impeller shaft in a
vise.
smr2009-006-002_c
TYPICAL
1. XPS lube
4. Start screwing the impeller on its shaft.
smr2009-006-005_a
TYPICAL
1. Flat side
2. Apply LOCTITE 767 (ANTISEIZE LUBRICANT)

(P/N 293 800 070) on threads of impeller shaft.
smr2009-006-007
TYPICAL
5. Mount the required tool in impeller splines.

155 (P/N 529 035 820)
smr2009-006-002_b 215, 260
(P/N 529 035 956)
TYPICAL
1. Antiseize lubricant
3. Apply XPS LUBE (P/N 293 600 016) on the wear

ring surface.
529035956
TYPICAL
6. Torque impeller as per table.

TORQUE
125 N•m (92 lbf•ft)
Remove tool.
smr2012-036 11
NOTICE Never use an impact wrench to 6. After cutting ring, insert a screwdriver blade be-
tighten impeller shaft. tween jet pump housing and ring outside diam-
eter.
7. Push ring so that it can collapse internally.
8. Pull ring out.
Wear Ring Installation

To install wear ring in housing, use a square steel
plate of approximately 180 x 180 mm x 6 mm thick
(7 x 7 in x 1/4 in) and a press.
Manually engage ring in housing making sure it is
equally inserted all around. Press ring until it seats
into bottom of housing.
smr2009-006-006_a
TYPICAL
7. Apply LOCTITE 577 (THREAD SEALANT) (P/N 293

800 050) on impeller boot threads.
8. Apply TRIPLE-GUARD GREASE (P/N 296 000 329)
inside impeller boot.
1
9. Install impeller boot on impeller and tighten
counterclockwise.
WEAR RING
Wear Ring Inspection 2
Check wear ring for:
– Deep scratches F01J1DA
– Irregular surface 1. Rounded edge

– Any apparent damage. 2. Press wear ring
Check IMPELLER/WEAR RING CLEARANCE, see If a press is not readily available, a piece of wood
procedure at the beginning of this subsection. such as a 2 x 4 in x 12 in long, can be used.
Manually engage ring in housing making sure it
Wear Ring Removal is equally inserted all around. Place wood piece
1. Remove the iBR gate, VTS trim ring and the over ring. Using a hammer, strike on wood to
steering nozzle as an assembly. See procedure push ring. Strike one side then rotate wood piece
in IBR AND VTS subsection. about 90° and strike again. Frequently rotate
2. Remove jet pump from watercraft. Refer to wood piece so that ring slides in evenly until it
JET PUMP HOUSING in this subsection. seats into bottom of housing.
3. Remove impeller from jet pump housing, refer
to IMPELLER in this subsection.
4. Place jet pump housing in a vise with soft jaws.
It is best to clamp housing using a lower ear.
5. Cut wear ring at two places.
NOTICE When cutting ring, be careful not to
damage jet pump housing.
NOTE: Wear ring can be cut using a jigsaw, a
small grinder or a low clearance hacksaw.
12 smr2012-036
F18J0PB
TYPICAL
1 1. Impeller remover/installer tool
2
F01J1FA
3. Install jet pump housing over impeller re-
1. Piece of wood mover/installer tool.
2. Rounded edge
3. Wear ring
IMPELLER SHAFT AND BEARING

Impeller Shaft and Bearing Removal
2. Mount in a vise the proper impeller remover/in-
staller as per table.
529035956 F18J0QA
TYPICAL
TYPICAL
ENGINE REQUIRED TOOL 4. Using a 30 mm socket, unscrew the impeller
100, 130, IMPELLER REMOVER/INSTALLER shaft nut counterclockwise.
155 (P/N 529 035 820) NOTE: If impeller loosens instead of shaft nut,
IMPELLER REMOVER/INSTALLER refer to IMPELLER SHAFT NUT REMOVAL IF
215, 260
(P/N 529 035 956) IMPELLER HAS LOOSENED further in this pro-
cedure.
smr2012-036 13
8. Use the IMPELLER SHAFT PUSHER (P/N 529 035

955) to press impeller shaft out of pump hous-
ing.
NOTE: Bearing will come out with the impeller
shaft.
smr2009-006-009_a
TYPICAL
529035955
5. Remove impeller shaft nut.
smr2009-006-010_a
smr2009-006-003_b
TYPICAL
TYPICAL
1. Nut
6. Remove impeller as described in this subsec-

tion.
7. From the impeller side, remove circlip, seals,
spacer and O-ring.
smr2009-006-011
TYPICAL
9. Use the IMPELLER SHAFT BEARING TOOL

(P/N 529 036 168) to press bearing off impeller
shaft.
smr2006-027-007_b
TYPICAL
1. Circlip
2. Seal
14 smr2012-036
3. Torque impeller more than impeller shaft nut.
smr2009-006-012_a
TYPICAL
1. Impeller shaft and bearing
2. Bearing tool on INNER race
smr2009-006-006_a
Impeller Shaft Nut Removal if Impeller Has TYPICAL

Loosened
4. Turn pump upside down and retry unscrewing
1. Turn pump upside down and mount the flat impeller shaft nut.
sides of impeller shaft in a vise.
smr2009-006-009_a
smr2009-006-005_a TYPICAL
TYPICAL
1. Flat side 5. If impeller still loosens instead of nut, retighten
impeller more and retry. Repeat until nut
2. Mount in the impeller splines the proper im- loosens.
peller remover/installer as per table.
6. Remove impeller as described in this subsec-
tion.
7. Return to step 5 in the IMPELLER SHAFT AND
BEARING REMOVAL main procedure.
Impeller Shaft and Bearing Inspection
529035956 With your finger nail, feel seal lip contact surface
TYPICAL on shaft. If any irregular surface is found, replace
shaft and seals.
Check condition of shaft threads.
155 (P/N 529 035 820)
215, 260
(P/N 529 035 956)
smr2012-036 15
smr2009-006-019_a
TYPICAL
1. Threads
2. Seal lip contact surface
3. Threads
Inspect ball bearing for corrosion.

smr2009-006-014_a
TYPICAL
Impeller Shaft and Bearing Installation 1. Bearing tool
Bearing Installation
The installation is essentially the reverse of the re- 2. Press bearing until it bottoms.
moval procedure. However, pay attention to the NOTE: Ensure impeller shaft turns freely and
following. smoothly.
1. Using the IMPELLER SHAFT BEARING TOOL 3. Turn pump upside down.
(P/N 529 036 168) on the bearing inner race,
4. Coat shaft surface with JET PUMP BEARING
press the bearing on the impeller shaft. GREASE (P/N 293 550 032).
2. Use the IMPELLER SHAFT PUSHER (P/N 529 035 5. Install O-ring at bottom.
955) to protect the impeller shaft threads.
NOTE: The bearing can be installed in either direc-
tion.
F19J07A 2 1
smr2009-006-013_a
TYPICAL
TYPICAL 1. O-ring at bottom
1. Impeller shaft bearing tool on INNER race 2. Coat surface
3. Impeller shaft installer/pusher tool 6. Apply 4 ml (.1 U.S. oz) of JET PUMP BEARING
3. Press bearing until it bottoms. GREASE (P/N 293 550 032) on bearing.
Impeller Shaft Installation

NOTE: Ensure there is no O-ring in pump housing
on the cover side.
1. From the outlet side of pump, press impeller
shaft assembly into housing using the IM-
PELLER SHAFT BEARING TOOL (P/N 529 036
168).
16 smr2012-036
F18J12A
TYPICAL F18J14B
TYPICAL
7. Press a NEW double lip seal using the 1. Seal/bearing pusher
SEAL/BEARING PUSHER (P/N 529 035 819) until
seal bottoms. Make sure seal lip are facing 8. Install spacer and then the other seal (thin). En-
upwards. sure seal lip is facing up.
smr2009-006-016_a
smr2009-006-015_a
1. Seal lip facing up
1. Seal lip up
9. Install circlip.
1
smr2006-027-007_c
F18J13A TYPICAL
1. Circlip
1. Seal lip facing up
10. Turn pump upside down.
11. Install the two O-rings in pump housing.
smr2012-036 17
smr2009-006-017_a
TYPICAL
1. O-rings
F18J0QA
12. Before installing any other parts, pressurize jet TYPICAL

pump to insure proper seal installation. Refer
to LEAK TEST in this subsection. 16. Using a 30 mm socket, screw the impeller
13. Install impeller. Refer to IMPELLER in this shaft nut on clockwise.
subsection. 17. Torque nut as specified in exploded view.
14. Mount in a vise the proper impeller re-
mover/installer as per table.
529035956
TYPICAL
ENGINE TOOL P/N

155 (P/N 529 035 820)
smr2009-006-009_b
215, 260 18. Apply 24 ml (.8 U.S. oz) of JET PUMP BEARING
(P/N 529 035 956)
GREASE (P/N 293 550 032) on the bearing (nut
side).
F18J0PB
1. Impeller remover/installer tool

smr2009-006-018
15. Install jet pump housing over this tool.
18 smr2012-036
19. Install the impeller cover. Refer to IMPELLER

NOZZLE (GTS MODELS)

Nozzle Removal
Disconnect steering cable from nozzle arm. Refer
to STEERING AND O.T.A.S.
Remove screws retaining nozzle to venturi.
smr2011-035-008_a
1. Screws
Remove nozzle.
Steering Nozzle Inspection

Inspect steering nozzle for cracks, wear, deforma-
tion, and other damages.
Inspect bushings for wear or other damage.
Replace parts as required.
Nozzle Installation
screw threads (or use new self-locking screws).
Torque screws as per table..
TORQUE
21 N•m (15 lbf•ft)
Secure steering cable to nozzle arm. Refer to Re-

fer to STEERING AND O.T.A.S.
Perform the STEERING ALIGNMENT. Refer to
smr2012-036 19
Section 06 STEERING AND PROPULSION
Subsection 04 (DRIVE SHAFT)
DRIVE SHAFT
SERVICE TOOLS
DRIVE SHAFT C-CLIP REMOVER ................................................. 529 036 026 ......................................... 511
FLOATING RING TOOL (TYPE I) ................................................... 529 035 841 ................................. 512, 517
FLOATING RING TOOL (TYPE II) .................................................. 529 036 116 ................................. 512, 517
PTO SUPPORT TOOL ................................................................... 529 035 842 ................................. 513, 515
SERVICE PRODUCTS
PULLEY FLANGE CLEANER ......................................................... 413 711 809 ......................................... 514
XPS LUBE...................................................................................... 293 600 016 ......................................... 512
XPS SYNTHETIC GREASE............................................................. 293 550 010 ......................................... 515
smr2012-037 509
NEW
Engine oil
XPS
Synthetic
grease
Synthetic grease
2 N•m
(18 lbf•in)

smr2012-037-100_a
510 smr2012-037
PROCEDURES All Models

1. On supercharged engines, remove also the
DRIVE SHAFT hose from the supercharger.
Drive Shaft Access 2. Drain cooling system and engine oil.
3. Disconnect the coolant tank hose from water
Models Without Suspension pump housing and move coolant tank aside to
1. Remove seat. make room.
2. Remove seat bridge from body, GTX, RXT and 4. Disconnect exhaust hose from the resonator.
Wake Pro models. Place hose over muffler.
3. Remove the rear handle, RXP-X models. 5. Remove water pump housing. Refer to WATER
4. Detach the air intake hose from the throttle PUMP HOUSING REMOVAL.
body, GTR and RXP-X models.
Drive Shaft Removal
Preparation
1. Remove moving deck and deck extension. Re-
fer to BODY subsection. Refer to DRIVE SHAFT ACCESS to remove re-
quired parts according to model.
TAKE SYSTEM (MODELS WITH SUSPENSION) To minimize oil spillage, syphon oil in engine PTO
subsection: area. Refer to PTO HOUSING REMOVAL in PTO
HOUSING AND MAGNETO subsection.
3. Detach the air intake hose from the throttle
body. Procedures
NOTE: Ensure jet pump is installed before begin-
ning this procedure.
1. Disconnect EGTS sensor as necessary.
2. Lift rubber protector to expose PTO seal as-
sembly.
3. Confirm the floating ring is not stuck on drive
shaft as follows:
REQUIRED TOOL
DRIVE SHAFT C-CLIP REMOVER
(P/N 529 036 026)
smr2010-024-200_a
NATURALLY-ASPIRATED ENGINE
529036026
3.1 Place the fork of drive shaft circlip remover

against floating ring.
3.2 Place the adjustable arm on engine.
smr2010-024-201_a
SUPERCHARGED ENGINE
2. Supercharger hose
smr2012-037 511
F18I0OA 1
TYPICAL
smr2011-036-002_a 1. Largest opening on PTO seal side
1. Fork against floating ring
2. Adjustable arm
3.3 Move the tool handle toward the front of

vehicle to push floating ring rearward. 1
smr2011-036-030_a
TYPICAL
1. Largest opening here
5. Turn tool screw CLOCKWISE until the following

gap is obtained.
smr2011-036-003_a
GAP BETWEEN TELLTALE GROOVE AND
NOTE: Do not remove circlip at this time. TOOL EDGE
3.4 Remove the drive shaft C-clip remover. 18 mm (.71 in)
4. Install the following tool on drive shaft with its
largest opening on PTO side. NOTE: This will expose the O-ring contact area.
6. Lubricate O-ring contact area with XPS LUBE
REQUIRED TOOL (P/N 293 600 016).
NOTE: This is necessary to ease drive shaft re-
FLOATING RING moval later in this procedure.
130 and 155
TOOL (TYPE I)
engines
(P/N 529 035 841)
FLOATING RING
215 and 260
TOOL (TYPE II)
engines
(P/N 529 036 116)
512 smr2012-037
1
2 F18I04A
1. Insert in groove of PTO seal assembly
NOTICE Strictly follow this procedure other-

wise damage to component might occur.
9. Reinstall the floating ring tool as shown.
A
smr2011-036-031_a
TYPICAL
1. Telltale groove
2. Lubricate this area
A. 18 mm (.71 in)
7. Remove the floating ring tool.

8. Install the following tool to PTO seal assembly.
REQUIRED TOOL
PTO SUPPORT TOOL (P/N 529 035 842)
F18I0OA 1
TYPICAL
1. Largest opening on PTO seal side
10. Turn screw of tool clockwise to push floating

ring rearward to expose circlip.
11. Remove and discard circlip.
529035842
smr2012-037 513
3
smr2006-028-006_a
2 TYPICAL
1. Surface condition
2. Splines condition
1
Excessive deflection could cause vibration and
damage to drive shaft splines, impeller or floating
F18C02A ring.
TYPICAL Place drive shaft on V-blocks and set-up a dial
1. Largest opening here
2. Floating ring gauge in center of shaft. Slowly rotate shaft; dif-
3. PTO seal support tool ference between highest and lowest dial gauge
4. Remove circlip
reading is deflection. Refer to the following illus-
12. Remove the floating ring tool. tration.
13. Place rags under PTO housing to prevent
spillage. If spillage occurs, clean immediately
with the PULLEY FLANGE CLEANER (P/N 413
711 809) to prevent oil stains.
14. Remove jet pump. Refer to JET PUMP sec-
tion.
15. Remove drive shaft.
NOTE: A slight jerk to the rear may be required to 1
remove the drive shaft from the PTO seal assem-
bly.
Drive Shaft Inspection

F01J15A 2
Drive Shaft
MEASURING DRIVE SHAFT DEFLECTION
Inspect condition of circlip groove. If there is any 1. Dial gauge
damage or severe wear, replace drive shaft. 2. V-blocks
Maximum permissible deflection is 0.5 mm

(.020 in).
Floating Ring
Inspect condition of O-rings and contact surface
of floating ring.
Replace as required.
smr2011-036-004_a
1. Circlip groove
Inspect condition of drive shaft splines. If splines

are damaged, replace drive shaft.
With your finger nail, feel machined surface of
drive shaft. If any irregular surface is found, re-
new drive shaft.
514 smr2012-037
1 2
F18I0KA
1. O-rings
2. Contact surface
Drive Shaft Installation

F18I0FA 1
Before installing drive shaft, discard both O-rings
inside PTO seal and install NEW ones. INCORRECT POSITION
1. Inner sleeve not flush with outer circumference
Remove the damper at the end of drive shaft and

replace it with a NEW one.
F18C01A
1. O-rings smr2006-028-004_a
1. Damper
Inspect PTO seal assembly. The inner sleeve
must be flush with outer circumference of the Install the PTO SUPPORT TOOL (P/N 529 035 842) on
assembly. Otherwise, gently push or tap on inner PTO seal assembly.
sleeve until flush. Apply a thin coat of XPS SYNTHETIC GREASE
(P/N 293 550 010) on the floating ring O-rings. Do
not get grease on floating ring contact surface.
1 2
F18I0KA
1. XP-S synthetic grease on O-rings

F18I0EA 1 2. No lubrication on contact surface
CORRECT POSITION Slide drive shaft far enough to install floating ring.
1. Inner sleeve flush with outer circumference
smr2012-037 515
3 1
F18I0HA 1 2 3
1. PTO seal support
2. Drive shaft end
3. Insert floating ring on shaft end
Continue pushing drive shaft towards engine care- F18I0IA 2

fully guiding it in the PTO seal then in crankshaft CORRECT INSTALLATION
splines. It may be necessary to move PTO seal 1. PTO seal assembly
assembly up and down to position it in the same 2. Shaft pushed in, hiding telltale groove
3. Inner sleeve flush with outer circumference
axis as the drive shaft.
NOTE: If drive shaft does not enter into the PTO 3 1
seal, check engine alignment.
F18I02A F18I0JA 2
TYPICAL IMPROPER INSTALLATION
1. PTO seal assembly
Maintain PTO seal assembly in the proper position 2. Telltale groove visible
3. Inner sleeve NOT flush with outer circumference
and tap shaft end until it bottoms against engine.
At this time, the telltale groove MUST NOT be vis- Temporarily install the jet pump.
ible. This validates the correct position. Install a new circlip using the following procedure
and tools.
NOTICE If the telltale groove is exposed, the
installation is wrong and PTO seal assembly
will be pressed into crankshaft splines which
could rub a hole in seal thus creating an oil
leak.
516 smr2012-037
REQUIRED TOOL If telltale groove is visible, pull PTO seal assembly

rearwards to fully extend it.
FLOATING RING
130 and 155 If inner sleeve is not flush, gently tap it until it is
TOOL (TYPE I)
engines flush.
(P/N 529 035 841)
FLOATING RING Reposition rubber protector.
215 and 260
TOOL (TYPE II) Reconnect EGTS sensor if applicable.
engines
(P/N 529 036 116)
Permanently install jet pump. Refer to JET PUMP
section.
Check engine oil level. Refill as necessary.
Test watercraft then ensure there is:
– No oil leak in PTO seal area
– No water intrusion by the thru-hull fitting area.
DRIVE SHAFT BOOT

Drive Shaft Boot Inspection
Inspect the condition of boot. If there is any dam-
F18I0NA 1 age or evidence of wear, replace it.
TYPICAL
1. Largest opening on through-hull fitting side Drive Shaft Boot Removal
NOTE: Ensure PTO seal support is still in place. Remove drive shaft. Refer to DRIVE SHAFT in this
subsection.
Push floating ring rearwards and install a NEW cir-
clip. Loosen gear clamp holding boot, then carefully
pull boot and carbon ring from hull insert.
3
2
smr2008-030-002_a
1 TYPICAL
2. Drive shaft boot
F18C02A
Drive Shaft Boot Installation
TYPICAL
1. Largest opening The installation is the reverse of the removal pro-
2. Floating ring cedure.
3. PTO seal support tool
4. Install circlip
CARBON RING
Remove floating ring tool and PTO seal support.
NOTE: Pulling drive shaft boot rearward will ease Carbon Ring Removal
removal of PTO support tool. Remove DRIVE SHAFT BOOT. See procedure in
Ensure everything is properly positioned: this section.
– Telltale groove is not visible Loosen gear clamp then pull carbon ring from
– Inner sleeve is flush with outer circumference drive shaft boot.
of PTO seal assembly
– Circlip is not exposed.
smr2012-037 517
smr2008-030-003_a
1. Drive shaft boot

2. Carbon ring
Carbon Ring Installation

cedure.
518 smr2012-037
Subsection XX (MANUAL SUSPENSION (S))
MANUAL SUSPENSION (S)

SERVICE TOOLS
SUPERTANIUM DRILL BIT 3/16"................................................... 529 031 800 ........................................... 11
smr2012-038 1
FRONT SUSPENSION ARM
48 Nm NEW
(35 lbfft)
NEW NEW
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
12 Nm
(106 lbfin)
NEW
NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW
25 Nm NEW
(18 lbfft) 12 Nm
(106 lbfin) 10 Nm
10 Nm (89 lbfin)
NEW (89 lbfin) NEW
See NEW
tightening
sequence NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft) NEW
NEW 48 Nm
See tightening (35 lbfft)
sequence

smr2011-037-100_a
2 smr2012-038
SHOCK ABSORBER
NEW
NEW 6 N•m
75 N•m (53 lbf•in)
(55 lbf•ft) See tightening
sequence
25 N•m
(18 lbf•ft)
NEW
NEW
25 N•m
(18 lbf•ft) NEW
6 N•m
(53 lbf•in)
See tightening
sequence NEW
25 N•m
(18 lbf•ft)
NEW
10 N•m
(89 lbf•in)
NEW
25 N•m
(18 lbf•ft)

smr2012-038-100_a
smr2012-038 3
REAR SUSPENSION ARM
NEW
12 Nm
(106 lbfin) NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW
NEW 12 Nm
NEW (106 lbfin)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft) 10 Nm
(89 lbfin) NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
NEW (18 lbfft)
10 Nm
NEW (89 lbfin)

smr2009-041-002_b
4 smr2012-038
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Suspension (S) allows the moving deck to
move independently from the fixed deck, isolat-
ing rider and passenger from the impact of rough
water.
The moving deck may be adjusted mechanically
to absorb (dampen) water shocks according to the
driver riding style and water conditions.
smr2011-037-001
SPRING PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT
NBR OF CLICKS
RIDERS TOTAL WEIGHT ON SPRING
(KG/LB) ADJUSTER
(CLOCKWISE*)
68 kg (150 lb) 0
79 kg (175 lb) 2
smr2009-041-080
90 kg (200 lb) 4
TYPICAL - MOVING DECK 102 kg (225 lb) 6
113 kg (250 lb) 8
125 kg (275 lb) 10
136 kg (300 lb) 12
147 kg (325 lb) 14
159 kg (350 lb) 16
170 kg (375 lb) 18
* 0 is set at fully unscrewed position
(counterclockwise).
sdd2009-001-202
TYPICAL - FIXED DECK

TROUBLESHOOTING
Spring Preload Adjustment
The spring preload can be easily adjusted using a DIAGNOSTIC GUIDELINES
1/2" drive ratchet wrench with an extension. The following is provided to help in diagnosing the
The spring preload adjuster is located under the probable source of troubles. It is a guideline and
seat. it should not be assumed to list all possible prob-
lems.
SUSPENSION MOVES ERRATICALLY

1. Defective shock absorber.
- Replace the shock absorber.
2. Broken spring.
- Replace spring.
smr2012-038 5
SUSPENSION NOISE (DURING A TURN) PROCEDURES

1. Front or rear suspension arm shaft supports po-
sition. SHOCK ABSORBER
- Supports must be flushed against both ends of Shock Absorber Location
shaft. Reposition shaft in its supports.
2. Worn arm shaft bushings.
- Check front and rear arm shaft bushings condition
3. Snap rings on both sides of the rear lower arm
shaft are not properly positioned.
- Reposition shaft in its supports. Refer to SUS-
PENSION ARM SHAFTS.
SUSPENSION NOISE (FRONT OF SEAT)

1. Holder retaining screws are loose.
- Tighten shock absorber holder screws to recom-
mended torque.
2. Shock absorber screws are loose.
- Tighten shock absorber screws to recommended
torque.
smr2012-038-003_a
SUSPENSION BOTTOMS HARD 1. Mounting plate

2. Shock absorber
3. Shock holder
1. Spring out of specification or broken.
- Replace spring. Shock Absorber Removal
2. Shock absorber is damaged. 1. Remove moving deck. Refer to BODY subsec-
- Check shock absorber resistance. Replace shock tion.
absorber.
2. Remove shock absorber upper bolt.
3. Bump stops damaged or worn.
- Replace both bump stops.
smr2012-038-010_a
1. Shock absorber upper bolt
3. Remove mounting plate by pulling it upwards.
6 smr2012-038
smr2012-038-001_b
SHOCK ABSORBER REMOVAL
smr2012-038-009_a
7. Remove shock holder from shock absorber.
MOUNTING PLATE REMOVAL
4. Remove spring and lower spring bushing.
smr2012-038-002_a
1. Shock absorber lower bolt
smr2011-037-010_a Shock Absorber Inspection

1. Spring NOTE: Because of gas pressure, strong resis-
2. Lower spring bushing
tance is felt when compressing shock.
5. Remove shock holder retaining screws. Dis- To inspect shock operation, or if suspecting an in-
card screws, keep washers ternal leak between oil chamber and gas chamber,
check shock as follows:
1. Grab the shock absorber body firmly and press
the rod end against a firm surface.
1.1 Verify the compression stroke when the
rod is fully extended.
1.2 Make sure that shock absorber rod can be
completely inserted in the shock body.
2. The shock should extend unassisted. Rod must
come out at a steady speed.
If any problem is detected, replace the shock ab-
smr2012-038-001_a
sorber.
TYPICAL
1. Shock holder retaining screws and washers Shock Absorber Installation
6. Remove shock absorber and shock holder.
Secure shock absorber using NEW bolts.
smr2012-038 7
Tighten shock absorber bolts to specification. 4. Remove spring holder retaining screws.
TORQUE
Shock absorber bolt 75 N•m (55 lbf•ft)
Install NEW shock holder screws.

Tighten shock holder screws to specification.
TORQUE
Shock holder screw 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
SPRING
Spring Location
smr2011-037-011_a
1. Spring holder retaining screws
5. Remove screw securing spring holder to link

arm.
smr2012-038-004_a
1. Spring
Spring Removal
tion.
2. Remove shock holder from its location. Refer
to SHOCK ABSORBER in this subsection. smr2012-038-005_a
TYPICAL - SOME PARTS REMOVED FOR CLARITY

1. Screw securing spring holder to link arm
6. Remove spring holder.
smr2012-038-001_a
TYPICAL
1. Shock holder retaining screws and washers
3. Move shock holder aside.
8 smr2012-038
Spring Installation
Tighten shock absorber bolts to specification.
TORQUE
Install NEW shock holder screws and spring

holder screws.
Tighten shock and spring holder screws to speci-
fication.
smr2011-037-012
SPRING HOLDER REMOVAL

TORQUE
Spring Inspection
Spring holder screw 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
Inspect spring and replace if one of the following
damage is detected: If spring supports were disassembled, pay atten-
– Crack in the paint tion to the following.
– Rust Install NEW upper spring support screws.
– Other visible damages. Tighten upper spring support screws to specifica-
NOTE: If rust is limited to a 1/4 of the first coil, the tion as per the following sequence.
spring should not be replaced.
TORQUE
Upper spring support
screw
smr2009-041-090_a
1. Zone where presence of rust is normal
Check the curve line of spring.

SPRING SHAPE
Maximum 7 mm (9/32 in)
smr2011-037-013_a
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
Tighten upper wear ring retaining screws to spec-

ification as per the following sequence.
smr2009-041-041_a
A. 7 mm (9/32 in) maximum
Replace spring if out of specification.
smr2012-038 9
TORQUE Tighten link arm bolts to specification.

Upper wear ring retaining TORQUE
screw
Link arm bolt 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
LATERAL SUPPORT
Lateral Support Location
The lateral supports are located on both side of the
fixed deck to support the moving deck.
smr2011-037-014_a
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
LINK ARM smr2010-045-011_a
1. Lateral supports
Link Arm Access
Refer to BODY subsection and remove: Lateral Support Removal
– Moving deck NOTE: The following instruction can be used for
– Deck extension. RH or LH support.
1. Remove the moving deck. Refer to BODY sub-
Link Arm Removal section.
1. Remove spring holder. Refer to SPRING RE- 2. Cut the Oetiker clamp retaining lateral bellows
MOVAL in this subsection. to lateral support.
2. Remove link arm lower retaining bolt.
smr2009-041-022_a
1. Lateral support
2. Oetiker clamp
3. Remove the lateral support screw.

smr2011-037-017_a

1. Link arm lower retaining bolt
Link Arm Installation

Secure link arm using NEW bolts.
10 smr2012-038
smr2009-041-023_a smr2010-045-012_a
1. Lateral support screw 1. LH lateral bellows shown
4. Remove lateral support from lateral bellows. Lateral Bellows Removal

Lateral Support Installation 1. Remove lateral support screw.
Apply soapy water solution on bellows opening
and insert the lateral support.
Index lateral supports with the front suspension
shaft ends. Lateral supports can be inserted in
one position only.
Install new lateral support screw.
Tighten lateral support screw to specification.
smr2009-041-024_a
TORQUE
1. Lateral support screw
Lateral support screw 48 N•m (35 lbf•ft)
2. Detach lateral support from suspension shaft.
Install a new Oetiker clamp. Position the ear of 3. Using the SUPERTANIUM DRILL BIT 3/16"
clamp rearwards. (P/N 529 031 800), remove all rivets (12) se-
curing the lateral bellows ring to body.
529031800
smr2009-041-066_a
RH SIDE SHOWN
1. Ear of clamp rearwards
LATERAL BELLOWS smr2009-041-025_a
Lateral Bellows Location 1. Rivet location
The lateral bellows are located on each side of the 4. Remove lateral ring.
fixed deck.
5. Cut Oetiker clamp securing bellows to lateral
support.
6. Separate lateral support from bellows.
smr2012-038 11
Lateral Bellows Installation FRONT SUSPENSION ARM

The installation is the reverse of the removal pro- Front Suspension Arm Location
Index suspension shaft with the lateral support.
The lateral support can be inserted in one position
only.
Install the retaining ring. Align the ring pin with
holes in bellows and body.
smr2012-038-006_a
TYPICAL - FIXED DECK REMOVED FOR CLARITY

smr2009-041-026_a 1. Front suspension arm
1. Ring pin
2. Bellows alignment hole
3. Body hole Front Suspension Arm Removal
Install new rivets. If the head of rivet tool can- section.
not be inserted in ring opening, use the sleeve
(P/N 707 000 181) to offset the rivet tool and well 2. Remove the engine. Refer to ENGINE RE-
lean the rivet head against ring. MOVAL AND INSTALLATION subsection.
Index lateral supports with the front suspension 3. Remove both lateral support screws.
one position only.
TORQUE
Install a new Oetiker clamp. Position the ear of

clamp rearwards.
smr2009-041-024_a
RH SIDE SHOWN
4. Detach lateral supports from suspension arm

shaft.
5. Remove screws securing both shaft supports
to suspension base.
smr2009-041-066_a
RH SIDE SHOWN
12 smr2012-038
SUSPENSION BASE
Suspension Base Location
smr2009-041-063_a
1. Shaft support (one on each side)
6. Move front suspension arm rearward to re-

move it.
Front Suspension Arm Installation

If a shaft support has been loosened from the smr2012-038-007_a
suspension arm shaft, see SUSPENSION ARM TYPICAL - FIXED DECK REMOVED FOR CLARITY
SHAFTS for proper installation procedure. 1. Suspension base
Suspension Base Removal

1. Refer to the appropriate procedures and re-
move the following parts:
– Moving deck
– Engine
– Shock absorber and spring.
2. Using a marker, trace the shape of suspension
base at the bottom of the hull to reposition it
at the same place.
smr2009-041-063_a
to suspension base.
Install NEW shaft support screws.

Tighten shaft support screws to specification.
TORQUE
Shaft support screws 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
smr2009-041-063_a
4. Remove and discard suspension base screws.
smr2012-038 13
1.3 Tighten suspension base screws to speci-

fication as per the following sequence.
TORQUE
Suspension base screws 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
smr2009-041-031_a
TYPICAL - STARBOARD SIDE

1. Suspension base screws
smr2009-041-032_a smr2012-038-008_a
TYPICAL - PORT SIDE TIGHTENING SEQUENCE

2. Install NEW shaft support screws to secure
5. Remove suspension base with the rear vent front suspension arm.
duct.
3. Tighten shaft support screws to specification.
TORQUE
4. Refer to the appropriate procedures and install

all other removed parts.
– Shock absorber and spring
– Engine
– Moving deck.
Suspension Base Installation without
smr2009-041-033_a Reference Marks
TYPICAL
1. Suspension base 1. Install the suspension base on watercraft using
2. Rear vent duct NEW screws. Do not tighten them yet.
Suspension Base Installation 2. Install NEW shaft support screws to secure
front suspension arm.
cedure. However, pay attention to the following. 3. Tighten shaft support screws to specification.
1. Install the suspension base. TORQUE
1.1 Position the base in accordance with the Shaft support screws 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
reference marks previously drawn at the
bottom of the hull. 4. Install lateral supports.
NOTE: If no marks are available, see SUS- 4.1 Index lateral supports with the front sus-
PENSION BASE INSTALLATION WITHOUT pension shaft ends. Lateral supports can
REFERENCE MARKS. be inserted in one position only.
1.2 Install NEW suspension base screws.
14 smr2012-038
4.2 Tighten lateral support screws to specifica- – Engine

tion. – Moving deck.
TORQUE
Lateral support screws 48 N•m (35 lbf•ft)
REAR SUSPENSION ARM
Rear Suspension Arm Location
5. Align suspension base on watercraft.
5.1 On both sides, measure the distance be-
tween the end of lateral support and fixed
deck.
smr2010-045-015_a
1. Rear suspension arm
Rear Suspension Arm Removal

smr2009-041-064_a
A. Same distance on LH and RH sides
2. Remove bolts securing both rear suspension
5.2 If required, move suspension base until arm covers.
both distances are equal.
TORQUE
smr2009-041-072_a
1. Rear suspension arm cover
3. Unclip and remove both lateral rear panels.
smr2012-038-008_a
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE

smr2012-038 15
NOTE: If the upper arm shaft or one of its arm

shaft support has been removed or loosened, re-
fer to SUSPENSION ARM SHAFTS for proper in-
stallation procedure.
2. Tighten upper arm support screws to specifica-
tion.
TORQUE
Upper arm support
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
screws
3. Carefully lower and secure the rear suspension

arm to the fixed deck.
smr2009-041-073_a
3.1 Position the rear suspension arm brackets
1. RH lateral rear panel
in accordance with the reference marks
4. Mark position of rear suspension arm brackets previously draw on fixed deck.
for proper reinstallation. NOTICE If no mark was traced, refer to
5. Remove and discard screws securing rear sus- REAR SUSPENSION ARM INSTALLATION
pension arm to fixed deck. WITHOUT REFERENCE MARKS for proper
procedure to install and align the rear sus-
pension arm.
3.2 Install NEW screws to secure rear suspen-
sion arm brackets.
3.3 Tighten rear suspension arm screws to
specification.
TORQUE
Rear suspension arm
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
screws
smr2009-041-074_a
1. Rear suspension arm screws Rear Suspension Arm Installation Without

Reference Marks
6. Remove and discard screws securing the top of
rear suspension arm. 1. Lower the rear suspension arm on fixed deck.
2. Position the square openings of rear suspen-
sion arm brackets so that the threaded inserts
in fixed deck are centered.
smr2009-041-075_a
1. Retaining screws
7. Remove the rear suspension arm from water-

smr2009-041-076_a
craft.
1. Square opening
2. Threaded insert
Rear Suspension Arm Installation
1. Using NEW screws, install the top of rear sus- 3. On each bracket, install the retaining plate and
pension arm. one screw.
16 smr2012-038
4. Install a weight of 90 kg (200 lb) on vehicle to 5. Apply a force on the RH support to move it on
lower the moving deck. the left side.
5. Check moving deck position in comparison to NOTICE Make sure arm shaft is fully inserted,
fixed deck. it must lean against the arm shaft support.
5.1 Check the gap between moving deck
wipers and fixed deck. It should be the
same on both sides.
5.2 Check front and rear gaps. Moving deck
should be able to move without having
contact with the fixed deck.
5.3 Reposition rear suspension arm brackets
on fixed deck until positioning of moving
deck is satisfactory.
6. Secure the rear suspension arm to the fixed
deck. smr2009-041-067_a
6.1 Install NEW screws to secure rear suspen- 1. Arm shaft against its support
sion arm brackets.
6. Install NEW support screws and tighten them
6.2 Remove and replace screws installed dur- to specification.
ing alignment.
TORQUE
specification. Shaft support screws 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
TORQUE 7. Secure both supports to shaft using NEW

Rear suspension arm socket screws.
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
screws 8. Tighten shaft screws to specification.
TORQUE
SUSPENSION ARM SHAFTS Shaft screws 12 N•m (106 lbf•in)
Removal of Front Suspension Arm
Shaft Removal of Rear Suspension Arm
1. Remove the FRONT SUSPENSION ARM, see Upper Shaft
procedure in this subsection. 1. Unclip and remove both lateral rear panels.
2. Remove and discard socket screws securing
supports to shaft.
3. Separate arm shaft supports from arm shaft.
Installation of Front Suspension Arm

Shaft
1. Insert shaft in the suspension arm.
2. Install a support on each end of shaft.
3. Secure the LH arm shaft support to suspension
base using NEW support screws.
NOTE: Make sure to insert the support pin into
suspension base hole.
4. Tighten the LH support screws to specification. smr2009-041-073_a
TORQUE 1. RH lateral rear panel
Shaft support screws 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft) 2. Remove arm shaft support screws.
smr2012-038 17
smr2009-041-067_a
smr2009-041-077_a 1. Arm shaft against its support

1. Arm shaft support screws
3. Remove and discard socket screws securing to specification.
supports to arm shaft.
TORQUE
4. Separate arm shaft support from arm shaft.
Upper arm support
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
Installation of Rear Suspension Arm screws
Upper Shaft
7. Secure both supports to shaft using NEW
1. Insert shaft in the rear arm. socket screws.
2. Install a support on each end of shaft. 8. Tighten upper shaft screws to specification.
3. Secure the LH support to rear arm holder using
TORQUE
NEW support screws.
NOTE: Make sure to insert the support pin into Upper shaft screws 12 N•m (106 lbf•in)
holder hole.
smr2009-041-078_a
smr2009-041-079_a
1. Support pin
2. Holder hole 1. Bar clamp
2. New socket screws
4. Tighten the LH support screws to specification.
Removal of Rear Suspension Arm
TORQUE Lower Shaft
Upper arm support 1. Open the boarding platform.
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
screws
5. Apply a force on the RH support to move it to arm covers.
the left side.
NOTE: A bar clamp can be used to compress both
supports together.
NOTICE Make sure arm shaft is fully inserted,
it must lay flush against the arm shaft support.
18 smr2012-038
smr2009-041-070_a
1. Circlip
smr2009-041-072_a
1. Rear suspension arm cover Installation of Rear Suspension Arm

3. Mark position of rear suspension arm brack- Lower Shaft
ets for proper reinstallation. 1. When reassembly the rear bracket on shaft
4. Remove and discard screws securing rear sus- end, press bracket on bushing to install the
pension arm to fixed deck. circlip.
2. When both brackets are installed on shaft, pull
brackets outside to position circlips against
brackets.
smr2009-041-074_a
1. Rear suspension arm screws

rear brackets to arm shaft ends. smr2009-041-071_a
1. Incorrect installation
2. Proper installation
3. Lower the rear suspension arm on fixed deck.

4. Tighten NEW socket screws to specification.
TORQUE
Lower shaft screws 10 N•m (89 lbf•in)
5. Refer to REAR ARM for reinstallation.
smr2009-041-069_a
1. Socket screw
2. LH rear bracket
6. Press one rear bracket against the suspension

arm bushing and remove the circlip. Repeat for
the other side.
smr2012-038 19
Subsection XX (ADJUSTABLE SUSPENSION (aS))
ADJUSTABLE SUSPENSION (aS)

SERVICE TOOLS
smr2012-039 1
48 Nm NEW
(35 lbfft)
NEW NEW
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
12 Nm
(106 lbfin)
NEW
NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW
25 Nm NEW
(18 lbfft) 12 Nm
(106 lbfin) 10 Nm
10 Nm (89 lbfin)
NEW (89 lbfin) NEW
See NEW
tightening
sequence NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft) NEW
NEW 48 Nm
See tightening (35 lbfft)
sequence

smr2011-037-100_a
2 smr2012-039
SHOCK ABSORBER
NEW
NEW 6 Nm
75 Nm (53 lbfin)
(55 lbfft) See tightening
sequence
NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW NEW
25 Nm 6 Nm
(18 lbfft) (53 lbfin)
See tightening
sequence
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW
NEW
10 Nm
NEW (89 lbfin)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)

smr2011-037-101_a
smr2012-039 3
REAR SUSPENSION ARM
NEW
12 Nm
(106 lbfin) NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW
NEW 12 Nm
NEW (106 lbfin)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft) 10 Nm
(89 lbfin) NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
NEW (18 lbfft)
10 Nm
NEW (89 lbfin)
smr2009-041-002_a
4 smr2012-039
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The adjustable Suspension (aS) allows the moving
deck to move independently from the fixed deck,
isolating rider and passenger from the impact of
rough water.
With the aS feature, the moving deck may be
adjusted mechanically to absorb (dampen) water
shocks according to the driver riding style and
water conditions.
smr2011-037-001
SPRING PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT
NBR OF CLICKS
RIDERS TOTAL WEIGHT ON SPRING
(KG/LB) ADJUSTER
(CLOCKWISE*)
57 kg (125 lb) 0
73 kg (160 lb) 2
89 kg (195 lb) 4
smr2009-041-080 105 kg (230 lb) 6
TYPICAL - MOVING DECK
120 kg (265 lb) 8
136 kg (300 lb) 10
152 kg (335 lb) 12
168 kg (370 lb) 14
184 kg (405 lb) 16
200 kg (440 lb) 18
(counterclockwise).
sdd2009-001-202
Damping Adjustment
TYPICAL - FIXED DECK
The aS Suspension damping may be personally
Spring Preload Adjustment adjustable according to the driving preferences
and water conditions.
The spring preload can be easily adjusted using a
1/2" drive ratchet wrench with an extension. Damping adjustment is carried out via the remote
nitrogen reservoir in the glove box.
The spring preload adjuster is located under the
seat. A blue knob located in glove box allows damper
adjustment for this purpose.
smr2012-039 5
SUSPENSION NOISE (DURING A TURN)

1. Front or rear suspension arm shaft supports po-
sition.
- Supports must be flushed against both ends of
- Check front and rear arm shaft bushings condition
3. Snap rings on both sides of the rear lower arm
- Reposition shaft in its supports. Refer to SUS-
PENSION ARM SHAFTS.
smo2011-002-006_a
1. Blue knob SUSPENSION NOISE (FRONT OF SEAT)

2. Nitrogen gas damper
1. Holder retaining screws are loose.
NBR OF CLICKS ON - Tighten shock absorber holder screws to recom-
TYPICAL CONDITIONS DAMPER ADJUSTER mended torque.
(CLOCKWISE*)
2. Shock absorber screws are loose.
0
Calm water - Tighten shock absorber screws to recommended
5 torque.
10 SUSPENSION BOTTOMS HARD
Rough water
15
1. Spring out of specification or broken.
Offshore 20 - Replace spring.
* 0 is set at fully unscrewed position 2. Shock absorber is damaged.
(counterclockwise).
- Check shock absorber resistance. Replace shock
absorber.
NOTE: These adjustments are provided as guide-
lines to ensure optimum suspension perfor- 3. Bump stops damaged or worn.
mance. Personal preference may dictate differ- - Replace both bump stops.
ent settings than those recommended.
TROUBLESHOOTING
DIAGNOSTIC GUIDELINES
lems.
SUSPENSION MOVES ERRATICALLY
1. Defective shock absorber.
- Replace the shock absorber.
2. Broken spring.
- Replace spring.
6 smr2012-039
PROCEDURES
SHOCK ABSORBER
Shock Absorber Location
smr2011-037-004_a
MOUNTING PLATE REMOVAL
4. Remove spring and lower spring bushing.
smr2011-037-002_a
1. Mounting plate
2. Shock absorber
3. Shock holder
Shock Absorber Removal

tion.
2. Remove shock absorber upper bolt.
smr2011-037-010_a
1. Spring
2. Lower spring bushing
5. Remove shock holder retaining screws.
smr2011-037-003_a
1. Shock absorber upper bolt
3. Remove mounting plate by pulling it upwards.
smr2011-037-005_a
TYPICAL
1. Shock holder retaining screws
6. Remove locking tie securing remote reservoir

hose.
smr2012-039 7
smr2011-037-006_a
smr2011-037-009_a
1. Locking tie securing remote reservoir hose
1. Shock absorber lower bolt
7. Remove bellows of remote reservoir hose from
deck. Shock Absorber Inspection
8. Insert remote reservoir into deck hole. NOTE: Because of gas pressure, strong resis-
To inspect shock operation, or if suspecting an in-
ternal leak between oil chamber and gas chamber,
2. The shock should extend unassisted. Rod must
come out at a steady speed.
If any problem is detected, replace the shock ab-
smr2011-037-007_a
sorber.
1. Bellows of remote reservoir hose
2. Deck hole
3. Remote reservoir Shock Absorber Installation
9. Remove shock absorber and remote reservoir.
TORQUE
Install NEW shock holder screws.

Tighten shock holder screws to specification.
TORQUE
smr2011-037-008
SHOCK ABSORBER REMOVAL
10. Remove shock holder from shock absorber.

8 smr2012-039
SPRING
Spring Location
smr2011-037-011_a
1. Spring holder retaining screws
5. Remove screw securing spring holder to link

arm.
smr2011-037-015_a
1. Spring
Spring Removal
tion.
2. Remove shock holder from its location. Refer
to SHOCK ABSORBER in this subsection.
smr2011-037-016_a

1. Screw securing spring holder to link arm
6. Remove spring holder.
smr2011-037-005_a
TYPICAL
1. Shock holder retaining screws
3. Move shock holder aside.

4. Remove spring holder retaining screws.
smr2011-037-012
SPRING HOLDER REMOVAL
smr2012-039 9
Spring Inspection TORQUE

Inspect spring and replace if one of the following Shock holder screw 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
damage is detected:
– Crack in the paint Spring holder screw 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
– Rust If spring supports were disassembled, pay atten-
– Other visible damages. tion to the following.
NOTE: If rust is limited to a 1/4 of the first coil, the Install NEW upper spring support screws.
Tighten upper spring support screws to specifica-
tion as per the following sequence.
TORQUE
Upper spring support
screw
smr2009-041-090_a
Check the curve line of spring.

SPRING SHAPE
smr2011-037-013_a
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
Tighten upper wear ring retaining screws to spec-

smr2009-041-041_a ification as per the following sequence.
TORQUE
Upper wear ring retaining
screw
Spring Installation
TORQUE
Install NEW shock holder screws and spring

holder screws.
Tighten shock and spring holder screws to speci-
fication.
smr2011-037-014_a
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
10 smr2012-039
LINK ARM
Link Arm Access
Refer to BODY subsection and remove:
– Moving deck
– Deck extension.
Link Arm Removal

1. Remove spring holder. Refer to SPRING RE- smr2010-045-011_a
MOVAL in this subsection. 1. Lateral supports
2. Remove link arm lower retaining bolt.
Lateral Support Removal
NOTE: The following instruction can be used for
RH or LH support.
section.
2. Cut the Oetiker clamp retaining lateral bellows
to lateral support.
smr2011-037-017_a

1. Link arm lower retaining bolt
Link Arm Installation

The installation is the reverse of the removal pro- smr2009-041-022_a
cedure. However, pay attention to the following. 1. Lateral support

2. Oetiker clamp
Secure link arm using NEW bolts.
Tighten link arm bolts to specification. 3. Remove the lateral support screw.
TORQUE
Link arm bolt 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
LATERAL SUPPORT
Lateral Support Location
fixed deck to support the moving deck.
smr2009-041-023_a
4. Remove lateral support from lateral bellows.
Lateral Support Installation

smr2012-039 11

one position only.
TORQUE
smr2009-041-024_a
Install a new Oetiker clamp. Position the ear of 2. Detach lateral support from suspension shaft.
clamp rearwards.
3. Using the SUPERTANIUM DRILL BIT 3/16"
(P/N 529 031 800), remove all rivets (12) se-
curing the lateral bellows ring to body.
529031800
smr2009-041-066_a
RH SIDE SHOWN
LATERAL BELLOWS
Lateral Bellows Location smr2009-041-025_a
The lateral bellows are located on each side of the 1. Rivet location
fixed deck.
4. Remove lateral ring.
5. Cut Oetiker clamp securing bellows to lateral
support.
Lateral Bellows Installation

smr2010-045-012_a
1. LH lateral bellows shown The lateral support can be inserted in one position
only.
Lateral Bellows Removal Install the retaining ring. Align the ring pin with
1. Remove lateral support screw. holes in bellows and body.
12 smr2012-039

Front Suspension Arm Location
smr2009-041-026_a
1. Ring pin
3. Body hole
Install new rivets. If the head of rivet tool can-

(P/N 707 000 181) to offset the rivet tool and well smr2010-045-013_a
lean the rivet head against ring. TYPICAL - FIXED DECK REMOVED FOR CLARITY
1. Front suspension arm
shaft ends. Lateral supports can be inserted in Front Suspension Arm Removal
one position only. 1. Remove the moving deck. Refer to BODY sub-
Install new lateral support screw. section.
Tighten lateral support screw to specification. 2. Remove the engine. Refer to ENGINE RE-
MOVAL AND INSTALLATION subsection.
TORQUE
3. Remove both lateral support screws.

clamp rearwards.
smr2009-041-024_a
RH SIDE SHOWN
4. Detach lateral supports from suspension arm

smr2009-041-066_a shaft.
RH SIDE SHOWN
1. Ear of clamp rearwards 5. Remove screws securing both shaft supports
to suspension base.
smr2012-039 13
SUSPENSION BASE
smr2009-041-063_a

move it.
smr2010-045-014_a
Front Suspension Arm Installation TYPICAL - FIXED DECK REMOVED FOR CLARITY
1. Suspension base
cedure. However, pay attention to the following. Suspension Base Removal
If a shaft support has been loosened from the 1. Refer to the appropriate procedures and re-
suspension arm shaft, see SUSPENSION ARM move the following parts:
SHAFTS for proper installation procedure.
– Moving deck
– Engine
– Shock absorber and spring.
2. Using a marker, trace the shape of suspension
at the same place.
to suspension base.
smr2009-041-063_a
Install NEW shaft support screws.

Tighten shaft support screws to specification.
TORQUE
smr2009-041-063_a
14 smr2012-039

TORQUE
smr2009-041-031_a
TYPICAL - STARBOARD SIDE

smr2009-041-065_a
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE

smr2009-041-032_a 3. Tighten shaft support screws to specification.
TYPICAL - PORT SIDE
1. Suspension base screws TORQUE
5. Remove suspension base with the rear vent Shaft support screws 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
duct.
– Engine
– Moving deck.
Suspension Base Installation without
Reference Marks
1. Install the suspension base on watercraft using
NEW screws. Do not tighten them yet.
smr2009-041-033_a
TYPICAL 3. Tighten shaft support screws to specification.
1. Suspension base
2. Rear vent duct
TORQUE
Suspension Base Installation Shaft support screws 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
4. Install lateral supports.
4.1 Index lateral supports with the front sus-
1. Install the suspension base.
pension shaft ends. Lateral supports can
1.1 Position the base in accordance with the be inserted in one position only.
4.2 Tighten lateral support screws to specifica-
bottom of the hull.
tion.
NOTE: If no marks are available, see SUS-
PENSION BASE INSTALLATION WITHOUT
REFERENCE MARKS.
smr2012-039 15
TORQUE REAR SUSPENSION ARM

Lateral support screws 48 N•m (35 lbf•ft) Rear Suspension Arm Location
5. Align suspension base on watercraft.
deck.
smr2010-045-015_a

smr2009-041-064_a
A. Same distance on LH and RH sides 2. Remove bolts securing both rear suspension
arm covers.
5.2 If required, move suspension base until
TORQUE
smr2009-041-072_a
smr2009-041-065_a
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE

– Engine
– Moving deck.
smr2009-041-073_a
16 smr2012-039
4. Mark position of rear suspension arm brackets 3. Carefully lower and secure the rear suspension
for proper reinstallation. arm to the fixed deck.
5. Remove and discard screws securing rear sus- 3.1 Position the rear suspension arm brackets
pension arm to fixed deck. in accordance with the reference marks
previously draw on fixed deck.
NOTICE If no mark was traced, refer to
REAR SUSPENSION ARM INSTALLATION
WITHOUT REFERENCE MARKS for proper
pension arm.
sion arm brackets.
smr2009-041-074_a
specification.
1. Rear suspension arm screws TORQUE
6. Remove and discard screws securing the top of Rear suspension arm
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
rear suspension arm. screws
Rear Suspension Arm Installation Without

Reference Marks
smr2009-041-075_a
1. Retaining screws
7. Remove the rear suspension arm from water-

craft.
Rear Suspension Arm Installation

1. Using NEW screws, install the top of rear sus-
pension arm. smr2009-041-076_a
1. Square opening
NOTE: If the upper arm shaft or one of its arm 2. Threaded insert
fer to SUSPENSION ARM SHAFTS for proper in- 3. On each bracket, install the retaining plate and
stallation procedure. one screw.
2. Tighten upper arm support screws to specifica- 4. Install a weight of 90 kg (200 lb) on vehicle to
tion. lower the moving deck.
TORQUE 5. Check moving deck position in comparison to
fixed deck.
Upper arm support
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft) 5.1 Check the gap between moving deck
screws
same on both sides.
5.2 Check front and rear gaps. Moving deck
should be able to move without having
smr2012-039 17
5.3 Reposition rear suspension arm brackets

on fixed deck until positioning of moving
deck is satisfactory.
6. Secure the rear suspension arm to the fixed
deck.
sion arm brackets.
6.2 Remove and replace screws installed dur-
ing alignment.
smr2009-041-067_a
1. Arm shaft against its support
specification.
TORQUE 6. Install NEW support screws and tighten them
to specification.
Rear suspension arm
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft) TORQUE
screws
SUSPENSION ARM SHAFTS 7. Secure both supports to shaft using NEW
Removal of Front Suspension Arm socket screws.
Shaft 8. Tighten shaft screws to specification.
1. Remove the FRONT SUSPENSION ARM, see TORQUE
Shaft screws 12 N•m (106 lbf•in)
supports to shaft.
Upper Shaft
Installation of Front Suspension Arm 1. Unclip and remove both lateral rear panels.
Shaft
1. Insert shaft in the suspension arm.
TORQUE
5. Apply a force on the RH support to move it on

the left side. smr2009-041-073_a

it must lean against the arm shaft support. 2. Remove arm shaft support screws.
18 smr2012-039
smr2009-041-067_a
smr2009-041-077_a 1. Arm shaft against its support

3. Remove and discard socket screws securing to specification.
TORQUE
Upper arm support
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
Installation of Rear Suspension Arm screws
Upper Shaft
7. Secure both supports to shaft using NEW
1. Insert shaft in the rear arm. socket screws.
2. Install a support on each end of shaft. 8. Tighten upper shaft screws to specification.
TORQUE
NEW support screws.
NOTE: Make sure to insert the support pin into Upper shaft screws 12 N•m (106 lbf•in)
holder hole.
smr2009-041-078_a
smr2009-041-079_a
1. Support pin
2. Holder hole 1. Bar clamp
2. New socket screws
TORQUE Lower Shaft
Upper arm support 1. Open the boarding platform.
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
screws
5. Apply a force on the RH support to move it to arm covers.
the left side.
supports together.
smr2012-039 19
smr2009-041-070_a
1. Circlip
smr2009-041-072_a
1. Rear suspension arm cover Installation of Rear Suspension Arm

3. Mark position of rear suspension arm brack- Lower Shaft
ets for proper reinstallation. 1. When reassembly the rear bracket on shaft
4. Remove and discard screws securing rear sus- end, press bracket on bushing to install the
pension arm to fixed deck. circlip.
brackets.
smr2009-041-074_a

rear brackets to arm shaft ends. smr2009-041-071_a

4. Tighten NEW socket screws to specification.
TORQUE
Lower shaft screws 10 N•m (89 lbf•in)
5. Refer to REAR ARM for reinstallation.
smr2009-041-069_a
1. Socket screw
2. LH rear bracket

arm bushing and remove the circlip. Repeat for
the other side.
20 smr2012-039
Subsection XX (INTELLIGENT SUSPENSION (iS))
INTELLIGENT SUSPENSION (iS)

SERVICE TOOLS
FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER ............................................................ 529 035 868 ..................................... 15–18
MAGNETO HARNESS 6 PINS....................................................... 295 000 136 ........................................... 15
SERVICE PRODUCTS
DIELECTRIC GREASE ................................................................... 293 550 004 ............................................. 9
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ..................................... 23, 25
smr2012-040 1
FRONT SUSPENSION ARM AND HYDRAULIC PUMP
NEW NEW
48 Nm
(35 lbfft)
NEW
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
NEW
12 Nm
(106 lbfin)
NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft) NEW
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
NEW
48 Nm
2 Nm NEW (35 lbfft)
(18 lbfin) 12 Nm
(106 lbfin)
10 Nm
(89 lbfin) NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft) NEW
25 Nm 10 Nm
(18 lbfft) (89 lbfin)
10 Nm NEW
(89 lbfin)
NEW
NEW
NEW 10 Nm
25 Nm (89 lbfin)
(18 lbfft) 10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
8 Nm
(71 lbfft)
Loctite 243
smr2010-045-001_a
2 smr2012-040
ACTUATOR AND SHOCK ABSORBER
NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW
75 Nm
(55 lbfft)
6 Nm
(53 lbfin) 6 Nm
NEW (53 lbfin)
NEW
NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
75 Nm NEW
(55 lbfft) 25 Nm
NEW (18 lbfft)
NEW
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
smr2010-045-002_a
smr2012-040 3
REAR SUSPENSION ARM
NEW
12 Nm
(106 lbfin) NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW
NEW 12 Nm
NEW (106 lbfin)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft) 10 Nm
(89 lbfin) NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
NEW (18 lbfft)
10 Nm
NEW (89 lbfin)

smr2009-041-002_b
4 smr2012-040
GENERAL
NOTE: For a complete overview of the electrical
system, refer to POWER DISTRIBUTION AND
GROUNDS subsection.
It is highly recommended to disconnect the bat-
tery when replacing any electric or electronic com-
ponent.
WARNING
Always disconnect battery exactly in the sdd2009-001-206_b
specified order, BLACK (-) cable first, RED (+) 1. Rear suspension arm
cable last. Always reconnect BLACK (-) cable 3. Springs
last. Do not place tools on battery. 4. Shock absorber
An actuator is mounted underneath the springs to

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION control the spring preload and therefore the sus-
(COMPONENTS) pension height.
The intelligent suspension is a mechanical system
composed of two springs and one shock absorber
installed in the fixed deck which connects to the
moving deck to isolate the riders from the rough
water.
smr2009-041-038_a
1. Springs
2. Actuator
The iS module controls the electric motor of the

smr2009-041-080
hydraulic pump to adjust the actuator height. It
MOVING DECK also sets the suspension height according to the
active mode of operation and input signals.
sdd2009-001-202
FIXED DECK
smr2009-041-039_a
REAR STARBOARD SIDE

1. iS module
iS Module
The iS module communicates via CAN protocol
with the multifunction gauge.
smr2012-040 5
The iS module receives information from the mul- Manual Suspension Mode
tifunction gauge and a comparison is made with MANUAL SUSPENSION mode allows fine-tun-
the input from the suspension position sensor. If ing the suspension calibration to the operator's
the suspension is not in the proper position, the iS preference. The SUSPENSION HEIGHT can be
module will send an output signal to the hydraulic adjusted using the UP or DOWN button while in
pump to either raise or lower the suspension to IS MODE.
pre-programmed positions.
SUSPENSION HEIGHT can be adjusted a total of
Suspension Position Sensor nine increments.
The suspension position sensor is a potentiome- NOTE: Changing the suspension height using the
ter that sends a signal to the iS module which is UP/DOWN buttons puts the iS system in MAN-
proportional to the front suspension arm angle. UAL SUSPENSION mode. The AUTO mode is de-
activated.
SYSTEM OPERATION Manually Adjusting Ride Height
The intelligent suspension system (iS), allows the While in IS MODE, press the UP or DOWN button
moving deck to move independently of the fixed once to move the suspension to the next height
deck, isolating rider and passenger(s) from the im- increment, or press and hold the button until the
pact of rough water. desired ride height is obtained.
WARNING
Although the suspension system absorbs
part of the vertical forces and therefore re-
duces the impact force to the body, it cannot
eliminate it completely. To prevent you and
your passenger from being bounced and
eventually ejected from the watercraft, re-
duce your speed.
sdd2009-001-024_b
TYPICAL
WARNING 1. MODE
2. SET
Avoid riding in very rough waters or practic- 3. UP and DOWN button
ing extreme maneuvers like jumping wakes
or waves. The following indications of manual suspension
mode can be observed in the digital screen of the
The iS system provides multiple modes of opera- information center:
tion. – A scrolling message in the digital screen that
states MANUAL SUSPENSION.
Automatic Suspension Mode – The AUTO indication in the iS display will disap-
The system always starts up in AUTOMATIC SUS- pear.
PENSION mode and shuts down in DOCK mode. – The suspension position indicator will indicate
The suspension will automatically move up to a the relative SUSPENSION HEIGHT (only one
factory preset height. This height is ideal for most segment of the indicator will be on).
riding conditions at cruising speeds.
The iS system constantly monitors the stroke of
the suspension and automatically compensates
for changing water conditions and passenger
load.
The moving deck height proportionally elevates
the center of gravity of the watercraft.
NOTE: When performing certain maneuvers at
low speed the watercraft's propensity to overturn
can increase.
6 smr2012-040
Dock Mode AUTO

3 2
In DOCK MODE AUTO, the suspension lowers to
in
lap
AM
DOCK mode height to lower the center of gravity
RPMgal/h
when certain conditions are met.

1
– When the engine is shut down after normal op-
eration of the watercraft.
– If O.T.A.S. is activated SEE ACTIVE TECH-
AUTOMATIC SUSPENSION MODE NOLOGIES (iCONTROL).
– If the operator releases the throttle to idle RPM
1. MANUAL SUSPENSION message is displayed for approximately 10 seconds.
here
2. AUTO mode indicator OFF
NOTE: When the suspension moves down to
dock mode height, a DOCK MODE ON message
3. Relative suspension position
indication
will scroll across in the multifunction display.
Dock Mode OFF
Reverting Back to AUTO MODE
If the suspension is set to DOCK MODE OFF, the
To revert back to AUTO selection mode without suspension will not lower itself to DOCK mode
stopping the engine, proceed as follows: height when the throttle is released to idle for
– Press the MODE button repeatedly until the IS more than ten seconds. However, it will lower
MODE message appears in the multifunction itself automatically when:
display. – The engine is shut off
– Press the SET button. – When O.T.A.S. is activated.
– A scrolling message in the mul- If the suspension is in the up position with the wa-
tifunction display stating DOU- tercraft powered up and the DOWN button is dou-
BLE_CLICK_UP_FOR_AUTO_MODE appears. ble clicked while in the IS MODE, the suspension
– Double click on UP button. will lower itself to DOCK mode height even if the
The AUTO mode is confirmed by: suspension is set to DOCK MODE OFF.
– A scrolling message in the digital screen stating If the suspension is in the down position (dock
AUTOMATIC SUSPENSION. mode height) with the watercraft powered up and
– The AUTO indication in the iS display will ap- the UP button is double clicked while in the IS
pear. MODE, the suspension will move up to the fac-
– All segments of the suspension position indica- tory preset height.
tor will be on.
WARNING
3 2 When performing certain maneuvers at low
speed or when docking, the watercraft's
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
propensity to overturn can increase. The
1 more riders (or weight) on the moving deck,
the more unstable the watercraft may be-
come.
AUTOMATIC SUSPENSION MODE NOTE: DOCK MODE AUTO is always active

when using a learning key.
1. AUTOMATIC SUSPENSION
message is displayed here Selecting DOCK MODE AUTO or DOCK MODE
OFF
2. AUTO mode indicator ON
3. All segments of suspension position indicator ON Selecting DOCK MODE AUTO or DOCK MODE
OFF is only available when the engine is not run-
ning and when using a normal key.
Dock Modes
To change the DOCK mode of operation, carry out
The iS system can be set to DOCK MODE AUTO the following steps.
or DOCK MODE OFF.
1. Press the START/STOP button to power up the
information center.
smr2012-040 7
2. Install the tether cord on the engine cut-off 7. Press the SET button, or wait for the function to
switch. time out to save the setting and return to main
3. Press the MODE button repeatedly until SET- display.
TINGS is displayed in the Information Center. You may now start the engine and drive away us-
ing the selected DOCK MODE.
in
lap
AM
CAUTION Operating the watercraft in
RPMgal/h
DOCK MODE OFF prevents the suspension
from automatically moving to the "down" po-
sition when operating the watercraft at slow
speed or when stopping. This maintains a
higher center of gravity, reduces stability, and
MESSAGE DISPLAYED makes the watercraft more prone to overturn-
ing.
SETTINGS
4. Press the SET button to display DOCK MODE. TROUBLESHOOTING

DIAGNOSTIC TIPS
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h It is important to determine first if the problem is
electrical or mechanical related. If you hear the
hydraulic motor running when pressing the UP or
DOWN button, check for related mechanical prob-
lem.
FIRST AVAILABLE MODE OPTION NOTE: It is a good practice to check for fault
codes using B.U.D.S. software as a first trou-
DOCK MODE message is displayed here bleshooting step. If a problem occurs with the
suspension, several fault codes pertaining to the
5. Press the SET button to display DOCK MODE suspension position sensor may be generated.
AUTO.
IMPORTANT: When troubleshooting an electrical
system fault, check battery condition, cables and
in
connections first.
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
Electrical System Activation

NOTE: Pressing the START/STOP button without
the D.E.S.S. key installed on its post will turn on
MODE ACTIVATED electrical power without starting the engine; the
DOCK MODE AUTO message is displayed here information center will cycle through a self-test
function and shut off its display after a few sec-
6. Press the UP or DOWN button to toggle the onds. However, the electrical system will stay
display to DOCK MODE OFF. powered up for approximately three minutes after
the START/STOP button was depressed.
2. Install D.E.S.S. key to activate ECM and the in-
in
lap
AM
formation center when testing procedures re-
RPMgal/h
quire the device or system to be supplied with
electrical power.
NOTE: When using B.U.D.S.,briefly press the
START/STOP button to initiate back the commu-
nication after the electrical system has shut off.
MODE DEACTIVATED
DOCK MODE OFF message is displayed here
8 smr2012-040
Circuit Testing 4. Shock absorber is damaged.

Check the related-circuit fuse condition with a - Replace shock absorber.
fuse tester or test light (relying solely on a visual 5. Leak in hydraulic circuit.
inspection could lead to an incorrect conclusion).
- Repair or replace defective part(s).
Electrical Connection Inspection 6. Faulty suspension position sensor.
When replacing an electric or electronic compo- - Test sensor and replace as required.
nent, always check electrical connections. Make 7. Actuator is damaged.
sure they are tight, make good contact, and are
- Replace the actuator.
corrosion-free. Dirty, loose or corroded contacts
are poor conductors and are often the source of a 8. Hydraulic pump cannot build enough pressure.
system or component malfunction. - Replace hydraulic pump.
Pay particular attention to ensure that pins are not
bent or pushed out of their connectors. SUSPENSION MOVES ERRATICALLY
Ensure all wire terminals are properly crimped on 1. Defective shock absorber.
wires, and connector housings are properly fas- - Replace the shock absorber.
tened.
2. Broken spring(s).
Check for signs of moisture, corrosion or dullness. - Replace spring(s).
Clean pins properly and coat them with DIELEC-
TRIC GREASE (P/N 293 550 004) or other appropri- SUSPENSION NOISE (DURING A TURN)
ate lubricant (except if otherwise specified) when
reassembling them. 1. Front or rear suspension arm shaft supports po-
sition.
Pay attention to the ground wire connections.
Make sure they are clean, tight and free of corro- - Supports must be flushe against both ends of
sion.
DIAGNOSTIC GUIDELINES - Check front and rear arm shaft bushings condition
probable source of troubles. It is a guideline and 3. Snap rings on both sides of the rear lower arm
lems. - Reposition shaft in its supports.
SUSPENSION DOES NOT MOVE SUSPENSION NOISE (FRONT OF SEAT)

1. Check gauge display for iS informations. 1. Holder retaining screws are loose.
- No information, refer to the diagnostic flow chart - Tighten shock absorber and actuator holder
(electrical) in this subsection. screws to recommended torque.
- iS information appears, refer to the diagnostic 2. Shock absorber screws are loose.
flow chart (hydraulic/mechanical) in this subsec-
tion. - Tighten shock absorber screws to recommended
torque.
SUSPENSION DOES NOT LOWER IN 3. Link under actuator holder loosened or not in-
DOCK MODE POSITION stalled.
1. Something stuck under moving deck. - Install link properly.
- Remove object(s) between moving deck and - Tighten bolts to recommended torque.
fixed deck.
SUSPENSION IS LOWER THAN THE DOCK
2. PWC is not level. MODE POSITION
- Place PWC level
1. Spring (s) out of specification or broken.
3. Hydraulic fluid level too low. - Replace the defective spring(s).
- Refill hydraulic pump reservoir and check for
leaks. 2. Bump stops damaged or worn.
smr2012-040 9
SUSPENSION BOTTOMS HARD

1. Spring(s) out of specification or broken.
- Replace the defective spring(s).
2. Shock absorber is damaged.
- Check shock absorber resistance. Replace shock
absorber.
3. Bump stops damaged or worn.
SUSPENSION QUIT WORKING BUT

MAY OPERATE MOMENTARILY AFTER
RESTARTING THE ENGINE
1. Hydraulic pump current draw is too high.
- Check hydraulic pump.
2. Internal problem within iS module.
- Replace iS module.
10 smr2012-040
DIAGNOSTIC FLOW CHARTS
iS Electrical Troubleshooting
Suspension does not move
NO Check CAN
Can you see iS display? bus
YES
Check for
hydraulic
or mechanical Can you hear the
YES hydraulic pump running NO Suspension
problem, see iS
hydraulic/mechanical when pressing iS button(s) moves?
troubleshooting on steering?
flow chart YES
NO
Install the latest System is ok

version of B.U.D.S.
software and
check fault codes
Is there a YES Follow service

fault code? action
NO
In B.U.D.S. activation
page, activate iS UP NO Suspension
and iS DOWN moves?
buttons
YES
Check the System is ok

suspension position YES
sensor and Suspension moves?
the iS buttons
NO
Suspension NO Perform hydraulic

moves? * pump operation test Perform iS
module test
YES
System is ok
Hydraulic pump YES
can be activated?
NO Suspension
NO moves?
YES
* If all input voltage tests are good, but suspension Replace
does not activate with switches but does with hydraulic
B.U.D.S., suspect gauge issue. pump System is OK
smr2009-041-100_en
smr2012-040 11
iS Hydraulic/Mechanical Troubleshooting
Suspension does not move
Check for
an electrical
problem, see
Can you hear the NO iS electrical
hydraulic pump running troubleshooting
when pressing iS button(s) flow chart
on steering?
YES
Level NO Is there something YES Remove

vehicle stuck under object(s)
moving deck?
NO
Suspension NO NO Suspension
moves? Is vehicle level?
moves?
YES YES YES
System is OK Check hydraulic fluid level System is OK
NO Refill reservoir
Is fluid level good?
YES
Check for leak(s) NO Suspension

moves?
YES
Repair or replace YES Is there visual System is OK

defective part(s) leak(s)?
NO
Suspension NO Replace hydraulilc
moves? Check hydraulic cylinder cylinder
YES
System is OK NO
Is cylinder good?
NO Suspension
YES moves?
YES
Replace
hydraulic
pump System is OK
smr2009-041-101_en
12 smr2012-040
PROCEDURES
SHOCK ABSORBER
Shock Absorber Location
smr2009-041-004_a
1. Rear retaining screws
5. Remove shock absorber with mounting plate

and shock holder.
smr2010-045-004_a
NOTE: Take care not to let the spring protector fall
1. Shock absorber into the hull.
2. Shock holder
3. Mounting plate 6. Remove and discard the screw securing shock
absorber to shock holder.
Shock Absorber Removal
section.
2. Remove tapes securing central bellows to
mounting plate.
3. Move down central bellows to reach shock
holder screws.
4. Remove and discard the four screws securing
the shock holder.
NOTE: Using lateral supports, raise front arm to
reach front screws. smr2009-041-005_a
1. Shock absorber lower screw (discard)

2. Shock holder
7. Detach the top of shock absorber from mount-

ing plate. Discard screw.
smr2009-041-003_a
1. Front retaining screws

smr2009-041-006_a
1. Shock absorber upper screw (discard)

2. Mounting plate
Shock Absorber Inspection

NOTE: Because of gas pressure, strong resis-
smr2012-040 13
To inspect shock operation, or if suspecting an in-

ternal leak between oil chamber and gas chamber,
2. The shock should extend unassisted. Rod must smr2009-041-007_a
come out at a steady speed. 1. Spring protector

2. Long spring
If any problem is detected, replace the shock ab- 3. Spacer
4. Short spring
sorber. 5. Spring holder
Shock Absorber Installation Spring Inspection

The installation is the reverse of the removal pro- Inspect both springs and replace if one of the fol-
cedure. However, pay attention to the following. lowing damage is detected:
Secure the shock absorber using NEW screws. – Crack in the paint
Tighten screws to 75 N•m (55 lbf•ft). – Rust
Install NEW shock holder screws and tighten – Other visible damage.
them to 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft). NOTE: If rust is limited to a 1/4 of the first coil, the
SPRINGS
Spring Location
smr2009-041-090_a
Check the curve line of the long spring.

LONG SPRING SHAPE
smr2010-045-005_a
1. Springs
Spring Removal
1. Remove SHOCK ABSORBER, see procedure in
this subsection.
2. Remove the spring protector, the long spring,
the spacer, the short spring and the spring
holder.
smr2009-041-041_a
14 smr2012-040
Spring Installation NOTE: If the seat is moving up and the number

The installation is the reverse of the removal pro- does not increase in B.U.D.S. but it is between 10
cedure. and 100%, check the suspension position sensor
fork.
SUSPENSION POSITION 3. Unplug the 6-pins connector from the iS mod-
ule. The module is located in front of the bat-
SENSOR tery in the same compartment.
Suspension Position Sensor Location
The suspension position sensor is located on sus-
pension base, under the hydraulic pump reservoir.
smr2009-041-009_a
1. Suspension position sensor connector on iS module
smr2010-045-006_a
4. Connect the MAGNETO HARNESS 6 PINS
1. Suspension position sensor (P/N 295 000 136) to iS module for voltage
checks.
Suspension Position Sensor Input
Voltage Test
At Sensor Connector
SUSPENSION POSITION
VOLTAGE
SENSOR CONNECTOR
295000136
Pin 1 Pin 2 5 Vdc

5. Using the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035
Using the 6-pin Magneto Harness Tool 868), check voltage as per the following table.
1. Connect B.U.D.S. Refer to COMMUNICATION
2. Using B.U.D.S., raise suspension to the fully up
position.
529035868
smr2009-041-053_b
ACTIVATION AND iS TABS

1. UP
2. Down
smr2012-040 15
SUSPENSION MAGNETO SUSPENSION iS MODULE

VOLTAGE
POSITION HARNESS POSITION (6-pin RESISTANCE
(Vdc)
(% in B.U.D.S.) (wire lead color) (% in B.U.D.S.) connector)
All positions BK BK/YL 4.99 All positions 4 6 1803 - 2203
100% WH BK/YL 3.23 100% 5 6 1957 - 2391
100% BK WH 1.75 100% 4 5 1361 - 1663
88% WH BK/YL 3.09 88% 5 6 1904 - 2327
88% BK WH 1.89 88% 4 5 1410 - 1724
75% WH BK/YL 2.99 75% 5 6 1871 - 2287
75% BK WH 1.98 75% 4 5 1448 - 1770
53% WH BK/YL 2.81 53% 5 6 1799 - 2199
53% BK WH 2.16 53% 4 5 1516 - 1852
35% WH BK/YL 2.68 35% 5 6 1752 - 2142
35% BK WH 2.30 35% 4 5 1565 - 1913
6. Remove the 6-pin magneto harness tool. Suspension Position Sensor

Suspension Position Sensor Replacement
Resistance Test 1. Remove the deck extension. Refer to BODY
subsection.
At iS Module Connector
2. Remove the air intake tube. Refer to AIR IN-
1. Using the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 TAKE SYSTEM subsection.
868), check resistance values on iS connector
as per the following table. 3. Unplug the suspension position sensor connec-
tor.
529035868
smr2009-041-011_a
1. Sensor connector
2. Hydraulic pump reservoir
4. Remove screws securing the suspension posi-

tion sensor.
16 smr2012-040
smr2009-041-012_a
smr2009-041-014_a
1. Retaining screws
1. Lever
5. Remove bolts securing the sensor and its cover 2. Lever shaft
3. Sensor
to the sensor support and the sensor lever.
8. Reinstall and connect the sensor in PWC.
iS MODULE
iS Module Location
The iS module is located inside hull, in front of the
battery.
smr2009-041-013_a
1. Retaining bolt
2. Sensor
3. Support
4. Lever
5. Cover
6. O-rings
NOTE: If water is present in the sensor always

replace sensor even if it seems in good condition.
smr2010-045-007_a
6. Check condition of O-rings on sensor and sen-
1. iS module
sor lever.
7. Reinstall all parts. iS Module Input Voltage Test
NOTE: When reassembling parts, index sensor (Switched Power)
lever shaft with sensor inner slot. The sensor Make sure fuse F1 is powered and in good condi-
lever must be positioned to 180° with the sensor tion.
electrical connector.
electrical system.
Install the D.E.S.S. key.
868), perform the following test.
VOLTAGE
MULTIMETER LEAD POSITION
(VDC)
Pin 1 of
Negative
iS module 6-pin Battery voltage
battery post
connector
smr2012-040 17
iS MODULE
3-PIN BATTERY RESULT
CONNECTOR
Pin 2 Negative post Bright light
If tests succeed, carry out iS MODULE GROUND

TEST.
If tests fails, check wiring and connectors be-
tween fuse box pin A2 and module 3-pin connec-
tor pin 2.
smr2009-041-055_a
iS Module Ground Test
Repeat the test using a test light. Using the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035
868), perform the following test.
TEST LIGHT POSITION RESULT
Pin 1 of
Negative
iS module 6-pin Bright light
battery post
connector
If tests succeed, carry out the iS MODULE INPUT

VOLTAGE TEST
(BATTERY POWER).
If tests fail, check wiring and connectors between
fuse box pin A8 and module 6-pin connector pin 1.
iS Module Input Voltage Test

(Battery Power) smr2009-041-057_a
PIN 1 TO BATTERY POSITIVE POST

Make sure fuse F7 is powered and in good condi-
tion. iS MODULE
Using the FLUKE 115 MULTIMETER (P/N 529 035 3-PIN BATTERY RESULT
868), perform the following test. CONNECTOR
iS MODULE Pin 1 Positive post Battery voltage

VOLTAGE
3-PIN BATTERY
(VDC) Repeat the test using a test light.
CONNECTOR
Pin 2 Negative post Battery voltage iS MODULE
3-PIN BATTERY RESULT
CONNECTOR
Pin 1 Positive post Bright light
If tests succeed, carry out iS BUTTON TEST US-

ING B.U.D.S.
If tests fails, check wiring and connectors module
3-pin connector pin 1 and engine ground.
iS Module Output Voltage Test

At the hydraulic pump motor connector, connect
multimeter leads.
smr2009-041-057_b
PIN 2 TO BATTERY NEGATIVE POST

Activate the iS either UP and DOWN with
B.U.D.S. or with the UP or DOWN buttons.
Repeat the test using a test light. There will be either a positive 12 Vdc or a negative
12 Vdc reading.
18 smr2012-040
Activate the opposite UP or DOWN and the read-

ing should reverse polarity.
If the voltage is as specified, carry out the same
test using a 12 V test light to ensure the circuit
can supply enough current to operate the hy-
draulic pump.
The light should be bright in both the UP or DOWN
positions.
If tests fail, carry out the iS MODULE INPUT VOLT-
AGE TEST (SWITCHED POWER). smr2009-041-036_a
1. Hydraulic motor connector

iS Module Removal
1. Open boarding platform and remove the star- 5. Disconnect the iS module input voltage connec-
board storage bin. tor.
2. Disconnect the suspension position sensor
connector from the iS module.
smr2009-041-037_a
1. iS module input voltage connector
NOTE: The locking tab of input voltage connector

smr2009-041-034_a is located underneath.
1. Suspension position sensor connector
6. Remove the iS module from PWC.
3. Detach the retaining strap.
iS Module Installation
cedure.
HYDRAULIC PUMP
Hydraulic Pump Location
The hydraulic pump is located at the rear of the
suspension base.
smr2009-041-035_a
1. Retaining strap
4. Disconnect the hydraulic motor connector.
smr2012-040 19
smr2010-045-009_a
1. Hydraulic pump
smr2009-041-044_a
Hydraulic Pump Recommended Fluid A. 130 mm ± 5 mm (5-1/8 in ± 13/64 in)
Always use automatic transmission fluid (ATF) To Add Fluid
Dexron III.
Remove the plug on the end of reservoir.
NOTICE Use ATF Dexron III only. Do not use
Using a syringe, fill up the reservoir to the recom-
fluids other than the recommended one, nor mended level.
mix different types of fluids.
Reinstall reservoir plug and tighten it to 1 N•m
Hydraulic Pump Fluid Level (9 lbf•in).
Verification
Hydraulic Pump Operation Test
NOTE: The fluid level will drop slightly during
break-in period because the actuator uses a small Connect a 30 A fused jumper from a 12-volt bat-
amount of fluid to lubricate its moving parts. If a tery positive terminal and one pin of the hydraulic
large amount of fluid is required, check compo- pump 2-pin connector .
nents for leaks. Connect a jumper from battery negative terminal
and the other pin of the hydraulic pump 2-pin con-
Reservoir in Vehicle nector .
Place the PWC level (longitudinally and trans- The hydraulic pump should activate and suspen-
versely). Make sure suspension is in DOCK sion should go up or down.
MODE position.
Reverse the jumpers position at the pump con-
The fluid should be near reservoir plug. nector. The suspension should reverse direction.
If the hydraulic pump does not run, replace hy-
draulic pump.
If hydraulic pump turns, carry out the HYDRAULIC
PUMP CURRENT DRAW test to confirm pump op-
eration.
Hydraulic Pump Current Draw

If the current draw is to high, the iS module acti-
vates an internal protection.
Connect PWC to B.U.D.S. Refer to COMMUNI-
CATION TOOLS AND B.U.D.S. subsection.
smr2009-041-043_a
1. Fluid level Select ACTIVATION and iS tabs.

Activate the suspension by pressing the UP and
Reservoir Out of Vehicle DOWN buttons and check monitor the ammeter
Place the reservoir vertically. in the B.U.D.S. page.
Using a ruler, measure the fluid level. The
reservoir is full when fluid level reaches
130 mm ± 5 mm (5-1/8 in ± 13/64 in).
20 smr2012-040
smr2009-041-053_a
smr2009-041-029_a
1. B.U.D.S. page ammeter
2. UP button 1. Actuator link bolt
3. DOWN button 2. Link support on the top of suspension base
iS POSITION CURRENT 6. Remove screws retaining the actuator holder.

UP 16 - 20 A
DOWN 15 - 18 A
If current is as per specification, carry out the iS

MODULE OUTPUT VOLTAGE TEST.
If current draw is low, check connections and
wires.
If the current draw is excessive, replace the hy-
draulic pump.
smr2009-041-028_a
Hydraulic Pump Removal 1. Actuator holder screws
(as a Unit with Actuator)
To work on many parts of suspension system, the 7. Remove the suspension position sensor to
removal of the hydraulic pump and actuator as an avoid damaging it.
unit is necessary. 8. Remove screws securing both rear ends of
1. Remove SHOCK ABSORBER and SPRINGS. front suspension arm to suspension base.
See procedures in this subsection.
2. Unplug the hydraulic pump connector from the
iS module.
3. Cut any locking ties securing the pump harness
to PWC harness.
4. Remove clamp and bolt securing the hydraulic
pump from suspension base.
smr2009-041-027_a
1. Retaining screws
9. Lift the rear of the front suspension arm to

make room for hydraulic pump.
10. Remove hydraulic pump with actuator by
lifting them through the suspension bellows
smr2009-041-016_b opening.
1. Hydraulic pump clamp
2. Retaining bolt
5. Remove actuator link bolt.
smr2012-040 21
Hydraulic Pump Installation 3. Unplug the hydraulic pump connector from the
(as a Unit with Actuator) iS module.
The installation is essentially the reverse of the re- 4. Cut any locking ties securing the pump harness
moval procedure. However, pay attention to the to PWC harness.
following. 5. Cut locking tie securing the hydraulic hose to
Make sure to secure the actuator link to suspen- pump.
sion base. Tighten actuator link bolt to 25 N•m
(18 lbf•ft).
NOTICE Failure to do so might result in
spring failure.
Hydraulic hose routing is very critical to avoid
problems with hydraulic unit. Use the following
illustration to route and attach the hydraulic hose
properly.
smr2009-041-016_a

2. Hydraulic hose
6. Unscrew the retaining clamp completely and re-

move it.
smr2009-041-045_a
VIEW FROM THE REAR OF PWC

1. Secure hydraulic hose to hydraulic pump
2. Secure hydraulic hose, fuel hose and PWC wiring harness
smr2009-041-017_a
1. Retaining clamp
2. Hydraulic pump
7. Remove hydraulic pump retaining bolt.
smr2009-041-046_a
VIEW FROM THE FRONT OF PWC

1. Position both ends of hydraulic hose on same side
Install the FRONT SUSPENSION ARM. See pro-

smr2009-041-018_a
Hydraulic Pump Removal 1. Retaining bolt
(Without Actuator) 2. Hydraulic pump
1. Remove the deck extension. Refer to BODY 8. At the bottom of pump housing, remove socket
subsection. screw securing hydraulic hose lock.
2. Remove the air intake tube. Refer to AIR IN-
22 smr2012-040
smr2010-045-020_a smr2010-045-020
1. Socket screw RECOMMENDED POSITION

2. Hydraulic hose lock
9. Remove hose from pump and plug hose to threads of lock screw.
avoid oil spillage.
3. Tighten screw to 8 N•m (71 lbf•in).
10. Place your finger on pump opening and re-
move pump from PWC. 4. Secure hydraulic pump to suspension base.
NOTE: Wipe any oil spillage. 4.1 Install pump retaining screw and tighten it
to 10 N•m (89 lbf•in).
Hydraulic Pump Installation 4.2 Install retaining clamp and tighten it to
(Without Actuator) 2 N•m (18 lbf•in).
1. Install hydraulic hose on pump and secure hose 5. Secure hose to reservoir with a new locking tie.
using the hydraulic hose lock. 6. Route pump harness and secure it with new
NOTE: The hose must turn freely. Do not insert locking ties.
hose into lock hook. 7. Connect the hydraulic pump connector to iS
module.
8. Install a weight of 90 kg (200 lb) on moving
deck and using suspension controls on steer-
ing, cycle the suspension fully up and fully
down 3 times. This action will remove air
bubbles trapped into hose and pump during
installation.
9. Check for leaks.
10. Install all other removed parts.
smr2009-041-020_a ACTUATOR
WRONG POSITION
Actuator Location
The actuator is located at the front of the suspen-
sion base under suspension springs.
smr2012-040 23
smr2009-041-048_a
1. Retaining screws
2. Alignment support
smr2010-045-010_a
1. Actuator
4. Turn actuator up side down and remove hy-
draulic hose.
Actuator Inspection
Check actuator for leaks at hose opening and
around inner piston.
Replace actuator if any leak is detected.
Actuator Removal
1. Refer to HYDRAULIC PUMP REMOVAL (AS A
UNIT WITH ACTUATOR) and remove the pump
from the PWC.
2. Remove and discard the screw securing actua- smr2009-041-049_a
tor link to alignment support. 1. Retaining socket screw
2. Hydraulic hose lock
5. Remove and discard the three socket screws

securing actuator holder halves and split the ac-
tuator holder.
smr2009-041-047_a
1. Actuator link
2. Retaining screw
3. Alignment support
smr2009-041-050_a
3. Remove the alignment support from actuator
1. Socket screws
holder. Discard screws. 2. Actuator holder halves
Actuator Installation
Install hydraulic hose in accordance with the fol-
lowing illustration.
24 smr2012-040
2. Cut the Oetiker clamp retaining lateral bellows

to lateral support.
smr2009-041-052_a
1. Hose fully inserted in lock slot

2. Position hydraulic hose in lock hook
Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060) on smr2009-041-022_a
threads of lock screw. 1. Lateral support

2. Oetiker clamp
Tighten screw to 8 N•m (71 lbf•in).
Install the hydraulic pump in PWC. Make sure 3. Remove the lateral support screw.
to route the hydraulic hose properly. See HY-
DRAULIC PUMP INSTALLATION (AS A UNIT
WITH ACTUATOR) in this subsection.
Install a weight of 90 kg (200 lb) on moving deck
and using suspension controls on steering, cycle
the suspension fully up and fully down 3 times.
This action will remove air bubbles trapped into
hose and pump during installation.
Check for leaks.
Install all other removed parts.
smr2009-041-023_a
LATERAL SUPPORT 1. Lateral support screw
Lateral Support Location 4. Remove lateral support from lateral bellows.

fixed deck to support the moving deck. Lateral Support Installation
one position only.
Tighten lateral support screw to 48 N•m
(35 lbf•ft).
smr2010-045-011_a Install a new Oetiker clamp. Position the ear of
1. Lateral supports clamp rearwards.
Lateral Support Removal

NOTE: The following instruction can be used for
RH or LH support.
section.
smr2012-040 25
529031800
smr2009-041-066_a
RH SIDE SHOWN
LATERAL BELLOWS smr2009-041-025_a
1. Rivet location
Lateral Bellows Location 4. Remove lateral ring.
The lateral bellows are located on each side of the 5. Cut Oetiker clamp securing bellows to lateral
fixed deck. support.
Lateral Bellows Installation

The lateral support can be inserted in one position
only.
smr2010-045-012_a
Install the retaining ring. Align the ring pin with
1. LH lateral bellows shown
holes in bellows and body.
Lateral Bellows Removal
1. Remove lateral support screw.
smr2009-041-026_a
1. Ring pin
3. Body hole
smr2009-041-024_a

Install new rivets. If the head of rivet tool can-
2. Disconnect lateral support from suspension (P/N 707 000 181) to offset the rivet tool and well
shaft. lean the rivet head against ring.
3. Using the SUPERTANIUM DRILL BIT 3/16" Index lateral supports with the front suspension
(P/N 529 031 800), remove all rivets (12) se- shaft ends. Lateral supports can be inserted in
curing the lateral bellows ring to body. one position only.
26 smr2012-040
Tighten lateral support screw to 48 N•m

(35 lbf•ft).
clamp rearwards.
smr2009-041-024_a
RH SIDE SHOWN
4. Disconnect lateral supports from suspension

arm shaft.
5. Refer to HYDRAULIC PUMP REMOVAL (AS A
smr2009-041-066_a
UNIT WITH ACTUATOR) and remove the pump
RH SIDE SHOWN
1. Ear of clamp rearwards from the PWC.
FRONT SUSPENSION ARM to suspension base.
Front Suspension Arm Location move it from the PWC.
Front Suspension Arm Installation

If a shaft support has been loosened from the
suspension arm shaft, see SUSPENSION ARM
SHAFTS for proper installation procedure.
smr2010-045-013_a
FIXED DECK REMOVED FOR CLARITY

Front Suspension Arm Removal

section.
2. Remove the engine. Refer to ENGINE RE-
MOVAL AND INSTALLATION subsection. smr2009-041-063_a

3. Remove both lateral support screws.
smr2012-040 27
SUSPENSION BASE
smr2009-041-032_a
PORT SIDE
4. Remove suspension base along with the rear

vent duct.
smr2010-045-014_a
FIXED DECK REMOVED FOR CLARITY

1. Suspension base
Suspension Base Removal

1. Refer to the appropriate procedures and re-
move the following parts:
– Moving deck
– Engine
– Shock absorber and springs smr2009-041-033_a
– Hydraulic pump (with actuator) 1. Suspension base
– Suspension position sensor. 2. Rear vent duct
2. Using a marker, trace the shape of suspension Suspension Base Installation

at the same place. The installation is the reverse of the removal pro-
1. Install the suspension base.
1.1 Position the base in accordance with the
bottom of the hull.
NOTE: If there is no mark, see SUSPEN-
SION BASE INSTALLATION WITHOUT REF-
ERENCE MARKS.
1.3 Tighten suspension base screws to
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft).
smr2009-041-031_a
STARBOARD SIDE
1. Suspension base screws – Actuator and hydraulic pump
– Front suspension arm
– Shock absorber and springs
– Engine
– Moving deck.
28 smr2012-040
Suspension Base Installation without – Shock absorber and springs

Reference Marks – Engine
1. Install the suspension base in PWC using NEW – Moving deck.
screws. Do not tighten them yet.
2. Install the front arm on suspension base and REAR SUSPENSION ARM
tighten screws to 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft), use the
OLD screws. Rear Suspension Arm Location
3. Install lateral supports.
3.1 Index lateral supports with the front sus-
pension shaft ends. Lateral supports can
be inserted in one position only.
3.2 Tighten lateral support screws to 48 N•m
(35 lbf•ft).
4. Align suspension base in PWC.
deck.
smr2010-045-015_a

arm covers.
smr2009-041-064_a
A. Same distance on LH and RH sides
4.2 If required, move suspension base until

4.3 Tighten suspension base rear screws to
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft).
smr2009-041-072_a
smr2009-041-065_a
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE

– Actuator and hydraulic pump
smr2012-040 29
NOTE: If the upper arm shaft or one of its arm

fer to SUSPENSION ARM SHAFTS for proper in-
stallation procedure.
2. Tighten screws to 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft).
3. Carefully lower and secure the rear suspension
arm to the fixed deck.
3.1 Position the rear suspension arm brackets
previously draw on fixed deck.
NOTICE If no mark was traced, refer to
smr2009-041-073_a
REAR SUSPENSION ARM INSTALLATION
1. RH lateral rear panel WITHOUT REFERENCE MARKS for proper
4. Mark position of rear suspension arm brackets pension arm.
for proper reinstallation.
5. Remove and discard screws securing rear sus- sion arm brackets.
pension arm to fixed deck.
3.3 Tighten screws to 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft).
Rear Suspension Arm Installation Without
Reference Marks
smr2009-041-074_a
6. Remove and discard screws securing the top of

rear suspension arm.
smr2009-041-076_a
1. Square opening
2. Threaded insert
3. On each bracket, install the retaining plate and

one screw.
4. Install a weight of 90 kg (200 lb) on PWC to
lower the moving deck.
smr2009-041-075_a
5. Check moving deck position in comparison to
1. Retaining screws
fixed deck.
7. Remove the rear suspension arm from PWC. 5.1 Check the gap between moving deck
Rear Suspension Arm Installation same on both sides.
1. Using NEW screws, install the top of rear sus- 5.2 Check front and rear gaps. Moving deck
pension arm. should be able to move without having
30 smr2012-040
5.3 Reposition rear suspension arm brackets 6. Install NEW support screws and tighten them
on fixed deck until positioning of moving to 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft).
deck is satisfactory. 7. Secure both supports to shaft using NEW
6. Secure the rear suspension arm to the fixed socket screws. Tighten them to 12 N•m
deck. (106 lbf•in).
sion arm brackets. Removal of Rear Suspension Arm
Upper Shaft
6.2 Remove and replace screws installed dur-
ing alignment. 1. Unclip and remove both lateral rear panels.
6.3 Tighten screws to 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft).
SUSPENSION ARM SHAFTS

Removal of Front Suspension Arm
Shaft
1. Remove the FRONT SUSPENSION ARM, see
supports to shaft.
Installation of Front Suspension Arm

Shaft smr2009-041-073_a

1. To reinstall the shaft, insert it in the suspension
arm. 2. Remove arm shaft support screws.
2. Install a support on each end of theshaft.
4. Tighten the LH support screws to 25 N•m
(18 lbf•ft).
5. Apply a force on the RH support to move it on
the left side.
it must lean against the arm shaft support. smr2009-041-077_a

Installation of Rear Suspension Arm

Upper Shaft
1. To reinstall the shaft, insert it in the rear arm.
smr2009-041-067_a
NEW support screws.
1. Arm shaft against its support
holder hole.
smr2012-040 31
smr2009-041-078_a
1. Support pin
smr2009-041-079_a
2. Holder hole
1. Bar clamp
4. Tighten the LH support screws to 25 N•m 2. New socket screws
(18 lbf•ft).
5. Apply a force on the RH support to move it to Lower Shaft
the left side.
supports together. 2. Remove bolts securing both rear suspension
arm covers.
smr2009-041-067_a
smr2009-041-072_a
1. Arm shaft against its support 1. Rear suspension arm cover
6. Install NEW support screws and tighten them 3. Mark position of rear suspension arm brack-
to 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft). ets for proper reinstallation.
7. Secure both supports to shaft using NEW 4. Remove and discard screws securing rear sus-
socket screws. Tighten them to 12 N•m pension arm to fixed deck.
(106 lbf•in).
smr2009-041-074_a
32 smr2012-040

rear brackets to arm shaft ends.
smr2009-041-071_a
smr2009-041-069_a
1. Socket screw
2. LH rear bracket 4. Tighten NEW socket screws to 10 N•m
(89 lbf•in).
arm bushing and remove the circlip. Repeat for 5. Refer to REAR ARM for reinstallation.
the other side.
smr2009-041-070_a
1. Circlip
Installation of Rear Suspension Arm

Lower Shaft
1. When reassembly the rear bracket on shaft
end, press bracket on bushing to install the
circlip.
brackets.
smr2012-040 33
Subsection XX (BODY (GTS/GTI/GTR/WAKE))
BODY (GTS/GTI/GTR/WAKE)
SERVICE TOOLS
SUPERTANIUM DRILL BIT 3/16"................................................... 529 031 800 ............................... 12–13, 16
SERVICE PRODUCTS
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ........................................... 14
XPS SYNTHETIC GREASE............................................................. 293 550 010 ..................................... 17–18
BODY PARTS NOMENCLATURE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
smo2011-003-002_c
1. Storage compartment cover

2. Mirror support
3. Gauge trim
4. Lateral trim panel
5. Console
6. Glove box cover
7. Seat
8. Rear handle
9. Bumper
smr2013-009 1
STORAGE COMPARTMENT COVER
4.5 N•m
(40 lbf•in)
2 N•m
(418 lbf•in)
See
tightening
sequence
See tightening 8 N•m
sequence (71 lbf•in)
8 N•m
(71 lbf•in)
smr2012-041-100_a
2 smr2013-009
BODY PARTS
1.5 Nm
(13 lbfin)
1.5 Nm
(13 lbfin)
3.5 Nm
(31 lbfin)
See tightening
sequence
smr2011-039-101_a
smr2013-009 3
BODY PARTS
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
See tightening
sequence
4.5 Nm
(40 lbfin)
4.5 Nm
(40 lbfin)
LTD 11.5 Nm

(102 lbfin)
4.5 Nm
(40 lbfin)
See tightening
sequence
smr2011-039-102_b
4 smr2013-009
VENTILATION
smr2011-039-103
smr2013-009 5
SEAT
smr2011-039-104_a
6 smr2013-009
WAKEBOARD RACK AND WAKE PYLON

Wake 155
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
Loctite
5150
(silicone
sealant)
XPS
synthetic
grease
See
tightening
sequence
See tightening
sequence
See tightening sequence
See
tightening
sequence
smr2011-040-100_a
smr2013-009 7
PROCEDURES
GELCOAT
For information and repair, refer to BODY
(RXT/GTX/WAKE PRO) subsection.
DECALS
CARPETS
(RXT/GTX/WAKE PRO) subsection. smr2011-039-002_b
1. Inner shell retaining screws

2. Bolt
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
COVER 3. Unlatch both retaining tabs at the rear using a
screwdriver.
Storage Compartment Cover Removal
1. Open storage compartment cover.
2. Remove nuts and bolts securing storage com-
partment cover to hinge.
smr2011-039-003_a
RETAINING TABS
4. Unlatch retaining tabs on both sides using a

screwdriver.
smr2011-039-001_a
1. Retaining nuts
3. Remove storage compartment cover.
Storage Compartment Cover

Disassembly
Storage Compartment Cover Inner Shell
1. Remove BRP logo located at the front of cover.
2. Remove inner shell retaining screws and bolt.
smr2011-039-004
8 smr2013-009
5. Disassemble inner shell from storage compart- Storage Compartment Cover

ment cover. Installation
Storage Compartment Cover Latch The installation is the reverse of the removal pro-
1. Ensure that inner shell is removed.
Tighten storage compartment cover retaining nuts
2. Remove latch by slightly pushing both retaining
to specification as per the following sequence.
holes toward the inside.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Storage compartment
8.0 N•m (71 lbf•in)
cover retaining nuts
smr2011-039-005_a

Assembly
The assembly is the reverse of the disassembly
procedure. However, pay attention to the follow- smr2011-039-007_a
ing. TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
Tighten inner shell retaining screws and bolt to

specification as per the following sequence. STORAGE COMPARTMENT
TIGHTENING TORQUE
COVER HINGE
Inner shell retaining Storage Compartment Cover Hinge
2.0 N•m (18 lbf•in) Removal
screws
Inner shell retaining bolt 4.5 N•m (40 lbf•in) 1. Proceed with STORAGE COMPARTMENT
COVER REMOVAL.
2. Remove screws securing storage compart-
ment cover hinge to deck.
smr2011-039-006_a
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
smr2011-039-008_a
HINGE RETAINING SCREWS
smr2013-009 9
Storage Compartment Cover Hinge

Installation
Use a ø 6.5 mm (1/4 in) steel rod to make a hook
in order to lock the hinge.
smr2011-039-011_a
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
GAUGE TRIM
Gauge Trim Removal
smr2011-039-009
2. From underneath mirror, remove retaining
TYPICAL
screws on both sides.
Insert the steel hook on the lateral tab of hinge in

order to slightly load the spring.
smr2011-039-012_a
RETAINING SCREWS
smr2011-039-010_a
1. Steel hook 3. Hit with a sharp blow the front part of mirror
toward the rear to unlock it.
Tighten hinge retaining screws to specification as
per the following sequence.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Storage compartment
8.0 N•m (71 lbf•in)
cover hinge screws
10 smr2013-009
LATERAL TRIM PANEL

Lateral Trim Panel Removal
1. Remove seat.
2. From inside storage compartment, remove
screws securing lateral trim panel to deck.
smr2011-039-013_a
4. Remove gauge trim from mirror support.
Gauge Trim Installation

Prior to inserting gauge trim into mirror support,
smr2011-039-017_a
ensure that all tabs are properly aligned. RETAINING SCREWS

plastic rivets securing lateral trim panel to
deck.
smr2011-039-014_a
TOP OF GAUGE TRIM
smr2011-039-018_a
PLASTIC RIVETS
4. Remove plastic rivets securing the rear portion

of lateral trim panel.
smr2011-039-015_a
BOTTOM OF GAUGE TRIM
smr2013-009 11
529031800
smr2011-039-020_a
PLASTIC RIVETS
5. Slide panel toward the front to unlock retaining

smr2011-039-023_a
tabs.
1. Mirror support retaining rivets
5. Remove fuel tank cap.

6. Place a clean cloth rag onto fuel tank tube.
screwdriver.
smr2011-039-022_a
Lateral Trim Panel Installation

Install NEW plastic rivets.
smr2011-039-024_a
1. Side retaining tabs

MIRROR SUPPORT
8. Unlatch retaining tabs on the top using a screw-
Mirror Support Removal driver.
1. Proceed with LATERAL TRIM PANEL RE-
MOVAL. See procedure in this subsection.
2. Proceed with INFORMATION CENTER RE-
MOVAL. Refer to INFORMATION CENTER
(GAUGE) subsection.
3. Remove steering column, refer to STEERING
4. Remove the following rivets securing mirror
support to deck.
REQUIRED TOOL
SUPERTANIUM DRILL BIT 3/16" (P/N 529 031 800)
12 smr2013-009
2. Remove GLOVE BOX COVER, see procedure in

this subsection.
3. Remove the following rivets securing console
to deck.
REQUIRED TOOL
529031800
smr2011-039-025_a
1. Top retaining tab
9. Remove mirror support by pulling it upwards.

10. Remove cloth rag and reinstall fuel tank cap.
WARNING
Fuel vapors are flammable and explosive
under certain conditions. Unless otherwise
noted, the fuel tank cap must always be in-
stalled on watercraft.
smr2011-039-026_a
Mirror Support Installation 1. Console retaining rivets
Prior to inserting mirror support into console, en-
sure that all tabs are properly aligned.
Install rivets upside down with washers on mirror
support top surface.
MIRRORS
Mirror Replacement
1. Proceed with GAUGE TRIM REMOVAL, see
2. From inside gauge trim, slightly heat mirror.
3. Push at the back of mirror to remove it. smr2011-039-027_a
4. Properly clean gauge trim surface of any glue 1. Console retaining rivets
residue.
4. Remove console by pulling it upwards.
5. Install mirror using adhesive tape at the back of
mirror. Console Installation
6. Reinstall gauge trim as the reverse of removal. The installation is the reverse of the removal pro-
CONSOLE
Console Removal
1. Proceed with MIRROR SUPPORT REMOVAL.
See procedure in this subsection.
smr2013-009 13
To ease installation of rivets located in glove box, LOCK PIN POSITIONING

proceed as follows:
MEASURE A MEASURE B
– Remove air intake silencer, refer to AIR INTAKE
SYSTEM (EXCEPT iS AND aS MODELS) sub- 24.0 mm ± 1.0 mm 30 mm ± 1.0 mm
section. (.945 in ± .039 in) (1.181 in ± .039 in)
– Install rivets upside down with washers on con-
sole top surface.
GLOVE BOX COVER

Glove Box Cover Replacement
1. Open glove box cover.
2. Pull glove box cover upwards to release it from
console hinge.
smr2011-039-029_a
A. 24.0 mm ± 1.0 mm (.945 in ± .039 in)

B. 30 mm ± 1.0 mm (1.181 in ± .039 in)
4. Hold the lock pin in this position and tighten as

SEAT LATCH TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
9.5 N•m
STEP 1 Lock pin
(84 lbf•in)
smr2011-039-028_a
8.0 N•m
STEP 2 Adjustment nut
3. Reinstall glove box cover as the reverse of re- (71 lbf•in)
moval.
5. Close the seat and readjust if required.
SEAT
REAR HANDLE
Seat Cleaning
Rear Handle Replacement
For information, refer to BODY (RXT/GTX/WAKE
PRO) subsection. 1. Remove seat.
2. Remove screws securing rear handle to deck.
SEAT LATCH
Seat Latch Adjustment
NOTE: Apply LOCTITE 243 (BLUE) (P/N 293 800 060)
on threads of lock pin when the adjustment is re-
quired or when the lock pin is removed. If a new
lock pin is used, it is already coat with a thread-
locker.
1. Loosen adjustment nut.
2. Adjust lock pin height. Do not torque yet.
3. Position the lock pin longitudinally into the rear
handle slot.
smr2011-039-030_a
1. Rear handle retaining screws
14 smr2013-009
3. Replace rear handle.

4. Tighten rear handle screws to specification.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Rear handle screws 8.0 N•m (71 lbf•in)
BUMPER
Bumper Replacement
1. Remove screws securing front bumper.
2. Remove front bumper from deck.
smr2011-039-033_a
7. Install new bumpers as the reverse of removal.

NOTE: Use soapy water to ease bumper installa-
tion.
8. Tighten front bumper lower retaining screws to
specification.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Front bumper lower
4.5 N•m (40 lbf•in)
screws
9. Tighten bumper retaining screws to specifica-

smr2011-039-031_a
1. Front bumper retaining screws
TIGHTENING TORQUE
3. Remove screws securing both rear corner
bumpers. Bumper retaining screws 4.5 N•m (40 lbf•in)
4. Remove rear corner bumpers from deck.
smr2011-039-034_a
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
smr2011-039-032_a
VENTILATION DUCT
1. Rear corner bumper retaining screws
Ventilation Duct Replacement
5. Slide side bumpers toward the rear to remove 1. Proceed with LATERAL TRIM PANEL RE-
them from deck. MOVAL. See procedure in this subsection.
6. Slide rear bumper toward the side to remove it 2. Remove plastic rivet securing ventilation duct
from deck. to housing.
smr2013-009 15
smr2010-046-006_a
1. Lateral arms screws
smr2011-039-035_a
Remove bolts at the bottom of wake pylon.
3. Remove the following rivets securing ventila-
tion duct housing to deck.
REQUIRED TOOL
529031800
smr2010-046-007_a
1. Wake pylon bottom bolts
Remove bolts securing the wake pylon support to

body.
smr2011-039-035_b
4. If applicable, remove locking tie securing wiring

harness to ventilation duct.
5. Remove ventilation duct and its housing from
watercraft.
6. Reinstall parts as the reverse of removal. smr2010-046-008_a
1. Wake pylon support bolts
WAKE PYLON (WAKE) Lift the wake pylon to disengage its bottom from
the body.
Wake Pylon Removal
Slide the bottom of the wake pylon rearward to
Open the seat.
remove the wake pylon from vehicle.
Remove both lateral arms.
16 smr2013-009
Handle
Extend handle approximately 75 mm to 90 mm
(3 in to 3-1/2 in).
smr2010-046-009_a
Wake Pylon Disassembly

Extend the handle completely.
smr2008-035-016_a
Turn the wake pylon upside down.
A. 75 mm to 90 mm (3 in to 3-1/2 in)
Move both ends of locking strap to disengage the
inner lock and free the handle. Insert two thin feeler gauges between handle
stem and extension tube.
smr2008-035-014_a
1. Locking strap end

2. Handle stem smr2008-035-017_a
1. Handle stem
Locking Strap 2. Feeler gauges
3. Extension tube
Using a screwdriver or any other suitable tool, de-
tach a side of the locking strap from retaining pin. Place a rag around the joint to catch balls and
spring.
Hold feeler gauges and pull the handle.
Wake Pylon Assembly

Handle
Install a loose locking tie on handle stem.
Apply XPS SYNTHETIC GREASE (P/N 293 550 010) on
each ends of spring.
Insert the spring in the handle stem hole.
Position a ball on each ends of spring.
Install a feeler gauge over each balls.
Tighten the locking tie in order to retain feeler
smr2008-035-015_a
gauges and balls.
1. Locking strap
Remove locking strap and the inner lock.
smr2013-009 17
smr2008-035-018_a
smr2008-035-021_a
1. Feeler gauges
2. Ball 1. Retaining pin
2. Locking strap
Apply XPS SYNTHETIC GREASE (P/N 293 550 010) in
Using a suitable tool, position the locking strap in
both recesses of the extension tube.
its groove.
smr2008-035-022_a
1. Locking strap
smr2008-035-019_a 2. Locking strap groove
1. Extension tube
2. Recesses Reinstall the wake pylon trim.
Slide the handle stem into the extension tube. Do not install the handle into wake pylon yet.
Remove feeler gauges and locking tie. Wake Pylon Installation
Locking Strap Position the wake pylon on deck.
Remove the wake pylon trim. Install and secure wake pylon and lateral arms us-
ing previously removed fasteners and new elastic
stop nuts.
smr2008-035-020_a smr2010-046-010_a
1. Wake pylon trim screws 1. Bottom of wake pylon

2. Rubber washers
3. Flat washers
Install lock and insert the end of the locking strap 4. New elastic stop nuts
over the retaining pin.
18 smr2013-009
smr2010-046-011_a
1. Flat washers
2. New elastic stop nuts
Tighten all bolts by hand.

Ensure base of wake pylon is well leaned against
body.
Tighten all bolts as per the following sequence.
smr2011-039-016_a
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
Insert the handle into the wake pylon.

Move both ends of the locking strap forward to
fully insert handle.
smr2013-009 19
Subsection XX (BODY (RXT/GTX/WAKE PRO))
BODY (RXT/GTX/WAKE PRO)

SERVICE TOOLS
SERVICE PRODUCTS
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ........................................... 20
LOCTITE 414 ................................................................................. 413 705 800 ..................................... 18, 36
LOCTITE 5150 (SILICONE SEALANT) ........................................... 296 000 309 ........................................... 31
XPS MULTI-PURPOSE CLEANER ................................................. 219 701 709 ........................................... 19
XPS SYNTHETIC GREASE............................................................. 293 550 010 ........................................... 50
1
BODY (MODELS WITH SUSPENSION)
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
Loctite
243 8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
smr2010-046-101_a
2
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
smr2010-046-102_a
3
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
0.9 Nm
(8 lbfin)
0.4 Nm
1.1 Nm (4 lbfin)
(10 lbfin) 4.5 Nm
(40 lbfin)
1.5 Nm
1.2 Nm (13 lbfin)
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin) 4.5 Nm
(40 lbfin)
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
4.5 Nm
(40 lbfin)
smr2010-046-103_b
4
BODY (MODELS WITHOUT SUSPENSION)
2.5 Nm
(22 lbfin)
11.5 Nm
(102 lbfin)
Except
Wake models
smr2010-046-104_b
5
BODY (MODELS WITHOUT SUSPENSION)
8 N•m
(71 lbf•in)
4.5 N•m
(40 lbf•in)
Loctite 8 N•m
243 (71 lbf•in)
4.5 N•m
(40 lbf•in)
8 N•m
(71 lbf•in)
4.5 N•m
(40 lbf•in)
smr2013-010-103_a
6
STORAGE COMPARTMENT (MODELS WITH SUSPENSION)
0.9 N•m
(8 lbf•in)
3 N•m
(27 lbf•in)
0.4 N•m 8 N•m

2.5 N•m
(22 lbf•in)
1.1 N•m
(10 lbf•in)
5 N•m
(44 lbf•in)
1.2 N•m
(11 lbf•in)
smr2013-010-102_a
7
STORAGE COMPARTMENT (MODELS WITHOUT SUSPENSION)
smr2010-046-108
8
VENTILATION (MODELS WITH SUSPENSION)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
smr2009-017-002_a
9
VENTILATION (MODELS WITHOUT SUSPENSION)
smr2013-010-100_a
10
FRONT COVER
XPS
synthetic
grease
XPS
synthetic
grease
Models without
suspension 2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
smr2010-046-106_b
11
SEAT
RXT series GXT series
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
6.5 Nm
1.5 Nm (58 lbfin)
(13 lbfin)
iS models
6.5 Nm 4 Nm

smr2010-046-109_a
12
WAKEBOARD RACK AND WAKE PYLON

Wake Pro
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
Loctite
5150
(silicone
sealant)
XPS
synthetic
grease
See
tightening
sequence
See tightening
sequence
See tightening sequence
See
tightening
sequence
smr2011-040-100_a
13
PROCEDURES WARNING
Protect skin, wear gloves when in contact
GELCOAT with resin, hardeners and gelcoat. A barrier
The deck is constructed of chopped fiberglass, skin cream may also be used. Do not expose
saturated with resin. It is sprayed on the layer of area to open flame or lit cigarette. Some of
gelcoat along with pieces of fiberglass mat, cloth the materials are flammable. Protect eyes,
and woven roving which are added at required wear safety glasses when grinding, sanding
areas. or spraying. Use a dust mask when sanding
or grinding. When spraying wear a respirator
For the hull, a different material is used and a stan- or paint mask. Always read warning labels
dard polyester based fiberglass repair kit will not on products.
work. Refer to HULL subsection for proper mate-
rial and procedures. TOOLS
Gelcoat Repair Information Air mask Power sander
All liquid gelcoat and repair kits can be purchased Buffing pda Putty knife
directly from Gelcote International Ltd. BRP does Cover sheets Safety glasses
not distribute these products. Heavy-duty polisher Sanding block
NOTE: Fiberglass repair kit is also available Paint bruhs Scissors
through automotive or marine suppliers. Plastic container (mixing) Spray gun
Gelcote International Ltd web site has all the Sea- Plastic film Stirring stick
Doo personal watercraft and sport boat gelcoat
Plastic squeegee White cloths
colors.
You can order on the web site and get confirma- MATERIALS
tion of your order within hours. Quick, reliable ser- Acetone Epoxy filler
vice is what is offered to all BRP dealers around Cabosil Masking tape
the world.
Cardboard Liquid gelcoat
There are many services on this web site to
Fine compound Medium compound
make your ordering quick and informative. Or (white) (white)
you can call Gelcote International directly with
any question pertaining to gelcoat. Service, value Fiberglass cloth Polyester resin
and knowledge is what you can expect when you Fiberglass mat 24-grit sanding disks
call Gelcote International. Gelcoat putty Wax
Gelcote International Ltd Sandpaper (100-grit, 220-grit, 320-grit, 400-grit,
174 Colonnade Road Suite 29 600-grit, 1000-grit)
Ottawa, Ontario
Canada, K2E 7J5 Air Bubbles Repair
Phone: (613) 225-2177 Possible cause:
Phone: (877) 435-2683 (Toll Free) – Air pocket trapped between layers of laminate
Fax: (613) 225-5297 and gelcoat.
Web Site: www.gelcoat.ca Preparation of Surface
E-mail: info@gelcote.com
Remove all of the damaged gelcoat surrounding
the air bubble with a putty knife or preferably a
carbide grinding tip. Make sure all loose and weak
areas are completely removed. Sand a small area
of the gelcoat surface with 220-grit sandpaper. If
needed, sand the cavity itself. These areas must
have a rough surface to allow the gelcoat putty to
bond properly.
14
Filling the Cavity then additional reinforcement may be necessary.

The prepared surface must be cleaned with ace- This subject will be covered in COMPOUND
tone on a cloth. Use a gelcoat repair kit. Follow FRACTURES.
the mixing instructions in the kit when preparing Preparing the Surface
the gelcoat putty.
Small Fractures: Open the cracks up with a
Carefully mix the required amount while making sharp triangular can opener or preferably a car-
sure there are no air bubbles in the mixture. With bide tipped die grinder. The V groove will provide
a putty knife, fill the repair area and cover with a good bonding area for the gelcoat. With 220-grit
plastic film. Curing time may depend on tempera- sandpaper, sand the sides of the notched out ar-
ture, amount of putty and percentage of catalyst. eas.
After 2 hours, press lightly on the surface with
fingers to test the hardness. When the area be- Numerous Fractures: Using a grinder with a
comes hard, remove the plastic film. 24-grit disk, remove the gelcoat. Sand the area
edge with 220-grit sandpaper.
Sanding
Filling the Repair Area
Begin block sanding the patch with 320-grit sand-
paper until you come close to the original surface. Small Fractures: Refer to the same procedure as
Remove dust with a water soaked cloth and con- in the AIR BUBBLES.
tinue sanding with a 400-grit wet paper. Finish Numerous Fractures Over Large Surface: Pre-
wet sanding with a 600-grit to remove deeper pare the area for spray application of liquid gel-
scratches. If needed you can wet sand with finer coat. Wipe down the surface with acetone. Mask
grit paper such as 1000-grit. the area off to protect the watercraft from over-
spray.
Buffing and Waxing
Mix the needed quantity of gelcoat and catalyst
Buff the surface using a heavy duty polisher with according to suppliers recommendations. The
a buffing pad. Make sure the pad is free of dirt gelcoat can be thinned with acetone up to 10%.
or you may damage the gelcoat. Carefully begin If it needs more consistency you can add cabosil.
buffing with a white medium compound. Finish
off using a fine compound. While buffing, pay Make sure that the air supply is free of oil, dirt and
close attention to avoid overheating the surface. water.
Test spray the gelcoat mixture on paper to verify
Blisters Repair its consistency and pattern. You may have to ap-
Possible causes: ply 5 or 6 coats to cover the area properly. Over-
– Insert catalyst lap each coat further than the last, leaving at least
30 seconds between passes. Avoid trying to coat
– Improper catalyst/gelcoat ratio. the surface with only a few heavy coats, this will
A blister is a visible bump on the watercraft sur- not allow the gelcoat to dry properly.
face that may not necessarily come right through Apply a coat of polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) to seal off
the gelcoat layer. In the case of only a few blis- the air and protect the gelcoat surface from dust.
ters, follow the same repair procedure as for air PVA speeds up the curing process because gel-
bubbles. If they are numerous and in close con- coat will not cure properly when exposed to air.
centration, spray liquid gelcoat to achieve proper
repair. This procedure is covered in MINOR GEL- Sanding
COAT FRACTURES. Wash the polyvinyl alcohol off with water. De-
pending on the size of the area repaired, you
Minor Gelcoat Fractures Repair can either block sand as per previous procedure
Possible causes: or you may use an air sander. Sand the surface
– Flexing of fiberglass laminate down with progressively finer grits of sandpaper
– Gelcoat thickness until the desired finish is achieved.
– Direct result of impact. Buffing and Waxing
In case of fractures which have not penetrated Buff the surface using a heavy duty polisher with
past the gelcoat layer, the repair concerns the gel- a buffing pad. Make sure the pad is free of dirt
coat only. If flex cracking or impact are evident, or you may damage the gelcoat. Carefully begin
15
buffing with a white medium compound. Finish pieces evenly. Try to work quickly, you may only
off using a fine compound. While buffing, pay have 15 or 20 minutes. You may clean the brush
close attention to avoid overheating the surface. with acetone.
Wait until the repair has hardened before moving
Compound Fractures Repair on to the interior repair. If the size of the opening
Possible causes: is too large for the pieces to maintain the proper
– Thickness of fiberglass laminate shape, you will have to use a backing support. It
– Direct result of impact. is a shaped piece of cardboard that fits flush to the
interior surface and has a plastic layer on the repair
Compound fractures are those that have gone side. It is held in place by tape or a support.
past the gelcoated surface and in through the lay-
ers of fiberglass laminate. Two types of repairs Inside: Wipe down the area with acetone on a
have to be performed. The first is to restore the cloth. Apply the same procedure as for outside
structural integrity of the damaged area. Fracture repair when laminating the alternating pieces
types can vary from a simple crack to a large of fiberglass material. If a backing support was
hole. Usually, fiberglass reinforcement becomes used, remove it before starting the repair. After
necessary, especially if the fracture can be at- the area has hardened, remove sharp edges of
tributed to weakness. The final part of the repair material from surface. If required paint the sur-
is the gelcoating, which cannot be done until the face.
interior and exterior laminate surfaces have been Sanding
repaired.
Outside: This surface will have to be prepared for
Outside: Remove the damaged gelcoat and fiber- application of gelcoat. The size of the area will
glass with a 24-grit disk using a power sander. determine the gelcoating procedure to be used.
Grind outward at least 2 inches from the fracture Refer to the MINOR GELCOAT FRACTURES RE-
to allow the patch to bond to strong material. PAIR.
Cut enough pieces of fiberglass mat necessary
to build up the area. The pieces should be cut Buffing and Waxing
so they overlap each other by at least a half inch. Refer to the BUFFING AND WAXING in MINOR
For a smoother finish, the last layer should be GELCOAT FRACTURES REPAIR.
fiberglass cloth. If the fracture is small enough all
you may have to do is fill the area with an epoxy
filler.
DECALS
Inside: For the interior repair, you can grind more. Decal Removal
This will allow for more fiberglass material which Using a heat gun warm up one end of decal for a
will strengthen the area. If the fracture opening is few seconds until decal can roll off when rubbing
too large after surface preparation, you may need with your finger.
a backing support to cover the opening. Cut alter-
NOTE: When heating near light surfaces, duct
nating pieces of fiberglass mat and cloth in over-
tape should be applied to protect the surface.
lapping sizes.
Otherwise the light color could become a yellow-
Patching the Repair Area ish color.
Outside: The outside should be done first. Wipe Pull decal slowly and when necessary apply more
clean the area with acetone on a cloth, then mask heat to ease removal on the area that has to be
off area. For a small crack use an epoxy filler in peeled off.
the same way you would use gelcoat repair putty. If decal tears while pulling off, it has to be heated
When laying up a larger area you will use mat, for a few seconds longer. If decal tends to stretch
cloth and fiberglass resin and catalyst. Use a clean while pulling off, stop heating and wait a few sec-
container to mix the resin, mix only what you will onds to let it cool, then peel it off.
need. Follow the recommended catalyst ratio.
Using a clean paintbrush, brush the mixed resin Decal Installation (with a Protective
on the surface. Place the smallest piece of mat Film on Back Side)
over the fracture and then wet out the mat. Fol- These decals usually contain written information
low with the remaining pieces of mat and final (e.g.: warning) and are used on gelcoat or metal.
layer of cloth. While wetting the pieces make sure
you work the air bubbles out and saturate all the Using isopropyl alcohol, clean the surface and dry
thoroughly.
16
Using a pencil and the decal as a template, mark Carpet Removal

the area where decal will be located. Unstick a carpet corner.
Remove half of the decal back protective film and Pull carpet vigorously to remove the carpet and its
align decal with marks. Start sticking it from cen- glue from body.
ter and remove the other half of the film to stick
it completely. Carefully squeegee decal beginning To remove the remaining glue from body, use a
at center and working outward using, firm, short, plastic or rubber spatula. Scrape remaining glue
overlapping strokes. with spatula.
NOTE: Do not use any products (alcohol, ace-
Decal Installation (with a Protective tone, thinner, etc.) or heat the remaining carpet
Film on Both Sides) glue. Chemical reactions make glue very hard to
These decals usually contain graphics and are remove.
used on gelcoat or plastic.
Carpet Installation
Installation on Gelcoat Clean body surface with isopropyl alcohol and dry
Using isopropyl alcohol, clean the surface and dry thoroughly.
thoroughly. Install new carpet.
Using a pencil and the decal as a template mark
the area where decal will be located. STORAGE COMPARTMENT
For better adhesion a dry application is recom- COVER
mended, however, to ease decal installation a
mild solution of soapy water can be sprayed over
surface where decal will be installed.
Remove back protective film from decal and align
decal with marks. When well aligned squeegee
decal beginning at center and working outward us-
ing firm, short, overlapping strokes.
Remove front protective film once decal has ad-
hered to hull.
Installation on Plastic Surface (Storage Cover)
Clean surface with isopropyl alcohol and dry thor-
oughly. smr2009-042-024_a

Using a pencil and the decal as a template, mark 1. Storage compartment cover
the area where decal will be located.
NOTICE Do not use soapy water to locate de- Storage Compartment Cover Removal
cal on plastic parts. 1. Open cover.
2. Cut locking tie retaining the bellows of gas
Remove back protective film from decal and care-
shock.
fully align decal with marks. When well aligned
squeegee decal beginning at center and working
outward using firm, short, overlapping strokes.
Remove front protective film once decal has ad-
hered.
CARPETS
Carpet Cleaning
To clean the carpets, use 3M™ Citrus Base
Cleaner or the equivalent. See the manufac-
smr2009-042-028_a
turer's instructions.
3. Move bellows downward.

17
4. Unscrew gas shock from its upper attachment. NOTICE Make sure to insert cover hinges
5. Remove gas shock from vehicle. completely. A click must be heard to indicate
complete insertion.
6. Open cover completely.
7. Align cover hinge keys with front body module Position the gas shock lower attachment on cavity
slots. opening.
8. Pull up cover to remove it. NOTICE To avoid breaking the attachment,
do not force to insert it in cavity.
smr2009-042-031_a
1. Lower attachment in its cavity
smr2009-042-029_a Close cover to lock the bottom of the gas shock.

1. Cover hinge key
2. Front body module slot
GLOVE BOX COVER
Installation
Remove gas shock attachment from cover.
Apply LOCTITE 414 (P/N 413 705 800) on threads of
shock absorber body.
Tighten manually the attachment on gas shock.
Install the bellows and secure it using a locking tie. smr2009-042-055_a

Install the gas shock on cover. 1. Glove box cover
NOTE: The corrugated section of bellows must
point downward. Glove Box Cover Removal
1. Move steering in its upper position.
2. Open glove box cover until cover hinges are
aligned with front body module openings.
smr2009-042-030_a
1. Corrugated section
Install cover on vehicle.

smr2009-042-025_a
1. Glove box cover hinge

2. Front body module opening
18
3. Pull the bottom of cover gently to release Secure lateral arms to moving deck. Install parts
hinges. as shown.
Glove Box Cover Installation

Reverse the removal procedure.
SEAT
Seat Removal
1. Open seat.
2. Attach the seat to support it during removal.
3. Remove Allen socket screw retaining the lateral
arm to moving deck (one each side).
smr2009-042-032_a
1. Allen socket screw

2. Stainless steel flat washers
3. Sleeve
4. RH lateral arm
5. Rubber grommet in moving deck
Tighten lateral arm screws to specification.

LATERAL ARM SCREWS TORQUE
1.5 N•m (13 lbf•in)
NOTICE Do not tighten screws over this

recommended torque. Otherwise, the rubber
smr2009-042-026_a
1. Allen socket screw

grommet could turns and screw will be hard
2. RH lateral arm to remove.
4. Remove bolts securing the central arm to seat. Seat Cleaning
For general purpose cleaning, use XPS MULTI-PUR-
POSE CLEANER (P/N 219 701 709), Vinyl Finish Vinyl
Cleaner, Fantastik or warm water with a mild dish
soap such as Dawn or Ivory. Gently scrub with a
small soft bristle brush.
For dirt build-up, use XPS MULTI-PURPOSE
CLEANER (P/N 219 701 709), Vinyl Finish Vinyl
Cleaner or an equivalent. Let soak for approxi-
mately 10 minutes, then gently scrub with a soft
bristle brush. For specific stain removal, refer to
smr2009-042-027_a your cleaning and care card.
1. Central arm Do not use any silicone-based protectants. They
2. Retaining bolts
will extract the plasticizers, leaving the vinyl hard
5. Remove seat from vehicle. and brittle, and eventually cracking will occur.
RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS
Seat Installation
The installation is the reverse of the removal pro- XPS MULTI-PURPOSE CLEANER
1.
(P/N 219 701 709)
Install seat to central arm. 2. Dish Soap (Dawn or Ivory)
Tighten seat retaining bolts to specification. 3. Fantastik
SEAT RETAINING BOLTS TORQUE 4. 3M Citrus Cleaner
4 N•m (35 lbf•in) 5. 303 Protectant
19
Vinyl Cleaning Recommendations for Special 2. Adjust lock pin height. Do not torque yet.
Stains 3. Position the lock pin longitudinally into the rear
TYPE OF STEP STEP STEP handle slot.
ACTION
STAIN 1 2 3 4. Hold the lock pin in this position and tighten ad-
Ballpoint ink* E B A justment nut to specification.
— A. Medium-soft brush,
Chewing gum D A SEAT LATCH ADJUSTMENT NUT TORQUE
warm soapy water,
Coffee, tea, rinse/dry. 8 N•m (71 lbf•in)
B — —
chocolate
—
5. Close the seat and readjust as required.
Pen D B
— B. Vinyl Finish Cleaner,
Grease D B
rinse/dry.
Household soil A B —
Ketchup A B —
Latex paint A B — C. One (1) tablespoon
of ammonia, one-fourth
Lipstick A B — (1/4) cup of hydrogen
peroxide, three-fourth
Mildew or wet (3/4) cup of water,
C B A
leaves* rinse/dry.
Motor oil B — —
Oil-based paint D B —
D. Wipe or scrape off
Permanent
E B C excess (chill gum with smr2010-046-014_a
marker*
ice before hand). 1. Lock pin
Spray paint B B — 2. Adjustment nut
Suntan lotion A B — MODEL MEASURE A MEASURE B

— E. Denatured alcohol,
Tar/asphalt D B iS and aS 32.4 mm ± 1.0 mm
rinse/dry.
Models (1.276 in ± .039 in)
Yellow mustard A B C 34.4 mm ± 1.0 mm
Models
*Suntan lotion, tree pollen, wet leaves and some other products 36.4 mm ± 1.0 mm (1.354 in ± .039 in)
without
can contain dyes that stain permanently. (1.433 in ± .039 in)
iS or aS
All cleaning methods must be followed by a thor-
ough rinse with warm water. MIRRORS
Certain household cleaners, powdered abrasives,
steel wool and industrial cleaners can cause dam- Mirror Replacement
age and discoloration and are not recommended. 1. Remove mirror trim as follows.
Dry cleaning fluids and lacquer solvents should 1.1 Using a small screwdriver, unlock both
not be used as they will remove printed pattern front tabs securing the front of mirror
and gloss. Waxes should be used with caution trim.
as many contain dyes or solvents that can perma-
nently damage the protective coating. 1.2 Tilt the trim forward and remove it.
SEAT LATCH
locker.
20
4. Install mirror trim as follows.

4.1 Install the front locating tabs.
smr2009-042-042_a
1. Front retaining tabs

2. Side retaining tabs
3. Locating tabs
smr2009-042-043_a
2. Remove nut and spring securing mirror. 1. Front locating tabs
4.2 Lower rear part of trim.

4.3 Lift up the rear edge and press the center
of trim to position retainers over front re-
taining tabs.
smr2011-040-001_a
1. Nut
2. Spring smr2009-042-044_a
1. Trim retainers
3. Install the new mirror and tighten nut to speci- 2. Retaining tabs
fication.
MIRROR SPRING LENGTH SPECIFICATION BUMPERS
10 mm to 12 mm (13/32 in to 15/32 in) Bumper Removal
Front Bumper
1. Remove both protective caps.
smr2009-042-045_a

smr2011-040-002_a 1. Front bumper
A. 10 mm to 12 mm (13/32 in to 15/32 in) 2. Protective caps
21
2. Remove side screws securing front bumper to

body.
smr2009-042-049_a
FROM RH SIDE OF VEHICLE

1. Rear bumper
2. Retaining screw
3. Side bumper
smr2009-042-046_a
FROM RH SIDE OF VEHICLE 3. Remove screws located under rear bumper.

1. Front bumper
2. Retaining screw
3. Side bumper
3. Remove screws located under front bumper.
smr2009-042-050_a
1. Retaining screws
smr2009-042-047_a
UNDERNEATH FRONT OF VEHICLE

4. Remove rear bumper from vehicle.
1. Retaining screws
Side Bumpers
4. Remove front bumper from vehicle. 1. Remove front and rear bumpers.
Rear Bumper 2. Using a marker, trace a line at bumper end.
1. Remove both protective caps (one on each NOTE: These marks will be used during installa-
side). tion.
smr2009-042-048_a
TYPICAL – iS MODEL SHOWN smr2009-042-051_a

1. Rear bumper
2. Protective cap 1. Trace a line here
2. Remove side screws securing rear bumper to 3. Pull the top of bumper to unclip it from body.
body. NOTE: A heat gun can be used to soften side
bumper.
22
smr2009-042-052_a smr2009-042-052_b
1. Make sure bumper is positioned correctly

Bumper Installation
NOTE: A heat gun can be used to soften side
Front and Rear Bumper bumper.
cedure. BODY COVER
Tighten bumper screws to specification.
BUMPER SCREWS TORQUE
4.5 N•m (40 lbf•in)
Side Bumpers
1. Remove all remaining residues of the mounting
tape.
2. Clean bumper area using isopropyl alcohol.
3. Remove the protective skin on mounting tape.
smr2009-042-057_a

1. Body covers
Body Cover Removal

1. Remove the STORAGE COMPARTMENT
COVER, see procedure in this subsection.
2. Remove the FRONT GRILLE, see procedure in
this subsection.
3. Remove the plastic push-in clip securing the up-
smr2009-042-053_a per trim.
1. Protective skin
4. Insert bumper over body lip.

4.1 Insert lower section first.
4.2 Insert upper section last.
ssi2009-003-002_a
LH SIDE SHOWN
1. Remove this plastic push-in clip
23
4. Move both upper trims rearward and remove

them.
smr2009-042-058_a
ssi2009-003-003_a
RH SIDE SHOWN
LH SIDE SHOWN 1. Rear retaining tabs
1. LH upper trim
5. Remove the plastic push-in clips retaining the

LH and RH trims.
smr2009-042-059_a
RH SIDE SHOWN
1. Center retaining tab
ssi2009-003-004_a
10. Unlock the four retaining tabs securing the
LH SIDE SHOWN
1. Remove this plastic push-in clip front of body cover.
6. Open seat and using a 3/16" drill bit, drill the

rivets securing the seat trims.
smr2009-042-060_a
RH SIDE SHOWN
1. Front retaining tab
11. Remove body covers.

ssi2009-003-008_b
Body Cover Installation
LH SIDE SHOWN
1. Remove these rivets The installation is the reverse of the removal pro-
cedure.
7. Remove seat trim and drill the front rivet secur-
ing the body cover.
8. At the front of front body module, remove
screws or rivets retaining both body cover.
9. Unlock rear and center retaining tabs.
24
FRONT BODY MODULE
smr2009-042-062_a
1. LH side retaining screws
smr2009-042-065_a
4. At the front of body module, remove screws.
1. Front body module
Front Body Module Removal

1. Refer to appropriate procedures and remove
the following parts:
– Storage compartment cover
– Storage bin
– Glove box cover
– Body covers and front grille
– Steering and steering lock
– Speed-Tie unit (if equipped). smr2009-042-063_a
2. Remove both screws and washers located be- 1. Front retaining screws
tween seat and glove box.
5. Unlock retaining tabs.
smr2009-042-064_a
smr2009-042-061_a
1. Front body module retaining tabs
1. Rear retaining screws
6. Remove front body module.
3. On each side of front body module, remove
both retaining screws. Front Body Module Installation
cedure.
SPEED-TIE UNIT
Front Speed-Tie Unit Removal
1. Open the glove box.
2. Remove the plastic push-in clip securing the LH
upper trim.
25
ssi2009-003-002_a
1. Remove this plastic push-in clip ssi2009-003-008_a
1. LH body cover
3. Move upper trim rearward and remove it. 2. Remove this rivet
3. Seat trim
7. Remove front trim by releasing both retaining

tabs.
ssi2009-003-003_a
1. Upper trim
4. Remove the plastic push-in clip retaining the LH

trim.
smr2009-042-034_a
1. Retaining tabs
8. Using a small screwdriver, release both retain-

ing hooks securing the cam trim on locking
mechanism.
ssi2009-003-004_a
1. Remove this plastic push-in clip
5. Open seat.
6. Drill rivet securing the LH body cover and the
ssi2009-003-015_a
seat trim.
1. Retaining hooks
REQUIRED TOOL
9. Remove screws retaining the Speed-Tie unit.
10. Position the reel of Speed-Tie unit to the bot-
tom of its cavity.
11. Remove the locking mechanism from vehicle.
529031800 12. Open storage cover and unlock the front tab
securing the LH trim.
26
Rear Speed-Tie Unit Removal

iS and aS Models
1. Remove screws securing the Speed-Tie unit to
the boarding platform.
2. Remove rear trim by releasing retaining tabs.
ssi2009-003-009_a
1. Front locking tab
13. Unlatch the rear tab.
smr2009-042-035_a
1. Retaining tabs
3. Remove screws securing the locking mecha-

nism to the boarding platform.
ssi2009-003-010_a
1. Rear locking tab
14. Slightly pull the top of LH trim and remove the smr2009-042-036_a
reel of the Speed-Tie unit from its location as 1. Retaining screws
shown.
4. Remove the Speed-Tie unit from vehicle.
Models Without iS or aS
1. Remove both access covers.
2. From underneath deck, remove screws retain-
ing the Speed-Tie cover.
3. Remove bolts securing the Speed-Tie unit to
deck.
Front Speed-Tie Unit Installation

1. Ensure both double cage nuts are correctly in-
serted into Speed-Tie unit cavities.
ssi2009-003-011_a
1. Speed-Tie unit reel
NOTICE During Speed-Tie unit removal, be

careful not to damage the LH trim.
27
ssi2009-003-007_a
1. Double cage nut

ssi2009-003-011_a
2. Positioning tab
1. Speed-Tie unit reel
2. Insert the Speed-Tie unit in vehicle.
NOTICE During Speed-Tie unit insertion,
2.1 Unlock the front tab securing the LH trim. be careful not to damage the LH trim.
NOTE: To facilitate the locking mechanism inser-
tion, temporarily pull approximately 200 mm (8 in)
of rope between reel and locking mechanism.
3. Position the reel to the bottom of its cavity.
ssi2009-003-009_a
1. Front locking tab
2.2 Unlatch the rear tab.

ssi2009-003-012_a
1. Push in the reel
4. Lift the lever and insert the locking mechanism

so that the lever is pointing toward the front of
vehicle.
ssi2009-003-010_a
1. Rear locking tab
2.3 Slightly pull the top of LH trim and insert

the reel of the Speed-Tie unit in its location ssi2009-003-013_a
as shown. 1. Locking lever

2. Rope
NOTE: Insert the unit with the marking out-
side. 5. Align the reel with the locking mechanism.
6. Tighten locking mechanism retaining screws to
specification.
28
LOCKING MECHANISM RETAINING 9. Test Speed-Tie operation.

SCREWS TORQUE 10. Reinstall all removed parts.
Rear Speed-Tie Unit Installation
iS and aS Models
1. Lift up the boarding platform.
NOTE: To facilitate the locking mechanism inser-
tion, temporarily pull approximately 200 mm (8 in)
of rope.
ssi2009-003-014_a
1. Locking mechanism retaining screws (M6 x 45)
7. Install the cam trim.

7.1 Insert both cam trim retaining hooks into
locking mechanism openings.
ssi2009-003-101_a
1. Locking mechanism
A. 200 mm (8 in)
2. Insert the locking mechanism in boarding plat-

form opening. Position the locking lever toward
the slot.
ssi2009-003-015_a
1. Retaining hooks
7.2 Press down the cam trim until it snaps into

place.
8. Install the front trim.
8.1 Insert top tabs and align lower tabs with
openings. ssi2009-003-102_a
1. Locking lever
2. Boarding platform slot
3. Position a double cage nut on the locking mech-

anism.
ssi2009-003-016_a
1. Tabs
8.2 Press trim in place.

29
LOCKING MECHANISM SCREWS TORQUE

2.5 N•m (22 lbf•in)
ssi2009-003-103_a
1. Double cage nut

ssi2009-003-106_a
4. Secure it using retaining screws. 2. Locking mechanism
10. Install the cam trim.

10.1 Insert both cam trim retaining hooks into
locking mechanism openings.
ssi2009-003-104_a
1. Retaining screws (M6 x 45)
5. Install the second double cage nut.

6. Secure the reel of the Speed-Tie unit on board- ssi2009-003-107_a
ing platform. 1. Retaining hooks
7. Tighten Speed-Tie retaining screws to specifica-
tion. 10.2 Press down the cam trim against board-
ing platform.
SPEED-TIE RETAINING SCREWS TORQUE
11. Install the rear trim.
5 N•m (44 lbf•in) 11.1 Align tabs and alignment pin with corre-
sponding openings.
ssi2009-003-109_a
1. Tabs
2. Alignment pin
ssi2009-003-105_a
11.2 Press trim in place.
1. Speed-Tie unit
12. Test Speed-Tie operation.
8. Close boarding platform.
Models Without iS or aS
9. Tighten locking mechanism retaining screws to
specification. 1. Clean all residues of silicone from deck and
Speed-Tie cover.
30
2. Apply LOCTITE 5150 (SILICONE SEALANT)

(P/N 296 000 309) in the Speed-Tie unit holes.
ssi2010-011-019_a
1. Locking lever
7. To facilitate new cover installation and avoid

cross threading, install both Plastite screws in
cover posts (approximately 3-4 turns). Then,
ssi2010-011-017 remove screws.
3. Align Speed-Tie unit holes with body holes.
4. Secure the Speed-Tie unit.
ssi2010-011-020_a
1. Cover
2. Cover posts
3. Plastite screws K40 x 13

ssi2010-011-018_a (P/N 296 000 309) all around both cover holes.
1. M6 x 30 Allen socket screw
2. M6 flat washers
3. Speed-Tie unit
5. Tighten Speed-Tie unit retaining screws to

specification.
SPEED-TIE UNIT RETAINING SCREWS TORQUE
6. Pull the locking lever to allow cover installation.
ssi2010-011-021
9. Install the cover.

9.1 Insert cover opening over the mooring
rope stopper and the locking lever.
31
ssi2009-003-017_a
ssi2010-011-022_a 1. Cap
1. Cover 2. Small screwdriver
2. Locking lever
3. Mooring rope stopper 3. Untie the knot and remove the button.
9.2 Insert cover posts into cover holes.
NOTE: Due to the drilling precision, it may be
necessary to pry slightly the cover to insert
cover posts into cover holes.
9.3 From underneath deck, secure the cover
with Plastite screws and flat washers. To
avoid damaging the cover, stop tightening
as soon as the washers are against the
deck.
NOTICE Do not tighten screws more than ssi2009-003-018_a
necessary to avoid damaging the cover. 1. Untie this knot

2. Button
10. Test Speed-Tie operation.
4. Remove the locking mechanism and let the
11. Reinstall access covers. rope retracts into housing.
Speed-Tie Unit Cleaning 5. Remove the back cover.
A minimum of maintenance is required to keep
the Speed-Tie unit and the rope in serviceable con-
dition.
Clean the locking mechanism and rope with fresh
water to remove salt, sand or other deposits.
NOTICE Do not use a high pressure washer
to clean the Speed-Tie unit.
Let dry.
ssi2009-003-019_a
Speed-Tie Rope Replacement 1. Back cover

2. Retaining screws
1. Remove the Speed-Tie unit from the vehicle.
6. Remove the rewind unit.
2. Using a small tool, remove the rope cap.
32
ssi2009-003-020_a ssi2009-003-023_a
1. Rewind unit 1. Inner stopper
7. Turn the unit upside down and remove the re- 10. Insert the inner stopper on new rope and tie
taining screw. a knot near the end of the line. Position the
inner stopper in order to its flat side leans
against the knot.
ssi2009-003-021_a
1. Retaining screw
ssi2009-003-025_a
8. Split the rewind unit and remove damaged 1. Inner stopper

A. 106 mm ± 6 mm (4-1/8 in ± 15/64 in)
rope.
11. On rewind unit base, identify the short tongue.
ssi2009-003-022_a
9. Before discarding rope, remove and keep the

inner stopper. ssi2009-003-026_a
1. Short tongue
12. Install the rope end (with the knot) over the
short tongue as shown.
33
ssi2009-003-021_a
1. Rewind unit cover retaining screw
ssi2009-003-027_a 14. Turn rope clockwise. Check indications on in-

1. Short tongue ner side of rewind unit.
13. Install the rewind unit cover.
13.1 Align the cover notch and the rope.
ssi2009-003-030
15. Lock the end of rope as shown.
ssi2009-003-028_a
1. Cover notch
13.2 Press in the cover until both parts are

completely pressed together.
ssi2009-003-031
16. Install rewind unit into housing.

16.1 Install the rewind unit with the retaining
screw downward. The end of rope must
be placed in front of the housing opening.
16.2 Insert spring in shaft notch.
ssi2009-003-029_a
13.3 Install and tighten retaining screw to

specification.
REWIND UNIT COVER RETAINING
SCREW TORQUE
34
ssi2009-003-035_a
1. Rope
ssi2009-003-032_a
A. 18 mm ± 6 mm (23/32 in ± 15/64 in)
1. Spring in notch
19.4 Pull knot in the button and install the
NOTE: Ensure spring is properly inserted in button cap. Make sure cap is properly
notch. snapped.
17. Using a screwdriver, crank rewind spring ex- 20. Install and tighten Speed-Tie cover retaining
actly 7 turns (clockwise). screws to specification.
SPEED-TIE COVER RETAINING SCREWS
TORQUE
21. Check Speed-Tie operation.

22. Reinstall the Speed-Tie unit on vehicle.
BOARDING PLATFORM
(iS AND aS MODELS)
ssi2009-003-033_a Boarding Platform Removal
18. Unlock the end of the rope and pull it out by 1. Unlatch the boarding platform.
the housing opening. 2. Open boarding platform completely.
NOTE: Be careful not to release the rope and the 3. Remove plastic dart securing rear shock assem-
spring. Otherwise you will need to remove drum bly support.
and repeat the cranking operation.
19. Install locking mechanism and rope.
19.1 Pull out rope end.
19.2 Insert end of rope through locking mech-
anism.
ssi2009-003-034_a smr2013-010-002_b
1. Locking mechanism TYPICAL - PARTS REMOVED FOR CLARITY

1. Plastic dart
2. Rear shock assembly support
19.3 Pass rope end through the rope button
and tie a knot on the rope end, see pic- 4. Remove rear shock assembly support.
ture.
35
smr2013-010-002_c smr2013-010-002_a
TYPICAL - PARTS REMOVED FOR CLARITY TYPICAL

5. Remove front shock assembly support.
7. Move bellows downward.
6. Cut locking ties retaining the bellows of gas
shock. 8. Unscrew gas shock from its upper attachment.
9. Remove gas shock from vehicle.
10. Align boarding platform hinge openings with
flat sides of fixed hinges.
smr2009-042-037_a
smr2013-010-001_a 1. Boarding platform hinge

1. Cut this locking tie 2. Fixed hinge
11. Remove boarding platform.
Boarding Platform Installation

1. Remove gas shock attachment from boarding
platform.
2. Apply LOCTITE 414 (P/N 413 705 800) on threads
of shock absorber body.
3. Manually tighten the attachment on gas shock.
4. Install the bellows and secure it using a locking
tie.
5. Install the gas shock on cover.
NOTE: The corrugated section of bellows must
point downward.
6. Align boarding platform hinge openings with flat
sides of fixed hinges.
36
7. Push in the boarding platform to assemble

hinges.
8. Position the bottom of the gas shock on cavity
opening.
NOTICE To avoid breaking the attachment,
do not force to insert it in cavity.
smr2013-010-002_b
TYPICAL - PARTS REMOVED FOR CLARITY

1. Plastic dart
2. Rear shock assembly support
smr2009-042-038_a
10. Close boarding platform to lock the bottom of
1. Lower attachment on cavity opening
the gas shock.
NOTE: Make sure upper attachment is properly 11. Lock boarding platform.
inserted in its slots.
DECK EXTENSION
(iS AND aS MODELS)
smr2009-042-039_a
1. Upper attachment
9. Install rear shock assembly support onto rear

shock and securing in place using plastic dart.
smr2009-042-009_a
1. Deck extension
Deck Extension Removal

1. Open seat.
2. Remove the rear ventilation box.
37
Deck Extension Installation

1. Position the deck extension.
2. Install screws retaining deck extension and air
inlet.
3. Tighten deck extension retaining screws to
specification.
DECK EXTENSION RETAINING SCREWS
TORQUE
1.2 N•m (11 lbf•in)
NOTICE Do not tighten screws over this

smr2009-016-001_a
recommended torque. Otherwise, the rubber
1. Rear ventilation box
2. Retaining latches grommet could turns and screw will be hard
to remove.
3. Remove screws securing air inlet to deck ex-
tension. 4. Install and tighten coolant reservoir screws to
specification.
COOLANT RESERVOIR SCREWS TORQUE
5. Reposition moving deck. Refer to MOVING

DECK in this subsection.
MOVING DECK
(iS AND aS MODELS)
smr2009-042-020_a
1. Air inlet retaining screws
4. Remove coolant reservoir screws.
smr2009-042-008_a
1. Moving deck
The moving deck is comprised of:

– Front storage cover
– Front body module
– Steering
smr2009-042-021_a
– Seat
1. Coolant reservoir screws
– Foot wells.
5. Remove all screws retaining deck extension to The moving deck is attached to the intelligent sus-
fixed deck. pension and moves as a single unit.
6. Close seat. The moving deck does not comprise the boarding
7. Tilt the MOVING DECK, see procedure in this platform and the rear storage bins.
subsection. It is possible to tilt the moving deck for servicing
8. Remove the deck extension. the watercraft, such as:
– Deck extension removal
38
– Working on air intake system

– Suspension position sensor replacement
– Suspension hydraulic pump replacement.
The moving deck removal is also required for ma-
jor repairs, such as:
– Engine removal
– Suspension component removal (except sus-
pension position sensor)
– Fuel tank removal.
smr2009-042-011_a
Tilting Moving Deck for Servicing 1. Rear suspension arm

2. Reinstallation marks
Watercraft 3. Screws (discard)
1. Remove the BOARDING PLATFORM, see pro-
cedure in this subsection. 5. Lift the rear suspension arm against seat handle
and attach it with locking tie or strap.
ssi2009-002-002_a
1. Boarding platform smr2009-042-012_a
1. Seat handle
2. Remove bolts securing both rear suspension 2. Ski/wakeboard attachment
3. Locking tie
arm covers.
6. Install two pieces of wood (4 x 4) under mov-
ing deck front area as shown to avoid potential
damage when lifting the moving deck.
smr2009-042-010_a
1. Cover screws
3. Mark position of rear suspension arm brackets

for proper reinstallation.
4. Remove and discard screws securing rear sus-
smr2009-042-022_a
pension arm to fixed deck.
1. Pieces of wood
7. Place steering in its lower position.
39
8. On aS models, ensure that remote reservoir

hose has enough free length before tilting the
moving deck.
– If hose is too tight, remove remote reser-
voir retaining screws then move hose inside
deck.
smr2009-042-023_a
1. Use this rivet as reference point

A. 340 mm (13-1/2 in)
NOTICE Lifting the rear of moving deck more

than the recommended height can damage the
steering cable and the remote reservoir hose.
Lowering Back Moving Deck
smr2011-040-004_a 1. Carefully lower and secure the rear suspension
aS MODEL arm to the fixed deck.
1. Remote reservoir retaining screws (2x)
2. Hose bellows 1.1 Position the rear suspension arm brackets
9. Using suitable lifting devices, raise the rear of previously drew on fixed deck.
moving deck to 340 mm (13-1/2 in).
NOTICE If no mark was trace, refer to IS
SUSPENSION subsection for proper pro-
cedure to install and align the rear suspen-
sion arm.
sion arm brackets.
1.3 Tighten screws to specification.
REAR SUSPENSION ARM RETAINING
SCREWS TORQUE
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
smr2009-042-066_a
1. Hoist
2. Detach lifting device.
2. Lifting strap 3. Remove pieces of wood located under the front
of moving deck.
Removing the Moving Deck for

Servicing Watercraft
1. Open the front storage cover and remove the
front basket.
2. On aS models, remove remote reservoir from
moving deck as follows:
2.1 Remove both retaining screws.
2.2 Detach hose bellows from moving deck.
2.3 Insert remote reservoir into moving deck
hole.
40
smr2009-042-011_a

2. Reinstallation marks
3. Screws (discard)
smr2011-040-004_a
aS MODEL 7. Lift and attach the rear suspension arm against

1. Remote reservoir retaining screws (2x)
2. Hose bellows seat handle.
3. Remove the BOARDING PLATFORM, see pro-

smr2009-042-012_a
1. Seat handle
2. Ski/wakeboard attachment
ssi2009-002-002_a
3. Locking tie
8. Manually tip up the front of moving deck and
4. Remove bolts securing both rear suspension install a piece of wood (2 x 4) between fixed
arm covers. deck and each lateral supports.
smr2009-042-013_a
FROM THE FRONT OF VEHICLE

smr2009-042-010_a 1. RH lateral support
1. Cover screws 2. Piece of wood
5. Mark position of rear suspension arm brackets 9. Detach moving deck from lateral supports.
for proper reinstallation. 9.1 Remove front carpet of foot wells and pro-
6. Remove and discard screws securing rear sus- tective caps on both sides of the moving
pension arm to fixed deck. deck. Discard the front carpets.
41
smr2009-042-014_a
RH SIDE SHOWN
1. Front carpet (discard)
2. Protective cap smr2011-040-003_a
1. Gauge support
9.2 Remove and discard screws securing
moving deck to lateral supports. 14. Disconnect both connectors under moving
deck.
smr2009-042-015_a
RH SIDE SHOWN
1. Retaining screws (discard)
10. Open seat.

smr2010-046-015_a
11. Remove and discard M8 screws securing the
suspension mounting plate and moving deck. 2. O.T.A.S. connector
15. Detach steering cable from steering column.

15.1 Remove bolt securing ball joint to steer-
ing column.
smr2009-042-016_a
1. Moving deck central screws (to discard)
12. Close seat.

13. Remove the gauge support. Refer to INFOR-
MATION CENTER (GAUGE) subsection. smr2009-042-006_a
1. Steering cable ball joint

2. Steering column
42
15.2 Remove bolts retaining steering cable

clamp.
15.3 Unlatch steering cable clamp.
smr2009-042-071
smr2009-042-007_a
1. Steering column 2. Slowly, lower the moving deck just enough to

2. Steering column clamp bolts be able to insert the end of steering cable in
4. Steering cable adjusting nut steering column.
15.4 Place steering in its lower position. NOTICE Make sure not to pinch electrical har-
15.5 Free steering cable from fixed clamp. ness while lowering the moving deck.
16. Install lifting straps. 3. Install steering cable clamp and its bolts. Do
16.1 Using both mooring cleats under steer- not tighten bolts yet.
ing, install two lifting straps.
smr2009-042-007_a
1. Steering column
smr2009-042-079_a
1. Front lifting strap hooks into steering mooring cleats 4. Connect both electrical connectors under mov-
ing deck.
16.2 Install another lifting strap on seat handle.
17. Attach all lifting straps to an lifting device to lift
the moving deck.
CAUTION Make sure lifting device is lo-

cated at the center of the vehicle to rise moving
deck horizontally.
18. Raise moving deck slowly and drive steering
cable out of steering column.
19. Place the moving deck on a level surface.
Moving Deck Installation

1. Install 2 pieces of wood under lateral supports.
43
9. Raise rear of moving deck until suspension is

clear of moving deck.
NOTICE Do not raise the rear of moving deck
more than 340 mm (13-1/2 in).
smr2010-046-015_a
5. Lower the front of moving deck and secure it

smr2009-042-023_a
on both lateral supports using NEW screws.
1. Use this rivet as reference point
A. 340 mm (13-1/2 in)
10. Install two homemade alignment pins on sus-

pension mounting plate.
10.1 Take two M8 x 50 bolts and cut their
heads.
10.2 Grind down the cut ends to make a
rounded shape.
smr2009-042-015_a
RH SIDE SHOWN
1. Retaining screws (new)
6. Remove pieces of wood located under lateral

supports and reposition one under moving deck
front area.
smr2009-042-073_a
10.3 Install alignment pins into the 2 rear out-

side positions of suspension mounting
plate.
smr2009-042-090_a
1. Install piece of wood here
7. Remove the front lifting straps.

8. Open seat.
44
20. On aS models, install remote reservoir on

moving deck.
21. Install NEW front carpets on foot wells and
protective caps on moving deck.
22. Check steering alignment then tighten steer-
ing clamp bolts. Refer to STEERING subsec-
tion.
FRONT GRILLE
(iS AND aS MODELS)
smr2009-042-072_a
1. Alignment pins
11. Position the moving deck so that alignment

pins are aligned with suspension reinforce-
ment plate holes.
12. Lower the moving deck over alignment pins.
13. Install NEW M8 screws to secure the moving
deck to suspension mounting plate.
NOTE: Remove the alignment pins only when 2
screws are engaged in mounting plate.
14. Tighten screws to specification. smr2009-042-056_a
MOVING DECK RETAINING SCREWS LOCATED UNDER STORAGE COMPARTMENT COVER

1. Front grille
TORQUE (M8)
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft) Front Grille Removal
1. Remove the STORAGE COMPARTMENT
15. Close seat. COVER, see procedure in this subsection.
16. Carefully lower and secure the rear suspen- 2. Press on both tabs securing front grille to front
sion arm to the fixed deck. body module.
16.1 Position the rear suspension arm brack-
ets in accordance with the reference
marks previously drew on fixed deck.
NOTICE If no mark was trace, refer to iS
SUSPENSION subsection for proper pro-
cedure to install and align the rear sus-
pension arm.
16.2 Install NEW screws to secure rear sus-
pension arm brackets.
16.3 Tighten screws to specification.
REAR SUSPENSION ARM RETAINING smr2009-042-054_a
SCREWS TORQUE 1. Front grille
2. Retaining tabs
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
3. Remove grille.
17. Remove rear lifting strap.
18. Attach steering cable to steering column. Front Grille Installation
19. Install gauge support. Refer to INFORMA- The installation is the reverse of the removal pro-
TION CENTER (GAUGE) subsection. cedure.
45
SPLASH DEFLECTOR
(iS AND aS MODELS)
Splash Deflector Removal
smr2009-017-010_a
1. Ventilation box
2. Retaining latches
3. Remove the ventilation box.
Rear Ventilation Box Installation

sdd2009-001-052_a The installation is the reverse of the removal pro-
1. To remove the splash deflector, drill out the 4
rivets securing the splash deflector to the fixed Before installing the ventilation box, check the
deck. condition of its seal.
If the seal is damaged, replace the ventilation box
2. Pull the deflector from the fixed deck.
as an assembly.
NOTICE A molded location pin at each end
of the deflector are each inserted into the fixed FRONT VENTILATION BOX
deck. Be careful not to break them when re- (iS AND aS MODELS)
moving the deflector.
Front Ventilation Box Removal
Splash Deflector Installation 1. Open the front storage cover and remove the
1. Position the splash deflector over the forward storage basket.
end of the fixed deck and press the guide pins
2. Remove screws securing the ventilation box to
into the holes provided in the deck.
fixed deck.
2. Install four new rivets to secure the deflector to
the deck.
REAR VENTILATION BOX

(iS AND aS MODELS)
Rear Ventilation Box Removal
1. Open seat.
2. Release all retaining latches.
smr2009-017-003_a
1. Front ventilation box

2. Retaining screws
3. Remove the ventilation box.
Front Ventilation Box Installation

Before installing the ventilation box, check the
condition of its seal.
46
If the seal is damaged, replace the ventilation box. REAR ACCESS PANELS (MODELS
Tighten ventilation box screws to specification. WITHOUT iS OR aS)
VENTILATION BOX SCREWS TORQUE
1.2 N•m (11 lbf•in)
AIR INTAKE DUCT

(iS AND aS MODELS)
Air Intake Duct Removal
Remove engine. Refer to ENGINE REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION subsection.
Remove the suspension base. Refer to iS SUS-
PENSION subsection. smr2010-046-001_a
1. Rear access panels

Remove air intake duck from vehicle.
Air Intake Duct Installation Rear Access Panel Removal

Install suspension base. Refer to iS SUSPENSION Turn the lock handle to select the UNLOCK posi-
for complete procedure. tion.
– LH access panel: turn lock handle counterclock-
Install engine. Refer to ENGINE REMOVAL AND wise.
INSTALLATION.
– RH access panel: turn lock handle clockwise.
After deck extension installation, tighten screws
retaining the air intake duct to deck extension to
specification.
AIR INTAKE DUCT RETAINING SCREWS TORQUE
1.2 N•m (11 lbf•in)
smr2010-046-003_a
LOCK HANDLE OF THE LH ACCESS PANEL

1. Lock handle
2. UNLOCK position
3. LOCK position
smr2009-042-020_a
1. Air inlet retaining screws RXT X

Open and remove the panel.
GTX 155, RXT 215 and WAKE Pro 215
Open the panel completely.
Move the bottom of the panel outwards to re-
move it.
47
smr2010-046-004_a
smr2010-046-002_a
Step 1: Open the panel
Step 2: Move the panel outside LOCK HANDLE OF THE RH ACCESS PANEL
1. Lock handle in LOCK position
Rear Access Panel Installation
The installation is the reverse of the removal pro- WAKE PYLON (WAKE PRO 215)
cedure. However, pay attention to the following. Wake Pylon Removal
GTX 155, RXT 215 and WAKE Pro 215 Open the seat.
Insert rubber stoppers under the deck. Remove both lateral arms.
smr2010-046-005_a
smr2010-046-006_a
1. Rubber stoppers
1. Lateral arms screws
Close the panel partially and center it into the deck
cavity. Remove bolts at the bottom of wake pylon.
Press the corner, near the lock handle, against the
deck and turn the lock handle in the LOCK posi-
tion.
smr2010-046-007_a
1. Wake pylon bottom bolts
Remove bolts securing the wake pylon support to

body.
48
Locking Strap
Using a screwdriver or any other suitable tool, de-
tach a side of the locking strap from retaining pin.
smr2010-046-008_a
1. Wake pylon support bolts
Lift the wake pylon to disengage its bottom from

the body.
Slide the bottom of the wake pylon rearward to
remove the wake pylon from vehicle. smr2008-035-015_a
1. Locking strap
Remove locking strap and the inner lock.

Handle
Extend handle approximately 75 mm to 90 mm
(3 in to 3-1/2 in).
smr2010-046-009_a
Wake Pylon Disassembly

Extend the handle completely.
Turn the wake pylon upside down.
Move both ends of locking strap to disengage the smr2008-035-016_a
inner lock and free the handle. A. 75 mm to 90 mm (3 in to 3-1/2 in)
Insert two thin feeler gauges between handle

stem and extension tube.
smr2008-035-014_a
1. Locking strap end

2. Handle stem
49
smr2008-035-017_a
smr2008-035-019_a
1. Handle stem
1. Extension tube
2. Feeler gauges
3. Extension tube 2. Recesses
Place a rag around the joint to catch balls and Slide the handle stem into the extension tube.
spring. Remove feeler gauges and locking tie.
Hold feeler gauges and pull the handle. Locking Strap
Wake Pylon Assembly Remove the wake pylon trim.
Handle
Install a loose locking tie on handle stem.
Apply XPS SYNTHETIC GREASE (P/N 293 550 010) on
each ends of spring.
Insert the spring in the handle stem hole.
Position a ball on each ends of spring.
Install a feeler gauge over each balls.
Tighten the locking tie in order to retain feeler
gauges and balls.
smr2008-035-020_a
1. Wake pylon trim screws
Install lock and insert the end of the locking strap

over the retaining pin.
smr2008-035-018_a
1. Feeler gauges
2. Ball
Apply XPS SYNTHETIC GREASE (P/N 293 550 010) in

both recesses of the extension tube.
smr2008-035-021_a
1. Retaining pin
2. Locking strap
Using a suitable tool, position the locking strap in

its groove.
50
Tighten all bolts as per the following sequence.
smr2008-035-022_a
1. Locking strap
2. Locking strap groove
smr2011-039-016_a
Reinstall the wake pylon trim. TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
Do not install the handle into wake pylon yet.
Insert the handle into the wake pylon.
Wake Pylon Installation Move both ends of the locking strap forward to
Position the wake pylon on vehicle. fully insert the handle.
Install and secure wake pylon and lateral arms us-
ing previously removed fasteners and new elastic
stop nuts.
smr2010-046-010_a
1. Bottom of wake pylon

2. Rubber washers
3. Flat washers
smr2010-046-011_a
1. Flat washers
Tighten all bolts by hand.

Ensure base of wake pylon is well leaned against
body.
51
Subsection XX (BODY (RXP))
BODY (RXP)
SERVICE TOOLS
SUPERTANIUM DRILL BIT 3/16"................................................... 529 031 800 ............................... 11–12, 15
SERVICE PRODUCTS
LOCTITE 243 (BLUE)..................................................................... 293 800 060 ........................................... 13
BODY PARTS NOMENCLATURE
3 5
1 2 4 6 7 8
smr2012-043-104_a
1. Storage compartment cover

2. Mirror support
3. Gauge trim
4. Lateral trim panel
5. Console
6. Glove box cover
7. Seat
8. Rear handle
9. Bumper
smr2012-043 1
STORAGE COMPARTMENT COVER
3.5 N•m
(31 lbf•in)
4.5 N•m
(40 lbf•in)
See tightening
sequence
8 N•m
(71 lbf•in)
See tightening 2.0 N•m

sequence (18 lbf•in)
8 N•m
(71 lbf•in)
smr2012-043-103_a
2 smr2012-043
BODY PARTS
1.5 N•m
(13 lbf•in)
4.5 N•m
(40 lbf•in)
1.5 N•m
4.5 N•m (13 lbf•in)
(40 lbf•in)
4.5 N•m
(40 lbf•in) 1.5 N•m
(13 lbf•in)
4.5 N•m
(40 lbf•in)
4.5 N•m
4.5 N•m (40 lbf•in)
(40 lbf•in)
smr2012-043-102_a
smr2012-043 3
BODY PARTS
8 N•m
(71 lbf•in)
4.5 N•m
(40 lbf•in)
4.5 N•m
(40 lbf•in)
11.5 N•m
(102 lbf•in)
smr2012-043-105_a
4 smr2012-043
VENTILATION
smr2012-043-101_a
smr2012-043 5
SEAT
smr2012-043-100_a
6 smr2012-043
PROCEDURES
GELCOAT
DECALS
smr2012-043-001_a
1. BRP logo
CARPETS
2. Remove inner shell retaining bolt.
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
COVER
Storage Compartment Cover Removal
2. Remove nuts and bolts securing storage com-
partment cover to hinge.
smr2012-043-002_d
INNER SHELL RETAINING BOLT
3. Remove inner shell retaining screws.
smr2011-039-001_a
1. Retaining nuts
smr2012-043-002_a
3. Remove storage compartment cover. INNER SHELL RETAINING SCREWS
Storage Compartment Cover 4. Unlatch retaining tabs on both sides using a

Disassembly screwdriver.
Storage Compartment Cover Inner Shell

1. Remove BRP logo located at the front of cover.
smr2012-043 7
smr2012-043-002_d
INNER SHELL RETAINING BOLT
Tighten inner shell retaining screws to specifica-

smr2011-039-004
TIGHTENING TORQUE
5. Disassemble inner shell from storage compart-
ment cover. Inner shell retaining
2.0 N•m (18 lbf•in)
screws
Storage Compartment Cover Latch
1. Ensure that inner shell is removed.
2. Remove latch by slightly pushing both retaining
holes toward the inside.
smr2012-043-002_b
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE

Installation
smr2011-039-005_a
Tighten storage compartment cover retaining nuts
Storage Compartment Cover to specification as per the following sequence.
Assembly TIGHTENING TORQUE
The assembly is the reverse of the disassembly
Storage compartment
procedure. However, pay attention to the follow- 8.0 N•m (71 lbf•in)
cover retaining nuts
ing.
Tighten inner shell retaining bolt to specification.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Inner shell retaining bolt 4.5 N•m (40 lbf•in)
8 smr2012-043
smr2011-039-009
smr2011-039-007_a
TYPICAL
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
Insert the steel hook on the lateral tab of hinge in

STORAGE COMPARTMENT order to slightly load the spring.
COVER HINGE
Removal
1. Proceed with STORAGE COMPARTMENT
COVER REMOVAL.
2. Remove screws securing storage compart-
ment cover hinge to deck.
smr2011-039-010_a
1. Steel hook
Tighten hinge retaining screws to specification as

TIGHTENING TORQUE
Storage compartment
8.0 N•m (71 lbf•in)
cover hinge screws
smr2011-039-008_a
HINGE RETAINING SCREWS

Installation
Use a ø 6.5 mm (1/4 in) steel rod to make a hook
in order to lock the hinge.
smr2012-043 9
smr2012-043-003_a
4. Remove gauge trim from mirror support.
smr2011-039-011_a Gauge Trim Installation

TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
GAUGE TRIM Prior to inserting gauge trim into mirror support,
Gauge Trim Removal ensure that all tabs are properly aligned.
2. From underneath mirror, remove retaining
screws on both sides.
smr2011-039-014_a
TOP OF GAUGE TRIM
smr2011-039-012_a
RETAINING SCREWS
3. Hit with a sharp blow the front part of mirror

toward the rear to unlock it.
smr2011-039-015_a
BOTTOM OF GAUGE TRIM
10 smr2012-043
LATERAL TRIM PANEL Lateral Trim Panel Installation

Lateral Trim Panel Removal The installation is the reverse of the removal pro-
1. Remove seat.
Install NEW plastic rivets.
screws securing lateral trim panel to deck.
MIRROR SUPPORT
Mirror Support Removal
2. Proceed with INFORMATION CENTER RE-
MOVAL. Refer to INFORMATION CENTER
(GAUGE) subsection.
3. Remove steering column, refer to STEERING
4. Remove the following rivets securing mirror
ssi2012-009-042_b
support to deck.
RETAINING SCREWS
REQUIRED TOOL
plastic rivet securing lateral trim panel to deck. SUPERTANIUM DRILL BIT 3/16" (P/N 529 031 800)
4. Remove plastic rivet and retaining screw secur-

ing the rear portion of lateral trim panel.
529031800
smr2012-043-004_a
1. Plastic rivet smr2012-043-005_a

2. Retaining screw
1. Mirror support retaining rivets
5. Slide and rotate panel toward the front to unlock
5. Remove fuel tank cap.
retaining tabs.
6. Place a clean cloth rag onto fuel tank tube.
screwdriver.
8. Unlatch retaining tabs on the top using a screw-
driver.
9. Remove mirror support by pulling it upwards.
10. Remove cloth rag and reinstall fuel tank cap.
WARNING
Fuel vapors are flammable and explosive
smr2012-043-004_b
under certain conditions. Unless otherwise
noted, the fuel tank cap must always be in-
stalled on watercraft.
smr2012-043 11
Mirror Support Installation

Prior to inserting mirror support into console, en-
sure that all tabs are properly aligned.
Install rivets upside down with washers on mirror
support top surface.
MIRRORS
Mirror Replacement
1. Proceed with GAUGE TRIM REMOVAL, see
procedure in this subsection. smr2012-043-006_a
2. From inside gauge trim, slightly heat mirror. 1. Console retaining rivets
3. Push at the back of mirror to remove it. 4. Remove console by pulling it upwards.
4. Properly clean gauge trim surface of any glue
residue. Console Installation
5. Install mirror using adhesive tape at the back of The installation is the reverse of the removal pro-
mirror. cedure. However, pay attention to the following.
6. Reinstall gauge trim as the reverse of removal. To ease installation of rivets located in glove box,
proceed as follows:
CONSOLE – Remove air intake silencer, refer to AIR INTAKE
SYSTEM (EXCEPT iS AND aS MODELS) sub-
Console Removal section.
1. Proceed with MIRROR SUPPORT REMOVAL. – Install rivets upside down with washers on con-
See procedure in this subsection. sole top surface.
2. Remove GLOVE BOX COVER, see procedure in
this subsection. GLOVE BOX COVER
3. Remove the following rivets securing console Glove Box Cover Replacement
to deck. 1. Open glove box cover.
REQUIRED TOOL 2. Pull glove box cover upwards to release it from
SUPERTANIUM DRILL BIT 3/16" (P/N 529 031 800) console hinge.
529031800
smr2011-039-028_a
3. Reinstall glove box cover as the reverse of re-

moval.
12 smr2012-043
SEAT REAR HANDLE

Seat Cleaning Rear Handle Replacement
For information, refer to BODY (RXT/GTX/WAKE 1. Remove seat.
PRO) subsection. 2. Remove screws securing rear handle cover and
remove rear handle cover.
SEAT LATCH
locker.
2. Adjust lock pin height. Do not torque yet.
3. Position the lock pin longitudinally into the rear
handle slot.
LOCK PIN POSITIONING
MEASURE A MEASURE B smr2012-043-009_a
1. Rear handle cover retaining screws

24.0 mm ± 1.0 mm 30 mm ± 1.0 mm
(.945 in ± .039 in) (1.181 in ± .039 in) 3. Remove screws securing rear handle to deck.
smr2012-043-010_a
smr2012-043-008_a 1. Rear handle retaining screws

A. 76 mm (2.992 in)
B. 30.7 mm ± 1.0 mm (1.209 in ± .039 in) 4. Replace rear handle.
4. Hold the lock pin in this position and tighten as 5. Tighten rear handle screws to specification.
per the following sequence. TIGHTENING TORQUE
SEAT LATCH TIGHTENING SEQUENCE Rear handle screws 8.0 N•m (71 lbf•in)
9.5 N•m
STEP 1 Lock pin 6. Reinstall rear handle cover.
(84 lbf•in)
8.0 N•m 7. Tighten rear handle screws to specification.
STEP 2 Adjustment nut
(71 lbf•in) TIGHTENING TORQUE
5. Close the seat and readjust if required. Rear handle screws 4.5 N•m (40 lbf•in)
smr2012-043 13
BUMPER
Bumper Replacement
1. Remove screws securing front bumper.
2. Remove front bumper from deck.
smr2012-043-011_a
7. Install new bumpers as the reverse of removal.

NOTE: Use soapy water to ease bumper installa-
tion.
smr2012-043-007_a
8. Tighten front bumper lower retaining screws to
1. Front bumper retaining screws
specification.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
3. Remove screws securing both rear corner
bumpers. Front bumper lower
8.0 N•m (71 lbf•in)
screws
4. Remove rear corner bumpers from deck.
9. Tighten bumper retaining screws to specifica-
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Bumper retaining screws 4.5 N•m (40 lbf•in)
smr2011-039-032_a
1. Rear corner bumper retaining screws
5. Slide side bumpers toward the rear to remove

them from deck. smr2011-039-034_a
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
6. Slide rear bumper toward the side to remove it
from deck.
VENTILATION DUCT
Ventilation Duct Replacement
2. Remove plastic rivet securing ventilation duct
to housing.
14 smr2012-043
smr2011-039-035_a
3. Remove the following rivets securing ventila-

tion duct housing to deck.
REQUIRED TOOL
529031800
smr2011-039-035_b
4. If applicable, remove locking tie securing wiring

harness to ventilation duct.
5. Remove ventilation duct and its housing from
watercraft.
6. Reinstall parts as the reverse of removal.
smr2012-043 15
Subsection XX (HULL (GTS/GTI/GTR/WAKE/RXP))
HULL (GTS/GTI/GTR/WAKE/RXP)
SERVICE PRODUCTS
BRP HEAVY DUTY CLEANER ....................................................... 293 110 001 ......................................... 7–9
LOCTITE 5150 (SILICONE SEALANT) ........................................... 296 000 309 ............................... 10–11, 14
LOCTITE 5900 ............................................................................... 293 800 066 ................................... 7–9, 12
smr2012-044 1
GTS, GTI, GTR and WAKE Series
NEW NEW
8 Nm 14.5 Nm
Loctite 5150
(silicone sealant)
14.5 Nm
(128 lbfin)
NEW
Loctite 5150
(silicone sealant)
NEW
Loctite 8 Nm
5900 (71 lbfin)
8 Nm NEW
(71 lbfin) 16 Nm
(142 lbfin)
8.5 Nm NEW NEW

(75 lbfin) 8 Nm 14.5 Nm
8.5 Nm NEW

(75 lbfin)
smr2011-047-004_a
2 smr2012-044
RXP-X Series

Loctite 5150
(silicone sealant)
NEW
14.5 N•m
(128 lbf•in)
Loctite 5150
(silicone sealant) 8 N•m
(71 lbf•in)
Loctite 5150
(silicone sealant)
NEW
18 N•m
(159 lbf•in)
9 N•m
(80 lbf•in)
NEW
Loctite 5900
16 N•m
(142 lbf•in)
smr2012-044-001_a
smr2012-044 3
All Models
NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW
25 Nm
NEW (18 lbfft)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
NEW
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
Loctite
567
NEW (pipe sealant) NEW
25 Nm 8 Nm
NEW = Component must be replaced when removed. (18 lbfft) (71 lbfin)
smr2011-047-003_a
4 smr2012-044
PROCEDURES ATL COMPOSITES

P.O. Box 2349/Southport 4215
Queensland, Australia
HULL
Hull Repair Tel.: +61 7-5563-1222,
Fax: +61 7-5563-1585
The repair procedures of the hull is not the same E-mail: info@atlcomposites.com
as a fiberglass composite hull and deck. The stan-
dard polyester based fiberglass repair kits will not New Zealand, South Pacific and Asia
work with this type of hull. The polyester will not ADHESIVE TECHNOLOGIES LTD.
adhere to the hull material. Only two-part epoxy 17 Corbans Ave./Box 21-169, Henderson
repair material should be used. Auckland, New Zealand
To repair a hull, the use of an Epoxy repair system,
such as the WEST SYSTEM® or equivalent epoxy, Phone: 64-9-838-6961
is mandatory. Fax: 64-9-836-4849
E-mail: enquiries@adhesivetechnologies.co.nz
However, the finish on the ³ hull is a polyester
based gelcoat with a bonding layer between the
hull and the gelcoat. Standard gelcoat refinishing
can be performed if the damage is limited to the
color surface. If damage requires the removal or
the repair to structure material, the epoxy may
also be used as a barrier coat before refinishing
with gelcoat. Epoxy adheres to hull material, and
gelcoat adheres to epoxy.
An epoxy repair kit can be purchased directly from
WEST SYSTEM.
Go to www.westsystem.com.
On this site you will find complete repair instruc-
tions, click on HOW TO USE.
Also training videos, tools and several products
are available on the web site.
Consumer Assistance
North and South America

WEST SYSTEM
102 Patterson Ave.
P.O. Box 665 Bay City, MI 48707-0665
Phone: 989 684-7286

Toll free: 866 937-8797
Fax: 989 684-1374
Europe, Middle East, Africa and Asia
WESSEX RESINS AND ADHESIVES LIMITED
Cupernham House, Cupernham Lane, Romsey
England SO51 7LF
Phone: 44-1-794-521-111
Fax: 44-1-794-517-779
E-mail: info@wessex-resins.com
Australia, South Pacific and Asia
WEST SYSTEM is a registered trademark of Gougeon Brother, Inc
smr2012-044 5
INLET GRATE TIGHTENING TORQUE

Inlet Grate Removal INLET First step Hand tighten
GRATE
1. Remove inlet grate retaining screws using an SCREWS Second step 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
impact tool. Discard screws.
smr2011-041-001_a
smr2012-044-002_a
TYPICAL – GTS MODEL SHOWN
1. Inlet grate TIGHTENING TORQUE SEQUENCE
2. Inlet grate screws
2. Remove inlet grate. RIDE PLATE

Ride Plate Removal
Inlet Grate Installation
1. Remove inlet grate, see procedure in this sub-
1. Install NEW inlet grate retaining screws at the section.
proper location.
2. Remove jet pump. Refer to JET PUMP.
INLET GRATE SCREWS
3. Drain cooling system. Refer to COOLING SYS-
LOCATION MODEL SCREW SIZE TEM.
Front All M8 x 40 4. From inside the hull, disconnect coolant hoses
M8 x 20
from the ride plate.
RXP-X Series
Rear 5. Remove coolant hose fittings from the ride
GTS, GTI, GTR plate.
M8 x 16
and WAKE 155
NOTICE If possible, remove the hose fittings
from the ride plate before removing the ride
plate. If fittings cannot be removed, proceed
with care when removing the ride plate.
6. Heat ride plate retaining screws using a heat
gun.
7. Using an impact tool, remove and discard re-
taining screws.
smr2011-041-001_c
SCREW LOCATION
1. Front
2. Rear
2. Tighten screws to the specified torque and se-

quence.
6 smr2012-044
Ride Plate Installation

1. Apply LOCTITE 5900 (P/N 293 800 066) sealant as
illustrated.
smr2011-041-002_a
TYPICAL
1. Ride plate retaining screws
8. Install a low height hydraulic bottle jack and 2 smr2011-047-001_a
steel plates between ride plate and hull as per SEALANT APPLICATION
2. Install both hose fittings on the ride plate.
Tighten to the specified torque.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Hose fittings 9 N•m (80 lbf•in)
3. Position ride plate on hull and thread NEW

screws 5 turns by hand.
4. Position inlet grate and thread NEW screws 5
turns by hand. Refer to INLET GRATE in this
subsection.
quence.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
smr2009-043-036_a Ride plate retaining
TYPICAL 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
screws
1. Hydraulic bottle jack
2. Steel plates
9. Heat the edge of the ride plate with a heat gun

to soften the sealant.
10. Start pumping the hydraulic jack slowly.
11. Using a sharp knife, carefully cut the sealant
around the ride plate edges.
12. Pump the hydraulic jack slowly to pry the ride
plate from the hull.
Ride Plate Cleaning

1. Carefully scrape off all excess sealant from ride
plate and hull.
2. Clean hull surface with BRP HEAVY DUTY smr2012-044-003_a
CLEANER (P/N 293 110 001) to eliminate grease, RIDE PLATE TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
dust and sealant residue. Clean fitting threads.
smr2012-044 7
6. Tighten inlet grate screws to the specified

torque and sequence, refer to INLET GRATE
INSTALLATION in this subsection.
7. Reinstall coolant hoses on ride plate fittings.
NOTICE Make sure the coolant hose clamp
screws do not rub on any component.
8. Fill and bleed cooling system and carry out a
leak test. Refer to COOLING SYSTEM subsec-
tion.
9. Install all remaining parts. Refer to the applica-
smr2011-047-007_a
ble procedures.
INSIDE THE HULL
1. Jet pump support retaining nuts
JET PUMP SUPPORT
4. Heat the jet pump support using a heat gun in
Jet Pump Support Removal order to soften the sealant.
1. Remove the following parts: 5. Pull jet pump support off the hull.
– Jet pump (refer to JET PUMP subsection) 6. Note the alignment shims location.
– Drive shaft (refer to DRIVE SHAFT subsec-
tion) NOTICE Alignment shims have to be rein-
stalled at the same location.
– Ride plate (refer to RIDE PLATE in this sub-
section. Jet Pump Support Cleaning
2. Disconnect hoses from jet pump support. 1. Scrape off all excess sealant from jet pump sup-
port, ride plate, and hull.
2. Inspect pump support for cracks or other dam-
age.
3. Clean jet pump support and hull surface with
BRP HEAVY DUTY CLEANER (P/N 293 110 001) to
eliminate grease, dust, and sealant residue.
Jet Pump Support Installation

1. Make sure sealant contact areas are clean and
dry.
smr2011-047-006_a NOTE: If a new jet pump support is installed, per-
INSIDE THE HULL form a flame treat to increase the adhesion of the
1. Exhaust water supply hose
2. Bailer hoses Loctite 5900.
2. Apply LOCTITE 5900 (P/N 293 800 066) on the jet
3. Remove jet pump support retaining nuts and
pump support as shown (thick black line).
washers.
8 smr2012-044
smr2011-047-008_a smr2011-047-009_a
SEALANT APPLICATION 1. Retaining screws
2. Thru-hull fitting
3. Insert the studs in the jet pump support square
holes. 3. Heat the thru-hull fitting with a heat gun to
soften the sealer.
4. Slide the alignment shims on the studs.
4. Pull thru-hull fitting off the hull.
5. Position the jet pump support against the hull.
6. Inside the hull, thread all 4 retaining nuts. Thru-Hull Fitting Area Cleaning
7. Tighten retaining nuts to the specified torque 1. Scrape off all excess sealant from the hull.
and sequence. 2. Clean hull surface with BRP HEAVY DUTY
TIGHTENING TORQUE CLEANER (P/N 293 110 001) to eliminate grease,
dust, and sealant residue.
Jet pump support
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft) NOTE: Use only a clean, dry, oil free filtered air
retaining nuts
supply for dusting and drying parts or hull.
Thru-Hull Fitting Installation

1. Make sure thru-hull fitting sealing surface is
free of sealant residue, clean and dry before
installation.
illustrated.
smr2012-044-004_a
JET PUMP SUPPORT TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
8. Remove excess sealant.

9. Reinstall other removed parts. Refer to appro-
priate subsections for procedures.
THRU-HULL FITTING smr2011-047-010_a
SEALANT APPLICATION
Thru-Hull Fitting Removal
1. Remove drive shaft, refer to DRIVE SHAFT sub-
quence.
section.
2. Remove the thru-hull fitting retaining screws.
smr2012-044 9
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Thru-hull fitting retaining
screws
smr2010-047-004_a
1. Apply silicone sealant here
3. Apply a small amount of LOCTITE 5150 (SILI-

CONE SEALANT) (P/N 296 000 309) into each hull
hole.
smr2011-047-009_b
THRU-HULL FITTING TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
4. Install other removed parts, refer to the appro-

priate subsections.
FIXED REAR SPONSONS smr2010-047-005_a
(EXCEPT RXP-X SERIES) 1. Apply silicone sealant in these holes
NOTE: Removal and installation procedure for RH 4. Insert a bolt with washer through each hole and
and LH sponson is similar. install the sponson against the hull.
5. From inside hull, secure each bolt with a
Fixed Rear Sponson Removal washer and a NEW elastic stop nut.
Remove resonator (on RH side) or muffler (on LH 6. Tighten nuts as specified in the exploded view.
side). Refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM subsection.
7. Reinstall resonator. Refer to EXHAUST SYS-
From inside hull, hold sponson nuts while remov- TEM for the procedure.
ing sponson retaining bolts and washers.
ADJUSTABLE REAR SPONSONS
(RXP-X SERIES
NOTE: The following procedures apply for RH and
LH sides.
Adjustable Rear Sponson Removal

Remove and discard all screws securing ad-
justable sponsons.
smr2005-024-014_a
TYPICAL – RH SPONSON SHOWN

1. Sponson
2. Retaining bolts
Fixed Rear Sponson Installation

1. Clean any residues of silicone sealant on hull
and sponsons.
(P/N 296 000 309) on back side of sponson
spacers.
10 smr2012-044
smr2012-044-006_a
smr2012-044-005_a
BODY NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY PURPOSE
1. Adjustable sponson
1. Sponson support
2. Retaining screws
2. Square head stud
3. Push nut
Adjustable Rear Sponson Installation 4. Washer
5. Elastic stop nut
WARNING Adjustable Sponson Support

Both sponsons must be installed and ad- Installation
justed at the same height. Missing sponsons
or improper adjustment will affect handling
and stability, which could cause a loss of
control of the watercraft. REQUIRED PRODUCT LOCATION
LOCTITE 5150
TIGHTENING TORQUE Around each hole of
(SILICONE SEALANT)
sponson support
Sponson retaining (P/N 296 000 309)
18 N•m (159 lbf•in)
screws
ADJUSTABLE
SPONSON SUPPORTS
(RXP-X SERIES
NOTE: Removal and installation procedure for RH
and LH sponson is similar.
smr2012-044-008_a
Adjustable Sponson Support Removal 1. Apply silicon sealant here
Remove the ADJUSTABLE SPONSON, see proce-
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Remove resonator (on RH side) or muffler (on LH Sponson support nuts
16 N•m (142 lbf•in)
side). Refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM subsection. (NEW)
From inside hull, remove nuts and washers retain- Reinstall adjustable sponson as described in AD-
ing the adjustable sponson support. JUSTABLE SPONSON INSTALLATION.
FIXED TRIM TABS

(RXP-X SERIES)
NOTE: The following procedures apply to RH and
LH sides.
Fixed Trim Tab Removal

Remove screws securing the fixed trim tab.
smr2012-044 11
smr2012-044-010_a
smr2012-044-007_a
TYPICAL - LEFT SIDE SHOWN (iBR ACTUATOR REMOVED)
1. Trim tab 1. Bailer pick-up
2. Washer
3. Trim tab retaining screws
Bailer Pick-Up Inspection
Fixed Trim Tab Installation 1. Check holes in the bailer pick-ups to see if they
REQUIRED PRODUCT LOCATION are obstructed. Clean if necessary.
LOCTITE 5900 (P/N 293 Inside each hole of 2. Check if the hole on each bailer hose elbow fit-
800 066) the hull ting is obstructed. Clean elbow fittings if nec-
essary.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Fixed trim tab retaining
16 N•m (142 lbf•in)
screws
BAILERS
Two bailer pick ups (one each side), draw water
from the bilge when watercraft is in operation.
The bailer pick ups are connected to syphon tubes
mounted in the jet pump venturi that use the jet
pump thrust to create a vacuum. The bailers are
also connected to the bilge drain plugs in the
stern.
Bailer Pick-Up Location smr2005-005-001_a
Port side (LH): underneath the iBR actuator (if TYPICAL

equipped). 1. Elbow fitting holes
Starboard side (RH): underneath the rear exhaust NOTE: When repositioning the bailer hose el-
hose. bows, attach them at the highest available point
on the exhaust hose.
DRAIN PLUGS
NOTE: Each drain plug on the stern are each con-
nected to a bailer. When watercraft is off the wa-
ter, the drain plugs can be removed to manually
drain the bilge.
Drain Plug Neck Location

Port side (LH): behind the iBR actuator (if
equipped).
Starboard side (RH): behind the rear exhaust hose.
12 smr2012-044
3. Inside the hull, hold drain neck nut using ad-

justable pliers.
4. Insert a ratchet extension in the square hole,
then unscrew the drain neck from the hull.
smr2011-047-011_a
RH SIDE SHOWN
1. Drain plug neck
Drain Plug Neck Removal

smr2009-043-033
1. Cut locking tie securing bailer hose to the drain
DRAIN NECK REMOVAL
plug assembly.
Drain Plug Neck Installation
1. Install drain neck and torque to 9 N•m
(80 lbf•in).
2. Secure bailer hose to drain neck using a NEW
locking tie.
3. Reinstall all removed parts in the reverse order
of removal.
iCATCH BOW CUP

(GTI LIMITED 155 AND RXP-X)
smr2011-047-011_b
iCATCH Bow Cup Access
RH SHOWN Open the front storage compartment cover.
1. Drain plug neck
2. Locking tie
iCATCH Bow Cup Removal
2. Unscrew the drain plug from the drain neck and Remove the following fasteners retaining the
pull the drain plug out of the neck. iCATCH bow cup:
– Allen screws
– Rubber washers
– Stainless steel flat washers
– Elastic stop nuts (discard them).
iCATCH Bow Cup Installation

smr2009-043-032_a
DRAIN PLUG REMOVAL

1. Drain plug
2. Drain neck
smr2012-044 13
3. Clean any silicone sealant residue.
Eyelet Installation
1. Inside the hull, apply LOCTITE 5150 (SILICONE
SEALANT) (P/N 296 000 309) around eyelet
mounting holes.
2. Position eyelet and hardware as illustrated. Use
NEW elastic stop nuts.
NOTE: Bow and stern eyelets have the same
hardware layout.
smr2012-044-009_a
1. Allen screw
iCATCH bow cup
2.
3. Rubber washer
4. Stainless steel flat washer
5. Elastic stop nut
TIGHTENING TORQUE
iCATCH bow cup nuts 14.5 N•m (128 lbf•in)
BOW AND STERN EYELETS smr2007-034-112_a
TYPICAL
Bow Eyelet Access 1. Eyelet
2. Small stainless steel washer
Open the front storage cover. 3. Nylon washer
4. Loctite 5150 (silicone sealant) here
5. Rubber washer
Stern Eyelet Access 6. Large stainless steel washer
7. Elastic stop nut
Remove seat.
3. Tighten nuts to the specified torque.
Eyelet Removal
TIGHTENING TORQUE
1. Unscrew and discard both bow eyelet retaining
nuts. Eyelet retaining nuts 14.5 N•m (128 lbf•in)
NOTE: Keep all washers for installation. Bow and
stern eyelets have the same hardware layout. HULL INSERTS
Metal inserts (brass) of various types and sizes
are screwed into the hull at various locations. A
threaded hole in the insert is used for fastening
various parts and equipment onto the hull.
Some inserts pass completely through the hull,
while others do not (blind hole inserts).
smr2011-047-012_a
TYPICAL - INSIDE THE HULL

1. Threaded portion of the eyelet
2. Rubber washer
3. Large stainless steel washer
4. Elastic stop nut
2. Pull eyelet off the hull.

14 smr2012-044
smr2009-043-025_a smr2009-043-026_b
TYPICAL BLIND HOLE INSERT
1. Pass through insert 1. Excess glue on head
3. Use a six-point socket of appropriate size and a

ratchet wrench to unscrew the insert from the
hull.
NOTE: An impact tool may be used to facilitate
removal of the insert.
Insert Installation
1. Clean the insert hole in the hull to remove any
dirt or loose glue using clean, dry, oil free fil-
tered air.
NOTICE Do not use a metal tool to clean or
remove the glue inside the hull insert hole to
smr2009-043-026_a
prevent damaging the threads in the hull ma-
TYPICAL
1. Blind hole insert terial. The glue that is properly bonded to the
hull does not need to be removed.
All type inserts may be replaced if the inner screw
threads are damaged. 2. If the insert passes completely through the hull,
screw a stud of appropriate size into the insert
NOTE: Inserts should only be replaced as a last
(M6 or M8) to prevent any glue from seeping
resort. First try passing a tap, cleaning the hole,
into the fastener threads in the insert. Apply
and using a NEW self-locking screw. If fastener
the SIX10 glue from West System (see HULL
can be tightened to the specified torque, do not
change insert. If torque cannot be applied, drill
REPAIR at the beginning of this subsection for
more information) or an equivalent to the outer
and tap insert one size larger before trying to
threads of the insert.
change an insert.
NOTE: Apply a sufficient amount of glue through
Insert Removal the full length of the insert threads to ensure ex-
1. Heat the insert using a heat gun to soften the cess glue will come out of the hole as the insert
glue securing the insert into the hull. is screwed into the hull.
2. Remove any excess glue from around the head 3. If the insert screws into a blind hole, apply the
of the insert that would prevent proper insertion SIX10 glue or an equivalent to the threads in the
of the socket used to remove the insert. hull.
4. Screw the insert in the hull boss and torque to
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft). Ensure the flanged portion
of the insert makes contact with the boss it is
being screwed into.
smr2012-044 15
Subsection XX (HULL (GTX/RXT/WAKE PRO))
HULL (GTX/RXT/WAKE PRO)

SERVICE PRODUCTS
BRP HEAVY DUTY CLEANER ....................................................... 293 110 001 ............................. 7–8, 10, 13
LOCTITE 5150 (SILICONE SEALANT) ........................................... 296 000 309 ............................... 11–12, 18
LOCTITE 5900 ............................................................................... 293 800 066 ................................. 7–10, 13
smr2012-045 1
All Except RXT-X Series
NEW
14.5 N•m
(128 lbf•in)
NEW
14.5 N•m NEW
(128 lbf•in)
8 N•m
(71 lbf•in)
Loctite
5900
Loctite 5150 NEW

(silicone sealant)
NEW
16 N•m 8 N•m
(142 lbf•in) NEW (71 lbf•in)
14.5 N•m
9 N•m (128 lbf•in)
(80 lbf•in) 8.5 N•m
(75 lbf•in)

smr2012-045-001_a
2 smr2012-045
RXT-X Series
NEW
14.5 N•m
(128 lbf•in)
NEW
14.5 N•m
(128 lbf•in) NEW
8 N•m
(71 lbf•in)
8 N•m
(71 lbf•in) Loctite
5150
(silicone
sealant)
Loctite 5150
(silicone sealant)
NEW
NEW
NEW 16 N•m
18 N•m (142 lbf•in) NEW 13 N•m
(159 lbf•in) (1155 lbf•in)
14.5 N•m
(128 lbf•in) 16 N•m
(142 lbf•in)
9 N•m
(80 lbf•in)

smr2012-045-002_a
smr2012-045 3
All Models
Loctite 5900
8 N•m
(71 lbf•in)
NEW
25 N•m
(18 lbf•ft) 25 N•m
(18 lbf•ft)
SIX10
(Epoxy
11 N•m adhesive)
(97 lbf•in)
9 N•m NEW
(90 lbf•in) 20 N•m
(15 lbf•ft)
NEW NEW
20 N•m 25 N•m
(15 lbf•ft) (18 lbf•ft)
8 N•mNEW
(71 lbf•in)
Loctite 567
NEW (pipe sealant)
25 N•m
(18 lbf•ft) NEW
25 N•m
(18 lbf•ft)
smr2012-045-003_a
4 smr2012-045
PROCEDURES ATL Composites,

P.O. Box 2349/Southport 4215,
HULL Queensland, Australia,
Tel.: +61 7-5563-1222,
Hull Repair Fax: +61 7-5563-1585
E-mail: info@atlcomposites.com
The repair procedures of the S³ hull is not the
same as a fiberglass composite hull and deck. New Zealand, South Pacific and Asia
The standard polyester based fiberglass repair Adhesive Technologies Ltd.,
kits will not work with this type of hull. The 17 Corbans Ave./Box 21-169, Henderson,
polyester will not adhere to the S³ hull material. Auckland, New Zealand,
Only two-part epoxy repair material should be Phone: 64-9-838-6961,
used. Fax: 64-9-836-4849
E-mail: enquiries@adhesivetechnologies.co.nz
To repair a S³ hull, the use of an Epoxy repair
system, such as the WEST SYSTEM® or an other
equivalent epoxy system, is mandatory. INLET GRATE
However, the finish on the S³ hull is a polyester
based gelcoat with s a bonding layer between the Inlet Grate Removal
hull and the gelcoat. Standard gelcoat refinishing Remove inlet grate retaining screws using an im-
can be performed if the damage is limited to the pact tool. Discard screws.
color surface. If damage requires the removal or
the repair to structure material, the epoxy may
also be used as a barrier coat before refinishing
with gelcoat. Epoxy adheres to S³ hull material,
and gelcoat adheres to epoxy.
An epoxy repair kit can be purchased directly from
WEST SYSTEM.
Go to www.westsystem.com.
On this site you will find complete repair instruc-
tions, click on HOW TO USE.
Also training videos, tools and several products
are available on the web site.
smr2009-043-013_a
Consumer Assistance TYPICAL
1. Inlet grate screws
North and South America 2. Inlet grate
WEST SYSTEM
102 Patterson Ave.
Inlet Grate Installation
P.O. Box 665 Bay City, MI 48707-0665 1. Install NEW inlet grate retaining screws at the
Phone: 989 684-7286 proper location.
Toll free: 866 937-8797
Fax: 989 684-1374 INLET GRATE SCREWS
Europe, Middle East, Africa and Asia LOCATION SCREW SIZE
Wessex Resins and Adhesives Limited, Front M8 x 40

Cupernham House, Cupernham Lane, Romsey, Rear M8 x 20
England SO51 7LF
Phone: 44-1-794-521-111
Fax: 44-1-794-517-779
E-mail: info@wessex-resins.com
Australia, South Pacific and Asia
WEST SYSTEM is a registered trademark of Gougeon Brother, Inc
smr2012-045 5
NOTICE If possible, remove the hose fittings

from the ride plate before removing the ride
plate. If fittings cannot be removed, proceed
with care when removing the ride plate.
6. Heat ride plate retaining screws using a heat
gun.
7. Using an impact tool, remove and discard re-
taining screws.
smr2009-043-013_b
SCREW LOCATION
1. Front
2. Rear

quence.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
INLET First step Hand tighten
GRATE
SCREWS Second step 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
smr2012-045-006_a
TYPICAL
1. Ride plate retaining screws
8. Install a low height hydraulic bottle jack and 2

steel plates between ride plate and hull as per
smr2012-045-005_a
TIGHTENING TORQUE SEQUENCE
RIDE PLATE
Ride Plate Removal
1. Remove inlet grate, see procedure in this sub-
section.
2. Remove jet pump. Refer to JET PUMP. smr2009-043-036_a
TYPICAL
3. Drain cooling system. Refer to COOLING SYS- 1. Hydraulic bottle jack
2. Steel plates
TEM.
4. From inside the hull, disconnect coolant hoses 9. Heat the edge of the ride plate with a heat gun
from the ride plate. to soften the sealant.
5. Remove coolant hose fittings from the ride 10. Start pumping the hydraulic jack slowly.
plate. 11. Using a sharp knife, carefully cut the sealant
around the ride plate edges.
6 smr2012-045
12. Pump the hydraulic jack slowly to pry the ride

plate from the hull.
Ride Plate Cleaning

1. Carefully scrape off all excess sealant from ride
plate and hull.
2. Clean hull surface with BRP HEAVY DUTY
CLEANER (P/N 293 110 001) to eliminate grease,
dust and sealant residue. Clean fitting threads.
Ride Plate Installation

1. Install both hose fittings on the ride plate. smr2012-045-008_a
Tighten to the specified torque. RIDE PLATE TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
NOTE: Replace O-rings if necessary. 6. Tighten inlet grate screws to the specified
torque and sequence, refer to INLET GRATE
TIGHTENING TORQUE
INSTALLATION in this subsection.
Hose fittings 9 N•m (80 lbf•in)
7. Reinstall coolant hoses on ride plate fittings.
2. Apply LOCTITE 5900 (P/N 293 800 066) sealant as NOTICE Make sure the coolant hose clamp
illustrated. screws do not rub on any component.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Coolant hose clamps 4 N•m (35 lbf•in)
8. Install jet pump, refer to the JET PUMP subsec-

tion.
9. Install iBR gate and VTS trim ring, refer to the
iBR AND VTS subsection.
10. Install a piece of hose over the threaded end
of the front ride plate screws.
smr2012-045-007
SEALANT APPLICATION
3. Position ride plate on hull and thread NEW

screws 5 turns by hand.
4. Position inlet grate and thread NEW screws 5
turns by hand. Refer to INLET GRATE in this
subsection. smr2010-047-010_a
5. Tighten screws to the specified torque and se- TYPICAL

1. Hoses
quence.
TIGHTENING TORQUE 11. Install battery and electrical accessories sup-
port, refer to CHARGING SYSTEM subsec-
Ride plate retaining screws 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft) tion.
12. Fill and bleed cooling system and carry out a
leak test. Refer to COOLING SYSTEM sub-
section.
13. Install all remaining parts. Refer to the appli-
cable procedures.
smr2012-045 7
JET PUMP SUPPORT 2. Inspect pump support for cracks or other dam-
age.
Jet Pump Support Removal
3. Clean jet pump support and hull surface with
1. Remove the following parts: BRP HEAVY DUTY CLEANER (P/N 293 110 001) to
– Jet pump (refer to JET PUMP subsection) eliminate grease, dust, and sealant residue.
– Drive shaft (refer to DRIVE SHAFT subsec-
tion) Jet Pump Support Installation
– Ride plate (refer to RIDE PLATE in this sub- 1. Make sure sealant contact areas are clean and
section. dry.
2. Disconnect hoses from jet pump support. 2. Apply LOCTITE 5900 (P/N 293 800 066) on the jet
smr2011-047-006_a
INSIDE THE HULL

1. Exhaust water supply hose
2. Bailer hoses
3. Remove jet pump support retaining nuts and

washers. smr2012-045-009
SEALANT APPLICATION
smr2011-047-007_a smr2012-045-010
INSIDE THE HULL SEALANT APPLICATION

1. Jet pump support retaining nuts
3. Insert the studs in the jet pump support square
4. Heat the jet pump support using a heat gun in holes.
order to soften the sealant.
4. Slide the alignment shims on the studs.
5. Pull jet pump support off the hull.
5. Position the jet pump support against the hull.
6. Note the alignment shims location.
6. Inside the hull, thread all 4 retaining nuts.
NOTICE Alignment shims have to be rein- 7. Tighten retaining nuts to the specified torque
stalled at the same location. and sequence.
Jet Pump Support Cleaning
1. Scrape off all excess sealant from jet pump sup-
port, ride plate, and hull.
8 smr2012-045
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Jet pump support
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
retaining nuts
smr2012-045-009
SEALANT APPLICATION
smr2012-044-004_a

Reused Jet Pump Support
Make sure sealant contact areas are clean and dry
as explained in JET PUMP SUPPORT CLEANING.
smr2012-045-010
New Jet Pump Support SEALANT APPLICATION
Proceed with a flame treatment to increase Loc-
tite 5900 adhesion as follows: 2. Insert the studs in the jet pump support square
1. Heat surface where Loctite 5900 is applied holes.
using a propane torch. See REUSED AND 3. Slide the alignment shims on the studs.
NEW JET PUMP SUPPORT INSTALLATION 4. Position the jet pump support against the hull.
for sealant application areas.
5. Inside the hull, thread all 4 retaining nuts.
2. Stop heating as soon as the surface has
changed to a dull finish. 6. Tighten retaining nuts to the specified torque
and sequence.
NOTICE Do not overheat to avoid any defor-
mation of the jet pump support. TIGHTENING TORQUE
Jet pump support
Reused and New Jet Pump Support 25 N•m (18 lbf•ft)
retaining nuts
Installation
1. Apply LOCTITE 5900 (P/N 293 800 066) on the jet
smr2012-045 9
Thru-Hull Fitting Installation

1. Make sure thru-hull fitting sealing surface is
free of sealant residue, clean and dry before
installation.
illustrated.
smr2012-044-004_a

THRU-HULL FITTING smr2011-047-010_a
SEALANT APPLICATION
Thru-Hull Fitting Removal
1. Remove drive shaft, refer to DRIVE SHAFT sub- quence.
section.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
2. Remove the thru-hull fitting retaining screws.
Thru-hull fitting retaining
screws
smr2011-047-009_a
1. Retaining screws
2. Thru-hull fitting
smr2011-047-009_b
3. Heat the thru-hull fitting with a heat gun to THRU-HULL FITTING TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
soften the sealer. 4. Install other removed parts, refer to the appro-
4. Pull thru-hull fitting off the hull. priate subsections.
Thru-Hull Fitting Area Cleaning BOW STABILIZER

1. Scrape off all excess sealant from the hull. RXT-X aS SERIES
2. Clean hull surface with BRP HEAVY DUTY
CLEANER (P/N 293 110 001) to eliminate grease, Bow Stabilizer Removal
dust, and sealant residue. Remove retaining screws.
NOTE: Use only a clean, dry, oil free filtered air
supply for dusting and drying parts or hull.
10 smr2012-045
smr2010-047-004_a
1. Apply silicone sealant here
3. Apply a small amount of LOCTITE 5150 (SILI-

CONE SEALANT) (P/N 296 000 309) into each hull
smr2012-045-013_a
1. LH bow stabilizer
hole.
Bow Stabilizer Installation

cedure.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Bow stabilizer screws 8 N•m (71 lbf•in)
FIXED REAR SPONSONS

NOTE: Removal and installation procedure for RH smr2010-047-005_a
and LH sponson is similar. 1. Apply silicone sealant in these holes
Fixed Rear Sponson Removal 4. Insert a bolt with washer through each hole and
install the sponson against the hull.
Remove the muffler (on LH side) or the resonator
(on RH side). Refer to the EXHAUST SYSTEM 5. From inside hull, secure each bolt with a
subsection. washer and a NEW elastic stop nut.
From inside hull, hold sponson nuts while remov- 6. Tighten nuts as specified in the exploded views.
ing sponson retaining bolts and washers. 7. Reinstall muffler or resonator. Refer to EX-
HAUST SYSTEM for the procedure.
ADJUSTABLE REAR SPONSONS

(RXT-X SERIES)
LH sides.
Adjustable Rear Sponson Removal

Remove and discard all screws securing ad-
smr2005-024-014_a justable sponsons.
TYPICAL – RH SPONSON SHOWN
1. Sponson
2. Retaining bolts
Fixed Rear Sponson Installation

and sponsons.
(P/N 296 000 309) on back side of sponson
spacers.
smr2012-045 11
smr2012-045-011_a
smr2012-044-006_a
1. Adjustable sponson
2. Retaining screws BODY NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY PURPOSE
1. Sponson support
2. Square head stud
Adjustable Rear Sponson Installation 3. Push nut
4. Washer
5. Elastic stop nut
WARNING
Both sponsons must be installed and ad- Adjustable Sponson Support
justed at the same height. Missing sponsons Installation
or improper adjustment will affect handling
and stability, which could cause a loss of
control of the watercraft.
REQUIRED PRODUCT LOCATION
TIGHTENING TORQUE
LOCTITE 5150
Around each hole of
Sponson retaining (SILICONE SEALANT)
18 N•m (159 lbf•in) sponson support
screws (P/N 296 000 309)
ADJUSTABLE SPONSON
SUPPORTS (RXT-X SERIES)
NOTE: Removal and installation procedure for RH
and LH sponson is similar.
Adjustable Sponson Support Removal

Remove the ADJUSTABLE SPONSON, see proce-
Remove resonator (on RH side) or muffler (on LH smr2012-044-008_a
side). Refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM subsection. 1. Apply silicon sealant here
From inside hull, remove nuts and washers retain-
ing the adjustable sponson support. TIGHTENING TORQUE
Sponson support nuts
16 N•m (142 lbf•in)
(NEW)
Reinstall adjustable sponson as described in AD-

JUSTABLE SPONSON INSTALLATION.
ADJUSTABLE TRIM TABS

(RXT-X aS MODEL)
LH sides.
12 smr2012-045
Adjustable Trim Tab Removal 2. Install the trim tab support using previously
1. Remove fasteners retaining trim tab and link drawn marks.
rod to trim tab support. TIGHTENING TORQUE
Trim tab support screws 16 N•m (142 lbf•in)
smr2012-045-012
2. Before removing trim tab support, trace line on

hull around support to ensure alignment when sbl2012-005-013
reinstalling the support. 3. Install the link rod in the upper bracket of the
3. Remove trim tab support from hull. support, as shown.
and inside hull holes.
REQUIRED PRODUCT
BRP HEAVY DUTY CLEANER (P/N 293 110 001)
Adjustable Trim Tab Installation

NOTICE Do not use pneumatic or electrical
tools when stainless steel fasteners are used as
seizure may occur.
1. Apply sealant in each hull holes.
REQUIRED PRODUCT
LOCTITE 5900 sbl2012-005-012
(P/N 293 800 066)

TIGHTENING TORQUE
Link rod upper retaining nut 13 N•m (115 lbf•in)
4. Secure the trim tab to support as shown.
sbl2012-005-014_a
1. Apply sealant in these holes
smr2012-045 13
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Link rod lower retaining nut 13 N•m (115 lbf•in)
BAILERS
Two bailer pick ups (one each side), serve to drain
the bilge of the watercraft when it is in operation.
The bailer pick ups are connected through a hose
system to two syphon tubes mounted in the jet
pump venturi that draw the water out of the bilge
through the bailer pick ups. The bailers are also
connected to the bilge drain plugs in the stern.
sbl2012-005-009
Bailer Pick-Up Access

TIGHTENING TORQUE
Trim tab retaining nuts 13 N•m (115 lbf•in)
Remove rear access panels.
5. Secure the bottom of the link rod. Position the Models With Suspension
link rod to the 0 (zero) position (factory setting).
Open the boarding platform.
Remove the storage bins.
Bailer Pick-Up Inspection

1. Locate bailer pick-up. Refer to BAILER PICK-UP
ACCESS in this subsection.
2. Inside hull, check holes in the bailer pick-ups to
see if they are obstructed. Clean if necessary.
On the port side (LH), the bailer is located below
the iBR actuator.
sbl2012-005-010_a
1. 0 (zero) position (factory setting)
NOTE: Make sure to place the bolt head toward

outside of watercraft.
smr2009-043-006_c
TYPICAL - LEFT SIDE SHOWN (iBR ACTUATOR REMOVED)

1. Bailer assembly
On the starboard side (RH), the bailer is located

between the battery support base and the hull (jet
pump tunnel).
sbl2012-005-060_a
1. Bolt head here – left link rod

2. Bolt head here – right link rod
14 smr2012-045
2. Cut locking tie securing bailer hose to the drain

plug assembly.
smr2009-043-035_a
1. Starboard bailer
3. Check if the hole on each bailer hose elbow fit-

ting is obstructed. Clean both elbow fittings if
necessary. smr2009-043-034_a
LEFT SIDE SHOWN (iBR ACTUATOR REMOVED)

3. Unscrew the drain plug from the drain neck and

pull the drain plug out of the neck.
smr05-005-001_A
1. Elbow fitting holes
NOTE: When repositioning the bailer hose el- smr2009-043-032_a
bows, attach them at the highest position that DRAIN PLUG REMOVAL
1. Drain plug
you can on the exhaust hose. 2. Drain neck
DRAIN PLUGS 4. Inside hull, hold the drain neck nut using ad-
justable pliers.
NOTE: The two drain plugs on the stern are each
5. Using a ratchet handle and extension of appro-
connected to a bailer. When watercraft is on dry
priate size, unscrew the drain neck from the
land, the drain plugs can be removed to manually
hull.
drain the bilge.
Drain Plug Access

Remove the appropriate rear access panel.
Remove the appropriate storage bin.
Drain Plug Neck Removal

1. Locate drain plug. Refer to DRAIN PLUG AC-
CESS in this subsection.
smr2012-045 15
1.2 Remove splash deflector from vehicle.
smr2009-043-033
DRAIN NECK REMOVAL
Drain Plug Neck Installation

1. Install drain neck and torque to 9 N•m
(80 lbf•in).
ssi2010-016-004
2. Secure bailer hose to drain neck using a NEW
locking tie. 1.3 Clean aluminum residues.
3. Reinstall all removed parts in the reverse order 2. Using a cutting knife, make opening in the neo-
of removal. prene sealing pad.
BOW EYELET OR iCATCH BOW

CUP
Bow Eyelet/iCATCH Bow Cup Removal
To remove the retaining nuts on the bow moor-
ing eyelet or the iCATCH bow cup, an access hole
must be cut in the neoprene sealing pad. Carry
out the following steps.
1. Remove splash deflector.
1.1 Drill all rivets holding the splash deflector.
ssi2010-016-005_a
1. Neoprene sealing pad
3. Make 3 cuts according to the following picture.

NOTICE Do not cut neoprene sealing pad too
close to its edges to prevent tearing it off when
folding and ensure proper sealing.
ssi2010-016-003_a
1. Splash deflector
2. Rivet
16 smr2012-045
ssi2010-016-006_a
CUTTING PATTERN
4. Gently fold all flaps of the neoprene sealing pad ssi2010-016-011_a
towards the inside of the hull. 1. Rubber washer

2. Large washer
3. Elastic nut
4. Screw
6. From the outside of watercraft, pull bow eye-

let/iCATCH bow cup to remove it from water-
craft.
7. Clean any residue of silicone sealant on hull.
1. Open the front storage cover.
2. Remove the storage bin.
3. Remove nuts and washers securing the bow
eyelet or the iCATCH bow cup. Discard nuts.
ssi2010-016-020
5. Unscrew and discard both elastic stop nuts

holding the bow eyelet/iCATCH bow cup in
place.
NOTE: The rubber washers and large washers
should be kept for installation.
smr2010-047-006_a
TYPICAL – INSIDE HULL

1. Eyelet retaining nuts
4. Remove the bow eyelet/iCATCH bow cup from

the vehicle.
5. Clean any residue of silicone sealant from the
hull.
smr2012-045 17
Bow Eyelet/iCATCH Bow Cup STERN EYELETS

Installation
Stern Eyelet Removal
1. On models with suspension, open the board-
ing platform and remove the applicable storage
tray. On models without suspension, remove
the applicable access cover.
2. Inside hull, unscrew and discard elastic stop
nuts securing the stern eyelet to hull.
3. Pull stern eyelet to remove it from watercraft.
4. Clean any residue of silicone sealant from the
hull.
smr2007-034-110_a
TYPICAL – BOW EYELET

Stern Eyelet Installation
1. Bow eyelet 1. Install small washers and nylon washers to
2. Small washer
3. Nylon washer stern eyelet and insert it through the hull.
4. Loctite 5150 (silicone sealant) here
5. Rubber washer 2. Inside hull, apply LOCTITE 5150 (SILICONE
6. Large washer SEALANT) (P/N 296 000 309) all around holes.
7. Elastic stop nut
3. Install eyelet and other parts using NEW elastic
stop nuts as per following illustration.
smr2012-045-004_a
TYPICAL – iCATCH BOW CUP

1. Allen screw smr2007-034-112_a
2. iCATCH bow cup TYPICAL

3. Loctite 5150 (silicone sealant) here 1. Stern eyelet
4. Rubber washer 2. Small washer
5. Stainless steel flat washer 3. Nylon washer
6. Elastic stop nut 4. Loctite 5150 (silicone sealant) here
5. Rubber washer
REQUIRED PRODUCT LOCATION 6. Large washer
7. Elastic stop nut
LOCTITE 5150
(SILICONE SEALANT) Inside hull, around holes 4. Torque retaining nuts to 14.5 N•m (128 lbf•in).
(P/N 296 000 309)
HULL INSERTS
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Metal inserts (brass) of various types and sizes
Retaining nuts 14.5 N•m (128 lbf•in) are screwed into the hull at various locations. A
threaded hole in the insert is used for fastening
Models With Suspension various parts and equipment onto the hull.
Reinstall the splash deflector on the fixed deck us- Some inserts pass completely through the hull,
ing 6 rivets. while others do not (blind hole inserts).
NOTICE Ensure neoprene gasket edges have
not been damaged during the installation pro-
cedure before reinstalling the splash deflector.
If gasket is damaged, replace by a new one.
18 smr2012-045
smr2009-043-025_a smr2009-043-026_b
TYPICAL BLIND HOLE INSERT
1. Pass through insert 1. Excess glue on head
3. Use a six-point socket of appropriate size and a

ratchet wrench to unscrew the insert from the
hull.
NOTE: An impact tool may be used to facilitate
removal of the insert.
Insert Installation
1. Clean the insert hole in the hull to remove any
dirt or loose glue using clean, dry, oil free fil-
tered air.
NOTICE Do not use a metal tool to clean or
remove the glue inside the hull insert hole to
smr2009-043-026_a
TYPICAL
prevent damaging the threads in the hull ma-
1. Blind hole insert terial. The glue that is properly bonded to the
hull does not need to be removed.
All type inserts may be replaced if the inner screw
threads are damaged beyond use. 2. If the insert passes completely through the hull,
NOTE: Inserts should only be replaced as a last screw a stud of appropriate size into the insert
resort. First try passing a tap, cleaning the hole, (M6 or M8) to prevent any glue from seeping
and using a NEW self-locking screw. If fastener into the fastener threads in the insert. Apply
can be tightened to the specified torque, do not the SIX10 glue from West System (see HULL
change insert. If torque cannot be applied, drill REPAIR at the beginning of this subsection for
and tap insert one size larger before trying to more information) or an equivalent to the outer
change an insert. threads of the insert.
NOTE: Apply a sufficient amount of glue thru the
Insert Removal full length of the insert threads to ensure excess
1. Heat the insert using a heat gun to soften the glue will come out of the hole as the insert is
glue securing the insert into the hull. screwed into the hull.
2. Remove any excess glue from around the head 3. If the insert screws into a blind hole, apply the
of the insert that would prevent proper insertion SIX10 glue or an equivalent to the threads in the
of the socket used to remove the insert. hull.
4. Screw the insert in the hull boss and torque to
25 N•m (18 lbf•ft). Ensure the flanged portion
of the insert makes contact with the boss it is
being screwed into.
smr2012-045 19
Subsection XX (GTS 130 AND GTI 130)
GTS 130 AND GTI 130

MODEL GTS 130 / GTI 130
ENGINE
ROTAX® 1503 4-TEC™, 4-stroke, Single Over
Engine type
Head Camshaft (SOHC)
Induction Naturally-aspirated
Number of cylinders 3
Number of valves 12 valves with hydraulic lifters (no adjustment)
Bore 100 mm (3.9 in)
Stroke 63.4 mm (2.5 in)
Displacement 1 493.8 cm³ (91 in³)
Compression ratio 10.6:1
Maximum RPM 7300 RPM
Dry sump (2 oil pumps).
Type Replaceable oil filter.
Water-cooled oil cooler
Lubrication XPS synthetic blend oil (summer grade) (P/N 293 600
Oil type
121). Refer to LUBRICATION SYSTEM subsection
3 L (3.2 qt (U.S. liq.)) oil change w/filter

Capacity
4.5 L (4.8 qt (U.S. liq.)) total
Intake valve opening 10° ATDC
Intake valve closing 50° ABDC
Exhaust valve opening 50° BBDC
Exhaust valve closing 10° BTDC
New 5.961 mm to 5.975 mm (.2347 in to .2352 in)
Intake
Wear limit 5.930 mm (.233 in)
Valve stem diameter
Exhaust
Valve guide diameter
New 41.02 mm (1.615 in)
Inner
Valve spring free Wear limit 38.80 mm (1.528 in)
length New 45.45 mm (1.789 in)
Outer
Wear limit 43.00 mm (1.693 in)
Intake
Valve seat contact Wear limit 1.60 mm (.063 in)
width New 1.25 mm to 1.55 mm (.049 in to .061 in)
Exhaust
Rocker arm inner diameter
Rocker arm shaft diameter
Cylinder head maximum warpage Service limit 0.15 mm (.006 in)
smr2013-011 1

ENGINE (cont'd)
1st Upper compression ring, rectangular
Piston ring type 2nd Lower compression ring, tapered face
3rd Oil scraper ring
Rectangular New 0.30 mm to 0.50 mm (.012 in to .02 in)
Taper-face New 0.35 mm to 0.55 mm (.014 in to .022 in)
Ring end gap
Oil scraper ring New 0.35 mm to 0.50 mm (.014 in to .02 in)
All Wear limit 1.50 mm (.059 in)
Ring/piston groove Taper-face New 0.015 mm to 0.06 mm (.0006 in to .0024 in)
clearance Oil scraper ring New 0.020 mm to 0.055 mm (.001 in to .002 in)
Piston/cylinder wall clearance
Cylinder taper Wear limit 0.100 mm (.0039 in)
Cylinder out of round (maximum) 0.015 mm (.0006 in)
Front
Camshaft bearing Wear limit 24.910 mm (.9807 in)
journal diameter New 39.892 mm to 39.905 mm (1.5706 in to 1.5711 in)
PTO and center
Front
inner diameter New 40.000 mm to 40.020 mm (1.5748 in to 1.5756 in)
PTO and center
New 31.540 mm to 31.740 mm (1.2417 in to 1.2496 in)
Intake
Cam lobe height
Exhaust
Crankshaft deflection Maximum 0.05 mm (.002 in)
Crankshaft axial clearance
Crankshaft bearing journal diameter
Crankshaft radial clearance Wear limit 0.07 mm (.0028 in)
Connecting rod big end diameter Service limit 45.080 mm (1.7748 in)
Connecting rod big end radial play Service limit 0.090 mm (.0035 in)
Connecting rod big end axial play
Connecting rod small end diameter
Connecting rod small end radial play Wear limit 0.080 mm (.0031 in)
2 smr2013-011

ENGINE (cont'd)
Piston pin diameter
Balance shaft journal diameter
Balance shaft radial clearance Wear limit 0.070 mm (.0028 in)
Balance shaft axial clearance New 0.020 mm to 0.250 mm (.0008 in to .0098 in)
New N.A.
Supercharger shaft driven plate journal depth
Wear limit N.A.
New N.A.
Supercharger drive gear thickness
Wear limit N.A.
New N.A.
Supercharger lock washer thickness
Wear limit N.A.
Supercharger spring washer package height New N.A.
(not compressed) Wear limit N.A.
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
Intake spark arrester Tubular, wire screen
COOLING SYSTEM
Type Closed loop cooling system
Ethylene-glycol and distilled water (50%/50%). Use
Coolant premix coolant from BRP or a coolant specially
formulated for aluminum engines
Cooling system capacity 5.5 L (5.8 qt (U.S. liq.)) total
Thermostat 87°C (189°F)
Monitoring beeper setting 100°C (212°F)
EXHAUST SYSTEM
D-Sea-Bel sound reduction system. Water cooled/water
Type
injected (open loop). Direct flow from jet pump
3 x 3.5 mm (.138 in) on exhaust pipe and 1 x 3.5 mm
Water injection in muffler
(.138 in) on muffler
FUEL SYSTEM
Multipoint fuel injection with iTC (intelligent Throttle
Fuel injection type
Control). Single throttle body (62 mm) with an actuator
Fuel pressure 386 kPa to 414 kPa (56 PSI to 60 PSI)
Fuel injector Quantity 3
Inside North America ((RON + MON)/2) 87 or higher
Fuel type
Outside North America (RON) 92 or higher
Fuel tank (including reserve) 60 L (15.9 U.S. gal.)
Fuel tank reserve (from low level signal) approx. 12 L (3.2 U.S. gal.)
Idle speed 1750 ± 50 RPM (not adjustable)
smr2013-011 3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Magneto generator output 360 W @ 6000 RPM
Stator 0.1 to 1.0
Battery 12 V, 30 A•h
D.E.S.S. (Digitally Encoded Security System) with
Anti-start system selectable maximum vehicle speed settings for RK
(rental key) and LK (learning key)
Ignition system type IDI (Inductive Discharge Ignition)
Ignition timing Variable (electronically controlled)
Make and type NGK DCPR8E
Spark plug
Gap 0.7 mm to 0.8 mm (.028 in to .031 in)
Primary 0.85 to 1.15
Ignition coil
Secondary 9.5 to 13.5 K
Engine speed limiter setting 7650 RPM
#2: Diagnostic connector 15 A
#3: START/STOP 3 A
#4: GPS (if so equipped) 3 A
#5: iBR power (except GTS models) 30 A
#6: Voltage rectifier/regulator 30 A
#8: Relay, fuses 2, 3 and 4 30 A
#11: Depth sounder (if so equipped) 3 A
Fuse box #12: O.T.A.S., gauge start up and CAPS 3 A
#13: Inj/Ign cyl 1 10 A
#16: Starter solenoid 5 A
#17:iBR control (except GTS models) 5 A
#18: Fuel pump 10 A
#19: ECM power 15 A
STEERING AND PROPULSION
Steering Fixed column
Steering nozzle pivoting angle 20°
O.T.A.S. (Off-Throttle Assisted Steering) Electronically-controlled
Type Axial flow single stage
Jet pump
Grease type Jet pump bearing grease (P/N 293 550 032)
Rotation (seen from rear) Counterclockwise
Impeller Pitch 11°/18°
Outside diameter 155.5 mm ± 0.06 mm (6.122 in ± .002 in)
New 0 mm to 0.23 mm (0 in to .009 in)
Impeller/wear ring clearance
End play (new) 0
Impeller shaft
Side play 0
Coupling type Crowned splines, direct drive
Drive shaft
Deflection (max.) 0.5 mm (.02 in)
4 smr2013-011

Minimum required water level for propulsion system 90 cm (3 ft) underneath the lowest rear portion of hull
iBR and VTS
GTS 130 N.A.
Description Intelligent Brake and Reverse activated by a LH lever.
GTI 130 Electronically-controlled iBR gate to provide brake,
reverse, neutral and forward position
Forward
Neutral
GTS 130 N.A.
Braking
Gate angle (from Reverse
horizontal line of
watercraft) Forward Approx. from +8° to -4°
Neutral Approx. -52°
GTI 130
Braking Approx. -70°
Reverse Approx. from -52° to -70°
VTS system N.A.
VTS range angle N.A.
Actuator N.A.
WEIGHT AND LOADING CAPACITY
GTS 130 339 kg (745 lb)
Dry weight
GTI 130 343 kg (755 lb)
Number of passenger (driver incl.) 3
Load limit (passenger and 10 kg (22 lb) luggage) 272 kg (600 lb)
DIMENSIONS
Overall length 336.8 cm (132.6 in)
Overall width 123.1 cm (48.5 in)
Overall height 111.8 cm (44 in)
MATERIALS
Hull Composite fiberglass
Inlet grate Aluminum
Steering cover Thermoplastic
Impeller material Stainless steel
Impeller housing/stator Aluminum/aluminum
Venturi Aluminum
Nozzle Aluminum
Fuel tank Polyethylene
Seat Polyurethane/foam
N.A.: Not Available
smr2013-011 5
Subsection XX (GTI 155 AND WAKE 155)
GTI 155 AND WAKE 155

MODEL GTI 155 / WAKE 155
ENGINE
Engine type
Lubrication XPS synthetic blend oil (summer grade) (P/N 293 600
Oil type
121). Refer to LUBRICATION SYSTEM subsection
Capacity
Intake valve opening 0° BTDC
Exhaust valve closing 0° ATDC
Intake
Valve stem diameter
Exhaust
New 41.02 mm (1.615 in)
Inner
Outer
Intake
Exhaust
smr2013-012 1

ENGINE (cont'd)
Ring end gap
Front
PTO and center
Front
PTO and center
Intake
Cam lobe height
Exhaust
2 smr2013-012

ENGINE (cont'd)
Piston pin diameter
New N.A.
Wear limit N.A.
New N.A.
Wear limit N.A.
New N.A.
Wear limit N.A.
Supercharger spring washer package height New N.A.
(not compressed) Wear limit N.A.
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
COOLING SYSTEM
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Type
3 x 3.5 mm (.138 in) on exhaust pipe and 1 x 3.5 mm
(.138 in) on muffler
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel injection type
Control). Single throttle body (62 mm) with an actuator
Fuel type
Fuel tank (including reserve) 60 L (15.9 U.S. gal.)
smr2013-012 3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Stator 0.1 to 1.0
Spark plug
Ignition coil
#3: START/STOP 3 A
#5: iBR power 30 A
#8: Relay, fuses 2, 3 and 4 30 A
#11: Depth sounder (if so equipped) 3 A
Fuse box #12: O.T.A.S., gauge start up and CAPS 3 A
#17:iBR control 5 A
#18: Fuel pump 10 A
#19: ECM power 15 A
Steering Fixed column
Jet pump
Outside diameter 155.5 mm ± 0.06 mm (6.122 in ± .002 in)
End play (new) 0
Impeller shaft
Side play 0
Drive shaft
4 smr2013-012

iBR and VTS
Intelligent Brake and Reverse activated by a LH lever.
Description Electronically-controlled iBR gate to provide brake,
Forward Approx. from +8° to -4°
Gate angle (from horizontal line of watercraft)
VTS system Yes
VTS range angle Approx. from +8° to -4°
12 V, 80 A max. capacity. Reversible PWM
Actuator
(pulse-width modulation) motor
GTI 155 343 kg (755 lb)
Dry weight
WAKE 155 348 kg (765 lb)
DIMENSIONS
Overall length 336.8 cm (132.6 in)
Overall height 111.8 cm (44 in)
MATERIALS
Venturi Aluminum
Nozzle Aluminum
N.A.: Not Available
smr2013-012 5
Subsection XX (GTR 215)
GTR 215
MODEL GTR 215
ENGINE
Engine type ROTAX® 1503 4-TEC™, 4-stroke, Single Over Head Camshaft (SOHC)
Induction Supercharged intercooled
Type Dry sump (2 oil pumps). Replaceable oil filter. Water-cooled oil cooler
XPS synthetic blend oil (summer grade) (P/N 293 600 121).
Oil type
Lubrication Refer to LUBRICATION SYSTEM subsection
Capacity
4.5 L (4.8 qt (U.S. liq.)) tota
Intake
Valve stem diameter
Exhaust
New 41.02 mm (1.615 in)
Inner
Valve spring free length
New 45.45 mm (1.789 in)
Outer
Intake
Valve seat contact width
Exhaust
smr2013-013 1
MODEL GTR 215

ENGINE (cont'd)
Ring end gap
Ring/piston groove clearance
Front
Camshaft bearing journal Wear limit 24.910 mm (.9807 in)
diameter New 39.892 mm to 39.905 mm (1.5706 in to 1.5711 in)
PTO and center
Front
Camshaft bearing inner Wear limit 25.050 mm (.9862 in)
PTO and center
Intake
Cam lobe height
Exhaust
Piston pin diameter
2 smr2013-013
MODEL GTR 215

ENGINE (cont'd)
Supercharger spring washer package height New 10.900 mm to 10.700 mm (.4291 in to .4213 in)
(not compressed) Wear limit 10.200 mm (.4016 in)
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
COOLING SYSTEM
Ethylene-glycol and distilled water (50%/50%). Use premix coolant
Coolant
from BRP or a coolant specially formulated for aluminum engines
EXHAUST SYSTEM
D-Sea-Bel sound reduction system. Water cooled/water injected
Type
(open loop). Direct flow from jet pump
Water injection in muffler 3 x 3.5 mm (.138 in) on exhaust pipe and 1 x 3.5 mm (.138 in) on muffler
FUEL SYSTEM
Multipoint fuel injection with iTC (intelligent Throttle Control).
Fuel injection type
Single throttle body (62 mm) with an actuator
Inside North America
91 or higher
Fuel type ((RON + MON)/2)
Fuel tank (including reserve) 60 L (16 U.S. gal.)
smr2013-013 3
MODEL GTR 215

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Stator 0.1 to 1.0
D.E.S.S. (Digitally Encoded Security System) with selectable maximum
Anti-start system
vehicle speed settings for RK (rental key) and LK (learning key)
Spark plug
Ignition coil
#3: START/STOP 3 A
#4: GPS (If so equipped) 3 A
#5: iBR power 30 A
#8: IFuses 2, 3, 4 and relay 30 A
#11: Depth sounder 3 A
#12 O.T.A.S., Gauge start up,
Fuse box 3 A
CAPS
#17: iBR control 5 A
#18: Fuel pump 10 A
#19: ECM power 15 A
4 smr2013-013
MODEL GTR 215

Steering Adjustable 4 positions
Jet pump
Rotation (seen
Counterclockwise
from rear)
Outside
159 mm ± 0.06 mm (6.26 in ± .002 in)
diameter
End play (new) 0
Impeller shaft
Side play 0
Drive shaft Deflection
0.5 mm (.02 in)
(max.)
iBR and VTS
Description Electronically-controlled iBR gate to provide brake, reverse,
neutral and forward position
VTS system Yes
VTS range angle 8° up, -4° down
Actuator
Dry weight 348 kg (765 lb)
DIMENSIONS
Overall length 336.8 cm (133 in)
Overall width 123.1 cm (48 in)
Overall height 111.8 cm (44.02 in)
Overall height with keel horizontal, suspension extended N.A.
Overall height with keel horizontal, suspension collapsed N.A.
smr2013-013 5
MODEL GTR 215

MATERIALS
Venturi Aluminum
Nozzle Aluminum
N.A.: Not Available
6 smr2013-013
Subsection XX (GTX 155/215/260)
GTX 155/215/260
MODEL GTX 155 / GTX S 155 / GTX 215 / GTX LTD iS 260
ENGINE
Engine type
GTX 155
Naturally-aspirated
GTX S 155
Induction
GTX 215
Supercharged intercooled
GTX LTD iS 260
GTX 155
10.6:1
GTX S 155
Compression ratio
GTX 215
8.4:1
GTX LTD iS 260
GTX 155
7300 RPM
GTX S 155
Maximum RPM
GTX 215
8000 RPM
GTX LTD iS 260
Dry sump (2 oil pumps). Replaceable oil filter.
Type
XPS synthetic blend oil (summer
Lubrication Oil type grade) (P/N 293 600 121).
Refer to LUBRICATION SYSTEM subsection
Capacity
Intake
Valve stem diameter
Exhaust
New 41.02 mm (1.615 in)
Inner
New 45.45 mm (1.789 in)
Outer
smr2010-048 1
ENGINE (cont'd)
Intake
Exhaust
Ring end gap
GTX 155
0.024 mm to 0.056 mm (.0009 in to .0022 in)
GTX S 155
New
Piston/cylinder wall clearance GTX 215
0.04 mm to 0.08 mm (.0016 in to .0031 in)
GTX LTD iS 260
Front
PTO and center
Front
PTO and center
Intake
Cam lobe height
Exhaust
2 smr2010-048
ENGINE (cont'd)
Piston pin diameter
GTX 215
Supercharger shaft driven GTX LTD iS 260
plate journal depth GTX 215
GTX LTD iS 260
GTX 215
Supercharger drive gear GTX LTD iS 260
thickness GTX 215
GTX LTD iS 260
GTX 215
Supercharger lock washer GTX LTD iS 260
thickness GTX 215
GTX LTD iS 260
GTX 215
Supercharger spring New 10.900 mm to 10.700 mm (.4291 in to .4213 in)
GTX LTD iS 260
washer package height
(not compressed) GTX 215
GTX LTD iS 260
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
smr2010-048 3
COOLING SYSTEM
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Type
3 x 3.5 mm (.138 in) on exhaust pipe and
1 x 3.5 mm (.138 in) on muffler
FUEL SYSTEM
Multipoint fuel injection with
Fuel injection type iTC (intelligent Throttle Control).
GTX 155
87 or higher
Inside North America GTX S 155
((RON + MON)/2) GTX 215
91 or higher
GTX LTD iS 260
Fuel type
GTX 155
92 or higher
Outside North America GTX S 155
(RON) GTX 215
95 or higher
GTX LTD iS 260
GTX 155 60 L (16 U.S. gal.)
GTX S 155 70 L (18 U.S. gal.)
Fuel tank (including reserve)
GTX 215 60 L (16 U.S. gal.)
GTX LTD iS 260 70 L (18 U.S. gal.)
GTX 155 approx. 12 L (3.2 U.S. gal.)
GTX S 155 approx. 14 L (3.7 U.S. gal.)
Fuel tank reserve (from low level signal)
GTX 215 approx. 12 L (3.2 U.S. gal.)
GTX LTD iS 260 approx. 14 L (3.7 U.S. gal.)
4 smr2010-048
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Stator 0.1 to 1.0
Spark plug
Ignition coil
GTX 155
7750 RPM
GTX S 155
Engine speed limiter setting
GTX 215
8300 RPM
GTX LTD iS 260
#1: iS control (GTX LTD iS only) 5 A
#3: START/STOP 3 A
#5: iBR power 30 A
#7: iS power (GTX LTD iS only) 30 A
#8: Battery 30 A
Fuse box #11: Depth sounder 3 A
#12 O.T.A.S., Gauge start up, CAPS 3 A
#18: Fuel pump 10 A
#19: ECM power 15 A
smr2010-048 5
Jet pump
GTX 155
GTX S 155 10°/21°
Impeller Pitch
GTX 215
GTX LTD iS 260 14°/25°
Outside diameter 159 mm ± 0.06 mm (6.26 in ± .002 in)
End play (new) 0
Impeller shaft
Side play 0
Drive shaft
iBR and VTS
Description Electronically-controlled iBR gate to provide brake,
VTS system Yes
Actuator
GTX 155 371 kg (816 lb)
GTX S 155 436 kg (960 lb)
Dry weight
GTX 215 375 kg (824 lb)
GTX LTD iS 260 446 kg (980 lb)
GTX 155 272 kg (600 lb)
GTX S 155 227 kg (500 lb)
Load limit (passenger and 10 kg (22 lb) luggage)
GTX 215 272 kg (600 lb)
GTX LTD iS 260 227 kg (500 lb)
6 smr2010-048
DIMENSIONS
Overall length 354 cm (139 in)
Overall width 122.4 cm (48 in)
GTX 155 116.6 cm (45.91 in)
GTX S 155 111.4 cm (43.9 in)
Overall height
GTX 215 116.6 cm (45.91 in)
GTX LTD iS 260 111.4 cm (43.9 in)
GTX 155 N.A.
GTX S 155 127.7 cm (50.3 in)
Overall height with keel horizontal, suspension extended
GTX 215 N.A.
GTX LTD iS 260 127.7 cm (50.3 in)
GTX 155 N.A.
GTX S 155 115.8 cm (45.6 in)
Overall height with keel horizontal, suspension collapsed
GTX 215 N.A.
GTX LTD iS 260 115.8 cm (45.6 in)
MATERIALS
Venturi Aluminum
Nozzle Aluminum
N.A.: Not Available
smr2010-048 7
Subsection XX (RXT 260)
RXT 260
MODEL RXT 260 / RXT-X 260 / RXT-X aS 260
ENGINE
Lubrication XPS synthetic blend oil (summer grade) (P/N 293 600 121).
Oil type
Capacity
Intake
Valve stem Wear limit 5.930 mm (.233 in)
diameter New 5.946 mm to 5.960 mm (.2341 in to .2346 in)
Exhaust
New 41.02 mm (1.615 in)
Inner
Outer
Intake
Exhaust
smr2010-048 1

ENGINE (cont'd)
Ring end gap
Front
PTO and center
Front
PTO and center
Intake
Cam lobe height
Exhaust
2 smr2010-048

ENGINE (cont'd)
Piston pin diameter
Supercharger shaft driven plate journal New 14.460 mm to 14.500 mm (.5693 in to .5709 in)
depth Wear limit 14.600 mm (.5748 in)
Supercharger spring washer package New 10.900 mm to 10.700 mm (.4291 in to .4213 in)
height (not compressed) Wear limit 10.200 mm (.4016 in)
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
COOLING SYSTEM
Ethylene-glycol and distilled water (50%/50%). Use premix coolant from
Coolant
BRP or a coolant specially formulated for aluminum engines
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Type
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel injection type
Fuel type
RXT 260
60 L (16 U.S. gal.)
Fuel tank (including reserve) RXT - X 260
RXT - X aS 260 70 L (18 U.S. gal.)
RXT 260
Approx. 12 L (3.2 U.S. gal.)
Fuel tank reserve (from low level signal) RXT - X 260
RXT - X aS 260 Approx. 14 L (3.7 U.S. gal.)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
smr2010-048 3

Stator 0.1 to 1.0
Anti-start system
Spark plug
Ignition coil
#3: START/STOP 3 A
#4: GPS (if so equipped 3 A
#5: iBR power 30 A
#8: Battery 30 A
Fuse box #12 O.T.A.S., Gauge start up, CAPS 3 A
#18: Fuel pump 10 A
#19: ECM power 15 A
4 smr2010-048

RXT 260 Adjustable 4 positions
Steering RXT - X 260 Steering: Adjustable 4 positions
RXT - X aS 260 Handlebar: -0.0 mm to +25 mm
O.T.A.S. (Off-Throttle Assisted Steering) Electronically-controlled. Achieved with the iBR gate and engine speed
Jet pump
RXT 260 10°/21°
Impeller Pitch RXT - X 260
14°/25°
RXT - X aS 260
End play (new) 0
Impeller shaft
Side play 0
Drive shaft
iBR and VTS
Gate angle (from horizontal line of Neutral Approx. -52°
watercraft) Braking Approx. -70°
Electronically-controlled through the VTS control button
VTS system
with 2 preset positions
Actuator 12 V, 80 A max. capacity. Reversible PWM (pulse-width modulation) motor
smr2010-048 5

RXT 260 375 kg (824 lb)
Dry weight RXT - X 260 379 kg (834 lb)
RXT - X aS 260 438 kg (965 lb)
RXT 260
Load limit (passenger and 10 kg (22 lb) 272 kg (600 lb)
RXT - X 260
luggage)
RXT - X aS 260 227 kg (500 lb)
DIMENSIONS
Overall width 122 cm (48 in)
RXT 260 116.6 cm (45.91 in)
Overall height RXT - X 260 118 cm (46.5 in)
RXT - X aS 260 118.1 cm (46.5 in)
RXT 260 N.A.
Overall height with keel horizontal,
RXT - X 260 N.A.
suspension extended
RXT - X aS 260 127.7 cm (50.3 in)
RXT 260 N.A.
Overall height with keel horizontal,
RXT - X 260 N.A.
suspension collapsed
RXT - X aS 260 115.8 cm (45.6 in)
MATERIALS
Venturi Aluminum
Nozzle Aluminum
N.A.: Not Available
6 smr2010-048
Subsection XX (WAKE PRO 215)
WAKE PRO 215

MODEL WAKE PRO 215
ENGINE
Lubrication XPS synthetic blend oil (summer grade) (P/N 293 600 121).
Oil type
Capacity
Intake
Valve stem diameter
Exhaust
New 41.02 mm (1.615 in)
Inner
New 45.45 mm (1.789 in)
Outer
Intake
Exhaust
smr2010-048 1
MODEL WAKE PRO 215

ENGINE (cont'd)
Ring end gap
Front
PTO and center
Front
PTO and center
Intake
Cam lobe height
Exhaust
New 0.100 mm - 0.352 mm (.004 in - .014 in)
2 smr2010-048
MODEL WAKE PRO 215

ENGINE (cont'd)
Piston pin diameter
Supercharger shaft driven plate journal New 14.460 mm to 14.500 mm (.5693 in to .5709 in)
depth Wear limit 14.600 mm (.5748 in)
Supercharger spring washer package height New 10.900 mm to 10.700 mm (.4291 in to .4213 in)
(not compressed) Wear limit 10.200 mm (.4016 in)
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
COOLING SYSTEM
Ethylene-glycol and distilled water (50%/50%). Use premix coolant
Coolant
from BRP or a coolant specially formulated for aluminum engines
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Type
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel injection type
Fuel type
smr2010-048 3
MODEL WAKE PRO 215

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Stator 0.1 to 1.0
Anti-start system
Spark plug
Ignition coil
#3: START/STOP 3 A
#4:GPS (if so equipped) 3 A
#5: iBR power 30 A
#8: Battery 30 A
Fuse box #12 O.T.A.S., Gauge start up, CAPS 3 A
#18: Fuel pump 10 A
#19: ECM power 15 A
Electronically-controlled. Achieved with the iBR gate
O.T.A.S. (Off-Throttle Assisted Steering)
and engine speed
Jet pump
Rotation (seen from
Counterclockwise
rear)
Impeller
Pitch 10°/21°
STEERING AND PROPULSION (cont'd)
End play (new) 0
Impeller shaft
Side play 0
4 smr2010-048
MODEL WAKE PRO 215

Drive shaft
iBR and VTS
Gate angle (from horizontal line of Neutral Approx. -52°
watercraft) Braking Approx. -70°
VTS system Electronically-controlled through the VTS control button
Actuator
Dry weight 379 kg (834 lb)
DIMENSIONS
Overall width 122 cm (48 in)
MATERIALS
Venturi Aluminum
Nozzle Aluminum
smr2010-048 5
Section 01 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Subsection 07 (RXP 260)
RXP 260
MODEL RXP X 260 / RXP X 260 RS
ENGINE
ROTAX® 1503 4-TEC™, 4-stroke, Single
Engine type
Over Head Camshaft (SOHC)
12 valves with hydraulic lifters (no
Number of valves
adjustment)
Lubrication
Oil type grade) (P/N 293 600 121).
Capacity
Intake
Valve stem diameter
Exhaust
New 41.02 mm (1.615 in)
Inner
New 45.45 mm (1.789 in)
Outer
Intake
Exhaust
20.007 mm to 20.020 mm
New
Rocker arm inner diameter (.7877 in to .7882 in)
19.980 mm to 19.993 mm
New
Rocker arm shaft diameter (.7866 in to .7871 in)
smr2010-048 45

ENGINE (cont'd)
Ring end gap
24.939 mm to 24.960 mm
New
Front (.9819 in to .9827 in)
diameter 39.892 mm to 39.905 mm
New
PTO and center (1.5706 in to 1.5711 in)
25.000 mm to 25.013 mm
New
Front (.9843 in to .9848 in)
diameter 40.000 mm to 40.020 mm
New
PTO and center (1.5748 in to 1.5756 in)
31.540 mm to 31.740 mm
New
Intake (1.2417 in to 1.2496 in)
Cam lobe height
31.430 mm to 31.630 mm
New
Exhaust (1.2374 in to 1.2453 in)
49.991 mm to 50.000 mm
New
Crankshaft bearing journal diameter (1.9681 in to 1.9685 in)
46 smr2010-048

smr2010-048 47

ENGINE (cont'd)
23.010 mm to 23.020 mm
New
Connecting rod small end diameter (.9059 in to .9063 in)
22.996 mm to 23.000 mm
New
Piston pin diameter (.9054 in to .9055 in)
31.984 mm to 32.000 mm
New
Balance shaft journal diameter (1.2592 in to 1.2598 in)
14.460 mm to 14.500 mm
New
Supercharger shaft driven plate journal depth (.5693 in to .5709 in)
11.000 mm to 11.050 mm
New
Supercharger drive gear thickness (.4331 in to .435 in)
10.900 mm to 10.700 mm
Supercharger spring washer package height (not New
(.4291 in to .4213 in)
compressed)
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
COOLING SYSTEM
Ethylene-glycol and distilled water
(50%/50%). Use premix coolant from
Coolant
BRP or a coolant specially formulated
for aluminum engines
EXHAUST SYSTEM
D-Sea-Bel sound reduction system.
Type Water cooled/water injected (open loop).
Direct flow from jet pump
3 x 3.5 mm (.138 in) on exhaust pipe and
1 x 3.5 mm (.138 in) on muffler
FUEL SYSTEM
iTC (intelligent Throttle Control).
Fuel injection type
Single throttle body (62 mm) with
an actuator
48 smr2010-048

Inside North America
91 or higher
Fuel type ((RON + MON)/2)
smr2010-048 49

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Stator 0.1 to 1.0
D.E.S.S. (Digitally Encoded Security
System) with selectable maximum
Anti-start system
vehicle speed settings for RK (rental
key) and LK (learning key)
Spark plug
Ignition coil
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
#1: iBR control 5 A
#3: START/STOP 3 A
#4: Gauge constant power 3 A
#5: iBR power 30 A
#7: iS power 30 A
#8: IFuses 2, 3, 4 and relay 30 A
Fuse box #11: Depth sounder 3 A
#12 O.T.A.S., Gauge start up, CAPS 3 A
#18: Fuel pump 10 A
#19: ECM power 15 A
50 smr2010-048

Electronically-controlled. Achieved with
O.T.A.S. (Off-Throttle Assisted Steering)
the iBR gate and engine speed
Jet pump
RXP X 260
RXP X 260 RS
End play (new) 0
Impeller shaft
Side play 0
Drive shaft
90 cm (3 ft) underneath the lowest
Minimum required water level for propulsion system
rear portion of hull
iBR and VTS
Intelligent Brake and Reverse activated
by a LH lever. Electronically-controlled
Description
iBR gate to provide brake, reverse,
Electronically-controlled through the VTS
VTS system
control button with 2 preset positions
Actuator
Dry weight 368.3 kg (812 lb)
DIMENSIONS
Overall length 331.6 cm (131 in)
MATERIALS
smr2010-048 51

Venturi Aluminum
Nozzle Aluminum
N.A.: Not Available
52 smr2010-048
Subsection XX (WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION)
WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION

GENERAL Terminal Identification on Connector
On the wiring diagram, a letter or a digit is used to
WIRING DIAGRAM LOCATION identify the terminal position in a connector.
The wiring diagrams are in the back cover pocket.
WIRING DIAGRAM CODES

Wire Color Codes
smr2015-009-002_a
1. Terminal position
smr2015-009-001_a
1. Wire main color On a connector, a letter or a digit is usually molded

2. Tracer (thin colored line)
on the connector to identify the terminal position.
General Wire Color Use
COLOR USE
Battery power (12 Vdc directly
RED
connected to battery)
Fused 12 Vdc power or switched
RED + tracer
power from relay
1 1
VIOLET or Fused 12 Vdc accessory power
VIOLET + tracer from fuse box
Alternating current (AC)
YELLOW
from magneto
BLACK Ground
WHITE/BEIGE CAN HI wires,
F04H6LA
WHITE/BLACK CAN LO wires
TYPICAL
1. Wire identification numbers
Color Codes
COLOR CODES Terminal Identification on a Wiring
CODE COLOR CODE COLOR
Diagram
In-line connectors of wiring harnesses are identi-
BEIGE fied on the wiring diagram with their approximate
BG OR ORANGE
(TAN)
location and the following information.
BK BLACK PK PINK
BN BROWN RD RED
BU BLUE VT VIOLET
GN GREEN WH WHITE
GY GRAY YE YELLOW
smr2015-009 1
Subsection XX (WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION)
smr2015-009-003_a
TYPICAL
1. Connector location
2. Wire pin location in connector
Connectors Linked by a Dashed Line

Connectors may be divided into segments linked
by dashed lines, however, some segments of the
smr2012-047-004_a
same connector may be found elsewhere on the TYPICAL
wiring diagram. 1. CAN wire
2. Wire origin
3. Destination terminal (as referenced at ECM)
Component Application
If a component in the wiring diagram is not appli-
cable to every vehicle model, or can be installed
as an option or accessory on certain models, the
component shall be enclosed in a dash line.
smr2015-009-003_b
TYPICAL
1. Connector identification and location
2. Connector pin number
3. Dashed line links connector segments as one
CAN Wire Circuit References

On the wiring diagram, CAN linked components
use the following coding.
smr2011-043-001_a
smr2015-009-004_a 1. Component(s) optional or applicable to certain models

2. Indicates each switch is a separate component
TYPICAL
1. CAN HI wire (x)
2. CAN LOW wire (o)
3. Wire destination
FB1 - G12 = : Terminal G12 in the fuse box no. 1
Corresponding CAN links are identified at fuse box

using the following coding.
2 smr2015-009
Subsection XX (CONNECTOR INFORMATION)
CONNECTOR INFORMATION
SERVICE TOOLS
CRIMPING TOOL (HEAVY GAUGE WIRE) .................................... 529 035 730 ........................................... 15
ECM ADAPTER TOOL................................................................... 529 036 166 ............................................. 5
ECM TERMINAL REMOVER 2.25................................................. 529 036 175 ............................................. 5
ECM TERMINAL REMOVER 3.36................................................. 529 036 174 ............................................. 5

AMP TERMINAL EXTRACTOR...................................................... 726503-1 ............................................. 7
DELPHI TERMINAL EXTRACTOR ................................................. 12094429 ................................... 6, 9–12
FCI TERMINAL EXTRACTOR TOOL ............................................. 54241678 ..................................... 10, 12
GM TERMINAL EXTRACTOR........................................................ 12094430 ....................................... 7, 14
PROCEDURES
MAGNETO AND ENGINE
CONNECTOR (DEUTSCH)
Connector Removal from its Support
1. Insert a small flat screwdriver between the sup-
port and the Deutsch connector.
2. Pry the connector away from the support
slightly while sliding it out in the direction
shown.
smr2009-045-010_a
TYPICAL - MALE CONNECTOR REMOVED FOR CLARITY

Connector Disconnect
1. To disconnect a Deutsch connector, press the
release tab and twist a small flat screwdriver
between the male and female housing to dis-
engage and disconnect them.
smr2009-045-009_a
MALE CONNECTOR REMOVED FOR CLARITY

smr2012-048 1
2 Connector Disassembly and

Reassembly
3 1
3
2
4
F18Z0MA 1 2 F00H1CA
TYPICAL TYPICAL - DEUTSCH CONNECTOR

1. Release tab 1. Male connector
2. Deutsch connector 2. Female connector
3. Secondary lock
4. Sealing cap
NOTICE Do not apply dielectric grease on ter-

minal inside connector.
To remove terminals from connector, proceed as
follows:
1. Using long nose pliers, pull out the plastic lock
from between the terminals.
F18Z0NA 2 1
TYPICAL
1. Deutsch connector
2. Press release button
V01G0OA 1
FEMALE CONNECTOR
1. Female lock
F18Z0LA 2
TYPICAL
1. Flat screwdriver
2. Deutsch connector
2 smr2012-048
3. Pull back on the terminal wire to ensure the re-

tention fingers are holding the terminal.
4. After all required terminals have been inserted,
the lock must be installed.
1 1
V01G0PA 1
MALE CONNECTOR
1. Male lock
F04H6LA
NOTE: Before pin extraction, push wire forward CONNECTOR PIN-OUT

to relieve pressure on retaining tab. 1. Terminal position identification numbers
2. Insert a 4.8 mm (.189 in) wide screwdriver
blade inside the front of the terminal cavity. ECM CONNECTOR (MOLEX)
3. Pry the retaining tab away from the terminal There are 2 connectors on the ECM.
while gently pulling the wire and terminal out
of the back of the connector. The engine wiring harness connector is con-
nected to ECM connector "A". The vehicle wiring
harness connector is connected to ECM connec-
1
tor "B".
Each ECM connector has 48 pins.
smr2009-027-005
ECM CONNECTORS
Connector Removal
V01G0QA 1 1. To access the ECM, refer to ELECTRONIC
FEMALE CONNECTOR FUEL INJECTION (EFI) subsection.
1. Retaining tabs
2. Press and hold the locking tab on the connec-
To install: tor to be disconnected.
1. For insertion of a terminal, ensure the plastic
lock is removed.
2. Insert terminal through the back of the connec-
tor in the appropriate position, and push it in as
far as it will go. You should feel or hear the ter-
minal lock engage.
smr2012-048 3
smr2009-045-013_b
smr2009-045-011_a
CONNECTOR LOCKING CAM IN RELEASE POSITION
LOCKING TAB TO PRESS AND HOLD
2. Insert connector on ECM.
3. As you hold the locking tab, rotate the connec-
tor locking cam until it stops. 3. As you push the connector onto the ECM, ro-
tate the connector locking cam until it snaps
locked.
smr2009-045-012_a
CONNECTOR LOCKING CAM ROTATION TO RELEASE
4. Pull connector off ECM. smr2009-045-011_b
1. Locked here
4. Ensure the locking tab is fully out.
smr2009-045-013_a
Connector Installation
1. Fully open connector locking cam.
4 smr2012-048
529036166
1. Disconnect the ECM connector to be probed,

and reconnect it on the ECM adapter.
smr2009-045-011_a
2. Probe wire terminals of the circuit to be tested
LOCKING TAB FULLY OUT directly in the adapter holes.
Connector Inspection
Before replacing an ECM, always check electrical
connections.
1. Ensure connector locking mechanism is func-
tioning properly.
2. Ensure all wire terminals (pins) are properly
locked in the connector.
3. Ensure they are very tight, make good contact
with the pins in the ECM.
4. Ensure the pins in the harness connector vmr2008-139-016_a
and the ECM connector are clean, shiny and TYPICAL

corrosion-free. 1. ECM connector
2. ECM adapter
5. Check wiring harness for signs of scoring.
NOTICE Never probe directly on the ECM
NOTE: A “defective ECM module” could possi- harness connector. This could change the
bly be repaired simply by disconnecting and recon- shape or enlarge the terminals and create in-
necting it. termittent or permanent contact problems.
NOTICE Do not apply any lubricant product
to the pins of the ECM connector. Connector Terminal Removal (Harness
Connector)
Connector Probing To remove a signal terminal from the ECM har-
The most recommended and safest method to ness connector, use the ECM TERMINAL RE-
probe the MOLEX (ECM) connector terminals is MOVER 2.25 (P/N 529 036 175).
to use the ECM ADAPTER TOOL (P/N 529 036 166). To remove a power terminal, use the ECM TERMI-
This tool will prevent deforming or enlarging of NAL REMOVER 3.36 (P/N 529 036 174).
the terminals, which would lead to bad ECM ter-
minal contact creating intermittent or permanent
problems.
smr2012-048 5
529036175
1. Remove rear protector from connector.

2. Pull out the connector lock.
smr2009-045-027_a
NOTICE Before installing wire terminals in

the connector, ensure all terminals are prop-
erly crimped on wires. After installation of
wire terminals in the connectors, ensure they
are properly locked by gently pulling on them
as if to extract them.
BRLS, TAS AND STARTER

SOLENOID CONNECTORS
(DELPHI)
Connector Terminal Removal
smr2009-045-025_a
To remove a terminal (pin) from the connector, use
3. Insert tool to unlock terminal. a special tool such as the DELPHI TERMINAL EX-
TRACTOR (P/N 12094429).
smr2010-052-001
DELPHI TERMINAL EXTRACTOR (P/N 12094429)
NOTE: Grinding the tool end to a taper is required.

1. Carefully insert the tool in the space provided to
release the pin lock.
2. Push the pin out the front of the connector by
pushing on the wire.
smr2009-045-026_a
1. Unlock here
4. Gently pull on the wire to extract the terminal

out the back of the connector.
6 smr2012-048
smr2009-045-016_a
smr2009-045-014_a 1. Unlock terminal here

1. Unlock terminal here
2. Gently pull on the wire to extract the pin out the
back of the connector.
smr2009-045-015_a
NOTICE Before installing terminals in the

connectors, ensure all terminals are properly
crimped on the wires. After installation of the
wire terminals in the connectors, ensure they smr2009-045-017_a
are properly locked by gently pushing on them

iBR AND iS POWER wire terminals in the connectors, ensure they
CONNECTORS (DELPHI) are properly locked by gently pushing on them
To remove a terminal (pin) from the connector, use SPS CONNECTORS (BOSCH)
a special tool such as the GM TERMINAL EXTRAC-
TOR (P/N 12094430). Connector Terminal Removal
To remove a terminal (pin) from the connector, use
a special tool such as the AMP TERMINAL EXTRAC-
TOR (P/N 726503-1).
smr2010-052-003
GM TERMINAL EXTRACTOR (P/N 12094430)

smr2012-048 7
smr2009-045-020_a
smr2009-045-018_a
1. Pry out locking cap
1. Unlock terminal here
2. Release the pin in the front of the connector.
smr2009-045-019_a

are properly locked by gently pulling on them smr2009-045-021_a
as if to extract them. 1. Unlock here

INFORMATION CENTER back of the connector.
CONNECTOR (DELPHI)
1. To remove a terminal from the connector, first
remove the locking cap in the front of the con-
nector.
smr2009-045-022_a

8 smr2012-048
VTS, SPORT/ECO, MODE/SET

AND UP/DOWN SWITCH
CONNECTORS (DELPHI)
Terminal Removal
1. To remove a terminal from connector, first re-
move the locking cap.
smr2009-045-028_a

smr2009-045-023_a wire terminals in the connectors, ensure they
1. Pry out locking cap are properly locked by gently pushing on them
2. Carefully insert the DELPHI TERMINAL EXTRAC-
TOR (P/N 12094429) in the space provided to re-
lease the pin lock. 24 PIN STEERING CONNECTOR
(APEX ERGOMATE)
smr2010-052-001
DELPHI TERMINAL EXTRACTOR (P/N 12094429)
smr2010-050-004_a
APEX ERGOMATE 24-PIN CONNECTOR

smr2009-045-024_a
1. Male connector
2. Female connector
1. Unlock here 3. Safety lock
4. Locking cam
3. Gently pull on the wire to extract the pin out the 5. Connector sleeve
Connector Disconnect
1. Pull the red safety lock out of the locking cam.
smr2012-048 9
529036188
2. Probe the applicable circuit using the test con-

nector on the diagnostic harness.
smr2010-050-005_a
NOTICE Attempting to probe the connector
Step 1: Pull RED safety lock back
without using the diagnostic connector may
2. Press the tab on the side of the connector damage the connector pins, or even cause a
sleeve. short circuit if testing an energized circuit.
Extracting Pins (Female Connector)

To release one of the 16 small pins towards the
middle part of the connector, use the FCI TERMI-
NAL EXTRACTOR TOOL (P/N 54241678).
smr2010-052-002
FCI TERMINAL EXTRACTOR TOOL (P/N 54241678)
smr2010-050-006_a
To release one of the 8 larger pins towards the
Step 2: Press tab outer part of the connector, use the DELPHI TER-
MINAL EXTRACTOR (P/N 12094429).
3. Pull the connector sleeve back. The cam will
rotate and unlock the male and female connec-
tors.
smr2010-052-001
DELPHI TERMINAL EXTRACTOR TOOL(P/N 12094429)
NOTE: Grinding the DELPHI TERMINAL EXTRAC-

TOR (P/N 12094429) end to a taper is required to
allow insertion of the tool between the lock and
the pin.
smr2010-050-007_a
Step 3: Pull connector sleeve back
4. Pull the connectors apart.
Connector Probing
1. Disconnect the APEX ERGOMATE connector in
the vehicle and connect it to the DIAGNOSTIC
HARNESS (P/N 529 036 188).
10 smr2012-048
smr2010-050-008_a
FEMALE CONNECTOR
1. Secondary pin lock
2. Retaining tabs
1. Insert the DELPHI TERMINAL EXTRACTOR

(P/N 12094429) in one of the holes at the end of
the secondary lock (the white plastic insert in
the connector). smr2010-050-010_a
Steps 2 and 3: Gently pry to release secondary lock (both ends)
3. Repeat the previous step at the other end of

the secondary lock and pull it up to the detent
position. This will allow unlocking of the pins.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the sec-
ondary lock.
4. Insert the extractor tool in the small hole adja-
cent to the pin.
NOTE: Push the extractor tool in only as far as
required to release the lock from the pin. The
tool should slide along the pin and be inserted
between the pin and the lock.
smr2010-050-009_a
Step 1: Insert extractor tool here
2. Gently pry the tool towards the center of the

connector to release one end of the secondary
lock, then pull it up slightly.
smr2010-050-011_a
EXTRACTING A SMALL PIN

Step 4: Insert FCI terminal extractor tool (P/N 54241678) in round
hole
A. Pin hole
smr2012-048 11
smr2010-052-001
DELPHI TERMINAL EXTRACTOR TOOL (P/N 12094429)
NOTE: Grinding the DELPHI TERMINAL EXTRAC-

TOR (P/N 12094429) end to a taper is required.
1. Using a pair of thin long nose pliers, pull the
secondary lock up to the detent position (the
white plastic insert in the connector). This will
allow unlocking of the pins.
smr2010-050-012_a
EXTRACTING A LARGER PIN

NOTICE Do not attempt to remove the sec-
Step 4: Insert the DELPHI terminal extractor (P/N 12094429) in ondary lock or damage will occur. Be careful
square hole
not to bend the pins when using the pliers.
A. Pin hole
smr2010-050-014_a
MALE CONNECTOR
Step 1: Pull on secondary lock here
smr2010-050-013_a
SECONDARY LOCK REMOVED FOR CLARITY

1. Pin stop
2. Pin lock
3. Extractor tool inserts here
4. This pin is not locked and pushed back

Extracting Pins (Male Connector)

To release one of the 16 small pins towards the
middle part of the connector, use the FCI TERMI-
NAL EXTRACTOR TOOL (P/N 54241678).
smr2010-050-015_a
MALE CONNECTOR
1. Secondary lock in detente position
smr2010-052-002
FCI TERMINAL EXTRACTOR TOOL (P/N 54241678) 2. Insert the extractor tool in the small hole adja-
cent to the pin.
To release one of the 8 larger pins towards the
outer part of the connector, use the DELPHI TER- NOTE: Push the extractor tool in only as far as
MINAL EXTRACTOR (P/N 12094429). required to release the lock from the pin. The
tool should slide along the pin and be inserted
between the pin and the lock.
12 smr2012-048
smr2010-050-016_a
SMALL PIN EXTRACTION

Step 2: Insert FCI Terminal extractor tool (P/N 54241678) in small
round hole
smr2010-050-018_a
SMALL PIN INSERTION

1. Notch
2. Stepped portion towards notch
4. Push the pin in until the pin lock engages the

pin.
5. Gently pull on the pin to ensure it is properly
locked.
6. Repeat previous steps for each pin to be in-
serted.
smr2010-050-017_a
7. Push the secondary lock into the connector to
LARGE PIN EXTRACTION
Step 2: Insert DELPHI terminal extractor (P/N 12094429) in square
the locked position.
hole
Reconnecting the APEX ERGOMATE
3. Gently pull on the wire to extract the pin out the Connector
1. Insert the male connector into the female con-
Inserting Pins nector so the lock pin inserts into the lock cam.
1. Ensure the terminal (pin) is properly crimped
onto the wire.
2. Ensure the secondary lock (the white plastic in-
sert in the connector) is up in the detent posi-
tion.
3. Insert the pin in through the back of the connec-
tor.
NOTE: When inserting a small pin, insert the
stepped portion facing the notch in the connector
pin hole. The large pin does not have a specific
orientation.
smr2010-050-019_a
Step 1: Insert male connector in female connector

A. Lock pin
B. Lock cam
2. Push the female connector sleeve over the

male connector to rotate and fully engage the
locking cam.
smr2012-048 13
smr2010-052-003
GM TERMINAL EXTRACTOR (P/N 12094430)
smr2010-050-020_a
Step 2: Push female connector sleeve over male connector
3. Push the red safety lock into the locking cam.
smr2010-050-022_a
Step 2: Insert GM extractor tool (P/N 12094430)

smr2010-050-005_b
Step 3: Push safety lock into locking cam
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR/RECTIFIER
CONNECTOR (FURUKAWA)
Terminal Removal
1. Remove the secondary lock (plastic insert).
smr2010-050-023_a
Step 3: Pull wire to extract pin

BATTERY CABLES
smr2010-050-021_a
Battery Cable Crimping
Step 1: Remove the secondary lock Carefully strip the wire approximately to 10 mm
(3/8 in) in length, using a wire stripping tool or
2. Carefully insert the GM TERMINAL EXTRACTOR sharp blade/knife.
(P/N 12094430) between the lock and the pin to
release the pin.
14 smr2012-048
A
A32E2QA
A. 10 mm (3/8 in)
NOTE: Make sure not to cut wire strands while

stripping the wire. 2
Install the appropriate terminal on the wire ac- A32E2SA
cording to the requirement. Refer to appropriate POSITIONING THE CRIMPING PLIERS

PARTS CATALOG. Step 1: Press
Step 2: Rotate
After positioning the crimping pliers, crimp the ter-

minal already installed on wire.
A32E2RA
INSTALLATION OF TERMINAL
Follow the instructions provided with the CRIMP-

ING TOOL (HEAVY GAUGE WIRE) (P/N 529 035 730)
to select the proper position of the tool.
A32E2TA
529035730
CRIMPING OF WIRE
NOTE: Different wires require different crimping
pliers settings, so make sure to follow the instruc-
tion supplied with the tool.
A32E2UA
PROPERLY CRIMPED WIRE
To verify, if the wire is properly crimped, apply

some pulling force on wire and the terminal at the
same time from both directions.
NOTICE Never weld the wire to the terminal.
Welding can change the property of the wire
and it can become brittle and break.
smr2012-048 15
Install the protective heat shrink rubber tube on

the terminal. Heat the heat shrink rubber tube us-
ing the heat gun so that it grasps the wire and the
terminal.
NOTICE Make sure that the protective heat
shrink rubber tube has been properly installed
and no part of wire is exposed.
16 smr2012-048
2015 SEA-DOO 4-TEC iTC SERIES
Série GTI, GTR, GTS, RXP, WAKE Series
2015 - Volume 2
2015

Volume 2
2015 - Volume 2
Flat Rate
Time Schedule
Barème de temps

à taux fixe
2015 - Volume 2
Série GTITM, GTRTM,GTSTM,
2015- Volume 2
RXPTM, WAKETM
Series Série GTI, GTR, GTS, RXP, WAKE Series
2015 - Volume 2
Effective September 3 th, 2014

En vigueur le 3 septembre 2014
Subject to review from time to time without notice or delay.
Sujet à révision sans préavis, ni délais.
® MC ET LE LOGO BRP SONT DES MARQUES DE COMMERCE DE BOMBARDIER PRODUITS RÉCRÉATIFS INC. OU DE SES SOCIÉTÉS AFFILIÉES. ®™ AND THE BRP LOGO ARE TRADEMARKS OF BOMBARDIER RECREATIONAL PRODUCTS INC. OR ITS AFFILIATES.
© 2014 BOMBARDIER PRODUITS RÉCRÉATIFS INC. TOUS DROITS RÉSERVÉS. IMPRIMÉ AU CANADA. © 2014 BOMBARDIER RECREATIONAL PRODUCTS INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN CANADA.
INTRODUCTION
This publication governs all warranty labor allowances for 2015 BRP Personal Watercraft.
1. HOW DOES IT WORK
We follow the procedures detailed in the BRP Watercraft Shop Manual. The flat rate time is the maximum time
allowed for a repair involving any given part. FLAT RATE TIME IS NOT CUMULATIVE. You must use the flat rate
time given for the longest lasting operation.
NOTE: The Flat Rate Time Schedule was prepared by skilled mechanics using the hand tools usually found in
workshops and all the special tools mentioned in the Shop Manual.
2. COMPILATION
The Flat Rate Time Schedule is compiled as follows:
The actual required time to perform the repair plus (+) 30% correction factor up to 3.0 hours or (+) 15% over
3.0 hours time to take into account, among others:
– Vehicle handling
– Obtaining the parts
– Diagnosis
– Cleaning
– Special compensation (rusted bolts).
3. HOW TO USE IT
Refer to the system you need, locate part or series of parts replaced. List JOB CODE in the appropriate column on
claim.
SYSTEM PAGE SYSTEM PAGE
01 ENGINE 4 05 PROPULSION 26
02 FUEL SYSTEM 15 07 STEERING AND CONTROLS 31
03 IGNITION 22 09 BODY 34
04 STARTER 24 10 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 46
NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, dismantling order is: top to bottom, exterior to interior, front to rear.
All fractions of hours are in tenths:
0.1 = 6 minutes
0.2 = 12 minutes, and so on
LEGEND:
* REQUIRES PRIOR AUTHORIZATION BY DISTRIBUTOR.
** INDICATE LABOUR TIME ON LINE “LABOUR ONLY“ OF CLAIM.
*** INDICATE $$$ AMOUNT ON “SUB-CONTRACTED LABOUR“ OF CLAIM.
IMPORTANT: Always use the longest flat rate time applicable to the repair performed.
4. JOB REQUIREMENTS
All the flat rate times mentioned in the following pages include the required operations such as: engine timing,
connecting rod(s) alignment, cylinder head(s) torque or use of parallel bar, use of ignition tester, piston clearance/ring
end gap measurement, crankshaft to crankcase measurement, cylinder honing, engine leak test.
5. ILLUSTRATIONS
The illustrations contained in this manual do not necessarily show every components of a given system as Parts
Catalogs do. Their purpose is to facilitate recognition of parts related to a flat rate time. Item numbers on illustra-
tions correspond to the four or five-digit Job Code.
6. SUGGESTION (FORM REQUEST)
Volume 2- Sea-Doo 1
2015 STF2015-002_VOL 2.FM
INTRODUCTION
Cette publication détermine le temps de MAIN-D’OEUVRE couvert par la garantie pour les motomarines BRP 2015.
1. UTILISATION DU MANUEL
En procédant de la façon indiquée dans le Manuel de réparation motomarines BRP, chaque temps donné représente
le maximum permis pour une réparation portant sur cette pièce. LES TEMPS NE SONT PAS CUMULATIFS. On
doit inscrire le temps donné pour l’opération qui prend le plus de temps.
REMARQUE: Le Barème de temps à taux fixe a été préparé par des mécaniciens compétents utilisant les outils
que l’on retrouve normalement dans les ateliers de réparation, en plus de tous les outils spéciaux mentionnés dans
le Manuel de réparation.
2. COMPILATION
Le Barème de temps à taux fixe a été établi en compilant le temps nécessaire pour faire la réparation plus (+) un
facteur de correction de 30% lorsqu’un travail dure 3.0 heures et moins, ou (+) 15% lorsqu’un travail dure plus de
3.0 heures. Cette compilation comprend, entre autres, les étapes suivantes:
– Manutention de la motomarine
– Nettoyage
– Aller chercher les pièces, essais physiques
– Compensation spéciale (boulons rouillés)
– Diagnostic.
3. UTILISATION DU BARÈME
Se reporter à la section désirée, repérer la pièce ou l’ensemble de pièces remplacées et inscrire le CODE DE
TRAVAIL dans la colonne appropriée sur la formule de réclamation.
SYSTÈME PAGE SYSTÈME PAGE
01 MOTEUR 4 05 PROPULSION 26
02 SYSTÈME D’ESSENCE 15 07 DIRECTION ET COMMANDES 31
03 ALLUMAGE 22 09 CARROSSERIE 34
10 SYSTÈME ÉLECTRIQUE 46
04 DÉMARREUR 24
REMARQUE: Sauf indication contraire, le démontage doit s’effectuer de haut en bas, de l’extérieur vers l’intérieur,
de l’avant vers l’arrière.
Toutes les fractions d’heures sont exprimées en dixièmes:
0.1 = 6 minutes
0.2 = 12 minutes, et ainsi de suite
LÉGENDE:
* AUTORISATION REQUISE AVANT LE REMPLACEMENT.
** INSCRIRE LE TEMPS À LA LIGNE «MAIN-D’OEUVRE SEULEMENT».
*** INSCRIRE LE MONTANT $$$ À LA LIGNE «OUVRAGE SOUS-CONTRACTÉ».
IMPORTANT: Toujours utiliser le temps donné à l’opération qui nécessite le plus de temps.
4. TRAVAUX REQUIS
Tous les temps mentionnés dans les pages suivantes incluent les opérations telles que: réglage du moteur, aligne-
ment de la ou des bielles, couple de serrage de la ou des culasses ou utilisation de barres parallèles, utilisation du
vérificateur d’allumage, mesure du jet des pistons/jeu en bout des segments, mesure de l’écart entre le vilebrequin
et le carter, rectification du cylindre, vérification de fuite du moteur.
5. ILLUSTRATIONS
Contrairement aux Catalogues de pièces, les illustrations de ce manuel ne montrent pas nécessairement chacune
des pièces qu’elles représentent, leur raison d’être étant plutôt de faciliter la reconnaissance des pièces reliées à
un barème de temps à taux fixe. Les numéros d’items sur les illustrations correspondent aux quatre ou cinq
derniers chiffres du code de travail.
6. SUGGESTION (FORMULAIRE)
2 Sea-Doo - Volume 2
2015
2015
Liquid Cooled Engines — Moteurs refroidis par liquide
MODEL ENGINE INTERCOOLER

TABLE DESCRIPTION iBR
MODÈLE MOTEUR REFROIDISSEUR
1503
2 GTS 130 25FA/25FB N/A N/A
ROTAX
23FA/23FB
GTI 130 23FC/23FD
23FZ 1503 ROTAX
24FA/24FB
GTI SE 130
24FC/24FD
3 GTI SE 155 30FA/30FB
N/A STD
39FA/39FB
GTI LTD 155
39FZ 1503 ROTAX
35FA/35FB
WAKE 155
35FZ
36FA/36FB 1503
4 GTR 215
36FZ ROTAX
STD STD
21FC/21FD 1503
5 RXP X 260
21FL/21FM ROTAX
STD STD
Volume 2- Sea-Doo 3
2015
01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
ENGINE
MOTEUR
RXP X
GTS
GTR
GTI
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
2 3 4 5
NO LABOR INVOLVED
01 00
AUCUNE MAIN-D’OEUVRE
0 0 0 0
MUFFLER, HOSE, STRAP, RUBBER STRIP

01 01
SILENCIEUX, BOYAU, SANGLE, BANDE CAOUTCHOUC
0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND/OR BOLT(S)

01 05
COLLECTEUR D’ÉCHAPPEMENT ET/OU BOULON(S)
1.2 1.2 1.8 1.8
01 08 ENGINE (ASS’Y) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

3.6 3.6 4.0 4.0
* DÉPOSE ET INSTALLATION DU MOTEUR (COMPLET)
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
01 12
CAPTEUR DE TEMPÉRATURE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
CYLINDER HEAD
01 14
CULASSE
4.5 4.5 5.2 5.2
HOSE (L.H RESONATOR TO EXHAUST OUTLET)

01 35 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
BOYAU (RÉSONATEUR GAUCHE À LA SORTIE D’ÉCHAPPEMENT)
EXHAUST OUTLET
01 36
SORTIE D’ÉCHAPPEMENT
0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
SHORT BLOCK
01 37
ENSEMBLE CARTER-CYLINDRES
6.9 6.9 7.5 7.5
BALANCE SHAFT (ASS’Y)

01 43
ARBRE D’ÉQUILIBRAGE (COMPLET)
6.8 6.8 7.3 7.3
RESONATOR (RIGHT)
01 52
RÉSONATEUR (DROIT)
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
MUFFLER SUPPORT
01 53 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
SUPPORT DE SILENCIEUX
ENGINE RUBBER MOUNTS (REAR OR FRONT) (EACH)
01 56
TAMPON D’ANCRAGE MOTEUR (AVANT OU ARRIÈRE) (CHACUN)
0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
REAR ENGINE SUPPORT

01 57 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
SUPPORT MOTEUR ARRIÈRE
HOSE (FROM PUMP SUPPORT TO HEAD PIPE ASS'Y)
01 61
BOYAU DU SUPPORT DE POMPE AU TUYAU COLLECTEUR (COMPLET)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
SENSOR TEMPERATURE (MUFFLER)

01 63
CAPTEUR DE TEMPERATURE (SILENCIEUX)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
NOISE SENSOR
01 65
CAPTEUR DE CLIQUETIS
0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
EXHAUST PIPE
01 82
TUYAU D’ÉCHAPPEMENT SOUDÉ
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
PISTON, RINGS, CIRCLIP, PIN (1)

01 83 7.0 7.0 7.4 7.4
PISTON, SEGMENTS, ANNEAU DE RETENUE, GOUPILLE (1)
01 84
7.2 7.2 7.6 7.6

01 85
7.4 7.4 7.8 7.8
INLET HOSE (RADIATOR TO PUMP)

01 86
BOYAU ENTRÉE D’EAU (RADIATEUR À POMPE)
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
2015
ENGINE
MOTEUR 01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
RXP X
GTS
GTR
GTI
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE DESCRIPTION
2 3 4 5
WATER OUTLET (ENGINE TO RADIATOR)

01 87
SORTIE D’EAU (MOTEUR AU RADIATEUR)
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
HOSE FROM MUFFLER LEFT TO MUFFLER RIGHT

01 88
BOYAU DU SILENCIEUX GAUCHE AU SILENCIEUX DROIT
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
ENGINE BLOCK (CRANKCASE)

01 89
ENSEMBLE MOTEUR (CARTER)
8.6 8.6 9.0 9.0
ENGINE BLOCK RESEAL OR SEALANT

01 90
RESCELLEMENT DU MOTEUR OU SCELLANT
4.7 4.7 5.1 5.1
CRANKSHAFT AND/OR PLAIN BEARING AND/OR RING HALF

01 92 8.1 8.1 8.5 8.5
VILEBREQUIN ET/OU ROULEMENT PLAT ET/OU DEMI-BAGUE
WATER PUMP HOUSING (ASS’Y) AND/OR GASKET
01 93
BOÎTIER POMPE À EAU (COMPLET) ET/OU JOINT D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ
0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0
COOLING RESERVE
01 94
RÉSERVOIR ANTIGEL
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
RADIATOR AND/OR FITTING

01 95
RADIATEUR ET/OU RACCORD DROIT
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

01 96
CAPTEUR DE POSITION DE L’ARBRE À CAMES
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
VALVE COVER AND/OR GASKET

01 97 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
COUVERCLE DE SOUPAPE ET/OU JOINT D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ
CAMSHAFT
01 98
ARBRE À CAMES
1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
CAMSHAFT GUIDE
01 99 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
GUIDE DE L’ARBRE À CAMES
CAMSHAFT CHAIN
01 174 CHAÎNE DE L’ARBRE À CAMES 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5
TIMING GEAR
01 175 PIGNON DE DISTRIBUTION 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
ROCKER ARM (ASS’Y)

01 176 AXE DE CULBUTEUR (COMPLET) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
EXHAUST VALVE, SPRINGS, SEAL, GUIDE (1)

01 177 SOUPAPE D’ÉCHAPPEMENT, RESSORTS, JOINT, GUIDE (1) 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7
INTAKE VALVE, SRINGS, SEAL, GUIDE (1)

01 178 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7
SOUPAPE D’ADMISSION, RESSORTS, JOINT, GUIDE (1)
CHAIN GUIDE
01 179 GUIDE DE CHAÎNE 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
OUTPUT SLEEVE, SEAL, STOP SLEEVE

01 180 MANCHON DE DÉBIT, JOINT, ARRÊT DU MANCHON 1.7 1.7 2.4 2.4
SEAL (OUTPUT SLEEVE)

01 181 JOINT (MANCHON DE DÉBIT) 1.0 1.0 1.8 1.8
OIL RADIATOR AND/OR O-RING

01 182 RADIATEUR D’HUILE ET/OU JOINT TORIQUE 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7
OIL PUMP COVER AND/OR SHAFT AND/OR ROTOR (REAR)

01 183 COUVERCLE DE LA POMPE À L’HUILE ET/OU ARBRE ET/OU ROTOR (ARRIÈRE) 2.4 2.4 3.2 3.2
Volume 2- Sea-Doo 5
2015
01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
ENGINE
MOTEUR
RXP X
GTS
GTR
GTI
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
2 3 4 5
OIL PUMP HOUSING AND/OR ALL PARTS (FRONT)

01 184 BOÎTIER DE LA POMPE À L’HUILE ET/OU TOUTES LES PIÈCES (AVANT) 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
OIL SEPARATOR HOUSING AND/OR GASKET

01 186 BOÎTIER SÉPARATEUR D’HUILE ET/OU JOINT D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

01 189 INTERRUPTEUR DE PRESSION D’HUILE 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.6
PTO HOUSING AND/OR GASKET

01 190 BOÎTIER PDM ET/OU JOINT D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ 2.7 2.7 3.5 3.5
CHAIN TENSION GUIDE

01 191 5.4 5.4 5.8 5.8
GUIDE DE TENSION DE CHAÎNE
CHAIN TENSIONER (ASS’Y)
01 192 TENDEUR DE CHAÎNE (COMPLET) 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
OIL SIEVE (PTO)

01 193 TAMIS D’HUILE (PDM) 2.1 2.1 3.1 3.1
OIL FILTER AND/OR O-RING

01 194 FILTRE À HUILE ET/OU JOINT TORIQUE 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
VALVE SEAT SLEEVE, PISTON, SPRING, PLUG AND O-RING

01 195 MANCHON DE SIÈGE DE SOUPAPE, PISTON, RESSORT, BOUCHON ET JOINT T0RIQUE 2.2 2.2 3.2 3.2
PRESSURE CAP
01 216 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
BOUCHON DE RADIATEUR
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CPS)
01 250 CAPTEUR POSITION DU VILEBREQUIN (CPV) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
PRESSURE VALVE (ASS’Y)

01 251 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
SOUPAPE DE PRESSURISATION (COMPLET)
EXHAUST/INLET VALVES AND/OR SPRINGS AND/OR SEALS (4)
01 255 VALVES D’ÉCHAPPEMENT/D’ADMISSION ET/OU RESSORTS ET/OU ANNEAUX (4) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2


COOLANT HOSE (WATER PUMP HOUSING TO ENGINE)

01 260 BOYAU DE REFROIDISSEMENT (BOÎTIER DE LA POMPE À EAU AU MOTEUR) 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.7
LONG BLOCK
01 264 5.0 5.0 5.4 5.4
ENSEMBLE CARTER-CYLINDRE-CULASSE
WATER PUMP DYNAMIC SEAL AND/OR OIL SEAL
01 301 ANNEAU D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ DYNAMIQUE POMPE À EAU ET/OU ANNEAU D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ 2.4 2.4 3.2 3.2
D’HUILE
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
01 308 JOINT D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ DE LA CULASSE 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
COOLAND TANK SUPPORT

01 331 SUPPORT RÉSERVOIR D’ANTIGEL 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
BOIL OUT PROCEDURE

01 341 PROCÉDURE MOTEUR INONDÉ 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
BALL BEARINGS WITH BELLOW (ASS’Y)

01 344 1.0 1.0 1.9 1.9
SOUFFLET ET ROULEMENTS À BILLE
2015
ENGINE
MOTEUR 01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
RXP X
GTS
GTR
GTI
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE DESCRIPTION
2 3 4 5
INJECTOR (ONE OR ALL)

01 353 INJECTEUR (UN OU TOUS) 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
Volume 2- Sea-Doo 7
2015
01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
ENGINE
MOTEUR
0157
01192
0157
01189
0165
01182
F18D0DT
2015
ENGINE
MOTEUR 01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0183
0184
0185
01181 0192
01180
0143
F18D0ES
Volume 2- Sea-Doo 9
2015
01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
ENGINE
MOTEUR
0197
01176
01251 01176
01177
01179 0105
01175 01178
0199
0196
0112 0114
01174
01191
01308
01177 01178
F18D35T
2015
ENGINE
MOTEUR 01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
01260
01194
01190
01250
01344
01301
0193
01183
01193
01195
F18G06V
Volume 2- Sea-Doo 11
2015
01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
ENGINE
MOTEUR
01186
01184
F18G07S
2015
stf2011-001-001_a
01216
01331
Volume 2- Sea-Doo
0194
Exhaust Manifold/
Collecteur dÉchappement
2015
0187
0186
0161
0195
ENGINE
01MOTEUR
13
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
ENGINE
MOTEUR
Engine/
Moteur
0182
0188
0152
0163
0135
0101
0136
stf2011-001-002_a 0153
2015
FUEL SYSTEM
SYSTÈME D'ESSENCE 02
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
RXP X
GTS
GTR
GTI
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE DESCRIPTION
2 3 4 5
NO LABOR INVOLVED
02 00
0 0 0 0
REMOVAL AND/OR INSTALLATION OF AIR SILENCER

02 01
DÉPOSE ET/OU INSTALLATION SILENCIEUX ADMISSION D’AIR
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
FUEL TANK CAP AND/OR SEAL

02 26
BOUCHON DU RÉSERVOIR À ESSENCE ET/OU ANNEAU
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
FUEL TANK FILLER NECK AND/OR GASKET

02 27
GOULOT DE REMPLISSAGE ET/OU JOINT D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
FUEL TANK STRAPS (2 OR 5)

02 29 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
SANGLES DU RÉSERVOIR À ESSENCE (2 OU 5)
FUEL TANK
02 31
RÉSERVOIR À ESSENCE
4.7 4.7 5.0 5.0
FUEL TANK HOSE (FROM FILLER NECK TO FUEL TANK)

02 36
BOYAU À ESSENCE (GOULOT AU RÉSERVOIR)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
THROTTLE BODY (ASS’Y)

02 63
CARTER D’ACCÉLÉRATEUR (COMPLET)
0.6 0.6 0.7 0.7
FUEL PUMP MODULE

02 66
MODULE POMPE À ESSENCE
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
FUEL PUMP INLET FILTER

02 67 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
FILTRE DU CONDUIT D’ENTRÉE DE POMPE À ESSENCE
FUEL RAIL
02 69
RAIL D’ESSENCE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (CARBURETOR ADAPTOR)

02 73 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
CAPTEUR DE TEMPÉRATURE D’AIR (ADAPTATEUR DE CARBURATEUR)
FUEL FEEDING HOSE (ASS’Y)
02 78
BOYAU D’ALIMENTATION D’ESSENCE (COMPLET)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
AIR PRESSURE SENSOR

02 84
CAPTEUR PRESSION D’AIR
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
AIR INTAKE (ASS’Y)

02 85
ADMISSION D’AIR (COMPLET)
0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
COMPRESSOR HOUSING AND/OR BOOSTER AND/OR O-RING

02 87
LOGEMENT DU COMPRESSEUR ET/OU PROPULSEUR ET/OU JOINT TORIQUE
1.2 1.2
COMPRESSOR IMPELLER AND/OR BALL BEARING AND/OR O-RING AND/OR STEP

COLLAR
02 88
TURBINE DE COMPRESSEUR ET/OU ROULEMENT À BILLES ET/OU JOINT TORIQUE ET/OU
1.3 1.3
PALIER
COMPRESSOR SHAFT (ASS’Y) AND/OR BALL BEARING
02 89
AXE DE COMPRESSEUR (COMPLET) ET/OU ROULEMENT À BILLES
1.5 1.5
DRIVE GEAR AND/OR NEEDLE PIN AND/OR SPRING WASHER

02 90 ENGRENAGE D’ENTRAÎNEMENT ET/OU GOUPILLE À AIGUILLE ET/OU RONDELLE 1.2 1.2
RESSORT
INTERCOOLER AND/OR O-RING
02 91
REFROIDISSEUR ET/OU JOINT TORIQUE
0.9 0.9
INTERCOOLER SUPPORT AND/OR ALL PARTS

02 92
SUPPORT DU REFROIDISSEUR ET/OU TOUTES LES PIÈCES
0.9
2015
02
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
FUEL SYSTEM
SYSTÈME D'ESSENCE
RXP X
GTS
GTR
GTI
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
2 3 4 5
FUEL PUMP NUT AND/OR GASKET

02 93
ÉCROU DE LA POMPE À ESSENCE ET/OU JOINT D'ÉTANCHÉITÉ
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
HOSE (BOOSTER INLET)

02 94
BOYAU (ENTRÉE DU PROPULSEUR)
0.3 0.3
HOSE (BOOSTER OUTLET)

02 96
BOYAU (SORTIE DU PROPULSEUR)
0.3 0.3
HOSE (THROTTLE BODY INLET)

02 97
BOYAU (ENTRÉE CARTER ACCÉLÉRATEUR)
0.3 0.3
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

02 98 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
CAPTEUR NIVEAU D'ESSENCE
2015
FUEL SYSTEM
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
1503 NA ETC
0269
0263
0284
0285
0273
stf2011-001-003_b
2015
02
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
FUEL SYSTEM
SYSTÈME D'ESSENCE
GTR
1503 SCIC ETC

0269
0263
0284
0285
1503 HO
0273
0291
Stf2010-001-001_b
2015
FUEL SYSTEM
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0287
0288
0289
0290
0287
F18F0PS
2015
02
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
FUEL SYSTEM
SYSTÈME D'ESSENCE
0226
0278
0227
0293
0266
0236
0267
0298 0229
0231
stf2012-002-001_a
2015
FUEL SYSTEM
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0201
0296
0292
0201
0291
0297
0294
0292
0294
stf2012-002-002_a
2015
03
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
IGNITION
ALLUMAGE
RXP X
GTS
GTR
GTI
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
2 3 4 5
NO LABOR INVOLVED
03 00
0 0 0 0
IGNITION COIL
03 04
BOBINE D’ALLUMAGE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
MAGNETO FLYWHEEL
03 06
VOLANT MAGNÉTIQUE
2.5 2.5 3.6 3.6
STATOR PLATE (ASS’Y)

03 07
PLAQUE ARMATURE (COMPLET)
2.5 2.5 3.6 3.6
2015
IGNITION
ALLUMAGE 03
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0307
0306
F18R07S
2015
04
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
STARTER
DÉMARREUR
RXP X
GTS
GTR
GTI
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
2 3 4 5
NO LABOR INVOLVED
04 00
0 0 0 0
ELECTRIC STARTER (ASS'Y)

04 02
DÉMARREUR ÉLECTRIQUE (COMPLET)
0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6
ONE OR ALL STARTER COMPONENTS

04 03
UNE OU TOUTES LES PIÈCES DU DÉMARREUR
0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8
STARTER RELAY
04 05
SOLÉNOÏDE DÉMARREUR
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
STARTER DRIVE (ASS’Y) AND/OR COVER

04 08 2.6 2.6 3.7 3.7
ENTRAÎNEMENT DU DÉMARREUR (COMPLET) ET/OU COUVERCLE
ELECTRIC STARTER DRIVE (ASS’Y)
04 10
ENTRAÎNEMENT DU DÉMARREUR ÉLECTRIQUE (COMPLET)
2.5 2.5 3.6 3.6
2015
STARTER
DÉMARREUR 04
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0402
0410
0408
F09D0XS
2015
05
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
PROPULSION
PROPULSION
RXP X
GTS
GTR
GTI
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
2 3 4 5
NO LABOR INVOLVED
05 00
0 0 0 0
HOSE (FROM SCREEN BAILERS TO IMPELLER HOUSING)

05 02
BOYAU (TAMIS DÉCLENCHEMENT AU CARTER D’HÉLICE)
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
STEERING NOZZLE AND/OR BUSHING AND/OR SLEEVE

05 04
BUSE DE DIRECTION ET/OU DOUILLE ET/OU MANCHON
0.3 0.4 0.4 0.4
VENTURI AND/OR O-RING

05 05
VENTURI ET/OU JOINT TORIQUE
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
IMPELLER SHAFT HOUSING COVER AND/OR O-RINGS AND/OR GREASE

05 06 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
COUVERCLE ARBRE TURBINE ET/OU JOINT TORIQUE ET/OU GRAISSE
PTO FLYWHEEL RUBBER BOOT CLAMP (EACH)
05 07
COLLIER DE SERRAGE DU SOUFFLET VOLANT PDM (CHACUN)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
RUBBER BOOT
05 08
SOUFFLET CAOUTCHOUC
0.9 0.9 1.2 1.2
IMPELLER HOUSING FITTING

05 10
RACCORD DU CARTER D'HÉLICE
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
DRIVE SHAFT AND/OR BUMPER PLUG

05 11
ARBRE DE TRANSMISSION ET/OU BOUCHON CONTRE CHOC
0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
IMPELLER AND/OR SHAFT AND/OR WASHER AND/OR THRUST BEARING

05 12 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
TURBINE ET/OU ARBRE ET/OU RONDELLE ET/OU PALIER BUTÉE
IMPELLER HOUSING (ASS’Y)
05 13
CARTER D’HÉLICE (COMPLET)
1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
IMPELLER SHAFT DOUBLE LIP SEAL AND/OR BEARING

05 14 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
ANNEAU ÉTANCHÉITÉ D'ARBRE TURBINE ET/OU ROULEMENT À BILLES
WEAR RING
05 15
BAGUE D’USURE
1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
HULL STUDS (IMPELLER HOUSING) (1 OR 2)

05 16
GOUJONS COQUE (CARTER D’HÉLICE) (1 OU 2)
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
HULL STUDS (IMPELLER HOUSING) (3 OR 4)

05 17
GOUJONS COQUE (CARTER D’HÉLICE) (3 OU 4)
0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
WATER INLET GRATE

05 18
GRILLE DE POMPE (ADMISSION D’EAU)
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
IMPELLER HOUSING REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

05 21 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
DÉPOSE ET INSTALLATION DU CARTER D’HÉLICE
REVERSE GATE (ASS’Y)
05 30
DÉFLECTEUR DE MARCHE ARRIÈRE (COMPLET)
0.4 0.4 0.4
PUMP SUPPORT
05 38
SUPPORT DE POMPE
3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3
RING CARBONE
05 45
BAGUE AU CARBONE
0.9 0.9 1.2 1.2
FLOATING RING
05 57
BAGUE FLOTTANTE
0.9 0.9 1.2 1.2
ARM BLACK
05 64
BRAS NOIR
0.4 0.4 0.4
2015
PROPULSION
PROPULSION 05
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
RXP X
GTS
GTR
GTI
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE DESCRIPTION
2 3 4 5
ROD PIVOT
05 66
PIVOT DE RACCORD
0.4 0.4 0.4
SUPPORT PLATE AND/OR SEALS (RIGHT SIDE)

05 72
PLAQUE SUPPORT ET/OU ANNEAU D'ÉTANCHÉITÉ (CÔTÉ DROIT)
0.6 0.6 0.6
SUPPORT PLATE AND/OR SEALS (LEFT SIDE)

05 73
PLAQUE SUPPORT ET/OU ANNEAU D'ÉTANCHÉITÉ (CÔTÉ GAUCHE)
0.7 0.7 0.7
FIXING PLATE (RIGHT SIDE)

05 74
PLAQUE FIXATION (CÔTÉ DROIT)
0.6 0.6 0.6
FIXING PLATE (LEFT SIDE)

05 75 0.7 0.7 0.7
PLAQUE FIXATION (CÔTÉ GAUCHE)
iBR ACTUATOR
05 76
ACTUATEUR iBR
0.7 0.7 1.2
GUARD
05 77
PROTECTEUR
0.3 0.3 0.3
2015
05
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
PROPULSION
PROPULSION
0513
0510
0504
0514
0512
0505
0515
0513
0506
stf2011-001-005_a
2015
PROPULSION
PROPULSION 05
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0557
0511
0538
0516
0545 0517
0508
0507
0518
stf2011-001-006_b
2015
05
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
PROPULSION
PROPULSION
0574
0504
0572
0572
0574
0566
0577
0530
0573
0576
0564
0564
stf2011-001-007_a
2015
STEERING AND CONTROLS
DIRECTION ET COMMANDES 07
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
RXP X
GTS
GTR
GTI
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE DESCRIPTION
2 3 4 5
NO LABOR INVOLVED
07 00
0 0 0 0
HANDLE GRIP (1 OR 2)
07 01
GAINE DE GUIDON (1 OU 2)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
HANDLE HOUSING (LEFT)

07 03
LOGEMENT DE GUIDON (GAUCHE)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
THROTTLE HANDLE HOUSING (RIGHT)

07 04
LOGEMENT DE MANETTE D’ACCÉLÉRATEUR (DROIT)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
STEERING COVER AND/OR FOAM

07 05 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
COUVRE-GUIDON ET/OU MOUSSE
HANDLEBAR
07 06
GUIDON
0.9 0.9 0.9
STEERING STEM ARM

07 07
BRAS DE TIGE DE DIRECTION
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
STEERING CABLE (FROM NOZZLE TO STEM ARM)

07 13
CÂBLE DE DIRECTION (DE LA BUSE AU BRAS DE TIGE)
0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
FRONT BALL JOINT STEERING CABLE

07 14
JOINT À ROTULE AVANT (CÂBLE DE DIRECTION)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
REAR BALL JOINT STEERING CABLE (1 OR 2)

07 15 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
JOINT À ROTULE ARRIÈRE (CÂBLE DE DIRECTION) (1 OU 2)
STEERING SUPPORT
07 44
SUPPORT DIRECTION
1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
HANDLE BAR EXTENSION

07 79 0.4
RALLONGE DE GUIDON
THROTTLE HANDLE AND/OR BUSHINGS
07 81
MANETTE ACCÉLÉRATEUR ET/OU COUSSINETS
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
REVERSE HANDLE AND/OR BUSHINGS

07 82
MANETTE DE RENVERSE ET/OU COUSSINETS
0.4 0.4 0.4
WEAR RING
07 85
BAGUE D'USURE
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
ADAPTER CABLE
07 87
ADAPTATEUR DE CÂBLE
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
HANDLEBAR EXTENSION TUBE (RH)

07 88 0.4
TUBE D’EXTENSION DU GUIDON (DROIT)
HANDLEBAR EXTENSION TUBE (LH)
07 89
TUBE D’EXTENSION DU GUIDON (GAUCHE)
0.4
2015
07
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
DIRECTION ET COMMANDES
0703
0782
0705 0704
0701
0781
0785
0706 0744
0714
0707
0713
0787
0715
stf2011-001-008_a
2015
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
RXP X
0714
0713
0779
0705
0704
0715
0781
0701
0703
0788
0708
0707
0779
0782
0701
0789
0785
0744
stf2012-002-003_a
2015
09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
BODY
CARROSSERIE
RXP X
GTS
GTR
GTI
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
2 3 4 5
NO LABOR INVOLVED
09 00
0 0 0 0
FRONT BUMPER
09 01
PARE-CHOCS AVANT
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
SIDE BUMPER (LEFT OR RIGHT) (1)

09 02
PARE-CHOCS LATÉRAL (GAUCHE OU DROIT) (1)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
SIDE BUMPER (BOTH SIDE) (2)

09 04
PARE-CHOCS LATÉRAL (LES DEUX CÔTÉS) (2)
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
REAR BUMPER
09 06 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
PARE-CHOCS ARRIÈRE
CORNER BUMPER (LEFT OR RIGHT)1
09 08
PARE-CHOCS EN COIN (GAUCHE OU DROIT)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
“U” CLAMP AND/OR SKI HOOK AND/OR FINITION/RETAINER PLATE

09 09
BRIDE EN «U» ET/OU CROCHET SKI ET/OU PLAQUE RETENUE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
STORAGE COVER (ANY OR ALL PARTS)

09 10
COUVERCLE À BAGAGES (UNE OU TOUTES LES PIÈCES)
0.5 0.5 0.5 1.5
STORAGE COVER HINGE

09 11
CHARNIÈRE COUVERCLE À BAGAGES
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
STORAGE COVER LATCH

09 12 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
LOQUET DU COUVERCLE À BAGAGES
STORAGE COVER NEOPRENE SEAL
09 13
ANNEAU EN NÉOPRÈNE DU COUVERCLE À BAGAGES
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
STORAGE COVER DECAL

09 14 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
AUTOCOLLANT DU COUVERCLE À BAGAGES
SIDE BODY DECAL (RIGHT) (1 OR 2)
09 15
AUTOCOLLANT LATÉRAL DE LA CARROSSERIE (DROIT) (1 OU 2)
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
SIDE BODY DECAL (LEFT) (1 OR 2)

09 16
AUTOCOLLANT LATÉRAL DE LA CARROSSERIE (GAUCHE) (1 OU 2)
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
ALL BODY DECALS

09 17
TOUS LES AUTOCOLLANTS DE LA CARROSSERIE
1.2 1.4 1.4 1.4
SIDE CARPET (1)

09 19
TAPIS LATÉRAL (1)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
SIDE CARPET (2)

09 20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
TAPIS LATÉRAL (2)
REAR CARPET
09 21
TAPIS ARRIÈRE
0.3 0.5 0.5 0.5
SEAT (ASS’Y)
09 22
SIÈGE (COMPLET)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
SEAT COVER
09 24
HOUSSE DE SIÈGE
1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9
SEAT BASE NEOPRENE SEAL

09 26
ANNEAU EN NÉOPRÈNE DE LA BASE DU SIÈGE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
SEAT LACHT (ANY OR ALL PARTS)

09 28
LOQUET DE SIÈGE (UNE OU TOUTES LES PIÈCES)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
2015
BODY
CARROSSERIE 09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
RXP X
GTS
GTR
GTI
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE DESCRIPTION
2 3 4 5
SEAT LATCH HOOK

09 29
CROCHET DU LOQUET DU SIÈGE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
LACHT STUD ( SEAT)

09 30
ERGOT D’ENCRAGE (SIÈGE)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
FRONT TUBE VENT

09 31
BOYAU DE VENTILATION AVANT
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
BOX GLOVES
09 35
COFFRE À GANTS
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
PLATFORM CARPET (RIGHT OR LEFT)

09 36 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
TAPIS DE PLATE-FORME (DROIT OU GAUCHE)
GRAB HANDLE
09 37
POIGNÉE DE MAINTIEN
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
SPONSON (RIGHT OR LEFT) (EACH)

09 38
STABILISATEUR (DROIT OU GAUCHE) (CHACUN)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
MIRROR (1)
09 39
RÉTROVISEUR (1)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
MIRRORS (2)
09 40
RÉTROVISEURS (2)
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
SIDE HULL DECAL (1)

09 44 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
AUTOCOLLANT LATÉRAL DE LA COQUE (1)
SIDE HULL DECALS (RIGHT) (2)
09 45
AUTOCOLLANTS LATÉRAUX DE LA COQUE (2)
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
SIDE MOULDING (RIGHT OR LEFT)

09 46 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
ENJOLIVEUR LATÉRAL (DROIT OU GAUCHE)
REAR SIDE BODY DECAL
09 50
AUTOCOLLANT ARRIÈRE DE LA CARROSSERIE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
BRP DECAL(S)
09 51
AUTOCOLLANT(S) BRP
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
REBORDING LADDER ANT/OR SUPPORT (ASS’Y)

09 55
ÉCHELLE D’EMBARQUEMENT ET/OU SUPPORT (COMPLET)
0.5 0.5
SIDE GRILL (RIGHT OR LEFT)

09 56
GRILLE LATÉRALE (DROITE OU GAUCHE)
0.3
DEFLECTOR
09 77 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
DÉFLECTEUR
LOWER STORAGE COVER (ANY OR ALL PARTS)
09 88 COUVERCLE DU COMPARTIMENT DE RANGEMENT INFÉRIEUR 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.4
(UNE OU TOUTES LES PIÈCES)
SPONSON SPACER
09 100 ENTRETOISE DU STABILISATEUR 1.0
SIDE CARPETS (3)

09 152 TAPIS LATÉRAUX (3) 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
FRONT GRILL
09 168 GRILLE FRONTALE 1.1
2015
09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
BODY
CARROSSERIE
RXP X
GTS
GTR
GTI
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
2 3 4 5
SIDE CARPETS (4)

09 204 TAPIS LATÉRAUX (4) 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
SIDE CARPETS (5)

09 205 TAPIS LATÉRAUX (5) 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
SIDE CARPETS (6)

09 206 TAPIS LATÉRAUX (6) 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
SIDE CARPETS (ALL)

09 207 TAPIS LATÉRAUX (TOUS) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
HANDLE STEM (WAKE PYLON)

09 254 0.4
POIGNÉE (POTEAU WAKE)
EXTENSION TUBE (WAKE PYLON)
09 255 TUBE D’EXTENSION (POTEAU WAKE) 1.0
WAKE PYLON MOULDED

09 256 POTEAU WAKE MOULÉ 1.0
LOCKING STRAP
09 257 COURROIE DE BLOCAGE 0.3
BLEED PLUG
09 262 BOUCHON DE PURGE 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
BOX DOOR
09 284 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
PORTE DE COFFRE
DASHBOARD BEZEL
09 291 ENJOLIVEUR DE TABLEAU DE BORD 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
MIRROR SUPPORT
09 380 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
SUPPORT DE MIROIRS
DIVIDER
09 381 CLOISON 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
HULL INSERT
09 382 PASSE-COQUE 1.2 1.2 1.5 1.5
FOOTREST (RH OR LH)

09 390 APPUI-PIEDS (DROIT OU GAUCHE) 0.3
REAR COSMETIC AND COVER

09 391 ENJOPLIVEUR ARRIÈRE ET COUVERCLE 0.4
HANDLE COSMETIC (RH AND/OR LH)

09 392 0.3
ENJOLIVEUR DE POIGNÉE (DROIT ET/OU GAUCHE)
COSMETIC DEFLECTOR
09 393 DÉFLECTEUR ENLOLIVEUR 0.3
STORAGE COVER COSMETIC (RH OR LH)

09 394 ENJOLIVEUR DE COUVERCLE À BAGAGE (DROIT OU GAUCHE) 1.1
TRIM TAB
09 402 CORRECTEUR D’ASSIETTE 0.3
2015
BODY
CARROSSERIE 09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0939
0940
09291
09380
09284
0946
0956
0935
0946
0956
0946
0908
0977
0906
0956
09390
0908
0902
0904
09390
0902
0904 0901
09381
stf2012-002-004_a
2015
09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
BODY
CARROSSERIE
0909
09382
0938
0909
0962
09100 09402
stf2013-001-001_a
2015
BODY
CARROSSERIE 09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0919, 0920, 09152,

09204, 09205
09206,09207
0936
0930
0921
0937
09392
09391
09392
0909
stf2012-002-005_a
2015
09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
BODY
CARROSSERIE
09393
09168
0910
0912
0988
09394
0911
0913
stf2012-002-006_a
2015
BODY
CARROSSERIE 09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0912
0910
0988
0913
0911
stf2011-001-009_a
2015
09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
BODY
CARROSSERIE
09254
09255
09256 09257
Stf2009-001-002_a
2015
BODY
CARROSSERIE 09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0901
0902
0904
0902
0904
0937
0908
0906
0909
LTD
0908
stf2011-001-010_a
2015
44
09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
stf2011-001-011_a
0939
0940
BODY
09291
09284
CARROSSERIE
09380
0935
0946
2015
0921
0919
0920 0936
09152
09204
09205
09381 09206
09207
0946
Sea-Doo - Volume 2
BODY
CARROSSERIE 09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0938
09382
0938
09262
0955
stf2011-001-012_a
2015
10
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SYSTÈME ÉLECTRIQUE
RXP X
GTS
GTR
GTI
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
2 3 4 5
NO LABOR INVOLVED
10 00
0 0 0 0
BATTERY
10 03
BATTERIE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
GROUND CABLE
10 04
CÂBLE DE MASSE
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
BATTERY RED CABLE (BATTERY TO STARTER RELAY)

10 05 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
CÂBLE ROUGE DE BATTERIE (BATTERIE AU SOLÉNOÏDE)
BATTERY RED CABLE (STARTER TO STARTER RELAY)
10 06
CÂBLE ROUGE DE BATTERIE (DÉMARREUR AU SOLÉNOÏDE)
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
REGULATOR (ASS'Y)/RECTIFIER (ASS’Y)

10 11 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
RÉGULATEUR (COMPLET)/REDRESSEUR (COMPLET)
MAIN HARNESS (ASS’Y)
10 12
CÂBLAGE PRINCIPAL (COMPLET)
2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2
BATTERY SUPPORT
10 15
SUPPORT DE BATTERIE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
D.E.S.S. KEY
10 28
CLÉ D.E.S.S.
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
L.C.D INFO GAUGE (MULTIFUNCTION GAUGE)

10 46
CADRAN INFO MULTIFONCTION
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT

10 56 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
UNITÉ CONTRÔLE ÉLECTRONIQUE
ENGINE HARNESS (ASS’Y)
10 61
CÂBLAGE MOTEUR (COMPLET)
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
STEERING HARNESS (ASS’Y)

10 62
CÂBLAGE GUIDON (COMPLET)
0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
OTAS SWITCH
10 64
INTERRUPTEUR DE L’OTAS
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
D.E.S.S. POST
10 65
BORNE D.E.S.S.
0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
TOPS SWITCH
10 66 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
INTERRUPTEUR TOPS
STARTING RELAY
10 77
RELAIS DE DÉMARRAGE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
OTAS ACTUATOR
10 78 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
ACTIONNEUR DE L’OTAS
BRAKE SENSOR
10 79
CAPTEUR DE FREINAGE
0.3 0.3 0.3
THROTTLE SENSOR
10 80
CAPTEUR D'ACCÉLÉRATEUR
0.3 0.3 0.3
CONTROLE SWITCH (RIGHT OR LEFT)

10 81
INTERRUPTEUR DE CONTRÔLE (DROIT OU GAUCHE)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
2015
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SYSTÈME ÉLECTRIQUE 10
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
1046
1080
1064
1081
1012
1078
1065
1062
1077
1003
1028
1079
1081
1005
1015
1004
1011
stf2011-001-013_a
2015
RXT, RXT aS, WAKE Series
Série GTX, GTX iS,
2015 - Volume 3
2015

Volume 3
Série GTX, GTX iS,

2015 - Volume 3
Flat Rate
Time Schedule
Barème de temps
à taux fixe

Série GTX, GTX iS,
2015 - Volume 3
Série

Série GTX, GTX iS,
2015 - Volume 3
GTXTM, GTXTM iS, RXTTM,
RXTTM aS, WAKETM
Series
Série GTX, GTX iS,
2015 - Volume 3
Effective September 4 th, 2014

En vigueur le 4 novembre 2014
Subject to review from time to time without notice or delay.
Sujet à révision sans préavis, ni délais.
® MC ET LE LOGO BRP SONT DES MARQUES DE COMMERCE DE BOMBARDIER PRODUITS RÉCRÉATIFS INC. OU DE SES SOCIÉTÉS AFFILIÉES. ®™ AND THE BRP LOGO ARE TRADEMARKS OF BOMBARDIER RECREATIONAL PRODUCTS INC. OR ITS AFFILIATES.
© 2014 BOMBARDIER PRODUITS RÉCRÉATIFS INC. TOUS DROITS RÉSERVÉS. IMPRIMÉ AU CANADA. © 2014 BOMBARDIER RECREATIONAL PRODUCTS INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN CANADA.
INTRODUCTION
This publication governs all warranty labor allowances for 2015 BRP Personal Watercraft.
1. HOW DOES IT WORK
We follow the procedures detailed in the BRP Watercraft Shop Manual. The flat rate time is the maximum time
allowed for a repair involving any given part. FLAT RATE TIME IS NOT CUMULATIVE. You must use the flat rate
time given for the longest lasting operation.
NOTE: The Flat Rate Time Schedule was prepared by skilled mechanics using the hand tools usually found in
workshops and all the special tools mentioned in the Shop Manual.
2. COMPILATION
The Flat Rate Time Schedule is compiled as follows:
The actual required time to perform the repair plus (+) 30% correction factor up to 3.0 hours or (+) 15% over
3.0 hours time to take into account, among others:
– Vehicle handling
– Obtaining the parts
– Diagnosis
– Cleaning
– Special compensation (rusted bolts).
3. HOW TO USE IT
Refer to the system you need, locate part or series of parts replaced. List JOB CODE in the appropriate column on
claim.
SYSTEM PAGE SYSTEM PAGE
01 ENGINE 4 07 STEERING AND CONTROLS 31
02 FUEL SYSTEM 15 08 SUSPENSION 34
03 IGNITION 25 09 BODY 38
04 STARTER 24 10 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 51
05 PROPULSION 26
NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, dismantling order is: top to bottom, exterior to interior, front to rear.
All fractions of hours are in tenths:
0.1 = 6 minutes
0.2 = 12 minutes, and so on
LEGEND:
* REQUIRES PRIOR AUTHORIZATION BY DISTRIBUTOR.
** INDICATE LABOUR TIME ON LINE “LABOUR ONLY“ OF CLAIM.
*** INDICATE $$$ AMOUNT ON “SUB-CONTRACTED LABOUR“ OF CLAIM.
IMPORTANT: Always use the longest flat rate time applicable to the repair performed.
4. JOB REQUIREMENTS
All the flat rate times mentioned in the following pages include the required operations such as: engine timing,
connecting rod(s) alignment, cylinder head(s) torque or use of parallel bar, use of ignition tester, piston clearance/ring
end gap measurement, crankshaft to crankcase measurement, cylinder honing, engine leak test.
5. ILLUSTRATIONS
The illustrations contained in this manual do not necessarily show every components of a given system as Parts
Catalogs do. Their purpose is to facilitate recognition of parts related to a flat rate time. Item numbers on illustra-
tions correspond to the four or five-digit Job Code.
6. SUGGESTION (FORM REQUEST)
Volume 3- Sea-Doo 1
2015 STF2015-003_VOL 3.FM
INTRODUCTION
Cette publication détermine le temps de MAIN-D’OEUVRE couvert par la garantie pour les motomarines BRP 2015.
1. UTILISATION DU MANUEL
En procédant de la façon indiquée dans le Manuel de réparation motomarines BRP, chaque temps donné représente
le maximum permis pour une réparation portant sur cette pièce. LES TEMPS NE SONT PAS CUMULATIFS. On
doit inscrire le temps donné pour l’opération qui prend le plus de temps.
REMARQUE: Le Barème de temps à taux fixe a été préparé par des mécaniciens compétents utilisant les outils
que l’on retrouve normalement dans les ateliers de réparation, en plus de tous les outils spéciaux mentionnés dans
le Manuel de réparation.
2. COMPILATION
Le Barème de temps à taux fixe a été établi en compilant le temps nécessaire pour faire la réparation plus (+) un
facteur de correction de 30% lorsqu’un travail dure 3.0 heures et moins, ou (+) 15% lorsqu’un travail dure plus de
3.0 heures. Cette compilation comprend, entre autres, les étapes suivantes:
– Manutention de la motomarine
– Nettoyage
– Aller chercher les pièces, essais physiques
– Compensation spéciale (boulons rouillés)
– Diagnostic.
3. UTILISATION DU BARÈME
Se reporter à la section désirée, repérer la pièce ou l’ensemble de pièces remplacées et inscrire le CODE DE
TRAVAIL dans la colonne appropriée sur la formule de réclamation.
SYSTÈME PAGE SYSTÈME PAGE
01 MOTEUR 4 07 DIRECTION ET COMMANDES 31
02 SYSTÈME D’ESSENCE 15 08 SUSPENSION 34
03 ALLUMAGE 25 09 CARROSSERIE 38
10 SYSTÈME ÉLECTRIQUE 51
04 DÉMARREUR 24
05 PROPULSION 26
REMARQUE: Sauf indication contraire, le démontage doit s’effectuer de haut en bas, de l’extérieur vers l’intérieur,
de l’avant vers l’arrière.
Toutes les fractions d’heures sont exprimées en dixièmes:
0.1 = 6 minutes
0.2 = 12 minutes, et ainsi de suite
LÉGENDE:
* AUTORISATION REQUISE AVANT LE REMPLACEMENT.
** INSCRIRE LE TEMPS À LA LIGNE «MAIN-D’OEUVRE SEULEMENT».
*** INSCRIRE LE MONTANT $$$ À LA LIGNE «OUVRAGE SOUS-CONTRACTÉ».
IMPORTANT: Toujours utiliser le temps donné à l’opération qui nécessite le plus de temps.
4. TRAVAUX REQUIS
Tous les temps mentionnés dans les pages suivantes incluent les opérations telles que: réglage du moteur, aligne-
ment de la ou des bielles, couple de serrage de la ou des culasses ou utilisation de barres parallèles, utilisation du
vérificateur d’allumage, mesure du jet des pistons/jeu en bout des segments, mesure de l’écart entre le vilebrequin
et le carter, rectification du cylindre, vérification de fuite du moteur.
5. ILLUSTRATIONS
Contrairement aux Catalogues de pièces, les illustrations de ce manuel ne montrent pas nécessairement chacune
des pièces qu’elles représentent, leur raison d’être étant plutôt de faciliter la reconnaissance des pièces reliées à
un barème de temps à taux fixe. Les numéros d’items sur les illustrations correspondent aux quatre ou cinq
derniers chiffres du code de travail.
6. SUGGESTION (FORMULAIRE)
2015
2015
Liquid Cooled Engines — Moteurs refroidis par liquide
MODEL/ ENGINE/ INTERCOOLER/

TABLE DESCRIPTION SUSPENSION iBR
MODÈLE MOTEUR REFROIDISSEUR
38FA/38FB 1503
6 GTX 155
38FE/38FF ROTAX
N/A N/A STD
44FA/44FB
GTX LTD 215
44FE/44FF
7 1503 ROTAX STD N/A STD
26FA/26FB
WAKE PRO 215
26FE/26FF
17FA/17FB
RXT 260
17FE/17FF
8 1503 ROTAX STD N/A STD
31FC/31FD
RXT X 260
31FL/31FM
33FA/33FB
9 GTX S 155 1503 ROTAX STD STD STD
33FC/33FD
18FA/18FB
GTX iS LTD 260
18FE/18FF
10 1503 ROTAX STD STD STD
41FA/41FB
RXT aS X 260
41FG/41FH
STD: STANDARD
Volume 3- Sea-Doo 3
2015
01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
ENGINE
MOTEUR
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
NO LABOR INVOLVED
01 00 0 0 0 0 0
MUFFLER, HOSE, STRAP, RUBBER STRIP
01 01
SILENCIEUX, BOYAU, SANGLE, BANDE CAOUTCHOUC
0.9 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND/OR BOLT(S)

01 05
COLLECTEUR D’ÉCHAPPEMENT ET/OU BOULON(S)
1.2 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8
01 08 ENGINE (ASS’Y) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

3.6 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0
* DÉPOSE ET INSTALLATION DU MOTEUR (COMPLET)
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
01 12 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
CAPTEUR DE TEMPÉRATURE
CYLINDER HEAD
01 14
CULASSE
4.5 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.2
EXHAUST OUTLET
01 36
SORTIE D’ÉCHAPPEMENT
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
SHORT BLOCK
01 37
ENSEMBLE CARTER-CYLINDRES
6.9 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
BALANCE SHAFT (ASS’Y)

01 43
ARBRE D’ÉQUILIBRAGE (COMPLET)
6.8 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3
COVER MUFFLER (FRONT)

01 48 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
COUVRE SILENCIEUX (AVANT)
RESONATOR (RIGHT)
01 52
RÉSONATEUR (DROIT)
0.5 0.5 0.5 4.0 4.2
MUFFLER SUPPORT
01 53
SUPPORT DU SILENCIEUX
1.1 1.1 1.1 1.3 1.3
ENGINE RUBBER MOUNTS (REAR OR FRONT) (EACH)

01 56
TAMPON D’ANCRAGE MOTEUR (AVANT OU ARRIÈRE) (CHACUN)
0.8 0.8 0.8 1.5 1.5
REAR ENGINE SUPPORT

01 57 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.6 1.6
SUPPORT MOTEUR ARRIÈRE
HOSE (FROM PUMP SUPPORT TO HEAD PIPE ASS'Y)
01 61
BOYAU DU SUPPORT DE POMPE AU TUYAU COLLECTEUR (COMPLET)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.9 0.9
SENSOR TEMPERATURE (MUFFLER)

01 63
CAPTEUR DE TEMPERATURE (SILENCIEUX)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4
NOISE SENSOR
01 65
CAPTEUR DE CLIQUETIS
0.9 0.9 0.9 1.6 1.6
EXHAUST PIPE
01 82
TUYAU D’ÉCHAPPEMENT SOUDÉ
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.9 0.9

01 83 7.0 7.4 7.4 7.5 7.5
01 84
7.2 7.6 7.6 7.7 7.7

01 85
7.4 7.8 7.8 7.9 7.9
2015
ENGINE
MOTEUR 01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
INLET HOSE (RADIATOR TO PUMP)

01 86 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.2 1.2
BOYAU ENTRÉE D’EAU (RADIATEUR À POMPE)
WATER OUTLET (ENGINE TO RADIATOR)
01 87
SORTIE D’EAU (MOTEUR AU RADIATEUR)
0.5 0.5 0.5 1.2 1.2
HOSE FROM MUFFLER LEFT TO MUFFLER RIGHT

01 88
BOYAU DU SILENCIEUX GAUCHE AU SILENCIEUX DROIT
0.3 0.3 0.3 O.5 0.5
ENGINE BLOCK (CRANKCASE)

01 89
ENSEMBLE MOTEUR (CARTER)
8.6 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.1
ENGINE BLOCK RESEAL OR SEALANT

01 90
RESCELLEMENT DU MOTEUR OU SCELLANT
4.7 5.1 5.1 5.2 5.2
CRANKSHAFT AND/OR PLAIN BEARING AND/OR RING HALF

01 92 8.1 8.5 8.5 8.6 8.6
VILEBREQUIN ET/OU ROULEMENT PLAT ET/OU DEMI-BAGUE
WATER PUMP HOUSING (ASS’Y) AND/OR GASKET
01 93
BOÎTIER POMPE À EAU (COMPLET) E.5T/OU JOINT D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ
0.8 1.0 1.0 1.6 1.6
COOLING RESERVE
01 94
RÉSERVOIR ANTIGEL
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4
RADIATOR AND/OR FITTING

01 95
RADIATEUR ET/OU RACCORD DROIT
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.2 3.2
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

01 96 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
CAPTEUR DE POSITION DE L’ARBRE À CAMES
VALVE COVER AND/OR GASKET
01 97
COUVERCLE DE SOUPAPE ET/OU JOINT D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.6
CAMSHAFT
01 98
ARBRE À CAMES
1.1 1.1 1.1 1.8 1.8
CAMSHAFT GUIDE
01 99
GUIDE DE L’ARBRE À CAMES
0.6 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.0
CAMSHAFT CHAIN
01 174 CHAÎNE DE L’ARBRE À CAMES 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.6 8.6
TIMING GEAR
01 175 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.8 1.8
PIGNON DE DISTRIBUTION
ROCKER ARM (ASS’Y)
01 176 AXE DE CULBUTEUR (COMPLET) 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.0
EXHAUST VALVE, SPRINGS, SEAL, GUIDE (1)

01 177 SOUPAPE D’ÉCHAPPEMENT, RESSORTS, JOINT, GUIDE (1) 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.4 2.4
INTAKE VALVE, SRINGS, SEAL, GUIDE (1)

01 178 SOUPAPE D’ADMISSION, RESSORTS, JOINT, GUIDE (1) 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.4 2.4
CHAIN GUIDE
01 179 GUIDE DE CHAÎNE 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.8 0.8
OUTPUT SLEEVE, SEAL, STOP SLEEVE

01 180 1.7 2.4 2.4 2.4 3.0
MANCHON DE DÉBIT, JOINT, ARRÊT DU MANCHON
SEAL (OUTPUT SLEEVE)
01 181 JOINT (MANCHON DE DÉBIT) 1.0 1.8 1.8 1.7 2.4
OIL RADIATOR AND/OR O-RING

01 182 RADIATEUR D’HUILE ET/OU JOINT TORIQUE 3.7 3.7 3.7 4.4 4.4
Volume 3- Sea-doo 5
2015
01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
ENGINE
MOTEUR
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
OIL PUMP COVER AND/OR SHAFT AND/OR ROTOR (REAR)

01 183 2.4 3.2 3.2 4.5 4.5
COUVERCLE DE LA POMPE À L’HUILE ET/OU ARBRE ET/OU ROTOR (ARRIÈRE)
OIL PUMP HOUSING AND/OR ALL PARTS (FRONT)
01 184 BOÎTIER DE LA POMPE À L’HUILE ET/OU TOUTES LES PIÈCES (AVANT) 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.9 1.9
OIL SEPARATOR HOUSING AND/OR GASKET

01 186 BOÎTIER SÉPARATEUR D’HUILE ET/OU JOINT D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

01 189 INTERRUPTEUR DE PRESSION D’HUILE 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.3 1.3
PTO HOUSING AND/OR GASKET

01 190 BOÎTIER PDM ET/OU JOINT D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ 2.7 3.5 3.5 4.4 4.8
CHAIN TENSION GUIDE

01 191 5.4 5.8 5.8 5.9 5.9
GUIDE DE TENSION DE CHAÎNE
CHAIN TENSIONER (ASS’Y)
01 192 TENDEUR DE CHAÎNE (COMPLET) 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.7 0.7
OIL SIEVE (PTO)

01 193 TAMIS D’HUILE (PDM) 2.1 3.1 3.1 3.8 3.8
OIL FILTER AND/OR O-RING

01 194 FILTRE À HUILE ET/OU JOINT TORIQUE 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
VALVE SEAT SLEEVE, PISTON, SPRING, PLUG AND O-RING

01 195 MANCHON DE SIÈGE DE SOUPAPE, PISTON, RESSORT, BOUCHON ET JOINT 2.2 3.2 3.2 3.9 3.9
T0RIQUE
PRESSURE CAP
01 216 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
BOUCHON DE RADIATEUR
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CPS)
01 250 CAPTEUR POSITION DU VILEBREQUIN (CPV) 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.2 1.2
PRESSURE VALVE (ASS’Y)

01 251 SOUPAPE DE PRESSURISATION (COMPLET) 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
INJECTOR (ONE OR ALL)

01 253 INJECTEUR (UN OU TOUS) 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4

01 255 VALVES D’ÉCHAPPEMENT/D’ADMISSION ET/OU RESSORTS ET/OU ANNEAUX (4) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.9 2.9

01 256 2.6 2.6 2.6 3.3 3.3
VALVES D’ÉCHAPPEMENT/D’ADMISSION ET/OU RESSORTS ET/OU ANNEAUX (8)
01 257 VALVES D’ÉCHAP./D’ADMISSION. ET/OU RESSORTS ET/OU ANNEAUX (12) 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.7 3.7
COOLANT HOSE (WATER PUMP HOUSING TO ENGINE)

01 260 BOYAU DE REFROIDISSEMENT (BOÎTIER DE LA POMPE À EAU AU MOTEUR) 0.5 0.7 0.7 1.3 1.3
LONG BLOCK
01 264 ENSEMBLE CARTER-CYLINDRE-CULASSE 5.0 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4
WATER PUMP DYNAMIC SEAL AND/OR OIL SEAL

01 301 ANNEAU D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ DYNAMIQUE POMPE À EAU ET/OU ANNEAU 2.4 3.2 3.2 3.5 3.9
D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ D’HUILE
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
01 308 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.8 1.8
JOINT D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ DE LA CULASSE
2015
ENGINE
MOTEUR 01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
BOIL OUT PROCEDURE

01 341 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
PROCÉDURE MOTEUR INONDÉ
BALL BEARINGS WITH BELLOW
01 344 SOUFFLET ET ROULEMENTS À BILLE 1.0 1.9 1.9 2.7 2.7
Volume 3- Sea-doo 7
2015
01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
ENGINE
MOTEUR
0157
01192
0157
01189
0165
01182
F18D0DT
2015
ENGINE
MOTEUR 01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0183
0184
0185
01181 0192
01180
0143
F18D0ES
Volume 3- Sea-doo 9
2015
01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
ENGINE
MOTEUR
0197
01176
01251 01176
01177
01179 0105
01175 01178
0199
0196
0112 0114
01174
01191
01308
01177 01178
F18D35T
2015
ENGINE
MOTEUR 01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
01260
01194
01190
01250
01344
01301
0193
01183
01193
01195
F18G06V
Volume 3- Sea-doo 11
2015
01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
ENGINE
MOTEUR
01186
01184
F18G07S
2015
ENGINE
MOTEUR 01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
01216
0194
0195
0186
0187
Stf2009-002-001_a
2015
01
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
ENGINE
MOTEUR
0182
0188
0101
0152
0136
0153
0153
Stf2009-009-002_a
2015
FUEL SYSTEM
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
NO LABOR INVOLVED
02 00
0 0 0 0 0
REMOVAL AND/OR INSTALLATION OF AIR SILENCER

02 01 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.9 0.9
DÉPOSE ET/OU INSTALLATION SILENCIEUX ADMISSION D’AIR
FUEL TANK CAP AND/OR SEAL
02 26
BOUCHON DU RÉSERVOIR À ESSENCE ET/OU ANNEAU
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
FUEL TANK FILLER NECK AND/OR GASKET

02 27 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
GOULOT DE REMPLISSAGE ET/OU JOINT D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ
FUEL TANK STRAPS (2 OR 5)
02 29
SANGLES DU RÉSERVOIR À ESSENCE (2 OU 5)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5
FUEL TANK
02 31
RÉSERVOIR À ESSENCE
4.7 5.0 5.0 6.6 6.6
VENT CHECK VALVE (EACH)

02 35
SOUPAPE D’ARRÊT DU SYSTÈME DE VENTILATION (CHACUNE)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
FUEL TANK HOSE (FROM FILLER NECK TO FUEL TANK)

02 36
BOYAU À ESSENCE (GOULOT AU RÉSERVOIR)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
AIR SILENCER SUPPORT

02 60 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
SUPPORT DU SILENCIEUX D'ADMISSION
THROTTLE BODY (ASS’Y)
02 63
CARTER D’ACCÉLÉRATEUR (COMPLET)
0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
INJECTOR
02 64
INJECTEUR
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5
FUEL PUMP MODULE

02 66
MODULE POMPE À ESSENCE
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5
FUEL PUMP INLET FILTER

02 67
FILTRE DU CONDUIT D’ENTRÉE DE POMPE À ESSENCE
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5
FUEL RAIL
02 69 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5
RAIL D’ESSENCE
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (CARBURETOR ADAPTOR)
02 73
CAPTEUR DE TEMPÉRATURE D’AIR (ADAPTATEUR DE CARBURATEUR)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4
FUEL FEEDING HOSE (ASS’Y)

02 78 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.6
BOYAU D’ALIMENTATION D’ESSENCE (COMPLET)
AIR PRESSURE SENSOR
02 84
CAPTEUR PRESSION D’AIR
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.8 0.8
AIR INTAKE (ASS’Y)

02 85
ADMISSION D’AIR (COMPLET)
0.8 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.2
COMPRESSOR HOUSING AND/OR BOOSTER AND/OR O-RING

02 87
LOGEMENT DU COMPRESSEUR ET/OU PROPULSEUR ET/OU JOINT TORIQUE
1.2 1.2 1.6
COMPRESSOR IMPELLER AND/OR BALL BEARING AND/OR O-RING AND/OR STEP

COLLAR
02 88
TURBINE DE COMPRESSEUR ET/OU ROULEMENT À BILLES ET/OU JOINT TORIQUE
1.3 1.3 1.7
ET/OU PALIER
COMPRESSOR SHAFT (ASS’Y) AND/OR BALL BEARING
02 89
AXE DE COMPRESSEUR (COMPLET) ET/OU ROULEMENT À BILLES
1.5 1.5 1.9
2015
02
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
FUEL SYSTEM
SYSTÈME D'ESSENCE
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
DRIVE GEAR AND/OR NEEDLE PIN AND/OR SPRING WASHER

02 90 ENGRENAGE D’ENTRAÎNEMENT ET/OU GOUPILLE À AIGUILLE ET/OU RONDELLE 1.2 1.2 1.6
RESSORT
INTERCOOLER AND/OR O-RING
02 91
REFROIDISSEUR ET/OU JOINT TORIQUE
0.9 0.9 0.6
INTERCOOLER SUPPORT AND/OR ALL PARTS

02 92
SUPPORT DU REFROIDISSEUR ET/OU TOUTES LES PIÈCES
0.7
FUEL PUMP NUT AND/OR GASKET

02 93
ÉCROU DE LA POMPE À ESSENCE ET/OU JOINT D'ÉTANCHÉITÉ
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5
HOSE (BOOSTER INLET)

02 94
BOYAU (ENTRÉE DU PROPULSEUR)
0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5
HOSE (BOOSTER OUTLET)

02 96
BOYAU (SORTIE DU PROPULSEUR)
0.3 0.5
HOSE (THROTTLE BODY INLET)

02 97 0.3 0.5
BOYAU (ENTRÉE CARTER ACCÉLÉRATEUR)
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
02 98
CAPTEUR NIVEAU D'ESSENCE
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5
16 Sea-doo - Volume 3
2015
FUEL SYSTEM
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
1503 SCIC ETC

0269
0263
0284
0285
1503 HO
0273
0291
Stf2010-001-001_b
2015
02
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
FUEL SYSTEM
SYSTÈME D'ESSENCE
0287
0288
0289
0290
0287
F18F0PS
2015
FUEL SYSTEM
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0226
0293
0278
0227
0266
0267
0236
0298
0236
0231
0229
0229
stf2012-003-001_a
2015
02
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
FUEL SYSTEM
SYSTÈME D'ESSENCE
0201
0294
0201
0294
stf2011-002-001_a
2015
FUEL SYSTEM
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0201
0201
0201
0294
0292
0260
0296
0291
0297
Stf2009-002-004_a
2015
03
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
IGNITION
ALLUMAGE
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
NO LABOR INVOLVED
03 00
0 0 0 0 0
IGNITION COIL
03 04 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
BOBINE D’ALLUMAGE
MAGNETO FLYWHEEL
03 06
VOLANT MAGNÉTIQUE
2.5 3.6 3.6 4.0 4.0
STATOR PLATE (ASS’Y)

03 07 2.5 3.6 3.6 4.0 4.0
PLAQUE ARMATURE (COMPLET)
2015
IGNITION
ALLUMAGE 03
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0307
0306
F18R07S
2015
04
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
STARTER
DÉMARREUR
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
NO LABOR INVOLVED
04 00
0 0 0 0 0
ELECTRIC STARTER (ASS'Y)

04 02 0.5 0.6 0.6 1.3 1.3
DÉMARREUR ÉLECTRIQUE (COMPLET)
ONE OR ALL STARTER COMPONENTS
04 03
UNE OU TOUTES LES PIÈCES DU DÉMARREUR
0.7 0.8 0.8 1.5 1.5
STARTER RELAY
04 05 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
SOLÉNOÏDE DÉMARREUR
STARTER DRIVE (ASS’Y) AND/OR COVER
04 08
ENTRAÎNEMENT DU DÉMARREUR (COMPLET) ET/OU COUVERCLE
2.6 3.7 3.7 4.1 4.1
ELECTRIC STARTER DRIVE (ASS’Y)

04 10
ENTRAÎNEMENT DU DÉMARREUR ÉLECTRIQUE (COMPLET)
2.5 3.6 3.6 4.0 4.0
2015
STARTER
DÉMARREUR 04
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0402
0410
0408
F09D0XS
2015
05
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
PROPULSION
PROPULSION
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
NO LABOR INVOLVED
05 00
0 0 0 0 0
HOSE (FROM SCREEN BAILERS TO IMPELLER HOUSING)

05 02 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
BOYAU (TAMIS DÉCLENCHEMENT AU CARTER D’HÉLICE)
STEERING NOZZLE AND/OR BUSHING AND/OR SLEEVE
05 04
BUSE DE DIRECTION ET/OU DOUILLE ET/OU MANCHON
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
VENTURI AND/OR O-RING

05 05 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
VENTURI ET/OU JOINT TORIQUE
IMPELLER SHAFT HOUSING COVER AND/OR O-RINGS AND/OR GREASE
05 06
COUVERCLE ARBRE TURBINE ET/OU JOINT TORIQUE ET/OU GRAISSE
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
PTO FLYWHEEL RUBBER BOOT CLAMP (EACH)

05 07
COLLIER DE SERRAGE DU SOUFFLET VOLANT PDM (CHACUN)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4
PTO FLYWHEEL RUBBER BOOT

05 08
SOUFFLET CAOUTCHOUC VOLANT CÔTÉ PDM
0.7 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.2
IMPELLER HOUSING FITTING

05 10
RACCORD DU CARTER D'HÉLICE
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
DRIVE SHAFT AND/OR BUMPER PLUG

05 11 0.7 0.7 0.7 1.1 1.1
ARBRE DE TRANSMISSION ET/OU BOUCHON CONTRE CHOC
IMPELLER AND/OR SHAFT AND/OR WASHER AND/OR THRUST BEARING
05 12
TURBINE ET/OU ARBRE ET/OU RONDELLE ET/OU PALIER BUTÉE
1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
IMPELLER HOUSING (ASS’Y)

05 13
CARTER D’HÉLICE (COMPLET)
1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
IMPELLER SHAFT DOUBLE LIP SEAL AND/OR BEARING

05 14
ANNEAU ÉTANCHÉITÉ D'ARBRE TURBINE ET/OU ROULEMENT À BILLES
1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
WEAR RING
05 15
BAGUE D’USURE
1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
WATER INLET GRATE

05 18 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
GRILLE DE POMPE (ADMISSION D’EAU)
IMPELLER HOUSING REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
05 21
DÉPOSE ET INSTALLATION DU CARTER D’HÉLICE
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
REVERSE GATE (ASS’Y)

05 30 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
DÉFLECTEUR DE MARCHE ARRIÈRE (COMPLET)
PUMP SUPPORT
05 38
SUPPORT DE POMPE
3.3 3.3 3.3 3.5 3.5
RING CARBONE
05 45
BAGUE AU CARBONE
0.7 1.2 1.2 1.8 2.0
FLOATING RING
05 57
BAGUE FLOTTANTE
0.7 1.2 1.2 1.8 2.0
ARM BLACK
05 64
BRAS NOIR
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
ROD PIVOT
05 66 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
PIVOT DE RACCORD
2015
PROPULSION
PROPULSION 05
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
SUPPORT PLATE AND/OR SEALS (RIGHT SIDE)

05 72
PLAQUE SUPPORT ET/OU ANNEAU D'ÉTANCHÉITÉ (CÔTÉ DROIT)
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
SUPPORT PLATE AND/OR SEALS (LEFT SIDE)

05 73 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
PLAQUE SUPPORT ET/OU ANNEAU D'ÉTANCHÉITÉ (CÔTÉ GAUCHE)
FIXING PLATE (RIGHT SIDE)
05 74
PLAQUE FIXATION (CÔTÉ DROIT)
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
FIXING PLATE (LEFT SIDE)

05 75 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
PLAQUE FIXATION (CÔTÉ GAUCHE)
iBR ACTUATOR
05 76
ACTUATEUR iBR
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
GUARD
05 77
PROTECTEUR
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Volume 3 - Sea-doo 27
2015
05
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
PROPULSION
PROPULSION
0512
0514
0513
0513
0515 0506
0505
0510
0502
Stf2009-002-005_ a
2015
PROPULSION
PROPULSION 05
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0574
0572
0566
0564
0504
0564
0566
0530
0573
0576
0575
0577
Stf2009-002-007_ a
Volume 3 - Sea-doo 29
2015
05
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
PROPULSION
PROPULSION
0557
See Pump System/

Voir Système Pompe
0511
0545
0538
0508
0507
0518
stf2011-002-002_a
2015
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
GTX/WAKE
GTX iS/
RXT aS
GTX S
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
NO LABOR INVOLVED
07 00 0 0 0 0 0
HANDLE GRIP (1 OR 2)
07 01
GAINE DE GUIDON (1 OU 2)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
HANDLE HOUSING (LEFT)

07 03
LOGEMENT DE GUIDON (GAUCHE)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
THROTTLE HANDLE HOUSING (RIGHT)

07 04
LOGEMENT DE MANETTE D’ACCÉLÉRATEUR (DROIT)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
STEERING COVER AND/OR FOAM

07 05
COUVRE-GUIDON ET/OU MOUSSE
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
HANDLEBAR
07 06 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
GUIDON
STEERING STEM ARM
07 07
BRAS DE TIGE DE DIRECTION
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
STEERING CABLE (FROM NOZZLE TO STEM ARM)

07 13 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.3 1.3
CÂBLE DE DIRECTION (DE LA BUSE AU BRAS DE TIGE)
FRONT BALL JOINT STEERING CABLE
07 14
JOINT À ROTULE AVANT (CÂBLE DE DIRECTION)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
REAR BALL JOINT STEERING CABLE (1 OR 2)

07 15
JOINT À ROTULE ARRIÈRE (CÂBLE DE DIRECTION) (1 OU 2)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
STEERING SUPPORT
07 44
SUPPORT DIRECTION
1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
GAUGE SUPPORT, COVER AND TRIM

07 80
SUPPORT DE CADRAN, COUVERCLE ET ENJOLIVEUR
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
THROTTLE HANDLE AND/OR BUSHINGS

07 81 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
MANETTE ACCÉLÉRATEUR ET/OU COUSSINETS
REVERSE HANDLE AND/OR BUSHINGS
07 82
MANETTE DE RENVERSE ET/OU COUSSINETS
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
ADJUSTABLE LATCH, PIVOTS AND LOCK

07 83
LOQUET AJUSTABLE, PIVOTS ET VERROU
1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
STEERING PIVOT (RIGHT AND/OR LEFT)

07 84
PIVOT DE DIRECTION (DROIT ET/OU GAUCHE)
1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
WEAR RING
07 85
BAGUE D'USURE
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
GROMMET CABLE
07 86
SOUFFLET DE CÂBLE
1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
ADAPTER CABLE
07 87
ADAPTATEUR DE CABLE
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
2015
07
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
DIRECTION ET COMMANDES
0705
0780
0744
0782
0706
0701
0703
0704
0781
0714
0701
0707
Stf2009-002-008_ a
2015
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0785
0784
0744
0784
0783
0786
0713
0787
0715
Stf2009-002-009_b
2015
08
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
SUSPENSION
SUSPENSION
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
NO LABOR INVOLVED
08 00
0 0
FRONT ARM AND/OR SHAFT

08 01 6.0 6.0
BRAS AVANT ET/OU ARBRE
FRONT ARM BASE
08 02
BASE DE BRAS AVANT
6.4 6.4
SPRING, SUPPORT, SPACER, PROTECTOR AND CLAMP

08 03 1.2 1.2
RESSORT, SUPPORT, ESPACEUR, PROTECTEUR ET BRIDE
SHOCK AND BUSHINGS
08 04
AMORTISSEUR ET COUSSINETS
1.4 1.4
SHOCK SUPPORT (UPPER)

08 05
SUPPORT D'AMORTISSEUR (SUPÉRIEUR)
1.2 1.2
ACTUATOR AND BUSHINGS

08 06
ACTIONNEUR ET COUSSINETS
2.0 2.0
ACTUATOR PUMP
08 07
POMPE DE L'ACTIONNEUR
2.0
SHOCK LOWER SUPPORT

08 08 1.4 1.4
SUPPORT D'AMORTISSEUR INFÉRIEUR
ACTUATOR LOWER SUPPORT
08 09
SUPPORT INFÉRIEUR DE L'ACTIONNEUR
1.9 1.9
HYDRAULIC HOSE
08 10
BOYAU HYDRAULIQUE
2.0
ALIGNMENT ARM, ADAPTOR, BRACKET AND BUSHINGS

08 11
BRAS ALIGNEMENT, ADAPTEUR, ATTACHE ET COUSSINETS
1.9
SENSOR BRACKET, LEVER, COVER AND O-RING

08 12
ATTACHE CAPTEUR, LEVIER, COUVERCLE ET JOINT TORIQUE
0.6
POSITION SENSOR AND O-RING

08 13 0.6
CAPTEUR DE POSITION ET JOINT TORIQUE
CLAMP AND/OR BUMPER (RIGHT OR LEFT)
08 14
BRIDE DE RETENUE ET/OU BUTÉE (DROITE OU GAUCHE)
2.0 2.0
RUBBER BUMPER (RIGHT OR LEFT)

08 15 0.7 0.7
BUTÉE DE CAOUTCHOUC (DROITE OU GAUCHE)
FOOTREST, BUMPER AND BUSHING (RIGHT OR LEFT)
08 16
REPOSE-PIEDS, BUTÉE ET COUSSINET (DROIT OU GAUCHE)
0.7 0.7
LATERAL BELLOW AND RING (RIGHT)

08 17
SOUFFLET LATÉRAL ET ANNEAU (DROIT)
0.9 0.9
LATERAL BELLOW AND RING (LEFT)

08 18
SOUFFLET LATÉRAL ET ANNEAU (GAUCHE)
0.9 0.9
FRONT ARM SHAFT (FRONT)

08 19
ARBRE DU BRAS AVANT (AVANT)
6.0 6.0
CENTRAL BELLOW AND PLATE

08 20 0.9 0.9
SOUFFLET CENTRAL ET PLAQUE
2015
SUSPENSION
SUSPENSION 08
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
REAR ARM MOULDING

08 21
ENJOLIVEUR BRAS ARRIÈRE
0.5 0.5
REAR ARM
08 22 0.9 0.9
BRAS ARRIÈRE
REAR BASES, BUSHINGS, BUMPERS AND SHAFT
08 23
BASES ARRIÈRE, COUSSINETS, BUTÉES ET ARBRE
0.6 0.6
CLAMP, BUSHINGS AND BUMPERS

08 24 0.8 0.8
BRIDE DE RETENUE, COUSSINETS ET BUTÉES
REAR ARM SHAFT (UPPER)
08 25
ARBRE DU BRAS ARRIÈRE (SUPÉRIEUR)
0.8 0.8
U-CLAMP AND/OR SKI HOOK AND/OR PLATE

08 26
BRIDE EN U ET/OU CROCHET SKI ET/OU PLAQUE
0.5 0.5
2015
36
Front arm/bras avant
0818
08
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
Stf2009-002-010_a
0820
0816
0805
0819
SUSPENSION
SUSPENSION
0803
0814
0804 0816
0815
0801
0813
0817
2015
0812
0808 0816
0806 0814
0809
0807 0811
0809
0810 0815
0802
Sea-doo - Volume 3
SUSPENSION
SUSPENSION 08
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
Rear arm/bras arrière
0826
0824
0821
0825
0822
0824
0823
Stf2009-002-011_a
2015
09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
BODY
CARROSSERIE
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
NO LABOR INVOLVED
09 00
0 0 0 0 0
FRONT BUMPER
09 01 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
PARE-CHOCS AVANT
SIDE BUMPER (LEFT OR RIGHT) (1)
09 02
PARE-CHOCS LATÉRAL (GAUCHE OU DROIT) (1)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
SIDE BUMPER (BOTH SIDE) (2)

09 04 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
PARE-CHOCS LATÉRAL (LES DEUX CÔTÉS) (2)
REAR BUMPER
09 06
PARE-CHOCS ARRIÈRE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
“U” CLAMP AND/OR SKI HOOK AND/OR FINITION/RETAINER PLATE

09 09
BRIDE EN «U» ET/OU CROCHET SKI ET/OU PLAQUE RETENUE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5
STORAGE COVER (ANY OR ALL PARTS)

09 10
COUVERCLE À BAGAGES (UNE OU TOUTES LES PIÈCES)
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
STORAGE COVER LATCH

09 12
LOQUET DU COUVERCLE À BAGAGES
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
STORAGE COVER NEOPRENE SEAL

09 13 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
ANNEAU EN NÉOPRÈNE DU COUVERCLE À BAGAGES
STORAGE COVER DECAL
09 14
AUTOCOLLANT DU COUVERCLE À BAGAGES
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
SIDE BODY DECAL (RIGHT) (1 OR 2)

09 15
AUTOCOLLANT LATÉRAL DE LA CARROSSERIE (DROIT) (1 OU 2)
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
SIDE BODY DECAL (LEFT) (1 OR 2)

09 16
AUTOCOLLANT LATÉRAL DE LA CARROSSERIE (GAUCHE) (1 OU 2)
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
ALL BODY DECALS

09 17
TOUS LES AUTOCOLLANTS DE LA CARROSSERIE
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
SIDE CARPET (1)

09 19 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
TAPIS LATÉRAL (1)
SIDE CARPET (2)
09 20
TAPIS LATÉRAL (2)
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
REAR CARPET
09 21 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
TAPIS ARRIÈRE
SEAT (ASS’Y)
09 22
SIÈGE (COMPLET)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
SEAT COVER
09 24
HOUSSE DE SIÈGE
1.9 1.9 1.9 2. 2.1
SEAT BASE NEOPRENE SEAL

09 26
ANNEAU EN NÉOPRÈNE DE LA BASE DU SIÈGE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
SEAT LACHT (ANY OR ALL PARTS)

09 28
LOQUET DE SIÈGE (UNE OU TOUTES LES PIÈCES)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
LACHT STUD ( SEAT)

09 30 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
ERGOT D’ENCRAGE (SIÈGE)
2015
BODY
CARROSSERIE 09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
BOX GLOVES
09 35
COFFRE À GANTS
0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
PLATFORM CARPET (RIGHT OR LEFT)

09 36 0.3 0.3
TAPIS DE PLATE-FORME (DROIT OU GAUCHE)
GRAB HANDLE
09 37
POIGNÉE DE MAINTIEN
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
SPONSON (RIGHT OR LEFT) (EACH)

09 38 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
STABILISATEUR (DROIT OU GAUCHE) (CHACUN)
MIRROR (1)
09 39
RÉTROVISEUR (1)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
MIRRORS (2)
09 40
RÉTROVISEURS (2)
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
SIDE HULL DECAL (1)

09 44
AUTOCOLLANT LATÉRAL DE LA COQUE (1)
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
SIDE HULL DECALS (RIGHT) (2)

09 45
AUTOCOLLANTS LATÉRAUX DE LA COQUE (2)
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
SIDE MOULDING (RIGHT OR LEFT)

09 46 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
ENJOLIVEUR LATÉRAL (DROIT OU GAUCHE)
REAR SIDE BODY DECAL
09 50
AUTOCOLLANT ARRIÈRE DE LA CARROSSERIE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
BRP DECAL(S)
09 51
AUTOCOLLANT(S) BRP
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
REBORDING LADDER ANT/OR SUPPORT (ASS’Y)

09 55
ÉCHELLE D’EMBARQUEMENT ET/OU SUPPORT (COMPLET)
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
SIDE GRILL (RIGHT OR LEFT)

09 56
GRILLE LATÉRALE (DROITE OU GAUCHE)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
SEAT SHOCK
09 68 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
AMORTISSEUR DE SIÈGE
EXTINGUISHER AND/OR STORAGE
09 72
BOÎTIER EXTINCTEUR ET/OU DE RANGEMENT
0.3 0.3
DEFLECTOR
09 77 0.3 0.3
DÉFLECTEUR
STORAGE TRAY
09 78
COFFRE À BAGAGES
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
SPONSON SPACER
09 100 ENTRETOISE DU STABILISATEUR 1.0 1.2
SIDE CARPETS (3)

09 152 TAPIS LATÉRAUX (3) 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
SUPERIOR MOULDING (RIGHT OR LEFT)

09 166 ENJOLIVEUR SUPÉRIEUR (DROIT OU GAUCHE) 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
FRONT GRILL
09 168 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
GRILLE FRONTALE
2015
09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
BODY
CARROSSERIE
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
SIDE CARPETS (4)

09 204 TAPIS LATÉRAUX (4) 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
SIDE CARPETS (5)

09 205 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
TAPIS LATÉRAUX (5)
SIDE CARPETS (6)
09 206 TAPIS LATÉRAUX (6) 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
SIDE CARPETS (ALL)

09 207 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
TAPIS LATÉRAUX (TOUS)
GAS SHOCK
09 223 AMORTISSEUR À GAZ 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
HANDLE STEM (WAKE PYLON)

09 254 POIGNÉE (POTEAU WAKE) 0.4
EXTENSION TUBE (WAKE PYLON)

09 255 TUBE D’EXTENSION (POTEAU WAKE) 1.0
WAKE PYLON MOULDED

09 256 POTEAU WAKE MOULÉ 1.0
LOCKING STRAP
09 257 0.3
COURROIE DE BLOCAGE
BLEED PLUG
09 262 BOUCHON DE PURGE 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
MOVING DECK (WITHOUT BODY PARTS)

09 267 PONT MOBILE (SANS LES PIÈCES DE CARROSSERIES) 5.0 5.0
REAR CONTROL ARM ADAPTOR

09 268 ADAPTATEUR DU BRAS CONTRÔLE ARRIÈRE 1.2 1.2
DECK EXTENSION AND SEAL

09 269 RALLONGE DE PONT ET JOINT D'ÉTANCHÉITÉ 0.5 0.5
FRONT SCRAPER JOINT (RIGHT)

09 270 0.8 0.8
JOINT RACLEUR AVANT (DROIT)
FRONT SCRAPER JOINT (LEFT)
09 271 JOINT RACLEUR AVANT (GAUCHE) 0.8 0.8
SIDE SCRAPER JOINT (RIGHT OR LEFT)

09 272 0.4 0.4
JOINT RACLEUR LATÉRAL (DROIT OU GAUCHE)
REAR SCRAPER JOINT (RIGHT OR LEFT)
09 273 JOINT RACLEUR ARRIÈRE (DROIT OU GAUCHE) 0.4 0.4
REAR GRILL (RIGHT OR LEFT)

09 274 GRILLE ARRIÈRE (DROITE OU GAUCHE) 0.3 0.3
SPEED-TIE (ASS'Y)
09 275 ATTACHE D'AMARRAGE RAPIDE (COMPLET) 0.3 0.3
SPEED-TIE (ALL PARTS)

09 276 ATTACHE D'AMARRAGE RAPIDE (TOUTES LES PIÈCES) 0.4 0.4
SUSPENSION MOUNTING PLATE (UPPER)

09 277 0.5 0.5
PLAQUE DE MONTAGE DE SUSPENSION (SUPÉRIEURE)
2015
BODY
CARROSSERIE 09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
SUSPENSION MOUNTING PLATE (LOWER)

09 278 PLAQUE DE MONTAGE DE SUSPENSION (INFÉRIEURE) 0.5 0.5
FRONT BODY MODULE

09 279 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
MODULE DE CARROSSERIE AVANT
LOWER MOULDING (RIGHT OR LEFT)
09 280 ENJOLIVEUR INFÉRIEUR (DROIT OU GAUCHE) 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
REAR PLATFORM AND/OR PIVOTS

09 281 0.5 0.5
PLATE-FORME ARRIÈRE ET/OU PIVOTS
LATCH AND/OR BASE (RIGHT OR LEFT)
09 282 LOQUET ET/OU BASE (DROIT OU GAUCHE) 0.3 0.3
REAR BIN AND/OR SEAL

09 283 COFFRE ARRIÈRE ET/OU JOINT D'ÉTANCHÉITÉ 0.3 0.3
BOX DOOR
09 284 PORTE DE COFFRE 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
MOUNTING CASE ABSORBER

09 377 BOÎTIER DE FIXATION D’AMORTISSEUR 0.6 0.6 0.6
HULL INSERT
09 382 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.5 5.5
PASSE-COQUE
ACCESS COVER (ASS’Y) (RIGHT OR LEFT)
09 383 COUVERCLE D’ACCÈS (COMPLET) (DROIT OU GAUCHE) 0.3 0.3 0.3
TRIM TAB
09 402 CORRECTEUR D’ASSIETTE 0.3 0.3
2015
09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
BODY
CARROSSERIE
0946
0930 0901
09279
09166 09166
0946
0937
0902
0904 09280
09280
09383
09377
0902
0904
09383
0906
Stf2010-001-002_b
2015
BODY
CARROSSERIE 09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
09254
09255
09256 09257
Stf2009-001-002_a
2015
09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
BODY
CARROSSERIE
0937
09267
0930
09277
09268
09152
09204
09205
09206
09307
0919
0920
Stf2009-002-012_a
2015
BODY
CARROSSERIE 09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0946
09166
09168
09279
09275
09280
09166
09278
0956
0946
09280
Stf2009-002-013_a
0956
2015
46
09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
Stf2009-002-014_a
0901
BODY
09269
CARROSSERIE
09271
0902 09273
0904 09269 09270
09272
2015
09274 0977
09273
09274
0902
0904
09272
0906
09276
09275
LTD
Sea-doo - Volume 3
BODY
CARROSSERIE 09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
0922
0924
0928
0926
0968
Stf2009-002-015_a
2015
09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
BODY
CARROSSERIE
09402
09382
0938
09262 0955
09100
0938
stf2013-002-001_a
0909
2015
BODY
CARROSSERIE 09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
09382
0938
0938
09382
09262
0955
stf2011-002-003_a
2015
09
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
BODY
CARROSSERIE
0921
0936
0936
09281
09282
0972
09282 09223
09283
09284
0913
0935
0978
0912
Stf2009-002-017_a
2015
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
NO LABOR INVOLVED
10 00
0 0 0 0 0
BATTERY
10 03 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
BATTERIE
GROUND CABLE
10 04
CÂBLE DE MASSE
0.4 0.4 0.4 1.0 1.0
BATTERY RED CABLE (BATTERY TO STARTER RELAY)

10 05 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
CÂBLE ROUGE DE BATTERIE (BATTERIE AU SOLÉNOÏDE)
BATTERY RED CABLE (STARTER TO STARTER RELAY)
10 06
CÂBLE ROUGE DE BATTERIE (DÉMARREUR AU SOLÉNOÏDE)
0.4 0.4 0.4 1.0 1.0
REGULATOR (ASS'Y)/RECTIFIER (ASS’Y)

10 11
RÉGULATEUR (COMPLET)/REDRESSEUR (COMPLET)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
MAIN HARNESS (ASS’Y)

10 12
CÂBLAGE PRINCIPAL (COMPLET)
2.2 2.2 2.2 2.8 2.8
BATTERY SUPPORT
10 15
SUPPORT DE BATTERIE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
D.E.S.S. KEY
10 28 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
CLÉ D.E.S.S.
L.C.D INFO GAUGE (MULTIFUNCTION GAUGE)
10 46
CADRAN INFO MULTIFONCTION
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT

10 56
UNITÉ CONTRÔLE ÉLECTRONIQUE
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
DEPTH SENDER
10 59
PROFONDIMÈTRE
0.3
ENGINE HARNESS (ASS’Y)

10 61
CÂBLAGE MOTEUR (COMPLET)
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.7 1.7
STEERING HARNESS (ASS’Y)

10 62 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
CÂBLAGE GUIDON (COMPLET)
OTAS SWITCH
10 64
INTERRUPTEUR DE L’OTAS
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
D.E.S.S. POST
10 65 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
BORNE D.E.S.S.
TOPS SWITCH
10 66
INTERRUPTEUR TOPS
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
STARTING RELAY
10 77
RELAIS DE DÉMARRAGE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
OTAS ACTUATOR
10 78
ACTIONNEUR DE L’OTAS
0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
BRAKE SENSOR
10 79
CAPTEUR DE FREINAGE
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
THROTTLE SENSOR
10 80 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
CAPTEUR D'ACCÉLÉRATEUR
2015
10
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SYSTÈME ÉLECTRIQUE
GTX iS /
RXT aS
WAKE
GTX S
GTX /
GTX
RXT
SYSTÈME
SYSTEM
CODE
DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10
CONTROLE SWITCH (RIGHT OR LEFT)

10 81
INTERRUPTEUR DE CONTRÔLE (DROIT OU GAUCHE)
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
ELECTRONIC SUSPENSION MODULE

10 82 0.3
MODULE DE SUSPENSION ÉLECTRONIQUE
2015
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SYSTEM/SYSTÈME
1079
1081 1046
1028 1080
1062 1078
1064
1081
1012
1082
1004 1006
1011
1005
0977
1003
1015
Stf2009-002-018_a
2015
SERIES
2015
GTS / GTI / GTR / WAKE

OPERATOR’S
GUIDE
Includes Safety, Watercraft and
Maintenance Information
GTS /GTI /GTR /WAKE

TM TM TM TM
SERIES
219 001 397
Read this guide thoroughly.
2015
OPERATOR’S GUIDE, GTS / GTI / GTR / WAKE SERIES / ENGLISH It contains important safety information.
GUIDE DU CONDUCTEUR, SÉRIE GTS / GTI / GTR / WAKE / ANGLAIS Minimum recommended operator’s age: 16 years old.
Keep this Operator’s Guide in the watercraft.
FAIT AU / MADE IN CANADA U/M:P.C
2 1 9 0 0 1 3 9 7
®™ AND THE BRP LOGO ARE TRADEMARKS OF BOMBARDIER RECREATIONAL PRODUCTS INC. OR ITS AFFILIATES.
©2014 BOMBARDIER RECREATIONAL PRODUCTS INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN CANADA. Original Instructions
WARNING
Disregarding any of the safety precautions and instructions contained in
this Operator’s Guide, SAFETY DVD video and on-product safety labels
could cause injury including the possibility of death!
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
This vehicle contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
In Canada, products are distributed by Bombardier Recreational Products Inc.

(BRP).
In USA, products are distributed by BRP US Inc.
Knight’s Spray-Nine† is a trademark of Korkay System Ltd.
GTX† is a trademark of Castrol Ltd. Used under license.
This is a non-exhaustive list of trademarks that are the property of Bombardier
Recreational Products Inc. or its affiliates:
4-TECTM Rotax® VTSTM
D.E.S.S.TM GTS TM XPSTM
iBRTM GTITM 130 GTITM
iControlTM Sea-Doo® GTITM SE 130
Learning KeyTM Sea-Doo LKTM GTITM SE 155
iTCTM GTITM Limited 155 WAKETM 155
GTRTM 215 GTS TM Rental O.T.A.S.TM
T.O.P.S.TM
smo2015-001 en
FOREWORD
Dieses Handbuch ist möglicherweise in Ihrer Landessprache
Deutsch verfügbar. Bitte wenden Sie sich an Ihren Händler oder besuchen Sie:
www.operatorsguide.brp.com.
This guide may be available in your language. Check with your dealer or
English
go to: www.operatorsguide.brp.com.
Es posible que este manual esté disponible en su idioma. Consulte a su
Español
distribuidor o visite: www.operatorsguide.brp.com.
Ce guide peut être disponible dans votre langue. Vérifier avec votre
Français
concessionnaire ou aller à: www.operatorsguide.brp.com.
このガイドは、言語によって翻訳版が用意されています。.
日本語ディーラーに問い合わせるか、次のアドレスでご確認ください：
Deze handleiding kan beschikbaar zijn in uw taal. Vraag het aan uw dealer
Nederlands
of ga naar: www.operatorsguide.brp.com.
Denne boken kan finnes tilgjengelig på ditt eget språk. Kontakt din
Norsk
forhandler eller gå til: www.operatorsguide.brp.com.
Este manual pode estar disponível em seu idioma. Fale com sua
Português
concessionária ou visite o site: www.operatorsguide.brp.com.
Käyttöohjekirja voi olla saatavissa omalla kielelläsi. Tarkista jälleenmyyjältä
Suomi
tai käy osoitteessa: www.operatorsguide.brp.com.
Denna bok kan finnas tillgänglig på ditt språk. Kontakta din återförsäljare
Svenska
eller gå till: www.operatorsguide.brp.com.
Congratulations on your purchase Know Before you Go

of a new Sea-Doo® personal water- To learn how to reduce the risk for you
craft (PWC). It is backed by the BRP or other persons being injured or killed,
warranty and a network of authorized read the following sections before you
Sea-Doo personal watercraft dealers operate the watercraft:
ready to provide the parts, service or
accessories you may require. – SAFETY INFORMATION
– WATERCRAFT INFORMATION.
Your dealer is committed to your sat-
isfaction. He has taken training to per- Read and understand all safety labels
form the initial setup and inspection of on your watercraft and watch atten-
your watercraft as well as completed tively your SAFETY DVD video.
the final adjustment before you took Failure to follow the warnings con-
possession. If you need more com- tained in this Operator's Guide can
plete servicing information, please ask result in serious injury or death.
your dealer.
BRP highly recommends that you take
At delivery, you were also informed of a safe boating course. Please check
the warranty coverage and signed the with your dealer or local authorities for
PREDELIVERY CHECK LIST to ensure availability in your area.
your new watercraft was prepared to
your entire satisfaction. In certain areas, an operator compe-
tency card is mandatory to operate a
pleasure craft.
_______________ 1
FOREWORD
WARNING The information contained in this doc-

ument is correct at the time of publica-
Get familiar with this PWC; it may tion. However, BRP maintains a pol-
exceed the performance of other icy of continuous improvement of its
PWCs you have ridden. products without imposing upon itself
any obligation to install them on prod-
Safety Messages ucts previously manufactured. Due
to late changes, some differences be-
This Operator’s Guide utilizes the fol- tween the manufactured product and
lowing symbols and words to empha- the descriptions and/or specifications
size particular information: in this guide may occur. BRP reserves
the right at any time to discontinue or
The safety alert symbol indicates change specifications, designs, fea-
a potential injury hazard. tures, models or equipment without
incurring any obligation upon itself.
WARNING This Operator's Guide and the SAFETY
Indicates a potential hazard which, DVD video should remain with the wa-
if not avoided, could result in seri- tercraft when it's sold.
ous injury or death.
CAUTION Indicates a poten-

tially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates an instruction
which, if not followed, could se-
verely damage watercraft compo-
nents or other property.
About this Operator's

Guide
This Operator's Guide has been pre-
pared to acquaint the owner/operator
or passenger with this personal water-
craft and its various controls, mainte-
nance and safe riding instructions.
Keep this Operator's Guide in the wa-
tercraft as you can refer to it for oper-
ation, instructing others, maintenance
and troubleshooting.
Note that this guide is available in sev-
eral languages. In the event of any dis-
crepancy, the English version shall pre-
vail.
If you want to view and/or print an
extra copy of your Operator's Guide,
simply visit the following website
2 _______________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Know Before you Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Safety Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
About this Operator's Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SAFETY INFORMATION
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Avoid Carbon Monoxide Poisoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Avoid Gasoline Fires and Other Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Avoid Burns from Hot Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SPECIAL SAFETY MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Reminders Regarding Safe Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Water Sports (Towing with the Watercraft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Hypothermia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Safe Boating Courses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ACTIVE TECHNOLOGIES (iCONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
iTC (intelligent Throttle Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
iBR (intelligent Brake and Reverse System) (All Models Except GTS) . . . . . . 17
SAFETY EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Required Safety Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Additional Recommended Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
PRACTICE EXERCISES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Where to Practice Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Practice Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Important Factors Not to Neglect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
NAVIGATION RULES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Operating Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
FUELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Fueling Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Fuel Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
TRAILERING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
IMPORTANT ON-PRODUCT LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Watercraft Safety Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Compliance Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
PRE-RIDE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
What to Do Before Launching the Watercraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
What to Do After Launching the Watercraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
_______________ 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WATERCRAFT INFORMATION
CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1) Handlebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2) Engine START/STOP Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3) Engine Cut-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4) Throttle Lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5) iBR Lever (intelligent Brake and Reverse) (All Models Except GTS). . . . . . 49
6) MODE/SET Buttons (All Models Except GTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
7) UP/DOWN Buttons (All Models Except GTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
8) Cruise Button (GTI Limited and WAKE Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
9) VTS Button (Variable Trim System) (GTI Limited and GTR Models) . . . . . . 50
10) Sport Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
11) ECO Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
INFORMATION CENTER (GAUGE) (GTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Multifunction Gauge Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Gauge Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
INFORMATION CENTER (GAUGES) (GTI/GTR/WAKE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Multifunction Gauge Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Multifunction Gauge Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Navigating the Multifunction Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Changing Numerical Display Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Resetting Numerical Display Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Multifunction Gauge Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Analog Speedometer Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Analog Tachometer Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1) Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2) Front Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3) Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4) Passenger Handhold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5) Boarding Step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
6) Boarding Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7) Front and Rear Eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8) Bilge Drain Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
9) Ski/Wakeboard Post (WAKE Model Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
10) Wakeboard Rack (WAKE Model Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
BREAK-IN PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Operation During Break-In Period. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Boarding the Watercraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
How to Start Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
How to Stop the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
How to Steer the Watercraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
How to Engage Neutral (iBR Equipped Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
How to Engage Forward (iBR Equipped Models Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4 _______________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (cont’d)

How to Engage and Use Reverse (iBR Equipped Models Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
How to Engage and Use Braking (iBR Equipped Models Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
How to Use the Variable Trim System (VTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
General Operating Recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
OPERATING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Touring Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
ECO Mode (Fuel Economy Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Cruise Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Slow Speed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Ski Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Learning Key and Rental Key Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
SPECIAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Jet Pump Water Intake and Impeller Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Capsized Watercraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Submerged Watercraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Water-Flooded Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Towing the Watercraft in Water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Ignition Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Ride Plate and Water Intake Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Sacrificial Anode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Ski/Wakeboard Post (Wake). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
WATERCRAFT CARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Post-Operation Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Watercraft Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
STORAGE AND PRESEASON PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Preseason Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
WATERCRAFT IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Hull Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Engine Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
_______________ 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
RF D.E.S.S. KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

ENGINE EMISSIONS INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Manufacturer's Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Dealer's Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Owner Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
EPA Emission Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

MONITORING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Fault Indicators and Message Display Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Beeper Code Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
WARRANTY
BRP LIMITED WARRANTY – USA AND CANADA: 2015 SEA-DOO® PERSONAL

WATERCRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
US EPA EMISSION-RELATED WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
CALIFORNIA AND NEW YORK EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY
STATEMENT FOR MODEL YEAR 2015 SEA-DOO® PERSONAL
WATERCRAFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
BRP INTERNATIONAL LIMITED WARRANTY: 2015 SEA-DOO® PERSONAL
WATERCRAFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
BRP LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE EUROPEAN ECONOMIC AREA,
THE COMMONWEALTH OF THE INDEPENDENT STATES, TURKEY: 2015
SEA-DOO® PERSONAL WATERCRAFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
CUSTOMER INFORMATION
PRIVACY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

CHANGE OF ADDRESS/OWNERSHIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
6 _______________
SAFETY
INFORMATION
________ SAFETY INFORMATION ________ 7

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
Avoid Carbon Monoxide flame many feet away from the en-
Poisoning gine. To reduce the risk of fire or explo-
sion, follow these instructions:
All engine exhaust contains carbon
monoxide, a deadly gas. Breathing car- – Use only an approved red gasoline
bon monoxide can cause headaches, container to store fuel.
dizziness, drowsiness, nausea, confu- – Strictly adhere to the instructions in
sion and eventually death. FUELING section.
Carbon monoxide is a colorless, odor- – Never start watercraft if gasoline or
less, tasteless gas that may be present gasoline vapor odors is present in
even if you do not see or smell any en- the engine compartment.
gine exhaust. Deadly levels of carbon – Never start or operate the engine if
monoxide can collect rapidly, and you the fuel cap is not properly secured.
can quickly be overcome and unable – Do not carry gasoline containers in
to save yourself. Also, deadly levels of the front storage compartment or
carbon monoxide can linger for hours anywhere else on the watercraft.
or days in enclosed or poorly ventilated Gasoline is poisonous and can cause
areas. If you experience any symp- injury or death.
toms of carbon monoxide poisoning,
leave the area immediately, get fresh – Never siphon gasoline with your
air and seek medical treatment. mouth.
– If you swallow gasoline, get any in
To prevent serious injury or death from your eyes, or inhale gasoline vapors,
carbon monoxide: see a doctor immediately.
– Never run the watercraft in poorly
ventilated or partially enclosed ar- If gasoline is spilled on you, wash
eas such as watercraft houses, sea- thoroughly with soap and water and
walls or other boats in close prox- change your clothes.
imity. Even if you try to ventilate
engine exhaust, carbon monoxide Avoid Burns from Hot Parts
can rapidly reach dangerous levels. Certain components may become hot
– Never run the watercraft outdoors during operation. Avoid contact dur-
where engine exhaust can be drawn ing and shortly after operation to avoid
into a building through openings burns.
such as windows and doors.
– Never stand behind the watercraft Accessories and
while the engine is running. A per- Modifications
son standing behind a running en-
gine may inhale high concentrations Do not make unauthorized modifica-
of exhaust fumes. Inhalation of con- tions, or use accessories that are not
centrated exhaust fumes that con- approved by BRP. Since these changes
tain carbon monoxide can result in have not been tested by BRP, they
CO poisoning, serious health prob- may increase the risk of accidents or
lems and death. injuries, and they can make the water-
craft illegal for use on water.
Avoid Gasoline Fires and See your authorized Sea-Doo dealer
Other Hazards for available accessories for your wa-
tercraft.
Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive. Fuel vapors can
spread and be ignited by a spark or
8 ________ SAFETY INFORMATION ________

SPECIAL SAFETY MESSAGES
Reminders Regarding Safe When braking, riders must brace them-
Operation selves against the deceleration force
to prevent from moving forward on the
The performance of this watercraft watercraft and losing balance.
may significantly exceed that of other
watercraft you may have operated. When operating an iBR equipped wa-
Make sure you read and understand tercraft, be aware that other boats fol-
the content of this Operator's Guide lowing or operating in close proximity
to become completely familiar with may not be able to stop as quickly.
the controls and operation of the wa- When at speed and the brake is first
tercraft before embarking on your first applied, a plume of water will shoot up
trip, or taking on a passenger(s). If you in the air behind the watercraft which
have not had the opportunity to do so, may cause the operator of a following
practice driving solo in a suitable traf- watercraft to momentarily loose sight
fic free area to become accustomed of your PWC. It is important to inform
to the feel and response of each con- the operator of a watercraft who in-
trol. Be fully familiar with all controls tends to follow in a convoy formation,
before accelerating above idle speed. of the braking and maneuvering capa-
Do not assume that all PWCs handle bility of your PWC, what the plume of
identically. Each model differs, often water indicates, and that a greater dis-
substantially. tance should be maintained between
Always keep in mind that as the throt- watercraft.
tle lever is returned to the idle position, When actuating the iBR control lever
less directional control is available. To while the watercraft has some for-
turn the watercraft, both steering and ward speed, the braking mode will
throttle are necessary. Do not release engage and generate a deceleration
throttle when trying to steer away from proportional to the iBR lever position.
objects. Your need throttle to steer. If The more you pull in the iBR lever, the
the engine is shut off, directional con- greater the braking force becomes.
trol is lost. Be careful to gradually actuate the iBR
Although most watercraft have no lever to adjust the intensity of the brak-
means of braking, advancement in ing force, and to simultaneously re-
technologies now permit us to offer lease the throttle lever.
some models that are equipped with The brake feature of the iBR system
a braking system called the iBRTM sys- cannot prevent your PWC from drift-
tem. Practice braking maneuvers in ing due to current or wind. It has no
a safe traffic-free area to become fa- braking effect on the rearward motion.
miliar with handling under braking and Also note that your engine must be
with stopping distances under various running to be able to use the brake.
operating conditions.
The personal watercraft jet thrust can
cause injury. The jet pump may pick up
WARNING debris and throw it rearward causing a
Stopping distance will vary de- risk of injuring people, damaging the jet
pending on initial speed, load, pump, or other property.
wind, number of riders and water Observe the instructions on all safety
conditions. The amount of braking labels. They are there to help assure
power commanded by the opera- that you have a safe and enjoyable out-
tor using the iBR lever (intelligent ing.
Brake and Reverse) will also affect
stopping distance.

Do not store any objects in areas that watercraft damage. Debris may also
are not designed specifically for stor- be picked up and thrown rearward by
age. the jet pump onto people or property.
Riding with passenger(s), pulling Keep the tether cord attached to the
tubes, a skier, or a wake boarder makes operator's PFD or wrist (wrist strap
the PWC handle differently and re- required) at all times and keep it free
quires greater skill. from snagging on the handlebars to
Certain PWC models come equipped help ensure the engine stops should
with tow eyelets or a ski pole (Wake the operator fall off. After riding, re-
only) which, can be used to attach move the tether cord from the engine
a tow rope for a skier, tube or wake cut-off switch to avoid unauthorized
boarder. Do not use these attachment use by children or others. If the op-
points or any other portion of the wa- erator falls off the watercraft and the
tercraft to tow a para-sail or any other tether cord is not attached as recom-
craft. Personal injury or severe dam- mended, the watercraft engine will not
age may occur. stop.
Combustion engines need air to op- Ride within your limits and level of rid-
erate; consequently this PWC cannot ing ability.
be totally watertight. Any maneuvers Always ride responsibly and safely.
such as turning constantly in tight cir- Use common sense and courtesy.
cles, plunging the bow through waves, Respect no wake zones, the environ-
or capsizing the watercraft, that cause ment, and the rights of other users of
the air inlet openings to be under wa- the waterways. As the operator and
ter may cause severe engine problems owner of a PWC, you are responsible
due to water ingestion. Refer to OP- for damage by the wake of your PWC.
ERATING INSTRUCTIONS subsection Do not let anyone throw refuse over-
and the WARRANTY section contained board.
in this Operator's Guide.
While your watercraft has the ca-
Engine exhaust contains carbon pacity of operating at high speeds, it
monoxide (CO), which can cause seri- is strongly recommended that high
ous health problems or death if inhaled speed operation only be applied when
in sufficient quantities. Do not operate ideal conditions exist and are permit-
the PWC in a confined area or allow ted. Higher speed operation requires a
CO to accumulate around the PWC, higher degree of skill and increases the
or in enclosed or sheltered areas such risk of severe injuries.
as when docked, or when rafting. Be
aware of the risk of CO emanations The forces generated on the body of
from exhaust of other PWCs. riders while turning, negotiating waves
or wakes, operating in choppy waters,
Know the waters in which the water- or falling off the watercraft, especially
craft is to be operated. Current, tides, at higher speeds, may cause injury in-
rapids, hidden obstacles, wakes and cluding the possibility of broken bones
waves etc. can affect safe operation. or more serious bodily injuries. Re-
It is not advisable to operate the wa- main flexible and avoid sharp turns.
tercraft in rough waters or inclement
weather. PWCs are not designed for night-time
operation.
In shallow water, proceed with caution
and at very low speeds. Grounding or Avoid riding in very rough waters or
abrupt stops may result in injury and practicing extreme maneuvers like
jumping wakes or waves.
10 _______ SAFETY INFORMATION ________

Before Getting Underway Respect applicable laws. Check local

For safety reasons and proper care, al- and federal boating laws applicable
ways perform the pre-ride inspection to the waterways where you intend
as specified in your Operator's Guide to use your watercraft. Learn the lo-
before operating your watercraft. cal navigation rules. Know and under-
stand the applicable navigation system
Do not exceed the payload or pas- (such as buoys and signs).
senger capacities for your watercraft.
Overloading can affect maneuverabil- Remember that sun, wind, fatigue or
ity, stability and performance. Also, illness may impair your judgement and
heavy seas reduce capacity. A payload reaction time.
or person capacity plate is not an ex- Operation of this PWC by a person un-
cuse for failure to use common sense der 16 years of age, or a person with a
or good judgment. disability that impairs vision, reaction
Regularly inspect the PWC, hull, en- time, judgment, or operation of the
gine, safety equipment, and all other controls is NOT recommended.
boating gear and keep them in safe op- Always properly use the tether cord
erating condition. when operating the watercraft and en-
Be sure you have the minimum re- sure that all passengers are familiar
quired safety equipment, PFDs and with its use.
any additional gear needed for your Ensure that any operator and all pas-
cruise. sengers know how to swim and how
Ensure that all lifesaving equipment, to reboard the PWC from the water.
including fire extinguisher, are in safe Boarding in deep water can be stren-
operating condition and easily acces- uous. Practice in chest-deep water
sible. Show all passengers where this before operating or embarking your
equipment is stored on the PWC, and watercraft in deep water. Ensure that
make sure they know how to use it. any operator and all passengers wear a
PFD at all times and take extra precau-
Keep an eye on the weather. Check lo- tions when boating.
cal weather broadcasts before depar-
ture. Be alert to changing conditions. Never turn handlebar while someone
is near the rear of watercraft. Keep
Keep accurate and up-to-date charts of away from steering moving parts (noz-
the boating area on board. Before get- zle, iBR gate, linkages, etc.).
ting underway, check water conditions
in the planned boating area. Do not start the engine or operate the
watercraft if anyone is in the water
Ensure there is enough fuel on board nearby, or near the rear of the water-
for the planned trip. Always verify fuel craft
level before use and during the ride.
Apply the principle of 1/3 of the fuel Be aware of the iBR gate movement
to reach your destination, 1/3 to re- when starting the engine, shutting
turn, and keep 1/3 in reserve. Allow down the engine or using the iBR lever.
for changes due to adverse weather or Automatic movement of the gate may
other delays. squeeze fingers or toes of people tak-
ing a hold on the back or your PWC.
Operator and Passenger Awareness The operator and passenger(s) should
Read and understand all safety labels be properly seated and have a firm grip
on the Sea-Doo PWC, the Operator's on a handhold before starting the wa-
Guide, all other safety documents, and tercraft, and at all times when the wa-
watch the SAFETY DVD video before tercraft is in motion. All passenger(s)
operating the PWC. should be instructed to use the hand-

holds provided, or to hold on to the are boarding, nearby, or during removal

waist of the person in front of them. of any weeds or debris from the intake
Each passenger must be able to simul- grate.
taneously place both feet firmly flat On a PWC, never place your feet and
against each footwell when properly legs in the water to aid turning.
seated. When going over waves, pas-
senger(s) may raise their body slightly Operation by Minors
off the seat to absorb the shocks with
their legs. Minors should always be supervised
by an adult whenever operating a wa-
When braking or decelerating, riders tercraft. Laws regarding the minimum
must brace themselves against the de- age and licensing requirements of mi-
celeration force to prevent from mov- nors may vary from one jurisdiction to
ing forward on the watercraft and los- another. Be sure to contact the local
ing balance. boating authorities for information re-
When accelerating on a PWC with a garding the legal operation of a PWC in
passenger(s), whether from a com- the intended jurisdiction of use. BRP
plete stop or while underway, always recommends a minimum operator age
do so progressively. Fast acceleration of 16 years old.
may cause your passenger(s) to loose
their balance and fall rearward off the Drugs and Alcohol
watercraft. Make sure that your pas- Never use your PWC with drugs or
senger(s) are aware of or can anticipate alcohol. Like driving a car, driving a
any rapid acceleration. watercraft requires the operator to be
Severe internal injuries can occur if sober, attentive and alert. Operating a
water is forced into body cavities as a watercraft while intoxicated or under
result of falling into water or being near the influence of drugs is not only dan-
a jet thrust nozzle. Consequently, the gerous, but it is also a Federal offense
wearing of a wet suit bottom is highly carrying a significant penalty. These
recommended. laws are vigorously enforced. The use
of drugs and alcohol, singly or in com-
Keep away from the intake grate while bination, decreases reaction time, im-
the engine is running. Items such pedes judgment, impairs vision, and
as long hair, loose clothing, or PFD inhibits your ability to safely operate a
straps can become entangled in mov- watercraft.
ing parts.
If the throttle lever is depressed while WARNING
braking, the iBR system will disable the
throttle command by the user. When Alcohol consumption and boat-
releasing the iBR lever while the throt- ing do not mix! Operating with
tle lever is still depressed, the throt- the use of drugs or alcohol endan-
tle command will regain control and gers the lives of your passengers,
generate an acceleration after a short other boaters, and yourself. Fed-
delay. Release throttle lever if acceler- eral laws prohibit operating a wa-
ation is not needed. tercraft with the use of drugs or
alcohol.
Before reboarding, make sure engine
is off and the tether cord is removed
from the engine cut-off switch.
To prevent accidental starting, always
remove the tether cord from the en-
gine cut-off switch when swimmers

Water Sports (Towing with – When pulling a tube, skier, or a wake

the Watercraft) boarder, do not make tight sharp
turns or use the braking system
WARNING unless absolutely necessary. Re-
member that although this PWC
Avoid personal injury! Your PWC is manoeuvrable and has stopping
is not designed for and should not capabilities (models with iBR), the
be used for pulling another craft, person in tow may not be able to
parasails, kites, gliders, or any de- avoid an obstacle, or the PWC with
vice which can become airborne. which it is being towed.
Use your watercraft only for water – Allow only capable swimmers to
sports it was designed for. take part in any water sport.
– Always wear an approved personal
Water skiing, wakeboarding, or riding flotation device (PFD). Wearing
a towed inflatable apparatus are some a properly designed PFD helps a
of the more popular water sports. Tak- stunned or unconscious person stay
ing part in any water sport requires afloat.
increased safety awareness by the par- – Be considerate to others you share
ticipant and the watercraft operator. If the water with.
you have never towed someone be-
hind your PWC before, it is a good idea – Both the operator and observer
to spend some hours as an observer, should monitor the location of the
working with and learning from an ex- tow rope when participating in wa-
perienced operator. It is also important tersports. A slack tow rope can be-
to be aware of the skill and experience come entangled with a person(s) or
of the person being towed. objects on the PWC or in the wa-
ter, particularly when making a tight
Everyone participating in a water sport turn or circling, and cause serious
should observe these guidelines: personal injury.
– Riding with passenger(s) or pulling – Do not tow a person in any water
a tube, skier or wakeboarder makes sport on a short tow rope such that
the watercraft handle differently the person inhales exhaust fumes
and requires greater skill. in concentration. Inhalation of con-
– Always respect the safety and com- centrated exhaust fumes, which
fort of your passenger(s) and person contain carbon monoxide, can re-
being towed on skis, wakeboard or sult in CO poisoning, personal injury
other water products. and death.
– Always carry an observer when – Use a tow rope of sufficient length
pulling a tube, skier or wakeboarder and size, and make sure it is ade-
to observe the person being towed quately secured to your watercraft.
and inform the operator about the Always store tow rope when not in
participants' hand signals. The op- use. While some watercraft are
erator must focus his attention on equipped or can be fitted with a
operating the watercraft and the specially designed towing mech-
waters ahead. anism, avoid installing a tow pole
– Proceed with only as much speed as on a PWC. It can become a hazard
required and follow the observers' should someone fall on it.
instructions. – Give immediate attention to a per-
son who has fallen. He or she is
vulnerable in the water alone and
may not be seen by other boaters.

– Approach a person in the water from clothing or personal flotation device

the lee side (opposite the direction straps can become entangled in mov-
of the wind). Turn off the motor being parts resulting in serious injury or
fore coming close to the person. drowning. In shallow water, shells,
– Participate in water sports only sand, pebbles or other objects could
in safe areas. Stay away from be drawn up by the jet pump and be
other boats, channels, beaches, thrown rearward.
restricted areas, swimmers, and
heavily traveled waterways and un-
derwater obstructions.
– Turn off the engine and secure the
watercraft in place before swim-
ming.
– Swim only in areas designated as
safe for swimming. These are usu-
ally marked with a swim area buoy.
Do not swim alone or at night.
F00A2MY
DIVER DOWN FLOAT
For more information on approved, le-

gal and safe practice of water sports,
please contact the local legal authority
on water sports safety for the area you
plan to practice in.
F00A2LY
SWIM AREA BUOY Hypothermia

– Do not water ski between sunset Hypothermia, the loss of body heat
and sunrise. It is illegal in most ar- resulting in a subnormal body temper-
eas. ature, is a significant cause of death in
– Do not drive the watercraft directly boating accidents. After an individual
behind a water skier, tuber or wake- has succumbed to hypothermia, he or
boarder. At 40 km/h (25 MPH) per she will lose consciousness and then
hour, the watercraft will overtake a drown.
person who falls in the water 60 m PFDs can increase survival time be-
(197 ft) in front of your watercraft in cause of the insulation they provide.
about 5 seconds.
– Shut off the engine and remove the Naturally, the warmer the water, the
tether cord from the engine cut-off less insulation one will require. When
switch when anyone is in the water operating in cold water (below 4°C
nearby. (40°F)) consideration should be given
to using a coat or jacket style PFD as
– Stay at least 45 m (148 ft) away they cover more body area than the
from areas marked by a diver down vest style PFDs.
float.
Avoid personal injury! Do not allow
anyone near the propulsion system or
intake grate, even when the engine
is off. Items such as long hair, loose

Some points to remember about hy-

pothermia protection:
– While afloat in the water, do not at-
tempt to swim unless it is to reach
a nearby watercraft, fellow sur-
vivor, or a floating object onto which
you can lean or climb. Unneces-
sary swimming increases the rate
of body heat loss. In cold water,
drown-proof methods that require
putting your head in the water are
not recommended. Keep your head
out of the water. This will greatly
lessen heat loss and increase your
survival time.
– Maintain a positive attitude about
your survival and rescue. This will
improve your chances of extending
your survival time until you can be
rescued. Your will to live does make
a difference!
– If there is more than one person
in the water, huddling together is
recommended. This action tends to
reduce the rate of heat loss and thus
increase the survival time.
– Always wear your PFD. It won't help
you fight off the effects of hypother-
mia if you don't have it on when you
go into the water.
Safe Boating Courses

Many countries recommend or require
a boating safety course. Check with
your local competent authorities.
Check local and federal boating laws
applicable to the waterways where
you intend to use your watercraft.
Learn the local navigation rules. Know
and understand the applicable naviga-
tion system (such as buoys and signs).

ACTIVE TECHNOLOGIES (iCONTROL)
Introduction The iTC allows the following operating
NOTE: Some functions or features de- modes:
scribed in this section may not apply to – Touring mode
every PWC model, or may be available – Sport mode
as an option. – ECO mode
iControlTM (intelligent Control sys- – Cruise mode (if equipped)
tems) provides an environment – Slow speed mode (if equipped with
whereby the operator can control cruise mode)
many systems without taking his – Ski mode (if equipped).
hands off the handlebars. The O.T.A.S.TM (Off Throttle Assisted
All controls are at the operator's finger Steering) is also controlled by the iTC.
tips and activated by pressing a button
or pulling a lever. The operator's atten- Touring Mode
tion can thus remain focused on the Touring mode is the default riding
water and driving the watercraft. mode.
Each control is electronic and provides In touring mode, available engine
a command signal to an electronic power and acceleration is reduced
module whose function is to assure when accelerating from a complete
proper operation of its system within stop and when operating in the low
set parameters. engine power range under certain con-
The various systems grouped under ditions.
iControl are the:
– iTCTM (intelligent Throttle Control) Sport Mode
– iBR (intelligent Brake and Reverse) In sport mode, maximum engine
(models with iBR) power is available throughout the en-
– O.T.A.S. (Off Throttle Assisted gine operational range.
Steering). Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec-
These systems function together to tion for detailed instructions.
provide features such as cruise mode,
slow speed mode and braking, im- ECO Mode
proved watercraft response to opera- When ECO mode is selected (fuel
tor inputs, increased maneuverability economy mode), engine RPM is lim-
and control. ited whereby an optimal cruising
It is extremely important for operators speed is maintained in order to reduce
to read all information contained in this fuel consumption.
Operator's Guide so as to become fa- Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec-
miliar with this watercraft, its systems, tion for detailed instructions.
controls, capabilities and limitations.
Cruise Mode (if equipped)
iTC (intelligent Throttle Cruise mode allows the operator to set
Control) a desired maximum speed of the wa-
The system uses an electronic throttle tercraft.
control (ETC) that provides command Cruise mode limits watercraft speed
signals to the ECM (Engine Control but does not maintain it. The oper-
Module). With this system, there is no ator must hold the throttle lever de-
need for a traditional throttle cable. pressed to maintain forward speed,

unlike an automotive type cruise con- Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

trol which maintains a constant speed subsection for details.
while throttle pedal is released.
As you proceed under a constant cruis- Learning Key and Rental Key Modes
ing speed setting, hold the throttle The Sea-DooTM learning key limits the
lever fully depressed in order to keep speed of the watercraft therefore en-
your full attention to maintaining good abling first time users and less expe-
situational awareness. rienced operators to learn how to op-
Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec- erate the watercraft while gaining the
tion for detailed instructions. necessary confidence and control.
The rental key is applicable only to
Slow Speed Mode (if equipped with rental models. It functions similarly
Cruise Mode) as a learning key.
Slow speed mode is a function Limitations
of cruise mode which allows the
operator to adjust and set idle The ability of a novice to operate the
speed corresponding to a water- watercraft can be exceeded even
craft speed of 1.6 km/h to 11 km/h when a learning or rental key is used.
(1 MPH to 7 MPH). The throttle lever Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec-
should not be depressed while operat- tion for details.
ing in slow speed mode.
Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec- iBR (intelligent Brake
tion for detailed instructions. and Reverse System) (All
Models Except GTS)
Ski Mode (if equipped)
This watercraft uses an electronically
Ski mode allows for a controlled launch controlled braking and reverse system
and accurately maintained maximum called the iBR system (intelligent Brake
towing speed when towing a skier or and Reverse).
wake boarder.
The iBR module controls the position
Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec- of the iBR gate to provide:
tion for detailed instructions.
– Forward
O.T.A.S. TM System – Reverse
(Off-Throttle Assisted Steering) – Neutral
The O.T.A.S. (Off-Throttle Assisted – Braking.
Steering) system provides additional The operator commands the position
maneuverability in off-throttle situa- of the iBR gate using either the throttle
tions. lever for forward position, or the iBR
The OTAS system is electronically ac- lever for neutral, reverse, and for the
tivated when the operator initiates a braking function.
full turn and releases the throttle at the NOTE: The iBR lever can only be used
same time. to command a change in the gate posi-
tion if the engine is running.
Limitations
Using the iBR system significantly re-
The O.T.A.S. system cannot help you duces the stopping distance of this
maintain control or prevent collisions watercraft and can increase its maneu-
in all situations. verability as it can be used in a straight
line, in a turn, at high or low speeds, or

to propel the watercraft in reverse for

docking or maneuvering in very close
quarters.
Under ideal conditions, experienced
operators were consistently able to
reduce the stopping distance of a wa-
tercraft equipped with an iBR system
by approximately 33%, from an initial
speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH).
Limitations
Even when equipped with an iBR sys-
tem, watercraft do not have the ability
of land based vehicles.
Stopping distance will vary notably de-
pending on initial speed, load, wind,
current, water conditions and the
amount of braking.
The iBR system has no effect on the
rearward motion.
It cannot prevent your watercraft from
drifting in current or wind.
WARNING
– It is important to inform the
operator of a watercraft who
intends to follow in a convoy
formation, of the braking and
maneuvering capability of your
PWC, what the plume of water
indicates, and that a greater dis-
tance must be maintained be-
tween watercraft.
– Be aware that other boats fol-
lowing or operating in close
proximity may not be able to
stop as quickly.

SAFETY EQUIPMENT
Required Safety Recommended Protective Gear
Equipment The operator and passenger(s) of
The operator and the passenger(s) PWCs must wear protective gear, in-
must wear an approved Personal Flota- cluding:
tion Device (PDF) that is suitable for – A wet suit bottom, or thick tightly
PWC use. woven and snug fitting clothing that
Operator and passenger(s) should provides equivalent protection. As
have ready access to shatterproof an example, thin bike shorts would
glasses should riding conditions or not be appropriate. Severe inter-
personal preference warrant. nal injuries can occur if water is
forced into body cavities as a re-
Wind, water spray and speed may sult of falling in the water or be-
cause a person's eyes to water and ing near jet thrust nozzle. Normal
create blurred vision. swimwear does not adequately pro-
As the owner of the watercraft, you tect against forceful entry of water
are responsible for assuring that all into the lower male or female body
required safety equipment is aboard. opening(s).
You should also consider supplying ad- – Footwear, gloves, safety goggles
ditional equipment as needed for your or glasses are also recommended.
safety and that of your passengers. Some type of lightweight, flexible
Check state and local regulations about foot protection is recommended.
required safety equipment. This will help reduce possible injury,
Safety equipment required by regula- should you step on sharp underwa-
tions is mandatory. If local regulations ter objects.
require additional equipment, it must
be approved by a competent authority. Eye Vest-type
Minimum requirements include the protection personal
following: flotation
– Personal flotation devices (PFDs) device
– A buoyant heaving line of 15 m
(50 ft) minimum
– A watertight flashlight or approved
flares Gloves
Wet suit
– Signaling device or wet suit
bottom
– Sound producing devices (air horn or
whistle).
Foot
protection
F00A12A
Personal Flotation Devices (PFDs)

Each person on a recreational water-
craft must wear a personal flotation
device (PFD) at all times. Ensure that
these PFDs meet your country's regu-
lations.

SAFETY EQUIPMENT
A PFD provides buoyancy to help keep ability of quick rescue such as in areas
the head and face above the water, and where other people are commonly in-
to help maintain a satisfactory body po- volved in water activities.
sition while in the water. Body weight
and age should be considered when
selecting a PFD. The buoyancy pro-
vided by the PFD should support your
weight in water. The size of the PFD
should be appropriate for the wearer.
Body weight and chest size are com-
mon methods used to size PFDs. It is
your responsibility to ensure that you
have the proper number and types of
PFDs on board to comply with federal F00A2DY
and local regulations, and that your
passengers know where they are and TYPE II — WEARABLE
how to use them.
PFD Type III, Wearable, allows wear-
PFD Types ers to place themselves in a vertical
There are five types of approved PFDs. or slightly backward position. It does
not turn the wearer. It maintains the
PFD Type I, Wearable, has the greatest wearer in a vertical or slightly back-
required buoyancy. Its design allows ward position and has no tendency
for turning most unconscious persons to turn the wearer face down. It has
in the water from face down position to the same buoyancy as a Type Il PFD
a vertical or slightly backward, face-up and may be appropriate in areas where
position. It can greatly increase the other people are commonly involved in
chances of survival. Type I is most water activities.
effective for all waters, especially off-
shore when rescue may be delayed. It
is also the most effective in rough wa-
ters.
F00A2EY
TYPE III — WEARABLE
PFD Type V, Wearable, must be worn.

F00A2CY
When inflated, it provides buoyancy
TYPE I — WEARABLE equivalent to Type I, Il or III PFDs.
When it is deflated, however, it may
PFD Type II, Wearable, turns its not support some people.
wearer in the same way as Type I, but
not as effectively. The Type Il does not
turn as many persons under the same
conditions as a Type I. You may prefer
to use this PFD where there is a prob-

SAFETY EQUIPMENT
Weighing the Risks vs Benefits

In order to decide whether or not you
should wear a helmet, it is best to con-
sider the particular environment you
will be riding in, as well as other fac-
tors such as personal experience. Will
there be a lot of traffic on the water?
What is your riding style?
F00A2GY The Bottom Line
TYPE V — WEARABLE Since each option minimizes some
risks, but increases others, before
Helmets each ride you must decide whether
to wear or not wear a helmet based on
Some Important Considerations your particular situation.
Helmets are designed to offer some If you decide to wear a helmet, you
degree of protection in case of im- must then decide what type is the
pacts to the head. In most motorized most appropriate for the circum-
sports, the benefits of wearing a hel- stances. Look for helmets that meet
met clearly outweigh the drawbacks. DOT or Snell standards, and if possi-
However, in the case of motorized wa- ble, choose one designed for motor-
tersports such as riding personal wa- ized watersports.
tercraft, this is not necessarily true as
there are some particular risks associ- Additional Recommended
ated with the water.
Equipment
Benefits It is recommended that you acquire
A helmet helps to reduce the risk of additional equipment for safe, enjoy-
injury in case of a head impact against able cruising. This list, which is not all
a hard surface such as another craft in inclusive, includes items you should
the case of a collision. Similarly, a hel- consider acquiring.
met with a chin guard might help pre- – Local map
vent injuries to the face, jaw or teeth. – First aid kit
Risks – Tow rope
– Flares
On the other hand, in some situations
when falling off the watercraft, hel- – Mooring cords.
mets have a tendency to catch the A cellular telephone in a waterproof
water, like a “bucket”, and put severe bag or container has also been found
stresses on the neck or spine. This to be beneficial to boaters when in dis-
could result in choking, severe or per- tress or just for contacting someone
manent neck or spine injury or death. on shore.
Helmets may also interfere with pe-
ripheral vision and hearing, or increase
fatigue which, could contribute to in-
crease the risk of a collision.

PRACTICE EXERCISES
It is always a good idea to practice and Watercraft Equipped with iBR
get familiar with all controls, functions Practice stopping the watercraft in
and handling characteristics of your a straight line at various speeds and
watercraft before venturing on the wa- braking force.
ter.
Remember that watercraft speed,
Always secure the tether cord to the load, water conditions, current and
engine cut-off switch and the clip to wind also affect stopping distances.
your PFD or a wrist strap.
Reverse (Except Watercraft not
Where to Practice Equipped with iBR)
Exercises Practice reverse operation to learn
Find a suitable area to practice the ex- how the watercraft operates in reverse
ercises. Ensure the area meet the fol- and reacts with steering inputs.
lowing requirements: NOTE: Always perform this exercise
– No traffic at slow speeds.
– No obstacles
– No swimmers Avoiding an Obstacle
– No current Practice obstacle avoidance (choose a
– Ample space to maneuver virtual point on the water) by steering
– Water depth is adequate. the watercraft and maintaining throt-
tle.
Practice Exercises Repeat exercise, but this time release
throttle while turning.
Practice alone the following exercises.
NOTE: With this exercise, you will
Turning learn that you need throttle to steer the
watercraft in a different direction.
Practice turning in circles in both di-
rections at slow speed. When com- Docking
fortable with the exercise, increase
difficulty by making some figure 8. Watercraft not Equipped with iBR
When this is mastered, repeat the Practice docking using the throttle and
above exercises but at increased steering to become familiar with the
speed. response of the PWC and to develop
good control skills.
Stopping Distances
Watercraft Equipped with iBR
Watercraft not Equipped with iBR
Practice docking using the throttle, iBR
Practice stopping the watercraft in a lever and the steering to become famil-
straight line at different speeds. iar with the response of the PWC, and
Remember, water drag is the main to develop good control skills.
factor which reduces the watercraft NOTE: Remember that steering direc-
speed and thus the stopping distance. tion is reversed when backing.
NOTE: The watercraft speed, load,
current and wind also play an important
role in affecting stopping distances.

PRACTICE EXERCISES
Slow Speed Mode, Ski Mode and

Cruise Mode
If your watercraft has any of these
modes, it is also important to under-
stand their operation and to become
familiar with these features prior to us-
ing them on a ride with other people.
WARNING
The ski and the cruise modes are
not an automatic pilot; they will
not drive the watercraft for you.
Important Factors Not to

Neglect
In addition, always remember that the
following conditions have a direct im-
pact on how your watercraft will be-
have and respond to different inputs:
– Loads
– Currents
– Wind
– Water conditions.
Make sure to be alert to these condi-
tions, and adapt accordingly. If pos-
sible, practice further in these condi-
tions.
For delicate maneuvers, the best ad-
vice is always to try to reduce your
speed to a minimum.

NAVIGATION RULES
Operating Rules
Operating a watercraft can be com-
pared with driving on unmarked high-
ways and roads. To prevent collisions
or avoid other boaters, a system of op-
erating rules must be followed. It’s not
only common sense... it’s the law!
smo2012-003-200
Generally keep to your right and safely
TYPICAL
avoid collisions by keeping a safe dis-
tance from other watercraft, boats, Like a street traffic light, if you see a
people and objects. RED light, STOP, give the right of way.
The following illustration identifies dif- The other boat is to your right and it has
ferent parts of a boat that are used the right of way.
as directional reference points, the If you see a GREEN light, pass with
bow being the front of the boat. The caution. The other boat is to your left,
port side of boat (left side) is visually you have the right of way.
identifiable by a RED light off the bow,
and the starboard side (right side) by a Meeting Head-On
GREEN light.
Keep right.
Bow
Port Starboard
1 2
smo2012-003-201
TYPICAL
Passing
Give the right of way to other crafts and
F00A13Y Stern keep clear.
TYPICAL - DIRECTIONAL REFERENCE
POINTS
1. RED light
2. GREEN light (yield zone)
Crossing
Give the right of way to a watercraft smo2012-003-202
ahead and to your right. Never cross TYPICAL
in front of a boat, you should see his
RED light, he should see your GREEN Navigation System
light (he has the right of way).
Navigational aids, such as signs or
Personal watercraft (PWC) do not have buoys, can assist you in identify-
these colored lights, but the rule still ing safe waters. Buoys will indicate
applies. whether you should keep to the right
(starboard) or to the left (port) of the

NAVIGATION RULES
buoy, or to which channel you can con- When operating an iBR equipped wa-
tinue. They may also indicate whether tercraft, be aware that other boats fol-
you are entering a restricted or con- lowing or operating in close proximity
trolled area such as a no wake or low may not be able to stop as quickly.
speed zone. They may also indicate When at speed and the brake is first ap-
hazards or pertinent boating informa- plied, a plume of water will shoot up in
tion. Markers may be located on shore the air behind the watercraft indicating
or on the water. They can also indi- a braking manoeuvre.
cate speed limits, no power craft or
boating, anchorage and other useful It is important to inform the operator of
information. (The shape of each type a watercraft who intends to follow in
of marker will provide assistance). a convoy formation of the braking and
maneuvering capability of your PWC,
Make sure you know and understand what the plume of water indicates, and
the navigation system applicable to that a greater distance should be main-
the waterways where you intend to tained between both of you.
use the watercraft.
Stopping distance will vary depending
Collision Avoidance on initial speed, load, wind and water
conditions.
Do not release the throttle when try-
ing to steer away from an obstacle. Although the preferable maneuver to
Engine power and jet pump thrust is avoid an obstacle is to steer away while
required to steer the watercraft. applying throttle, the iBR can also be
used by fully braking and turning in the
Always keep a constant lookout for appropriate direction to avoid the ob-
other water users, other boats or obstacle.
jects, especially when turning. Be alert
for conditions that may limit your visi-
bility or block your vision of others.
Respect the rights of other recreation-
ists and/or bystanders and always
keep a safe distance from all other
watercraft, boats, people and objects.
Do not wake or wave jump, ride the
surf line or attempt to spray or splash
others with your watercraft. You may
misjudge the ability of the watercraft
or your own riding skills and strike a
boat, watercraft or person.
This watercraft has the capability of
turning more sharply than other boats,
however, unless in an emergency, do
not negotiate sharp, high speed turns.
Such maneuvers make it hard for oth-
ers to avoid you or understand where
you are going. Also, you and/or your
passenger(s) could be thrown from the
watercraft.
Watercraft Equipped with iBR
Unlike most other watercraft, this
PWC has a braking system (iBR).

FUELING
Fueling Procedure WARNING
Fuel tank may be pressurized, fuel
WARNING vapors may be released while re-
Fuel is flammable and explosive moving the fuel tank cap.
under certain conditions. Always
work in a well ventilated area. Do 8. Insert the gas pump spout into the
not smoke or allow open flames or filler neck and fill up the fuel tank.
sparks in the vicinity.
WARNING
1. Turn off engine. To prevent fuel back-flow, fill tank
slowly so the air can escape from
WARNING the fuel tank.
Always stop the engine before re-
fueling. 9. Stop filling immediately after the re-
lease of the gas pump nozzle handle
2. Do not allow anyone to remain on and wait a moment before remov-
the watercraft. ing the spout. Do not retract the gas
pump nozzle to put more fuel in fuel
3. Tie watercraft securely to the fuel- tank.
ing pier.
4. Have a fire extinguisher close at WARNING
hand. Do not overfill or top off the fuel
5. Open the front storage compart- tank and leave the watercraft in the
ment cover. sun. As temperature increases,
fuel expands and may overflow.
6. Locate fuel tank cap.
10. Reinstall fuel tank cap and fully
tighten it clockwise.
WARNING
Always wipe off any fuel spillage
from the watercraft.
11. After refueling, always open the

seat and ensure there is no gaso-
line vapor odor inside the engine
compartment.
smo2011-003-011_a
TYPICAL - FUEL TANK CAP LOCATION WARNING

1. Fuel tank cap (front storage cover open) Do not start watercraft if gasoline
7. Slowly unscrew the fuel cap coun- or gasoline vapor odor is present.
terclockwise.

FUELING
Fuel Requirements All Models

NOTICE Always use fresh gaso- NOTICE Never experiment with
line. Gasoline will oxidize; the re- other fuels. Engine or fuel system
sult is loss of octane, volatile com- damages may occur with the use of
pounds, and the production of gum an inadequate fuel.
and varnish deposits which can
damage the fuel system. Inside North America
Alcohol fuel blending varies by coun- NOTICE Do NOT use fuel from fuel
try and region. Your vehicle has been pumps labeled E85.
designed to operate using the recom-
mended fuels, however, be aware of Use of fuel labeled E15 is prohibited by
the following: U.S. EPA Regulations.
– Use of fuel containing alcohol above
the percentage specified by gov-
ernment regulations is not recom-
mended and can result in the fol-
lowing problems in the fuel system
components:
• Starting and operating difficul-
ties.
• Deterioration of rubber or plastic
parts.
• Corrosion of metal parts.
• Damage to internal engine parts.
– Inspect frequently for the presence
of fuel leaks or other fuel system
abnormalities if you suspect the
presence of alcohol in gasoline ex-
ceeds the current government reg-
ulations.
– Alcohol blended fuels attract and
hold moisture which may lead to
fuel phase separation and can result
in engine performance problems or
engine damage.
Recommended Fuel
All Models Except GTR
Use common unleaded gasoline with
an AKI (RON+MON)/2 octane rating of
87, or an RON octane rating of 91.
GTR Models Only
Use premium unleaded gasoline with

TRAILERING INFORMATION
NOTICE The span of the trailer NOTICE Do not route ropes or

wood bunks including bunk width tie-downs over the seat or grab
should be adjusted to provide sup- handle as they could be perma-
port throughout the full length of the nently damaged. Wrap ropes or
hull. The ends of both trailer wood tie-downs with rags or similar pro-
bunks should not exceed the length tectors where they can come into
of the watercraft. contact with the watercraft body.
Ensure the trailer wheels are posi-
tioned so that the center of gravity of WARNING
the watercraft is slightly ahead of the Make sure seat is securely latched
wheels to properly support the weight prior to trailering.
of the watercraft.
A Sea-Doo cover can protect the wa-
WARNING tercraft, particularly when driving on
Never tip this watercraft on end for dirt roads, to prevent dirt entry through
transporting. We recommend that the air inlet openings.
you carry the watercraft in its nor-
mal operating position. WARNING
When trailering the watercraft,
Check the applicable laws and regula- NEVER leave any equipment on
tions in your area concerning towing the watercraft.
a trailer, especially for the following
items: WAKE Model
– Brake system
– Tow vehicle weight WARNING
– Mirrors. NEVER leave a wakeboard in-
Take the following precautions when stalled on the rack. Otherwise,
towing the watercraft: wake board fin(s) could cause in-
– Respect tow vehicle maximum jury to bystanders or wakeboard
weight capacity and the tongue could fly off on the road.
weight capacity as recommended
by manufacturer. WARNING
– Tie the watercraft to both front and Bungee cords are under tension
rear (bow/stern) eyelets so that it is and could spring back and whip
firmly secured on the trailer. Use ad- someone when released. Use cau-
ditional tie-downs if necessary. tion.
– Ensure fuel tank cap, front stor-
age compartment cover, glove box NOTE: When trailering 2 watercraft, it
cover and seat are properly latched. may be necessary to remove the inner
– Observe trailering safety precau- wakeboard rack.
tions.

IMPORTANT ON-PRODUCT LABELS
Watercraft Safety Labels
These labels are affixed to the vehicle for the safety of the operator, passenger
(2-UP) or bystanders.
The labels illustrated on the following pages are on your watercraft. If missing or
damaged, they can be replaced free of charge. See an authorized Sea-Doo dealer.
Please read the following labels carefully before operating this watercraft.
NOTE: The first illustration of the watercraft indicates the approximate locations
of the various labels. A dotted line indicates that the label is not on the outer sur-
face, and that the seat or a cover of some type must be opened to see the label.
NOTE: In the event of any discrepancy between this guide and the vehicle, the
safety labels on the vehicle have precedence over the labels in this guide.
3 1,2
6,17 4,5,7,8,9
10
smo2011-003-001_a
WATERCRAFT SAFETY LABEL LOCATION - GTS MODELS
3 1,2
4,5,7,8,9
6,17
14 11
10
12 13
smo2011-003-002_a
WATERCRAFT SAFETY LABEL LOCATION - GTI MODELS

30
219904485
smo2011-003-003_a
6,17
Collisions result in
more INJURIES AND
DEATHS than any other type of
accident for personal watercraft (PWC).
3
TO AVOID COLLISIONS:
SCAN CONSTANTLY for people, objects, and
other watercraft.Be alert for conditions that
limit your visibility or block your vision of others.
_______
OPERATE DEFENSIVELY at safe speeds and
keep a safe distance away from people, objects,

and other watercraft.
• Do not follow directly behind PWCs or other boats.

• Do not go near others to spray or splash them with water.
• Avoid sharp turns or other maneuvers that make it hard for
others to avoid you or understand where you are going.
• Avoid areas with submerged objects or shallow water.
TAKE EARLY ACTION to avoid collisions. Remember, generally
PWCs and other boats do not have brakes.
1,2
DO NOT RELEASE THROTTLE WHEN TRYING TO STEER away

from objects - you need throttle to steer. Always check throttle and
steering controls for proper operation before starting PWC.
Follow navigation rules and province/ state and local laws that apply to
LABEL 1 - MAIN WARNING LH (GTS MODELS ONLY)

PWCs.
4,5,7,8,9
See Operator's Guide for more information.

WATERCRAFT SAFETY LABEL LOCATION - WAKE MODEL
16
SAFETY INFORMATION
4551
90940438
212919
15
12
13
10
14 11
________
219904484
219903448B
more INJURIES AND
SCAN CONSTANTLY for people, objects, and
other watercraft.Be alert for conditions that
________
OPERATE DEFENSIVELY at safe speeds and
keep a safe distance away from people,
LABEL 2 - MAIN WARNING RH

objects, and other watercraft.
• Avoid sharp turns or other maneuvers that make it hard for
others to avoid you or understand where you are going.
TAKE EARLY ACTION to avoid collisions. Remember, generally PWCs
and other boats do not have brakes.
DO NOT RELEASE THROTTLE WHEN TRYING TO STEER away from
objects - you need throttle to steer. Always check throttle and steering
controls for proper operation before starting PWC.
Follow navigation rules and province/ state and local laws that apply to
PWCs.
iBR INSTRUCTIONS
IBR INTELLIGENT BRAKE AND REVERSE FUNCTIONS:
How to brake
SAFETY INFORMATION
• Squeeze brake lever
How to reverse
LABEL 1 - MAIN WARNING LH (GTI SERIES AND WAKE MODELS)
• Maintain brake lever engaged

How to go forward
• Tap throttle lever to engage forward movement
from neutral position.
4
Squeeze throttle lever to accelerate. 0448
2199
How to get to neutral
•Tap brake lever
Refer to the operator's
guide for more
information.
________
31
219903501
LABEL 3
Certain components in the engine compartment

may be very hot. Direct contact may result in
skin burn. 219903132A
219903132
LABEL 8
219903184
LABEL 4
F18L0NY
LABEL 5 F00A2TY
LABEL 9
smo2009-002-106_aen
LABEL 6
219903177
219903301
LABEL 7
LABEL 10

smo2009-002-111_a
LABEL 13
smo2009-002-109_a
LABEL 11
smo2009-002-110_aen
LABEL 12
219904254
LABEL 14 - GTI SE, GTI LTD AND WAKE MODELS
219903137
219903228
LABEL 15
LABEL 16

219903502
LABEL 17
Compliance Labels
2 5
1 3,4
smo2011-003-001_d
COMPLIANCE LABEL LOCATION
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

THIS ENGINE IS CERTIFIED TO OPERATE ON
UNLEADED GASOLINE AND CONFORMS TO
U.S. EPA & CALIFORNIA EMISSION / EVAP
REGULATIONS FOR MARINE SI ENGINES.
ENGINE FAMILY FAMILLE DE MOTEUR
LIMITE DES ÉMISSIONS
FEL DE LA FAMILLE
ENGINE DISPLACEMENT CYLINDRÉE
EXHAUST EMISSION SYSTÈME DE CONTRÔLE
CONTROL SYSTEM DES ÉMISSIONS
POWER PUISSANCE
RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LE DISPOSITIF ANTIPOLLUTION
CE MOTEUR EST CERTIFIÉ POUR FONCTIONNER À L'ESSENCE SANS
PLOMB ET IL RÉPOND AUX NORMES DE L'EPA DES É.-U. &
RÉGLEMENTATIONS CALIFORNIENNES POUR LES MOTEURS MARINS À
ALLUMAGE COMMANDÉ.
SEE OPERATOR’S GUIDE FOR MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
VOIR GUIDE DU CONDUCTEUR POUR LES SPÉCIFICATIONS D’ENTRETIEN
BOMBARDIER RECREATIONAL PRODUCTS INC.
219904642
219902679
219904642
LABEL 1 - EMISSION CONTROL LABEL
LABEL 2 - INSIDE NORTH AMERICA ONLY

3 272 3 272
600 600
272 272
600 600
XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
MAXIMUM CAPACITIES CAN ICES-2

MAXIMUM CAPACITIES
ABOVE INFORMATION ALSO / NMB-2” ABOVE INFORMATION ALSO
APPLIES IN THE U.S.A. APPLIES IN THE U.S.A.
smo2015-001-001_a smo2015-001-002_a
LABEL 3 - CANADIAN COMPLIANCE NOTICE LABEL 4 - TYPICAL (WATERCRAFT OUTSIDE

(CAN/US MODELS ONLY) NORTH AMERICA)

219903510
219903510
LABEL 5 - TYPICAL
AUSTRALIAN BUILDERS PLATE

Imported by BRP Australia Pty Ltd
DATE 2014
Max persons 3 = 225 kg

Max load = 273 kg
Buoyancy Basic Flotation
WARNING
Alteration of the boat’s hull or permanent
fittings may invalidate the particulars on
this plate.
Information determined - ISO 13590
219904405
219904405
LABEL 6- AUSTRALIAN MODELS ONLY

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
WARNING
Perform a pre-ride inspection before each ride to detect potential problems
during operation. The pre-ride inspection can help you monitor wear and
deterioration before they become a problem. Correct any problems that
you discover to reduce the risk of a breakdown or crash.
Before performing the pre-ride inspection, read and understand the CONTROLS
section.
What to Do Before Launching the Watercraft

WARNING
Engine should be off and the tether cord cap should always be removed
from the engine cut-off switch prior to verifying any of the following points.
Only start watercraft once all items have been checked and operate prop-
erly.
NOTE: Before starting the engine and taking off, it is recommended to shake verti-
cally the rear of the watercraft to shake away any sand that may have accumulated
near the propulsion and reverse systems.
Check the items listed in the following table before launching the watercraft.
ITEM OPERATION ✓
Hull Inspect.
Jet pump water intake Inspect/clean.
Drain plugs Tighten.
Fuel tank Refill.
Check for any visible fluid leaks and
Engine compartment
gasoline vapor odor.
Engine oil level Check/refill.
Engine coolant level Check/refill.
Steering system Check operation.
Throttle lever Check operation.
iBR lever (except GTS models) Check operation.
Front storage compartment cover,
Ensure they are closed and latched.
glove box and seat

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
ITEM OPERATION ✓
– Ensure rack is properly installed and

secured.
Wakeboard rack (WAKE model) – Make sure bungee cords are in good
condition.
– Ensure wakeboard is correctly installed
in rack and secured.
Ski/wakeboard post (WAKE model) Inspect and check operation.
Engine cut-off switch and engine
Check operation.
START/STOP button
Hull
Inspect hull for cracks and other dam-
ages.
Jet Pump Water Intake

Remove weeds, shells, debris or any-
thing else that could restrict the flow of
water and damage the propulsion unit.
Clean as necessary. If any obstruction smo2009-002-135_a
cannot be removed, refer to an autho- TYPICAL - BILGE DRAIN PLUG LOCATIONS

rized Sea-Doo dealer for servicing. 1. Bilge drain plugs
2. Tighten
3. Untighten
WARNING
Ensure bilge drain plugs are prop-
erly secured prior to launching the
watercraft in water.
Fuel Tank
Fill the fuel tank.
WARNING
Strictly adhere to instructions de-
tailed in FUELING PROCEDURE.
Engine Compartment
F18J04Y 1 2 Inspect the engine compartment for
fuel vapor odor.
TYPICAL — INSPECT THESE AREAS
1. Water intake
2. Ride plate
Drain Plugs
Secure bilge drain plugs.

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
WARNING Steering System

Should any leak or gasoline odor Assisted by another person, check
be present, do not apply electri- steering operation for free movement.
cal power or start the engine. You When the handlebar is horizontal,
should seek service from an autho- the jet pump nozzle should be in the
rized Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop, straight ahead position. Ensure the jet
or person of your own choosing pump nozzle pivots easily and in the
for maintenance, repair, or re- same direction as the handlebar (e.g.:
placement. Please refer to the US when handlebar is turned to the left,
EPA EMISSIONS-RELATED WAR- the nozzle opening must point towards
RANTY contained herein for infor- the LH side of watercraft).
mation about warranty claims.
WARNING
To access the engine compartment, Check handlebar and correspond-
open the seat. ing steering nozzle operation be-
fore starting. Never turn handle-
bar while someone is near the rear
of the watercraft. Keep away from
steering moving parts (nozzle, iBR
gate, linkages etc.).
Throttle Lever
Check the Electronic Throttle Control
lever (ETC) for free and smooth opera-
tion. It should return to its initial posi-
tion immediately after it is released.
smo2011-003-010
ENGINE COMPARTMENT, SEAT REMOVED WARNING

Check throttle lever operation be-
Engine Oil fore starting the engine. If any fric-
Ensure oil level is within specification tion is felt in the throttle lever, refer
as described in MAINTENANCE PRO- to an authorized Sea-Doo dealer.
CEDURES section.
iBR Lever (All Models Except GTS)
Engine Coolant Check the iBR lever for free and
Ensure coolant level is within specifi- smooth operation. It should return
cation as described in MAINTENANCE to its initial position immediately after
PROCEDURES section. it is released.
Check for coolant leaks on engine, in
bilge and from ride plate. WARNING
Check iBR lever operation before
starting the engine. If any friction
CAUTION When operating the is felt in the iBR lever, refer to an
engine with the watercraft out of authorized Sea-Doo dealer.
the water, the engine and heat ex-
changer in the ride plate may be-
come very hot. Avoid any contact
with hot engine parts and the ride
plate as burns may occur.

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
Storage Compartment, Glove Box Engine Cut-Off Switch and Engine

and Seat START/STOP Button
Ensure all required safety and survival Press the start button once without in-
equipment and any additional cargo is stalling the tether cord cap on the en-
properly stored in the storage compart- gine cut-off switch.
ment provided. Install the tether cord cap on the en-
Ensure the front cover, glove box, and gine cut-off switch.
seat are closed and latched. Press the START/STOP button to start
the engine, then stop it by pressing the
WARNING START/STOP button a second time.
Ensure the seat, glove box, and NOTE: To allow engine starting, the
front storage compartment cover tether cord cap must be properly in-
are securely latched. stalled on the engine cut-off switch
within 5 seconds of pressing the
Wakeboard Rack (WAKE Model START/STOP button.
Only) Restart the engine, then stop it by re-
moving the tether cord from the engine
WARNING cut-off switch.
Ensure wakeboard rack is properly
secured to watercraft body, and WARNING
that the wakeboard is properly po- Should the tether cord cap be
sitioned and secured to the rack loose or fail to remain on the en-
prior to using watercraft. Ensure gine cut-off switch, replace the
wakeboard retaining straps are in tether cord immediately in order
good condition. to avoid unsafe use. If remov-
ing the tether cord cap from the
Ski/Wakeboard Post (WAKE Model engine cut-off switch or pressing
Only) the START/STOP button does not
stop the engine, do not use the
Make sure ski/wakeboard post is fully watercraft. See your authorized
extended and locked before use. Sea-Doo dealer.
Completely retract and lock when not
used. What to Do After
Launching the Watercraft
WARNING
Check the items listed in the follow-
Use caution with skier/wake- ing table after launching the watercraft
boarder in tow as tow rope may and before going for a ride.
backlash to watercraft when re-
leased. Never perform a sharp ITEM OPERATION ✓
turn when towing a skier, wake-
boarder or any toy. Always store Information
Check operation
tow rope when not in use. Center
Intelligent Brake
and Reverse Check operation
NOTICE The ski/wakeboard post is System (iBR)
designed for towing a skier or wake-
boarder with a maximum gross Variable Trim
weight of 114 kg (250 lb). System (VTS) Check operation
(as applicable)

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
Information Center (Gauge) Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

1. Press START/STOP button and in- subsection for detailed instructions.
stall the tether cord cap on the en-
gine cut-off switch.
2. As the information center cycles
through its self-test function, en-
sure all indications come on.
WARNING
Always attach the tether cord clip
to your PFD or to the wrist (wrist
strap required).
iBR System (All Models Except GTS)

NOTICE Ensure there is sufficient
space ahead and behind watercraft
to safely carry out the iBR system
test to avoid a collision. Watercraft
will move during test.
1. Remove the moorings securing the
watercraft to the dock.
2. Start the engine and ensure the wa-
tercraft does not move.
3. On the left handlebar, depress the
iBR lever completely in, the wa-
tercraft should move slowly back-
wards.
4. Release the iBR lever, there should
not be any reverse thrust.
WARNING
Always ensure proper iBR system
operation before taking the water-
craft out for a ride.
Variable Trim System (All Models

Except GTS)
With the engine running in forward po-
sition, use the VTS system to move
the jet pump nozzle up and down alter-
nately to check VTS operation. Con-
firm the VTS position indicator move-
ment in the information center.
Also test the VTS preset trim positions
by double clicking the VTS UP/DOWN
button (as applicable to model).

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
This page is
intentionally blank

WATERCRAFT
INFORMATION
_______________ 43
CONTROLS
NOTE: Some vehicle safety labels are not shown on illustrations. For information
on vehicle safety labels, refer to WATERCRAFT SAFETY LABELS subsection.
smo2012-001-002_a
GTS MODELS
44 ______________
CONTROLS
smo2012-001-005_a
GTI AND GTI SE MODELS
smo2012-001-004_a
GTI LIMITED MODEL
_______________ 45
CONTROLS
smo2012-001-003_a
GTR MODEL
smo2012-001-006_a
WAKE MODEL
46 ______________
CONTROLS
1) Handlebar Waking Up the Electrical System

The handlebar controls the direction of Press the START/STOP button once
the watercraft. During forward opera- without installing the tether cord on
tion, turning the handlebar to the right the engine cut-off switch.
steers the watercraft to the right and This will power up the electrical sys-
inversely. tem; the information center will cycle
through a self-test function and will
WARNING then go blank after a few seconds.
Check handlebar and correspond- The electrical system will stay pow-
ing steering nozzle operation be- ered up for approximately 3 minutes
fore starting. Never turn handle- after the START/STOP button was de-
bar while someone is near the rear pressed.
the propulsion system. NOTE: If the START/STOP button is
pressed and held without the tether
cord installed, the information cen-
All Models Except GTS ter displays will stay on as long as the
When operating in reverse, steering START/STOP button is held.
direction is reversed. Turning the han-
dlebar to the right while backing up 3) Engine Cut-Off Switch
steers the watercraft to the left. Refer The engine cut-off switch is located in
to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS sub- the middle of the handlebar.
section for detailed instructions.
2) Engine START/STOP
Button
The engine START/STOP button is lo-
cated on the LH handlebar.
smo2011-003-018_b
TYPICAL
1. Engine cut-off switch
To allow engine starting, the tether

cord cap must be securely snapped
onto the engine cut-off switch.
smo2011-003-018_a
TYPICAL
1. START/STOP button WARNING
Engine Starting and Stopping to the operator's personal flota-
Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS tion device (PFD) or wrist (wrist
subsection for detailed instructions. strap required).
_______________ 47
CONTROLS
To have a key programmed to your

watercraft, see your authorized BRP
Sea-Doo dealer.
D.E.S.S. Key Recognition
Two short beeps indicate the system
is ready to allow engine starting. Oth-
erwise, refer to the TROUBLESHOOT-
ING section.
D.E.S.S. Key Types (If Applicable) or
smo2009-002-115_a
RF D.E.S.S. key types (If Applicable)
TYPICAL
1. Tether cord cap on the engine cut-off switch Three types of keys can be used:
2. Tether cord clip secured to operator's PFD – Normal key
To stop engine, pull the tether cord cap – Learning key
from the engine cut-off switch. – Rental key (rental models).
To ease key type recognition, the
WARNING tether cord float comes in different
colors.
Should the engine be stopped, the
brake function (models with iBR) KEY TYPE FLOAT COLOR
and watercraft directional control
is lost. Normal Yellow or Black
Learning Green
WARNING
Rental Orange
Always disconnect the tether cord
when the watercraft is not in oper- The information center displays the
ation in order to prevent accidental type of key used.
engine starting or to avoid unau-
thorized use by others, children,
and to prevent theft.
Digitally Encoded Security System

(D.E.S.S.)
The tether cord cap contains a D.E.S.S.
key that is programmed to give it a
unique electronic serial number. This
is the equivalent of a conventional key.
TYPE OF KEY IS DISPLAYED HERE
The D.E.S.S. system reads the key
in the tether cord cap that is installed Message possibilities:
on the engine cut-off switch, and only – NORMAL KEY
allows engine starting for keys it rec- – LEARNING KEY
ognizes. – RENTAL KEY.
The D.E.S.S. system brings great flex-
ibility. You can buy additional tether The SEA-DOO learning key or
cords and have the D.E.S.S. keys pro- rental key, limits the speed of the
grammed to your watercraft. watercraft and the engine torque,
A total of ten D.E.S.S. keys can be pro- therefore enabling first time users and
grammed to the same watercraft. less experienced operators to learn
48 ______________
CONTROLS
how to operate the watercraft while

gaining the necessary confidence and
control.
The learning and rental modes also
offer the possibility of setting the ma-
ximum speed of the watercraft.
Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec-
tion for details.
smo2011-003-020_a
4) Throttle Lever TYPICAL - iBR LEVER

1. iBR lever
The throttle lever on the RH handle- 2. Lever rest position
bar electronically controls the engine 3. 25% stroke required to activate iBR function
4. Operating range
speed.
To increase or maintain watercraft At speeds below 8 km/h (5 MPH),
speed, pull on the throttle lever with pulling the iBR lever in will engage re-
your finger. verse.
To decrease watercraft speed, release NOTE: If water current is 8 km/h
the throttle lever. (5 MPH) or above, the reverse can not
be engaged as the speed threshold for
the reverse is exceeded.
At speeds above 8 km/h (5 MPH),
pulling the iBR lever in will engage the
brake.
When the iBR lever is released after
braking or reverse operation, neutral is
engaged.
smo2009-002-201_a WARNING
TYPICAL If the throttle lever is still pulled in
1. Throttle lever when releasing the iBR lever, for-
2. To accelerate
3. To decelerate ward movement will be initiated
after a short delay. If forward ac-
The throttle lever is spring loaded and celeration is not desired, release
should return to rest position (idle) the throttle lever.
when not pressed.
NOTE: The neutral position can be fine
5) iBR Lever (intelligent tuned by trimming the iBR system.
Brake and Reverse) (All Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Models Except GTS) subsection for detailed instructions.
The iBR lever on the LH handlebar can
electronically command: 6) MODE/SET Buttons (All
– Reverse Models Except GTS)
– Neutral These buttons are located on the RH
– Braking. side of the handlebar.
NOTE: A minimum of 25% lever travel Press MODE button to scroll through
is required to activate iBR functions. various functions available through the
information center.
_______________ 49
CONTROLS
Press SET button to select the desired – Cruise mode

function, navigate through a function – Slow speed mode
submenu, or to save any modified set- – iBR neutral adjustment.
ting.
8) Cruise Button (GTI
Limited and WAKE
Models)
The Cruise button is located on the RH
side of the handlebar, just below the
UP/DOWN buttons.
sdd2009-001-024_b
TYPICAL
1. MODE
2. SET
3. UP/DOWN button
Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

subsection for detailed instructions.
sdd2009-001-024_g
7) UP/DOWN Buttons (All TYPICAL

1. Cruise button
Models Except GTS)
These buttons located on the RH side It is used to activate or deactivate
of the handlebar. CRUISE mode or to engage SLOW
SPEED MODE.
9) VTS Button (Variable

Trim System) (GTI
Limited and GTR
Models)
The VTS button is located on the LH
handlebar.
smo2012-003-007_b
TYPICAL
1. Up button
2. Down button
The UP/DOWN buttons are used to

make a selection or change a setting
through the information center such
as:
– Gauge functions
– Ski mode
50 ______________
CONTROLS
11) ECO Button

The ECO button is located on the LH
handlebar.
sdd2009-001-019_c

1. Bow up
2. Bow down
This model watercraft is equipped with

a programmable high performance smo2012-002-009_b
VTS. TYPICAL
1. ECO button
It provides watercraft pitch trim adjust-
ments by adjusting the vertical position It is used to activate or deactivate ECO
of the jet nozzle. mode.
The VTS can be electrically trimmed to Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec-
the desired attitude, or to one of two tion for details.
preset trim positions.
Press the VTS control button (up/down
arrow) to adjust the riding attitude of
the watercraft.
subsection for details.
10) Sport Button

The Sport button is located on the LH
handlebar.
smo2012-002-009_a
TYPICAL
1. Sport button
It is used to activate or deactivate

SPORT mode.
tion for details.
_______________ 51
INFORMATION CENTER (GAUGE) (GTS)
WARNING
smo2011-003-024_a
TYPICAL - GTS MODELS

Multifunction Gauge – Display the engine RPM

Description – Display fault messages.
NOTE: If a fault occurs, it will period-
8 9 10 ically scroll the applicable fault mes-
sage in the display and revert to the
RPM indication depending on the
2 severity of the fault detected.
1 2) Numerical Display
4
3 The numerical display provides an indi-
11 cation of estimated watercraft speed.
5
7 6
smo2011-003-021_b
When the TOURING mode indicator is
ON, the default TOURING mode is ac-
1) Multifunction Display tive.
The multifunction display is used to: Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec-
tion for details.
– Display the WELCOME message
on power up
– Display the KEY recognition mes-
sage
52 ______________
4) Sport Mode Indicator 7) Water Depth Display

The SPORT mode indicator is normally The water depth display provides an in-
off. dication of the lake water depth.
When sport mode of operation is se- The system is capable of indicating wa-
lected, the SPORT mode indicator will ter depth under the hull in single incre-
come on and stay on until sport mode ments up to 50 m (164 ft).
is deactivated, or the watercraft is shut NOTE: Under certain conditions, the
down. display may stop indicating. The dis-
NOTE: Sport mode is not the default play's ability to provide an indication
riding mode. To be active, it must be of the waters's depth depends on the
selected on after starting the engine. conditions of use.
Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec- NOTE: The water depth indication is
tion for detailed instructions. only available when a depth sounder is
installed and detected.
A bar gauge located in the bottom RH WARNING
side of the multifunction display con- Never use the depth sounder as a
tinuously indicates the amount of fuel warning device to ride in shallow
in the fuel tank while riding. water.
When the fuel tank is full, 8 segments
(bars) of the indicator are turned on. 8) Check Engine Light
The top segment is not used. The check engine light comes ON
Low Fuel Level Indication when a fault is detected by the engine
management system.
When there is only 2 segments of fuel
indicated (approximately 25% fuel tank The check engine light may be accom-
capacity or 14 L (3.7 U.S. gal.), the fol- panied by the applicable scrolling fault
lowing indications will come ON to message in the multifunction display.
advise you that a low fuel condition ex- When the check engine light comes
ists. on, you may seek service from an au-
thorized Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop,
LOW FUEL LEVEL INDICATIONS or person of your own choosing for
maintenance, repair, or replacement.
Last 2 fuel gauge
Please refer to the US EPA EMIS-
segments Flashing SIONS-RELATED WARRANTY con-
Fuel tank symbol tained herein for information about
warranty claims.
Audible advisory
(one long beep) 9) Maintenance Reminder Indicator
Scrolling LOW Periodically The maintenance reminder indicator
FUEL advisory comes ON when required mainte-
message nance is due.
When the maintenance reminder indi-
6) Hour Meter Display cator comes on, you may seek service
from an authorized Sea-Doo dealer,
Continuously displays the accumu- repair shop, or person of your own
lated engine hours. choosing for maintenance, repair, or re-
placement. Please refer to the US EPA
_______________ 53
EMISSIONS-RELATED WARRANTY
contained herein for information about
warranty claims.
10) High Temperature Indicator

The high temperature indicator comes
ON when a high engine temperature or
a high exhaust system temperature is
detected. Refer to TROUBLESHOOT-
ING section.
11) ECO Indicator
The ECO indicator and a smile in the
fuel tank symbol comes ON when
FUEL ECONOMY MODE is activated.
icône_eco-fuel
FUEL ECONOMY MODE INDICATOR

Gauge Setup
The multifunction gauge is capable of
providing speed indications in km/h or
in MPH. It is also capable of displaying
messages in various languages.
To have your gauge set up to your pre-
ferred unit of measurement and avail-
able language, see your authorized
Sea-Doo dealer.
54 ______________
INFORMATION CENTER (GAUGES)
(GTI/GTR/WAKE)
WARNING
smo2011-003-023_a
TYPICAL - GTI ,GTI SE AND WAKE MODELS

2 1 3
smo2012-001-007_a
TYPICAL - GTI LIMITED AND GTR MODELS

2. Analog speedometer
3. Analog tachometer
_______________ 55
INFORMATION CENTER (GAUGES) (GTI/GTR/WAKE)

GTI/ GTI
GTI SE GTR WAKE
GTI 130 LIMITED
Touring mode indicator X X X X X
Sport mode indicator X X X X X
Fuel level indication X X X X X
Hour meter display X X X X X
ECO mode indicator X X X X X
CRUISE mode indicator - - X - X
iBR position indicator X X X X X
SKI mode indicator - - - - X
VTS position indication - X X X X
- = See your Sea-Doo dealer for availability.
Multifunction Gauge – Display scrolling messages of func-

Description tion activation or system faults
8 9 10 11
1
4
3
5
16
12
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
15 14 7 6 13
smo2011-003-022_a
NOTE: The default indication in the
multifunction display is the compass
1) Multifunction Display direction.
– Display the WELCOME message 2) Numerical Display
on power up The numerical display is used to pro-
– Display the KEY recognition mes- vide a variety of indications as selected
sage by the operator using the DISPLAY
– Provide various indications as se- function in the multifunction display.
lected by the operator
– Activating or changing various func-
tions or modes of operation
56 ______________
2
1
NUMERICAL DISPLAY
1. Numerical display indication

2. Unit of measurement of indication
AVAILABLE INDICATIONS IN NUMERICAL DISPLAY

GTI/ GTI
GTI SE GTR WAKE
GTI 130 Limited
Clock N.A. X X X X
CRUISE SPEED setting - - X - X
SLOW SPEED MODE setting - Opt X - X
VTS preset - - X - -
VTS settings - X N.A. X X
SKI MODE settings - - - - X
Fuel consumption - X X X X
Fuel autonomy - - - -
X
Altitude N.A. N.A. Std N.A. N.A.
When the information center is first 3) Touring Mode Indicator

powered up, the numerical display de- When the TOURING mode indicator is
faults to the last selected indication. ON, the default TOURING mode of op-
eration is active.
_______________ 57
TOURING MODE INDICATOR FUEL LEVEL INDICATION
Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec- When the fuel tank is full, 8 segments
tion for detailed instructions. (bars) of the indicator are turned on.
The top segment is not used.
Low Fuel Level Warning
The sport mode indicator is normally
off. When there is only 2 segments of fuel
indicated (approximately 25% fuel tank
When sport mode of operation is se- capacity or 14 L (3.7 U.S. gal.), the fol-
lected, the SPORT mode indicator will lowing warnings will be ON.
come on and stay on until sport mode
is deactivated, or the watercraft is shut LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING
down.
Last 2 fuel gauge
segments Flashing
Fuel tank symbol
Audible warning
(one long beep)
Periodically
Scrolling LOW FUEL
WARNING message
SPORT MODE INDICATOR 6) Hour Meter Display (HR)

NOTE: Sport mode is not the default Continuously displays the accumu-
riding mode. To be active, it must be lated engine hours.
selected after starting the engine.

A bar gauge located in the bottom RH
side of the multifunction display con-
tinuously indicates the amount of fuel
in the fuel tank while riding.
HOUR METER DISPLAY

The water depth display provides an in-
dication of the lake water depth.
58 ______________
The system is capable of indicating wa- SIONS-RELATED WARRANTY con-

ter depth under the hull in single incre- tained herein for information about
ments up to 50 m (164 ft). warranty claims.
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the
display may stop indicating. The dis- 9) Maintenance Reminder Indicator
play's ability to provide and indication The maintenance reminder indicator
of the water's depth depends on the comes ON when required mainte-
conditions of use. nance is due.
WATER DEPTH DISPLAY MAINTENANCE REMINDER

INDICATOR
NOTE: The water depth indication is
only available when a depth sounder is When the maintenance reminder indi-
installed and detected. cator comes on, you may seek service
from an authorized Sea-Doo dealer,
WARNING repair shop, or person of your own
Never use the depth sounder as a choosing for maintenance, repair, or re-
warning device to ride in shallow placement. Please refer to the US EPA
water. EMISSIONS-RELATED WARRANTY
warranty claims.
The check engine light comes ON 10) High Temperature Indicator
when a fault is detected by the engine The high temperature indicator comes
management system. ON when a high engine temperature or
a high exhaust system temperature is
detected.
CHECK ENGINE LIGHT
When the check engine light comes HIGH TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

on, you may seek service from an au-
thorized Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop, Refer to TROUBLESHOOTING sub-
or person of your own choosing for section for details.
maintenance, repair, or replacement.
Please refer to the US EPA EMIS-
_______________ 59
11) iBR Fault Indicator

The iBR fault indicator comes ON
when a fault in the iBR system has
been detected.

iBR FAULT INDICATOR 14) iBR Position Indicator
Provides an indication of the iBR gate
Refer to TROUBLESHOOTING sub- position.
section for details.
– N (neutral)
12) ECO Indicator – F (forward)
The ECO indicator and a smile in the – R (reverse).
fuel tank symbol comes ON when
FUEL ECONOMY MODE is activated.
iBR POSITION INDICATOR
ECO MODE INDICATOR 15) SKI MODE Indicator

(Fuel Economy Mode)
The ski mode indicator is ON when SKI
MODE is active.
13) CRUISE Mode Indicator

The cruise mode indicator comes ON
when:
– CRUISE MODE has been activated.
– SLOW SPEED MODE has been acti-
vated.
SKI MODE INDICATOR

60 ______________
16) VTS Position Indication

The VTS position indication provides an
indication of the pump nozzle position.
A single segment of a bar gauge type
indicator is turned on to indicate the rel-
ative position of the watercraft bow.
FUNCTION SUBMENU DISPLAYED IN

SEQUENCE WHEN MODE BUTTON
PRESSED REPEATEDLY
2. Then press the SET button to enter

that function.
NOTE: The available functions and the
VTS POSITION INDICATION order in which they appear depends on
the watercraft model. The fault code
Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS function is only available when there
subsection for detailed instructions. is an active fault. The settings func-
tion is only available when the engine
Navigating the is shut off. The key mode function is
Multifunction Display only available with a normal key.
Function Description
WARNING
Do not adjust display while riding, Compass
you could lose control. A GPS incorporated in the information
center provides the indication in the
Selecting Functions multifunction display.
When operating at speed, the multi- The cardinal points, intermediate car-
function display provides an indication dinal points, as well as the azimuth the
of the compass direction and azimuth watercraft is travelling are displayed
of the watercraft is traveling by default. in the multifunction display by default
when the watercraft is moving.
1. To select the various functions avail-
able through the multifunction dis- For a compass indication to be dis-
play, press the MODE button re- played, the GPS must have a good link
peatedly until the desired function with the navigation satellites.
is visible:
– LAP TIMER
– SKI MODE
– FUEL ECONOMY MODE
– VTS MODE
– DISPLAY
– FAULT CODES
– KEY MODE COMPASS DIRECTION DISPLAYED
– SETTINGS.
_______________ 61
NOTE: The compass indication is only NOTE: The timer starts immediately
available above 5 km/h (3 MPH). when pressing the SET button.
4. To record each lap time, press the
WARNING SET button at the start of each lap.
Use the compass as a guide only. NOTE: The lap time will be recorded,
Not to be used for precision navi- the lap counter in the numerical display
gation purposes. will count the number of laps recorded,
and the timer will continue to run.
Lap Timer
2
The lap timer can be used to record up
to 50 individual lap times.
To activate and use the lap timer, carry 1
out the following:
1. Press the MODE button repeatedly
until LAP TIME is visible in the multi-
function display.
LAP TIMER FUNCTION EXAMPLE

5. To save the last lap and stop the

timer, press the MODE button.
2
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
LAP TIME 1
2. Press the SET button to enter the

function, the lap timer will be acti-
vated and visible in the display.
2 LAP TIMER FUNCTION EXAMPLE

1 2. Lap number "2" displayed here
To view each lap time, use the

UP/DOWN button. The lap counter
will indicate which lap is indicated.
LAP TIMER FUNCTION To view the cumulative lap time of all
laps recorded, use the UP/DOWN
1. 00'00'00 lap time displayed here button until ALL is visible in the lap
2. Lap number "0" displayed here counter.
3. To start the timer, press the SET but-

ton.
62 ______________
2 When the LOW FUEL indications

come on in the multifunction gauge,
the "TIME TO EMPTY" and "DISTANCE
1 TO EMPTY" functions will indicate "0"
(zero) if they are the selected indica-
tion.
To display the watercraft fuel con-
sumption, carry out the following:
LAP TIMER FUNCTION EXAMPLE until FUEL CONSUMPTION is visi-
1. Total lap times 02'23'37 displayed
ble in the multifunction display.
here
2. Lap count "ALL" displayed here
To reset the lap timer and lap counter,

press and hold the SET button until the
timer and counter are reset to 0 (zero).
Ski Mode
Ski mode is used for repeated con-
trolled launches when towing a skier MESSAGE DISPLAYED
or wakeboarder. Refer to OPERATING
MODES for more details. FUEL CONSUMPTION
ECO Mode 2. Press the UP/DOWN button to tog-

ECO mode is a function by which en- gle to the desired fuel consumption
gine fuel consumption is reduced. Re- display mode.
fer to OPERATING MODES subsection
2
for detailed instructions.
Fuel Consumption
1
The FUEL CONSUMPTION function is
used to display the watercraft fuel con-
sumption four different ways:
– Instant fuel flow per hour (gal/h or
L/h)
– Average fuel flow per hour (gal/h or FUEL CONSUMPTION DISPLAY
L/h) MODE
– Distance to empty (Mi or Km)
1. INSTANT FUEL CONSUMPTION
– Time to empty (h or min). message
The fuel consumption functions are 2. Applicable value
not continuously active.
The fuel consumption function se- 3. Press the SET button to save the
lected becomes active only when se- setting and return to the main dis-
lected as the indication in the numeri- play.
cal display.
_______________ 63
NOTE: The fuel consumption value

selected will be displayed in the nu-
merical display. Double click the SET
button to reset the average fuel con-
sumption indication. The display will
momentarily indicate zero (0).
VTS Mode
The VTS MODE function is used to
manually set the VTS or change VTS MESSAGE DISPLAYED
PRESET settings.
DISPLAY
subsection for detailed instructions. 2. Press the SET button to enter the
Display DISPLAY function.
The DISPLAY function is used to 3. Press the UP/DOWN button until
change the indication in the numerical the preferred indication is visible in
display. Refer to CHANGING NUMER- the multifunction display (as appli-
ICAL DISPLAY INDICATION. cable to model).
– RPM
Fault Codes – SPEED
The FAULT CODES function is used to – CLOCK
display active fault codes. – ENGINE TEMP
Refer to MONITORING SYSTEM sub- – ALTITUDE
section for details. – TOP SPEED
Key Mode – AVG SPEED
– TOP RPM
The KEY MODE function is used for
changing LEARNING key settings. – AVG RPM.
Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec- 2
Settings 1
– Changing the clock setting, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION GAUGE SETUP.
– Activating the iBR override function,
refer to SPECIAL PROCEDURES.
Changing Numerical 1. Type of selected numerical display
Display Indication indication
To change the indication in the numeri- 2. Applicable value
cal display, carry out the following:
1. Press the MODE button on the RH 4. Press the SET button to select and
handlebar repeatedly until DISPLAY save the preferred indication, or
is visible in the multifunction display. wait for the display function to time
out. The last indication visible will
be automatically saved.
64 ______________
Resetting Numerical 2
Display Indication
The following numerical display indica-
tions can be reset when selected: 1
– Top speed
– Average speed
– Top RPM
– Average RPM. FUNCTION SELECTED - CLOCK
To reset the indication. double click the 1. CLOCK indication
SET button. The numerical display will 2. Time
NOTE: Each of these functions be- 3. Press the SET button to enter the
come active ONLY when selected as function. CHANGE CLOCK OFF-
the numerical display indication. SET message will be displayed.
Multifunction Gauge 2
Setup
Clock Setting 1
until SETTINGS is visible in the mul-
tifunction display.
FUNCTION SELECTED - CHANGE

CLOCK OFFSET
1. CHANGE CLOCK OFFSET indication

2. Time
4. Press the UP/DOWN button to ad-

just the clock to the correct local
MESSAGE DISPLAYED time.
5. Press the SET button to save the
SETTINGS setting and return to the main dis-
play.
2. Press the UP/DOWN button repeat-
edly until CLOCK is visible. NOTE: The clock uses the GPS sig-
nal to maintain the appropriate time
referenced to Greenwich Mean Time
(GMT). When setting the clock, only
Units of Measurement and

Language Setting
displaying information in metric or im-
perial units and in various languages.
_______________ 65
To change the units of measurement

or to change the language displayed
in the multifunction gauge, see your
authorized Sea-Doo dealer.
Analog Speedometer
Description
The speedometer, located in the LH
side of the information center, pro-
vides an analog indication of the speed
of the watercraft in miles per hour
(MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The speed indication is based on a GPS
(Global Positioning System) incorpo-
rated within the information center.
If for some reason the GPS signal is
lost, a default mode is used whereby,
the speed is calculated using infor-
mation received from other systems
to provide an estimated watercraft
speed.
Analog Tachometer
Description
The tachometer provides an analog in-
dication of the revolutions per minute
(RPM) of the engine. Multiply the in-
dicated number by 1000 to obtain the
actual engine RPM.
66 ______________
EQUIPMENT
NOTE: Illustrations may not be accurate for every model and are only provided as
a visual guide.
2 1 3 4 10 4 9
7 7
8
smo2014-001-001_a
TYPICAL - WAKE MODEL ILLUSTRATED
1) Glove Box The front storage compartment also

A small, storage compartment for per- contains two holders for safety equip-
sonal articles. ment; one for a fire extinguisher and
another for the emergency kit (these
Pull up on cover latch to open glove are not provided).
box.
smo2011-003-011_b
smo2009-002-120_a
TYPICAL — GLOVE BOX FRONT STORAGE COMPARTMENT

1. Cover latch 1. Fire extinguisher secured in holder
2. Emergency kit secured in holder
2) Front Storage To open the front storage compart-

Compartment ment cover, pull the latch lever upward
A convenient area to carry personal ar- Always close and latch cover when rid-
ticles. ing.
_______________ 67
EQUIPMENT
smo2011-003-025_a
TYPICAL smo2009-002-129_a
1. Front storage compartment cover TYPICAL - SEAT LATCH

2. Latch lever 1. Seat latch handle
2. Latch pin
WARNING 3. Pin insertion hole
Never carry any loose, heavy, To install the seat, insert the forward
sharp, or breakable objects in the end of the seat in it's retainer.
storage compartment. Do not ex-
ceed maximum load capacity; 9 kg
(20 lb). Never operate the water-
craft with the front storage com-
partment cover open. This is not a
watertight compartment.
3) Seat
Removing the seat provides access to
the engine compartment.
The seat latch is located at the back
end of the seat.
smo2011-003-012_a
To remove the seat, pull up on the latch 1. Forward seat tab
handle and lift the back end of the seat 2. Forward seat retainer
off the latch pin. Then pull the seat up
and backwards to unhook the front of Align the seat latch with the latch pin
the seat from it's retainer and remove and firmly press down on the rear por-
the seat from the watercraft. tion of the seat to lock it in place.
Pull up on the rear portion of the seat to
ensure it is properly latched.
CAUTION Ensure the latch is

properly locked onto the pin.
4) Passenger Handhold
The seat strap provides a handhold for
a passenger to hold on to when riding.
The sides of the molded grab handle at
the rear of the seat also provide a hand-
hold for a passenger. The rear portion
of the molded grab handle provides
68 ______________
EQUIPMENT
a handhold for the skier/wakeboarder

spotter or boarding the watercraft from
the water.
NOTICE Never use the molded
grab handle to tow anything or to lift
the watercraft.
smo2009-002-133
BOARDING STEP HELD DOWN FOR

BOARDING FROM WATER
NOTICE
– Never use the step for boarding a
watercraft that is out of water.
– Never use the step for pulling,
smo2011-003-013_a towing, diving or jumping, or
TYPICAL - PASSENGER HANDHOLDS any other purpose other than as a
1. Seat strap boarding step.
2. Molded grab handle
– Stay on center of the step.
5) Boarding Step – Only one person at a time on the
step.
A convenient step used for boarding
the watercraft from the water. iBR Equipped Models Only
WARNING
Be aware of the iBR gate move-
ment when starting the engine,
shutting down the engine or using
the iBR lever. Automatic move-
ment of the gate may squeeze fin-
gers or toes of people taking a hold
on the back or your PWC.
smo2009-002-132_a
6) Boarding Platform
TYPICAL
1. Boarding step The rear deck area serves as the board-
ing platform.
WARNING The aft portion of the foot wells near
The engine must be shut off before the boarding platform are used as foot
attempting to board the watercraft rests for the rear facing spotter when
using the boarding step. towing a skier or tuber.
Pull down the step with your hand and

hold until a foot or a knee is put on the
step.
_______________ 69
EQUIPMENT
Rear Eyelets
smo2011-003-014_a
smo2009-002-132_b
2. Spotter foot rests (each side) TYPICAL
1. Rear eyelets
7) Front and Rear Eyelets All Models Except WAKE

Eyelets can be used for mooring, tow-
ing a water skier, wakeboarder or tu-
ber, and as tie-down points when trai-
lering your watercraft.
Front Eyelet
smo2011-003-026_a
1. Rear eyelet
8) Bilge Drain Plugs

Unscrew drain plugs whenever wa-
tercraft is on the trailer. This will allow
water accumulated in the bilge to be
evacuated and helps to reduce con-
smo2008-001-020_a
densation.
TYPICAL
1. Front eyelet
smo2009-002-135_a
TYPICAL
1. Drain plugs
2. Tighten
3. Loosen
70 ______________
EQUIPMENT
NOTICE Ensure drain plugs are

properly secured prior to launching
the watercraft in water.
9) Ski/Wakeboard Post
(WAKE Model Only)
Pull up on the knob to extend the post.
Ensure both sections of post are fully
extended and properly locked before
attaching ski or wakeboard rope. smo2011-003-017_a
TYPICAL - PUSH TOWARD FRONT TO

UNLOCK AND REMOVE POST
1. Locking clip
WARNING
Make sure ski/wakeboard post is
fully extended and locked before
use. Completely retract and lock
when not used. Use caution with
skier/wakeboarder in tow as tow
rope may backlash to watercraft
when released. Never perform a
smo2011-003-015_a
sharp turn when towing a skier,
TYPICAL - SKI/WAKEBOARD POST wakeboarder or any toy. Always
RETACTED store tow rope when not in use.
1. Pull on this knob to extend
NOTICE The ski/wakeboard post is

boarder with a maximum gross
weight of 114 kg (250 lb).
Always have one person other than the
operator as an observer.
NOTE: The handles on the ski/
wakeboard post are provided as a
handhold for the observer.
smo2011-003-016
TYPICAL - SKI/WAKEBOARD POST NOTICE Never use the ski/

EXTENDED wakeboard post to tow other water-
To retract the post, push straight down craft. Respect the maximum load
on the top of the post. limit rating of the ski/wakeboard
post. Overloading can affect ma-
If the post becomes difficult to extend neuverability, stability and perfor-
or retract, simultaneously push in on mance.
both sides of the locking clip toward
front of watercraft.
_______________ 71
EQUIPMENT
10) Wakeboard Rack

(WAKE Model Only)
A convenient removable rack to carry a
wakeboard on the watercraft when on
the water.
smo2010-002-009_a
1. Hooked portion of rack in lower bracket
2. Rotate the rack upwards and push

the top of the rack inboard until the
handle locks into the top retaining
bracket.
WARNING
If rack is not properly secured on
smo2011-003-014_b the watercraft, it could become
1. Wakeboard rack loose and detach unexpectedly,
creating a risk of injury to people
NOTE: The wakeboard rack can be in- nearby. Periodically ensure the
stalled on the LH side of the watercraft. rack is properly locked on its sup-
To install: port.
1. Insert the hooks on the lower por-
tion of the rack into the lower retain- 3. When installing a wakeboard on
ing bracket located on the hull under the rack, position wakeboard fin(s)
the LH side bumper. outward with the heel of the boots
facing down near freeboard of the
PWC.
4. Secure wakeboard using bungee
cords.
WARNING
To avoid possible injuries and cuts
from the wakeboards fin(s), al-
ways place FIN(S) OUTWARDS.
smo2010-002-007_a
RETAINING BRACKETS FOR WAKEBOARD

RACK
1. Lower retaining bracket
2. Upper retaining bracket
smo2010-002-008
TYPICAL - WAKEBOARD INSTALLED WITH

FINS OUTWARD
72 ______________
EQUIPMENT
5. After installation, pull and push WARNING

wakeboard to ensure it is tightly
secured to rack. When trailering the watercraft,
NEVER leave a wakeboard in-
WARNING stalled on the rack. Otherwise,
wakeboard fin(s) could cause in-
If the wakeboard is not properly se- jury to bystanders or wakeboard
cured on the rack, it could become could fly off on the road. The
loose and detach unexpectedly, bungee cords are under tension
creating a risk of injury to people and could spring back and whip
nearby. To avoid: someone when released. Use cau-
– Inspect bungee cords condition tion.
– Secure wakeboard properly on To remove the wakeboard rack, de-
rack. press the lever at the top of the rack
– Periodically ensure the board is and remove it from its retaining brack-
properly attached. ets.
NOTE: When the wakeboard is re-

moved from its rack, secure the
bungee cords so that they will not
move freely when riding watercraft.
NOTICE The rack is designed to
hold one wakeboard. Do not use to
hold more than one wakeboard or
to transport skis or any other object.
Do not use rack(s) as mooring points
or to reboard.
WARNING smo2010-002-010_a
WAKEBOARD RACK REMOVAL

With wakeboard and/or rack in- 1. Press this handle to release wakeboard rack
stalled, operate with extra caution:
– NEVER perform aggressive ma-
neuvers including a spin-out.
– NEVER jump waves.
– Use common sense and limit
speed.
Otherwise, the wakeboard could
detach or occupants could fall off
and injure themselves against the
wakeboard or rack.
_______________ 73
BREAK-IN PERIOD
Operation During Break-In
Period
A break-in period of 10 operating hours
is required before running the water-
craft at sustained full throttle.
During this period, maximum throttle
should not exceed 1/2 to 3/4 opening.
However, brief full acceleration and
speed variations contribute to a good
break-in.
NOTICE Continued wide open
throttle accelerations or operation,
prolonged cruising speeds are detri-
mental during the break-in period.
NOTE: GTR 215: During the first 5
hours of operation, the engine man-
agement limits the engine maximum
speed for engine protection. The en-
gine performance will progressively
increase during this period.
74 ______________
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
Always perform the PRE-RIDE IN-
SPECTION before operating this
watercraft. Be sure to read the
SAFETY INFORMATION and the
WATERCRAFT INFORMATION sec-
tions and be thoroughly familiar
with the iControl technology.
Should any control or instruction not be F18A01Y

fully understood, refer to an authorized
Sea-Doo dealer.
Boarding from Water
Boarding the Watercraft Ensure there is at least 90 cm (3 ft) of
As with any watercraft, boarding water underneath the lowest rear por-
should be done carefully and engine tion of the hull.
must not be running. Take into account that the hull will be
lower in the water when all passen-
WARNING gers are aboard. Be certain to maintain
the specified depth so sand, pebbles
Engine must be OFF and tether and rocks will not be drawn up in the
cord must be removed when propulsion system.
boarding the watercraft or when
using the boarding step. Never
use propulsion system compo-
nents as a supporting point to
board the watercraft.
Boarding from a Dock

When boarding from a dock, slowly
place one foot on the watercraft foot-
board nearest the dock while holding A
the handlebar, and at the same time,
transfer the body weight to the other
F18L0XY
side in order to balance the watercraft.
Then bring the other foot over the seat A. Maintain at least 90 cm (3 ft) underneath
the lowest rear portion of the hull when all
and place it on the other footboard. passengers are aboard
Push the watercraft away from the
dock. NOTICE Starting the engine or rid-
ing the watercraft in shallower water
may damage the propulsion system.
Operator Alone
Models Without a Boarding Step
1. Using one hand, grab the rear han-
dle.
_______________ 75
2. With the other hand on the boarding Using the other hand, take hold of the
platform, lift your body until you can edge of the boarding platform, then
lay one knee on the boarding plat- pull yourself up so that you can knee
form. onto the boarding step.
3. Lay the other knee on the boarding
platform.
smo2009-002-141
NOTICE
smo2009-002-144
4. Take hold of the seat strap to help – Only one person at a time on the
maintain your balance and step for- step.
ward onto the footboards on either – Never use propulsion system
side of the seat. components to board.
Reach forward with one hand and take
hold of the molded handle behind the
seat, then stand on the boarding step.
smo2009-002-145
Sit astride the seat.

Models with a Boarding Step smo2009-002-142
Using one hand, lower the boarding

step. With both hands on the handle behind
the seat, step up onto the boarding
platform.
smo2009-002-140
smo2009-002-143
76 ______________
smo2009-002-146
smo2009-002-144
Take hold of the seat strap to help main- The passenger then climbs onto the
tain your balance and step forward watercraft while the operator main-
onto the footboards on either side of tains balance by sitting as close as pos-
the seat. sible to the console.
smo2009-002-147
smo2009-002-145
TYPICAL - MODEL WITH BOARDING STEP
Sit astride the seat. SHOWN
Operator with a Passenger

The operator climbs on the watercraft
in the same way as explained previ-
ously.
WARNING
Engine must be OFF and tether
cord must be removed when smo2009-002-148
boarding the watercraft or when TYPICAL - MODEL WITH BOARDING STEP
using the boarding step. Never SHOWN
use propulsion system compo-
nents as a supporting point to
In choppy water, while in the water,

the passenger may hold the water-
craft steady to help the operator climb
aboard.
smo2009-002-149
_______________ 77
5. Depress the START/STOP button to

crank the engine.
6. Release engine START/STOP but-
ton immediately after engine is
started.
WARNING
smo2009-002-150
The tether cord clip should always
be attached to the operators per-
sonal flotation device or to the
How to Start Engine wrist (wrist strap required) when
starting or operating the water-
WARNING craft.
Before starting the engine, the op-
erator and passenger(s) should al-
ways: NOTICE Do not hold START/STOP
button more than 10 seconds to
– Be properly seated on the water- avoid starter overheating. A rest pe-
craft riod should be observed between
– Have a firm grip on a handhold the cranking cycles to allow the
or hold on to the waist of the per- starter to cool down.
son in front of them
– Wear appropriate protective NOTE: If the engine is stopped us-
clothing including a PFD ap- ing the START/STOP button without
proved by local authorities and removing the tether cord, it can be
a wet suit bottom. restarted within 3 minutes. After this
delay, remove the tether cord and carry
out the engine starting procedure from
NOTICE Ensure there is at least the beginning.
90 cm (3 ft) of water under the low-
est rear portion of the hull when all How to Stop the Engine
passengers are aboard prior to start-
ing the engine. Otherwise damage WARNING
to the propulsion system compo-
nents may occur. To maintain watercraft directional
control, the engine should be
1. Attach the tether cord clip to your running until the watercraft is
PFD or to the wrist (wrist strap re- stopped.
quired).
2. Firmly grip the handlebar with your The engine may be shut off using one
left hand and place both feet on the of two methods:
footboards. – Pressing the engine START/STOP
3. Press the engine START/STOP but- button, or
ton once to wake up the electrical – Removing the tether cord from the
system. engine cut-off switch.
4. Within 5 seconds of pressing
START/STOP button, install the
tether cord on the engine cut-off
switch.
78 ______________
WARNING WARNING
Never leave the tether cord on the Directional control is reduced
engine cut-off switch when dis- when the throttle is released and
embarking watercraft to prevent lost when the engine is off.
theft, accidental engine starting,
and to avoid unauthorized use by The watercraft behaves differently
children or others. with a passenger and requires greater
skill. The passenger(s) should always
How to Steer the grip the seat strap, the molded grab
Watercraft handle, or the waist of the person
ahead of them. Reduce speed and
avoid sharp turns. Avoid choppy water
conditions when carrying a passenger.
Tight Turns and Other Special

Maneuvers
Any tight turns or special maneuvers
that will cause the air inlet openings to
be kept under water for a prolonged
time, water will seep into the bilge.
Combustion engines need air to oper-
ate; consequently this watercraft can-
not be totally watertight.
F18J09Y
NOTICE If the air inlet openings
Turning the handlebar pivots the jet are kept under water, such as turning
pump nozzle which controls the water- constantly in tight circles, plunging
craft direction. Turning the handlebar the bow through waves, or capsiz-
to the right will turn the watercraft to ing the watercraft, water may seep
the right, turning the handlebar to the into the bilge, which may cause se-
left turns the watercraft to the left. vere damage to internal parts of the
The throttle should be applied to turn engine. Refer to the WARRANTY
the watercraft. section contained in this guide.
WARNING O.T.A.S.TM System

(Off-Throttle Assisted Steering)
Throttle should be applied and
handlebar turned to change the di- The O.T.A.S. (Off-Throttle Assisted
rection of the watercraft. Steering Steering) system provides additional
efficiency will differ depending on maneuverability in off-throttle situa-
the amount of throttle applied, the tions.
number of passengers, the load, If the driver releases the throttle to idle
the water conditions and the en- when initiating a full turn, the O.T.A.S.
vironmental factors such as the system will be electronically activated,
wind. and will slightly increase engine speed
to allow completion of the turn.
Unlike a car, a watercraft needs some When the handlebar is brought back
throttle to turn. Practice in a safe area towards its center position, the throt-
applying the throttle and turning away tle reverts to idle.
from an imaginary object. This is a
good collision avoidance technique.
_______________ 79
We recommend that you familiarize

yourself with this feature during your
first ride.
How to Engage Neutral (iBR

Equipped Models Only)
WARNING
The drive shaft and impeller are sdd2009-001-024_i
always turning when the engine is TRIMMING THE iBR NEUTRAL POSITION
running, even in neutral position. 1. UP button (to stop rearward movement)
Keep away from the propulsion 2. DOWN button (to stop forward movement)
system of the watercraft. NOTE: Press the UP/DOWN button
repeatedly until proper adjustment of
When the watercraft is first started, the neutral position is attained and the
the iBR system automatically sets the watercraft stops moving.
neutral position by default.
To engage neutral from forward posi- How to Engage Forward
tion, tap the iBR lever. (iBR Equipped Models
To engage neutral from reverse posi- Only)
tion, release the iBR lever and throttle To engage forward from neutral po-
lever. sition, tap on the throttle lever. The
watercraft will accelerate forward.
How to Trim the Neutral Position of
the iBR To engage forward from reverse posi-
tion, release the iBR lever, then tap the
When in NEUTRAL, if the watercraft throttle lever.
creeps forward or backward, the iBR
system may be trimmed. To re-engage forward from braking, si-
multaneously pull in the throttle lever
NOTE: Movement of the watercraft while releasing the iBR lever. The wa-
when operating in neutral may be due tercraft will accelerate forward after a
to wind or water current. short delay.
If the watercraft is moving forwards,
momentarily press the DOWN button.
If the watercraft is moving backwards,
momentarily press the UP button.
smo2009-002-201_b
ENGAGING NEUTRAL
1. Throttle lever
80 ______________
How to Engage and Use WARNING

Reverse (iBR Equipped The brake function has no effect
Models Only) when travelling in reverse.
Reverse can only be engaged between
idle speed and the threshold forward Available engine power is limited in
speed of 8 km/h (5 MPH). reverse mode, which limits reverse
To engage reverse position, the iBR speed.
lever on the LH handlebar must be
pulled in at least 25% of the lever WARNING
travel.
Only use reverse at slow speed
and for the shortest time possible.
Always ensure the path behind
is clear of objects, obstacles and
people.
When operating in reverse, turn the

handlebar in the opposite direction
that you want to move the rear of the
watercraft.
smo2009-002-202_a For example, to steer the rear of the
TYPICAL - iBR LEVER watercraft to port (left), turn the han-
1. iBR lever dlebar to starboard (right).
2. Lever released position
3. Approximate 25% position
4. Operating range
When operating the iBR lever in re-

verse mode, the throttle lever can
be used to control engine RPM, and
thus the amount of reverse thrust pro-
duced.
By modulating both the iBR and throt-
tle levers simultaneously, reverse
thrust can be more precisely con-
trolled. Too much RPM will create
water turbulence and reduce reverse
efficiency.
NOTE: Engine power will be reduced
to idle whenever the iBR lever position
is changed.
Release the iBR lever to end reverse
operation. F18J08Z
To stop rearward motion after iBR lever

TYPICAL - STEERING DIRECTION REVERSED
release, apply enough throttle to stop WHEN BACKING
rearward movement.
_______________ 81
CAUTION Steering direction

in reverse is opposite of forward.
To steer the stern to port (left) in re-
verse, turn the handlebar to star-
board (right). To steer the stern to
starboard (right), turn the handle-
bar to port (left). Reverse operation
should be practiced in open waters
in order to become fully familiar with smo2009-002-202_a
the controls and watercraft handling TYPICAL - iBR LEVER
characteristics before operating in 1. iBR lever
close quarters. 2. Lever released position
3. Approximate 25% position
4. Operating range
How to Engage and Use
Braking (iBR Equipped WARNING
Models Only) Braking should be practiced in
open waters and at gradually in-
WARNING creasing speeds in order to be-
– The engine must be running to come fully familiar with the con-
be able to use the brake. trols and watercraft handling char-
acteristics.
– The brake is only applicable
when operating in forward
movement, it has no effect on When iBR lever is applied, the throttle
rearward motion. lever command is overridden and en-
gine throttle control is now dependant
– The brake cannot prevent your on the iBR lever position. Braking can
PWC from drifting due to cur- thus be modulated by using only the
rent or wind. iBR lever.
The braking function can only be en- Watercraft deceleration is proportional
gaged during forward operation at or to the braking force. The more the iBR
above the threshold speed of 8 km/h lever is pulled in, the greater the brak-
(5 MPH). ing force applied.
Braking is engaged and controlled NOTE: Be careful to gradually actuate
when the iBR lever on the LH handle- the iBR lever to adjust intensity of the
bar is pulled in at least 25% of its travel. braking force and simultaneously re-
lease the throttle lever.
CAUTION When braking, rid-

ers must brace themselves against
the deceleration force to prevent
from moving forward on the water-
craft and losing balance. The oper-
ator should always keep both hands
on the handlebars, and all passen-
gers should maintain a firm grip of a
handhold or the waist of the person
in front of them.
82 ______________
WARNING WARNING
Stopping distance will vary de- – It is important to inform the
pending on initial speed, load, operator of a watercraft who
wind, number of riders, water con- intends to follow in a convoy
ditions, and the amount of braking formation, of the braking and
power commanded by the oper- maneuvering capability of your
ator. Always adjust your riding PWC, what the plume of water
style accordingly. indicates, and that a greater dis-
When the watercraft slows to less tween watercraft.
than 8 km/h (5 MPH), braking mode – Be aware that other boats fol-
ends and reverse mode is engaged. lowing or operating in close
Release the iBR lever once the water- proximity may not be able to
craft is stopped. Otherwise, a rear- stop as quickly.
ward movement will be initiated.
Braking in a Turn
CAUTION As the watercraft Throttle must be applied for turning to
slows to a stop, the wake created ensure directional control. However
by the watercraft will catch up and braking can be initiated during a turn
tend to push the watercraft forward. using the iBR lever as previously de-
Ensure there are no obstacles or scribed. Get ready to maintain your
bathers in the direction of travel. balance while the wake is crossing
If the throttle lever is still pulled in your PWC.
when releasing the iBR lever, the wa-
tercraft will accelerate forward after a
short delay. Acceleration will be pro- CAUTION As the watercraft
portional to the throttle lever position. slows to a stop while braking in a
turn, the wake created by the water-
craft will catch up and tend to push
WARNING the watercraft sideways. Be pre-
If forward acceleration is not de- pared to maintain balance as the
sired when the brake lever is re- wake crossed the watercraft.
leased, release the throttle lever.
How to Use the Variable
When at speed and the brake is first Trim System (VTS)
applied, a plume of water will shoot up The variable trim system (VTS)
in the air behind the watercraft which changes the vertical position of the jet
may cause the operator of a following pump nozzle to provide the operator
watercraft to momentarily loose sight with a fast, effective system to com-
of your PWC. pensate for load, thrust, riding position
and water conditions. Correctly ad-
justed, it can improve handling, reduce
porpoising, and position the watercraft
at its best riding attitude to attain maxi-
mum performance.
When first using the watercraft, the
operator should become familiar with
the use of the variable trim system
(VTS) at varying speeds and water con-
ditions. A mid-range trim is generally
_______________ 83
used when cruising. Experience alone NOTE: VTS position is indicated on a

will dictate the best trim for the condi- bar gauge in the information center.
tions. During the watercraft break-in
period, when lower speeds are recom-
mended, it is an excellent opportunity
to become familiar with trim adjust-
ment and its effects.
When the nozzle is positioned in an
upward angle, the water jet directs the
bow of the watercraft upward. This po-
sition is used to optimize high speed.
When the nozzle is directed down- VTS POSITION INDICATION
ward, the bow is forced downward
and increases the watercraft turning The VTS system allows for manually
capabilities. As with any watercraft, adjusting the trim position of the noz-
speed and operator body position and zle, or selecting two preset trim posi-
movement (body English), will deter- tions and recording or changing preset
mine the degree and sharpness of the trim positions on certain models.
watercraft turn. Porpoising can be re-
duced or eliminated if the nozzle is
downward and speed is adjusted pro-
portionately.
VTS Trimming Methods

AVAILABLE VTS TRIMMING METHODS
GTI/ GTI
GTI SE GTR WAKE
GTI 130 Limited
VTS trim button N.A. N.A X X N.A
VTS "Double Click"
N.A. N.A X X N.A
trimming
VTS "Presets" N.A. N.A X X N.A
VTS trimming through
N.A. X N.A. N.A. X
multifunction gauge
Trimming the VTS Using the VTS NOTE: Pressing the VTS trim button
Button without the engine in forward position
Five trim positions are available. will only change the indication. The
nozzle will move to the selected VTS
With the watercraft operating in for- trim position when forward position is
ward position, proceed as follows: engaged.
1. Press the VTS UP button once to 2. Press the VTS DOWN button once
trim the bow of the watercraft up to to trim the bow of the watercraft
the next trim position. down to the next trim position.
84 ______________
smo2011-003-018_c smo2011-003-018_c
TYPICAL - VTS CONTROL BUTTON DOUBLE-CLICK UP OR DOWN VTS BUTTON

1. Bow up TO USE PRESET POSITIONS
2. Bow down 1. Highest preset position on UP arrow
2. Lowest preset position on DOWN arrow
NOTE: If the VTS UP/Down button
is pressed and held, the pump nozzle Recording Preset Trim Positions
will keep moving until the button is Two different VTS trim positions may
released at the desired trim attitude, be recorded for quickly selecting the
or the maximum trim position (up or preferred watercraft trim attitude.
down) is reached.
Both VTS PRESET trim positions are
factory set to 3 but may be changed
as per operator preference. When
the VTS PRESET trim positions are
changed by an operator, the new set-
tings will remain recorded in memory
even after complete watercraft power
down.
To record VTS preset trim positions:
1. Turn ON the electrical power by
pressing the START/STOP button
once.
2. Install the tether cord on the engine
Two preset trim positions can be se- cut-off switch.
lected.
3. On the RH handlebar, press the
To select the highest trim position MODE button repeatedly until VTS
recorded, double-click on the VTS UP MODE is displayed.
button (bow up).
To select the lowest trim position
recorded, double-click on the VTS
DOWN button (bow down).
NOTE: If only one preset trim position
is recorded, double-click either UP or
DOWN of the VTS button.
sdd2009-001-024_b
1. MODE button
2. SET button
3. UP/DOWN button
_______________ 85
The VTS system will compare the pre-

set trim settings recorded, the highest
position will be assigned to the UP ar-
row (bow up), the lowest to the DOWN
arrow (bow down).
If both trim positions are identical, both
buttons will have the same trim set-
tings.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED Trimming the VTS Using the
Mode/Set Buttons
VTS MODE
With the engine running in forward po-
4. On the RH handlebar, press the SET sition, proceed as follows:
button to display PRESET 1. 1. Press the MODE button to display
5. Press the VTS UP/DOWN button to the VTS function in the multifunc-
change the PRESET 1 VTS position. tion display.
Gauge will display setting 1 through 2. On the RH handlebar, press the
5 in the digital screen above PRE- UP/DOWN button to change the
SET 1. VTS setting.
2 2
1 1
FUNCTION SELECTED - PRESET 1 FUNCTION SELECTED - VTS

1. PRESET 1 message 1. VTS message
2. VTS setting number 2. VTS setting number
3. VTS position indicator at setting 1
(bow down) 3. Confirm VTS operation by looking
for the VTS position indicator move-
6. Press the SET button to save PRE- ment in the digital display.
SET 1 and display PRESET 2. 4. Press the SET button to save the de-
7. Press the VTS UP/DOWN button to sired setting and return to the main
change the PRESET 2 VTS position. display.
Gauge will display setting 1 through NOTE: The available VTS settings are
5 in the digital screen above PRE- between 1 and 5.
SET 2.
NOTE: The VTS system cannot be
8. Press the SET button to save the fully tested without the engine operat-
settings and return to the main dis- ing in forward position. If the engine
play. is not running in forward position, only
the VTS indication will change when
the VTS control switches are pressed;
the nozzle will not change position.
86 ______________
General Operating
Recommendations
Rough Water or Poor Visibility
Operation
Avoid operation in these conditions. If
you must do so, proceed with caution
using minimum speed.
Crossing Waves
The operator must grip the handlebar
firmly and keep both feet on the foot-
boards.
F18A03Y
The passenger must grip the hand-
holds with both hands and keep both The operator should practice in open
feet on the footboards. waters at various speeds to become
Reduce speed. familiar with the stopping distances
Always be prepared to steer and main- under different conditions.
tain your balance as necessary. Models Without iBR
When going over waves, raise your
body slightly off the seat to absorb the WARNING
shocks with your legs. The engine must stop running for
When crossing wakes, always keep a the watercraft to come to a full
safe distance from watercraft ahead. stop.
WARNING Models with iBR

When crossing wakes, slow down.
Operator and passenger(s) should WARNING
brace themselves and adopt a Always practice braking in open
semi-standing position to help waters ensuring there are no wa-
absorb the bumps. Do not jump tercraft or boats in your immediate
waves or wakes. vicinity, especially astern. Other
users of the waterways may not be
Stopping/Docking able to maneuver or stop in time
When the throttle is released, the wa- to avoid you should you unexpect-
tercraft is slowed by water drag against edly come to a full stop in front of
the hull. The stopping distance will them.
vary depending on the watercraft size,
weight, speed, water surface condi- The iBR system can also be used for
tion, presence and direction of wind slowing down or for stopping the
and current. watercraft more quickly, and for in-
creasing maneuverability especially
when docking. Stopping using the
iBR system in a straight line and in a
turn should be practiced extensively
to become familiar with the handling
characteristics of the watercraft under
partial or full braking conditions.
_______________ 87
When at speed and the brake is first Drive slowly towards the beach and
applied, a plume of water will shoot shut off the engine before the water is
up in the air behind the watercraft and less than 90 cm (3 ft) deep under the
may cause the operator of a following lowest rear portion of the hull. Then
watercraft to momentarily loose sight pull the watercraft to the beach.
of your PWC.
NOTICE Riding the watercraft in
shallow water may result in damage
WARNING to the propulsion system compo-
It is important to inform the oper- nents. Always shut off the engine
ator of a watercraft who intends to before the water is less than 90 cm
follow in a convoy formation of the (3 ft) deep, and never use reverse or
braking and maneuvering capabil- braking.
ity of your PWC, what the plume of
water indicates, and that a greater
distance should be maintained be-
tween both of you.
The operator should also practice dock-

ing with an imaginary dock using the
various controls available (iBR lever
and throttle lever).
Release the throttle at a sufficient dis-
tance before the expected landing
area.
Reduce speed to idle.
Maneuver using a combination of the F18A03Y
iBR lever and throttle lever, shifting
to neutral, reverse, or forward as re-
quired.
Remember that when operating in re-
verse, steering direction is reversed.
Turning the handlebars to the left will
move the stern to the right when back-
ing up, and vice-versa.
WARNING
Directional control is reduced
when the throttle is released
and/or when engine is off. Steer-
ing direction is reversed when op-
erating the watercraft in reverse.
Beaching
NOTICE It is not recommended to
run the watercraft to the beach.
88 ______________
OPERATING MODES
GTI/ GTI
GTS GTI SE GTR WAKE
GTI 130 LIMITED
Touring mode X X X X X X
Sport mode X X X X X X
ECO mode X X X X X X
Cruise mode N.A. - - X - X
Slow speed mode N.A. - - X - X
Ski mode N.A. - - - - X
Learning key modes X X X X X X
N.A. = Not Applicable
Touring Mode
By default, the watercraft is in TOUR-
ING mode of operation when first
started.
A TOURING mode indicator is ON in
the multifunction gauge to confirm the
active mode of operation.
Once activated, SPORT MODE will re-

main active until it is deactivated by the
operator, or the engine is shut down
whereby it defaults back to TOURING
MODE.

To activate sport mode while riding at
Sport Mode
When selected, SPORT MODE pro- WARNING
vides for instant throttle response and When activating sport mode, be
more rapid accelerations than TOUR- sure to maintain situational aware-
ING MODE. ness of other watercraft, obstacles,
A SPORT mode indicator is ON in the or persons in the water.
multifunction gauge to confirm the ac-
tive mode of operation. 1. Depress and hold the SPORT button
for at least 3 seconds.
_______________ 89
OPERATING MODES
smo2012-002-009_a
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
TYPICAL
1. Sport button SPORT MODE ACTIVATED
NOTE: The following important mes- NOTE: After a few seconds, the gauge
sage will scroll across the multifunc- will revert to its normal display.
tion display:
3. Ensure the SPORT mode indicator is
turned on.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
ENTERING SPORT MODE -
INCREASED ACCELERATION - NOTE: The SPORT mode indicator will
INSTRUCT PASSENGERS TO HOLD - come on and stay on as long as sport
PRESS_SPORT_BUTTON mode is active.

WARNING
Ensure passengers are advised To deactivate sport mode while riding
that sport mode provides for in- at speed, carry out the following:
creased accelerations and that
they are to hold on tightly. WARNING
When deactivating sport mode, be
2. Press the SPORT button again to ac- sure to maintain situational aware-
tivate sport mode. ness of other watercraft, obstacles,
or persons in the water.
A scrolling SPORT MODE ACTIVATED
message will momentarily confirm
that sport mode has been activated. 1. Depress and hold the SPORT button
NOTE: The following message will
scroll in the multifunction display:
SPORT MODE DEACTIVATED.
90 ______________
OPERATING MODES
The following message will be dis-

played on the multifunction display:
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
NOTE: After a few seconds, the gauge
ECO MODE
will revert to its normal display.
2. Ensure the TOURING mode indica- The ECO mode indicator will also be ac-
tor is on. tivated.
TOURING MODE INDICATOR ECO MODE INDICATORS

(Fuel Economy Mode)
ECO Mode
(Fuel Economy Mode) How to Deactivate ECO Mode
1. Depress the Eco button for at least
How to Activate ECO Mode one second.
1. Depress the Eco button for at least
one second.
smo2012-002-009_b
TYPICAL
smo2012-002-009_b 1. Eco button
TYPICAL The ECO mode indicator will be deacti-
1. ECO button
vated.
_______________ 91
OPERATING MODES
Cruise Mode To activate and preset CRUISE MODE

Cruise mode is a function of iTC (in- at idle speed, carry out the following:
telligent Throttle Control) system that 1. Tap the throttle lever to move the
allows the operator to set the desired iBR to the forward position.
maximum watercraft speed. 2. Press and hold the cruise button.
This is useful when cruising for long
distances, operating in limited speed
zones, or towing a tuber, skier or wake
boarder.
Cruise mode only limits forward
speed, the operator must keep the
throttle depressed to maintain forward
speed.
Once the maximum cruise speed is
set, the operator can vary the water-
craft speed from idle speed up to the sdd2009-001-024_j
set cruise speed using the throttle ENGAGING CRUISE AT IDLE

lever. The set cruise speed will not Step 1: Tap throttle to engage FORWARD
be exceeded even if the throttle lever Step 2: Press cruise button
is fully depressed. The following message will appear in
As you proceed under a constant cruis- the multifunction display.
ing speed setting, keep your attention
level up to maintain good situational
awareness.
Slowing down is a matter of releasing
the throttle lever further than the set
point, or by pulling the iBR lever in.
If the iBR lever is pulled in for braking,
CRUISE mode is overridden but not
deactivated.
Once the iBR lever is released and the MESSAGE DISPLAYED
throttle is pulled in to engage forward CRUISE MODE _ SELECT SPEED _
position, the cruise function will reen- PRESS SET TO ACCEPT OR MODE TO
gage to limit the watercraft speed as it EXIT
was set before.
NOTE: Cruise mode is not available if 3. Press the UP button until the de-
slow speed mode or ski mode mode is sired cruise speed is indicated in the
engaged. numerical display.
Activating Cruise Mode
Cruise Mode Activation at Idle
Speed
NOTE: This function is available up to
approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH).
92 ______________
OPERATING MODES
A beep indicating that you are now in

cruise mode will sound, and a CRUISE
indicator will come on in the multifunc-
tion gauge.
sdd2009-001-024_i
1. UP button
2. DOWN button
The following will be displayed in the

multifunction gauge. CRUISE MODE INDICATOR
2
Cruise Mode Activation Above Idle
Speed
1 To activate cruise mode above idle
speed (10 km/h (6 MPH)):
1. Accelerate to the desired water-
craft speed and hold throttle lever
steady.
2. Press and hold the cruise button for
FUNCTION SELECTED - CRUISE approximately 1 second.
MODE
1. CRUISE MODE _ SPEED

ADJUSTING

cruise speed selected and en-
gage cruise mode. The following
scrolling message will appear in the
sdd2009-001-024_j
ENGAGING CRUISE AT SPEED

Step 1: Accelerate to desired speed and hold
throttle steady
A beep indicating that you are now in

cruise mode will sound, and a CRUISE
indicator will come on in the multifunc-
tion gauge.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
CRUISE MODE ACTIVE
_______________ 93
OPERATING MODES
CRUISE MODE INDICATOR FUNCTION SELECTED - CRUISE

MODE
Changing Set Cruise Speed 1. CRUISE MODE _ SPEED
To increase or decrease the set cruise ADJUSTING
speed: 2. Cruise speed set point indication
1. Hold the throttle lever all the way in
to the handlebar. NOTE: Pressing the UP/DOWN but-
2. On the RH handlebar, press ton repeatedly will change the cruise
UP/DOWN button. set speed in single increments. Press-
ing and holding the button will increase
or decrease the speed until the button
is released.

1. Release the throttle lever.
2. Press the cruise button.
Deactivation of cruise mode is indi-
cated by:
sdd2009-001-024_h
1. Throttle lever – A BEEP will be heard.
2. UP button
3. DOWN button NOTE: If the throttle lever is not fully
released when the cruise button is
While the UP/Down is being pressed pressed to deactivate cruise mode,
to change the speed setting, the fol- the BEEP will not be heard and the
lowing will appear in the multifunction cruise indicator will remain on. The
gauge. speed limiting function of cruise mode
will stay active until the throttle is fully
released, then the BEEP will be heard
and the cruise indicator will go out.
Slow Speed Mode

The Intelligent Throttle Control also
allows for a Slow Speed Mode where
the driver can adjust and set idle speed.
This is useful when operating in slow
speed zones where the driver must be
especially attentive to possible obsta-
cle avoidance.
94 ______________
OPERATING MODES
The operator can select an idle

speed set point (slow speed) be-
tween 1 and 5 (1.6 km/h to 11 km/h
(1 MPH to 7 MPH)).
If you accelerate above approximately
14 km/h (9 MPH), Slow Speed Mode
will be deactivated and the engine will
return to its normal idle RPM when the
throttle is released.
Should a situation arise where the op-
erator must stop or accelerate quickly
away from a hazardous situation, pull A scrolling message will appear in the
in the iBR lever, or pull in on the throttle multifunction display to specify that
lever to deactivate slow speed mode you are now in slow speed mode. The
and regain normal control of the water- default slow speed set point of 1 will
craft. also come on for a few seconds in the
numerical display.
Activating Slow Speed Mode
2
To activate slow speed mode of opera-
tion:
1. Release the throttle lever to idle 1
RPM.
2. Pull in and release the iBR lever to
engage neutral.
approximately 1 second.
FUNCTION SELECTED - SLOW
SPEED MODE

2. Slow speed set point of "1" indication
NOTE: The scrolling SLOW SPEED

MODE message repeats itself as long
as slow speed mode is activated. The
numerical display reverts back to the
previous indication after a few sec-
sdd2009-001-024_g onds.
TYPICAL
1. CRUISE button Changing Set Slow Speed
The CRUISE indicator will come on There are 5 slow speed set points avail-
in the multifunction gauge to indicate able (1 through 5), 1 being the slowest.
cruise activation. To increase or decrease the slow
speed set point, press the UP/DOWN
button on the RH handlebar once, or
repeatedly.
_______________ 95
OPERATING MODES
sdd2009-001-024_i
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
1. UP button to increase speed
2. DOWN button to decrease speed SLOW SPEED MODE ACTIVE
While the UP/DOWN is being pressed

to change the slow speed set point, Deactivating Slow Speed Mode
the following will appear in the multi- Slow speed mode can be deactivated
function gauge. using any of the following methods:
– Pressing the cruise button.
2
– Depressing the iBR lever.
– Accelerating above the highest
1 slow speed that can be set (approxi-
mately 14 km/h (9 MPH)).
When deactivating SLOW SPEED
MODE:
– By pressing the cruise button, the
iBR system maintains forward posi-
FUNCTION SELECTED - SLOW tion.
SPEED MODE
– By pressing the iBR lever, the iBR
1. SLOW SPEED MODE - SPEED system will shift to neutral position.
ADJUSTING message SLOW SPEED MODE deactivation will
2. Slow speed set point indication be indicated in the following manner:
1. The CRUISE indicator will go out
The displays will revert back to their 2. The scrolling SLOW SPEED MODE
previous indication a few seconds af- ACTIVE message will cease.
ter the last activation of the UP/DOWN
button. Ski Mode
NOTE: As a reminder, the following Ski mode allows for repeated and pre-
message will scroll across the multi- cisely controlled launches, and a set
function display periodically. towing speed, specifically for towing a
Ski mode is not available if using a
LEARNING key or a RENTAL key.
RAMP Function
The RAMP function offers a pre-pro-
grammed setting for launching and
accelerating the PWCr.
96 ______________
OPERATING MODES
RAMP 1 provides:
RAMP 5 provides:
– Quickest launch
– Highest TARGET SPEED range. sdd2009-001-024_e
TYPICAL
TARGET SPEED Function 1. MODE button
The TARGET SPEED function limits the
maximum towing speed.
Once the RAMP has been selected,
an average PWC target speed for that
RAMP will be visible in the numerical
display.
The average speed displayed and the
speed range available is dependent on
the RAMP selected. The higher the
RAMP number, the higher the speed MESSAGE DISPLAYED
range.
The operator may increase or decrease SKI MODE
the target speed to any value within the
selected RAMP speed range. 3. Press SET to enter the function.
The multifunction gauge message
NOTE: If the desired target speed can- will change to RAMP. The RAMP
not be set in the selected RAMP, you setting number will be visible in the
must exit then reengage SKI MODE, numerical display.
and select a different RAMP.

To engage ski mode, carry out the fol-
lowing steps:
NOTE: Ski mode cannot be engaged if
the throttle lever is not fully released,
and if CRUISE or SLOW SPEED mode
is engaged. A message will appear in
the multifunction display advising you sdd2009-001-024_f
of the situation. Follow the instruc- 1. SET button

tions in the display.
until SKI MODE is visible in the mul-
tifunction display.
_______________ 97
OPERATING MODES
1. RAMP message SKI MODE_PRESS_SET_TO START OR

MODE TO EXIT
2. Ramp setting
4. To change the RAMP setting, press NOTE: A BEEP will be heard every 5
the UP/DOWN button until the de- seconds as a SKI MODE engaged re-
sired ramp number is visible in the minder.
numerical display. 8. Press SET again; the following con-
5. Press SET to lock in the ramp set- firmation message will appear.
ting; the multifunction display will
change to the TARGET SPEED set-
ting function.
2
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
SKI MODE
ACTIVE_PRESS_MODE_AND
SECOND SETTING AVAILABLE - RETURN TO IDLE TO CANCEL
TARGET SPEED
NOTE: The SKI MODE indicator will
1. TARGET SPEED message also come ON and blink when ski mode
2. Target speed setting becomes active. It will be ON steady
when the operator pulls and holds the
6. Press the UP/DOWN button to throttle lever all the way in to the han-
increase or decrease the target dlebar.
speed.
7. Press SET to lock in the target
speed; the display will switch to the
following scrolling message.
SKI MODE INDICATOR
98 ______________
OPERATING MODES
9. To launch the PWC in ski mode, pull To end a ski run and completely deac-
in and hold the throttle lever all the tivate ski mode, release the throttle to
way to the handlebar grip. The PWC idle, then press the MODE button.
will accelerate to the set TARGET
SPEED and the SKI MODE indicator Learning Key and Rental
will be on steady. Key Modes
10. To increase or decrease the TAR- Both learning and rental keys provide
GET SPEED during a ski run, press a mode of operation whereby engine
the UP/DOWN button, do not re- power and speed is limited.
lease the throttle lever.
There are 5 speed settings available for
the learning key mode. By default, the
key modes are preset to the speed set-
ting (3).
NOTE: Changing key settings is only
available when the engine is not run-
ning.
Changing Learning Key Speed

Settings
sdd2009-001-024_h
GTS Models
1. Hold throttle lever in
2. Press UP button to increase speed The default learning key setting is
3. Press DOWN button to decrease speed 74 km/h (46 MPH) and cannot be
changed on these models.
NOTE: If the throttle is partly released
during a ski run, the SKI MODE indica- All Models Except GTS
tor light will start to blink and the speed To change learning or rental key set-
adjust function using the UP/DOWN ar- tings, carry out the following:
row button will be deactivated.
1. Press the START/STOP button to
11. To end a ski run or to pick up a fallen wake up the electrical system and
skier or wakeboarder, fully release install the NORMAL key on the en-
the throttle to regain normal throt- gine cut-off switch.
tle control.
2. Wait for the information center to
NOTE: When the throttle is fully re- complete its self-test and display
leased during ski mode operation, the the key recognition message.
system returns to ski mode engaged
status. The SKI MODE indicator light 3. Press the MODE button repeatedly
will go out but, ski mode will remain until KEY MODE is visible in the digi-
engaged and a message to that effect tal screen of the information center.
will reappear in the multifunction dis-
play.
12. Press SET to reactivate ski mode
and fully pull in the throttle lever to
start another ski run.
Deactivating Ski Mode

To exit ski mode at any given point dur-
ing the ski mode setting process, press
the MODE button.
_______________ 99
OPERATING MODES
6. Press the SET button once to save

the setting, twice to exit the func-
tion, or simply wait for the function
to time-out. The change in key set-
ting will automatically be saved.
NOTE: The key speed setting is appli-
cable to any key of the same type used
on a specific watercraft. The same
key type used on a different watercraft
sdd2009-001-024_b
may therefore have a different key
TYPICAL - GAUGE CONTROL BUTTONS speed setting.
1. MODE button
2. SET button KEY APPROX.
3. UP/DOWN button D.E.S.S.
SPEED MAX.
KEY TYPE
SETTING SPEED
80 km/h
5
(50 MPH)
74 km/h
4
(46 MPH)
Learning 68 km/h
3
key (42 MPH)
MESSAGE DISPLAYED 58 km/h
2
(36 MPH)
KEY MODE
51 km/h
1
4. Press the SET button once to enable (32 MPH)
learning key mode setting function.
The display will change to L-Key.
2
FUNCTION SELECTED - LEARNING

KEY
1. L-KEY message
2. Learning key setting
5. Press the UP/DOWN button to tog-

gle the key setting between 1 and
5. See table for speed limitations
according to setting.
100 ______________
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
Jet Pump Water Intake and Models with iBR
Impeller Cleaning If the aforementioned method does
not work, the following can be per-
WARNING formed:
Keep away from intake grate while – With engine running and before ap-
engine is running. Items such as plying throttle, pull the iBR lever in
long hair, loose clothing or per- to select reverse operation and vary
sonal flotation device straps can throttle quickly several times.
become entangled in moving – Repeat procedure if necessary.
parts.
All Models
Weeds, shells or debris can get caught If system is still blocked, move the wa-
on the intake grate, drive shaft and/or tercraft out of the water for cleaning.
impeller. A clogged water intake may Refer to ON-BEACH WATER CLEAN-
cause troubles such as: ING.
– Cavitation: Engine speed is high On-Beach Water Cleaning
but watercraft moves slowly due to
reduced jet thrust, jet pump compo-
nents may be damaged. WARNING
– Overheating: Since the jet pump The tether cord MUST BE RE-
operation controls the flow of wa- MOVED from the engine cut-off
ter to cool the exhaust system, a switch to prevent accidental en-
clogged intake will cause the engine gine starting before cleaning the
to overheat and damage engine in- propulsion system components.
ternal components.
A weed clogged area can be cleaned as Place a cardboard or a carpet beside
follows: the watercraft to prevent scratching
when turning the watercraft for clean-
WARNING ing.
If it is necessary to reach in to re- Rotate the watercraft to any side for
move any foreign object caught in cleaning.
the propulsion system, the tether
cord MUST BE REMOVED from the
In-Water Cleaning
Rock the watercraft several times
while repeatedly pressing engine
START/STOP button for short periods
without starting the engine. Most of
the time, this will remove the block-
age. Start engine and make sure wa-
tercraft operates properly.
smo2009-002-300_a
TYPICAL
______________ 101
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
Clean the water intake area. If the sys- WARNING

tem is still clogged, refer to an autho-
rized Sea-Doo dealer for servicing. If it is necessary to reach in to re-
move any foreign object caught
NOTICE Inspect water intake grate in the propulsion system, strictly
for damage. Refer to an authorized observe the following before pro-
Sea-Doo dealer for repair as neces- ceeding:
sary. – Remove tether cord from the
Watercrafts Equipped with iBR – Wait at least 5 minutes.
For ease of access to the propulsion – Do not press on START/STOP
system, move the iBR to the for- button. Should the START/
ward position, refer to iBR OVERRIDE STOP button is pressed, wait
FUNCTION for detailed instructions. another 5 minutes.
iBR Override Function (Models
Activating iBR Override Function
Equipped with iBR)
To activate the iBR override function,
When the iBR override function is acti-
carry out the following step.
vated, it allows the user to electrically
move the iBR gate and nozzle through 1. Power up the electrical system by
its full range of motion using the VTS pressing the START/STOP button.
control button. 2. Install the tether cord on the engine
NOTE: The iBR override function is cut-off switch.
only available when the engine is not NOTE: The tether cord must be in-
running. stalled to ensure the information cen-
ter will not shut off all indications after
WARNING its self test function. Electrical power
When moving the iBR gate using will stay on for approximately 3 min-
the iBR override function, ensure utes.
no-one is near the rear of the wa- 3. Press the Mode button on the RH
tercraft. Movement of the gate handlebar repeatedly until SET-
may squeeze fingers. TINGS is visible in the digital display
of the information center.
NOTICE An object or tool caught

in the iBR system when using the
iBR override function may cause
damage to the iBR components. Re-
move all rigid foreign objects that
may obstruct the iBR gate travel be-
fore moving it.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
SETTINGS
4. Press the SET button (RH handle-

bar) to display IBR OVR.
102 ______________
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
Models Without a VTS UP/DOWN

Button
NOTE: On models without the VTS
UP/DOWN button, use the UP/DOWN
button on the RH handlebar to move
the iBR to the desired position once
the iBR override function has been ac-
tivated as described in the previous
steps.
AVAILABLE MODE FUNCTION
All Models
IBR-OVR MODE message
9. Remove the tether cord from the
5. Press the SET button to enter IBR
OVR function and display OVR OFF.
WARNING
If it is necessary to reach in to re-
in the propulsion system, strictly
observe the following before pro-
ceeding:
– Remove tether cord from the
– Wait at least 5 minutes.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED – Do not press on START/STOP
button. Should the START/
OVR OFF STOP button be pressed, wait
another 5 minutes.
6. Press the UP/DOWN button (RH
handlebar) to display OVR ON. Deactivating iBR Override Function
There are three ways to deactivate the
iBR override function:
– Repeat steps in ACTIVATING iBR
OVERRIDE FUNCTION and press
the SET button when OVR OFF is
visible.
– Wait for the electrical power to shut
off.
– Start the engine.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
NOTE: When the engine is started,
OVR ON the iBR OVR function is deactivated
and the iBR gate will move to the neu-
7. Press the SET button to select the tral position.
OVR ON function. The gauge will
return to its normal display.
8. Press the VTS UP/DOWN arrow but-
ton to move the iBR gate to the de-
sired position.
______________ 103
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
WARNING
When moving the iBR gate using
the iBR override function, ensure
no-one stands near the rear of the
watercraft. Movement of the gate
may squeeze fingers.
Capsized Watercraft
NOTE: Some vehicle safety labels are
not shown on illustrations. For infor-
mation on vehicle safety labels, refer smo2009-002-153_a
to WATERCRAFT SAFETY LABELS

subsection. The 4-TEC™ engine features a tip-over
protection system (T.O.P.S.TM). When
The watercraft is designed so that it the watercraft tips over, the engine is
should not turn over easily. Two spon- automatically stopped.
sons mounted on the side of the hull
assist watercraft stability. If it turns When the watercraft is returned to its
over, it will remain capsized. normal operating position, the engine
can be started normally.
WARNING NOTICE If the watercraft has been
When watercraft is capsized, do capsized for more than 5 minutes,
not attempt to restart the engine. do not attempt to crank the engine
Operator and passengers should to avoid water ingestion that would
always wear approved personal damage the engine. See an autho-
flotation devices. rized Sea-Doo dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
To turn the watercraft upright, ensure NOTICE If the engine does not
the engine is off and the tether cord
is NOT on the engine cut-off switch. crank, do not attempt to start it any-
Then grab the inlet grate, step on a more. Otherwise, the engine could
side bumper rail, and use your weight be damaged. See an authorized
to rotate the watercraft towards you. Sea-Doo dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
NOTE: A label on the stern near the
flushing connector provides instruc- As soon as possible, check for pres-
tions on how to turn the watercraft ence of water in the bilge. Drain as
right side up. The label is upside down necessary when back to the shore.
so that it can be read when the water-
craft is overturned. Submerged Watercraft
To limit damages to the engine, per-
form the following procedure as soon
as possible.
Drain bilge.
If it was submerged in salt water, spray
bilge and all components with fresh
water using a garden hose to stop the
salt corroding effect.
104 ______________
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
NOTICE Never try to crank or start NOTICE Failure to follow these

the engine. Water trapped in intake instructions may result in damage
manifold would flow towards the to the engine. If you must tow a
engine and possibly cause severe stranded watercraft in water, be sure
engine damage. not to exceed the maximum towing
Bring the watercraft to an authorized
Sea-Doo dealer as soon as possible to If you have to tow the watercraft faster
have it serviced. than the maximum recommended
speed, clamp the cross over hose.
NOTICE The longer the delay be-
fore you have the engine serviced,
the greater the damage to the en-
gine will be.
Water-Flooded Engine
NOTICE Never try to crank or start
the engine. Water trapped in intake
manifold would flow towards the
engine and possibly cause severe
engine damage. smo2013-001-001_a
1. Cross over hose

Sea-Doo dealer as soon as possible to
have it serviced.
gine will be. Failure to have the en-
gine properly serviced may cause
severe engine damage.
Towing the Watercraft in

Water
Special precautions should be taken
when towing a Sea-Doo watercraft in
water.
The maximum recommended towing
speed is 21 km/h (13 MPH).
This will prevent the exhaust system
from filling with water, which may lead
to water being injected into and filling
the engine. Without the engine run-
ning, there isn't any exhaust pressure
to push the water out the exhaust out-
let.
______________ 105
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
This page is
intentionally blank
106 ______________
MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
______________ 107
Maintenance is very important for keeping the watercraft in a safe operating con-
dition. The watercraft should be serviced as per the maintenance schedule.
A repair shop or person of the owner's choosing may maintain, replace, or re-
pair emission control devices and systems. These instructions do not require
components or service by BRP or authorized Sea-Doo dealers. Although an au-
thorized Sea-Doo dealer has an in-depth technical knowledge and tools to service
the Sea-Doo personal watercraft, the emission-related warranty is not condi-
tioned on the use of an authorized Sea-Doo dealer or any other establishment
with which BRP has a commercial relationship. For emission-related warranty
claims, BRP is limiting the diagnosis and repair of emission-related parts to the
authorized Sea-Doo dealers. For more information, please refer to the US EPA
EMISSION-RELATED WARRANTY contained herein. Proper maintenance is the
owner’s responsibility. A warranty claim may be denied if, among other things,
the owner or operator caused the problem through improper maintenance or use.
You must follow the instructions for fuel requirements in the fueling section of
this manual. Even if gasoline containing greater than ten volume percent ethanol
is readily available, the US EPA issued a prohibition against the use of gasoline
containing greater than 10 vol% ethanol that applies to this vehicle. The use of
gasoline containing greater than 10 vol% ethanol with this engine may harm the
emission control system.
Disregard the information pertaining to the following systems if the watercraft is
not equipped with these features:
Carry out all maintenance as listed in the schedule whenever the hours or time of
each column is reached.
NOTE: As an example, at 200 hours or 2 years, complete all items in this column
and ALSO in the EVERY 100 hours or 1 year column.
WARNING
Failure to properly maintain the watercraft according to the maintenance
schedule and procedures can make it unsafe to operate.
108 ______________

C: CLEAN
EVERY 100 HOURS OR 1 YEAR
I: INSPECT
R: REPLACE
RS: REPAIR SHOP
PART/TASK NOTE
ENGINE
Rubber mounts I RS (1) Every 10 hours
Corrosion protection in salt water use.
(spray an anti-corrosion lubricant (2) Replace at 200 hours,
L (1) O irrespective of the number of
to metallic components in engine
compartment) years.
Supercharger clutch (215 engines) R (2) RS
EXHAUST SYSTEM
(3) Daily flushing in salt water
Exhaust system I I, C (3) O/RS
or dirty water use.
COOLING SYSTEM
Hose and fasteners I I RS (4) Replace at 300 hours
Coolant I R(4) RS or 5 years
FUEL SYSTEM
(5) See NOTE 1 after
iTC lever (5) I, L O/RS
maintenance schedule.
Fuel cap, filler neck, fuel tank, fuel tank
I I (6) RS
straps, fuel lines and connections (6) At storage period or after
100 hours of use whichever
Fuel system leak test I I RS
comes first.
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
______________ 109

C: CLEAN
I: INSPECT
R: REPLACE
RS: REPAIR SHOP
PART/TASK NOTE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Electrical connections and fastening
(ignition system, starting system, fuel I I RS (7) Inspect once a month. Add
injectors, fuse boxes etc.) electrolyte as required.
STEERING SYSTEM
Steering nozzle bushings I I RS (8) Inspect operation.
O.T.A.S. (8) I I RS
PROPULSION SYSTEM
Impeller, impeller boot and wear ring
I I RS
condition (6) At storage period or
Impeller shaft radial play I RS after 100 hours of use
whichever comes first.
Jet pump housing inspection I RS (9) Inspect each month
Impeller shaft seal, sleeve, O-ring and (more often in salt water use)
I (6) RS and change when necessary.
impeller cover
(10) Inspect more frequently
Drive shaft/impeller splines I, L RS when using PWC in foul/dirty
Sacrificial anode I (9) O/RS water.
Measure impeller and impeller wear ring
I RS
clearance
110 ______________

C: CLEAN
I: INSPECT
R: REPLACE
RS: REPAIR SHOP
PART/TASK NOTE
iBR gate backlash I I RS (5) See NOTE 1 after
iBR friction sleeves, bushings and iBR gate maintenance schedule.
I I RS (6) At storage period or
stoppers
after 100 hours of use
iBR U arm, VTS trim ring and iBR gate I RS whichever comes first.
I (11) See NOTE 2 after
iBR U arm retaining screws I (11 ) (6) (11) RS maintenance schedule.
HULL AND BODY
Hull I O
—
NOTE 1: The iTC and iBR levers should be inspected by depressing and releasing the levers to check for
freedom of movement. If any friction is felt, the lever must be taken apart, cleaned, inspected
for wear and lubricated, refer to INTELLIGENT THROTTLE CONTROL (ITC), STEERING and O.T.A.S.
subsections.
NOTE 2: Ensure proper torque of iBR U arm to iBR actuator shaft retaining screws. If retaining screws found
loose, do not re-torque them. Replace them with new ones.
______________ 111
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
This section includes instructions for NOTICE These engines have been
basic maintenance procedures. developed and validated using the
BRP XPS Synthetic blend oil. BRP
WARNING recommends the use of its XPS
Synthetic blend oil at all times. If
Turn off the engine and follow the recommended XPS engine oil
these maintenance procedures is not available, use a 10W40 min-
when performing maintenance. eral engine oil compatible with wet
If you do not follow proper main- clutches. Damages caused by oil
tenance procedures you can be which is not suitable for the engine
injured by hot parts, moving parts, will not be covered by the BRP lim-
electricity, chemicals or other haz- ited warranty.
ards.
NOTICE NEVER use fully synthetic
WARNING oil. This would impair the proper op-
eration of the supercharger clutch.
Should removal of a locking device Do not add any additives to the rec-
(e.g. lock tabs, self-locking fasten- ommended oil. Mineral oils for API
ers, etc.) be required, always re- service classification SM contain ad-
place with a new one. ditives (friction modifiers) that may
cause inappropriate slippage of the
supercharger and eventually lead to
NOTICE Never leave any object, premature wear.
rag, tool, etc., in the engine com-
partment or in the bilge. Engine Oil Level
Engine Oil NOTICE Check level frequently

and refill if necessary. Do not over-
Recommended Engine Oil fill. Operating the engine with an
improper level may severely dam-
100/130/155 Engines age engine.
Use XPS 4-STROKE SYNTH. BLEND
OIL (SUMMER) (P/N 293 600 121). CAUTION Certain compo-
If the recommended XPSTM engine oil nents in the engine compartment
is not available, use a 5W40 or 10W40 may be very hot. Direct contact may
engine oil meeting the requirements result in skin burn.
for API service classification SM, SL Oil level can be checked with water-
or SJ. Always check the API service craft either in or out of water.
label certification on the oil container, it
must contain at least one of the above If Watercraft is Out of the Water
standards.
NOTICE Watercraft must be level.
215 Engine
Use XPS 4-STROKE SYNTH. BLEND CAUTION When operating the
OIL (SUMMER) (P/N 293 600 121). engine out of water, the heat ex-
changer in the ride plate may be-
with the ride plate as burns may oc-
cur.
1. Raise trailer tow pole, then block in
position when bumper rail is level.
112 ______________
2. Open the seat.

3. Install a garden hose on the exhaust
system flushing connector. Refer
to EXHAUST SYSTEM in this sec-
tion and follow the procedure. lmr2007-053-100_a
NOTICE 1. Full
2. Add
– Never run engine without supply- 3. Operating range
ing water to the exhaust system.
Failure to cool exhaust system 8. Add oil to ensure the level is be-
may severely damage it. tween marks as required.
– Never run engine longer than To add oil:
2 minutes. Drive line seal has no – Unscrew oil cap.
cooling when watercraft is out of – Place a funnel in the oil filler neck
water. opening.
4. With the engine already at normal – Add the recommended oil to the
operating condition, let engine idle proper level.
for 30 seconds then stop engine. NOTE: Do not overfill.
5. Wait at least 30 seconds for the oil
to settle in the engine, then pull dip-
stick out and wipe clean.
smo2011-003-010_b
TYPICAL
1. Oil filler cap location
smo2011-003-010_a
NOTE: Every time oil is added in the
TYPICAL engine, the complete procedure ex-
1. Oil dipstick location plained in this section must be carried
6. Reinstall dipstick, push in com- out again. Otherwise, you will obtain a
pletely. false oil level reading.
7. Remove dipstick again and read 9. Properly reinstall oil cap and dip-
oil level. It should be between the stick.
FULL and ADD marks.
Engine Oil Change and Oil Filter
Replacement
The oil change and filter replacement
may be performed by an authorized
Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop, or person
of your own choosing.
______________ 113
Engine Coolant With watercraft on a level surface,

coolant level should be between MIN.
Recommended Engine Coolant and MAX. marks on coolant reservoir
Always use LONG LIFE ANTIFREEZE when engine is cold.
(P/N 219 702 685) or equivalent. If
the recommended coolant is not avail-
able, use a low silicate, extended
life ethylene-glycol premixed coolant
(50%-50%) specifically formulated
for internal combustion aluminum en-
gines. 1
To prevent antifreeze deterioration, al-
ways use the same brand and grade.
Never mix different brands or grades
unless cooling system is completely
flushed and refilled. F18E0NY
Engine Coolant Level TYPICAL - COOLANT EXPANSION TANK

WARNING NOTE: The watercraft is level when
Check coolant level with engine it is in water. When on a trailer, raise
cold. Never add coolant in cooling trailer tow pole and block in this posi-
system when engine is hot. tion when bumper rail is level.
Add coolant/demineralized water to
CAUTION Certain compo- adjust coolant level between marks
nents in the engine compartment as required. Use a funnel to avoid
may be very hot. Direct contact may spillage. Do not overfill.
result in skin burn. Properly reinstall and tighten filler cap,
Open seat. then reinstall ventilation box and close
seat.
Locate the expansion tank cap.
NOTE: A cooling system that fre-
quently requires coolant is an indica-
tion of leaks or engine problems. See
an authorized Sea-Doo dealer.
Engine Coolant Replacement

Coolant replacement should be per-
formed by an authorized Sea-Doo
dealer.
Ignition Coils
smo2011-003-010_c
TYPICAL 1. Open seat.

1. Expansion tank cap 2. Remove engine cover (as applicable
to model).
114 ______________
NOTICE Do not remove the igni-

tion coil before disconnecting the
input connector or the wires may be
damaged. Do not pry up ignition coil
with a screwdriver to avoid damage.
NOTE: Twist ignition coil in both direc-
tions as you pull it up to ease removal.
Remove ignition coil from spark plug.
sbs2009-011-003_a
Ignition Coil Lubrication 1. Correctly shaped excess of product
1. Pull rubber seal down. 5. Apply DOW CORNING 111 (P/N 413
707 000) or equivalent on rubber
seal contact area.
smr05-015-002_d
sbs2009-011-002_a
2. Apply DOW CORNING 111 (P/N 413
707 000) or equivalent to rubber seal NOTE: Prior to inserting the ignition
seat as shown. coil on its spark plug, apply sealant as
described in IGNITION COIL LUBRI-
CATION.
2. Push the ignition coil down to se-
curely install it on the spark plug tip.
3. Ensure the seal seats properly with
top surface of engine valve cover.
sbs2009-011-001_a
3. Pull rubber seal back on its seat

making sure the tabs on the ignition
coil and the slots in the seal properly
match together.
4. Leave a ring of grease on top of the smr2009-032-004_a
seal as shown to act as a water bar- TYPICAL
rier. Wipe off the excess. 1. Seal properly seated
______________ 115
Spark Plugs
Spark Plug Removal
1. Open seat.
2. Disconnect the ignition coil input
connector.
3. Remove ignition coil. Refer to IGNI-
TION COIL REMOVAL.
WARNING
smr2009-032-003_a
Never remove an ignition coil from 1. Ignition coil
a spark plug without disconnect- 2. Spark plug
ing it from the wiring harness.
Flammable vapors may be present Spark Plug Installation
in the bilge. Should the tether cord
be installed on the engine cut-off Prior to installation, ensure the contact
switch, a spark could be generated surfaces of the cylinder head and spark
at the coil spark plug end which plug are free of grime.
could cause an explosion. 1. Using a wire feeler gauge, set elec-
trode gap as specified in the follow-
4. Using a spark plug socket, release ing chart.
the torque applied to the spark plug. SPARK GAP
TORQUE
PLUG mm (in)
NGK
Hand tighten
DCPR8E 0.75
+ 1/4 turn
(or (.030)
with a socket
equivalent)
1 2
2. Apply anti-seize lubricant over the

spark plug threads to prevent possi-
ble seizure.
A00E0BA
3. Hand screw spark plug into cylinder
head. Then, tighten the spark plug
1. Approved socket clockwise an additional 1/4 turn with
2. Improper socket an approved spark plug socket.
5. Clean the spark plug and cylinder 4. Install ignition coil. Refer to IGNI-
head with pressurized air. TION COIL INSTALLATION.
6. Unscrew spark plug then use the 5. Close seat.
ignition coil to take spark plug out of
spark plug hole. Exhaust System
Exhaust System Flushing
Flushing the exhaust system and in-
tercooler (supercharged models) with
fresh water is essential to neutralize
corroding effects of salt or other chem-
ical products present in water. It will
116 ______________
help to remove sand, salt, shells or NOTE: An optional quick connect hose
other particles in water jackets and/or adapter and hose fitting can be used
hoses. (P/N 295 500 473) or equivalent. No
Flushing should be performed when hose pincher is required to flush en-
the watercraft is not expected to be gine.
used further the same day or when the
watercraft is stored for any extended
time.
WARNING
Perform this operation in a well
ventilated area.
Proceed as follows:
Clean propulsion system by spraying smo2009-002-138
water in its inlet and outlet and then TYPICAL - QUICK CONNECT HOSE ADAPTER
apply a coating of XPS Lube or equiva-
lent.
CAUTION When operating the

engine while the watercraft is out
of the water, the heat exchanger in
the ride plate may become very hot.
Avoid any contact with ride plate as
burns may occur.
Connect a garden hose to the connec-
tor located at the rear of watercraft (on smo2009-002-139_a
the port side of the stern). Do not open TYPICAL

water tap at this time. 1. Hose adapter (optional, not mandatory)
2. Quick connect fitting (optional, not
NOTICE Always run the engine mandatory)
3. Garden hose
before opening the water tap. If not,
water will get inside the engine. To flush, start engine then immediately
open the water tap.
CAUTION Certain compo-

nents in the engine compartment
may be very hot. Direct contact may
result in skin burn. Do not touch any
electrical parts or propulsion system
component when the engine is run-
ning.
NOTICE Never flush a hot en-
smo2009-002-132_c
gine. Always start the engine before
TYPICAL opening the water tap. Open wa-
1. Flushing connector location
ter tap immediately after engine is
started to prevent overheating.
______________ 117
Run the engine 90 seconds at idle

speed.
NOTICE Never run engine without
supplying water to the exhaust sys-
tem when watercraft is out of water.
Ensure water flows out of jet pump
while flushing. Otherwise, refer to an
authorized Sea-Doo dealer for servic-
ing.
NOTICE Never run engine longer
than 2 minutes. Drive line seal has
no cooling when watercraft is out of
water.
Close the water tap, run the engine at F18J04Y 1 2
5000 RPM for 5 seconds and stop the
engine. TYPICAL — INSPECT THESE AREAS
1. Water intake
NOTICE Always close the water 2. Ride plate
tap before stopping the engine. If
not, water will get inside the engine. Sacrificial Anode
NOTICE Remove quick connect Sacrificial Anode Inspection
adapter after flushing operation (if Check for wear. If worn more than half,
used). replace anode.
Ride Plate and Water Intake
Grate
Ride Plate and Water Intake Grate
Inspection
Inspect ride plate and jet pump wa-
ter intake grate for damage. See your
Sea-Doo dealer to have any damaged
part repaired or replaced.
WARNING
smr2011-035-009_a
The tether cord must always be
removed from the engine cut-off
switch prior to inspecting the in-
take grate. Sacrificial Anode Removal
Unscrew sacrificial anode hexagonal
screw and remove anode.
118 ______________
Fuse Inspection
If an electrical problem occurs, check
the fuses. If a fuse is burnt, replace by
one of the same rating.
smr2006-027-009
2
3
Installation is the reverse of the re-
moval procedure.
Torque anode retaining screw as spec-
ified in exploded view.
A15E0KZ
Ski/Wakeboard Post TYPICAL

(Wake) 1. Fuse
2. Check if melted
Ski/Wakeboard Post Inspection 3. Ampere rating
Check ski/wakeboard post operation.

Ensure it slides up and down easily. WARNING
Check locking mechanism operation. Do not use a higher rated fuse
Check fasteners tightness. If some- as this can cause severe dam-
thing is found defective, don't use age. If a fuse has burnt out, the
ski/wakeboard post and see an autho- source of the malfunction should
rized Sea-Doo dealer for repair. be determined and corrected be-
fore restarting. See an authorized
Ski/Wakeboard Post Lubrication Sea-Doo dealer for servicing.
Clean ski/wakeboard post and apply
a light coat of SUPER LUBE GREASE Fuse Location
(P/N 293 550 030) or equivalent. All fuses are located inside a single
Lubricate post throughout its length. fuse box.
Wipe off all excess grease and reinstall To access the fuse box, open the front
post. storage cover.
Extend and retract several times to dis- Remove the two plastic rivets and the
tribute the lubricant. rubber tie securing the battery access
panel at the back of the storage com-
Fuses partment. The fuse box is located
ahead of the fuel tank just under the
Fuse Removal and Installation gauge area, attached to the battery
holder.
Use the fuse remover/installer in-
cluded in the fuse box to ease fuse
removal.
______________ 119
Fuse Description
FUSE RATING DESCRIPTION
1 — Not used
2 15 A Diagnostic connector
3 3A START/STOP button
GPS (except GTS
4 3A
models)
iBR (except GTS
smo2011-003-011_c 5 30 A
BATTERY AND FUSE ACCESS, FRONT
models)
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
1. Battery access panel 6 30 A Charge
7 — Not used
8 30 A Battery
9 — Not used
10 — Not used
Depth sounder (if so
11 3A
equipped)
Gauge, OTAS and
12 3A
CAPS
Cylinder 1 (ignition
13 10 A
smo2011-003-009_a coil and injection)
TYPICAL
1. Fuse box Cylinder 2 (ignition
14 10 A
2. Fuel tank coil and injection)
3. Front storage compartment (access panel
removed) Cylinder 3 (ignition
15 10 A
coil and injection)
To remove the fuse box cover, squeeze
and hold locking tabs on both sides of 16 5A Starter solenoid
the fuse box and pull the cover off the
fuse box. iBR control (except
17 5A
GTS models)
NOTE: Fuse ratings and positions are
illustrated on the fuse box cover. 18 10 A Fuel pump
19 15 A ECM
120 ______________
WATERCRAFT CARE
Remove the watercraft from the water marine organisms from engine and/or
every day. hull. Apply non-abrasive wax such as
silicone wax.
Post-Operation Care NOTICE Never clean fiberglass
Exhaust System Flushing and plastic parts with strong deter-
gent, degreasing agent, paint thin-
The exhaust system should be flushed ner, acetone, or other strong chemi-
daily when watercraft is used in salt or cal or petroleum type cleaner.
foul water.
Refer to MAINTENANCE PROCE- Stains may be removed from the
DURES. seat and fiberglass using Knight's
Spray-Nine† or the equivalent.
NOTE: On supercharged models, the
intercooler is flushed at the same time. To clean the carpets, use 3M™ Citrus
Base Cleaner (24 oz spray can) or an
Additional Care for Foul Water or equivalent.
Salt Water Operation
When the watercraft is operated in foul WARNING
water and particularly in salt water, ad- Never apply plastic or vinyl pro-
ditional care should be taken to protect tector on the carpets or seat as the
the watercraft and its components. surface will become slippery and
the occupants may slip off the wa-
Rinse watercraft bilge area with fresh tercraft.
water.
Never use a high pressure washer to Respect the environment by ensuring
clean the bilge. USE LOW PRESSURE fuel, oil or cleaning solutions do not
ONLY (such as a garden hose). drain into the waterways.
High pressure can cause damages to
electrical or mechanical systems.
CAUTION Allow engine to

cool before performing any main-
tenance.
NOTICE Failure to perform proper
care such as: watercraft rinsing, ex-
haust system flushing and anticor-
rosion treatment, when watercraft is
used in salt water, will result in dam-
age to the watercraft and its compo-
nents. Never leave the watercraft
stored in direct sunlight.
Watercraft Cleaning
Body and Hull
Occasionally, wash the hull and various
body components with water and soap
(use only mild detergent). Remove any
______________ 121
STORAGE AND PRESEASON PREPARATION
Storage Fuel System
Fuel System Protection
WARNING
XPS FUEL STABILIZER (P/N 413 408
Because fuel and oil are 601) (or equivalent) should be added in
flammable, you should have the fuel tank to prevent fuel deteriora-
an authorized Sea-Doo dealer, tion and fuel system gumming. Follow
repair shop, or person of your stabilizer manufacturers' instructions
own choosing to inspect the fuel for proper use.
system integrity as specified in the
periodic inspection chart. NOTICE It is highly recommended
to add fuel stabilizer at storage in or-
It is recommended that the watercraft der to maintain fuel system in good
be serviced by an authorized Sea-Doo condition. Fuel stabilizer should
dealer, repair shop, or person of your be added prior to engine lubrica-
own choosing for storage, however tion and fuel tank top up to ensure
the following operations can be per- fuel system components protection
formed by you with a minimum of against varnish deposits.
tools.
Fill up fuel tank completely as ex-
NOTE: Carry out the following tasks in plained in FUELING section. Make
the same order as detailed in this sec- sure there is no water inside fuel tank.
tion.
NOTICE Should any water be
NOTICE Do not run the engine dur- trapped inside fuel tank, severe in-
ing the storage period. ternal damage will occur to the fuel
injection system.
Propulsion System
Engine and Exhaust Systems
Jet Pump Cleaning
Clean jet pump by spraying water in its Exhaust System Flushing
inlet and outlet and then apply a coat of Perform procedure as described in
XPS LUBE (P/N 293 600 016) or equiva- MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.
lent.
WARNING The oil change and filter replacement
Always remove tether cord from may be performed by an authorized
the engine cut-off switch to pre- Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop, or person
vent unexpected engine starting of your own choosing.
before cleaning the propulsion
system components. Engine must Exhaust System Draining
not be running for this operation. In areas where temperature may
freeze, water trapped in the exhaust
Jet Pump Inspection system must be removed.
Remove impeller cover and check if jet Using the flushing connector located
pump is water contaminated; if so, see on the port (LH) side of the stern, inject
your authorized Sea-Doo dealer. pressurized air at 379 kPa (55 PSI) into
system until there is no more water
flowing from jet pump.
122 ______________
7. Apply anti-seize lubricant on spark

plug threads, then reinstall them
in the engine. Refer to MAINTE-
NANCE PROCEDURES.
8. Install the ignition coils, refer to
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.
Engine Coolant Test
If antifreeze is not replaced, test its
smo2009-002-132_c
density.
TYPICAL
1. Flushing connector The antifreeze replacement and a den-
sity test should be performed by an au-
The following hose can be fabricated to thorized Sea-Doo dealer.
ease draining procedure. NOTE: Antifreeze should be replaced
every 300 hours or every 5 years to
prevent antifreeze deterioration.
NOTICE Improper antifreeze den-
sity may result in freezing of the liq-
smo2008-001-053_a uid in the cooling system if the wa-
TYPICAL tercraft is stored in an area where
1. Flushing connector adapter the freezing point is attained. This
2. Hose 12.7 mm (1/2 in) could seriously damage the engine.
3. Air hose male adapter
NOTICE Failure to drain the ex- Electrical System

haust system may cause severe
damage to the intercooler (super- Battery Removal and Charging
charged models) and exhaust mani- Contact your authorized Sea-Doo
fold. dealer.
Remove special tools. WARNING
Engine Internal Lubrication Never charge or boost the battery
while installed in the watercraft.
1. Open the seat.
2. Remove ignition coils, refer to Engine Compartment
3. Remove spark plugs, refer to MAIN- Engine Compartment Cleaning
TENANCE PROCEDURES. Clean the bilge using hot water and a
4. Spray XPS LUBE (P/N 293 600 016) mild detergent or with bilge cleaner.
or equivalent in spark plug holes. Rinse thoroughly.
5. To prevent fuel from being injected Lift front end of watercraft to com-
and to disable the ignition during en- pletely drain bilge through the bilge
gine cranking, fully depress throttle drain plugs.
lever and HOLD against handlebar.
crank the engine a few turns. This Wipe off any residual water in the en-
will distribute the oil on the cylinder gine compartment.
walls.
______________ 123
Spray XPS LUBE (P/N 293 600 016) Preseason maintenance preparation
or equivalent over all metallic compo- may be performed by an authorized
nents in engine compartment. Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop or person
NOTE: The seat should be left partially of your own choosing.
open during storage. This will prevent NOTE: Though not required, it is
engine compartment condensation recommended that an authorized
and possible corrosion. Sea-Doo dealer perform preseason
maintenance preparation at the same
Body and Hull time that any safety-related factory
campaigns are performed by the au-
Body and Hull Cleaning thorized Sea-Doo dealer.
Wash the body with a soap and wa-
ter solution (use only mild detergent). WARNING
Rinse thoroughly with fresh water. Re- Only perform procedures as de-
move marine organisms from the hull. tailed in the PERIODIC MAIN-
NOTICE Never clean fiberglass TENANCE CHART. It is recom-
mended that the assistance of an
and plastic parts with strong deter-
authorized Sea-Doo dealer be pe-
gent, de-greasing a gent, paint thin-
riodically obtained on other com-
ner, acetone, or other strong chemi-
ponents and systems not covered
cal or petroleum cleaners.
in this guide.
Body and Hull Repair
If any repairs are needed to body com- NOTICE When component con-
ponents or to the hull, contact your au-
ditions seem less than satisfactory,
thorized Sea-Doo dealer.
replace using genuine BRP parts, or
Body and Hull Protection equivalents.
Apply a good quality marine wax to the
body.
If the watercraft is to be stored outside,
cover it with an opaque tarpaulin to pre-
vent sun rays and grime from affecting
the plastic components, watercraft fin-
ish, as well as preventing dust accumu-
lation.
NOTICE The watercraft should
never be left in water for storage.
Never leave the watercraft stored in
direct sunlight. Never store water-
craft in a plastic bag.
Preseason Preparation
Maintenance preparation must be per-
formed in conjunction with PERIODIC
MAINTENANCE CHART.
Ensure to perform all tasks included in
the 100 HOURS OR 1 YEAR column.
124 ______________
TECHNICAL
INFORMATION
______________ 125
WATERCRAFT IDENTIFICATION
The main components of the water-
craft (engine and hull) are identified by
different serial numbers. It may some-
times become necessary to locate
these numbers for warranty purposes
or to trace the watercraft in the event
of theft.
Hull Identification Number

The Hull Identification Number (HIN) is
located on the boarding platform at the
rear of watercraft.
F18D03Y
TYPICAL
smo2011-003-008_a
TYPICAL
1. Hull Identification Number (HIN)
It is composed of 12 digits:
YDV 12345 L 8 09
Model year
Year of production
Month of production
Serial number
(a letter may also be used as a digit)
Manufacturer
Engine Identification
Number
The Engine Identification Number
(EIN) is located on the front end of the
engine.
126 ______________
RF D.E.S.S. KEY
Radio Frequency Digitally Encoded Se-
curity System (RF D.E.S.S.)
Industries Canada Certification:
12006A-M01456
This device complies with RSS-GEN
and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
FCC Certification: 2ACERM01456
The following device is in compliance
with FCC part 15C.
Warning to the user: Any changes
/modifications not approved by the
manufacturer could void the user’s au-
thority to operate the equipment.
European Conformity:
with the following standards:
ETSI EN 300 330-2
ETSI EN 60950-1
______________ 127
ENGINE EMISSIONS INFORMATION
Manufacturer's EPA Emission Regulations
Responsibility All 1999 and more recent Sea-Doo
Beginning with 1999 model year en- watercraft manufactured by BRP are
gines, PWC manufacturers of marine certified to the EPA as conforming to
engines must determine the exhaust the requirements of the regulations for
emission levels for each engine horse- the control of air pollution from new
power family and certify these engines watercraft engines. This certification
with the United States of America En- is contingent on certain adjustments
vironmental Protection Agency (EPA). being set to factory standards. For
An emissions control information label, this reason, the factory procedure for
showing emission levels and engine servicing the product must be strictly
specifications, must be placed on each followed and, whenever practicable,
watercraft at the time of manufacture. returned to the original intent of the
design.
Dealer's Responsibility The responsibilities listed above are
When performing service on all 1999 general and in no way a complete list-
and more recent Sea-Doo watercraft ing of the rules and regulations per-
that carry an emissions control infor- taining to the EPA requirements on
mation label, adjustments must be exhaust emissions for marine prod-
kept within published factory specifi- ucts. For more detailed information on
cations. this subject, you may contact:
Replacement or repair of any emission
related component must be executed U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
in a manner that maintains emission Office of Transportation and Air Quality
levels within the prescribed certifica- 1200 Pennsylvania Ave. NW
tion standards. Mail Code 6403J
Washington D.C. 20460
Dealers are not to modify the engine in
any manner that would alter the horse-
power or allow emission levels to ex- EPA INTERNET WEB SITE:
ceed their predetermined factory spec- http://www.epa.gov/otaq
ifications.
Exceptions include manufacturer's
prescribed changes, such as altitude
adjustments for example.
Owner Responsibility
The owner/operator is required to have
engine maintenance performed to
maintain emission levels within pre-
scribed certification standards.
The owner/operator is not to, and
should not allow anyone to modify the
engine in any manner that would alter
the horsepower or allow emissions
levels to exceed their predetermined
factory specifications.
128 ______________
SPECIFICATIONS
GTS MODELS
WATERCRAFT
GTS Rental
ENGINE
Rotax®1503 4-TEC®. Single Over
Type
Declared power(1) 74 kW @ 6000 RPM
12 valves (4 per cylinder) with
Number of valves
hydraulic lifters (no adjustment)
Displacement 1 494 cm³ (91.2 in³)
COOLING SYSTEM
Closed-loop cooling system
Type
(CLCS)
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel injection type
Single throttle body (62 mm)
with actuator
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Ignition IDI (inductive discharge ignition)
Make and type NGK, DCPR8E or equivalent
Spark plug
Gap 0.75 mm (.03 in)
Battery 12 V, 30 A•h. Electrolyte type
PROPULSION
Propulsion system Sea-Doo® jet pump
Axial flow, single stage.
Type
Jet pump Large hub with 10-vane stator
Material Aluminum
Impeller Stainless steel
Transmission Type Direct drive
______________ 129
SPECIFICATIONS
GTS MODELS
WATERCRAFT
GTS Rental
DIMENSIONS
Length 336.8 cm (132.6 in)
Width 123.1 cm (48.5 in)
Height 111.8 cm (44 in)
Weight (dry) 355 kg (780 lb)
Rider capacity 3 (refer to load limit)
Storage capacity 116.6 L (30.8 U.S. gal.)
Load limit
272 kg (600 lb)
(passengers + luggage)
FLUIDS
Type Regular unleaded
87 Pump Posted AKI
Fuel - Refer to FUEL Minimum (RON+MON)/2
REQUIREMENTS octane
91 RON
Tank capacity 60 L (15.9 U.S. gal.)
XPS synthetic blend
oil (summer grade).
Type
If not available, use SAE 5W40
Engine oil API service SM motor oil
3 L (3.2 qt (U.S. liq.)) oil change
Capacity
w/filter
See ENGINE COOLANT in the
Coolant type MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Cooling system section of this guide
Capacity 5.5 L (5.8 qt (U.S. liq.))
(1) Declared power as per ISO 8665 at propeller-shaft.
130 ______________
SPECIFICATIONS
GTI MODELS
WATERCRAFT GTI SE GTI SE GTI LTD
GTI GTI 130
130 155 155
ENGINE
Rotax® 1503 4-TEC®.
Type
Single Over Head Camshaft (SOHC)
89 kW @
Declared Power(1) 97 kW @ 7300 RPM 106 kW @ 7300 RPM
7300 RPM
12 valves (4 per cylinder) with hydraulic lifters
Number of valves
(no adjustment)
COOLING SYSTEM
Type Closed-loop cooling system (CLCS)
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel injection type
Control). Single throttle body (62 mm) with actuator
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Ignition IDI (Inductive Discharge Ignition)
Make, type NGK, DCPR8E or equivalent
Spark plug
Gap 0.75 mm (.03 in)
PROPULSION
Propulsion system Sea-Doo® jet pump with iBR (intelligent brake and reverse)
Type Axial flow, single stage. Large hub with 10-vane stator
Jet pump
Material Aluminum
Transmission Direct drive
Electronic
Electronic, gauge with VTS
VTS Type N.A. interface, no VTS switch
switch and preset
positioning
______________ 131
SPECIFICATIONS
GTI MODELS
WATERCRAFT GTI SE GTI SE GTI LTD
GTI GTI 130
130 155 155
DIMENSIONS
Length 336.8 cm (132.6 in)
Width 123.1 cm (48.5 in)
Load limit
272 kg (600 lb)
FLUIDS
Fuel - Type Regular unleaded

Refer 87 Pump Posted AKI (RON+MON)/2
Minimum
to FUEL
octane 91 RON
REQUIRE-
MENTS Tank capacity 60 L (15.9 U.S. gal.)
XPS synthetic blend oil (summer grade).
Type
Engine oil If not available, use SAE 5W40 API service SM motor oil
Capacity 3 L (3.2 qt (U.S. liq.)) oil change w/filter
See ENGINE COOLANT in the MAINTENANCE
Cooling Coolant type
PROCEDURES section of this guide
system
Capacity 5.5 L (5.8 qt (U.S. liq.)) total
132 ______________
SPECIFICATIONS
WATERCRAFT GTR MODELS

ENGINE
Type
Declared Power(1) 152 kW @ 8000 RPM
Gear driven supercharger with slip
Induction
clutch. Water/air intercooler
Number of valves
COOLING SYSTEM
Type
(CLCS)
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel injection type
with actuator
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Spark plug
Gap 0.75 mm (.03 in)
PROPULSION
Sea-Doo® jet pump with iBR
Propulsion system
(intelligent brake and reverse)
Type
Material Aluminum
______________ 133
SPECIFICATIONS
WATERCRAFT GTR MODELS

DIMENSIONS
Length 336.8 cm (132.6 in)
Width 123.1 cm (48.5 in)
Load limit
272 kg (600 lb)
FLUIDS
Type Premium unleaded
91 Pump Posted AKI
REQUIREMENTS octane
95 RON
XPS synthetic blend
oil (summer grade).
Type
Refer to MAINTENANCE section
Engine oil for more information
Capacity
w/filter
134 ______________
SPECIFICATIONS
WATERCRAFT WAKE MODEL

ENGINE
Type
Number of valves
COOLING SYSTEM
Type
(CLCS)
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel injection type
with actuator
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Make and type NGK, DCPR8E (or equivalent)
Spark plug
Gap 0.75 mm (.03 in)
PROPULSION
Sea-Doo® jet pump with iBR
Propulsion system
Type
Material Aluminum
VTS Type Electronic, gauge interface
______________ 135
SPECIFICATIONS
WATERCRAFT WAKE MODEL

DIMENSIONS
Length 336.8 cm (132.6 in)
Width 123.1 cm (48.5 in)
Load limit
272 kg (600 lb)
FLUIDS
Type Regular unleaded
87 Pump Posted AKI
REQUIREMENTS octane
91 RON
XPS synthetic blend
oil (summer grade).
Type
If not available, use SAE 5W40
Engine oil API service SM motor oil
Capacity
w/filter
(1)
Declared power as per ISO 8665 at propeller-shaft.
NOTE: BRP reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications
and/or to make additions to, or improvements in its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on its products previously manufactured.
136 ______________
TROUBLESHOOTING
______________ 137
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES
ENGINE WILL NOT START

1. Tether cord removed.
– Press START/STOP button.
– Properly install tether cord cap on engine cut-off switch within 5 seconds of
pressing START/STOP button.
– After double “beep”, press START/STOP button to start engine.
2. ECM does not recognize the D.E.S.S. key.
– Refer to an authorized Sea-Doo dealer.
3. Burnt fuse: main, electric starter or ECM.
– Check wiring then replace fuse(s).
4. Discharged battery.
WARNING
Do not charge or boost the battery while installed on the watercraft. Elec-
trolyte is poisonous and dangerous. Avoid contact with eyes, skin and
clothing.
5. Battery connections, corroded or loose. Bad ground.

6. Water-flooded engine.
– Refer to WATER-FLOODED ENGINE in SPECIAL PROCEDURES.
7. Faulty sensor or ECM.
– Seek service from an authorized Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop, or person of
your own choosing for maintenance, repair, or replacement. Please refer
to the US EPA EMISSIONS-RELATED WARRANTY contained herein for
information about warranty claims.
8. Seized jet pump.
– Try to clean. Otherwise, refer to an authorized Sea-Doo dealer.
ENGINE CRANKS SLOWLY

1. Loose battery cable connections.
– Check/clean/tighten.
2. Discharged or weak battery.
3. Worn starter.
ENGINE TURNS NORMALLY BUT WILL NOT START

1. Fuel tank empty or water-contaminated.
– Refill. Siphon and fill with fresh fuel.
138 ______________
ENGINE TURNS NORMALLY BUT WILL NOT START (cont’d)

2. Fouled/defective spark plugs.
– Replace.
3. Blown fuse.
5. Engine management system fault detected (check engine pilot lamp is
ON).
6. Faulty fuel pump.
ENGINE MISFIRES, RUNS IRREGULARLY

1. Fouled/defective/worn spark plugs.
– Replace.
2. Fuel: Level too low, stale or water-contaminated.
– Siphon and/or refill.
3. Faulty ignition coil(s).
4. Clogged injectors.
ON).
– Refer to MONITORING SYSTEM.
ENGINE SMOKE
1. Oil level too high.
______________ 139
ENGINE SMOKE (cont’d)

2. Water ingestion, coolant leak or damaged cylinder head gasket.
3. Internal engine damage.
ENGINE OVERHEATS
1. Clogged exhaust system.
– Flush exhaust system.
2. Engine coolant level too low.
– Refer to MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.
3. Quick connect adapter left in flushing connector.
ENGINE LACKS ACCELERATION OR POWER

1. Learning or Rental key used.
– Use a Normal key.
2. Not in Sport mode.
– Select Sport mode.
3. Jet pump water intake clogged.
– Clean. Refer to JET PUMP WATER INTAKE AND IMPELLER CLEANING in
SPECIAL PROCEDURES section.
4. Damaged impeller or worn-out wear ring.
– Replace. Refer to an authorized Sea-Doo dealer.
5. Engine oil level too high.
6. Weak spark.
– Refer to ENGINE MISFIRES, RUNS IRREGULARLY.
ON).
140 ______________
ENGINE LACKS ACCELERATION OR POWER (cont’d)

9. Low fuel pressure.
10.Water in fuel.
– Siphon and replace.
11.Engine damaged by water ingestion.
WATERCRAFT CANNOT REACH TOP SPEED

ON).
4. Faulty supercharger and/or intercooler (supercharged models).
WATERCRAFT STAYS IN NEUTRAL AFTER OPERATING THE IBR LEVER (MODELS

WITH iBR)
1. The iBR gate stays in neutral.
– Release the throttle to idle RPM.
– Press the CRUISE button to activate the slow speed mode.
– Return to shore using the slow speed mode. Refer to an authorized Sea-Doo
dealer.
iBR WILL NOT RETURN TO NEUTRAL POSITION (IBR INDICATOR LIGHT ON)
(MODELS WITH iBR)
1. iBR jammed with debris.
– Clean and check for damage in the iBR gate and nozzle area.
______________ 141
(MODELS WITH iBR) (cont’d)
2. iBR system malfunction.
– Remove tether cord and wait 5 minutes.
– Install tether cord and check iBR light to ensure fault is cleared.
– Refer to an authorized Sea-Doo dealer if fault persists or reoccurs frequently.
iBR WILL NOT RETURN TO NEUTRAL POSITION (IBR FAULT INDICATOR OFF)
(MODELS WITH iBR)
1. Throttle lever not fully released during operation.
– Release throttle lever fully to ensure iBR gate returns to neutral.
2. Throttle lever does not fully return to null when released.
ABNORMAL NOISE FROM PROPULSION SYSTEM

1. Weeds or debris jammed around impeller.
– Check for damage.
2. Damaged impeller shaft or drive shaft.
3. Water intrusion in jet pump causing bearing seizure.
WATER FOUND IN BILGE

1. Bailer system malfunction.
– Have system inspected by an authorized Sea-Doo dealer.
2. Exhaust system leak.
3. Carbon ring at drive shaft worn.
142 ______________
MONITORING SYSTEM
A system monitors the electronic com- If there is an active fault code, it may
ponents of the EMS (engine manage- be viewed by the operator on the
ment system), iBR (if equipped), and multifunction display. The operator
other components of the electrical may then choose to call his autho-
system. When a fault occurs, it sends rized Sea-Doo dealer to pass on the
visual messages through the infor- fault code. The dealer will then advise
mation center and/or audible signals the operator on the steps to take to
through a beeper to inform you of a solve the problem, or to stop using the
particular condition. watercraft and to seek service from
A fault code may also be recorded. an authorized Sea-Doo dealer, repair
shop, or person of your own choosing
When a minor or transient fault oc- for maintenance, repair, or replace-
curs, the fault message and beeper ment. Please refer to the US EPA
will cease automatically if the condi- EMISSIONS-RELATED WARRANTY
tion that caused the fault does not ex- contained herein for information about
ist anymore. warranty claims.
Releasing the throttle and letting the
engine return to idle speed may allow Displaying Fault Codes
normal operation to return. If this does Press the MODE button repeatedly un-
not work, try removing the tether cord til the FAULT CODE function is visible
from the engine cut-off switch, waiting in the multifunction display.
5 minutes, then restarting.
Press the SET or the UP/DOWN but-
The electronic system will react differ- ton to enter the function and display
ently depending on the fault type. If a the first fault code, then press the
severe failure occured, the engine may UP/DOWN button repeatedly to dis-
not be allowed to be started. In other play each subsequent code.
cases, the engine will operate in limp
home mode (reduced speed). NOTE: When the last fault code has
been displayed and the button is
When a fault occurs, seek service pressed again, the system loops back
from an authorized Sea-Doo dealer, to the first fault code displayed, and all
repair shop, or person of your own fault codes can again be displayed. If
choosing for maintenance, repair, or there was one active fault code when
replacement as soon as possible for entering the FAULT CODE mode, and
inspection. Please refer to the US EPA it becomes occurred (no longer active),
Emissions-related warranty contained a NO ACTIVE FAULT CODE message
herein for information about warranty will scroll in the display.
claims.
To exit the FAULT CODE display func-
tion, the MODE or SET button must be
Fault Codes pressed once. There is no time out on
When a fault occurs, a numerical fault this function.
code may be recorded depending on
the fault type and system.
These fault codes are used by au-
thorized Sea-Doo dealers for trou-
bleshooting the watercraft systems
when comparing them to a fault list.
Fault codes can be viewed in the in-
formation center multifunction display
however, this function is only available
if a fault is still active.
______________ 143
MONITORING SYSTEM
MESSAGE DISPLAYED APPLICABLE FAULT CODE IS

DISPLAYED HERE
FAULT CODE
Fault Indicators and Message Display Information

The fault indicators and messages displayed in the information center will inform
you of a particular condition or if an anomaly occurs.
If a fault indicator or a fault message comes ON in the multifunction gauge,
seek service from an authorized Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop, or person of your
own choosing for maintenance, repair, or replacement. Please refer to the US
EPA EMISSIONS-RELATED WARRANTY contained herein for information about
warranty claims.
For information on usual function indicators, refer to MULTIFUNCTION GAUGE
section as applicable to model.
FAULT
INDICATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
(ON)
Check engine (minor fault

CHECK ENGINE or
requiring maintenance) or
LIMP HOME MODE
LIMP HOME MODE (major engine fault)
LOW or HIGH
BATTERY VOLTAGE
LOW OIL PRESSURE Low engine oil pressure detected
144 ______________
MONITORING SYSTEM
FAULT
INDICATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
(ON)
Models with iBR
Light is steady with a buzzer and a
IBR MODULE ERROR
check engine light: iBR system fault (refer to
an authorized Sea-Doo dealer)
Models with iBR
-- Light is flashing: iBR system fault
(refer to an authorized Sea-Doo dealer)
Models with iBR
-- Light is steady with no buzzer:
iBR system still functional but needs to be
inspected by an authorized Sea-Doo dealer
MESSAGE DISPLAY INFORMATION

Engine system malfunction or
CHECK ENGINE
IBR MODULE ERROR iBR system malfunction (models with iBR)
CALIBRATION CHECKSUM ERROR Cluster programming corrupted
NOTICE Running engine with low oil pressure may severely damage the
engine.
______________ 145
MONITORING SYSTEM
Beeper Code Information

Reinstall tether cord correctly on engine cut-off switcht.
Wrong D.E.S.S. key.
Use a tether cord that has been programmed for the
watercraft.
Defective D.E.S.S. key.
Use another programmed tether cord.
1 long beep Dried salt water in tether cord cap.
(when installing tether Clean tether cord cap to remove salt water.
cord on engine cut-off
switch) Defective engine cut-off switch.
Refer to an authorized Sea-Doo dealer.
Improper operation of ECM or defective wiring
harness.
Seek service from an authorized Sea-Doo dealer, repair
shop, or person of your own choosing for maintenance,
repair, or replacement. Please refer to the US EPA
Emissions-related warranty contained herein for
Watercraft is upside down.
Turn watercraft upright. Refer to SPECIAL PROCEDURES.
Engine management system fault.
A 2 second beep shop, or person of your own choosing for maintenance,
every 15 minute interval repair, or replacement. Please refer to the US EPA
EMISSIONS-RELATED WARRANTY contained herein
for information about warranty claims.
iBR system fault.
Low fuel level.
Refill fuel tank. If problem persists, refer to an authorized
A 2 second beep Sea-Doo dealer.
every 5 minute interval
Fuel tank level sensor or circuit malfunction.
146 ______________
MONITORING SYSTEM

See ENGINE OVERHEATING.
Continuously beeps for information about warranty claims.
Low oil pressure.
Turn off engine as soon as possible. Check oil level
and refill. Seek service from an authorized Sea-Doo
dealer, repair shop, or person of your own choosing for
maintenance, repair, or replacement. Please refer to the
US EPA EMISSIONS-RELATED WARRANTY contained
herein for information about warranty claims.
NOTICE If the monitoring beeper continuously sounds, stop engine as

soon as possible.
______________ 147
MONITORING SYSTEM
This page is
intentionally blank
148 ______________
WARRANTY
______________ 149
BRP LIMITED WARRANTY – USA AND CANADA:
2015 SEA-DOO® PERSONAL WATERCRAFT
1. SCOPE
Bombardier Recreational Products Inc. (“BRP”)* warrants its model-year 2015
Sea-Doo personal watercraft sold by authorized BRP Dealers (as defined below)
in the United States of America (“USA”) and in Canada from defects in material
or workmanship for the period and under the conditions described below. This
limited warranty will become null and void if: (1) the Sea-Doo personal watercraft
was used for racing or any other competitive activity, at any point, even by a pre-
vious owner; or (2) the Sea-Doo personal watercraft has been altered or modified
in such a way so as to adversely affect its operation, performance or durability, or
has been altered or modified to change its intended use.
Except if otherwise specified, all genuine BRP parts and accessories installed by
an authorized BRP dealer (as hereinafter defined) at the time of delivery of the 2015
Sea-Doo personal watercraft, carry the same warranty as that of the personal Sea-
Doo watercraft.
2. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY GIVEN AND ACCEPTED IN LIEU OF ANY
AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FIT-
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE EXTENT THAT THEY CANNOT
BE DISCLAIMED, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION
TO THE LIFE OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. INCIDENTAL AND CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGES ARE EXCLUDED FROM COVERAGE UNDER THIS
WARRANTY. SOME STATES/PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW FOR THE DIS-
CLAIMERS, LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS IDENTIFIED ABOVE, AS A
RESULT, THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU
SPECIFIC RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER LEGAL RIGHTS
WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE, OR PROVINCE TO PROVINCE.
Neither the distributor, any BRP dealer nor any other person has been authorized
to make any affirmation, representation or warranty regarding the product, other
than those contained in this limited warranty, and if made, shall not be enforceable
against BRP. BRP reserves the right to modify this warranty at any time, being un-
derstood that such modification will not alter the warranty conditions applicable to
the products sold while this warranty is in effect.
3. EXCLUSIONS – ARE NOT WARRANTED

The following are not warranted under any circumstances:
– Normal wear and tear;
– Routine maintenance items, tune ups, adjustments;
– Damage caused by failure to provide proper maintenance and/or storage, as de-
scribed in the Operator’s Guide;
– Damage resulting from removal of parts, improper repairs, service, mainte-
nance, modifications or use of parts not manufactured or approved by BRP or
resulting from repairs done by a person that is not an authorized servicing BRP
dealer;
150 ______________
– Damage caused by abuse, abnormal use, neglect, or operation of the product in
a manner inconsistent with the recommended operation described in the Oper-
ator’s Guide;
– Damage resulting from accident, submersion, fire, theft, vandalism or any act of
God;
– Operation with fuels, oils or lubricants which are not suitable for use with the
product (see the Operator’s Guide);
– Damage from rust, corrosion or exposure to the elements;
– Damage from cooling system or jet pump blockage by foreign material;
– Water damages caused by water ingestion;
– Damages related to gel coat finish including but not limited to cosmetic gel coat
finish, blisters or fiberglass delamination caused by blisters, crazing, spider or
hairline cracks; and
– Incidental or consequential damages, or damages of any kind including without
limitation towing, storage, telephone, rental, taxi, inconvenience, insurance
coverage, loan payments, loss of time, loss of income.
4. WARRANTY COVERAGE PERIOD

This limited warranty will be in effect from (1) the date of delivery to the first retail
consumer or (2) the date the product is first put into use, whichever occurs first and
for the applicable period below:
1. TWELVE (12) CONSECUTIVE MONTHS for private use owners.
2. FOUR (4) CONSECUTIVE MONTHS for commercial use owners. A personal
watercraft is used commercially when it is used in connection with generating
income or any work or employment during any part of the warranty period. A
personal watercraft is also used commercially when, at any point during the
warranty period, it has commercial tags or is licensed for commercial use. This
is a minimal warranty period which can be extended by any applicable warranty
promotional program, as the case may be.
3. For emission-related components; please also refer to the US EPA EMISSION-
RELATED WARRANTY contained herein.
4. For Sea-Doo personal watercrafts produced by BRP for sale in the State of Cali-
fornia or New York that are originally sold to a resident or subsequently warranty
registered to a resident in the State of California or New York, please also refer to
the applicable California and New York Emissions Control Warranty Statement
contained herein.
The repair or replacement of parts or the performance of service under any applica-
ble warranty does not extend the life of such warranty beyond its original expiration
date.
5. CONDITIONS REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY COVERAGE

This limited warranty coverage is available only if each of the following conditions
has been fulfilled:
– The 2015 Sea-Doo personal watercraft must be purchased as new and unused
by its first owner from a BRP dealer authorized to distribute Sea-Doo personal
watercraft in the country in which the sale occurred;
______________ 151
– The BRP specified predelivery inspection process must be completed and doc-
umented and signed by the purchaser;
– The 2015 Sea-Doo personal watercraft must have undergone proper registra-
tion by an authorized BRP dealer;
– The 2015 Sea-Doo personal watercraft must be purchased in the country in
which the purchaser resides; and
– Routine maintenance outlined in the Operator’s Guide must be timely per-
formed in order to maintain warranty coverage. BRP reserves the right to make
warranty coverage contingent upon proof of proper maintenance.
BRP will not honour this limited warranty to any private use owner or commercial
use owner if one of the preceding conditions has not been met. Such limitations
are necessary in order to allow BRP to preserve both the safety of its products, and
also that of its consumers and the general public.
6. WHAT TO DO TO OBTAIN WARRANTY COVERAGE

The customer must cease using the Sea-Doo personal watercraft upon the ap-
pearance of an anomaly. The customer must notify an authorized servicing BRP
dealer within three (3) days of the appearance of a defect, and provide it with
reasonable access to the product and reasonable opportunity to repair it. The
customer must also present to the authorized BRP dealer, proof of purchase of
the product and must sign the repair/work order prior to the start of the repair in
order to validate the warranty repair. All parts replaced under this limited warranty
become the property of BRP.
7. WHAT BRP WILL DO

BRP’s obligations under this warranty are limited to, at its sole discretion, repairing
parts found defective under normal use, maintenance and service, or replacing
such parts with new genuine BRP parts without charge for parts and labor, at any
authorized BRP dealer during the applicable warranty coverage period under the
conditions described herein. No claim of breach of warranty shall be the cause
for cancellation or rescission of the sale of the Sea-Doo personal watercraft to the
owner.
In the event that service is required outside of the country of original sale, the
owner will bear responsibility for any additional charges due to local practices
and conditions, such as, but not limited to freight, insurance, taxes, license fees,
import duties, and any and all other financial charges, including those levied by
governments, states, territories and their respective agencies.
BRP reserves the right to improve or modify products from time to time without as-
suming any obligation to modify products previously manufactured.
152 ______________
8. TRANSFER
If the ownership of a product is transferred during the warranty coverage period,
this warranty shall also be transferred and be valid for the remaining coverage
period provided that BRP is notified of such transfer of ownership in the following
way:
1. The former owner contacts BRP (at the phone number provided below) or an
authorized BRP dealer and gives the coordinates of the new owner; or
2. BRP or an authorized BRP dealer receives a proof that the former owner agreed
to the transfer of ownership, in addition to the coordinates of the new owner.
9. CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In the event of a controversy or a dispute in connection with this BRP limited
warranty, BRP suggests that you try to resolve the issue at the dealership level.
We recommend discussing the issue with the authorized BRP dealer’s service
manager or owner.
If the issue has not yet been resolved, please submit your complaint in writing or
call the appropriate number below:
In CANADA In USA
Bombardier Recreational Products Inc. BRP US Inc.
Customer Assistance Center Customer Assistance Center
75 J.-A. Bombardier Street 7575 Bombardier Court
Sherbrooke QC J1L 1W3 Wausau WI 54401
Tel.: 819 566-3366 Tel.: 715 848-4957
* In the USA, products are distributed and serviced by BRP US Inc.

© 2014 Bombardier Recreational Products Inc. All rights reserved.
® Registered trademark of Bombardier Recreational Products Inc. or its affiliates.
______________ 153
US EPA EMISSION-RELATED WARRANTY
Bombardier Recreational Products Inc. (“BRP”)* warrants to the ultimate pur-
chaser and each subsequent purchaser that this new engine, including all parts of
its exhaust emission control system and its evaporative emission control system,
meets two conditions:
1. It is designed, built, and equipped so it conforms at the time of sale to the ulti-
mate purchaser with the requirements of 40 CFR 1045 and 40 CFR 1060.
2. It is free from defects in materials and workmanship that may keep it from
meeting the requirements of 40 CFR 1045 and 40 CFR 1060.
Where a warrantable condition exists, BRP will repair or replace, as it elects, any
part or component with a defect in materials or workmanship that would increase
the engine’s emissions of any regulated pollutant within the stated warranty
period at no cost to the owner, including expenses related to diagnosing and
repairing or replacing emission-related parts. All defective parts replaced under
this warranty become the property of BRP.
For all emission-related warranty claims, BRP is limiting the diagnosis and repair of
emission-related parts to the authorized Sea-Doo dealers, unless for emergency
repairs as required by item 2 of the following list.
As a certifying manufacturer, BRP will not deny emission-related warranty claims
based on any of the following:
1. Maintenance or other service BRP or BRP's authorized facilities performed.
2. Engine/equipment repair work that an operator performed to correct an unsafe,
emergency condition attributable to BRP as long as the operator tries to restore
the engine/equipment to its proper configuration as soon as possible.
3. Any action or inaction by the operator unrelated to the warranty claim.
4. Maintenance that was performed more frequently than BRP specify.
5. Anything that is BRP fault or responsibility.
6. The use of any fuel that is commonly available where the equipment operates
unless BRP written maintenance instructions state that this fuel would harm
the equipment’s emission control system and operators can readily find the
proper fuel. See maintenance information section and fuel requirements of
fueling section.
Emission-Related Warranty Period

The emission-related warranty is valid for the following period whichever comes
first:
HOURS MONTHS
Exhaust emission-related components 175 30
Evaporative emission-related components N/A 24
154 ______________
Components Covered
The emission-related warranty covers all components whose failure would in-
crease an engine’s emissions of any regulated pollutant, including the following
listed components:
1. For exhaust emissions, emission-related components include any engine parts
related to the following systems:
– Air-induction system
– Fuel system
– Ignition system
– Exhaust gas recirculation systems
2. The following parts are also considered emission-related components for
exhaust emissions:
– Aftertreatment devices
– Crankcase ventilation valves
– Sensors
– Electronic control units
3. The following parts are considered emission-related components for evapora-
tive emissions:
– Fuel tank
– Fuel cap
– Fuel line
– Fuel line fittings
– Clamps*
– Pressure relief valves*
– Control valves*
– Control solenoids*
– Electronic controls*
– Vacuum control diaphragms*
– Control cables*
– Control linkages*
– Purge valves
– Vapor hoses
– Liquid/vapor separator
– Carbon canister
– Canister mounting brackets
– Carburetor purge port connector
4. Emission-related components also include any other part whose only purpose
is to reduce emissions or whose failure will increase emissions without signifi-
cantly degrading engine/equipment performance.
*As related to the evaporative emission control system
______________ 155
Limited Applicability
As a certifying manufacturer, BRP may deny emission-related warranty claims
for failures that have been caused by the owner’s or operator’s improper main-
tenance or use, by accidents for which the manufacturer has no responsibility,
or by acts of God. For example, an emission-related warranty claim need not be
honored for failures that have been directly caused by the operator’s abuse of the
engine/equipment or the operator’s use of the engine/equipment in a manner for
which it was not designed and are not attributable to the manufacturer in any way.
156 ______________
CALIFORNIA AND NEW YORK EMISSION CONTROL
WARRANTY STATEMENT FOR MODEL YEAR 2015
SEA-DOO® PERSONAL WATERCRAFT
For California and New York, your 2015 Sea-Doo personal watercraft has a special
environmental label required by the California Air Resources Board. The label has
1, 2, 3 or 4 stars. A hangtag, provided with your personal watercraft, describes the
meaning of the star rating system.
The Star Label Means Cleaner Marine Engines

The Symbol for Cleaner Marine Engines:
F18L3CQ
Cleaner Air and Water

For a healthier lifestyle and environment.
Better Fuel Economy

Burns up to 30 - 40 percent less gas and oil than conventional carbureted
two-stroke engines saving money and resources.
Longer Emission Warranty

Protects consumer for worry free operation.
One Star – Low Emission

The one-star label identifies personal watercraft, outboard, stern drive and inboard
engines that meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal Watercraft and Out-
board marine engine 2001 exhaust emission standards. Engines meeting these
standards have 75% lower emissions than conventional carbureted two-stroke
engines. These engines are equivalent to the U.S. EPA’s 2006 standards for
marine engines.
Two Stars – Very Low Emission

The two-star label identifies personal watercraft, outboard, stern drive and inboard
engines that meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal Watercraft and Outboard
marine engine 2004 exhaust emission standards. Engines meeting these stan-
dards have 20% lower emissions than One Star - Low-Emission engines.
______________ 157
Three Stars – Ultra Low Emission
The three-star label identifies engines that meet the Air Resources Board’s Per-
sonal Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2008 exhaust emission standards
or the Stern drive and Inboard marine engine 2003 exhaust emission standards.
Engines meeting these standards have 65% lower emissions than One Star –
Low Emission engines.
Four Stars – Super Ultra Low Emission

The four-star label identifies engines that meet the Air Resources Board’s
Stern-drive and Inboard marine engine 2012 exhaust emission standards. Per-
sonal Watercraft and Outboard marine engines may also comply with these
standards. Engines meeting these standards have 90% lower emissions than
One Star – Low Emission engines.
For more information: Cleaner Watercraft – Get the Facts
1 800 END-SMOG
www.arb.ca.gov
Your Emission Control Warranty Rights and Obligations

The California Air Resources Board, the New York State Department of Environ-
mental Conservation and Bombardier Recreational Products Inc. (“BRP”) are
pleased to explain the emission control system warranty on your Model Year
2015 Sea-Doo personal watercraft. In California and New York, new personal
watercraft engines must be designed, built and equipped to meet the State’s
stringent anti-smog standards. BRP must warrant the emission control system on
your personal watercraft engine for the period of time listed below provided there
has been no abuse, neglect or improper maintenance of your personal watercraft
engine.
Your emission control system may include parts such as the fuel injection system,
the ignition system and catalytic converter. Also included may be hoses, belts,
connectors and other emission related assemblies.
Where a warrantable condition exists, BRP will repair your personal watercraft en-
gine at no cost to you including diagnosis, parts and labor provided that such work
is performed by an authorized BRP dealer.
Manufacturer’s Limited Warranty Coverage

This emission limited warranty covers Model Year 2015 Sea-Doo personal wa-
tercrafts certified and produced by BRP for sale in California or New York, that
are originally sold in California or New York to a California or New York resident or
subsequently warranty registered to a California or New York resident. The BRP
limited warranty conditions for Sea-Doo personal watercrafts are still applicable
to these models with the necessary modifications. Select emission control
parts of your 2015 Sea-Doo personal watercrafts are warranted from the date of
delivery to the first retail consumer for a period of 4 years, or for 250 hours of use,
whichever occurs first. However, warranty coverage based on the hourly period is
only permitted for personal watercraft equipped with the appropriate hour meters
or their equivalent. If any emission-related part on your engine is defective under
warranty, the part will be repaired or replaced by BRP.
158 ______________
Parts covered for a Model Year 2015 Sea-Doo® personal watercraft:
Idle bypass valve Air intake adapter
Throttle position sensor Spark plugs
Intake manifold air pressure sensor Ignition coils
Intake manifold air temperature sensor Air box
Engine temperature sensor Intake and exhaust valve and seals
Knock sensor Intake manifold
Engine control module ECM Crankcase ventilation valve
Throttle body Throttle body seal
Fuel rail Intake manifold seal
Fuel injectors Wire harness and connectors
Fuel pressure regulator Fuel filter
Fuel pump Supercharger
The emission warranty covers damage to other engine components that is caused
by the failure of a warranted part. The BRP Operator’s Guide provided contains
written instructions for the proper maintenance and use of your personal water-
craft. All emission warranty parts are warranted by BRP for the entire warranty
period of the personal watercraft, unless the part is scheduled for replacement as
required maintenance in the Operator’s Guide.
Emission warranty parts that are scheduled for replacement, as required mainte-
nance, are warranted by BRP for the period of time before the first scheduled re-
placement date for that part. Emission warranty parts that are scheduled for reg-
ular inspection, but not regular replacement, are warranted by BRP for the entire
warranty period of the personal watercraft. Any emission warranty part repaired or
replaced under the terms of this warranty statement is warranted by BRP for the
remainder of the warranty period of the original part. All parts replaced under this
limited warranty become the property of BRP.
Maintenance receipts and records should be transferred to each subsequent
owner of the personal watercraft.
______________ 159
Owner’s Warranty Responsibilities
As the owner of a 2015 Sea-Doo personal watercraft, you are responsible for the
performance of the required maintenance listed in your Operator’s Guide. BRP
recommends that you retain all receipts covering maintenance of your personal
watercraft engine, but BRP cannot deny warranty solely for the lack of receipts or
your failure to ensure the performance of all scheduled maintenance.
As the owner of a Sea-Doo® personal watercraft, you should however be aware
that BRP may deny you warranty coverage if your engine(s) or a part has failed due
to abuse, neglect, improper maintenance or unapproved modifications.
You are responsible for presenting your engine to an authorized BRP Dealer as
soon as a problem exists. The warranty repairs will be completed in a reasonable
amount of time, not to exceed 30 days.
If you have any questions regarding your warranty rights and responsibilities or for
the name and location of the nearest authorized BRP Dealer you should contact the
Customer Assistance Center at 1 715 848-4957.

® Registered trademark of Bombardier Recreational Products Inc. or its subsidiaries.
160 ______________
BRP INTERNATIONAL LIMITED WARRANTY: 2015
1. SCOPE OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY
Bombardier Recreational Products Inc. (“BRP”)* warrants its 2015 SEA-DOO
PERSONAL WATERCRAFTS ("personal watercraft") sold by distributors or deal-
ers authorized by BRP to distribute Sea-Doo Personal watercrafts ("Sea-Doo
Distributor/Dealer") outside of the fifty United States, Canada, member states
of the European Economic Area (which is comprised of the member states of
the European Union plus Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein) ("EEA"), member
states of the Commonwealth of the Independent States (including Ukraine and
Turkmenistan) ("CIS") and Turkey, from defects in material or workmanship for the
period and under the conditions described below.
All genuine BRP personal watercraft parts and accessories, installed by an autho-
rized Sea-Doo Distributor/Dealer at the time of delivery of the 2015 Sea-Doo per-
sonal watercraft, carry the same warranty as that of the personal watercraft.
This limited warranty will become null and void if: (1) the personal watercraft was
used for racing or any other competitive activity, at any point, even by a previous
owner; or (2) the personal watercraft has been altered or modified in such a way
so as to adversely affect its operation, performance or durability or (3) the personal
watercraft has been altered or modified to change its intended use.
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY
GIVEN AND ACCEPTED IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EX-
PRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THEY CANNOT BE DISCLAIMED, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIFE OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY.
INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARE EXCLUDED FROM
COVERAGE UNDER THIS WARRANTY. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT AL-
LOW FOR THE DISCLAIMERS, LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS IDENTIFIED
ABOVE, AS A RESULT, THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY
GIVES YOU SPECIFIC RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER LEGAL
RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM COUNTRY TO COUNTRY. (FOR PROD-
UCTS PURCHASED IN AUSTRALIA SEE CLAUSE 4 BELOW).
Neither the Sea-Doo Distributor/Dealer nor any other person has been authorized
against BRP.
BRP reserves the right to modify this warranty at any time, being understood that
such modification will not alter the warranty conditions applicable to the products
sold while this warranty is in effect.

The following are not warranted under this limited warranty under any circum-
stances:
– Replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear;
______________ 161
– Routine maintenance parts and services, including but not limited to tune ups,
adjustments, oil, lubricant and coolant changes, spark plug replacement, water
pumps and the like;
– Damage caused by negligence or failure to provide proper maintenance and/or
storage, as described in the Operator’s Guide;
– Damage resulting from removal of parts, improper repairs, service, main-
tenance, modification or use of parts or accessories not manufactured or
approved by BRP which in its reasonable judgment are either incompatible
with the product or adversely affect its operation, performance and durability,
or resulting from repairs done by a person that is not an authorized servicing
Sea-Doo Distributor/Dealer;
– Damage caused by abuse, misuse, abnormal use, neglect, racing, improper
operation or operation of the product in a manner inconsistent with the recom-
mended operation described in the Operator’s Guide;
– Damage resulting from external damage, accident, submersion, fire, foreign ob-
ject or water ingestion, theft, vandalism or any act of God;
– Damage resulting from rust, corrosion or exposure to the elements;
– Damages from cooling system or jet pump blockage by foreign material;
– Damages to gel coat finish including but not limited to cosmetic gel coat finish
defects, blisters, starring, crazing and fiberglass delamination caused by blis-
ters, crazing, spider or hairline cracks; and
limitation towing, storage, transportation expenses, telephone, rental, taxi, in-
convenience, insurance coverage, loan payments, loss of time, loss of income
or time missed for downtime experience due to service work.

for a period of:
1. TWELVE (12) CONSECUTIVE MONTHS for private, recreational use,
2. FOUR (4) CONSECUTIVE MONTHS for commercial use,
This is a minimal warranty period which can be extended by any applicable
warranty promotional program, as the case may be. A personal watercraft is
used commercially when it is used in connection with generating income or
any work or employment during any part of the warranty period. A personal
watercraft is also used commercially when, at any point during the warranty
period, it has commercial tags or is licensed for commercial use.
The repair or replacement of parts or the performance of service under this war-
ranty does not extend the life of this warranty beyond its original expiration date.
Note that the duration and any other modalities of the warranty coverage are sub-
ject to the applicable national or local legislation in the customer's country.
162 ______________
FOR PRODUCTS SOLD IN AUSTRALIA ONLY
Nothing in these Warranty terms and conditions should be taken to exclude,
restrict or modify the application of any condition, warranty, guarantee, right or
remedy conferred or implied under the Competition and Consumer Act 2010
(Cth), including the Australian Consumer Law or any other law, where to do so
would contravene that law, or cause any part of these terms and conditions to be
void. The benefits given to you under this limited warranty are in addition to other
rights and remedies that you have under Australian law.
Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian
Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure
and for compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You
are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of
acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure.
5. CONDITIONS TO HAVE WARRANTY COVERAGE

This warranty coverage is available only if each of the following conditions has
been fulfilled:
by its first owner from a Sea-Doo Distributor/Dealer authorized to distribute Sea-
Doo personal watercrafts in the country in which the sale occurred;
– The BRP specified pre-delivery inspection process must be completed and doc-
umented;
tion by an authorized Sea-Doo Distributor/Dealer;
– The 2015 Sea-Doo personal watercraft must have been purchased in the coun-
try or union of countries in which the purchaser resides.
BRP will not honor this limited warranty to any private use owner or commercial
are necessary in order to allow BRP to preserve both the safety of its products,
and also that of its consumers and the general public.

UNDER THIS WARRANTY
The customer must cease using the Sea-Doo personal watercraft upon the
appearance of an anomaly. The customer must notify a servicing Sea-Doo
Distributor/Dealer within two (2) days of the appearance of a defect, and provide it
with reasonable access to the product and reasonable opportunity to repair it. The
customer must also present to the authorized Sea-Doo Distributor/Dealer, proof
of purchase of the product and must sign the repair/work order prior to starting the
repair in order to validate the warranty repair. All parts replaced under this limited
warranty become the property of BRP.
Note that the notification period is subject to the applicable national or local legisla-
tion in customer's country.
______________ 163
7. WHAT BRP WILL DO
To the extent permitted by law, BRP’s obligations under this warranty are limited
to, at its sole discretion, repairing parts found defective under normal use, main-
tenance and service, or replacing such parts with new genuine BRP parts without
charge for parts and labor, at any authorized Sea-Doo Distributor/Dealer during
the warranty coverage period under the conditions described herein. BRP’s
responsibility is limited to making the required repairs or replacements of parts.
No claim of breach of warranty shall be cause for cancellation or rescission of the
sale of the Sea-Doo personal watercraft to the owner. You may have other legal
rights which may vary from country to country.
and conditions, such as, but not limited to, freight, insurance, taxes, license fees,
8. TRANSFER
period provided BRP or an authorized Sea-Doo Distributor/Dealer receives a proof
that the former owner agreed to the transfer of ownership, in addition to the
coordinates of the new owner.
1. In the event of a controversy or a dispute in connection with this limited
warranty, BRP suggests that you try to resolve the issue at the Sea-Doo
Distributor/Dealer level. We recommend discussing the issue with the autho-
rized Sea-Doo Distributor/Dealer's service manager or owner.
2. If further assistance is required, the Sea-Doo Distributor/Dealer service depart-
ment should be contacted in order to resolve the matter.
3. If the matter still remains unresolved then contact BRP by writing at the address
listed below.
For countries within Middle East and Africa, please contact our European
office:
BRP EUROPE N.V.
Consumer Assistance Center
Skaldenstraat 125
9042 Gent
Belgium
Tel.: +32 9 218 26 00
164 ______________
For all other countries, please contact your local Sea-Doo Distributor/Dealer
(visit our website at www.brp.com for contact information), or contact our
North American office at:
75 J.-A. Bombardier Street
Sherbrooke QC J1L 1W3
Tel.: +1 819 566-3366
* For the territory covered by this limited warranty, products are distributed and serviced by
Bombardier Recreational Products Inc. or its affiliates.
® Registered trademark of Bombardier Recreational Products Inc.
______________ 165
BRP LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE EUROPEAN
ECONOMIC AREA, THE COMMONWEALTH OF THE
INDEPENDENT STATES, TURKEY: 2015 SEA-DOO®
PERSONAL WATERCRAFT
PERSONAL WATERCRAFT ("personal watercraft") sold by distributors or deal-
ers authorized by BRP to distribute Sea-Doo personal watercrafts ("Sea-Doo
Distributor/Dealer") in member states of the European Economic Area (which is
comprised of the member states of the European Union plus Norway, Iceland and
Liechtenstein) ("EEA"), in member states of the Commonwealth of the Indepen-
dent States (including Ukraine and Turkmenistan) ("CIS") and Turkey from defects
in material or workmanship for the period and under the conditions described
below.
rized Sea-Doo Distributors/Dealers at the time of delivery of the 2015 Sea-Doo per-
sonal watercraft carry the same warranty as that of the personal watercraft.
so as to adversely affect its operation, performance or durability, or (3) the personal
GIVES YOU SPECIFIC RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER LEGAL
RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM COUNTRY TO COUNTRY.
against BRP.

stances:
166 ______________
pumps and the like;
approved by BRP which in its reasonable judgement are either incompatible
– Operation with fuel, oils or lubricants which are not suitable for use with the
convenience, insurance coverage, loan payments, loss of time, loss of income;

for a period of:
1. Twenty four (24) CONSECUTIVE MONTHS, for private, recreational use,
A personal watercraft is used commercially when it is used in connection
with generating income or any work or employment during any part of the
warranty period. A personal watercraft is also used commercially when, at
any point during the warranty period, it has commercial tags or is licensed for
commercial use.
______________ 167
been fulfilled:
umented;
– The 2015 Sea-Doo personal watercraft must be purchased within the EEA by
an EEA resident, in the CIS for residents of the countries comprised in such
area and in Turkey for residents of Turkey; and

UNDER THIS WARRANTY
Distributor/Dealer within two (2) months of the appearance of a defect, and pro-
vide it with reasonable access to the product and reasonable opportunity to repair
it. The customer must also present to the authorized Sea-Doo Distributor/Dealer,
proof of purchase of the product and must sign the repair/work order prior to
starting the repair in order to validate the warranty repair. All parts replaced under
this limited warranty become the property of BRP.
7. WHAT BRP WILL DO

tenance and service, or replacing such parts with new genuine Sea-Doo parts
without charge for parts and labor, at any authorized Sea-Doo Distributor/Dealer
during the warranty coverage period under the conditions described herein.
BRP’s responsibility is limited to making the required repairs or replacements of
parts. No claim of breach of warranty shall be cause for cancellation or rescission
of the sale of the Sea-Doo personal watercraft to the owner. You may have other
legal rights which may vary from country to country.
In the event that service is required outside of the country of original sale, or
for EEA residents, if service is required outside of the EEA, for CIS residents, if
service is required outside of the CIS, the owner will bear responsibility for any
additional charges due to local practices and conditions, such as, but not limited
168 ______________
to, freight, insurance, taxes, license fees, import duties, and any and all other
financial charges, including those levied by governments, states, territories and
their respective agencies.
8. TRANSFER
3. If the matter still remains unresolved then contact BRP at the address listed be-
low.
For countries within EEA, CIS or Turkey, except Scandinavian countries

please contact our European office:
BRP EUROPE N.V.
Skaldenstraat 125
9042 Gent
Belgium
Tel.: +32 9 218 26 00
For Scandinavian countries, please contact our Finland office:

BRP FINLAND OY
Service Department
Isoaavantie 7
FIN-96320 Rovaniemi
Finland
Tel.: +358 163 208 111
You can find your Sea-Doo Distributor/Dealer's coordinates on www.brp.com.
* In the EEA, products are distributed and serviced by BRP European Distribution S.A. and
other affiliates or subsidiaries of BRP.
® Registered trademarks of Bombardier Recreational Products Inc.
______________ 169
ADDITIONAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR FRANCE ONLY
The following terms and conditions are applicable to products sold in France only:
The seller shall deliver goods that are complying with the contract and shall be re-
sponsible for defects existing upon delivery. The seller shall also be responsible for
defects resulting from packaging, assembling instructions or the installation when
it is its responsibility per the contract or if accomplished under its responsibility. To
be compliant with the contract, the good shall:
1. Be fit for normal use for goods similar thereto and, if applicable:
• Correspond to the description provided by the seller and have the qualities
presented to the buyer though sample or model;
• Have the qualities that a buyer may legitimately expect considering the pub-
lic declarations of the seller, the manufacturer of its representative, including
in advertising or labeling; or
2. Have the characteristics mutually agreed upon as between the parties or be fit
for the specific use intended by the buyer and brought to the attention of the
seller and which accepted.
The action for failure to comply is prescribed after two years after delivery of the
goods. The seller is responsible for the warranty for hidden defects of the good
sold if such hidden defects are rendering the good unfit for the intended use, or
if they diminish its use in such a way that the buyer would not have acquired the
good or would have given a lesser price, had he known. The action for such hidden
defects shall be taken by the buyer within 2 years of the discovery of the defect.
170 ______________
CUSTOMER
INFORMATION
______________ 171
PRIVACY INFORMATION
BRP wishes to inform you that your coordinates will be used for safety and war-
ranty related purposes. Furthermore, BRP and its affiliates may use its customer
list to distribute marketing and promotional information about BRP and related
products.
To exercise your right to consult or correct your data, or to be removed from the
addressee-list for direct marketing, please contact BRP.
By E-mail: privacyofficer@brp.com
By mail: BRP
Senior Legal Counsel-Privacy Officer
726 St-Joseph
Valcourt, QC
Canada
J0E 2L0
172 ______________
CHANGE OF ADDRESS/OWNERSHIP
If your address has changed or if you are the new owner of the watercraft, be sure
to notify BRP by either:
– Mailing one of the following card below;
– North America Only: calling at 715 848-4957 (USA) or 819 566-3366 (Canada);
– Contacting an authorized BRP distributor/dealer.
In case of change of ownership, please join a proof that the former owner agreed
to the transfer.
Notifying BRP, even after the expiration of the limited warranty, is very important as
it enables BRP to reach the watercraft owner if necessary, like when safety recalls
are initiated. It is the owner’s responsibility to notify BRP.
STOLEN UNITS: In the event that your watercraft is stolen, you should notify your
area’s distributor warranty department of such. We will ask you to provide your
name, address, phone number, Hull Identification Number and date it was stolen.
North America
Warranty Department
Sherbrooke, QC J1L 1W3
Canada
Scandinavian countries
BRP FINLAND OY
Service Department
Isoaavantie 7
FIN-96320 Rovaniemi
Finland
Other countries in the world

BRP EUROPEAN DISTRIBUTION
Warranty Department
Chemin de Messidor 5-7
1006 Lausanne
Switzerland
______________ 173
This page is
intentionally blank
174 ______________
______________ 175
176 ______________
SERIES
2015
GTS / GTI / GTR / WAKE

OPERATOR’S
GUIDE
GTS /GTI /GTR /WAKE

TM TM TM TM
SERIES
219 001 397
2015
OPERATOR’S GUIDE, GTS / GTI / GTR / WAKE SERIES / ENGLISH It contains important safety information.
GUIDE DU CONDUCTEUR, SÉRIE GTS / GTI / GTR / WAKE / ANGLAIS Minimum recommended operator’s age: 16 years old.
2 1 9 0 0 1 3 9 7
©2014 BOMBARDIER RECREATIONAL PRODUCTS INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN CANADA. Original Instructions
2015
OPERATOR’S
GUIDE
RXP-X 260
RXP -X 260
TM TM
219 001 396 Read this guide thoroughly.

2015
OPERATOR’S GUIDE, RXP-X 260 / ENGLISH It contains important safety information.

GUIDE DU CONDUCTEUR, RXP-X 260 / ANGLAIS Minimum recommended operator’s age: 16 years old.
©2014 BOMBARDIER RECREATIONAL PRODUCTS INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN CANADA. 2 1 9 0 0 1 3 9 6 Original Instructions
WARNING
WARNING

(BRP).
4-TECTM iTCTM T.O.P.S.TM
D.E.S.S.TM O.T.A.S.TM VTSTM
iBRTM Rotax® XPSTM
iControlTM Sea-Doo® RXP-XTM 260
Learning KeyTM T³HullTM RXP-XTM 260 RS
smo2015-003 en JT
FOREWORD
English
Español
Français
Nederlands
Norsk
Português
Suomi
Svenska

possession. If you need more com- tained in this Operator's Guide can
your dealer.
pleasure craft.
_______________ 1
FOREWORD
WARNING Note that this guide is available in sev-

Get familiar with this PWC; it may crepancy, the English version shall pre-
exceed the performance of other vail.
PWCs you have ridden.
If you want to view and/or print an
extra copy of your Operator's Guide,
WARNING simply visit the following website
This is a high performance PWC. www.operatorsguide.brp.com.
Inexperienced riders may over- The informations contained in this doc-
look risks and be surpised by the ument are correct at the time of publi-
specific behavior of this PWC in cation. However, BRP maintains a pol-
any water condition. icy of continuous improvement of its
products without imposing upon itself
any obligation to install them on prod-
Safety Messages ucts previously manufactured. Due
This Operator’s Guide utilizes the fol- to late changes, some differences be-
lowing symbols and words to empha- tween the manufactured product and
size particular information: the descriptions and/or specifications
in this guide may occur. BRP reserves
The safety alert symbol indicates the right at any time to discontinue or
a potential injury hazard. change specifications, designs, fea-
tures, models or equipment without
incurring any obligation upon itself.
WARNING
This Operator's Guide and the SAFETY
Indicates a potential hazard which, DVD video should remain with the wa-
if not avoided, could result in seri- tercraft when it's sold.
ous injury or death.

moderate injury.

Guide
Keep this Operator's Guide in the wa-
ation, instructing others, troubleshoot-
ing or maintenance.
2 _______________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Safety Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SAFETY INFORMATION
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Avoid Carbon Monoxide Poisoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Avoid Gasoline Fires and Other Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Avoid Burns from Hot Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SPECIAL SAFETY MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Reminders Regarding Safe Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Water Sports and Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Hypothermia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
iBR (intelligent Brake and Reverse System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Operating Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
FUELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Hang Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
_______________ 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1) Handlebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4) Throttle Lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5) iBR Lever (intelligent Brake and Reverse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6) MODE/SET Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7) UP/DOWN Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
8) VTS Button (Variable Trim System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
9) Sport Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
10) ECO Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
INFORMATION CENTER (GAUGES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Information Center Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1) Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2) Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3) Multifunction Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4) Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5) Fuel Level Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6) VTS Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
7) iS Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
8) Numerical Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
9) Multifunction Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
10) Water Depth Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
11) Water Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
12) Hour Meter Display (HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
13) iBR Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
14) Compass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
15) Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1) Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2) Front Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3) Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4) Footwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5) Passenger Handhold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7) Front and Rear Eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
8) Bilge Drain Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
9) Adjustable Sponsons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
10) Adjustable Ergonomic Steering (AES). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
11) Trim Tabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4 _______________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BREAK-IN PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
How to Start Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
How to Stop the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
How to Engage Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
How to Engage Forward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
How to Engage and Use Reverse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
How to Engage and Use Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
How to Steer the Watercraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
How to Use the Variable Trim System (VTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
General Operation Recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
OPERATING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
ECO Mode (Fuel Economy Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Learning Key Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
SPECIAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Jet Pump Water Intake and Impeller Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Capsized Watercraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Submerged Watercraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Water-Flooded Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Towing the Watercraft in Water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Ignition Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Ride Plate and Water Intake Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Sacrificial Anode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
WATERCRAFT CARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Post-Operation Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Watercraft Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
_______________ 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS

RF D.E.S.S. KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
TROUBLESHOOTING

Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Fault Indicators and Message Display Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
WARRANTY

WATERCRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
WATERCRAFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
WATERCRAFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

6 _______________
SAFETY
INFORMATION

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
eas such as watercraft houses, sea- thoroughly with soap and water and
walls or other boats in close prox- change your clothes.
imity. Even if you try to ventilate
engine exhaust, carbon monoxide Avoid Burns from Hot Parts
can rapidly reach dangerous levels. Certain components may become hot
tercraft.
8 ________ SAFETY INFORMATION ________

Reminders Regarding Safe When braking, riders must brace them-
Operation selves against the deceleration force
The performance of this watercraft watercraft and losing balance.
watercraft you may have operated. When operating an iBR equipped wa-
Make sure you read and understand tercraft, be aware that other boats fol-
the content of this Operator's Guide lowing or operating in close proximity
to become completely familiar with may not be able to stop as quickly.
the controls and operation of the wa- When at speed and the brake is first
tercraft before embarking on your first applied, a plume of water will shoot up
trip, or taking on a passenger(s). If you in the air behind the watercraft which
have not had the opportunity to do so, may cause the operator of a following
practice driving solo in a suitable traf- watercraft to momentarily loose sight
fic free area to become accustomed of your PWC. It is important to inform
to the feel and response of each con- the operator of a watercraft who in-
trol. Be fully familiar with all controls tends to follow in a convoy formation,
before accelerating above idle speed. of the braking and maneuvering capa-
Do not assume that all PWCs handle bility of your PWC, what the plume of
identically. Each model differs, often water indicates, and that a greater dis-
substantially. tance should be maintained between
Always keep in mind that as the throt- watercraft.
tle lever is returned to the idle position, When actuating the iBR control lever
less directional control is available. To while the watercraft has some for-
turn the watercraft, both steering and ward speed, the braking mode will
throttle are necessary. Do not release engage and generate a deceleration
throttle when trying to steer away from proportional to the iBR lever position.
objects. Your need throttle to steer. If The more you pull in the iBR lever, the
the engine is shut off, directional con- greater the braking force becomes.
trol is lost. Be careful to gradually actuate the iBR
Although most watercraft have no lever to adjust the intensity of the brak-
means of braking, advancement in ing force, and to simultaneously re-
technologies now permit us to offer lease the throttle lever.
models that are equipped with a brak- The brake feature of the iBR system
ing system called the iBRTM system. cannot prevent your PWC from drift-
Practice braking maneuvers in a safe ing due to current or wind. It has no
traffic-free area to become familiar braking effect on the rearward motion.
with handling under braking and with Also note that your engine must be
stopping distances under various oper- running to be able to use the brake.
ating conditions.
The personal watercraft jet thrust can
cause injury. The jet pump may pick up
WARNING debris and throw it rearward causing a
Stopping distance will vary de- risk of injuring people, damaging the jet
pending on initial speed, load, pump, or other property.
wind, number of riders and water Observe the instructions on all safety
conditions. The amount of braking labels. They are there to help assure
power commanded by the opera- that you have a safe and enjoyable out-
tor using the iBR lever (intelligent ing.
Brake and Reverse) will also affect
stopping distance.

Do not store any objects in areas that It is not advisable to operate the wa-
are not designed specifically for stor- tercraft in rough waters or inclement
age. weather.
Riding with a passenger makes the In shallow water, proceed with caution
PWC handle differently and requires and at very low speeds. Grounding or
greater skill. abrupt stops may result in injury and
This PWC comes equipped with front watercraft damage. Debris may also
and rear eyelets for mooring the wa- be picked up and thrown rearward by
tercraft or for attachment on a trailer. the jet pump onto people or property.
It cannot be used to attach a tow rope Keep the tether cord attached to the
for a skier, tube or wake boarder. Do operator's PFD or wrist (wrist strap
not use these attachment points or any required) at all times and keep it free
other portion of the watercraft to tow from snagging on the handlebars to
a para-sail or any other craft. Personal help ensure the engine stops should
injury or severe damage may occur. the operator fall off. After riding, re-
Certain PWC models come equipped move the tether cord from the engine
with tow eyelets which, can be used cut-off switch to avoid unauthorized
to attach a tow rope for a skier, tube use by children or others. If the op-
or wake boarder. Do not use these at- erator falls off the watercraft and the
tachment points or any other portion of tether cord is not attached as recom-
the watercraft to tow a para-sail or any mended, the watercraft engine will not
other craft. Personal injury or severe stop.
damage may occur. Ride within your limits and level of rid-
Combustion engines need air to op- ing ability.
erate; consequently this PWC cannot Always ride responsibly and safely.
be totally watertight. Any maneuvers Use common sense and courtesy.
such as turning constantly in tight cir- Respect no wake zones, the environ-
cles, plunging the bow through waves, ment, and the rights of other users of
or capsizing the watercraft, that cause the waterways. As the operator and
the air inlet openings to be under wa- owner of a PWC, you are responsible
ter may cause severe engine problems for damage by the wake of your PWC.
due to water ingestion. Refer to OP- Do not let anyone throw refuse over-
ERATING INSTRUCTIONS subsection board.
and the WARRANTY section contained
in this Operator's Guide. While your watercraft has the ca-
pacity of operating at high speeds, it
Engine exhaust contains carbon is strongly recommended that high
monoxide (CO), which can cause seri- speed operation only be applied when
ous health problems or death if inhaled ideal conditions exist and are permit-
in sufficient quantities. Do not operate ted. Higher speed operation requires a
the PWC in a confined area or allow higher degree of skill and increases the
CO to accumulate around the PWC, risk of severe injuries.
or in enclosed or sheltered areas such
as when docked, or when rafting. Be The forces generated on the body of
aware of the risk of CO emanations riders while turning, negotiating waves
from exhaust of other PWCs. or wakes, operating in choppy waters,
or falling off the watercraft, especially
Know the waters in which the water- at higher speeds, may cause injury in-
craft is to be operated. Current, tides, cluding the possibility of broken bones
rapids, hidden obstacles, wakes and or more serious bodily injuries. Re-
waves etc. can affect safe operation. main flexible and avoid sharp turns.

PWCs are not designed for night-time

operation.
Avoid riding in very rough waters or
practicing extreme maneuvers like
jumping wakes or waves.
Everyone participating in a water sport
should observe these guidelines:
– Riding with passenger makes the
F00A2LY
watercraft handle differently and re-
quires greater skill. SWIM AREA BUOY
– Always respect the safety and com- – Do not drive the watercraft directly
fort of your passenger. behind a water skier, tuber or wake-
– Always wear an approved personal boarder. At 40 km/h (25 MPH) per
flotation device (PFD). Wearing hour, the watercraft will overtake a
a properly designed PFD helps a person who falls in the water 60 m
stunned or unconscious person stay (197 ft) in front of your watercraft in
afloat. about 5 seconds.
– Be considerate to others you share – Shut off the engine and remove the
the water with. tether cord from the engine cut-off
– Give immediate attention to a per- switch when anyone is in the water
son who has fallen. He or she is nearby.
vulnerable in the water alone and – Stay at least 45 m (148 ft) away
may not be seen by other boaters. from areas marked by a diver down
– Approach a person in the water from float.
the lee side (opposite the direction Avoid personal injury! Do not allow
of the wind). Turn off the motor be- anyone near the propulsion system or
fore coming close to the person. intake grate, even when the engine
– Turn off the engine and anchor the is off. Items such as long hair, loose
watercraft before swimming. clothing or personal flotation device
– Swim only in areas designated as straps can become entangled in mov-
safe for swimming. These are usu- ing parts resulting in serious injury or
ally marked with a swim area buoy. drowning. In shallow water, shells,
Do not swim alone or at night. sand, pebbles or other objects could
be drawn up by the jet pump and be
thrown rearward.
F00A2MY
DIVER DOWN FLOAT

For more information on approved, le- Operator and Passenger Awareness

gal and safe practice of water sports, Read and understand all safety labels
please contact the local legal authority on the Sea-Doo PWC, the Operator's
on water sports safety for the area you Guide, all other safety documents, and
plan to practice in. watch the SAFETY DVD video before
operating the PWC.
Before Getting Underway
Respect applicable laws. Check local
For safety reasons and proper care, al- and federal boating laws applicable
ways perform the pre-ride inspection to the waterways where you intend
as specified in your Operator's Guide to use your watercraft. Learn the lo-
before operating your watercraft. cal navigation rules. Know and under-
Do not exceed the payload or pas- stand the applicable navigation system
senger capacities for your watercraft. (such as buoys and signs).
Overloading can affect maneuverabil- Remember that sun, wind, fatigue or
ity, stability and performance. Also, illness may impair your judgement and
heavy seas reduce capacity. A payload reaction time.
or person capacity plate is not an ex-
cuse for failure to use common sense Operation of this PWC by a person un-
or good judgment. der 16 years of age, or a person with a
disability that impairs vision, reaction
Regularly inspect the PWC, hull, en- time, judgment, or operation of the
gine, safety equipment, and all other controls is NOT recommended.
boating gear and keep them in safe op-
erating condition. Always properly use the tether cord
when operating the watercraft and en-
Be sure you have at least the minimum sure that all passengers are familiar
required safety equipment, PFDs and with its use.
any additional gear needed for your
cruise. Ensure that any operator and all pas-
sengers know how to swim and how
Ensure that all lifesaving equipment, to reboard the PWC from the water.
including fire extinguisher, are in safe Boarding in deep water can be stren-
operating condition and easily acces- uous. Practice in chest-deep water
sible. Show all passengers where this before operating or embarking your
equipment is stored on the PWC, and watercraft in deep water. Ensure that
make sure they know how to use it. any operator and all passengers wear a
Keep an eye on the weather. Check lo- PFD at all times and take extra precau-
cal weather broadcasts before depar- tions when boating.
ture. Be alert to changing conditions. Never turn handlebar while someone
Keep accurate and up-to-date charts of is near the rear of watercraft. Keep
the boating area on board. Before get- away from steering moving parts (noz-
ting underway, check water conditions zle, iBR gate, linkages, etc.).
in the planned boating area. Do not start the engine or operate the
Ensure there is enough fuel on board watercraft if anyone is in the water
for the planned trip. Always verify fuel nearby, or near the rear of the water-
level before use and during the ride. craft
Apply the principle of 1/3 of the fuel Be aware of the iBR gate movement
to reach your destination, 1/3 to re- when starting the engine, shutting
turn, and keep 1/3 in reserve. Allow down the engine or using the iBR lever.
for changes due to adverse weather or Automatic movement of the gate may
other delays. squeeze fingers or toes of people tak-
ing a hold on the back or your PWC.

The operator and passenger(s) should Before reboarding, make sure engine
be properly seated and have a firm grip is off and the tether cord is removed
on a handhold before starting the wa- from the engine cut-off switch.
tercraft, and at all times when the wa- To prevent accidental starting, always
tercraft is in motion. All passenger(s) remove the tether cord from the en-
should be instructed to use the hand- gine cut-off switch when swimmers
holds provided, or to hold on to the are boarding, nearby, or during removal
waist of the person in front of them. of any weeds or debris from the intake
Each passenger must be able to simul- grate.
taneously place both feet firmly flat
against each footwell when properly On a PWC, never place your feet and
seated. When going over waves, pas- legs in the water to aid turning.
senger(s) may raise their body slightly
off the seat to absorb the shocks with Operation by Minors
their legs. Minors should always be supervised
When braking or decelerating, riders by an adult whenever operating a wa-
must brace themselves against the de- tercraft. Laws regarding the minimum
celeration force to prevent from mov- age and licensing requirements of mi-
ing forward on the watercraft and los- nors may vary from one jurisdiction to
ing balance. another. Be sure to contact the local
boating authorities for information re-
When accelerating on a PWC with a garding the legal operation of a PWC in
passenger(s), whether from a com- the intended jurisdiction of use. BRP
plete stop or while underway, always recommends a minimum operator age
do so progressively. Fast acceleration of 16 years old.
may cause your passenger(s) to loose
their balance and fall rearward off the Drugs and Alcohol
watercraft. Make sure that your pas-
senger(s) are aware of or can anticipate Never use your PWC with drugs or
any rapid acceleration. alcohol. Like driving a car, driving a
watercraft requires the operator to be
Severe internal injuries can occur if sober, attentive and alert. Operating a
water is forced into body cavities as a watercraft while intoxicated or under
result of falling into water or being near the influence of drugs is not only dan-
a jet thrust nozzle. Consequently, the gerous, but it is also a Federal offense
wearing of a wet suit bottom is highly carrying a significant penalty. These
recommended. laws are vigorously enforced. The use
Keep away from the intake grate while of drugs and alcohol, singly or in com-
the engine is running. Items such bination, decreases reaction time, im-
as long hair, loose clothing, or PFD pedes judgment, impairs vision, and
straps can become entangled in mov- inhibits your ability to safely operate a
ing parts. watercraft.
If the throttle lever is depressed while
braking, the iBR system will disable the WARNING
throttle command by the user. When Alcohol consumption and boat-
releasing the iBR lever while the throt- ing do not mix! Operating with
tle lever is still depressed, the throt- the use of drugs or alcohol endan-
tle command will regain control and gers the lives of your passengers,
generate an acceleration after a short other boaters, and yourself. Fed-
delay. Release throttle lever if acceler- eral laws prohibit operating a wa-
ation is not needed. tercraft with the use of drugs or
alcohol.

Water Sports and Towing – If there is more than one person

WARNING recommended. This action tends to
Avoid personal injury! Your PWC increase the survival time.
is not designed for and should not – Always wear your PFD. It won't help
be used for towing or pulling any- you fight off the effects of hypother-
thing, or for any water sports. mia if you don't have it on when you
go into the water.
Hypothermia
Hypothermia, the loss of body heat Safe Boating Courses
resulting in a subnormal body temper- Many countries recommend or require
ature, is a significant cause of death in a boating safety course. Check with
boating accidents. After an individual your local competent authorities.
has succumbed to hypothermia, he or Check local and federal boating laws
she will lose consciousness and then applicable to the waterways where
drown. you intend to use your watercraft.
PFDs can increase survival time be- Learn the local navigation rules. Know
cause of the insulation they provide. and understand the applicable naviga-
Naturally, the warmer the water, the tion system (such as buoys and signs).
less insulation one will require. When
operating in cold water (below 4°C
(40°F)) consideration should be given
they cover more body area than the
vest style PFDs.
a nearby watercraft, fellow sur-
vivor, or a floating object onto which
you can lean or climb. Unneces-
sary swimming increases the rate
of body heat loss. In cold water,
drown-proof methods that require
putting your head in the water are
not recommended. Keep your head
out of the water. This will greatly
lessen heat loss and increase your
survival time.
a difference!

Introduction The O.T.A.S.TM (Off Throttle Assisted
NOTE: Some functions or features de- Steering) is also controlled by the iTC.
scribed in this section may not apply to
every PWC model, or may be available Sport Mode
as an option. In sport mode, maximum engine
iControlTM (intelligent Control sys- power is available throughout the en-
tems) provides an environment gine operational range.
whereby the operator can control Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec-
many systems without taking his tion for detailed instructions.
hands off the handlebars.
All controls are at the operator's finger ECO Mode
tips and activated by pressing a button When ECO mode is selected (fuel
or pulling a lever. The operator's atten- economy mode), engine RPM is lim-
tion can thus remain focused on the ited whereby an optimal cruising
water and driving the watercraft. speed is maintained in order to reduce
Each control is electronic and provides fuel consumption.
a command signal to an electronic Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec-
module whose function is to assure tion for detailed instructions.
proper operation of its system within
set parameters. O.T.A.S. TM System
The various systems grouped under (Off-Throttle Assisted Steering)
iControl are the: The O.T.A.S. (Off-Throttle Assisted
– iTCTM (intelligent Throttle Control) Steering) system provides additional
– iBR (intelligent Brake and Reverse) maneuverability in off-throttle situa-
tions.
– O.T.A.S. (Off Throttle Assisted
Steering). The O.T.A.S. system is electronically
activated when the operator initiates a
These systems function together to full turn and releases the throttle at the
provide improved watercraft response same time.
to operator inputs and increased ma-
neuverability and control. Limitations
It is extremely important for operators The O.T.A.S. system cannot help you
to read all information contained in this maintain control or prevent collisions
operator's guide so as to become fa- in all situations.
miliar with this watercraft, its systems,
controls, capabilities and limitations. Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
iTC (intelligent Throttle Learning Key Modes
Control)
The Sea-DooTM learning key limits the
The system uses an electronic throttle speed of the watercraft therefore en-
control (ETC) that provides command abling first time users and less expe-
signals to the ECM (Engine Control rienced operators to learn how to op-
Module). With this system, there is no erate the watercraft while gaining the
need for a traditional throttle cable. necessary confidence and control.
The iTC allows the following operating
modes:
– Sport mode
– ECO mode.

Limitations Stopping distance will vary notably de-

The ability of a novice to operate the pending on initial speed, load, wind,
watercraft can be exceeded even current, water conditions and the
when a learning key is used. amount of braking.
Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec- The iBR system has no effect on the
tion for details. rearward motion.
iBR (intelligent Brake and drifting in current or wind.
Reverse System)
This watercraft uses an electronically WARNING
controlled braking and reverse system – It is important to inform the
called the iBR system (intelligent Brake operator of a watercraft who
and Reverse). intends to follow in a convoy
The iBR module controls the position formation, of the braking and
of the iBR gate to provide: maneuvering capability of your
– Forward indicates, and that a greater dis-
– Reverse tance must be maintained be-
– Neutral tween watercraft.
– Braking. – Be aware that other boats fol-
The operator commands the position lowing or operating in close
of the iBR gate using either the throttle proximity may not be able to
lever for forward position, or the iBR stop as quickly.
lever for neutral, reverse, and for the
braking function.
NOTE: The iBR lever can only be used
to command a change in the gate posi-
duces the stopping distance of this
watercraft and can increase its maneu-
verability as it can be used in a straight
line, in a turn, at high or low speeds, or
to propel the watercraft in reverse for
docking or maneuvering in very close
quarters.
Under ideal conditions, experienced
operators were consistently able to
reduce the stopping distance of a wa-
tercraft equipped with an iBR system
by approximately 33%, from an initial
Limitations
Even when equipped with an iBR sys-
tem, watercraft do not have the ability

SAFETY EQUIPMENT
Required Safety Recommended Protective Gear
(50 ft) minimum
flares Gloves
Wet suit
bottom
whistle).
Foot
protection
F00A12A

these PFDs meet your country's regu-
lations.

SAFETY EQUIPMENT
how to use them.
ters.
F00A2EY

F00A2CY

SAFETY EQUIPMENT

Equipment
Risks – Tow rope
– Flares

PRACTICE EXERCISES
It is always a good idea to practice and Avoiding an Obstacle
get familiar with all controls, functions Practice obstacle avoidance (choose a
and handling characteristics of your virtual point on the water) by steering
watercraft before venturing on the wa- the watercraft and maintaining throt-
ter. tle.
Always secure the tether cord to the Repeat exercise, but this time release
engine cut-off switch and the clip to throttle while turning.
your PFD or a wrist strap.
NOTE: With this exercise, you will
Where to Practice learn that you need throttle to steer the
watercraft in a different direction.
Exercises
Find a suitable area to practice the ex- Docking
ercises. Ensure the area meet the fol- Practice docking using the throttle, iBR
lowing requirements: lever and the steering to become famil-
– No traffic iar with the response of the PWC, and
– No obstacles to develop good control skills.
– No swimmers NOTE: Remember that steering direc-
– No current tion is reversed when backing.
– Ample space to maneuver
– Water depth is adequate. Important Factors Not to
Neglect
Practice Exercises In addition, always remember that the
Practice alone the following exercises. following conditions have a direct im-
Turning have and respond to different inputs:
Practice turning in circles in both di- – Loads
rections at slow speed. When com- – Currents
fortable with the exercise, increase – Wind
difficulty by making some figure 8. – Water conditions.
When this is mastered, repeat the Make sure to be alert to these condi-
above exercises but at increased tions, and adapt accordingly. If pos-
speed. sible, practice further in these condi-
tions.
Stopping Distances
Practice stopping the watercraft in vice is always to try to reduce your
a straight line at various speeds and speed to a minimum.
braking force.
load, water conditions, current and
wind also affect stopping distances.
Reverse
Practice reverse operation to learn
how the watercraft operates in reverse
and reacts with steering inputs.
NOTE: Always perform this exercise
at slow speeds.

NAVIGATION RULES
Operating Rules
smo2012-003-200
TYPICAL
tance from other watercraft, boats, Like a street traffic light, if you see a
ferent parts of a boat that are used the right of way.
GREEN light.
Keep right.
Bow
Port Starboard
1 2
smo2012-003-201
TYPICAL
Passing
POINTS
1. RED light
Crossing
Personal watercraft (PWC) do not have buoys, can assist you in identify-
these colored lights, but the rule still ing safe waters. Buoys will indicate
applies. whether you should keep to the right

NAVIGATION RULES
use the watercraft.
conditions.
ing to steer away from an obstacle. Although the preferable maneuver to
Always keep a constant lookout for appropriate direction to avoid the ob-
other water users, other boats or obstacle.
keep a safe distance from all other
watercraft, boats, people and objects.
boat, watercraft or person.
watercraft.
Unlike most other watercraft, this

FUELING
Fueling Procedure 7. Insert the gas pump spout into the
filler neck and fill up the fuel tank.
WARNING
Fuel is flammable and explosive WARNING
under certain conditions. Always To prevent fuel back-flow, fill tank
work in a well ventilated area. Do slowly so the air can escape from
not smoke or allow open flames or the fuel tank.
sparks in the vicinity.
8. Stop filling immediately after the re-
1. Turn off engine. lease of the gas pump nozzle handle
and wait a moment before remov-
ing the spout. Do not retract the gas
WARNING pump nozzle to put more fuel in fuel
Always stop the engine before re- tank.
fueling.
WARNING
2. Do not allow anyone to remain on Do not overfill or top off the fuel
the watercraft. tank and leave the watercraft in the
3. Tie watercraft securely to the fuel- sun. As temperature increases,
ing pier. fuel expands and may overflow.
4. Have a fire extinguisher close at
hand. 9. Reinstall fuel tank cap and fully
tighten it clockwise.
5. Open the front storage compart-
ment cover.
WARNING
6. Slowly unscrew the fuel cap coun-
terclockwise. Always wipe off any fuel spillage
from the watercraft.
10. After refueling, always open the

seat and ensure there is no gaso-
line vapor odor inside the engine
compartment.
WARNING
Do not start watercraft if gasoline
or gasoline vapor odor is present.
smo2012-003-001_a
TYPICAL
1. Fuel tank cap
WARNING
Fuel tank may be pressurized, fuel
vapors may be released while re-
moving the fuel tank cap.

FUELING
Fuel Requirements Inside North America

NOTICE Always use fresh gaso- NOTICE Do NOT use fuel from fuel
line. Gasoline will oxidize; the re- pumps labeled E85.
sult is loss of octane, volatile com-
pounds, and the production of gum Use of fuel labeled E15 is prohibited by
and varnish deposits which can U.S. EPA Regulations.
damage the fuel system.
Alcohol fuel blending varies by coun-
try and region. Your vehicle has been
designed to operate using the recom-
mended fuels, however, be aware of
the following:
– Use of fuel containing alcohol above
components:
ties.
parts.
ulations.
engine damage.
Recommended Fuel
NOTICE Never experiment with
other fuels. Engine or fuel system
damages may occur with the use of
an inadequate fuel.


Ensure the trailer wheels are posi-
tioned so that the center of gravity of WARNING
the watercraft is slightly ahead of the Make sure seat is securely latched
wheels to properly support the weight prior to trailering.
of the watercraft.
WARNING tercraft, particularly when driving on
Never tip this watercraft on end for dirt roads, to prevent dirt entry through
transporting. We recommend that the air inlet openings.
mal operating position. WARNING
When trailering the watercraft,
Check the applicable laws and regula- NEVER leave any equipment on
tions in your area concerning towing the watercraft.
a trailer, especially for the following
items:
– Brake system
– Tow vehicle weight
– Mirrors.
Take the following precautions when
towing the watercraft:
– Respect tow vehicle maximum
weight capacity and the tongue
weight capacity as recommended
by manufacturer.
– Tie the watercraft to both front and
rear (bow/stern) eyelets so that it is
firmly secured on the trailer. Use ad-
ditional tie-downs if necessary.
age compartment cover, glove box
cover and seat are properly latched.
– Observe trailering safety precau-
tions.

Hang Tag
This watercraft comes with a hang tag and labels containing important safety infor-
mations.
219904038
HANG TAG - LOCATED ON HANDLEBAR

(2-UP) or bystanders
smo2012-003-100_g
WATERCRAFT SAFETY LABEL LOCATION

more INJURIES AND
TO AVOID COLLISIONS: SCAN CONSTANTLY for
people, objects, and other watercraft. Be alert for conditions that limit
your visibility or block your vision of others.
OPERATE DEFENSIVELY at safe speeds and keep a safe distance away
from people, objects, and other watercraft.
• Do not follow directly behind PWCs or other
boats.
• Do not go near others to spray or splash them
with water.
• Avoid sharp turns or other maneuvers that
make it hard for others to avoid you or understand where you are going.
TAKE EARLY ACTION to avoid collisions. Remember, PWCs and
other boats do not have brakes.
DO NOT RELEASE THROTTLE WHEN TRYING TO STEER away
from objects – you need throttle to steer. Always check throttle and
steering controls for proper operation before starting PWC.
Follow navigation rules and province / state and local laws that
apply to PWCs. See Operator's Guide for more information.
iBR INSTRUCTIONS
IBR INTELLIGENT BRAKE AND REVERSE FUNCTIONS:
How to brake
• Squeeze brake lever
How to reverse
• Maintain brake lever engaged
How to go forward
• Tap throttle lever to engage forward movement from
neutral position.
Squeeze throttle lever to accelerate.
How to get to neutral
•Tap brake lever
Refer to the
operator's guide
for more
information.
219
904
438
219904438
LABEL 1

219903508A_en
LABEL 2

219903501
LABEL 3
219903184
LABEL 4
F00A2TY
LABEL 7
219903082A
219903082A
LABEL 5
Certain components in the engine compartment

may be very hot. Direct contact may result in
skin burn. 219903132A
219903132
LABEL 6
219903301
LABEL 8

219903077
LABEL 9
219903078
LABEL 10
219903066
LABEL 11
219903502
LABEL 12
Recommended: premium unleaded gasoline 91 pump

octane or higher.
Minimum required: unleaded gasoline 87 pump octane.
219903127A
219904040
219903127A
LABEL 14
LABEL 13

2 182 2 182
400 400
182 182
400 400
XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX

MAXIMUM CAPACITIES
ABOVE INFORMATION ALSO / NMB-2” ABOVE INFORMATION ALSO
APPLIES IN THE U.S.A. APPLIES IN THE U.S.A.
smo2015-003-002_a smo2015-003-001_a
LABEL 15 - CANADIAN COMPLIANCE LABEL 16 - TYPICAL

NOTICE (CAN MODELS ONLY) (WATERCRAFT OUTSIDE NORTH
AMERICA)
219904252
LABEL 17

NOTICE
(from 1-1/2 to 2 minutes)
219904387
LABEL 18
Compliance Labels
smo2012-003-100_b
COMPLIANCE LABEL LOCATION
219902679A
LABEL 1 - EMISSION CONTROL LABEL


FEL DE LA FAMILLE
POWER PUISSANCE
PLOMB ET IL RÉPOND AUX NORMES DE L'EPA DES É.-U. &
ALLUMAGE COMMANDÉ.
219904642
219904642
219903510
219903510
LABEL 3 - TYPICAL

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
WARNING
Perform a pre-ride inspection before each ride. The pre-ride inspection
can help detect a malfunction or problem. Correct any problems that you
discover to reduce the risk of a breakdown or accident.

WARNING
Engine must be turned off and the tether cord cap removed from the engine
cut-off switch unless otherwise specified prior to verifying any of the follow-
ing points.
ITEM OPERATION ✓
Hull Inspect.
Fuel tank Refill.
Engine compartment
iBR lever Check operation.
glove box and seat
Engine cut-off switch and engine
Check operation.
START/STOP button

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
Hull WARNING
Inspect hull for cracks and other dam- Ensure bilge drain plugs are prop-
ages. erly secured prior to launching the
Remove weeds, shells, debris or any- Fuel Tank
Fill the fuel tank.
Clean as necessary. If any obstruction
cannot be removed, refer to an autho- WARNING
rized Sea-Doo dealer for servicing. Strictly adhere to instructions de-
tailed in FUELING PROCEDURE.
Engine Compartment
Inspect the engine compartment for
fuel vapor odor.
WARNING
Should any leak or gasoline odor
be present, do not apply electri-
cal power or start the engine. You
should seek service from an autho-
rized Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop,
or person of your own choosing
for maintenance, repair, or re-
placement. Please refer to the US
EPA EMISSIONS-RELATED WAR-
RANTY contained herein for infor-
F18J04Y 1 2 mation about warranty claims.
1. Water intake
2. Ride plate To access the engine compartment,
open the seat.
Drain Plugs
Secure bilge drain plugs.
smo2012-003-003
smo2012-003-002_a ENGINE COMPARTMENT, SEAT REMOVED
TYPICAL - BILGE DRAIN PLUG LOCATIONS
1. Drain plugs Engine Oil
2. Tighten
3. Loosen Ensure oil level is within specification
as described in MAINTENANCE PRO-
CEDURES section.

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
Engine Coolant iBR Lever

Ensure coolant level is within specifi- Check the iBR lever for free and
cation as described in MAINTENANCE smooth operation. It should return
PROCEDURES section. to its initial position immediately after
Check for coolant leaks on engine, in it is released.
bilge and from ride plate.
WARNING
CAUTION When operating the Check iBR lever operation before
engine with the watercraft out of starting the engine. If any friction
the water, the engine and heat ex- is felt in the iBR lever, refer to an
changer in the ride plate may be- authorized Sea-Doo dealer.
with hot engine parts and the ride Storage Compartment, Glove Box
plate as burns may occur. and Seat
Ensure all required safety and survival
Steering System equipment and any additional cargo is
Assisted by another person, check properly stored in the storage compart-
steering operation for free movement. ment provided.
When the handlebar is horizontal, Ensure the front cover, glove box, and
the jet pump nozzle should be in the seat are closed and latched.
straight ahead position. Ensure the jet
pump nozzle pivots easily and in the WARNING
same direction as the handlebar (e.g.: Ensure the seat, glove box, and
when handlebar is turned to the left, front storage compartment cover
the nozzle opening must point towards are securely latched.
the LH side of watercraft).
Engine Cut-Off Switch and Engine
WARNING START/STOP Button
Check handlebar and correspond- Press the start button once without in-
ing steering nozzle operation be- stalling the tether cord cap on the en-
fore starting. Never turn handle- gine cut-off switch.
of the watercraft. Keep away from Install the tether cord cap on the en-
steering moving parts (nozzle, iBR gine cut-off switch.
gate, linkages etc.). Press the START/STOP button to start
the engine, then stop it by pressing the
Throttle Lever START/STOP button a second time.
Check the Electronic Throttle Control NOTE: To allow engine starting, the
lever (ETC) for free and smooth opera- tether cord cap must be properly in-
tion. It should return to its initial posi- stalled on the engine cut-off switch
tion immediately after it is released. within 5 seconds of pressing the
START/STOP button.
WARNING Restart the engine, then stop it by re-
Check throttle lever operation be- moving the tether cord from the engine
fore starting the engine. If any fric- cut-off switch.
tion is felt in the throttle lever, refer
to an authorized Sea-Doo dealer.

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
WARNING iBR System

Should the tether cord cap be NOTICE Ensure there is sufficient
loose or fail to remain on the en- space ahead and behind watercraft
gine cut-off switch, replace the to safely carry out the iBR system
tether cord immediately in order test to avoid a collision. Watercraft
to avoid unsafe use. If remov- will move during test.
ing the tether cord cap from the
engine cut-off switch or pressing 1. Remove the moorings securing the
the START/STOP button does not watercraft to the dock.
stop the engine, do not use the 2. Start the engine and ensure the wa-
watercraft. See your authorized tercraft does not move.
Sea-Doo dealer.
3. On the left handlebar, depress the
iBR lever completely in, the wa-
What to Do After tercraft should move slowly back-
Launching the Watercraft wards.
Check the items listed in the follow- 4. Release the iBR lever, there should
ing table after launching the watercraft not be any reverse thrust.
and before going for a ride.
ITEM OPERATION ✓ WARNING
Always ensure proper iBR system
Information operation before taking the water-
Check operation.
Center craft out for a ride.
Intelligent Brake
and Reverse Check operation. Variable Trim System (VTS)
System (iBR) With the engine running in forward po-
Variable Trim sition, use the VTS system to move
System (VTS) (as Check operation. the jet pump nozzle up and down alter-
applicable) nately to check VTS operation. Con-
firm the VTS position indicator move-
ment in the information center.
Information Center (Gauge)
1. Press START/STOP button and in- by double clicking the VTS UP/DOWN
stall the tether cord cap on the en- button (as applicable to model).
2. As the information center cycles subsection for detailed instructions.
through its self-test function, en-
sure all indications come on.
WARNING
to your PFD or wrist (wrist strap re-
quired).

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
This page is
intentionally blank

WATERCRAFT
INFORMATION
_______________ 39
CONTROLS
smo2012-003-101_a
RXP-X
NOTE: Some controls, indications, 2) Engine START/STOP

functions and features described in Button
this section may not apply to every
PWC model, or may be available as an The engine START/STOP button is lo-
option. cated on the LH handlebar. It is used to
wake up the electrical system as well
as to start and stop the engine.
1) Handlebar
The handlebar controls the direction of
the watercraft. During forward opera-
tion, turning the handlebar to the right
steers the watercraft to the right and
inversely.
WARNING
Check handlebar and correspond-
ing steering nozzle operation be-
fore starting. Never turn handle- smo2012-003-008_b
bar while someone is near the rear TYPICAL
of the watercraft. Keep away from 1. START/STOP button
the propulsion system.
Waking Up the Electrical System
When operating in reverse, steering Press the START/STOP button once
direction is reversed. Turning the han- without installing the tether cord on
dlebar to the right while backing up the engine cut-off switch.
steers the watercraft to the left.
40 ______________
CONTROLS
This will power up the electrical sys-

tem; the information center will cycle
then go blank after a few seconds.
The electrical system will stay pow-
ered up for approximately 3 minutes
after the START/STOP button was de-
pressed.
NOTE: If the START/STOP button is
pressed and held without the tether
cord installed, the information cen- smo2009-002-115_a
ter displays will stay on as long as the TYPICAL

START/STOP button is held. 1. Tether cord cap on the engine cut-off switch
2. Tether cord clip secured to operator's PFD
Engine Starting and Stopping To stop engine, pull the tether cord cap
Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS from the engine cut-off switch.
WARNING
3) Engine Cut-Off Switch Should the engine be stopped, the
To allow engine starting, the tether brake function and watercraft di-
cord cap must be securely snapped rectional control is lost.
onto the engine cut-off switch.
WARNING
Always disconnect the tether cord
when the watercraft is not in oper-
ation in order to prevent accidental
thorized use by others, children,
and to prevent theft.
Radio Frequency Digitally Encoded

Security System (RF D.E.S.S.)
The tether cord cap contains a D.E.S.S.
smo2012-003-025_a key that is programmed to give it a
TYPICAL unique electronic serial number. This
1. Engine cut-off switch is the equivalent of a conventional key.
The D.E.S.S. system reads the key
WARNING in the tether cord cap that is installed
Always attach the tether cord clip on the engine cut-off switch, and only
to the operator's personal flota- allows engine starting for keys it rec-
tion device (PFD) or wrist (wrist ognizes.
strap required). The D.E.S.S. system brings great flex-
ibility. You can buy additional tether
cords and have the D.E.S.S. keys pro-
grammed to your watercraft.
A total of ten D.E.S.S. keys can be pro-
grammed to the same watercraft.
_______________ 41
CONTROLS
To have a key programmed to your Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec-

watercraft, see your authorized BRP tion for details.
Sea-Doo dealer.
4) Throttle Lever
RF D.E.S.S. Key Recognition
The throttle lever on the RH handle-
Two short beeps indicate the system bar electronically controls the engine
is ready to allow engine starting. Oth- speed.
erwise, refer to the TROUBLESHOOT-
ING section. To increase or maintain watercraft
speed, pull on the throttle lever with
RF D.E.S.S. Key Types your finger.
Two types of keys can be used: To decrease watercraft speed, release
– Normal key the throttle lever.
– Learning key.
To ease key type recognition, the
tether cord float comes in different
colors.
KEY TYPE FLOAT COLOR
Normal Yellow or Black
Learning Green
The information center displays the

type of key used.
smo2012-003-005_a
TYPICAL
mBAR PSI
BOOST 1. Throttle lever
2. To accelerate
3. To decelerate
The throttle lever is spring loaded and

should return to rest position (idle)
when not pressed.
KEY TYPE RECOGNITION MESSAGE

5) iBR Lever (intelligent
Brake and Reverse)
NORMAL KEY or LEARNING KEY The iBR lever on the LH handlebar can
electronically command:
The SEA-DOO learning key, limits the
speed of the watercraft and the en- – Reverse
gine torque, therefore enabling first – Neutral
time users and less experienced op- – Braking.
erators to learn how to operate the NOTE: A minimum of 25% lever travel
watercraft while gaining the necessary is required to activate iBR functions.
confidence and control.
The learning mode also offers the pos-
sibility of setting the maximum speed
of the watercraft.
42 ______________
CONTROLS
Press MODE button to scroll through

various functions available through the
information center.
Press SET button to select the desired
function, navigate through a function
submenu, or to save any modified set-
ting.
smo2012-003-006_a
TYPICAL - iBR LEVER

1. iBR lever
2. Lever rest position
3. 25% stroke required to activate iBR function
4. Operating range
At speeds below 8 km/h (5 MPH),

pulling the iBR lever in will engage re-
verse.
NOTE: If water current is 8 km/h smo2012-003-007_a
(5 MPH) or above, the reverse can not
TYPICAL
be engaged as the speed threshold for 1. MODE
the reverse is exceeded. 2. SET
3. UP/DOWN button
At speeds above 8 km/h (5 MPH),
pulling the iBR lever in will engage the Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
brake. subsection for detailed instructions.
braking or reverse operation, neutral is 7) UP/DOWN Buttons
engaged.
These buttons located on the RH side
of the handlebar.
WARNING
If throttle lever is still pulled in
when releasing the iBR lever, for-
ward movement will be initiated
celeration is not desired, release
the throttle lever.

tuned by trimming the iBR system.
smo2012-003-007_b
6) MODE/SET Buttons TYPICAL
These buttons are located on the RH 1. UP
2. DOWN
side of the handlebar.
_______________ 43
CONTROLS

make a selection or change a setting
through the information center such
as:
– Gauge functions
– iBR neutral adjustment.
8) VTS Button (Variable

Trim System) smo2012-003-008_e
The VTS button is located on the LH 1. Sport button

handlebar.
It is used to activate or deactivate
SPORT mode.
tion for details.
10) ECO Button

The ECO button is located on the LH
handlebar.
smo2012-003-008_a

1. Bow up
2. Bow down
This model watercraft is equipped with

a programmable high performance
VTS.
It provides watercraft pitch trim adjust-
ments by adjusting the vertical position smo2012-003-008_d
of the jet nozzle. 1. ECO button

The VTS can be electrically trimmed to It is used to activate or deactivate ECO
the desired attitude, or to one of two mode.
preset trim positions.
Press the VTS control button tion for details.
(up/down) to adjust the riding atti-
tude of the watercraft.
9) Sport Button
The Sport button is located on the LH
handlebar.
44 ______________
WARNING
1 4 9 3 15 8 4 2
13
6 14 12 5
smo2012-003-300_a
1) Speedometer 2) Tachometer
The speedometer, located in the LH The tachometer provides an analog in-
side of the information center, pro- dication of the revolutions per minute
vides an analog indication of the speed (RPM) of the engine. Multiply the in-
of the watercraft in miles per hour dicated number by 1000 to obtain the
(MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h). actual engine RPM.
(Global Positioning System) incorpo- 3) Multifunction Gauge
rated within the information center. The multifunction gauge, located in the
If for some reason the GPS signal is center of the information center, is ca-
lost, a default mode is used whereby, pable of displaying different indications
the speed is calculated using infor- simultaneously.
mation received from other systems Numerical and multifunction displays
to provide an estimated watercraft in the digital screen indicator can be
speed. used to display various indications, or
for selecting modes of operation and
changing settings as explained in their
respective sections.
_______________ 45

RXP-X
Fuel level indication X
Hour meter display X
Water depth indication -
ECO mode indicator X
VTS position indication X
Compass X
Boost Gauge X
- = See a Sea-Doo dealer for availability.
4) Indicator Lights
Indicator lights (pilot lamps), inform you of a selected function or a system anom-
aly.
An indicator light may be accompanied by a scrolling message in the multifunction
display.
See the following table for information on the usual pilot lamps. Refer to MONI-
TORING SYSTEM for details on malfunction pilot lamps.
PILOT
LAMPS (ON)
Maintenance required. When the
maintenance reminder indicator comes
on, you may seek service from an authorized
Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop, or person of
MAINTENANCE
your own choosing for maintenance, repair,
REMINDER
or replacement. Please refer to the US
EPA EMISSIONS-RELATED WARRANTY
warranty claims.
Low fuel level, approx. 25% tank capacity,
LOW-FUEL 14 L (3.7 U.S. gal.) or fuel level sensor
disconnected.
46 ______________
PILOT
LAMPS (ON)
SPORT Scrolling SPORT Sport Mode activated. Refer to OPERATING

MODE
MODE messages MODES subsection.
5) Fuel Level Indication LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING

A bar gauge located in the bottom RH Last 2 fuel gauge
side of the multifunction display con- segments Flashing
tinuously indicates the amount of fuel
in the fuel tank while riding. Fuel tank symbol (LCD)
Audible warning (one
mBAR PSI
BOOST
long beep)
Periodically
Scrolling LOW FUEL
WARNING message
6) VTS Position
The VTS position indication located in
the bottom LH side of the digital screen
FUEL LEVEL INDICATION shows the riding attitude of the water-
craft.
When the fuel tank is full, 8 segments
(bars) of the indicator are turned on. A single segment of a bar gauge type
The top segment is not used. indicator is turned on to indicate the rel-
It is active when there is only 2 seg- mBAR PSI
BOOST
ments of fuel indicated (approxi-

mately 25% fuel tank capacity or 14 L
(3.7 U.S. gal.).

for more details on using the VTS.
_______________ 47
7) iS Position AVAILABLE
Not available for this model. INDICATIONS IN RXP-X
NUMERICAL DISPLAY
8) Numerical Display Fuel autonomy
The numerical display is used to pro- (distance and time to X
vide a variety of indications as selected empty)
by the operator using the DISPLAY Lap timer X
function in the multifunction display.
Top speed/RPM
X
Average speed/RPM
mBAR PSI
BOOST
Altitude N.A.
When the information center is first

NUMERICAL DISPLAY
powered up, the numerical display de-
faults to the last selected indication.
The available indications are depen-
dent on the watercraft model or option 9) Multifunction Display
installed. The multifunction display is used to:
– Display the WELCOME message
AVAILABLE on power up.
INDICATIONS IN RXP-X
NUMERICAL DISPLAY – Display the KEY recognition mes-
sage.
Indication – Provide various indications as se-
Watercraft speed
by default lected by the operator.
Engine RPM X – Activating and setting various func-
tions and modes of operation.
Engine temperature X – Display scrolling messages of func-
Lake water temperature N.A. tion activation or system faults.
Clock X
Learning key settings X multifunction display is the compass
direction.
CRUISE SPEED setting -
SLOW SPEED MODE 10) Water Depth Display
-
setting Not available for this model.
VTS preset X
11) Water Temperature
VTS settings (through Display
N.A.
gauge)
Not available for this model.
SKI MODE settings N.A.
Fuel consumption
12) Hour Meter Display (HR)
X Continuously displays the accumu-
lated engine hours.
48 ______________
mBAR PSI
BOOST mBAR PSI
BOOST
2
HOUR METER DISPLAY COMPASS
13) iBR Position 2. Compass active indicator
position. NOTE: The compass indication is only
– N (neutral) available above 5 km/h (3 MPH).
– F (forward)
– R (reverse). WARNING
Use the compass as a guide only.
Not to be used for precision navi-
mBAR PSI
BOOST
gation purposes.
15) Boost Gauge
mBAR PSI
BOOST
iBR POSITION INDICATOR
14) Compass
A GPS incorporated in the information
center provides the indication in the BOOST INDICATOR
The cardinal points, intermediate car- The boost gauge indicates the mani-
dinal points, as well as the azimuth the fold pressure of the engine provided
watercraft is travelling are displayed by the supercharger.
in the multifunction display by default
when the watercraft is moving. Navigating the
For a compass indication to be dis- Multifunction Display
played, the GPS must have a good link
with the navigation satellites. When the electrical system is pow-
ered up and the cluster has completed
This is confirmed when the COMPASS its self test function, a WELCOME
active indicator is visible in the digital ABOARD SEA-DOO scrolling mes-
screen. sage will appear for a few seconds.
After the welcome message, nothing
will appear in the display until the wa-
tercraft is operated.
_______________ 49
When the watercraft is being oper- – FUEL CONSUMPTION

ated, the multifunction display pro- – VTS MODE
vides an indication of compass heading – DISPLAY
or scrolling messages from the moni-
toring system. – FAULT CODES
– KEY MODE
The multifunction display is also used
to display a menu for the selection of – SETTINGS.
various functions which, permit chang- Then press the SET button to enter that
ing the numerical display indication, function.
system modes of operation, settings, NOTE: The fault code function is only
active system fault codes, and a lap available when there is an active fault.
timer. The settings function is only available
when the engine is shut off. The key
WARNING mode function is only available with a
Selecting various numerical dis- normal key.
plays, system modes of opera-
tion or changing settings should Function Description
only be carried out with the water-
craft stopped. Selecting these var- Lap Timer
ious functions while operating the The lap timer can be used to record up
watercraft at speed is not recom- to 50 individual lap times.
mended as it deters your attention
To activate and use the lap timer, carry
from situational awareness.
out the following:
mBAR PSI
BOOST
function display.
mBAR PSI
BOOST
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
NOTE: To change the unit of measure-

ment or the language displayed, see MESSAGE DISPLAYED
LAP TIME
Selecting Functions
When operating at speed, the multi- 2. Press the SET button to enter the
function display normally provides an function, the lap timer will be acti-
indication of the compass direction and vated and visible in the display.
azimuth the watercraft is traveling.
To select the various functions avail-
able through the multifunction display,
press the MODE button repeatedly un-
til the desired function is visible:
– LAP TIME
50 ______________
2 To reset the lap timer and lap counter,

mBAR PSI
BOOST
timer and counter are reset to 0 (zero).
1 Fuel Consumption
The FUEL CONSUMPTION function
is used to display the watercrafts fuel
consumption in four different ways.
FUNCTION SELECTED: LAP TIMER l/h)
– Average fuel flow per hour (gal/h or
1. Lap time l/h)
2. Lap count – Distance to empty (Mi or Km)
3. To start the timer, press the SET but- – Time to empty (h or min).
ton. The fuel consumption functions are
NOTE: The timer starts immediately not continuously active.
when pressing the SET button. A fuel consumption function becomes
4. To record each lap time, press the active only when selected as the indi-
SET button at the start of each lap. cation in the numerical display.
NOTE: The lap time will be recorded, When the LOW FUEL indications
the lap counter in the numerical display come on in the multifunction gauge,
will count the number of laps recorded, the "TIME TO EMPTY" and "DISTANCE
and the timer will continue to run. TO EMPTY" functions will indicate "0"
(zero) if they are the selected indica-
5. To save the last lap and stop the tion.
timer, press the MODE button.
To display the watercraft fuel con-
To view each lap time, use the UP or sumption, carry out the following:
DOWN button. The lap counter will
indicate which lap is indicated. 1. Press the MODE button repeatedly
until FUEL CONSUMPTION is visi-
To view the cumulative lap time of all ble in the multifunction display.
laps recorded, use the UP or DOWN
button until ALL is visible in the lap
counter. mBAR PSI
BOOST
2
mBAR PSI
BOOST
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
FUEL CONSUMPTION
MESSAGE DISPLAYED: LAP TIMER
2. Press the UP or DOWN button to
1. Total time toggle to the desired fuel consump-
2. ALL is displayed here tion display mode.
_______________ 51
2 Settings
mBAR PSI
BOOST The SETTINGS function is used for:
– Clock setting. Refer to MULTI-
1
FUNCTION GAUGE SETUP
– iBR override function for mainte-
nance.
Changing Numerical
FUEL CONSUMPTION DISPLAY Display Indication
MODE To change the indication in the numeri-
message 1. Press the MODE button on the RH
2. Fuel consumption value handlebar repeatedly until DISPLAY
is visible in the multifunction display.
setting and return to the main dis- mBAR PSI
BOOST
play.
will be displayed in the numerical dis-
play. Double click the SET button to
reset the average fuel consumption in-
dication. The display will momentarily
indicate zero (0).
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
VTS Mode
The VTS MODE function is used to DISPLAY
manually set the VTS or change VTS
PRESET settings. Refer to OPERAT- 2. Press the SET button to enter the
ING INSTRUCTIONS subsection for DISPLAY function.
details. 3. Press the UP or DOWN button until
the preferred indication appears.
Display
– RPM
The DISPLAY function is used to – SPEED
change the indication in the numerical
– ENGINE TEMP
display. Refer to CHANGING NUMER-
ICAL DISPLAY INDICATION. – TOP SPEED
– AVG SPEED
Fault Codes – TOP RPM
The FAULT CODES function is used – AVG RPM
to display active fault codes. Refer to – CLOCK.
MONITORING SYSTEM subsection.
Key Mode
The KEY MODE function is used for
changing LEARNING key settings. Re-
for details.
52 ______________
2 Multifunction Gauge
mBAR PSI
BOOST Setup
Changing Clock Setting
1
tifunction display.
NUMERICAL DISPLAY SELECTION mBAR PSI

BOOST
1. Type of selected numerical display

indication
2. Applicable value
4. Press the SET button to select and

save the preferred indication, or
wait for the display function to time MESSAGE DISPLAYED
be automatically saved. SETTINGS
The following abbreviations are used in
the numerical display: 2. Press the UP or DOWN button re-
peatedly until CLOCK is visible.
– FT or M
– RPM 2
– MPH or Km/h
mBAR PSI
BOOST
– °F or °C
– AM or PM 1
– Gal/h or l/h.
Resetting Numerical
Display Indication
tions can be reset: 1. CLOCK message
– Average fuel consumption 2. Time
– Top speed
– Average speed 3. Press the SET button to enter the
– Top RPM function. CHANGE CLOCK OFF-
– Average RPM. SET message will be displayed.
To reset indications, double click the
SET button. The numerical display will
NOTE: Each of these functions be-
come active ONLY when selected as
the numerical display indication.
_______________ 53
2
mBAR PSI
BOOST

CLOCK OFFSET

2. Time

adjust the clock to the correct local
time.
setting and return to the main dis-
play.
NOTE: The clock uses the GPS sig-

Language Setting
54 ______________
EQUIPMENT
smo2012-003-100_d
TYPICAL - RXP-X
1) Glove Box The front storage compartment also

A small, storage compartment for per- contains two holders for safety equip-
sonal articles. ment; one for a fire extinguisher and
another for the emergency kit (these
Pull up on cover latch to open glove are not provided).
box.
smo2012-003-010_a
FRONT STORAGE COMPARTMENT

1. Fire extinguisher secured in holder
smo2012-003-009_a 2. Emergency kit secured in holder
TYPICAL — GLOVE BOX
1. Cover latch To open the front storage compart-
ment cover, pull the latch lever upward
2) Front Storage Always close and latch cover when rid-
ing.
Compartment
A convenient area to carry personal ar-
ticles.
_______________ 55
EQUIPMENT
smo2012-003-026_a
ERGONOMIC SEAT
smo2012-003-011_a
TYPICAL Seat Removal

1. Front storage compartment cover
2. Latch lever To remove the seat, pull up on the latch
handle and lift the back end of the seat.
WARNING
Never carry any loose, heavy,
sharp, or breakable objects in the
storage compartment. Do not ex-
ceed maximum load capacity; 9 kg
(20 lb). Never operate the water-
craft with the front storage com-
partment cover open. This is not a
watertight compartment.
3) Seat smo2009-002-129_a
This model comes equipped with an TYPICAL - SEAT LATCH
ergonomic seat narrowing towards 1. Seat latch handle
the front with knee grab design allow- 2. Latch pin
ing you to position your legs towards 3. Pin insertion hole
the inside of the footwells, minimizing Then pull the seat up and backwards to
upper body fatigue and granting you remove the seat from the watercraft.
more control when cornering.
This seat is designed for an operator Seat Installation
and a passenger. To install the seat, insert the forward
end of the seat in it's retainer.
56 ______________
EQUIPMENT
smo2012-003-026_c
smo2012-003-013_a 1. Angled footwells

1. Forward seat retainer
5) Passenger Handhold
Align the seat latch with the latch pin
and firmly press down on the rear por- The seat strap provides a handhold for
tion of the seat to lock it in place. a passenger to hold on to when riding.
Pull up on the rear portion of the seat to The sides of the molded grab handle at
ensure it is properly latched. the rear of the seat also provide a hand-
hold for a passenger. The rear portion
of the molded grab handle provides a
CAUTION Ensure the latch is handhold for boarding the watercraft
properly locked onto the pin. from the water.
4) Footwell NOTICE Never use the molded

grab handle to tow anything or to lift
The operator and passenger feet the watercraft.
should remain at all times on footwells
while riding.
smo2012-003-012_a
TYPICAL - PASSENGER HANDHOLDS

smo2012-003-026_b
1. Seat strap
1. Footwell 2. Molded grab handle
For the operator, the angled footwells 6) Boarding Platform

unique to this models allow you to "lock
in" when cornering hard. The rear deck area serves as the board-
ing platform.
The aft portion of the foot wells near
the boarding platform are used as foot
rests for the rear facing spotter when
towing a skier or tuber.
_______________ 57
EQUIPMENT
Outside North America
smo2012-003-014_a
1. Boarding platform smo2012-003-016_a
TYPICAL - CE MODEL
7) Front and Rear Eyelets 1. Front eyelet
Eyelets can be used for mooring and Rear Eyelets
as tie-down points when trailering your
watercraft.
Front Eyelet
North America
The front eyelet used is the iCatch
hook type. It is ready for the Sea-Doo
Move trailer with the iCatch system.
smo2012-003-015_a
NOTE: The iCatch hook requires no TYPICAL
special procedure when using a regu- 1. Rear eyelets
lar trailer.
smo2012-003-019_a smo2012-003-017_a
1. iCatch hook 1. Rear eyelet

densation.
58 ______________
EQUIPMENT
SPONSON ADJUSTMENT
GUIDELINE
Increase lateral grip for
faster turning response.
Race Race position is NOT
recommended when riding
smo2012-003-002_a with a passenger.
TYPICAL - BILGE DRAIN PLUG LOCATIONS Offer a balance
1. Drain plugs
2. Tighten combination between Race
3. Loosen Sport and Freeride positions.
(factory Preferred position for
NOTICE Ensure drain plugs are setting) overall riding conditions
properly secured prior to launching and when riding with a
the watercraft in water. passenger.
9) Adjustable Sponsons Decrease lateral grip for a

Freeride
more playful behavior.
The adjustable sponsons change the
lateral grip of the watercraft.
smo2012-003-018_a
LH SIDE SHOWN
1. Adjustable sponson smo2012-003-027_a
1. Freeride
Sponson Adjustment Guideline 2. Sport (factory setting)
3. Race
The sponsons offer 3 possible height
settings. How to Adjust Sponson
NOTE: It is highly recommended to
WARNING have this adjustment carried out by
After adjusting sponsons, always your Sea-Doo dealer.
familiarize yourself with the new Remove and DISCARD the 5 self-
handling characteristics of the wa- adhesive screws.
tercraft.
_______________ 59
EQUIPMENT
10) Adjustable Ergonomic

Steering (AES)
The handlebar width and angular posi-
tion of the controls may be adjusted to
driver preference by extending and ro-
tating the handlebar extension tubes.
NOTE: To carry out the ergonomic ad-
justments, see an authorized Sea-Doo
dealer.
smo2012-003-018_b
1. Self-adhesive screws
Reposition sponson to desired posi-

tion.
Install NEW self-adhesive screws and
torque to specification.
WARNING
Whenever the sponsons are ad-
justed, the self-adhesive screws
must be replaced and torqued to smo2010-002-006_c
specification. Otherwise, loss of ERGONOMIC ADJUSTMENTS

sponson may occur which could 1. Handlebar width adjustment
2. Angular position adjustment of controls
cause a loss of control of the wa-
tercraft.
11) Trim Tabs
TIGHTENING TORQUE Trim tabs are present on PWC hull to
provide adequate bow attitude in all
Sponson 18 N•m ± 2 N•m conditions.
screws (159 lbf•in ± 18 lbf•in)
(P/N 250 000 572) (NEW SCREWS
REQUIRED)
Proceed the same way for the other

side.
WARNING
Both sponsons must be installed smo2012-003-020_a
and adjusted at the same height. 1. LH side shown - trim tab

Missing sponsons or improper ad-
justment will affect handling and
stability, which could cause a loss
of control of the watercraft.
60 ______________
BREAK-IN PERIOD
Period
break-in.
throttle accelerations or operations
and prolonged cruising speeds are
detrimental during the break-in pe-
riod.
Break-In Mode
This model has a break-in mode pro-
grammed to ensure initial engine pro-
tection.
During the first 5 hours of operation,
the engine management limits the en-
gine maximum speed for engine pro-
tection. The engine performance will
progressively increase during this pe-
riod.
_______________ 61
WARNING Boarding from Water
Always perform the PRE-RIDE IN- Ensure there is at least 90 cm (3 ft) of
SPECTION before operating this water underneath the lowest rear por-
watercraft. Be sure to read the tion of the hull.
SAFETY INFORMATION and the Take into account that the hull will be
WATERCRAFT INFORMATION sec- lower in the water when all passen-
tions and be thoroughly familiar gers are aboard. Be certain to maintain
with the iControl technology. the specified depth so sand, pebbles
and rocks will not be drawn up in the
Should any control or instruction not be propulsion system.
Sea-Doo dealer.
Boarding the Watercraft

As with any watercraft, boarding
should be done carefully and engine
must not be running.
WARNING A
cord must be removed when F18L0XY
boarding the watercraft.
A. Maintain at least 90 cm (3 ft) underneath
the lowest rear portion of the hull when all
Boarding from a Dock passengers are aboard
When boarding from a dock, slowly NOTICE Starting the engine or rid-
board nearest the dock while holding ing the watercraft in shallower water
the handlebar, and at the same time, may damage the propulsion system
transfer the body weight to the other components.
side in order to balance the watercraft. Operator Alone
Then bring the other foot over the seat Using one hand, take hold of the
and place it on the other footboard. molded grab handle behind the seat.
Push the watercraft away from the
dock. Using the other hand, take hold of the
edge of the boarding platform, then
pull yourself up so that you can knee
onto the boarding platform.
NOTICE Never use propulsion
system components to board.
With both hands on the handle behind
platform.
F18A01Y
62 ______________

aboard.
smo2009-002-143
smo2009-002-146
The passenger then climbs onto the

watercraft while the operator main-
tains balance by sitting as close as pos-
smo2009-002-144
sible to the console.
Take hold of the seat strap to help main-

tain your balance and step forward
onto the footboards on either side of
the seat.
smo2009-002-149
smo2009-002-145

The operator climbs on the watercraft smo2009-002-150
ously.
WARNING
cord must be removed when
boarding the watercraft or when
using the boarding step.
_______________ 63
How to Start Engine WARNING

The tether cord clip should always
WARNING be attached to the operators per-
Before starting the engine, the op- sonal flotation device or to the
erator and passenger(s) should al- wrist (wrist strap required) when
ways: starting or operating the water-
– Be properly seated on the watercraft.
craft
– Have a firm grip on a handhold NOTICE Do not hold START/STOP
or hold on to the waist of the per-
son in front of them button more than 10 seconds to
avoid starter overheating. A rest pe-
– Wear appropriate protective riod should be observed between
clothing including a PFD ap- the cranking cycles to allow the
proved by local authorities and starter to cool down.
a wet suit bottom.
NOTE: If the engine is stopped us-
ing the START/STOP button without
NOTICE Ensure there is at least removing the tether cord, it can be
90 cm (3 ft) of water under the low- restarted within 3 minutes. After this
est rear portion of the hull when all delay, remove the tether cord and carry
passengers are aboard prior to start- out the engine starting procedure from
ing the engine. Otherwise damage the beginning.
nents may occur. How to Stop the Engine
1. Attach the tether cord clip to your
PFD or to the wrist (wrist strap re- WARNING
quired). To maintain watercraft directional
2. Firmly grip the handlebar with your control, the engine should be
left hand and place both feet on the running until the watercraft is
footwells. stopped.
3. Press the engine START/STOP but-
ton once to wake up the electrical The engine may be shut off using one
system. of two methods:
4. Install the tether cord on the engine – Pressing the engine START/STOP
cut-off switch. button, or
– Removing the tether cord from the
5. After double beep, depress the engine cut-off switch.
START/STOP button to crank the
engine.
6. Release engine START/STOP but-
WARNING
ton immediately after engine is Never leave the tether cord on the
started. engine cut-off switch when dis-
embarking watercraft to prevent
theft, accidental engine starting,
and to avoid unauthorized use by
children or others.
64 ______________
How to Engage Neutral NOTE: Press the UP/DOWN button

WARNING the neutral position is attained and the
watercraft stops moving.
The drive shaft and impeller are
always turning when the engine is How to Engage Forward
running, even in neutral position.
Keep away from the propulsion Forward motion can be initiated by sim-
system of the watercraft. ply depressing the throttle lever.
When the watercraft is first started,

the iBR system automatically sets the
neutral position by default.
To engage neutral from forward posi-
tion, tap the iBR lever.
To engage neutral from reverse posi-
tion, release the iBR lever and throttle
lever.
How to Trim the Neutral Position of

the iBR
smo2012-003-005_b
When in NEUTRAL, if the watercraft
ENGAGING FORWARD
creeps forward or backward, the iBR 1. Throttle lever
system may be trimmed.
NOTE: Movement of the watercraft How to Engage and Use
when operating in neutral may be due Reverse
to wind or water current.
Reverse can only be engaged between
If the watercraft is moving forwards, idle speed and the threshold forward
momentarily press the DOWN button. speed of 8 km/h (5 MPH).
momentarily press the UP button. WARNING
If water current is 8 km/h (5 MPH)
or above, the reverse can not be
engaged as the speed theshold for
To engage reverse position, the iBR

lever on the LH handlebar must be
pulled in at least 25% of the lever
travel.
smo2012-003-007_b
TRIMMING THE iBR NEUTRAL POSITION

1. UP button (to stop rearward movement)
2. DOWN button (to stop forward movement)
_______________ 65
WARNING
people.
When operating in reverse, turn the

handlebar in the opposite direction
smo2012-003-006_a
watercraft.
TYPICAL - iBR LEVER
1. iBR lever For example, to steer the rear of the
2. Lever released position watercraft to port (left), turn the han-
3. Approximate 25% position dlebar to starboard (right).
4. Operating range

duced.
efficiency.
is changed.
operation.
To stop rearward motion after iBR lever F18J08Z
release, apply enough throttle to stop
rearward movement. TYPICAL - STEERING DIRECTION REVERSED
WHEN BACKING
WARNING
The brake function has no effect CAUTION Steering direction
when travelling in reverse. in reverse is opposite of forward.
To steer the stern to port (left) in re-
verse, turn the handlebar to star-
Available engine power is limited in board (right). To steer the stern to
reverse mode, which limits reverse starboard (right), turn the handle-
speed. bar to port (left). Reverse operation
should be practiced in open waters
in order to become fully familiar with
the controls and watercraft handling
characteristics before operating in
close quarters.
66 ______________
How to Engage and Use When iBR lever is applied, the throttle
Brake lever command is overridden and en-
gine throttle control is now dependant
WARNING on the iBR lever position. Braking can
thus be modulated by using only the
– The engine must be running to iBR lever.
be able to use the brake.
Watercraft deceleration is proportional
– The brake is only applicable to the braking force. The more the iBR
when operating in forward lever is pulled in, the greater the brak-
movement, it has no effect on ing force applied.
rearward motion.
NOTE: Be careful to gradually actuate
– The brake cannot prevent your
the iBR lever to adjust intensity of the
PWC from drifting due to cur-
braking force and simultaneously re-
rent or wind. lease the throttle lever.
The braking function can only be en-
gaged during forward operation at or CAUTION When braking, rid-
above the threshold speed of 8 km/h ers must brace themselves against
(5 MPH). the deceleration force to prevent
from moving forward on the water-
Braking is engaged and controlled craft and losing balance. The oper-
when the iBR lever on the LH handle- ator should always keep both hands
bar is pulled in at least 25% of its travel. on the handlebars, and all passen-
gers should maintain a firm grip of a
handhold or the waist of the person
in front of them.
WARNING
Stopping distance will vary de-
pending on initial speed, load,
wind, number of riders, water con-
ditions, and the amount of braking
power commanded by the oper-
ator. Always adjust your riding
style accordingly.
smo2012-003-006_a
TYPICAL - iBR LEVER

1. iBR lever When the watercraft slows to less
2. Lever released position than 8 km/h (5 MPH), braking mode
3. Approximate 25% position ends and reverse mode is engaged.
4. Operating range Release the iBR lever once the water-
craft is stopped. Otherwise, a rear-
WARNING ward movement will be initiated.
Braking should be practiced in
open waters and at gradually in- CAUTION As the watercraft
creasing speeds in order to be- slows to a stop, the wake created
come fully familiar with the con- by the watercraft will catch up and
trols and watercraft handling char- tend to push the watercraft forward.
acteristics. Ensure there are no obstacles or
bathers in the direction of travel.
_______________ 67
If the throttle lever is still pulled in How to Steer the

when releasing the iBR lever, the wa- Watercraft
tercraft will accelerate forward after a
short delay. Acceleration will be pro-
portional to the throttle lever position.
WARNING
If forward acceleration is not de-
sired when the brake lever is re-
leased, release the throttle lever.
When at speed and the brake is first

applied, a plume of water will shoot up
in the air behind the watercraft which
may cause the operator of a following
F18J09Y
watercraft to momentarily loose sight
of your PWC.
Turning the handlebar pivots the jet
WARNING pump nozzle which controls the water-
craft direction. Turning the handlebar
– It is important to inform the to the right will turn the watercraft to
operator of a watercraft who the right, turning the handlebar to the
intends to follow in a convoy left turns the watercraft to the left.
formation, of the braking and The throttle should be applied to turn
maneuvering capability of your the watercraft.
indicates, and that a greater dis- WARNING
tance must be maintained be- Throttle should be applied and
tween watercraft. handlebar turned to change the di-
– Be aware that other boats fol- rection of the watercraft. Steering
lowing or operating in close efficiency will differ depending on
proximity may not be able to the amount of throttle applied, the
stop as quickly. number of passengers, the load,
the water conditions and the en-
Braking in a Turn vironmental factors such as the
wind.
Throttle must be applied for turning to
ensure directional control. However
braking can be initiated during a turn Unlike a car, a watercraft needs some
using the iBR lever as previously de- throttle to turn. Practice in a safe area
scribed. Get ready to maintain your applying the throttle and turning away
balance while the wake is crossing from an imaginary object. This is a
your PWC. good collision avoidance technique.
CAUTION As the watercraft

WARNING
slows to a stop while braking in a Directional control is reduced
turn, the wake created by the water- when the throttle is released and
craft will catch up and tend to push lost when the engine is off.
the watercraft sideways. Be pre-
pared to maintain balance as the
wake crossed the watercraft.
68 ______________
The watercraft behaves differently How to Use the Variable

with a passenger and requires greater Trim System (VTS)
grip the seat strap, the molded grab The variable trim system (VTS)
handle, or the waist of the person changes the vertical position of the jet
ahead of them. Reduce speed and pump nozzle to provide the operator
avoid sharp turns. Avoid choppy water with a fast, effective system to com-
conditions when carrying a passenger. pensate for load, thrust, riding position
and water conditions. Correctly ad-
Tight Turns and Other Special justed, it can improve handling, reduce
Maneuvers porpoising, and position the watercraft
Any tight turns or special maneuvers mum performance.
be kept under water for a prolonged When first using the watercraft, the
time, water will seep into the bilge. operator should become familiar with
the use of the variable trim system
Combustion engines need air to oper- (VTS) at varying speeds and water con-
ate; consequently this watercraft can- ditions. A mid-range trim is generally
not be totally watertight. used when cruising. Experience alone
will dictate the best trim for the condi-
NOTICE If the air inlet openings
tions. During the watercraft break-in
are kept under water, such as turning period, when lower speeds are recom-
constantly in tight circles, plunging mended, it is an excellent opportunity
the bow through waves, or capsiz- to become familiar with trim adjust-
ing the watercraft, water may seep ment and its effects.
into the bilge, which may cause se-
vere damage to internal parts of the When the nozzle is positioned in an
engine. Refer to the WARRANTY upward angle, the water jet directs the
section contained in this guide. bow of the watercraft upward. This po-
sition is used to optimize high speed.
O.T.A.S.TM System When the nozzle is directed down-
(Off-Throttle Assisted Steering) ward, the bow is forced downward
The O.T.A.S. (Off-Throttle Assisted and increases the watercraft turning
Steering) system provides additional capabilities. As with any watercraft,
maneuverability in off-throttle situa- speed and operator body position and
tions. movement (body English), will deter-
mine the degree and sharpness of the
If the driver releases the throttle to idle watercraft turn. Porpoising can be re-
when initiating a full turn, the O.T.A.S. duced or eliminated if the nozzle is
system will be electronically activated, downward and speed is adjusted pro-
and will slightly increase engine speed portionately.
to allow completion of the turn.
NOTE: VTS position is indicated on a
When the handlebar is brought back bar gauge in the information center.
towards its center position, the throt-
tle reverts to idle.
first ride.
_______________ 69
2. Press the VTS DOWN button once

mBAR PSI
BOOST to trim the bow of the watercraft
down to the next trim position.
The VTS system allows for manually

adjusting the trim position of the noz-
zle, or selecting two preset trim posi- smo2012-003-008_a
tions and recording or changing preset
trim positions on certain models. 1. Bow up
2. Bow down
NOTE: If the VTS UP/Down button
AVAILABLE VTS TRIMMING RXP-X is pressed and held, the pump nozzle
METHODS 260 will keep moving until the button is
released at the desired trim attitude,
VTS trim Button X or the maximum trim position (up or
VTS "Double Click" trimming X down) is reached.
VTS "Presets" X
mBAR PSI
BOOST

N.A.
multifunction gauge
N.A. = Not available
Trimming the VTS Using the VTS VTS POSITION INDICATION

Button
Five trim positions are available. Using Preset Trim Positions
With the watercraft operating in for- Two preset trim positions can be se-
ward position, proceed as follows: lected.
1. Press the VTS UP button once to To select the highest trim position
trim the bow of the watercraft up to recorded, double-click on the VTS UP
the next trim position. button (bow up).
NOTE: Pressing the VTS trim button To select the lowest trim position
without the engine in forward position recorded, double-click on the VTS
will only change the indication. The DOWN button (bow down).
trim position when forward position is NOTE: If only one preset trim position
engaged. is recorded, double-click either UP or
70 ______________
smo2012-003-008_a
DOUBLE-CLICK UP OR DOWN VTS BUTTON

TO USE PRESET POSITIONS
smo2012-003-007_a
1. Highest preset position on UP
2. Lowest preset position on DOWN 1. MODE button
2. SET button
Recording Preset Trim Positions 3. UP/DOWN button
Two different VTS trim positions may
be recorded for quickly selecting the mBAR PSI
BOOST
preferred watercraft trim attitude.
Both VTS PRESET trim positions are
factory set to 3 but may be changed
as per operator preference. When
the VTS PRESET trim positions are
changed by an operator, the new set-
tings will remain recorded in memory
even after complete watercraft power MESSAGE DISPLAYED
down.
VTS MODE
1. Turn ON the electrical power by 4. On the RH handlebar, press the SET
pressing the START/STOP button button to display PRESET 1.
once.
5. Press the VTS UP/DOWN button to
2. Install the tether cord on the engine change the PRESET 1 VTS position.
cut-off switch. Gauge will display setting 1 through
3. On the RH handlebar, press the 9 in the digital screen above PRE-
MODE button repeatedly until VTS SET 1.
MODE is displayed.
_______________ 71
2 2
mBAR PSI
mBAR PSI
BOOST BOOST
1 1
FUNCTION SELECTED - PRESET 1 FUNCTION SELECTED - VTS
1. PRESET 1 message 1. VTS message

2. VTS setting number 2. VTS setting number
3. VTS position indicator at setting 1
(bow down) 3. Confirm VTS operation by looking
6. Press the SET button to save PRE- ment in the digital display.
SET 1 and display PRESET 2. 4. Press the SET button to save the de-
7. Press the VTS UP/DOWN button to sired setting and return to the main
change the PRESET 2 VTS position. display.
Gauge will display setting 1 through NOTE: The available VTS settings are
9 in the digital screen above PRE- between 1 and 5.
SET 2.
settings and return to the main dis- ing in forward position. If the engine
play. is not running in forward position, only
The VTS system will compare the pre- the VTS indication will change when
set trim settings recorded, the highest the VTS control switches are pressed;
position will be assigned to the UP but- the nozzle will not change position.
ton (bow up), the lowest to the DOWN
button (bow down). General Operation
If both trim positions are identical, both Recommendations
tings. Rough Water or Poor Visibility
Operation
Trimming the VTS Using the Avoid operation in these conditions. If
Mode/Set Buttons you must do so, proceed with caution
With the engine running in forward po- using minimum speed.
sition, proceed as follows:
Crossing Waves
1. Press the MODE button to display
the VTS function in the multifunc- The operator must grip the handlebar
tion display. firmly and keep both feet on the foot-
boards.
2. On the RH handlebar, press the
UP/DOWN button to change the The passenger must grip the hand-
VTS setting. holds with both hands and keep both
feet on the footboards.
Reduce speed.
72 ______________
Always be prepared to steer and main- Models Without iBR

tain your balance as necessary.
When going over waves, raise your WARNING
body slightly off the seat to absorb the The engine must stop running for
shocks with your legs. the watercraft to come to a full
When crossing wakes, always keep a stop.
safe distance from watercraft ahead.
Models with iBR
WARNING
When crossing wakes, slow down. WARNING
Operator and passenger(s) should Always practice braking in open
brace themselves and adopt a waters ensuring there are no wa-
semi-standing position to help tercraft or boats in your immediate
absorb the bumps. Do not jump vicinity, especially astern. Other
waves or wakes. users of the waterways may not be
able to maneuver or stop in time
Stopping/Docking to avoid you should you unexpect-
edly come to a full stop in front of
When the throttle is released, the wa- them.
tercraft is slowed by water drag against
the hull. The stopping distance will
vary depending on the watercraft size, The iBR system can also be used for
weight, speed, water surface condi- slowing down or for stopping the
tion, presence and direction of wind watercraft more quickly, and for in-
and current. creasing maneuverability especially
when docking. Stopping using the
iBR system in a straight line and in a
turn should be practiced extensively
to become familiar with the handling
characteristics of the watercraft under
partial or full braking conditions.
applied, a plume of water will shoot
up in the air behind the watercraft and
may cause the operator of a following
watercraft to momentarily loose sight
of your PWC.
WARNING
F18A03Y It is important to inform the oper-
ator of a watercraft who intends to
The operator should practice in open follow in a convoy formation of the
waters at various speeds to become braking and maneuvering capabil-
familiar with the stopping distances ity of your PWC, what the plume of
under different conditions. water indicates, and that a greater
tween both of you.
_______________ 73

area.
Maneuver using a combination of the
quired.
Remember that when operating in re- F18A03Y

WARNING
Beaching
Drive slowly towards the beach and
shut off the engine before the water is
less than 90 cm (3 ft) deep under the
lowest rear portion of the hull. Then
pull the watercraft to the beach.
NOTICE Riding the watercraft in
shallow water may result in damage
nents. Always shut off the engine
before the water is less than 90 cm
(3 ft) deep, and never use reverse or
braking.
74 ______________
OPERATING MODES
RXP-X
260
Sport mode X
ECO mode X
Learning key mode X
smo2012-003-008_e
WARNING 1. Sport mode button

Whenever changing operating NOTE: Indicator light will light up and
mode, make sure to maintain situ- the following important message will
ational awareness while riding. scroll across the multifunction display:
Sport Mode
When selected, SPORT MODE pro- mBAR PSI
BOOST
vides for instant throttle response and

more rapid accelerations than NOR-
MAL OPERATING MODE.
Once activated, SPORT MODE will re-
whereby it defaults back to NORMAL
OPERATING MODE. MESSAGE DISPLAYED
INCREASED ACCELERATION -
To quickly activate sport mode with en- INSTRUCT PASSENGERS TO HOLD -
gine running, carry out the following: PRESS_SPORT_BUTTON
WARNING WARNING
Whenever changing operating Ensure passengers are advised
mode, make sure to maintain situ- that sport mode provides for in-
ational awareness while riding. creased accelerations and that
they are to hold on tightly.
1. Depress and hold the Sport mode
button for at least 3 seconds. 2. Press the Sport mode button again
to activate sport mode.
A scrolling SPORT MODE ACTIVATED
that sport mode has been activated.
_______________ 75
OPERATING MODES
mBAR PSI mBAR PSI

BOOST BOOST

SPORT MODE ACTIVATED SPORT MODE DEACTIVATED
NOTE: After a few seconds, the gauge NOTE: After a few seconds, the gauge
will revert to its normal display. will revert to its normal display.
3. Ensure the SPORT mode indicator is 2. Ensure the SPORT mode indicator is
turned on. not on.
ECO Mode
(Fuel Economy Mode)
Activating ECO Mode
To activate ECO mode, carry out the
following:
WARNING
Whenever changing operating
mode, make sure to maintain situ-
NOTE: The SPORT mode indicator will ational awareness while riding.
come on and stay on as long as sport
mode is active.
1. Depress the ECO mode button for
Deactivating Sport Mode at least 1 second.
To deactivate sport mode while riding
at speed, carry out the following:
WARNING
When deactivating sport mode,
be sure to maintain situational
awareness of other watercrafts,
obstacles, or persons in the water.
1. Depress and hold the Sport mode smo2012-003-008_d

button for at least 3 seconds. 1. ECO mode button
scroll in the multifunction display: 2. The ECO mode activation can be
SPORT MODE DEACTIVATED. confirmed by the ECO indicator.
76 ______________
OPERATING MODES

mBAR PSI
BOOST until KEY MODE is visible in the digi-
tal screen of the information center.
ECO MODE INDICATORS

(Fuel Economy Mode)
Deactivating ECO Mode

To deactivate ECO mode , carry out the
following:
smo2012-003-007_a
WARNING TYPICAL - GAUGE CONTROL BUTTONS

1. MODE button
Whenever changing operating 2. SET button
mode, make sure to maintain situ- 3. UP/DOWN button
ational awareness while riding.
mBAR PSI
BOOST
1. Depress ECO button for at least 1
second.
Learning Key Modes

The learning l key provides a mode of
operation whereby engine power and
speed is limited.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
There are 5 speed settings available for
the learning key mode. By default, the KEY MODE
key mode is preset to no 3.
NOTE: Changing key settings is only 4. Press the SET button once to enable
available when the engine is not run- learning key mode setting function.
ning. The display will change to L-Key.
Changing Learning Key Speed

Settings
To change learning key setting, carry
out the following:
wake up the electrical system and
install the NORMAL key on the en-
complete its self-test and display
the key recognition message.
_______________ 77
OPERATING MODES
2
mBAR PSI
BOOST

KEY
1. L-KEY message
5. Press the UP/DOWN button to tog-

gle the key setting between 1 and
5. See table for speed limitations
according to setting.
speed setting.
KEY APPROX.
D.E.S.S.
SPEED MAX.
KEY TYPE
SETTING SPEED
80 km/h
5
(50 MPH)
74 km/h
4
(46 MPH)
Learning 68 km/h
3
key (42 MPH)
60 km/h
2
(37 MPH)
51 km/h
1
(32 MPH)
NOTE: Key speed setting may vary de-

pending on riding conditions.
78 ______________
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
Jet Pump Water Intake and If the aforementioned method does
Impeller Cleaning not work, the following can be per-
formed:
WARNING – With engine running and before ap-
plying throttle, pull the iBR lever in
Keep away from intake grate while to select reverse operation and vary
engine is running. Items such as throttle quickly several times.
long hair, loose clothing or per- – Repeat procedure if necessary.
sonal flotation device straps can
become entangled in moving If system is still blocked, move the wa-
parts. tercraft out of the water for cleaning.
Refer to ON-BEACH WATER CLEAN-
Weeds, shells or debris can get caught
ING.
on the intake grate, drive shaft and/or On-Beach Water Cleaning
impeller. A clogged water intake may
cause troubles such as:
– Cavitation: Engine speed is high WARNING
but watercraft moves slowly due to The tether cord MUST BE RE-
reduced jet thrust, jet pump compo- MOVED from the engine cut-off
nents may be damaged. switch to prevent accidental en-
– Overheating: Since the jet pump gine starting before cleaning the
operation controls the flow of wa- propulsion system components.
ter to cool the exhaust system, a
clogged intake will cause the engine Place a cardboard or a carpet beside
to overheat and damage engine in- the watercraft to prevent scratching
ternal components. when turning the watercraft for clean-
A weed clogged area can be cleaned as ing.
follows: Rotate the watercraft to any side for
cleaning.
WARNING
move any foreign object caught in
In-Water Cleaning
START/STOP button for short periods
without starting the engine. Most of
the time, this will remove the block-
smo2009-002-300_a
age. Start engine and make sure wa-
tercraft operates properly. TYPICAL
Clean the water intake area. If the sys-

rized Sea-Doo dealer for servicing.
_______________ 79
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
NOTICE Inspect water intake grate Activating iBR Override Function

for damage. Refer to an authorized To activate the iBR override function,
Sea-Doo dealer for repair as neces- carry out the following step.
sary.
1. Power up the electrical system by
For ease of access to the propulsion pressing the START/STOP button.
system, move the iBR to the for- 2. Install the tether cord on the engine
ward position, refer to iBR OVERRIDE cut-off switch.
FUNCTION for detailed instructions.
NOTE: The tether cord must be in-
iBR Override Function stalled to ensure the information cen-
When the iBR override function is acti- its self test function. Electrical power
vated, it allows the user to electrically will stay on for approximately 3 min-
move the iBR gate and nozzle through utes.
its full range of motion using the VTS
control button. 3. Press the Mode button on the RH
handlebar repeatedly until SET-
NOTE: The iBR override function is TINGS is visible in the digital display
only available when the engine is not of the information center.
running.
WARNING mBAR PSI

BOOST

no-one is near the rear of the wa-
tercraft. Movement of the gate
NOTICE An object or tool caught MESSAGE DISPLAYED

in the iBR system when using the SETTINGS
damage to the iBR components. Re- 4. Press the UP/DOWN button to dis-
move all rigid foreign objects that play IBR OVR.
may obstruct the iBR gate travel be-
fore moving it.
mBAR PSI
BOOST
WARNING
ceeding:
– Remove tether cord from the MODE FUNCTION
– Wait at least 5 minutes. IBR-OVR MODE message
– Do not press on START/STOP
button. Should the START/ 5. Press the SET button to enter IBR
STOP button is pressed, wait OVR function and display OVR OFF.
another 5 minutes.
80 ______________
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
mBAR PSI
WARNING
BOOST
ceeding:
MESSAGE DISPLAYED – Wait at least 5 minutes.
OVR OFF button. Should the START/
STOP button be pressed, wait
6. Press the UP/DOWN button (RH another 5 minutes.
handlebar) to display OVR ON.
Deactivating iBR Override Function
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
OVERRIDE FUNCTION and press
visible.
off.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED – Start the engine.
OVR ON NOTE: When the engine is started,
the iBR OVR function is deactivated
7. Press the SET button to select the and the iBR gate will move to the neu-
OVR ON function. The gauge will tral position.
8. Press the VTS UP/DOWN button to WARNING
move the iBR gate to the desired po- When moving the iBR gate using
sition. the iBR override function, ensure
9. Remove the tether cord from the no-one stands near the rear of the
engine cut-off switch. watercraft. Movement of the gate
Capsized Watercraft
mation on vehicle safety labels, refer
to WATERCRAFT SAFETY LABELS
subsection.
The watercraft is designed so that it
should not turn over easily. Two spon-
sons mounted on the side of the hull
assist watercraft stability. If it turns
over, it will remain capsized.
_______________ 81
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
WARNING NOTICE If the engine does not

crank, do not attempt to start it any-
When watercraft is capsized, do more. Otherwise, the engine could
not attempt to restart the engine. be damaged. See an authorized
Operator and passengers should Sea-Doo dealer as soon as possi-
always wear approved personal ble.
flotation devices.
As soon as possible, check for pres-
To turn the watercraft upright, ensure ence of water in the bilge. Drain as
the engine is off and the tether cord necessary when back to the shore.
is NOT on the engine cut-off switch.
Then grab the inlet grate, step on a Submerged Watercraft
side bumper rail, and use your weight
to rotate the watercraft towards you.
NOTE: A label on the stern near the as possible.
flushing connector provides instruc-
Drain bilge.
tions on how to turn the watercraft
right side up. The label is upside down If it was submerged in salt water, spray
so that it can be read when the water- bilge and all components with fresh
craft is overturned. water using a garden hose to stop the
engine damage.
have it serviced.
smo2012-003-021_a
gine will be.
The 4-TEC™ engine features a tip-over
protection system (T.O.P.S.TM). When
the watercraft tips over, the engine is Water-Flooded Engine
automatically stopped. NOTICE Never try to crank or start
When the watercraft is returned to its the engine. Water trapped in intake
normal operating position, the engine manifold would flow towards the
can be started normally. engine and possibly cause severe
engine damage.
NOTICE If the watercraft has been
capsized for more than 5 minutes, Bring the watercraft to an authorized
do not attempt to crank the engine Sea-Doo dealer as soon as possible to
to avoid water ingestion that would have it serviced.
damage the engine. See an autho-
rized Sea-Doo dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
82 ______________
SPECIAL PROCEDURES


Water
water.
let.
NOTICE Failure to follow these
instructions may result in damage
to the engine. If you must tow a
stranded watercraft in water, be sure
not to exceed the maximum towing
If you have to tow the watercraft faster
than the maximum recommended
smo2013-001-001_a
1. Cross over hose
_______________ 83
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
This page is
intentionally blank
84 ______________
MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
_______________ 85
WARNING
86 ______________

C: CLEAN
I: INSPECT
R: REPLACE
RS: REPAIR SHOP
PART/TASK NOTE
ENGINE
in salt water use.
Corrosion protection (2) Replace at 200 hours,
(Spray an anti-corrosion lubricant to L (1) O irrespective of the number of
metallic components in engine compartment) years.
Supercharger clutch (260 engines) R (2) RS
EXHAUST SYSTEM
I, C (3) Daily flushing in salt water or
dirty water use.
COOLING SYSTEM
Hose and fasteners I RS (4) Replace at 300 hours
FUEL SYSTEM
I I (6) RS
straps, fuel lines and connections (6) At storage period or after 100
hours of use whichever comes
first.
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
_______________ 87

C: CLEAN
I: INSPECT
R: REPLACE
RS: REPAIR SHOP
PART/TASK NOTE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Electrical connections and fastening (ignition
system, starting system, fuel injectors, fuse I I RS (7) Inspect once a month. Add
boxes etc.) electrolyte as required.
STEERING SYSTEM
O.T.A.S. (8) I I RS
PROPULSION SYSTEM
I I RS
Jet pump housing inspection I RS (9) Inspect each month (more
Impeller shaft seal, sleeve, O-ring and often in salt water use) and
I (6) RS change when necessary.
impeller cover
I RS
clearance
88 ______________

C: CLEAN
I: INSPECT
R: REPLACE
RS: REPAIR SHOP
PART/TASK NOTE
stoppers
iBR U arm VTS trim ring and iBR gate I RS whichever comes first.
I (6) (11) See NOTE 2 after
iBR U arm retaining screws I (11) (11) RS maintenance schedule.
HULL AND BODY
Hull I O
—
subsections.
_______________ 89
This section includes instructions for NOTICE NEVER use fully synthetic
basic maintenance procedures. oil. This would impair the proper op-
WARNING Do not add any additives to the rec-
ommended oil. Mineral oils for API
Turn off the engine and follow service classification SM contain ad-
these maintenance procedures ditives (friction modifiers) that may
when performing maintenance. cause inappropriate slippage of the
If you do not follow proper main- supercharger and eventually lead to
tenance procedures you can be premature wear.
injured by hot parts, moving parts,
electricity, chemicals or other haz- Engine Oil Level
ards.
NOTICE Check level frequently
WARNING and refill if necessary. Do not over-
fill. Operating the engine with an
Should removal of a locking device improper level may severely dam-
(e.g. lock tabs, self-locking fasten- age engine.
ers, etc.) be required, always re-
place with a new one.
NOTICE Never leave any object, may be very hot. Direct contact may
rag, tool, etc., in the engine com- result in skin burn.
partment or in the bilge. Oil level can be checked with water-
craft either in or out of water.
Engine Oil
If Watercraft is Out of the Water
Recommended Engine Oil NOTICE Watercraft must be level.
OIL (SUMMER) (P/N 293 600 121). CAUTION When operating the
NOTICE The supercharged engine engine out of water, the heat ex-
has been developed and validated changer in the ride plate may be-
using the BRP XPS Synthetic blend come very hot. Avoid any contact
oil. BRP recommends the use of its with the ride plate as burns may oc-
XPS Synthetic blend oil at all times. cur.
If the recommended XPS engine oil 1. Raise trailer tow pole, then block in
is not available, use a 10W40 min- position when bumper rail is level.
eral engine oil compatible with wet 2. Open the seat.
clutches. Damages caused by oil
which is not suitable for the engine 3. Install a garden hose on the exhaust
will not be covered by the BRP lim- system flushing connector. Refer
ited warranty. to EXHAUST SYSTEM in this sec-
tion and follow the procedure.
90 ______________
NOTICE – Place a funnel in the oil filler neck

– Never run engine without supply- opening.
ing water to the exhaust system. – Add the recommended oil to the
Failure to cool exhaust system proper level.
may severely damage it. NOTE: Do not overfill.
– Never run engine longer than
2 minutes. Drive line seal has no
cooling when watercraft is out of
water.
4. With the engine already at normal
operating condition, let engine idle
for 30 seconds then stop engine.
stick out and wipe clean. smo2012-003-003_b
1. Oil filler cap location
NOTE: Every time oil is added in the

engine, the complete procedure ex-
plained in this section must be carried
out again. Otherwise, you will obtain a
false oil level reading.
9. Properly reinstall oil cap and dip-
stick.
smo2012-003-003_d Engine Oil Change and Oil Filter
1. Oil dipstick location Replacement
6. Reinstall dipstick, push in com- The oil change and filter replacement
pletely. may be performed by an authorized
7. Remove dipstick again and read of your own choosing.
oil level. It should be between the
FULL and ADD marks. Engine Coolant
Recommended Engine Coolant
Always use LONG LIFE ANTIFREEZE
(P/N 219 702 685) or equivalent. If
the recommended coolant is not avail-
lmr2007-053-100_a
able, use a low silicate, extended
1. Full
2. Add (50%-50%) specifically formulated
3. Operating range for internal combustion aluminum en-
gines.
8. Add oil to ensure the level is be- To prevent antifreeze deterioration, al-
tween marks as required. ways use the same brand and grade.
To add oil: Never mix different brands or grades
– Unscrew oil cap. unless cooling system is completely
flushed and refilled.
_______________ 91
Engine Coolant Level NOTE: The watercraft is level when

it is in water. When on a trailer, raise
WARNING trailer tow pole and block in this posi-
tion when bumper rail is level.
Check coolant level with engine
cold. Never add coolant in cooling Add coolant/demineralized water to
system when engine is hot. adjust coolant level between marks
as required. Use a funnel to avoid
spillage. Do not overfill.
CAUTION Certain compo- Properly reinstall and tighten filler cap,
nents in the engine compartment then reinstall ventilation box and close
may be very hot. Direct contact may seat.
result in skin burn.
NOTE: A cooling system that fre-
Open seat. quently requires coolant is an indica-
Locate the expansion tank cap. tion of leaks or engine problems. See

dealer.
Ignition Coils
smo2012-003-003_c
1. Expansion tank cap
With watercraft on a level surface, tion coil before disconnecting the
coolant level should be between MIN. input connector or the wires may be
and MAX. marks on coolant reservoir damaged. Do not pry up ignition coil
when engine is cold. with a screwdriver to avoid damage.
Ignition Coil Lubrication

1 1. Pull rubber seal down.
F18E0NY
TYPICAL - COOLANT EXPANSION TANK

92 ______________
5. Apply DOW CORNING 111 (P/N 413

seal contact area.
sbs2009-011-002_a

smr05-015-002_d
2. Apply DOW CORNING 111 (P/N 413 1. Apply product here

707 000) or equivalent to rubber seal
seat as shown. Ignition Coil Installation
NOTE: Prior to inserting the ignition
coil on its spark plug, apply sealant as
CATION.
sbs2009-011-001_a
3. Pull rubber seal back on its seat

making sure the tabs on the ignition
match together.
4. Leave a ring of grease on top of the
seal as shown to act as a water bar-
rier. Wipe off the excess.
smr2009-032-004_a
TYPICAL
Spark Plugs
Spark Plug Removal
1. Open seat.
2. Disconnect the ignition coil input
connector.
sbs2009-011-003_a
1. Correctly shaped excess of product TION COILS.
_______________ 93
WARNING Spark Plug Installation

Never remove an ignition coil from Prior to installation, ensure the contact
a spark plug without disconnect- surfaces of the cylinder head and spark
ing it from the wiring harness. plug are free of grime.
Flammable vapors may be present 1. Using a wire feeler gauge, set elec-
in the bilge. Should the tether cord trode gap as specified in the follow-
be installed on the engine cut-off ing chart.
switch, a spark could be generated
at the coil spark plug end which SPARK GAP
TORQUE
could cause an explosion. PLUG mm (in)
Hand tighten
4. Using a spark plug socket, release NGK
+ 1/4 turn 0.75
the torque applied to the spark plug. DCPR8E or
with a (.030)
equivalent
socket
2. Apply anti-seize lubricant over the

spark plug threads to prevent possi-
ble seizure.
1 2 3. Hand screw spark plug into cylinder
head. Then, tighten the spark plug
clockwise an additional 1/4 turn with
an approved spark plug socket.
Install ignition coil. Refer to IGNITION
A00E0BA COILS.
1. Approved socket Complete the installation in the re-
2. Improper socket verse order of the removal.
5. Clean the spark plug and cylinder
head with pressurized air. Exhaust System
6. Unscrew spark plug then use the Exhaust System Flushing
spark plug hole. Flushing the exhaust system with
help to remove sand, salt, shells or
other particles in water jackets and/or
hoses.
NOTICE If watercraft is used in
salt water, exhaust system must be
flushed daily to avoid serious dam-
age to mechanical components.
Flushing should be performed when
the watercraft is not expected to be
smr2009-032-003_a
1. Ignition coil watercraft is stored for any extended
2. Spark plug
time.
94 ______________
WARNING
Perform this operation in a well
ventilated area.
Proceed as follows:
Clean propulsion system by spraying
water in its inlet and outlet and then
apply a coating of XPS Lube or equiva- smo2009-002-138
lent. TYPICAL - QUICK CONNECT HOSE ADAPTER

engine while the watercraft is out
Avoid any contact with ride plate as
burns may occur.
Connect a garden hose to the connec-
tor located at the rear of watercraft (on
the port side of the stern). Do not open
water tap at this time. smo2009-002-139_a
TYPICAL
1. Hose adapter (optional, not mandatory)
mandatory)
3. Garden hose
To flush, start engine then immediately

open the water tap.

result in skin burn. Do not touch any
smo2012-003-021_b electrical parts or propulsion system
1. Flushing connector location component when the engine is run-
ning.
NOTE: An optional quick connect hose
adapter and hose fitting can be used NOTICE Never flush a hot en-
(P/N 295 500 473). No hose pincher is gine. Always start the engine before
required to flush engine. opening the water tap. Open wa-
speed.
NOTICE Never run engine without
supplying water to the exhaust sys-
tem when watercraft is out of water.
_______________ 95

ing.
water.
Close the water tap, run the engine at
5000 RPM for 5 seconds and stop the
engine.
NOTICE Always close the water
tap before stopping the engine.
NOTICE Remove quick connect F18J04Y 1 2
adapter after flushing operation (if
used). TYPICAL — INSPECT THESE AREAS
1. Water intake
2. Ride plate
Grate Sacrificial Anode
Ride Plate and Water Intake Grate Sacrificial Anode Inspection
Inspection
Check for wear. If worn more than half,
Inspect ride plate and jet pump wa- replace anode.
ter intake grate for damage. See your
Sea-Doo dealer to have any damaged
part repaired or replaced.
WARNING
The tether cord must always be
removed from the engine cut-off
switch prior to inspecting the in-
take grate.
smr2011-035-009_a
Sacrificial Anode Removal

screw and remove anode.
96 ______________
WARNING
Do not use a higher rated fuse
as this can cause severe dam-
age. If a fuse has burnt out, the
source of the malfunction should
be determined and corrected be-
fore restarting. See an authorized
Sea-Doo dealer for servicing.
smr2006-027-009
Fuse Location
Sacrificial Anode Installation To access the fuse box, open the front
Installation is the reverse of the re- storage cover.
moval procedure. Remove the two plastic rivets and the
Torque anode retaining screw as spec- rubber tie securing the access panel at
ified in exploded view. the back of the storage compartment.
Fuses
Fuse Removal and Installation
removal.
Fuse Inspection
smo2012-003-010_b
one of the same rating. FRONT STORAGE COMPARTMENT COVER
OPENED
1. Access panel
2
3
A15E0KZ smo2012-003-022_a
TYPICAL - ACCESS PANEL REMOVED

TYPICAL 1. Fuse box
1. Fuse 2. Battery
2. Check if melted
3. Ampere rating To remove the fuse box cover, squeeze
and hold locking tabs on both sides of
the fuse box and pull the cover off the
fuse box.
_______________ 97

illustrated on the fuse box cover.
Fuse Description
1 — Not used
Diagnostic
2 15 A
connector
4 3A GPS
5 30 A iBR
6 30 A Charge
7 — Not used
8 30 A Battery
9 — Not used
10 — Not used
Gauge, OTAS and
11 3A
CAPS
12 10 A
coil and injection)
13 10 A
coil and injection)
14 10 A
coil and injection)
15 5A Starter solenoid
16 5A iBR control
17 10 A Fuel pump
18 15 A ECM
98 ______________
WATERCRAFT CARE
Remove the watercraft from the water NOTICE Never clean fiberglass
every day. and plastic parts with strong deter-
Post-Operation Care ner, acetone, or other strong chemi-
cal or petroleum type cleaner.
Stains may be removed from the
The exhaust system should be flushed seat and fiberglass using Knight's
daily when watercraft is used in salt or Spray-Nine† or the equivalent.
foul water.
To clean the carpets, use 3M™ Citrus
Refer to MAINTENANCE PROCE- Base Cleaner (24 oz spray can) or an
DURES. equivalent.
Additional Care for Foul Water or
Salt Water Operation WARNING
Never apply plastic or vinyl pro-
When the watercraft is operated in foul tector on the carpets or seat as the
water and particularly in salt water, ad- surface will become slippery and
ditional care should be taken to protect the occupants may slip off the wa-
the watercraft and its components. tercraft.
Rinse watercraft bilge area with fresh
water.
Never use a high pressure washer to
clean the bilge. USE LOW PRESSURE
ONLY (such as a garden hose).
electrical or mechanical systems.
CAUTION Allow engine to

cool before performing any main-
tenance.
NOTICE Failure to perform proper
haust system flushing and anticor-
rosion treatment, when watercraft is
used in salt water, will result in dam-
nents.
Watercraft Cleaning
Body and Hull
marine organisms from engine and/or
hull. Apply non-abrasive wax such as
silicone wax.
_______________ 99
Storage Fuel System
WARNING
repair shop or person of your stabilizer manufacturers' instructions
dealer, repair shop or person of your be added prior to engine lubrica-
tools.
tion.
injection system.
Propulsion System
Engine and Exhaust Systems
Jet Pump Cleaning
lent.
the engine cut-off switch to pre- Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop or person
vent unexpected engine starting of your own choosing
before cleaning the propulsion
system components. Engine must Intercooler Draining
not be running for this operation. It is important to expel any trapped wa-
ter that may have accumulated from
Jet Pump Inspection condensation in the intercooler.
Remove impeller cover and check if jet Proceed as follows:
pump is water contaminated; if so, see 1. Open the boarding platform and re-
your authorized Sea-Doo dealer. move the RH storage bin.
100 ______________
2. Ensure there is an alignment line Exhaust System Draining

drawn on the intercooler outlet In areas where temperature may
hose. This will ensure the hose is freeze, water trapped in the exhaust
not twisted or kinked on reinstalla- system and intercooler must be re-
tion. moved.
3. Loosen the clamp retaining the in- Using the flushing connector located
tercooler outlet hose. on the port (LH) side of the stern, inject
4. Remove the intercooler outlet hose pressurized air at 379 kPa (55 PSI) into
from the intercooler. system until there is no more water
NOTE: This hose feeds the inlet of the flowing from jet pump.
throttle body.
smo2012-003-021_b
TYPICAL
The following hose can be fabricated to

ease draining procedure.
smo2013-003-001_a
TYPICAL
2. Hose clamp smo2008-001-053_a
TYPICAL
1. Flushing connector adapter
5. Start and rev the engine up to 2. Hose 12.7 mm (1/2 in)
4000 RPM several times. 3. Air hose male adapter
NOTE: Ensure air intake system does NOTICE Failure to drain the ex-
not aspirate foreign objects which may haust system may cause severe
cause severe engine or damage. damage.
6. Stop engine.
Remove special tools.
7. Reinstall the intercooler air outlet
hose, ensure it is properly aligned Engine Internal Lubrication
as prior to removal to ensure proper
engine operation. 1. Open the seat.
2. Remove ignition coils, refer to
______________ 101
3. Remove spark plugs, refer to MAIN- Engine Compartment

TENANCE PROCEDURES.
4. Spray XPS LUBE (P/N 293 600 016)
or equivalent in spark plug holes. Clean the bilge using hot water and a
mild detergent or with bilge cleaner.
5. To prevent fuel from being injected
and to disable the ignition during en- Rinse thoroughly.
gine cranking, fully depress throttle Lift front end of watercraft to com-
lever and HOLD against handlebar. pletely drain bilge through the bilge
6. Press the START/STOP button to drain plugs.
crank the engine a few turns. This
will distribute the oil on the cylinder Anticorrosion Treatment
walls. Wipe off any residual water in the en-
7. Apply anti-seize lubricant on spark gine compartment.
plug threads, then reinstall them Spray XPS LUBE (P/N 293 600 016)
in the engine. Refer to MAINTE- or equivalent over all metallic compo-
NANCE PROCEDURES. nents in engine compartment.
8. Install the ignition coils, refer to NOTE: The seat should be left partially
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES. open during storage. This will prevent
engine compartment condensation
Engine Coolant Test and possible corrosion.
If antifreeze is not replaced, test its
density. Body and Hull
The antifreeze replacement and a den- Body and Hull Cleaning
thorized Sea-Doo dealer. Wash the body with a soap and wa-
ter solution (use only mild detergent).
NOTE: Antifreeze should be replaced Rinse thoroughly with fresh water. Re-
every 300 hours or every 5 years to move marine organisms from the hull.
prevent antifreeze deterioration.
NOTICE Never clean fiberglass
NOTICE Improper antifreeze den- and plastic parts with strong deter-
sity may result in freezing of the liq- gent, de-greasing agent, paint thin-
uid in the cooling system if the wa- ner, acetone, or other strong chemi-
tercraft is stored in an area where cal or petroleum cleaners.
the freezing point is attained. This
could seriously damage the engine. Body and Hull Repair
If any repairs are needed to body com-
Electrical System ponents or to the hull, contact your au-
Battery Removal and Charging thorized Sea-Doo dealer.
Contact your authorized Sea-Doo Body and Hull Protection
dealer. Apply a good quality marine wax to the
body.
WARNING
If the watercraft is to be stored outside,
Never charge or boost the battery cover it with an opaque tarpaulin to pre-
while installed in the watercraft. vent sun rays and grime from affecting
ish, as well as preventing dust accumu-
lation.
102 ______________

MAINTENANCE CHART.
Preseason maintenance preparation
Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop or person
NOTE: Though not required, it is
recommended that an authorized
Sea-Doo dealer perform preseason
time that any safety-related factory
WARNING
Only perform procedures as de-
tailed in the PERIODIC MAIN-
TENANCE CHART. It is recom-
in this guide.
NOTICE When component con-

equivalents.
______________ 103
This page is
intentionally blank
104 ______________
TECHNICAL
INFORMATION
______________ 105
of theft.

located on the boarding platform at the
rear of watercraft.
F18D03Y
TYPICAL
smo2012-003-014_b
TYPICAL
YDV 12345 L 8 09
Model year
Year of production
Month of production
Serial number
Manufacturer
Number
engine.
106 ______________
RF D.E.S.S. KEY
12006A-M01456
with FCC part 15C.
ETSI EN 300 330-2
ETSI EN 60950-1
______________ 107
design.
ifications.
108 ______________
SPECIFICATIONS
WATERCRAFT RXP-X 260
ENGINE
Rotax®1503 4-TEC®Single
Type
Overhead Cam (SOHC)
Gear driven supercharger with
Induction slip clutch. External water/air
intercooler
Number of valves
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling
(CLCS)
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Injection Type
with actuator
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Spark plug
Gap 0.75 mm (.03 in)
PROPULSION
Sea-Doo® Direct Drive with iBR
Propulsion system
Type
Material Aluminum
Transmission Type Direct Drive
High performance electric VTS
Variable trim system (VTS) with programmable preset
positions
______________ 109
SPECIFICATIONS
WATERCRAFT RXP-X 260

DIMENSIONS
Length 331.6 cm (130.6 in)
Width 122.7 cm (48.3 in)
Height 114.7 cm (45.2 in)
Weight (dry) 378.7 kg (835 lb)
Load limit
182 kg (400 lb)
FLUIDS
Type Unleaded Fuel
91 Pump Posted AKI
REQUIREMENTS octane
95 RON
Type grade). Refer to MAINTENANCE
Engine oil section for more information
Capacity
w/filter
(1)
110 ______________
TROUBLESHOOTING
______________ 111

– Properly install tether cord cap on engine cut-off switch within 5 seconds of
pressing START/STOP button.
– After double “beep”, press START/STOP button to start engine.
WARNING
clothing.

8. Seized jet pump.
ENGINE TURNS SLOWLY

3. Worn starter.

112 ______________

– Replace.
3. Blown fuse.
ON).

– Replace.
ON).
ENGINE SMOKE
______________ 113

ENGINE OVERHEATS
– Remove adapter from flushing connector and retry watercraft. If problem
persists, seek service from an authorized Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop,
or person of your own choosing for maintenance, repair, or replacement.
Please refer to the US EPA EMISSIONS-RELATED WARRANTY contained

1. Learning key used.
2. Sport mode not activated.
– Refer to ACTIVATING SPORT MODE in OPERATING MODES.
6. Weak spark.
ON).
114 ______________

10.Water in fuel.
WATERCRAFT CANNOT REACH TOP SPEED

ON).
4. Faulty supercharger and/or intercooler.
WATERCRAFT STAYS IN NEUTRAL AFTER OPERATING THE IBR LEVER

–
– Remove tether cord and wait 5 minutes.
– Install tether cord and check iBR light to ensure fault is cleared.
______________ 115
iBR WILL NOT RETURN TO NEUTRAL POSITION (IBR FAULT INDICATOR OFF)

– Check for damage.

116 ______________
MONITORING SYSTEM
A system monitors the electronic com- If there is an active fault code, it may
ponents of the EMS (engine manage- be viewed by the operator on the
ment system) iBR, and other compo- multifunction display. The operator
nents of the electrical system. When a may then choose to call his autho-
fault occurs, it sends visual messages rized Sea-Doo dealer to pass on the
through the information center and/or fault code. The dealer will then advise
audible signals through a beeper to in- the operator on the steps to take to
form you of a particular condition. solve the problem, or to stop using the
A fault code may also be recorded. watercraft and to seek service from
an authorized Sea-Doo dealer, repair
When a minor or transient fault oc- shop, or person of your own choosing
curs, the fault message and beeper for maintenance, repair, or replace-
will cease automatically if the condi- ment. Please refer to the US EPA
tion that caused the fault does not ex- EMISSIONS-RELATED WARRANTY
ist anymore. contained herein for information about
Releasing the throttle and letting the warranty claims.
engine return to idle speed may allow
normal operation to return. If this does Displaying Fault Codes
not work, try removing the tether cord Press the MODE button repeatedly un-
from the engine cut-off switch, waiting til the FAULT CODE function is visible
5 minutes, then restarting. in the multifunction display.
The electronic system will react differ- Press the SET or the UP/DOWN but-
ently depending on the fault type. If a ton to enter the function and display
severe failure occured, the engine may the first fault code, then press the
not be allowed to be started. In other UP/DOWN button repeatedly to dis-
cases, the engine will operate in limp play each subsequent code.
home mode (reduced speed).
NOTE: When the last fault code has
When a fault occurs, seek service from been displayed and the button is
an authorized Sea-Doo dealer, repair pressed again, the system loops back
shop, or person of your own choosing to the first fault code displayed, and all
for maintenance, repair, or replace- fault codes can again be displayed. If
ment. Please refer to the US EPA there was one active fault code when
EMISSIONS-RELATED WARRANTY entering the FAULT CODE mode, and
contained herein for information about it becomes occurred (no longer active),
warranty claims. a NO ACTIVE FAULT CODE message
will scroll in the display.
Fault Codes To exit the FAULT CODE display func-
When a fault occurs, a numerical fault tion, the MODE or SET button must be
code may be recorded depending on pressed once. There is no time out on
the fault type and system. this function.
Fault codes can be viewed in the in-
formation center multifunction display
______________ 117
MONITORING SYSTEM
mBAR PSI mBAR PSI

BOOST BOOST
MESSAGE DISPLAYED APPLICABLE FAULT CODE IS

DISPLAYED HERE
FAULT CODE message is displayed
here
Fault Indicators and Message Display Information

The fault indicators and messages displayed in the information center will inform
you of a particular condition or if an anomaly occurs.
If a fault indicator or a fault message comes ON in the multifunction gauge,
seek service from an authorized Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop, or person of your
own choosing for maintenance, repair, or replacement. Please refer to the US
EPA EMISSIONS-RELATED WARRANTY contained herein for information about
warranty claims..
For information on usual function indicators, refer to MULTIFUNCTION GAUGE
section as applicable to model.
PILOT
LAMPS (ON)
LOW or HIGH
BATTERY VOLTAGE
HIGH
Engine or exhaust system overheating
TEMPERATURE
CHECK ENGINE or Check engine (minor fault req. maint.) or

LIMP HOME MODE LIMP HOME MODE (major eng. fault)
118 ______________
MONITORING SYSTEM
PILOT
LAMPS (ON)
Light is steady with a buzzer and a check
IBR MODULE
engine light: iBR system fault (refer to an
ERROR
authorized Sea-Doo dealer)
_ Light is flashing: iBR system fault (refer to an

Light is steady with no buzzer:
_ iBR system still functional but needs to
be inspected by an authorized Sea-Doo dealer
_ OTAS system fault

CHECK ENGINE
IBR MODULE ERROR iBR system malfunction
engine.
______________ 119
MONITORING SYSTEM

Reinstall tether cord correctly on engine cut-off switcht.
Wrong D.E.S.S. key.
watercraft.
Defective D.E.S.S. key.
1 long beep Use another programmed tether cord.
(when installing tether
cord on engine cut-off Defective engine cut-off switch.
switch) Refer to an authorized Sea-Doo dealer.
harness.
A 2 second beep shop, or person of your own choosing for maintenance,
every 15 minute interval repair, or replacement. Please refer to the US EPA
iBR system fault.
Low fuel level.
A 2 second beep Sea-Doo dealer.
every 5 minute interval
120 ______________
MONITORING SYSTEM

Low oil pressure.

soon as possible.
______________ 121
MONITORING SYSTEM
This page is
intentionally blank
122 ______________
WARRANTY
______________ 123
1. SCOPE
Doo watercraft.

dealer;
124 ______________
ator’s Guide;
God;

contained herein.
date.

has been fulfilled:
______________ 125

7. WHAT BRP WILL DO

owner.
126 ______________
8. TRANSFER
way:
manager or owner.
In CANADA In USA
Tel.: 819 566-3366 Tel.: 715 848-4957

______________ 127
fueling section.

first:
HOURS MONTHS
128 ______________
Components Covered
listed components:
– Fuel system
– Ignition system
exhaust emissions:
– Sensors
tive emissions:
– Fuel tank
– Fuel cap
– Fuel line
– Clamps*
– Control valves*
– Control cables*
– Purge valves
– Vapor hoses
– Carbon canister
______________ 129
130 ______________
For California, your 2015 Sea-Doo personal watercraft has a special environmental
label required by the California Air Resources Board. The label has 1, 2, 3 or 4 stars.
A hangtag, provided with your personal watercraft, describes the meaning of the
star rating system.

F18L3CQ

Better Fuel Economy



marine engines.

______________ 131

1 800 END-SMOG
www.arb.ca.gov

pleased to explain the emission control system warranty on your Model Year
2015 Sea-Doo personal watercraft. In California and New York, new personal
watercraft engines must be designed, built and equipped to meet the State’s
stringent anti-smog standards. BRP must warrant the emission control system on
your personal watercraft engine for the period of time listed below provided there
has been no abuse, neglect or improper maintenance of your personal watercraft
engine.

132 ______________
______________ 133
recommends that you retain all receipts covering maintenance your personal

134 ______________
against BRP.

stances:
______________ 135
pumps and the like;

for a period of:
136 ______________

been fulfilled:
umented;

UNDER THIS WARRANTY
______________ 137
7. WHAT BRP WILL DO
8. TRANSFER
listed below.
office:
BRP EUROPE N.V.
Skaldenstraat 125
9042 Gent
Belgium
Tel.: +32 9 218 26 00
138 ______________
Tel.: +1 819 566-3366
______________ 139
PERSONAL WATERCRAFT
below.
against BRP.

stances:
140 ______________
pumps and the like;

for a period of:
commercial use.
______________ 141
been fulfilled:
umented;

UNDER THIS WARRANTY
7. WHAT BRP WILL DO

142 ______________
8. TRANSFER
low.

BRP EUROPE N.V.
Skaldenstraat 125
9042 Gent
Belgium
Tel.: +32 9 218 26 00

BRP FINLAND OY
Service Department
Isoaavantie 7
FIN-96320 Rovaniemi
Finland
Tel.: +358 163 208 111
______________ 143
144 ______________
CUSTOMER
INFORMATION
______________ 145
PRIVACY INFORMATION
products.
By mail: BRP
726 St-Joseph
Valcourt, QC
Canada
J0E 2L0
146 ______________
If your address has changed or if you are the new owner of the watercraft, be sure
to notify BRP by either:
to the transfer.
Notifying BRP, even after the expiration of the limited warranty, is very important as
it enables BRP to reach the watercraft owner if necessary, like when safety recalls
are initiated. It is the owner’s responsibility to notify BRP.
STOLEN UNITS: In the event that your watercraft is stolen, you should notify your
area’s distributor warranty department of such. We will ask you to provide your
name, address, phone number, Hull Identification Number and date it was stolen.
NORTH AMERICA
Bombardier Recreational Products Inc.
Warranty Department
Canada
SCANDINAVIAN COUNTRIES
BRP Finland OY
Service Department
Isoaavantie 7
Fin-96320 Rovaniemi
Finland
OTHER COUNTRIES IN THE WORLD

BRP European Distribution
Warranty Department
1006 Lausanne
Switzerland
______________ 147
This page is
intentionally blank
148 ______________
______________ 149
This page is
intentionally blank
150 ______________
______________ 151
152 ______________
WARNING
WARNING

(BRP).
4-TECTM iTCTM T.O.P.S.TM
D.E.S.S.TM O.T.A.S.TM VTSTM
iBRTM Rotax® XPSTM
iControlTM Sea-Doo® RXP-XTM 260
Learning KeyTM T³HullTM RXP-XTM 260 RS
smo2015-003 en JT
2015
OPERATOR’S
GUIDE
RXP-X 260
RXP -X 260
TM TM
219 001 396 Read this guide thoroughly.

2015
OPERATOR’S GUIDE, RXP-X 260 / ENGLISH It contains important safety information.

GUIDE DU CONDUCTEUR, RXP-X 260 / ANGLAIS Minimum recommended operator’s age: 16 years old.
©2014 BOMBARDIER RECREATIONAL PRODUCTS INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN CANADA. 2 1 9 0 0 1 3 9 6 Original Instructions
RXT / GTX / WAKE PRO SERIES
2015
OPERATOR’S
GUIDE
RXT / GTX / WAKE PRO

TM † TM
SERIES
219 001 398
OPERATOR’S GUIDE, RXT/ GTX / WAKE PRO SERIES / ENGLISH
It contains important safety information.
2015
GUIDE DU CONDUCTEUR, SÉRIE RXT/ GTX / WAKE PRO / ANGLAIS

Minimum recommended operator’s age: 16 years old.
©2014 BOMBARDIER RECREATIONAL PRODUCTS INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN CANADA.
† IS A TRADEMARK OF CASTROL LTD USED UNDER LICENSE. 2 1 9 0 0 1 3 9 8 Original Instructions
WARNING
WARNING

(BRP).
4-TECTM iControlTM T.O.P.S.TM
D.E.S.S.TM iSTM VTSTM
GTXTM iTCTM XPSTM
GTX LimitedTM O.T.A.S.TM WAKETM PRO 215
GTX Limited iSTM Rotax® RXTTM-XTM
GTX STM RXTTM RXTTM-XTM aSTM
iBRTM Sea-Doo®
smo2015-002 en JT
FOREWORD
English
Español
Français
Nederlands
Norsk
Português
Suomi
Svenska

possession. If you need more com- tained in this Operators' Guide can
your dealer.
pleasure craft.
_______________ 1
FOREWORD
WARNING Keep this Operator's Guide in the wa-

Get familiar with this PWC; it may ation, instructing others, maintenance
exceed the performance of other and troubleshooting.
PWCs you have ridden.
Note that this guide is available in sev-
RXT-X and RXT-X aS Models crepancy, the English version shall pre-
vail.
WARNING If you want to view and/or print an
This is a high performance PWC. extra copy of your Operator's Guide,
Inexperienced riders may over- simply visit the following website
look risks and be surpised by the www.operatorsguide.brp.com.
specific behavior of this PWC in
any water condition. The informations contained in this doc-
ument are correct at the time of publi-
cation. However, BRP maintains a pol-
Safety Messages icy of continuous improvement of its
This Operator’s Guide utilizes the fol- products without imposing upon itself
lowing symbols and words to empha- any obligation to install them on prod-
size particular information: ucts previously manufactured. Due
to late changes, some differences be-
The safety alert symbol indicates tween the manufactured product and
a potential injury hazard. the descriptions and/or specifications
in this guide may occur. BRP reserves
the right at any time to discontinue or
WARNING change specifications, designs, fea-
Indicates a potential hazard which, tures, models or equipment without
if not avoided, could result in seri- incurring any obligation upon itself.
ous injury or death. This Operator's Guide and the SAFETY
DVD video should remain with the wa-
tercraft when it's sold.
moderate injury.

Guide
2 _______________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Safety Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SAFETY INFORMATION
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Avoid Carbon Monoxide Poisoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Avoid Gasoline Fires and Other Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Avoid Burns from Hot Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
SPECIAL SAFETY MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Reminders Regarding Safe Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Water Sports (Towing with the Watercraft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Hypothermia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
iBR (intelligent Brake and Reverse System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
iS (intelligent Suspension) (GTX Limited iS 260 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Operating Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
FUELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
_______________ 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
1) Handlebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2) Throttle Lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3) iBR Lever (intelligent Brake and Reverse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6) VTS (Variable Trim System) Button (all Models Except GTX 155 and GTX S
155). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7) Sport Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8) ECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
9) MODE/SET Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
10) UP/DOWN Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
11) Cruise Button (Except RXT-X and RXT-X aS Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
INFORMATION CENTER (GAUGES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Information Center Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
1) Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2) Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3) Multifunction Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4) Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5) Fuel Level Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6) VTS Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7) iS Position (GTX Limited iS Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8) Numerical Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
9) Multifunction Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
10) Water Depth Display (GTX Limited and GTX Limited iS Models) . . . . . . . 67
11) Lake Water Temperature Display (GTX Limited and GTX Limited iS
Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
12) Hour Meter Display (HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
13) iBR Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
14) Compass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
15) Touring Mode Indicator (all Models Except RXT-X/RXT-X aS). . . . . . . . . . . . 68
16) Sport Mode Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
17) Boost Gauge (RXT-X/RXT-X aS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
1) Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2) Front Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3) Rear Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4) Fire Extinguisher Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5) Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6) Passenger Handholds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7) Boarding Step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4 _______________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EQUIPMENT (cont’d)
9) Speed-Ties (GTX Limited and GTX Limited iS Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
10) Front and Rear Eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
11) Mooring Cleats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
12) Bilge Drain Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
13) Adjustable Sponsons (RXT-X aS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
14) Adjustable Trim Tabs (RXT-X aS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
15) Bow Stabilizer (RXT-X aS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
16) Ski/Wakeboard Post (WAKE Pro model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
17) Wakeboard Rack (WAKE Pro model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
18) Steering Tilt Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
19) Adjustable Ergonomic Steering (AES) (RXT-X/RXT-X aS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
iS (intelligent Suspension) (GTX Limited iS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
aS (adjustable Suspension) (RXT-X aS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
S (Manual Suspension) (GTX S 155) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
BREAK-IN PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
How to Start Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
How to Stop the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
How to Steer the Watercraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
How to Engage Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
How to Engage Forward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
How to Engage and Use Reverse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
How to Engage and Use Braking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
How to Use the Variable Trim System (VTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
General Operating Recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
OPERATING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Touring Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
ECO Mode (Fuel Economy Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Cruise Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Slow Speed Mode (all Models Except RXT-X and RXT-X aS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Ski Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Learning Key Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
SPECIAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Jet Pump Water Intake and Impeller Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Capsized Watercraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Submerged Watercraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Water-Flooded Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Towing the Watercraft in Water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
_______________ 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Ignition Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Ride Plate and Water Intake Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Sacrificial Anode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Ski/Wakeboard Post (Wake). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
WATERCRAFT CARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Post-Operation Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Watercraft Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

RF D.E.S.S. KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
TROUBLESHOOTING

Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Indicator Lights and Message Display Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
6 _______________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WARRANTY

WATERCRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
WATERCRAFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
WATERCRAFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

_______________ 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8 _______________
SAFETY
INFORMATION

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
eas such as boat houses, seawalls thoroughly with soap and water and
or other boats in close proximity. change your clothes.
Even if you try to ventilate engine
exhaust, carbon monoxide can Avoid Burns from Hot Parts
rapidly reach dangerous levels. Certain components may become hot
tercraft.

Reminders Regarding Safe When operating an iBR equipped wa-
Operation tercraft, be aware that other boats fol-
lowing or operating in close proximity
The performance of this watercraft may not be able to stop as quickly.
watercrafts you may have operated. When at speed and the brake is first
Make sure you read and understand applied, a plume of water will shoot up
the content of this Operator's Guide in the air behind the watercraft which
to become completely familiar with may cause the operator of a following
the controls and operation of the wa- watercraft to momentarily loose sight
tercraft before embarking on your first of your PWC. It is important to inform
trip, or taking on a passenger(s). If you the operator of a watercraft who in-
have not had the opportunity to do so, tends to follow in a convoy formation,
practice driving solo in a suitable traf- of the braking and maneuvering capa-
fic free area to become accustomed bility of your PWC, what the plume of
to the feel and response of each con- water indicates, and that a greater dis-
trol. Be fully familiar with all controls tance should be maintained between
before accelerating above idle speed. watercrafts.
Do not assume that all PWCs handle When actuating the iBR control lever
identically. Each model differs, often while the watercraft has some for-
substantially. ward speed, the braking mode will
Always keep in mind that as the throt- engage and generate a deceleration
tle lever is returned to the idle position, proportional to the iBR lever position.
less directional control is available. The more you pull in the iBR lever, the
To turn the watercraft, both steering greater the braking force becomes.
and throttle are necessary. Do not re- Be careful to gradually actuate the iBR
lease the throttle when trying to steer lever to adjust the intensity of the brak-
away from objects. You need throttle ing force, and to simultaneously re-
to steer. If engine is shut off, direc- lease the throttle lever.
tional control is lost. Keep the tether cord clip attached to
Although most watercrafts have no the operators' PFD or wrist (wrist strap
means of braking, advancement in required) at all times and keep it free
technologies now permit us to offer from snagging on the handlebars to
models that are equipped with a brak- help ensure the engine stops should
ing system called the iBRTM system. the operator fall off. After riding, re-
Practice braking maneuvers in a safe move the tether cord from the engine
traffic-free area to become familiar cut-off switch to avoid unauthorized
with handling under braking and with use by children or others. If the op-
stopping distances under various oper- erator falls off the watercraft and the
ating conditions. tether cord is not attached as recom-
mended, the watercraft engine will not
Stopping distance will vary depending stop.
on initial speed, load, wind, number
of riders and water conditions. The Ride within your limits and level of rid-
amount of braking power commanded ing ability.
by the operator using the iBR lever (in- Avoid aggressive maneuvers to reduce
telligent Brake and Reverse) will also the risk of loss of control, ejection and
affect stopping distance. collision. Understand and respect the
When braking, riders must brace them- performance of your watercraft.
selves against the deceleration force
watercraft and losing balance.

Avoid riding in very rough waters or Engine exhaust contains carbon

practicing extreme maneuvers like monoxide (CO), which can cause seri-
jumping wakes or waves. ous health problems or death if inhaled
The brake feature of the iBR system in sufficient quantities. Do not operate
cannot prevent your PWC from drift- the PWC in a confined area or allow
ing due to current or wind. It has no CO to accumulate around the PWC,
braking effect on the rearward veloc- or in enclosed or sheltered areas such
ity. Also note that your engine must be as when docked, or when rafting. Be
running to be able to use the brake. aware of the risk of CO emanations
from exhaust of other PWCs.
The personal watercrafts' jet thrust
can cause injury. The jet pump may Know the waters in which the water-
pick up debris and throw it rearward craft is to be operated. Current, tides,
causing a risk of injuring people, dam- rapids, hidden obstacles, wakes and
aging the jet pump, or other property. waves etc. can affect safe operation.
It is not advisable to operate the wa-
Observe the instructions on all safety tercraft in rough waters or inclement
labels. They are there to help assure weather.
that you have a safe and enjoyable out-
ing. In shallow water, proceed with caution
and at very low speeds. Grounding or
Do not store any objects in areas that abrupt stops may result in injury and
are not designed specifically for stor- watercraft damage. Debris may also
age. be picked up and thrown rearward by
Riding with passenger(s), pulling the jet pump onto people or property.
tubes, a skier, or a wake boarder makes Always ride responsibly and safely.
the PWC handle differently and re- Use common sense and courtesy.
quires greater skill.
Respect no wake zones, the environ-
Certain PWC models come equipped ment, and the rights of other users of
with tow eyelets or a ski pole (Wake the waterways. As the operator and
only) which, can be used to attach owner of a PWC, you are responsible
a tow rope for a skier, tube or wake for damage by the wake of your PWC.
boarder. Do not use these attachment Do not let anyone throw refuse over-
points or any other portion of the wa- board.
tercraft to tow a para-sail or any other
craft. Personal injury or severe dam- While your watercraft has the ca-
age may occur. pacity of operating at high speeds, it
is strongly recommended that high
Combustion engines need air to op- speed operation only be applied when
erate; consequently this PWC cannot ideal conditions exist and are permit-
be totally watertight. Any maneuvers ted. Higher speed operation requires a
such as turning constantly in tight cir- higher degree of skill and increases the
cles, plunging the bow through waves, risk of severe injuries.
or capsizing the watercraft, that cause
the air inlet openings to be under wa- The forces generated on the body of
ter may cause severe engine problems riders while turning, negotiating waves
due to water ingestion. Refer to HOW or wakes, operating in choppy waters,
TO STEER WATERCRAFT in the OP- or falling off the watercraft, especially
ERATING INSTRUCTIONS section and at higher speeds, may cause injury in-
the WARRANTY section contained in cluding the possibility of broken bones
this Operator's Guide. or more serious bodily injuries. Re-
main flexible and avoid sharp turns.

PWCs are not designed for night-time Ensure there is enough fuel on board
operation. for the planned trip. Always verify fuel
Certain PWC models are equipped level before use and during the ride.
with an intelligent suspension (GTX Apply the principle of 1/3 of the fuel
Limited iS). Although the system ab- to reach your destination, 1/3 to re-
sorbs part of the vertical forces and turn, and keep 1/3 in reserve. Allow
therefore reduces the impact force to for changes due to adverse weather or
the body, it cannot eliminate it com- other delays.
pletely. To prevent you and your pas-
senger(s) from being bounced and Operator and Passenger Awareness
eventually be ejected from the wa- Read and understand all safety labels
tercraft, reduce your speed. on the Sea-Doo PWC, the Operator's
Guide, all other safety documents, and
Before Getting Underway watch the SAFETY DVD video before
For safety reasons and proper care, al- operating the PWC.
ways perform the pre-ride inspection Respect applicable laws. Check local
as specified in your Operator's Guide and federal boating laws applicable
before operating your watercraft. to the waterways where you intend
Do not exceed the payload or pas- to use your watercraft. Learn the lo-
senger capacities for your watercraft. cal navigation rules. Know and under-
Overloading can affect maneuverabil- stand the applicable navigation system
ity, stability and performance. Also, (such as buoys and signs).
heavy seas reduce capacity. A payload Remember that sun, wind, fatigue or
or person capacity plate is not an ex- illness may impair your judgement and
cuse for failure to use common sense reaction time.
or good judgment. Operation of this PWC by a person un-
Regularly inspect the PWC, hull, en- der 16 years of age, or a person with a
gine, safety equipment, and all other disability that impairs vision, reaction
boating gear and keep them in safe op- time, judgment, or operation of the
erating condition. controls is NOT recommended.
Be sure you have the minimum re- Always properly use the tether cord
quired safety equipment, PFDs and when operating the watercraft and en-
any additional gear needed for your sure that all passengers are familiar
cruise. with its use.
Check that all lifesaving equipment, in- Ensure that any operator and all pas-
cluding fire extinguisher, are in safe op- sengers know how to swim and how
erating condition and easily accessible. to re-board the PWC from the water.
Show all passengers where this equip- Boarding in deep water can be stren-
ment is stored on the PWC, and make uous. Practice in chest-deep water
sure they know how to use it. before operating or embarking your
Keep an eye on the weather. Check lo- watercraft in deep water. Ensure that
cal weather broadcasts before depar- any operator and all passengers wear a
ture. Be alert to changing conditions. PFD at all times and take extra precau-
tions when boating.
Keep accurate and up-to-date charts of
the boating area on board. Before get- Never turn handlebar while someone
ting underway, check water conditions is near the rear of watercraft. Keep
in the planned boating area. away from steering moving parts (noz-
zle, iBR gate, linkages, etc.).

Do not start the engine or operate the If the throttle lever is depressed while
watercraft if anyone is in the water braking, the iBR system will disable the
nearby, or near the rear of the water- throttle command by the user. When
craft. releasing the iBR lever while the throt-
Be aware of the iBR gate movement tle lever is still depressed, the throt-
when starting the engine, shutting tle command will regain control and
down the engine or using the iBR lever. generate an acceleration after a short
Automatic movement of the gate may delay. Release throttle lever if acceler-
squeeze fingers or toes of people tak- ation is not needed.
ing a hold on the back or your PWC. Before reboarding, make sure engine
The operator and passenger(s) should is off and tether cord is removed from
be properly seated and have a firm grip the engine cut-off switch.
on a handhold before starting the wa- To prevent accidental starting, always
tercraft, and at all times when the wa- detach the tether cord from the engine
tercraft is in motion. All passenger(s) cut-off switch when swimmers are
should be instructed to use the hand- boarding, nearby, or during removal of
holds provided, or to hold on to the any weeds or debris from the intake
waist of the person in front of them. grate.
Each passenger must be able to simul- On a PWC, never place your feet and
taneously place both feet firmly flat legs in the water to aid turning.
against each footwell when properly
seated. When going over waves, pas- Operation by Minors
senger(s) may raise their body slightly
off the seat to absorb the shocks with Minors should always be supervised
their legs. by an adult whenever operating a wa-
tercraft. Laws regarding the minimum
When braking or decelerating, riders age and licensing requirements of mi-
must brace themselves against the de- nors may vary from one jurisdiction to
celeration force to prevent from mov- another. Be sure to contact the local
ing forward on the watercraft and los- boating authorities for information re-
ing balance. garding the legal operation of a PWC in
When accelerating on a PWC with a the intended jurisdiction of use. BRP
passenger(s), whether from a com- recommends a minimum operator age
plete stop or while underway, always of 16 years old.
do so progressively. Fast acceleration
may cause your passenger(s) to loose Drugs and Alcohol
their balance and fall rearward off the Never use your PWC with drugs or
watercraft. Make sure that your pas- alcohol. Like driving a car, driving a
senger(s) are aware of or can anticipate watercraft requires the operator to be
any rapid acceleration. sober, attentive and alert. Operating a
Severe internal injuries can occur if watercraft while intoxicated or under
water is forced into body cavities as a the influence of drugs is not only dan-
result of falling into water or being near gerous, but it is also a Federal offense
a jet thrust nozzle. Consequently, the carrying a significant penalty. These
wear of a bottom wet suit is highly rec- laws are vigorously enforced. The use
ommended. of drugs and alcohol, singly or in com-
bination, decreases reaction time, im-
Keep away from the intake grate while pedes judgment, impairs vision, and
the engine is running. Items such inhibits your ability to safely operate a
as long hair, loose clothing, or PFD watercraft.
straps can become entangled in mov-
ing parts.

WARNING – Always carry an observer when

pulling a tube, skier or wakeboarder
Alcohol consumption and boat- to observe the person being towed
ing do not mix! Operating with and inform the operator about the
the use of drugs or alcohol endan- participants' hand signals. The op-
gers the lives of your passengers, erator must focus his attention on
other boaters, and yourself. Fed- operating the watercraft and the
eral laws prohibit operating a wa- waters ahead.
tercraft with the use of drugs or
alcohol. – Proceed with only as much speed as
required and follow the observers'
instructions.
Water Sports (Towing with – When pulling a tube, skier, or a wake
the Watercraft) boarder, do not make tight sharp
turns or use the braking system
WARNING unless absolutely necessary. Re-
member that although this PWC is
Avoid personal injury! Your PWC manoeuvrable and has stopping ca-
is not designed for and should not pabilities, the person in tow may not
be used for pulling another craft, be able to avoid an obstacle, or the
parasails, kites, gliders, or any de- PWC with which it is being towed.
vice which can become airborne.
Use your watercraft only for water – Allow only capable swimmers to
sports it was designed for. take part in any water sport.
– Always wear an approved personal
flotation device (PFD). Wearing
Water skiing, wakeboarding, or riding a properly designed PFD helps a
a towed inflatable apparatus are some stunned or unconscious person stay
of the more popular water sports. Tak- afloat.
ing part in any water sport requires
increased safety awareness by the par- – Be considerate to others you share
ticipant and the watercraft operator. If the water with.
you have never towed someone be- – Both the operator and observer
hind your PWC before, it is a good idea should monitor the location of the
to spend some hours as an observer, tow rope when participating in wa-
working with and learning from an ex- tersports. A slack tow rope can be-
perienced operator. It is also important come entangled with a person(s) or
to be aware of the skill and experience objects on the PWC or in the wa-
of the person being towed. ter, particularly when making a tight
turn or circling, and cause serious
Everyone participating in a water sport personal injury.
should observe these guidelines:
– Do not tow a person in any water
– Riding with passenger(s) or pulling sport on a short tow rope such that
a tube, skier or wakeboarder makes the person inhales exhaust fumes
the watercraft handle differently in concentration. Inhalation of con-
and requires greater skill. centrated exhaust fumes, which
– Always respect the safety and com- contain carbon monoxide, can re-
fort of your passenger(s) and person sult in CO poisoning, personal injury
being towed on skis, wakeboard or and death.
other water products.

– Use a tow rope of sufficient length – Do not drive the watercraft directly
and size and make sure it is ade- behind a water skier, tuber or wake-
quately secured to your watercraft. boarder. At 40 km/h (25 MPH) per
Always store tow rope when not hour, the watercraft will overtake a
in use. While some watercrafts person who falls in the water 60 m
are equipped or can be fitted with (197 ft) in front of your watercraft in
a specially designed towing mech- about 5 seconds.
anism, avoid installing a tow pole – Shut off the engine and remove the
on a PWC. It can become a hazard tether cord from the engine cut-off
should someone fall on it. switch when anyone is in the water
– Give immediate attention to a per- nearby.
son who has fallen. He or she is – Stay at least 45 m (148 ft) away
vulnerable in the water alone and from areas marked by a diver down
may not be seen by other boaters. float.
– Approach a person in the water from Avoid personal injury! Do not allow
the lee side (opposite the direction anyone near the propulsion system or
of the wind). Turn off the motor be- intake grate, even when the engine
fore coming close to the person. is off. Items such as long hair, loose
– Participate in water sports only clothing or personal flotation device
in safe areas. Stay away from straps can become entangled in mov-
other boats, channels, beaches, ing parts resulting in serious injury or
restricted areas, swimmers, and drowning. In shallow water, shells,
heavily traveled waterways and un- sand, pebbles or other objects could
derwater obstructions. be drawn up by the jet pump and be
– Turn off the engine and anchor the thrown rearward.
watercraft before swimming.
– Swim only in areas designated as
safe for swimming. These are usu-
ally marked with a swim area buoy.
Do not swim alone or at night.
F00A2MY
DIVER DOWN FLOAT

F00A2LY
For more information on approved, le-
SWIM AREA BUOY gal and safe practice of water sports,
– Do not water ski between sunset please contact the local legal authority
and sunrise. It is illegal in most ar- on water sports safety for the area you
eas. plan to practice in.
Hypothermia
Hypothermia, the loss of body heat
resulting in a subnormal body temper-
ature, is a significant cause of death in

boating accidents. After an individual Check local and federal boating laws
has succumbed to hypothermia, he or applicable to the waterways where
she will lose consciousness and then you intend to use your watercraft.
drown. Learn the local navigation rules. Know
PFDs can increase survival time be- and understand the applicable naviga-
cause of the insulation they provide. tion system (such as buoys and signs).
Naturally, the warmer the water, the
less insulation one will require. When
operating in cold water (below 4°C
(40°F)) consideration should be given
they cover more body area than the
vest style PFDs.
a nearby boat, fellow survivor, or a
floating object onto which you can
lean or climb. Unnecessary swim-
ming increases the rate of body heat
loss. In cold water, drown-proof
methods that require putting your
head in the water are not recom-
mended. Keep your head out of the
water. This will greatly lessen heat
loss and increase your survival time.
a difference!
– If there is more than one person
recommended. This action tends to
increase the survival time.
– Always wear your PFD. It won't help
you fight off the effects of hypother-
mia if you don't have it on when you
go into the water.
Safe Boating Courses

Many countries recommend or require
a boating safety course. Check with
your local competent authorities.

Introduction The iTC allows the following operating
NOTE: Some functions or features de- modes:
scribed in this section may not apply to – Touring mode
every PWC model, or may be available – Sport mode
as an option. – ECO mode
iControlTM (intelligent Control sys- – Cruise mode (if equipped)
tems) provides an environment – Slow speed mode (if equipped with
whereby the operator can control cruise mode)
many systems without taking his – Ski mode (if equipped).
hands off the handlebars.
The OTAS (Off throttle Assisted Steer-
All controls are at the operator's finger ing) is also controlled by the iTC.
tips and activated by pressing a button
or pulling a lever. The operator's atten- Touring Mode
tion can thus remain focused on the
water and driving the watercraft. The Touring mode is the default riding
mode.
Each control is electronic and provides
a command signal to an electronic In touring mode, available engine
module whose function is to assure power and acceleration is reduced
proper operation of its system within when accelerating from a complete
set parameters. stop and when operating in the low
engine power range under certain con-
The various systems grouped under ditions.
iControl are the:
– iTCTM (intelligent Throttle Control) ECO Mode
– iBR (intelligent Brake and Reverse) When ECO mode (FUEL ECONOMY
– iSTM (intelligent suspension) (GTX mode) is selected, fuel consumption is
Limited iS 260 Only) reduced for any given RPM. This mode
– O.T.A.S.TM (Off Throttle Assisted is ideal when cruising and maximum
Steering). fuel efficiency is desired.
These systems function together to Refer to OPERATING MODES for de-
provide features such as cruise con- tailed instructions.
trol, slow speed mode and braking,
improved watercraft response to oper- Sport Mode
ator inputs, increased maneuverability In sport mode, maximum engine
and control. power is available throughout the en-
It is extremely important for operators gine operational range.
to read all information contained in this Refer to OPERATING MODES for de-
Operator's Guide so as to become fa- tailed instructions.
miliar with this watercraft, its systems,
controls, capabilities and limitations. Cruise Mode
iTC (intelligent Throttle Cruise mode allows the operator to
set a desired maximum speed of the
Control) watercraft when operating above
The system uses an electronic throttle 3800 RPM.
control (ETC) that provides command Cruise mode limits watercraft speed
signals to the ECM (Engine Control but does not maintain it. The oper-
Module). With this system, there is no ator must hold the throttle lever de-
need for a traditional throttle cable. pressed to maintain forward speed,

unlike an automotive type cruise con- Refer to HOW TO STEER THE WA-
trol which maintains a constant speed TERCRAFT in OPERATING INSTRUC-
while throttle pedal is released. TIONS section for details.
As you proceed under a constant cruis-
ing speed setting, hold the throttle Learning Key
lever fully depressed in order to keep The Sea-Doo LKTM learning key limits
your full attention to maintaining good the speed of the watercraft therefore
situational awareness. enabling first time users and less ex-
Refer to CRUISE MODE in OPERAT- perienced operators to learn how to
ING MODES for detailed instructions. operate the watercraft while gaining
the necessary confidence and control.
Slow Speed Mode Limitations
Slow speed mode is a function The ability of a novice to operate the
of cruise mode which allows the watercraft can be exceeded even
operator to adjust and set idle when a learning key is used.
speed corresponding to a water-
craft speed of 1.6 km/h to 11 km/h Refer to OPERATING MODES for in-
(1 MPH to 7 MPH). The throttle lever formation on using and programming
should not be depressed while operat- learning keys.
ing in slow speed mode.
Refer to OPERATING MODES for de- iBR (intelligent Brake and
tailed instructions. Reverse System)
This watercraft uses an electronically
Ski Mode controlled braking and reverse system
Ski mode allows for a controlled launch called the iBR system (intelligent Brake
and accurately maintained maximum and Reverse).
towing speed when towing a skier or The iBR module controls the position
wake boarder. of the iBR gate to provide forward
Refer to OPERATING MODES for de- thrust, reverse thrust, braking thrust,
tailed instructions. and neutral.
The operator commands the position
O.T.A.S. System of the iBR gate using either the throt-
(Off-Throttle Assisted Steering) tle lever for forward thrust, or the iBR
The O.T.A.S. (Off-Throttle Assisted lever for neutral, reverse, and for the
Steering) system provides additional braking function.
maneuverability in off-throttle situa- NOTE: The iBR lever can only be used
tions. to command a change in the gate posi-
Limitations
The O.T.A.S. system cannot help you duces the stopping distance of this
maintain control or prevent collisions watercraft and can increase its maneu-
in all situations. verability as it can be used in a straight
The O.T.A.S. system is electronically line, in a turn, at high or low speeds, or
activated when the operator initiates a to propel the watercraft in reverse for
full turn and releases the throttle at the docking or maneuvering in very close
same time. quarters.

Under ideal conditions, experienced The iS system incorporates a func-

operators were consistently able to tion known as DOCK MODE. When
reduce , the stopping distance of a wa- activated manually or automatically,
tercraft equipped with an iBR system DOCK MODE moves the suspension
by approximately 33%,from an initial down to lower the center of gravity of
speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH). the watercraft. This function is useful
when transporting the watercraft, op-
Limitations erating at slow speed or when O.T.A.S.
Even when equipped with an iBR sys- is activated as it reduces the possibility
tem, watercrafts do not have the ability of overturning.
Limitations
Stopping distance will vary notably de-
pending on initial speed, load, wind, Although the system absorbs partially
current, water conditions and the the vertical forces transferred to the
amount of braking. occupants when riding, it cannot elim-
inate them completely. Sudden jolts
The iBR system has no effect on the can cause the suspension to bottom.
rearward motion.
drifting in current or wind.
WARNING
– It is important to inform the
operator of a watercraft who
intends to follow in a convoy
formation, of the braking and
maneuvering capability of your
tween watercraft.
– Be aware that other boats fol-
lowing or operating in close
stop as quickly.
iS (intelligent Suspension)
(GTX Limited iS 260 Only)
The suspension system of this water-
craft is designed so that the occupants
sit on what is known as the moving
deck. When the suspension system is
active, the moving deck is usually in an
"up" position. This means the moving
deck is raised above the fixed deck suf-
ficiently for the suspension system to
absorb the up and down movement of
the watercraft as it travels through the
water.

SAFETY EQUIPMENT
Required Safety Recommended Protection Gears
(50 ft) minimum
flares Gloves
Wet suit
bottom
whistle).
Foot
protection
F00A12A

these PFDs meet your country regula-
tions.

SAFETY EQUIPMENT
how to use them.
ters.
F00A2EY

F00A2CY

SAFETY EQUIPMENT

Equipment
Risks – Tow rope
– Flares

PRACTICE EXERCISES
It is always a good idea to practice and Avoiding an Obstacle
get familiar with all controls, functions Practice obstacle avoidance (choose a
and handling characteristics of your virtual point on the water) by steering
watercraft before venturing on the wa- watercraft and maintaining throttle.
ter.
Repeat exercise, but this time release
Always secure the tether cord to the throttle while turning.
engine cut-off switch and the clip to
your PFD or a wrist strap. NOTE: With this exercise, you will
learn that you need throttle to steer the
Where to Practice watercraft in a different direction.
Exercises Docking
Find a suitable area to practice the ex- Practice docking using the throttle, iBR
ercises. Ensure the area meet the fol- lever and steering to become familiar
lowing requirements: with the response of the PWC and to
– No traffic develop good control skills.
– No obstacles NOTE: Remember that steering direc-
– No swimmers tion is reversed when backing.
– No current
– Ample space to maneuver Slow Speed Mode, Ski Mode and
– Water depth is adequate. Cruise Mode
If your watercraft has any of these
Practice Exercises modes, it is also important to under-
stand their operation and to become
Practice alone the following exercises. familiar with these features prior to us-
ing them on a ride with other people.
Turning
Practice turning in circles in both di- WARNING
rections at slow speed. When com-
fortable with the exercise, increase The ski and the cruise modes are
difficulty by making some figure 8. not an automatic pilot; they will
not drive the watercraft for you.
When this is mastered, repeat the
above exercises but at increased
speed.
Stopping Distances
Practice stopping the watercraft in
a straight line at various speeds and
braking force.
load, water conditions, current and
wind also affect stopping distances.
Reverse
Practice reverse operation to learn
how the watercraft operates in reverse
and reacts with steering inputs.
NOTE: Always perform this exercise
at slow speeds.

PRACTICE EXERCISES
Important Factors Not to

Neglect
In addition, always remember that the
following conditions have a direct im-
have and respond to different inputs:
– Loads
– Currents
– Wind
– Water conditions.
Make sure to be alert to these condi-
tions, and adapt accordingly. If pos-
sible, practice further in these condi-
tions.
vice is always to try to reduce your
speed to a minimum.

NAVIGATION RULES
Operating Rules
smo2012-003-200
TYPICAL
tance from other watercrafts, boats, Like a street traffic light, if you see a
ferent parts of the boat that are used the right of way.
GREEN light.
Keep right.
Bow
Port Starboard
1 2
smo2012-003-201
TYPICAL
Passing
POINTS
1. RED light
Crossing
Personal watercrafts (PWC) do not buoys, can assist you in identify-
have these colored lights, but the rule ing safe waters. Buoys will indicate
still applies. whether you should keep to the right

NAVIGATION RULES
use the watercraft.
conditions.
ing to steer away from an obstacle. Although the preferable manoeuvre to
Always keep a constant lookout for direction to avoid the obstacle.
other water users, other boats or ob-
keep a safe distance from all other wa-
tercrafts, boats, people and objects.
boat or person.
watercraft.
Unlike most other watercrafts, this

FUELING
Fueling Procedure WARNING
To prevent fuel back-flow, fill tank
WARNING slowly so the air can escape from
Fuel is flammable and explosive the fuel tank.
under certain conditions. Always
work in a well ventilated area. Do Stop filling immediately after the re-
not smoke or allow open flames or lease of the gas pump nozzle handle
sparks in the vicinity. and wait a moment before removing
the spout. Do not retract the gas pump
Turn off engine. nozzle to put more fuel in fuel tank.
WARNING WARNING
Always stop the engine before re- Do not overfill or top off the fuel
fueling. tank and leave the watercraft in the
sun. As temperature increases,
fuel expands and may overflow.
Do not allow anyone to remain on the
watercraft.
Close the fuel tank cap and ensure it is
Tie watercraft securely to the fueling properly latched.
pier.
Have a fire extinguisher close at hand. WARNING
Lightly press down on the fuel cap with Always wipe off any fuel spillage
your LH hand as you pull up on the latch from the watercraft.
with your fingers to release it. The cap
will pop open as it is pushed open by After refueling always open the seat,
spring pressure. remove the ventilation box (as applica-
ble), and ensure there is no gasoline
vapor odor inside the engine compart-
ment.
WARNING
Do not start watercraft if gasoline
or gasoline vapor odor is present.
Fuel Requirements
sdd2009-001-054_a
NOTICE Always use fresh gaso-
TYPICAL - FUEL TANK CAP LOCATION
line. Gasoline will oxidize; the re-
sult is loss of octane, volatile com-
pounds, and the production of gum
WARNING and varnish deposits which can
Fuel tank may be pressurized, damage the fuel system.
place one hand over the fuel cap
when releasing the cap retaining
latch.
Insert the gas pump spout into the filler

neck and fill the fuel tank.

FUELING
Alcohol fuel blending varies by coun- Inside North America

try and region. Your vehicle has been
designed to operate using the recom- NOTICE Do NOT use fuel from fuel
mended fuels, however, be aware of pumps labeled E85.
the following:
Use of fuel labeled E15 is prohibited by
– Use of fuel containing alcohol above U.S. EPA Regulations.
components:
ties.
parts.
ulations.
engine damage.
Recommended Fuel
GTX and GTX S Models
Use common unleaded gasoline with
All Models except GTX and GTX S
All Models
NOTICE Never experiment with
other fuels. Engine or fuel system
damages may occur with the use of
an inadequate fuel.


Ensure the trailer wheels are posi- GTX Limited and GTX Limited iS
tioned so that the center of gravity of Models
the watercraft is slightly ahead of the
wheels to properly support the weight WARNING
of the watercraft.
Ensure the watercraft moving deck
is down in the DOCK MODE po-
WARNING sition before trailering. This will
Never tip this watercraft on end for lower the center of gravity and im-
transporting. We recommend that prove trailer stability.
mal operating position. All Models
Check the applicable laws and regula- WARNING
tions in your area concerning towing Make sure seat is securely latched
a trailer, especially for the following prior to trailering.
items:
– Brake system
– Tow vehicle weight tercraft, particularly when driving on
– Mirrors. dirt roads, to prevent dirt entry through
Take the following precautions when the air inlet openings.
towing the watercraft:
– Respect tow vehicle maximum WARNING
weight capacity and the tongue When trailering the watercraft,
weight capacity as recommended NEVER leave any equipment on
by manufacturer. the watercraft.
– Tie the watercraft to both front and
rear (bow/stern) eyelets so that it is WAKETM Pro Model
firmly secured on the trailer. Use ad-
ditional tie-downs if necessary.
WARNING
age compartment cover, glove box NEVER leave a wakeboard in-
cover, boarding platform and seat stalled on the rack. Otherwise,
are properly latched. wake board fin(s) could cause in-
jury to bystanders or wakeboard
– Observe trailering safety precau- could fly off on the road.
tions.

WARNING
Bungee cords are under tension
and could spring back and whip
someone when released. Use cau-
tion.
NOTE: When trailering 2 watercrafts,

it may be necessary to remove the in-
ner wakeboard rack.

(2-UP) or bystanders
1 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 20
16, 17
6
8, 21
2 19 22 10, 11, 12, 13, 18

smo2009-002-100_f
TYPICAL - GTX LIMITED AND GTX LIMITED iS
1 16, 17 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 20
6
8, 21
19 22 10, 11, 12, 13

smo2014-002-001_a
TYPICAL - GTX

1 16, 17 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 20 14
6
8, 21
19 22 15 10, 11, 12, 13

smo2014-002-002_a
WAKE PRO
1 16, 17 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 20
6
8, 21
19 22 10, 11, 12, 13, 18

smo2011-002-008_c
RXT 260
1 16,17
3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 20 6
21
19 22 10, 11, 12, 13, 18

smo2010-002-003_d
RXT-X

1 16, 17 6
3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 20
21
2 19 22 10, 11, 12, 13

smo2012-002-013_c
RXT-X aS
After refueling, always open the seat and the ventilation

box (if applicable) to ensure there is no gasoline vapor odor inside
Gasoline vapor may cause fire or explosion.
Do not overfill gas tank.
Keep the craft away from open flames and sparks. Recommended for
Do not start watercraft if liquid gasoline or gasoline supercharged engine:
vapor odor is present. premium unleaded
Always replace ventilation box (if applicable) and gasoline 91 pump
close seat before starting. octane or higher.
Minimum required:
unleaded gasoline
87 pump octane.
Après avoir fait le plein, toujours ouvrir le siège et la boîte
de ventilation (si applicable) afin de sassurer quil ny a pas
démanation dessence dans le compartiment moteur. Recommandé pour
Les vapeurs dessence peuvent provoquer un incendie moteur suralimenté:
ou une explosion. essence sans plomb
219903495
Éviter de trop remplir le réservoire dessence. 91 octane ou plus.

Garder la motomarine à lécart des flammes et des étincelles. Minimum requis:
Ne pas démarrer la motomarine en présence dessence liquide essence sans plomb
ou démanation dessence. 87 octane.
Toujours remettre la boîte de ventillation (si applicable) en place et
refermer le siège avant de démarrer la motomarine.
219903495
LABEL 1: TYPICAL
smo2009-002-103_a
LABEL 2: TYPICAL

F18L0NY
LABEL 5: TYPICAL
219903184
LABEL 3: FIXED DECK MODELS
smo2009-002-106_aen
LABEL 6: TYPICAL
219903084
LABEL 3: iS MODELS 219903177
LABEL 7: TYPICAL
smo2009-002-105_aen
LABEL 4: TYPICAL
219904252
LABEL 8 - ON FIXED DECK AND aS MODELS

219904254
LABEL 8 - ON S AND iS MODELS
smo2009-002-110_aen
LABEL 12: TYPICAL
F00A2TY
LABEL 9: TYPICAL
smo2009-002-111_a
LABEL 13: TYPICAL
219903301
219903137
LABEL 10: TYPICAL
LABEL 14: TYPICAL
smo2009-002-109_a
LABEL 11: TYPICAL

219903228
LABEL 15: TYPICAL
219903197
LABEL 16: GTX LIMITED AND LIMITED-iS MODELS

iBR INSTRUCTIO
NS
IBR INTELLIGENT BRAKE Collisions result in more INJURIES AND DEATHS than
AND REVERSE FUNCTIONS: any other type of accident for personal watercraft (PWC).
How to brake
• Squeeze brake lever SCAN CONSTANTLY for people, objects, and other watercraft.Be alert for conditions that
How to reverse
• Maintain brake lever engaged OPERATE DEFENSIVELY at safe speeds and keep a safe
distance away from people, objects, and other watercraft.
How to go forward • Do not follow directly behind PWCs or other boats.
• Tap throttle lever to engage • Do not go near others to spray or splash them with water.
forward movement from neutral • Avoid sharp turns or other maneuvers that make it hard for
position. others to avoid you or understand where you are going.
Squeeze throttle lever to
accelerate. TAKE EARLY ACTION to avoid collisions. Remember, generally
PWCs and other
How to get to neutral boats do not have brakes.
•Tap brake lever
DO NOT RELEASE THROTTLE WHEN TRYING TO STEER
Refer to the operator's guide away from objects
for more information. - you need throttle to steer. Always check throttle and steering controls for proper
operation before starting PWC.
Follow navigation rules and province/ state and local laws that apply to PWCs.
219904548
219904548
LABEL 16: GTX, WAKE, RXT AND RXT-X MODELS

219904550
Collisions result in more INJURIES AND DEATHS than any other type of accident for personal watercraft (PWC).
SCAN CONSTANTLY for people, objects, and other watercraft.Be alert for conditions that limit your visibility or block your vision of others.
OPERATE DEFENSIVELY at safe speeds and keep a safe distance away from people, objects, and other watercraft.
• Avoid sharp turns or other maneuvers that make it hard for others to avoid you or understand where you are going.
________
TAKE EARLY ACTION to avoid collisions. Remember, generally PWCs and other boats do not have brakes.
DO NOT RELEASE THROTTLE WHEN TRYING TO STEER away from objects - you need throttle to steer.
LABEL 16: RXT-X aS MODEL

Always check throttle and steering controls for proper operation before starting PWC.
Follow navigation rules and province/ state and local laws that apply to PWCs.
219904
550
219904040
SAFETY INFORMATION
LABEL 16: RXT-X MODEL
________
39
219903198
LABEL 17: ALL MODELS EXCEPT RXT-X
To reduce the risk of SEVERE INJURY DEATH:

WEAR A PERSONAL FLOTATION DEVICE (PFD). All riders must wear a Coast Guard approved PFD that is suitable for personal
watercraft (PWC) use.
WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. Severe internal injuries can occur if water is forced into body cavities as a result of falling into water or being
near jet thrust nozzle. Normal swimwear does not adequately protect against forceful water entry into lower body opening(s) of males or females.
All riders must wear a wet suit bottom or clothing that provides equivalent protection (see Operator's Guide). Footwear, gloves, and
goggles/glasses are recommended.
KNOW BOATING LAWS. BRP recommends a minimum operator age of 16 years old. Know the operator age and training
requirements for your province/ state. A boating safety course is recommended and may be required in your province/ state.
ATTACH ENGINE SHUT-OFF CORD (LANYARD) to PFD and keep it free from handlebars so that engine stops if
operator falls off. After riding, remove cord from PWC to avoid unauthorized use by children or others.
RIDE WITHIN YOUR LIMITS AND AVOID AGGRESSIVE MANEUVERS to reduce the risk of loss of control,
ejection, and collision. This is a high performance boat - not a toy. Sharp turns or jumping wakes or waves can
increase the risk of back/spinal injury (paralysis), facial injuries, and broken legs, ankles, and other bones. Do not
jump wakes or waves.
DO NOT APPLY THROTTLE WHEN ANYONE IS AT REAR OF PWC
- turn engine off or keep engine at idle. Water and/or debris exiting jet thrust nozzle can cause severe
injury.
KEEP AWAY FROM INTAKE GRATE while engine is on. Items such as long hair, loose
clothing, or PFD straps can become entangled in moving parts resulting in severe
injury or drowning.
NEVER RIDE AFTER CONSUMING DRUGS OR ALCOHOL
READ AND FOLLOW OPERATOR'S GUIDE
219904552
219904552
LABEL 17: RXT-X aS MODEL


FEL DE LA FAMILLE
POWER PUISSANCE
219904042 PLOMB ET IL RÉPOND AUX NORMES DE L'EPA DES É.-U. &
LABEL 17: RXT-X MODEL ALLUMAGE COMMANDÉ.
219904642
NOTICE 219904642
(from 1-1/2 to 2 minutes)
219904387
219903510
LABEL 18 - 260 ENGINE ONLY
Compliance Labels
219903510
LABEL 21 - TYPICAL

The EPA compliance label is located on
the front ventilation box riser.
It can be seen by opening the front
cover, removing the front storage bin
and looking aft.
219902679
LABEL 19
smo2009-002-152_a
1. Compliance label
2. Ventilation box
3. Riser

Models Without Suspension Watercraft Inside North-America

On these models, the EPA compliance GTX S, GTX LTD iS, and RXT-X aS
label is located on the RH side of a deck
riser just below the glove box.
To view the label, open the seat and
look to the right of the seat hinge near
the top of the riser.
3 227
500
227
500
smo2010-002-004_b
GTX155, RXT-X AND WAKE PRO MODELS XXXXXXXXX

1. EPA label location

ABOVE INFORMATION ALSO / NMB-2”
APPLIES IN THE U.S.A.
smo2015-002-002_a
LABEL 22 - CANADIAN COMPLIANCE

NOTICE (CAN MODELS ONLY)

GTX, GTX LTD, RXT, RXT-X, Watercraft Outside North America

and Wake
GTX S, GTX LTD iS, and RXT-X aS
3 272
600 3 227
272 500
600 227
500
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX

ABOVE INFORMATION ALSO / NMB-2” MAXIMUM CAPACITIES
APPLIES IN THE U.S.A. ABOVE INFORMATION ALSO
smo2015-001-001_a
smo2015-002-001_a
LABEL 22 - CANADIAN COMPLIANCE
NOTICE (CAN MODELS ONLY) LABEL 22 - TYPICAL (WATERCRAFT
OUTSIDE NORTH AMERICA)

GTX, GTX LTD, RXT, RXT-X, AUSTRALIAN BUILDERS PLATE

and Wake Imported by BRP Australia Pty Ltd
DATE 2014

Max load = 227 kg
WARNING
3 272 Alteration of the boat’s hull or permanent
600 fittings may invalidate the particulars on
this plate.
272 Information determined - ISO 13590
600 219904406
219904406
LABEL 23 - RXT-X aS AND GTX LIMITED iS
XXXXXXXXX
MAXIMUM CAPACITIES
ABOVE INFORMATION ALSO
smo2015-001-002_a
LABEL 22 - TYPICAL (WATERCRAFT

OUTSIDE NORTH AMERICA)
Australian Models Only
AUSTRALIAN BUILDERS PLATE

Imported by BRP Australia Pty Ltd
DATE 2014

Max load = 273 kg
WARNING
Alteration of the boat’s hull or permanent
fittings may invalidate the particulars on
this plate.
Information determined - ISO 13590
219904405
219904405
LABEL 23 - ALL MODELS EXCEPT RXT-X aS

AND GTX LIMITED iS

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
WARNING
Perform a pre-ride inspection before each ride to detect potential problems
during operation. The pre-ride inspection can help you monitor wear and
deterioration before they become a problem. Correct any problems that
you discover to reduce the risk of a breakdown or crash.
Before performing the pre-ride inspection, read and understand the CONTROLS
section.

WARNING
Engine should be off and the tether cord cap should always be removed
from the engine cut-off switch prior to verifying any of the following points.
Only start watercraft once all items have been checked and operate prop-
erly.
ITEM OPERATION ✓
Hull Inspect.
Fuel tank Refill.
Engine compartment
iBR lever Check operation.
Intelligent Suspension (iS) (GTX
Check operation.
Limited iS 260 only)
boarding platform and seat
Ensure it is installed on watercraft and
Self-contained removable storage bin
properly closed and latched.

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
ITEM OPERATION ✓
– Ensure rack is properly installed and

secured.
Wakeboard rack (WAKE Pro model) – Make sure bungee cords are in good
condition.
– Ensure wakeboard is correctly installed
in rack and secured.
Ski/wakeboard post (WAKE Pro
Inspect and check operation.
model)
Engine START/STOP button Check operation.
Engine cut-off switch Check operation.
Hull Drain Plugs

Inspect hull for cracks and other dam- Secure bilge drain plugs.
ages.

Remove weeds, shells, debris or any-
Clean as necessary. If any obstruction
cannot be removed, refer to an autho-
smo2009-002-135_a
TYPICAL - BILGE DRAIN PLUG LOCATIONS

1. Bilge drain plugs
2. Tighten
3. Untighten
WARNING
Ensure bilge drain plugs are prop-
erly secured prior to launching the
Fuel Tank
Fill the fuel tank.
WARNING
Strictly adhere to instructions de-
F18J04Y 1 2 tailed in FUELING PROCEDURE.
1. Water intake Engine Compartment
2. Ride plate
Inspect the engine compartment for
fuel vapor odor.

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
WARNING Engine Oil

Should any leak or gasoline odor Ensure oil level is within specification
be present, do not apply electri- as described in MAINTENANCE PRO-
cal power or start the engine. You CEDURES section.
should seek service from an autho-
rized Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop, Engine Coolant
or person of your own choosing Ensure coolant level is within specifi-
for maintenance, repair, or re- cation as described in MAINTENANCE
placement. Please refer to the US PROCEDURES section.
EPA EMISSIONS-RELATED WAR-
RANTY contained herein for infor- All Models Except iS
mation about warranty claims. Check for coolant leaks on engine, in
bilge and from ride plate.
To access the engine compartment,
open the seat. CAUTION When operating the
Models with Suspension engine with the watercraft out of
the water, the engine and heat ex-
Also remove the ventilation box by de- changer in the ride plate may be-
pressing the 3 locking tabs and lifting it come very hot. Avoid any contact
off the deck extension. with hot engine parts and the ride
plate as burns may occur.
Steering System
Assisted by another person, check
steering operation for free movement.
When the handlebar is horizontal,
the jet pump nozzle should be in the
straight ahead position. Ensure the jet
pump nozzle pivots easily and in the
same direction as the handlebar (e.g.:
when handlebar is turned to the left,
smo2009-002-002_b
the nozzle opening must point towards
1. Ventilation box the LH side of watercraft).
2. Locking tabs
WARNING
Check handlebar and correspond-
ing steering nozzle operation be-
steering moving parts (nozzle, iBR
gate, linkages etc.).
Throttle Lever
Check the Electronic Throttle Control
smo2009-002-003 lever (ETC) for free and smooth opera-
VENTILATION BOX REMOVED tion. It should return to its initial posi-
tion immediately after it is released.

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
WARNING WARNING
Check throttle lever operation be- Do not store cargo or material of
fore starting the engine. If any fric- any type in the space between the
tion is felt in the throttle lever, refer moving and fixed deck, or near
to an authorized Sea-Doo dealer. the rear suspension control arm.
These areas must remain free of all
iBR Lever obstructions to permit free move-
ment of the deck and any water
Check the iBR lever for free and which may accumulate in the foot
smooth operation. It should return well areas. Use only provide stor-
to its initial position immediately after age compartments.
it is released.
WARNING Wakeboard Rack (WAKE Pro model)

Check iBR lever operation before
starting the engine. If any friction WARNING
is felt in the iBR lever, refer to an Ensure wakeboard rack is properly
authorized Sea-Doo dealer. secured to watercraft body, and
that the wakeboard is properly po-
iS Suspension (GTX Limited iS 260 sitioned and secured to the rack
only) prior to using watercraft. Ensure
wakeboard retaining straps are in
1. Press briefly the START/STOP but- good condition.
ton to wake-up the ECM.
2. Switch to manual suspension Ski/Wakeboard Post (WAKE Pro
mode. Refer to IS (INTELLIGENT model)
SUSPENSION) (GTX LIMITED IS).
Make sure ski/wakeboard post is fully
Storage Compartments, Boarding extended and locked before use.
Platform and Seat Completely retract and lock when not
Ensure all required safety and survival used.
equipment and any additional cargo is
properly stored in the storage bins pro- WARNING
vided. Use caution with skier/wake-
Ensure the self-contained storage bin boarder in tow as tow rope may
cover, front cover, glove box, boarding backlash to watercraft when re-
platform, access panels, and seat are leased. Never perform a sharp
closed and latched. turn when towing a skier, wake-
boarder or any toy. Always store
WARNING tow rope when not in use.
Ensure the seat, boarding plat-
form, access panels, and all stor- NOTICE The ski/wakeboard post is
age compartment covers are se- designed for towing a skier or wake-
curely latched. boarder with a maximum gross
Ensure there are no items of cargo, or
other material, between the moving
deck and fixed deck.

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
Engine Cut-Off Switch and Engine Information Center (Gauge)

START/STOP Button 1. Press START/STOP button and
Press the start button once without install tether cord on the engine
installing the tether cordon the engine cut-off switch.
cut-off switch. 2. As the information center cycles
Install the tether cord cap on the en- through its self-test function, en-
gine cut-off switch. sure all indications come on.
Press the START/STOP button to start
the engine, then stop it by pressing the WARNING
START/STOP button a second time. Always attach the tether cord clip
NOTE: To allow engine starting, the to your PFD or to the wrist (wrist
tether cord cap must be properly in- strap required).
stalled on the engine cut-off switch
within 5 seconds of pressing the iBR System
START/STOP button.
NOTICE Ensure there is sufficient
Restart the engine, then stop it by re- space ahead and behind watercraft
moving the tether cord from the engine to safely carry out the iBR system
cut-off switch. test to avoid a collision. Watercraft
will move during test.
WARNING
Should the tether cord cap be 1. Remove the moorings securing the
loose or fail to remain on the en- watercraft to the dock.
gine cut-off switch, replace the 2. Start the engine and ensure the wa-
tether cord immediately in order tercraft does not move.
to avoid unsafe use. If remov-
ing the tether cord cap from the 3. On the left handlebar, depress the
engine cut-off switch or pressing iBR lever completely in, the wa-
the START/STOP button does not tercraft should move slowly back-
stop the engine, do not use the wards.
watercraft. See your authorized 4. Release the iBR lever, there should
Sea-Doo dealer. not be any reverse thrust.
What to Do After WARNING

Launching the Watercraft Always ensure proper iBR system
Check the items listed in the follow- operation before taking the water-
ing table after launching the watercraft craft out for a ride.
and before going for a ride.
Variable Trim System (VTS)
ITEM OPERATION ✓
With the engine running in forward
Check thrust, use the VTSTM system to move
Information Center the jet pump nozzle up, and then down
operation.
alternately to check VTS operation.
Intelligent Brake Confirm the VTS position indicator
Check
and Reverse movement in the information center.
operation.
System (iBR)
Variable Trim Check (if equipped).
System (VTS) operation.

PRE-RIDE INSPECTION
This page is
intentionally blank

WATERCRAFT
INFORMATION
_______________ 51
CONTROLS
smo2012-002-006_a
GTX 155/GTS S 155
52 ______________
CONTROLS
smo2012-002-008_a
GTX LIMITED/GTX iS LIMITED/RXT/WAKE PRO
smo2012-002-007_a
RXT-X/RXT-X aS
_______________ 53
CONTROLS
NOTE: Some indications, functions The throttle lever is spring loaded and
and features described in this section should return to rest position (idle)
may not apply to every PWC model, or when not pressed.
may be available as an option.
3) iBR Lever (intelligent
1) Handlebar Brake and Reverse)
The handlebar controls the direction of The iBR lever on the LH handlebar can
the watercraft. During forward opera- electronically command:
tion, turning the handlebar to the right – Brake
steers the watercraft to the right and
inversely. – Reverse
– Neutral.
WARNING NOTE: A minimum of 25% of iBR lever
Check handlebar and correspond- stroke is required to activate iBR func-
ing steering nozzle operation be- tions.
propulsion system.
When operating in reverse, steering

direction is reversed. Turning the han-
dlebar to the right while backing up
steers the watercraft to the left.
smo2009-002-202_a
2) Throttle Lever TYPICAL
The throttle lever on the RH handle- 1. iBR lever
2. Lever rest position
bar controls electronically the engine 3. 25% stroke required to activate iBR
speed. functions
4. Operating range
To increase or maintain watercraft
speed, pull the throttle lever with your At speed above 8 km/h (5 MPH),
finger. pulling the iBR lever will engage the
To decrease watercraft speed, release brake.
the throttle lever. NOTE: If water current is 8 km/h
(5 MPH) or above, the reverse can not
be engaged as the speed threshold for
At speed below 8 km/h (5 MPH),
pulling the iBR lever will engage re-
verse.
braking or reverse operation, the neu-
tral is engaged.
smo2009-002-201_a
1. Throttle lever
2. To accelerate
3. To decelerate
54 ______________
CONTROLS
WARNING
If throttle lever is still pulled in
when releasing the iBR lever, for-
ward movement will be initiated
celeration is not desired, release
the throttle lever.

tuned by trimming the iBR system.
smo2009-002-115_a
TYPICAL
for detailed instructions. 1. Tether cord cap on the engine cut-off switch
2. Tether cord secured to operator's PFD
4) Engine Cut-Off Switch
To stop engine, pull the tether cord cap
The engine cut-off switch is located in from the engine cut-off switch.
the middle of the handlebar.
WARNING
Should the engine be stopped, the
brake function and all watercraft
directional control is lost.
WARNING
Always disconnect tether cord
when watercraft is not in opera-
tion in order to prevent accidental
sdd2009-001-019_a
TYPICAL thorized use by others, children,
2. START/STOP button and to prevent theft.
To allow engine starting, the tether Radio Frequency Digitally Encoded

cord cap must be securely snapped to Security System (RF D.E.S.S.)
The tether cord cap contains an elec-
tronic circuit (D.E.S.S.TM key) that is
WARNING programmed to give it a unique elec-
Always attach the tether cord clip tronic serial number. This is the equiv-
to the operator's personal flota- alent of a conventional key.
tion device (PFD) or wrist (wrist The D.E.S.S. system reads the key in-
strap required). stalled on the engine cut-off switch and
only allows engine starting for keys it
recognizes.
The D.E.S.S. system brings great flex-
ibility. You can buy additional tether
cords and have the D.E.S.S. keys pro-
grammed for your watercraft.
A total of ten D.E.S.S. keys can be pro-
grammed.
_______________ 55
CONTROLS
To have a key programmed to your For more information on learning keys,

watercraft, see your authorized BRP refer to OPERATING MODES section.
Sea-Doo dealer.
5) Engine START/STOP
RF D.E.S.S. Key Recognition
Button
Two short beeps indicate the system
is ready to allow engine starting. Oth- The engine START/STOP button is lo-
erwise, refer to the TROUBLESHOOT- cated on the LH handlebar.
ING section.
RF D.E.S.S. Key Types
Two types of keys can be used:
– Normal key
– Learning key.
To ease key recognition, the tether
cord float comes in different colors.
KEY TYPE FLOAT COLOR sdd2009-001-019_a
Normal Yellow or Black TYPICAL

2. START/STOP button
Learning Green
Engine Starting and Stopping
The information center displays the Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
type of D.E.S.S. key used. for complete procedures on how to
start and stop the engine.
in
lap
Waking Up the Electrical System
AM
RPMgal/h
Press the START/STOP button once
without installing the tether cord on
This will power up the electrical sys-
tem; the information center will cycle
TYPE OF KEY IS DISPLAYED HERE then go blank after a few seconds.
Message possibilities: The electrical system will stay pow-
– NORMAL KEY ered up for approximately 3 minutes
– LEARNING KEY. after the START/STOP button was de-
pressed.
The Sea-Doo learning key, limits the This function allows the suspension
speed of the watercraft and the en- to be activated (if applicable) without
gine torque, therefore enabling first starting the engine.
time users and less experienced op- NOTE: If the START/STOP button is
erators to learn how to operate the pressed and held without the tether
watercraft while gaining the necessary cord installed, the information cen-
confidence and control. ter displays will stay on as long as the
The learning mode offer also the possi- START/STOP button is held.
bility of setting the maximum speed of
the watercraft.
56 ______________
CONTROLS
6) VTS (Variable Trim It is used to activate or deactivate

System) Button (all SPORT mode.
Models Except GTX Refer to OPERATING MODES subsec-
155 and GTX S 155) tion for details.
This watercraft is equipped with a pro-
grammable high performance VTS. 8) ECO Button
It provides watercraft pitch trim adjust- The ECO button is located on the LH
ments by adjusting the vertical position handlebar.
of the jet nozzle.
The VTS can be electrically trimmed to
desired attitude, or to one of two pre-
set trim positions.
Press VTS control button (up or down
button) to adjust riding attitude of the
watercraft.
smo2012-002-009_b
TYPICAL
1. ECO button
It is used to activate or deactivate ECO

mode.
tion for details.
sdd2009-001-019_c

1. Bow up
9) MODE/SET Buttons
2. Bow down These buttons are located on the RH
side handlebar.
section for details. Press MODE button to scroll through
various functions available through the
information center.
7) Sport Button
Press SET button to select the desired
The Sport button is located on the LH function, navigate through a function
handlebar. submenu, or to save any modified set-
tings.
smo2012-002-009_a
TYPICAL
1. Sport button
_______________ 57
CONTROLS
sdd2009-001-024_b
smo2011-002-009_a
TYPICAL
1. MODE TYPICAL
2. SET 1. Cruise button
3. UP/DOWN button 2. UP and DOWN button
10) UP/DOWN Buttons It is used to activate or deactivate

CRUISE mode or to engage SLOW
These buttons are located on the RH SPEED mode.
side of the handlebar.
Refer to OPERATING MODES for de-
smo2012-003-007_b
TYPICAL
1. Up button
2. Down button

make a selection or change a settings
through the information center.
11) Cruise Button (Except

RXT-X and RXT-X aS
Models)
The Cruise button is located on the RH
side of the handlebar, just below the
UP and DOWN button.
58 ______________
WARNING
1 9 3 4 8 2
4 13 4 4
6 15 10 12 16 5
smo2012-001-007_e
GTX 155/GTX S 155
_______________ 59
1 4 9 3 7 8 4 2
10 13 14 4
6 15 11 12 16 5
smo2012-002-005_a
GTX LIMITED/GTX iS LIMITED/RXT/WAKE PRO
1 4 9 3 17 8 4 2
10 13 4
6 14 12 5
smo2012-002-003_c
RXT-X/RXT-X aS
60 ______________
1) Speedometer
The speedometer, located in the LH
side of the information center, pro-
vides an analog indication of the speed
of the watercraft in miles per hour
(MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
(Global Positioning System) incorpo-
rated within the information center.
If for some reason the GPS signal is
lost, a default mode is used whereby,
the speed is calculated using infor-
mation received from other systems
to provide an estimated watercraft
speed.
2) Tachometer
The tachometer provides an analog in-
dication of the revolutions per minute
(RPM) of the engine. Multiply the in-
dicated number by 1000 to obtain the
actual engine RPM.
3) Multifunction Gauge
The multifunction gauge, located in the
center of the information center, is ca-
pable of displaying different indications
simultaneously.
Numerical and multifunction displays
in the digital screen indicator can be
used to display various indications, or
for selecting modes of operation and
changing settings as explained in their
respective sections.
_______________ 61

GTX 155 GTX
GTX RXT-X/ WAKE
GTX S LIMITED RXT
LIMITED RXT-X aS PRO
155 iS
TOURING mode
X X X X N.A. X
indicator
SPORT mode
X X X X N.A. X
indicator
Fuel level indication X X X X X X
Hour meter display X X X X X X
Water depth - - - -
X X
indication
ECO mode indicator X X X X X X
CRUISE mode
X N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
indicator
iBR position indicator X X X X X X
SKI mode indicator - N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
VTS position
X X X X X X
indication
Boost gauge N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. X N.A.
iS indicator N.A. N.A. X N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. = Not Available or Not Active
62 ______________
4) Indicator Lights
Indicator lights (pilot lamps), inform you of a selected function or a system anom-
aly.
An indicator light may be accompanied by a scrolling message in the multifunction
display.
See the following table for information on the usual pilot lamps. Refer to MONI-
TORING SYSTEM for details on malfunction pilot lamps.
PILOT
LAMPS (ON)
Maintenance required. You may seek service
from an authorized Sea-Doo dealer, repair
shop, or person of your own choosing for
MAINTENANCE
maintenance, repair, or replacement. Please
REMINDER
refer to the US EPA EMISSIONS-RELATED
WARRANTY contained herein for information
about warranty claims.
Low fuel level, approx. 25% tank capacity,
LOW-FUEL 14 L (3.7 U.S. gal.) or fuel level sensor
disconnected.
Scrolling SLOW CRUISE mode or SLOW SPEED MODE
SPEED MODE engaged. Refer to OPERATING MODES
message subsection.
Scrolling SKI MODE Ski Mode activated. Refer to OPERATING

messages MODES subsection.
SPORT Scrolling SPORT Sport Mode activated. Refer to OPERATING

MODE
MODE messages MODES subsection.
ALL MODELS EXCEPT RXT-X/RXT-X aS MODELS
Fuel Economy Mode activated. Refer to

FUEL ECO
OPERATING MODES subsection.
RXT-X/RXT-X aS
Fuel Economy Mode activated. Refer to

FUEL ECO
OPERATING MODES subsection.
_______________ 63
5) Fuel Level Indication GTX 155 and GTX S 155 Models

A bar gauge located in the bottom RH LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING
side of the multifunction display con-
tinuously indicates the amount of fuel Last 2 fuel gauge
in the fuel tank while riding. segments Flashing
Fuel tank symbol (LCD)
in
Audible warning (one
lap
AM
RPMgal/h long beep)
Periodically
Scrolling LOW FUEL
WARNING message
6) VTS Position
FUEL LEVEL INDICATION The VTS position indication located in
the bottom LH side of the digital screen
When the fuel tank is full, 8 segments shows the riding attitude of the water-
(bars) of the indicator are turned on. craft.
The top segment is not used.
A single segment of a bar gauge type
indicator is turned on to indicate the rel-
It is active when there is only 2 seg-
ments of fuel indicated (approxi-
mately 25% fuel tank capacity or 14 L
(3.7 U.S. gal.). in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
All Models Except GTX 155

and GTX S 155
Last 2 fuel gauge
segments ON VTS POSITION INDICATION
Fuel tank symbol (LED) Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Audible warning (one for more details on using the VTS.
long beep)
Periodically 7) iS Position (GTX Limited
Scrolling LOW FUEL iS Only)
WARNING message
The iS display (intelligent Suspension)
provides a visual indication of the rela-
tive height of the suspension.
It also indicates if the suspension is in
AUTO mode of operation.
64 ______________
1 2
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
1. iS position indicator
2. iS AUTO mode indicator
When the suspension system is oper-

ating in AUTO mode, the AUTO indica-
tor and all bar segments of the position
indicator will be on.
When the suspension height is ad-
justed manually using the UP/DOWN
buttons (while in iS mode), the system
switches to MANUAL mode of opera-
tion. The AUTO indication disappears
and only one bar segment of the posi-
tion indicator will be on.
for more information on using the sus-
pension.
8) Numerical Display
The numerical display is used to pro-
vide a variety of indications as selected
by the operator using the DISPLAY
function in the multifunction display.
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
NUMERICAL DISPLAY
_______________ 65
The available indications are dependent on the watercraft model or option in-
stalled.
GTX
GTX
LIMITED, RXT-X
AVAILABLE INDICATIONS IN 155, WAKE
GTX RXT aS,
NUMERICAL DISPLAY GTX PRO
LIMITED RXT-X
S 155
iS
Engine temperature - - - X -
Lake water temperature N.A. X N.A. N.A. N.A.
Clock X X X X X
CRUISE SPEED setting X X X - X
SLOW SPEED MODE setting X X X - X
VTS preset - X X X X
VTS settings (through gauge) X N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
SKI MODE settings - - - - X
Fuel consumption
X X X X X
Fuel autonomy - - -
X X
Lap timer - - - X -
Top speed/RPM - - - -
X
Average speed/RPM
Altitude N.A. X N.A. N.A. N.A.
When the information center is first powered up, the numerical display defaults to
the last selected indication.
66 ______________
9) Multifunction Display WARNING

The multifunction display is used to: Never use the depth sounder as a
– Display the WELCOME message warning device to ride in shallow
on power up. water.
– Display the KEY recognition mes-
sage. 11) Lake Water
– Provide various indications as se- Temperature Display (GTX
lected by the operator.
Limited and GTX Limited iS
– Activating and setting various func-
tions and modes of operation.
Models)
– Display scrolling messages of func- Continuously displays surface water
tion activation or system faults. temperature.
multifunction display is the compass in
lap
AM
direction. RPMgal/h

(GTX Limited and GTX
Limited iS Models)
smo2012-002-001_f
The water depth display provides an in-
dication of the lake water depth.
The numerical display may also be se-
The system is capable of indicating wa- lected to display water temperature.
ter depth under the hull in single incre- See NUMERICAL DISPLAY in this sec-
ments up to 50 m (164 ft). tion.
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the To change the unit of measurement
display may stop indicating. The dis- (°C or °F), see your authorized Sea-Doo
play ability to provide an indication of dealer.
the water depth depends on the condi-
tions of use. 12) Hour Meter Display (HR)
2 Continuously displays the accumu-
lated engine hours.
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
WATER DEPTH DISPLAY
1. Depth finder indicator

HOUR METER DISPLAY
2. Water depth indication
NOTE: The water depth indication is

only available when a depth sounder is
installed and detected.
_______________ 67
13) iBR Position

position. in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
– N (neutral) 1
– F (forward)
– R (reverse). 2
in
COMPASS (ALL MODELS EXCEPT
lap
AM
RPMgal/h RXT-X/RXT-X aS)
2. Compass active indicator
mBAR PSI
iBR POSITION INDICATOR BOOST
14) Compass 1
A GPS incorporated in the information
center provides the indication in the
multifunction display. 2
The cardinal points, intermediate car- COMPASS (RXT-X/RXT-X aS
dinal points, as well as the azimuth the MODELS)
watercraft is travelling are displayed
in the multifunction display by default 1. Compass indication
when the watercraft is moving. 2. Compass active indicator
For a compass indication to be dis-
played, the GPS must have a good link NOTE: The compass indication is only
with the navigation satellites. available above 5 km/h (3 MPH).
All Models Except GTX 155
and GTX S 155 WARNING
This is confirmed when the COMPASS Use the compass as a guide only.
active indicator is visible in the digital Not to be used for precision navi-
screen. gation purposes.

(all Models Except
RXT-X/RXT-X aS)
When the TOURING mode indicator is
ON, the default TOURING mode is ac-
tive.
68 ______________
RXT-X/RXT-X aS
in
There is no sport mode indicator in the
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
multifunction display, only a SPORT
MODE indicator light turns ON in the
tachometer.
17) Boost Gauge

(RXT-X/RXT-X aS)
mBAR PSI
For more information on the touring BOOST
mode, refer to OPERATING MODES

subsection.
in
BOOST INDICATOR
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
The boost gauge indicates the mani-

fold pressure of the engine provided
by the supercharger.
Navigating the
SPORT MODE INDICATOR (ALL Multifunction Display
MODELS EXCEPT RXT-X/RXT-X aS) When the electrical system is pow-
ered up and the cluster has completed
When sport mode of operation is se- its self test function, a WELCOME
lected, the sport mode indicator will ABOARD SEA-DOO scrolling mes-
come on and stay on until sport mode sage will appear for a few seconds.
is deactivated, or the watercraft is shut After the welcome message, nothing
down. will appear in the display until the wa-
NOTE: The sport mode is not the de- tercraft is operated.
fault riding mode. To be active, it must When the watercraft is being oper-
be selected after starting the engine. ated, the multifunction display pro-
For instructions on how to engage vides an indication of compass heading
sport mode, refer to OPERATING or scrolling messages from the moni-
MODES subsection. toring system.
The multifunction display is also used
GTX Limited/GTX Limited to display a menu for the selection of
iS/RXT/WAKE PRO various functions which, permit chang-
In addition to the sport mode indicator ing the numerical display indication,
in the multifunction display, a SPORT system modes of operation, settings,
MODE indicator light turns ON in the active system fault codes, and a lap
tachometer. timer.
_______________ 69
WARNING NOTE: The fault code function is only

available when there is an active fault.
Selecting various numerical dis- The settings and key mode functions
plays, system modes of opera- are only available when the engine is
tion or changing settings should shut off. The key mode function is only
only be carried out with the water- available with a normal key.
craft stopped. Selecting these var-
ious functions while operating the Function Description
watercraft at speed is not recom-
mended as it deters your attention Lap Timer
from situational awareness.
The lap timer can be used to record up
to 50 individual lap times.
To activate and use the lap timer, carry
in
out the following:
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
function display.
in
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY lap

AM
RPMgal/h
NOTE: To change the unit of measure-

ment or the language displayed, see
Selecting Functions
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
When operating at speed, the multi-
function display normally provides an LAP TIME
indication of the compass direction and
azimuth the watercraft is traveling. 2. Press the SET button to enter the
To select the various functions avail- function, the lap timer will be acti-
able through the multifunction display, vated and visible in the display.
press the MODE button repeatedly un-
til the desired function is visible: 2
– LAP TIME in
lap
AM
– SKI MODE RPMgal/h
1
– LAP TIME
– VTS MODE
– DISPLAY
– FAULT CODES FUNCTION SELECTED: LAP TIMER
– KEY MODE
1. Lap time
– SETTINGS.
2. Lap count
Then press the SET button to enter that
function. 3. To start the timer, press the SET but-
ton.
70 ______________
NOTE: The timer starts immediately – Average fuel flow per hour (gal/h or
when pressing the SET button. l/h)
4. To record each lap time, press the – Distance to empty (Mi or Km)
SET button at the start of each lap. – Time to empty (h or min).
NOTE: The lap time will be recorded, The fuel consumption functions are
the lap counter in the numerical display not continuously active.
will count the number of laps recorded, A fuel consumption function becomes
and the timer will continue to run. active only when selected as the indi-
5. To save the last lap and stop the cation in the numerical display.
timer, press the MODE button. When the LOW FUEL indications
To view each lap time, use the UP or come on in the multifunction gauge,
DOWN button. The lap counter will the "TIME TO EMPTY" and "DISTANCE
indicate which lap is indicated. TO EMPTY" functions will indicate "0"
To view the cumulative lap time of all (zero) if they are the selected indica-
laps recorded, use the UP or DOWN tion.
button until ALL is visible in the lap To display the watercraft fuel con-
counter. sumption, carry out the following:
2 until FUEL CONSUMPTION is visi-
in
lap
ble in the multifunction display.
AM
RPMgal/h
1
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
MESSAGE DISPLAYED: LAP TIMER
1. Total time
2. ALL is displayed here MESSAGE DISPLAYED
To reset the lap timer and lap counter, FUEL CONSUMPTION
timer and counter are reset to 0 (zero). 2. Press the UP or DOWN button to
toggle to the desired fuel consump-
Ski Mode tion display mode.
Ski mode is used for repeated con-
trolled launches when towing a skier
or wakeboarder. Refer to OPERATING
MODES for more details.
Fuel Consumption
The FUEL CONSUMPTION function
is used to display the watercrafts fuel
consumption in four different ways.
l/h)
_______________ 71
Settings
2
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
– Clock setting. Refer to MULTI-
1 FUNCTION GAUGE SETUP
– iBR override function for mainte-
nance.
Changing Numerical
FUEL CONSUMPTION DISPLAY Display Indication
MODE To change the indication in the numeri-
message 1. Press the MODE button on the RH
2. Fuel consumption value handlebar repeatedly until DISPLAY
is visible in the multifunction display.
play. in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
will be displayed in the numerical dis-
play. Double click the SET button to
reset the average fuel consumption in-
dication. The display will momentarily
indicate zero (0).
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
VTS Mode
DISPLAY
The VTS MODE function is used to
manually set the VTS or change VTS
PRESET settings. Refer to OPERAT- 2. Press the SET button to enter the
ING INSTRUCTIONS subsection for DISPLAY function.
details. 3. Press the UP or DOWN button until
the preferred available indication ap-
Display pears.
The DISPLAY function is used to – RPM
change the indication in the numerical – SPEED
display. Refer to CHANGING NUMER- – LAKE TEMPERATURE (only on
ICAL DISPLAY INDICATION. models GTX Limited and GTX
Fault Codes Limited iS 260)
– DEPTH
The FAULT CODES function is used
to display active fault codes. Refer to – ENGINE TEMP
MONITORING SYSTEM subsection. – ALTITUDE
– TOP SPEED
Key Mode – AVG SPEED
The KEY MODE function is used for – TOP RPM
changing LEARNING key settings. Re- – AVG RPM
for details. – CLOCK.
72 ______________
Multifunction Gauge
2
Setup
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
Changing Clock Setting
1
tifunction display.

in
lap
AM
1. Type of selected numerical display RPMgal/h
indication
2. Applicable value
4. Press the SET button to select and

save the preferred indication, or
wait for the display function to time MESSAGE DISPLAYED
be automatically saved. SETTINGS
The following abbreviations are used in 2. Press the UP or DOWN button re-
the numerical display: peatedly until CLOCK is visible.
– FT or M
– RPM 2
– MPH or Km/h in
lap
– °F or °C AM
RPMgal/h
– AM or PM 1
– Gal/h or l/h.
Resetting Numerical
Display Indication
tions can be reset: 1. CLOCK message
– Average fuel consumption 2. Time
– Top speed
– Average speed 3. Press the SET button to enter the
– Top RPM function. CHANGE CLOCK OFF-
– Average RPM. SET message will be displayed.
To reset indications, double click the
SET button. The numerical display will
NOTE: Each of these functions be-
come active ONLY when selected as
the numerical display indication.
_______________ 73
2
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h

CLOCK OFFSET

2. Time

adjust the clock to the correct local
time.
play.
NOTE: The clock uses the GPS sig-

Language Setting
74 ______________
EQUIPMENT
NOTE: Illustrations may not be accurate for every model and are only provided as
a visual guide.
2 11 9 18,19 1 6 5 6
10
8
3,4 9
10
15 13 12 14 10
smo2012-002-013_a
TYPICAL
17 16
7
smo2011-002-001_c
WAKE PRO MODELS
_______________ 75
EQUIPMENT
1) Glove Box
A small, storage compartment for per-
sonal articles.
Pull up on cover latch to open glove
box.
smo2009-002-121
GLOVE BOX LINER BAG
2) Front Storage Bin

A watertight storage bin that can be
used to carry larger personal articles
is located under the front cover. The
storage bin is self-contained and re-
smo2009-002-120_a movable.
TYPICAL — GLOVE BOX
1. Cover latch
Glove Box Organizer (GTX Limited

and GTX Limited iS Models)
A removable glove box organizer can
be used for storing and carrying per-
sonal items.
smo2009-002-136
FRONT STORAGE BIN
Storage Bin Access

Open the front storage compartment
cover by pulling upwards on the two
cover latch handles (one each side).
sdd2009-001-051
GLOVE BOX ORGANIZER
Glove Box Liner Bag (GTX Limited

and GTX Limited iS Models)
A glove box liner bag protects items
stored in the glove box. The liner bag
is easily removed from the glove box
by pulling it out using the two eyelets.
smo2009-002-122_a
TYPICAL - STORAGE BIN ACCESS

1. Front cover latch handles (one each side)
76 ______________
EQUIPMENT
How to Open Storage Bin Cover

Release cover latches then pull on
cover handle to open.
smo2009-002-124_a
STORAGE BIN REMOVAL

Step 1: Push back on storage bin latches
Step 2: Lift and tilt forward to release front tabs
smo2009-002-123_a
WARNING
HOW TO OPEN STORAGE BIN
Step 1: Release cover latches Never store or carry anything un-
Step 2: Pull cover open derneath storage bin, or between
the moving deck and fixed deck.
NOTICE The maximum load al-
lowable for the front storage bin is
9 kg (20 lb) evenly distributed. Storage Bin Installation
As you insert the storage bin in the
WARNING front storage compartment, tilt it for-
ward to insert the storage bin front
Never leave any heavy or break- tabs in their retainers underneath the
able objects loose in the front stor- storage cover shock support.
age bin. Do not overload. Never
operate the watercraft with any
storage compartment cover open.
Storage Bin Removal

Ensure the latches on the storage bin
cover are properly locked.
Push back on the latches that lock the
storage bin in position. Then pull up on
the storage bin handle while tilting the
bin forward to release the front tabs,
and remove it from the watercraft.
smo2009-002-125_a
Step 1: Insert storage bin front tabs
Push down on aft end of storage bin

to secure in place with locking latches
(one each side).
_______________ 77
EQUIPMENT
smo2009-002-126_a
Step 1: Push down onto latches to secure

smo2009-002-127_a
Ensure storage bin is properly inserted 1. Fire extinguisher holder location
in the locking latches, and ensure the
latches are locked forward. The RH storage bin can be removed for
NOTICE Never operate the water- servicing the watercraft.
craft if the storage bin is not properly To remove storage bin, pull off the two
secured. plastic rivets within the bin (fore and
aft) then lift the storage bin out of the
All Models Without Suspension fixed deck.
NOTICE Do not operate water-
craft if the front storage bin is not
installed, otherwise water will enter
bilge.
3) Rear Storage Bins

Two storage bins are located under the
rear boarding platform. They are Ideal
for storing items such as a towrope,
first aid kit, fire extinguisher, and other smo2009-002-128
items. BATTERY AND FUSE ACCESS - RH
STORAGE BIN REMOVED
When the boarding platform is closed,
it serves as the cover for both storage NOTICE Never operate the water-
bins. craft without both rear storage bins
The RH storage bin is specially de- installed. Always ensure the rear
signed for storing an approved fire ex- boarding platform is properly closed
tinguisher (sold separately). and latched over the storage bins. If
not properly latch, water rushing
over the platform during extreme
maneuvers may open the platform
and dislodge the RH storage bin.
Should this happen, water will en-
ter the bilge and may lead to engine
damages or electrical problems.
78 ______________
EQUIPMENT
4) Fire Extinguisher CAUTION Ensure the latch is

Holder properly locked onto the pin.
6) Passenger Handholds
Use the support inside the RH storage
bin under the rear boarding platform, The seat strap provides a handhold for
and secure the extinguisher using the a passenger to hold on to when riding.
rubber tie-down. The sides of the molded grab handle at
Refer to REAR STORAGE BINS for il- the rear of the seat also provide a hand-
lustration. hold for a passenger. The rear portion
of the molded grab handle provides a
NOTE: Fire extinguisher is sold sepa- handhold for the skier/wakeboarder (if
rately. applicable) spotter or boarding the wa-
Models Without Suspension tercraft from the water.
The fire extinguisher support is located NOTICE Never use the molded
in the front storage bin. grab handle to tow anything or to lift
the watercraft.
5) Seat
Opening the seat provides access to
The seat latch is located at the back
end of the seat. The forward end of
the seat is mounted on a hinge.
To open the seat, pull up on the latch
handle and lift the seat fully open. A
cylinder at the front of the seat serves
to hold the seat in the fully open posi-
tion.
smo2009-002-130_a
TYPICAL - PASSENGER HANDHOLDS

1. Seat strap
2. Molded grab handle
7) Boarding Step
A convenient step used for boarding
the watercraft from the water.
smo2009-002-129_a
TYPICAL - SEAT LATCH

1. Seat latch handle
2. Latch pin
3. Pin insertion hole
To latch seat, close the seat and firmly

push down on the rear portion of the
seat.
_______________ 79
EQUIPMENT
WARNING
Be aware of the iBR gate move-
shutting down the engine or using
the iBR lever. Automatic move-
ment of the gate may squeeze fin-
gers or toes of people taking a hold
on the back or your PWC.
smo2009-002-132_a
TYPICAL 8) Boarding Platform

1. Boarding step
A boarding platform covers the rear
deck area.
WARNING Two indentations in the platform are
The engine must be shut off before used as foot rests for the rear facing
attempting to board the watercraft spotter when towing a skier or tuber.
using the boarding step.
Two grab handles near the rear edge of
the platform provide hand holds for a
Pull down the step with your hand and person boarding from the water.
hold until a foot or a knee is put on the
step. Models with Suspension
The platform also serves as a water-
tight cover for two rear storage bins
that are accessible when opening the
platform. It is hinged to the fixed deck
at the rear, and held closed by two
latches at its front corners.
To open the boarding platform, pull up
on each latch handle and lift the deck
fully up. A cylinder on the left side is
capable of holding the platform open.
smo2009-002-133
BOARDING STEP HELD DOWN FOR

BOARDING FROM WATER
NOTICE
– Never use the step for boarding a
watercraft that is out of water.
– Never use the step for pulling,
towing, diving or jumping, or
any other purpose other than as a
boarding step.
– Only one person at a time on the smo2009-002-131_c
step. GTX LIMITED iS MODEL ILLUSTRATED

2. Spotter foot rests
3. Grab handles
4. Latch handles
80 ______________
EQUIPMENT
9) Speed-Ties (GTX WARNING

Limited and GTX
– Do not use retractable ropes
Limited iS Models) when watercraft engine is run-
Two speed-ties are provided for moor- ning.
ing of the watercraft. – Do not use to tow a watercraft.
One speed-tie is located just below the Do not use to pull a person or
LH handlebar, the other is located in any object behind or to the side
the center rear edge of the boarding of the watercraft.
platform. – Do not use speed-tie rope as a
tie-down on a trailer.
NOTICE
– This system is designed for tem-
porary use in normal conditions.
Do not use as a permanent moor-
ing system, or in extreme condi-
tions (strong winds, waves, etc.).
– Regularly inspect rope condition;
do not tie up watercraft with a
damaged rope. Replacing BRP
smo2009-002-134_a rope by any other rope will void
1. Front speed-tie the speed-tie warranty.
– If speed ties are used in salt wa-
ter conditions, the rope should
be regularly rinsed thoroughly
with fresh water to prevent salt
buildup in the rope and speed-tie
mechanism. This will help extend
the life of the rope and ensure
proper operation the mechanism.
NOTE: The rope of the speed-tie is a
wear item that is not covered under
normal warranty.
Refer to MAINTENANCE section for
speed-tie cleaning instructions.
smo2009-002-131_d
1. Rear speed-tie Mooring your PWC Using the

Speed-Ties
1. With your watercraft parallel to the
dock and at a standstill next to the
dock mooring cleat, release the
front speed-tie by lifting the lever.
2. Grasp and pull on the mooring line
stopper to extract enough line to
reach and tie off to the mooring
cleat.
_______________ 81
EQUIPMENT
NOTICE
– Do not moor watercraft with only
one retractable rope. Always use
front and rear systems together.
– During mooring, do not over-
tighten ropes. Always leave a lit-
tle slack. Take tides into consider-
ation if applicable. Always moor
watercraft with the rope and not
sdd2009-001-050_a with its plastic end.
TYPICAL - FRONT SPEED TIE – The mooring system does not
1. Speed-tie mooring line protect watercraft against im-
2. Mooring line stopper pacts with the dock. Use dock
3. Speed-tie locking lever
bumpers (cushions) in combina-
3. Push down on the speed-tie locking tion with retractable ropes to pro-
lever to lock the mooring line. tect your watercraft.
– Always moor watercraft to a
NOTICE Always ensure the dock of appropriate height using
speed-tie rope is properly locked. strong mooring cleats.
Make sure mooring rope is not in
contact with any components that Casting Off Using Speed-Ties
could lead to watercraft damaged or 1. When casting off, first untie the
premature rope wear. rear speed-tie. Retract the mooring
4. When speed-tie rope is secured to rope, hold the mooring rope stopper
the dock cleat with the watercraft near its receptacle and lift the lock-
still parallel to the dock, carefully ing lever. Once the mooring rope
step onto the dock. Step from the is retracted, snap the mooring rope
foot well or seat of the watercraft, stopper into its receptacle.
do not stand on the rail of the wa- 2. Step onto the watercraft. Be sure to
tercraft as this could cause it to be- position your weight over the center
come unstable. of the watercraft as much as possi-
5. Hold the watercraft parallel with the ble to maintain watercraft stability.
dock and repeat the tying operation 3. Carefully move to the operators' po-
with the rear speed-tie. When using sition.
the rear rope, be careful not to fall. 4. Release the front mooring rope
NOTE: Docking procedure is basi- from the dock cleat, retract it and
cally the same if there are passengers lock the stopper as with the rear
aboard. However, the operator should speed-tie.
ask that passengers remain still and 5. Push or drift the watercraft away
maintain their weight centered over from the dock.
the seat during docking. The passen-
gers must step onto the dock only after
front mooring rope is secured to dock CAUTION Be careful when re-
cleat. The operator must remain on tracting mooring rope. Always hold
the watercraft to keep the watercraft the stopper near its receptacle be-
parallel with the dock during passen- fore unlocking the lever. Do not
gers landing. stand in the path of a retracting rope.
82 ______________
EQUIPMENT
CAUTION Ensure that ropes

are properly retracted and that stop-
pers are properly snapped in before
starting watercraft.
10) Front and Rear Eyelets

Eyelets can be used for mooring, tow-
ing and as tie-down points when trailer-
ing your watercraft. smo2009-002-132_b
TYPICAL
Front Eyelet 1. Eyelets
11) Mooring Cleats

These cleats can be used for tempo-
rary docking such as when refueling.
smo2008-001-020_a
TYPICAL
1. Front eyelet
Rear Eyelets smo2009-002-134_b
TYPICAL
1. Mooring cleats
NOTICE Never use mooring cleats

to pull or lift the watercraft.

densation.
smo2011-002-010_a
TYPICAL
1. Eyelet
_______________ 83
EQUIPMENT
SPONSON ADJUSTMENT
GUIDELINE
Increase lateral grip for
faster turning response.
Race Race position is NOT
recommended when riding
with passenger(s).
smo2009-002-135_a Offer a balance
TYPICAL combination between Race
1. Drain plugs Sport and Freeride positions.
2. Tighten (factory Preferred position for
3. Loosen setting) overall riding conditions
NOTICE Ensure drain plugs are (especially rough water) or
properly secured prior to launching if riding with passenger(s).
the watercraft in water. Decrease lateral grip for a
Freeride
more playful behavior.
13) Adjustable Sponsons
(RXT-X aS)
The adjustable sponsons change the
lateral grip of the watercraft.
smo2012-003-027_a
smo2012-003-018_a
1. Freeride
TYPICAL - LH SIDE SHOWN 2. Sport (factory setting)
1. Adjustable sponson 3. Race
Sponson Adjustment Guideline How to Adjust Sponson

The sponsons offer 3 possible height NOTE: It is highly recommended to
settings. have this adjustment carried out by
your Sea-Doo dealer.
NOTE: When adjusting the spon-
sons to a different setting than factory Remove and DISCARD the 5 self-
(Sport), the trim tabs should be left to adhesive screws.
factory setting (0).
WARNING
After adjusting sponsons, always
familiarize yourself with the new
handling characteristics of the wa-
tercraft.
84 ______________
EQUIPMENT
14) Adjustable Trim Tabs

(RXT-X aS)
The adjustable trim tabs change the
bow attitude of the watercraft.
smo2012-003-018_b
1. Self-adhesive screws
Reposition sponson to desired posi-

tion.
Install NEW self-adhesive screws and
torque to specification.
smo2012-002-010
WARNING RH SIDE - TRIM TAB
Whenever the sponsons are ad-
justed, the self-adhesive screws Trim Tab Adjustment Guideline
must be replaced and torqued to
specification. Otherwise, loss of With properly adjusted trim tabs, the
sponson may occur which could watercraft should have an neutral atti-
cause a loss of control of the wa- tude, especially when riding in rough
tercraft. waters (waves or choppy water).
The trim tabs provide 5 different set-
TIGHTENING TORQUE
tings.
NOTE: When adjusting the trim tabs
Sponson to a different setting than factory (0),
screws the adjustable sponsons should be left
(P/N 250 000 18 N•m ± 2 N•m to factory setting (Sport).
572) (NEW (159 lbf•in ± 18 lbf•in)
SCREWS See table below for trim tab adjust-
REQUIRED) ment characteristics and effects, ac-
cording to condition.
side. WARNING
After trim tab adjustment, always
WARNING familiarize yourself with the new
Both sponsons must be installed behavior of the watercraft.
and adjusted at the same height.
Missing sponsons or improper ad-
_______________ 85
EQUIPMENT
TRIM TAB ADJUSTMENT GUIDELINE

PWC SPEED
TRIM TAB BOW WATER STEERING
(CALM
POSITION ATTITUDE CONDITION RESPONSE
WATER)
(+1)
+1 (+1)
0 F
-1
-2 (-3)
(-3) (-3)
(-3)
-3
NOTE: F (0) = factory position.

How to Adjust Trim Tabs
Remove bolt and lock nut from link rod.
smo2012-002-012 _a
1. Trim tab positions
Install a NEW lock nut and tighten to

smo2012-002-010_a specification.
1. Bolt
2. Lock nut WARNING
Adjust trim tab to desired position. Locking devices when removed
must be replaced.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Link rod lock 13 N•m ± 1 N•m
nut (115 lbf•in ± 9 lbf•in)
86 ______________
EQUIPMENT

side.
WARNING
Both trims tabs must be adjusted
at the same height. Improper ad-
15) Bow Stabilizer (RXT-X smo2009-001-002
aS) SKI/WAKEBOARD POST EXTENDED
The bow stabilizers located on each To retract the post, push straight down
side of the hull gives the following ben- on the top of the post.
efits in rough water conditions:
If the post becomes difficult to extend
– Reduce bow diving or retract, simultaneously push in on
– Better hull tracking both sides of the locking clip toward
– Diminish splash. front of watercraft.
16) Ski/Wakeboard Post

(WAKE Pro model)
Pull up on the knob to extend the post.
Ensure both sections of post are fully
extended and properly locked before
attaching ski or wakeboard rope.
smo2009-001-003_a
PUSH TOWARD FRONT TO UNLOCK AND

REMOVE POST
1. Locking clip
WARNING
Make sure ski/wakeboard post is
fully extended and locked before
smo2009-001-001_a use. Completely retract and lock
TYPICAL - SKI/WAKEBOARD POST when not used. Use caution with
RETRACTED skier/wakeboarder in tow as tow
1. Pull on this knob to extend rope may backlash to watercraft
when released. Never perform a
sharp turn when towing a skier,
wakeboarder or any toy. . Always
store tow rope when not in use.
_______________ 87
EQUIPMENT
NOTICE The ski/wakeboard post is

boarder with a maximum gross
Always have one person other than the
operator as an observer.
NOTE: The handles on the ski/wake-
board post are provided as a handhold smo2010-002-009_a
for the observer. 1. Hooked portion of rack in lower bracket
NOTICE Never use the ski/ 2. Rotate the rack upwards and push
wakeboard post to tow other water- the top of the rack inboard until the
crafts. Respect the maximum load handle locks into the top retaining
limit rating of the ski/wakeboard bracket.
post. Overloading can affect ma-
neuverability, stability and perfor- WARNING
mance.
If rack is not properly secured on
17) Wakeboard Rack the watercraft, it could become
loose and detach unexpectedly,
(WAKE Pro model) creating a risk of injury to people
A convenient removable rack to carry a nearby. Periodically ensure the
wakeboard on the watercraft when on rack is properly locked on its sup-
the water. port.
NOTE: The wakeboard rack can be in-
stalled on the LH side of the watercraft. 3. When installing a wakeboard on
To install: the rack, position wakeboard fin(s)
outward with the heel of the boots
1. Insert the hooks on the lower por- facing down near freeboard of the
tion of the rack into the lower retain- PWC.
ing bracket located on the hull under
the LH side bumper. 4. Secure wakeboard using bungee
cords.
WARNING
To avoid possible injuries and cuts
from the wakeboards fin(s), al-
ways place FIN(S) OUTWARDS.
smo2010-002-007_a
RETAINING BRACKETS FOR WAKEBOARD

RACK
1. Lower retaining bracket
2. Upper retaining bracket
smo2010-002-008
WAKEBOARD INSTALLED WITH FINS

OUTWARD
88 ______________
EQUIPMENT
5. After installation, pull and push WARNING

wakeboard to ensure it is tightly
secured to rack. When trailering the watercraft,
NEVER leave a wakeboard in-
WARNING stalled on the rack. Otherwise,
wakeboard fin(s) could cause in-
If the wakeboard is not properly se- jury to bystanders or wakeboard
cured on the rack, it could become could fly off on the road. The
loose and detach unexpectedly, bungee cords are under tension
creating a risk of injury to people and could spring back and whip
nearby. To avoid: someone when released. Use cau-
– Inspect bungee cords condition tion.
– Secure wakeboard properly on To remove the wakeboard rack, de-
rack. press the lever at the top of the rack
– Periodically ensure the board is and remove it from its retaining brack-
properly attached. ets.
NOTE: When the wakeboard is re-

moved from its rack, secure the
bungee cords so that they will not
move freely when riding watercraft.
NOTICE The rack is designed to
hold one wakeboard. Do not use to
hold more than one wakeboard or
to transport skis or any other object.
Do not use rack(s) as mooring points
or to reboard.
WARNING smo2010-002-010_a
WAKEBOARD RACK REMOVAL

With wakeboard and/or rack in- 1. Press this handle to release wakeboard rack
stalled, operate with extra caution:
– NEVER perform aggressive ma- 18) Steering Tilt Handle
neuvers including a spin-out.
– NEVER jump waves. The handlebar position can be adjusted
to suit rider preferences.
– Use common sense and limit
speed. To perform this adjustment, pull on the
Otherwise, the wakeboard could release handle at the base of the steer-
detach or occupants could fall off ing column just ahead of the glove box,
and injure themselves against the and tilt the handlebars to the desired
wakeboard or rack. position.
_______________ 89
EQUIPMENT
sdd2009-001-088_a
TYPICAL
smo2009-002-117_a
1. Release handle
2. Available tilt adjustment STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT LATCH
3. Multifunction gauge PROPERLY SECURED
1. Latch pawl engaged
When the handlebars are at the de- 2. Release handle locked forward
sired position, release the latch handle
and ensure the latch pawl properly en- 19) Adjustable Ergonomic
gages a groove in the steering column. Steering (AES)
Also ensure the latch handle is in the (RXT-X/RXT-X aS)
forward position.
The handlebar width and angular posi-
tion of the controls may be adjusted to
WARNING driver preference by extending and ro-
To prevent sudden movement of tating the handlebar extension tubes.
the steering column, always en- NOTE: To carry out the ergonomic ad-
sure the pawl on the steering col- justments, see an authorized Sea-Doo
umn latch is properly engaged in dealer.
one of the grooves on the steering
column.
smo2010-002-006_c
ERGONOMIC ADJUSTMENTS
1. Handlebar width adjustment
2. Angular position adjustment of controls
smo2009-002-116_a
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT LATCH

NOT SECURED
1. Latch pawl engaged in steering column
groove
2. Release handle unlocked
90 ______________
SUSPENSION
iS (intelligent Suspension) Manual Suspension Mode
(GTX Limited iS) MANUAL SUSPENSION mode allows
The intelligent suspension system (iS), fine-tuning the suspension calibration
allows the moving deck to move inde- to the operator's preference. The SUS-
pendently of the fixed deck, isolating PENSION HEIGHT can be adjusted us-
rider and passenger(s) from the impact ing the UP or DOWN button while in IS
of rough water. MODE.
SUSPENSION HEIGHT can be ad-
WARNING justed a total of nine increments.
Although the suspension system NOTE: Changing the suspension
absorbs part of the vertical forces height using the UP/DOWN buttons
and therefore reduces the impact puts the iS system in MANUAL SUS-
force to the body, it cannot elimi- PENSION mode. The AUTO mode is
nate it completely. To prevent you deactivated.
and your passenger from being
bounced and eventually ejected Manually Adjusting Ride Height
from the watercraft, reduce your While in IS MODE, press the UP or
speed. DOWN button once to move the sus-
pension to the next height increment,
or press and hold the button until the
WARNING desired ride height is obtained.
Avoid riding in very rough waters
or practicing extreme maneuvers
like jumping wakes or waves.
The iS system provides multiple

modes of operation.
Automatic Suspension Mode

The system always starts up in AUTO-
MATIC SUSPENSION mode and shuts
down in DOCK mode. sdd2009-001-024_b
The suspension will automatically TYPICAL

move up to a factory preset height. 1. MODE
2. SET
This height is ideal for most riding con- 3. UP and DOWN button
ditions at cruising speeds.
The iS system constantly monitors the The following indications of manual
stroke of the suspension and automat- suspension mode can be observed in
ically compensates for changing water the digital screen of the information
conditions and passenger load. center:
– A scrolling message in the digital
The moving deck height proportionally screen that states MANUAL SUS-
elevates the center of gravity of the PENSION.
watercraft.
– The AUTO indication in the iS dis-
NOTE: When performing certain ma- play will disappear.
neuvers at low speed the watercraft's – The suspension position indicator
propensity to overturn can increase. will indicate the relative SUSPEN-
SION HEIGHT (only one segment of
the indicator will be on).
_______________ 91
SUSPENSION
3 2 3 2
in in
lap lap
AM AM
RPMgal/h RPMgal/h
1 1
AUTOMATIC SUSPENSION MODE AUTOMATIC SUSPENSION MODE
1. MANUAL SUSPENSION message is 1. AUTOMATIC SUSPENSION

displayed here message is displayed here
2. AUTO mode indicator OFF 2. AUTO mode indicator ON
3. Relative suspension position 3. All segments of suspension position
indication indicator ON
Reverting Back to AUTO MODE Dock Modes

To revert back to AUTO selection mode The iS system can be set to DOCK
without stopping the engine, proceed MODE AUTO or DOCK MODE OFF.
as follows:
– Press the MODE button repeatedly Dock Mode AUTO
until the IS MODE message appears In DOCK MODE AUTO, the suspen-
in the multifunction display. sion lowers to DOCK mode height to
– Press the SET button. lower the center of gravity when cer-
– A scrolling message in the tain conditions are met.
multifunction display stating DOU- – When the engine is shut down after
BLE_CLICK_UP_FOR_AUTO_MODE normal operation of the watercraft.
appears. – If O.T.A.S. is activated SEE ACTIVE
– Double click on UP button. TECHNOLOGIES (iCONTROL).
The AUTO mode is confirmed by: – If the operator releases the throt-
– A scrolling message in the digital tle to idle RPM for approximately
screen stating AUTOMATIC SUS- 10 seconds.
PENSION. NOTE: When the suspension moves
– The AUTO indication in the iS dis- down to dock mode height, a DOCK
play will appear. MODE ON message will scroll across
– All segments of the suspension po- in the multifunction display.
sition indicator will be on. Dock Mode OFF
If the suspension is set to DOCK
MODE OFF, the suspension will not
lower itself to DOCK mode height
when the throttle is released to idle
for more than ten seconds. However,
it will lower itself automatically when:
– The engine is shut off
– When O.T.A.S. is activated.
92 ______________
SUSPENSION
If the suspension is in the up position

with the watercraft powered up and
the DOWN button is double clicked in
lap
AM
while in the IS MODE, the suspension RPMgal/h
will lower itself to DOCK mode height

even if the suspension is set to DOCK
MODE OFF.
If the suspension is in the down posi-
tion (dock mode height) with the wa-
tercraft powered up and the UP button MESSAGE DISPLAYED
is double clicked while in the IS MODE,
the suspension will move up to the fac- SETTINGS
tory preset height.
4. Press the SET button to display
DOCK MODE.
WARNING
When performing certain maneu-
vers at low speed or when dock-
ing, the watercraft's propensity to in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
overturn can increase. The more
riders (or weight) on the moving
deck, the more unstable the water-
craft may become.
NOTE: DOCK MODE AUTO is always

FIRST AVAILABLE MODE OPTION
active when using a learning key.
DOCK MODE message is displayed
Selecting DOCK MODE AUTO or here
DOCK MODE OFF
Selecting DOCK MODE AUTO or 5. Press the SET button to display
DOCK MODE OFF is only available DOCK MODE AUTO.
when the engine is not running and
when using a normal key.
To change the DOCK mode of opera- in
tion, carry out the following steps. lap

AM
RPMgal/h

power up the information center.
2. Install the tether cord on the engine
cut-off switch.
3. Press the MODE button repeatedly MODE ACTIVATED
until SETTINGS is displayed in the
Information Center. DOCK MODE AUTO message is
displayed here

toggle the display to DOCK MODE
OFF.
_______________ 93
SUSPENSION
WARNING
in
Although the suspension system
lap
AM
RPMgal/h absorbs part of the vertical forces
and therefore reduces the impact
force to the body, it cannot elimi-
nate it completely. To prevent you
bounced and eventually ejected
from the watercraft, reduce your
MODE DEACTIVATED speed.
DOCK MODE OFF message is displayed
here WARNING
7. Press the SET button, or wait for the Avoid riding in very rough waters
function to time out to save the set- or practicing extreme maneuvers
ting and return to main display. like jumping wakes or waves.
You may now start the engine and
drive away using the selected DOCK Spring Preload Adjustment
MODE. The spring preload can be easily ad-
justed using a 1/2" drive nut (adjuster).
CAUTION Operating the wa- The spring preload adjuster is located
tercraft in DOCK MODE OFF pre- under the seat.
vents the suspension from automat-
ically moving to the "down" position NBR OF
when operating the watercraft at CLICKS ON
RIDERS TOTAL
slow speed or when stopping. This SPRING
WEIGHT (KG/LBS)
maintains a higher center of gravity, ADJUSTER
reduces stability, and makes the wa- (CLOCKWISE*)
tercraft more prone to overturning.
57 kg (126 lb) 0
aS (adjustable Suspension) 73 kg (161 lb) 2
(RXT-X aS) 89 kg (196 lb) 4
The adjustable Suspension (aS) al-
lows the moving deck to move inde- 105 kg (231 lb) 6
pendently of the fixed deck, isolating 120 kg (265 lb) 8
rider and passenger from the impact of
rough water. 136 kg (300 lb) 10
With the aS feature, the moving deck 152 kg (335 lb) 12
may be adjusted mechanically to ab-
sorb (dampen) water shocks according 168 kg (370 lb) 14
to the driver riding style and water con-
184 kg (406 lb) 16
ditions.
200 kg (441 lb) 18
(counterclockwise).
94 ______________
SUSPENSION
Damping Adjustment S (Manual Suspension)

The aS Suspension damping may be (GTX S 155)
personally adjustable according to the The Manual suspension (S) allows the
driving preferences and water condi- moving deck to move independently of
tions. the fixed deck, isolating rider and pas-
Damping adjustment is carried out via senger from the impact of rough water.
the remote nitrogen reservoir in the The moving deck may be adjusted
glove box. mechanically to absorb (dampen) wa-
A blue knob located in glove box allows ter shocks according to the driver's
damper adjustment for this purpose. weight.
WARNING
Although the suspension system
absorbs part of the vertical forces
and therefore reduces the impact
force to the body, it cannot elimi-
nate it completely. To prevent you
bounced and eventually ejected
from the watercraft, reduce your
speed.
smo2011-002-006_a
1. Blue knob
WARNING
2. Nitrogen gas damper Avoid riding in very rough waters
or practicing extreme maneuvers
NBR OF CLICKS like jumping wakes or waves.
TYPICAL ON DAMPER
CONDITIONS ADJUSTER
(CLOCKWISE*)
0
Calm water
5
10
Rough water
15
Offshore 20
(counterclockwise).
NOTE: These adjustments are pro-

vided as guidelines to ensure optimum
suspension performance. Personal
preference may dictate different set-
tings than those recommended.
_______________ 95
SUSPENSION
Spring Preload Adjustment

The spring preload can be easily ad-
justed using a 1/2" drive nut (adjuster).
The spring preload adjuster is located
under the seat.
NBR OF
CLICKS ON
RIDERS TOTAL
SPRING
WEIGHT (KG/LBS)
ADJUSTER
(CLOCKWISE*)
68 kg (150 lb) 0
79 kg (174 lb) 2
90 kg (198 lb) 4
102 kg (225 lb) 6
113 kg (249 lb) 8
125 kg (276 lb) 10
136 kg (300 lb) 12
147 kg (324 lb) 14
159 kg (351 lb) 16
170 kg (375 lb) 18
(counterclockwise).
96 ______________
BREAK-IN PERIOD
Period
break-in.
throttle accelerations or operation,
prolonged cruising speeds are detri-
mental during the break-in period.
NOTE: 215 and 260 engines: Dur-
ing the first 5 hours of operation, the
engine management limits the engine
maximum speed for engine protection.
The engine performance will progres-
sively increase during this period.
_______________ 97
WARNING Boarding from Shallow Water
Always perform the PRE-RIDE IN- In shallow water, board the watercraft
SPECTION before operating this from either the side or the rear.
watercraft. Be sure to read the
SAFETY INFORMATION and the WARNING
WATERCRAFT INFORMATION sec- – Keep limbs away from jet or in-
tions and be thoroughly familiar take grate.
with the iControl technology.
– Never use propulsion system as
a supporting point to board the
Should any control or instruction not be watercraft.
Sea-Doo dealer. Ensure there is at least 90 cm (3 ft) of
water underneath the lowest rear por-
Boarding the Watercraft tion of the hull.
As with any watercraft, boarding Take into account that the hull will be
should be done carefully and engine lower in the water when all passen-
must not be running. gers are aboard. Be certain to maintain
the specified depth so sand, pebbles
WARNING and rocks will not be drawn up in the
Engine must be OFF when board- jet pump.
ing the watercraft or when using
the boarding step.
Boarding from a Dock

When boarding from a dock, slowly
board nearest the dock while holding
the handlebar, and at the same time,
transfer the body weight to the other A
side in order to balance the watercraft.
Then bring the other foot over the seat F18L0XY
and place it on the other footboard.
Push the watercraft away from the A. Maintain at least 90 cm (3 ft) underneath
dock. the lowest rear portion of the hull when all
passengers are aboard
NOTICE
– Starting the engine or riding the
watercraft in shallower water
may damage the impeller or other
jet pump components.
– Only one person at a time on the
step.
F18A01Y
98 ______________
WARNING 2. With the other hand on the boarding

platform, lift your body until you can
Watercraft with iBR system: lay one knee on the boarding plat-
– Be aware of the iBR gate move- form.
shutting down the engine or us- 3. Lay the other knee on the boarding
ing the iBR lever. Automatic platform.
movement of the gate may
squeeze fingers or toes of peo-
ple taking a hold on the back or
your PWC.
– Never use iBR gate as a sup-
porting point to board the wa-
tercraft.
Boarding in Deep Water

smo2009-002-144
WARNING 4. Take hold of the seat strap to help

– Keep limbs away from propul- maintain your balance and step for-
sion system or intake grate. ward onto the footboards on either
– Never use propulsion systems side of the seat.
a supporting point to board the
watercraft.
– Inexperienced riders should
practice how to board the water-
craft close to shore (all methods
explained here) before ventur-
ing into deep water.
WARNING
smo2009-002-145
Watercraft with iBR system:
– Be aware of the iBR gate move- Sit astride the seat.
shutting down the engine or us- Models with a Boarding Step
ing the iBR lever. Automatic Swim to the rear of the watercraft.
movement of the gate may
squeeze fingers or toes of peo- Using one hand, lower the boarding
ple taking a hold on the back or step.
your PWC.
– Never use propulsion system or
iBR gate as a supporting point to
Operator Alone
Models Without a Boarding Step
1. Using one hand, grab the rear han-
dle. smo2009-002-140
_______________ 99
Using the other hand, take hold of the

edge of the boarding platform, then
pull yourself up so that you can knee
onto the boarding step.
smo2009-002-144
Take hold of the seat strap to help main-

tain your balance and step forward
onto the footboards on either side of
the seat.
smo2009-002-141
NOTICE
step.
Reach forward with one hand and take
hold of the molded handle behind the
seat, then stand on the boarding step.
smo2009-002-145

The operator climbs on the watercraft
ously.
smo2009-002-142
With both hands on the handle behind aboard.
platform.
smo2009-002-146
NOTICE
smo2009-002-143
step.
100 ______________
The passenger then climbs onto the

watercraft while the operator main-
tains balance by sitting as close as pos-
sible to the console.
smo2009-002-147

SHOWN
smo2009-002-148

SHOWN
smo2009-002-149
smo2009-002-150
______________ 101
How to Start Engine NOTE: The START/STOP button must

be activated within 5 seconds after
WARNING the tether cord cap is installed on the
engine cut-off switch to allow engine
Before starting the engine, the op- starting.
erator and passenger(s) should al-
ways: NOTICE In the event the engine
– Be properly seated on the water- does not start right away, do not
craft. hold START/STOP button more than
– Have a firm grip on a handhold 10 seconds to avoid starter over-
or hold on to the waist of the per- heating. A rest period should be ob-
son in front of them. served between the cranking cycles
to allow the starter to cool down. Re-
– Wear appropriate protective fer to TROUBLESHOOTING section.
clothing including a PFD ap-
proved by local authorities and 6. Release engine START/STOP but-
a wet suit bottom. ton after engine is started.
NOTICE Ensure there is at least WARNING

90 cm (3 ft) of water under the low- The tether cord should always be
est rear portion of the hull when all attached to the operators personal
passengers are aboard prior to start- flotation device when starting or
ing the engine. Otherwise damage operating the watercraft.
to the impeller or other jet pump
components may occur. NOTE: The tether cord must be in-
1. Attach the tether cord clip to your stalled on the engine cut-off switch
PFD or to the wrist (wrist strap re- within 5 seconds of pressing the
quired). START/STOP button to allow engine
starting. If you hear anything other
2. Firmly grip handlebar with your left than 2 short beeps when installing
hand and place both feet on the foot- the tether cord, it indicates a condi-
boards. tion that should be corrected. Refer to
3. Press the engine START/STOP but- the TROUBLESHOOTING section for
ton to wake up the electrical sys- BEEP code signal identification.
tem. NOTE: The engine can be restarted
4. As the information center cycles within 3 minutes when stopped using
through its self test function, install the START/STOP button. After this de-
the tether cord on the engine cut-off lay, resume the starting procedure.
switch.
How to Stop the Engine
WARNING
The tether cord should always be WARNING
attached to the operators personal To maintain watercraft directional
flotation device or to the wrist control, the engine should be
(wrist strap required) when start- running until the watercraft is
ing or operating the watercraft. stopped.
5. Depress the START/STOP button to

start the engine.
102 ______________
To shut off the engine, press the en- WARNING

gine START/STOP button or pull off the
tether cord cap from the engine cut-off Throttle should be applied and
switch. handlebar turned to change the di-
rection of the watercraft. Steering
WARNING efficiency will differ depending on
the amount of throttle applied, the
Never leave the tether cord on the number of passengers, the load,
engine cut-off switch when dis- the water conditions and the en-
embarking watercraft to prevent vironmental factors such as the
theft, accidental engine starting, wind.
and to avoid unauthorized use by
children or others. Unlike a car, a watercraft needs some
throttle to turn. Practice in a safe area
If the engine is shut off using the applying the throttle and turning away
START/STOP button and the tether from an imaginary object. This is a
cord is left on the engine cut-off good collision avoidance technique.
switch, the information center and all
electrical power will shut off after ap-
proximately three minutes to prevent WARNING
battery discharge. Directional control is reduced
when the throttle is released and
How to Steer the lost when the engine is off.
Watercraft
The watercraft behaves differently
with a passenger and requires greater
grip the seat strap, the molded grab
handle, or the waist of the person
ahead of them. Reduce speed and
avoid sharp turns. Avoid choppy water
conditions when carrying a passenger.
Tight Turns and Other Special

Maneuvers
Any tight turns or special maneuvers
F18J09Y be kept under water for a prolonged
time, water will seep into the bilge.
Turning the handlebar pivots the jet Combustion engines need air to oper-
pump nozzle which controls the water- ate; consequently this watercraft can-
craft direction. Turning the handlebar not be totally watertight.
to the right will turn the watercraft to
the right and inversely. The throttle NOTICE If the air inlet openings
should be applied to turn the water- are kept under water, such as turning
craft. constantly in tight circles, plunging
the bow through waves, or capsiz-
ing the watercraft, water may seep
into the bilge, which may cause se-
vere damage to internal parts of the
engine. Refer to the WARRANTY
section contained in this guide.
______________ 103
O.T.A.S. System How to Trim the Neutral Position of

(Off-Throttle Assisted Steering) the iBR
The O.T.A.S. (Off-Throttle Assisted When in NEUTRAL, if the watercraft
Steering) system provides additional creeps forward or backward, the iBR
maneuverability in off-throttle situa- system may be trimmed.
tions. NOTE: Movement of the watercraft
If the driver releases the throttle to idle when operating in neutral may be due
when initiating a full turn, the O.T.A.S. to wind or water current.
system will be electronically activated. If the watercraft is moving forwards,
O.T.A.S. will slightly increase engine momentarily press the DOWN button.
speed to help turning.
When the handlebar is brought back momentarily press the UP button.
towards its center position, the throt-
tle reverts to idle.
first ride.
How to Engage Neutral

WARNING
The drive shaft and impeller are
always turning when the engine is sdd2009-001-024_i
running, even when the iBR gate TRIMMING THE iBR NEUTRAL POSITION
is set to the neutral position. Keep 1. UP button (to stop rearward movement)
away from the propulsion system 2. DOWN button (to stop forward movement)
of the watercraft. NOTE: Press the UP/DOWN button
When the watercraft is first started, the neutral position is attained and the
the iBR system automatically sets the watercraft stops moving.
iBR gate to the neutral position by de-
fault. How to Engage Forward
If the gate is in forward thrust position, To engage forward thrust from neutral,
tap the iBR lever. The gate will move to tap on the throttle lever. The gate will
neutral. move to forward thrust position and
If braking or reverse is used, the iBR the watercraft will accelerate forward.
gate will move to the neutral position To engage forward thrust from re-
when the iBR lever is released, if throt- verse, release the iBR lever while ap-
tle is not applied. plying throttle moderately.
NOTE: The throttle lever must be fully To re-engage forward thrust from brak-
released for the iBR gate to move to ing, simultaneously pull in the throttle
the neutral position when the iBR lever lever while releasing the iBR lever. The
is released. watercraft will accelerate forward after
If the engine is stopped in forward or a short delay.
reverse, the iBR gate will move to the
neutral position on engine shutdown.
104 ______________
How to Engage and Use When operating in reverse, turn the

Reverse handlebar in the opposite direction
Reverse can only be engaged between watercraft.
idle speed and the threshold forward
speed of 8 km/h (5 MPH). For example, to steer the rear of the
watercraft to port (left), turn the han-
To engage reverse thrust, the iBR lever dlebar to starboard (right).
on the LH handlebar must be pulled in
at least 25% of the lever travel.
duced.
efficiency.
is changed.
operation.
To stop rearward velocity after iBR F18J08Z
lever release, apply enough throttle to TYPICAL - STEERING DIRECTION REVERSED

stop rearward movement. WHEN BACKING
WARNING CAUTION Steering direction

The brake function has no effect in reverse thrust is opposite of for-
when travelling in reverse. ward thrust. To steer the stern to
port (left) in reverse, turn the han-
Available engine power is limited in dlebar to starboard (right). To steer
reverse mode, which limits reverse the stern to starboard (right), turn
speed. However, speeds above the handlebar to port (left). Reverse
8 km/h (5 MPH) may be obtained in thrust operation should be practiced
reverse depending on conditions. in open waters in order to become
fully familiar with the controls and
watercraft handling characteristics
WARNING before operating in close quarters.
people.
______________ 105
How to Engage and Use CAUTION When braking, rid-

Braking ers must brace themselves against
the deceleration force to prevent
WARNING from moving forward on the water-
craft and losing balance. The oper-
– The engine must be running to ator should always keep both hands
be able to use the brake. on the handlebars, and all passen-
– The brake is only applicable gers should maintain a firm grip of a
when operating in forward handhold or the waist of the person
movement, it has no effect on in front of them.
rearward velocity.
– The brake cannot prevent your WARNING
PWC from drifting due to cur- Stopping distance will vary de-
rent or wind. pending on initial speed, load,
wind, number of riders, water con-
The braking function can only be en- ditions, and the amount of braking
gaged during forward operation at or power commanded by the oper-
above the threshold speed of 8 km/h ator. Always adjust your riding
(5 MPH). style accordingly.
Braking is engaged and controlled
when the iBR lever on the LH handle- When the watercraft slows to less
bar is pulled in at least 25% of its travel. than 8 km/h (5 MPH), braking mode
ends and reverse mode is engaged.
WARNING Release the iBR lever once the water-
craft is stopped. Otherwise, a rear-
Braking should be practiced in ward movement will be initiated.
open waters and at gradually in-
creasing speeds in order to be-
come fully familiar with the con- CAUTION As the watercraft
trols and watercraft handling char- slows to a stop, the wake created
acteristics. by the watercraft will catch up and
tend to push the watercraft forward.
When iBR lever is applied, the throttle Ensure there are no obstacles or
lever command is overridden and en- bathers in the direction of travel.
gine throttle control is now dependant If the throttle lever is still pulled in
on the iBR lever position. Braking can when releasing the iBR lever, the wa-
thus be modulated by using only the tercraft will accelerate forward after a
iBR lever. short delay. Acceleration will be pro-
Watercraft deceleration is proportional portional to the throttle lever position.
to the braking force. The more the iBR
lever is pulled in, the greater the brak- WARNING
ing force applied. If forward acceleration is not de-
NOTE: Be careful to gradually actuate sired when the brake lever is re-
the iBR lever to adjust intensity of the leased, release the throttle lever.
braking force and simultaneously re-
lease the throttle lever. When at speed and the brake is first
applied, a plume of water will shoot up
in the air behind the watercraft which
106 ______________
may cause the operator of a following When first using the watercraft, the
watercraft to momentarily loose sight operator should become familiar with
of your PWC. the use of the variable trim system
(VTS) at varying speeds and water con-
WARNING ditions. A mid-range trim is generally
used when cruising. Experience alone
– It is important to inform the will dictate the best trim for the condi-
operator of a watercraft who tions. During the watercraft break-in
intends to follow in a convoy period, when lower speeds are recom-
formation, of the braking and mended, it is an excellent opportunity
maneuvering capability of your to become familiar with trim adjust-
PWC, what the plume of water ment and its effects.
tance must be maintained be- When the nozzle is positioned in an
tween watercrafts. upward angle, the water thrust directs
the bow of the watercraft upward.
– Be aware that other boats fol- This position is used to optimize high
lowing or operating in close speed.
stop as quickly. When the nozzle is directed down-
ward, the bow is forced downward
and increases the watercraft turning
Braking in a Turn capabilities. As with any watercraft,
Throttle must be applied for turning to speed and operator body position and
ensure directional control. However movement (body English), will deter-
braking can be initiated during a turn mine the degree and sharpness of the
using the iBR lever as previously de- watercraft turn. Porpoising can be re-
scribed. Get ready to maintain your duced or eliminated if the nozzle is
balance while the wake is crossing downward and speed is adjusted pro-
your PWC. portionately.
NOTE: VTS position is indicated on a
CAUTION As the watercraft bar gauge in the information center.
slows to a stop while braking in a
turn, the wake created by the water-
craft will catch up and tend to push
the watercraft sideways. Be pre-
pared to maintain balance as the
wake crossed the watercraft.
How to Use the Variable

Trim System (VTS)
The variable trim system (VTS)
changes the vertical position of the jet
pump nozzle to provide the operator sdd2009-001-042_a
with a fast, effective system to com- INFORMATION CENTER — VTS POSITION
pensate for load, thrust, riding position INDICATOR
and water conditions. Correctly ad- 1. Bow up
justed, it can improve handling, reduce 2. Bow down
porpoising, and position the watercraft
mum performance.
______________ 107
The VTS system allows for manually adjusting the trim position of the nozzle, or se-
lecting two preset trim positions and recording or changing preset trim positions
on certain models.

GTX
RXT
AVAILABLE VTS GTX LIMITED
RXT-X WAKE PRO
TRIMMING METHODS GTX S 155 GTX
RXT-X aS
LIMITED iS
VTS trim button N.A. X X X
VTS "double click"
N.A. X X X
trimming
VTS "presets" N.A. X X X
X N.A. N.A. N.A.
multifunction gauge
Trimming the VTS Using the VTS

Button
Nine trim positions are available.
With the watercraft operating in for-
ward thrust, proceed as follows.
NOTE: Pressing the VTS trim button
without the engine in forward thrust
will only change the indication. The
sdd2009-001-019_c
trim position when forward thrust is TYPICAL - VTS CONTROL BUTTON
1. Bow up
engaged. 2. Bow down
1. Press the VTS UP button once to
trim the bow of the watercraft up to
the next up trim position.
2. Press the VTS DOWN button once
to trim the bow of the watercraft
down to the next down trim posi-
tion.
sdd2009-001-042_a
INFORMATION CENTER — VTS POSITION

INDICATOR
1. Bow up
2. Bow down
108 ______________
NOTE: If the VTS UP or Down button

is pressed and held, the pump nozzle
will keep moving until the button is
released at the desired trim attitude
or the maximum trim position (up or
down) is reached.
Two preset trim positions can be se-
lected. sdd2009-001-024_b
1. MODE button
To select the highest trim position 2. SET button
recorded, double-click on the VTS UP 3. UP/DOWN button
button (bow up).
To select the lowest trim position
recorded, double-click on the VTS
DOWN button (bow down). in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
NOTE: If only one preset trim position

is recorded, double-click either UP or
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
VTS MODE
4. On the RH handlebar, press the SET

button to display PRESET 1.
5. Press the VTS UP or DOWN button
to change the PRESET 1 VTS posi-
sdd2009-001-019_c tion. Gauge will display setting 1
DOUBLE-CLICK UP OR DOWN TO USE through 9 in the digital screen above
PRESET POSITIONS PRESET 1.
1. Highest preset position on UP button
2. Lowest preset position on DOWN button
2
Recording Preset Trim Positions in
lap
AM
Two different VTS trim positions may RPMgal/h
be recorded for quickly selecting the 1

preferred watercraft trim attitude.
3
1. Turn ON the electrical power by
pressing the START/STOP button
once. FUNCTION SELECTED - PRESET 1
2. Installing the tether cord on the en- 1. PRESET 1 message

gine cut-off switch. 2. VTS setting number
3. On the RH handlebar, press the 3. VTS position indicator at setting 1
MODE button repeatedly until VTS (bow down)
MODE is displayed.
______________ 109
6. Press the SET button to save PRE-

SET 1 and display PRESET 2. 2
7. Press the VTS UP or DOWN button in

lap
AM
RPMgal/h
to change the PRESET 2 VTS posi- 1
tion. Gauge will display setting 1
through 9 in the digital screen above
PRESET 2.
2
FUNCTION SELECTED - VTS
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
1. VTS message
1
2. VTS setting number
3
3. Confirm VTS operation by looking
ment in the digital display.
FUNCTION SELECTED - PRESET 2
4. Press the SET button to save the de-
1. PRESET 2 message sired setting and return to the main
display.
2. VTS setting number
3. VTS position indicator at setting 9 NOTE: The available VTS settings are
(bow up) between 1 and 9.
settings and return to the main dis- ing in forward thrust. If the engine is
play. not running in forward thrust, only the
VTS indication will change when the
The VTS system will compare the pre-
VTS control switches are pressed; the
set trim settings recorded, the highest
nozzle will not change position.
position will be assigned to the UP but-
ton (bow up), the lowest to the DOWN
button (bow down). General Operating
If both trim positions are identical, both
Recommendations
Rough Water or Poor Visibility
tings.
Operation
Trimming the VTS Using the Gauge Avoid operation in these conditions. If
you must do so, proceed with caution
1. With the engine running in forward
using minimum speed.
thrust, press the MODE button to
display the VTS function in the mul-
Crossing Waves
tifunction display.
The operator must grip the handlebar
2. On the RH handlebar, press the UP
firmly and keep both feet on the foot-
or DOWN button to change the VTS
boards.
setting.
The passenger must grip the hand-
holds with both hands and keep both
feet on the footboards.
Reduce speed.
110 ______________
Always be prepared to steer and main-

tain your balance as necessary.
When going over waves, raise your
body slightly off the seat to absorb the
shocks with your legs.
When crossing wakes, always keep a
safe distance from watercraft ahead.
WARNING
When crossing wakes, slow down.
Operator and passenger(s) should
brace themselves and adopt a
semi-standing position to help F18A03Y
absorb the bumps. Do not jump
waves or wakes.
The operator should practice in open
waters at various speeds to become fa-
NOTE: Some watercraft models are miliarized with the stopping distances
equipped with a suspension system under different conditions. Stopping
(iS) that is capable of smoothing out the using the iBR system in a straight line
bumps when riding through rough wa- and in a turn should be practiced exten-
ter or a wake. Adopting a semi-stand- sively to become familiar with the han-
ing position may be necessary in very dling characteristics of the watercraft
rough water or large wakes. Operator under partial or full braking conditions.
should reduce speed as required to
prevent loosing control of the water- Models Without iBR
craft, or prevent personnel from being
ejected. WARNING
Stopping/Docking The engine must stop running for
the watercraft to come to a full
When the throttle is released, the wa- stop.
tercraft is slowed by water drag against
the hull. The stopping distance will
vary depending on the watercraft size, Models with iBR
weight, speed, water surface condi-
tion, presence and direction of wind WARNING
and current. Always practice braking in open
The iBR system can also be used for waters ensuring there are no wa-
slowing down or for stopping more tercrafts or boats in your imme-
quickly, and for increasing maneuver- diate vicinity, especially astern.
ability especially when docking. Other users of the waterways may
not be able to maneuver or stop in
time to avoid you should you un-
expectedly come to a full stop in
front of them.

applied, a plume of water will shoot
up in the air behind the watercraft and
______________ 111
may cause the operator of a following NOTICE Riding the watercraft in

watercraft to momentarily loose sight shallow water may result in damage
of your PWC. to the impeller, iBR components,
or other jet pump components. Al-
WARNING ways shut off the engine before wa-
ter is less than 90 cm (3 ft) deep and
It is important to inform the oper- never use reverse or braking.
ator of a watercraft who intends to
follow in a convoy formation of the
braking and maneuvering capabil-
ity of your PWC, what the plume of
water indicates, and that a greater
tween both of you.

area. F18A03Y
Maneuver using a combination of the
quired.
Remember that when operating in re-
WARNING
Beaching
Drive slowly towards the beach and
shut off the engine before the water is
less than 90 cm (3 ft) deep under the
lowest rear portion of the hull. Then
pull the watercraft to the beach.
112 ______________
OPERATING MODES
GTX
LIMITED, RXT-X
OPERATING MODE GTX 155, WAKE
GTX RXT aS,
AVAILABLE GTX S 155 PRO
LIMITED RXT-X
iS
Touring mode X X X X X
Sport mode X X X X X
ECO mode X X X X X
Cruise mode X X X - X
Slow speed mode X X X - X
Ski mode - - - - X
Learning key mode X X X X X

Touring Mode Sport Mode

By default, the watercraft is set to When selected, SPORT MODE pro-
TOURING mode of operation when vides for instant throttle response and
started. more rapid accelerations than TOUR-
ING MODE.
All Models Except RXT-X/RXT-X aS
NOTE: Sport mode is not available if
A TOURING mode indicator is ON in using a LEARNING key.
the multifunction gauge to confirm the
active mode of operation. Once activated, SPORT MODE will re-
whereby it defaults back to TOURING
in
lap
AM
MODE.
RPMgal/h

To quickly activate sport mode while
riding at speed, carry out the following:
TOURING MODE INDICATOR (ALL

MODELS EXCEPT RXT-X/RXT-X aS)
______________ 113
OPERATING MODES
WARNING A scrolling SPORT MODE ACTIVATED

When activating sport mode, be that sport mode has been activated.
sure to maintain situational aware-
ness of other watercrafts, obsta-
cles, or persons in the water.
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
1. Depress and hold the SPORT button

MESSAGE DISPLAYED
SPORT MODE ACTIVATED

3. Ensure the SPORT mode indicator is
smo2012-002-009_a
turned on.
TYPICAL
1. Sport button
The following message will be dis- in

lap
played: AM
RPMgal/h
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
SPORT MODE INDICATOR (ALL

MODELS EXCEPT RXT-X)
NOTE: The SPORT mode indicator will

MESSAGE DISPLAYED come on and stay on as long as sport
mode is active.
INCREASED ACCELERATION - RXT-X/RXT-X aS
INSTRUCT PASSENGERS TO HOLD - There is no SPORT mode indicator in
PRESS_SPORT_BUTTON the multifunction display, but only a
SPORT MODE indicator light in the
WARNING tachometer.
Ensure passengers are advised Deactivating Sport Mode
that sport mode provides for in-
creased accelerations and that To quickly deactivate sport mode while
they are to hold on tightly. riding at speed, carry out the following:
2. Press the SET button again to acti-

vate sport mode.
114 ______________
OPERATING MODES
WARNING
When deactivating sport mode, in
lap
be sure to maintain situational AM
RPMgal/h
awareness of other watercrafts,

obstacles, or persons in the water.
1. Depress and hold the SPORT button

TOURING MODE INDICATOR (ALL
MODELS EXCEPT RXT-X/RXT-X aS)
ECO Mode
(Fuel Economy Mode)
1. Depress the ECO button for at least
1 second.
smo2012-002-009_a
TYPICAL
1. Sport button

scroll in the multifunction display:
SPORT MODE DEACTIVATED.
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
smo2012-002-009_b
TYPICAL
1. ECO button
The following message will be dis-

played on the multifunction display:
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h

All Models Except RXT-X/RXT-X aS
2. Ensure the TOURING mode indica-
tor is on.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
ECO MODE
______________ 115
OPERATING MODES
Once the maximum cruise speed is

set, the operator can vary the water-
in
lap
craft speed from idle speed up to the
AM
RPMgal/h
set cruise speed using the throttle
lever. The set cruise speed will not
be exceeded even if the throttle lever
is fully depressed.
As you proceed under a constant cruis-
ing speed setting, keep your attention
MESSAGE DISPLAYED level up to maintain good situational
awareness.
FUEL ECONOMY MODE - HOLD SET
TO ACTIVATE OR MODE TO EXIT Slowing down is a matter of releasing
the throttle lever further than the set
The ECO mode indicator will also be ac- point, or by pulling the iBR lever in.
tivated. If the iBR lever is pulled in for braking,
CRUISE mode is overridden but not
How to Deactivate ECO Mode deactivated.
1. Depress the ECO button for at least Once the iBR lever is released and the
1 second. throttle is pulled in to engage forward
thrust, the cruise function will reen-
gage to limit the watercraft speed as it
was set before.
Prerequisite for Cruise Mode

Activation
NOTE: Cruise mode is not available if
slow speed mode or ski mode is en-
gaged.
CRUISE MODE can be activated:
smo2012-002-009_b
– At idle in forward thrust
TYPICAL
1. ECO button – Whenever at constant speed.
The ECO mode indicator will be deacti- Activating Cruise Mode

vated. 1. Maintain a constant speed.
Cruise Mode 2. Press and hold the cruise button for
Cruise mode is a function of iTC (in-
telligent Throttle Control) system that
allows the operator to set the desired
maximum watercraft speed.
This is useful when cruising for long
distances, operating in limited speed
zones, or towing a tuber, skier or wake
boarder.
The operator must keep the throttle de-
pressed to maintain forward speed.
116 ______________
OPERATING MODES
To activate and preset CRUISE MODE

at idle speed in forward thrust:
1. Press and hold the cruise button un-
til the following message appears in
the multifunction display.
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
sdd2009-001-024_c
TYPICAL
1. CRUISE button
2. Throttle lever
3. UP button
4. DOWN button
You will hear a beep indicating that you MESSAGE DISPLAYED

are now in cruise mode, and a green
CRUISE indicator light will be lit. CRUISE MODE _ SELECT SPEED _
PRESS SET TO ACCEPT OR MODE TO
EXIT
2. Press the UP button until the de-

sired cruise speed is indicated in the
numerical display. The following
message will scroll in the multifunc-
tion display.
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
sdd2009-001-034_a
TYPICAL - CRUISE MODE INDICATOR LIGHT
NOTE: Activating cruise mode of op-

eration only limits the maximum speed
available when depressing the throttle MESSAGE DISPLAYED
lever. The throttle lever must be held
in to maintain forward speed. Water- CRUISE MODE _ SPEED ADJUSTING
craft speed can be varied from idle up
to the set cruise speed using the throt- 3. Press the SET button to save the
tle lever once the cruise function is cruise speed selected and engage
activated. Watercraft speed may vary cruise speed function. The follow-
depending on water conditions during ing message will scroll in the multi-
use. function display.
Cruise Mode Activation at Idle
Speed
NOTE: This function is available up to
approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH).
______________ 117
OPERATING MODES
NOTE: If the throttle lever is not fully

released when the cruise button is
in
lap
pressed to deactivate cruise mode, the
AM
RPMgal/h
BEEP will not be heard and the cruise
light will remain on. The speed limiting
function of cruise mode will stay active
until the throttle is fully released, then
the BEEP will be heard and the cruise
light will go out.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
Slow Speed Mode (all
CRUISE MODE ACTIVE Models Except RXT-X and
RXT-X aS)
Changing Set Cruise Speed
The Intelligent Throttle Control also
To increase or decrease the set cruise allows for a Slow Speed Mode where
speed: the driver can adjust and set idle speed.
1. Keep throttle lever fully depressed. This is usefull when operating in slow
speed zones where the driver must be
2. Press the UP/DOWN button. especially attentive to possible obsta-
cle avoidance.
The operator can set idle speed
in
lap
AM
between 1.6 km/h to 11 km/h
RPMgal/h
(1 MPH to 7 MPH).
If you accelerate above approximately
14 km/h (9 MPH) , Slow Speed Mode
will be deactivated and the engine will
return to idle RPM when the throttle is
released.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
Should a situation arise where the op-
CRUISE MODE _ SPEED ADJUSTING erator must stop or accelerate quickly
away from a hazardous situation,
3. Press the UP/DOWN button to ad- pulling in the iBR lever, or pulling in on
just speed accordingly. the throttle lever will deactivate slow
speed mode and normal control of the
Deactivating Cruise Mode watercraft will be returned to the oper-
ator.
1. Release the throttle lever. Activating Slow Speed Mode
2. Press the cruise button. To activate slow speed mode of opera-
Deactivation of cruise mode is indi- tion:
cated by: 1. Release the throttle lever to idle
– The CRUISE indicator light in the RPM.
speedometer display will go off. 2. Pull in and release the iBR lever to
– A BEEP will be heard. engage neutral.
118 ______________
OPERATING MODES
2
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
sdd2009-001-024_g
TYPICAL
1. CRUISE button 1. SLOW SPEED MODE ACTIVATED
message
The CRUISE indicator will come on in
the speedometer or multifunction dis- 2. Slow speed setting is displayed here
play to indicate cruise activation. for a few seconds
NOTE: The scrolling SLOW SPEED

MODE message repeats itself as long
as slow speed mode is activated. The
numerical display reverts back to the
previous indication after a few sec-
onds.
2
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
1
sdd2009-001-034_a
TYPICAL - CRUISE MODE INDICATOR

LIGHTIN SPEEDOMETER
A message will scroll in the multifunc- SLOW SPEED MODE INDICATION

tion display to specify that you are now
in slow speed mode. 1. SLOW SPEED MODE message
2. Numerical display reverts to previous
indication
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
Changing Set Slow Speed
To increase or decrease the set slow
speed, press the UP/DOWN button on
the RH handlebar once, or repeatedly.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
SLOW SPEED MODE _ SPEED
ADJUSTING
The default slow speed setting of 1 will

also come on for a few seconds in the
numerical display.
______________ 119
OPERATING MODES
in in
lap lap
AM AM
RPMgal/h RPMgal/h

SLOW SPEED MODE _ SPEED SLOW SPEED MODE ACTIVE
ADJUSTING
The displays will revert back to their
The setting point indication in the digi- previous indication a few seconds after
tal screen will come back on to indicate the last activation of the UP or DOWN
the slow speed setting change. button.
2 Deactivating Slow Speed Mode

in
lap
The slow speed mode can be deacti-
AM
RPMgal/h vated using any of the following meth-
1 ods:
– Pressing the cruise button.
– Depressing the iBR lever.
– Accelerating past the set slow
speed.
When deactivating SLOW SPEED
1. SLOW SPEED MODE message MODE by pressing the cruise button,
or accelerating using the throttle lever,
2. Numerical display reverts to previous the iBR gate stays in the forward posi-
indication tion.
The displays will revert back to their When using the iBR lever, the iBR gate
previous indication a few seconds after will move towards the reverse posi-
the last activation of the UP or DOWN tion, then neutral when the lever is
button. released.
NOTE: There are 5 slow speed set- SLOW SPEED MODE deactivation will
tings available (1 through 5). Adjust be indicated in the following manner:
slow speed mode to desired speed. – The CRUISE indicator will go out
The following message will scroll – The scrolling SLOW SPEED MODE
across the multifunction display pe- ACTIVE message will cease.
riodically as a reminder.
Ski Mode
Ski mode allows for repeated and pre-
cisely controlled launches, and a set
towing speed, specifically for towing a
Ski mode is not available if using a
LEARNING key.
120 ______________
OPERATING MODES
RAMP Function 2. Press the MODE button repeatedly

The RAMP function offers a pre-pro- until SKI MODE is visible in the mul-
grammed setting for launching and tifunction display.
accelerating the PWCr.
RAMP 1 provides:
RAMP 5 provides:
– Quickest launch
– Highest TARGET SPEED range. sdd2009-001-024_e
TYPICAL
TARGET SPEED Function 1. MODE button
The TARGET SPEED function limits the
maximum towing speed.
Once the RAMP has been selected,
an average PWC target speed for that
RAMP will be visible in the numerical
display.
The average speed displayed and the
speed range available is dependent on
the RAMP selected. The higher the
RAMP number, the higher the speed MESSAGE DISPLAYED
range.
SKI MODE
The operator may increase or decrease
the target speed to any value within the
selected RAMP speed range. 3. Press SET to enter the function.
The multifunction gauge message
NOTE: If the desired target speed can- will change to RAMP. The RAMP
not be set in the selected RAMP, you setting number will be visible in the
must exit then reengage SKI MODE, numerical display.
and select a different RAMP.

To engage ski mode, carry out the fol-
lowing steps:
NOTE: Ski mode cannot be engaged if
the throttle lever is not fully released,
and if CRUISE or SLOW SPEED mode
is engaged. A message will appear in
the multifunction display advising you sdd2009-001-024_f
of the situation. Follow the instruc- 1. SET button

tions in the display.
______________ 121
OPERATING MODES
1. RAMP message SKI MODE_PRESS_SET_TO START OR

MODE TO EXIT
2. Ramp setting
4. To change the RAMP setting, press NOTE: A BEEP will be heard every 5
the UP/DOWN button until the de- seconds as a SKI MODE engaged re-
sired ramp number is visible in the minder.
numerical display. 8. Press SET again; the following con-
5. Press SET to lock in the ramp set- firmation message will appear.
ting; the multifunction display will
change to the TARGET SPEED set-
ting function.
2
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
SKI MODE
ACTIVE_PRESS_MODE_AND
SECOND SETTING AVAILABLE - RETURN TO IDLE TO CANCEL
TARGET SPEED
NOTE: The SKI MODE indicator will
1. TARGET SPEED message also come ON and blink when ski mode
2. Target speed setting becomes active. It will be ON steady
when the operator pulls and holds the
6. Press the UP/DOWN button to throttle lever all the way in to the han-
increase or decrease the target dlebar.
speed.
7. Press SET to lock in the target
speed; the display will switch to the
following scrolling message.
SKI MODE INDICATOR
122 ______________
OPERATING MODES
9. To launch the PWC in ski mode, pull To end a ski run and completely deac-
in and hold the throttle lever all the tivate ski mode, release the throttle to
way to the handlebar grip. The PWC idle, then press the MODE button.
will accelerate to the set TARGET
SPEED and the SKI MODE indicator Learning Key Mode
will be on steady.
There are 5 speed settings available.
10. To increase or decrease the TAR-
GET SPEED during a ski run, press By default, the speed setting is no 3.
the UP/DOWN button, do not re-
lease the throttle lever. Changing Learning Key Speed
Settings
NOTE: Changing key settings is only
available when the engine is not run-
ning.
To change learning key settings, carry
out the following:
wake up the electrical system and
install the NORMAL key on the en-
sdd2009-001-024_h
1. Hold throttle lever in
2. Press UP button to increase speed complete its self-test and display
3. Press DOWN button to decrease speed the key recognition message.
NOTE: If the throttle is partly released until KEY MODE is visible in the digi-
during a ski run, the SKI MODE indica- tal screen of the information center.
tor light will start to blink and the speed
adjust function using the UP/DOWN ar-
row button will be deactivated.
11. To end a ski run or to pick up a fallen
skier or wakeboarder, fully release
the throttle to regain normal throt-
tle control.
NOTE: When the throttle is fully re-
leased during ski mode operation, the
system returns to ski mode engaged
status. The SKI MODE indicator light sdd2009-001-024_b
will go out but, ski mode will remain TYPICAL - GAUGE CONTROL BUTTONS
engaged and a message to that effect 1. MODE button
will reappear in the multifunction dis- 2. SET button
play. 3. UPDOWN button
12. Press SET to reactivate ski mode

and fully pull in the throttle lever to
start another ski run.
Deactivating Ski Mode

To exit ski mode at any given point dur-
ing the ski mode setting process, press
the MODE button.
______________ 123
OPERATING MODES
KEY APPROX.
D.E.S.S.
SPEED MAX.
KEY TYPE
in
lap
AM
SETTING SPEED
RPMgal/h
80 km/h
5
(50 MPH)
74 km/h
4
(46 MPH)
MESSAGE DISPLAYED LEARNING 68 km/h

3
KEY (42 MPH)
KEY MODE
60 km/h
2
4. Press the SET button once to enable (37 MPH)
learning key mode setting function. 51 km/h
The display will change to L-Key. 1
(32 MPH)
2
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h

KEY
1. L-KEY message

toggle the key setting between 1
and 5. See table for speed limita-
tions according to setting.
speed setting.
124 ______________
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
Jet Pump Water Intake and If the aforementioned method does
Impeller Cleaning not work, the following can be per-
formed:
WARNING – With engine running and before ap-
plying throttle, pull the iBR lever in
Keep away from intake grate while to select reverse operation and vary
engine is running. Items such as throttle quickly several times.
long hair, loose clothing or per- – Repeat procedure if necessary.
sonal flotation device straps can
become entangled in moving If system is still blocked, move the wa-
parts. tercraft out of the water for cleaning.
Refer to ON-BEACH WATER CLEAN-
Weeds, shells or debris can get caught
ING.
on the intake grate, drive shaft and/or On-Beach Water Cleaning
impeller. A clogged water intake may
cause troubles such as:
– Cavitation: Engine speed is high WARNING
but watercraft moves slowly due to The tether cord MUST BE RE-
reduced jet thrust, jet pump compo- MOVED from the engine cut-off
nents may be damaged. switch to prevent accidental en-
– Overheating: Since the jet pump gine starting before cleaning the
operation controls the flow of wa- jet pump area.
ter to cool the exhaust system, a
clogged intake will cause the engine Place a cardboard or a carpet beside
to overheat and damage engine in- the watercraft to prevent scratching
ternal components. when turning the watercraft for clean-
A weed clogged area can be cleaned as ing.
follows: Rotate the watercraft to any side for
cleaning.
WARNING
move any foreign object caught in
In-Water Cleaning
START/STOP button for short period
without starting engine. Most of the
time, this will remove the blockage.
smo2009-002-300_a
Start engine and make sure watercraft
operates properly. TYPICAL
Clean the water intake area. If the sys-

______________ 125
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
NOTICE Inspect water intake grate Activating iBR Override Function

for damage. Refer to an authorized To activate the iBR override function,
Sea-Doo dealer for repair as neces- carry out the following step.
sary.
1. Power up the electrical system by
For ease of access to the jet pump pressing the start/stop.
area, move the iBR to the forward po- 2. Install the tether cord on the engine
sition, refer to iBR OVERRIDE FUNC- cut-off switch.
TION for detailed instructions.
NOTE: The tether cord must be in-
iBR Override Function stalled to ensure the information cen-
When the iBR override function is acti- its self test function. Electrical power
vated, it allows the user to electrically will stay ON for approximately 3 min-
move the iBR gate and nozzle through utes.
its full range of motion using the VTS
control button. 3. Press the Mode button on the RH
handlebar repeatedly until SET-
NOTE: The iBR override function is TINGS is visible in the digital display
only available when the engine is not of the information center.
running.
WARNING
in
When moving the iBR gate using lap

AM
RPMgal/h

noone is near the rear of the water-
craft. Movement of the gate may
squeeze fingers.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
NOTICE An object or tool caught
in the iBR system when using the SETTINGS
damage to the iBR components. Re- GTX iS Limited Models Only
move all rigid foreign objects that
may obstruct the iBR gate travel be- 4. Press the SET button (RH handle-
fore moving it. bar) to display DOCK MODE.
WARNING
If it is necessary to reach in to rein
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
ceeding:
FIRST AVAILABLE MODE FUNCTION
– Do not press on START/STOP DOCK MODE message
STOP button is pressed, wait
another 5 minutes.
126 ______________
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
All Models 9. Press the VTS UP/DOWN button to

5. Press the UP/DOWN button to dis- move the iBR gate to the desired po-
play IBR OVR. sition.
Models Without a VTS UP/DOWN
Button
in
lap
AM
NOTE: On models without the VTS
RPMgal/h
UP/DOWN button, use the UP/DOWN
button on the RH handlebar to move
the iBR to the desired position once
the iBR override function has been ac-
tivated as described in the previous
steps.
MODE FUNCTION
All Models
IBR-OVR MODE message 10. Remove the tether cord from the
6. Press the SET button to enter IBR
OVR function and display OVR OFF. WARNING
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
ceeding:
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
OVR OFF STOP button be pressed, wait
another 5 minutes.
7. Press the UP/DOWN button (RH
handlebar) to display OVR ON. Deactivating iBR Override Function
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h OVERRIDE FUNCTION and press
visible.
off.
– Start the engine.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED NOTE: When the engine is started,
OVR ON the iBR OVR function is deactivated
and the iBR gate will move to the neu-
8. Press the SET button to select the tral position.
OVR ON function. The gauge will
______________ 127
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
WARNING
no one stands near the rear of the
watercraft. Movement of the gate
Capsized Watercraft
mation on vehicle safety labels, refer smo2009-002-153_a
to WATERCRAFT SAFETY LABELS TYPICAL

subsection.
The watercraft is designed so that it The 4-TECTM engine features a tip-over
should not turn over easily. Two spon- protection system (T.O.P.S.TM). When
sons mounted on the side of the hull the watercraft tips over, the engine is
assist watercraft stability. If it turns automatically stopped.
over, it will remain capsized. When the watercraft is returned to its
normal operating position, the engine
WARNING can be started normally.
When watercraft is capsized, do NOTICE If the watercraft has been
not attempt to restart the engine. capsized for more than 5 minutes,
Operator and passengers should do not attempt to crank the engine
always wear approved personal to avoid water ingestion that would
flotation devices. damage the engine. See an autho-
rized Sea-Doo dealer as soon as pos-
To turn the watercraft upright, ensure sible.
the engine is off and the D.E.S.S. key
is NOT on its post, then grab the inlet NOTICE If the engine does not
grate, step on a side bumper rail and crank, do not attempt to start it any-
use your weight to rotate the water- more. Otherwise, the engine could
craft towards you. be damaged. See an authorized
Sea-Doo dealer as soon as possi-
NOTE: A label on the stern near the ble.
flushing connector provides instruc-
tions on how to turn the watercraft As soon as possible, check for pres-
right side up. The label is upside down ence of water in the bilge. Drain as
so that it can be read when the water- necessary when back to the shore.
craft is overturned.
Submerged Watercraft
as possible.
Drain bilge.
If it was submerged in salt water, spray
bilge and all components with fresh
water using a garden hose to stop the
128 ______________
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
NOTICE Never try to crank or start NOTICE Failure to follow these

the engine. Water trapped in intake instructions may result in damage
manifold would flow towards the to the engine. If you must tow a
engine and possibly cause severe stranded watercraft in water, be sure
engine damage. not to exceed the maximum towing
Sea-Doo dealer as soon as possible to If you have to tow the watercraft faster
have it serviced. than the maximum recommended
gine will be.
Water-Flooded Engine
engine damage. smo2013-001-001_a
1. Cross over hose

have it serviced.

Water
water.
let.
______________ 129
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
This page is
intentionally blank
130 ______________
MAINTENANCE
______________ 131
Disregard the information pertaining to the following systems if the watercraft is
not equipped with these features:
– iS (intelligent Suspension) (GTX LTD iS only)
– aS (adjustable Suspension) (RXT-X aS only)
WARNING
132 ______________

C: CLEAN
I: INSPECT
R: REPLACE
RS: REPAIR SHOP
PART/TASK NOTE
ENGINE
Corrosion protection in salt water use.
(Spray an anti-corrosion lubricant (2) Replace at 200 hours,
L (1) O irrespective of the number of
to metallic components in engine
compartment) years.
Supercharger clutch (215/260 engines) R (2) RS
EXHAUST SYSTEM
I, C (3) Daily flushing in salt water or
dirty water use.
COOLING SYSTEM
Hose and fasteners I I RS (4) Replace at 300 hours
FUEL SYSTEM
I I (6) RS
straps, fuel lines and connections (6) At storage period or after 100
hours of use whichever comes
first.
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
______________ 133

C: CLEAN
I: INSPECT
R: REPLACE
RS: REPAIR SHOP
PART/TASK NOTE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Electrical connections and fastening
(ignition system, starting system, fuel I I RS (7) Inspect once a month. Add
injectors, fuse boxes etc.) electrolyte as required.
STEERING SYSTEM
O.T.A.S. (8) I I RS
PROPULSION SYSTEM
I I RS
Jet pump housing inspection I RS (9) Inspect each month (more
Impeller shaft seal, sleeve, O-ring and often in salt water use) and
I (6) RS change when necessary.
impeller cover
I RS
clearance
134 ______________

C: CLEAN
I: INSPECT
R: REPLACE
RS: REPAIR SHOP
PART/TASK NOTE
stoppers
iBR U arm, VTS trim ring and iBR gate I RS whichever comes first.
I (6) (11) See NOTE 2 after
iBR U arm retaining screws I (11) (11) RS maintenance schedule.
iS SYSTEM (intelligent Suspension) (GTX limited iS only)
iS oil (12) I RS (12) Check pump reservoir oil
iS position sensor I RS level and for system leaks.
aS SYSTEM (adjustable Suspension) (RXT-X aS only)
Nitrogen remote reservoir —
I RS
(adjustment knob, mounts)
HULL AND BODY
Hull I O
—
subsections.
______________ 135
This section includes instructions for NOTICE These engines have been
basic maintenance procedures. developed and validated using the
BRP XPS Synthetic blend oil. BRP
WARNING recommends the use of its XPS
Synthetic blend oil at all times. If
Turn off the engine and follow the recommended XPS engine oil
these maintenance procedures is not available, use a 10W40 min-
when performing maintenance. eral engine oil compatible with wet
If you do not follow proper main- clutches. Damages caused by oil
tenance procedures you can be which is not suitable for the engine
injured by hot parts, moving parts, will not be covered by the BRP lim-
electricity, chemicals or other haz- ited warranty.
ards.
NOTICE NEVER use fully synthetic
WARNING oil. This would impair the proper op-
Should removal of a locking device Do not add any additives to the rec-
(e.g. lock tabs, self-locking fasten- ommended oil. Mineral oils for API
ers, etc.) be required, always re- service classification SM contain ad-
place with a new one. ditives (friction modifiers) that may
cause inappropriate slippage of the
supercharger and eventually lead to
NOTICE Never leave any object, premature wear.
rag, tool, etc., in the engine com-
partment or in the bilge. Engine Oil Level
Engine Oil NOTICE Check level frequently

and refill if necessary. Do not over-
Recommended Engine Oil fill. Operating the engine with an
improper level may severely dam-
Models with 155 Engine age engine.
OIL (SUMMER) (P/N 293 600 121). CAUTION Certain compo-
If the recommended XPSTM engine oil nents in the engine compartment
is not available, use a 5W40 or 10W40 may be very hot. Direct contact may
engine oil meeting the requirements result in skin burn.
for API service classification SM, SL Oil level can be checked with water-
or SJ. Always check the API service craft either in or out of water.
label certification on the oil container, it
must contain at least one of the above If Watercraft is Out of the Water
standards.
NOTICE Watercraft must be level.
Models with 215 and 260 Engines
Use XPS 4-STROKE SYNTH. BLEND CAUTION When operating the
OIL (SUMMER) (P/N 293 600 121). engine while the watercraft is out of
water, the heat exchanger in the ride
plate may become very hot. Avoid
any contact with the ride plate as
burns may occur.
1. Raise trailer tow pole, then block in
position when bumper rail is level.
136 ______________
2. Open the seat.

Models Equipped with a Suspension
3. Remove the ventilation box from
the deck extension to gain partial
access to engine compartment.
NOTE: To remove the ventilation box,
simply release the 3 clips retaining it
and lift it off the deck extension.
smo2009-002-003_b
TYPICAL
1. Oil dipstick location
7. Reinstall dipstick, push in com-

pletely.
8. Remove dipstick again and read
oil level. It should be between the
FULL and ADD marks.
smo2009-002-002_a
1. Ventilation box
2. Deck extension
3. Retaining clips
All Models lmr2007-053-100_a
4. Install a garden hose on the exhaust 1. Full

system flushing connector. Refer 2. Add
to EXHAUST SYSTEM in this sec- 3. Operating range
tion and follow the procedure. 9. Add oil to ensure the level is be-
NOTICE tween marks as required.
– Never run engine without supply- To add oil:
ing water to the exhaust system. – Unscrew oil cap.
Failure to cool exhaust system – Place a funnel in the oil filler neck
may severely damage it. opening.
– Never run engine longer than – Add the recommended oil to the
2 minutes. Drive line seal has no proper level.
cooling when watercraft is out of
water. NOTE: Do not overfill.
5. With the engine already at normal

operating condition, let engine idle
for 30 seconds then stop engine.
stick out and wipe clean.
______________ 137
Engine Coolant Level
WARNING
Check coolant level with engine
cold. Never add coolant in cooling
system when engine is hot.

smo2009-002-003_c
TYPICAL
result in skin burn.
1. Oil filler cap location Open seat.
NOTE: Every time oil is added in the Remove ventilation box. Refer to EN-
engine, the complete procedure ex- GINE OIL LEVEL for the procedure.
plained in this section must be carried Locate the expansion tank cap.
out again. Otherwise, you will obtain a
false oil level reading.
10. Properly reinstall oil cap and dip-
stick.
Engine Oil Change and Oil Filter

Replacement
The oil change and filter replacement
Engine Coolant smo2009-002-003_d
TYPICAL
Recommended Engine Coolant 1. Expansion tank cap
Always use LONG LIFE ANTIFREEZE With watercraft on a level surface,

(P/N 219 702 685) or equivalent. If coolant level should be between MIN.
the recommended coolant is not avail- and MAX. marks on coolant reservoir
able, use a low silicate, extended when engine is cold.
(50%-50%) specifically formulated
for internal combustion aluminum en-
gines.
To prevent antifreeze deterioration, al-
ways use the same brand and grade.
Never mix different brands or grades
unless cooling system is completely
flushed and refilled.
smo2009-002-137_a
TYPICAL - COOLANT EXPANSION TANK

138 ______________
NOTE: The watercraft is level when

it is in water. When on a trailer, raise
trailer tow pole and block in this posi-
tion when bumper rail is level.
Add coolant/demineralized water to
adjust coolant level between marks
as required. Use a funnel to avoid
spillage. Do not overfill.
Properly reinstall and tighten filler cap, sbs2009-011-002_a
then reinstall ventilation box and close 1. Rubber seal pulled down
seat.
NOTE: A cooling system that fre- 2. Apply DOW CORNING 111 (P/N 413
quently requires coolant is an indica- 707 000) or equivalent to rubber seal
tion of leaks or engine problems. See seat as shown.

dealer.
Ignition Coils
Ignition Coil Access
Models Equipped with a Suspension sbs2009-011-001_a
1. Open seat. 1. Apply product here

2. Remove rear ventilation box. 3. Pull rubber seal back on its seat
Models Without Suspension making sure the tabs on the ignition
1. Open seat. match together.
2. Remove engine cover. 4. Leave a ring of grease on top of the
seal as shown to act as a water bar-
Ignition Coil Removal rier. Wipe off the excess.
tion coil before disconnecting the
input connector or the wires may be
damaged. Do not pry up ignition coil
with a screwdriver to avoid damage.
sbs2009-011-003_a
Ignition Coil Lubrication 1. Correctly shaped excess of product
1. Pull rubber seal down.
______________ 139
5. Apply DOW CORNING 111 (P/N 413 WARNING

seal contact area. Never remove an ignition coil from
a spark plug without disconnect-
ing it from the wiring harness.
Flammable vapors may be present
in the bilge. Should the tether cord
be installed on the engine cut-off
switch, a spark could be generated
at the coil spark plug end which
could cause an explosion.
smr05-015-002_d
1. Apply product here 5. Using a spark plug socket, release

the torque applied to the spark plug.
NOTE: Prior to inserting the ignition
coil on its spark plug, apply sealant as
CATION.
1. Install coil in cylinder head hole. 1 2
A00E0BA
1. Approved socket
2. Improper socket
6. Clean the spark plug and cylinder

head with pressurized air.
7. Unscrew spark plug then use the
spark plug hole.
smr2009-032-004_a
TYPICAL
Spark Plugs
Spark Plug Removal
1. Open seat.
2. Remove rear ventilation box (as ap-
plicable).
smr2009-032-003_a
3. Disconnect the ignition coil input 1. Ignition coil
connector. 2. Spark plug
TION COIL REMOVAL.
140 ______________
Spark Plug Installation Exhaust system flushing should be

Prior to installation, ensure the contact performed when the watercraft is not
surfaces of the cylinder head and spark expected to be used further the same
plug are free of grime. day or when the watercraft is stored
for any extended time.
1. Using a wire feeler gauge, set elec-
trode gap as specified in the follow- NOTICE Failure to flush the sys-
ing chart. tem, when necessary, will severely
damage exhaust system. Make sure
SPARK GAP engine operates during entire pro-
TORQUE
PLUG MM (IN) cedure.
NGK
DCPR8E
Hand tighten
0.75 WARNING
+ 1/4 turn
(or (.030) Perform these operations in a well
with a socket
equivalent) ventilated area. Certain compo-
2. Apply anti-seize lubricant over the may be very hot. Direct contact
spark plug threads to prevent possi- may result in skin burn. Do not
ble seizure. touch any electrical part or jet
3. Hand screw spark plug into cylinder pump area when engine is run-
head. Then, tighten the spark plug ning.
clockwise an additional 1/4 turn with
an approved spark plug socket. WARNING
4. Install ignition coil. Refer to IGNI- When operating the engine while
TION COIL INSTALLATION. the watercraft is out of the water,
5. Close seat. the heat exchanger in the ride plate
may become very hot. Avoid any
Exhaust System contact with ride plate as burns
may occur.
Flushing the exhaust system and in- Connect a garden hose to connector lo-
tercooler (supercharged models) with cated at the rear of watercraft. Do not
fresh water is essential to neutralize open water tap yet.
help to remove sand, salt, shells or
other particles in water jackets and/or
hoses.
All Models Except 260 Engine
Flushing the exhaust system with
ical products present in water. It will smr2009-021-004_a
help to clean up sand, salt, shells or 1. Water inlet connector
other particles in water jackets (ex-
haust system, intercooler (super- NOTE: The following tool is recom-
charged engines) and hoses). mended when a quick connect adapter
is used to ease garden hose installa-
tion.
______________ 141
RECOMMENDED TOOL Models with 260 Engine

FLUSHING NOTICE If watercraft is used in
CONNECTOR salt water, exhaust system must be
ADAPTER (P/N 295 flushed daily to avoid serious dam-
500 473) age to mechanical components.
Flushing should be performed when
the watercraft is not expected to be
watercraft is stored for any extended
time.
F00E05A 1 2 WARNING
1. Quick connect adapter Perform this operation in a well
2. Flushing connector adapter ventilated area.
To flush the exhaust system, start the Proceed as follows:
engine then immediately open the wa-
ter tap. Clean jet pump by spraying water in its
inlet and outlet and then apply a coating
NOTICE Always start the engine of XPS Lube or equivalent.
before opening the water tap. Open
water tap immediately after engine
is started to prevent overheating. engine while the watercraft is out
Never run engine without supplying
water to the exhaust system when
watercraft is out of water. Avoid any contact with ride plate as
Run the engine about 20 seconds at a burns may occur.
fast idle between 4000 - 5000 RPM. Connect a garden hose to the connec-
tor located at the rear of watercraft (on
NOTICE Never run engine longer the port side of the stern). Do not open
than 2 minutes. Drive line seal has water tap at this time.
water. NOTICE Always run the engine
before opening the water tap. If not,
Ensure water flows out of jet pump water will get inside the engine.
while flushing.
Close the water tap, then stop the en-
gine.
tap before stopping the engine.
Disconnect the garden hose.
NOTICE Remove flushing connec-
tor adapter after operation (if used).
smo2009-002-132_c
TYPICAL
1. Flushing connector location
142 ______________
NOTE: An optional quick connect hose NOTICE Never run engine without
adapter and hose fitting can be used supplying water to the exhaust sys-
(P/N 295 500 473). No hose pincher is tem when watercraft is out of water.
required to flush engine.
ing.
water.
Close the water tap, run the engine at
smo2009-002-138 5000 RPM for 5 seconds and stop the
QUICK CONNECT HOSE ADAPTER engine.
tap before stopping the engine. If
not, water will get inside the engine.
NOTICE Remove quick connect
adapter after flushing operation (if
used).

Grate
smo2009-002-139_a
TYPICAL Ride Plate and Water Intake Grate

1. Hose adapter (optional, not mandatory) Inspection
mandatory) Inspect ride plate and jet pump wa-
3. Garden hose ter intake grate for damage. See your
To flush, start engine then immediately Sea-Doo dealer to have any damaged
open the water tap. part repaired or replaced.
WARNING
nents in the engine compartment The tether cord must always be
may be very hot. Direct contact may removed from the engine cut-off
result in skin burn. Do not touch switch prior to inspecting the in-
any electrical parts or jet pump area take grate.
when engine is running.
NOTICE Never flush a hot en-
gine. Always start the engine before
opening the water tap. Open wa-
speed.
______________ 143
smr2006-027-009

Installation is the reverse of the re-
moval procedure.
Torque anode retaining screw as spec-
F18J04Y 1 2 ified in exploded view.
1. Water intake Ski/Wakeboard Post
2. Ride plate (Wake)
Sacrificial Anode Ski/Wakeboard Post Inspection
Check ski/wakeboard post operation.
Sacrificial Anode Inspection Ensure it slides up and down easily.
Check for wear. If worn more than half, Check locking mechanism operation.
replace anode. Check fasteners tightness. If some-
thing is found defective, don't use
ski/wakeboard post and see an autho-
rized Sea-Doo dealer for repair.
Ski/Wakeboard Post Lubrication

Clean ski/wakeboard post and apply
a light coat of SUPER LUBE GREASE
Lubricate post throughout its length.
Wipe off all excess grease and reinstall
post.
smr2011-035-009_a Extend and retract several times to dis-
1. Sacrificial anode location tribute the lubricant.
Sacrificial Anode Removal Fuses

screw and remove anode. Fuse Removal and Installation
removal.
144 ______________
Fuse Inspection
one of the same rating.
ssi2009-002-002_a
2
3 Remove the two plastic rivets secur-
ing the RH aft storage bin and remove
the storage bin from the fixed deck.
The fuse box is located just under the
storage bin, attached to the front of the
battery holder.
A15E0KZ
TYPICAL
1. Fuse
2. Check if melted
3. Ampere rating
WARNING
Do not use a higher rated fuse
as this can cause severe dam-
age. If a fuse has burnt out, the
source of the malfunction should
be determined and corrected be-
fore restarting. See an authorized smo2011-002-007_a
Sea-Doo dealer for servicing. TYPICAL

1. Fuse box
2. Battery holder
Fuse Location 3. Storage bin
All fuses are located inside a single Models Without Suspension
fuse box.
Open the starboard access panel on
To access the fuse box: the rear deck.
smr2011-029-009_a
1. Starboard access panel
______________ 145
All Models
To remove a fuse box cover, squeeze
locking tabs together, hold and pull
fuse box cover to open.
illustrated on the fuse box cover.
Fuse Description
iS Control (intelligent
1 5A Suspension) (GTX
Limited iS only)
2 15 A Diagnostic connector
4 3A GPS
5 30 A iBR
6 30 A Charge
7 30 A iS
8 30 A Battery
9 — Not used
10 — Not used
Depth sounder (if so

11 3A
equipped)
Gauge, OTAS and

12 3A
CAPS
13 10 A
coil and injection)
14 10 A
coil and injection)
15 10 A
coil and injection)
16 5A Starter solenoid
17 5A iBR control
18 10 A Fuel pump
19 15 A ECM
146 ______________
WATERCRAFT CARE
Remove the watercraft from the water marine organisms from engine and/or
every day. hull. Apply non-abrasive wax such as
silicone wax.
Post-Operation Care NOTICE Never clean fiberglass
Exhaust System Flushing and plastic parts with strong deter-
The exhaust system should be flushed ner, acetone, or other strong chemi-
daily when watercraft is used in salt or cal or petroleum type cleaner.
foul water.
Refer to MAINTENANCE PROCE- Stains may be removed from the
DURES. seat and fiberglass using Knight's
Spray-Nine† or the equivalent.
NOTE: On supercharged models, the
intercooler is flushed at the same time. To clean the carpets, use 3M™ Citrus
Base Cleaner (24 oz spray can) or an
Additional Care for Foul Water or equivalent.
Salt Water Operation
When the watercraft is operated in foul WARNING
water and particularly in salt water, ad- Never apply plastic or vinyl pro-
ditional care should be taken to protect tector on the carpets or seat as the
the watercraft and its components. surface will become slippery and
the occupants may slip off the wa-
Rinse watercraft bilge area with fresh tercraft.
water.
Never use a high pressure washer to Respect the environment by ensuring
clean the bilge. USE LOW PRESSURE fuel, oil or cleaning solutions do not
ONLY (such as a garden hose). drain into the waterways.
electrical or mechanical systems. Speed-Tie Rope
A minimum of maintenance is required
CAUTION Allow engine to to keep the speed-tie unit and the
cool before performing any main- mooring rope in serviceable condition.
tenance. Clean the locking mechanism and
mooring rope with fresh water to re-
NOTICE Failure to perform proper move salt, sand or other deposits.
haust system flushing and anticor- NOTICE Do not use a high pres-
rosion treatment, when watercraft is sure washer to clean the speed-tie
used in salt water, will result in dam- unit.
nents. Never leave the watercraft Let dry.
stored in direct sunlight.
Watercraft Cleaning
Body and Hull
______________ 147
Storage Fuel System
WARNING
repair shop, or person of your stabilizer manufacturers' instructions
dealer, repair shop, or person of your be added prior to engine lubrica-
tools.
tion.
injection system.
Propulsion System
Engine and Exhaust
Jet Pump Cleaning
lent.
the engine cut-off switch to pre- Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop, or person
vent unexpected engine starting of your own choosing.
before cleaning the jet pump area.
Engine must not be running for Models with 260 Engine
this operation. It is important to expel any trapped wa-
ter that may have accumulated from
Jet Pump Inspection condensation in the intercooler.
Remove impeller cover (rear cone) Proceed as follows:
and check if jet pump is water con- 1. Open the boarding platform and re-
taminated; if so, see your authorized move the RH storage bin.
Sea-Doo dealer.
148 ______________
2. Ensure there is an alignment line Exhaust System Draining

drawn on the intercooler outlet In areas where temperature may
hose. This will ensure the hose is freeze, water trapped in the exhaust
not twisted or kinked on reinstalla- system and intercooler must be re-
tion. moved.
3. Loosen the clamp retaining the in- Using the flushing connector located
tercooler outlet hose. on the port (LH) side of the stern, inject
4. Remove the intercooler outlet hose pressurized air at 379 kPa (55 PSI) into
from the intercooler. system until there is no more water
NOTE: This hose feeds the inlet of the flowing from jet pump.
throttle body.
5. For iS models, drape a couple of
shop rags or a plastic bag over the
iS module to protect it from any ex-
pelled water from the intercooler.
smo2009-002-132_c
TYPICAL
The following hose can be fabricated to

ease draining procedure.
smo2009-002-151_a
TYPICAL
2. Hose clamp
smo2008-001-053_a
4. iS module TYPICAL
1. Flushing connector adapter
6. Start and rev the engine up to 2. Hose 12.7 mm (1/2 in)
4000 RPM several times. 3. Air hose male adapter
NOTE: Ensure air intake system does NOTICE Failure to drain the ex-
not aspirate foreign objects which may haust system may cause severe
cause severe engine or damage. damage to the intercooler (super-
7. Stop engine. charged models) and exhaust mani-
fold.
8. Reinstall the intercooler air outlet
hose, ensure it is properly aligned Remove special tools.
as prior to removal to ensure proper
engine operation. Engine Internal Lubrication
1. Open the seat.
Remove the air ventilation box over the
engine (as applicable).
______________ 149
2. Remove ignition coils, refer to Engine Compartment

3. Remove spark plugs, refer to MAIN-
TENANCE PROCEDURES. Clean the bilge with hot water and de-
tergent or with bilge cleaner. Rinse
4. Spray XPS LUBE (P/N 293 600 016) thoroughly. Lift front end of watercraft
or equivalent in spark plug holes. to completely drain bilge through the
5. To prevent fuel from being injected bilge drain plugs.
and to disable the ignition during en-
gine cranking, fully depress throttle Anticorrosion Treatment
lever and HOLD against handlebar. Wipe off any residual water in the en-
6. Press the START/STOP button to gine compartment.
crank the engine a few turns. This Spray XPS LUBE (P/N 293 600 016)
will distribute the oil on the cylinder or equivalent over all metallic compo-
walls. nents in engine compartment.
7. Apply anti-seize lubricant on spark NOTE: The seat should be left partially
plug threads, then reinstall them open during storage. This will prevent
in the engine. Refer to MAINTE- engine compartment condensation
NANCE PROCEDURES. and possible corrosion.
8. Install the ignition coils, refer to
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES. Body and Hull
Engine Coolant Test Body and Hull Cleaning

If antifreeze is not replaced, test its Wash the body with a soap and wa-
density. ter solution (use only mild detergent).
Rinse thoroughly with fresh water. Re-
The antifreeze replacement and a den- move marine organisms from the hull.
thorized Sea-Doo dealer. NOTICE Never clean fiberglass
NOTE: Antifreeze should be replaced and plastic parts with strong deter-
every 300 hours or every 5 years to gent, degreasing agent, paint thin-
prevent antifreeze deterioration. ner, acetone, or other strong chemi-
cal or petroleum cleaners.
NOTICE Improper antifreeze den-
sity may result in freezing of the liq- Body and Hull Repair
uid in the cooling system if the wa- If any repairs are needed to body com-
tercraft is stored in an area where ponents or to the hull, contact your au-
the freezing point is attained. This thorized Sea-Doo dealer.
would seriously damage the engine.
Body and Hull Protection
Electrical System Apply a good quality marine wax to the
Battery Removal and Charging body.
Contact your authorized Sea-Doo If the watercraft is to be stored outside,
dealer. cover it with an opaque tarpaulin to pre-
vent sun rays and grime from affecting
WARNING ish, as well as preventing dust accumu-
Never charge or boost the battery lation.
while installed in the watercraft.
150 ______________

MAINTENANCE CHART.
Preseason maintenance preparation
Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop or person
NOTE: Though not required, it is
recommended that an authorized
Sea-Doo dealer perform preseason
time that any safety-related factory
WARNING
Only perform procedures as de-
tailed in the PERIODIC MAIN-
TENANCE CHART. It is recom-
in this guide.
NOTICE When component con-

equivalents.
______________ 151
This page is
intentionally blank
152 ______________
TECHNICAL
INFORMATION
______________ 153
of theft.

located on footboard at the rear of wa-
tercraft.
F18D03Y
TYPICAL
smo2009-002-131_b
TYPICAL
YDV 12345 L 8 09
Model year
Year of production
Month of production
Serial number
Manufacturer
Number
engine.
154 ______________
RF D.E.S.S. KEY
12006A-M01456
with FCC part 15C.
ETSI EN 300 330-2
ETSI EN 60950-1
______________ 155
design.
ifications.
156 ______________
SPECIFICATIONS
GTX GTX
GTX 155/
WATERCRAFT LIMITED iS LIMITED
GTX S 155
260 215
ENGINE
Rotax® 4-TEC. Single Over Head
Type
Camshaft (SOHC)
179 kW @ 152 kW @ 106 kW @
Declared Power(1)
8000 RPM 8000 RPM 7300 RPM
Gear driven supercharger
Naturally
Induction with slip clutch. Water/air
aspirated
intercooler
Number of cylinder 3
12 valves (4 per cylinder) with hydraulic
Number of valve
lifters (no adjustment)
Compression ratio 8.4:1 10.6:1
COOLING SYSTEM
FUEL SYSTEM
Multipoint fuel injection with iTC
Fuel injection type (intelligent Throttle Control). Single
throttle body (62 mm) with actuator
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Spark plug
Gap 0.75 mm (.03 in)
PROPULSION
Sea-Doo® jet pump with iBR (intelligent
Propulsion system
brake and reverse)
Type
Large hub with 10-vane stator
Jet pump
Material Aluminum
______________ 157
SPECIFICATIONS
GTX GTX
GTX 155/
GTX S 155
260 215
PROPULSION (cont'd)
VTS system Yes
DIMENSIONS
Length 353.5 cm (139.2 in)
Width 122.4 cm (48.2 in)
GTX 155/GTX
116.6 cm (45.9 in)
Limited 215
Height GTX Limited
iS 260 111.4 cm (43.9 in)
GTX S 155
GTX 155 392 kg (865 lb)
GTX Limited
399 kg (880 lb)
215
Weight (dry)
GTX S 155 458 kg (1,010 lb)
GTX Limited
467 kg (1,030 lb)
iS 260
Rider capacity (refer to load limit) 3
GTX 155
GTX Limited 52 L (13.7 U.S. gal.)
215
Storage capacity
GTX S 155
iS 260
GTX 155
GTX Limited 272 kg (600 lb)
Load limit 215
(passengers + luggage) GTX S 155
GTX Limited 227 kg (500 lb)
iS 260
158 ______________
SPECIFICATIONS
GTX GTX
GTX 155/
GTX S 155
260 215
FLUIDS
Regular
unleaded
87 Pump
91 Pump Posted AKI
Posted AKI
Minimum octane (RON+MON)/2
(RON+MON)/2
Fuel - Refer to
95 RON 91 RON
FUEL REQUIRE-
MENTS GTX 155
Tank 215
capacity GTX S 155
iS 260
Type Refer to MAINTENANCE section for
Engine oil more information
Capacity 3 L (3.2 qt (U.S. liq.)) Oil change w/filter
______________ 159
SPECIFICATIONS
RXT-X RXT-X aS RXT

WATERCRAFT
260 260 260
ENGINE
Type Rotax® 4-TEC. Single Over Head Camshaft (SOHC)
Gear driven supercharger with slip clutch.
Induction
Water/air intercooler
Number of valve
COOLING SYSTEM
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel injection type
Control). Single throttle body (62 mm) with actuator
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Spark plug
Gap 0.75 mm (.03 in)
PROPULSION
Propulsion system
brake and reverse)
Axial flow, single stage. Large hub with
Type
Jet pump 10-vane stator
Material Aluminum
VTS Type Yes
160 ______________
SPECIFICATIONS
RXT-X RXT-X aS RXT

WATERCRAFT
260 260 260
DIMENSIONS
Length 353.5 cm (139.2 in)
Width 122.4 cm (48.19 in)
116.6 cm
(45.9 in)
462.7 kg
Weight (dry) 401 kg (885 lb) 399 kg (880 lb)
(1,020 lb)
Rider capacity
3
(refer to load limit)
52 L 62 L 52 L
Storage capacity
(13.7 U.S. gal.) (16.4 U.S. gal.) (13.7 U.S. gal.)
Load limit
272 kg (600 lb) 227 kg (500 lb) 272 kg (600 lb)
FLUIDS
Fuel - Refer to
FUEL REQUIRE- Minimum 91 Pump Posted AKI (RON+MON)/2
MENTS octane 95 RON
RXT-X aS 260 70 L (18.6 U.S. gal.)
Fuel tank
capacity RXT-X 260,
60 L (15.9 U.S. gal.)
RXT 260
Type Refer to MAINTENANCE section for more
Engine oil information
See ENGINE COOLANT in the MAINTENANCE
Coolant type
Cooling system PROCEDURES section of this guide
______________ 161
SPECIFICATIONS
WATERCRAFT WAKE PRO 215

ENGINE
Rotax® 4-TEC. Single Over Head
Type
Camshaft (SOHC)
Declared power(1) 152 kW @ 8000 RPM
Gear driven supercharger with slip
Induction
clutch. Water/air intercooler
Number of valve
COOLING SYSTEM
FUEL SYSTEM
Multipoint fuel injection with iTC
Fuel injection type (intelligent Throttle Control). Single
throttle body (62 mm) with actuator
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Spark plug
Gap 0.75 mm (.03 in)
PROPULSION
Propulsion system
brake and reverse)
Axial flow, single stage. Large hub
Type
Jet pump with 10-vane stator
Material Aluminum
VTS Type Yes
162 ______________
SPECIFICATIONS
WATERCRAFT WAKE PRO 215

DIMENSIONS
Length 353.5 cm (139.2 in)
Width 122.4 cm (48.19 in)
Rider capacity (refer to load limit) 3
Storage capacity 52 L (13.7 U.S. gal.)
Load limit
272 kg (600 lb)
Skier or wakeboarder gross weight limit on
114 kg (250 lb)
ski/wakeboard post
FLUIDS
Fuel - Refer to FUEL Minimum 91 Pump Posted AKI (RON+MON)/2

REQUIREMENTS octane 95 RON
Type Refer to MAINTENANCE section
Engine oil for more information
(1)
______________ 163
SPECIFICATIONS
This page is
intentionally blank
164 ______________
TROUBLESHOOTING
______________ 165

– Install tether cord cap over engine cut-off switch within 5 seconds after de-
pressing the START/STOP button.
– After double "beep", press START/STOP button.
WARNING
clothing.

8. Seized jet pump.
ENGINE CRANKS SLOWLY

3. Worn starter.

166 ______________

– Replace.
3. Blown fuse.
ON).

– Replace.
ON).
ENGINE SMOKE
______________ 167

ENGINE OVERHEATS
– Remove adapter from flushing connector and retry watercraft. If problem
persists, seek service from an authorized Sea-Doo dealer, repair shop,
or person of your own choosing for maintenance, repair, or replacement.
Please refer to the US EPA EMISSIONS-RELATED WARRANTY contained

1. Learning key used.
2. Not in Sport mode.
– Select Sport mode.
6. Weak spark.
ON).
168 ______________

10.Water in fuel.
WATERCRAFT CAN NOT REACH TOP SPEED

ON).
4. Faulty supercharger and/or intercooler (supercharged models).
WATERCRAFT STAYS IN NEUTRAL AFTER OPERATING THE IBR LEVER

– Press the CRUISE button to activate the slow speed mode.
– Return to shore using the slow speed mode. Refer to an authorized Sea-Doo
dealer.
– Remove tether cord, wait four minutes, reinstall key and check iBR light to
ensure fault is cleared.
______________ 169
iBR WILL NOT RETURN TO NEUTRAL POSITION (IBR INDICATOR LIGHT OFF)

– Ceck for damage.

170 ______________
MONITORING SYSTEM
A system monitors the electronic com- Sea-Doo dealer to pass on the fault
ponents of the EMS (engine man- code. The dealer will then advise the
agement system) iBR, iS, and other operator on the steps to take to solve
components of the electrical system. the problem, or to stop using the wa-
When a fault occurs, it sends visual tercraft and to bring it in to the dealer
messages through the information for repairs.
center and/or audible signals through
a beeper to inform you of a particular Displaying Fault Codes
condition. Press the MODE button repeatedly un-
A fault code may also be recorded. til the FAULT CODE function is visible
When a minor or transient fault oc- in the multifunction display.
curs, the fault message and beeper Press the SET or the UP or DOWN but-
will cease automatically if the condi- ton to enter the function and display
tion that caused the fault does not ex- the first fault code, then press the UP
ist anymore. or DOWN button repeatedly to display
Releasing the throttle and letting the each subsequent code.
engine return to idle speed may allow NOTE: When the last fault code has
normal operation to come back. If this been displayed and the button is
does not work, try removing and rein- pressed again, the system loops back
stalling the tether cord on the engine to the first fault code displayed, and all
cut-off switch. fault codes can again be displayed. If
The electronic system will react differ- there was one active fault code when
ently depending on the fault type. In entering the FAULT CODE mode, and
severe failure, the engine may not be it becomes occurred (no longer active),
allowed to be started. In other cases, a NO ACTIVE FAULT CODE message
the engine will operate in limp home will scroll in the display.
mode (reduced speed). To exit the FAULT CODE display func-
When a fault occurs,please refer to tion, the MODE or SET button must be
the US EPA EMISSIONS-RELATED pressed once. There is no time out on
WARRANTY contained herein for infor- this function.
mation about warranty claims..
Fault Codes in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
When a fault occurs, a numerical fault
code may be recorded depending on
the fault type and system.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
Fault codes can be viewed in the in- FAULT CODE message is displayed
formation center multifunction display here
If there is an active fault code, it may
be viewed by the operator on the mul-
tifunction display. The operator may
then choose to call his authorized
______________ 171
MONITORING SYSTEM
in
lap
AM
RPMgal/h
APPLICABLE FAULT CODE IS

DISPLAYED HERE
Indicator Lights and Message Display Information

The indicator lights (pilot lamps) and messages displayed in the information center
will inform you of a particular condition or if an anomaly occurs.
For information on usual indicator lights, refer to INFORMATION CENTER
(GAUGE).
PILOT
LAMPS (ON)
LOW or HIGH
BATTERY VOLTAGE
HIGH
Engine or exhaust system overheating
TEMPERATURE
CHECK ENGINE or Check engine (minor fault req. maint.) or

LIMP HOME MODE LIMP HOME MODE (major eng. fault)
Light is steady with a buzzer and a check

IBR MODULE
engine light: iBR system fault (refer to an
ERROR
_ Light is flashing: iBR system fault (refer to an

Light is steady with no buzzer:
_ iBR system still functional but needs to
be inspected by an authorized Sea-Doo dealer
_ OTAS system fault
172 ______________
MONITORING SYSTEM

CHECK ENGINE
Problem in iBR, not sending water
WATER TEMP SENSOR DEFECTIVE
temperature info.
IBR MODULE ERROR iBR system malfunction
engine.
______________ 173
MONITORING SYSTEM

Reinstall tether cord cap correctly on the engine cut-off
switch.
Wrong D.E.S.S. key.
watercraft.
1 long beep Defective D.E.S.S. key.
(while installing tether Use another tether cord with programmed D.E.S.S. key.
cord on watercraft engine
cut-off switch) Defective engine cut-off switch.
harness.Seek service from an authorized Sea-Doo
A 2 seconds beep shop, or person of your own choosing for maintenance,
every 15 minutes interval repair, or replacement. Please refer to the US EPA
iBR system fault.
Low fuel level.
A 2 seconds beep Sea-Doo dealer.
every 5 minutes interval
174 ______________
MONITORING SYSTEM

High engine temperature coolant.
Low oil pressure.

soon as possible.
______________ 175
MONITORING SYSTEM
This page is
intentionally blank
176 ______________
WARRANTY
______________ 177
1. SCOPE
Doo watercraft.

dealer;
178 ______________
ator’s Guide;
God;

contained herein.
date.

has been fulfilled:
______________ 179

7. WHAT BRP WILL DO

owner.
180 ______________
8. TRANSFER
way:
manager or owner.
In CANADA In USA
Tel.: 819 566-3366 Tel.: 715 848-4957

______________ 181
fueling section.

first:
HOURS MONTHS
182 ______________
Components Covered
listed components:
– Fuel system
– Ignition system
exhaust emissions:
– Sensors
tive emissions:
– Fuel tank
– Fuel cap
– Fuel line
– Clamps*
– Control valves*
– Control cables*
– Purge valves
– Vapor hoses
– Carbon canister
______________ 183
184 ______________
For California and New York, your 2015 Sea-Doo personal watercraft has a special
environmental label required by the California Air Resources Board. The label has
1, 2, 3 or 4 stars. A hangtag, provided with your personal watercraft, describes the
meaning of the star rating system.

F18L3CQ

Better Fuel Economy



marine engines.

______________ 185

1 800 END-SMOG
www.arb.ca.gov

pleased to explain the emission control system warranty on your Model Year 2015
Sea-Doo personal watercraft. In California, new personal watercraft engines
must be designed, built and equipped to meet the State’s stringent anti-smog
standards. BRP must warrant the emission control system on your personal
watercraft engine for the period of time listed below provided there has been no
abuse, neglect or improper maintenance of your personal watercraft engine.

186 ______________
______________ 187
recommends that you retain all receipts covering maintenance of your personal

188 ______________
against BRP.

stances:
______________ 189
pumps and the like;

for a period of:
190 ______________

been fulfilled:
umented;

UNDER THIS WARRANTY
______________ 191
7. WHAT BRP WILL DO
8. TRANSFER
listed below.
office:
BRP EUROPE N.V.
Skaldenstraat 125
9042 Gent
Belgium
Tel.: +32 9 218 26 00
192 ______________
Tel.: +1 819 566-3366
______________ 193
PERSONAL WATERCRAFT
below.
against BRP.

stances:
194 ______________
pumps and the like;

for a period of:
commercial use.
______________ 195
been fulfilled:
umented;

UNDER THIS WARRANTY
7. WHAT BRP WILL DO

196 ______________
8. TRANSFER
low.

BRP EUROPE N.V.
Skaldenstraat 125
9042 Gent
Belgium
Tel.: +32 9 218 26 00

BRP FINLAND OY
Service Department
Isoaavantie 7
FIN-96320 Rovaniemi
Finland
Tel.: +358 163 208 111
______________ 197
198 ______________
CUSTOMER
INFORMATION
______________ 199
PRIVACY INFORMATION
products.
By mail: BRP
726 St-Joseph
Valcourt QC
Canada
J0E 2L0
200 ______________
If your address has changed or if you are the new owner of the boat, be sure to no-
tify BRP by either:
to the transfer.
Notifying BRP, even after the expiration of the limited warranty, is very important
as it enables BRP to reach the boat owner if necessary, like when safety recalls are
initiated. It is the owner’s responsibility to notify BRP.
STOLEN UNITS: In the event that your boat is stolen, you should notify your area’s
distributor warranty department of such. We will ask you to provide your name, ad-
dress, phone number, Hull Identification Number and date it was stolen.
North America
Warranty Department
Canada
Scandinavian countries
BRP FINLAND OY
Service Department
Isoaavantie 7
FIN-96320 Rovaniemi
Finland
Other countries in the world

BRP EUROPEAN DISTRIBUTION
Warranty Department
1006 Lausanne
Switzerland
______________ 201
This page is
intentionally blank
202 ______________
______________ 203
This page is
intentionally blank
204 ______________
______________ 205
This page is
intentionally blank
206 ______________
NOTES
______________ 207
NOTES
208 ______________
RXT / GTX / WAKE PRO SERIES
2015
OPERATOR’S
GUIDE
RXT / GTX / WAKE PRO

TM † TM
SERIES
219 001 398
OPERATOR’S GUIDE, RXT/ GTX / WAKE PRO SERIES / ENGLISH
It contains important safety information.
2015
GUIDE DU CONDUCTEUR, SÉRIE RXT/ GTX / WAKE PRO / ANGLAIS

Minimum recommended operator’s age: 16 years old.
©2014 BOMBARDIER RECREATIONAL PRODUCTS INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN CANADA.
† IS A TRADEMARK OF CASTROL LTD USED UNDER LICENSE. 2 1 9 0 0 1 3 9 8 Original Instructions

2015 Seadoo 4-Tec Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 Seadoo 4-Tec Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 Seadoo 4-Tec Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAFETY NOTICE

CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation

The information and component/system descrip-

VEHICLE INFORMATION ENGINE IDENTIFICATION

It is located on the deck at the rear of watercraft.

The owner/operator is not to, and should not al-

EPA Emission Regulations

The use of RIGHT (starboard) and LEFT (port) in-

Other common terms used in the marine indus-

Section 06 ENGINE Page heading

Subsection title MAGNETO

Loctite 243 Drop represents a

Bold face number

Document number for 55 Page number

NOTICE Pay attention to torque specifications.

Remove starting pulley no. 2. TYPICAL Italic bold face type-

Bold face number following part

4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9

FASTENER FASTENER GRADE/TORQUE

FASTENER INFORMATION Threadlocker Application for

1. Clean threads (bolt and hole) with solvent.

Threadlocker Application for Stud

1. Adjust screw to proper setting.

NOTE: If it is difficult to readjust, heat screw with Gasket Compound Application

Application for Stripped Thread Repair 1 2

3. Apply a strip of proper strength Loctite on lead-

Threadlocker Application for Case-In

1. Clean inner housing diameter and outer gasket

The maintenance schedule does not exempt the pre-ride inspection.

A: ADJUST FIRST 50 HOURS OR 1 YEAR

A: ADJUST FIRST 50 HOURS OR 1 YEAR

iBR protective guard I I RS

PROCEDURES Exhaust System Flushing

8. Torque intercooler hose clamp as specified.

Exhaust System Draining

Models Without Suspension

If coolant is not replaced, test the coolant density

Engine Internal Lubrication

3. Lift front end of watercraft to completely drain

BODY AND HULL

Body and Hull Protection

YEAR MODEL MODEL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER

Jet Pump Cleaning NOTICE Fuel stabilizer should be added prior

Jet Pump Inspection Intercooler Draining

Printed in Canada. (sbs2010-005 en AP)

1. Intake hose smo2009-002-151_a

4. Start engine and rev up to 4000 RPMs several

Exhaust System Protection

TYPICAL – ALL OTHER MODELS

NOTICE Never cut the locking ties of ignition

Body and Hull Cleaning

1. Use this column

Furthermore, proceed with the following:

GENERAL Engine Lubrication

11. Remove the suction pump tube.

WARNING CAPSIZED WATERCRAFT

4. Continue to run the engine at 3500 RPM for 15

ENGINE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

25 Nm NEW 25 Nm

GTX 155 and GTX S 155

25 Nm NEW 25 Nm

25 Nm 25 Nm Maximum